IR-ADV 6500III Series Service Manual en 7.0 [PDF]

Citation preview

Revision 7.0



imageRUNNER ADVANCE 6500 III Series Service Manual



Important Notices



Important Notices Application This manual has been issued by Canon Inc. for qualified persons to learn technical theory, installation, maintenance, and repair of products. This manual covers all localities where the products are sold. For this reason, there may be information in this manual that does not apply to your locality. Following "Trademarks" and "Copyright" are not applicable if they are not supported by laws and regulations in the country or region that this document and products are used in.



Corrections This manual may contain technical inaccuracies or typographical errors due to improvements or changes in products. When changes occur in applicable products or in the contents of this manual, Canon will release technical information as the need arises. In the event of major changes in the contents of this manual over a long or short period, Canon will issue a new edition of this manual.



Trademarks The Bluetooth word mark and logos are registered trademarks owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and any use of such marks by Canon is under license. Mopria®, the Mopria® Logo and the Mopria® Alliance logo are registered trademarks and service marks of Mopria Alliance, Inc. in the United States and other countries. Unauthorized use is strictly prohibited. Apple, AppleTalk, Bonjour, iPad, iPhone, iPod touch, Mac, OS X and Safari are trademarks of Apple Inc. Microsoft, Windows, Windows Vista, Windows Server, Internet Explorer, Microsoft Edge, Excel and PowerPoint are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries. Google Cloud Print, Google Chrome and Android are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Google Inc. OCR Technology by I.R.I.S., copyright 1987-2015, All Rights Reserved. iHQC™ compression technology by I.R.I.S., copyright 2007-2015, All Rights Reserved. PDF-iHQC™, XPS-iHQC™ technology by I.R.I.S., copyright 2007-2015, All rights Reserved. Java is a registered trademark of Oracle and/or its affiliates. Adobe is a registered trademark of Adobe Systems Incorporated. Command WorkStation, EFI, Fiery, FreeForm, Spot-On, and WebTools are trademarks of Electronics For Imaging, Inc. and/or its wholly owned subsidiaries in the U.S. and/or certain other countries. TORX® is a registered trademark of Acument Intellectual Properties, LLC in the United States. Other product names and other names in this document are generally registered trademarks or trademarks of the companies.



Important Notices



Copyright The copyright of this document belongs to Canon Inc. This document may not be copied, reproduced or translated into another language, in whole or in part, without the prior consent of Canon Inc. Copyright CANON INC. 2018



Caution Use of this manual should be strictly supervised to avoid disclosure of confidential information.



Explanation of Symbols The following symbols are used throughout this Service Manual. Symbols



Explanation



Symbols



Check.



Explanation Remove the claw.



1x Check visually.



Insert the claw.



1x Check a sound.



Push the part.



Disconnect the connector.



Connect the power cable.



Connect the connector.



Disconnect the power cable.



Remove the cable/wire from the cable guide or wire saddle.



Turn on the power.



Install the cable/wire to the cable guide or wire saddle.



Turn off the power.



Remove the screw.



Loosen the screw.



1x



1x



1x



1x



1x



1x Install the screw.



1x



Tighten the screw.



1x



Important Notices Symbols



Explanation Cleaning is needed.



Symbols



Explanation Measurement is needed.



The following rules apply throughout this Service Manual: 1. Each chapter contains sections explaining the purpose of specific functions and the relationship between electrical and mechanical systems with reference to the timing of operation. In the diagrams, represents the path of mechanical drive; where a signal name accompanies the symbol, the arrow indicates the direction of the electric signal. The expression "turn on the power" means flipping on the power switch, closing the front door, and closing the delivery unit door, which results in supplying the machine with power. 2. In the digital circuits, '1' is used to indicate that the voltage level of a given signal is "High", while '0' is used to indicate "Low". (The voltage value, however, differs from circuit to circuit.) In addition, the asterisk (*) as in "DRMD*" indicates that the DRMD signal goes on when '0'. In practically all cases, the internal mechanisms of a microprocessor cannot be checked in the field. Therefore, the operations of the microprocessors used in the machines are not discussed: they are explained in terms of from sensors to the input of the DC controller PCB and from the output of the DC controller PCB to the loads. The descriptions in this Service Manual are subject to change without notice for product improvement or other purposes, and major changes will be communicated in the form of Service Information bulletins. All service persons are expected to have a good understanding of the contents of this Service Manual and all relevant Service Information bulletins and be able to identify and isolate faults in the machine.



Contents



Contents Safety Precautions...............................................................................................1 Laser................................................................................................................................................... 2 Laser Safety......................................................................................................................................... 2 Handling of Laser System......................................................................................................................2



Power Supply / Lithium Battery........................................................................................................... 3 Turn power switch ON........................................................................................................................... 3 Power Supply....................................................................................................................................... 3 Notes When Handling a Lithium Battery..................................................................................................3



Toner Safety........................................................................................................................................4 About Toner..........................................................................................................................................4 Handling Adhered Toner........................................................................................................................4



Notes on works....................................................................................................................................4 Points to Note Before Servicing..............................................................................................................4 Points to Note at Cleaning..................................................................................................................... 4 Notes on Assembly/Disassembly........................................................................................................... 5



1. Product Overview.............................................................................................6 Product Lineup.................................................................................................................................... 7 Main Body............................................................................................................................................ 7 Pickup/Delivery System Option.............................................................................................................. 8 Scanning System Options....................................................................................................................10 Function Expansion System Options.................................................................................................... 11



Features............................................................................................................................................ 13 Features.............................................................................................................................................13



Specifications.................................................................................................................................... 14 Product Specifications......................................................................................................................... 14 Fax Specifications............................................................................................................................... 15 Power Supply Specifications................................................................................................................ 15 Weight and Size..................................................................................................................................15 Productivity.........................................................................................................................................16 Paper Type.........................................................................................................................................19



External View.................................................................................................................................... 29 External Cover.................................................................................................................................... 29 Cross Section View............................................................................................................................. 32



Operation...........................................................................................................................................34 Power Switch......................................................................................................................................34 Control Panel......................................................................................................................................34



2. Technology..................................................................................................... 37 Basic Configuration........................................................................................................................... 38 Functional Configuration...................................................................................................................... 38 Basic Sequence.................................................................................................................................. 38



Original Exposure/Feed System........................................................................................................39 Overview............................................................................................................................................ 39



i



Contents Basic configuration..............................................................................................................................41 Controls..............................................................................................................................................59



Main Controller................................................................................................................................ 101 Overview.......................................................................................................................................... 101 Startup Sequence..............................................................................................................................104 Shutdown Sequence......................................................................................................................... 104 Motion Sensor...................................................................................................................................105



Laser Exposure System.................................................................................................................. 106 Overview.......................................................................................................................................... 106 Controls............................................................................................................................................108



Image Formation System................................................................................................................ 113 Overview.......................................................................................................................................... 113 Controls............................................................................................................................................121



Fixing System..................................................................................................................................158 Overview.......................................................................................................................................... 158 Controls............................................................................................................................................162



Pickup / Feed System..................................................................................................................... 175 Overview.......................................................................................................................................... 175 Controls............................................................................................................................................182



External Auxiliary System................................................................................................................209 Overview.......................................................................................................................................... 209 Controls............................................................................................................................................211



3. Periodical Service........................................................................................ 221 Periodically Replaced Parts............................................................................................................ 222 DADF............................................................................................................................................... 222 Reader............................................................................................................................................. 222 Printer.............................................................................................................................................. 222 Option.............................................................................................................................................. 223



Consumable Parts...........................................................................................................................224 DADF............................................................................................................................................... 224 Reader............................................................................................................................................. 224 Printer.............................................................................................................................................. 224 Option.............................................................................................................................................. 225



Periodical Servicing.........................................................................................................................227 DADF............................................................................................................................................... 227 Reader............................................................................................................................................. 227 Printer.............................................................................................................................................. 228 Option.............................................................................................................................................. 230



4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning............................................................... 231 Preface............................................................................................................................................ 232 Outline..............................................................................................................................................232



Parts List......................................................................................................................................... 233 List of External / Internal Cover.......................................................................................................... 233 List of Main Unit................................................................................................................................ 236 Periodic Replacing Parts,Durable Parts,Cleaning Parts........................................................................240 List of Electrical Parts ....................................................................................................................... 252 Connector List...................................................................................................................................270



ii



Contents



Original Exposure/Feed System......................................................................................................290 Removing from the Connection Equipment(DADF).............................................................................. 290 Main Unit (DADF)..............................................................................................................................308 External Auxiliary System (DADF)...................................................................................................... 316 Consumable parts for periodical replacement and locations for cleaning (DADF)................................... 344 Removing from the Connection Equipment(Reader)............................................................................ 372 Main Unit(Reader)............................................................................................................................. 384 Periodical Consumable Parts/Locations for Periodical Cleaning (Reader)............................................. 395



Controller System............................................................................................................................402 Removing the HDD........................................................................................................................... 402 Removing Main Controller PCB 1....................................................................................................... 405 Removing Main Controller PCB 2....................................................................................................... 407 Removing the Control Panel CPU PCB(Flat Control Panel Unit)........................................................... 412 Removing the LCD Unit (Flat Control Panel) ...................................................................................... 419 Removing the Control Panel CPU PCB(Upright Control Panel Unit)......................................................428 Removing the LCD Unit (Upright Control Panel Unit)........................................................................... 430



Laser Exposure System.................................................................................................................. 435 Removing the Laser Scanner Unit...................................................................................................... 435 Cleaning the Dust Collecting Glass.....................................................................................................438



Image Formation System................................................................................................................ 439 Removing the Primary Charging Assembly......................................................................................... 439 Removing the Primary Charging Wire Cleaner, Cleaner Holder (Right/Left)...........................................441 Replacing the Primary Charging Assembly Grid Wire...........................................................................443 Replacing the Primary Charging Wire................................................................................................. 447 Cleaning the Primary Charging Assembly Grid Wire............................................................................ 448 Removing the Pre-transfer Charging Assembly................................................................................... 449 Removing the Pre-transfer Charging Wire Cleaner, Cleaner Holder...................................................... 450 Replacing the Pre-transfer Charging Wire........................................................................................... 452 Cleaning the Pre-transfer Charging Wire.............................................................................................454 Removing the Process Unit................................................................................................................454 Cleaning the Process Unit..................................................................................................................456 Removing the Drum Cleaning Unit......................................................................................................457 Removing the Drum Cleaning Blade................................................................................................... 458 Cleaning the Drum Cleaning Unit....................................................................................................... 459 Replacing the Pre-exposure Plastic Film............................................................................................. 460 Removing the Drum Unit....................................................................................................................460 Removing the Photosensitive Drum.................................................................................................... 461 Cleaning Photosensitive Drum........................................................................................................... 464 Cleaning the Drum edges.................................................................................................................. 465 Removing the Cleaner Separation Claw..............................................................................................465 Removing the Side Seal.................................................................................................................... 466 Removing the Developing Assembly...................................................................................................467 Cleaning the Developing Assembly.....................................................................................................469 Removing the Developing Cylinder and the Developing Roller..............................................................469 Removing the ETB Unit..................................................................................................................... 473 Removing the ETB............................................................................................................................ 476 Cleaning the ETB.............................................................................................................................. 477 Removing the Transfer Roller.............................................................................................................477 Removing the ETB Cleaning Blade.....................................................................................................478 Removing the ETB Brush Roller......................................................................................................... 479 Removing the Waste Toner Container................................................................................................ 480



iii



Contents Removing the Drum Heater................................................................................................................481 Removing the Primary Charging Shutter Unit...................................................................................... 482 Removing the Pre-transfer Charging Assembly Shutter Unit.................................................................483 Removing the Drum Brush Roller....................................................................................................... 486 Removing the ETB Drive Unit.............................................................................................................487 Removing the Transfer Cleaning Unit................................................................................................. 489 Removing the Post-transfer Static Eliminator.......................................................................................489 Removing the Toner Receptacle Tray.................................................................................................490 Removing the Hopper Unit................................................................................................................. 491 Removing the Buffer Unit................................................................................................................... 495 Removing the Potential Control PCB Unit........................................................................................... 497 Removing the Waste Toner Feed Unit................................................................................................ 499 Removing the Drum Drive Unit........................................................................................................... 502 Removing the Developing Drive Unit.................................................................................................. 503



Fixing System..................................................................................................................................505 Removing the Fixing Assembly.......................................................................................................... 505 Cleaning the Fixing Inlet Guide,Fixing Inlet Sensor Flag, Fixing Right Stay, Dowel, Dowel Holder...........508 Cleaning the Inner Delivery Roller...................................................................................................... 509 Cleaning the Fixing Oil Pan, Fixing Cleaning Web Guide..................................................................... 510 Removing the Fixing Cleaning Web.................................................................................................... 510 Separating the Fixing Upper Unit from the Fixing Lower Unit................................................................ 512 Removing the Fixing Roller, Insulating Bush and Thrust Stopper.......................................................... 515 Removing the Pressure Roller............................................................................................................517 Removing the Pressure Roller Static Eliminator...................................................................................517 Removing the Main Thermistor, Sub Thermistor2................................................................................ 518 Removing the Sub Thermistor 1......................................................................................................... 520 Removing the Upper Separation Claw................................................................................................ 521 Cleaning the Upper Separation Claw.................................................................................................. 521 Removing the Thermoswitch.............................................................................................................. 522



Pickup/Feed System....................................................................................................................... 524 Removing the Left Pickup Deck..........................................................................................................524 Removing the Left Deck Pickup Roller................................................................................................ 524 Removing the Left Deck Feed Roller.................................................................................................. 524 Removing the Right Pickup Deck....................................................................................................... 525 Removing the Left Deck Separation Roller.......................................................................................... 525 Removing the Right Deck Pickup Roller..............................................................................................526 Removing the Right Deck Feed Roller................................................................................................ 526 Removing the Right Deck Separation Roller........................................................................................527 Removing the Upper Cassette............................................................................................................528 Removing the Upper Cassette Pickup Roller....................................................................................... 528 Removing the Upper Cassette Feed Roller......................................................................................... 528 Removing the Upper Cassette Separation Roller.................................................................................528 Removing the Lower Cassette............................................................................................................529 Removing the Lower Cassette Pickup Roller....................................................................................... 529 Removing the Lower Cassette Feed Roller......................................................................................... 530 Removing the Lower Cassette Separation Roller.................................................................................530 Removing the Multi-purpose Tray Feed Roller.....................................................................................530 Removing the Multi-purpose Tray Separation Roller............................................................................ 532 Cleaning the Pickup and Fixing Feed Assembly.................................................................................. 533 Removing the Left Deck Pickup Unit...................................................................................................538 Removing the Right Deck Pickup Unit.................................................................................................539



iv



Contents Removing the Cassettes 3 and 4 Pickup Unit...................................................................................... 540 Removing the Vertical Path Cassette Pickup Drive Unit....................................................................... 542 Removing the Registration Unit.......................................................................................................... 545 Removing the Left Deck Pickup Drive Unit.......................................................................................... 548 Removing the Main Drive Unit............................................................................................................ 548



External Auxiliary System................................................................................................................554 Removing the Filter (for primary charging)...........................................................................................554 Removing the Ozone Filter.................................................................................................................554 Removing the DC Controller PCB.......................................................................................................554 Removing the Power Supply Assembly...............................................................................................556 Removing the Fixing Power Unit.........................................................................................................558 Removing the Feed Driver PCB..........................................................................................................559 Removing the Upper High Voltage Unit...............................................................................................559 Removing the Flat Control Panel Unit................................................................................................. 560 Removing the Upright Control Panel...................................................................................................564



5. Adjustment................................................................................................... 566 Overview......................................................................................................................................... 567 When replacing parts...................................................................................................................... 569 Original Exposure and Feed System...................................................................................................569 Main Controller..................................................................................................................................598 Laser Exposure System.....................................................................................................................603 Image Formation System................................................................................................................... 603 Fixing System................................................................................................................................... 610 External Auxiliary System.................................................................................................................. 611



6. Troubleshooting...........................................................................................612 Making Initial Checks...................................................................................................................... 613 List of Initial Check Items................................................................................................................... 613



Test Print......................................................................................................................................... 614 Overview.......................................................................................................................................... 614 How to View the Test Print................................................................................................................. 615 Solid white (TYPE=4)........................................................................................................................ 616 Halftone (TYPE=5/6/11/12/13/14).......................................................................................................616 Solid black (TYPE=7)........................................................................................................................ 617 Horizontal line (TYPE=8/9/10)............................................................................................................ 617



Image Faults....................................................................................................................................619 Parts Pitch Related to Periodical Image Failure .................................................................................. 619 Image with a line on the trailing edge.................................................................................................. 619 Uneven density correction by 2D shading........................................................................................... 620 ADF black line...................................................................................................................................623 Separation Failure Jam due to Deformation of Separation Claw........................................................... 624 Image error due to soil attached to the Cleaning Brushes for the Duplex Right Roller and the Duplex Outlet Roller.................................................................................................................................. 625 Uneven density................................................................................................................................. 634 Smeared image.................................................................................................................................635 Adjusting the Edge Emphasis Level....................................................................................................637 Soil at interval equal to Developing Sleeve circumference.................................................................... 638



Feed Faults..................................................................................................................................... 640 Paper wrinkle.................................................................................................................................... 640



v



Contents



Other............................................................................................................................................... 641 Adjusting rotation of the Upright Control Panel Arm............................................................................. 641 Remedy to be implemented when the ETB Disengage Member (Transfer Frame Stopper) is left unremoved.................................................................................................................................... 642 Checking nip width............................................................................................................................ 644 ETB Displacement.............................................................................................................................645 Remedies to be performed when E602-xxxx or E614-xxxx error is displayed.........................................651



Debug Log.......................................................................................................................................655 Function Overview.............................................................................................................................655 Saving and Collecting Debug Logs..................................................................................................... 658 Service Mode Relating to Debug Logs................................................................................................ 671



Startup System Failure Diagnosis................................................................................................... 673 How to See the Startup System Failure Diagnosis............................................................................... 673 Startup Failure Analysis Policy........................................................................................................... 673 Flow A: Control Panel LED Check Flow.............................................................................................. 674 Flow B: Controller Self Diagnosis....................................................................................................... 675 Flow C: Power Supply Assembly Check Flow......................................................................................675 Flow C-1: DC Power (12 V) Check Flow............................................................................................. 677 Flow C-2: All-night Power Supply (5 V) Check Flow............................................................................. 679 Reference: Activation Conditions of the Control Panel Backlight........................................................... 681



Controller Self Diagnosis.................................................................................................................682 Boot Method..................................................................................................................................... 683 Diagnosis Result............................................................................................................................... 684 Limitations........................................................................................................................................ 687



7. Error/Jam/Alarm........................................................................................... 688 Outline............................................................................................................................................. 689 Error code notation............................................................................................................................689 Location code................................................................................................................................... 689 Pickup Position Code.........................................................................................................................690 Pickup size....................................................................................................................................... 690 Points to Note When Clearing MN-CON .............................................................................................692 Points to Note When Clearing HDD.................................................................................................... 692 Remedies to be performed when E602-xxxx or E614-xxxx error is displayed.........................................692



Error Code.......................................................................................................................................696 Error Code Details.............................................................................................................................696



Error Code (FAX)............................................................................................................................ 926 How to View Fax Error Codes............................................................................................................ 926 User error codes............................................................................................................................... 926 Service Error Code............................................................................................................................926



Alarm Code..................................................................................................................................... 929 Alarm Code Details........................................................................................................................... 929



Jam Code........................................................................................................................................ 984 Jam Type..........................................................................................................................................984 Jam screen display specification........................................................................................................ 985 Main Unit.......................................................................................................................................... 985 Paper Deck Unit-E1...........................................................................................................................988 POD Deck Lite-C1.............................................................................................................................989 Duplex Color Image Reader Unit........................................................................................................ 990 Staple Finisher-AC1, Booklet Finisher-AC1......................................................................................... 992



vi



Contents Document Insertion / Folding Unit-J1.................................................................................................. 993 PUNCHER UNIT-A1..........................................................................................................................995



8. Service Mode................................................................................................ 996 Overview......................................................................................................................................... 997 Basic Operations...............................................................................................................................997 SITUATION Mode........................................................................................................................... 1000 Security Support..............................................................................................................................1005 Service Mode Backup...................................................................................................................... 1009 Output of Service Print Data.............................................................................................................1009



COPIER (Service mode for printer)...............................................................................................1014 DISPLAY (State display mode).........................................................................................................1014 I/O..................................................................................................................................................1039 ADJUST (Adjustment mode)............................................................................................................ 1039 FUNCTION (Operation / inspection mode)........................................................................................ 1083 OPTION (Specification setting mode)................................................................................................1112 TEST (Print test mode).................................................................................................................... 1228 COUNTER (Counter mode)..............................................................................................................1233



FEEDER (ADF service mode).......................................................................................................1262 DISPLAY (State display mode).........................................................................................................1262 ADJUST (Adjustment mode)............................................................................................................ 1263 FUNCTION (Operation / inspection mode)........................................................................................ 1265 OPTION (Specification setting mode)................................................................................................1267



SORTER (Service mode for delivery options)...............................................................................1269 ADJUST (Adjustment mode)............................................................................................................ 1269 FUNCTION (Operation / inspection mode)........................................................................................ 1278 OPTION (Specification setting mode)................................................................................................1282



BOARD (Option board setting mode)............................................................................................1287 OPTION (Specification setting mode)................................................................................................1287



FAX (Serivce Mode for FAX).........................................................................................................1288 Overview........................................................................................................................................ 1288 Setting of Bit Switch (SSSW)............................................................................................................1291 Setting of Menu Switch (MENU)....................................................................................................... 1302 Setting of Numeric Parameter (NUMERIC Param.)............................................................................ 1303 Setting of Destination (TYPE)...........................................................................................................1305 Setting of Printer Functions (PRINTER)............................................................................................ 1306 IPFAX Setting................................................................................................................................. 1308 Initialization of Set Value (CLEAR)....................................................................................................1309 Test Mode (TEST)........................................................................................................................... 1309 Service Report (REPORT)............................................................................................................... 1313



9. Installation.................................................................................................. 1317 How to Utilize This Installation Procedure.....................................................................................1319 Description on the Parts Included in the Package.............................................................................. 1319 Symbols in the Illustration................................................................................................................ 1319



Checking before Installation.......................................................................................................... 1320 Checking Power Supply................................................................................................................... 1320 Checking the Installation Environment.............................................................................................. 1320 Points to Note at Installation Work.................................................................................................... 1320



vii



Contents Points to Note When Moving This Host Machine................................................................................1320 Checking Installation Space............................................................................................................. 1320 Option Combination Table................................................................................................................1321 Order to Install the Host machine and the Options............................................................................. 1321



Installation of Host Machine.......................................................................................................... 1323 Unpacking.......................................................................................................................................1323 Checking the Contents.....................................................................................................................1327 Installation Procedure...................................................................................................................... 1329 Operation when using uniFLOW Online............................................................................................ 1358



When Relocating the Machine...................................................................................................... 1359 Points to Note When Relocating the Host Machine............................................................................ 1359 Overview........................................................................................................................................ 1359 Works during Relocation.................................................................................................................. 1359 Works after Relocation.....................................................................................................................1365



Printer Cover-H1/H2......................................................................................................................1366 Points to Note before Installation...................................................................................................... 1366 Checking the Contents.....................................................................................................................1366 Essential Items to Be Performed Before Installation........................................................................... 1367 Installation Outline Drawing..............................................................................................................1367 Installation Procedure...................................................................................................................... 1367 Operation Check............................................................................................................................. 1370



NFC Kit-A1 (for Upright Control Panel)......................................................................................... 1371 Points to Note before Installation...................................................................................................... 1371 Checking the Contents.....................................................................................................................1371 Essential Items to Be Performed Before Installation........................................................................... 1371 Installation Outline Drawing..............................................................................................................1371 Installation Procedure...................................................................................................................... 1372 Setting after Installation....................................................................................................................1375



NFC Kit-C1.................................................................................................................................... 1377 Points to Note before Installation...................................................................................................... 1377 Checking the Contents.....................................................................................................................1377 Essential Items to Be Performed Before Installation........................................................................... 1377 Installation Outline Drawing..............................................................................................................1377 Installation Procedure...................................................................................................................... 1378 Setting after Installation....................................................................................................................1384



Reader Heater Unit....................................................................................................................... 1385 Checking the Contents.....................................................................................................................1385 Checking the Parts to be Installed (Europe only)................................................................................1385 Essential Items to Be Performed Before Installation........................................................................... 1385 Installation Outline Drawing..............................................................................................................1385 Installation Procedure...................................................................................................................... 1385



Shift Tray-F1..................................................................................................................................1390 Checking the Contents.....................................................................................................................1390 Essential Items to Be Performed Before Installation........................................................................... 1390 Installation Outline Drawing..............................................................................................................1390 Installation Procedure...................................................................................................................... 1391 Checking after Installation................................................................................................................ 1394



IC Card Reader Box-B1................................................................................................................ 1395 Point to Note About Installation.........................................................................................................1395 Checking the Contents.....................................................................................................................1395 Essential Items to Be Performed Before Installation........................................................................... 1395



viii



Contents Installation Outline Drawing..............................................................................................................1395 Installation Procedure...................................................................................................................... 1396



Paper Deck Heater Unit-A1...........................................................................................................1406 Checking the Supplied Parts............................................................................................................ 1406 Essential Items to Be Performed Before Installation........................................................................... 1406 Installation Procedure...................................................................................................................... 1406



Utility Tray-B1................................................................................................................................1413 Points to Note at Installation.............................................................................................................1413 Checking the Contents.....................................................................................................................1413 Installation Outline Drawing..............................................................................................................1413 Installation Procedure...................................................................................................................... 1413



Copy Card Reader-F1................................................................................................................... 1416 Points to Note at Installation.............................................................................................................1416 Essential Items to Be Performed Before Installation........................................................................... 1416 Checking the Contents.....................................................................................................................1417 Installation Procedure...................................................................................................................... 1418 Checking after Installation................................................................................................................ 1425



Voice Guidance Kit-G1..................................................................................................................1427 Points to Note at Installation.............................................................................................................1427 Checking the Contents.....................................................................................................................1427 Essential Items to Be Performed Before Installation........................................................................... 1428 Installation Outline Drawing..............................................................................................................1428 Installation Procedure...................................................................................................................... 1428 Checking after Installation................................................................................................................ 1433 Operation Check............................................................................................................................. 1433



Document Scan Lock Kit-B2......................................................................................................... 1434 Points to Note Before Installation......................................................................................................1434 Checking the Contents.....................................................................................................................1434 Essential Items to Be Performed Before Installation........................................................................... 1434 Installation Outline Drawing..............................................................................................................1434 Installation Procedure...................................................................................................................... 1435 Checking after Installation................................................................................................................ 1437



Serial Interface Kit-K3 / Copy Control Interface Kit-A1..................................................................1438 Points to Note at Installation.............................................................................................................1438 Checking the Contents.....................................................................................................................1438 Essential Items to Be Performed Before Installation........................................................................... 1439 Installation Outline Drawing..............................................................................................................1439 Installation Procedure...................................................................................................................... 1439



Voice Operation Kit-D1..................................................................................................................1443 Points to Note Before Installation......................................................................................................1443 Checking the Contents.....................................................................................................................1443 Essential Items to Be Performed Before Installation........................................................................... 1444 Installation Outline Drawing..............................................................................................................1444 Installation Procedure...................................................................................................................... 1444 Checking after Installation................................................................................................................ 1450 Operation Check............................................................................................................................. 1450



Connection Kit-A1/A2 for Bluetooth LE......................................................................................... 1452 Checking the Contents.....................................................................................................................1452 Essential Items to Be Performed Before Installation........................................................................... 1453 Installation Outline Drawing..............................................................................................................1453 Installation Procedure...................................................................................................................... 1453



ix



Contents Setting after Installation....................................................................................................................1458



Stamp Unit-B1............................................................................................................................... 1460 Checking the Contents.....................................................................................................................1460 Installation Outline Drawing..............................................................................................................1460 Essential Items to Be Performed Before Installation........................................................................... 1460 Installation Procedure...................................................................................................................... 1460 Operation Check............................................................................................................................. 1463



HDD-related Option.......................................................................................................................1464 Pre-checks......................................................................................................................................1464 Removing the HDD Box Unit............................................................................................................ 1464 [TYPE-1] Option HDD (1TB).............................................................................................................1467 [TYPE-2] Removable HDD Kit.......................................................................................................... 1470 [TYPE-3] Option HDD (1TB) + Removable HDD Kit........................................................................... 1475 [TYPE-4] Standard HDD + Option HDD (250GB) + HDD Mirroring Kit................................................. 1482 [TYPE-5] Standard HDD + Option HDD (250GB) + Removable HDD Kit + HDD Mirroring Kit............... 1488 [TYPE-6] 2 Option HDDs (1TB) + HDD Mirroring Kit.......................................................................... 1496 [TYPE-7] 2 Option HDDs (1TB) + Removable HDD Kit + HDD Mirroring Kit.........................................1503



Super G3 FAX Board-AS1............................................................................................................ 1513 Product Name................................................................................................................................. 1513 Points to Note at Installation.............................................................................................................1513 Essential Items to Be Performed Before Installation........................................................................... 1513 Installation Outline Drawing..............................................................................................................1513 Checking the Contents.....................................................................................................................1513 Installation Procedure...................................................................................................................... 1514 Checking the Operation................................................................................................................... 1516



Super G3 FAX Board-AS2............................................................................................................ 1518 Product Name................................................................................................................................. 1518 Points to Note at Installation.............................................................................................................1518 Essential Items to Be Performed Before Installation........................................................................... 1518 Installation Outline Drawing..............................................................................................................1518 Checking the Contents.....................................................................................................................1518 Installation Procedure...................................................................................................................... 1518 Checking the Operation................................................................................................................... 1520



Super G3 2nd Line Fax Board-AS1...............................................................................................1522 Product Name................................................................................................................................. 1522 Points to Note at Installation.............................................................................................................1522 Essential Items to Be Performed Before Installation........................................................................... 1522 Installation Outline Drawing..............................................................................................................1522 Checking the Contents.....................................................................................................................1522 Installation Procedure...................................................................................................................... 1523 Checking the Operation................................................................................................................... 1531



Super G3 2nd Line Fax Board-AS2...............................................................................................1533 Product Name................................................................................................................................. 1533 Points to Note at Installation.............................................................................................................1533 Essential Items to Be Performed Before Installation........................................................................... 1533 Installation Outline Drawing..............................................................................................................1533 Checking the Contents.....................................................................................................................1533 Installation Procedure...................................................................................................................... 1534 Checking the Operation................................................................................................................... 1542



Super G3 3rd/4th Line Fax Board-AS1......................................................................................... 1543 Product Name................................................................................................................................. 1543



x



Contents Points to Note at Installation.............................................................................................................1543 Essential Items to Be Performed Before Installation........................................................................... 1543 Installation Outline Drawing..............................................................................................................1543 Checking the Contents.....................................................................................................................1544 Installation Procedure...................................................................................................................... 1544 Checking the Operation................................................................................................................... 1548



Super G3 3rd4th Line Fax Board-AS2.......................................................................................... 1550 Product Name................................................................................................................................. 1550 Points to Note at Installation.............................................................................................................1550 Essential Items to Be Performed Before Installation........................................................................... 1550 Installation Outline Drawing..............................................................................................................1550 Checking the Contents.....................................................................................................................1551 Installation Procedure...................................................................................................................... 1551 Checking the Operation................................................................................................................... 1554



APPENDICES..................................................................................................1556 Service Tools.................................................................................................................................1557 Special Tools.................................................................................................................................. 1557 Solvent/Oil List................................................................................................................................ 1558



General Timing Chart.................................................................................................................... 1559 Basic sequence at power ON........................................................................................................... 1559 Basic sequence at printing ...............1560 Basic sequence at printing ...............1561



General Circuit Diagram................................................................................................................1562 Soft counter specifications ........................................................................................................... 1576 Removal........................................................................................................................................ 1580 Overview........................................................................................................................................ 1580 Work Procedure.............................................................................................................................. 1580



List of Service Modes That Can Be Restored............................................................................... 1583



xi



Safety Precautions Laser..................................................... 2 Power Supply / Lithium Battery............. 3 Toner Safety..........................................4 Notes on works..................................... 4



Safety Precautions



Laser Laser Safety Since radiation emitted inside this machine is completely confined with protective housings, external covers and interlock switches, the laser beam cannot escape from the machine during any phase of normal use by users. Therefore, this machine is classified as a Class 1 laser product under the international standard IEC60825-1 that is regarded as safe during normal use.



Handling of Laser System This machine is classified as a Class 1 laser product. However, inside the machine, Class 3B laser beam is emitted and exposure to the beam may cause eye injuries. Therefore, when servicing on and around the Laser Assembly, be sure to turn OFF the power of the machine before starting the work. If you must service while the power is turned ON, be sure to keep the following in mind. • Do not use a screwdriver or any tools that reflect laser light. • Remove watches, rings and any other objects that act as reflectors before starting the work to prevent eye injuries. The mark or the warning label is affixed to the machine's covers that confine laser beam as shown in the figure. If you must open the cover and disable the interlock switches for servicing, be sure to prevent the eye from exposure. The following warnings are given to comply with Safety Principles (EN60950-1). Dieses Gerät ist der Klasse 1 der Laserprodukte zugeordnet. Innerhalb des Geräts wird jedoch ein Laserstrahl der Klasse 3B ausgestrahlt, der Augenschäden verursachen kann, wenn man in diesen Strahl blickt. Deshalb sollte bei Servicearbeiten an oder in der Nähe der Laserbaugruppe zuerst die Stromversorgung des Geräts ausgeschaltet werden. Bei Servicearbeiten, die unbedingt bei eingeschaltetem Gerät durchgeführt werden müssen, auf jeden Fall die folgenden Vorsichtsmaßnahmen beachten. • Keine Schraubendreher oder ähnliche Werkzeuge verwenden, die Laserlicht reflektieren können. • Vor Beginn der Arbeit Uhren, Ringe und ähnliche Gegenstände abnehmen, die als Reflektoren fungieren können, um Augenschäden zu verhindern. An den Abdeckungen des Geräts, die das Austreten des Laserstrahls verhindern, ist das Kennzeichen bzw. der Warnaufkleber angebracht (siehe Abbildung). Müssen für Servicezwecke die Abdeckung geöffnet und die Verriegelungsschalter deaktiviert werden, besondere Vorsicht walten lassen, damit der Laserstrahl nicht in die Augen gerät.



2



Safety Precautions



Power Supply / Lithium Battery Turn power switch ON The machine is equipped with 2 power switches: main power switch and control energy saver key. The machine goes on when the main power switch is turned on (i.e., other than in low power mode, sleep mode). CAUTION: Do not turn off the main power switch while the progress bar is indicated, during which access is made to the Storage. If deprived of power, the Storage can suffer a fault (E602).



Power Supply • As a general rule, do not use extension cords. If an extension cord must be used, however, use one for local rated voltage and over, untie the cord binding, and insert the power plug completely into the extension cord outlet to ensure a firm connection between the power cord and the extension cord. CAUTION: Do not plug multiple cords together to an extension cord. It may cause a fire or electrical shock. • The socket-outlet shall be installed near the equipment and shall be easily accessible.



Notes When Handling a Lithium Battery Dispose of used batteries according to the instructions. CAUTION: Risk of explosion if battery is replaced by an incorrect type.



The following warnings are given to comply with Safety Principles (EN60950-1). CAUTION: Wenn mit dem falschen Typ ausgewechselt, besteht Explosionsgefahr. Gebrauchte Batterien gemäß der Anleitung beseitigen.



3



Safety Precautions



Toner Safety About Toner Toner is a nontoxic matter composed of plastic, iron and a trace of pigments. CAUTION: Never throw toner in flames to avoid explosion.



Handling Adhered Toner • Use dry tissue paper to wipe off toner adhered to skin or clothes and wash in water. • Never use warm water for cleaning up toner to prevent toner particles from being gelated to soak into fibers permanently. • Toner particles are reactive with vinyl polymers. Avoid contacting these materials.



Notes on works Points to Note Before Servicing • At servicing, be sure to turn OFF the power source according to the specified steps and disconnect the power plug. • Be sure to disconnect the power plug on a regular basis and remove dust and dirt accumulated around the outlet with dry cloth. CAUTION: Leaving the power plug connected for a long time in an environment having a lot of dust, moisture, or oily smoke will cause a fire. (Because dust accumulated in the surrounding area will absorb moisture and cause an insulation failure) • Be careful not to be injured by burrs of edges, sharp corners or protrusions. CAUTION: Hazardous area such as corners, edges, springs and other sharp sections may be remaining on products. Always be aware of the presence of hazardous area to avoid injury caused by contacting and/or striking those area, by not overconcentrating on service work.



Points to Note at Cleaning When performing cleaning using organic solvent such as alcohol, be sure to check that the component of solvent is vaporized completely before assembling.



4



Safety Precautions



Notes on Assembly/Disassembly Follow the items below to assemble/disassemble the device. 1. Disconnect the power plug to avoid any potential dangers during assembling/disassembling works. 2. If not specially instructed, reverse the order of disassembly to reinstall. 3. Ensure to use the right screw type (length, diameter, etc.) at the right position when assembling. 4. To keep electric conduction, binding screws with washers are used to attach the grounding wire and the varistor. Ensure to use the right screw type when assembling. 5. Unless it is specially needed, do not operate the device with some parts removed. 6. Never remove the paint-locked screws when disassembling. CAUTION: English CAUTION The fuse may be in the neutral, and that the mains shall be disconnected to de-energize the phase conductors. German VORSICHT Die Sicherung kann sich im Nullleiter befinden und das Hauptnetz muss abgetrennt werden, um die Phasenleiter stromlos zu machen.



■ Points to Note when Tightening a Screw When a thin plates is used in some parts for the light weighting purpose, warn the following. In the case of a screw hole with a triangle mark near it as shown in the figure below, strongly tightening the screw may damage or deform the screw hole. In the case of a screw hole with a triangle mark, take care not to apply too much force when tightening the screw.



The recommended torque value is shown below as a reference value. Type of Screws RS tight Fastened member Tightening torque (N*m)



W Sems



Binding



TP



Metal



Resin



Metal



Resin



Metal



Resin



Metal



Resin



M4



Approx. 1.6



Approx. 1.6



Approx. 1.6



Approx. 0.8



Approx. 1.6



Approx. 0.8



Approx. 1.6



Approx. 0.8



M3



Approx. 0.8



Approx. 0.8



Approx. 0.6



Approx. 0.6



Approx. 0.6



Approx. 0.6



Approx. 0.6



Approx. 0.6



* For PCB, refer to the tightening torque value of resin (fastened member).



Type of Screws RS tight



W Sams



Binding



5



TP



1



Product Overview Product Lineup...................................... 7 Features.............................................. 13 Specifications...................................... 14 External View...................................... 29 Operation............................................ 34



1. Product Overview



Product Lineup Main Body imageRUNNER ADVANCE 6575 III / 6565 III / 6555 III The underlined numerical value indicates the print speed (ppm: print per minute).



imageRUNNER ADVANCE 6575 III / 6575i III



imageRUNNER ADVANCE 6565 III / 6565i III



Machine Configuration



2 models: printer model, model with DADF + Reader



Print speed



75 ppm



Positioning



Target machine: iR5075N/iR5065/iR5065N/iR5055/iR5055N



Control Panel



Flat Control Panel



HDD



Standard: 250 GB, Maximum: 1 TB



Communication method with pickup/delivery option Pickup/ delivery option



Serial/UFDI



65 ppm



7



imageRUNNER ADVANCE 6555 III / 6555i III 55 ppm



1. Product Overview



Pickup/Delivery System Option Copy Tray-R1/R2



POD Deck Lite-C1



Shift Tray-F1



Staple Finisher-V2 *3 /Booklet Finisher-V2 *3



Paper Deck Unit-E1



Document Insertion / Folding Unit-J1



*1: 2/3, 2/4, 4 Hole Puncher Unit-A1 are available as an option.



Pickup System Required Options/Conditions Pickup System Required Options/Conditions Product name



Required options, conditions, etc.



Paper Deck Unit-E1



Using with POD Deck Lite-C1 is not available. Pickup method: retard method Pickup capacity: 3,500sheets (80 g/m2) Paper type: Thin paper, plain paper, heavy paper, color paper, recycled paper, bond paper, pre-punched paper, letterhead Paper size: A4, B5, LTR Paper weight: 52 to 256 g/m2 Double feed detection: not available



POD Deck Lite-C1



Using with Paper Deck Unit-E1 is not available. Pickup method: air separation method Pickup capacity: 3,500 sheets (80 g/m2) Paper type: Thin paper, plain paper, heavy paper, color paper, recycled paper, prepunched paper, transparency, labels, tab paper, bond paper, letterhead, postcard Paper size: 13"x19" to A5R Paper weight: 52 to 256 g/m2 Double feed detection: not available



Tab Feeding Attachment Kit-B1 Cassette Heater Unit-38



For cassette of main body



Paper Deck Heater Unit-A1



Option for Paper Deck Unit-E1



8



1. Product Overview



Delivery System Required Options/Conditions Delivery System Required Options/Conditions Product name



Required options, conditions, etc.



Shift Tray-F1



Using with delivery-related options is not available. Paper size: Ppaper available for the host machine Paper weight: 52 to 256 g/m2 Tray capacity: 500 sheets (64 g/m2)



Copy Tray-R1 /R2



Using with delivery-related options is not available. Paper size: Paper available for the host machine Paper weight: 52 to 256 g/m2 Tray capacity: 250 sheets (64 g/m2)



Document Insertion Unit-P1



Staple Finisher/Booklet Finisher is required at the downstream side. Pickup capacity: 100 sheets x 1 bin Paper type: Thin paper, plain paper, recycled paper, color paper, heavy paper, tab paper, bond paper, letterhead, coated paper Paper size: B5R to A3/11x17 Paper weight: 60 to 256 g/m2



Document Insertion / Folding Unit-J1



Folding Unit + Insertion Unit Staple Finisher/Booklet Finisher is required at the downstream side. Folding Unit Folding type: Z-Fold, C-Fold Paper type: Thin paper, plain paper, recycled paper, color paper Paper size: Z fold (A3, B4, A4R/11 x 17, LGL, LTRR), C fold (A4R/LTRR) Paper weight: 60 to 105 g/m2 Insertion Unit Pickup capacity: 100 sheets x 1 bin Paper type: Thin paper, plain paper, recycled paper, color paper, heavy paper, tab paper, bond paper, letterhead, coated paper Paper size: B5R to A3/11x17 Paper weight: 60 to 256 g/m2



Staple Finisher-V2



Using with Booklet Finisher-V2 is not available. Paper weight: 52 to 256 g/m2 Maximum stacking capacity: 3,500 sheets (A4, B5, LTR) The number of sheets to be stitched: Staple: 65 sheets (A4, B5, LTR) Staple-Free Stapling: 4 sheets (81.4 g/m2) Manual Staple: 65 sheets (90 g/m2)



Booklet Finisher-V2



Using with Staple Finisher-V2 is not available. Paper weight: 52 to 256 g/m2 Maximum stacking capacity: 3,500 sheets (A4, B5, LTR) The number of sheets to be stitched: Staple: 65 sheets (A4, B5, LTR) Staple-Free Stapling: 4 sheets (81.4 g/m2) Manual Staple: 65 sheets (90 g/m2) Saddle Stitch: 20 sheets/10 sets (81.4 g/m2)



2/3, 2/4, 4 Hole Puncher Unit-A1



Booklet Finisher-V2 and Staple Finisher-V2 options Paper weight: 52 to 256 g/m2



Staple Cartridge-X1



Plain Staple Cartridge Option for Booklet Finisher-V2 and Staple Finisher-V2



Staple Cartridge-Y1



Saddle Staple Cartridge Option for Booklet Finisher-V2



9



1. Product Overview



Scanning System Options Stamp Ink Cartridge-C1 Stamp Unit-B1



Reader Heater Unit-G1



Printer Cover-H1 ADF Access Handle-A1



Required Options and Conditions Product name



Required options, conditions, etc.



Reader Heater Unit-G1



Option for Reader Unit



ADF Access Handle-A1



It is the handle to support opening and closing the Feeder.



Stamp Ink Cartridge-C1



DADF is required.



Stamp Unit-B1



DADF is required.



Printer Cover-H1



It is the cover to be installed at the top of the host machine when using this equipment as a printer model.



10



1. Product Overview



Function Expansion System Options Utility Tray-B1 Upright Control Panel-E1



Copy Card Reader-F1 Copy Card Reader Attachment-A3



NFC Kit-A1 2.5inch/250GB HDD-N1 2.5inch/1TB HDD-P1 NFC KIT-B1



Removable HDD Kit-AL1/ HDD Mirroring Kit-J1



IC Card Reader Box-B1



Voice Guidance Kit-G1



Voice Operation Kit-D1



Serial Interface Kit-K2 Copy Control Interface Kit-A1



Super G3 3rd/4th Line Fax Board-AS1



imagePASS-Y1 Licence option



Super G3 2nd Line Fax Board-AS1



Super G3 FAX Board-AS1



Hardware Products Product name



Required options, conditions, etc.



Upright Control Panel-H1



No particular options and conditions are required.



★NFC Kit-A1



Required when using NFC function at installation of the Upright Control Panel-A1.



★NFC Kit-B1



No particular options and conditions are required.



Utility Tray-B1



Using with Voice Guidance Kit-G1 and Voice Operation Kit-D1 is not available.



Copy Card Reader-F1



Copy Card Reader Installation Kit-A3 is required. Using with Serial Interface Kit-K2 and Copy Control Interface Kit-A1 is not available.



Copy Card Reader Attachment-A4



Required when Copy Card Reader-F1 is installed.



Card Set-A1 to A6



Copy Card Reader-F1 is required.



Super G3 FAX Board-AS1



No particular options and conditions are required.



Super G3 2nd Line Fax Board-AS1



Super G3 FAX Board-AS1 is required.



■Super G3 3rd/4th Line Fax Board-AS1



Super G3 FAX Board-AL1 and Super G3 2nd Line Fax Board-AS1 is required.



●imagePASS-Y1



No particular options and conditions are required.



Voice Guidance Kit-G1



Using with Utility Tray-B1 and Voice Operation Kit-D1 is not available.



Voice Operation Kit-D1



Using with Utility Tray-B1 and Voice Guidance Kit-G1 is not available.



11



1. Product Overview Product name



Required options, conditions, etc.



Serial Interface Kit-K3



Required when the coin manager is connected. Using with Copy Card Reader-F1 and Copy Control Interface Kit-A1 is not available.



Copy Control Interface Kit-A1



Required when the coin manager is connected. Using with Copy Card Reader-F1 and Serial Interface Kit-K2 is not available.



2.5inch/250GB HDD-N1



This is used when the mirroring function is used with HDD Mirroring Kit-J1.



2.5inch/1TB HDD-P1



This is used when the mirroring function is used with HDD Mirroring Kit-J1.



HDD Mirroring Kit-J1



When performing mirroring, either the Option HDD-N1 (250 GB) or the Option HDD-P1 (1 TB) is required.



Removable HDD Kit-AL1



No particular options and conditions are required.



IC Card Reader Box-B1



Card Reader (sales company's option) is required.



iR-ADV Security Kit-AA1 for IEEE 2600 Common Criteria Certification Connection Kit-A1 for Bluetooth LE



License Products At the time of installation, obtain the license number according to the license certificate included and then enter the obtained license number from the Control Panel of the machine. The applicable functions are now enabled. There is no physical installation work at the time of installation. Product name



Required options, conditions, etc.



★Remote Fax Kit-A1



No particular options and conditions are required.



★IP FAX Expansion Kit-B1



Using with Super G3 2nd Line Fax Board-AS1 or Super G3 3rd/4th Line Fax Board-AS1 is not available.



PCL Printer Kit-BC1



No particular options and conditions are required.



PCL International Font Set-A1



No particular options and conditions are required.



PCL Asian Font Set-A1 PS Printer Kit-BC1 /BV1



No particular options and conditions are required.



Barcode Printing Kit-D1



No particular options and conditions are required.



Universal Send Trace & Smooth PDF Kit-A1 No particular options and conditions are required. Universal Send Advanced Feature Set-H1



No particular options and conditions are required.



■Universal Send Security Feature Set-D1



No particular options and conditions are required.



Universal Send Digital User Signature KitC1



No particular options and conditions are required.



■Encrypted Secure Print Software-D1



No particular options and conditions are required.



■Encrypted Printing Software-D1



No particular options and conditions are required.



■Secure Watermark-B1



No particular options and conditions are required.



Document Scan Lock Kit-B2



No particular options and conditions are required.



Picture Login-A1



No particular options and conditions are required.



■Web Access Software-K1



No particular options and conditions are required.



12



1. Product Overview



Features Features • Standard size paper setting for A5 from the Multi-purpose Tray • Standard size paper setting for A6R/Postcard from the Cassette/Multi-purpose Tray



13



1. Product Overview



Specifications Product Specifications Item



Description



Installation type of main body



Reader-Printer Separated, Console type



Photoreceptor



84 mm diameter amorphous silicon drum



Exposure method



Laser exposure method



Charging method



Corona + Grid charging method



Developing method



Dry, 1-component toner projection



Transfer method



Transfer Roller method



Separation method



Transfer Belt



Pickup method



Right/Left Deck: Separation retard method Cassette 3/4: Separation retard method Multi-purpose Tray: Simple retard method



Cleaning method



Drum: Cleaning Blade ETB: Cleaning Blade + Brush Roller



Fixing method



Heat Roller method



Delivery method



Face-up/Face-down



Type of toner



Magnetic negative toner



Toner supplying method



Set-on



Toner level detection func- Yes tion Leading edge image margin 2.5 mm +1.5/-0.5 mm Left image margin



2.5 mm +/- 1.5 mm



Warm-up time



After Powering ON: 30 sec. or less Returning from the Sleep mode: 30 sec. or less Returning from the Energy Saver mode: Approximately 20 sec.



First copy time



iR-ADV 6575 III: 3.1 sec. or less iR-ADV 6565 III /6555 III: 3.3 sec. or less



Image gradations



256 gradations



Print resolution



Max. 1,200 dpi x 1,200 dpi



Maximum image guaranteed area



305.0 x 482.7 mm



Maximum printable area



310 x 625 mm



Paper Type/Size



“Paper Type” on page 19: reference



Pickup capacity



Right/Left Deck: 1,500 sheets each (80 g/m2) Cassette 3/4: 550 sheets each (80 g/m2) Multi-purpose Tray: 100 sheets (80 g/m2)



Duplex method



Through path



Memory capacity



For Main Controller 1: Capacity of 2 GB (for controller control) + 1 GB (for image processing)



HDD capacity



Standard: 250 GB, Maximum: 1 TB



Environment temperature/ Humidity/Atmosphere range



“9. Installation” on page 1317: reference



Noise



At the time of printing: 75 dB or less



Rated power supply



“Power Supply Specifications” on page 15: reference



Maximum power consumption



Dimensions/Weight



• At the time of printing: 1.5 kW or less • At the time of sleep: 0.9 W or less • When the main power switch is turned OFF: • When Quick Startup Settings for Main Power is set to On: 0.45 W • When Quick Startup Settings for Main Power is set to Off: 0.3 W “Weight and Size” on page 15



14



1. Product Overview



Fax Specifications Item Telephone Line Used



Contents Public Switched Telephone Network (PSTN)



*1



Scan Line Density



Normal G3: 8 pels*2 / mm x 3.85 line / mm Fine G3: 8 pels*2 / mm x 7.7 line / mm Super-Fine G3: 8 pels*2 / mm x 15.4 line / mm Ultra-Fine G3: 16 pels*2 / mm x 15.4 line / mm



Transmission Speed



Super G3 : 33.6 kbps, G3 : 14.4 kbps



Compression Method



MH, MR, MMR, JBIG



Transmission Type



SuperG3, G3



Sending Original Sizes



• AB configuration: A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5*2, B5R*3, A5*3, A5R*3 • Inch configuration: 11" x 17", LGL, LTR, LTRR, STMTR



Receiving Paper Sizes



• AB configuration: A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5, B5R, A5R • Inch configuration: 11" x 17", LGL, LTR, LTRR, STMTR • Other: K8, K16



No. of Memory RX Jobs



Up to 320 jobs



Transmission Times



Approximately 2.6 seconds (When sending LTR Canon original paper, Normal 8 pels x 3.85 line/mm ECM (JBIG))



*1 When using an IP telephone service, facsimile communication may not be performed normally via an IP telephone line. It is recommended to use facsimile communication via a general telephone (Public Switched Telephone Network) line. *2 Pels stands for picture elements (pixels). *3 Sent as A4.



Power Supply Specifications Product name



Power supJapan ply source V(V) I(A) (number of cables)



North America V(V)



Europe



I(A)



V(V)



Asia



I(A)



V(V)



Australia I(A)



V(V)



I(A)



imageRUNNER AD- Power outlet 100 VANCE 6575 III / 6565 (1) III / 6555 III



15



120 -127



16



220 -240 10



220 -240 10



220 -240



10



POD Deck Lite-C1



Power outlet 100 (1)



2.4



120 -127



2.2



220 -240 1.2



220 -240 1.2



220 -240



1.2



Paper Deck Unit-E1



Main body



-



-



-



-



-



-



-



-



Document Insertion Unit-P1



Power outlet (1)



-



100 240



1.0



100 -240 1.0



100 -240 1.0



100 -240



1.0



Paper Folding Insertion Unit-J1



Finisher



100 -240



1.0



100 -240



1.0



100 -240 1.0



100 -240 1.0



100 -240



1.0



Shift Tray-E1



Main body



-



-



-



-



-



-



-



-



-



-



Staple Finisher-V1/ V2



Main body



-



-



-



-



-



-



-



-



-



-



Booklet Finisher-V1 / V2



Main body



-



-



-



-



-



-



-



-



-



-



2/3, 2/4, 4 Hole Puncher Unit-A1



Finisher



-



-



-



-



-



-



-



-



-



-



-



-



Weight and Size Product name



Width (mm) Depth (mm)



Height (mm) Weight (kg)



imageRUNNER ADVANCE 6575 III /6565 III Without the upright control panel



670



779



1,220



234



imageRUNNER ADVANCE 6575 III /6565 III With the upright control panel



1,481



779



1,252



238



15



1. Product Overview Product name



Width (mm) Depth (mm)



Height (mm) Weight (kg)



POD Deck Lite-C1



656



686



582



68



Paper Deck Unit-E1



363



630



582



34



Paper Folding Insertion Unit-J1



662



679



1,242



76



Copy Tray-R1



420



382



175



1.1



Shift Tray-E1



366



547



256



4.2



Booklet Finisher-V1/V2



525



623



1,099



58



Staple Finisher-V1/V2



525



623



1,099



35



-



-



-



3



2/4 Hole Puncher Unit-A1



Productivity ■ imageRUNNER ADVANCE 6575 III Unit: images / min 1-sided Mode Plain paper Thin paper Environmental paper Recycled paper Pre-punched paper (52 to 90g/m2)



Size



Cassette



Multi-purpose Tray



Paper Deck



Cassette



Multi-purpose Tray



Paper Deck



75



53



75



37.5



26.5



37.5



A6R



-



35



-



-



-



-



A5



-



53



-



-



-



-



A5R



35



35



35



17.5



17.5



17.5



STMTR



35



35



35



17.5



17.5



17.5



B5R



63



47



63



31.5



23.5



31.5



LTRR



58



45



58



29



22.5



29



A4R



54



44



54



27



22



27



LGL



45



38



45



22.5



19



22.5



8KR



37



33



37



18.5



16.5



18.5



B4



45



38



45



22.5



19



22.5



A3



37



33



37



18.5



16.5



18.5



11x17



37



33



37



18.5



16.5



18.5



65



53



65



32.5



26.5



32.5



A6R



-



35



-



-



-



-



A5



-



35



-



-



-



-



A5R



35



35



35



17.5



17.5



17.5



STMTR



35



35



35



17.5



17.5



17.5



B5R



54



47



54



27



23.5



27



LTRR



50



45



50



25



22.5



25



A4R



46



44



46



23



22



23



LGL



39



39



39



19.5



19.5



19.5



B4



39



39



39



19.5



19.5



19.5



8KR



32



32



32



16



16



16



A3



32



32



32



16



16



16



11x17



32



32



32



16



16



16



LTR



35



35



35



17.5



17.5



17.5



LTRR



24



24



24



12



12



12



B5, A4



-



-



-



-



-



-



B5R



-



-



-



-



-



-



A4R



-



-



-



-



-



-



B4



-



-



-



-



-



-



A3



-



-



-



-



-



-



A4, LTR



-



53



-



-



-



-



B5, A4, LTR, 16K



Heavy paper B5, A4, LTR, (91 to 256g/m2) 16K



Bond paper Tracing paper



Transparency



2-sided



16



1. Product Overview 1-sided Mode Transparency Label paper



Tab paper



Size



2-sided



Cassette



Multi-purpose Tray



Paper Deck



Cassette



Multi-purpose Tray



Paper Deck



LTRR



-



45



-



-



-



-



A4R



-



44



-



-



-



-



A4



-



53



-



-



-



-



A4R



-



44



-



-



-



-



B4



-



39



-



-



-



-



59



-



59



-



-



-



A4, LTR



■ imageRUNNER ADVANCE 6565 III Unit: images / min 1-sided Mode Plain paper Thin paper Environmental paper Recycled paper Pre-punched paper (52 to 90g/m2)



Size



Cassette



Multi-purpose Tray



Paper Deck



Cassette



Multi-purpose Tray



Paper Deck



65



46



65



32.5



23



32.5



A6R



-



35



-



-



-



-



A5



-



46



-



-



-



-



A5R



35



35



35



17.5



17.5



17.5



STMTR



35



35



35



17.5



17.5



17.5



B5R



55



41



55



27.5



20.5



27.5



LTRR



50



39



50



25



19.5



25



A4R



47



38



47



23.5



19



23.5



LGL



39



33



39



19.5



16.5



19.5



B4



39



33



39



19.5



16.5



19.5



8KR



32



29



32



16



14.5



16



A3



32



29



32



16



14.5



16



11x17



32



29



32



16



14.5



16



56



46



56



28



23



28



A6R



-



30



-



-



-



-



A5



-



30



-



-



-



-



A5R



35



35



35



17.5



17.5



17.5



STMTR



35



35



35



17.5



17.5



17.5



B5R



47



41



47



23.5



20.5



23.5



LTRR



43



39



43



21.5



19.5



21.5



A4R



40



38



40



20



19



20



LGL



33



33



33



16.5



16.5



16.5



B4



33



33



33



16.5



16.5



16.5



8KR



27



27



27



13.5



14.5



13.5



A3



27



27



27



13.5



14.5



13.5



11x17



27



27



27



13.5



14.5



13.5



LTR



30



30



30



14.95



15



14.95



LTRR



21



21



21



10.5



10.5



10.5



B5, A4



-



-



-



-



-



-



B5R



-



-



-



-



-



-



A4R



-



-



-



-



-



-



B4



-



-



-



-



-



-



A3



-



-



-



-



-



-



A4, LTR



-



46



-



-



-



-



LTRR



-



39



-



-



-



-



A4R



-



38



-



-



-



-



A4



-



46



-



-



-



-



B5, A4, LTR, 16K



Heavy paper B5, A4, LTR, (91 to 256g/m2) 16K



Bond paper Tracing paper



Transparency



Label paper



2-sided



17



1. Product Overview 1-sided Mode Label paper



Size A4R B4



Tab paper



A4, LTR



2-sided



Cassette



Multi-purpose Tray



Paper Deck



Cassette



Multi-purpose Tray



Paper Deck



-



38



-



-



-



-



-



33



-



-



-



-



51



-



51



-



-



-



■ imageRUNNER ADVANCE 6560 III Unit: images / min 1-sided Mode Plain paper Thin paper Environmental paper Recycled paper Pre-punched paper (52 to 90 g/m2)



Heavy paper (91 to 256 g/m2)



Bond paper Tracing paper



Transparency



Label paper



Size



Multi-purpose Tray



Paper Deck



Cassette



Multi-purpose Tray



Paper Deck



60



46



60



30



23



30



A6R



-



35



-



-



-



-



A5



-



46



-



-



-



-



A5R



35



35



35



17.5



17.5



17.5



STMTR



35



35



35



17.5



17.5



17.5



B5R



50



41



50



25



20.5



25



LTRR



46



39



46



23



19.5



23



A4R



43



38



43



21.5



19



21.5



LGL



39



33



39



19.5



16.5



19.5



B4



39



33



39



19.5



16.5



19.5



8KR



32



29



32



16



14.5



16



A3



32



29



32



16



14.5



16



11x17



32



29



32



16



14.5



16



B5, A4, LTR, 16K



55



46



55



27.5



23



27.5



A6R



-



30



-



-



-



-



A5



-



30



-



-



-



-



A5R



35



35



35



17.5



17.5



17.5



STMTR



35



35



35



17.5



17.5



17.5



B5R



46



41



46



23



20.5



23



LTRR



43



39



43



21.5



19.5



21.5



A4R



40



38



40



20



19



20



LGL



33



33



33



16.5



16.5



16.5



B4



33



33



33



16.5



16.5



16.5



8KR



27



27



27



13.5



14.5



13.5



A3



27



27



27



13.5



14.5



13.5 13.5



B5, A4, LTR 16K



11x17



27



27



27



13.5



14.5



LTR



30



30



30



15



15



15



LTRR



21



21



21



10.5



10.5



10.5



B5, A4



-



-



-



-



-



-



B5R



-



-



-



-



-



-



A4R



-



-



-



-



-



-



B4



-



-



-



-



-



-



A3



-



-



-



-



-



-



A4, LTR



-



46



-



-



-



-



LTRR



-



39



-



-



-



-



A4R



-



38



-



-



-



-



A4



-



46



-



-



-



-



A4R



-



38



-



-



-



-



-



33



-



-



-



-



51



-



51



-



-



-



B4 Tab paper



2-sided



Cassette



A4, LTR



18



1. Product Overview



Paper Type Following shows the types of usable papers. Type



Size



Feed- Width ing di- direcrection tion (mm) (mm)



Pickup position Multipurpose Tray



Right Deck



Left Deck



CasCas- 3.5KPD sette 3 sette 4



POD Deck Lite



Inserter (except for CMJ)



Thin 2 (52 to 59 g/m2) A3



420



297



Yes



No



No



Yes



Yes



No



Yes



Yes



B4



364



257



Yes



No



No



Yes



Yes



No



Yes



Yes



A4R



297



210



Yes



No



No



Yes



Yes



No



Yes



Yes



A4



210



297



Yes



Yes



Yes



Yes



Yes



Yes



Yes



Yes



B5R



257



182



Yes



No



No



Yes



Yes



No



Yes



Yes



B5



182



257



Yes



Yes



Yes



Yes



Yes



Yes



Yes



Yes



A5



148



210



Yes



No



No



No



No



No



No



No



A5R



210



148



Yes



No



No



Yes



Yes



No



Yes



No



A6R



148



105



Yes



No



No



No



No



No



No



No



11x17



431.8



279.4



Yes



No



No



Yes



Yes



No



Yes



Yes



LGL



355.6



215.9



Yes



No



No



Yes



Yes



No



Yes



Yes



LTR



215.9



279.4



Yes



Yes



Yes



Yes



Yes



Yes



Yes



Yes



LTRR



279.4



215.9



Yes



No



No



Yes



Yes



No



Yes



Yes



STMTR



215.9



139.7



Yes



No



No



Yes



Yes



No



Yes



No



EXEC



184.1



266.7



Yes



No



No



Yes



Yes



No



Yes



Yes



OFFICIO



317.5



215.9



Yes



No



No



Yes



Yes



No



Yes



No



E-OFFICIO



320



220



Yes



No



No



Yes



Yes



No



Yes



No



B-OFFICIO



355



216



Yes



No



No



Yes



Yes



No



Yes



No



M-OFFICIO



341



216



Yes



No



No



Yes



Yes



No



Yes



No



A-OFFICIO



340



220



Yes



No



No



Yes



Yes



No



Yes



No



A-LTR



220



280



Yes



No



No



Yes



Yes



No



Yes



No



A-LTRR



280



220



Yes



No



No



Yes



Yes



No



Yes



No



GLTR-R



266.7



203.2



Yes



No



No



Yes



Yes



No



Yes



No



GLTR



203.2



266.7



Yes



No



No



Yes



Yes



No



Yes



No



GLGL



330.2



203.2



Yes



No



No



Yes



Yes



No



Yes



No



AFLS



337



206



Yes



No



No



Yes



Yes



No



Yes



No



FLS



330.2



215.9



Yes



No



No



Yes



Yes



No



Yes



No



8K



390



270



Yes



No



No



Yes



Yes



No



Yes



No



16K



195



270



Yes



No



No



Yes



Yes



No



Yes



No



16KR



270



195



No



No



No



Yes



Yes



No



Yes



No



F4A



342.9



215.9



Yes



No



No



Yes



Yes



No



Yes



No



I-LGL



345



215



Yes



No



No



Yes



Yes



No



Yes



No



Free



182 to 487.7



100 to 297



Yes



No



No



No



No



No



No



No



Free (Long length)



487.8 to 100 to 630 297



Yes *1



No



No



No



No



No



No



No



Custom size 0-1, and 0-2



-



Yes



No



No



No



No



No



No



No



Custom size 1-1, 1-2, 1-3, 2-1, 2-2, 2-3, 3-1, 3-2, and 3-3



-



Yes



No



No



Yes



Yes



No



Yes



No



Yes



No



No



No



No



No



No



No



Yes



No



No



Yes



Yes



No



Yes



Yes



Custom size 487.8 to 100 to 4 (long 630 297 length) Thin 1 (60 to 63 g/m2) A3



420



297



19



1. Product Overview Type



Plain 1 (64 to 75 g/m2) Plain 2 (76 to 90 g/m2) Plain 3 (91 to 105 g/m2) Color paper 1 (64 to 90 g/m2) Recycled 1 (64 to 90 g/ m2)



Heavy 1 (106 to 128 g/ m2) Heavy 2 (129 to 150 g/ m2) Heavy 3 (151 to 163 g/ m2)



Size



Feed- Width ing di- direcrection tion (mm) (mm)



Pickup position Multipurpose Tray



Right Deck



Left Deck



CasCas- 3.5KPD sette 3 sette 4



No



No



Yes



Yes



POD Deck Lite



Inserter (except for CMJ)



No



Yes



Yes



B4



364



257



Yes



A4R



297



210



Yes



No



No



Yes



Yes



No



Yes



Yes



A4



210



297



Yes



Yes



Yes



Yes



Yes



Yes



Yes



Yes



B5R



257



182



Yes



No



No



Yes



Yes



No



Yes



Yes



B5



182



257



Yes



Yes



Yes



Yes



Yes



Yes



Yes



Yes



A5



148



210



Yes



No



No



No



No



No



No



No



A5R



210



148



Yes



No



No



Yes



Yes



No



Yes



No



A6R



148



105



Yes



No



No



No



No



No



No



No



11x17



431.8



279.4



Yes



No



No



Yes



Yes



No



Yes



Yes



LGL



355.6



215.9



Yes



No



No



Yes



Yes



No



Yes



Yes



LTR



215.9



279.4



Yes



Yes



Yes



Yes



Yes



Yes



Yes



Yes



LTRR



279.4



215.9



Yes



No



No



Yes



Yes



No



Yes



Yes



STMTR



215.9



139.7



Yes



No



No



Yes



Yes



No



Yes



No



EXEC



184.1



266.7



Yes



No



No



Yes



Yes



No



Yes



Yes



OFFICIO



317.5



215.9



Yes



No



No



Yes



Yes



No



Yes



No



E-OFFICIO



320



220



Yes



No



No



Yes



Yes



No



Yes



No



B-OFFICIO



355



216



Yes



No



No



Yes



Yes



No



Yes



No



M-OFFICIO



341



216



Yes



No



No



Yes



Yes



No



Yes



No



A-OFFICIO



340



220



Yes



No



No



Yes



Yes



No



Yes



No



A-LTR



220



280



Yes



No



No



Yes



Yes



No



Yes



No



A-LTRR



280



220



Yes



No



No



Yes



Yes



No



Yes



No



GLTR-R



266.7



203.2



Yes



No



No



Yes



Yes



No



Yes



No



GLTR



203.2



266.7



Yes



No



No



Yes



Yes



No



Yes



No



GLGL



330.2



203.2



Yes



No



No



Yes



Yes



No



Yes



No



AFLS



337



206



Yes



No



No



Yes



Yes



No



Yes



No



FLS



330.2



215.9



Yes



No



No



Yes



Yes



No



Yes



No



8K



390



270



Yes



No



No



Yes



Yes



No



Yes



No



16K



195



270



Yes



No



No



Yes



Yes



No



Yes



No



16KR



270



195



No



No



No



Yes



Yes



No



Yes



No



F4A



342.9



215.9



Yes



No



No



Yes



Yes



No



Yes



No



I-LGL



345



215



Yes



No



No



Yes



Yes



No



Yes



No



Free



182 to 487.7



100 to 297



Yes



No



No



No



No



No



No



No



Free (Long length)



487.8 to 100 to 630 297



Yes *1



No



No



No



No



No



No



No



Custom size 0-1, and 0-2



-



Yes



No



No



No



No



No



No



No



Custom size 1-1, 1-2, 1-3, 2-1, 2-2, 2-3, 3-1, 3-2, and 3-3



-



Yes



No



No



Yes



Yes



No



Yes



No



Custom size 487.8 to 100 to 4 (long 630 297 length)



Yes



No



No



No



No



No



No



No



A3



420



297



Yes



No



No



Yes



Yes



No



Yes



Yes



B4



364



257



Yes



No



No



Yes



Yes



No



Yes



Yes



A4R



297



210



Yes



No



No



Yes



Yes



No



Yes



Yes



A4



210



297



Yes



Yes



Yes



Yes



Yes



Yes



Yes



Yes



B5R



257



182



Yes



No



No



Yes



Yes



No



Yes



Yes



B5



182



257



Yes



Yes



Yes



Yes



Yes



Yes



Yes



Yes



20



1. Product Overview Type



Heavy 1 (106 to 128 g/ m2) Heavy 2 (129 to 150 g/ m2) Heavy 3 (151 to 163 g/ m2)



Size



Feed- Width ing di- direcrection tion (mm) (mm)



Pickup position Multipurpose Tray



Right Deck



Left Deck



CasCas- 3.5KPD sette 3 sette 4



POD Deck Lite



Inserter (except for CMJ)



A5



148



210



Yes



No



No



No



No



No



No



No



A5R



210



148



Yes



No



No



Yes



Yes



No



Yes



No



A6R



148



105



Yes



No



No



No



No



No



No



No



11x17



431.8



279.4



Yes



No



No



Yes



Yes



No



Yes



Yes



LGL



355.6



215.9



Yes



No



No



Yes



Yes



No



Yes



Yes



LTR



215.9



279.4



Yes



Yes



Yes



Yes



Yes



Yes



Yes



Yes



LTRR



279.4



215.9



Yes



No



No



Yes



Yes



No



Yes



Yes



STMTR



215.9



139.7



Yes



No



No



Yes



Yes



No



Yes



No



EXEC



184.1



266.7



Yes



No



No



Yes



Yes



No



Yes



Yes



OFFICIO



317.5



215.9



Yes



No



No



Yes



Yes



No



Yes



No



E-OFFICIO



320



220



Yes



No



No



Yes



Yes



No



Yes



No



B-OFFICIO



355



216



Yes



No



No



Yes



Yes



No



Yes



No



M-OFFICIO



341



216



Yes



No



No



Yes



Yes



No



Yes



No



A-OFFICIO



340



220



Yes



No



No



Yes



Yes



No



Yes



No



A-LTR



220



280



Yes



No



No



Yes



Yes



No



Yes



No



A-LTRR



280



220



Yes



No



No



Yes



Yes



No



Yes



No



GLTR-R



266.7



203.2



Yes



No



No



Yes



Yes



No



Yes



No



GLTR



203.2



266.7



Yes



No



No



Yes



Yes



No



Yes



No



GLGL



330.2



203.2



Yes



No



No



Yes



Yes



No



Yes



No



AFLS



337



206



Yes



No



No



Yes



Yes



No



Yes



No



FLS



330.2



215.9



Yes



No



No



Yes



Yes



No



Yes



No



8K



390



270



Yes



No



No



Yes



Yes



No



Yes



No



16K



195



270



Yes



No



No



Yes



Yes



No



Yes



No



16KR



270



195



No



No



No



Yes



Yes



No



Yes



No



F4A



342.9



215.9



Yes



No



No



Yes



Yes



No



Yes



No



I-LGL



345



215



Yes



No



No



Yes



Yes



No



Yes



No



Free



182 to 487.7



100 to 297



Yes



No



No



No



No



No



No



No



Free (Long length)



487.8 to 100 to 630 297



Yes *1



No



No



No



No



No



No



No



Custom size 0-1, and 0-2



-



Yes



No



No



No



No



No



No



No



Custom size 1-1, 1-2, 1-3, 2-1, 2-2, 2-3, 3-1, 3-2, and 3-3



-



Yes



No



No



Yes



Yes



No



Yes



No



Yes



No



No



No



No



No



No



No



Custom size 487.8 to 100 to 4 (long 630 297 length) Heavy 4 (164 to 180 g/ A3 m2) B4 Heavy 5 (181 to 220 g/ A4R m2) A4



420



297



Yes



No



No



Yes



Yes



No



Yes



Yes



364



257



Yes



No



No



Yes



Yes



No



Yes



Yes



297



210



Yes



No



No



Yes



Yes



No



Yes



Yes



210



297



Yes



Yes



Yes



Yes



Yes



Yes



Yes



Yes



B5R



257



182



Yes



No



No



Yes



Yes



No



Yes



Yes



B5



182



257



Yes



Yes



Yes



Yes



Yes



Yes



Yes



Yes



A5



148



210



Yes



No



No



No



No



No



No



No



A5R



210



148



Yes



No



No



Yes



Yes



No



Yes



No



A6R



148



105



Yes



No



No



No



No



No



No



No



11x17



431.8



279.4



Yes



No



No



Yes



Yes



No



Yes



Yes



LGL



355.6



215.9



Yes



No



No



Yes



Yes



No



Yes



Yes



21



1. Product Overview Type



Size



Heavy 4 (164 to 180 g/ LTR m2) LTRR Heavy 5 (181 to 220 g/ STMTR m2) EXEC



Feed- Width ing di- direcrection tion (mm) (mm)



Pickup position Multipurpose Tray



Right Deck



Left Deck



CasCas- 3.5KPD sette 3 sette 4



POD Deck Lite



Inserter (except for CMJ)



215.9



279.4



Yes



Yes



Yes



Yes



Yes



Yes



Yes



Yes



279.4



215.9



Yes



No



No



Yes



Yes



No



Yes



Yes



215.9



139.7



Yes



No



No



Yes



Yes



No



Yes



No



184.1



266.7



Yes



No



No



Yes



Yes



No



Yes



Yes



OFFICIO



317.5



215.9



Yes



No



No



Yes



Yes



No



Yes



No



E-OFFICIO



320



220



Yes



No



No



Yes



Yes



No



Yes



No



B-OFFICIO



355



216



Yes



No



No



Yes



Yes



No



Yes



No



M-OFFICIO



341



216



Yes



No



No



Yes



Yes



No



Yes



No



A-OFFICIO



340



220



Yes



No



No



Yes



Yes



No



Yes



No



A-LTR



220



280



Yes



No



No



Yes



Yes



No



Yes



No



A-LTRR



280



220



Yes



No



No



Yes



Yes



No



Yes



No



GLTR-R



266.7



203.2



Yes



No



No



Yes



Yes



No



Yes



No



GLTR



203.2



266.7



Yes



No



No



Yes



Yes



No



Yes



No



GLGL



330.2



203.2



Yes



No



No



Yes



Yes



No



Yes



No



AFLS



337



206



Yes



No



No



Yes



Yes



No



Yes



No



FLS



330.2



215.9



Yes



No



No



Yes



Yes



No



Yes



No



8K



390



270



Yes



No



No



Yes



Yes



No



Yes



No



16K



195



270



Yes



No



No



Yes



Yes



No



Yes



No



16KR



270



195



No



No



No



Yes



Yes



No



Yes



No



F4A



342.9



215.9



Yes



No



No



Yes



Yes



No



Yes



No



I-LGL



345



215



Yes



No



No



Yes



Yes



No



Yes



No



Free



182 to 487.7



100 to 297



Yes



No



No



No



No



No



No



No



Free (Long length)



487.8 to 100 to 630 297



Yes *1



No



No



No



No



No



No



No



Custom size 0-1, and 0-2



-



Yes



No



No



No



No



No



No



No



Custom size 1-1, 1-2, 1-3, 2-1, 2-2, 2-3, 3-1, 3-2, and 3-3



-



Yes



No



No



Yes



Yes



No



Yes



No



Yes



No



No



No



No



No



No



No



Custom size 487.8 to 100 to 4 (long 630 297 length) Heavy 6 (221 to 256 g/ A3 m2) B4



420



297



Yes



No



No



No



No



No



Yes



Yes



364



257



Yes



No



No



No



No



No



Yes



Yes



A4R



297



210



Yes



No



No



No



No



No



Yes



Yes



A4



210



297



Yes



No



No



No



No



Yes



Yes



Yes



B5R



257



182



Yes



No



No



No



No



No



Yes



Yes



B5



182



257



Yes



No



No



No



No



Yes



Yes



Yes



A5



148



210



Yes



No



No



No



No



No



No



No



A5R



210



148



Yes



No



No



No



No



No



Yes



No



A6R



148



105



Yes



No



No



No



No



No



No



No



11x17



431.8



279.4



Yes



No



No



No



No



No



Yes



Yes



LGL



355.6



215.9



Yes



No



No



No



No



No



Yes



Yes



LTR



215.9



279.4



Yes



No



No



No



No



Yes



Yes



Yes



LTRR



279.4



215.9



Yes



No



No



No



No



No



Yes



Yes



STMTR



215.9



139.7



Yes



No



No



No



No



No



Yes



No



EXEC



184.1



266.7



Yes



No



No



No



No



No



Yes



Yes



OFFICIO



317.5



215.9



Yes



No



No



No



No



No



Yes



No



22



1. Product Overview Type



Size



Feed- Width ing di- direcrection tion (mm) (mm)



Pickup position Multipurpose Tray



Right Deck



Left Deck



CasCas- 3.5KPD sette 3 sette 4



POD Deck Lite



Inserter (except for CMJ)



Heavy 6 (221 to 256 g/ E-OFFICIO m2) B-OFFICIO



320



220



Yes



No



No



No



No



No



Yes



No



355



216



Yes



No



No



No



No



No



Yes



No



M-OFFICIO



341



216



Yes



No



No



No



No



No



Yes



No



A-OFFICIO



340



220



Yes



No



No



No



No



No



Yes



No



A-LTR



220



280



Yes



No



No



No



No



No



Yes



No



A-LTRR



280



220



Yes



No



No



No



No



No



Yes



No



GLTR-R



266.7



203.2



Yes



No



No



No



No



No



Yes



No



GLTR



203.2



266.7



Yes



No



No



No



No



No



Yes



No



GLGL



330.2



203.2



Yes



No



No



No



No



No



Yes



No



AFLS



337



206



Yes



No



No



No



No



No



Yes



No



FLS



330.2



215.9



Yes



No



No



No



No



No



Yes



No



8K



390



270



Yes



No



No



No



No



No



Yes



No



16K



195



270



Yes



No



No



No



No



No



Yes



No



16KR



270



195



No



No



No



No



No



No



Yes



No



F4A



342.9



215.9



Yes



No



No



No



No



No



Yes



No



I-LGL



345



215



Yes



No



No



No



No



No



Yes



No



Free



182 to 487.7



100 to 297



Yes



No



No



No



No



No



No



No



Free (Long length)



487.8 to 100 to 630 297



Yes *1



No



No



No



No



No



No



No



1-Sided Coated 1 (106 to 180 g/m2) 1-Sided Coated 2 (181 to 220 g/m2) 2-Sided Coated 1 (106 to 180 g/m2) 2-Sided Coated 2 (181 to 220 g/m2)



Custom size 0-1, and 0-2



-



Yes



No



No



No



No



No



No



No



Custom size 1-1, 1-2, 1-3, 2-1, 2-2, 2-3, 3-1, 3-2, and 3-3



-



Yes



No



No



No



No



No



Yes



No



Custom size 487.8 to 100 to 4 (long 630 297 length)



Yes



No



No



No



No



No



No



No



A3



420



297



No



No



No



No



No



No



No



Yes



B4



364



257



No



No



No



No



No



No



No



Yes



A4R



297



210



No



No



No



No



No



No



No



Yes



A4



210



297



No



No



No



No



No



No



No



Yes



B5R



257



182



No



No



No



No



No



No



No



Yes



B5



182



257



No



No



No



No



No



No



No



Yes



11x17



431.8



279.4



No



No



No



No



No



No



No



Yes



LGL



355.6



215.9



No



No



No



No



No



No



No



Yes



LTR



215.9



279.4



No



No



No



No



No



No



No



Yes



LTRR



279.4



215.9



No



No



No



No



No



No



No



Yes



184.1



266.7



No



No



No



No



No



No



No



Yes



1-Sided Coated 3 (221 A3 to 256 g/m2) B4 2-Sided Coated 3 (221 A4R to 256 g/m2) A4



EXEC



420



297



No



No



No



No



No



No



No



Yes



364



257



No



No



No



No



No



No



No



Yes



297



210



No



No



No



No



No



No



No



Yes



210



297



No



No



No



No



No



No



No



Yes



B5R



257



182



No



No



No



No



No



No



No



Yes



B5



182



257



No



No



No



No



No



No



No



Yes



11x17



431.8



279.4



No



No



No



No



No



No



No



Yes



LGL



355.6



215.9



No



No



No



No



No



No



No



Yes



LTR



215.9



279.4



No



No



No



No



No



No



No



Yes



LTRR



279.4



215.9



No



No



No



No



No



No



No



Yes



23



1. Product Overview Type



Size



Feed- Width ing di- direcrection tion (mm) (mm)



Pickup position Multipurpose Tray



Right Deck



Left Deck



CasCas- 3.5KPD sette 3 sette 4



POD Deck Lite



Inserter (except for CMJ)



1-Sided Coated 3 (221 EXEC to 256 g/m2) 2-Sided Coated 3 (221 to 256 g/m2)



184.1



266.7



No



No



No



No



No



No



No



Yes



Tracing (64 to 80 g/m2) A3



420



297



Yes



No



No



No



No



No



No



No



B4



364



257



Yes



No



No



No



No



No



No



No



A4R



297



210



Yes



No



No



No



No



No



No



No



A4



210



297



Yes



No



No



No



No



No



No



No



B5R



257



182



Yes



No



No



No



No



No



No



No



B5



182



257



Yes



No



No



No



No



No



No



No



A5



148



210



Yes



No



No



No



No



No



No



No



A5R



210



148



Yes



No



No



No



No



No



No



No



A6R



148



105



Yes



No



No



No



No



No



No



No



11x17



431.8



279.4



Yes



No



No



No



No



No



No



No



LGL



355.6



215.9



Yes



No



No



No



No



No



No



No



LTR



215.9



279.4



Yes



No



No



No



No



No



No



No



LTRR



279.4



215.9



Yes



No



No



No



No



No



No



No



STMTR



215.9



139.7



Yes



No



No



No



No



No



No



No



EXEC



184.1



266.7



Yes



No



No



No



No



No



No



No



OFFICIO



317.5



215.9



Yes



No



No



No



No



No



No



No



E-OFFICIO



320



220



Yes



No



No



No



No



No



No



No



B-OFFICIO



355



216



Yes



No



No



No



No



No



No



No



M-OFFICIO



341



216



Yes



No



No



No



No



No



No



No



A-OFFICIO



340



220



Yes



No



No



No



No



No



No



No



A-LTR



220



280



Yes



No



No



No



No



No



No



No



A-LTRR



280



220



Yes



No



No



No



No



No



No



No



GLTR-R



266.7



203.2



Yes



No



No



No



No



No



No



No



GLTR



203.2



266.7



Yes



No



No



No



No



No



No



No



GLGL



330.2



203.2



Yes



No



No



No



No



No



No



No



AFLS



337



206



Yes



No



No



No



No



No



No



No



FLS



330.2



215.9



Yes



No



No



No



No



No



No



No



8K



390



270



Yes



No



No



No



No



No



No



No



16K



195



270



Yes



No



No



No



No



No



No



No



F4A



342.9



215.9



Yes



No



No



No



No



No



No



No



I-LGL



345



215



Yes



No



No



No



No



No



No



No



Free



182 to 487.7



100 to 297



Yes



No



No



No



No



No



No



No



Free (Long length)



487.8 to 100 to 630 297



Yes *1



No



No



No



No



No



No



No



Yes



No



No



No



No



No



No



No



Yes



No



No



No



No



No



No



No



Custom size 0-1, 0-2, 1-1, 1-2, 1-3, 2-1, 2-2, 2-3, 3-1, 3-2, and 3-3



-



Custom size 487.8 to 100 to 4 (long 630 297 length) Clear film (151 to 181 g/m2)



A3



420



297



No *2



No



No



No



No



No



No *2



No



B4



364



257



No *2



No



No



No



No



No



No *2



No



A4R



297



210



No *2



No



No



No



No



No



No *2



No



A4



210



297



No *2



No



No



No



No



No



No *2



No



11x17



431.8



279.4



No *2



No



No



No



No



No



No *2



No



24



1. Product Overview Type



Clear film (151 to 181 g/m2)



Transparency (151 to 180 g/m2)



Label paper 1 (118 to 185 g/m2)



Size



Feed- Width ing di- direcrection tion (mm) (mm)



Pickup position Multipurpose Tray



Right Deck



Left Deck



CasCas- 3.5KPD sette 3 sette 4



POD Deck Lite



Inserter (except for CMJ)



LGL



355.6



215.9



No *2



No



No



No



No



No



No *2



No



LTR



215.9



279.4



No *2



No



No



No



No



No



No *2



No



LTRR



279.4



215.9



No *2



No



No



No



No



No



No *2



No



OFFICIO



317.5



215.9



No *2



No



No



No



No



No



No *2



No



E-OFFICIO



320



220



No *2



No



No



No



No



No



No *2



No



B-OFFICIO



355



216



No *2



No



No



No



No



No



No *2



No



M-OFFICIO



341



216



No *2



No



No



No



No



No



No *2



No



A-OFFICIO



340



220



No *2



No



No



No



No



No



No *2



No



A-LTR



220



280



No *2



No



No



No



No



No



No *2



No



A-LTRR



280



220



No *2



No



No



No



No



No



No *2



No



FLS



330.2



215.9



No *2



No



No



No



No



No



No *2



No



8K



390



270



No *2



No



No



No



No



No



No *2



No



F4A



342.9



215.9



No *2



No



No



No



No



No



No *2



No



I-LGL



345



215



No *2



No



No



No



No



No



No *2



No



Custom paper size 3-2



210 to 431.8



210 to 297



No *2



No



No



No



No



No



No *2



No



A4R



297



210



Yes



No



No



No



No



No



Yes



No



A4



210



297



Yes



No



No



No



No



No



Yes



No



LTR



215.9



279.4



Yes



No



No



No



No



No



Yes



No



LTRR



279.4



215.9



Yes



No



No



No



No



No



Yes



No



A3



420



297



Yes



No



No



No



No



No



Yes



No



B4



364



257



Yes



No



No



No



No



No



Yes



No



A4R



297



210



Yes



No



No



No



No



No



Yes



No



A4



210



297



Yes



No



No



No



No



No



Yes



No



B5R



257



182



Yes



No



No



No



No



No



Yes



No



B5



182



257



Yes



No



No



No



No



No



Yes



No



A5R



210



148



Yes



No



No



No



No



No



Yes



No



11x17



431.8



279.4



Yes



No



No



No



No



No



Yes



No



LGL



355.6



215.9



Yes



No



No



No



No



No



Yes



No



LTR



215.9



279.4



Yes



No



No



No



No



No



Yes



No



LTRR



279.4



215.9



Yes



No



No



No



No



No



Yes



No



STMTR



215.9



139.7



Yes



No



No



No



No



No



Yes



No



EXEC



184.1



266.7



Yes



No



No



No



No



No



Yes



No



OFFICIO



317.5



215.9



Yes



No



No



No



No



No



Yes



No



E-OFFICIO



320



220



Yes



No



No



No



No



No



Yes



No



B-OFFICIO



355



216



Yes



No



No



No



No



No



Yes



No



M-OFFICIO



341



216



Yes



No



No



No



No



No



Yes



No



A-OFFICIO



340



220



Yes



No



No



No



No



No



Yes



No



A-LTR



220



280



Yes



No



No



No



No



No



Yes



No



A-LTRR



280



220



Yes



No



No



No



No



No



Yes



No



GLTR-R



266.7



203.2



Yes



No



No



No



No



No



Yes



No



GLTR



203.2



266.7



Yes



No



No



No



No



No



Yes



No



GLGL



330.2



203.2



Yes



No



No



No



No



No



Yes



No



AFLS



337



206



Yes



No



No



No



No



No



Yes



No



FLS



330.2



215.9



Yes



No



No



No



No



No



Yes



No



8K



390



270



Yes



No



No



No



No



No



Yes



No



16K



195



270



Yes



No



No



No



No



No



Yes



No



16KR



270



195



No



No



No



No



No



No



Yes



No



F4A



342.9



215.9



Yes



No



No



No



No



No



Yes



No



I-LGL



345



215



No



No



No



No



No



No



Yes



No



25



1. Product Overview Type



Label paper 1 (118 to 185 g/m2)



Size



Feed- Width ing di- direcrection tion (mm) (mm)



Multipurpose Tray



Right Deck



Left Deck



Yes



No



No



No



No



Yes *1



No



No



No



-



Yes



No



No



Free



182 to 487.7



Free (Long length)



487.8 to 100 to 630 297



Custom size 1-1, 1-2, 1-3, 2-1, 2-2, 2-3, 3-1, 3-2, and 3-3



Pickup position



100 to 297



CasCas- 3.5KPD sette 3 sette 4



POD Deck Lite



Inserter (except for CMJ)



No



No



No



No



No



No



No



No



No



No



Yes



No



Bond 1 (90 to 90 g/m2) A3



420



297



Yes



No



No



Yes



Yes



No



Yes



Yes



B4



364



257



Yes



No



No



Yes



Yes



No



Yes



Yes



A4R



297



210



Yes



No



No



Yes



Yes



No



Yes



Yes



A4



210



297



Yes



Yes



Yes



Yes



Yes



Yes



Yes



Yes



B5R



257



182



Yes



No



No



Yes



Yes



No



Yes



Yes



B5



182



257



Yes



Yes



Yes



Yes



Yes



Yes



Yes



Yes



A5



148



210



Yes



No



No



No



No



No



No



No



A5R



210



148



Yes



No



No



Yes



Yes



No



Yes



No



A6R



148



105



Yes



No



No



No



No



No



No



No



11x17



431.8



279.4



Yes



No



No



Yes



Yes



No



Yes



Yes



LGL



355.6



215.9



Yes



No



No



Yes



Yes



No



Yes



Yes



LTR



215.9



279.4



Yes



Yes



Yes



Yes



Yes



Yes



Yes



Yes



LTRR



279.4



215.9



Yes



No



No



Yes



Yes



No



Yes



Yes



STMTR



215.9



139.7



Yes



No



No



Yes



Yes



No



Yes



No



EXEC



184.1



266.7



Yes



No



No



Yes



Yes



No



Yes



Yes



OFFICIO



317.5



215.9



Yes



No



No



Yes



Yes



No



Yes



No



E-OFFICIO



320



220



Yes



No



No



Yes



Yes



No



Yes



No



B-OFFICIO



355



216



Yes



No



No



Yes



Yes



No



Yes



No



M-OFFICIO



341



216



Yes



No



No



Yes



Yes



No



Yes



No



A-OFFICIO



340



220



Yes



No



No



Yes



Yes



No



Yes



No



A-LTR



220



280



Yes



No



No



Yes



Yes



No



Yes



No



A-LTRR



280



220



Yes



No



No



Yes



Yes



No



Yes



No



GLTR-R



266.7



203.2



Yes



No



No



Yes



Yes



No



Yes



No



GLTR



203.2



266.7



Yes



No



No



Yes



Yes



No



Yes



No



GLGL



330.2



203.2



Yes



No



No



Yes



Yes



No



Yes



No



AFLS



337



206



Yes



No



No



Yes



Yes



No



Yes



No



FLS



330.2



215.9



Yes



No



No



Yes



Yes



No



Yes



No



8K



390



270



Yes



No



No



Yes



Yes



No



Yes



No



16K



195



270



Yes



No



No



Yes



Yes



No



Yes



No



16KR



270



195



No



No



No



Yes



Yes



No



Yes



No



F4A



342.9



215.9



Yes



No



No



Yes



Yes



No



Yes



No



I-LGL



345



215



Yes



No



No



Yes



Yes



No



Yes



No



Free



182 to 487.7



100 to 297



Yes



No



No



No



No



No



No



No



Free (Long length)



487.8 to 100 to 630 297



Yes *1



No



No



No



No



No



No



No



Custom size 0-1, and 0-2



-



Yes



No



No



No



No



No



No



No



Custom size 1-1, 1-2, 1-3, 2-1, 2-2, 2-3, 3-1, 3-2, and 3-3



-



Yes



No



No



Yes



Yes



No



Yes



No



26



1. Product Overview Type



Size



Feed- Width ing di- direcrection tion (mm) (mm)



Pickup position Multipurpose Tray



Right Deck



Left Deck



Bond 1 (90 to 90 g/m2) Custom size 487.8 to 100 to 4 (long 630 297 length)



Yes



No



No



No



No



Postcard, 4 on 1 post- Postcard card (190 to 190 g/m2) Reply postcard



148



100



Yes



No



No



No



200



148



Yes



No



No



4 on 1 postcard



200



296



Yes



No



Tab 1 (91 to 220 g/m2) A4 Pre-Punched paper 1 (64 to 90 g/m2)



CasCas- 3.5KPD sette 3 sette 4



POD Deck Lite



Inserter (except for CMJ)



No



No



No



No



No



No



No



No



No



No



Yes



No



No



No



No



No



Yes



No



210



297



Yes



No



No



Yes



Yes



No



Yes



Yes



LTR



215.9



279.4



Yes



No



No



Yes



Yes



No



Yes



Yes



A4



210



297



Yes



Yes



Yes



Yes



Yes



Yes



Yes



No



LTR



215.9



279.4



Yes



Yes



Yes



Yes



Yes



Yes



Yes



No



420



297



Yes



No



No



Yes



Yes



No



Yes



Yes



Letterhead (151 to 180 A3 g/m2) B4



364



257



Yes



No



No



Yes



Yes



No



Yes



Yes



A4R



297



210



Yes



No



No



Yes



Yes



No



Yes



Yes



A4



210



297



Yes



Yes



Yes



Yes



Yes



Yes



Yes



Yes



B5R



257



182



Yes



No



No



Yes



Yes



No



Yes



Yes



B5



182



257



Yes



Yes



Yes



Yes



Yes



Yes



Yes



Yes



A5



148



210



Yes



No



No



No



No



No



No



No



A5R



210



148



Yes



No



No



Yes



Yes



No



Yes



No



A6R



148



105



Yes



No



No



No



No



No



No



No



11x17



431.8



279.4



Yes



No



No



Yes



Yes



No



Yes



Yes



LGL



355.6



215.9



Yes



No



No



Yes



Yes



No



Yes



Yes



LTR



215.9



279.4



Yes



Yes



Yes



Yes



Yes



Yes



Yes



Yes



LTRR



279.4



215.9



Yes



No



No



Yes



Yes



No



Yes



Yes



STMTR



215.9



139.7



Yes



No



No



Yes



Yes



No



Yes



No



EXEC



184.1



266.7



Yes



No



No



Yes



Yes



No



Yes



Yes



OFFICIO



317.5



215.9



Yes



No



No



Yes



Yes



No



Yes



No



E-OFFICIO



320



220



Yes



No



No



Yes



Yes



No



Yes



No



B-OFFICIO



355



216



Yes



No



No



Yes



Yes



No



Yes



No



M-OFFICIO



341



216



Yes



No



No



Yes



Yes



No



Yes



No



A-OFFICIO



340



220



Yes



No



No



Yes



Yes



No



Yes



No



A-LTR



220



280



Yes



No



No



Yes



Yes



No



Yes



No



A-LTRR



280



220



Yes



No



No



Yes



Yes



No



Yes



No



GLTR-R



266.7



203.2



Yes



No



No



Yes



Yes



No



Yes



No



GLTR



203.2



266.7



Yes



No



No



Yes



Yes



No



Yes



No



GLGL



330.2



203.2



Yes



No



No



Yes



Yes



No



Yes



No



AFLS



337



206



Yes



No



No



Yes



Yes



No



Yes



No



FLS



330.2



215.9



Yes



No



No



Yes



Yes



No



Yes



No



8K



390



270



Yes



No



No



Yes



Yes



No



Yes



No



16K



195



270



Yes



No



No



Yes



Yes



No



Yes



No



16KR



270



195



No



No



No



Yes



Yes



No



Yes



No



F4A



342.9



215.9



Yes



No



No



Yes



Yes



No



Yes



No



I-LGL



345



215



Yes



No



No



Yes



Yes



No



Yes



No



Free



182 to 487.7



100 to 297



Yes



No



No



No



No



No



No



No



Free (Long length)



487.8 to 100 to 630 297



Yes *1



No



No



No



No



No



No



No



Yes



No



No



No



No



No



No



No



Custom size 0-1, and 0-2



-



27



1. Product Overview Type



Size



Feed- Width ing di- direcrection tion (mm) (mm)



Multipurpose Tray



Right Deck



Left Deck



Yes



No



No



Yes



Yes



Custom size 487.8 to 100 to 4 (long 630 297 length)



Yes



No



No



No



-



No



No



No



No



Letterhead (151 to 180 Custom size g/m2) 1-1, 1-2, 1-3, 2-1, 2-2, 2-3, 3-1, 3-2, and 3-3



Envelope *3



Pickup position



-



-



-



CasCas- 3.5KPD sette 3 sette 4



POD Deck Lite



Inserter (except for CMJ)



No



Yes



No



No



No



No



No



No



No



No



No



*1: It is necessary to set "1" in the following service mode (Lv.2). COPIER > OPTION > USER > MF-LG-ST *2: It is necessary to set "1" in the following service mode (Lv.2). COPIER > OPTION > USER > FLM-DSPL *3: Envelopes are not a supported media.



Custom size paper See the table below for the custom paper size. Size



Feeding direction (mm)



Width direction (mm)



Custom paper size 0-1



148.0 to 431.8



100.0 to 139.6



Custom paper size 0-2



148.0 to 181.9



139.7 to 297.0



Custom paper size 1-1



182.0 to 209.9



139.7 to 181.9



Custom paper size 1-2



210.0 to 431.8



139.7 to 181.9



Custom paper size 2-1



182.0 to 209.9



182.0 to 209.9



Custom paper size 2-2



210.0 to 279.3



182.0 to 209.9



Custom paper size 3-1



182.0 to 209.9



210.0 to 297.0



Custom paper size 3-2



210.0 to 431.8



210.0 to 297.0



Custom size 4 (long length *1)



431.9 to 630.0



100.0 to 297.0



*1: (Level 2) COPIER > FUNCTION > USER > MF-LG-ST (ON/OFF of long original mode display) When 1 is set, [Long Original] button is displayed in Copy > Options screen. The length setting of Multi-purpose Tray becomes up to 630 mm.



28



1. Product Overview



External View External Cover ■ DADF [3]



[4]



[1]



[2]



No.



Name



[1]



Front Cover



[2]



Left Cover



[3]



Rear Cover



[4]



Feeder Cover



■ Reader [8]



[4]



[5] [3] [6] [9]



[11]



[1] [7] [2]



[10]



29



1. Product Overview Reader No.



Name



[1]



Front Cover



[2]



Left Cover



[3]



Right Cover



[4]



Rear Cover



[5]



PCB Cover



[6]



Right Upper Panel



[7]



Left Upper Panel



[8]



DADF Base Right Cover



[9]



DADF Base Left Cover



[10]



Jump Base



[11]



Left Upper Small Cover



■ Printer [2] [1] [16] [4]



[3] [15] [5]



[6]



[14]



[8]



[13]



[9]



[12] [7] [10] [11]



30



1. Product Overview [33]



[17] [32] [31] [30]



[18]



[29] [28] [19] [27]



[26] [20]



[25] [24] [21]



[23] [22]



No.



Name



[1]



Upper Cover



[2]



Upper Left Cover



[3]



Control Panel



[4]



Upper Right Cover



[5]



Toner Exchange Cover



[6]



Front Cover



[7]



Deck Left Cover



[8]



Deck Right Cover



[9]



Cassette Front Cover



[10]



Cassette Front Cover



[11]



Left Front Cover



[12]



Left Lower Cover



[13]



Left Handle Cover



[14]



Delivery Cover



[15]



Finisher Connector Cover



[16]



Left Upper Cover



[17]



Upper Rear Cover



[18]



Left Rear Cover



[19]



Rear Upper Cover



[20]



Rear Lower Cover



[21]



Filter Cover



[22]



Waste Toner Container Cover



[23]



Right Lower Cover



[24]



Right Rear Cover 2



[25]



Vertical Path Cover



[26]



Right Front Cover



[27]



Right Handle Cover



[28]



Inner Cover



[29]



Right Cover



[30]



Multi-Purpose Tray Sub Cover



[31]



Multi-Purpose Tray



31



1. Product Overview No.



Name



[32]



Right Upper Cover



[33]



Right Rear Cover 1



■ Switches, I/F, Others



Main Power Switch



Environment Heater Switch Cassette Heater Switch



Leakage Breaker



Be sure to perform the following procedure for checking the Leakage Breaker. 1. Turn OFF the main power switch and check that the Control Panel LED is off. 2. Using a pen point, press the test button of the breaker on the rear side of the machine. 3. Check that the breaker switch is OFF (O side). 4. Return the breaker switch to ON (I side). 5. Turn ON the main power switch.



Cross Section View ■ DADF Scanner unit



Pickup roller unit



Scanning position Scanning position (front side) (rear side)



Original pickup tray



Path of original



32



Original delivery tray



1. Product Overview



■ Reader Stream reading glass



Copyboard glass



Scanner unit



■ Printer Drum Cleaning Unit



Pre-exposure LED



ETB Unit (Transfer Belt Unit)



Primary Charging Assembly Laser Scanner Unit Multi-purpose Tray Pickup Unit



Fixing Assembly Developing Assembly



Pre-transfer Charging Assembly



Reverse Delivery Unit



Transfer Cleaning Unit Duplex Feed Unit Pickup Paper Path Unit Left Deck Right Deck



Cassette 3



Cassette 4



33



1. Product Overview



Operation Power Switch ■ Types of Power Switches This machine has the Main Power Switch, the Control Panel Power Switch and the Environment Heater Switch. Turning ON the Main Power Switch supplies the power in the usual case (except when the machine is in sleep mode). The Environment Switch supplies or blocks the power to the Drum Heater, the Cassette Heater and the Reader Heater.



■ Points to Note on Turning ON/OFF the Power Switch • Do not turn OFF the Main Power Switch while the progress bar (to be displayed when the power is turned ON) is displayed, which indicates access to the HDD. • Be sure to turn OFF the Main Power Switch to cut the power (there is no need to perform the shutdown sequence which has been performed with the conventional machines). • After turning OFF the power (after turning OFF the Main Power Switch), do not turn ON the Main Power Switch unless the screen disappears. • Do not turn OFF the power during downloading.



Control Panel ■ Control Panel [1] [2] [3]



[4] [5] [6] [7] [8] [9]



[16]



[15]



[14]



[13]



No.



[12] [11] [10]



Name



[1]



[Settings/Registration] key



[2]



Numeric keys



[3]



[Energy Saver] key



[4]



[Counter/Device Information] key



[5]



Brightness Adjustment key



[6]



Settings key



[7]



[Clear] key



[8]



[Stop] key



[9]



[Start] key



[10]



Main Power indicator



[11]



Error indicator



[12]



Processing/Data indicator



[13]



[Reset] key



[14]



ID (Log In/Out) key



[15]



NFC (If equipped with NFC Kit-B1)



34



1. Product Overview No.



Name



[16]



Touch panel display



■ Home Screen Menu



[1]



[2]



[3]



[7]



[4]



[5]



[8]



[9] [13]



[14]



[15]



[16]



[17]



[18]



[6] [10]



[11]



No.



[12]



Name



[1]



Copy



[2]



Scan and Send



[3]



Scan and Store



[4]



Access Stored Files



[5]



Fax/I-Fax Inbox



[6]



Print



[7]



Tutorial



[8]



Dest./Fwd. Settings



[9]



Hold



[10]



Scanner



[11]



Settings/Regist. Shortcut



[12]



Personal Settings



[13]



Status Monitor/Cancel



[14]



Scan for Mobile



[15]



Mobile Portal



[16]



uniFLOW Online Setup



[17]



Copy (2 on 1; 2-Sided)



[18]



Copy (Prevent Bleed-Thru)



■ Settings/Registration Screen Menu



[1] [2] [3] [4] [5]



35



1. Product Overview No.



Name



[1]



Preferences



[2]



Adjustment/Maintenance



[3]



Function Settings



[4]



Set Destination



[5]



Management Settings



36



2



Technology Basic Configuration............................. 38 Original Exposure/Feed System......... 39 Main Controller..................................101 Laser Exposure System.................... 106 Image Formation System.................. 113 Fixing System....................................158 Pickup / Feed System....................... 175 External Auxiliary System................. 209



2. Technology



Basic Configuration Functional Configuration The machine may broadly be divided into the following functional system blocks; document exposure/feed system block, controller system block, laser exposure system block, image formation system block, fixing system block and pickup/feed system block.



Document Exposure/Feed System



Reader controller



Laser Exposure System



Controller System HDD Option board



Exposure lamp



CCD



Laser scanner unit (Bk)



Main controller 1/2 DC controller



Drum unit (Bk) ETB Image Formation system



Fixing System Delivery



Transfer



Fixing



Duplexing feed Pickup Pickup Feed System



Left deck



Right deck



Cassette3 Flow of paper Flow of signal



Cassette4



Laser beam



Basic Sequence 1. Basic sequence at power ON (“Basic sequence at power ON” on page 1559 reference) 2. Basic sequence at printing (“Basic sequence at printing ” on page 1560 reference) 3. Basic sequence at printing (“Basic sequence at printing ” on page 1561 reference)



38



2. Technology



Original Exposure/Feed System Overview ■ Features • High Speed 2-Side Scan-at One Time (DADF) 240 ipm (in Black-and-White at 300 dpi) 220 ipm (in Full Colour at 300 dpi) • High Capacity Pickup Tray (DADF) Maximum document loading is 300 sheets (80 g/m2 or lower). • Double Feed Sensor installed as standard Double feed detection during paper feed has been realized by the ultrasonic sensor on the feeding path.



■ Specifications ● DADF Item



Specification



Remarks



Original pickup method



Auto pickup/delivery method



Simultaneous 2-sided scanning



Type of original



Sheet original



-



Grammage of original



1-sided



A/B



38 to 220



Inch



50 to 220 g/m2



g/m2



2-sided



50 to 220 g/m2



Color original



64 to 220 g/m2



Original size



60 to 90 g/m2: If original exceeds 432 mm, 1-sided, 1-sheet feeding. 64 to 220 g/m2 at B/W and color mixed mode and if original is B/W.



A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5, B5R, A5, A5R, B6, 11×17, LGL, LTR, For B6, horizontal scanning only LTRR, STMT, STMTR, 8K, 16K, 16KR



Feed direction



139.7 to 431.8 mm (STMT to 17 inch) * 431.8 to 630 mm (refer to the remarks)



Since the original with 431.8 to 630 mm in feed direction is larger than the original pickup tray, user needs to hold it so that the machine can scan the original.



Width direction



128 to 304.8 mm (B6R to 12 inch)



-



Setting direction of original



Original tray pickup: face-up stacking



-



Setting position of original



Original tray pickup: center reference



-



Scanning method of original



Stream reading



For simultaneous 2-sided scanning, only the original of 431.8 mm or shorter.



Separation method of original



Retard separating method



-



Feed mode of original



1-sided, 2-sided (simultaneous scanning)



-



Stacking capacity of original tray



All sizes: 300 sheets (in case of paper of 80 g/m2 or lighter)



• Grammage conversion for original exceeding 80 g/m2. • Folding original is subject to height of 10 mm or shorter. • 1 sheet stacking for original exceeding 432 mm.



Mixed Mix of same configura- Yes mode func- tion mode tion Mix of different config- Yes uration mode



• Original should be set at the rear side. • Assured combination for mix with different configuration AB type: A3/B4, B4/A4R, A4/B5, B5R/A5R



Original size detection function



Yes



-



Done stamp function



Yes



-



Original Stream processing scanning speed



Copying



• 1-sided 120 ipm (in Black-and-White at 600 dpi) • 2-sided 150 ipm (in Black-and-White at 600 dpi)



39



-



2. Technology Item



Specification



Original Stream processing scanning speed



Scanning*2



• 1-sided 120 ipm (in Black-and-White at 300 dpi) 120 ipm (in Full Colour at 300 dpi) 60 ipm (in Full Colour at 600 dpi) • 2-sided 240 ipm (in Black-and-White at 300 dpi) 220 ipm (in Full Colour at 300 dpi) 60 ipm (in Full Colour at 600 dpi)



Remarks -



*1: To use the Long Original mode, select the following service mode (LV. 2) and set it to "1" (default: "0") COPIER > OPTION > USER > MF-LG-ST *2: The scanning speed may vary, depending on the scanning mode and original type.



● Reader Item Exposure system Original scan



Specification/function



Remarks



High-brightness white LED + reflection plate



-



In BOOK mode



Scan by movement of scanner unit



-



In DADF mode



Scan by original stream reading with scanner unit fixed -



Scanning resolution



600 dpi x 600 dpi



SEND: 300 x 300 dpi



Gradation



256 gradations



-



Carriage position detection



Scanner unit HP sensor (PS2)



-



Magnification change



25% to 400%



Digital reproduction (Color: in case of 300 dpi or less, scan reproduction (double speed scan) is also included).



In main scanning di- Image processing in main controller PCB rection



-



In sub scanning direction



Image processing in main controller PCB



Some are processed by the reader controller PCB.



Number of line of reading sensor



4 lines (R, G, B, B/W)



-



Original size detection



Horizontal scanning direction: detection by reading sen- sor (scanner unit)



In BOOK mode



Vertical scanning direction: detection by reflection sen- sor (original size sensor 1 (AB type) or original si ze sensor 2 (Inch type) In DADF mode



Horizontal scanning direction: detection by the original width volume/photointerrupter on DADF



-



Vertical scanning direction: detection by the photointer- rupter on DADF Maximum original size Option



In BOOK mode



297 mm x 431.8 mm



-



In DADF mode



304.8 mm x 630 mm



-



Reader heater



-



40



2. Technology



Basic configuration ■ DADF ● Function Configuration Reader controller PCB



- Controls - Power supply assembly



Original feed assembly



Original scanning assembly (front side)



DADF driver PCB



Original pickup assembly



Original scanning assembly (rear side)



41



Original pickup tray assembly



Path of original



Original delivery assembly



2. Technology



● Parts Configuration List of Major Electric Parts Tray lifter motor (M7) Pickup motor (M5)



DADF cooling fan1 (FM1)



Pickup roller unit lifter motor (M1)



DADF driver PCB (UN3) Stamp solenoid (SL1)



Feed motor (M3) Read motor (M4)



Original Display LED PCB (UN2)



DADF cooling fan2 (FM2)



Delivery Display LED PCB (UN1)



Registration motor (M6) Delivery motor (M2)



Glass shifting motor (M8)



Scanner unit



Drive Configuration This equipment DADF is 1 scanner unit for the original (for the back side). Symbol



Name



Role



Remarks



M1



Pickup roller unit lifter motor



Up/down movement of pickup roller unit (using cam)



-



M2



Delivery motor



Drive of delivery roller



Speed control is active



M3



Feed motor



Drive of pullout roller, feed roller 2



Speed control is active



M4



Read motor



Drive of lead roller 1/2/3 and platen roller 1/2



PS constant speed



M5



Pickup motor



Drive of pickup roller, separation roller, feed Speed control is active roller 1



M6



Registration motor



Drive of registration roller



PS constant speed



M7



Tray lifter motor



Up/down movement of pickup lifter



-



M8



Glass shift motor



Shift of glass of scanning assembly for back side



-



The drive of this equipment is shown below.



42



2. Technology M6



M8



M3



M1



M4



M5



M2



M7



List of Rollers [9] [8]



[7] [6]



[5] [4] [3] [2]



[1]



[10] [11] [12] [13] [14] [15] [16] [17] [18] [19] [20] [21] [22] [23]



No.



Name



No.



Name



[1]



Pickup roller



[13]



Platen roller 1



[2]



Feed roller 1



[14]



Platen roller 1 wheel 1



[3]



Separation roller



[15]



Lead roller 2 wheel



[4]



Pullout roller wheel



[16]



Lead roller 2



[5]



Pullout roller



[17]



Platen roller 2 wheel 1



[6]



Feed roller 2



[18]



Platen roller 2



[7]



Feed roller 2 wheel



[19]



Platen roller 2 wheel 2



[8]



Registration roller wheel



[20]



Lead roller 3 wheel



[9]



Registration roller



[21]



Lead roller 3



[10]



Lead roller 1



[22]



Delivery roller wheel



[11]



Lead roller 1 wheel



[23]



Delivery roller



[12]



Platen roller 1 wheel 2



Sensor List Symbol



SR1



Name



AB/ Inch identification sensor



Detection content



Identification of A4R/LTRR and A5R/STMTR



43



Jam detection Delay



Stationary



Residue



Others



-



-



-



-



2. Technology Symbol



Name



Detection content



Jam detection Delay



Stationary



Residue



Others



SR2



LTR-R/ LGL identification sen- Identification of LTR-R/LGL sor



-



-



-



-



SR3



Original sensor



Presence/absence of original on original pickup tray



-



-



-



-



SR4



Z-folding sensor



Z-folding original on original pickup tray



-



-



-



-



SR5



Tray HP sensor



Most lowered position of original pickup tray (upper)



-



-



-



-



SR6



Post-separation sensor 1



Leading edge of original just after the pickup



-



-



-



Yes



SR7



Post-separation sensor 2



Leading edge of original just after the pickup



SR8



Delay sensor



Feed delay



SR9



Tray open/closed sensor



Open/close of original pickup tray



SR10



Paper surface sensor



Top surface position at original pickup



-



-



-



-



SR11



Pickup roller unit lifter HP sen- Position of pickup roller unit sor



-



-



-



Yes



SR12



Original size sensor 2



-



-



-



-



SR13



Original size sensor 4



-



-



-



-



SR14



Original size sensor 1



-



-



-



-



SR15



Original size sensor 3



-



-



-



-



SR16



Delivery tray sensor



Original on delivery tray



-



-



-



-



SR17



Cover open/closed sensor



Open/close of feeder cover



-



-



-



Yes



SR18



Glass shifting HP sensor



Position of scanning glass



-



-



-



-



SR19



Lead sensor 2



Leading edge/trailing edge of original



Yes



Yes



Yes



-



SR20



Post-separation sensor 3



Leading edge of original just after the pickup



Yes



Yes



Yes



Yes



SR21



Delivery sensor



Leading edge/trailing edge of original



Yes



Yes



Yes



-



SR22



Lead sensor 1



Original size in feed direction



Yes



Yes



Yes



-



SR23



Registration sensor



Registration arch creation timing Original size in feed direction



Yes



Yes



Yes



-



SR24



Double feed detection sensor Double feed (Transmission)



-



-



-



Yes



SR25



Double feed detection sensor (Reception)



-



-



-



Yes



VR1



Original width volume



-



-



-



-



Original size in width direction



Original size in width direction



44



-



-



-



Yes



Yes



Yes



Yes



-



-



-



-



-



2. Technology



SR13



SR24



SR12



SR20 SR17



SR25



SR7 SR11



SR10



SR22 SR19 SR14 SR21 SR9 SR23 SR15 SR18 SR8



SR5 SR3



SR6



● DADF Driver PCB Indicate the destination of the DADF driver PCB. Jack No.



Destination



J401



Reader controller PCB (for communication)



J402



Reader controller PCB (for communication)



J403



Pickup roller unit lifter motor (M1) Delivery motor (M2)



J404



Feed motor (M3) Read Motor (M4)



J405



Pickup Motor (M5) Registration motor(M6)



J406



Tray lifter motor ( M7)



J407



DADF cooling fan 1 (FM1)



J408



DADF cooling fan 2 ( FM2)



J409



Post-separation sensor 1 (SR6) Post-separation sensor 2 (SR7) Delay sensor (SR8) Tray open/closed sensor (SR9) Paper surface sensor (SR10) Pickup roller unit lifter home position sensor (SR11) Post-separation sensor 3 (SR20)



J410



AB/ Inch identification sensor (SR1) LTR-R/ LGL idenfication sensor (SR2) Original sensor (SR3) Z-folding sensor (SR4) Tray home position sensor (SR5) Original width volume (VR1) Delivery display LED PCB (UN1)



45



SR1



SR2



SR4 VR1



2. Technology Jack No.



Destination



J411



Original size sensor 2 (SR12) Original size sensor 4 (SR13) Original size sensor 1 (SR14) Original size sensor 3 (SR15) Cover open/closed sensor (SR17) Double feed detection sensor (Transmission)(SR24) Double feed detection sensor (Reception)(SR25) Original display LED PCB (UN2)



J412



Delivery sensor (SR21) Lead sensor 1 (SR22) Registration sensor (SR23)



J413



Delivery tray sensor (SR16) Glass home position sensor (SR18) Lead sensor 2 (SR19) Stamp solenoid (SL1)



J415



Glass movement moter (M8)



J412



J408



J411



J409



IC



J410



J407



J413 J403 J406



J415 J405



J404 J401



J402



NOTE: The scanner unit is connected to the reader controller PCB.



● Electric Circuit Diagram The control of this equipment is performed on the reader controller PCB. Following shows the relation of each electrical parts. Sensor



Motor Scanner unit



DADF driver PCB Solenoid



Fan



Reader controller PCB



Error Code Communication error • E280-0101: Communication error between the Reader Controller PCB and the DADF Scanner Unit • E280-0102: Communication error between the Reader Controller PCB and the DADF Scanner Unit



46



2. Technology • E400-0002: Communication error between the Reader Controller PCB and the DADF Deriver PCB • E400-0003: Communication error between the Reader Controller PCB and the DADF Deriver PCB



● Overview of Operation Mode Overview The operation mode of this equipment is classified as below. Name of operation 2-sided scanning mode method Normal rotation pick- up/delivery



Operation overview



Applicable print mode



Original is picked up and is scanned 1-sided original -> 1-sided print by the scanner unit in reader side. 1-sided original -> 2-sided print And then, it is delivered. 1-sided original with mix of same configuration -> 1-sided print 1-sided original with mix of same configuration -> 2-sided print 1-sided original with mix of different configuration -> 1-sided print 1-sided original with mix of different configuration -> 2-sided print Extra long original -> 1-sided print



2-sided simultaneous scanning



Original is picked up and the front surface is scanned by the scanner unit in reader side while back surface is scanned by the scanner unit in DADF side. And then, it is delivered.



2-sided original -> 1-sided print 2-sided original -> 2-sided print 2-sided original with mix of same configuration -> 1-sided print 2-sided original with mix of same configuration -> 2-sided print 2-sided original with mix of different configuration -> 1-sided print 2-sided original with mix of different configuration -> 2-sided print



1-Sided Original (Small Size) 1. 1st side pickup



47



2. Technology 2. 1st side arch creation



3. 1st side feeding & 2nd side pickup



4. 1st side scanning & 2nd side arch creation



5. 2nd side scanning



48



2. Technology



1-Sided Original (Large Size) 1. 1st side pickup



2. 1st side arch creation



3. 1st side scanning & 2nd side pickup



4. 2nd side arch creation



49



2. Technology 5. 2nd side scanning



1-Sided Original with Mix of Same Configuration (Small Size) 1. 1st side pickup



2. 1st side arch creation



3. 1st side stop & 2nd side pickup



50



2. Technology 4. 1st side scanning & 2nd side arch creation



5. 2nd side stop (1st side is also stopped)



6. 2nd side scanning



2-Sided Original (Simultaneous Scanning of Both Sides) (Small Size) 1. 1st side pickup



51



2. Technology 2. 1st side arch creation



3. 1st side feeding & 2nd side pickup



4. 1st side scanning & 2nd side arch creation



5. 2nd side feeding



52



2. Technology 6. 2nd side scanning



● Scanner Unit For exposure and scanning of original, this equipment uses an integrated scanner unit consists of the LED, the mirror, the lens and the reading sensor. The light emitted from the LED is reflected to the original, and then received by the reading sensor through the 5 turndown mirrors. LED lamp unit The LED lamp unit emits light from 2 boards of LED lamp PCB (LED chip: 54 pieces per board). The emitted light is reflected to the original through the reflecting plate. Reading sensor The reading sensor performs scanning of image per image line. The reading sensor has 4 lines (B/W, R, G, B), using 1 line (B/W) when scanning black/white image and 3 lines (R, G, B) when scanning color image.



DADF LED Lamp PCB (Left)



DADF LED Lamp PCB (Right) DADF Scanner Unit PCB



LED (light source)



Mirror No.4 Mirror No.3 Mirror No.2 Mirror No.1 Mirror No.5 Lens CCD [ Red (R) line] [ Greeen (G) line] [ Blue (B) line] [ Black & white (B / W) line ]



53



2. Technology



Error Code E302-0101: Error in paper back white shading E302-0102: Error in paper back black shading



■ Reader ● Function configuration Following is the list of functions.



Reader unit



Scanner unit Image scanning A/D conversion



Reader controller PCB Scanner drive



Original size detection



Dust detection



Image processing



Main controller PCB Magnification change



54



2. Technology



● Parts configuration Scanner motor (M1) Reader controller PCB (CN1) Original size sensor 2 (CF1)



DADF open/closed sensor 2 (PS3) DADF open/closed sensor 1 (PS1)



Scanner unit home position sensor (PS2) Scanner unit



Original size sensor 1 (CF2)



Scanner unit cooling fan (FM1)



Component part M1



Symbol



Function/specification



Scanner motor



2 phase pulse motor: pulse control



FM1



Scanner unit cooling fan



Cooling of scanner unit



PS1



DADF open/closed sensor 1



DADF open detection (DADF is detected at 5 degree)



PS2



Scanner unit HP sensor



Scanner unit HP detection



PS3



DADF open/closed sensor 2



DADF open detection (size detection timing is detected when DADF is open at 25 degree.



CF1



Original size sensor 2



Size detection in sub scanning direction (INCH type)



CF2



Original size sensor 1



Size detection in sub scanning direction (AB type)



Scanner unit



Image reading, analog image processing



Reader controller PCB



Control of entire reader, digital image processing



UN1



● Overview of power circuit Control of the host machine is conducted at the reader controller PCB. Reader controller PCB also controls the DADF driver PCB and DADF scanner unit. Following is the relations of each electrical part. Motor Fan Host machine



Reader controller PCB



Sensor Scanner unit



DADF driver PCB



E280-0001: Communication error between the Reader Controller PCB and the Reader Scanner Unit E280-0002: Communication error between the Reader Controller PCB and the Reader Scanner Unit E400-0002: Communication error between the Reader Controller PCB and the DADF Driver PCB E400-0003: Communication error between the Reader Controller PCB and the DADF Driver PCB E743-0000: Communication error between the Main Controller PCB 1 and the Reader Controller PCB



55



2. Technology



● Reader controller PCB Following is the function configuration of reader controller PCB. Jack No.



Destination



J101



Host machine (for power supply)



J102



DADF open/closed sensor 1 (PS1) Scanner unit HP sensor (PS2) DADF open/closed sensor 2 (PS3)



J103



Scanner unit cooling fan (FM1)



J104



DADF driver PCB (for communication)



J105



Scanner unit (DADF)



J106



Scanner unit (Reader)



J107



Original size sensor 2 (CF1) Original size sensor 1 (CF2)



J108



Scanner motor (M1)



J109



Main controller PCB (for communication)



J110



(Connection with PC)



J111



DADF driver PCB (for power supply)



J112 J106



J103



J107



IC J102 IC



J108 J105 J110



J109



J111 J104 J101



● Scanner unit Original exposure and scanning are performed by the integrated scanner unit of LED, mirror, lens and reading sensor. Light emitted from LED is reflected by the original and reaches the reading sensor through the 5 folding mirrors.



a. LED lamp unit On LED lamp unit, the light is generated from the 2 LED lamp PCBs (LED chip: 54 pieces per PCB). Generated light is exposed to the original through the reflection plate.



b. Reading sensor Reading sensor scans the image per 1image line. Reading sensor has 4 lines (R, G, B, BW). At B&W scanning, it uses 1 line (B/W) and uses 3 lines (R, G, B) at color scanning.



E302-0001: Error in paper front white shading E302-0002: Error in paper front black shading



56



2. Technology



DADF LED Lamp PCB (Left)



DADF LED Lamp PCB (Right) DADF Scanner Unit PCB



LED (light source)



Mirror No.4 Mirror No.3 Mirror No.2 Mirror No.1 Mirror No.5 Lens CCD [ Red (R) line] [ Greeen (G) line] [ Blue (B) line] [ Black & white (B / W) line ]



● Basic sequence Home position detection operation at power ON 6WUHDP +3VHQVRU 6FDQVWDUW SRVLWLRQ UHDGLQJSRVLWLRQ SRVLWLRQ



6KDGLQJ SRVLWLRQ



,IWKH+36HQVRU LV2))ZKHQWKH 0DLQ3RZHU6ZLWFK LV21



,IWKH+36HQVRU LV2))ZKHQWKH 0DLQ3RZHU6ZLWFK LV21



57



,PDJH OHDGLQJHGJH



2ULJLQDOVL]H GHWHFWLRQSRVLWLRQ



2. Technology



Original size detection operation 6KDGLQJ SRVLWLRQ



+36HQVRU 6WUHDP 6FDQVWDUW SRVLWLRQ UHDGLQJSRVLWLRQ SRVLWLRQ



,PDJH OHDGLQJHGJH



2ULJLQDOVL]H GHWHFWLRQSRVLWLRQ



&RS\ERDUGLVRSHQ &RS\ERDUGLV FORVHG Ѝ/DPS21 2ULJLQDOVL]H LGQWLILFDWLRQ Ѝ/DPS2))



/DPS21 /DPS2))



VHFWLPHRXW +3VHDUFK RSHUDWLRQ



At start key ON (Book mode) 6WUHDP +3VHQVRU 6FDQVWDUW SRVLWLRQ UHDGLQJSRVLWLRQ SRVLWLRQ



6KDGLQJ SRVLWLRQ



,PDJH OHDGLQJHGJH



2ULJLQDOVL]H GHWHFWLRQSRVLWLRQ



5HDGLQJ FRPSOHWHG ࣭6WRS SRVLWLRQ /DPS2))



,IWKHRULJLQDO VL]HGHWHFWLRQ /DPS21 VWDUWHGEHIRUH WKHVHFRQG WLPHRXW +3VHDUFK RSHUDWLRQ ,IWKHRULJLQDO VL]HGHWHFWLRQ VWDUWHGDIWHU WKHVHFRQG WLPHRXW



5HDGLQJ FRPSOHWHG ࣭6WRS SRVLWLRQ /DPS2))



/DPS21



+3VHDUFK RSHUDWLRQ



At start key ON (DADF mode) 6WUHDP +3VHQVRU 6FDQVWDUW SRVLWLRQ UHDGLQJSRVLWLRQ SRVLWLRQ



6KDGLQJ VWDUW SRVLWLRQ



6KDGLQJ SRVLWLRQ



/DPS21



&KDQJHLQUHDGSRVLWLRQRIWKHRULJLQDOLQRUGHUWR DYRLGGXVWGXULQJVWUHDPUHDGLQJ㸦㸳SRLQWV㸧 6FDQ2SHUDWLRQ 6WUHDPUHDGLQJGXVWGHWHFWLRQ㸦㸳SRLQWV㸧



+3VHDUFK RSHUDWLRQ



58



,PDJH OHDGLQJ HGJH



2ULJLQDOVL]H GHWHFWLRQSRVLWLRQ



2. Technology



Controls ■ DADF ● Original Scanning Assembly 2-Sided Scanning Control Scanning of 2-sided original is performed by simultaneous 2-sided scanning method. (reversing 2-sided scanning is not performed). This is to feed the original in the machine only once by scanning the front side with the scanner unit in the reader unit while scanning the back side with the scanner unit in the DADF at the same time. Scanner unit (DADF)



Scanner unit (Reader)



Scanning position for the rear side



Scanning position for the front side



• A fine adjustment of the front side image magnification ratio in horizontal scanning direction at DADF 2-sided reading FEEDER > ADJUST > ADJMSCN1 • A fine adjustment of the back side image magnification ratio in horizontal scanning direction at DADF 2-sided reading FEEDER > ADJUST > ADJMSCN2 • A fine adjustment of the front side image magnification ratio in vertical scanning direction at DADF reading FEEDER > ADJUST > LA-SPEED • A fine adjustment of the back side image magnification ratio in vertical scanning direction at DADF reading FEEDER > ADJUST > LA-SPD2



• Settings/Registration > Function Settings > Common > Scan Settings > Speed/Image Quality Priority for B&W Scan Set whether priority is given to scanning speed or to image quality when performing black and white scanning from the feeder. • Settings/Registration > Function Settings > Common > Scan Settings > Scanner Noise Settings Set whether priority is given to scanning speed or to noise reduction when the document is scanned from the feeder



Glass Shift Control This equipment has a scanning glass on the undersurface of the scanner unit. A standard white plate is attached to this scanning glass for shading correction and dust detection correction. The home position of the scanning glass is detected by the glass home position sensor (SR18). The reader controller drives the glass shift motor (M8) on a timely basis to shift the scanning glass. This enables the reader controller executing above-mentioned correction by comparing reflection data between the position of standard white plate and the position for image scanning. State



State



Wait



Yes



Standby



No



59



2. Technology State



State



When recovered from sleep state



Yes



When scanning 2 sides



Yes



At post rotation



Yes (After 2 sides scanning only)



DADF driver PCB



[1]



[2]



M8



SR18



[5]



[4]



[3]



No.



Name



[1]



Glass shift home position detection signal



[2]



Glass shift motor drive signal



[3]



Scanning glass



[4]



Standard white plate



[5]



Scanner unit



SR18 M8



Glass home position sensor Glass shift motor



Error code E202-0101: DADF Scanner Unit HP error E202-0102: DADF Scanner Unit HP error



● Dust Detection Control Overview The timing of dust detection is as follows. Start key ON Before stream reading



[1]



[2]



1st sheet scanned



Between sheets



2nd sheet scanned



After scan



[3]



[2]



[3]



[2]



No.



Standby



Description



[1]



White plate dust detection control



[2]



Steam reading glass / Scanning glass dust detection control, Dust detection correction control (continuous lines)



[3]



Dust detection correction control (noncontinuous lines)



60



2. Technology - White plate dust detection - Scanning glass dust detection - Dust detection correction (continuous lines) - Dust detection correction (noncontinuous lines)



Scanner unit (DADF)



- White plate dust detection - Stream reading glass dust detection - Dust detection correction (continuous lines) - Dust detection correction (noncontinuous lines)



Scanner unit (Reader)



White plate dust detection control In this machine, the fans cool down the inside of the DADF to prevent the overheating at stream reading operation. As a result, dust in the DADF may stick to the white plate and it may cause the lines on the image. To reduce the influence from the dust, the white plate dust detection and correction are performed. 1. White plate dust detection The machine compares the shading coefficient obtained from shift shading and the shading coefficient obtained from fixed shading to identify the presence/absence of dust and, if any, identifies the coordinates and width of the area. 2. White plate dust correction If the machine detects the dust as a result of white plate dust detection, it interpolates the shading coefficient of the area using the shading coefficient of both sides so as to decrease the effects of the presence of dust. It executes the shading correction using the shading coefficient obtained after the interpolation. When the dust is detected as a result of white plate dust detection, the machine interpolates the shading coefficient of the dust area using the shading coefficient of both sides so as to reduce the effects of the dust. The shading correction is executed after the interpolation. White plate



[Detection Algorithm]



Area of dust



Computation of shading coefficient (shift shading to reference area)



Computation of shading coefficient (from fixed shading to shading correction position)



Comparison



Detection of coordinates of start of dust and width



[Correction Algorithm]



Fixing shading position Shading correction position Correction of dust area coefficient using data of both sides



Reference area (Shading coefficient computation area)



61



2. Technology



Scanning glass dust detection control In the case of 2-side scanning with this equipment, dust and smudges on the scanning glass (attached when scanning the back side) can cause lines on the image. To prevent this symptom, there is a dust detection correcting function with this equipment. This function makes the reader controller to shift the scanning glass to the scanning position at detection timing for detecting the degree of smudges on scanning surface. In the case of smudges detected at the scanning position, the scanner unit is shifted to smudge-free position to prevent image fault. There are 3 scanning positions to be detected in the order as shown below. If there is smudge at the first position, the scanning position is shifted to the next scanning position to execute scanning of the backside. If smudge is detected at all 3 scanning positions, a user message is displayed to encourage cleaning of the scanning glass (DF operation is available when this message is shown). DADF driver PCB [1]



[2] M8



[5]



SR18



[3]



[4] Scanning position



[B]



[A] 0.5 mm



[C] 0.5 mm



14.5 mm



[4] [6]



[7]



No.



Name



[1]



Glass home position detection signal



[2]



Glass shift motor drive signal



[3]



Scanning glass



[4]



Standard white plate



[5]



Scanner unit



[6]



Home position



[7]



Scanning position ([A], [B], [C])



SR18 M8



Glass home position sensor Glass shift motor



62



[3]



2. Technology



• To adjust dust detection level with dust detection correction control that is executed at paper interval by the Scanner Unit (for back side) in DADF mode. COPIER > OPTION > IMG-RDR > DF2DSTL1 • To adjust dust detection level with dust detection correction control that is executed by the Scanner Unit (for back side) after the job is completed in DADF mode. COPIER > OPTION > IMG-RDR > DF2DSTL2



Dust detection correction control (continuous lines) This control detects and corrects lines caused by dust that has been detected between sheets. Correction is performed symmetrically for lines (caused by dust) detected by scanning glass dust detection. In the case of detecting lines caused by specified amount of dust, an alarm is displayed to encourage cleaning. For difference from noncontinuous lines, see the Dust detection correction control (noncontinuous lines). Before scanning Scanning position



Attached dust



Scanning glass



Platen roller 2



Original



After scanning



It is attached on the scanning glass



Scanning result



63



2. Technology



Dust detection correction control (noncontinuous lines) This control detects and corrects lines caused by dust that failed to be detected between sheets. Dust attached to the original is not detected at the lead edge of the original. This dust can be attached to the original again after being remained at the scanning position due to friction with the scanning glass while this dust passes through the scanning position. In this case, this dust will not be detected even at the trail edge because the dust is fed together with the original. The lines (created as described above), occurring noncontinulusly from the lead edge to the trail edge of the original, are detected for image correction. Correction is performed symmetrically for lines stretching in sub (vertical) scanning direction on scanned image. Identifying lines (caused by dust) with length, color and brightness of lines, correction is performed for such lines determined as lines caused by dust. Before scanning Scanning position Scanning glass



Floating dust



Original



Platen roller 2



After scanning



64



2. Technology It sticks on the original during scanning



Scanning result



• Settings/Registration > Function Settings > Common > Scan Settings > Streak Prevention At the original reading, you can specify whether to execute the removing function or not when non-continuous lines are detected.



● Original Feed Control Overview The following shows relationship between each sensor and document mode. Timing



Direction



Start of pick- Feed up



Mode Normal



Mix of Mix of differsame ent configuspecificaration tion



Extra long



Z-folding sensor (SR4)



Yes



-



-



-



LTR-R/LGL identification sensor (SR2)



Yes



-



-



-



AB/ Inch identification sensor (SR1)



Yes



Yes



-



-



Original width volume (VR1)



Yes



Yes



Yes



Yes



Feed



Post-separation sensor 3 (SR20) Lead sensor 1 (SR22)



Yes



Yes



Yes



Yes



Width



Original size sensor 1 to 4 (SR12 to 15)



-



-



Yes



-



Width In feeding



Sensor



65



2. Technology NOTE: Normal/mix of same configuration/mix of different configuration mode: measurement value is converted to standard size. Extra long mode / (non-plain detection): Measurement value is used for original size as it is.



Detection at Start of Pickup Detection in feed direction The size of original is determined whether it is LTR-R or LGL by LTR-R/LGL identification sensor (SR2). Once an original is placed on the original pickup tray, the light-blocking plate operates in keeping with the detection lever of LTRR/LGL identification sensor (SR2) and blocks the light of photo interrupter. With reference to the signal (LGL_S) of the LTR-R/LGL identification sensor (SR2) and the original width, the machine determines whether or not the paper on the original pickup tray is LGL. The machine communicates the original size information with the connected devices as soon as the start key is turned ON.



LGL size original



LGL_S



DADF driver PCB



SR2



Detecting lever



Detection of width direction The size of original in width direction is detected by the original width volume (VR1) and the AB/ Inch identification sensor (SR1) on the original pickup tray. The original width volume (VR1) operates together with the slide guide and its resistance value is changed to analog as the slide guide is moved. The DADF driver PCB reads these changes in resistance as the original size signal (VR1) and converts it into the size in width direction. The AB/ Inch identification sensor (SR1) is installed inside the original pickup tray to perform the width detection between A4 and LTRR, or between A5R and STMTR correctly on the original width volume (VR1). The AB/ Inch identification sensor (SR1) outputs AB/ Inch detection signal (A4LT_S) "1" when the original width is "127 mm or longer and shorter than 148 mm" or "197 mm or longer and shorter than 214 mm".



66



2. Technology DADF driver PCB



AB/Inch determination sensor (SR1)



VR



A4LT_S



Slide guide (Rear)



Gear



Original width volume (VR1)



Slide guide (Front)



The stop position of the slide guide can be changed by changing (turning around) the attaching of the positioning roll [1] of the slide guide as shown below. There is a groove on the rail of the slide guide so that the slide can stop at specific default sizes. Some sizes, however, are extremely close to each other, possibly causing the slide to stop at the wrong position. To make sure that the slide is at the correct position, the stop position is adjusted with the positioning roll [1].



[1]



A4R



Engraved mark of slide guide positioning wheel (surface)



Stop position of slide guide 1 groove



2 grooves



A4R



A4R



A4R /LTRR



INCH



LTRR



A4R /LTRR



67



2. Technology



Detection at Feeding Detection in feed direction Original size in feed direction is calculated by using the detection signal of post-separation sensor 3 (SR20) and the lead sensor 1 (SR22).



SEPA3_AD



READ_AD



DADF driver PCB



SR20



Original SR22



Detection in width direction The size is detected by the original size sensor 1 to 4 (SR12 to 15).



SR13



SR15



SR12



SR14



DADF driver PCB



68



2. Technology



Original Size Identification Normal Mode AB type (Unit: mm) Original width volume (VR1)



AB/Inch identifi- LTR-R/LGL identication sensor fication sensor (SR1) (SR2)



Postseparation sensor 3 (SR20)



Measurement value in feed direction



Detected size



ON *1



-



A3



width > 289



-



OFF



OFF



-



A4



289 =/> width > 272



-



ON *1



ON *1



-



A3/8K *2



-



OFF



OFF



-



A4/16K *2



272 =/> width > 247



-



ON *1



ON *1



-



B4



-



OFF



OFF



-



B5



-



-



-



length =/> 222



A4R



-



-



-



length < 222



A5



200 =/> width > 172



-



-



-



length > 193



B5R



172 =/> width > 138.5



-



-



-



length =/> 253



A4R



-



-



-



length < 253



A5R



-



-



-



-



B6R



247 =/> width > 200



138.5 =/> width



ON *1



*1: OR identification *2: K-paper is detected when K-paper is supported. Inch type (Unit: mm) Original width vol- AB/Inch identifica- LTR-R/LGL identifica- Postseparation sensor Measurement Detected size ume (VR1) tion sensor (SR1) tion sensor (SR2) 3 (SR20) value in feed direction width > 289 289 =/> width > 272 272 =/> width > 247 247 =/> width > 200



200 =/> width > 172



172 =/> width



-



ON *



ON *



-



11x17



-



OFF



OFF



-



LTR



-



ON *



ON *



-



11x17



-



OFF



OFF



-



LTR



-



ON *



ON *



-



11x17



-



OFF



OFF



-



LTR



-



ON *



-



length =/> 282 *



LGL



-



OFF



-



length =/> 209



LTRR



-



OFF



-



length 282 *



LGL



-



OFF



-



length =/> 209



LTRR



-



OFF



-



length < 209



STMT



-



-



-



-



STMTR



*: OR identification AB/ Inch mixed (Unit: mm) Original width vol- AB/Inch identifica- LTR-R/LGL identiume (VR1) tion sensor (SR1) fication sensor (SR2) width > 289



Postseparation sensor 3 (SR20)



Measurement value in feed direction



Detected size



A3



-



ON *



ON *



-



-



OFF



OFF



-



A4



289 =/> width > 272



-



ON *



ON *



-



11x17



-



OFF



OFF



-



LTR



272 =/> width > 247



-



ON *



ON *



-



B4



69



2. Technology Original width vol- AB/Inch identifica- LTR-R/LGL identiume (VR1) tion sensor (SR1) fication sensor (SR2)



Postseparation sensor 3 (SR20)



Measurement value in feed direction



Detected size



272 =/> width > 247



-



OFF



OFF



-



B5



247 =/> width > 200



OFF



-



-



length =/>222



A4R



OFF



-



-



length < 222



A5



ON



ON *



-



length =/>282 *



LGL



ON



OFF



-



length < 282



LTRR STMT



ON



OFF



-



length < 209



200 =/> width > 172



-



-



-



-



B5R



172 =/> width > 138.5



OFF



-



-



length =/>212



STMTR



ON



-



-



length < 212



A5R



-



-



-



length =/>200



STMTR



-



-



-



length < 200



B6R



Postseparation sensor 3 (SR20)



Measurement value in feed direction



Detected size



-



A3



138.5 =/> width



*: OR identification



Mix of same configuration mode AB Type (Unit: mm) Original width vol- AB/Inch identifica- LTR-R/LGL identiume (VR1) tion sensor (SR1) fication sensor (SR2) width > 289 289 =/> width >272 272 =/> width >247 247 =/> width >200



-



-



ON



-



-



OFF



-



A4



-



-



ON



-



A3/8K *



-



-



OFF



-



A4/16K *



-



-



ON



-



B4



-



-



OFF



-



B5



-



-



-



length =/>222



A4R



-



-



-



length < 222



A5



200 =/> width >172



-



-



-



-



B5R



172 =/> width >138.5



-



-



-



length =/>253



A4R



-



-



-



length < 253



A5R



-



-



-



-



B6R



Postseparation sensor 3 (SR20)



Measurement value in feed direction



Detected size



11x17



138.5 =/> width



*: K-paper is detected when K-paper is supported. Inch Type (Unit: mm) Original width vol- AB/Inch identifica- LTR-R/LGL identiume (VR1) tion sensor (SR1) fication sensor (SR2) Width > 289



-



-



ON



-



-



-



OFF



-



LTR



289 =/> width > 272



-



-



ON



-



11x17



-



-



OFF



-



LTR



272 =/> width > 247



-



-



ON



-



11x17



-



-



OFF



-



LTR



-



-



ON



-



LGL



-



-



OFF



length =/>209



LTRR STMT



247 =/> width > 200



200 =/> width > 172



-



-



OFF



length < 209



-



-



ON



-



LGL



-



-



OFF



length =/>209



LTRR



-



-



OFF



length < 209



STMT



70



2. Technology Original width vol- AB/Inch identifica- LTR-R/LGL identiume (VR1) tion sensor (SR1) fication sensor (SR2) 172=/> width



-



Postseparation sensor 3 (SR20)



Measurement value in feed direction



Detected size



-



-



STMR



Postseparation sensor 3 (SR20)



Measurement value in feed direction



Detected size



A3



-



AB/ Inch mixed (Unit: mm) Original width vol- AB/Inch identifica- LTR-R/LGL identiume (VR1) tion sensor (SR1) fication sensor (SR2) Width > 289



-



-



ON



-



-



-



OFF



-



A4



289 =/> width > 272



-



-



ON



-



11x17



-



-



OFF



-



LTR



272 =/> width > 247



-



-



ON



-



B4



-



-



OFF



-



B5



OFF



-



-



length =/>222



A4R



OFF



-



-



length < 222



A5



ON



-



ON



-



LGL



ON



-



OFF



length =/>209



LTRR



ON



-



OFF



length < 209



STMT



247 =/> width > 200



200 =/> width > 172



-



-



-



-



B5R



172 =/> width > 138.5



OFF



-



-



-



STMTR



ON



-



-



-



A5R



-



-



-



length =/>200



STMTR



-



-



-



length < 200



B6R



138.5 =/> width



Mix of different configuration mode AB Type (Unit: mm) Original Original size width volume sensor 1 (VR1) (SR14) width > 272



272 =/> width > 247



247 =/> width > 200



200 =/> width > 172



Original size sensor 2 (SR12)



Original size sensor 3 (SR15)



-



-



-



ON



-



A3



ON



-



-



-



OFF



-



A4



OFF



ON



-



-



ON



-



B4



OFF



ON



-



-



OFF



-



B5



-



OFF



-



ON



ON



length =/> 222



A4R



-



OFF



-



ON



OFF



length< 222



A5



ON



Original size Post-separa- Measurement Detected size sensor 4 tion Sensor 3 value in feed (SR13) (SR20) direction



-



-



-



OFF



-



-



B5R



ON



-



-



-



ON



-



B4



ON



-



-



-



OFF



-



B5



OFF



-



ON



-



-



length =/> 222



A4R



OFF



-



ON



-



-



length< 222



A5



-



-



OFF



ON



-



-



B5R



-



-



-



OFF



-



-



A5R



-



ON



-



-



ON



length =/> 222



A4R



-



ON



-



-



OFF



length< 222



A5



-



OFF



ON



-



-



length =/> 193



B5R



-



OFF



OFF



-



-



length> 200



A5R



-



OFF



OFF



-



-



length =/> 200



B6R



-



-



ON



-



-



length =/> 193



B5R



-



-



OFF



-



-



length> 200



A5R



71



2. Technology Original Original size width volume sensor 1 (VR1) (SR14)



Original size sensor 2 (SR12)



Original size sensor 3 (SR15) OFF



Original size Post-separa- Measurement Detected size sensor 4 tion Sensor 3 value in feed (SR13) (SR20) direction



200 =/> width > 172



-



OFF



172=/> width



-



-



ON



-



-



-



OFF



-



-



-



length =/> 200



B6R



-



-



A4R



-



-



B6R



Inch Type (Unit: mm) Original Original size width volume sensor 1 (VR1) (SR14) width > 272



247 =/> width > 200



172=/> width



Original size sensor 2 (SR12)



Original size sensor 3 (SR15)



Original size Post-separa- Measurement Detected size sensor 4 tion Sensor 3 value in feed (SR13) (SR20) direction



-



ON



-



-



ON



-



11x17



-



ON



-



-



OFF



-



LTR



-



OFF



ON



-



ON



-



LGL



-



OFF



ON



-



OFF



length =/> 209



LTR-R



-



OFF



ON



-



OFF



length< 209



STMT



-



ON



-



-



ON



-



LGL



-



ON



-



-



OFF



length =/> 209



LTR-R



-



ON



-



-



OFF



length< 209



STMT



-



OFF



-



-



OFF



-



STMTR



-



-



-



-



-



-



STMTR



Detection of Z-fold Original For Z-fold original or curled original on the Original Pickup Tray which length is less than A3, the Z-folding Sensor (SR4) performs the detection. Size of an original detected at start of pickup and the size detected during feeding are compared. If the original size detected during feeding is longer, it is judged as Z-fold original. After completion of reading, it is indicated on the Control Panel that the original is Z-fold original.



Original



LGL_S2



DADF driver PCB



SR4



● Original Pickup Tray Assembly Original Detection Control The original sensor (SR3) identifies whether the original is present or not on the original pickup tray. Once an original is placed on the original pickup tray, the detecting lever operates together with the light blocking plate and the light blocking plate passes through the photo interrupter. As a result, the original sensor (SR3) generates the original detection signal (EMP_S). Once the tray open/closed sensor (SR9) and the cover open/closed sensor (SR17) detects that the original pickup tray and the feeder cover are closed respectively, they generate the original pickup tray open detection signal (TRAY_OPEN_S) and the feeder cover open signal (COVER_S).



72



2. Technology Once the DADF driver PCB receives the original pickup tray open signal (TRAY_OPEN_S), feeder cover open signal (COVER_ S) and original detection signal (EMP_S), the original set display activation signal (EMP_LED) is generated to activate the original set display (LED).



SR17



Original



EMP_S



EMP_LED



TRAY_OPEN_S



COVER_S



DADF driver PCB



LED



SR9



SR3



Detecting lever



Original Pickup Tray Lifter Control Overview This equipment moves the original pickup tray up and down when the original is picked up. To enable stacking of 300 sheets of original (80 g/m2) and stream scanning, this equipment controls the pickup position to be kept constant by moving the original pickup tray up and down.



Pickup Roller Unit Pickup roller unit detects up/down movement of the pickup roller unit as well as the top position of the original.



73



2. Technology



PAPER_FACE_S



PICK UP_MOTOR



PICK UP_HP_S



DADF driver PCB



Pickup motor (M5)



Paper surface sensor (SR10)



Pickup roller unit lifter motor (M1)



Pickup roller unit lifter home position sensor (SR11) Cam Pickup roller unit



Original Pickup Tray Drive Unit This detects the drive of the tray up/down arm as well as the lowest position of the original pickup tray (upper).



74



2. Technology



TRAY_HP_S



Tray lifter motor (M7)



LIFT_MOT



DADF driver PCB



Tray home position sensor (SR5)



Tray lifter arm



Pickup Operation a. Pickup start 1. A use presses the start key or navigates the control panel. 2. The pickup roller unit lifter motor (M1) starts driving and the cam that holds the pickup roller unit rotates upward.



75



2. Technology 3. Upward shift of the cam makes the pickup roller unit tilt toward the original pickup tray and the pickup roller is moved down.



DADF driver PCB



Cam



[2]



[1]



[3]



Original



Pickup roller unit M1 SR11



SR5



Tray lifter arm



No.



Description



[1]



Pickup roller unit lifter motor drive signal



[2]



Pickup roller unit lifter home position detection signal



[3]



Tray home position detection signal



4. Tray lifter motor (M7) starts driving and the tray lifter arm pushes the original pickup tray (upper) upward. 5. The pickup roller unit is pushed up until the original contacts the pickup roller unit and the paper surface sensor (SR10) detects it. 6. The tray lifter motor (M7) stops driving once the paper surface sensor (SR10) detects the pickup roller unit. 7. The machine executes pickup (after the start key is pressed). 8. If the paper surface sensor (SR10) cannot detect the pickup roller unit during pickup, the tray lifter motor (M7) starts driving and the original pickup tray is again moved up until the paper surface sensor (SR10) detects the pickup roller unit. (“Original Pickup/Separation Control” on page 77 reference)



DADF driver PCB



[1]



[2]



M7 SR10



No.



Description



[1]



Paper surface detection signal



[2]



Tray lifter motor drive signal



b. Pickup completion



76



2. Technology 1. When the original sensor (SR3) cannot detect an original, the tray lifter motor (M8) drives the tray lifter arm (opposite direction to at the time of pickup) to move down the original pickup tray. 2. Once the tray home position sensor (SR5) detects that the tray lifter arm is shifted down to the lowest position, the pickup roller unit lifter motor (M1) starts driving to rotate the cam downward. 3. Downward shifting of cam makes the pickup roller unit return to the pre-pickup position and pickup operation completes.



DADF driver PCB



[1]



[2]



[3]



M1



[4]



M7 SR11



SR5



No.



Description



[1]



Pickup roller unit lifter motor drive signal



[2]



Pickup roller unit lifter home position detection signal



[3]



Tray home position detection signal



[4]



Tray lifter motor drive signal



• Settings/Registration > Function Settings > Common > Scan Settings > Timing to Raise Feeder Tray Select the timing for raising the feeder tray when scanning originals using functions such as Scan and Store, and Copy.



E401-0001: Pickup Roller Unit Lifting HP Sensor error E401-0002: Pickup Roller Unit Lifting HP Sensor error E407-0001: Tray Lifting Motor error E407-0002: Tray Lifting Motor error



● Original Pickup Assembly Original Pickup/Separation Control Pickup operation is performed by the pickup roller, the separation roller and the feed roller 1. Pickup motor (M5) drives the pickup roller, the separation roller and the feed roller 1. When the top surface of the original stack is lowered while the original is fed, the original pickup tray is moved up to keep the constant height of pickup position. (“Original Pickup Tray Lifter Control” on page 73 reference) Error of pickup operation is detected by the post-separation sensor 3 (SR20). If an original cannot be detected at the specified timing, a jam is notified.



77



2. Technology



SEPA_MOT



SEPA3_AD



DADF driver PCB



Original



M5



SR20



● Original Feed Assembly Overview This equipment is a 1-path 2-sided model and does not perform reversing operation. Refer to the following for the movement of original when it is being fed. (“Overview of Operation Mode” on page 47reference)



Original Feed Control a. Registration arch Registration arch is created at registration roller area. DADF driver PCB



RESI_AD



Original



SR23



b. Temporary stop position At the time of 1-sided mode with mix of same configuration, feeding is once stopped where paper is at downstream from the lead roller 1 while at upstream from the scanning position of the front side. Feeding of preceding original is also stopped when the 2nd sheet or later is fed because the drive of the read motor (M4) is stopped.



78



2. Technology



2nd original



LEAD_AD



DADF driver PCB



1st original



SR22 M4



Double Feed Detection Control This machine has the Double Feed Sensors (Transmission/Reception) (SR24/SR25) to detect double feeding of paper. The Double Feed Sensors (Transmission/Reception) (SR24/SR25) using ultrasonic method that are located between the Pullout Roller and the Feed Roller 2 perform double feed detection. Once it is judged that double feed has occurs, the machine stops operation due to a jam. The sensors check the sensor level at the start of a job while there is no original and calculate the threshold value of double feed detection. During a job, the Post-separation Sensor 3 (SR20) detects the leading/trailing edge of each original, and then the Double Feed Sensors compare the detection result with the threshold at the start of the job to determine the occurrence of double feed.



Duble feed detection sensor (Transmission) (SR24)



Duble feed detection sensor (Reception) (SR25) Post-separation sensor 3 (SR20)



Pullout roller



Feed roller 2



79



2. Technology NOTE: With the ultrasonic method, the oscillation portion emits ultrasonic wave to the paper surface. In the result, new ultrasonic wave is generated as the paper vibrates, and the reception side reads the ultrasonic wave. When double feed occurs, pitch of the vibration of the 2nd paper becomes low. The sensor uses the difference in pitch of the vibration to perform double feed detection.



Reception side



paper vibration Vibration: large



Transmission side



Original



Original (1st sheet) paper vibration



Reception side



Vibration: large Vibration: small



Transmission side



Original (2nd sheet)



• Settings/Registration> Function Settings> Common> Scan Settings> Set Detection of Feeder Multi. Sheet Feed as Default You can set whether to display a message on the screen when multiple sheets are fed . (default: ON)



• Configure the setting when the installation site is above altitude of 2000 m. FEEDER > OPTION > R-ATM • Change the threshold value of the Double Feed Sensor to determine "double feed" or "single feed". (Lv.2) FEEDER > OPTION > R-OVLPLV



● Original Scanning Assembly/Original Delivery Assembly Roller disengagement control The machine does not have the control to disengage the Lead Roller and the Delivery Roller. However, it has the Jam Removal Lever to disengage the Delivery Roller when a jam occurs.



● Jam Detection Overview This equipment uses the sensors shown in the figure to detect jam of originals. The jam detection timing is pre-stored in ROM on the reader controller PCB, and jam is checked whether there is an original at appropriate sensor area at the specified timing. Once a jam occurs, the equipment memorizes its description in code. Jam codes of this equipment can be checked by outputting the jam error history report in Service Mode on the host machine.



80



2. Technology SR17



SR25 SR8



SR24



SR20



SR11



SR6



SR23 LED



SR7



SR22 SR19



SR21



Jam Type Feed type Occurrence Section



Jam code



01



0001 0002



sensor name



sensor number



Post-separation sen- SR20 sor 3



0042 0003



Residue



Yes



-



-



-



Yes



-



-



Yes



-



Yes



-



-



Yes



-



-



0004



-



Yes



-



0044



-



Yes



-



Yes



-



-



Registration sensor



SR8



Stationary



0043



0005



Delay sensor



Jam type Delay



SR23



0045



Yes



-



-



0006



-



Yes



-



0046



-



Yes



-



Yes



-



-



0047



0007



Yes



-



-



0008



-



Yes



-



0048



-



Yes



-



Yes



-



-



0009



Lead sensor 1



Lead sensor 2



SR22



SR19



0049



Yes



-



-



0010



-



Yes



-



0050



-



Yes



-



Yes



-



-



0051



0011



Delivery sensor



SR21



Yes



-



-



0012



-



Yes



-



0052



-



Yes



-



Others Occurrence Section



Jam code



Jam type



Sensor name



01



0020



Double feed jam (during a Job)



Double feed detection sensor (transmission)/ (reception)



SR24, SR25



0021



Communication failure jam (during a job) Double feed detection sensor (transmission)/ (reception)



SR24, SR25



81



Sensor number



2. Technology Occurrence Section



Jam code



Jam type



Sensor name



Sensor number



01



0060



Double feed jam (during a job, first sheet) Double feed detection sensor (transmission)/ (reception)



SR24, SR25



0061



Communication failure jam (during a job, Double feed detection sensor (transmission)/ first sheet) (reception)



SR24, SR25



0062



Communication level failure jam (at the start of a job)



Double feed detection sensor (transmission)/ (reception)



SR24, SR25



0063



Communication failure jam (at the start of Double feed detection sensor (transmission)/ a job) (reception)



SR24, SR25



0071



Software timing error



-



-



0075



Pickup roller unit up/down error



Pickup roller unit up/down error



SR11



0076



Size error jam



Original size sensor 1/2



(reader: CF2, CF1)



0090



DADF open



DADF open/closed sensor 1/2



(reader: PS1, PS3)



Cover open/closed sensor



SR17



0091



DADF user open



0092



Cover open



0093



Cover user open



0095



Pickup error



Post-separation sensor 1/2/3



SR6, SR7, SR20



0096



Limited function jam



-



-



00A1



Power ON jam



Post-separation sensor 3



SR20



00A2



Power ON jam



Delay sensor



SR8



00A3



Power ON jam



Registration sensor



SR23



00A4



Power ON jam



Lead sensor 1



SR22



00A5



Power ON jam



Lead sensor 2



SR19



00A6



Power ON jam



Delivery sensor



SR21



• Settings/Registration > Function Settings > Common > Scan Settings > Feeder Jam Recovery Method Select whether scanning will start again from the first page of the document or the page of the document in which scanning was interrupted if a paper jam occurs in the feeder.



● Fan This equipment is equipped with 2 fans. Symbol



Name



Function



FM1



DADF cooling fan 1



To cool down the motor IC on DADF driver PCB (UN3).



FM2



DADF cooling fan 2



To cool down the read motor (M4).



82



2. Technology DADF cooling fan (FM1) DADF driver PCB (UN3)



Read motor (M4) DADF cooling fan (FM2)



● Power Supply Assembly Power supply schematic diagram is shown below. This equipment receives 5 systems (24.5, 24, 6, 5, 4.5 V) of power supply from the reader unit. 24V is mainly used for the motor, the solenoid, the fan, and the LED lamp unit. 5V is mainly used for the sensor. The converter in the DADF driver PCB generates 3.3V, and supplies to the original width volume. 24V 24V



Reader controller PCB



24V DADF driver PCB



24V 5V



Motor Solenoid Fan Sensor



5V



24V 6V 4.5V



Scanner unit PCB



3.3V



Original width volume



24V



LED lamp unit



E227-0001: Power supply (24V) error in the Reader Controller PCB E227-0101: Power supply (24V) error in the DADF driver PCB



● Limited Functions Mode When an error is detected, the functions related to the detected error are limited to make use of the other functions. When an error code related to DADF is detected, the machine once enters reader limited functions mode. After that, the machine enters DADF llimited functions mode by turning OFF and then ON the Main Power Switch. Yes: operation continues -: operation suspended Fixed reading



stream reading



Reader



-



-



DADF



Yes



-



83



2. Technology NOTE: Even though the function limitation mode is activated, the print function of the host machine can operate.



Corresponding error code Reader function limitation Code



Detail code



E202



0001



Description Reader Scanner Unit HP error



0002 0003 0010 E227



0001



Error in power supply (24V)



0101 E248



0001



EEPROM Error in the Reader Controller PCB



0002 0003 0010 E280



0001 0002 0101



E302



Communication error between the Reader Controller PCB and the Reader Scanner Unit



0102



Communication error between the Reader Controller PCB and the DADF Scanner Unit



0001



Error in paper front shading



0002 E412



0001



Reader fan error



0002 E423



0001



SDRAM error in the Reader Controller PCB



DADF function limitation Code



Detail code



E202



0101



E302



0101



E400



0002



Description DADF Scanner Unit HP error



0102 Error in paper back shading



0102



E401



0003



Communication error between the Reader Controller PCB and the DADF Deriver PCB



0001



Pickup Roller Unit Lifting HP Sensor error



0002 E407



0001



Tray Lifting Motor error



0002 E412



0005



DADF fan error



0006



● Stamp Operation When the host machine is in fax mode or SEND mode and its stamp function is selected, the Stamp Solenoid (SL1) drives and the stamp is put indicating that the original in question has been read or transmitted.



84



2. Technology



Stamp



Stamp solenoid (SL1)



■ Reader ● Scanner drive control Configuration of drive system Following is the parts configuration related with scanner drive system.



HP



ACOM,BCOM



Reader controller PCB



Scanner motor (M1)



Scanner home position sensor (PS2)



Scanner unit



Component parts M1



Symbol



Function



Scanner motor



Control of the drive/stop, direction and speed of motor rotation



85



2. Technology Component parts



Symbol



Function



PS2



Scanner unit HP sensor



Scanner unit HP detection



-



Scanner unit



Image reading, analog image processing



Scanner motor control Following is the control system configuration related with the scanner motor control. Motor driver on the reader controller PCB controls the drive/stop, direction and speed of scanner motor rotation in accordance with the signals from CPU. 1. Backward operation after image scanning Backward operation after image scanning until shading position of scanner unit is controlled by 468 mm/sec regardless of color mode. 2. Forward operation at image scanning At image scanning, the following motor control controls the scanner unit operation. Start position



Image trailing edge



Image leading edge



Acceleration



Normal speed



Stop



Deceleration



Shift speed [1]



[2]



[3]



[4]



Shift length [1] Acceleration Zone: accelerates to suit the selected mode. [2] Approach Zone: moves for speed stabilization. [3] Image Read Zone: reads the image at a specific speed. (if black-and-white/SEND mode, twice as fast as in full-color mode.) [4] Deceleration Zone: past the image trailing edge, immediately decelerates and stops.



Following shows the scanning speed in each mode. Mode



300/600 dpi



B&W



468 mm/s



Color



305 mm/s



E202-0001: Reader Scanner Unit HP error (outward) E202-0002: Reader Scanner Unit HP error (homeward) E202-0003: Reader Scanner Unit HP error (job start)



• Adjustment of the image reading start position at copyboard reading (vertical scanning direction) COPIER > ADJUST > ADJ-XY> ADJ-X



● Original size detection Overview To Original size is identified based on the result combinations of reflection light at the specific point on the reflection sensor and the scanner unit. To prevent the original from moving when closing the DADF, there is 2 point original size detection per each size on the scanner unit. • In main scanning direction: scanner unit (AB type: 9 point measurement (when K size paper is supported: 11 point measurement), Inch type: 6 point measurement) • In sub scanning direction: reflection type photo sensor (AB type: 1 point, Inch type: 1 point)



• Set of Chinese paper (K-size) support (Lv.2) COPIER > OPTION > FNC-SW > KSIZE-SW



86



2. Technology



Original size detection procedure Original size is detected in the following procedure. 1. External light search (in main scanning direction only) While keeping the LED lamp unit OFF, the reading sensor level of each detection point is measured in main scanning direction. 2. Output level detection of each sensor While keeping the LED lamp unit ON, reading sensor level of each detection point is measured in main scanning direction. The machine turns ON the LED of reflection type photo sensor in sub scanning direction and measures the sensor output. Original size is identified by these output combination.



Original size detection position In main scanning direction, the machine moves the scanner unit to the following position in reference to the original position and measures the reading sensor level of each detection position. In sub scanning direction, original size is identified by the following sensors. 239.5 mm



0 mm Original push-on position



40 mm Original size sensor 1 (CF2) 30.0 mm



A5-R



146.0 mm 169.0 mm 178.0 mm 197.0 mm 206.0 mm 244.0 mm 253.0 mm 264.0 mm 267.0 mm 284.0 mm 293.0 mm



B5-R



B6 A5



A4-R



B4



B5 16K



8K A4



Scanner unit original detection position



87



A3



2. Technology 311 mm



0 mm Original push-on position



40 mm Original size sensor 2 (CF1) 30.0 mm



126.7 mm 135.7 mm



STMT-R



LETTER_R



STMT



211.9 mm



266.4 mm 275.4 mm



LEGAL



LETTER



LEDGER



Scanner unit original detection position



Following is the combination of detection result and original size. A/B: Original presence/absence detection result of 2 points (reference) Y : Output level has no change (“Detection operation” on page 90reference) - : Output level has change (“Detection operation” on page 90reference) Original size



Scanner unit detection position 1



2



3



4



5



Original size sensor 1



A



B



A



B



A



B



A



B



A



B



A3



Y



Y



Y



Y



Y



Y



Y



Y



Y



Y



Y



B4



Y



Y



Y



Y



Y



Y



Y



Y



-



-



Y



A4R



Y



Y



Y



Y



Y



Y



-



-



-



-



Y



A4



Y



Y



Y



Y



Y



Y



Y



Y



Y



Y



-



B5



Y



Y



Y



Y



Y



Y



Y



Y



-



-



-



B5R



Y



Y



Y



Y



-



-



-



-



-



-



Y



A5



Y



Y



Y



Y



Y



Y



-



-



-



-



-



B6



Y



Y



Y



Y



-



-



-



-



-



-



-



A5R



Y



Y



-



-



-



-



-



-



-



-



-



None



-



-



-



-



-



-



-



-



-



-



-



Original size



Scanner unit detection position 1



2



Original size sensor 2



3



A



B



A



B



A



B



11" x 17"



Y



Y



Y



Y



Y



Y



Y



LGL



Y



Y



Y



Y



-



-



Y



LTRR



Y



Y



Y



Y



-



-



-



LTR



Y



Y



Y



Y



Y



Y



-



STMTR



Y



Y



-



-



-



-



-



STMT



Y



Y



Y



Y



-



-



-



88



2. Technology Original size



Scanner unit detection position 1



Absent



2



Original size sensor 2



3



A



B



A



B



A



B



-



-



-



-



-



-



-



To keep the high accuracy detection even though an original moves when the DADF is closed, this machine has 2 types of controls.



a. 2 point original detection at each detection position In main scanning direction, the machine determines whether the original is present or not from the 2 points of reading sensor output near the original detection position. Original size border line



Near 13 mm



1A: additional point of detection



Near 4 mm



1B: conventional point if detection Original size border line



Result



Judgment



A



B



Y



Y



Present



Y



-



Present



-



Y



Present



-



-



Absent



* Signal change with DADF Open to Close Changed: Others: Y



b. Priority on the front original presence As a result of main scanning direction measurement, if the original absence is detected at the rear while the original presence is detected at the front, a priority is given to the result of original presence at the front.



Original size sensor1 Point of detection 1 Point of detection 2 Point of detection 3 Point of detection 4 B5 Point of detection 5



Scanner unit original detection position



When the Reader Controller PCB could not be detected B5 size original at the detection position 2/3.



89



2. Technology Original detection position



Result



Identified size



1



Y



Y



2



-



Y



3



-



Y



4



Y



Y



5



-



-



Judgment



B5



Signal change with DADF Open to Close Change: Others: Y



Detection operation Following is the overview of operation for original size detection (AB type). 1. Wait status Scanner unit: shading position LED lamp unit: OFF Original size sensor: OFF Scanner unit



Original size sensor 1 Point of detection 1 Point of detection 2



DADF



Point of detection 3 Point of detection 4



DADF open/closed sensor 2 DADF open/closed sensor 1



Point of detection 5



Reader unit



Copyboard glass



Original detection position



2. DADF opened (The angle of DADF is 15 degree or more). Scanner unit: It moves to the original detection position (20mm from the original push-on position) LED lamp unit: OFF Original size sensor: OFF



90



2. Technology 3. Close DADF (The angle of DADF is from 5 to 15 degree). 3-1) The external light detection operation is performed. Since the area covered by an original will be blocked from external light, the machine will assume the absence of an original at points that detect external light. After the DADF sensor 2 detects [Close], the external light detection operation is started. In case of the described original size, A3/B4/A4/B5 are excluded from the list of possible sizes at this point.



15 degrees original



: external light



3-2) After the external light detection operation, the machine turns ON the LED in the main scanning direction and the reflected light is detected by the reading sensor (5 points). After the first detection, it continues detection by the specified interval (it completes after 3 sec). The original size sensor 1 starts detection in the sub scanning direction.



15 degrees



: LED light



4. DADF fully closed (the angle of DADF is 5 degree or less). The machine monitors the changes of output level of each sensor for 2 sec from when the DADF open sensor 1 detects the [Close] status. The machine determines the original presence in the point where the output level has no change. The machine identifies the original size from the combination of the level change at 5 points (priority on the front original presence).



5 degrees



5. Wait status (wait for start key) Scanner unit: Stream reading position LED lamp unit: ON Original size sensor: OFF



● Dust detection control Overview The timing of dust detection is as follows.



91



2. Technology Start key ON Before stream reading



[1]



[2]



1st sheet scanned



Between sheets



2nd sheet scanned



After scan



[3]



[2]



[3]



[2]



No.



Standby



Description



[1]



White plate dust detection control



[2]



Steam reading glass / Scanning glass dust detection control, Dust detection correction control (continuous lines)



[3]



Dust detection correction control (noncontinuous lines)



Scanner unit (DADF)



Scanner unit (Reader)



- White plate dust detection - Scanning glass dust detection - Dust detection correction (continuous lines) - Dust detection correction (noncontinuous lines)



- White plate dust detection - Stream reading glass dust detection - Dust detection correction (continuous lines) - Dust detection correction (noncontinuous lines)



White plate dust detection control In this machine, the fans cool down the inside of the DADF to prevent the overheating at stream reading operation. As a result, dust in the DADF may stick to the white plate and it may cause the lines on the image. To reduce the influence from the dust, the white plate dust detection and correction are performed.



a. White plate dust detection The machine compares the shading coefficient obtained from shift shading and the shading coefficient obtained from fixed shading to identify the presence/absence of dust and, if any, identifies the coordinates and width of the area.



b. White plate dust correction If the machine detects the dust as a result of white plate dust detection, it interpolates the shading coefficient of the area using the shading coefficient of both sides so as to decrease the effects of the presence of dust. It executes the shading correction using the shading coefficient obtained after the interpolation. When the dust is detected as a result of white plate dust detection, the machine interpolates the shading coefficient of the dust area using the shading coefficient of both sides so as to reduce the effects of the dust. The shading correction is executed after the interpolation.



92



2. Technology White plate



[Detection Algorithm]



Area of dust



Computation of shading coefficient (shift shading to reference area)



Computation of shading coefficient (from fixed shading to shading correction position)



Comparison



Detection of coordinates of start of dust and width



[Correction Algorithm]



Fixing shading position Shading correction position Correction of dust area coefficient using data of both sides



Reference area (Shading coefficient computation area)



Stream reading glass dust detection control The machine checks the presence/absent of dust on the stream reading glass and the DADF platen roller 1. It then changes the point of reading or executes image correction (refer to [Dust detection correction control (continuous lines)]) depending on the result of detection to avoid the reproduction of dust particles in its output images.



a. At the start of a job The scanner unit moves to the reading position saved at the detection of the previous job ends. After it moves, the dust detection is executed. If the dust is detected, the machine executes dust correction by making correction on the pixels on both sides of the area where dust is found. [1] It moves to the reading position.



b. Between sheets The dust detection is executed. If the dust is detected, the machine executes dust correction by making correction on the pixels on both sides of the area where dust is found. The scanner unit does not move due to the dust detection.



c. At the end of a job 1. The scanner unit moves to the default reading position A. [2] It moves to the reading position A. *1: In case that the reading position at the start of a job is one other than A. 2. The dust detection is executed. If there is no dust on the A position, the machine saves the A as a reading position for a next job and finishes the dust detection. 3. If there is a dust on the A position, the machine execute the dust detection on the B position. If there is no dust on the B position, the machine saves the B as a reading position for a next job and finishes the dust detection. [3] It moves to the B position. 4. If there is a dust on the B position, the machine execute the dust detection on the C position. If there is no dust on the C position, the machine saves the B as a reading position for a next job and finishes the dust detection. [4] It moves to the C position. 5. If there is a dust on the C position, the machine execute the dust detection on the D position. If there is no dust on the D position, the machine saves the B as a reading position for a next job and finishes the dust detection. [5] It moves to the D position. 6. If there is a dust on the D position, the machine executes the dust detection on the E position. If there also is a dust on the E position, the machine saves the position where the least dust is found among the A, B, C, D or E positions as a reading position for a next job and then, displays an alarm to perform the cleaning. [6] It moves to the reading position E.



93



2. Technology



0.5 mm 0.5 mm 0.5 mm 0.5 mm



C



B



A



D



E



At the start of a job



[1] At the end of a job



[2] *1



*1



*1



*1



[3] [4]



[5]



[6]



• Adjustment of the dust detection level between sheets in DADF mode COPIER > OPTION > IMG-RDR > DFDST-L1 • Adjustment of the dust detection level at job end in DADF mode. COPIER > OPTION > IMG-RDR > DFDST-L2



Dust detection correction control (continuous lines) The machine detects and corrects the lines due to the detected dust between sheets. This correction targets the lines due to the detected dust by the stream reading glass dust detection. In the case of detecting lines caused by specified amount of dust, an alarm is displayed to encourage cleaning. Refer to the Dust detection correction control (non-continuous lines) for the difference with non-continuous lines. (“Dust detection correction control (non-continuous lines)” on page 95 ) Before reading Platen roller 1



Original



Attached dust



Stream reading glass



Scanning position



94



2. Technology



After reading



It is attached on the stream reading glass.



Result of reading



Dust detection correction control (non-continuous lines) The machine detects and corrects the lines due to the dust other than dust between sheets. The dust on the original is not detected before the leading edge of original. This dust sometimes stops at the reading position due to the friction with the reading glass and sticks to the original again. In this case, the dust is fed together with the original and will not be detected after the trailing edge of the original. This control detects the non-continuous lines appears between the leading edge and the training edge formed as above and corrects the image. This correction targets the lines in the sub scanning direction on the read image. The machine determines whether the lines are due to the dust or not by the length, color and brightness of lines and the correction is executed if the lines are deemed as dustrelated lines. Before reading



95



2. Technology Original



Platen roller 1



Stream reading glass



Floating dust



Scanning position



After reading



It sticks on the original during scanning.



Result of reading



• Settings/Registration > Function Settings > Common > Scan Settings > Streak Prevention At the original reading, you can specify whether to execute the removing function or not when non-continuous lines are detected.



● Blank Paper Detection This machine can detect blank original included in the data read by stream reading when using the scan function and skip the blank original.



96



2. Technology Blank paper judgment is performed in the Reader Controller PCB using the data read by stream reading and the result is notified to the Main Controller PCB.



● Magnification change Magnification change in main scanning direction In main scanning direction at copy, image is always scanned by 100% size at copyboard scanning and DADF scanning, and then magnification is changed at image processing on the main controller block. At image SEND, reading size is changed in the reader controller PCB by the specified resolution and then magnification is changed at image processing on the main controller block.



• A fine adjustment of the front side image magnification ratio in horizontal scanning direction at DADF 2-sided reading FEEDER > ADJUST > ADJMSCN1 • A fine adjustment of the back side image magnification ratio in horizontal scanning direction at DADF 2-sided reading FEEDER > ADJUST > ADJMSCN2



Magnification change in vertical scanning direction As the magnification change in vertical scanning direction at the time of making a copy, the following operation is performed according to original reading method and difference in magnification. 1) Magnification change operation at copyboard reading Change of original reading speed, change of reading size in the Reader Controller PCB and data processing in the Main Controller PCB are performed according to the magnification. Example) In the case of reducing the magnification to 25%: Original reading speed: 468 mm/sec, read the original in the Reader Controller PCB at 50% magnification, reduce it to 50% magnification in the Main Controller PCB Example) In the case of 100%: Original reading speed: 468 mm/sec Change of original reading speed, change of reading size in the Reader Controller PCB and data processing in the Main Controller PCB are performed according to the specified resolution when performing SEND. Operation description



Magnification 25% to 50%



50.1% to 150%



150.1% to 299.9%



300% to 400%



Change of original reading speed (mm/sec)



468 mm/sec



468 mm/sec



234 mm/sec



154 mm/sec



Reading size in the Reader Controller PCB (%)



50%



100%



200%



300%



Digital magnification processing in the Main Controller PCB (%)



50 to 100%



50.1 to 150%



75 to 149.9%



100 to 133.3%



2) Magnification change operation at ADF reading mode Change of original reading speed, change of reading size in the Reader Controller PCB and data processing in the Main Controller PCB are performed according to the magnification. Example) In the case of reducing the magnification to 25%: Original reading speed: 610 mm/sec, read the original in the Reader Controller PCB at 50% magnification, reduce it to 5% magnification in the Main Controller PCB Example) In the case of 100%: Original reading speed: 610 mm/sec Change of original reading speed, change of reading size in the Reader Controller PCB and data processing in the Main Controller PCB are performed according to the specified resolution when performing SEND. Operation description



Magnification 25% to 50%



50.1% to 150%



150.1% to 200%



610 mm/sec



610 mm/sec



305 mm/sec



Reading size in the Reader Controller PCB (%)



50%



100%



200%



Digital magnification processing in the Main Controller PCB (%)



50 to 100%



50.1 to 150%



75 to 100%



Change of original reading speed (mm/ sec)



• Fine adjustment of the image magnification ratio in vertical scanning direction at DADF reading [front side] FEEDER > ADJUST > LA-SPEED • Fine adjustment of the image magnification ratio in vertical scanning direction at DADF reading [back side] FEEDER > ADJUST > LA-SPD2



97



2. Technology



● Image processing Overview Following is the main functions of image processing system. • Reading sensor Number of lines: 4 (R, G, B, B/W) Number of photo cells: 7488 (each line) • Shading processing Shading adjustment: In service mode Shading correction: Performed per very copy Digital image processing block



Analog image processing block Scanner unit PCB Reading sensor Analog image processing



A/D conversion



Reader controller PCB



Controller block



Shading processing



E248-0001: Error when the Main Controller PCB 1 read the Reader backup value in the Reader Controller PCB E248-0002: Error when the Main Controller PCB 1 write the Reader backup value in the Reader Controller PCB E248-0003: Error at inspection after completion of writing of the Reader backup value in the Reader Controller PCB E423-0001: SDRAM error in the Reader



Processing on the scanner unit PCB Reading sensor output gain correction, offset correction The analog video signal from the reading sensor is processed so that the rate of amplification is even (gain correction) while the output voltage in the absence of incident light is also processed for a specific level (offset correction). Reading sensor output A/D conversion The odd-numbered and even-numbered pixel analog video signals after the foregoing correction are then converted into 10-bit digital signals by the A/D converter according to their pixel voltage levels.



Shading processing Overview The output of the reading sensor may not always be uniform because of the following reasons even when the density of the original is uniform: • Variation in the sensitivity among individual pixels of the reading sensor. • Difference in the level of transmission between the center and the edge of the lens. • Difference in the intensity of light between the middle and the edges of the LED lamp unit. • Deterioration of the LED lamp unit. The machine executes shading correction to even out the output of the reading sensor. The machine executes either of the following 2 shading mechanisms: shading correction that is carried out per every copy and shading adjustment for which the target value is set in service mode.



Shading adjustment The machine performs shading adjustment in response to a command made in service mode. The machine computes the data entered in service mode to produce the target value for use at time of shading correction.



Shading correction The machine executes shading correction each time it scans an original. The machine directs the light from the lamp unit against the standard white plate, and the analog image processing block on the scanner unit PCB converts the reflected light into a digital signal. The result (i.e., a digital signal representing the intensity of the reflected light) is sent to the shading correction circuit of the reader controller PCB as a shading coefficient. The shading correction circuit in turn compares the coefficient with the target value it holds, and offers the difference as the shading correction value. The machine uses the shading correction value to correct the variation that may exist among the individual pixels of the reading sensor per each scan, thereby keeping the image density to a specific level at all times.



98



2. Technology Reading sensor output



Characteristics after correction



Target value



Characteristics before correction



Measurement



White



Original density



Standard white plate



E302-0001: Error in paper front white shading E302-0002: Error in paper front black shading E302-0101: Error in paper back white shading E302-0102: Error in paper back black shading



● Fan This equipment is equipped with a fan. Symbol FM1



Name Scanner unit cooling fan



Function To cool down the scanner unit.



Scanner unit cooling fan (FM1)



● Power unit Following is the overview of power supply 24 V and 12 V power supply for reader controller PCB is generated by the printer unit. 24 V is mainly used at the motors, fans and LED lump unit. Also it is supplied to the DADF driver PCB and DADF scanner unit. 5 V is mainly used at the sensors.



99



2. Technology 24V 24V 5V 24V Reader controller PCB



Host machine 12V



Motor Fan Sensor



24V 6V 4.5V



Scanner unit PCB (Reader)



24V



LED lamp unit



24V 6V 4.5V



Scanner unit PCB (DADF)



24V



LED lamp unit



24V 5V



E227-0001: Power supply (24V) error in the Reader Controller PCB E227-0101: Power supply (24V) error in the DADF driver PCB



● Limited Functions Mode (“Limited Functions Mode” on page 83 Reference)



100



DADF driver PCB



2. Technology



Main Controller Overview ■ Configuration/Function



Item Main Controller PCB



Function System Control/Memory Control/Printer Output Image Processing Control,Reader Image Input Processing, Card Reader Connection I/F, Fax ImageProcessing, USB Extension HUB Connection I/F



RAM



Temporarily storage of image data:Capacity of 2 GB (for controller control) + 1 GB (for image processing)



USB port



USB2.0 Device I/F, USB2.0 Host I/F



Hard disk



2.5-inch SATA I/F Standard: 250 GB (250 GB usable area), address list,security information (password, certificate), image data, preferences



Flash PCB



Storage of system software: 2 GB



TPM PCB



Generation and storage of the encryption key.(Only when Management Settings > Data Management > TPM Settings is"On". Default: Off)



101



2. Technology



■ Main Controller PCB1 FAN J15



Image Data Analyzer PCB J6001



J8002



External I/F Internal I/F



Voice J13



HDD J8000 J6003



J18



Counter J6005



J9 J8001 J6004 HDD J5 USB(H) J3 USB(D)



J7000 Main Controller PCB 2



J7 LAN



J1 TPM



J21 CC-VI



J20 CARD



No. TPM PCB



J3



USB I/F (Device)



J5



USB I/F (Host)



J7



LAN I/F



J9



-



J11



Flash PCB



J13



Voice-Operation Voice-Guidance



J15



Controller Fan



J18



-



J20



Serial Interface Kit Copy Card Reader



J21



Copy Control Interface Kit I/F



J6000



-



J6001



Image Data Analyzer PCB Standard hard disk



J6005



Counter Memory PCB



J7000



Main Controller PCB2



J8000 /J8001



Hard disk for mirroring



J8002



J11 FLASH



Functions and specifications



J1



J6003 /J6004



J6000



-



102



2. Technology



■ Main Controller PCB2 DC Controller PCB J5201



External I/F Internal I/F



DC Controller PCB J5202



J4021 UI J4031 Reader J4022 UI J4023 USB(H)



J4013 FAX



J4202 WIFI



J4012 FAX J4201 Main Switch J4000 Main Controller PCB 1



J4011 FAX J4002 Power Supply



J9001 Power Supply Control



J4003 SOFT-ID



No.



Functions and specifications



J4000



Main Controller PCB1



J4002



Relay PCB



J4003



SOFT-ID PCB



J4011 /4012 J4013 J4021/J4022



Fax (1-Line) Fax (2nd/3rd/4th Line) Control Panel I/F



J4023



IC Card Reader (upper port)/USB flash drive for users (lower port)



J4031



Reader



J4201



Main Switch



J4202



WIFI PCB



J5201/5202 J9001



DC Controller PCB Relay PCB



103



2. Technology



Startup Sequence Power Supply Switch ON



Power Supply Switch ON



Initializing process of hardware



Starting system software [Flash PCB]



Starting application [Hard disk]



Standby screen display



Standby screen display



Screen sequence and internal processing sequence NOTE: To achieve faster startup, the progress bar and the active PCB are not synchronized. For this reason, the progress bar cannot be utilized for troubleshooting. For information about troubleshooting, refer to "Related error codes (major error codes)" shown below.



NOTE: When system verification* at startup is ON, startup of system software takes more time than when OFF. *: Settings/Registration (login as an administrator) > [Management Settings] > [Security Settings] > [System verification at startup] Note that when the machine is recovering from sleep mode or at Quick Startup, system verification is not performed even it is set to ON.



Related error codes (major error codes): • • • • • •



E602-0001: HDD detection error E614-0001: Flash PCB detection error E614-0002: Error in file system on the Flash PCB E614-4001: Error in file system on the Flash PCB E614-4002: Error in file system on the Flash PCB E748-2010: Flash PCB error / HDD error



NOTE: When the following errors occur, the system of the host machine has not been started normally. Therefore the error code is not recorded in the log. E602-XX01, E614-XX01, E748-2010



Shutdown Sequence Before shutting down the power supply, it is necessary to perform the HDD completion process (Purpose: to prevent damage on the HDD) and execute the fixing disengagement operation.This sequential process is called “shutdown sequence”. With this machine, the Main Controller PCB detects turning OFF the Main Power Supply Switch, and the shutdown sequence is started and executed automatically.



104



2. Technology Note that the maximum shutdown time with this equipment is 90 seconds. (If the maximum of 90 seconds has elapsed, the power supply is turned OFF by the hard timer circuit on the Relay PCB.) NOTE: If the power supply is stopped without shutting down the machine, or if the processing to completely delete the hard disk (deletion of the primary file) fails to be completed within the shutdown time (max. 90 sec.), data consistency is checked at startup, during which the progress bar is displayed.



Motion Sensor Function Features of the Motion Sensor functions are shown below. • When the machine detects a person staying in front of it (in the area where the sensor works) for more than a certain period of time, it automatically recovers from sleep mode. • It judges whether the person is a user or a passerby and controls not to perform recovery triggered by passersby in order to reduce unnecessary power consumption. • Criteria for judging whether a person is a user or passerby are shown below. • If a person approaches the machine from the front, the sensor judges the person as a user and starts recovery from sleep mode quickly. • If a person approaches the machine from the side, the sensor judges the person walking fast as a passerby and the person walking slowly as a user. • The machine may recover from sleep mode in response to the detection of the passerby walking slowly, but the machine shifts to sleep mode again if it is not operated within a specified period of time. CAUTION: Do not block the opening because the sensor generates ultrasonic waves and detects reflected waves.



Settings/Registration This function can be set from the following menu. [Settings/Registration] > [Preferences] > [Timer/Energy Settings] > [Use Motion Sensor] ON/OFF of this function and the sensor sensitivity can be configured.



105



2. Technology



Laser Exposure System Overview ■ Overview This machine uses an 8-beam method that enables exposure of 8 beams per scanning direction for high productivity. Main Controller PCB 2 Video signal



Laser Driver PCB



Image Formation Lens Image Formation Lens (small) (large) Reflection mirror



BD signal



Laser signal



Laser scanner motor drive signal



DC Controller PCB



Polygon motor



BD Mirror



BD PCB



La La



se r



La se se r A rB H



Photosensitive Drum



Laser is applied to the Nom-image image on the positively-charged drum with this machine.



Image area Non-image area Non-image area



Laser ON Laser ON Enlarged view Laser Scanner Unit can be removed from the side of the main body.



106



2. Technology



Laser Scanner Unit



■ Specifications Item Laser team



Description



Wave length



670nm



Laser type



Red color laser



Laser output



7mW(Max)



Number of laser beams



8 beams



Resolution



1200dpi



Laser scanner motor



Type



Brushless motor



Number of rotations



24,800rpm(Process speed 350mm/sec) 20,500rpm(Process speed 290mm/sec)



Number of scanner mirror (polygon) surfaces



5



Controls



Laser ON/OFF control



Laser ON timing control



Main scanning synchronization control Sub scanning synchronization control Laser beam intensity control



APC control



Others



Laser scanner motor control Laser shutter control



■ Parts Configuration Image Formation Lens (large) Image Formation Lens (small) Reflection mirror



Laser Driver PCB



Polygon motor



BD Mirror



BD PCB



107



2. Technology Name



Role



Laser driver



Laser driver



Polygonal mirror



Perform scanning with a laser beam in the main scanning direction.



Reflection mirror



Reflect a laser team to the drum.



Correction lens



Correct a main-scanning tilt of the laser beam coming from the folding mirror.



Tilt correction motor



Correct a main-scanning tilt by moving the correction lens.



Image Formation Lens (small)



To connect focuses on the Drum to provide an image



Image Formation Lens (Large)



To connect focuses on the Drum to provide an image



Controls ■ Overview Laser Interface PCB



Laser Scanner Unit



Laser ON/OFF Control Laser Driver PCB Horizontal scanning synchronous Control Laser Scanner Motor Unit Vertical Scanning synchronous Control



Main Controller PCB 2



APC Control



Laser Scanner Motor Control



Laser Shutter Control



Item Laser ON timing control



Purpose/Description



Laser ON/OFF control



Turn ON/OFF a laser beam according to the combination of laser control signals.



Main scanning synchroni- Performed to adjust the writing position in the main scanning direction. zation control Sub scanning synchroni- Performed to adjust the writing position in the sub scanning direction. zation control Laser beam intensity control APC control



1Performed to keep a specified level of laser beam for each line.



Laser scanner motor control



To be executed to rotate the Polygon Mirror at the specified speed.



Laser shutter control



To prevent exposure of laser light in the machine when the Cover is open.



■ Laser ON Timing Control ● Laser ON/OFF Control This control is performed to turn ON/OFF a laser beam according to the combination of laser control signals. Polygon Mirror



Control signal



DC Controller PCB



Video signal



Laser Driver PCB



108



Laser Beam



2. Technology



After the power is turned ON



The DC controller switches the mode among four modes (Forcible OFF mode, APC mode, Print mode, Standby mode) according to the laser control signal. Mode



Laser status



Remarks



Forcible OFF



OFF



Clear the laser beam intensity setting determined by APC.



APC



ON



Adjust the laser beam intensity.



Print mode



OFF/ON



Irradiate a laser beam according to the video signal.



Standby mode



OFF



The main unit is placed in the standby status.



● Main Scanning Synchronization Control This control is performed to adjust the writing position in the main scanning direction.



For every eight lines



1. 2. 3. 4. 5.



The synchronization control in horizontal scanning direction is executed with reference to Laser A. The BD PCB is located on the light path of Laser A laser beam and the laser beam is emitted to the BD PCB. The BD PCB detects laser beam of Laser A and generates BD signal to be sent to the DC Controller PCB. The DC Controller sends the PBD signal to Main Controller PCB 2 according to BD signal. Based on the laser phase coefficient and the BD signal, the DC Controller PCB generates synchronization signal in horizontal scanning direction on an 8 lines basis at the generation area of synchronization signal in horizontal scanning direction. 6. Once the PBD signal is received, Main Controller PCB 2 sends video signal to the DC Controller PCB. 7. The video signal sent from Main Controller PCB 2 is output to the Laser Driver PCB according to the synchronization signal in horizontal scanning direction. NOTE: EEPROM on the Laser Driver PCB stores the 8-beam phase displacement coefficient (laser phase coefficient), which is unique to the Laser Scanner Unit, and corrects 8-beam phase difference based on the stored coefficient. When a Laser Scanner Unit is replaced, the DC Controller PCB automatically retrieves the laser phase coefficient of EEPROM.



PBD signal



Main Controller PCB 2



ASIC



Horizontal scanning synchronous signal generation assembly



BD signal Laser phase coefficient



EEPROM



Laser H Laser G



Video signal



Video signal ࣭ ࣭ ࣭ ࣭ ࣭ ࣭



BD PCB



Horizontal scanning synchronous signal



࣭ ࣭ ࣭ ࣭ ࣭ ࣭



DC Controller PCB



109



Laser Driver PCB



࣭ ࣭ ࣭ ࣭ ࣭ ࣭



Laser B Laser A



Polygon



2. Technology 6WDQGDUGBD



Laser H



T



Laser G



T



Laser F



T



࣭ ࣭ ࣭ ࣭ ࣭ ࣭



Laser A



T



● Sub Scanning Synchronization Control This control is performed to adjust the writing position in the sub scanning direction.



When printing is started



1. The DC Controller PCB generates synchronization signal in vertical scanning direction (PVREQ) and sends to Main Controller PCB 2. 2. Main Controller PCB 2 receives PVREQ (synchronization signal in vertical scanning direction) and sends the video signal to the DC Controller PCB. 3. The DC Controller PCB sends drive signal to the Laser Driver PCB to turn on the laser.



PVREQ



Laser Driver PCB



,PDJH ASIC Main Controller PCB 2



Image signal



DC Controller PCB



■ Laser Beam Intensity Control ● APC (Auto Power Control) Control To keep constant laser light intensity per 8 beams (1BD basis)



When the laser is scanned (per line)



1. The DC Controller PCB outputs laser control signal to the Laser Driver IC in the Laser Driver PCB to set in APC mode. 2. The Laser Driver IC is set in APC mode and makes laser diodes (LD1 to LD8) to forcibly emit in series. 3. The Laser Driver IC monitors laser diodes (LD1 to LD8) with the Photo Diode (PD) and adjusts output of laser diode until the laser light intensity reaches a specified level.



110



2. Technology Laser Driver PCB



LD1 LD2 LD3 LD4 PD



Laser Driver IC



Laser Control Signal



DC Controller PCB



LD5 LD6 LD7 LD8



■ Polygon Motor Control This control is performed to rotate the polygon mirror at a specified speed.



When the Laser Scanner Motor is started



1. The DC Controller PCB outputs acceleration signal (ACC) to forcibly rotate the Laser Scanner Motor. 2. The speed detection signals (FG, BD) are detected to be compared with the reference signal generated in the reference signal generation area, so that the acceleration signal (ACC) and the deceleration signal (DEC) are controlled to keep the specified speed.



Laser scanner motor



BD PCB ACC



DEC



BD



DC Controller PCB



E100: Scanner Motor BD unlock error E110: Scanner Motor FG unlock error



■ Laser Shutter Control To prevent laser exposure in the machine when the Cover is open



When the Front Door or Multi tray Cover opens/closes



When the Front Door or Multi tray Cover opens, the DC Controller PCB stops power supply (DC5V) of the Laser Driver to prevent laser exposure.



111



2. Technology



DC5V



PS03 Multi-purpose Cover Open/Close Sensor



SW02 Front Door Open Detection Switch



DC Controller PCB



DC12V



DC/DC



DC Power Supply PCB



Relay PCB



NOTE: This control is executed by the software only and there is no shutter to prevent laser exposure.



112



2. Technology



Image Formation System Overview ■ Overview Toner image is formed by the magnetic, 1-component toner projection developing method in image formation system. To ensure high quality print, this machine introduces the following new technologies: • Small-diameter toner High resolution by fine-grained toner • ETB transfer method Improved transfer/feeding performance by the ETB feeding • The shutter mechanism is added to the Primary Charging Assembly and the Pre-transfer Charging Assembly. This prevents discharge products from attaching on the Drum, thus prevents image failure just after startup. • Improved accessibility to the periodically replaced / durable parts provides increased serviceability. 'UXP&OHDQLQJ8QLW



3ULPDU\&KDUJLQJ $VVHPEO\ /DVHU



'HYHORSSLQJ$VVHPEO\



3KRWRVHQVLWLYH 'UXP



3UHWUDQVIHU &KDUJLQJ$VVHPEO\



3DSHU ETB



■ Specifications ● Basic Specifications Item Photosensitive Drum



Developing Assembly



Function/Method Material



A-Si



Drum diameter



84 mm diameter



Cleaning



Cleaning Blade



Process speed



iR-ADV 6575: 350 mm/sec iR-ADV 6565/6555: 290 mm/sec



Separation method



Curvature separation + separation claw



Drum Heater



Yes (42 +/- 2 deg C)



Drum HP detection



Yes



Developing method



Dry, 1-component toner projection method



Developing Cylinder



1 cylinder (single-developing method) 24.5 mm diameter



Toner Primary charging



Pre-transfer charging



Magnetic negative toner



Toner level detection



Yes (magnetic sensor)



Charging method



Corona charging (2 charging wires + grid wire)



Cleaning



Cleaning Pad (charging wire)



Shutter



Yes



Charging method



Corona charging (1 charging wire)



113



2. Technology Item



Function/Method



Pre-transfer charging



Cleaning



Cleaning Pad (charging wire)



Shutter



Yes



Transfer method



Direct transfer (ETB: Electrostatic Transfer Belt)



ETB Unit



Waste Toner Container



Toner Container



Material



CR rubber + urethane resin



Circumferential length



298.5 mm



Cleaning



Brush Roller + Cleaning Blade



Transfer method



Transfer Roller (sponge roller)



Separation method



Curvature separation + static eliminator



Disengagement mechanism



Yes



Capacity



Equivalent to 600,000 sheets (calculation with A4 and 6% image duty)



Full-level detection



Yes



Presence/absence detection



Yes



Method



Set-on (manual)



Presence/absence detection



No



● Charging Specifications Developing High Voltage PCB (UN17)



DC negative



Developing Cylinder



AC+DC positive



Primary Charging Wire



AC+DC negative



Pre-transfer Charging PCB (UN16)



AC



DC positive



DC positive



Primary Charging High Voltage PCB (UN15)



Grid Wire



Photosensitive Drum



Dust Collecting Roller Separation Claw



Pre-transfer Charging Wire



Bias value



Remarks



Primary charging bias



Item DC bias



6000 to 9000 V



To be specified by the potential control



Grid bias



DC bias



530 to 800 V



To be specified by the estimated life and environment*



Developing bias



AC bias



1200 V



DC bias



200 to 300 V



Fixed value (ON/OFF only) To be specified by the estimated life and environment*



Dust-collection bias



DC bias



-800 V



Constant voltage control



Pre-transfer charging bias



AC bias



8300 V



Fixed value (ON/OFF only)



DC bias



-3500 to 0 V



Constant current control (to be specified by the environment*)



Transfer bias



DC bias



0 to 6500 V



Constant current control (to be specified by the environment*, paper type and print mode)



Separation claw bias



AC bias



690 V



* Detected by the Environment Sensor (THU01)



114



Fixed value (ON/OFF only)



2. Technology



■ Parts Configuration ● Entire Configuration Toner Container



Toner Supply Assembly



Transfer Assembly



Process Assembly



Waste Toner Feed Assembly



Waste Toner Container



● Process Area Pre-exposure LED Drum Cleaning Blade



Primary Charging Assembly Grid Wire



Primary Charging Wire



Potential Sensor Developing Blade



Drum Cleaning Unit Developing Cylinder



Photosensitive Drum



Waste Toner Feed Screw Separation Claw Auxiliary Roller Magnet Roller



Dust Collecting Roller Pre-transfer Charging Assembly



Pre-transfer Charging Wire



115



Toner Stirrer



2. Technology



● Transfer Area Idler Roller Transfer Roller Drive Roller Static Eliminator Cleaning Blade Separation Guide



Brush Roller Transfer Belt Cleaning Shaft



Engagement Arm Engagement Cam



Waste Toner Feed Screw Cleaning Unit



● Toner Supply Area Front View



Toner Container



Hopper



Sub Hopper



Toner Stirrer



Buffer



Magnet Roller



Toner Feed Screw



Right Side View Hopper Toner Container Sub Hopper Toner Stirrer



Buffer



Magnet Roller



Toner Feed Screw



116



2. Technology



● Waste Toner Feeding Area Waste Toner Feed Screw



Waste Toner Feed Screw



Drum Cleaning Unit



ETB cleaning Unit



Waste Toner Feed Assembly



Waste Toner Container



Waste Toner



■ Drive Configuration ● Drive Configuration M02



CL01



M06



TS01



PS61



M07



M01



Symbol



Name



Function



M01



Drum Motor



To drive the Photosensitive Drum and the Dustcollection Roller



M02



Developing Motor



To drive the Developing Cylinder, the Toner Stirring Plate, the Magnet Roller and the Waste Toner Feed Screw



M06



Primary Charging Wire Cleaning Motor



To drive the Primary Charging Wire Cleaning Pad and the Primary Charging Shutter



M07



Pre-transfer Charging Wire Cleaning Motor



To drive the Pre-transfer Charging Wire Cleaning Pad and the Pre-transfer Charging Shutter



117



2. Technology Symbol



Name



Function



CL01



Developing Clutch



To drive the Developing Cylinder and the Toner Stirring Plate



TS01



Developing Toner Sensor



To detect toner level in the Developing Assembly



PS61



Drum Home Position Sensor



To detect home position of the Photosensitive Drum



● Transfer Area



PS55 PS56



M43



M19



Symbol



Parts name



Function



M19



Duplex Feed Left Motor



To make the ETB Unit (ETB) engaged/disengaged



M43



ETB Motor



To drive the ETB Drive Roller, the Brush Roller and the Waste Toner Feed Screw.



PS55



ETB Engage Sensor



To detect engagement of the.



PS56



ETB Disengage Sensor



To detect disengagement of the ETB (home position).



● Toner Supply Area



PS54



M10



M28



CL05



TS03 TS02



118



2. Technology Symbol



Parts name



Function



M10



Toner Supply Motor



To drive the Toner Stirring Plate (to supply toner to the Buffer)



M28



Toner Feed Motor



To drive the Toner Feed Screw and the Toner Stirring Plate (to feed toner)



CL05



Magnet Roller Clutch



To drive the Magnet Roller (to supply toner to the Developing Assembly)



TS02



Buffer Toner Sensor 1



To detect toner excess supply* * When toner clusters is supplied from the Sub Hopper, etc.



TS03



Buffer Toner Sensor 2



To detect toner level in the Buffer (to detect absence of toner in the Buffer)



PS54



Toner Exchange Cover Sensor



To detect whether the Toner Exchange Cover is opened/ closed.



● Waste Toner Feeding Area M02



M43



SW05



TS04



Symbol



Parts name



Function



M02



Developing Motor



To drive the Waste Toner Feed Screw(Drum Cleaning Unit)



M43



ETB Motor



To drive the Waste Toner Feed Screw(ETB Cleaning Unit)



SW5



Waste Toner Lock Detection Switch



To detect lock of the Waste Toner Feed Screw



TS04



Waste Toner Full Sensor



To detect whether the Waste Toner Container is full.



■ Print Process Block Static formation block 1



Step



Overview



Exposure



Light emission from the Pre-exposure LED removes residual potential on the surface of the Photosensitive Drum to prevent density unevenness.



2



Primary charging The surface of the Photosensitive Drum is charged to make a uniform positive potential. This machine uses the Primary Charging Assembly which indirectly gives potential from the Charging Wire to the Photosensitive Drum.



3



Laser exposure



Emission of the laser beam forms a static latent image on the surface of the Photosensitive Drum. When the laser beam is applied on the surface of the positively charged Photosensitive Drum, the potential at the emitted part is reduced.



119



2. Technology Block



Step



Overview



4



Developing



With the magnetic, 1-component toner projection developing method, toner that has been negatively charged by the Developing Cylinder is attached to the latent image on the surface of the Photosensitive Drum to make it visible.



5



Pre-transfer charging



Toner on the Photosensitive Drum is made to be a uniform potential.



6



Transfer



Positive potential is applied to the Transfer Roller so that the toner on the Photosensitive Drum is transferred on a paper.



7



Separation



With the curvature separation method and the static eliminator, the paper is separated from the Photosensitive Drum and the ETB.



Fixing block



8



Fixing



The toner on the paper is fused on the paper by heat and pressure.



ETB cleaning block



9



ETB cleaning



The Cleaning Blade removes the residual toner attached on the ETB.



Drum cleaning



The Cleaning Blade removes the residual toner attached on the Photosensitive Drum.



Developing block Transfer block



Drum cleaning block 10



1.Electrostatic latent image formation Block 2.Primary Charging 1.Pre-exposure



3.Laser exposure



6.Drum cleaning Block 10.Drum Cleaning



4.Fixing Block Delivery



8.Fixing



Photosensitive Drum



3.Transfer Block



4.Development



2.Development Block



5.Pre-transfer Charging



7.Separation 6.Transfer



Registration



MP Pickup Tray



ETB Unit 9.ETB cleaning



Deck/Cassette



5. ETB cleaning Block



Rotation of photosensitive drum and ETB Flow of paper



120



2. Technology



Controls ■ Overview Primary Charging -Primary charging bias control -Primary charging wire cleaning control -Primary charging shutter control



Exposure -Pre-exposure control Separation -Separation control -Separation claw reciprocation control



Toner Supply -Toner container detection -Toner level detection -Toner supply control -Detection of completion of toner replacement



Drum Cleaning -Drum cleaning exposure -Separation bias control Transfer -Pre-transfer charging bias control -Pre-transfer charging wire cleaning control -Pre-transfer charging shutter control -Transfer bias control -ETB cleaning control -ETB engage/disengage control



Development -Developing bias control -Developing Supply Shutter Opening/Closing Mechanism -Dust-collecting bias control Drum Control -Drum cleaning exposure -Separation claw bias control



Image Stabilization Control -Potential control -PASCAL control Other Control -Startup contrast potential correction -Laser APC control -Two dimension shading control -White band control -Black Band Control -Low Duty Discharge Control



Waste Toner Feed -Waste toner container detection -Waste toner full detection -Waste toner screw lock detection



Control name



Description



Exposure Pre-exposure control



To apply the light of the Pre-exposure LED on the surface of the Photosensitive Drum.



Primary charging wire bias control



To apply the positive potential to the Primary Charging Wire and the Grid Wire.



Primary charging wire cleaning control



To clean the Primary Charging Wire.



Primary charging shutter control



To prevent image failure caused by ozone generated from the Primary Charging Wire.



Developing bias control



To apply positive potential to the Developing Cylinder so that the toner on the Developing Cylinder is attached on the surface of the Photosensitive Drum.



Developing Supply Shutter Opening/ Closing Mechanism



There are shutters at the Supply Mouths of the Developing Assembly and the Buffer Unit to prevent toner scattering.



Toner collection sheet bias control



To apply negative potential to the Toner Collection Sheet.



Pre-transfer charging bias control



To charge toner negatively and evenly to ensure stability of transfer performance.



Primary charging



Developing



Transfer



Pre-transfer charging wire cleaning con- To clean the Pre-transfer Charging Wire to prevent the Chargtrol ing Wire failure that is caused by soil of the Pre-transfer Charging Wire. Pre-transfer charging shutter control



To prevent image failure caused by ozone generated from the Pretransfer Charging Wire.



Transfer bias control



To apply positive potential to the Transfer Roller so that the toner on the Photosensitive Drum is transferred on the paper.



ETB cleaning control



To remove the residual toner on the ETB to prevent image failure that is caused by toner soil on the belt.



121



2. Technology Control name



Description



ETB engagement/disengagement con- To engage/disengage the ETB with the Photosensitive Drum. trol Separation Drum cleaning control



To remove residual toner on the Photosensitive Drum.



Separation bias control



To remove toner attached to the Drum Separation Claw.



Separation control



To separate paper from the Photosensitive Drum and the ETB.



Drum cleaning Separation Claw Reciprocation Control By moving the Separation Claw back and forth (reciprocation), scar on the drum caused by the Separation Claw can be prevented. Drum control Drum home position detection



To detect home position of the Photosensitive Drum.



Drum heater control



To keep constant temperature of the Photosensitive Drum.



Toner Container Detection



Toner Container detection is not performed with this machine.



Toner supply Toner level detection



To detect toner level in the Developing Unit and the Buffer Unit.



Toner supply control



To supply toner from the Toner Container to the Developing Assembly.



Toner Replacement Completion Detec- To send a notice of Toner Replacement Completion when Totion ner Container is replaced. Waste toner feeding Waste toner container detection



To detect whether the Waste Toner Container is attached to the host machine.



Waste toner full level detection



To detect whether the Waste Toner Container is full.



Waste toner screw lock detection



To detect whether the Waste Toner Screw is locked.



Potential control



To determine primary current (VD), laser power (VL) and developing bias (Vdc) according to the deterioration level of the Photosensitive Drum and the environmental change.



PASCAL control



To determine gradation adjustment value based on the image density scanned by the Reader.



Image stabilization control



Other Control Startup Contrast Potential (Vcont) Cor- To adjust the contrast potential (Vcont) at startup in order to rection maintain the density consistently. Laser APC control



To correct the laser output control value to prevent changes in surface potential by the laser output.



2D shading control



To correct uneven potential on the Photosensitive Drum by laser exposure.



White Band Control



To blow off the reversely-charged toner on the Developing Sleeve forcibly to the Drum surface in order to collect the toner into the Drum Cleaning Unit.



Black Band Control



To supply toner thoroughly to the ends of the Cleaning Blade and prevent the blade from everting by forming the toner band at the Drum ends.



Low Duty Discharge Control



To forcibly eject toner by forming the toner band at the Drum ends in order to avoid toner deterioration in case low duty images are continuously output.



■ Exposure ● Pre-exposure Control To prevent uneven density with the print image, residual potential on the Photosensitive Drum is removed before the primary charging. With the command by the DC Controller PCB, the Pre-exposure LED (LE01) is emitted. By emitting the LED on the Photosensitive Drum, remove residual potential on the drum.



122



2. Technology



Main Driver PCB(UN78) Pre-exposure LED(LE01)



Photosensitive Drum



■ Primary Charging ● Primary Charging Bias Control To make the surface of the Photosensitive Drum evenly and positively charged. The primary charging bias (DC positive), which has been generated by the Primary Charging High Voltage PCB (UN15), is applied to the Primary Charging Wire and the Grid Wire. • Primary charging DC bias: the bias to be applied to the Primary Charging Wire • Grid DC bias: the bias to be applied to the Grid Wire The primary charging bias value is specified by the potential control. The grid bias is specified based on the estimated life and the environment. Primary Charging High Voltage PCB(UN15) DC positive



DC positive



Primary Charging Wire Grid Wire



Photosensitive Drum



● Primary Charging Wire Cleaning Control To prevent charging failure caused by soil of the Primary Charging Wire.



• • • •



Interruption at every 2000 sheets of continuous print (the value can be changed in service mode: 1,000 to 5,000 sheets) After last rotation which is performed on the 1500th sheet and later since the last cleaning (1-roundtrip) In the case of executing “Clean Wire” in user mode (1-roundtrip) In the case of executing the wire cleaning in service mode (1-roundtrip or 5-roundtrip)



123



2. Technology



The drive of the Primary Charging Wire Cleaning Motor (M06) makes the Cleaner Screw rotate clockwise/counterclockwise, which moves the Cleaning Pad back and forth to clean the Primary Charging Wire. Position detection of the Cleaning Pad is not performed. Screw



Primary Charging Wire Cleaning Motor (M06) Primary Charging Wire



Primary Charging Wire Cleaning Pad



• To clean the Charging Wires of Primary Charging Assembly and Pre-transfer Charging Assembly simultaneously (5reciprocation). COPIER > FUNCTION > CLEANING > WIRE-CLN • To clean the Charging Wires of Primary Charging Assembly and Pre-transfer Charging Assembly simultaneously (1reciprocation). COPIER > FUNCTION > CLEANING > WIRE-EX • To set the offset value of the paper interval for automatic cleaning of the Primary Charging Wire. (Lv.2) COPIER > OPTION > CLEANING > W-CLN-P



● Primary Charging Shutter Control To prevent uneven potential on the Photosensitive Drum caused by discharge products (nitrogen oxide) accumulated on the Primary Charging Assembly. NOTE: In the environment which moisture content is lower than the one in power saving environment (temperature: 23 deg C, humidity: 70%, moisture content: 15g), set the Drum Heater to OFF in the sleep mode after a specified time passes. Discharge product (nitrogen compound) which is generated at the Charging Assembly when image is formed is deposited on the Drum when the time passes. When the Drum Heater is OFF, the discharge product (nitrogen compound) has a chemical reaction with the moisture in the air and generates nitric acid. This nitric acid deteriorates the surface of the Drum and causes the image failure.



• When the Drum Heater is turned OFF • During sleep mode



124



2. Technology



• After 4 or 5 hours since the drum was stopped* *The time is determined by the environment (moisture content) when the drum operation was stopped. The timing for closing the Primary/Pre-transfer Charging Shutter can be set in the following service mode. COPIER > OPTION > IMG-DEV > PRI-SHUT Environment



Moisture content



Temperature/Humidity



Drum Heater



Time



1 2



to 0.86



23 deg C 5%



OFF



300min.



to 1.73



23 deg C 10%



OFF



3



285min.



to 5.8



23 deg C 30%



OFF



270min.



4



to 8.9



23 deg C 50%



OFF



255min.



Energy save



to 12.41



22 deg C 75%



OFF



240 min.



5



to 15



23 deg C 70%



ON



Not close



6



to 18



27 deg C 80%



ON



Not close



7



to 21.6



30 deg C 80%



ON



Not close



Shutter Open/Close Operation Sequence Operation



Elapsing time Image formation is completed. or Standby mode starts.



1. Calculate the moisture content. (Environment Heater) Refer to the table. 2. Based on the moisture content, determine the time until the Charging Shutter is closed. 3. Set the DC Controller startup time (DCON alarm).



Sleep mode starts. (Min. 10 sec., Max. 240 min.)



1. Calculate the moisture content. (Environment Heater) Refer to the table. 2. Determine whether the Drum Heater is ON or OFF during sleep mode.



DC Controller starts. (DCON alarm) (240 min. to 300 min.)



1. DC Controller checks whether the Drum Heater is ON or OFF.



Drum Heater is ON or OFF. ON Charging Shutter is not closed.



OFF Charging Shutter is closed.



Sleep mode restarts.



1. Charging Shutter is opened or closed. 2. Drum Heater is ON or OFF. 3. Two dimensional shading is ON or OFF.



Recovery starts.



Charging Shutter is opened. Drum Heater is ON. Charging Shutter is closed. Two dimensional Drum Heater is OFF. shading is OFF. 1. Operation of Charging Shutter opening 2. Fixing warm-up



1. Drum Heater is changed from ON to OFF. 2. Fixing warm-up



Charging Shutter is opened. Drum Heater is ON. Two dimensional shading is ON.



1. Drum Heater is OFF . 2. Fixing warm-up



Startup sequence Drum Heater is ON. Image formation starts.



The shutter is open or closed by the cleaning mechanism of the Primary Charging Wire. The Primary Charging Shutter is made of fiber and usually taken up by the bobbin. The drive of the Primary Charging Wire Cleaning Motor (M06) moves the Cleaning Pad to the rear and the shutter taken up by the bobbin becomes extended to make the Shutter closed.



125



2. Technology Because the Shutter comes between the Grid Wire and the Photosensitive Drum, discharge products from the Primary Charging Assembly do not reach the Photosensitive Drum. The Primary Charging Shutter Sensor (PS94) detects opening/close of the shutter. Grid Wire



Screw



Primary Charging Shutter Sensor(PS94) Primary Charging Wire Cleaning Motor(M06) Primary Charging Wire



Primary Charging Wire



Grid Wire Charging Shutter Photosensitive Drum Charging Shutter



E060-0001: Primary Charging Shutter HP open error E060-0002: Primary Charging Shutter HP close error



■ Developing ● Developing Bias Control To form a toner image on the Photosensitive Drum by charging toner on the Developing Cylinder.



The developing bias (AC, DC positive), which has been generated on the Develop High Voltage PCB (UN17), is applied to the Developing Cylinder. • Developing DC bias The bias to generate potential difference with the Photosensitive Drum. The bias value is determined based on the D-max control. • Developing AC bias The bias to improve image quality. The bias value is fixed.



126



2. Technology



Developing High Voltage PCB(UN17)



AC+DC positive



Photosensitive Drum



Developing Cylinder



● Developing Supply Shutter Opening/Closing Mechanism There are shutters at the Supply Mouths of the Developing Assembly and the Buffer Unit to prevent toner scattering. The Developing Shutter and Buffer Shutter is opened/closed in conjunction with push-in and pull-out of the Developing Assembly.



By pushing the Developing Assembly in the main body, the Developing Shutter comes in contact with the Buffer Unit. By pushing the assembly in farther, the Developing Shutter opens along the side of the Buffer Unit. By pulling the Developing Assembly out from the main body, the Developing Shutter closes by its own weight so the Supply Mouth is closed Buffer Assembly Developing Assembly Shutter Developing Assembly



Push



Developing Assembly Shutter Open



Toner Buffer Assembly



Developing Assembly Shutter



Developing Assembly



By pushing the Developing Assembly in the main body, edge of the Supply Mouth on the assembly hits to leading edge of the Buffer Shutter. By pushing the assembly in farther, the Buffer Shutter moves to the rear so the Supply Mouth is opened. The Shutter Arm goes down by spring pressure, and it interlocks with the protrusion on the Developing Shutter. By pulling the Developing Assembly out, the Shutter Arm is pushed by the protrusion on the Developing Shutter, so the Buffer Shutter is closed followed by the Supply Mouth. The Shutter Arm lifts up by hitting to the bottom of the Hopper.



127



2. Technology Buffer Assembly Shutter Open



Buffer Assembly Buffer Assembly Shutter Developing Assembly



Push



Toner Buffer Assembly



Spring Projection



Buffer Assembly Shutter Developing Assembly



● Dust-collection Bias Control To collect toner which floats over the Photosensitive Drum during developing process.



The dust-collection bias (DC negative), which has been generated on the Develop High Voltage PCB (UN17), is applied to the Dust-collection Roller. The bias value is fixed. Developing High Voltage PCB(UN17)



DC negative



Photosensitive Drum



Dust Collecting Roller



■ Transfer ● Pre-transfer Charging Bias Control To make the charging amount of toner on the Photosensitive Drum appropriate to improve transfer performance. The pre-transfer charging bias (AC + DC negative), which has been generated on the Pretransfer Charging PCB (UN16), is applied to the Pre-transfer Charging Wire.



128



2. Technology



Pre-transfer Charging PCB(UN16)



AC+DC negative



Photosensitive Drum



Pre-transfer Charging Wire



● Pre-transfer Charging Wire Cleaning Control To prevent charging failure caused by soil of the Pre-transfer Charging Wire.



To be executed together with the primary charging wire cleaning control at the same time.



The drive of the Pre-Transfer Charging Wire Cleaning Motor (M7) makes the Cleaner Screw rotate clockwise/counterclockwise, which moves the Cleaning Pad back and forth to clean the Pre-transfer Charging Wire. The Pre-transfer Charging Shutter Position Sensor ( ) detects position of the Cleaning Pad.



Screw



Pre-transfer Charging Wire Cleaning Pad Pre-transfer Charging Wire Cleaning Motor(M07)



Pre-transfer Charging Wire



• To clean the Charging Wires of Primary Charging Assembly and Pre-transfer Charging Assembly simultaneously (5reciprocation). COPIER > FUNCTION > CLEANING > WIRE-CLN • To clean the Charging Wires of Primary Charging Assembly and Pre-transfer Charging Assembly simultaneously (1reciprocation). COPIER > FUNCTION > CLEANING > WIRE-EX • To set the offset value of the paper interval for automatic cleaning of the Primary Charging Wire. (Lv.2) COPIER > OPTION > CLEANING > W-CLN-P



● Pre-transfer Charging Shutter Control To prevent uneven potential on the Photosensitive Drum caused by discharge products (nitrogen oxide) accumulated on the Pretransfer Charging Assembly.



129



2. Technology



• To be executed together with the Pre-transfer charging wire cleaning control at the same time.



The shutter is opened or closed by the cleaning mechanism of the Pre-transfer Charging Wire. The Pre-transfer Charging Shutter is made of fiber and usually taken up by the bobbin. The drive of the Pre-transfer Charging Wire Cleaning Motor (M07) moves the Cleaning Pad to the rear and the shutter taken up by the bobbin becomes extended to make the Shutter closed. Because the Shutter comes between the Pre-transfer Charging Wire and the Photosensitive Drum, discharge products from the Primary Charging Assembly do not reach the Photosensitive Drum. The Pre-transfer Charging Shutter Position Sensor (PS95) detects opening/close of the shutter.



Screw



Pre-transfer Charging Wire Cleaning Motor(M07) Pre-transfer Charging Wire Shutter Flag



Photosensitive Drum



Charging Shutter Charging Shutter



Pre-transfer Charging Wire



Pre-transfer Charging Shutter Sensor(PS95)



● Transfer Bias Control To transfer toner on the Photosensitive Drum to a paper. The transfer bias (DC positive), which has been generated on the Transfer High Voltage PCB (UN76), is applied to the Transfer Roller. Following shows the 3 types of transfer bias: • Print bias: the bias to be applied during printing • Paper leading edge weak bias: the bias to be applied to the leading edge of the paper (to prevent failure in paper separation) • Paper interval bias: the bias to be applied between sheets The bias value is determined by the environment, the paper type and the mode table. Transfer High Voltage PCB(UN76) DC positive Photosensitive Drum



Transfer Roller



130



2. Technology • To adjust the offset value of the target current of the Transfer Roller (Lv.2) COPIER > ADJUST > HV-TR > TR-OFS1 to 6 • To adjust the leading edge transfer target current and the offset value of leading edge transfer bias output timing (Lv.2) COPIER > ADJUST > HV-TR > TR-L-OF1 to 6 • To adjust the offset value of the pre-transfer charging current (Lv.2) COPIER > ADJUST > HV-TR > P-TR-OF1 to 6 • To set the paper type which the target current of the Transfer Roller is adjusted. (Lv.2) COPIER > ADJUST > HV-TR > TR-SP1 to 2 • To set the paper type which the leading edge transfer target current and the leading edge transfer bias output timing are adjusted. (Lv.2) COPIER > ADJUST > HV-TR > TR-L-SP1 to 2 • To set the paper type which the pre-transfer charging current is adjusted. (Lv.2) COPIER > ADJUST > HV-TR > P-TR-SP1 to 2



● ETB Cleaning Control To prevent image failure caused by toner soil on the ETB, the residual toner on the Transfer Belt is removed.



1. 2. 3. 4.



The Brush Roller collects toner on the ETB. The Cleaning Shaft scrapes toner on the Brush Roller. The ETB Cleaning Blade scrapes toner on the ETB. The scraped toner is fed to the Waste Toner Container.



Drive Roller Brush Roller



Cleaning Shaft ETB cleaning Unit Waste Toner Feed Screw



Cleaning Blade



• To execute three idle rotations of the ETB and clean the ETB. COPIER > FUNCTION > CLEANING > TBLT-CLN • To set the number of times to apply cleaning bias at the time of ETB cleaning. COPIER > OPTION > IMG-DEV > TBLTTMS • To set the timing to execute ETB cleaning control. COPIER > OPTION > IMG-DEV > TBLTCLSW • To set the transfer current value to apply cleaning bias(+) at the time of ETB cleaning. COPIER > OPTION > IMG-DEV > TBLTBIS+ • To set the transfer current value to apply cleaning bias (-) at the time of ETB cleaning. COPIER > OPTION > IMG-DEV > TBLTBIS-



● ETB Engagement/Disengagement Control To prevent image failure caused by toner soil on the ETB, the ETB is engaged or disengaged with the Photosensitive Drum.



• To make the belt engaged: during printing • To make the belt disengaged: any timing other than the above



1. Reverse rotation of the Duplex Feed Left Motor (M19) makes the Disengagement Cam rotate.



131



2. Technology 2. Rotation of the Disengagement Cam moves the Disengagement Arm up and down to make the ETB engaged/disengaged with the Photosensitive Drum. 3. Following 2 sensors detect position of the Transfer Belt. • ETB Engage Sensor (PS55): to detect engagement of the ETB. • ETB Disengage Sensor (PS56): to detect disengagement (home position) of the ETB.



E017-0001: ETB disengagement error E017-0002: ETB engagement error E017-0003: ETB HP error



ETB



Disengagement Engagement



Engagement Arm Flag M19



ETB Engage Sensor(PS55) Engagement Arm Engagement Cam



Engagement Cam ETB Disengage Sensor(PS56)



Engagement



Disengagement Photosensitive Drum



ETB Engagement Cam



Engagement Arm



■ Separation ● Separation Control



Separation is performed using the curvature separation method.



132



2. Technology



Paper



NOTE: The Separation Claw separates sheets before entering the Drum Cleaning Unit. This effectively avoids failure in paper feed (double feed, etc.)



Photosensitive Drum



Separation Claw



Paper



Separation Claw



Separation is performed using the curvature separation method and the Static Eliminator. There is no bias for separation.



133



2. Technology Static Eliminator



ETB



Separation Guide



Paper



Separation Guide



Static Eliminator



ETB



● Separation Claw Reciprocation Control By moving the Separation Claw back and forth (reciprocation), scar on the drum caused by the Separation Claw can be prevented.



During printing (while the Developing Motor is driving)



Making the Separation Claw move back and forth by transmitting the rotation force of the Developing Motor Drive via the cam and Gear Unit. Reciprocation width: +/-25mm 1. The drive of the Developing Motor (M02) makes the cam rotate. 2. The Drive Lever moves in a pendulum motion by the rotation of the cam, which make the Drive Shaft rotates. (With the oneway bearing, the Drive Shaft rotates in only one direction.) 3. Making the Lack move back and forth by transmitting the rotating motion of the Drive Shaft via the Gear Unit. The Separation Mounting Base linked with the Lack moves back and forth.



134



2. Technology



Drive Shaft



Gear Unit



M02



M02



Lack



Drive Lever



Cam



Separation Claw Mounting Base



■ Drum Cleaning ● Drum Cleaning Control The blade, which is in contact with the Drum, removes residual toner and paper dust on the Photosensitive Drum.



1. 2. 3. 4.



The drive of the Developing Motor (M02) makes the Magnet Roller rotate. The Magnet Roller forms a thin toner coating layer on the surface of the Photosensitive Drum. The Drum Cleaning Blade scrapes residual toner on the surface of the Drum. The Toner Collection Feeding Screw feeds the scraped waste toner to the Waste Toner Container. Drum Cleaning Unit Drum Cleaning Blade



Photosensitive Drum



Auxiliary Roller Waste Toner Feed Screw Magnet Roller



● Separation Bias Control To prevent image soil caused by toner accumulated on the Drum Separation Claw, this control prevents attachment of toner on the Photosensitive Drum with the Drum Separation Claw.



When the developing bias is applied



135



2. Technology



The separation claw bias (AC), which has been generated on the Develop High Voltage PCB (UN17), is applied to the Separation Claw so that vibration is given to the Separation Claw to prevent toner attachment. The bias value is fixed. Developing High Voltage PCB(UN17) AC Photosensitive Drum



Separation Claw



■ Drum-related Issues ● Drum HP Detection To detect home position of the Photosensitive Drum. There is a flag for HP detection on the shaft of the Photosensitive Drum. Once the Photosensitive Drum starts rotating, the flag passes through the Drum HP Sensor (PS61) and the home position of the Photosensitive Drum is detected. This control is used during the 2D shading control. Photosensitive Drum



Flag



Drum Home Position Sensor(PS61)



● Drum Heater Control To make potential characteristic for charging or exposure stable by keeping the specified temperature of the Photosensitive Drum. The Drum Heater is the flat heater located inside the Photosensitive Drum to keep moisture content on the surface of the Photosensitive Drum constant by turning ON the heater. NOTE: Temperature of the drum is detected by the Thermistor in the Drum Control PCB, and is controlled by turning ON/OFF the Drum Heater to make it 42 deg C.



136



2. Technology Photosensitive Drum Drum Heater



Environment Heater Switch



Environment Sensor



Operating condition of the heater differs according to the status of the Environment Switch and the host machine.



A. In the case of normal image mode*1 (DRM-H-SW: "2")



Mode Switch



Heater



Main SW



Main Power OFF



sleep mode



WarmUp (Recovery)



OFF



Standby/Energy Saver



Copy/Print



ON



Cassette Heater SW



OFF



ON



OFF



ON



OFF



ON



OFF



ON



Drum



OFF



OFF



OFF



OFF



ON*3



Cassette



OFF



OFF



OFF



OFF



OFF



Reader



OFF



OFF



OFF



OFF



OFF



OFF



ON



ON*3



ON



ON



OFF



ON



ON



ON



ON



OFF



OFF



OFF



ON



OFF



OFF



OFF



Mode Switch



Heater



Main Power OFF



Main SW



sleep mode



WarmUp (Recovery)



OFF



Standby/Energy Saver



Copy/Print



ON



Cassette Heater SW



OFF



ON



OFF



ON



OFF



ON



Drum



OFF



OFF



OFF



OFF



ON*3



Cassette



OFF



ON



OFF



ON



OFF



Reader



ON



ON



ON



ON



ON



B. In the case of image priority mode*1 (DRM-H-SW: "1")



137



OFF



ON



OFF



ON



ON*3



ON



ON



OFF



ON



ON



ON



ON



OFF



ON



OFF



OFF



OFF



OFF



OFF



2. Technology Mode Switch



Main Power OFF



Main SW



Heater



sleep mode



WarmUp (Recovery)



OFF



Standby/Energy Saver



Copy/Print



ON



Cassette Heater SW



OFF



ON



OFF



ON



OFF



ON



OFF



ON



Drum



OFF



OFF



OFF



OFF



ON*3



Cassette



OFF



OFF



OFF



OFF



OFF



Reader



OFF



OFF



OFF



OFF



OFF



OFF



ON



ON*3



ON



ON



OFF



ON



ON



ON



ON



OFF



ON



OFF



OFF



OFF



OFF



OFF



Mode Switch



Heater



Main Power OFF



Main SW



sleep mode



WarmUp (Recovery)



OFF



Standby/Energy Saver



Copy/Print



ON



Cassette Heater SW



OFF



ON



OFF



ON



OFF



ON



OFF



ON



OFF



ON



Drum



ON



ON



ON



ON



ON*3



ON*3



ON



ON



ON



ON



Cassette



OFF



ON



OFF



ON



OFF



ON



OFF



ON



OFF



ON



Reader



ON



ON



ON



ON



ON



OFF



OFF



OFF



OFF



OFF



*1: ON/OFF can be switched in the following service mode (Lv. 2). COPIER > OPTION > IMG-MCON > DRM-H-SW *2: When 1 or 2 is set in the following service mode, the Drum Heater is turned ON. COPIER > OPTION > IMG-LSR > 2D-SHADE *3: OFF when the detected temperature of the Environment Sensor is 15 deg C or higher.



● Drum Unit Life Detection Purpose To display the LIFE and Remaining Days of the Drum Unit (photosensitive drum) to notify the replacement timing. The LIFE and the Remaining Days can be checked in the service modes below. Consumption rate check Service Mode: COPIER > COUNTER > LIFE > PT-DRM



Control description 1. This calculates the drum life from the drum rotation time and the application time of primary charging DC bias. 2. The calculated drum life value is added to the counter value stored in the drum memory. 3. The remaining days are calculated by the calculated life with the consideration for the usage conditions. Item



Advance Notice Alarm



Replacement display



Replacement completion



Alarm code name



Drum Unit prior notification alarm *1



-



Drum Unit replacement completion alarm



Alarm Code



40-0073



-



43-0073



Message



-



Insert the drum cartridge.



Host machine operation after displaying the message Detection timing



Continuous printing is available When the consumption rate of 7 days after sending the AdWhen clearing the life value Drum Unit *2 reaches the setting vance Notice Alarm (default value) *1 value *1 of service mode



Detected to (location) Alarm log display



DC controller PCB ALARM-3



*3



-



ALARM-3



*1. The display/hide and display timing settings for prior notification alarm can be changed from the following service mode items. COPIER > OPTION > PM-DLV-M > PT-DRM *2. The consumption rate of Drum Unit can be checked from the following service mode. COPIER > COUNTER > LIFE > PT-DRM *3. The next prior notification alarm is not sent from sending the previous prior notification alarm and then sending the replacement completion alarm.



138



2. Technology



Service Mode • Drum Unit (Bk): Life VL/No. of days COPIER > COUNTER > LIFE > PT-DRM • Set Drum-U(Bk) prior alarm notice timing COPIER > OPTION > PM-DLV-D > PT-DRM



Alarm Code • Drum Unit prior notification alarm 40-0073 • Drum Unit replacement completion alarm 43-0073



■ Toner Supply Area ● Toner Container Detection Toner Container detection is not performed with this machine.



● Toner Supply Control To supply toner in the Toner Container to the Developing Assembly. The Magnet Roller helps toner supplied to the Developing Assembly uniformly in the longitudinal direction to form an even toner layer in the Developing Cylinder. Hopper Unit



Toner Feed Screw Magnet Roller



Toner Container



Toner Supply Motor M10



Sub Hopper Toner Stirrer



Buffer Toner Sensor 2 (TS03)



Buffer Unit Toner Feed Motor M28



CL05



Buffer Toner Sensor 1 (TS02) Developing Toner Sensor (TS01)



UN8 Main Controller PCB2



UN1 DC Controller PCB



Title Supply to the Hopper



Description



Developing Assembly



Video count value



Supply timing



Operation of the host machine



Toner in the Toner Container When both the Buffer Toner Sensor 1 (TS02) and the Buffer Toner Sensor 2 is supplied to the Buffer Unit. (TS03) detect absence of toner, the Toner Supply Motor (M10) is driven. When the Buffer Toner Sensor 1 (TS02) or the Buffer Toner Sensor 2 (TS03) detects presence of toner, the Toner Supply Motor (M10) is stopped. When the Buffer Toner Sensor 2 (TS03) detects absence of toner, the Toner Supply Motor (M10) is driven. When the Buffer Toner Sensor 1 (TS02) detects presence of toner, the Toner Supply Motor (M10) is stopped whereas the Toner Feed Motor (M28) is driven.



139



2. Technology Title



Description



Supply timing



Operation of the host machine



Supply to the Develop- Developer in the Buffer Unit When the Developing To- Drive the Toner Feed Motor (M28) and turn ON the ing Assembly is supplied to the Developing ner Sensor (TS01) detects Magnet Roller Clutch (CL05). Assembly. absence of toner Drive the Toner Feed Motor (M28) and connect the Magnet Roller Clutch (CL05). Toner is supplied intermittently until the Developing Toner Sensor (TS01) detects presence of toner. The supply amount is determined based on the output value of the video count of the image (image duty).



NOTE: The Buffer Toner Sensor1 (TS02) detects amount of toner around the Buffer Inlet. If toner is supplied excessively from the Sub Hopper to the Buffer Unit (if there are toner clusters), toner in the Buffer may overflow. If the Buffer Toner Sensor1 (TS02) detects presence of toner, regardless of presence/absence detection of toner by the Buffer Toner Sensor2 (TS03), the Toner Supply Motor (M10) is stopped so that toner supply to the Buffer is stopped to prevent toner leak.



• Toner supply to the Developing Assembly COPIER > FUNCTION > INSTALL > TONER-S



E020-0000: Developing Assembly toner absence error E020-0001: Error in Developing Toner Sensor (TS01) connection detection E020-0002: Error in Buffer Toner Sensor 1 (TS02) connection detection E020-0003: Error in Buffer Toner Sensor 2 (TS03) connection detection E020-0004: Error in Magnet Roller Clutch connection detection E020-0020: Error in Developing Toner Sensor Cleaning Scraper displacement (absence of toner) E020-0021: Error in Developing Toner Sensor Cleaning Scraper displacement (presence of toner)



● Toner Level Detection Purpose To display the life/remaining days to notify the Toner Container replacement timing. The life and remaining days can be seen in the following menu or service mode and whether to display/hide can be specified in the following service mode. Consumption confirmation Control Panel : Status Monitor > Consumables / Others > Check Consumables



Control Panel display example Remote UI : Status Monitor / Cancel > Consumables



140



2. Technology



Remote UI display example Service Mode : COPIER > COUNTER > LIFE > TONER-K Status name



Low remaining toner in container



Toner Container Emp- Toner Container / Bufty fer Empty



Toner Status



Toner Container: Low toner remaining Buffer: 100% Alarm code name



Toner prior notification alarm *1 *4



Toner low alarm *5



Toner Container: 0% Buffer: 100%



Toner Container: 0% Buffer: 0%



Toner Bottle empty alarm -



Alarm codes



10-0020



10-0001



Message



None



Toner is low. ReplaceReplace the toner carReplace the toner carment is not yet needed. *2 tridge. (Replacement not tridge. (Job is stopped.) yet needed.)



10-404



None



Host machine operation Replacement not yet needed. after the message is displayed



Host machine is stopped.



Detection timing



After approx. 900 sheets have been printed by starting the toner supply count since an empty toner warning *6



Depends on the service mode setting *1



Detected to (location) Alarm log storage location ALARM-2 Whether the Toner Container can be removed



Depends on the service When the Buffer Toner mode setting *3 Sensor 2 (TS03) detects absence of toner even after performing a toner supply operation



Toner supply count Not Available *7



Buffer Toner Sensor 2 (TS03)



Toner supply count



ALARM-2



-



Available



*1 : The detection timing can be changed in the following service modes (setting of the Toner advance notice alarm notification timing). The alarm can also be set to be disabled. • COPIER > OPTION > PM-DLV-D > TONER-K *2 : Whether to display this message can be changed in the following service mode (setting of the ON/OFF of toner preparation message). • COPIER > OPTION > PM-PRE-M > TONER-K *3 : The detection timing can be changed in the following service modes (setting of the days left before the Toner Preparation Warning). • COPIER > OPTION >PM-MSG-D > TONER-K



141



2. Technology *4 : After an advance notice alarm is sent, the next advance notice alarm will not be sent until the replacement completion alarm is sent. *5 : The message is generated by UGW and displayed on the UGW portal screen. This is not displayed on this machine. *6 : The exact number of printed sheets differs depending on the usage environment/usage conditions.



Service Mode To display the life value and the number of days left of Toner (Bk). COPIER > COUNTER > LIFE >TONER-K Display/hide Toner (Bk) preparation warning COPIER > OPTION > PM-PRM > TONER-K Set Toner (Bk) prior alarm notice timing COPIER > OPTION > PM-DLV-D > TONER-K Set number of days left before Toner (Bk) preparation warning COPIER > OPTION > PM-MSG-D > TONER-K Display/hide of Toner Container counter COPIER > OPTION > USER > TNRB-SW



Alarm code Toner Low (Black) alarm 10-0001 Toner (Bk) prior notification alarm 10-0020 Toner (Bk) empty alarm 10-0404



■ Waste Toner Feed Unit ● Waste Toner Container Detection Presence of the Waste Toner Container is detected by the Waste Toner Container Sensor (PS100). The Waste Toner Container Sensor (PS100) is turned ON when the Waste Toner Container is pushed into the host machine.



142



2. Technology



Waste Toner Container Sensor(PS100)



● Waste Toner Feed Assembly Overview Waste toner occurring in the Drum Cleaning Unit and ETB Cleaning Unit are fed to the Waste Toner Container. M02



Drum Cleaning Unit



ETB cleaning Unit



Waste Toner Feed Screw Waste Toner Full Sensor (TS04) Waste Toner Container



Waste Toner



143



2. Technology



Control description This machine performs the following controls. • "Black band control" to maintain the drum cleaning performance • "Low duty ejection control" to maintain the density stability when continuously outputting low duty images Therefore the criterion of the full Waste Toner Container varies according to the environment and the image duty as shown in the following table. Temperature/ Moisture conHumidity tent 0 to less than 1.0 23 deg C / 5%



0.86



23 deg C / 10%



1.73



23 deg C / 30%



5.8



23 deg C / 50%



8.9



27 deg C / 70%



15



28 deg C / 75%



18



30 deg C / 80%



21.6



Image duty (%) 1.0 to less than 2.0



250,000 pages



2.0 to less than 3.0



1,000,000 pages



100,000 pages 250,000 pages



3.0 to less than 4.0



4.0 to less than 5.0



5.0 to 6.0



800,000 pages 700,000 pages 600,000 pages



600,000 pages



500,000 pages



120,000 pages 150,000 pages 300,000 pages 500,000 pages 100,000 pages



150,000 pages 200,000 pages



The Drive Gear escapes when a certain load is applied to the Waste Toner Feeding Screw and an error is displayed after the Host Machine has been stopped.



Error Code Waste Toner Lock detection error 013-0001: At power-on 013-0002: While the Developing Assembly is driven



Service Mode Low duty ejection threshold value setting COPIER > OPTION > BODY > IMG-DEV > LWDTYADJ ON/OFF of low duty ejection COPIER > OPTION > BODY > IMG-DEV > LWDTY-SW



● Waste Toner Full Level Detection Purpose The life/remaining days are detected to notify the Waste Toner Container replacement timing. Life and remaining days of Waste Toner Container can be checked by the following menu and service mode. Consumption rate check Menu (Control Panel): Status Monitor/Cancel > Consumables > Check Item Number Menu (Remote UI): Status Monitor/Cancel > Consumables Service Mode: COPIER > COUNTER > LIFE



144



2. Technology Waste Toner Container status notification Detection description



Waste Toner Container advance notice alarm*1



Waste Toner Container preparation alarm*2



Waste Toner Container full level



Waste Toner Container replacement completion alarm



Detection tim- The number of remaining ing days before the Waste Toner Container becomes full has reached the setting value.*1



The number of remaining days before the Waste Toner Container becomes full has reached the setting value.*3



When 100,000 pages in terms of video counter (5.0 to 6.0% duty) have been printed from the Waste Toner Container preparation alarm



When the Waste Toner Sensor PCB (UN75) detected absence of Waste Toner while "preparation warning" or "full" is detected.*4



Detected to (location)



Waste Toner Full Sensor (TS04)



Waste Toner Full Sensor (TS04)



Waste toner counter



Waste Toner Full Sensor (TS04)



Message



-



Prepare a new Waste Toner When service replacement is Container. (Printing can be set: "The waste toner containcontinued.) er is full. (Call service representative.)" When user replacement is set, "Replace the waste toner container." (Host machine is stopped.) *5



Host machine Continuous printing is available operation after displaying the message



Host machine is stopped.



Continuous printing is available



Alarm Code



11-0001



11-0100



11-0010



-



Alarm Code Waste Toner Container full level 11-0001 Waste Toner Container preparation warning 11-0010 Waste Toner Container replacement completion alarm 11-0100 Waste Toner Container high consumption alarm 11-F010



Service Mode Display/Hide the Waste Toner Container Preparation Warning COPIER > OPTION > PM-PRE-M > WST-TNR Set days left before the Waste Toner Container Preparation Warning COPIER > OPTION > PM-MSG-D > WST-TNR



*1. The notification timing and display/hide for the Waste Toner Container Advance Notice Alarm can be set by the following service mode. COPIER > OPTION > PM-DLV-D > WST-TNR *2. Whether to display/hide the Waste Toner Container preparation warning can be specified in the following service mode. COPIER > OPTION > PM-PRE-M > WST-TNR *3. The remaining days to display the Waste Toner Container Preparation Warning message can be set by the following service mode. COPIER > OPTION > PM-MSG-D > WST-TNR *4. The parts counter is automatically cleared; however, it is not cleared at replacement while "preparation warning" or "full" is not detected or at replacement when the power is OFF. In that case, the following service mode can be executed to manually clear. COPIER > COUNTER > DRBL-1 > WST-TNR Note that to manually clear, all following conditions must be fulfilled. • A Waste Toner Container is available • The sensor is not detecting waste toner full. *5. Whether to display the replacement procedure on the Control Panel when the Waste Toner Container is full is set in the following service mode. COPIER > OPTION > USER > W-TN-DSP



145



2. Technology Set the Waste Toner Container prior notification alarm timing COPIER > OPTION > PM-DLV-D > WST-TNR Check High Consumption Alarm Send Status COPIER > DISPLAY > MISC > STC-REC



● Waste Toner Feed Screw Lock Detection To detect lock state of the Waste Toner Feed Screw. The drive by the Developing Motor (M02) is transmitted to the Screw Gear, which makes the Waste Toner Screw rotate. When this Screw Gear becomes unable to rotate, it slides sideways by the transmitted drive force. The Screw Gear fails to rotate once the Waste Toner Screw is locked; therefore, the transmitted drive force makes the Screw Gear slide sideways. The Waste Toner Lock Detection Switch (SW05) is placed by the side of the Screw Gear and SW05 is pressed when the Screw Gear is moved. With this mechanism, it is detected that the Waste Toner Screw is locked.



E013-0001 Error in Waste Toner Lock Detection Connector disconnection E013-0002 Error in Waste Toner Feed Screw Lock detection



■ Image Stabilization Control ● Overview This control prevents image failure due to change of the environment or deterioration of the Photosensitive Drum to ensure stabilized print. Laser Power(Lp)



Primary current (Ip)



Primary Charging Wire



Laser



Laser Power(Lp)



Potential Sensor



Developing Cylinder



Drum surface potential



Potential control



Developing bias (Vdc)



Laser APC control



DC Controller PCB



Reader



PASCAL PASCAL LUT Main Controller PCB2



146



2. Technology



● Execution Timing Execution items for image stabilization control differ according to the environment and condition of image formation parts. Following shows the control items at each sequence. *: 70 deg C or lower in the fixing temperature, **: 60 sec.70 deg C or lower in the fixing temperature, ***: Fixing temperature remaining high at power OFF/ON Control



Full Potential Control



Standard duration (second) Approx.



De- 8 scription



Timing Warm-up rotation



Initial Paper Interruption rota- intertion val



At Nor- Power Door Jam star mal OFF/O open retup startN cov* up *** ery ** Yes



-



-



-



-



Forcible in- Low duterruption at ty ejec2,000 sheets tion



(Yes) * 2



-



-



-



Last rotation



Arbitrary



Normal



PASCAL



(Yes) * 1



Yes



Re- *1 Operation Criteria mark - Last rotation after the first job right after startup first time for the day takes 10 minutes or longer s - Last rotation after processing 1,500 sheets or more following the last potential control execution - Last rotation after the first job following 90 minutes or more elapsed from the last potential control execution *2 Operation Criteria - Every initial rotation for the job that start within 10 minutes after density judgment at normal startup mode (60 seconds startup) APC Correction at Paper Interval



De- 0.2 scription



APC Control at Warm-up Rotation



De- 2 scription



APC Correction at Last Rotation



De- 2 scription



Drum Idle Rotation at First in the Day



De- 60 scription



-



-



-



-



-



-



Yes*



-



-



-



-



-



-



-



(Yes) * 4



-



-



-



-



-



Re- *3 At every 20-sheet interval mark s -



-



Re- *4 Operation Criteria mark - Initial rotation after the first job following 60 minutes or more elapsed from the last job completion s -



-



-



-



-



-



-



-



-



(Yes) * 5



-



Re- *5 Operation Criteria mark - Last rotation after the first job following 30 minutes or more elapsed from the last job completion s Yes



-



-



-



-



-



-



-



-



-



-



-



-



-



-



-



-



-



(Yes) * 6



-



(Yes) * 6



-



Remark s



Charging De- 30 Wire scripCleaning tion



Re- *6 Operation Criteria mark - Last rotation after 1,500 sheets or more processed following the last Charging Wire cleaning execution s - Forcibly interruption at 2,000 sheets or more processed following the last Charging Wire cleaning execution Idle Rotation at First in the Day



De- 15 to 30 scription



Yes



Yes



Yes



Yes



Yes



Re- To stabilize toner toribology after long idle time mark s



147



-



-



-



-



-



-



2. Technology Control



Standard duration (second) Approx.



Low Duty De- Ejection scription



Timing Warm-up rotation



Initial Paper Interruption rota- intertion val



At Nor- Power Door Jam star mal OFF/O open retup startN cov* up *** ery ** -



-



-



-



-



Last rotation



Arbitrary



Normal



PASCAL



Yes



Yes



-



Forcible in- Low duterruption at ty ejec2,000 sheets tion



-



-



-



Re- To prevent toner deterioration during continuous Low DUTY image printing mark s White Band Control



De- * 7 scription



-



-



-



-



-



-



-



-



-



Yes



-



-



-



-



-



-



-



-



Re- *7 When the predefined sheets were printed mark s Idle Rotation at First in the Day (H/H environment)



De- 15 (30) scription



Contrast Potential Correction at Startup



De- 1 scription



Disengagement of Transfer Unit



De- 1 scription



Weak Bias Control at Leading Edge



Description



Blank Band Control



De- 10 scription



(Yes )*8



Yes



-



-



Re- *8 Only when the environment is in high temperature/humidity mark s -



Yes



-



-



-



-



-



-



-



-



-



Yes



Yes



Yes



Yes



Yes



Yes



-



Yes



Yes



Yes



Yes



Remark s



Re- At jam recovery/after patch generation/at job completion mark s -



-



-



-



-



Yes



Yes



-



-



-



-



×



×



×



×



×



×



×



× *9



△ *10



×



×



Remark s



Re- *9 Operation Criteria mark At last rotation after the predefined sheets processed following the last black band control execution (2,000 sheets in s default) *10 Operation Criteria If the operation criteria are met during low duty ejection control, the control is synchronized to also perform this control.



● Potential Control Perform the following controls according to the deterioration level of the Photosensitive Drum and the environmental change. 1. VD control The primary current value (Ip) is determined to become the target dark area potential (VD). 2. VL control The laser power (LP) is determined to become the target bright area potential (VL).



148



2. Technology 3. Vdc control Developing bias is determined by adding the "fogging removal potential (Vback)" (based on the environment) to the bright area potential (VL).



Execution timing • Initial rotation except the following environment after Power-On first time for the day (the fixing roller is 70 deg C or less.) Environment: The room temperature is less than 17 deg C, the moisture content is 13 g or more. • Initial rotation After Power-On at the 2D shading ON • Every initial rotation for the job that start within 10 minutes after density judgment at normal startup mode (60 seconds startup) • Forcible interruption when the accumulated value of the paper interval VL correction value exceeds 10V within 10 minutes after density judgment at normal startup mode (60 seconds startup). • Last rotation after processing 1,500 sheets or more following the last potential control execution • Last rotation after the first job right after startup first time for the day takes 10 minutes or long • Last rotation after the first job following 90 minutes or more elapsed from the last potential control execution NOTE: At normal startup mode (60 sec. startup), simple potential control is executed to shorten the startup time.



1. VD control 1. The primary current (Ip_Target_Pre), which has been determined in the last potential control*1, is applied and the Potential Sensor measures drum surface potential (VD_Pre). *1: At the time of installation, the primary current adjusted in the factory is applied. 2. The drum surface potential (VD_Pre) and the target potential (VD_Target) are compared to apply the primary current (α x Ip_Target_Pre), which makes the target potential (VD_Target) to be in range between the drum surface potential (VD_Pre) and the drum surface potential (VDα_Pre), and then the drum surface potential (VDα_Pre) at that moment is read. 3. The 2 points of measured dark area potentials are connected with a straight line to calculate dark area potential characteristics. 4. Based on the obtained dark area potential characteristics, the primary current (Ip_Target) is calculated, which can obtain the target potential (VD_Target). 5. The calculated primary current is applied and this operation is repeated until the drum surface potential (VDm) is within the range of the target potential +/- 5V. Potential measurement is executed up to 8 times and correction is executed up to 8 times. Voltage(V)



Voltage(V)



VD α_Pre VD_Target



5)



4)



VD_Targets9 VDm



3)



VD_Pre



1)



2)



Current(A)



Current(A) Ip_Target_Pre α ×Ip_Target_Pre Ip_Target



Ip_Target



[When the drum surface potential (VDm) is not as follows: -5V Settings/Registration > Adjustment/Maintenance > Adjust Image Quality > Auto Adjust Gradation Execution of auto gradation adjustment



Potential control DC Controller PCB Send data of test print Main Controller PCB 2 Output test print DC Controller PCB Read test print Reader Density data output Main Controller PCB 2 Generate gradation table ( PASCALγLUT ) Main Controller PCB 2 NO



3-sheet output for test print? YES End



NOTE: Since Inbox images are binary, gradation adjustment cannot be performed after being stored in Inbox. Gradation adjustment is performed on the rasterized data before they are stored in Inbox. When the stored image is output after a long time, gradation adjustment is not performed on the basis of the environment at the time of output, so appropriate printing results may not be able to be obtained. If the environment changes with time, it is advisable to store the data into Inbox just before output.



■ Other Control ● Startup Contrast Potential (Vcont) Correction Contrast potential (Vcont) is corrected to keep a constant density and prevent light image caused by reduced toner charging amount in an energy-saving environment. NOTE: Temperature in the Developing Assembly is reduced because the Drum Heater is turned OFF at sleep state in an energy-saving environment. This operation increases moisture content in the Developing Assembly and reduces toner charging amount.



Execution timing At the time of the normal startup mode (in the case that the two dimension shading control is OFF)



152



2. Technology NOTE: This control is not executed when the two dimension shading control is ON because the Drum Heater is turned ON.



Control description 1. At the time of normal image formation, contrast potential (Vcontα) based on the environment table is added to the developing bias (Vdc (full potential control value)) determined by the full potential control to correct developing bias. Vdc=Vdc (potential control value) –Vcontα 2. The corrected contrast potential (Vcont) is reset (making Vcontα 0) when the next full potential correction is executed. Potential changes depending on laser emission



㼂㼐 㼂㼐㼏 㻔㻲㼡㼘㼘㻌㻼㼛㼠㼑㼚㼠㼕㼍㼘 㻯㼛㼚㼠㼞㼛㼘㻕



㼂㼏㼛㼚㼠



Vd : Dark area potential VL : Light area potential Vdc : Developing DC potential Vcont : Contrast potential Vback : Fogging removal potential 㼂㼏㼛㼚㼠䃐



㼂㼐㼏 㼂㼎㼍㼏㼗 㼂㻸



● Laser APC Control This control corrects laser output control value to prevent change of surface potential by laser output.



Correction type A. Between-sheet APC control: to keep constant bright area potential (VL) without reducing productivity during continuous jobs. B. Initial rotation APC to determine VL according to the laser and drum temperature characteristics. C. Last rotation APC control: to determine VL according to the laser and drum temperature characteristics.



Execution timing A. Between-sheet APC control: at every paper interval of a job. B. Initial rotation APC control: to be executed during initial rotation of the first job after the machine has been left unattached for 60 minutes or more since execution of the last job. C. Last rotation APC control: to be executed during last rotation of the first job after the machine has been left unattached for 30 minutes or more since execution of the last job.



Control description A. Between-sheet APC control 1. Bright area potential is measured at every sheet interval by the Potential Sensor. 2. Average sheet interval VL_ave of the measured paper interval VL potential (for 20 sheet intervals) is calculated. 3. Laser power correction value is determined by the difference between the measured potential VL (measured at the time of potential control) and the average paper interval VL_ave in addition to the last bright area potential characteristics (gradient (γ)). Correction formula LP_after=LP_before- (VL-Vl_ave) × γ LP_after: laser power after correction LP_before: laser power before correction VL: measured VL determined at the time of potential control VL_ave: average paper interval VL_ave γ: gradient (control coefficient): gradient reciprocal of LP_VI straight line in the range including VL target



153



2. Technology



Bright area potential characteristics( ) VL (V) VL0re



Procedure 3)



VL



Procedure 1), 2)



Lp_before



Lp_after



B. Initial rotation APC control 1. Bright area potential VL is measured during initial rotation to correct laser power. The primary current value and developing bias value are fi 2. Correction is executed by following the same way as between-sheet APC control. C. Last rotation APC control This correction follows the same way as initial rotation APC control



● Two Dimension Shading Control Uneven potential on the Photosensitive Drum is corrected by laser exposure.



Execution timing At the time of laser exposure (only when the two dimension shading control is ON. Default: OFF)



Control description 1. Potential data on the Drum surface is saved in EEPROM on the DC Controller PCB in the format supporting two-dimension coordinate (measured when the Drum was manufactured). 2. When the power is turned ON, EEPROM data is compared to RAM data. If there is any difference in the data, the EEPROM data is stored in the backup RAM. NOTE: Whether the control is enabled can be checked with COPIER>DISPLAY>2D-SHD>2DSTS. If 0 is displayed, check DRM-LOT number. When 0 is displayed, it means that the drum has not been registered; thus, execute FUNCTION/2D-SHADE/2D-READ to register the drum.



3. Potential data on the Drum surface is sent to the image ASIC and the image data is synchronized with the Drum home position, and then the uneven potential data is converted into light intensity to be sent to the Laser Driver PCB. 4. The Laser Driver PCB is exposed to remove uneven potential on the Drum. NOTE: For Drum provided as a service part, EEPROM which stores potential unevenness data is included. Therefore, the EEPROM needs to be replaced when the Drum is replaced. As the life of the Drum advances, uneven density can occur when the halftone image is output despite correction of the drum uneven potential. In such a case, uneven density can be corrected by specifying a particular position in service mode. See Troubleshooting for procedure. FCOT (First Copy Time) is reduced to detect home position of the Drum by turning ON the two dimension shading.



154



2. Technology DC Controller PCB CPU



Calculation



EEPROM



Drum potential uneven data



Backup RAM



Image ASIC



Adjusted value



Laser Driver PCB



Service Mode



Drum Home Position Sensor



Drum



• Display of 2D shading ON/OFF (Lv.2) COPIER > DISPLAY > 2D-SHADE > 2D-STS • Display of Drum Lot number COPIER > DISPLAY > 2D-SHADE > DRM-LOT • Display of checksum calculation result (Lv.2) COPIER > DISPLAY > 2D-SHADE > CHK-SUM • 2D shading horizontal scan correction COPIER > FUNCTION > 2D-SHADE > M-LINE1, M-LINE2 • 2D shading pattern output COPIER > FUNCTION > 2D-SHADE > SHD-P1 to 3 • Read 2D shading ROM COPIER > FUNCTION > 2D-SHADE > 2D-READ



● White Band Control Oppositely-charged toner on the Developing Sleeve is forcibly applied on the Drum and collected by the Cleaning Unit. NOTE: Large-grained toner is less likely to be charged compared to small-grained toner and can be positively charged (opposite charging) in rare cases. Such oppositely-charged toner fails to be developed but remains on the Developing Sleeve, which causes image failure.



Execution timing Last rotation after every job



Control description Developing bias Vdc is increased once the image trailing edge passes through the developing position.



155



2. Technology Vback is increased and the oppositely-charged toner on the Developing Cylinder is moved onto the Drum.



• Reverse toner forcible eject: blank band (Lv.2) COPIER > FUNCTION > MISC-P > WB • Setting of blank band ejection time (Lv.2) COPIER > ADJUST > MISC> TBSIS-WB



● Black Band Control This control maintains the cleaning performance by providing sufficient amount of toner to the edge of the Cleaning Blade. NOTE: Friction coefficient between the Blade and the Drum is increased unless sufficient amount of toner is applied on the Drum Cleaning Blade, which causes ride-up of the Blade. Although toner is properly applied to the center of the Blade by normal cleaning operation, toner is supplied insufficiently to the edge of the Blade.



Execution timing • Last rotation after the specified number of sheets*1 has been fed since execution of the last black band control. • Paper interval after the specified number of sheets*1 has been fed since execution of the last black band control. *1: This value can be changed in service mode. Timing



Moisture content



Last rotation



12g or more



Interval (sheets) 1,500



Paper interval



2,000



Control description 1. Black band described below is created on the Drum. 2. Black band is scraped by the Drum Cleaning Blade and toner is properly applied on the Cleaning Blade at that moment. 3. This control turns off the transfer high voltage and makes the Transfer Belt disengaged so that image is not applied on the Transfer Belt. 72 mm



152 mm Center



Drum



Black Band



152 mm



72 mm 2098mm



• To set the paper interval to output black band for preventing flip of the Cleaning Blade. COPIER > OPTION > IMG-DEV > BB-CNT • Set black band length for cleaning COPIER > OPTION > CLEANING > CLN-ADJ • ON/OFF of cleaning black band sequence COPIER > OPTION > CLEANING > CLN-SW • Toner forcible eject (black band) COPIER > FUNCTION > MISC-P > BB



● Low Duty Discharge Control In the case of continuous output of low duty image, this control consumes toner at non-image area to maintain the density stability.



156



2. Technology



Execution timing While the video count for every page is accumulated, in the case that the average image duty is less than the threshold*1, the ongoing job is interrupted at the time of last rotation of a job or the ongoing job is interrupting in the middle of the job to discharge the toner according to the average image duty. *1: Threshold is determined by the following environment table. The value can be changed in service mode Moisture content



Temperature/Humidity



Threshold



0.86



23deg C/5%



0.8%



1.73



23deg C/10%



0.8%



5.8



23deg C/30%



0.8%



8.9



23deg C/50%



0.8%



15



23deg C/70%



1.6%



18



28deg C/80%



2.0%



21.6



30deg C/80%



2.4%



Control description 1. Video count on every page is retrieved. 2. The obtained video count is converted into A4 size and the value is accumulated. 3. Once the accumulated value reaches the threshold, the following patch is created on the Drum to discharge deteriorated toner.



• ON/OFF of low duty ejection COPIER > OPTION > IMG-DEV > LWDTY-SW • Set low duty ejection threshold value COPIER > OPTION > IMG-DEV > LWDTYADJ



157



2. Technology



Fixing System Overview ■ Characteristics 1. IH heating method This machine uses the IH heating method. This method enables to shorten the warm-up time and high-speed printing.



Exciting Coil



Fixing Roller



Core



Paper



Pressure roller



Supplying high frequency current to the coil inside the Heater Unit generates a high frequency magnetic field around the coil. By this magnetic field, an eddy current (induction current) runs through the Fixing Roller and the Fixing Roller generates electricity by itself.



Flux High-frequency current



Magnetic material (Ferrite Core)



Coil Metal



Exothermic heat Eddy current



2. Making the Fixing Assembly as a unit Maintenance performance has been improved by separating the Fixing Unit from the Host Machine to be assigned as a unit. 3. Saving energy Improved toner allows reduction of fixing temperature that enables less energy consumption.



■ Specifications Item



Function/method



Fixing method



IH fixing method



Fixing Heater



IH heater



158



2. Technology Item



Function/method



Fixing Roller



O/D: 40mm



Pressure Roller



O/D: 38mm



Control temperature



(Japanese model) • imageRUNNER ADVANCE 6575/6565: To be reduced accordingly from 185 deg C (17 deg or more of environment temperature at standby) To be reduced accordingly from 190 deg C (less than 17 deg C of environment temperature at standby) • imageRUNNER ADVANCE 6555: To be reduced accordingly from 180 deg C (17 deg or more of environment temperature at standby) To be reduced accordingly from 190 deg C (less than 17 deg C of environment temperature at standby) (Non-Japanese model) • To be reduced accordingly from 190 deg C (17 deg or more of environment temperature at standby) • To be reduced accordingly from 195 deg C (less than 17 deg C of environment temperature at standby)



Fixing drive control



Switching the print speed and warm-up speed (low speed)



Thermistor



Main Thermistor (contact type) The center of the Fixing Roller, Reciprocating width: 12mm Temperature control, Failure detection Sub Thermistor (contact type)The rear of the Fixing Roller, No reciprocation Failure detection Shutter Thermistor(contact type) The rear of the Fixing Roller, No reciprocation Failure detection,Shutter Control



Thermal Switch



1 pc. (non-contact type)



Protective function



Yes (detection by the Thermistor and the Thermal Switch)



Separation mechanism



Upper Separation Claw: contact type, Reciprocating width: 3mm



Static Eliminator



Fixing Roller/ Pressure Roller/Shutter



Cleaning mechanism



Fixing Cleaning Web



Inlet guide height control



No



Bias application



No



Control to prevent temperature rise at the edge



control of heating area by flux blocking plate (shutter)



Disengagement mechanism



No



idle rotation during standby



Yes



Other controls



See “Controls” described later.



159



2. Technology



■ Parts configuration ● Cross-section view Fixing Cleaning Web takeup roller



Fixing Cleaning Web feed roller



Fixing Cleaning Web



Fixing Cleaning Web roller



Heater Unit



Fixing Roller Static eliminator



Shutter Static eliminator2



Shutter Static eliminator1



Upper separation claw



coil, core Fixing Roller Fixing inlet guide



Pressure roller Static eliminator



Pressure roller



Parts name



Function/method



Fixing Roller



Heating toner and paper



Pressure Roller



Pressing and feeding paper



Heater Unit Coil Core



IH Heater To heat the Fixing Roller



Fixing Cleaning Web



To remove residual toner on the surface of the Fixing Roller



Fixing Cleaning Web Roller Fixing Cleaning Web Take-up Roller Fixing Cleaning Web Feed Roller Upper Separation Claw



To separate paper from the Fixing Roller (to prevent paperwrapping) Reciprocating width: 3mm



Fixing Inlet Guide



Paper Feed Guide to the Fixing Assembly



Fixing Roller Static Eliminator



To prevent leak, static offset and noise



Pressure Roller Static Eliminator Shutter Static Eliminator



160



2. Technology



■ Thermistor, Thermal Switch Flux blocking plate (Shutter)



Fixing Sub Thermistor 1 (THM020) Fixing Sub Thermistor 2 (THM030)



Shutter Gear



Thermal Switch1(TP010) Fixing Main Thermistor(THM010) Fixing Roller



Fixing Shutter Home Position Sensor(PS53)



Code



Parts name



Function/method



THM010



Fixing Main Thermistor



Contact type temperature control, failure detection



THM020



Fixing Sub Thermistor 1



Contact type failure detection,Shutter operation temperature detection



THM030



Fixing Sub Thermistor 2



Contact type failure detection,Shutter operation temperature detection



TP010



Thermal Switch1



Non-Contact type (200 -/+ 5 deg C) To prevent abnormal temperature rise



PS53



Fixing Shutter Home Position Sensor



to detect shutter position



■ Drive configuration Fixing Cleaning Web Level Sensor(PS45) Fixing Cleaning Web Drive Solenoid SL09



M15



M03



Fixing Shutter Motor



Fixing Motor



Fixing Toenail Jam Sensor(PS04) Fixing Outlet Sensor(PS52)



161



Fixing Inlet Sensor(PS51) Fixing Shutter Home Position Sensor(PS53)



2. Technology Fixing Outlet Fixing Toenail Sensor(PS52) Jam Sensor(PS04) Fixing Cleaning Web Drive Solenoid(SL09) Fixing Shutter Motor(M15) Fixing Inlet Sensor(PS51) Fixing Motor (M03)



Fixing Cleaning Web Level Sensor(PS45) Fixing Shutter Home Position Sensor(PS53)



Code



Parts name



Function/method



M03



Fixing Motor



To control drive of the Fixing Motor



M15



Fixing Shutter Motor



To control drive of the Shutter



SL09



Fixing Cleaning Web Drive Solenoid



To control drive of the Cleaning Web



PS04



Fixing Toenail Jam Sensor



To prevent scratches on Fixing Roller due to jam



PS45



Fixing Cleaning Web Level Sensor



To detect length of the Cleaning Web



PS51



Fixing Inlet Sensor



To detect paper wrapping and stationary



PS52



Fixing Outlet Sensor



PS53



Fixing Shutter Home Position Sensor



to detect shutter position



Controls ■ Overview &OHDQLQJ:HE OHQJWKGHWHFWLRQ &OHDQLQJ:HE GULYHFRQWURO



7KHUPLVWRU UHFLSURFDWLQJFRQWURO



)L[LQJWHPSHUDWXUH FRQWURO



8SSHU6HSDUDWLRQ&ODZ UHFLSURFDWLQJFRQWURO



7KHFRQWUROWRSUHYHQW WHPSHUDWXUHULVH DWWKHHGJH 6KXWWHU&RQWURO



&RQWUROWRSUHYHQW SDSHUZUDSSLQJ



NO



'RZQVHTXHQFH FRQWURO



Control/Function



3URWHFWLYHIXQFWLRQ



Overview



1



Fixing temperature control



To control temperature of the Fixing Roller to prevent fixing failure



2



Down sequence control



In the case of large difference between the target temperature and the detected temperature, this control drops productivity to prevent fixing failure and image failure.



3



Paper anti-wrapping control



To prevent failure of the Fixing Assembly caused by wrapping of paper around the Fixing Roller and the Pressure Roller.



162



2. Technology NO



Control/Function



Overview



4



Shutter Control



To control the shutter position in order to prevent the temperature rising at the edge.



5



Thermistor reciprocating control



To prevent scar on the Fixing Roller by the Main Thermistor, this control moves the Main Thermistor back and forth.



6



Upper Separation Claw reciprocating control To prevent scar on the Fixing Roller by the Upper Separation Claw, this control moves the Upper Separation Claw back and forth.



7



Cleaning Web drive control



To prevent fixing offset, this control removes residual toner on the surface of the Fixing Roller.



8



Cleaning Web level detection



To detect level of the Cleaning Web.



9



Protective function



To detect error by Thermistor. To detect error by Thermoswitch.



■ Fixing temperature control ● Overview To prevent fixing failure, temperature control of the Fixing Roller is executed with the following timing. NO



Temperature control



Overview



1



Temperature control during startup



To control temperature to reach the standby temperature. To be switched from the following 4 modes according to the environment temperature/ humidity and the temperature of the Fixing Roller: • Normal startup mode • Low temperature environment startup mode • High humidity environment startup mode • Recovery mode



2



Temperature control during standby



To control temperature so that printing can be performed immediately after receiving the print request signal



3



Temperature control during printing



To control temperature by the temperature table according to the paper type and the paper basis weight.



4



Other temperature adjustments



Following shows other temperature adjustments • To control temperature for reducing power consumption.



● Temperature control during startup Temperature is controlled to reach the standby temperature.



163



2. Technology 㻤㻜



+LJKKXPLGLW\HQYLURQPHQW VWDUWXSPRGH



(QYLURQPHQWKXPLGLW\



㻣㻜 㻢㻜 㻡㻜



/RZWHPSHUDWXUHHQYLURQPHQW VWDUWXSPRGH



㻠㻜



1RUPDOVWDUWXSPRGH



㻟㻜 㻞㻜 㻝㻜 㻜 㻡



㻝㻜



㻝㻡



㻞㻜



㻞㻡



㻟㻜



㻟㻡



(QYLURQPHQWWHPSHUDWXUHGHJ&



In the case of reaching the target temperature within 30 seconds due to quick temperature rise of the Fixing Roller, the target temperature is maintained to be shifted to the ready state once the potential control is completed. Conditions



Target temperature



Environment tempera- Environment humidity Fixing Roller temperature ture 17 deg C or more



Low humidity environ70 deg C or less ment(within 13g of absolute moisture content)



Target temperature reaching time



185℃ 30 sec (Japanese model imageRUNNER ADVANCE 6555 : 180 deg C)



NOTE: In the case of selecting the fixing improvement mode in the following service mode, the machine does not enter the startup state for 30 seconds and waits until the specified time. (Lv.2) COPIER > OPTION > BODY > FSPD-S1 : Selection of fixing improvement mode



After it reaches the target temperature, the target temperature is maintained until completion of the potential control, and then the machine enters ready state. Conditions



Target temperature



Environment tempera- Environment humidity Fixing Roller temperature ture Less than 17 deg C



-



70 deg C or less



195 deg C



Target temperature reaching time 75 sec(reference value)



After it reaches the target temperature, the target temperature is maintained until completion of developing idle rotation as well as completion of the potential control, and then the machine enters ready state. Conditions



Target temperature



Target temperature reaching time



185 deg C (imageRUNNER ADVANCE 6555 Japanese model:180 deg C)



75sec (reference value)



Environment tempera- Environment humidity Fixing Roller temperature ture -



High humidity environment(13g or more of absolute moisture content)



70 deg C or less



The machine enters ready state once it reaches the target temperature.



164



2. Technology Conditions



Target temperature



Environment tempera- Environment humidity Fixing Roller temperature ture -



-



70 deg C or more



Target temperature reaching time



Environment Tempera30 sec or less ture: 17 deg C or more Japanese: 180 deg C (imageRUNNER ADVANCE 6555: 175 deg C) Non Japanese: 185 deg C Environment Temperature: less than 17 deg C Japanese: 190 deg C Non Japanese: 195 deg C



● Temperature Control for Standby To provide measures against temperature rise of the coil/Main Body and save energy consumption, the target temperature is reduced step by step on a specified time basis until it reaches a certain temperature.



Fixing Roller temperature(deg C)



  







Time(min)











The control temperature depends on the environment temperature/country. The details on the control temperature are shown below. • Normal environment 17 degC or higher Destination Japanese



Non Japanese



Model



Time (minute) 0 to 1



1 to 5



5 to 10



10 and longer



imageRUNNER ADVANCE 6575/6565



185



180



175



170



imageRUNNER ADVANCE 6555



180



175



170



170



imageRUNNER ADVANCE 6575/6565/6555



190



185



180



175



165



2. Technology • Low temperature environment Lower than 17 degC Destination



Model



Time (minute) 0 to 5



5 to 10



10 to 20



20 and longer



Japanese



imageRUNNER ADVANCE 6575/6565/6555



190



185



180



175



Non Japanese



imageRUNNER ADVANCE 6575/6565/6555



195



190



185



180



NOTE: When restoring from the recovery mode, temperature control is conducted from the 2nd line of temperature control table.



● Temperature control during printing The target temperature is reduced step by step on a specified time basis until it reaches a certain temperature. This control reduces energy consumption to prevent temperature rise of the Fixing Roller.



Fixing Roller temperature(deg C)



  















Time(min)



The control temperature depends on the environment temperature/country/paper type. The details on the control temperature are shown below. Paper type



Detail



Paper weight (g/m2 )



A



Plain paper, recycled paper, color paper, pre-punched paper



64 to 90



B



Heavy paper (plain paper, recycled paper, color paper, pre-punched 91 to 256 paper) Transparency, label paper, tracing paper, tab paper, postcard



All paper weight



C



Bond paper



All paper weight



D



Thin paper (plain paper, recycled paper, color paper, pre-punched paper)



52 to 63



166



2. Technology • Normal environment 17 degC or higher Destination Japanese



Model imageRUNNER ADVANCE 6575/6565



imageRUNNER ADVANCE 6555



Non Japanese



imageRUNNER ADVANCE 6575/6565/6555



Paper Type



Time (minute) 0 to 1



1 to 5



5 to 10



10 and longer



A



190



185



180



175



B



205



200



195



190



C



205



205



205



205



D



160



160



160



160



A



185



180



175



175



B



205



200



195



190



C



205



205



205



205



D



160



160



160



160



A



195



190



185



180



B



205



200



195



190



C



205



205



205



205



D



160



160



160



160



0 to 5



5 to 10



10 to 20



20 and longer



A



195



190



185



180



B



210



205



200



195



C



210



210



210



210



• Low temperature environment Lower than 17 degC Destination Japanese



Non Japanese



Model imageRUNNER ADVANCE 6575/6565/6555



imageRUNNER ADVANCE 6575/6565/6555



Paper Type



Time (minute)



D



170



170



170



170



A



200



195



190



185



B



210



205



200



195



C



210



210



210



210



D



170



170



170



170



• E000:Fixing Assembly low temperature error • E001:Fixing Assembly high temperature error • E002:Fixing Assembly temperature rise error • E003:Fixing Assembly temperature decrease error • E004:Fixing Power Supply error CAUTION: When any of the above Error Codes, E000 to E0004, is displayed, the error code display will not be cleared even though the Main Power Switch is turned OFF. In such a case, cancel the error by the following service mode and turn OFF and then ON the power. • Clear of error code COPIER > FUNCTION > CLEAR > ERR



• Setting of fixing improvement mode(Lv.2) COPIER > OPTION > IMG-FIX > FSPD-S1 • Setting of paper wrinkle prevention mode(Lv.2) COPIER > OPTION > IMG-FIX > FX-WNKL • Set fixing control temperature table: Thin COPIER > OPTION > IMG-FIX > TMP-TBL2 • Set fixing control temperature table: Plain COPIER > OPTION > CUSTOM > TEMP-TBL • Set fixing control temperature table* COPIER > OPTION > IMG-FIX > TMP-TBL3 • Set fixing control temperature table: Bond COPIER > OPTION > IMG-FIX > TMP-TBL4



167



2. Technology * To set the control temperature table of the Fixing Roller for 91 to 256g/m 2 size paper.



● Other temperature adjustments



By pressing the energy saver key on the Control Panel, energy consumption is reduced by reducing the control temperature when the Fixing Unit is at standby state according to the energy saving rate. NOTE: To be recovered to the normal mode according to the recovery mode.



• The energy saving rate can be changed from "Settings/Registration > Preferences > Timer/Energy Settings > Change Energy Saver Mode".



To save energy, in the case that no operation has been executed for a certain period of time, this machine is automatically to be in Low Energy Mode. Power distribution to the Fixing Unit is turned OFF in Low Energy Mode. NOTE: To be recovered to the normal mode according to the temperature control at warm-up.



• The time to change to the low power mode can be changed from "Settings/Registration > Preferences > Timer/Energy Settings > Auto Sleep Time".



■ Down sequence control ● Overview In the case of great difference between the target temperature and the detected temperature at the start of printing or during printing, productivity is dropped to prevent fixing failure or image failure.



● Execution timing • During printing • At the start of printing and when the paper type is switched



● Control description This control has the 3 types of down sequences according to the execution timing.



168



2. Technology 1. In the case of decrease in fixing temperature (during printing) When the fixing temperature drops during the job, the productivity is dropped or the job is stopped to prevent fixing failure.



When the environment temperature is 17 deg C or higher, the fixing temperature of 100% productivity remains, so the down sequence does not start. When the environment temperature is lower than 17 deg C, it may start down sequence. NOTE: When the print temperature is reduced by the service mode although the environment temperature is 17 deg C or higher, the down sequence may be started.



Right after the startup (including restoration from the sleep mode), a whole Fixing Assembly is not warm enough, so the down sequence may be started. However, as printing continues sequentially, the temperature of the Fixing Assembly is increased and reaches to the temperature of the 100% productivity Productivity(%)



Reference value



100%



Plain paper Heavy paper



85% 70% Stop



㻿㼔㼑㼑㼠㼟



150



50



2. When printing is started and the paper type is switched Because fixing temperature differs according to the paper type, switching the paper type causes downtime. Up to 60 seconds downtime is expected with this machine (switching from heavy paper to thin paper). The following shows estimated downtime. pattern of paper type switching



downtime (reference value)



Plain paper -> Heavy paper



5 sec



-



Thin paper -> Heavy paper



10 sec



Heavy paper -> Plain paper



-



Heavy paper -> Thin paper



60 sec



Bond paper -> Heavy paper



-



Remarks



Switching the temperature control is conducted, but print operation continues, so downtime does not occur. Switching the temperature control is conducted, but print operation continues, so downtime does not occur.



Bond paper -> Plain paper



-



Bond paper -> Thin paper



60 sec



-



Thin paper -> Bond paper



80 sec



-



Plain paper -> Bond paper



30 sec



-



Heavy paper -> Bond paper



10 sec



-



< Related Service Mode> • Set fixing/productivity: Heavy paper COPIER > OPTION > IMG-FIX > FIX-TEMP • Set fixing/productivity: Plain paper A3+ COPIER > OPTION > IMG-FIX > FIX-TMP2 • Set fixing/productivity: Special paper A3+ COPIER > OPTION > IMG-FIX > FIX-TMP3 • Image quality/productivity level : Quality Priority(Lv.2) COPIER > OPTION > IMG-FIX > FX-IMGLV



169



2. Technology



■ Shutter Control ● Overview To prevent image failure and reduction in productivity caused by temperature rise at the edge, this machine introduces the Shutter (to shield magnetic flux; nonmagnetic substance), so that position of the Shutter is controlled according to the detected temperature of the edge.



● Execution timing • When reaching the detection temperature of Sub Thermistor (THM020) and Shutter Thermistor (THM030) to the Shutter operation temperature • When printing is completed



● Control description By rotating the Shutter Motor (M15) for the specified amount, the Shutter is set in the specified position. There are cut-offs on the circumference of the Shutter Drive Gear (front) which is engaged with the Shutter. Detection of this cut-offs by the Shutter HP Sensor (PS53) determines whether the Shutter is set in the specified position. Shutter drive gear (rear)



Drive axis



Shutter Fixing Shutter Motor(M15) Shutter drive gear (front) Cut-off (for medium-size paper detection)



Shutter drive gear (front) Fixing Shutter Home Position Sensor(PS53)



Cut-off (for HP detection)



Cut-off (for small-size paper detection)



Fixing Shutter Home Position Sensor(PS53)



The shutter is set in any of the specified positions during printing according to the paper size and detected temperature of the Thermistor. The shutter is set in the home position when printing is completed. < Home Position (HP)> Shutter



< Position for middle paper size>



170



2. Technology Shutter



Shutter



E840-0001: IH Shutter Motor error



■ Paper Anti-wrapping Control ● Overview With this control, failure of the Fixing Assembly caused by paper wrapping around the Fixing Roller and the Pressure Roller is prevented. 3DSHU )L[LQJ5ROOHU



)L[LQJ2XWOHW6HQVRUPS52)



)L[LQJ,QOHW6HQVRUPS51)



171



2. Technology



● Control description In the case of delay jam at the fixing outlet, the DC Controller determines paper wrapping if the paper remains in the Fixing Assembly and executes the following. • The brake is applied to the Fixing Motor to immediately stop operation of the Fixing Motor (to minimize the paper wrapping level) • Power distribution to the coil is stopped (to ensure safety). • A jam is displayed.(Jam Code:0111) • Cleaning of the Fixing Roller is executed (5 times of web cleaning) NOTE: Paper presence in the Fixing Assembly is determined by the paper detection log with the Fixing Inlet Sensor (to see whether the paper passes through the Sensor).



■ Thermistor reciprocating control To prevent scar on the Fixing Roller detected by the Fixing Main Thermistor(THM010) and Fixing Sub Thermistror2 (THM030)the Fixing Main Thermistor and Fixing Sub Thermistror2 are moved back and forth by 12mm in the shaft direction of the Fixing Roller. The drive of the Fixing Cleaning Web Drive Solenoid (SL09) is transmitted to the Reciprocating Cam.



Fixing Cleaning Web Drive SL09 Solenoid



Fixing Main Thermistor (THM010) Fixing Sub Thermistor 2 (THM030)



12 12



mm



mm Fixing Roller



■ Upper separation claw reciprocating control To prevent scar on the Fixing Roller by the Upper Separation Claw, the Upper Separation Claw is moved back and forth by 3mm in the direction of the Fixing Roller. m



3m



M03 Fixing Motor



Upper separation claw Unit Upper separation claw



172



2. Technology



■ Cleaning web drive control To prevent fixing offset, the residual toner on the surface of the Fixing Roller is removed with the Cleaning Web.



Cleaning Web



Fixing Cleaning Web roller



Fixing Cleaning Web feed roller SL09 Fixing Cleaning Web Drive Solenoid



Fixing Cleaning Web takeup roller



The take-up length of the Cleaning Web is determined by the paper size and the number of sheets (in 1 job). Paper size



1st sheet



2nd sheet



3rd sheet



4th sheet or later



Small The size with less than 220mm length in feeding direction (LTR or less)



1-time



1-time



0-time



Repeat wrapping amount of the 1st to the 3rd sheet



Middle The size between 237mm and 364mm in feeding direction (B5R to LGL/B4)



1-time



1-time



1-time



Large The size with 365mm or more length in feeding direction (B5R or more)



2-time



1-time



1-time



When the paper is stationed in the Fixing Unit due to a jam or an error, the Fixing Web Drive Solenoid is turned ON for 5 times at the time of recovery.



E005-0001:Error in Fixing Cleaning Web Drive Solenoid connection



• Setting of Fixing Web Solenoid ON times COPIER > OPTION > IMG-FIX > CBLTINVL Setting Value 0 :Normal 1 :1.5 times of normal* 2 :0.5 times of normal 3 :0.75 times of normal * Only for paper which length in feed direction is 236.0 mm or less or 364.0 mm or longer



■ Cleaning web length detection When the length of the Cleaning Web is reduced, the Web Level Detection Arm is moved in the direction of the arrow to block the light path of the Fixing Cleaning Web Level Detection Sensor (PS45). When the Fixing Web Drive Solenoid has been turned ON for 4 times after the detection by this sensor, a fixing web length warning message is displayed on the Control Panel.



173



2. Technology



Web length detecting arm



Fixing Cleaning Web takeup roller Fixing Cleaning Web Level Sensor(PS45)



After the display of the fixing web length warning message, the number of turning ON the Fixing Cleaning Web Drive Solenoid is to be counted. The Error Code “E005-0000” is displayed once the counter value reaches 2000 (3000 sheets of copy/print in A4 size) CAUTION: In the case of replacing the Fixing Cleaning Web, be sure to clear the Fixing Web Counter by the following Service Mode • Fixing Cleaning Web take-up counter after the level warning COPIER > COUNTER > MISC > FIX-WEB • Fixing Cleaning Web take-up counter COPIER > COUNTER > DRBL-1 > FX-WEB



• E005-0000 : Error in absence of the Fixing Web After the advance notice detection for the absence of the Fixing Web, the web has continued to be pulled for 2000 times.



• Set Fixing Web level alarm notice timing COPIER > OPTION > IMG-FIX > WEB-LIFE Setting Value 0 : Detection by the sensor 1 : Count of 500,000 sheets (on a A4 size conversion basis) 2 to 7: As the value is incremented by 1, the counted number of sheets is increased by 50,000 sheets. The maximum setting value is 7 (800,000 sheets).



■ Protective function ● Detecting an Error Using the Thermistor In the event of the following, the machine will set the DC power (12 V) used to drive the AC relay (found on the fixing heater power supply PCB), thereby stopping the AC power to the fixing heater. • the main thermistor (THM010)/sub thermistor2 (THM030) has detected overheating. • the difference between temperature of each thermistors has deviated from a specific value.



● Detecting an Error Using the Thermal Switch In response to a deviation in temperature , bimetal contact of the thermal switch (TP010; non-contact type) will open to cut the power supply line (12 V) used to drive the AC relay on the fixing heater power supply PCB, thereby stopping the AC power to the fixing heater. CAUTION: Once the contact point of the Thermal Switch is open, it will not be recovered even though the high temperature becomes to be normal temperature. Be sure to eliminate the cause of the error, and then replace the Thermal Switch.



174



2. Technology



Pickup / Feed System Overview • Supported media (heavy paper) (52g/m2 -> 256g/m2) This feature is enabled by making gentler curve of the pre-registration path, reverse path and duplex merging path. • Improved jam processing performance This feature is enabled by making the Fixing/Feed Assembly and the Duplex Assembly as one unit as well as making the Delivery Unit and the Door of the Fixing Assembly as one unit. This feature is enabled by using forcible paper feed control that feeds paper to the position where the jammed paper is easily removed in the case of paper jam. • Increased pickup capacity of the Multi-purpose Tray (50 sheets -> 100 sheets) Simple retard method is used for pickup. Stacking capacity has increased from 50 sheets to 100 sheets thanks to the pickup tray that moves up and down. • Improved Multi-purpose Tray usability Automatic paper size recognition by the Multi-purpose Tray improves usability. • Reduced noise This feature is enabled by using a belt-type motor.



:Forced Paper Feed Control :Paper path :One Unit



■ Specifications These show major specifications of the Pickup/Feed System. Item



Function/Method



Paper Storage Method



Front loading method



Pickup Method



Left/Right Deck



Separation retard method



Cassette 3/4



Separation retard method



175



2. Technology Item Pickup Method



Multi-purpose Tray



Function/Method Simple retard method



Paper Feed Standard



Center



Paper stack capacity



Left/Right Deck



1500 sheets (80 g/m2)



Cassette 3/4



550 sheets (80 g/m2)



Multi-purpose Tray



100 sheets (80 g/m2)



Left/Right Deck



A4, B5, LTR



Cassette 3/4



A3, B4, A4R, A4, B5, B5R, A5, 11"×17" (279.4 x 431.8 mm), LGL, LTRR, LTR, EXECR, STMT, 8K, 16KR, 16K Custom paper size (139.7 x 182 to 297 x 431.8 mm)



Multi-purpose Tray



A3, A4R, A4, B4, B5, B5R, A5, 11"x17" (279.4 x 431.8 mm), LGL, LTRR, LTR, STMT, EXECR, 8K, 16KR, Postcard, Reply Postcard, 4 on 1 Postcard Custom paper size (100 x 148 mm to 297 x 431.8 mm) Long Length Paper (297 to 630.0 mm)



Left/Right Deck



52 g/m2 to 220 g/m2



Cassette 3/4



52 g/m2 to 220 g/m2



Multi-purpose Tray



52 g/m2 to 256 g/m2 (Duplex printing 52 g/m2 to 220 g/m2)



Left/Right Deck



Service Switching



Cassette 3/4



Auto size detection



Multi-purpose Tray



Auto size detection



Paper size



Paper Grammage



Paper Size Switching



Duplexing method



Through path



Transparency detection



N/A



176



2. Technology



■ Parts configuration ● Parts configuration PS52



PS51



PS10 PS20 PS67 PS47 PS29



PS64



PS36 PS35



PS28



PS04 PS65



PS23 PS07 PS06



PS31



PS24



PS66



PS19



PS12 PS11



PS32 PS49



PS08



PS50



PS48 PS25 PS17 PS21 PS26 PS68 PS18



SW07



PS33 SW09



PS22 PS27 SW08 PS71



SW10



PS69



PS70 PS72



PS73 PS14 PS13



Sensor No.



Name



PS02



Vertical Path Cover Open/Close Sensor



PS03



Multi-purpose Cover Open/Close Sensor



PS04



Fixing Toenail Jam Sensor



PS06



Right Deck Paper Height Sensor



PS07



Right Deck Paper Sensor



PS08



Right Deck Upper Limit Sensor



PS10



Left Deck Paper Height Sensor



PS11



Left Deck Paper Sensor



PS12



Left Deck Paper Height Sensor



PS13



Cassette 3 Paper Sensor



PS14



Cassette 4 Paper Sensor



PS17



Cassette 3 Paper Height Sensor



PS18



Cassette 4 Paper Height Sensor



PS19



Right Deck Pull Out Sensor



PS20



Left Deck Pickup Sensor



PS21



Vertical Path Sensor3



PS22



Vertical Path Sensor4



PS23



Multi-purpose Tray Paper Sensor



PS24*/25



Vertical Path Sensor1/Vertical Path Sensor2



PS26/27



Cassette 3 Pickup Sensor/Cassette 4 Pickup Sensor



PS28*



Writing Judging Sensor



177



2. Technology Sensor No.



Name



PS29*



Registration Sensor



PS31



Side Registration Sensor



PS32



Right Pickup Sensor



PS33



Left Deck Pull Out Sensor



PS35



Inner Delivery Sensor



PS36



Outer Delivery Sensor



PS47/48



Right Deck Paper Level Sensor 1/2



PS49/50



Left Deck Paper Level Sensor 1/2



PS51



Fixing Inlet Sensor



PS52



Fixing Outlet Sensor



PS64*



Duplex Outlet Sensor



PS65*



Reverse Vertical Path Sensor



PS66*



Duplex Left Sensor



PS67*



Duplex Merging Sensor



PS68



Cassette 3 Upper Limit Sensor



PS69/70



Cassette 3 Paper Level Sensor 1/Cassette 3 Paper Level Sensor 2



PS71



Cassette 4 Upper Limit Sensor



PS72/73



Cassette 4 Paper Level Sensor 1/Cassette 4 Paper Level Sensor 2



SW07



Cassette 3 Paper Width Detection Switch



SW08



Cassette 4 Paper Width Detection Switch



SW09



Cassette 3 Paper Length Detection Switch



SW10



Cassette 4 Paper Length Detection Switch



*Scanner Sensor



● Roller Fixing Roller



Duplex Merging Roller



Multi-purpose Tray Separation/Feed Roller



Registration Roller



Outer Delivery Roller Reverse Inlet Roller Multi-purpose Tray Pickup Roller



Inner Delivery Roller Pressure roller



Multi-purpose Tray Separation Roller



Reverse Upper Roller



Registration Front Roller Duplex Right Roller Duplex Outlet Roller



Duplex Inlet Roller Reverse Lower Roller



Vertical Path Roller1



Duplex Left Roller



Right Deck Feed Roller Right Deck Separation Roller



Left Deck Pickup Roller Left Deck Feed Roller



Vertical Path Roller2



Left Deck Separation Roller



Right Deck Pickup Roller



Vertical Path Roller3 Cassette 3 Feed Roller Cassette 3 Separation Roller Cassette 3 Pickup Roller Vertical Path Roller4 Cassette 4 Feed Roller Cassette 4 Separation Roller Cassette 4 Pickup Roller



178



2. Technology



■ Drive Configuration SL05



M03 M19 M43 M32



M34



M13



M14



M33 M18 M26



SL07 M24



M31



SL11 M11 SL06 M05



M04



SL03



M27



M20 SL04 M21 M12



No.



Name



M03



Fixing Motor



M04



Right Deck Lifter Motor



M05



Left Deck Lifter Motor



M11



Right Deck Pickup Motor



M12



Cassette3/4 Pickup Motor



M13



Delivery Motor



M14



Reverse Motor



M18



Duplex Feed Right Motor



M19



Duplex Feed Left Motor



M20



Cassette3 Lifter Motor



M21



Cassette4 Lifter Motor



M24



Left Deck Pickup Motor



M26



Vertical Path Upper Motor



M27



Vertical Path Lower Motor



M31



Vertical Path Middle Motor



M32



Duplex Feed Merging Motor



M33



Multi-purpose Registration Front Motor



M34



Registration Motor



M43



ETB Motor



SL03



Cassette 3 Pickup Solenoid



SL04



Cassette 4 Pickup Solenoid



SL05



Reverse Upper Flapper Solenoid



SL06



Right Deck Pickup Solenoid



179



2. Technology No.



Name



SL07



Left Deck Pickup Solenoid



SL11



Left Deck Merging Solenoid



■ Paper path Feeding path



Delivery Flapper [1] Multi Tray [4]



[2] Reverse Flapper



[3]



Duplex Flapper



[3],[4] Left Deck Pigkup



Option Pickup Right Deck Pigkup



Cassette 3 Pickup



Cassette 4 Pickup



No.



Feeding path



[1]



1-side face-up delivery, duplex face-down delivery



[2]



1-side face-down delivery, duplex printing



[3]



Duplex printing



[4]



1-side face-down delivery



180



2. Technology



■ Interval speed :Pickup Speed :Vertical path/duplex speed :Pre-registration speed :Post-registration speed :Process speed :Delivery speed :Delivery/reverse speed



Print speed [ppm]



75



65



Pickup speed [mm/s]



500



Vertical path/duplex speed [mm/s] Pre-registration speed [mm/s]



500 350



290



Post-registration speed [mm/s] Process speed [mm/s]



55



500 350



290



Delivery speed [mm/s]



350* / 750 (ACC)



Delivery/Reverse speed [mm/s]



350* / 750 (ACC)



* The delivery speed is slowed down to prevent the paper from being fallen out of the Delivery Tray (the delivery speed).



181



2. Technology



Controls Fixing Assembly



Secondary Transfer Unit



Registration Unit



Delivery Reverse Unit



Multi-purpose Tray Pickup Unit



Duplex Unit



Deck/Cassette Pickup Unit



Unit Deck/cassette pickup unit



Control Basic Movement Deck/Cassette Detection Paper Size Detection Paper Level Detection Paper Detection Lifter Control Pickup Retry Control



Multi-purpose pickup tray unit



Basic Movement Paper Size Detection Paper Detection



Pre-registration/Registration Unit



Pre-registration Control Registration Control Registration Deceleration Control Registration Acceleration Control



Secondary transfer Unit



Post-transfer Guide Attraction Control



Delivery unit Duplex unit



Face-up Delivery Face-down Delivery Duplex Reverse Delivery Side Registration Control Circulation quantity and limit



Jam detection



Jam Code List Forced Paper Feed Control



182



2. Technology



■ Deck/Cassette Pickup Unit ● Basic Movement When Deck/Cassette is installed, Motor drives to maintain the height which paper surface attaches to Pickup Roller (This is the height of Pickup Roller when Pickup Solenoid is OFF). If the Pickup Motor (M11/M12/M24) is turned ON, the Pickup Roller will rotate and the paper will be fed. When the Pickup Sensor (PS19/PS20/PS21/PS22) detects paper, the Pickup Solenoid(SL03/SL04/SL06/SL07)will turn ON, and Pickup Roller will draw away from paper surface. Only 1 sheet of paper is sent to feed path by the Feed Roller and the Separation Roller, and fed to Vertical Path Roller.



Deck M11 /M24



Deck Feed Roller PS19 /PS20



SL06 /SL07 M04 /M05



Deck Separation Roller Deck Pickup Roller



Deck Lifter



Cassette Cassette Feed Roller Cassette Pickup Roller



M20 /M21



M12 PS21 /PS22



Cassette Liter SL03 Cassette Separation /SL04 Roller



NOTE: The same single motor is used as a pickup motor for both Cassette 3 and Cassette 4. The drive is transmitted to Cassette 3 when the motor is in normal rotation and the drive is transmitted to Cassette 4 when the motor is in reverse rotation. The drive is switched by the One-way Clutch.



• ON/OFF of Pickup Roller Post-Rotation on Right Deck COPIER > OPTION > FEED-SW > DK1-TURN • ON/OFF of Pickup Roller Post-Rotation on Left Deck COPIER > OPTION > FEED-SW > DK2-TURN • ON/OFF of Pickup Roller Post-Rotation on Cassette3 COPIER > OPTION > FEED-SW > DK3-TURN



183



2. Technology • ON/OFF of Pickup Roller Post-Rotation on Cassette4 COPIER > OPTION > FEED-SW > DK4-TURN Setting Value 0: (Default), 1: ON after a job , 2 : ON at warm-up rotation , 3 : ON after a job and at warm-up rotation



● Deck/Cassette detection Whether Deck/Cassette is installed is detected



Deck Deck is detected by Paper Level Sensor. When light from 2 Paper Level Sensors is not blocked, it is detected as no deck installed Right Deck Paper Level Sensor 1 (PS47) Left Deck Paper Level Sensor 1 (PS49) Paper Level detection lever 1



Projection



Deck detection lever



Deck Right Deck Paper Level Sensor 2 (PS48) Left Deck Paper Level Sensor 2 (PS45)



Cassette Cassette is detected by Paper Size Detection Switch. When all actuators of the Paper Size Detection Switch(SW07/SW08)are not pressed, it is detected as no cassette installed Cassette 3 Size Detection Switch 1 (SW07) Cassette 4 Size Detection Switch 1 (SW08)



Paper Size Detection Lever Side Slide Guide



Paper Size Detection Circular Plate



Trailing Edge Slide Guide



● Paper Size Detection Deck Set in Service Mode. There is no mechanism to detect paper size.



184



2. Technology • Right Deck Paper setting COPIER > OPTION > CST > P-SZ-C1 • Left Deck Paper setting COPIER > OPTION > CST > P-SZ-C2 Setting Value 0: A4 (default) ,1: B5 , 2: LTR



Cassette Paper size in cassette 3/4 is each detected by 2 paper size detection switches. ON/OFF of 4-actuator in the Host Machine changes according to the Paper Size Detection Circular Plate/Lever Position linked to Trailing Edge/Side Slide Guide. Paper size is detected by two 4-actuator ON/OFF combinations. And, if all 4-actuator are OFF is detected, it means no-cassette. Cassette 3 Size Detection Switch 1 (SW07) Cassette 4 Size Detection Switch 1 (SW08)



Paper Size Detection Lever Side Slide Guide



Cassette 3 Size Detection Switch 2 (SW09) Cassette 4 Size Detection Switch 2 (SW10)



Paper Size Detection Circular Plate



Trailing Edge Slide Guide



Paper size detection Switch Paper Size



Width (mm)



Length (mm)



Width SW07/SW08 1-A



1-B



1-C



1-D



2-A



2-B



2-C



2-D



B5



257.0



182.0



ON



-



-



ON



ON



ON



ON



ON



EXEC



267.0



184.0



ON



-



-



ON



ON



ON



ON



ON



16K



270.0



195.0



ON



-



-



ON



-



ON



ON



ON



A5-R



148.5



210.0



-



ON



-



ON



ON



-



ON



ON



A4



297.0



210.0



ON



-



ON



ON



ON



-



ON



ON



185



Length SW09/SW10



2. Technology Paper Size



Width (mm)



Length (mm)



Width SW07/SW08



Length SW09/SW10



1-A



1-B



1-C



1-D



2-A



2-B



2-C



2-D



STMT-R



139.7



215.9



-



ON



-



ON



ON



-



ON



ON



LTR



279.4



215.9



ON



-



-



ON



ON



-



ON



ON



B5-R



182.0



257.0



-



ON



-



ON



ON



-



ON



-



-



ON



-



ON



ON



ON



ON



-



16K-R



195.0



270.0



ON



ON



-



ON



ON



ON



-



ON



-



ON



-



ON



ON



ON



-



ON



ON



ON



-



ON



-



ON



ON



ON



ON



ON



-



ON



-



ON



ON



-



ON



ON



LTR-R



215.9



279.4



A4-R



210.0



297.0



ON



ON



-



ON



-



-



LGL



215.9



355.6



ON



ON



-



ON



ON



ON



-



-



B4



257.0



364.0



ON



-



-



ON



ON



ON



ON



-



8K



270.0



390.0



ON



-



-



ON



-



-



ON



ON



A3



297.0



420.0



ON



-



ON



ON



-



ON



-



-



LDR



279.4



431.8



ON



-



-



ON



-



-



ON



-



SRA3



320.0



450.0



ON



-



ON



-



-



-



-



ON



12 x 18



304.8



457.2



ON



-



ON



ON



-



-



-



ON



13 x 19



330.2



483.0



ON



-



ON



-



-



-



-



-



K_LGL



268.0



190.0



ON



-



-



ON



ON



ON



ON



ON



K_LGL-R



190.0



268.0



-



ON



-



ON



ON



ON



-



ON



G_LTR



267.0



203.0



ON



-



-



ON



-



ON



ON



ON



G_LTR-R



203.0



267.0



ON



ON



-



ON



ON



ON



-



ON



G_LGL



203.2



330.2



ON



ON



-



ON



-



ON



ON



-



OFI



216.0



317.0



ON



ON



-



ON



ON



ON



-



E_OFI



220.0



320.0



ON



ON



-



ON



ON



ON



-



-



M_OFI



216.0



341.0



ON



ON



-



ON



ON



-



ON



ON



B_OFI



216.0



355.0



ON



ON



-



ON



ON



ON



-



-



A_OFI



220.0



340.0



ON



ON



-



ON



-



-



ON



ON



FOLIO



216.0



330.0



ON



ON



-



ON



-



ON



ON



-



FLSP



216.0



330.0



ON



ON



-



ON



-



ON



ON



-



A_FLSP



206.0



337.0



ON



ON



-



ON



-



-



ON



ON ON



A_LTR



280.0



220.0



ON



-



-



ON



ON



-



ON



A_LTR-R



220.0



280.0



ON



ON



-



ON



-



ON



ON



-



A_LGL



220.0



340.0



ON



ON



-



ON



-



-



ON



ON



FA4



216.0



343.0



ON



ON



-



ON



ON



-



-



ON



FB4



216.0



330.0



ON



ON



-



ON



-



ON



ON



-



SW07/SW08 1-D 1-C 1-B 1-A



SW09/SW10 2-D 2-C 2-B 2-A



• Settings/registration > Preferences > Paper Settings > Paper Size Group for Auto Recognition in Drawer Setting Value: All Sizes, A/B Size, Inch Size, A/K Size



186



2. Technology • Settings/registration > Preferences > Paper Settings > A5R/STMTR Original Selection Setting value Cassette3: A5R, STMTR Cassette4: A5R, STMTR • Settings/registration > Preferences > Paper Settings > B5/EXEC Original Selection Setting value Cassette3: B5, EXEC Cassette4: B5, EXEC • Settings/registration > Preferences > Paper Settings > Register Custom Size Setting Value: Register, Delete, Rename



● Paper Level Detection Paper level is detected by two Paper Level sensors in each cassette



Deck Right Deck Paper Level Sen- Right Deck Paper Level Sensor 1 (PS47) sor 2 (PS48) Left Deck Paper Level Sen- Left Deck Paper Level Sensor 1 (PS49) sor 2 (PS50) Full (100%~50%)



ON



OFF



Half (50%~25%)



ON



ON



Few (25% or less)



OFF



ON



Right Deck Paper Level Sensor 1 (PS47) Left Deck Paper Level Sensor 1 (PS49) Paper Level Detection Lever 1



Deck Detection Lever



Right Deck Paper Level Sensor 2 (PS48) Left Deck Paper Level Sensor 2 (PS50)



Paper Level Detection Lever 2



Deck Lifter



187



Control Panel Screen Display



2. Technology • Full (100%~50%) OFF



ON



Paper



• Half (50%~25%) ON



ON



Paper



• Few (25% or less) OFF



Paper



188



ON



2. Technology



Cassette Cassette 3 Paper Level Sensor 2 (PS70) Cassette 4 Paper Level Sensor 2 (PS73)



Paper Level Detection Lever



Cassette 3 Paper Level Sensor 1 (PS69) Cassette 4 Paper Level Sensor 1 (PS72)



Cassette 3 Paper Level Sen- Cassette 3 Paper Level Sensor 1 (PS69) sor 2 (PS70) Cassette 4 Paper Level Sen- Cassette 4 Paper Level Sensor 1 (PS72) sor 2 (PS73) Full (100%~50%)



OFF



OFF



Half (50%~25%)



ON



OFF



Few (25% or less)



ON



ON



Control Panel Screen Display



• Full (100%~50%) Cassette 3 Paper Level Sensor 2 (PS70) Cassette 4 Paper Level Sensor 2 (PS73) Paper



Cassette Lifter



Cassette 3 Paper Level Sensor 1 (PS69) Cassette 4 Paper Level Sensor 1 (PS72) OFF OFF



Paper Level Detection Lever



• Half (50%~25%) OFF



Paper



189



ON



Holding Plate



2. Technology • Few (25% or less) Paper



ON



ON



● Paper Detection If paper is present, the Detection Lever is pushed upward when lifter ascends, and Paper Sensor is turned OFF. If paper finishes, the Detection Lever enters lifter hole, and Paper Sensor is turned ON



Deck Right Deck Paper Sensor (PS07) Left Deck Paper Sensor (PS11) Paper Detection Lever Deck Lifter



Cassette Cassette 3 Paper Sensor (PS13) Cassette 4 Paper Sensor (PS14) Cassette Lifter



Paper Detection Lever



Holding Plate



● Lifter Control Paper is lifted to the pickup position by the Lifter.



190



2. Technology In the machine configuration with the Deck / Cassette set, the Pickup Motor is driven to raise the Lifter to fit the paper level to the height of the pickup position. The Lifter is also raised when the Paper Level Sensor went OFF during the pickup operation.



Deck Right Deck Lifter Motor(M04) Left Deck Lifter Motor(M05)



Right Deck Upper Limit Sensor(PS08) Left Deck Paper Height Sensor(PS12)



Right Deck Paper Height Sensor(PS06) Left Deck Paper Height Sensor(PS10)



Lifter Wire



Lifter Wire



Deck Lifter



Cassette Cassette 3 Upper Limit Sensor(PS68) Cassette 4 Upper Limit Sensor(PS71) Cassette 3 Paper Height Sensor (PS17) Cassette 4 Paper Height Sensor (PS18)



Cassette3 Lifter Motor(M20) Cassette4 Lifter Motor(M21)



Cassette Lifter



Middle Plate



Lifter Error Detection In case due to some reason the lifter keep ascending even the Paper Surface Height Sensor is turned ON, the Upper Limit Sensor is provided to prevent damage in this equipment due to the error in ascending. And, if the lifter starts ascending, but not detected by the Paper Surface Sensor and the Upper Limit Sensor within 3 minutes, the alarm corresponds to the concerned Pickup Cassette will be triggered. The alarm will release if the corresponding deck/ cassette is open or closed, or the power is turned OFF/ON.



● Pickup Retry Control If paper leading edge is not detected by Pickup sensor within the specified time after pickup movement starts, it is not immediately determined as jam, and re-pickup movement will be executed.



191



2. Technology During pickup retry, the Pickup Motor will be repeatedly turned ON/OFF with the Pickup Roller is in descended condition.



■ Multi-purpose Tray Pickup Unit ● Basic Movement 1. If the Multi-purpose Pickup Solenoid (SL02) is turned ON, the semi-toothed gear will rotate. 2. The holding plate Fixing Members will be released and the holding plate will ascend. Multi-purpose Tray feed roller



Multi-purpose Tray holding plate



Semi-toothed gear



Multi-purpose Tray pull-out roller SL02



Spring Multi-purpose Tray separation roller



3. When the Pre-registration Multi-purpose Tray Drive Motor drives, the Multi-purpose Pull Out Roller and the Multi-purpose Feed Roller/Multi-purpose Separation Roller will rotate, and only 1 sheet of paper will be picked up/fed. M33



Multi-purpose Tray feed roller



Multi-purpose Tray pull-out roller



Multi-purpose Tray separation roller



● Paper Size Detection The paper width is detected according to the output value from the variable resistor (Multi-purpose Tray Paper Width Detection PCB (UN13)) driven by the Slide Guide movement. The Multi-purpose Tray Paper Length Sensor (PS101) detects paper length. Paper size is determined by paper width and the detection result of the Multi-purpose Tray Paper Length Sensor (PS101). User adjusts the position of the Slide Guide on the Multi-purpose Tray Pickup Tray when placing paper on the tray.



192



2. Technology



Multi-purpose Tray Paper Width Sensor (UN13)



Multi-purpose Tray Paper Length Sensor (PS101)



Side Guide



Side Guide



Size indication is determined by the setting of auto-detected size for each location (Multi-purpose Tray) and the detection results of the 2 sensors. Country



Default Setting



US



Inch Size



CN



A/K Size



Destinations other than the above



A/B Size



Paper Size



Paper Width [mm]



Multi-purpose Tray Pa- Multi-purpose Tray per Width Sensor Paper Length Sen(UN13) sor (PS101) Detection Width [mm]



A3



297



293 - 303



A4



297



B4



257



B5



Paper Size Indication A/B Size



Inch Size



A/K Size



ON



A3



12x18/11x17/Free



A3



293 - 303



OFF



A4



LTR/Free



A4



253 - 263



ON



B4



11x17/Free



8K/Free



257



253 - 263



OFF



B5



LTR/EXEC/Free



16K/Free



A4R



210



206 - 216



ON/OFF



A4R



LGL/LTRR/Free



A4R



B5R



182



178 - 188



OFF



B5R



Free



Free



A5R



148



144 - 154



OFF



A5R



STMTR/Free



A5R



A6R



105



101 - 111



OFF



A6R



Free



A6R



11x17



279.4



275.4 - 285.4



ON



A3/B4/Free



11x17



A3/8K/Free A4/16K/Free



LTR



279.4



275.4 - 285.4



OFF



A4/B5/Free



LTR



EXEC



266.7



262.7 - 272.7



OFF



B5/Free



EXEC



16K/Free



LGL



215.9



211.9 - 221.9



ON



A4R/Free



LGL



A4R/Free



LTRR



215.9



211.9 - 221.9



OFF



A4R/Free



LTRR



A4R/Free



STMTR



139.7



135.7 - 145.7



OFF



A5R/Free



STMTR



A5R/Free



16K



270



266 - 276



OFF



B5/Free



LTR/EXEC/Free



16K



8K



270



266 - 276



ON



B4/Free



11x17/Free



8K



193



2. Technology Paper Size



Paper Width [mm]



Multi-purpose Tray Pa- Multi-purpose Tray per Width Sensor Paper Length Sen(UN13) sor (PS101) Detection Width [mm]



Post Card



Paper Size Indication A/B Size



Inch Size



A/K Size



"Paper Settings" needs to be performed due to non-standard size.



Custom size



NOTE: If multiple sizes are indicated using "/" as the result of automatic size detection shown in the table above, it means that any one of them may be detected depending on the position of Slide Guide on the Multi-purpose Tray Pickup Tray. Example: In case of placing 11 x 17 size paper on the Multi-purpose Tray Pickup Tray while A/B size is set, one of the following size is detected: A3, B4, or Free-Size.



Service Mode • Adjust of MP Tray A4R paper width COPIER > ADJUST > CST-ADJ > MF-A4R • Adjust of MP Tray A6R paper width COPIER > ADJUST > CST-ADJ > MF-A6R • Adjust of MP Tray A4 paper width COPIER > ADJUST > CST-ADJ > MF-A4 • Registration Multi-purpose Tray A4R standard width COPIER > FUNCTION > CST > MF-A4R • Registration Multi-purpose Tray A6R standard width COPIER > FUNCTION > CST > MF-A6R • Registration Multi-purpose Tray A4 standard width COPIER > FUNCTION > CST > MF-A4



User Mode This is used to change the auto recognition size of Multi-purpose Tray. • Settings/Registration > Preferences > Paper Settings > Paper Size Group for Auto Recognition in Drawer



● Paper Detection When paper is set, Paper Presence Detection Lever will be pushed, and the Multi-purpose Tray Paper Sensor (PS23) will turn ON.



Paper



Detection Lever



Multi-purpose Tray Paper Sensor (PS23)



194



2. Technology



■ Registration Unit ● Pre-registration Control Pickup processing time can vary depending on the paper type and paper size in use as well as the environment. Therefore, the machine executes pre-registration control to ease such variation. After the paper is picked up from the pickup cassette, the following reference sensor is used as a reference to feed the paper for a specified distance, and then the paper is stopped at the pre-registration position. Pre-registration stop position6



Duplex Outlet Sensor



Pre-registration stop position7



Pre-registration stop position 5 Pre-registration stop position 1 Vertical Path Sensor 1 Right Deck Pull Out Sensor Pre-registration stop position 2 Vertical Path Sensor 2 Pre-registration stop position 3 Vertical Path Sensor 3 Pre-registration stop position 4 Vertical Path Sensor 4



Left Deck Pull Out Sensor



Stop position name



Pickup Assembly



Pre-registration stop posi- Right Deck tion 1 Cassette3



Paper size



Reference sensor



Stop position



Size LTR (215.9mm)



Vertical Path Sensor1(PS24)



Vertical Path Roller 1 Downstream 10mm



Pre-registration stop posi- Cassette3 tion 2 Cassette4



LTRR=< Size =< A4R



Vertical Path Sensor2(PS25)



Vertical Path Roller 2 Downstream 10mm



Pre-registration stop posi- Cassette3 tion 3 Cassette3 Cassette4



11"x17"(431.8mm) < Size



Vertical Path Sensor3(PS26)



Vertical Path Roller 3 Downstream 10mm



Pre-registration stop posi- Cassette4 tion 4



11"x17" < Size



Vertical Path Sensor4(PS27)



Vertical Path Roller 4 Downstream 10mm



Pre-registration stop posi- OP Deck tion 5



All Size



Option Deck Pull Out Sen- Vertical Path Upper Roller sor 1 Downstream 10mm



Pre-registration stop posi- Left Deck tion 6



Size =< LTR



Left Deck Pull Out Sensor(PS33)



Duplex Merging Roller Downstream 10mm



Pre-registration stop posi- Left Deck tion 7



Size =< LTR



Duplex Outlet Sensor(PS64)



Duplex Outlet Sensor(PS64) Downstream 10mm



Cassette4



Size ≦ LTR LTRR < Size ≦ 11"x17"



195



2. Technology



● Registration Control The Registration Motor (M34) is rotated to make the image on the drum and the paper to be aligned at the specified position and feeds the paper to the Transfer Assembly. The rotating speed of the Registration Motor (M34) is increased to be higher than the process speed and then reduced to meet the process speed. 7UDQVIHU5ROOHU 5HJLVWUDWLRQ5ROOHU



M33



5HJLVWUDWLRQ)URQW5ROOHU M34



Adjust register start timing • Adjust register start timing: ≦90g/㎡, 1st COPIER > ADJUST > FEED-ADJ > REGIST • Adjust register start timing: ≦90g/㎡, MP Tray COPIER > ADJUST > FEED-ADJ > RG-MF • Adjust register start timing: ≧91 g/㎡ COPIER > ADJUST > FEED-ADJ > REG-THCK • Adjust register start timing:transparency, clear film COPIER > ADJUST > FEED-ADJ > REG-OHT • Adjust register start timing: ≦90g/㎡, 2nd COPIER > ADJUST > FEED-ADJ > REG-DUP1 • Adjust register start timing: ≧91 g/㎡ , 2nd COPIER > ADJUST > FEED-ADJ > REG-DUP2 Adjust pre-registration arch amount • Adjust pre-registration arch amount: cassette,≦ 90g/㎡ COPIER > ADJUST > FEED-ADJ > LP-FEED1 • Adjust pre-registration arch amount: cassette,≧ 91g/㎡ COPIER > ADJUST > FEED-ADJ > LP-FEED2 • Adjust pre-registration arch amount: MP Tray,≦ 90g/㎡ COPIER > ADJUST > FEED-ADJ > LP-MULT1 • Adjust pre-registration arch amount: MP Tray,≧ 91g/㎡ COPIER > ADJUST > FEED-ADJ > LP-MULT2 • Adjust pre-registration arch amount: 2-side,≦ 90g/㎡ COPIER > ADJUST > FEED-ADJ > LP-DUP1 • Adjust pre-registration arch amount: 2-side,≧ 91g/㎡ COPIER > ADJUST > FEED-ADJ > LP-DUP2



● Registration Deceleration Control This control reduces speed of Multi-purpose Tray Registration Front Motor (M33) (Registration feed speed) by using Registration Sensor (PS29) as a reference and pushes the paper against the Registration Roller to reduce hitting noise.



196



2. Technology 5HJLVWUDWLRQ5ROOHU 5HJLVWUDWLRQ6HQVRU



M33



5HJLVWUDWLRQ)URQW5ROOHU



Vertical path speed Pre-registration speed



Registration arch volume 5mm Stop point



start point of deceleration Registration Sensor



Print speed [ppm]



Registration Roller



75



65



Vertical path speed [mm/s] Registration feed speed [mm/s] Start point of deceleration [mm] Stop point [mm]



3mm



55



500 350



290



7.6



5.3



23 (20(distance between the Registration Sensor and the Registration Roller)+3(registration arch volume))



● Registration Acceleration Control he Registration Motor (M34) is rotated to make the image on the drum and the paper to be aligned at the specified position and feeds the paper to the Transfer Assembly. The rotating speed of the Registration Motor (M34) is increased to be higher than the process speed and then reduced to meet the process speed. Post-registration speed Process speed Speed of Registration Roller



Start point of deceleration Registration Roller point



Print speed [ppm]



75



10mm Transfer point



65



Post-registration speed [mm/s]



55



500



Process speed [mm/s]



350



290



Start point of deceleration [mm]



48.6



46.4



■ Transfer ● Post-transfer Guide Attraction Control With this machine, paper is attracted to the Post-transfer Guide by exhaust from the Image Formation System Exhaust Fan (FM01 or FM03 ). Therefore, behavior of papers between transfer and fixing becomes stable, which increase the paper feed capabilities.



197



2. Technology



Post-transfer Guide Paper



Duct



Paper



Post-transfer Guide Duct



■ Delivery/Reverse Unit ● Basic Operation Face-up Delivery 1. The Reverse Upper Flapper Solenoid (SL05) is turned ON to switch the feeding path to the Delivery Assembly side. 2. Rotating speed of the Delivery Motor (M13) is increased once the paper’s trailing edge passes through the Fixing Roller (fixing-through speed) 3. Feeding speed is reduced to meet the delivery speed once the paper’s trailing edge reaches the specified position. NOTE: Delivery speed is changed according to the paper size. Delivery speed remains the same if delivery option is connected.



198



2. Technology Outer Delivery Roller Outer Delivery Sensor(PS36) Outer Delivery Front Roller Reverse Upper Flapper Inner Delivery Sensor(PS35)



M13 Inner Delivery Roller SL05



Speed after Fixing Roller Delivery speed



Process speed Delivery Motor(M13)



Process speed



Reverse Upper Flapper Solenoid(SL05) 60 mm before Fixing Roller (Based on Registration Sensor)



20 mm before Outer Delivery Roller (Based on Outer-Delivery -Roller ON) 20 mm after Fixing Roller 20 mm after Outer Delivery (Based on Inner Delivery Sensor) Roller (Based on Outer-Delivery -Roller OFF)



Print speed [ppm] Process speed [mm/s]



75



65



350



55 290



Speed after Fixing Roller[mm/s]



750



Delivery speed [mm/s]



350 / 750(ACC)



Face-down Delivery 1. The Reverse Upper Flapper Solenoid(SL05)is turned OFF to switch the feeding path to the Delivery Assembly side. 2. Rotating speed of the Reverse Motor (M14) is increased (reverse feed speed) once the trailing edge of the preceding paper passes through the Fixing Roller to make the paper stopped/rotate reversely at the reverse position (reverse delivery speed) 3. Succeeding paper is fed to the reverse path to make the Reverse Motor (M14) stopped/ rotate normally. 4. Succeeding paper is fed to the reverse stop position. 5. Once the trailing edge of the preceding paper reaches the specified position, rotating speed of the Delivery Motor (M13) is reduced. NOTE: Delivery speed is changed according to the paper size. Delivery speed remains the same if delivery option is connected.



199



2. Technology Outer Delivery Roller Reverse Inlet Roller M13 SL05 Reverse Vertical Path Sensor (PS65) M14 Reverse Upper Roller



Reverse Lower Roller



Reverse delivery speed



Reverse delivery speed



Delivery speed



Delivery Motor (M13) Reverse delivery speed



Reverse feed speed Process speed



Process speed



Stop



Reverse Motor (M14)



50ms



Reverse Upper Flapper Solenoid (SL05)



20 mm before Outer Delivery Roller 60 mm before Fixing Roller (Based on Outer-Delivery-Roller ON) (Based on Registration Sensor ) 20 mm after Fixing Roller 20 mm after Outer Delivery Roller (Based on Inner Delivery Sensor) (Based on Outer-Delivery-Roller OFF)



Print speed [ppm] Process speed [mm/s]



75



65



350



55 290



Reverse feed speed [mm/s]



750



Reverse delivery speed [mm/s]



750



Delivery speed [mm/s]



350 / 750(ACC)



■ Duplex Unit ● Basic Operation 1. The Reverse Upper Flapper Solenoid (SL05) is turned OFF to switch the feeding path to the Reverse Assembly side. 2. When the paper’s trailing edge passes through the Fixing Roller, rotating speed of the Reverse Motor (M14) is increased (duplex pull-in speed) to make the paper stopped at the duplex reverse position. 3. The Reverse Motor is driven by the duplex pull-in speed to feed the paper to the Duplex Assembly (the flapper feeds the paper to the Duplex Assembly). Then, the Duplex Left Sensor (PS66) detects the paper's leading edge, and the paper is fed for a specified distance to stop at the position of Duplex Left Roller.



200



2. Technology Reverse Upper Flapper



SL05 Reverse Vertical Path Sensor (PS65) Reverse Upper Roller Duplex Flapper



M14



Duplex reverse point



M19



Reverse Lower Roller Duplex Left Sensor (PS66)



Duplex reverse standby point



Duplex feed speed Duplex reverse speed Process speed



Stop



Reverse Motor (M14)



Stop 50ms



Reverse Vertical Path Sensor (PS65) Duplex Left Sensor (PS66) Reverse Upper Flapper Solenoid (SL05)



60 mm before Fixing Roller (Based on Registration Sensor )



20 mm before Reverse Vertical Path Sensor



20 mm after Fixing Roller (Based on Reverse Vertical Path Sensor) Duplex Left Roller (Based on Duplex Left Sensor)



Print speed [ppm] Process speed [mm/s]



75



65



350



55 290



Duplex feed speed [mm/s]



500



Duplex reserve speed [mm/s]



500



Duplex delivery spped [mm/s]



500



● Side Registration Control In the case of printing the 2nd side of the 2-sided print, side registration displacement level is measured to adjust the write start timing and correct side registration.



When the paper is stopped at the duplex standby position



Side Registration Sensor (PS31) detects side registration. The side registration control executes detection of the home position as well as operation and detection of the standby position.



201



2. Technology 1. Home position operation Side Registration Unit is moved to the home position. Home position: at 13mm from the nominal dimension of A4 size Timing - When the main power is turned ON/when the Front Cover is closed/at the recovery from JAM process/at job completion 2. Standby position operation The unit is moved to the side registration standby position (10 mm front) corresponding the paper size. 3. Detection operation The Side Registration Motor (M16) is driven until Side Registration Sensor(PS31) is turned OFF to detect side registration displacement level from the travel distance. 4. The displacement level measured for side registration correction is converted into pixels to adjust the laser write start timing according to the displaced direction. The write start timing is pushed forward when the paper is displaced to the front. The write start timing is pushed back when the paper is displaced to the rear. Duplex Outlet Roller Side Registration Motor(M16)



Duplex Left Roller



Side Registration Sensor(PS31) Paper



Front



Standby point Detecting point About 10 mm



Paper



● Circulation quantity and limit The numbers in white background and the numbers in black background show each the first page and second page.



202



2. Technology



Less than 314 mm in size/5 sheets in circulation (B5 to A4R)



Pre-registration stop position 1



Pre-registration stop position 4



Pre-registration stop position 4



Registration stop position



Pre-registration stop position 1



Pre-registration stop position 4



Registration stop position



Pre-registration stop position7



Pre-registration stop position 1



Pre-registration stop position 4



203



Registration stop position



Duplex reverse stop position



Pre-registration stop position 1



Pre-registration stop position 4



Registration stop position



Pre-registration stop position 1



Pre-registration stop position 4



2. Technology



Pre-registration stop position7



Duplex reverse stop position



204



2. Technology



Exceeds 314 mm in size/3 sheets in circulation(B4 to LDR(431.8mm))



Registration stop position



Pre-registration stop position 4



Pre-registration stop position 4



Registration stop position



Registration stop position



Duplex stop position



Pre-registration stop position 4



Pre-registration stop position 4



Registration stop position



Registration stop position



Duplex stop position



Pre-registration stop position7



Registration stop position



205



2. Technology



■ Jam Detection ● Jam Code List PS52



PS51



PS20 PS67



PS29



PS64



PS03



PS36 PS35 PS04 PS65 PS31



PS24



PS66



PS19 PS32 PS02 PS25



PS21 PS26 PS33 PS22 PS27



Jam in Feed System xx = 01: Delay, 02: Stationary, 0A: Residue Yes: Detects, -: Does not detect Sensor No.



Sensor name



Jam type Delay



Stationary



Residue



xx01



PS19



Right Deck Pickup Sensor



Yes



-



xx02



PS32



Right Deck Pull Out Sensor



Yes



Yes



Yes



xx03



PS24



Vertical Path Sensor1



Yes



Yes



Yes



xx04



PS28



Writing Judging Sensor



Yes



Yes



Yes



xx05



PS29



Registration Sensor



Yes



Yes



Yes



xx06



PS20



Left Deck Pickup Sensor



Yes



-



-



xx07



PS33



Left Deck Pull Out Sensor



Yes



Yes



Yes



xx08



PS67



Duplex Merging Sensor



Yes



Yes



Yes



xx09



PS64



Duplex Outlet Sensor



Yes



Yes



Yes



xx0A



PS21



Cassette 3 Pickup Sensor



Yes



-



-



xx0B



PS26



Vertical Path Sensor3



Yes



Yes



Yes



xx0C



PS25



Vertical Path Sensor2



Yes



Yes



Yes



xx0D



PS22



Cassette 4 Pickup Sensor



Yes



-



-



xx0E



PS27



Vertical Path Sensor4



Yes



Yes



Yes



xx0F



PS51



Fixing Inlet Sensor



-



-



Yes



xx10



PS04



Fixing Toenail Jam Sensor



-



-



Yes



xx11



PS52



Fixing Outlet Sensor



Yes



-



Yes



206



2. Technology Sensor No.



Sensor name



Jam type Delay



Stationary



Residue



xx12



PS35



Inner Delivery Sensor



Yes



Yes



Yes



xx13



PS36



Outer Delivery Sensor



Yes



Yes



Yes



xx14



PS65



Reverse Vertical Path Sensor



Yes



Yes



Yes



xx15



PS66



Duplex Left Sensor



Yes



Yes



Yes



xx17



PS1



Deck Pickup Roll- Paer Deck / POD er Deck



Yes



-



-



xx18



PS6



Deck Pull Out Sensor



Yes



Yes



Yes



0305



PS29



Registration Sensor



Paer Deck / POD Deck



early timing jam



Other Jams Sensor No.



Sensor name



Jam type



0B01



SW02



Front Door Open Detection Switch



Door Open jam



0B02



PS03



Vertical Path Cover Open/Close Sensor Door Open jam



0B03



PS02



Multi-purpose Cover Open/Close Sensor Door Open jam



0C10



PS04



Fixing Toenail Jam Sensor



Fixing Toenail jam



0CA1



-



FeedSts time out jam



REFEED command is not received. (Former: E240-0001)



0CA2



-



RefeedStart time out jam



RefeedStart command is not received. (Former: E240-0002)



0CA3



-



ImageSet time out jam



ImageSet command is not received. (Former: E240-0003)



0CA4



-



PageComplete time out jam



PageCompletecommand is not received. (Former: E240-0004)



0CA5



-



Fixing temperature control time out jam -



0CAF



-



Finisher time out jam



Erroneous communication with finisher.



0CF1



-



Retry jam



An error avoidance jam occurs when an error in the machine (excluding parts failure) was detected. it is detected as an error if the same symptom occurs again after the first retry.



0D91



-



Size error jam



A size error jam occurs when the difference between the paper length detected by the Cassette Guide Plate/specified on the Control Panel and the length measured by the Registration Sensor is out of the specified range.



● Forced Paper Feed Control If there is paper in the following place after jam is detected, the paper will be forcedly fed to downstream direction.This control suppresses paper damage during jam handling.



207



2. Technology :Forced Paper Feed Control



208



2. Technology



External Auxiliary System Overview ■ Power Supply Configuration ● Power Supply Configuration inside the Host Machine Main Controller PCB 1



5V



Main Power Switch



12V



Main Controller PCB 2



5V



Front Door Open Detection Switch



Leakage Breaker 5V



Control Panel



5V



Multi Door Switch



12V 12V



Reader



24V



Noise Filter



5V



All-night Power Supply PCB



Fixing Power Supply PCB



12V



DC Power Supply PCB(12V)



12V



DC Power Supply PCB(24V)



24V



DC Power Supply PCB B(24V)



24V



DC Controller PCB



24V



DC-DC Converter PCB 3.3V



AC Driver PCB



5V 12V



Relay PCB



12V



Feed Driver PCB



24V



IH Coil Reader Heater Drum Heater Driver PCB



24V



Drum Heater



Developing Motor



24V



Cassette Heater



Drum Motor 24V



Deck Heater



High Voltage PCB 12V



Primary Charging High Voltage PCB



3.3V



Develop High Voltage PCB 12V



Cassette Heater Switch



Environment Heater Switch



12V



Main Driver PCB



24V



12V



24V



12V



24V



Option - Finisher - Paper Deck



Transfer High Voltage PCB



24V



5V



DC-DC Converter PCB



3.3V



12V



209



Duplex Driver PCB



24V



Fixing Motor Transfer High Voltage PCB



2. Technology



Main Controller PCB 1



DC Controller PCB Main Driver PCB



Transfer High Voltage PCB



Main Controller PCB 2



Feed Driver PCB DC Power Supply PCB



Duplex Driver PCB AC Driver PCB Relay PCB All-night Power Supply PCB Noise Filter



Develop High Voltage PCB DC Power Supply PCB Pre-transfer Charging PCB



Fixing Power Supply PCB



DC Power Supply PCB



Primary Charging High Voltage PCB



● Power Configuration of the Reader Unit 24V 24V 5V 24V Reader Controller PCB



Printer 12V



Motor Fan Sensor



24V 6V 4.5V



CMOS PCB 㸦Reader㸧



24V



LED Lamp Unit



24V 6V 4.5V



CMOS PCB 㸦DADF㸧



24V



LED Lamp Unit



24V 5V



210



DADF driver PCB



2. Technology



Controls ■ Power supply control ● Electric Power Management



By equating the electric power in the machine, the maximum power consumption is reduced in comparison with the conventional models (iR7105/7095/7086 series). 㼃㼕㼠㼔㼛㼡㼠㻌㼜㼛㼣㼑㼞㻌㼙㼍㼚㼍㼓㼑㼙㼑㼚㼠



㼃㼕㼠㼔㻌㼜㼛㼣㼑㼞㻌㼙㼍㼚㼍㼓㼑㼙㼑㼚㼠



0D[LPXPSRZHUFRQVXPSWLRQ



㻱㼝㼡㼍㼠㼕㼛㼚



㻻㼠㼔㼑㼞㻌㼠㼔㼍㼚㻌㼒㼕㼤㼕㼚㼓



㻻㼠㼔㼑㼞㻌㼠㼔㼍㼚㻌㼒㼕㼤㼕㼚㼓



㻲㼕㼤㼕㼚㼓



㻲㼕㼤㼕㼚㼓



This machine executes electric power management to prevent temporary power shortage. The electric power management detects current value of the entire product with the Current Sensor. In the case that the current value is likely to exceed the electric power reference value, the DC Controller temporarily reduces electric power supply to the fixing area to compensate for power shortage. 㻱㼘㼑㼏㼠㼞㼕㼏㻌㻼㼛㼣㼑㼞䠖



㻭㻯㻌㻰㼞㼕㼢㼑㼞㻌㻼㻯㻮



㻭㻯



㻿㼕㼓㼚㼍㼘㻦



䛆㻯㼡㼞㼞㼑㼚㼠㻌㻿㼑㼚㼟㼛㼞䛇



㼛㼠㼔㼑㼞㼟



㻰㼑㼠㼑㼏㼠㼕㼛㼚㻌㼛㼒㻌 㼀㼛㼠㼍㼘㻌㼏㼡㼞㼞㼑㼚㼠㻌㼢㼍㼘㼡㼑



䛆㻼㼛㼣㼑㼞䛇



㻲㼕㼤㼕㼚㼓㻌㻱㼘㼑㼏㼠㼞㼕㼏㻌㻼㼛㼣㼑㼞㻌



䛆㻲㼕㼤㼕㼚㼓㻌㻼㼛㼣㼑㼞㻌㻿㼡㼜㼜㼘㼥㻌㻼㻯㻮䛇 㻱㼘㼑㼏㼠㼞㼕㼏㻌㻼㼛㼣㼑㼞



䛆㻰㻯㻌㻯㼛㼚㼠㼞㼛㼘㼘㼑㼞㻌㻼㻯㻮䛇 䛆㻭㻿㻵㻯䛇 㻰㼑㼠㼑㼞㼙㼕㼚㼍㼠㼕㼛㼚㻌㼛㼒㻌㻌㼒㼕㼤㼕㼚㼓 㼑㼘㼑㼏㼠㼞㼕㼏㻌㼜㼛㼣㼑㼞㻌㼢㼍㼘㼡㼑



㼀㼑㼙㼜㼑㼞㼍㼠㼡㼞㼑



䛆㻲㼕㼤㼕㼚㼓㻌㻭㼟㼟㼑㼙㼎㼘㼥䛇 㻵㻴㻌㻯㼛㼕㼘



㼀㼛㼠㼍㼘㻌㼏㼡㼞㼞㼑㼚㼠㻌㼒㼘㼛㼣



Current Sensor : Converts the flux occurred by current to the voltage.



● Power-saving Function Overview There are "Standby" and "Sleep" as the power supply mode of this machine. Further, "Sleep" is divided into the following 3 modes: "Sleep Standby", "Sleep 1", "Deep Sleep".



211



2. Technology Reader Control panel State of power supply ON



Standby



Energy Saving State of power supply OFF Engine Main Controler



[Energy Saver] key is turned off or A specified period of time has passed



[Energy Saver] key is turned on



Sleep Mode Sleep Standby Energy Use



Energy Use



“Low”



“High”



Job end



Job submission Job end



Job submission



Deep Sleep



Sleep 1



* The time specified in Settings/Registration> Preferences> Timer/Energy Settings> Auto Sleep Time



Standby The mode that the machine is running or can start operation immediately and all power is supplied in this mode.



Sleep Standby The state that only the Control Panel is off while the power is supplied to all other parts.



Sleep 1 The state that the controller's all-night and non-all-night power is supplied while the Control Panel is off.



Deep Sleep In this state, the Control Panel is off while only all-night power is supplied. When any of the following "Conditions for Not Entering Deep Sleep" applies, transition to this mode does not occur.



Conditions for Not Entering Deep Sleep Mode (Check Items) Settings of Settings/Registration When the following settings are enabled in the [Settings/Registration] menu, the machine does not enter Deep Sleep mode. The corresponding items are shown below. Preferences > Timer/Energy Settings • Sleep Mode Energy Use > High • Sleep Mode Energy Use > Low > Compensate for Network Comm. • Within the time specified in Auto Sleep Time Preferences > Network • • • • • • • • •



NetWare Settings > Use NetWare > ON AppleTalk Settings > Use AppleTalk > ON TCP/IP Settings > BMLinkS Settings > Use BMLinkS > ON (*1) IEEE 802.1X Settings > Use IEEE 802.1X > ON TCP/IP Settings > IPv4 Settings > IP Address Settings > Auto IP > ON TCP/IP Settings > DNS Settings > mDNS Settings > Use mDNS > ON Google Cloud Print Settings > Use Google Cloud Print > ON (*2) TCP/IP Settings > SIP Settings > NGN Settings > Use NGN > ON (*1) Direct Connection Settings > Use Direct Connection > ON



212



2. Technology Function Settings > Receive/Forward • Fax Settings >Select RX Mode > Fax/Tel (Auto Switch) (*1) • Fax Settings > Remote RX > ON (*1) • Fax Settings > Set Number Display > ON (*1) Function Settings > Send • Fax Settings > Modem Dial-in Settings > ON (*1)



Other Settings • Volume Settings key > Fax Volume Settings > Incoming Fax Ring > ON (*1) *1: This may not be displayed depending on the country/region, model, and configuration of the options. *2: This must be already registered on Google Cloud Print in advance.



Hardware status • It is connected to the coin vendor.



System Performance Status • The system is running/communicating. CAUTION: The system is in a running/communicating state for approx. 10 minutes after startup in many cases.



● Quick Startup To realize faster startup, power configuration has been changed to always supply power to the All-night Power Supply PCB. Thereby, the main menu can be displayed after 7 seconds from turning ON the Main Power Supply Switch. Although when the Main Power Supply Switch is OFF, power is supplied to the following PCBs. • AC Driver PCB • All-night Power Supply PCB • Relay PCB • Main Controller PCB 1 Image of existing power supply



Main SW



By turning OFF the Main Switch, all power turns OFF



All-night Power Supply



Breaker



All-night Circuit



Relay



AC Driver PCB



NOT All-night Power Supply



Relay PCB



Main Controller PCB 1



Energized area when the Main Switch is OFF



Power is supplied to the All-night Power Supply even if the Main Switch is turned OFF



Image of power supply for Quick Startup



All-night Power Supply



Breaker Relay



NOT All-night Power Supply



AC Driver PCB



Main SW



213



All-night Circuit Relay PCB



Main Controller PCB 1



2. Technology NOTE: The quick startup function can be set from "Settings/Registration". • Settings/Registration > Preferences > Timer/Energy Settings > Quick Startup Settings for Main Power [On]: Quick startup is executed (default) [Off]: Quick startup is not executed



Disconnect the plug from outlet or turn OFF the Breaker when performing work with the possibility to come in contact with the PCBs above. PCBs may get damage. If a conductive material comes in contact with the PCB, short circuit may occur in the PCB, and may cause damage on it. The following illustration is used at the place where attention needs. When the following label is affixed, be sure to disconnect the plug from outlet or turn OFF the Breaker.



Quick Start



Plug Off Conditions for not executing quick startup This machine does not execute quick startup if the following conditions are met at first startup after the power plug is connected to the outlet. Connection status of the hardware • A coin vendor is connected. Either of the following network settings is set to "ON": Settings/Registration > Preferences > Network • AppleTalk Settings > Use AppleTalk > ON • Slect Wired/Wireless LAN > Wireless LAN • Bluetooth Settings > ON When turning ON the main power of the machine after turning OFF the main power in any of the conditions below • The system is running/communicating. Others • • • • • •



More than 110 hours have elapsed after quick startup When turning ON the main power of the machine in 20 seconds after turning OFF the main power Startup after 8 hours or more have passed since the power of this product was turned OFF When turning ON the main power of the machine after turning OFF the main power from the Remote UI The next time the power is turned ON after occurrence of the error code The next time the power is turned ON after shifting to the service mode screen



● Effects of Spanning Tree-supported Hub If you set the network as a loop, data keeps staying in this loop and efficiency of data transfer might be decreased. In order to prevent this symptom, some hubs have the function called “spanning tree”. If this function is enabled, the device newly connected to the hub can make data communication with network 10 to 50 seconds (time changes due to the conditions) after the connection. When the machine enters Deep sleep mode and restores from the sleep mode, the machine electrically disconnects with the network once. Therefore, if the machine connects with the spanning tree-installed hub, the machine cannot communicate with network for approximately 1 minute at a maximum after restoring from the Deep sleep mode. For this reason, right after restoring from the Deep sleep mode, the following symptoms might occur: Device status cannot be collected, printing cannot be made, and login using a login application cannot be made. If such symptoms become any problems, perform the following operations. • Using user mode, set not to enter the Deep sleep mode. Preferences > Timer/Energy Settings > Sleep Mode Energy Use > High • Disable the spanning tree function of hub. • Request users to use the hub which supports Rapid Spanning-Tree • Protocol (RSTP) that resolved such problems.



214



2. Technology



■ Heater Control The power of this machine is supplied to each load side by linking with the following switches, etc.



Operating condition of the heater differs according to the status of the Environment Switch and the host machine.



A. In the case of normal image mode*1 (DRM-H-SW: "2")



Mode Switch



Main SW



Heater



Main Power OFF



sleep mode



WarmUp (Recovery)



Standby/Energy Saver



OFF



Copy/Print



ON



Cassette Heater SW



OFF



ON



OFF



ON



OFF



ON



OFF



ON



Drum



OFF



OFF



OFF



OFF



ON*3



Cassette



OFF



OFF



OFF



OFF



OFF



Reader



OFF



OFF



OFF



OFF



OFF



OFF



ON



ON*3



ON



ON



OFF



ON



ON



ON



ON



OFF



ON



OFF



OFF



OFF



OFF



OFF



Mode Switch



Heater



Main Power OFF



Main SW



sleep mode



WarmUp (Recovery)



OFF



Standby/Energy Saver



Copy/Print



ON



Cassette Heater SW



OFF



ON



OFF



ON



OFF



ON



OFF



ON



Drum



OFF



OFF



OFF



OFF



ON*3



Cassette



OFF



ON



OFF



ON



OFF



Reader



ON



ON



ON



ON



ON



OFF



ON



ON*3



ON



ON



OFF



ON



ON



ON



ON



OFF



OFF



OFF



ON



OFF



OFF



OFF



B. In the case of image priority mode*1 (DRM-H-SW: "1")



Mode Switch



Heater



Main Power OFF



Main SW



sleep mode



WarmUp (Recovery)



OFF



Standby/Energy Saver



Copy/Print



ON



Cassette Heater SW



OFF



ON



OFF



ON



OFF



ON



OFF



ON



OFF



ON



Drum



OFF



OFF



OFF



OFF



ON*3



ON*3



ON



ON



ON



ON



Cassette



OFF



OFF



OFF



OFF



OFF



ON



OFF



ON



OFF



ON



Reader



OFF



OFF



OFF



OFF



OFF



OFF



OFF



OFF



OFF



OFF



Mode Switch



Main SW Cassette Heater SW



Heater



Main Power OFF



sleep mode



WarmUp (Recovery)



OFF



Standby/Energy Saver



Copy/Print



ON



OFF



ON



OFF



ON



OFF



ON



Drum



ON



Cassette



OFF



Reader



ON



OFF



ON



ON



ON



ON



ON*3



ON



OFF



ON



OFF



ON



ON



ON



ON



ON*3



ON



ON



OFF



OFF



OFF



*1: ON/OFF can be switched in the following service mode (Lv. 2). COPIER > OPTION > IMG-MCON > DRM-H-SW *2: When 1 or 2 is set in the following service mode, the Drum Heater is turned ON. COPIER > OPTION > IMG-LSR > 2D-SHADE *3: OFF when the detected temperature of the Environment Sensor is 15 deg C or higher.



215



OFF



ON



ON



ON



ON



ON



OFF



ON



OFF



OFF



OFF



2. Technology



■ Fan Control ● Location of Fans



FM17



FM16



FM33 FM07 FM02 IH power supply unit



FM31 FM30 FM32 FM41



FM04



Power Supply



FM08 FM42 FM40 FM05 FM14



FM01 FM03



FM15



Circuit code



Name



Function



Error/Alarm code



FM01 FM03



Making Image Exhaust Fan



To exhaust air in the image formation area



FM02



Primary Charging Air-supply Fan



To intake air around the Primary Charging Assembly



E824-0000



FM04



Main Controller Cooling Fan



To cool the Main Controller PCB



E880-0001



FM05



Paper Cooling Fan



To cool the paper passing through the delivery area



33-0001



FM07



Fixing Power Supply Cooling Fan



To cool the fixing power supply



E804-0001



FM08



Transfer Cleaner Cooling Fan



To cool the Transfer Cleaner / To cool the Duplex Feed Guide



E820-0002



FM14



Power Supply Cooling Fan 1



To cool the power supply



E804-0000



FM15



Power Supply Cooling Fan 2



To cool the power supply



E804-0000



FM16



Laser Scanner Cooling Fan



To cool the Laser Scanner



E121-0001



FM17



Primary Charging Exhaust Fan



To exhaust air around the Primary Charging Assembly



33-0027



FM30



Developer Lower Cooling Fan



To cool the Developing Unit



E820-0000



FM31



Developer Upper Cooling Fan



To cool the Developing Unit



E820-0001



FM32



Pre-transfer Charging Unit Air-supply Fan



To intake air around the Pre-transfer Charging Assembly 33-0026



FM33



Pre-transfer Charging Unit Exhaust Fan



To exhaust air around the Pretransfer Charging Assembly



FM40



Feed Driver Cooling Fan



To cool the Feed Driver



33-0013



FM41



Duplex Driver Cooling Fan



To cool the Duplex Driver



33-0028



FM42



Registration Motor/Duplex Motor Cooling Fan



To cool the Duplex Motor and the Registration Motor



33-0002



216



E806-0000



2. Technology



● Airflow



FM17



Developing Assembly



FM33



FM31 FM30



FM07 FM42



FM02



FM32 FM41



FM08 FM05



FM16



FM04



Power Supply



FM40 FM01 FM03



FM14 FM15



Circuit code



Name



FM01FM0 Making Image Exhaust Fan 3/



Function To exhaust air in the image formation area



Error/Alarm code E806-0000



FM02



Primary Charging Air-supply Fan



To intake air around the Primary Charging As- E824-0000 sembly



FM04



Main Controller Cooling Fan



To cool the Main Controller PCB



FM05



Paper Cooling Fan



To cool the paper passing through the delivery 33-0001 area



FM07



Fixing Power Supply Cooling Fan



To cool the fixing power supply



FM08



Transfer Cleaner Cooling Fan



To cool the Transfer Cleaner / To cool the Du- E820-0002 plex Feed Guide



FM14



Power Supply Cooling Fan 1



To cool the power supply



E804-0000



FM15



Power Supply Cooling Fan 2



To cool the power supply



E804-0000



FM16



Laser Scanner Cooling Fan



To cool the Laser Scanner



E121-0001



FM17



Primary Charging Exhaust Fan



To exhaust air around the Primary Charging As- 33-0027 sembly



FM30



Developer Lower Cooling Fan



To cool the Developing Unit



E820-0000



FM31



Developer Upper Cooling Fan



To cool the Developing Unit



E820-0001



FM32



Pre-transfer Charging Unit Air-supply Fan



To intake air around the Pre-transfer Charging 33-0026 Assembly



FM33



Pre-transfer Charging Unit Exhaust Fan



To exhaust air around the Pretransfer Charging Assembly



FM40



Feed Driver Cooling Fan



To cool the Feed Driver



217



E880-0001



E804-0001



33-0013



2. Technology Circuit code



Name



Function



Error/Alarm code



FM41



Duplex Driver Cooling Fan



To cool the Duplex Driver



FM42



Registration Motor/Duplex Motor Cooling Fan



To cool the Duplex Motor and the Registration 33-0002 Motor



33-0028



● Fan Sequence NO.



NAME



WAIT UP



INTR



STBY



PRINT



LSTR



JAM



ERR



Power saving



DEEP Sleep



Primary Charging FM02 Air-supply Fan FM01 FM03 Making Image Exhaust Fan FM04 Main Controller Cooling Fan



Controller control



FM05 Paper Cooling Fan Fixing Power Supply FM07 Cooling Fan FM08 Transfer Cleaner Cooling Fan FM14 Power Supply Cooling Fan 1 FM15 Power Supply Cooling Fan 2 FM16 Laser Scanner Cooling Fan FM17 Primary Charging Exhaust Fan FM30 Developer Lower Cooling Fan FM31 Developer Upper Cooling Fan Pre-transfer Charging Unit FM32 Air-supply Fan Pre-transfer Charging Unit FM33 Exhaust Fan FM40 Feed Driver Cooling Fan FM41 Duplex Driver Cooling Fan Registration Motor/ FM42 Duplex Motor Cooling Fan :Full speed :half speed



■ Counter Control Count-up timing differs according to the following. • Print mode (1-sided print/2nd side of 2-sided print, 1st side of 2-sided print) • Delivery position (Finisher) Delivery position



Print mode 1-sided print/2nd side of 2-sided print



1st side of 2-sided print



Count-up timing 1



When the machine configuration consists of the Host Machine only



2



Staple Finisher- Tray A (Upper Escape Tray) V1/V2 Booklet Finisher- Tray B (Lower Escape Tray) V1/V2



Reference sensor: Outer Delivery Sensor (PS36)



Reference sensor: Small (when the length is up to LTR) -> Duplex left Sensor (PS66) Reference sensor: Upper Escape Delivery Sensor (PS133) R-configuration (when the length exceeds LTR and up to A4R) Reference sensor: -> Duplex Merging Sensor (PS67) Bottom Escape Delivery Sensor (PS111) Large (the length is A4R or larger) Reference sensor: -> Reverse Vertical Path Sensor Delivery Sensor (PS102) (PS65) Reference sensor: Saddle Inlet Sensor (PS101)



Tray C (Stack Tray) Saddle area



The default counters for each country (model) are listed below. Target



Number displayed for each counter (in service mode)/Item Counter 1



Counter 2



Counter 3



Counter 4



Counter 5



Counter 6



100VJapan modeltype1



Total 1



*1



*1



*1



*1



*1



101



000



000



000



000



000



100VJapan model type2



Total2



Copy (Total2)



Total A2



*1



*1



*1



102



202



127



000



000



000



218



Target region code JP JP



2. Technology Target



Number displayed for each counter (in service mode)/Item Counter 1



120VTaiwan model



Counter 2



Counter 3



Counter 4



Counter 5



Counter 6



Total 1



Total (Large)



Copy (Total 1)



Copy (Large)



*1



*1



101



103



201



203



000



000



120V UL model Total 1 type1 101



Total (Large)



Copy (Total 1)



Copy (Large)



*1



*1



103



201



203



000



000



120V UL model Total2



Copy (Total2)



*1



*1



*1



*1



type2



102



202



000



000



000



000



230VGeneral model



Total 1



Total (Large)



Copy (Total 1)



Copy (Large)



*1



*1



101



103



201



203



000



000



Total (Black/ Small)



Scan (Total 1)



Print (Total 1)



*1



*1



240V UK model Total (Black/ type1 Large)



113



501



301



000



000



240V UK model Total 1 type2 101



112



*1



*1



*1



*1



*1



000



000



000



000



000



240V CA model Total 1 230V FRN model type1



Total (Large)



Copy (Total 1)



Copy (Large)



*1



*1



101



103



201



203



000



000



Total (Black/ Large)



Total (Black/ Small)



Scan (Total 1)



Print (Total 1)



*1



*1 000



112



113



501



301



000



230V FRN model type2



Total 1



*1



*1



*1



*1



*1



101



000



000



000



000



000



230V GER model type1



Total (Black/ Large)



Total (Black/ Small)



Scan (Total 1)



Print (Total 1)



*1



*1



112



113



501



301



000



000



230V GER model type2



Total 1



*1



*1



*1



*1



*1



101



000



000



000



000



000



230V AMS model type1



Total (Black/ Large)



Total (Black/ Small)



Scan (Total 1)



Print (Total 1)



*1



*1



112



113



501



301



000



000



Total 1



*1



*1



*1



*1



*1



101



000



000



000



000



000



Total (Black/ Small)



Scan (Total 1)



Print (Total 1)



*1



*1



230V AMS model type2



230V ITA mod- Total (Black/ el type1 Large)



113



501



301



000



000



230V ITA mod- Total 1 el type2 101



112



*1



*1



*1



*1



*1



000



000



000



000



000



230VGeneral model



Total 1



Total (Black/ Large)



Total (Black/ Small)



*1



*1



*1



101



112



113



000



000



000



*1 : Hidden by default. Can be changed in service mode. Description of symbols • • • • • •



Large: Large size paper (when paper length exceeds 364 mm in paper feed direction) Small: Small size paper (when paper length is 364 mm or less in paper feed direction) Total: When a sheet of paper is delivered, the counter is advanced by 1 2-Sided: The counter is advanced by 1 for paper delivered in 2-sided mode Country/region code change of CONFIG is executed from COPIER > OPTION > FNC-SW > CONFIG. Three-digit number in the counter column shows the setting value of the following service mode items. COPIER > OPTION > USER > COUNTER1 to COUNTER6 • COUNTER 2 to COUNTER 6 can be changed in the following service mode. COPIER > OPTION > USER



219



Target region code TW US US SG/KO/CN GB



GB AU FR



FR DE



DE ES/SE/PT/NO/ DK/FI/PL/HU/C Z/SI/GR/EE/R U/NL/SK/RO/H R/BG/TR ES/SE/PT/NO/ DK/FI/PL/HU/C Z/SI/GR/EE/R U/NL/SK/RO/H R/BG/TR IT



IT CN



2. Technology • The change of the counter display type (New method/Conventional method) can be changed from the following service mode. COPIER > OPTION > USER > CNT-SW



220



3



Periodical Service Periodically Replaced Parts.............. 222 Consumable Parts.............................224 Periodical Servicing...........................227



3. Periodical Service



Periodically Replaced Parts DADF Thes DADF does not have parts that require periodical replacement.



Reader Thes Reader does not have parts that require periodical replacement.



Printer No.



Parts name



Parts num- Quantiber ty *1



Interval *2



Service Mode



Alarm Code



Remark



Parts counter Replacement (COUNTER > completion noPRDC-1) tification



1



Primary Charging Wire



FB4-3687



2



500,000 sheets



PRM-WIRE



43-0133



With spring: FL3-4558 In a high temperature/ humidity environment (30 deg C/80%), it is 250,000 sheets.



2



Primary Charging Wire cleaner



FL2-7750



2



500,000 sheets



PRM-CLN



43-0350



In a high temperature/ humidity environment (30 deg C/80%), it is 250,000 sheets.



3



Primary Charging Wire cleaner holder



FL3-7560



2



500,000 sheets



4



Grid Wire



FY1-0883



1



500,000 sheets



-



-



5



Pre-transfer Charging Wire



FB4-3687



1



500,000 sheets



PO-WIRE



43-0376



With spring: FL3-4559 In a high temperature/ humidity environment (30 deg C/80%), it is 250,000 sheets.



6



Pre-transfer Charging Wire cleaner



FL2-7750



1



500,000 sheets



PO-CLN



43-0377



In a high temperature/ humidity environment (30 deg C/80%), it is 250,000 sheets.



7



Pre-transfer Charging Wire cleaner holder



FL3-7560



1



500,000 sheets



8



Fixing Main Thermistor (THM010/ THM030)



FK2-7683



1



500,000 sheets



FIX-TH1



43-0390



9



Fixing Sub Thermistor 1 (THM020)



FK2-7693



1



500,000 sheets



FIX-TH2



43-0391



10



Ozone Filter



FL3-2134



1



6,000,000 sheets



OZ-FIL1



43-0483



11



Dustproof Filter



FC8-9564



1



2,000,000 sheets



AR-FIL1



43-0488



-



*1: The parts number may be changed due to engineering change. *2: All the values described in this column are estimated replacement timing in A4 size. The replacement timing is a reference value in the case of usage in general offices, and the actual value differs depending on the customer environment, operation conditions in the field, etc.



222



3. Periodical Service



Option Thes Option does not have parts that require periodical replacement.



223



3. Periodical Service



Consumable Parts DADF No.



Parts name



Part No



Quantity



Interval



Service Mode



Alarm Code



Parts counter (COUNTER > DRBL-2)



Replacement completion notification



1



Pickup roller



FL3-7266



1



80,000 pages



DF-PU‑RL



43-0125



2



Feed roller 1



FL2-9608



1



80,000 pages



DF-FD‑RL



43-0091



3



Separation roller



FB2-7777



1



80,000 pages



DF-SP‑RL



43-0092



4



Dust-collecting



FC8-5633



2



80,000 pages



LNT‑TAP1



43- 0511



5



Dust-collecting type E



FC8-5727



8



80,000 pages



LNT‑TAP2



43- 0512



6



Stamp



FC7-5465



1



7,000 pages



STAMP



-



Reader The reader does not have parts that are classified as durables.



Printer No.



Parts Name



Parts No. *1



Qty



Work interService Alarm Code val mode *2 Parts counter Replacement (COUNTER > completion DRBL-1/2)



Remarks



1



Primary Charging Assembly



FM3-7288



1



1,000,000 sheets



PRM-UNIT



43-0173



2



Pre-transfer Charging Assembly



FM3-7297



1



1,000,000 sheets



PO-UNIT



43-0378



3



Developing Cylinder



FM4-5438



1



1,000,000 sheets



DV-UNT-K



43-0123



500,000 in high temp/ high hmdty environ (30 deg C/80%)



4



Developing Roller



FC0-2276



2



1,000,000 sheets



5



Drum Cleaning Blade



FL3-6291



1



600,000 sheets



CLN-BLD



43-0193



Reversed at 300,000 sheets (1-sided)



6



Drum Separation Claw



FB4-8018



3



500,000 sheets



SP-CLAW



43-0354



250,000 in high temp/ high hmdty environ (30 deg C/80%)



7



Drum Front Side Seal



FC9-9024



1



500,000 sheets



BS-SL-F



43-0352



8



Drum Rear Side Seal



FC9-9024



1



500,000 sheets



BS-SL-R



43-0353



9



Pre-exposure Scraper



FC9-9153



2



500,000 sheets



EXP-SCRP



43-0355



10



ETB



FC8-7160



1



500,000 sheets



TR-BLT



43-0006



11



Transfer Roller



FC8-7159



1



500,000 sheets



TR-ROLL



43-0013



12



Brush Roller



FC8-7175



1



500,000 sheets



T-CN-BRU



43-0372



13



ETB Cleaning Blade



FC6-1647



1



500,000 sheets



T-CLN-BD



43-0370



224



Clean with lint-free paper moistened with alcohol.



3. Periodical Service No.



Parts Name



Parts No. *1



Qty



Work interService Alarm Code val mode *2 Parts counter Replacement (COUNTER > completion DRBL-1/2)



Remarks



14



Fixing Cleaning Web



FY1-1157



1



500,000 sheets



FX-WEB1



43-0419



15



Fixing Roller



FM0-3465



1



500,000 sheets



FX-UP-RL



43-0389



16



Fixing Roller Insulating Bush



FM1-C081



2



500,000 sheets



FX-IN-BS



-



17



Fixing Roller Thrust Stopper



FC6-3501



2



500,000 sheets



FX-RTNR



43-0394



18



Pressure Roller Unit



FM4-5403



1



500,000 sheets



FX-LW-RL



43-0398



19



Pressure Roller Static Eliminator



FC7-4287



1



500,000 sheets



FX-L-STC



43-0402



20



Upper Separation Claw



FB5-3625



6



500,000 sheets



DLV-UCLW



43-0470



21



Cassette 3 Pickup Roller/Cassette 4 Pickup Roller



FC5-2524



2



500,000 sheets



3: C3-PU-RL 4: C4-PU-RL



3: 43-0085 4: 43-0088



Actual use in terms of No. of prints; 1 pc. ea. 3/4



22



Cassette 3 Feed Roller/ Cassette 4 Feed Roller



FC5-2526



2



500,000 sheets



3: C3-FD-RL 4: C4-FD-RL



3: 43-0086 4: 43-0089



Actual use in terms of No. of prints; 1 pc. ea. 3/4



23



Cassette 3 Separation Roller/Cassette 4 Separation Roller



FC5-2528



2



500,000 sheets



3: C3-SP-RL 4: C4-SP-RL



3: 43-0087 4: 43-0090



Actual use in terms of No. of prints; 1 pc. ea. 3/4



24



Right Deck Pickup Roller/Left Deck Pickup Roller



FC5-2524



2



500,000 sheets



Right: C1-PU- Right: 43-0079 Actual use in terms of RL Left: 43-0082 No. of prints; 1 pc. ea. Left: C2-PU-RL Left/Right



25



Right Deck Feed Roller/ Left Deck Feed Roller



FC5-2526



2



500,000 sheets



Right: C1-FD- Right: 43-0080 Actual use in terms of RL Left: 43-0083 No. of prints; 1 pc. ea. Left: C2-FD-RL Left/Right



26



Right Deck Separation Roller/Left Deck Separation Roller



FC5-2528



2



500,000 sheets



Right: C1-SP- Right: 43-0081 Actual use in terms of RL Left: 43-0084 No. of prints; 1 pc. ea. Left: C2-SP-RL Left/Right



27



Multi-purpose Tray Separation Roller



FC6-6661



1



120,000 sheets



M-SP-RL



43-0078



Actual use in terms of No. of prints



28



Multi-purpose Tray Feed Roller



FB1-8581



1



120,000 sheets



M-FD-RL



43-0077



Actual use in terms of No. of prints



Replaced simultaneously with Fixing Roller



Clean this part if not replacing it. Alcohol, lint-free paper.



*1: The parts numbers may change according to engineering change. *2: All the values indicated in this column are replacement timing estimated in A4 size. The replacement timing is a reference value for general office use. The actual value varies depending on the customer environment, operation conditions in the field, etc.



Option Paper Deck Unit-E1 No.



Parts name



Parts number



Quantity



Interval



Service Mode



Alarm Code



Parts counter (COUNTER > DRBL-2)



Replacement completion notification



1



Deck Pickup Roller



FL0-4500



1



1,000,000 sheets



PD-PU-RL



43-0568



2



Deck Feed Roller



FC0-9450



1



1,000,000 sheets



PD-FD-RL



43-0576



3



Deck Separation Roller



FC0-9631



1



1,000,000 sheets



PD-SP-RL



43-0572



225



3. Periodical Service POD Deck Lite-C1 No.



Parts name



Parts number



Quantity



Interval



Service Mode



Alarm Code



Parts counter (COUNTER > DRBL-2)



Replacement completion notification



1



Deck Pickup Roller



FL0-4500



1



1,000,000 sheets



PD-PU-RL



43-0568



2



Deck Feed Roller



FC0-9450



1



1,000,000 sheets



PD-FD-RL



43-0576



3



Deck Separation Roller



FC0-9631



1



1,000,000 sheets



PD-SP-RL



43-0572



Paper Folding Inserter Unit-J1 No.



Parts name



Parts num- Quan ber tity



Interval



Counter



1



Pickup Roller



4A3-3870



2



100,000 sheets



DRBL-2



IS-P-RL1



2



Feed Roller



4A3-3869



1



100,000 sheets



DRBL-2



IS-F-RL1



3



Separation Roller



4A3-3868



1



100,000 sheets



DRBL-2



IS-S-RL1



4



Torque limiter



4A3-3888



1



1,000,000 times



DRBL-2



IS-TQLM



5



Horizontal feed slave roller



FE3-7671



8



2,000,000 sheets



DRBL-2



IS-COLL1



6



Z fold feed slave roller



FE3-7671



10



2,000,000 sheets



DRBL-2



IS-COLL2



Staple Finisher-V1_V2/Booklet Finisher-V1_V2 No.



Parts name



Parts num- Quan ber tity



Interval



Counter



1



Staple Unit



FM1-H337



1



500,000 times



2



Staple-Free Binding Unit



FM1-K422



1



30,000 times DRBL-2



FR-STPL



3



Stack Tray Torque Limiter



FE3-9778



2



200,000 times



DRBL-2



TRY-TQLM



4



Static Eliminator (Stack Tray Unit)



FL0-5052



1



1,000,000 sheets



DRBL-2



DL-STC



5



Paddle Unit



FE3-6957



4



1,000,000 times



DRBL-2



FIN-MPDL



6



Stack Delivery Lower Roller Clutch



FK4-1312



1



1,000,000 times



DRBL-2



SW-RL-CL



7



Escape Feed Clutch



FK4-1312



1



1,000,000 times



DRBL-2



ESC-CL



8



Static Eliminator (Lower Escape Delivery Unit)



FL0-5056



1



1,000,000 sheets



DRBL-2



TRY-STC1



9



Static Eliminator (Upper Escape Delivery Unit)



FL0-5056



1



1,000,000 sheets



DRBL-2



TRY-STC2



10



Stitcher Unit



FL0-6966



1



100,000 times



DRBL-2



SDL-STP



11



Static Eliminator (Saddle De- FL0-2207 livery Unit)



2



1,000,000 sheets



DRBL-2



SDL-STC



226



DRBL-2



FIN-STPR



3. Periodical Service



Periodical Servicing DADF △: Cleaning ×: Lubrication, □: Adjustment, ◎: Inspection No.



1



Part Name



Number



Scanning glass (Surface)



Interval 8,000 pa- 160,000 ges pages



1



Scanning glass (Surface/ Back)



Remarks



As needed



Other



△



Item performed by user.



△



Including the white plate positioning of the glass surface. Item performed by user.



2



Platen roller 1



1



△



3



Platen roller 2



1



△ △



4



White plate



1



5



Post-separation sensor 1



1



△



△



6



Post-separation sensor 2



1



△



△



7



Post-separation sensor 3



1



△



△



8



Registration sensor



1



△



△



9



Lead sensor 1



1



△



△



10



Delivery sensor



1



△



△



11



Double feed detection sensor (transmission)



1



△



△



12



Double feed detection sensor (reception)



1



△



△



13



Registration roller



1



△



△



14



Lead roller 1



1



△



△



15



Lead roller 2



1



△



△



16



Lead roller 3



1



△



△



17



Pullout roller



1



△



△



18



Feed roller 2



1



△



△



19



Delivery roller



1



△



△



20



Each roller/wheel



12



△



△



21



Each scraper



-



△



△



22



DADF height adjustment



-



□



□



Sensor is scanner form only. Cleaning is performed per 160,000 pages sheets or 12 months period.



Cleaning is performed per 8,000 pages or 6 months period.



Adjustment is performed per 8,000 pages or 6 months period.



Reader △: Cleaning ×: Lubrication, □: Adjustment, ◎: Inspection No.



Part Name



Number



Interval



Remarks



As needed 1



Copyboard glass (Surface)



1



△



Item performed by user.



Copyboard glass (Surface/Back)



1



△



Including the white plate positioning of the glass surface.



227



3. Periodical Service No.



Part Name



Number



Interval



Remarks



As needed 2



Stream reading glass (Surface)



1



△



Item performed by user. (After cleaning with wet and tightly-wrung cloth, wipe with dry soft cloth.) When a service technician performs cleaning, use dedicated cleaning cloth and oil glass cleaner. Cleaning the Stream Reading Glass with alcohol results in thinning of the oil film on the surface. As a result, the frictional resistance of the surface is decreased, which allows more dust and dirt to adhere to the surface. - Oil Glass Cleaner: FY9-6020 - Cleaning Cloth: FC5-4430



Stream reading glass (Surface/Back)



1



△



-



Printer △: Cleaning ×: Lubrication, □: Adjustment, ◎: Inspection No.



Part Name



1



Dustproof Glass



2



Grid Wire



3



Number



Interval 250,000 pages



300,000 pages



Remarks



500,000 1,000,000 As neepages pages ded △



1



Clean with lint-free paper moistened with alcohol.



AR



△



Clean when Primary Charging Wire is replaced. Clean with lint-free paper moistened with alcohol. In a high temperature/humidity environment (30 deg C/80%), it is 250,000 sheets.



Primary Charging Assembly Shield Plate



3



△



Clean when Primary Charging Wire is replaced. Clean with lint-free paper moistened with alcohol. In a high temperature/humidity environment (30 deg C/80%), it is 250,000 sheets.



4



Pre-transfer Charging Assembly Shield Plate



2



△



Clean when Primary Charging Wire is replaced. Clean with lint-free paper moistened with alcohol. In a high temperature/humidity environment (30 deg C/80%), it is 250,000 sheets.



5



Drum Cleaning Unit Plate



1



△



Clean with lint-free paper moistened with alcohol.



6



Pre-exposure Plastic Sheet



2



7



Toner collection area



1



△



Crumb toner clusters. In a high temperature/humidity environment (30 deg C/80%), it is 250,000 sheets.



8



Separation Claw Mounting Base



1



△



Clean with lint-free paper moistened with alcohol.



9



Process Unit Rear Guide



1



△



Clean with lint-free paper moistened with alcohol.



10



Drum Sliding Assembly



1



△



×



228



Clean with lint-free paper moistened with alcohol.



Apply lubricant at the Drum Sliding Assembly when abnormal sound is heard at the time of operation (FY9-6008).



3. Periodical Service No.



Part Name



Number



Interval 250,000 pages



300,000 pages



Remarks



500,000 1,000,000 As neepages pages ded



△



11



Drum Face



1



Using lint-free paper, clean the drum with the drum cleaning powder (FY9-6024).



12



Drum Edge



1



13



The host machine surface below the Developing Assembly



1



14



Developing Roller



4



△



Clean with lint-free paper moistened with alcohol.



15



Lower side of Cylinder



1



△



Clean with lint-free paper moistened with alcohol.



16



Toner Receptacle Tray



1



17



Waste Toner Container



1



△



Remove the waste toner and clean the container when the message is displayed. Expressed in terms of A4-size paper and image ratio at 5%.



18



ETB Drive Roller



1



△



Clean with lint-free paper moistened with alcohol.



19



ETB Idler Roller



1



△



Clean with lint-free paper moistened with alcohol.



20



Fixing Cleaning Web Guide



1



△



Clean with lint-free paper moistened with alcohol.



21



Fixing Inlet Guide



1



△



Clean with lint-free paper moistened with alcohol.



22



Fixing Oil Receiver



1



△



Dry wiping



23



Fixing Right Stay



1



△



Clean with lint-free paper moistened with alcohol.



24



Dowel



4



△



Clean with lint-free paper moistened with alcohol.



25



Dowel Holder



4



△



Clean with lint-free paper moistened with alcohol.



26



Fixing Inlet Sensor Flag



1



△



Clean with lint-free paper moistened with alcohol.



27



Inner Delivery Roller



4



△



Clean with lint-free paper moistened with alcohol.



28



Upper Separation Claw



6



△



Clean this part when it is not replaced. Clean with lint-free paper moistened with alcohol.



29



Feed Guide



-



△



Remove paper lint with lint-free paper and cleaning tool.



30



Rollers/wheels



-



△



Clean with lint-free paper moistened with alcohol.



31



Separation Static Eliminator



1



△



Remove paper lint (toner) with Blower.



32



Duplex Unit Cleaning Brush



2



△



Using Blower, remove paper lint which was collected by Cleaning Brush.



33



Registration Unit Magnet



1



△



Clean with lint-free paper moistened with alcohol.



△



Clean with lint-free paper moistened. △



△



229



Remove toner which was scattered at removal of Developing Assembly.



Remove toner on the tray.



3. Periodical Service No.



Part Name



34



Number



Scanner Sensor(Feeding Assembly)



Interval 250,000 pages



300,000 pages



Remarks



500,000 1,000,000 As neepages pages ded △



7



Remove paper lint with Blower. Vertical Path Sensor 1 (PS24), Multi-purpose Tray Last Paper Sensor (PS28), Left Deck Pickup Sensor 2(PS20), Registration Sensor (PS29), Reverse Vertical Path Sensor (PS65), Duplex Outlet Sensor (PS64), Duplex Merge Sensor (PS67), Duplex Left Sensor (PS66)



Option △: Cleaning ×: Lubrication, □: Adjustment, ◎: Inspection Paper Deck Unit-E1 No.



Part Name



Number



Interval



Remarks



40,000 pa- As needed ges 1



Deck pickup roller



1



△



Clean with lint-free paper moistened with alcohol.



2



Deck feed roller



1



△



Clean with lint-free paper moistened with alcohol.



3



Deck separation roller



1



△



Clean with lint-free paper moistened with alcohol.



4



Deck pull-out roller/ collar



1



△



Clean with lint-free paper moistened with alcohol.



POD Deck Lite-C1 No.



Part Name



Number



Interval



Remarks



40,000 pa- As needed ges 1



Deck pickup roller



1



△



Clean with lint-free paper moistened with alcohol.



2



Deck feed roller



1



△



Clean with lint-free paper moistened with alcohol.



3



Deck separation roller



1



△



Clean with lint-free paper moistened with alcohol.



4



Deck pull-out roller/ collar



1



△



Clean with lint-free paper moistened with alcohol.



230



4



Parts Replacement and Cleaning Preface..............................................232 Parts List........................................... 233 Original Exposure/Feed System....... 290 Controller System..............................402 Laser Exposure System.................... 435 Image Formation System.................. 439 Fixing System....................................505 Pickup/Feed System......................... 524 External Auxiliary System................. 554



4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning



Preface Outline This chapter describes disassembly and reassembly procedures of the printer. The service technician is to identify the cause of printer failures according to the "Chapter 6 TROUBLESHOOTING" and to follow the disassembly procedures of each part to replace the defective parts or the consumable parts. Note the following precautions when working on the printer. 1. CAUTION: Before disassembling or reassembling the printer, be sure to disconnect its power cord from the electrical outlet 2. During disassembly, reassembly or transportation of the printer, remove the cartridge if required. When the cartridge is out of the printer, put it in a protective bag even in a short period of time to prevent the adverse effect of light. 3. Reassembling procedures are followed by the reverse of disassembly unless otherwise specified. 4. Note the length, diameters, and locations of screws as you remove them. When reassembling the printer, be sure to use them in their original locations. 5. Do not run the printer with any parts removed as a general rule. 6. Ground yourself by touching the metal part of the printer before handling the PCB to reduce the possibility of damage caused by static electricity. 7. When you replace the part that the rating plate or the product code label is attached, be sure to remove the rating plate or the product code label and put it to the new part.



232



4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning



Parts List List of External / Internal Cover ■ DADF [3]



[4]



[1]



[2]



No.



Name



[1]



DADF Front Cover



[2]



DADF Left Cover



[3]



DADF Rear Cover



[4]



Feeder Cover



■ Reader [8]



[4]



[5] [3] [6] [9]



[11]



[1] [7] [2]



[10]



233



4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning No.



Name



[1]



Reader Front Cover



[2]



Reader Left Cover



[3]



Reader Right Cover



[4]



Reader Rear Cover



[5]



PCB Cover



[6]



Right Upper Panel



[7]



Left Upper Panel



[8]



DADF Base Right Cover



[9]



DADF Base Left Cover



[10]



Jump Base



[11]



Left Upper Small Cover



■ Printer [2] [1] [16] [4]



[3] [15] [5]



[6]



[14]



[8]



[13]



[9]



[12] [7] [10] [11]



No



Name



Reference



[1]



Upper Cover



-



[2]



Upper Left Cover



-



[3]



Upper Middle Cover



-



[4]



Upper Right Cover



-



[5]



Toner Exchange Cover



-



[6]



Front Cover



-



[7]



Deck Left Cover



-



[8]



Deck Right Cover



-



[9]



Cassette Front Cover



-



[10]



Cassette Front Cover



-



[11]



Left Front Cover



-



[12]



Left Lower Cover



-



234



4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning No



Name



Reference



[13]



Left Handle Cover



-



[14]



Delivery Cover



-



[15]



Finisher Connector Cover



-



[16]



Left Upper Cover



[33]



[17] [32] [31] [30]



[18]



[29] [28] [19] [27]



[26] [20]



[25] [24] [21]



[23] [22]



No



Name



Reference



[17]



Upper Rear Cover



-



[18]



Left Rear Cover



-



[19]



Rear Upper Cover



-



[20]



Rear Lower Cover



-



[21]



Filter Cover



-



[22]



Waste Toner Container Cover



-



[23]



Right Lower Cover



-



[24]



Right Rear Cover 2



-



[25]



Vertical Path Cover



-



[26]



Right Front Cover



-



[27]



Right Handle Cover



-



[28]



Inner Cover



-



[29]



Right Cover



-



[30]



MP Pickup Tray Sub Cover



-



[31]



MP Pickup Tray



-



[32]



Right Upper Cover



-



[33]



Right Rear Cover 1



-



235



4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning



List of Main Unit ■ DADF [2]



[1]



No.



Name



[1]



Scanner Unit



[2]



Pickup Roller Unit



■ Reader



[1]



No. [1]



Name Scanner Unit



236



4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning



■ Printer Developing Assembly



Laser Scanner Unit



Process Unit



Waste Toner Feed Unit



Fixing Assembly



Hopper Unit



No



Name



Reference



[1]



Waste Toner Feed Unit



“Removing the Waste Toner Feed Unit” on page 499



[2]



Laser Scanner Unit



“Removing the Laser Scanner Unit” on page 435



[3]



Hopper Unit



“Removing the Hopper Unit” on page 491



[4]



Fixing Assembly



“Removing the Fixing Assembly” on page 505



[5]



Process Uint



“Removing the Process Unit” on page 454



[6]



Developing Assembly



“Removing the Developing Assembly” on page 467



237



4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning Multi-purpose Tray Pickup Unit



Fixing Feed Unit



Right Deck Pickup Unit



Left Deck Pickup Unit



Outer Delivery Unit



Vertical Path Unit



Cassette 3 Pickup Unit Cassette 4 Pickup Unit



Registration Unit



ETB Unit Reverse Delivery Unit



No



ETB Cleaning Unit



Name



Reference



[7]



Outer Delivery Unit



-



[8]



Fixing Feed Unit



-



[9]



Multi-purpose Tray Pickup Unit



-



[10]



Left Deck Pickup Unit



“Removing the Left Deck Pickup Unit” on page 538



[11]



Right Deck Pickup Unit



“Removing the Right Deck Pickup Unit” on page 539



[12]



Vertical Path Unit



[13]



Cassette 3 Pickup Unit



“Removing the Cassettes 3 and 4 Pickup Unit” on page 540



[14]



Cassette 4 Pickup Unit



“Removing the Cassettes 3 and 4 Pickup Unit” on page 540



[15]



Registration Unit



“Removing the Registration Unit” on page 545



[16]



Reverse Delivery Unit



[17]



ETB Cleaning Unit



“Removing the ETB Unit” on page 473



[18]



ETB Unit



“Removing the ETB Unit” on page 473



-



-



238



4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning Upright Control Panel Unit



Controller Box



Drum Drive Unit Developing Drive Unit



Flat Control Panel Unit Main Drive Unit



ETB Drive Unit



Vertical Path Cassette Pickup Drive Unit Left Deck Drive Unit



No



Name



Reference



[19]



Flat Control Panel Unit



“Removing the Flat Control Panel Unit” on page 560



[20]



Upright Control Panel Unit



“Removing the Upright Control Panel” on page 564



[21]



Controller Box



[22]



Drum Drive Unit



“Removing the Drum Drive Unit” on page 502



[23]



Developing Drive Unit



“Removing the Developing Drive Unit” on page 503



[24]



Main Drive Unit



“Removing the Main Drive Unit” on page 548



[25]



Vertical Path Cassette Pickup Drive Unit



“Removing the Vertical Path Cassette Pickup Drive Unit” on page 542



[26]



Left Deck Drive Unit



“Removing the Left Deck Pickup Drive Unit” on page 548



[27]



ETB Drive Unit



“Removing the ETB Drive Unit” on page 487



-



239



4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning



Periodic Replacing Parts,Durable Parts,Cleaning Parts ■ DADF



[21] [21]



[19] [15]



[14] [11] [3] [2] [1] [12] [18] [17]



[5]



[7]



[20] [4]



No.



[8]



[9]



[10] [22]



Name



[6]



[13]



Reference



[1]



Post-separation Sensor 1



[2]



Post-separation Sensor 2



“Cleaning the Post-separation Sensor 1/Post-separation Sensor 2/Post-separation Sensor 3” on page 357



[3]



Post-separation Sensor 3



[4]



Lead Sensor 1



[5]



Registration Sensor



[6]



Delivery Sensor



“Cleaning the Delivery Roller/Delivery Sensor” on page 365



[7]



Registration Roller



“Cleaning the Registration Sensor/Lead Sensor/ Registration Roller” on page 359



[8]



Lead Roller 1



“Cleaning the Pullout Roller/Feed Roller 2/Lead Roller 1” on page 362 “Cleaning the Lead Roller 2/Lead Roller 3” on page 364



“Cleaning the Registration Sensor/Lead Sensor/ Registration Roller” on page 359



[9]



Lead Roller 2



[10]



Lead Roller 3



[11]



Pullout Roller



“Cleaning the Pullout Roller/Feed Roller 2/Lead Roller 1” on page 362



[12]



Feed Roller 1



“Removing the Pickup Roller / Feed Roller” on page 344



[13]



Delivery Roller



“Cleaning the Delivery Roller/Delivery Sensor” on page 365



[14]



Double Feed Detection Sensor “Cleaning the Double Feed Detection Sensor (Reception/Transmission)” on page 366 (Reception)



[15]



Double Feed Detection Sensor (Transmission)



[17]



Pickup Roller



“Removing the Pickup Roller / Feed Roller” on page 344



[18]



Separation Roller



“Removing the Separation Roller” on page 345



[19]



Feed Roller 2



“Cleaning the Pullout Roller/Feed Roller 2/Lead Roller 1” on page 362



[20]



Dust-colleting



“Removing the Dust Collecting Sheets” on page 350



[21]



Dust-colleting typeE



“Removing the Dust Collecting Sheets Type E” on page 347



[22]



Stamp Cartridge



“Removing the Stamp Cartridge” on page 354



-



Each Roller/Wheel



-



-



Each Scraper



-



240



4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning No.



Name



-



Reference



DADF Height



“Height Adjustment” on page 295



■ Reader [2]



[1]



[3] [3]



No.



Name



Reference



[1]



Copyboard Glass (Large) Surface



“Cleaning the Copyboard Glass (Large)” on page 395



[2]



Copyboard Glass (Small) Surface



“Cleaning the Copyboard Glass (Small)” on page 396



241



4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning



■ Printer ● Periodic Replacing Parts,Durable Parts



Developing Roller



Developing Roller



Developing Cylinder Pre-exposure Scraper



Pre-exposure Scraper



Drum Side Seal (R) Drum Cleaning Blade Drum Separation Claw



Drum Side Seal (F)



No



Name



Main Unit



Reference



[1]



Developing Cylinder



Developing Assembly



“Removing the Developing Cylinder and the Developing Roller” on page 469



[2]



Developing Roller



Developing Assembly



“Removing the Developing Cylinder and the Developing Roller” on page 469



[3]



Drum Side Seal(Rear)



Process Unit



“Removing the Side Seal” on page 466



[4]



Drum Cleaning Blade



Process Unit



“Removing the Drum Cleaning Blade” on page 458



[5]



Drum Separation Claw



Process Unit



“Removing the Cleaner Separation Claw” on page 465



[6]



Drum Side Seal(Front)



Process Unit



“Removing the Side Seal” on page 466



[7]



Pre-exposure Scraper



Drum Cleaning Unit



“Replacing the Pre-exposure Plastic Film” on page 460



242



4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning Primary Charging Assembly Primary Charging Wire Cleaner



Primary Charging Wire



Primary Charging Wire Cleaner Holder Primary Charging Wire Cleaner



Pre-transfer Charging Assembly



Pre-transfer Charging Wire Cleaner



Pre-transfer Charging Wire



No



Name



Main Unit



Pre-transfer Charging Wire Cleaner Holder



Reference



[1]



Primary Charging Assembly



Process Unit



“Removing the Primary Charging Assembly” on page 439



[2]



Pre-transfer Charging Assembly



Process Unit



“Removing the Pre-transfer Charging Assembly” on page 449



[3]



Primary Charging Wire



Primary Charging Assembly



“Replacing the Primary Charging Wire” on page 447 Primary Charging Wire(with Spring)



[4]



Pre-transfer Charging Wire



Pre-transfer Charging Assem- “Replacing the Pre-transfer Charging Wire” on page 452 bly Pre-transfer Charging Wire(with Spring)



[5]



Primary Charging Wire Clean- Primary Charging Assembly er



“Removing the Primary Charging Wire Cleaner, Cleaner Holder (Right/Left)” on page 441



[6]



Primary Charging Wire Clean- Primary Charging Assembly er Holder



“Removing the Primary Charging Wire Cleaner, Cleaner Holder (Right/Left)” on page 441



[7]



Pre-transfer Charging Wire Cleaner



Pre-transfer Charging Assem- “Removing the Pre-transfer Charging Wire Cleaner, Cleaner bly Holder” on page 450



[8]



Pre-transfer Charging Wire Cleaner Holder



Pre-transfer Charging Assem- “Removing the Pre-transfer Charging Wire Cleaner, Cleaner bly Holder” on page 450



243



4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning



ETB



Transfer Roller



ETB Cleaning Blade Brush Roller



No



Name



Main Unit



Reference



[1]



ETB



ETB Unit



“Removing the ETB Unit” on page 473



[2]



Transfer Roller



ETB Unit



“Removing the Transfer Roller” on page 477



[3]



ETB Cleaning Blade



ETB Cleaning Unit



“Removing the ETB Cleaning Blade” on page 478



[4]



Brush Roller



ETB Cleaning Unit



“Removing the ETB Brush Roller” on page 479



Fixing Sub Thermistor 1(THM020) Fixing Sub Thermistor 2(THM030) Fixing Main Thermistor(THM010) Fixing Roller Insulating Bush Fixing Roller Thrust Retainer



Fixing Assembly



Fixing Roller Insulating Bush Fixing Roller



Fixing Roller Thrust Retainer



Fixing cleaning web



Upper separation claw



Pressure Roller Static Eliminator Pressure Roller Unit



244



4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning No



Name



Main Unit



Reference



[1]



Fixing Sub Thermister 1((THM020)



Fixing Assembly



“Removing the Sub Thermistor 1” on page 520



[2]



Fixing Sub Thermister 2(THM030)



Fixing Assembly



“Removing the Main Thermistor, Sub Thermistor2” on page 518



[3]



Fixing Main Thermister(THM010)



Fixing Assembly



“Removing the Main Thermistor, Sub Thermistor2” on page 518



[4]



Fixing Roller



Fixing Assembly



“Removing the Fixing Roller, Insulating Bush and Thrust Stopper” on page 515



[5]



Fixing Roller Insulating Bushing Fixing Assembly



“Removing the Fixing Roller, Insulating Bush and Thrust Stopper” on page 515



[6]



Fixing Roller Thrust Retainer



Fixing Assembly



“Removing the Fixing Roller, Insulating Bush and Thrust Stopper” on page 515



[7]



Fixing Cleaning Web



Fixing Assembly



“Removing the Fixing Cleaning Web” on page 510



[8]



Pressure Roller Static Eliminator Fixing Assembly



“Removing the Pressure Roller Static Eliminator” on page 517



[9]



Pressure Roller Unit



Fixing Assembly



“Removing the Pressure Roller” on page 517



[10]



Upper Separation Claw



Fixing Assembly



“Removing the Upper Separation Claw” on page 521



Dustproof Filter Multi-purpose Tray Feed Roller Multi-purpose Tray Separation Roller Right Deck Pickup Roller Ozone Filter



Right Deck Separation Roller Right Deck Feed Roller



Cassette 3 Separation Roller Cassette 3 Feed Roller Left Deck Separation Roller Left Deck Pickup Roller Left Deck Feed Roller Cassette 4 Separation Roller Cassette 4 Pickup Roller



Cassette 3 Pickup Roller



Cassette 4 Feed Roller



No [1]



Name Multi-purpose Tray Feed Roller



Main Unit



Reference



Multi-purpose Pickup Unit “Removing the Multi-purpose Tray Feed Roller” on page 530



245



4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning No



Name



Main Unit



Reference



[2]



Multi-purpose Tray Separation Roll- Multi-purpose Pickup Unit “Removing the Multi-purpose Tray Separation Roller” on er page 532



[3]



Right Deck Pickup Roller



Right Deck Pickup Unit



“Removing the Right Deck Pickup Roller” on page 526



[4]



Right Deck Separation Roller



Right Deck Pickup Unit



“Removing the Right Deck Separation Roller” on page 527



[5]



Right Deck Feed Roller



Right Deck Pickup Unit



“Removing the Right Deck Feed Roller” on page 526



[6]



Left Deck Separation Roller



Left Deck Pickup Unit



“Removing the Left Deck Separation Roller” on page 525



[7]



Left Deck Pickup Roller



Left Deck Pickup Unit



“Removing the Left Deck Pickup Roller” on page 524



[8]



Left Deck Feed Roller



Left Deck Pickup Unit



“Removing the Left Deck Feed Roller” on page 524



[9]



Cassette 3 Separation Roller



Cassette 3 Pickup Unit



“Removing the Upper Cassette Separation Roller” on page 528



[10]



Cassette 3 Feed Roller



Cassette 3 Pickup Unit



“Removing the Upper Cassette Feed Roller” on page 528



[11]



Cassette 3 Pickup Roller



Cassette 3 Pickup Unit



“Removing the Upper Cassette Pickup Roller” on page 528



[12]



Cassette 4 Separation Roller



Cassette 4 Pickup Unit



“Removing the Lower Cassette Separation Roller” on page 530



[13]



Cassette 4 Pickup Roller



Cassette 4 Pickup Unit



“Removing the Lower Cassette Pickup Roller” on page 529



[14]



Cassette 4 Feed Roller



Cassette 4 Pickup Unit



“Removing the Lower Cassette Feed Roller” on page 530



[15]



Dustproof Filter



Product configuration



“Removing the Filter (for primary charging)” on page 554



[16]



Ozone Filter



Product configuration



“Removing the Ozone Filter” on page 554



● List of Cleaning Parts Lower side of Developing Assembly



Developing Roller Lower side of Cylinder Developing Roller Drum Edge Drum



Pre-exposure Scraper Cleaning Unit Plate Pre-exposure Scraper Separation Claw Mounting Base



Process Unit Rear Guide



Drum Sliding Assembly Waste Toner collection area



No



Name



[1]



Cleaning Unit Plate



Drum Cleaning Unit



Main Unit



“Cleaning the Drum Cleaning Unit” on page 459



[2]



Pre-exposure Scraper



Drum Cleaning Unit



“Cleaning the Drum Cleaning Unit” on page 459



[3]



Waste Toner Collection Area



Drum Cleaning Unit



“Cleaning the Drum Cleaning Unit” on page 459



[4]



Separation Claw Mounting Base



Process Unit



“Cleaning the Process Unit” on page 456



[5]



Process Unit Rear Guide



Process Unit



“Cleaning the Process Unit” on page 456



[6]



Drum Sliding Assembly



Process Unit



“Cleaning the Process Unit” on page 456



[7]



Drum



Process Unit



“Cleaning Photosensitive Drum” on page 464



246



Reference



4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning No



Name



Main Unit



Reference



[8]



Drum Edge



[9]



Lower side of Developing Assem- Developing Assembly bly



Process Unit



“Cleaning the Drum edges” on page 465 “Cleaning the Developing Assembly” on page 469



[10]



Developing Roller



Developing Assembly



“Cleaning the Developing Assembly” on page 469



[11]



Lower side of Cylinder



Developing Assembly



“Cleaning the Developing Assembly” on page 469 Primary Charging Assembly Shield Plate (R)



Primary Charging Assembly Shield Plate (L) Primary Charging Assembly Grid Wire



Toner Receptacle Tray



Pre-transfer Charging Assembly Shield Plate ETB Idler Roller Waste Toner Container



ETB Drive Roller



No



Name



Main Unit



Reference



[1]



Primary Charging Assembly Grid Wire



Primary Charging Assembly



“Cleaning the Primary Charging Assembly Grid Wire” on page 448



[2]



Primary Charging Assembly Shield Primary Charging Assembly Plate



“Cleaning the Primary Charging Assembly Grid Wire” on page 448



[3]



Pre-transfer Charging Assembly Shield Plate



Pre-transfer Charging Assem- “Cleaning the Pre-transfer Charging Wire” on page bly 454



[4]



ETB Drive Roller



ETB



“Cleaning the ETB” on page 477



[5]



ETB Idler Roller



ETB



“Cleaning the ETB” on page 477



[6]



Toner Receptacle Tray



Hopper Unit



“Removing the Toner Receptacle Tray” on page 490



[7]



Waste Toner Container



Hopper Unit



“Removing the Waste Toner Container” on page 480



247



4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning Fixing inlet guide Fixing cleaning web guide



Fixing Inlet Sensor Flag



Fixing Assembly



Inner Delivery Roller



Fixing oil pan



Upper separation claw Fixing Right Stay



Dowel Holder Dowel



No



Name



Main Unit



Reference



[1]



Fixing Inlet Guide



Fixing Assembly “Cleaning the Fixing Inlet Guide,Fixing Inlet Sensor Flag, Fixing Right Stay, Dowel, Dowel Holder” on page 508



[2]



Fixing Right Stay



Fixing Assembly “Cleaning the Fixing Inlet Guide,Fixing Inlet Sensor Flag, Fixing Right Stay, Dowel, Dowel Holder” on page 508



[3]



Dowel



Fixing Assembly “Cleaning the Fixing Inlet Guide,Fixing Inlet Sensor Flag, Fixing Right Stay, Dowel, Dowel Holder” on page 508



[4]



Dowel Holder



Fixing Assembly “Cleaning the Fixing Inlet Guide,Fixing Inlet Sensor Flag, Fixing Right Stay, Dowel, Dowel Holder” on page 508



[5]



Fixing Oil Pan



Fixing Assembly “Cleaning the Fixing Oil Pan, Fixing Cleaning Web Guide” on page 510



[6]



Upper Separation Claw



Fixing Assembly “Cleaning the Upper Separation Claw” on page 521



[7]



Fixing Cieaning Web Guide



Fixing Assembly “Cleaning the Fixing Oil Pan, Fixing Cleaning Web Guide” on page 510



[8]



Fixing Inlet Sensor Flag



Fixing Assembly “Cleaning the Fixing Inlet Guide,Fixing Inlet Sensor Flag, Fixing Right Stay, Dowel, Dowel Holder” on page 508



[9]



Inner Delivery Roller



Fixing Assembly “Cleaning the Inner Delivery Roller” on page 509



248



4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning Registration Unit Feed Guide



Right Door Unit Feed Guide



Right Lower Door Unit Feed Guide



Inner Feed Guide Reverse Delivery Unit Feed Guide



Fixing Feed Unit (Duplex/Rear) Feed Guide



No



Name



Main Unit



Reference



[1]



Registration Unit Feed Guide



Fixing Feed Unit



“Cleaning the Pickup and Fixing Feed Assembly” on page 533



[2]



Reverse Delivery Unit Feed Guide



Reverse Delivery Unit



“Cleaning the Pickup and Fixing Feed Assembly” on page 533



[3]



Fixing Feed Unit (Duplex/Rear)Feed Guide Fixing Feed Unit



“Cleaning the Pickup and Fixing Feed Assembly” on page 533



[4]



Inner Feed Guide



Product Specification



“Cleaning the Pickup and Fixing Feed Assembly” on page 533



[5]



Right Door Unit Feed Guide



Right Door Unit



“Cleaning the Pickup and Fixing Feed Assembly” on page 533



[6]



Right Lower Door Unit Feed Guide



Right Lower Door Unit



“Cleaning the Pickup and Fixing Feed Assembly” on page 533



249



4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning Separation Static Eliminator



Roller of Multi-purpose Tray Pickup Unit Roller of Right Door Unit Registration Unit Magnet



Roller of Right Lower Door Unit



Duplex area Cleaning Brush Roller of Reverse Delivery Unit Roller of Fixing Feed Unit



Duplex area Cleaning Brush



No



Name



Main Unit



Reference



[1]



Roller of Fixing Feed Unit



Fixing Feed Unit



“Cleaning the Pickup and Fixing Feed Assembly” on page 533



[2]



Registration Unit Magnet



Registration Unit



“Cleaning the Pickup and Fixing Feed Assembly” on page 533



[3]



Roller of Multi-purpose Tray Pickup Multi-purpose Tray Pick- “Cleaning the Pickup and Fixing Feed Assembly” on page Unit up Unit 533



[4]



Roller of Right Door Unit



Right Door Unit



“Cleaning the Pickup and Fixing Feed Assembly” on page 533



[5]



Roller of Right Lower Door Unit



Right Lower Door Unit



“Cleaning the Pickup and Fixing Feed Assembly” on page 533



[6]



Roller of Reverse Delivery Unit



Reverse Delivery Unit



“Cleaning the Pickup and Fixing Feed Assembly” on page 533



[7]



Duplex area Cleaning Brush



Fixing Feed Unit



“Cleaning the Pickup and Fixing Feed Assembly” on page 533



[8]



Separation Static Eliminator



Fixing Feed Unit



“Cleaning the Pickup and Fixing Feed Assembly” on page 533



250



4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning Multi-purpose Tray Pickup Unit



Pickup Feed Drive Unit



PS28 PS29



PS24



PS64 PS66 PS65



PS67 Right Door Unit



Fixing Feed Unit



No



Name



Main Unit



Reference



PS24



Vertical Path Sensor 1



Vertical Path Unit



“Cleaning the Pickup and Fixing Feed Assembly” on page 533



PS28



Writing Judging Sensor



Multi-purpose Tray Pickup Unit



“Cleaning the Pickup and Fixing Feed Assembly” on page 533



PS29



Registration Sensor



Pickup Feed Drive Unit



“Cleaning the Pickup and Fixing Feed Assembly” on page 533



PS64



Duplex Outlet Sensor



Fixing Feed Unit



“Cleaning the Pickup and Fixing Feed Assembly” on page 533



PS66



Duplex Left Sensor



Fixing Feed Unit



“Cleaning the Pickup and Fixing Feed Assembly” on page 533



PS67



Duplex Merging Sensor



Fixing Feed Unit



“Cleaning the Pickup and Fixing Feed Assembly” on page 533



251



4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning



Dust-Proof Glass



Laser Scanner Unit



No



Name



[1]



Dustproof Glass



Main Unit



Reference



Product Configuration



“Cleaning the Dust Collecting Glass” on page 438



List of Electrical Parts ■ DADF ● Solenoid



SL1



No. SL1



FEEDER > FUNCTION



Name



Item No.



Stamp Solenoid



SL-CHK > 0



252



Remarks SL-ON > OK



4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning



● Motor M7 M5 M1 M3 M4



M6



M2



M8



No.



Name



M1



Pickup Roller Unit Lifter Motor



M2 M3



FEEDER > FUNCTION Item No.



Remarks



MTR-CHK > 9



MTR-ON > OK



Delivery Motor



MTR-CHK > 4



MTR-ON > OK



Feed Motor



MTR-CHK > 1



MTR-ON > OK



M4



Read Motor



MTR-CHK > 3



MTR-ON > OK



M5



Pickup Motor



MTR-CHK > 0



MTR-ON > OK



M6



Registration Motor



MTR-CHK > 2



MTR-ON > OK



M7



Tray Lifter Motor



MTR-CHK > 8



MTR-ON > OK



M8



Glass Movement Moter



MTR-CHK > 7



MTR-ON > OK



● Fan FM1



FM2



253



4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning No.



Name



FEEDER > FUNCTION Item No.



Remarks



FM1



DADF Cooling Fan 1



FAN-CHK > 0



FAN-ON > OK



FM2



DADF Cooling Fan 2



FAN-CHK > 1



FAN-ON > OK



● Sensor SR7



SR20



SR11



SR8



SR9 SR3



SR25



SR24



SR13 SR17 SR12 SR6 SR15 SR14



No.



Name



SR3



Original Sensor



SR6



Post-separation Sensor 1



SR7



Post-separation Sensor 2



SR8



Delay Sensor



SR9



Tray Open/Closed Sensor



SR11



Pickup Roller Unit Lifter Home Position Sensor



SR12



Original Size Sensor 2



SR13



Original Size Sensor 4



SR14



Original Size Sensor 1



SR15



Original Size Sensor 3



SR17



Cover Open/Closed Sensor



SR20



Post-separation Sensor 3



SR24



Double Feed Detection Sensor (Transmission)



SR25



Double Feed Detection Sensor (Reception)



254



4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning SR5 SR10



SR2



SR4



SR1



VR1



SR16 SR23 SR22 SR21



SR19 SR18



No.



Name



SR1



AB/ Inch Identification Sensor



SR2



LTR-R/ LGL Idenfication Sensor



SR4



Z-Folding Sensor



SR5



Tray Home Position Sensor



SR10



Paper Surface Sensor



SR16



Delivery Tray Sensor



SR18



Glass Home Position Sensor



SR19



Lead Sensor 2



SR21



Delivery Sensor



SR22



Lead Sensor 1



SR23



Registration Sensor



VR1



Original Width Volume



● PCB UN3



UN4



UN5



UN6



No.



Name



UN3



DADF Driver PCB



UN4



DADF Scanner Unit PCB



255



4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning No.



Name



UN5



DADF LED Lamp PCB (Left)



UN6



DADF LED Lamp PCB (Right)



● Other UN2



UN1



No.



Name



UN1



Delivery Display LED PCB



UN2



Original Display LED PCB



■ Reader ● Motor M1



No. M1



Name Scanner Motor



256



4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning



● Fan



FM1



No.



Name



FM1



Scanner Unit Cooling Fan



● Sensor CF2 CF1



PS1 PS3 PS2



No.



Name



PS1



DADF Open/Closed Sensor 1



PS2



Scanner Unit Home Position Sensor



PS3



DADF Open/Closed Sensor 2



CF1



Original Size Sensor 2



CF2



Original Size Sensor 1



257



4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning



● PCB UN1



UN2 UN3 UN4



No.



Name



UN1



Reader Controller PCB



UN2



Reader Scanner Unit PCB



UN3



Reader LED Lamp PCB (Left)



UN4



Reader LED Lamp PCB (Right)



■ Printer ● Clutch / Solenoid



Multi-purpose Tray Pickup Unit



Fixing Feed Unit



SL02 SL05



SL09 Fixing Assembly



258



SL11



4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning No



Name



Main Unit



COPIER > FUNCTION > PART-CHK



Multi-purpose Pickup Unit



Reference



Item No.



Remarks



SL > 1



SL-ON > OK



-



SL02



Multi-purpose Tray Pickup Solenoid



SL05



Reverse Upper Flapper Sole- Fixing Feed Unit noid



SL > 4



SL-ON > OK



-



SL09



Fixing Cleaning Web Drive Solenoid



Fixing Assembly



SL > 8



SL-ON > OK



-



SL11



Left Deck Merging Solenoid



Fixing Feed Unit



SL > 7



SL-ON > OK



-



CL05



SL06 SL07



CL01



SL03 SL04



No



Name



Main Unit



COPIER > FUNCTION > PART-CHK Item No.



Remarks



Reference



CL01 Developing Clutch



Developing Assembly



CL > 1



CL-ON > OK



-



CL05 Magnet Roller Clutch



Hopper Unit



CL > 2



CL-ON > OK



-



SL03 Cassette 3 Pickup Solenoid



Cassette 3 Pickup Unit



SL > 2



SL-ON > OK



-



SL04 Cassette 4 Pickup Solenoid



Cassette 4 Pickup Unit



SL > 3



SL-ON > OK



-



SL06 Right Deck Pickup Solenoid



Right Deck Pickup Unit



SL > 5



SL-ON > OK



-



SL07 Left Deck Pickup Solenoid



Left Deck Pickup Unit



SL > 6



SL-ON > OK



-



259



4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning



● List of Motor



Buffer Unit Hopper Unit



Process Unit ETB Unit



M10 M06 M28 M03



M07



M43



Fixing Assembly



No



Name



Main Unit



COPIER > FUNCTION > PART-CHK Remarks



Reference



M03



Fixing Motor



MTR > 17



MTR-ON > OK



-



M06



Primary Charging Wire Cleaning Process Unit Motor



-



-



-



M07



Pre-transfer Charging Wire Cleaning Motor



Process Unit



-



-



-



M10



Toner Supply Motor



Hopper Unit



-



-



-



M15



Fixing Shutter Motor



Fixing Assembly



-



-



-



M28



Toner Feed Motor



Buffer Unit



MTR > 2



MTR-ON > OK



-



M43



ETB Motor



ETB Unit



MTR > 14



MTR-ON > OK



-



M13



Fixing Assembly



Item No.



M44



Fixing Feed Unit



Laser Scanner Unit



M16



M18



Outer Delivery Unit M32 M14



260



M19



4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning No



Name



Main Unit



COPIER > FUNCTION > PART-CHK Item No.



Remarks



Reference



M13



Delivery Motor



Outer Delivery Unit



MTR > 3



MTR-ON > OK



-



M14



Reverse Motor



Fixing Feed Unit



MTR > 4



MTR-ON > OK



-



M16



Side Registration Motor Fixing Feed Unit



MTR > 5



MTR-ON > OK



-



M18



Duplex Feed Right Motor



Fixing Feed Unit



MTR > 6



MTR-ON > OK



-



M19



Duplex Feed Left Motor Fixing Feed Unit



MTR > 7



MTR-ON > OK



-



M32



Duplex Feed Merging Motor



Fixing Feed Unit



MTR > 11



MTR-ON > OK



-



M44



Laser Scanner Motor



Laser Scanner Unit



-



-



-



M02



M34 Developing Drive Unit



M01



Pickup Feed Unit



M33



Drum Drive Unit M26



M24 Cassette Pickup Drive Unit



M31 M11



M04



M27 M05 M20



M12



M21



No



Name



Main Unit



COPIER > FUNCTION > PART-CHK



Reference



Item No.



Remarks



M01



Drum Motor



Drum Drive Unit



-



-



-



M02



Developing Motor



Developing Assembly Drive Unit



-



-



-



M04



Right Deck Lifter Motor



Cassette Pickup Drive Unit



-



-



-



M05



Left Deck Lifter Motor



Cassette Pickup Drive Unit



-



-



-



M11



Right Deck Pickup Motor



Pickup Feed Unit



-



-



-



M12



Cassette 3,4 Pickup Motor Pickup Feed Unit



-



-



-



M20



Cassette 3 Lifter Motor



Cassette Pickup Drive Unit



-



-



-



M21



Cassette 4 Lifter Motor



Cassette Pickup Drive Unit



-



-



-



M24



Left Deck Pickup Motor



Cassette Pickup Drive Unit



-



-



-



M26



Vertical Path Upper Motor Pickup Feed Unit



MTR > 8



MTR-ON > OK



-



M27



Vertical Path Lower Motor Pickup Feed Unit



MTR > 9



MTR-ON > OK



-



M31



Vertical Path Middle Motor Pickup Feed Unit



MTR > 10



MTR-ON > OK



-



M33



Multi-purpose Tray Regis- Pickup Feed Unit tration Front Motor



MTR > 12



MTR-ON > OK



-



M34



Registration Motor



MTR > 13



MTR-ON > OK



-



Pickup Feed Unit



261



4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning



● List of Fan



FM17



FM16



FM33 FM07 FM02 IH power supply unit



FM31 FM30 FM32 FM41



FM04



Power Supply



FM08 FM42 FM40 FM05 FM01 FM03



FM14 FM15



No. FM01 FM03/



Name Making Image Exhaust Fan



Main Unit



Reference



Product configuration



-



FM02



Primary Charging Assembly Air Supply Fan Product configuration



-



FM04



Main Controller Cooling Fan



Product configuration



-



FM05



Paper Cooling Fan



Product configuration



-



FM07



Fixing Power Supply Cooling Fan



Product configuration



-



FM08



Transfer Cleaner Cooling Fan



Product configuration



-



FM14



Power Supply Cooling Fan 1



Product configuration



-



FM15



Power Supply Cooling Fan 2



Product configuration



-



FM16



Laser Scanner Cooling Fan



Product configuration



-



FM17



Primary Charging Assembly Exhaust Fan



Product configuration



-



FM30



Developing Assembly Lower Cooling Fan



Product configuration



-



FM31



Developing Assembly Upper Cooling Fan



Product configuration



-



FM32



Pre-transfer Charging Assembly Air Supply Product configuration Fan



-



FM33



Pre-transfer Charging Assembly Exhaust Fan



Product configuration



-



FM40



Feed Driver Cooling Fan



Product configuration



-



FM41



Duplex Driver Cooling Fan



Product configuration



-



FM42



Registration Motor/Duplex Motor Cooling Fan



Product configuration



-



262



4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning



● Sensor



Developing Assembly



Right Door Unit Pickup Feed Drive Unit



Fixing Assembly PS29



TS01 PS51



Drum Drive Unit PS61 PS24



PS96 TS04



PS45



PS04 PS53 PS52



PS100



No.



Name



Main Unit



Reference



PS04



Fixing Toenail Jam Sensor



Fixing Assembly



-



PS24



Vertical Path Sensor 1



Vertical Path Unit



-



PS29



Registration Sensor



Pickup Feed Drive Unit



-



PS45



Fixing Cleaning Web Level Sensor



Fixing Assembly



-



PS51



Fixing Inlet Sensor



Fixing Assembly



-



PS52



Fixing Outlet Sensor



Fixing Assembly



-



PS53



Fixing Shutter Home Position Sensor



Fixing Assembly



-



PS61



Drum Home Position Sensor



Drum Drive Unit



-



PS96



Fixed Feed Lever Sensor



Fixing Feed Unit



-



PS100



Waste Toner Container Sensor



-



-



TS01



Developing Assembly Toner Sensor



Developing Assembly



-



TS04



Waste Toner Full Sensor



-



-



263



4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning PS101



Hopper Unit



Multi-purpose Tray Pickup Unit



UN13



Buffer Assembly



Upper High Voltage Unit



TS03



PS54



PS23



PS55 TS02



PS56



PS28



PS35



PS64 PS65



PS36



PS67 PS66



Outer Delivery Unit



PS25



PS31 PS02



Fixing Feed Unit



No



Vertical Path Unit



Name



Main Unit



Reference



PS02



Vertical Path Cover Open/Close Sensor



Vertical Path Unit



-



PS23



Multi-purpose Tray Paper Sensor



Multi-purpose Pickup Unit



-



PS25



Vertical Path Sensor 2



Vertical Path Unit



-



PS28



Writing Judging Sensor



Multi-purpose Pickup Unit



-



PS31



Side Registration Sensor



Fixing Feed Unit



-



PS35



Inner Delivery Sensor



Fixing Feed Unit



-



PS36



Outer Delivery Sensor



Outer Delivery Unit



-



PS54



Toner Exchange Cover Open/Close Sensor



Hopper Unit



-



PS55



Transfer Belt Engage Sensor



Fixing Feed Unit



-



PS56



Transfer Belt Disengage Sensor



Fixing Feed Unit



-



PS64



Duplex Outlet Sensor



Fixing Feed Unit



-



PS65



Reverse Vertical Path Sensor



Fixing Feed Unit



-



PS66



Duplex Left Sensor



Fixing Feed Unit



-



PS67



Duplex Merging Sensor



Fixing Feed Unit



-



PS101



Multi-purpose Tray Paper Length Sensor



Multi-purpose Pickup Unit



-



TS02



Buffer Toner Sensor 1



Hopper Unit



-



TS03



Buffer Toner Sensor 2



Hopper Unit



-



UN13



Multi-purpose Tray Paper Width Sensor



Multi-purpose Pickup Unit



-



264



4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning Right Deck Pickup Unit



Right Deck Pickup Unit Left Deck Pickup Unit



Left Deck Pickup Unit



PS06 PS08



PS10



PS94 PS95



PS19



PS33



PS12



PS32



PS47 PS49



PS07



PS48



PS03



PS50



PS17 PS68



PS21



PS11



PS26 PS20 PS13 Cassette3 Pickup Unit PS18



Cassette3 Pickup Unit



PS71



PS22 PS27



PS69 THU01



PS70



PS14 PS72



No.



PS73



Cassette4 Pickup Unit



Name



Cassette4 Pickup Unit



Main Unit



Reference



PS03



Multi-purpose Tray Cover Open/Close Sensor



Multi-purpose Tray Pickup Unit



-



PS06



Right Deck Paper Height Sensor



Right Deck Unit



-



PS07



Right Deck Paper Sensor



Right Deck Unit



-



PS08



Right Deck Upper Limit Sensor



Right Deck Unit



-



PS10



Left Deck Paper Height Sensor



Left Deck Unit



-



PS11



Left Deck Paper Sensor



Left Deck Unit



-



PS12



Left Deck Upper Limit Sensor



Left Deck Unit



-



PS13



Cassette 3 Paper Sensor



Cassette 3 Pickup Unit



-



PS14



Cassette 4 Paper Sensor



Cassette 4 Pickup Unit



-



PS17



Cassette 3 Paper Height Sensor



Cassette 3 Pickup Unit



-



PS18



Cassette 4 Paper Height Sensor



Cassette 4 Pickup Unit



-



PS19



Right Deck Pickup Sensor



Right Deck Unit



-



PS20



Left Deck Pickup Sensor



Left Deck Unit



-



PS21



Cassette 3 Pickup Sensor



Cassette 3 Pickup Unit



-



PS22



Cassette 4 Pickup Sensor



Cassette 4 Pickup Unit



-



PS26



Vertical Path Sensor 3



Vertical Path Unit



-



PS27



Vertical Path Sensor 4



Vertical Path Unit



-



PS32



Right Deck Pull Out Sensor



Right Deck Unit



-



PS33



Left Deck Pull Out Sensor



Left Deck Unit



-



PS47



Right Deck Paper Level Sensor 1



Right Deck Unit



-



PS48



Right Deck Paper Level Sensor 2



Right Deck Unit



-



PS49



Left Deck Paper Level Sensor 1



Left Deck Unit



-



PS50



Left Deck Paper Level Sensor 2



Left Deck Unit



-



PS68



Cassette 3 Upper Limit Sensor



Cassette 3 Pickup Unit



-



PS69



Cassette 3 Paper Level Sensor 1



Cassette 3 Pickup Unit



-



PS70



Cassette 3 Paper Level Sensor 2



Cassette 3 Pickup Unit



-



PS71



Cassette 4 Upper Limit Sensor



Cassette 4 Pickup Unit



-



PS72



Cassette 4 Paper Level Sensor 1



Cassette 4 Pickup Unit



-



PS73



Cassette 4 Paper Level Sensor 2



Cassette 4 Pickup Unit



-



PS94



Primary Charging Assembly Shutter Open/ Close Sensor



Primary Charging Assembly



-



265



4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning No. PS95 THU01



Name



Main Unit



Reference



Pre-transfer Charging Assembly Shutter Open/Close Sensor



Pre-transfer Charging Assembly



-



Environment Sensor



Main Body



-



● List of Switch



Waste Toner Unit



SW01



SW05



SW02



SW06



SW07 SW09 SW03 SW04



Power Supply Unit SW08 SW10



No



Name



Main Unit



Reference



SW01



Power Switch



Product configuration



-



SW02



Front Door Open Detection Switch



Product configuration



-



SW03



Environment Switch



Product configuration



-



SW04



Cassette Heater Switch



Product configuration



-



SW05



Waste Toner Lock Detection Switch



Waste Toner Unit



-



SW06



Multi Door Switch



Product configuration



-



SW07



Cassette 3 Paper Width Detection Switch



Cassette 3 Pickup Unit



-



SW08



Cassette 4 Paper Width Detection Switch



Cassette 4 Pickup Unit



-



SW09



Cassette 3 Paper Length Detection Switch



Cassette 3 Pickup Unit



-



SW10



Cassette 4 Paper Length Detection Switch



Cassette 4 Pickup Unit



-



● PCB



UN49 UN47 UN51 UN50



UN48 UN45



266



4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning No.



Name



Main Unit



Reference



UN47



Control Panel CPU PCB



Flat Control Panel Unit



“Removing the Control Panel CPU PCB(Flat Control Panel Unit)” on page 412



UN48



NFC PCB



Flat Control Panel Unit



-



UN49



Key Top PCB



Flat Control Panel Unit



-



UN45



WLAN PCB



Product configuration



-



UN50



Motion Sensor PCB



Product configuration



-



UN51



LED PCB



Product configuration



-



UN34 UN1 UN76



UN28



UN78 UN8 Controller Unit



HDD



UN79



UN4 Power Supply Unit



UN80



Fixing Feed Unit



UN24 UN20



UN67



UN86 UN7 UN26



UN5 UN6



No



Name



Main Unit



Reference



UN1



DC Controller PCB



Product configuration



“Removing the DC Controller PCB” on page 554



UN4



DC Power Supply PCB



Product configuration



-



UN5



DC Power Supply PCB



Product configuration



-



UN6



DC Power Supply PCB



Product configuration



-



UN7



All-night Power Supply PCB



Product configuration



-



UN8



Main Controller PCB 2



Product configuration



“Removing Main Controller PCB 2” on page 407



UN20



AC Driver PCB



Product configuration



-



UN24



DC-DC Converter PCB



Product configuration



-



UN26



Noise Filter



Product configuration



-



UN28



DC-DC Converter PCB



Product configuration



-



UN34



Main Controller PCB 1



Product configuration



“Removing Main Controller PCB 1” on page 405



UN67



Transfer High Voltage Resistance PCB



Product configuration



-



UN76



Transfer High Voltage PCB



Product configuration



-



UN78



Main Driver PCB



Product configuration



-



UN79



Feed Driver PCB



Product configuration



-



UN80



Duplex Driver PCB



Product configuration



-



UN86



Relay PCB



Product configuration



-



267



4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning Upper High Voltage Unit UN17



Laser Scanner Unit UN31



UN18



UN16



UN33



UN15



UN21 UN64 UN3



UN63 Process Unit UN19 UN65



Drum Heater Driver PCB UN66



Process Unit



No



Name



UN3



Fixing Power Supply PCB



Product configuration



-



UN15



Primary Charging High Voltage PCB



Product configuration



-



UN16



Pre-transfer Charging PCB



Product configuration



-



UN17



Develop High Voltage PCB



Product configuration



-



UN18



Voltage Control PCB



Product configuration



“Removing the Potential Control PCB Unit” on page 497



UN19



Voltage Sensor PCB



Product configuration



“Removing the Potential Control PCB Unit” on page 497



UN21



Drum ROM



Product configuration



-



UN31



Laser Driver PCB



Product configuration



-



UN33



BD PCB



Product configuration



-



UN63



Contact A PCB



Product configuration



-



UN64



Contact B PCB



Product configuration



-



UN65



Contact A PCB



Product configuration



-



UN66



Contact B PCB



Product configuration



-



Drum Heater Driver PCB



Product configuration



-



-



Main Unit



268



Reference



4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning



● Heater,others



Process Unit LE01



UN75



TP010 THM030 THM020



VA



VA VA H01 H03



Power Supply Unit



THM010



Fixing Assembly



CB1001 CB1003 CB1004



H02



No



Name



Main Unit



Reference



H01



Drum Heater



Process Unit



-



H02



Multi Cassette Heater



Product configuration



-



H03



Fixing Heater



Fixing Assembly



-



LE01



Pre-exposure LED



Process Unit



-



TP010



Fixing Thermal Switch 1



Fixing Assembly



-



THM010



Fixing Main Thermistor



Fixing Assembly



-



THM020



Fixing Sub Thermistor 1



Fixing Assembly



-



THM030



Fixing Sub Thermistor 2



Fixing Assembly



-



CB1001



Leakage Breaker



Product configuration



-



CB1003



Leakage Breaker



Product configuration



-



CB1004



Leakage Breaker



Product configuration



-



■ Power Unit System



[4]



[2]



[1]



[3]



269



4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning No.



Name



[1]



Fax PCB



[2]



2nd Line G3 FAX PCB



[3]



Modular PCB



[4]



G3 FAX Expansion PCB



Connector List ■ DADF 36



22



45



21



32



29 19 15



35



17



33



18



50 16 49



20



37



46 48 47



31 51 53



52



3



7



10 9



1 2 6 4



28



12



5



25



11 14 13 8



30 26



27 23 40 41 34 44



61 24 42



39 38



63



60



No. J No. Symbol



Name



1



J401



UN3



DADF Driver PCB



2



J402



UN3



DADF Driver PCB



3



J403



UN3



DADF Driver PCB



3



J403



UN3



DADF Driver PCB



4



J404



UN3



4



J404



UN3



5



J405



5



J405



43



62



Relay Connector



No.



J104



J No.



Symbol



Name



-



-



Reader



J639



-



Reader



15



J612



M1



Pickup Roller Unit Lifter Motor



16



J615



M2



Delivery Motor



DADF Driver PCB



17



J616



M3



Feed Motor



DADF Driver PCB



18



J617



M4



Read Motor



UN3



DADF Driver PCB



19



J618



M5



Pickup Motor



UN3



DADF Driver PCB



20



J619



M6



Registration Motor



J1006



J1007



270



4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning No. J No. Symbol



Name



Relay Connector



No.



J No.



Symbol



Name



6



J406



UN3



DADF Driver PCB



21



J406



M7



Tray Lifter Motor



7



J407



UN3



DADF Driver PCB



22



J407



FM1



DADF Cooling Fan 1



8



J408



UN3



DADF Driver PCB



23



J620



FM2



DADF Cooling Fan 2



9



J409



UN3



DADF Driver PCB



J1004



J1003



24



J607



SR6



Post-separation Sensor 1



9



J409



UN3



DADF Driver PCB



J1004



J1003



25



J608



SR7



Post-separation Sensor 2



9



J409



UN3



DADF Driver PCB



J1004



J1003



26



J609



SR20



Post-separation Sensor 3



9



J409



UN3



DADF Driver PCB



J1003



27



J610



SR8



Delay Sensor



9



J409



UN3



DADF Driver PCB



J1004



J1003



28



J611



SR9



Tray Open/Closed Sensor



9



J409



UN3



DADF Driver PCB



J1005



29



J613



SR10



Paper Surface Sensor



9



J409



UN3



DADF Driver PCB



J1005



30



J614



SR11



Pickup Roller Unit Lifter Home Position Sensor



10



J410



UN3



DADF Driver PCB



J1000



31



J600



VR1



Original Width Volume



10



J410



UN3



DADF Driver PCB



32



J602



SR2



LTR-R/ LGL Idenfication Sensor



10



J410



UN3



DADF Driver PCB



J1000



J1603



33



J601



SR1



AB/ Inch Identification Sensor



10



J410



UN3



DADF Driver PCB



J1000



J1603



34



J603



SR3



Original Sensor



10



J410



UN3



DADF Driver PCB



J1000



35



J604



SR4



Z-Folding Sensor



10



J410



UN3



DADF Driver PCB



J1001



36



J605



SR5



Tray Home Position Sensor



10



J410



UN3



DADF Driver PCB



J1002



37



J606



UN1



Delivery Display LED PCB



11



J411



UN3



DADF Driver PCB



J1009



J1012



38



J622



SR12



Original Size Sensor 2



11



J411



UN3



DADF Driver PCB



J1009



J1012



39



J623



SR13



Original Size Sensor 4



11



J411



UN3



DADF Driver PCB



J1009



J1012



J1027



40



J634



SR25



Double Feed Detection Sensor (Reception)



11



J411



UN3



DADF Driver PCB



J1008



J1113



J1013



41



J635



SR24



Double Feed Detection Sensor (Transmission)



11



J411



UN3



DADF Driver PCB



J1008



J1113



J1013



42



J625



SR14



Original Size Sensor 1



11



J411



UN3



DADF Driver PCB



J1008



J1113



J1013



43



J626



SR15



Original Size Sensor 3



11



J411



UN3



DADF Driver PCB



J1008



J1113



44



J627



SR17



Cover Open/Closed Sensor



11



J411



UN3



DADF Driver PCB



J1008



J1113



45



J638



UN2



Original Display LED PCB



12



J412



UN3



DADF Driver PCB



J1014



J1029



46



J637



SR21



Delivery Sensor



12



J412



UN3



DADF Driver PCB



J1014



J1016



J1118



47



J628



SR22



Lead Sensor 1



12



J412



UN3



DADF Driver PCB



J1014



J1016



J1118



48



J629



SR23



Registration Sensor



13



J413



UN3



DADF Driver PCB



J1019



J1021



J1124



49



J633



SR16



Delivery Tray Sensor



13



J413



UN3



DADF Driver PCB



J1019



J1021



J1023



50



J632



SL1



Stamp Solenoid



13



J413



UN3



DADF Driver PCB



J1019



J1020



J1022



51



J631



SR19



Lead Sensor 2



13



J413



UN3



DADF Driver PCB



J1019



J1020



J1022



52



J630



SR18



Glass Home Position Sensor



14



J415



UN3



DADF Driver PCB



J1025



53



J1225



M8



Glass Movement Moter



60



J2411 UN4



Reader Scanner Unit PCB



62



J2412



UN6



DADF LED Lamp PCB (Right)



60



J2411 UN4



Reader Scanner Unit PCB



63



J2413



UN5



DADF LED Lamp PCB (Left)



61



J1102 UN4



Reader Scanner Unit PCB



J105



-



Reader Controller PCB



271



4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning



■ Reader 7 8



22



10 5 9 1 4 6



2 11 16 3 14 15



21 20



19 24



17 12



No J No. .



Symbol



Name



Relay Connector



23



No. J No.



J5001



-



Symbol



1



J101 UN1



Reader Controller PCB



2



J102 UN1



Reader Controller PCB



2



J102 UN1



Reader Controller PCB



2



J102 UN1



Reader Controller PCB



3



J103 UN1



Reader Controller PCB



J123



4



J104 UN1



Reader Controller PCB



J401



5



J105 UN1



Reader Controller PCB



6



J106 UN1



Reader Controller PCB



19



J1101 UN2



Reader Scanner Unit PCB



7



J107 UN1



Reader Controller PCB



J2071



20



J2073 CF1



Original Size Sensor 2



7



J107 UN1



Reader Controller PCB



J2072



21



J2074 CF2



Original Size Sensor 1



8



J108 UN1



Reader Controller PCB



22



J601



M1



Scanner Motor



9



J109 UN1



Reader Controller PCB



J206



-



-



Controller (HDMI RC)



10 J110 UN1



Reader Controller PCB



J2080



-



-



PC



11 J111 UN1



Reader Controller PCB



J418



-



-



-



12 J240 UN2 1



Reader Scanner Unit PCB



23



J2402 UN4



Reader LED Lamp PCB (Left)



12 J240 UN2 1



Reader Scanner Unit PCB



24



J2403 UN3



Reader LED Lamp PCB (Right)



J5301 J124



-



Name Printer



14



J5201 PS1



DADF Open/Closed Sensor 1



15



J5202 PS2



Scanner Unit Home Position Sensor



16



J5203 PS3



DADF Open/Closed Sensor 2



17



J125



FM1



Scanner Unit Cooling Fan



-



-



DADF



-



-



DADF Scanner Unit PCB



272



4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning



■ Printer



4 2 3 16 6 7



9



13 12 15



14



8 11 5



25 10



1 20 18



26 19



27



21 22 17



31 28 29 30



24 23



No.



J No. Symbol



Name



Relay Connector



No.



J No.



Symbol



Name



1



J401



UN1



DC Controller PCB



17



J518



UN86



Relay PCB



2



J411



UN1



DC Controller PCB



18



J126



UN78



Main Driver PCB



3



J412



UN1



DC Controller PCB



19



J125



UN78



Main Driver PCB



4



J413



UN1



DC Controller PCB



20



J124



UN78



Main Driver PCB



5



J414



UN1



DC Controller PCB



21



J128



UN78



Main Driver PCB



6



J421



UN1



DC Controller PCB



J3017



22



J204



UN79



Feed Driver PCB



7



J431



UN1



DC Controller PCB



J5005



23



J300



UN80



Duplex Driver PCB



UN1



DC Controller PCB



J5005



24



J301



UN80



Duplex Driver PCB



J9 8



J432 J8



9



J443



UN1



DC Controller PCB



25



J5201



UN8



Main Controller PCB 2



10



J442



UN1



DC Controller PCB



26



J22



UN8



Main Controller PCB 2



273



4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning No.



J No. Symbol



Name



Relay Connector



11



J451



UN1



DC Controller PCB



12



J461



UN1



DC Controller PCB



J5004



13



J462



UN1



DC Controller PCB



J3241



14



J471



UN1



DC Controller PCB



15



J472



UN1



DC Controller PCB



J3018



15



J472



UN1



DC Controller PCB



J3018



15



J472



UN1



DC Controller PCB



16



J491



UN1



DC Controller PCB



No.



J No.



Symbol



Name



27



J514



UN86



Relay PCB



J9200



-



-



-



DECK LATTICE



J9043



-



-



-



FINISHER LATTICE



28



J2169



UN31



Laser Driver PCB



J3011



29



J2160



UN33



BD PCB



J3011



30



J2159



M44



Laser Scanner Motor



31



J9912



UN31



Laser Driver PCB



-



-



-



-



J2087



44 43 21 20



36 25 63



27 26 34



33 65 64 37 19 24 35 23



18 61



17



62



60 30 40



28



42 14 41



16



39



29 32 31



10 8



6 9 7



45



2



3 11 13



4 5 1



38 15



No.



J No.



Symbol



Name



Relay Connector



No.



J No.



Symbol



Name



1



J101



UN78



Main Driver PCB



13



J515



UN86



Relay PCB



2



J102



UN78



Main Driver PCB



14



J2009



M13



Delivery Motor



274



4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning No.



J No.



Symbol



Name



Relay Connector



No.



J No.



Symbol



Name



3



J103



UN78



Main Driver PCB J3174



15



J615



UN20



AC Driver PCB



3



J103



UN78



Main Driver PCB J3251



16



J2136



PS36



Outer Delivery Sensor



3



J103



UN78



Main Driver PCB



17



J2140



PS96



Fixed Feed Lever Sensor



3



J103



UN78



Main Driver PCB



18



J3050



SW05



Waste Toner Lock Detection Switch



4



J104



UN78



Main Driver PCB J3001



J3006



19



J2011



PS45



Fixing Cleaning Web Level Sensor



4



J104



UN78



Main Driver PCB J3001



J3006



34



J2012



PS53



Fixing Shutter Home Position Sensor



4



J104



UN78



Main Driver PCB J3001



J3007



35



J2014



M15



Fixing Shutter Motor



4



J104



UN78



Main Driver PCB J3001



20



J2157



THM010



Fixing Main Thermistor



4



J104



UN78



Main Driver PCB J3001



20



J2157



THM030



Fixing Sub Thermistor 2



4



J104



UN78



Main Driver PCB J3001



21



J2158



THM020



Fixing Sub Thermistor 1



5



J105



UN78



Main Driver PCB J3001



J3092



J3093



23



J2016



M03



Fixing Motor



5



J105



UN78



Main Driver PCB J3001



J3092



J3093



24



J2015



SL09



Fixing Cleaning Web Drive Solenoid



5



J105



UN78



Main Driver PCB J3001



J3009



25



J2017



PS51



Fixing Inlet Sensor



5



J105



UN78



Main Driver PCB J3001



J3094



26



J2018



PS52



Fixing Outlet Sensor



5



J105



UN78



Main Driver PCB J3001



J3094



27



J2019



PS04



Fixing Toenail Jam Sensor



6



J106



UN78



Main Driver PCB J3235



J3121



28



J2001



SL02



Multi-purpose Pickup Solenoid



6



J106



UN78



Main Driver PCB J3235



J3121



29



J2002



PS23



Multi-purpose Tray Paper Sensor



6



J106



UN78



Main Driver PCB J3235



J3121



J3122



30



J2003



UN13



Multi-purpose Tray Paper Width Sensor



6



J106



UN78



Main Driver PCB J5010



J3121



J3122



60



J5011



PS101



Multi-purpose Tray Paper Length Sensor



6



J106



UN78



Main Driver PCB J3235



J3121



J3101



31



J2005



PS24



Vertical Path Sensor1



6



J106



UN78



Main Driver PCB J3235



J3121



32



J2053



PS28



Writing Judging Sensor



7



J107



UN78



Main Driver PCB



33



J2137



PS61



Drum Home Position Sensor



7



J107



UN78



Main Driver PCB J3177



J3060



36



J2141



LE01



Pre-exposure LED



7



J107



UN78



Main Driver PCB J3177



J3060



37



J3107



UN65



Pre-tranfer Charging Contact A PCB



8



J108



UN78



Main Driver PCB



38



J522



UN86



Relay PCB



9



J109



UN78



Main Driver PCB



39



J2004



FM33



Pre-transfer Charging Exhaust Fan



9



J109



UN78



Main Driver PCB



40



J2006



CL01



Developing Clutch



9



J109



UN78



Main Driver PCB



41



J2007



FM16



Laser Scanner Cooling Fan



9



J109



UN78



Main Driver PCB



42



J2008



FM17



Primary Charging Exhaust Fan



9



J109



UN78



Main Driver PCB



43



J2138



M01



Drum Motor



275



4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning No.



J No.



Symbol



Name



Relay Connector



No.



J No.



Symbol



Name



9



J109



UN78



Main Driver PCB



44



J2139



M02



Developing Motor



10



J110



UN78



Main Driver PCB J3272



J3167



-



-



SW02



Front Door Open Detection Switch



10



J110



UN78



Main Driver PCB J3272



J3167



45



J3253



SW06



Multi Door Switch



11



J151



UN78



Main Driver PCB J5001



J5026



61



J5003



TS04



Waste Toner Full Sensor



11



J151



UN78



Main Driver PCB J5001



62



J5002



PS100



Waste Toner Container Sensor



63



-



UN65



Pre-tranfer Charging Contact A PCB



-



-



UN66



Pre-tranfer Charging Contact B PCB



64



-



UN66



Pre-tranfer Charging Contact B PCB



65



J3107



M06



Primary Charging Wire Cleaning Motor



28 23 25 27



26 38 37



20 22 11 12 35



24



39



33



36



13 21 15 29 3016



1



14 41



23



18 40



54 10 6 7 8 9



31 17



19 32



No. J No.



Symbol



Name



Relay Connector



No.



J No.



Symbol



Name



1



J111



UN78



Main Driver PCB



J3097



14



J3501



UN15



Primary Charging High Voltage PCB



2



J112



UN78



Main Driver PCB



J3098



15



J3511



UN17



Develop High Voltage PCB



2



J112



UN78



Main Driver PCB



J3098



16



J3544



UN76



Pre-transfer Charging PCB



276



4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning No. J No.



Symbol



Name



Relay Connector



3



J114



UN78



Main Driver PCB



J3088



J3089



3



J114



UN78



Main Driver PCB



J3088



J3089



3



J114



UN78



Main Driver PCB



J3088



J3089



3



J114



UN78



Main Driver PCB



J3088



J3055



3



J114



UN78



Main Driver PCB



J3088



J3089



3



J114



UN78



Main Driver PCB



J3088



J3089



3



J114



UN78



Main Driver PCB



J3088



J3089



4



J115



UN78



Main Driver PCB



J3091



J3090



4



J115



UN78



Main Driver PCB



J3091



4



J115



UN78



Main Driver PCB



J3091



4



J115



UN78



Main Driver PCB



4



J115



UN78



5



J117



6



J118



7



No.



J No.



Symbol



Name



17



J2029



PS94



Primary Charging Shutter Sensor



J3252



18



J2132



PS03



Multi-purpose Cover Open/Close Sensor



J3047



19



J3048



THU01



Environment Sensor



20



J2025



UN21



Drum ROM PCB



J2133



-



-



TS01



Developing Toner Sensor



J5015



21



J5014



UN18



Voltage Control PCB



22



J3108



UN63



Pre-tranfer Charging Contact A PCB



J3106



23



J2034



PS54



Toner Exchange Cover Sensor



J3090



J3124



24



J2035



M28



Toner Feed Motor



J3090



J3124



25



J2036



CL05



Magnet Roller Clutch



J3091



J3090



J3124



26



J2038



TS02



Toner Excess Supply Sensor



Main Driver PCB



J3091



J3090



J3124



27



J2039



TS03



Buffer Toner Sensor



UN78



Main Driver PCB



J3063



J3080



28



J2037



M10



Toner Supply Motor



UN78



Main Driver PCB



J3172



29



J312



UN3



Fixing Power Supply PCB



J119



UN78



Main Driver PCB



J3111



30



J314



UN3



Fixing Power Supply PCB



7



J119



UN78



Main Driver PCB



J3111



31



J2130



FM07



Fixing Power Supply Cooling Fan



8



J127



UN78



Main Driver PCB



J3176



32



J614



UN20



AC Driver PCB



9



J129



UN78



Main Driver PCB



J3231



J3001



33



J2156



TP010



Thermal Switch1



10



J130



UN78



Main Driver PCB



J3066



J3067



J3215



35



J2114



PS95



Pre-transfer Charging Shutter Sensor



10



J130



UN78



Main Driver PCB



J3066



J3067



J3215



36



J2131



FM02



Primary Charging Suction Fan



10



J130



UN78



Main Driver PCB



J3066



J3067



J3215



37



J2170



FM30



Developer Lower Cooling Fan



10



J130



UN78



Main Driver PCB



J3066



J3067



J3215



38



J2171



FM31



Developer Upper Cooling Fan



10



J130



UN78



Main Driver PCB



J3066



J3067



J3215



39



J2177



FM32



Pre-transfer Charging Assembly Air Supply Fan



11



-



UN63



Contact A PCB



-



-



UN64



Pre-tranfer Charging Contact B PCB



12



-



UN64



Contact B PCB



40



J3108



M07



Pre-transfer Charging Wire Cleaning Motor



13



J427



UN18



Voltage Control PCB



41



J3172



UN19



Voltage Sensor PCB



J3169



J3170



277



4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning



32 28



35



31



33 30 34



23 27



20



21



13 14 29



15



12 24



22



19



25 26 17



18



16



11



4



3



9



2 8



1 10



5 6 7



No. J No. Symbol



Name



Relay Connector



No.



J No.



Symbol



Name



1



J201



UN79



Feed Driver PCB



10



J516



UN86



Relay PCB



2



J211



UN79



Feed Driver PCB



11



J2050



M24



Left Deck Pickup Motor



2



J211



UN79



Feed Driver PCB



12



J2071



M11



Right Deck Pickup Motor



3



J212



UN79



Feed Driver PCB



13



J2146



M33



Multi-purposeTray Registration Front Motor



3



J212



UN79



Feed Driver PCB



14



J2147



M26



Vertical Path Upper Motor



4



J213



UN79



Feed Driver PCB



15



J2076



M31



Vertical Path Middle Motor



5



J214



UN79



Feed Driver PCB



16



J2097



M12



Cassette3.4 Pickup Motor



6



J215



UN79



Feed Driver PCB



17



J2077



M27



Vertical Path Lower Motor



7



J218



UN79



Feed Driver PCB



18



J9033



UN24



DC-DC Converter PCB



8



J221



UN79



Feed Driver PCB



J3634



19



J2042



PS20



Left Deck Pickup Sensor



8



J221



UN79



Feed Driver PCB



J3634



20



J2043



PS12



Left Deck Paper Height Sensor



8



J221



UN79



Feed Driver PCB



J3634



21



J2044



PS11



Left Deck Paper Sensor



278



4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning No. J No. Symbol



Name



Relay Connector



No.



J No.



Symbol



Name



8



J221



UN79



Feed Driver PCB



J3634



22



J2045



PS10



Left Deck Paper Height Sensor



8



J221



UN79



Feed Driver PCB



J3634



23



J2046



PS33



Left Deck Pull Out Sensor



8



J221



UN79



Feed Driver PCB



J3132



24



J2048



PS49



Left Deck Paper Level Sensor 1



8



J221



UN79



Feed Driver PCB



J3132



25



J2049



PS50



Left Deck Paper Level Sensor 2



8



J221



UN79



Feed Driver PCB



26



J2051



M05



Left Deck Lifter Motor



8



J221



UN79



Feed Driver PCB



J3634



27



J2052



SL07



Left Deck Pickup Solenoid



8



J221



UN79



Feed Driver PCB



J3028



28



J2148



PS47



Right Deck Paper Level Sensor 1



8



J221



UN79



Feed Driver PCB



J3028



29



J2149



PS48



Right Deck Paper Level Sensor 2



9



J222



UN79



Feed Driver PCB



J3633



30



J2060



PS19



Right Deck Pickup Sensor



9



J222



UN79



Feed Driver PCB



J3633



31



J2061



PS08



Right Deck Upper Limit Sensor



9



J222



UN79



Feed Driver PCB



J3633



32



J2062



PS07



Right Deck Paper Sensor



9



J222



UN79



Feed Driver PCB



J3633



33



J2063



PS06



Right Deck Paper Height Sensor



9



J222



UN79



Feed Driver PCB



J3633



34



J2064



PS32



Right Deck Pull Out Sensor



9



J222



UN79



Feed Driver PCB



J3633



35



J2070



SL06



Right Deck Pickup Solenoid



279



4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning



6 9



7 11



26



12



14



28



18



17



29



10 13



27 15



16 19



8



30



20



23



21



31 25



22



3



2 1 4



5



32



24



No J No. .



Symbol



Name



Relay Connector



No.



J No.



Symbol



Name



1



J223



UN79



Feed Driver PCB



J3128



6



J2054



PS25



Vertical Path Sensor2



1



J223



UN79



Feed Driver PCB



J3635



7



J2055



PS68



Cassette 3 Upper Limit Sensor



1



J223



UN79



Feed Driver PCB



J3128



8



J2066



PS02



Vertical Path Cover Open/Close Sensor



1



J223



UN79



Feed Driver PCB



J3635



9



J2073



SL03



Cassette 3 Pickup Solenoid



1



J223



UN79



Feed Driver PCB



J3635



10



J2078



PS21



Cassette 3 Pickup Sensor



1



J223



UN79



Feed Driver PCB



J3635



11



J2079



PS13



Cassette 3 Paper Sensor



1



J223



UN79



Feed Driver PCB



J3635



12



J2080



PS17



Cassette 3 Paper Height Sensor



1



J223



UN79



Feed Driver PCB



J3635



13



J2081



PS26



Vertical Path Sensor3



280



4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning No J No. .



Symbol



Name



Relay Connector



No.



J No.



Symbol



Name



2



J224



UN79



Feed Driver PCB



J3636



14



J2056



PS71



Cassette 4 Upper Limit Sensor



2



J224



UN79



Feed Driver PCB



J3636



15



J2075



SL04



Cassette 4 Pickup Solenoid



2



J224



UN79



Feed Driver PCB



J3636



16



J2089



PS22



Cassette 4 Pickup Sensor



2



J224



UN79



Feed Driver PCB



J3636



17



J2090



PS14



Cassette 4 Paper Sensor



2



J224



UN79



Feed Driver PCB



J3636



18



J2091



PS18



Cassette 4 Paper Height Sensor



2



J224



UN79



Feed Driver PCB



J3636



19



J2092



PS27



Vertical Path Sensor4



3



J225



UN79



Feed Driver PCB



20



J2069



M04



Right Deck Lifter Motor



3



J225



UN79



Feed Driver PCB



21



J2072



M20



Cassette3 Lifter Motor



3



J225



UN79



Feed Driver PCB



22



J2074



M21



Cassette4 Lifter Motor



3



J225



UN79



Feed Driver PCB



J3031



23



J2085



SW09



Cassette 3 Paper Length Detection Switch



3



J225



UN79



Feed Driver PCB



J3008



24



J2088



FM03



Making Image Exhaust Fan



3



J225



UN79



Feed Driver PCB



J3031



25



J2096



SW10



Cassette 4 Paper Length Detection Switch



4



J226



UN79



Feed Driver PCB



J3273



26



J2082



PS69



Cassette 3 Paper Level Sensor 1



4



J226



UN79



Feed Driver PCB



J3273



27



J2083



PS70



Cassette 3 Paper Level Sensor 2



4



J226



UN79



Feed Driver PCB



J3273



28



J2084



SW07



Cassette 3 Paper Width Detection Switch



4



J226



UN79



Feed Driver PCB



J3033



29



J2093



PS72



Cassette 4 Paper Level Sensor 1



4



J226



UN79



Feed Driver PCB



J3033



30



J2094



PS73



Cassette 4 Paper Level Sensor 2



4



J226



UN79



Feed Driver PCB



J3033



31



J2095



SW08



Cassette 4 Paper Width Detection Switch



5



J227



UN79



Feed Driver PCB



32



J227



FM40



Feed Driver Cooling Fan



6



J2250



UN79



Feed Driver PCB



24



J2099



FM01



Making Image Exhaust Fan



J3013



281



4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning



13 33



37



32



10 12



34



31



35



20



30



24 16 27



25



22 18 15 23



29 17 5 8 36 21



9 7



6



26 3



4



2



1



11



19 14



No. J No.



Symbol



Name



Relay Connector J3233



J5005



No.



J No.



Symbol



Name



1



J310



UN80



Duplex Driver PCB



11



J517



UN86



Relay PCB



2



J311



UN80



Duplex Driver PCB



12



J9034



UN28



DC-DC Converter PCB



2



J311



UN80



Duplex Driver PCB



13



J3061



UN76



Transfer High Voltage PCB



3



J330



UN80



Duplex Driver PCB



14



J2167



M14



Reverse Motor



4



J331



UN80



Duplex Driver PCB



15



J2108



M32



Duplex Feed Merging Motor



4



J331



UN80



Duplex Driver PCB



16



J2111



M19



Duplex Feed Left Motor



5



J332



UN80



Duplex Driver PCB



17



J2098



M34



Registration Motor



5



J332



UN80



Duplex Driver PCB



18



J2109



M18



Duplex Feed Right Motor



6



J333



UN80



Duplex Driver PCB



19



J2107



M43



ETB Motor



7



J340



UN80



Duplex Driver PCB



20



J2113



PS35



Inner Delivery Sensor



7



J340



UN80



Duplex Driver PCB



21



J2115



SL05



Reverse Upper Flapper Solenoid



7



J340



UN80



Duplex Driver PCB



22



J2117



PS65



Reverse Vertical Path Sensor



7



J340



UN80



Duplex Driver PCB



23



J2118



FM05



Paper Cooling Fan



7



J340



UN80



Duplex Driver PCB



24



J2120



PS66



Duplex Left Sensor



7



J340



UN80



Duplex Driver PCB



J2121



25



J2121



FM08



Transfer Cleaner Cooling Fan



7



J340



UN80



Duplex Driver PCB



J3242



26



J2124



M16



Side Registration Motor



7



J340



UN80



Duplex Driver PCB



J3242



27



J2125



PS31



Side Registration Sensor



8



J342



UN80



Duplex Driver PCB



J3263



29



J2116



PS29



Registration Sensor



8



J342



UN80



Duplex Driver PCB



30



J2144



FM41



Duplex Driver Cooling Fan



8



J342



UN80



Duplex Driver PCB



31



J2145



FM42



Registration Motor/Duplex Motor Cooling Fan



J3042



J3236



J3243



J3236



J3020 J302 1



282



4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning No. J No.



Symbol



Name



Relay Connector



No.



J No.



Symbol



Name



9



J343



UN80



Duplex Driver PCB



J3270



32



J2100



PS55



ETB Engage Sensor



9



J343



UN80



Duplex Driver PCB



J3270



33



J2101



PS56



ETB Disengage Sensor



9



J343



UN80



Duplex Driver PCB



J3265



34



J2104



PS64



Duplex Outlet Sensor



9



J343



UN80



Duplex Driver PCB



J3269



35



J2105



PS67



Duplex Merging Sensor



9



J343



UN80



Duplex Driver PCB



J3270



36



J2106



SL11



Left Deck Merging Solenoid



9



J343



UN80



Duplex Driver PCB



37



J3062



UN76



Transfer High Voltage PCB



10



J3063



UN76



Transfer High Voltage J3306 PCB



-



-



UN67



Transfer High Voltage Resistance PCB



22 24



25



23 19 20



16



17 21



15



13 1



12 11



4 5



3 2 7 8 18



14



9 10



No.



J No.



Symbol



Name



1



J501



UN86



Relay PCB



2



J502



UN86



Relay PCB



6



Relay Connector



J3237



J9200



283



No.



J No.



Symbol



Name



13



J4002



UN8



Main Controller PCB 2



-



-



-



DECK LATTICE



4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning No.



J No.



Symbol



Name



Relay Connector



3



J505



UN86



Relay PCB



J3118



3



J505



UN86



Relay PCB



J3238



4



J507



UN86



5



J508



UN86



6



J509



UN86



Relay PCB



6



J509



UN86



7



J510



8 9



No.



J No.



Symbol



Name



-



-



-



READER LATTICE



-



-



-



FINISHER LATTICE



Relay PCB



14



J611



UN20



AC Driver PCB



Relay PCB



15



J9001



UN8



Main Controller PCB 2



16



J2134



FM14



Power Supply Cooling Fan 1



Relay PCB



17



J2154



FM15



Power Supply Cooling Fan 2



UN86



Relay PCB



18



J691



UN7



All-night Power Supply PCB



J511



UN86



Relay PCB



19



J201



UN4



DC Power Supply PCB



J512



UN86



Relay PCB



20



J202



UN5



DC Power Supply PCB



10



J513



UN86



Relay PCB



21



J202



UN6



DC Power Supply PCB



11



J519



UN86



Relay PCB



J3099



22



J3545



UN16



Pre-transfer Charging PCB



12



J520



UN86



Relay PCB



J3218



23



J2163



M03



Fixing Motor



12



J520



UN86



Relay PCB



J3102



24



J2151



M01



Drum Motor



12



J520



UN86



Relay PCB



J3102



25



J2152



M02



Developing Motor



J9043



J3224



J3001



J3212



J3213



23



26



25 6 10



3 5 4



8 17 11 7 9 1



29 30



16



27



2



14 15 13



28 12 11 20



19



18



24 22 21



No. J No.



Symbol



Name



1



J601



UN20



AC Driver PCB



2



J602



UN20



AC Driver PCB



Relay Connector J3639



284



No.



J No.



Symbol



Name



17



J1



UN25



Choke Coil PCB



18



J810



UN26



Noise Filter



4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning No. J No.



Symbol



Name



3



J603



UN20



AC Driver PCB



4



J604



UN20



AC Driver PCB



4



J604



UN20



AC Driver PCB



5



J605



UN20



6



J606



6



J606



7



Relay Connector



No.



J No.



Symbol



Name



19



J681



UN7



All-night Power Supply PCB



J9020



-



-



-



POD Deck Lite - C1 (Option)



J9020



-



-



-



Paper Deck Unit - E1 (Option)



AC Driver PCB



20



J101



UN4



DC Power Supply PCB



UN20



AC Driver PCB



21



J102



UN5



DC Power Supply PCB



UN20



AC Driver PCB



22



J102



UN6



DC Power Supply PCB



J607



UN20



AC Driver PCB



-



-



SW03



Environment Switch



7



J607



UN20



AC Driver PCB



-



-



SW04



Cassette Heater Switch



8



J608



UN20



AC Driver PCB



J3173



J3119



-



-



-



READER LATTICE



8



J608



UN20



AC Driver PCB



J3173



J3115



J3116



23



J3120



H01



Drum Heater



9



J610



UN20



AC Driver PCB



J9019



24



J220



H02



Multi Cassette Heater



10



J613



UN20



AC Driver PCB



J3174



J3638



J9043



-



-



-



FINISHER LATTICE



11



J500



UN3



Fixing Power Supply PCB



25



J2



UN25



Choke Coil PCB



12



J510



UN3



Fixing Power Supply PCB



26



J9072



H03



Fixing Heater



13



J3500 UN15



Primary Charging High Voltage PCB



27



J3510



UN17



Develop High Voltage PCB



13



J3500 UN15



Primary Charging High Voltage PCB



28



J3545



UN16



Pre-transfer Charging PCB



14



J3502 UN15



Primary Charging High Voltage PCB



29



J3214



-



High Voltage Connector



15



J3503 UN15



Primary Charging High Voltage PCB



30



J3003



-



High Voltage Connector



16



J3512 UN17



Develop High Voltage J3221 PCB



-



-



-



-



16



J3512 UN17



Develop High Voltage J3222 PCB



-



-



-



-



285



J3060



4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning



25 26 9



12



13



6 11 3 2



32



27 28 7 8 14 10



31 30 29



4 5



1



20 35



18



17 33



15



16 22



34 21 19 36 37 42 38 40 43



41



44



No. J No.



Symbol



Name



Relay Connector



No.



J No.



Symbol



Name



1



J801



UN26



Noise Filter



-



-



CB1001



Leakage Breaker



1



J801



UN26



Noise Filter



-



-



CB1002



Leakage Breaker



1



J801



UN26



Noise Filter



-



-



CB1003



Leakage Breaker



1



J801



UN26



Noise Filter



-



-



CB1004



Leakage Breaker



2



J3547



UN16



Pre-transfer Charging PCB



25



J9001



UN75



Post Charging Trance



J3004



J3129



286



4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning No. J No.



Symbol



Name



Relay Connector



No.



J No.



Symbol



Name



3



J3548



UN16



Pre-transfer Charging PCB



26



J3005



UN75



Post Charging Trance



4



J692



UN7



All-night Power Supply PCB



-



-



-



-



5



J693



UN7



All-night Power Supply PCB



-



-



-



-



6



J1001



UN47



Control Panel CPU PCB



27



J1



UN49



Key Top PCB



7



J1002



UN47



Control Panel CPU PCB



28



J2



UN49



Key Top PCB



8



J1005



UN47



Control Panel CPU PCB



-



-



UN48



NFC PCB



9



J1006



UN47



Control Panel CPU PCB



29



J1



UN50



Motion Sensor PCB



9



J1006



UN47



Control Panel CPU PCB



30



J1



UN51



LED PCB



10



J1007



UN47



Control Panel CPU PCB



-



-



UN52



Touch Pannel PCB



11



J1008



UN47



Control Panel CPU PCB



-



-



UN53



LCD PCB



12



J1020



UN47



Control Panel CPU PCB



31



J4021



UN8



Main Controller PCB 2



13



J1021



UN47



Control Panel CPU PCB



32



J4022



UN8



Main Controller PCB 2



14



J1022



UN47



Control Panel CPU PCB



-



-



-



speaker



15



J3



UN54



Control Panel CPU PCB



31



J4021



UN8



Main Controller PCB 2



16



J5



UN54



Control Panel CPU PCB



32



J4022



UN8



Main Controller PCB 2



17



J10



UN54



Control Panel CPU PCB



33



J1



UN59



Key Top PCB(Right)



18



J28



UN54



Control Panel CPU PCB



34



J1



UN58



Key Top PCB(Left)



18



J28



UN54



Control Panel CPU PCB



35



J1



UN57



Tarry PCB



19



J1003



UN54



Control Panel CPU PCB



36



J501



UN61



LED Driver PCB



19



J1003



UN54



Control Panel CPU PCB



37



J1



UN62



Volume PCB



20



J1005



UN54



Control Panel CPU PCB



38



J1001



UN55



Sensor Relay PCB



21



J1007



UN54



Control Panel CPU PCB



-



-



UN56



Touch Pannel PCB



22



J1008



UN54



Control Panel CPU PCB



-



-



UN60



LCD PCB



40



J1002



UN55



Sensor Relay PCB



42



J1



UN48



NFC PCB



41



J1003



UN55



Sensor Relay PCB



43



J1



UN50



Motion Sensor PCB



41



J1003



UN55



Sensor Relay PCB



44



J1



UN51



LED PCB



J3



J3



J14



J14



287



4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning



713 10 1611 19



6 15 14 3 2 4



21 20



23 22 24 18 17



1 9 8



5 12



28 41



35 40 36



32



42



29



27 33



41 25 34 26



No J No. Sym. bol



Name



38



Relay Connector



No. J No. Symbol



Name



1



J1



UN34



Main Controller PCB 1



-



-



-



TPM PCB



2



J3



UN34



Main Controller PCB 1



-



-



-



USB(D)



3



J5



UN34



Main Controller PCB 1



-



-



-



USB(H)



4



J7



UN34



Main Controller PCB 1



-



-



-



LAN



5



J11



UN34



Main Controller PCB 1



-



-



-



Flash PCB



6



J13



UN34



Main Controller PCB 1



-



-



-



Voice Guidance PCB



7



J15



UN34



Main Controller PCB 1



-



-



FM04



Main Controller Cooling Fan



8



J20



UN34



Main Controller PCB 1



-



-



-



Copy Card Reader Serial Interface Kit



9



J21



UN34



Main Controller PCB 1



-



-



-



Control Interface Kit



11 J600 UN34 5



Main Controller PCB 1



-



-



-



Memory PCB



12 J700 UN34 0



Main Controller PCB 1



32



J4000 UN8



Main Controller PCB 2



13 J800 UN34 0



Main Controller PCB 1



-



-



HDD for Mirroring



288



-



4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning No J No. Sym. bol



Name



Relay Connector



No. J No. Symbol



Name



14 J800 UN34 1



Main Controller PCB 1



-



-



-



HDD for Mirroring



15 J600 UN34 3



Main Controller PCB 1



-



-



-



HDD



16 J600 UN34 4



Main Controller PCB 1



-



-



-



HDD



17 J401 UN8 1



Main Controller PCB 2



33



J1



UN9



G3 FAX PCB



18 J401 UN8 2



Main Controller PCB 2



34



J2



UN9



G3 FAX PCB



18 J401 UN8 2



Main Controller PCB 2



35



J5



UN11



G3 2rd Line FAX PCB



19 J401 UN8 3



Main Controller PCB 2



36



J403



UN11



G3 2rd Line FAX PCB



20 J402 UN8 1



Main Controller PCB 2



-



-



-



Control Panel



21 J402 UN34 2



Main Controller PCB 2



22 J402 UN8 3



Main Controller PCB 2



-



-



-



USB Device Port



23 J403 UN8 1



Main Controller PCB 2



-



-



-



Reader



24 J420 UN8 2



Main Controller PCB 2



37



J784



UN45



WLAN PCB



25 J3



UN9



G3 FAX PCB



38



J1



UN10



Mojular PCB (1 line)



26 J4



UN9



G3 FAX PCB



-



-



-



Speaker



27 J6



UN9



G3 FAX PCB



40



J8



UN11



G3 2rd Line FAX PCB



28 J2



UN11



G3 2rd Line FAX PCB



41



J4



UN12



Mojular PCB (2 to 4 lines)



29 J2



UN27



G3 3rd/4th Line FAX PCB



30 J7



UN10



Mojular PCB (1 line)



42



J803



UN26



Noise Filter



31 J2



UN12



Mojular PCB (2 to 4 lines)



289



4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning



Original Exposure/Feed System Removing from the Connection Equipment(DADF) ■ Procedure 1. Open the DADF.



2. Remove the PCB Cover [1]. • 2 Screws [2] [2]



2x



[1]



290



4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning 3. Remove the Inner Plate [1]. • 4 Screws [2] • 1 Wire Saddle [3]



1x



4x [2]



[3]



[2]



[1]



4. Disconnect the cable [1]. • 1 Edge Saddle [2] • 1 Connector [3] • 2 Flat Cables [4]



1x



[1]



3x



[2] [3]



291



[4]



4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning 5. Remove the DADF [1]. • 4 Screws [2] [1]



4x



[2]



[2]



CAUTION: Be careful not to damage the white sheet [1] of the removed DADF.



[1]



CAUTION: Be careful not to damage the Reader Communication Cable Guide [1] when placing the DADF.



[1]



● Adjustment when Replacing the Parts When replacing the DADF, in the following procedures.



292



4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning No.



Item



Description



Reference



[1]



Angle Restriction ReAngle Restriction Release (Opening Angle at 90 deg) lease (Opening Angle at 90 deg)



“Angle Restriction Release (Opening Angle at 90 deg)” on page 570



[2]



Sensor Output Adjustment



“Sensor Output Adjustment” on page 294



[3]



Tray Width Adjustment Tray Width Adjustment



“Tray Width Adjustment” on page 294



[4]



Tilt Adjustment



Tilt Adjustment



“Tilt Adjustment” on page 295



[5]



Height Adjustment



Checking the height of front height adjustment roll.



“Checking the height of front height adjustment roll 1” on page 367



Left Hinge Height Adjustment



“ Left Hinge Height Adjustment 1” on page 296



Right Hinge Height Adjustment



“Right Hinge Height Adjustment” on page 573



Checking the height of front height adjustment roll.



“Checking the height of front height adjustment roll 2” on page 297



Checking the height of rear height adjustment roll.



“Checking the height of rear height adjustment roll.” on page 297



Left Hinge Height Adjustment



“Left Hinge Height Adjustment 2” on page 575



Side Registration Adjustment



“Side Registration Adjustment” on page 578



Sensor Output Adjustment



[6]



Side Registration Adjustment



[7]



Leading Edge Registra- Leading Edge Registration Adjustment tion Adjustment



“Leading Edge Registration Adjustment” on page 580



[8]



Magnification Adjustment



“Magnification Adjustment” on page 581



[9]



White Level Adjustment White Level Adjustment



Magnification Adjustment



“White Level Adjustment” on page 307



Preparation or Creation of Test Chart Prepare a test chart. If there is no test chart, create a test chart. Create a test chart that has a 10 mm smaller rectangle from the edge of A4 or LTR paper. 10 mm



10 mm



10 mm



10 mm



NOTE: Be sure to write a character or mark to identify the printed image direction.



Angle Restriction Release (Opening Angle at 90 deg) Change the opening angle of DADF from 70 deg to 90 deg. NOTE: Increasing the opening angle of DADF makes some operation easier.



293



4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning 1. Open the rubber cover and remove the angle restriction plate. • 2 screws Rubber cover



Rubber cover



Angle restriction plate



Screw



CAUTION: After adjustment, be sure to install the angle restriction plate.



Sensor Output Adjustment CAUTION: • When the sensor is replaced, be sure to clean the surface of prism before adjustment. • Make sure that there is no paper in DADF. 1. Execute the service mode item. (Lv.1) FEEDER > FUNCTION > SENS-INT



Tray Width Adjustment Execute either [a. AB type adjustment] or [b. Inch type adjustment] in this adjustment. a. AB type adjustment 1. Highlight the service mode item. (Lv.1) FEEDER > FUNCTION > TRY-A4 2. Set the slide guide to [A4/A3] display. 3. Press OK key to register the A4 width. 4. Highlight the service mode item. (Lv.1) FEEDER > FUNCTION > TRY-A5R 5. Set the slide guide to [A5R] display. 6. Press OK key to register the A5R width. b.Inch type adjustment 1. Highlight the service mode item. (Lv.1) FEEDER > FUNCTION > TRY-LTR 2. Set the slide guide to [LTR/11 x 17] display. 3. Press OK key and register the letter width. 4. Highlight the service mode item. (Lv.1) FEEDER > FUNCTION > TRY-LTRR 5. Set the slide guide to [STMT/ LTRR/ LGL] display. 6. Press OK key and register the LTRR width.



294



4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning



Tilt Adjustment CAUTION: Execute this adjustment after releasing the angle restriction (opening angle at 90 deg). “Angle Restriction Release (Opening Angle at 90 deg)” on page 570 1. Loosen the fixing nut on the back of the left hinge. 2. Rotate the hexagon socket bolt and move the fixing material to the marking line. To move it forward: rotate it clockwise To move it backward: rotate it counter clockwise



Hexagon socket bolt



Fixing nut



Fixing material Marking line



3. Tighten the fixing nut after adjustment.



Height Adjustment Checking the Height of the Height Adjustment Boss on the Front Side 1 1. Remove the Stream Reading Glass Retaining Cover.



x2



2. Close the ADF.



295



4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning 3. Check that the 2 Height Adjustment Bosses on the left front/rear sides are in contact with the Stream Reading Glass. NOTE: Checking can be performed easily by lighting up the LED. (Lv.1) COPIER > FUNCTION > MISC-R > SCANLAMP



Height adjustment roll



Stream reading glass



Height adjustment roll



4. If they are not in contact with the glass, perform the Left Hinge height adjustment.



Left Hinge Height Adjustment 1 Check that the Height Adjustment Rolls on the rear come contact with the stream reading glass. 1. Rotate the fixing screw on top of the left hinge to adjust it. To remove the space on the front: rotate it clockwise (black arrow direction) To remove the space on the rear or both sides: rotate it counterclockwise (white arrow direction) Blanking cover



Fixing screw



296



4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning



Checking the height of front height adjustment roll 2 1. Prepare the paper (plain) with approx. 10 mm in width and approx. 200 mm in length. 2. Align the edge of prepared paper with the contact point of DADF Glass Retainer and the Stream Reading Glass. Reading Glass



Height adjustment roll



Plate



20



0. 0



m



m



Paper



10



.0 mm



CAUTION: Place the paper in the position where it does not contact with the Platen Roller 1. If it is placed in the position where it contacts with the Platen Roller 1, checking cannot be performed correctly.



3. Close the DADF. 4. Pull out the paper in the direction of the arrow and check that there is resistance.



Paper



5. If there is no resistance, perform the height adjustment.



Checking the height of rear height adjustment roll. 1. Prepare the paper (plain) with approx. 10 mm in width and approx. 200 mm in length. 2. Align the edge of prepared paper with the contact point of DADF Glass Retainer and the Stream Reading Glass.



297



4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning Height adjustment roll



2



.0 00



mm



Reading Glass



Paper



10 .0 m m



Plate



CAUTION: Place the paper in the position where it does not contact with the Platen Roller 1. If it is placed in the position where it contacts with the Platen Roller 1, checking cannot be performed correctly.



3. Close the DADF. 4. Pull out the paper in the direction of the arrow and check that there is resistance.



Paper



5. If there is no resistance, perform the height adjustment.



Right Angle Adjustment NOTE: There are 2 adjustment methods; for front side reading (reader side scanner unit) and for back side reading (DADF side scanner unit).



298



4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning 1. Adjustment for front side reading 1. Set a test chart to DADF and make a 1-sided print.( “Preparation or Creation of Test Chart” on page 293) 2. Check the right angle accuracy of angle A on the printed paper. If it is not right angle, make an adjustment. Image on test chart Printed image



Feed direction



3. Loosen the 2 knurled screws on front of right hinge unit. 4. Loosen the knurled screw at the left side of left hinge unit front part.



299



4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning 5. Open the rubber cover on the back of right hinge unit and loosen the screw, and then make an adjustment by the hexagon socket bolt. If A is less than 90 deg, rotate it clockwise. If A is more than 90 deg, rotate it counterclockwise. Rubber cover



Hexagon socket bolt



Fixing nut



Knurled screw(Loosen)



Knurled screw(Loosen)



㸦LEFT SIDE㸧



㸦RIGHT SIDE㸧



6. After adjustment, tighten the fixing nut and 3 knurled screws. 7. Printout a test chart again and check that angle A is right angle.



300



4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning 2. Adjustment for back side reading 1. Set a test chart to DADF upside down and make a 2-sided print. 2. Check the right angle accuracy of angle A on the printed paper. If it is not right angle, make an adjustment. Image on test chart Printed image



Feed direction



3. Remove the front cover. 4. Loosen the adjustment screw. 5. Adjust the position of the guide that supports the scanner unit. If A is less than 90 deg, move the guide to right direction (black arrow direction). If A is more than 90 deg, move the guide to left direction (white arrow direction).



[B]



[A]



6. After adjustment, tighten the screw. 7. Printout a test chart again and check that it is right angle.



Side Registration Adjustment NOTE: There are 2 adjustment methods; for front side reading (reader side scanner unit) and for back side reading (DADF side scanner unit).



a. Adjustment for front side reading 1. Set a test chart on the original pickup tray and make a 1-sided print. (“Preparation or Creation of Test Chart” on page 293) 2. Overlap the printed paper with the test chart.



301



4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning 3. Check that the rear side of the printed image is within the standard. Standard: A ≦ 1 mm < If the image is displaced toward rear > Rear side of printed image



A



Image rear side of test chart



Feed direction < If the image is displaced toward front > Image rear side of test chart



A



Rear side of printed image



Feed direction



4. If it is out of standard, make an adjustment in service mode. (Lv.1) COPIER > ADJUST > ADJ-XY > ADJ-Y-DF If the image is displaced toward rear, increase the value (image is moved toward front). If the image is displaced toward front, decrease the value (image is moved toward rear). • Changes per 1 unit: 0.1 mm • Adjustment range: 2 to 202 (default: 102) 5. Printout a test chart again and check that the image is within the standard. b. Adjustment for back side reading 1. Set a test chart on the original pickup tray upside down and make a 2-sided print. 2. Overlap the printed paper with the test chart.



302



4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning 3. Check that the rear side of the printed image is within the standard. Standard: A ≦ 1 mm < If the image is displaced toward rear > Rear side of printed image



A



Image rear side of test chart



Feed direction < If the image is displaced toward front > Image rear side of test chart



A



Rear side of printed image



Feed direction



4. If it is out of standard, make an adjustment in service mode. (Lv.1) COPIER > ADJUST > ADJ-XY > ADJ-Y-DF2 If the image is displaced toward front, increase the value (image is moved toward rear). If the image is displaced toward rear, decrease the value (image is moved toward front). • Changes per 1 unit: 0.1 mm • Adjustment range: 56 to 220 (default: 124) 5. Printout a test chart again and check that the image is within the standard.



Leading Edge Registration Adjustment NOTE: There are 2 adjustment methods; for front side reading (reader side scanner unit) and for back side reading (DADF side scanner unit).



a. Adjustment for front side reading 1. Set a test chart on the original pickup tray and make a 1-sided print. ( “Preparation or Creation of Test Chart” on page 293) 2. Overlap the printed paper with the test chart.



303



4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning 3. Check that the leading edge of the printed image is within the standard. Standard: A ≦ 1 mm < If the image is displaced toward trailing edge > Leading edge of printed image



Image leading edge of test chart



A



Feed direction



< If the image is displaced toward leading edge >



Leading edge of printed image



Image leading edge of test chart



A



Feed direction



4. If it is out of standard, make an adjustment in service mode. (Lv.1) FEEDER > ADJUST > DOCST If the image is displaced toward trailing edge, increase the value (image is moved forward). If the image is displaced toward leading edge, decrease the value (image is moved backward). • Changes per 1 unit: 0.1 mm • Adjustment range: -50 to +50 5. Printout a test chart again and check that the image is within the standard. b. Adjustment for back side reading 1. Set a test chart on the original pickup tray upside down and make a 2-sided print. 2. Overlap the printed paper with the test chart.



304



4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning 3. Check that the leading edge of the printed image is within the standard. Standard: A ≦ 1 mm < If the image is displaced toward trailing edge > Leading edge of printed image



Image leading edge of test chart



A



Feed direction



< If the image is displaced toward leading edge >



Leading edge of printed image



Image leading edge of test chart



A



Feed direction



4. If it is out of standard, make an adjustment in service mode. (Lv.1) FEEDER > ADJUST > DOCST2 If the image is displaced toward trailing edge, increase the value (image is moved forward). If the image is displaced toward leading edge, decrease the value (image is moved backward). • Changes per 1 unit: 0.1 mm • Adjustment range: -50 to +50 5. Printout a test chart again and check that the image is within the standard.



Magnification Adjustment NOTE: • There are 2 adjustment methods; for front side reading (reader side scanner unit) and for back side reading (DADF side scanner unit). • Compare the image printed by stream reading and printed by copyboard reading to adjust.



a. Adjustment for front side reading 1. Set a test chart on the copyboard glass of the connected device and make a print. This is deemed as print1. (“Preparation or Creation of Test Chart” on page 293) 2. Set a test chart on the original pickup tray and make a 1-sided print. This is deemed as print2. 3. Overlap the print2 on the print1.



305



4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning 4. Check that the trailing edge of the image of print2 is within the standard. Standard: A ≦ 1 mm < If the image of print2 is longer > Trailing edge of print 1



Trailing edge of print 2



A



Feed direction



< If the image of print2 is shorter > Trailing edge of print 2



Trailing edge of print 1



A



Feed direction



5. If it is out of standard, make an adjustment in service mode. (Lv.1) FEEDER > ADJUST > LA-SPEED If the image of print2 is longer, increase the value (make the stream reading speed faster). If the image of print2 is shorter, decrease the value (make the stream reading speed slower). • Changes per 1 unit: 0.1% • Adjustment range: -30 to +30 6. Printout a test chart again and check that the image is within the standard. b. Adjustment for back side reading 1. Set a test chart on the copyboard glass of the connected device and make a print. This is deemed as print1. 2. Set a test chart on the original pickup tray upside down and make a 2-sided print. This is deemed as print2. 3. Overlap the print2 on the print1.



306



4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning 4. Check that the trailing edge of the image of print2 is within the standard. Standard: A ≦ 1 mm < If the image of print2 is longer > Trailing edge of print 1



Trailing edge of print 2



A



Feed direction



< If the image of print2 is shorter > Trailing edge of print 2



Trailing edge of print 1



A



Feed direction



5. If it is out of standard, make an adjustment in service mode. (Lv.1) FEEDER > ADJUST > LA-SPD2 If the image of print2 is longer, increase the value (make the sub scanning width shorter). If the image of print2 is shorter, decrease the value (make the sub scanning width longer). • Changes per 1 unit: 0.1% • Adjustment range: -30 to +30 6. Printout a test chart again and check that the image is within the standard.



White Level Adjustment 1. Set A4 or LTR paper on the copyboard glass and close the DADF. CAUTION: If the paper with narrow width is used for white level adjustment, the adjustment may not be complete properly.



2. Execute the service mode item. (Lv.1) COPIER > FUNCTION > CCD > DF-WLVL1 3. Remove the paper from the copyboard glass and set it to the original pickup tray of DADF.



307



4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning 4. Execute the service mode item. (Lv.1) COPIER > FUNCTION > CCD > DF-WLVL2 5. Set the paper to the copyboard glass again and close the DADF. 6. Execute the service mode item. (Lv.1) COPIER > FUNCTION > CCD > DF-WLVL3 7. Remove the paper from the copyboard glass and set it to the original pickup tray of DADF. 8. Execute the service mode item. (Lv.1) COPIER > FUNCTION > CCD > DF-WLVL4



Main Unit (DADF) ■ Removing the DADF Scanner Unit ● Preparation CAUTION: • Do not touch any part other than the grips [1] of the Scanner Unit. • Especially do not touch the Scanner Unit PCB [2] and the mirror [3].



[2]



[1]



[3]



1. Open the Feeder Cover [1].



308



4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning 2. Open the Open/Close Guide [2]. • 2 Screws [3] [1] [3]



x2



[2]



309



4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning 3. Remove the Original Size Sensor Unit [1] . • 3 Screws [2] • 1 Connector [3] • 1 Wire Saddle [4] [2] [1]



[3]



[2]



x3 [4]



[1]



310



4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning 4. Remove the Open/Close Guide[1]. • 2 Bosses[2] • 1 Cable[3]



[2]



[1]



[3]



[2]



[1]



5. Remove the Scanner Unit Cover [1].



[1]



6. Lift the Release Lever [1].



311



4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning [1]



312



4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning



● Procedure 1. Remove the Scanner Unit [1]. • 2 Screws [2] • 1 Flat Cable [3]



2x [2]



[3]



1x



[1]



NOTE: When installing the Scanner Unit [1], be sure to fit the 4 protrusions [2] of the Scanner Unit into the 2 guides [A] (front and rear). [2]



[A] [1]



[A] [2]



● Adjustment when Replacing the Parts 1. Input the service label value packaged in the Scanner Unit content. (Lv.2) COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > 100DF2RG , 100DF2GB



313



4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning 2. Perform sampling of B&W shading target. (Lv.1) COPIER > FUNCTION > CCD > BW-TGT 3. Perform white level adjustment. 1. Set A4 or LTR paper in the copyboard glass, close the DADF. CAUTION: If white level is adjusted in the small width paper, there is possibility that it will not adjust. 2. Execute the service mode item. (Lv.1) COPIER > FUNCTION > CCD > DF-WLVL1 3. Remove the paper from copyboard glass, set it in the DADF document pickup tray. 4. Execute the service mode item. (Lv.1) COPIER > FUNCTION > CCD > DF-WLVL2 5. Again, Set A4 or LTR paper in the copyboard glass, close the DADF. 6. Execute the service mode item. (Lv.1) COPIER > FUNCTION > CCD > DF-WLVL3 7. Remove the paper from copyboard glass, set it in the DADF document pickup tray. 8. Perform service mode item. (Lv.1) COPIER > FUNCTION > CCD > DF-WLVL4 4. After turning OFF/ON the power, make a copy and check the copied image. 5. Write the value in service label (inside the PCB cover). (Lv.1) COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > DFTBK-R , DFTBK-G , DFTBK-B , DFTBK-BW (Lv.1) COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > 100DF2RG , 100DF2GB



■ Removing the Pickup Roller Unit ● Procedure CAUTION: Be sure not to touch the surface of the roller when disassembling/assembling. 1. Open the Feeder Cover [1].



[1]



314



4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning 2. Remove the Inner Cover [1]. • 3 Screws [2]



3x



[2]



[1]



3. Remove the 2 springs [1].



[1]



4. Remove the Pickup Roller Unit [1]. • 2 Clips [2] • 2 Bushings [3]



[2] [3]



[1] [2]



[3]



315



4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning



External Auxiliary System (DADF) ■ Removing the DADF Front Cover ● Procedure 1. Open the DADF [1], and remove the screw (round end) [2] and the screw (tapping) [3].



2x [3]



[2]



[1]



2. Close the DADF. 3. Open the Feeder Cover [1], and remove the DADF Front Cover [2]. • 3 Screws [3] • 2 Claws [4] • 1 Hook [5] [3]



3x



2x



[1]



[2]



[4]



316



[5]



4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning



■ Removing the DADF Rear Cover ● Procedure 1. Remove the 2 Face Covers [1]. • 2 Claws [2] • 2 Hooks [3]



2x



[3]



[3]



[1]



[2]



[1]



2. Open the Feeder Cover [1], and remove the 3 screws [2].



1x [2]



2x



[2]



[1]



317



4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning 3. Lift the Original Pickup Tray [1], and remove the screw (tapping) [2]. [1]



[2]



1x



4. Lift the Original Pickup Tray [1], and remove the DADF Rear Cover [2]. [1]



[2]



■ Removing the DADF Left Cover ● Preparation 1. Remove the DADF Front Cover.“Removing the DADF Front Cover” on page 316 2. Remove the DADF Rear Cover. “Removing the DADF Rear Cover” on page 317



318



4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning



● Procedure 1. Remove the DADF Left Cover [1]. • 2 Screws [2]



[1]



x2



[2]



[2]



■ Removing the Feeder Cover ● Preparation 1. Remove the DADF Front Cover. “Removing the DADF Front Cover” on page 316 2. Remove the DADF Rear Cover. “Removing the DADF Rear Cover” on page 317 3. Remove the DADF Left Cover. “Removing the DADF Left Cover” on page 318



● Procedure 1. Open the Feeder Cover.



319



4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning 2. Remove the following parts. • • • • •



1 Arm [1] 1 Connector [2] 1 Edge saddle(free the harness) [3] 1 Screw [4] 1 Shaft [5] [1]



x1 x1 x1



[5] [2] [4]



[3]



320



4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning 3. Remove the feeder cover in the direction of the arrow. • 1 Boss [2]



[2]



[1]



■ Installing the White Plate ● Procedure Removing the DADF White Plate 1. Lift the DADF [1], and remove the White Plate [2].



[2] [1]



Installing the DADF White Plate 1. Put the White Plate [2] with the mark "FRONT" on the front side and the corner aligned with the upper left corner [A] of the Copyboard Glass.



321



4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning 2. Lower the DADF [3] to affix the White Plate [2] to the White Copyboard [4].



[3]



[4]



[A] [2]



[1]



[2]



3. Press the 9 Hook-and-Loop Fasteners [2] from above the White Plate [1] to attach them. [2] [1]



[2]



[2]



322



4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning



■ Removing the Stamp Solenoid ● Procedure 1. Open the DADF [1] Unit.



2. Open the White Copyboard [1], and open the Stamp Cover [2].



[2]



[1]



323



4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning 3. Remove the Stamp Inner Cover [1]. • 1 Screw [2]



1x



[2]



[1]



4. Remove the Stamp Solenoid [1]. • 2 Screws [2] • 1 Stamp Support Plate [3] • 1 Connector [4]



1x



[2]



[1]



1x [2]



1x



[3]



[4]



324



4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning



■ Removing the Hinge Unit (Left/Right) ● Removing the Hinge Unit (Right) Preparation 1. Remove the Face Cover [1]. • 1 Claw [2] • 1 Hook [3] • 2 Screws [4]



x2 [4] [4]



[3]



[1]



[2]



2. Remove the DADF.“Removing from the Connection Equipment(DADF)” on page 290



Procedure 1. Remove the Hinge Unit (Right). • 4 Screws



x4



325



4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning



● Removing the Hinge Unit (Left) Preparation 1. Remove the Face Cover [1]. • 1 Claw [2] • 1 Hook [3] • 1 Screw [4]



[3]



[1]



[2]



2. Remove the DADF.“Removing from the Connection Equipment(DADF)” on page 290



Procedure 1. Remove the Hinge Unit (Left). • 4 Screws



x4



● Adjustment when Replacing the Parts When replacing the Hinge(Left/Right), in the following procedures.



326



4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning No.



Item



Description



Reference



[1]



Left Hinge Slant Adjust- Left Hinge Slant Adjustment ment



“Left Hinge Slant Adjustment ” on page 587



[2]



Magnet Catch Adjustment



“Magnet Catch Adjustment ” on page 588



[3]



Hinge Pressure Adjust- Hinge Pressure Adjustment ment



[4]



Height Adjustment



Magnet Catch Adjustment



“Hinge Pressure Adjustment ” on page 590



Checking the Height of the Height Adjustment Boss on the “Checking the height of front height Front Side adjustment roll 1” on page 367 Left Hinge Height Adjustment



“ Left Hinge Height Adjustment 1” on page 296



Right Hinge Height Adjustment



“Right Hinge Height Adjustment” on page 573



Checking the Height of the Height Adjustment Boss on the “Checking the height of front height Front Side adjustment roll 2” on page 297 Checking the Height of the Height Adjustment Boss on the “Checking the height of rear height Rear Side adjustment roll.” on page 297 Left Hinge Height Adjustment



“Left Hinge Height Adjustment 2” on page 575



Left Hinge Slant Adjustment CAUTION: Execute this adjustment after releasing the angle restriction (opening angle at 90 deg). “Angle Restriction Release (Opening Angle at 90 deg)” on page 570 1. Loosen the fixing nut on the back of the left hinge. 2. Turn the bolt with hexagonal hole, and move the Fixation Member to the center marking line among the 7 marking lines (4th line). To move it forward: rotate it clockwise To move it backward: rotate it counter clockwise



Hexagon socket bolt



Fixing nut



Fixing material Marking line



3. Tighten the fixing nut after adjustment.



327



4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning 4. Check that the White Plate is not placed on the Size Index. If it is placed on the index, install it again while referring to “Installing the White Plate” on page 321.



ADF



Index Sheet White Plate Reader Unit



ADF



White Plate



Index Sheet Reader Unit



ADF



White Plate Index Sheet Reader Unit



ADF



Index Sheet



White Plate Reader Unit



Magnet Catch Adjustment 1. Remove the Front Cover.



328



4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning



x5



x2



2. Loosen the screw of the Magnet Catch. (Backlash state)



Loosen



329



4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning 3. Push the left upper side of the ADF until the Height Adjustment Boss on the front side is in contact with the Stream Reading Glass, and tighten the screw of the Magnet Catch. NOTE: Locations of the Height Adjustment Boss on the front side and the Stream Reading Glass Stream reading glass



Height adjustment roll



330



4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning



Tighten



331



4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning CAUTION: Be sure that the Magnet Catch is not tilted.



4. Install the Front Cover.



Hinge Pressure Adjustment 1. Hold the handle of the ADF Front Cover, and release the Magnet Catch.



332



4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning



Release the lever



Lose hold



CAUTION: Release it while paying attention not to put opening force.



2. Check that the flip-up angle of the ADF falls within the following range. CAUTION: Standard: 184 mm to 246 mm (Angle: 18.5 degrees to 25 degrees)



333



4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning 3. If it is less than 184 mm, turn the hexagonal wrench clockwise. CAUTION: • Do not rotate it by more than one turn. • The angle never becomes larger than 25 degrees due to initial setting of the hinge.



Hex wrench



184mm㹼246mm



NOTE: Service tool: Hexagonal wrench (8 mm)



Height Adjustment Checking the height of front height adjustment roll 1 1. Remove the DADF Glass Retainer. • 2 Screws



x2



2. Close the DADF.



334



4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning 3. Check that the 2 height adjustment rolls on the front/rear left come contact with the stream reading glass. NOTE: Turning ON the LED helps the check operation. (Lv.1) COPIER > FUNCTION > MISC-R > SCANLAMP



Height adjustment roll



Stream reading glass



Height adjustment roll



4. If not, execute the height adjustment of Left Hinge.



Left Hinge Height Adjustment 1 Check that the Height Adjustment Rolls on the rear come contact with the stream reading glass. 1. Rotate the fixing screw on top of the left hinge to adjust it. To remove the space on the front: rotate it clockwise (black arrow direction) To remove the space on the rear or both sides: rotate it counterclockwise (white arrow direction) Blanking cover



Fixing screw



335



4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning



Right Hinge Height Adjustment 1. Check that the space between the ADF and the Reader is 1 to 2 mm. If the space is less than 1 mm or more than 2 mm, make adjustment.



1.0 mm-2.0mm



2. Make adjustment by turning the Fixation Screw on the upper side of the Right Hinge. If the space is larger than 2 mm: Turn the screw counterclockwise (white arrow). If the space is less than 1 mm: Turn the screw clockwise (black arrow).



Claw



Blanking cover Fixing screw



Checking the height of front height adjustment roll 2 1. Prepare the paper (plain) with approx. 10 mm in width and approx. 200 mm in length. 2. Align the edge of prepared paper with the contact point of DADF Glass Retainer and the Stream Reading Glass.



336



4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning Reading Glass



Height adjustment roll



Plate



20



0. 0



m



m



Paper



10



.0 mm



CAUTION: Place the paper in the position where it does not contact with the Platen Roller 1. If it is placed in the position where it contacts with the Platen Roller 1, checking cannot be performed correctly.



3. Close the DADF. 4. Pull out the paper in the direction of the arrow and check that there is resistance.



Paper



5. If there is no resistance, perform the height adjustment.



Checking the height of rear height adjustment roll. 1. Prepare the paper (plain) with approx. 10 mm in width and approx. 200 mm in length. 2. Align the edge of prepared paper with the contact point of DADF Glass Retainer and the Stream Reading Glass.



337



4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning Height adjustment roll



2



.0 00



mm



Reading Glass



Paper



10 .0 m m



Plate



CAUTION: Place the paper in the position where it does not contact with the Platen Roller 1. If it is placed in the position where it contacts with the Platen Roller 1, checking cannot be performed correctly.



3. Close the DADF. 4. Pull out the paper in the direction of the arrow and check that there is resistance.



Paper



5. If there is no resistance, perform the height adjustment.



Left Hinge Height Adjustment 2 1. Make adjustment by turning the Fixation Screw on the upper side of the Left Hinge. If the front side is not installed properly: Turn the screw clockwise (black arrow). If the rear side or both sides are not installed properly: Turn the screw counterclockwise (white arrow). Blanking cover



Fixing screw



2. Check the height again to make sure that it becomes appropriate. 3. Check that the White Plate is in contact with the Copyboard Glass.



338



4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning



ADF



Index Sheet White Plate Reader Unit



ADF



White Plate



Index Sheet Reader Unit



ADF



White Plate Index Sheet Reader Unit



ADF



Index Sheet



White Plate Reader Unit



■ Removing the Double Feed Detection Sensor CAUTION: In the case of replacing the Double Feed Detection Sensor(Reception/Transmission), be sure to replace them together.



● Removing the Double Feed Detection Sensor (Reception) Preparation 1. Remove the DADF Front Cover. “Removing the DADF Front Cover” on page 316 2. Remove the DADF Rear Cover. “Removing the DADF Rear Cover” on page 317 3. Remove the DADF Left Cover. “Removing the DADF Left Cover” on page 318 4. Remove the Feeder Cover. “Removing the Feeder Cover” on page 319



339



4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning



Procedure 1. Remove the Lower Guide [1]. • 4 Screws [2] [2]



4x



[1]



[2]



340



4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning 2. Remove the Upper Guide [1]. CAUTION: Be sure not to lost the Spring [1] and the Retainer [2] when disassembling/assembling.



[1]



[2]



• 2 Screws [2] • 1 Connector[3] [1]



2x



1x



[2] [3]



[1]



341



4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning 3. Remove the Double Feed Detection Sensor (Reception). • 1 Connector [2] • 1 Screw [3] • 1 Claw [4]



1x



1x



[1]



[3]



[4]



[2]



CAUTION: • When assembling, be sure to align the 2 springs [2] with the 2 protrusions [1]. • When installing the Upper Guide, be sure to place the 5 sheets [4] of the Upper Guide on the upper side of the 5 Feed Rollers [3]. [1]



[2]



[3] [4]



● Removing the Double Feed Detection Sensor (Transmission) Preparation 1. Open the Feeder Cover [1].



342



4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning 2. Open the Open/Close Guide Unit [2]. • 2 Screws[3] [1] [3]



x2



[2]



Procedure 1. Remove the Double Feed Detection Sensor (Transmission)[1] and the Sensor Holder[2]. • 1 Screw [3] • 1 Claw [4] • 1 Connector [5]



1x [1] [3]



1x



[4]



[2] [5]



343



4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning 2. Remove the Double Feed Detection Sensor (Transmission)[1]. • 3 Claws [2] [2]



[1]



[2]



Consumable parts for periodical replacement and locations for cleaning (DADF) ■ Removing the Pickup Roller / Feed Roller ● Preparation 1. Remove the Pickup Roller Unit.“Removing the Pickup Roller Unit” on page 314



● Procedure CAUTION: Be sure not to touch the surface of the roller when disassembling/assembling. 1. Removing the Pickup Roller Remove the Pickup Roller [2] and the Roller Shaft [3] from the Pickup Roller Unit [1]. • 2 Clips [4] • 2 Bushings [5] • 1 Belt [6] [2]



[6]



[1] [3]



[4] [5]



[5] [4]



2. Remove the Roller Shaft [2] from the Pickup Roller [1]. • 1 Clip [3] [1] [3] [2]



344



4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning 3. Removing the Feed Roller Turn the Pickup Roller Unit [1] upside down, and remove the Feed Roller [2] and the Roller Shaft [3]. • 2 Clips [4] • 2 Bushings [5] • 1 Belt [6] [6]



[4] [5] [3] [5] [4]



[2] [1]



4. Remove the Roller Shaft [2] from the Feed Roller [1]. • 1 Clip [3] [1] [3]



[2]



● Actions after Parts Replacement 1. Clear the parts counter.(COPIER > COUNTER > DRBL‑2 > DF-PU-RL) 2. Clear the parts counter.(COPIER > COUNTER > DRBL‑2 > DF-FD-RL)



■ Removing the Separation Roller ● Preparation 1. Remove the Pickup Roller Unit. “Removing the Pickup Roller Unit” on page 314



● Procedure CAUTION: Be sure not to touch the surface of the roller when disassembling/assembling.



345



4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning 1. Lift the Original Pickup Tray [1].



[1]



2. Remove the Pickup Guide (Lower) [1] from the lower side of the Original Pickup Tray. • 2 Screws [2]



2x [1]



[2]



3. Remove the Separation Roller Unit [1]. • 2 Screws [2]



2x [2]



[1]



4. Lower the Original Pickup Tray. 5. Remove the Separation Roller [1] and the Roller Shaft [2]. [1]



[2]



346



4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning 6. Remove the Roller Shaft [2] from the Separation Roller [1]. • 1 Bearing [3] [2] [1] [3]



● Actions after Parts Replacement 1. Clear the parts counter.(COPIER > COUNTER > DRBL‑2 > DF-SP-RL)



■ Removing the Dust Collecting Sheets Type E ● Preparation 1. Remove the DADF Front Cover. “Removing the DADF Front Cover” on page 316 2. Remove the DADF Rear Cover. “Removing the DADF Rear Cover” on page 317 3. Remove the DADF Left Cover. “Removing the DADF Left Cover” on page 318 4. Remove the Feeder Cover. “Removing the Feeder Cover” on page 319



● Procedure 1. Remove the Lower Guide [1]. • 4 Screws [2] [2]



4x



[1]



[2]



347



4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning 2. Remove the Upper Guide [1] and the Grounding Wire [5]. CAUTION: Be sure not to lost the Spring [1] and the Retainer [2] when disassembling/assembling.



[1]



[2]



• 1 Connector [2] • 3 Screws [3] • 2 Springs [4] [1]



2x



1x



[3] [2]



1x



[5]



[1]



[4]



348



4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning 3. Remove the 8 Dust Collecting Sheets Type E [1]. [1]



[1]



CAUTION: When affixing the 8 Dust Collecting Sheets Type E [1], they should be aligned with the lines [A]. [1]



[A]



[1]



CAUTION: • When assembling, be sure to align the 2 springs [2] with the 2 protrusions [1]. • When installing the Upper Guide, be sure to place the 5 sheets [4] of the Upper Guide on the upper side of the 5 Feed Rollers [3]. [1]



[2]



[3] [4]



● Actions after Parts Replacement 1. Clear the parts counter.(COPIER > COUNTER > DRBL‑2 > LNT-TAP2)



349



4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning



■ Removing the Dust Collecting Sheets ● Preparation 1. Remove the DADF Front Cover. “Removing the DADF Front Cover” on page 316



● Procedure 1. Open the DADF [1], and remove the Left Cover [2]. • 2 Screws [3] • 2 Hooks [4]



2x [1]



[4]



[3]



[2]



2. Close the DADF [1], and remove the 2 screws [2].



2x



[1]



[2]



3. Open the Open/Close Guide Unit [1]. • 2 Screws [3] 4. Remove the Registration Upper Cover [2].



350



4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning



x2 [3]



[1]



[1] [2]



5. Remove the Registration Front Inner Guide [1]. • 2 Screws [2] • Harness Guide [A] [2]



2x



[2]



[1]



1x



[A]



351



4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning 6. Remove the Registration Inner Rear Guide Unit [1]. • 2 Screws [2] • 6 Clamps [3] • 1 Connector [4] [2]



2x [1]



[2]



6x [3] [4]



1x



[3]



7. Remove the Registration Roller Unit [1]. • 2 Screws [2] • 1 Support Plate [3]



2x [2]



[1] [3]



352



4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning 8. Remove the 2 Dust Collecting Sheets [1]. CAUTION: When replacing the Dust Collecting Sheets [1], do not bend the Scraper Sheet [2].



[1]



[2]



[1]



● Actions after Parts Replacement 1. Clear the parts counter.(COPIER > COUNTER > DRBL‑2 > LNT-TAP1)



353



4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning



■ Removing the Stamp Cartridge ● Procedure 1. Open the DADF [1] Unit.



2. Open the White Copyboard [1], and open the Stamp Cover [2].



[2]



[1]



354



4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning 3. Remove the Stamp Cartridge [2] using tweezers [1] not to touch the inked side [A]. [A]



[1]



[2]



NOTE: Be sure to insert the Stamp Cartridge until it clicks when installing it.



CAUTION: • When installing the Stamp Cartridge, be sure that it is not titled. • Be sure to install the Stamp Cartridge to proper position.



● Actions after Parts Replacement 1. Clear the parts counter.(COPIER > COUNTER > DRBL‑2 > STAMP)



■ Cleaning the Back Surface of the Reading Glass ● Preparation 1. Remove the DADF Front Cover. “Removing the DADF Front Cover” on page 316



355



4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning



● Procedure 1. Open the DADF, and slide the Reading Glass [1] in the direction of the arrow to remove it. • 1 Claw [2]



[1]



1x



[2]



2. Clean the back surface [1] of the Reading Glass with wet and tightly-wrung lint-free paper [2].



[1] [2]



356



4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning 3. Install the Reading Glass and the Front Cover to the original positions. CAUTION: When installing the Reading Glass [1], slowly and carefully slide it in. If you slide it in abruptly, the Film Sheet [2] may flip. (This will result in a jam at DADF reading.)



[1]



[2]



■ Cleaning the Post-separation Sensor 1/Post-separation Sensor 2/Postseparation Sensor 3 ● Procedure 1. Open the Feeder Cover [1].



[1]



357



4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning 2. Remove the Inner Cover [1]. • 3 Screws [2]



3x



[2]



[1]



3. Cleaning the Post-separation Sensor 1 Clean the Post-separation Sensor 1 [1] by blowing air a couple of times through the hole [A] of the guide with a blower [2]. (When wiping it, be sure to use wet and tightly-wrung lint-free paper.)



[2] [A]



[1]



4. Cleaning the Post-separation Sensor 2 Clean the Post-separation Sensor 2 [1] by blowing air a couple of times through the hole [A] of the guide with a blower [2]. (When wiping it, be sure to use wet and tightly-wrung lint-free paper.) [2] [A]



[1]



358



4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning 5. Cleaning the Post-separation Sensor 3 Clean the Post-separation Sensor 3 [1] by blowing air a couple of times through the clearance [A] of the guide with a blower [2]. (When wiping it, be sure to use wet and tightlywrung lint-free paper.)



[2]



[1]



[A]



■ Cleaning the Registration Sensor/Lead Sensor/ Registration Roller ● Procedure CAUTION: Be sure not to touch the surface of the roller when disassembling/assembling. 1. Open the Feeder Cover [1]. 2. Open the Open/Close Guide Unit [2]. • 2 Screws [3] [1] [3]



x2



[2]



359



4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning 3. Remove the Registration Front Inner Guide [1]. • 2 Screws [2] [2]



2x



[1]



[2]



[1]



4. Remove the Registration Guide [1]. • 2 Screws [2] [2]



2x [2]



[1]



360



4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning 5. Cleaning the Registration Sensor Clean the prism [1] of the Registration Sensor by blowing air a couple of times with a blower [2]. (When wiping, be sure to use wet and tightly-wrung lint-free paper.) CAUTION: When cleaning the prism of the Registration Sensor, do not disassembly the Prism Unit [2] from the Registration Guide [1]. [1] [2]



[2] [1]



6. Cleaning the Lead Sensor Clean the Lead Sensor [1] by blowing air a couple of times through the clearance [A] of the guide with a blower [2]. When wiping it, be sure to use wet and tightly-wrung lint-free paper.)



[2]



[1] [A]



361



4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning 7. Cleaning the Registration Roller Wipe the Registration Roller [2] with wet and tightly-wrung lint-free paper [3] by rotating the shaft [1] of the Registration Roller until it is clean.



[3]



[2] [1]



■ Cleaning the Pullout Roller/Feed Roller 2/Lead Roller 1 ● Procedure CAUTION: Be sure not to touch the surface of the roller when disassembling/assembling. 1. Open the Feeder Cover [1]. 2. Open the Open/Close Guide Unit [2]. • 2 Screws [3] [1] [3]



x2



[2]



362



4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning 3. Remove the Scanner Unit Cover [1].



[1]



4. Remove the Registration Front Inner Guide [1]. • 2 Screws [2] • Harness Guide [A] [2]



2x



[2]



[1]



1x [1]



[A]



363



4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning 5. Cleaning the Pullout Roller. Wipe the Pullout Roller [2] with wet and tightly-wrung lint-free paper [3] by rotating the shaft [1] of the Feed Roller 2 until it is clean.



[3]



[2]



[1]



6. Cleaning the Feed Roller 2 Wipe the Feed Roller 2 [2] with wet and tightly-wrung lint-free paper [3] by rotating the shaft [1] of the roller until it is clean.



[2]



[1]



[3]



7. Cleaning the Lead Roller 1 Wipe the Lead Roller 1 [2] with wet and tightly-wrung lint-free paper [3] by turning the Jam Removal Dial [1] until it is clean.



[3]



[1]



[2]



■ Cleaning the Lead Roller 2/Lead Roller 3 ● Preparation 1. Remove the DADF Scanner Unit. “Removing the DADF Scanner Unit” on page 308



364



4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning



● Procedure CAUTION: Be sure not to touch the surface of the roller when disassembling/assembling. 1. Cleaning the Lead Roller 2 Wipe the Lead Roller 2 [2] with wet and tightly-wrung lint-free paper [3] by turning the Jam Removal Dial [1] until it is clean.



[3]



[2] [1]



2. Cleaning the Lead Roller 3 Wipe the Lead Roller 3 [2] with wet and tightly-wrung lint-free paper [3] by turning the Jam Removal Dial [1] until it is clean.



[2]



[3]



[1]



■ Cleaning the Delivery Roller/Delivery Sensor ● Procedure CAUTION: Be sure not to touch the surface of the roller when disassembling/assembling.



365



4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning 1. Cleaning the Delivery Roller Lift the Multi-purpose Tray [1], and wipe the Delivery Roller [3] with wet and tightly-wrung lint-free paper [4] by rotating the shaft [2] of the Delivery Roller.



[1]



[2]



[3]



[4]



[3]



2. Cleaning the Delivery Sensor Lift the Multi-purpose Tray [1], and clean the Delivery Sensor [2] with a blower [3] through the clearance [A] of the Delivery Guide. [1]



[2] [3]



[A]



■ Cleaning the Double Feed Detection Sensor (Reception/Transmission) ● Procedure 1. Open the Feeder Cover [1].



[1]



366



4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning 2. Cleaning the Double Feed Detection Sensor (Transmission) Clean the Double Feed Detection Sensor (Transmission) by blowing air a couple of times through the hole [A] of the guide with a blower [2]. (When wiping it, be sure to use wet and tightly-wrung lint-free paper.)



[2] [A]



[1]



3. Cleaning the Double Feed Detection Sensor (Reception) Clean the Double Feed Detection Sensor (Transmission) by blowing air a couple of times through the hole [A] of the guide with a blower [2]. (When wiping it, be sure to use wet and tightly-wrung lint-free paper.) [A] [2] [1]



■ Height Adjustment ● Checking the height of front height adjustment roll 1 1. Remove the DADF Glass Retainer. • 2 Screws



x2



2. Close the DADF.



367



4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning 3. Check that the 2 height adjustment rolls on the front/rear left come contact with the stream reading glass. NOTE: Turning ON the LED helps the check operation. (Lv.1) COPIER > FUNCTION > MISC-R > SCANLAMP



Height adjustment roll



Stream reading glass



Height adjustment roll



4. If not, execute the height adjustment of Left Hinge.



● Left Hinge Height Adjustment 1 Check that the Height Adjustment Rolls on the rear come contact with the stream reading glass. 1. Rotate the fixing screw on top of the left hinge to adjust it. To remove the space on the front: rotate it clockwise (black arrow direction) To remove the space on the rear or both sides: rotate it counterclockwise (white arrow direction) Blanking cover



Fixing screw



368



4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning



● Right Hinge Height Adjustment 1. Check that the space between the ADF and the Reader is 1 to 2 mm. If the space is less than 1 mm or more than 2 mm, make adjustment.



1.0 mm-2.0mm



2. Make adjustment by turning the Fixation Screw on the upper side of the Right Hinge. If the space is larger than 2 mm: Turn the screw counterclockwise (white arrow). If the space is less than 1 mm: Turn the screw clockwise (black arrow).



Claw



Blanking cover Fixing screw



● Checking the height of front height adjustment roll 2 1. Prepare the paper (plain) with approx. 10 mm in width and approx. 200 mm in length. 2. Align the edge of prepared paper with the contact point of DADF Glass Retainer and the Stream Reading Glass.



369



4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning Reading Glass



Height adjustment roll



Plate



20



0. 0



m



m



Paper



10



.0 mm



CAUTION: Place the paper in the position where it does not contact with the Platen Roller 1. If it is placed in the position where it contacts with the Platen Roller 1, checking cannot be performed correctly.



3. Close the DADF. 4. Pull out the paper in the direction of the arrow and check that there is resistance.



Paper



5. If there is no resistance, perform the height adjustment.



● Checking the height of rear height adjustment roll. 1. Prepare the paper (plain) with approx. 10 mm in width and approx. 200 mm in length. 2. Align the edge of prepared paper with the contact point of DADF Glass Retainer and the Stream Reading Glass.



370



4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning Height adjustment roll



2



.0 00



mm



Reading Glass



Paper



10 .0 m m



Plate



CAUTION: Place the paper in the position where it does not contact with the Platen Roller 1. If it is placed in the position where it contacts with the Platen Roller 1, checking cannot be performed correctly.



3. Close the DADF. 4. Pull out the paper in the direction of the arrow and check that there is resistance.



Paper



5. If there is no resistance, perform the height adjustment.



● Left Hinge Height Adjustment 2 1. Make adjustment by turning the Fixation Screw on the upper side of the Left Hinge. If the front side is not installed properly: Turn the screw clockwise (black arrow). If the rear side or both sides are not installed properly: Turn the screw counterclockwise (white arrow). Blanking cover



Fixing screw



2. Check the height again to make sure that it becomes appropriate. 3. Check that the White Plate is in contact with the Copyboard Glass.



371



4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning



ADF



Index Sheet White Plate Reader Unit



ADF



White Plate



Index Sheet Reader Unit



ADF



White Plate Index Sheet Reader Unit



ADF



Index Sheet



White Plate Reader Unit



Removing from the Connection Equipment(Reader) ■ Removing the DADF + Reader Unit ● Preparation CAUTION: When a delivery system option (Buffer Path Unit) is installed, be sure to disconnect it from the host machine.



372



4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning



● Procedure CAUTION: • Because the weight of the equipment is approx. 40kg, be sure to work with 2 or more people when lifting it. Also, be sure to lift the equipment horizontally. 1. Move the Reader Scanner Unit to the fixing position by executing the following service mode. (Lv.2) COPIER > FUNCTION > MISC-R > RD-SHPOS CAUTION: Be sure to move the Scanner Unit to the fixing position and secure it in place when moving the Reader after installation. Otherwise, the Scanner Unit may get damage. If the machine is moved with the ADF Reading Glass stopped at a position other than the specified position, the Glass Holder of the ADF may be scraped and the Reading Glass may be soiled, resulting in lined images. In order to prevent it, execute the foregoing service mode to move the ADF Reading Glass to the specified position. If the Reader Scanner Unit is manually moved back to the fixation position, the ADF Reading Glass does not move along with the Reader Scanner Unit. Be sure to use service mode to move it.



2. Open the covers. • Toner Replacement Cover [1] • Right Cover [2] • Right Rear Cover 1 [3]



[3]



[1] [2]



373



4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning 3. Remove the Right Upper Cover [1]. • 3 Protrusions [2] • 2 Screws [3] • 1 Boss [4]



[4]



[2] [1]



x2



[3]



4. Close the Right cover. 5. Remove the Left Rear Cover [1]. • 1 Protrusion [2] • 1 Claw [3]



[1]



[3]



[2]



374



4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning 6. Remove the 2 Finisher Connection Covers [1]. • 1 Protrusion [2] for each location • 1 Claw [3] for each location



[3]



x2 [1] [1]



[2]



7. Remove the Left Upper Cover [1]. • 3 Protrusions [2] • 3 Claws [3] • 3 Screws [4]



[2]



x3



[4]



[1]



[3]



[3]



[4]



8. Remove the Upper Rear Cover [1]. • 3 Protrusions [2] • 2 Claws [3]



x2



[3]



[1]



[2]



375



4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning 9. Remove the Left Rear Inner Cover [1]. • 2 Screws [2]



x2



[1] [2]



10. Disconnect the Reader Power Supply Cable [1]. • • • • • •



2 Edge Saddles [2] 1 Wire Saddle [3] 2 Connectors [4] 1 grounding wire [5] 1 Toothed Washer [6] 1 Screw [7]



[1]



x3



x2



[3]



[2] [4]



[7]



[6] [5]



11. Disconnect the Reader Communication Cable [1]. • 3 Wire Saddles [2]



x3



[1]



376



[2]



4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning 12. Open the DADF, and remove the Left Upper Small Cover [1]. • 1 Protrusion [2] • 1 Claw [3]



1x



[2] [1] [3]



13. Install the Scanner Fixation Tool [1].



[1]



14. Close the DADF.



377



4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning 15. Remove the Reader Fixation Plate (R) [1] • 2 Bosses [2] • 1 Screw [3] • 1 Wire Saddle [4] [1]



[4]



1x



1x



[2]



[2]



[3]



378



4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning 16. Remove the Reader Fixation Plate (L) [1]. • 2 Bosses [2] • 1 Screw [3]



[1]



1x



[2]



[3]



[2]



379



4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning 17. Lift up the DADF + Reader Unit slightly with a screwdriver by applying the principle of leverage, and remove the 4 Rubber Plates [1] from the host machine (printer). CAUTION: • When attempting to lift up the DADF + Reader Unit fully without first removing the 4 Rubber Plates, force is generated when the Rubber Plates are removed, which may cause the DADF + Reader Unit to fall. • To make the work easier, remove the Rubber Plates in the front side first. • Do not use a long screwdriver. Otherwise, it may be bent.



[1]



[1]



CAUTION: • Because the weight of the equipment is approx. 40 kg, be sure to work with 2 or more people when lifting it up/down. Also, be sure to lift the equipment horizontally. • When lifting up/down the DADF + Reader Unit, be careful not to get the cables and fingers caught.



380



4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning 18. Remove the DADF + Reader Unit [1] from the 2 pins [2] of the host machine, and place it temporarily while being shifted for approx. 45mm toward left side of the host machine.



[2]



[1]



45mm



381



4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning CAUTION: When lifting up/down the DADF + Reader Unit, be sure to hold the position [A] shown in the figure.



[A]



[A]



382



4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning 19. Lift the DADF + Reader Unit [1] with 2 or more people and place it on the floor by passing over the front side of the host machine. CAUTION: Because the center of gravity of the equipment is at the rear, be careful not to drop it when lifting it.



[1]



NOTE: When installing to the host machine, place the DADF + Reader Unit temporarily on the floor with the pin [1] of the host machine and the hole [2] of the DADF + Reader Unit located as shown in the figure. Then, place the DADF + Reader Unit on the host machine from the front side of the machine.



[2]



[1]



383



4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning



Main Unit(Reader) ■ Removing the Scanner Unit (Reader) ● Preparation 1. Remove the Right Upper Cover. (“Removing the DADF + Reader Unit” on page 372) 2. Remove the Left Upper Cover.(“Removing the DADF + Reader Unit” on page 372)



● Procedure CAUTION: When replacing this parts, execute these actions whichare to be taken whenProcessing after Scanner Unit Replacement 1. Open the DADF [1], and remove the Reader Front Cover [2]. • 1 Screw (Flat Head) [3] • 2 Screws (RS) [4]



[1]



3x [3] [2]



[4]



[4]



2. Remove the PCB Cover [1]. • 2 Screws [2] [2]



2x



[1]



384



4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning 3. Remove the Right Upper Panel [1]. • 2 Screws [2] [2]



2x



[1]



4. Remove the Copyboard Glass [1].



[1]



5. Slide the Scanner Unit [1] to the center.



[1]



385



4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning 6. Remove the 2 Wire Fixtures [1], and take out the Scanner Unit [2]. • 2 Screws [3] CAUTION: • Do not touch any area other than the both ends [A] of the Scanner Unit (where the Scanner Unit is secured with the Scanner Wire). • Especially do not touch the Scanner Unit PCB [1] and the Lighting [2]. [A]



[2] [A]



[1]



• When taking out the Scanner Unit [1], be careful not to damage the Scanner Wire [2]. [2]



[1]



[3]



2x



[1]



[2] [1]



386



4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning 7. Remove the Core Holder [1], and remove the Scanner Unit [2]. • 2 Claws [3] • 1 Flat Cable [4]



2x



[3]



1x



[4] [2]



[1]



● Adjustment when Replacing the Parts 1. Input the service label value packaged in the Scanner Unit content. (Lv.1) COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > 100-RG , 100-GB 2. Perform sampling of B&W shading target. (Lv.1) COPIER > FUNCTION > CCD > BW-TGT 3. Perform white level adjustment. 1. Set A4 or LTR paper in the copyboard glass, close the DADF. CAUTION: If white level is adjusted in the small width paper, there is possibility that it will not adjust. 2. Execute the service mode item. (Lv.1) COPIER > FUNCTION > CCD > DF-WLVL1 3. Remove the paper from copyboard glass, set it in the DADF document pickup tray. 4. Execute the service mode item. (Lv.1) COPIER > FUNCTION > CCD > DF-WLVL2 5. Again, Set A4 or LTR paper in the copyboard glass, close the DADF. 6. Execute the service mode item. (Lv.1) COPIER > FUNCTION > CCD > DF-WLVL3 7. Remove the paper from copyboard glass, set it in the DADF document pickup tray. 8. Perform service mode item. (Lv.1) COPIER > FUNCTION > CCD > DF-WLVL4 4. After turning OFF/ON the power, make a copy and check the copied image. 5. Write the value in service label (inside the PCB cover). (Lv.1) COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > DFTAR-R , DFTAR-G , DFTAR-B , DFTAR-BW, SH-TRGT , 100-RG , 100-GB



387



4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning



■ Removing the Reader Controller PCB ● Adjustment before replacement 1. If necessary,output the servise mode setting values by P-PRINT before execution. (Lv.1) COPIER > FUNCTION > MISC-P > P-PRINT 2. Backup of Reader controller PCB RSRAM. (Lv.2)COPIER > FUNCTION > SYSTEM > RSRAMBUP



● Preparation 1. Open the covers. • Toner Replacement Cover [1] • Right Cover [2] • Right Rear Cover 1 [3]



[3]



[1] [2]



388



4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning 2. Remove the Right Upper Cover [1]. • 3 Protrusions [2] • 2 Screws [3] • 1 Boss [4]



[4]



[2]



2x [1]



[3]



3. Close the Right cover. 4. Remove the Left Rear Cover [1]. • 1 Protrusion [2] • 1 Claw [3]



1x



[3]



[1]



[2]



389



4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning 5. Remove the Left Rear Inner Cover [1]. • 2 Screws [2]



2x



[2] [1]



6. Remove the 2 Finisher Connection Covers [1]. • 1 Protrusion [2] for each location • 1 Claw [3] for each location [3]



1x



[2] [1]



390



4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning 7. Remove the Left Upper Cover [1]. • 3 Protrusions [2] • 3 Claws [3] • 3 Screws [4]



3x



3x [3]



[2] [3] [1]



[4]



[3]



8. Remove the Upper Rear Cover [1]. • 3 Protrusions [2] • 2 Claws [3]



2x



[3]



[1]



[2]



[2]



● Procedure CAUTION: When replacing this parts, execute these actions which are to be taken when (READ_Adjustment during Reader controller PCB replacement) 1. Open the DADF.



391



4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning



2. Remove the PCB Cover [1]. • 2 Screws [2] [2]



2x



[1]



3. Remove the Inner Plate [1]. • 4 Screws [2] • 1 Wire Saddle [3]



1x



4x [2]



[3]



[2]



[1]



392



4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning 4. Remove the Reader Rear Cover [1]. • 3 Wire Saddles [2] • 1 Connector [3] • 6 Screws [4]



x6 [4]



[2]



[4]



[3]



[2]



[1]



[4]



5. Remove the PCB Inner Cover [1]. • 1 Wire Saddle [2] • 1 Edge Saddle [3] • 4 Screws [4]



x4 [2]



[1]



[3]



[4]



[4]



6. Remove the HDMI Shield Plate [1]. • 2 Screws [2]



393



4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning 7. Remove the Reader Controller PCB [1]. • 6 Connectors [2] • 3 Flat Cables [3] • 4 Screws [4]



[4]



x4



x6



[4] [3]



[2] [4]



[2] [1] [3]



[2]



[2]



● Adjustment when Replacing the Parts 1. Using SST, download the newest system software (R-CON). 2. Perform RAM clear. (Lv.1) COPIER > FUNCTION > CLEAR > R-CON 3. Turn the connecting equipment OFF/ON. (Lv.2) COPIER > FUNCTION > SYSTEM > RSRAMRES(Restore) 4. Perform the input or adjustment for MTF value. 1. Input the MTF value of P-PRINT outputted before replacement. (Lv.1) COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > MTF2-M1 - MTF2-M12 , MTF2-S1 - MTF2-S12 2. Input the MTF value of P-PRINT outputted before replacement. (Lv.1) COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > MTF-M1 - MTF-M12 , MTF-S1 - MTF-S12 3. Perform the MTF filter coefficient computation (Lv.1) COPIER > FUNCTION > CCD > MTF-CLC 5. Input the value written the service label (the inside of PCB cover) (Total: 42 items). (Lv.1) COPIER > ADJUST > ADJ-XY > ADJ-X, ADJ-Y, ADJ-Y-DF, STRD-POS , ADJ-X-MG, ADJ-Y-DF2 (Lv.1) COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > W-PLT-X, W-PLT-Y, W-PLT-Z , SH-TRGT , DFTAR-R, DFTAR-G, DFTAR-B, DFTAR-BW , DFTBK-R, DFTBK-G, DFTBK-B, DFTBK-BW , DFCH2R2, DFCH2R10 , DFCH2B2, DFCH2B10 , DFCH2G2, DFCH2G10 , DFCH2K2, DFCH2K10 , DFCH-R2, DFCH-R10 , DFCH-B2, DFCH-B10 , DFCH-G2, DFCH-G10 , DFCH-K2, DFCH-K10 , 100-RG, 100GB (Lv.2) COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > 100DF2RG, 100DF2GB (Lv.1) COPIER > ADJUST > PASCAL > OFST-P-K 6. Perform computation for front & back linearity matching. (Lv.1) COPIER > FUNCTION > CCD > DF-LNR



394



4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning 7. Input the value written in the service label (inside PCB cover). (Lv.1) FEEDER > ADJUST > DOCST, LA-SPEED, DOCST2, LA-SPD2 8. Perform output adjustment of the sensor. (Lv.1) FEEDER > FUNCTION > SENS-INT 9. Adjust tray width. Perform either AB system or Inch system. a. AB system adjustment. 1. Adjust the slide guide to the index “A4/A3”. 2. Select the item in the service mode. (Lv.1) FEEDER > FUNCTION > TRY-A4 3. Press OK, and register the A4 width. 4. Adjust the slide guide to the index “A5R”. 5. Select the item in the service mode. (Lv.1) FEEDER > FUNCTION > TRY- A5R 6. Press OK, and register the A5R width. b.Inch system adjustment. 1. Adjust the slide guide to the index “LTR/ 11x17”. 2. Select the item in the service mode. (Lv.1) FEEDER > FUNCTION > TRY-LTR 3. Press OK, and register the letter width. 4. Adjust the slide guide to the index “STMT/ LTRR/ LGL”. 5. Select the item in the service mode. (Lv.1) FEEDER > FUNCTION > TRY- LTRR 6. Press OK, and register the LTRR width. 10. Make an output of P-PRINT. (Lv.1) COPIER > FUNCTION > MISC-P > P-PRINT 11. Store the outputted P-PRINT into the service book. 12. After turning OFF/ON the power, make a copy and check the copied image.



Periodical Consumable Parts/Locations for Periodical Cleaning (Reader) ■ Cleaning the Copyboard Glass (Large) ● Procedure 1. Open the DADF Unit. 2. Remove the Right Upper Panel [1]. • 2 Screws [2]



[2]



2x



[1]



395



4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning 3. Remove the Copyboard Glass (Large) [1].



[1]



4. Clean the front surface and back surface of the Copyboard Glass (Large) [1] with lint-free paper [2].



[2]



[1]



5. Clean the White Plate [1].



[1]



6. nstall the Copyboard Glass (Large) and the Right Upper Panel to the original positions.



■ Cleaning the Copyboard Glass (Small) ● Procedure CAUTION: Cleaning the Stream Reading Glass with alcohol results in thinning of the oil film on the surface. As a result, the frictional resistance of the surface is decreased, which allows more dust and dirt to adhere to the surface. Therefore, be sure to use Oil Glass Cleaner FY9-6020 when cleaning the Stream Reading Glass. 1. Open the DADF Unit.



396



4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning 2. Remove the Left Upper Panel [1]. • 2 Screws [2] [2]



2x



[1]



CAUTION: Be sure not to deform the Grounding Spring [1] of the Left Upper Panel when installing/removing.



[1]



3. Remove the Copyboard Glass (Small).



[1]



397



4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning 4. Clean the front surface and back surface of the Copyboard Glass (Small) [1] with lint-free paper [2].



[2]



[1]



CAUTION: Be sure to place the seal [1] of the Copyboard Glass (Small) to the left side of the front surface at installation.



[1]



5. Install the Copyboard Glass (Small) to the original position.



■ Cleaning the Reader Scanner Unit Scanner Mirror(Reader) ● Preparation 1. Remove the Right Upper Cover. (“Removing the DADF + Reader Unit” on page 372) 2. Remove the Left Upper Cover.(“Removing the DADF + Reader Unit” on page 372) 3. Remove the Scanner Unit (Reader).(“Procedure” on page 384)



398



4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning



● Procedure 1. Remove the Latch Plate[1]. • 1 Screw [2]



1x



[1]



[2]



399



4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning 2. Remove the LED Unit [1]. • • • • •



1 Connector [2] 1 Guide [3] 1 Reuse Band [4] 2 Screws [5] 3 Hooks [6] [5]



2x



[6]



[5]



[1]



1x



2x



[4]



[2] [3]



400



4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning 3. Clean 4 mirrors [1] with silbon paper with alcohol. Clean the mirrors from one end to the another in one direction. NOTE: The rearmost mirror [2] is dustproof mirror. Cleaning is not needed.



[1]



[1] [2]



401



4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning



Controller System Removing the HDD ■ Before Replacing 1. Back up the necessary data based on the table shown below. 2. Printing the set/registered data • COPIER > FUNCTION > MISC-P > USER-PRT • COPIER > FUNCTION > MISC-P > P-PRINT



Backup List Backup target data



Backup Method User



Service



DCM



Power OFF



(excluding DCM) Address List



Yes*1



-



Yes*9



-



Forwarding Settings



Yes*1



-



Yes*9



-



Preferences (Except for Paper Type Management Settings)



-



-



Yes*9



Yes*10



Adjustment/Maintenance(*)



-



-



Yes*9



Yes*10



Function Settings (Except for Printer Custom Settings,Forwarding Settings)



-



-



Yes*9



Yes*10



Set Destination (Except for Address List)



-



-



Yes*9



Yes*10



Management Settings (Except for Address List)



-



-



Yes*9



Yes*10



User authentication information used for local device authentication of UA (User Authentication)



Yes*2



-



Yes*9



-



Printer Settings



Yes*1



-



Yes*9



Yes*10



Set Paper Information



Yes*1



-



Yes*9



-



Settings / Registration



Setting items for each menu in Main Menu (Copy, Scan and Send, Fax, Scan and Store, Access Stored Files, Fax/I-Fax Inbox) Favorite Settings



Yes*1



Yes*8



Yes*9



-



Default Settings



-



Yes*8



Yes*9



-



Shortcut settings for “Options”



-



Yes*8



Yes*9



-



Previous Settings



-



Yes*8



-



-



Button Size information



-



-



Yes*9



-



Wallpaper Setting



-



-



Yes*9



-



Button information in Quick Menu



-



-



Yes*9



-



Restrict Quick Menu



-



-



Yes*9



-



Button settings in Main Menu



-



-



Yes*9



-



Button settings on the top of the screen



-



-



Yes*9



-



Wallpaper Setting for Main Menu



-



-



Yes*9



-



Other settings for Main Menu



-



-



Yes*9



-



Mail Box Settings (Register Box Name, PIN, Time Until File Auto Delete, Printer upon Storing from Printer Driver)



Yes*4



-



Yes*9



-



Image data in Mail Box, Fax Inbox, and Memory RX Inbox



Yes*4



-



-



-



-



-



Yes*9



Yes*10



-



Yes*8



Yes*9



-



-



Yes*8



-



-



Setting items for Quick Menu



Setting items for Main Menu



Function Settings > Store/Access Files



Network Place Settings Web browser settings Web Access setting information MEAP settings MEAP application License files for MEAP applications



Yes*5



-



-



-



Data saved using MEAP applications



Yes*5



Yes*8



Yes*9



-



402



4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning Backup target data



Backup Method User



Service



DCM



Power OFF



(excluding DCM) SMS (Service Management Service) password



-



Yes*8



-



-



-



-



-



-



Job logs



-



-



-



-



Audit Log



Yes*6



-



-



-



Key Pair and Server Certificate in Certificate Settings in TCP/IP Settings in Network Set-tings in System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen)



-



-



Yes*9



-



Auto Adjust Gradation setting values



-



-



-



-



PS font



-



-



-



-



Key information to be used for encryption when TPM is OFF



-



-



-



-



Yes*7



-



-



-



Display Language



-



-



Yes *9



-



Accessibility Settings



-



-



Yes *9



-



Default Screen



-



-



Yes *9



-



Default Job Settings



-



-



Yes *9



-



Quick Menu (Personal, layout of the Personal tab, and background of the Personal tab)



-



-



Yes *9



-



Universal data settings Unsent documents (documents waiting to be sent with the Delayed Send mode)



Key and settings information to be used for encryption when TPM is ON Personal Settings



Address Book (Personal/Group) Key ring (for host machine functions) Personal settings of MEAP



Yes *1



-



Yes *9



-



-



-



Yes *9



-



Yes *11



Yes *8



Yes *9



-



-



-



Yes*9



Yes*10



Service Mode Service Mode setting values (MN-CON)



*1: Remote UI > Settings/Registration > Management Settings > Data Management > Import or Export *2: Remote UI > Settings/Registration > Management Settings > User Management > Authentication Management > User Management *3: Remote UI > Quick Menu > Export *4: Remote UI > Settings/Registration > Management Settings > Data Management > Back Up or Restore *5: Remote UI > Service Management Service *6: Remote UI > Settings/Registration > Management Settings > Device Management > Save Audit Log Audit log that was exported cannot be put back to the device from which the log was exported. *7: Settings/Registration > Management Settings > Data Management > TPM Settings *8: Download mode > [5]: Backup/Restore > [3] : MEAP Backup > Meapback.bin Backup is possible using SST or USB memory The data saved using a MEAP application can be backed up only when the MEAP application has a backup function. *9: Backup Method using DCM When You set it in COPIER> OPTION> USER> SMD-EXPT> ON, a backup/restore is possible in Service Mode Settings from the Remote UI.There is a backup button on the TOP page of the service mode. 1. Remote UI > Settings/Registration > Management Settings > Data Management > Import/Export All 2. Remote UI > Settings/Registration > Management Settings > Data Management > Import/Export 3. Service mode top screen > BACKUP 4. Web Service *10: The setting value that was set when the main power was turned OFF the last time is automatically backed up to the Flash PCB. When a HDD is replaced with a new one, the setting value is automatically inherited from the Flash PCB at the time of HDD formatting. *11: iWEMC DAM plug-in



403



4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning



■ Procedure 1. Open the Right Rear Cover 1.



2. Open the HDD Front Cover. • 1 Screw



404



4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning 3. Lift up the HDD Case Hinge and pull out the HDD.



CAUTION: Points to Note when Installing the HDD Be sure to push the HDD into the machine horizontally. If it is not installed horizontally, it may cause poor contact/damage of connector or deformation of plate.



■ Aftter Replacement 1. HDD format Start the machine in safe mode, and format all partitions using SST or a USB memory. 2. Turning OFF and ON the main power switch 3. Restoring the backup data 4. Resetting/registering the data While referring to the list which was printed before replacement, reset/register the data. 5. When the user generates and adds the encryption key, certificate and/or CA certificate, request the user to generate them again.



Removing Main Controller PCB 1 ■ Preparation 1. Open the Right Rear Cover 1.



405



4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning 2. Remove the 1 Screw.



1x



3. Remove the Side Cover. • 1 Screw • 1 Hook



1x



■ Procedure 1. Remove the Main Controller PCB 1 and the HDD.



Handle



2. Disconnect the USB Cable and the Connector.



406



4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning 3. Remove the HDD. • 2 Screws



x2 x2



4. Remove the Flash PCB[1],TPM PCB[2],Memory PCB[3]. • 3 Screws[4]



3x [3] [1]



[2]



[4]



■ Aftter Replacement 1. Replace parts from an old PCB to a new PCB. • Memorey PCB • FLASH PCB • TPM PCB



Removing Main Controller PCB 2 ■ Preparation NOTE: No action needs to be performed when replacing the parts of the Main Controller PCB 2.



1. Remove the Main Controller PCB 1.( “Removing Main Controller PCB 1” on page 405)



407



4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning 2. Remove the Left Rear Cover.



3. Remove the Rear Upper Cover. • 13 Screws



x13



■ Procedure 1. Remove the Left Rear Inner Cover. • 2 Screws



x2



408



4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning 2. Remove the ECBOX Harness Guide (Lower). • 1 Screw • 2 Bosses



Boss



x1



3. Remove the ECBOX Harness Guide (Upper). • 1 Screw • 1 Boss



Boss



409



4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning 4. Disconnect the All Cables and the All Connectors. • 11 Connectors



x11



410



4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning 5. Remove the Main Controller PCB 2 • 8 Screws CAUTION: Be sure to hold the Main Controller PCB 2 so as not to drop it when removing it.



x8



411



4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning



Removing the Control Panel CPU PCB(Flat Control Panel Unit) ■ Preparation 1. Open the Toner Replacement Cover, and remove the Bottle Regulation Rail. • 1 Screw • 1 Hook



2. Remove the screw of the Control Panel Left Upper Cover.



412



4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning 3. Remove the Control Panel Left Upper Cover. • 1 Claw • 2 Hooks



413



4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning 4. Remove the Control Panel Right Cover. • 1 Claw • 1 Hook



5. Remove the 4 screws of the Flat Control Panel Unit and raise the Flat Control Panel Unit.



x4



414



4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning 6. Remove the Cable Retaining Member. < Capacitive Type > • 1 Boss • 2 Hooks



< Resistive Type > • 1 Reuse Band [A] • 1 Boss • 3 Hooks



[A]



415



4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning 7. Disconnect the 2 cables and the connector, and remove the Flat Control Panel Unit. < Capacitive Type >



x3



< Resistive Type >



x3



416



4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning



■ Procedure 1. Remove the 2 Contorol Panel Mounts. • 2 Screws each



x4



2. Remove the Contorol Panel Lower Cover. • 5 Screws • 3 Connectors • 1 Wire Saddle



x3



x5



417



4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning 3. Remove the Contorol Panel CPU PCB. • 6 Screws • 2 Flat Cables • 1 Sheet



x2



x1



x6



■ Aftter Replacement < Adjusting Touch Pannel > 1. If the coordinate on the Touch Panel is not correct, adjustment of the Touch Panel may not be performed. In that case, the Touch Panel can be adjusted by performing the following menu operation using hardware keys. • Press [5] key 3 times on the service mode top screen.



418



4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning



Removing the LCD Unit (Flat Control Panel) ■ Preparation 1. Open the Toner Replacement Cover, and remove the Bottle Regulation Rail. • 1 Screw • 1 Hook



2. Remove the screw of the Control Panel Left Upper Cover.



419



4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning 3. Remove the Control Panel Left Upper Cover. • 1 Claw • 2 Hooks



420



4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning 4. Remove the Control Panel Right Cover. • 1 Claw • 1 Hook



5. Remove the 4 screws of the Flat Control Panel Unit and raise the Flat Control Panel Unit.



x4



421



4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning 6. Remove the Cable Retaining Member. < Capacitive Type > • 1 Boss • 2 Hooks



< Resistive Type > • 1 Reuse Band [A] • 1 Boss • 3 Hooks



[A]



422



4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning 7. Disconnect the 2 cables and the connector, and remove the Flat Control Panel Unit. < Capacitive Type >



x3



< Resistive Type >



x3



423



4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning



■ Procedure CAUTION: Do not touch the surface [A] of the Touch Panel and the surface [B] of the LCD Unit when disassembling/ assembling.



[A]



[B]



1. Remove the 2 Contorol Panel Mounts. • 2 Screws each



x4



424



4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning 2. Remove the Contorol Panel Lower Cover. • 5 Screws • 3 Connectors • 1 Wire Saddle



x3



x5



3. Disconnect the 2 Flat Cables. • 1 Sheet



x2 x1



425



4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning 4. Remove the Control Panel Stay. • 8 Screws



x8



CAUTION: When installing the Control Panel Stay, be sure that it is not placed on the hinge [A] of the Side Key.



[A]



[A]



426



4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning 5. Disconnect the 2 Cables. • 3 Wire Saddles • 3 Guides



x6



6. Remove the LCD Holder Unit. • 3 Screws



x3



7. Remove the Key Top PCB. • 1 Screw



x1



8. Remove the all keys of the [A] part.



427



4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning



[A]



■ Aftter Replacement < Adjusting Touch Pannel > 1. If the coordinate on the Touch Panel is not correct, adjustment of the Touch Panel may not be performed. In that case, the Touch Panel can be adjusted by performing the following menu operation using hardware keys. • Press [5] key 3 times on the service mode top screen.



Removing the Control Panel CPU PCB(Upright Control Panel Unit) ■ Preparation 1. Remove the Upright Panel Unit. “Removing the Upright Control Panel” on page 564



428



4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning



■ Procedure 1. Remove the Tarry Lamp Cover. • 1 Screw



2. Remove the Panel Rear Cover. • 2 Caps • 8 Screws NOTE: Be sure to remove the Touch Pen when removing the Rear Cover.



x8



429



4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning 3. Remove the Control Panel CPU PCB. • 6 Screws • 3 Connectors • 2 Flat Cables



x5



x6



■ Aftter Replacement < Adjusting Touch Pannel > 1. If the coordinate on the Touch Panel is not correct, adjustment of the Touch Panel may not be performed. In that case, the Touch Panel can be adjusted by performing the following menu operation using hardware keys. • Press [5] key 3 times on the service mode top screen.



Removing the LCD Unit (Upright Control Panel Unit) ■ Preparation 1. Remove the Upright Panel Unit. “Removing the Upright Control Panel” on page 564



430



4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning



■ Procedure 1. Remove the Tarry Lamp Cover. • 1 Screw



2. Remove the Panel Rear Cover. • 2 Caps • 8 Screws NOTE: Be sure to remove the Touch Pen when removing the Rear Cover.



x8



431



4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning 3. Remove the Connectors and the Cables. • 4 Connectors • 3 Flat Cables • 10 Wire Saddles



x7



x10



4. Remove the Volume PCB. • 2 Screws



x2



5. Remove the Panel Frame. • 9 Screws



x9



432



4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning 6. Lift up the Control Panel Frame, disconnect the Flat Cable, and remove the Control Panel Frame.



7. Remove the LCD Unit. • 3 Screws



x3



433



4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning



■ Aftter Replacement < Adjusting Touch Pannel > 1. If the coordinate on the Touch Panel is not correct, adjustment of the Touch Panel may not be performed. In that case, the Touch Panel can be adjusted by performing the following menu operation using hardware keys. • Press [5] key 3 times on the service mode top screen.



434



4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning 1. Remove the Right Rear Cover2. • 2 Screws



Laser Exposure System Removing the Laser Scanner Unit



2x



■ Preparation 1. Removing the Right Upper Cover. 1. 2. 3. 4.



Open the Toner Exchange Cover. Open the Right Cover. Open the Right Rear Cover 1. Remove the Right Upper Cover. • 2 Screws • 1 Boss • 3 Protrusions



2. Disconnect the Connector and remove the Grounding Wire and the Reuse Band. • 1 Screw



1x



1x



1x



2x 3. Open the Right Cover. 4. Remove the E-ring to remove the Door Link.



2. Removing the Right Cover. NOTE: Laser Scanner Unit can be removed without removing the Right Cover.



Howerver, removing the Right Cover is recommended here for better operability.



435



4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning



■



5. Remove the 2 Hinge Pins to remove the Right Cover.



1. Lift the Plate to remove. • 2 Screws



2x



2. Remove the 2 Retainer Fixtures. • 2 Screws



2x



3. Free the Harness from the Harness Guide and Disconnect the Connector. CAUTION: To prevent falling of Right Cover, hold the Right Cover to remove the Hinge Pins.



1x



436



1x



4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning 6. Free the Harness from the Harness Guide and Disconnect the Connector.



4. Pull out the Laser Scanner Unit halfway. • 2 Bosses



1x



1x



5. Hook the wire of the Laser Scanner Unit to the hook of the main body.



CAUTION: Do not use the wire when the Right Cover is not removed.



437



4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning 2. Remove the Primary Charging Assembly. (“Removing the Primary Charging Assembly” on page 439)



7. Remove the Laser Scanner Unit. CAUTION: Before removing the Laser Scanner Unit, check that the hooking wire of the unit is not hooked to the frame of the main body.



■ Removing the Dustproof Glass 1. Pull out the Dustproof Glass and clean it with lintfree paper.



CAUTION: When installing the Laser Scanner Unit, be sure to check that the bosses are fitted into the holes.



■ Adjustment when Replacing the Parts 1. Execute the potential control. (Lv.1) COPIER > FUNCTION > DPC > DPC2 2. Write the value in service label. (Lv.1) COPIER > ADJUST > LASER > PVE-OFST (Adjust of write start position of laser)



Cleaning the Dust Collecting Glass ■ Preparation 1. Open the Front Cover.



438



4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning 1. While pushing the Release Lever in the direction of the arrow, pull out the Primary Charging Assembly.



Image Formation System



CAUTION: When removing the Primary Charging Assembly, be careful not to hold the PCB of the Primary Charging Assembly.



Removing the Primary Charging Assembly ■ 1. Open the Inner Cover. 1. Open the Front Cover. 2. Open the Inner Cover. • 1 Screw (to loosen) Loosen



PCB



PCB



■ CAUTION: • When removing the Primary Charging Assembly and the Pre-transfer Charging Assembly, go through the following procedure while the Charging Shutter is open. • At sleep mode, press the Power Switch on the Control Panel, check that the machine is in standby condition, turn OFF the Main Power, and then perform removing. • In the case that the condition of the Charging Shutter (open/close) is unknown while the power of the host machine is OFF, turn ON the power, check that the machine is in standby condition, turn OFF the Main Power, and then perform removing. If the above operations are not performed, it may be possible to remove the assembly while the Charging Shutter is closed, which may damage the drum or the shutter.



■ Adjustment when Replacing the Parts 1. Clear the parts counter. (Lv.1)COPIER > COUNTER > DRBL-1 > PRM-UNIT



439



4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning it to the main body, output a test print and check the image.



2. Output a halftone image using the service mode. (Lv.1)COPIER > TEST > PG > TYPE : 5 3. Execute the following procedure according to the density difference on the front and rear sides of the test print image.



CAUTION: • Since uneven density might occur, be sure to adjust by turning the 2 adjustment screws with the same amount.



• When the front side test print image is dark, execute step 3. • When the rear side test print image is dark, execute step 4. • When there is no uneven density, execute step 5 and the following. When the front side test print image is dark



[1]



NOTE: • When the front side test print image is dark [1], execute step 3 until the density becomes even. When the density becomes even, execute step 5 and the following. • When the adjustment screw is turned clockwise, the Charging Wire goes down and up (gap between grid and Charging Wire becomes narrow and wide). As a result, the density of output image becomes light.



CAUTION: • Be sure to adjust the dark side (density of the test print image) to be the light side.



4. Make the resin screws [A] and [C] a full turn clockwise. While referring to the replacement procedure of the Primary Charging Assembly, install



[C]



[A]



When the rear side test print image is dark NOTE: • When the rear side test print image is dark [2], execute step 4 until the density becomes even. When the density becomes even, execute step 5 and the following. • When the adjustment screw is turned clockwise, the Charging Wire goes down and up (gap between grid and Charging Wire becomes narrow and wide). As a result, the density of output image becomes light.



440



4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning 7. Init of Primary Charging Wire current VL.



CAUTION: • Be sure to adjust the dark side (density of the test print image) to be the light side.



(Lv.1)COPIER > FUNCTION > CLEAR > GRD-CRNT 8. Execute the potential control. (Lv.1)COPIER > FUNCTION > DPC > DPC2 9. Execute the density correction using the user mode.



5. Make the resin screws [B] and [D] a full turn clockwise. While referring to the replacement procedure of the Primary Charging Assembly, install it to the main body, output a test print and check the image.



Settings/Registration > Adjustment/Maintenance > Adjust Image Quality > Correct Density



Removing the Primary Charging Wire Cleaner, Cleaner Holder (Right/Left)



CAUTION: • Since uneven density might occur, be sure to adjust by turning the 2 adjustment screws with the same amount.



■ Preparation



[2]



1. Open the Inner Cover. (“Removing the Primary Charging Assembly” on page 439) 2. Remove the Primary Charging Assembly. (“Removing the Primary Charging Assembly” on page 439)



■ CAUTION: Do not move the Charging Wire Shutter; otherwise, the shutter can be damaged when installing the Charging Assembly. When the Charging Wire Shutter is moved by chance, be sure to move the Shutter until it is invisible.



Charging Wire Shutter [D]



[B]



Primary Charging Wire Cleaner



6. Clean the Charging Wire. (necessary time : about 120 second) (Lv.1)COPIER > FUNCTION > CLAENING > WIRE-CLN



441



4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning 2. Loosen the screw to move the Primary Charging Assembly Cleaner to the center.



CAUTION: Do not remove both Shield Plates (Right and Left) of the Primary Charging Assembly at the same time. Be sure to work on one Shield Plate at a time (otherwise, the Frame of the Primary Charging Assembly can be deformed). 1. Remove the Shield Plate (Right). When removing the Primary Charging Wire Cleaner Holder (Left), remove the Shield Plate (Left).



Loosen



• 2 Screws



2x



CAUTION: Points to Caution when Installing the Primary Charging Wire Cleaner Holder Be sure to push in the Primary Charging Wire Cleaner Holder until it is secured with the Claw.



442



4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning 3. Bring up the Primary Charging Assembly and pinch the Hook to remove the Primary Charging Assembly Cleaner Holder (Right) in the direction of the arrow.



4. Remove the Primary Charging Wire Cleaner (Right) in the direction of the arrow. CAUTION: Be careful not to damage the Primary Charging Wire and the Grid Wire when removing the Primary Charging Wire Cleaner (Right).



CAUTION: Points to Caution at Installation Be sure to push the Charging Wire against the 2 pads of the Primary Charging Wire Cleaner to install.



Charging Wire



Pad



Primary Charging Wire Cleaner



■ Actions after Parts Replacement 1. Clear the Parts Counter. (Lv.1) COPIER > COUNTER > PRDC-1 > PRM-CLN



Replacing the Primary Charging Assembly Grid Wire ■ Preparation 1. Open the Front Cover. 2. Open the Inner Cover. (“Removing the Primary Charging Assembly” on page 439)



443



4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning 3. Remove the Primary Charging Assembly(“Removing the Primary Charging Assembly” on page 439)



4. Loosen the screw and turn over the Primary Charging Assembly. 5. Push the front Motor Unit in the direction of the arrow and tighten the 4 screws.



4. Remove the Primary Charging Shutter Unit. (“Removing the Primary Charging Shutter Unit” on page 482)



turn over



■ Procedure 1. Remove the Primary Charging Assembly Grid Wire • 1 Screw Screw



Screw



Screws Grid Wire



2. Shift the Primary Charging Wire Cleaners (Left and Right). • 2 Screws (to loosen)



Push Primary Charging Wire Cleaners (Right)



Motor Unit Primary Charging Wire Cleaners (Left )



Motor Unit Screws



6. Untie approx. 5cm of the Charging Wire from the 0.1mm (wire-diameter) Charging Wire Reel to make a 2mm-diameter ring at the edge. 3. Loosen the 4 screws fixing the Motor Unit in the front.



NOTE: The ring can be easily made by the following procedure: Wrap the Charging Wire around the Hex Key to make a full round, and then turn the Hex Key for 3 to 4 times to twist the Charging Wire.



Screws



7. Cut the twisted Charging Wire (extra length) with nippers. 8. Hook the ring to the Stud A as shown in the figure. 9. After setting the wire 35 times around, pass through B part. After turning over the Primary Charging Assembly, pass the wire between the washer and the



444



4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning Motor Unit, wrap around the screw clockwise to make a full round and secure with the screw.



11. Loosen the 4 screws and tighten the screw until the tension of the Grid Wire is uniformed. Be careful not to deform (bend) the Charging Assembly.



Stud A



Screws



B part



turning over



Screw



turning over



Screw



Motor Unit



B part



12. Tighten the loosened 4 screws.



10. Cut the extra length of the Charging Wire with nippers.



Screws



CAUTION: Be sure to check the following items. • No bend or twist is found with the Grid Wire. • The wire is set evenly spaced apart. (The Grid Wire is fitted into the groove of the Block.)



445



4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning 13. Remove the Shield Plate (Left) and pinch the Grid Wire from the left side to clean it on the left side with lint-free paper moistened with water.



15. Tighten the 2 screws.



Primary Charging Wire Cleaners (Left )



CAUTION: • The frame of the Primary Charging Assembly may be distorted, so be careful not to remove both Left and Right Shield Plates simultaneously.



Primary Charging Wire Cleaners (Right)



Screws



CAUTION: Be sure to move the Primary Charging Wire Cleaners (Left and Right) until they stop and tighten the screws. 14. Shift the Primary Charging Wire Cleaners (Left and Right).



Screws



Primary Charging Wire Cleaners (Left )



Primary Charging Wire Cleaners (Right)



16. Install the Primary Charging Shutter Unit. (“Removing the Primary Charging Shutter Unit” on page 482)



446



4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning



■



Replacing the Primary Charging Wire



● 1. Remove the Sheet.



NOTE: Replacement procedure is the same between the Primary Charging Wire (Left) and the Primary Charging Wire (Right). The following explains the procedure of the Primary Charging Wire (Right).



NOTE: The Primary Charging Wire with spring is set as a service part.



CAUTION: In the case of replacing the Charging Wire on a Charging Wire basis, be sure to use the dedicated Charging Wire Tension Spring (97-5527) [A]. Do not use the Spring [B] attached to the Charging Wire.



2. Use tweezers to hold the tip of the Spring at the rear side to remove the Spring from the charging electrode and remove the Charging Wire from the groove of the Positioning Block. Groove



Charging Electrode



Spring [B]



Spring [A]



3. Remove the Charging Wire from the protrusion and the groove of the Positioning Block at the front side.



■ Preparation 1. Open the Front Cover. 2. Open the Inner Cover. (“Removing the Primary Charging Assembly” on page 439)



Protrusion



3. Remove the Primary Charging Assembly (“Removing the Primary Charging Assembly” on page 439)



Groove Charging Wire



4. Remove the Primary Charging Wire Cleaner Holder (Right). (“Removing the Primary Charging Wire Cleaner, Cleaner Holder (Right/Left)” on page 441) 5. Remove the Primary Charging Wire Cleaner (Right). (“Removing the Primary Charging Wire Cleaner, Cleaner Holder (Right/Left)” on page 441)



● NOTE: When installing the Charging Wire set as a service part, steps 4, 5, 7, and 8 are not required.



447



4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning 4) Untie approx. 5cm of the Charging Wire from the 0.06mm (wire-diameter) Charging Wire Reel to make a 2mm-diameter ring at the edge.



Groove



NOTE: The ring can be easily made by the following procedure: Wrap the Charging Wire around the Hex Key to make a full round, and then turn it for 3 to 4 times to twist the Charging Wire.



Charging Electrode



5) Cut the edge of the twisted Charging Wire with nippers. 6) Hook the ring to the front protrusion of the Positioning Block to hook the Charging Wire to the groove. CAUTION: Be sure to keep the following in mind after installation. • No bend or twist is found with the Charging Wire. • The Charging Wire is fitted into the groove of the Charging Wire Positioning Block.



Protrusion Groove Charging Wire



10) Clean the Charging Wire with lint-free paper moistened with alcohol. 11) Install the Primary Charging Wire Cleaner (Right). 12) Install the Primary Charging Wire Cleaner Holder (Right). 13) Install the Shield Plate (Right).



■ Adjustment when Replacing the Parts



7) Hook the Charging Wire Tension Spring to the Charging Wire to twist with it.



1. Clear the parts counter. (Lv.1)COPIER > COUNTER > PRDC-1 > PRM-WIRE 2. Clean the Charging Wire. (necessary time : about 120 second) (Lv.1)COPIER > FUNCTION > CLEANING > WIRE-CLN 3. Init of Primary Charging Wire current VL (Lv.1)COPIER > FUNCTION > CLEAR > GRD-CRNT 4. Execute the potential control. (Lv.1)COPIER > FUNCTION > DPC > DPC2



Cleaning the Primary Charging Assembly Grid Wire



8) Cut extra length of the Charging Wire with nippers. 9) Hook the Charging Wire to the rear groove of the Charging Wire Positioning Block and hold the edge of the Charging Wire Tension Spring with tweezers to hook it to the charging electrode.



■ Preparation 1. Open the Inner Cover.(“Removing the Primary Charging Assembly” on page 439) 2. Remove the Primary Charging Assembly(“Removing the Primary Charging Assembly” on page 439) 3. Remove the Primary Charging Wire Cleaner Holder. (“Removing the Primary Charging Wire Cleaner, Cleaner Holder (Right/Left)” on page 441)



448



4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning 4. Remove the Shield Plate (Right) and pinch the Grid Wire to clean it on the right side with lint-free paper moistened with water.



4. Remove the Primary Charging Wire.(“Replacing the Primary Charging Wire” on page 447) NOTE: With this machine, discharge products tend to be accumulated inside the Charging Assembly. To remove the discharge products efficiently, clean with lint-free paper moistened with water. (If there is toner stain, clean with lint-free paper moistened with alcohol.)



■ 1. Clean the inside of Shield Plate (Right) and Inner Shield Plate (Left) removed from the Primary Charging Assembly with lint-free paper moistened with water. 2. Clean both sides of the Inner Shield Plate (Middle) of the Primary Charging Assembly with lint-free paper moistened with water.



Removing the Pre-transfer Charging Assembly ■ Preparation 1. Open the Inner Cover.(Refer to“Removing the Primary Charging Assembly” on page 439)



■ CAUTION: When removing the Primary Charging Assembly and the Pre-transfer Charging Assembly, go through the following procedure while the Charging Shutter is open. • At sleep mode, press the Power Switch on the Control Panel, check that the machine is in standby condition, turn OFF the Main Power, and then perform removing. • In the case that the condition of the Charging Shutter (open/close) is unknown while the power of the host machine is OFF, turn ON the power, check that the machine is in standby condition, turn OFF the Main Power, and then perform removing. If the above operations are not performed, it may be possible to remove the assembly while the Charging Shutter is closed, which may damage the drum or the shutter.



3. Remove the Shield Plate (Left) and pinch the Grid Wire from the left side to clean it on the left side with lint-free paper moistened with water. CAUTION: • The frame of the Primary Charging Assembly may be distorted, so be careful not to remove both Left and Right Shield Plates simultaneously.



449



4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning 1. Turn the Lock Lever in the direction of the arrow to pull out the Pre-transfer Charging Assembly.



CAUTION: Points to Caution at Installation Be sure to fit the Transfer Charging Assembly to the groove on the host machine and install it horizontally.



CAUTION: When removing the Pre-transfer Charging Assembly, be careful not to hold the PCB of the Pre-transfer Charging Assembly. PCB



PCB



■ Adjustment when Replacing the Parts 1. Clear the parts counter. (Lv.1) COPIER > COUNTER > DRBL-1 > PO-UNIT 2. Clean the Charging Wire. (necessary time : about 120 second) (Lv.1) COPIER > FUNCTION > CLEANING > WIRECLN



Removing the Pre-transfer Charging Wire Cleaner, Cleaner Holder ■ Preparation 1. Open the Inner Cover.(“Removing the Primary Charging Assembly” on page 439 ) 2. Remove the Pre-transfer Charging Assembly. (“Removing the Pre-transfer Charging Assembly” on page 449 )



450



4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning



■



CAUTION: Points to Caution when Securing the Shield Plate Move the Shield Plate Retainer Block fully to the inside to secure with the screw. Check that the rear Pin is fitted into the Frame hole, and then move the Shield Plate back and forth to check that the Shield Plate is secured.



1. Displace the Shield Plate Retainer Block to open the Shield Plate in the direction of the arrow. • 1 Screw (to loosen)



Loosen



451



4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning 2. Turn the Gear by hand to move the Cleaning Pad Arm to the front.



4. Remove the Pre-transfer Charging Wire Cleaner in the direction of the arrow. CAUTION: Be careful not to damage the Pre-transfer Charging Wire when removing the Pretransfer Charging Wire Cleaner.



CAUTION: Points to Caution when Installing the Pre-transfer Charging Wire Cleaner Holder Push in the Pre-transfer Charging Wire Cleaner Holder until it is secured with the Claw. CAUTION: Points to Caution at Installation Be sure to push the Charging Wire against the 2 pads of the Pre-transfer Charging Wire Cleaner to install.



Charging Wire



Pad



3. Pinch the Hook and turn it in the direction of the arrow to remove the Pre-transfer Charging Assembly Cleaner Holder. Primary Charging Wire Cleaner



■ Actions after Parts Replacement 1. Clear the Parts Counter. (Lv.1) COPIER > COUNTER > PRDC-1 > PO-CLN



Replacing the Pre-transfer Charging Wire NOTE: The Primary Charging Wire with spring is set as a service part.



■ Preparation 1. Open the Front Cover.



452



4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning 2. Use tweezers to remove the front Spring from the Hook and then remove the Charging Wire from the rear charging electrode.



2. Open the Inner Cover. (“Removing the Primary Charging Assembly” on page 439) 3. Remove the Pre-transfer Charging Assembly. (“Removing the Pre-transfer Charging Assembly” on page 449) 4. Remove the Pre-transfer Charging Wire Cleaner Holder. (“Removing the Pre-transfer Charging Wire Cleaner, Cleaner Holder” on page 450) 5. Remove the Pre-transfer Charging Wire Cleaner. (“Removing the Pre-transfer Charging Wire Cleaner, Cleaner Holder” on page 450)



■ CAUTION: In the case of replacing the Charging Wire on a Charging Wire basis, be sure to use the dedicated Charging Wire Tension Spring (97-5527) [A]. Do not use the Spring [B] attached to the Charging Wire.



Spring [B]



3. Untie approx. 5cm of the Charging Wire from the 0.06mm (wire-diameter) Charging Wire Reel to make a 2mm-diameter ring at the edge.



Spring [A]



4. Cut the edge of the twisted Charging Wire with nippers. 1. Remove the Pre-transfer Charging Assembly Covers (Front and Rear).



5. Hook the ring to the rear charging electrode of the Pre-charging Assembly and put the ring through the rear groove and the sponge groove. Charging Wire Groove



Charging Electrode



453



4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning 6. On the front side of the Pre-charging Assembly, hook the Charging Wire Tension Spring to the Charging Wire to twist with it.



Cleaning the Pre-transfer Charging Wire ■ Preparation 1. Open the Front Cover. 2. Open the Inner Cover.(“Removing the Primary Charging Assembly” on page 439) 3. Remove the Pre-transfer Charging Assembly. (“Removing the Pre-transfer Charging Assembly” on page 449) 4. Remove the Pre-transfer Charging Wire Cleaner Holder.(“Removing the Pre-transfer Charging Wire Cleaner, Cleaner Holder” on page 450) 5. Remove the Pre-transfer Charging Wire Cleaner. (“Removing the Pre-transfer Charging Wire Cleaner, Cleaner Holder” on page 450)



7. Cut extra length of the Charging Wire with nippers. 8. Hold the tip of the Spring with tweezers and hook the Charging Wire to the groove to hook the Spring to the Hook.



6. Remove the Pre-transfer Charging Wire.(“Replacing the Pre-transfer Charging Wire” on page 452)



■ Procedure 1. Clean the Shield Plate with lint-free paper moistened with alcohol.



Hook



9. Clean the Charging Wire with lint-free paper moistened with alcohol. 10. Install the Pre-transfer Charging Assembly Covers (Front and Rear). 11. Install the Pre-transfer Charging Assembly Cleaner and the Pre-transfer Charging Assembly Cleaner Holder.



Removing the Process Unit



■ Adjustment when Replacing the Parts



■ Preparation 1. Open the Inner Cover.(“Removing the Primary Charging Assembly” on page 439)



1. Clear the parts counter. (Lv.1) COPIER > COUNTER > PRDC-1 > PO-WIRE



2. Remove the Primary Charging Assembly. (“Removing the Primary Charging Assembly” on page 439)



2. Clean the Charging Wire. (necessary time : about 120 second) (Lv.1) COPIER > FUNCTION > CLEANING > WIRECLN



3. Remove the Pre-transfer Charging Assembly. (“Removing the Pre-transfer Charging Assembly” on page 449)



454



4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning



■



1. Remove the Drum Fixation Cylinder to remove the Process Unit. • 2 Screws • 1 Screw (for installing the Drum Fixation Cylinder)



CAUTION: Do not touch the surface of the Photosensitive Drum.



NOTE: When removing the Process Unit, hold both the upper and front Handles to pull out the Process Unit.



Screw (RS Tightening)



3x



Screw (for installing the Drum Fixation Cylinder)



455



4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning CAUTION: Points to Caution at Installation When installing the Process Unit, fit the 3 grooves at the edge of the Drum Shaft with the 3 protrusions of the Drum Fixation Cylinder to install the Drum Shaft Fixing Screw.



CAUTION: Points to Caution at Installation Be sure to fit the Drum Cleaning Unit to the rail on the host machine and install it horizontally.



1x



Groove



Protrusion



Groove Protrusion



Cleaning the Process Unit ■ Preparation 1. Open the Inner Cover.(“Removing the Primary Charging Assembly” on page 439) 2. Remove the Primary Charging Assembly. (“Removing the Primary Charging Assembly” on page 439) 3. Remove the Pre-transfer Charging Assembly. (“Removing the Pre-transfer Charging Assembly” on page 449) 4. Remove the Process Unit.(“Removing the Process Unit” on page 454) 5. Remove the Drum Cleaning Unit.(“Removing the Drum Cleaning Unit” on page 457) 6. Remove the Drum Unit.(“Removing the Drum Unit” on page 460)



456



4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning



■ Procedure



■



1. Clean the Separation Claw Mounting Base and Separation Claw with lint-free paper moistened with alcohol.



CAUTION: Do not touch the surface of the Photosensitive Drum. After removing the Drum Cleaning Unit, place paper over the Photosensitive Drum to block light. 1. Remove the Drum Cleaning Unit. • Edge Saddle • 1 Connector • 4 Screws



1x



1x



4x



2. Clean the rear side of the Process Unit with lint-free paper moistened with alcohol.



CAUTION: When installing the Drum Cleaning Unit, clean the area shown with lint-free paper moistened with alcohol. If the Drum Cleaning Unit is installed without removing toner, it cannot be installed in the correct position, causing the cleaning error.



Removing the Drum Cleaning Unit ■ Preparation 1. Open the Inner Cover. (“Removing the Primary Charging Assembly” on page 439) 2. Remove the Primary Charging Assembly. (“Removing the Primary Charging Assembly” on page 439) 3. Remove the Pre-transfer Charging Assembly. (“Removing the Pre-transfer Charging Assembly” on page 449) 4. Remove the Process Unit. (“Removing the Process Unit” on page 454)



457



4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning



■



Removing the Drum Cleaning Blade



1. Turn over the Drum Cleaning Unit to remove the Drum Cleaning Blade Unit.



Procedure differs according to the temperature inside the machine. Be sure to perform the work by following the flow indicated below.



• 1 E-ring • 1 Plate



Turn ON the power



Check the temperature inside the machine in service mode (COPIER> DISPLAY> ANALOG> TEMP) 10 deg C or higher



Lower than 10 deg C



Plate



Turn ON the Environment Heater Switch



Check that the machine has been started up, and then turn OFF the power



Drum Cleaning Blade Unit



Replace the Drum Cleaning Blade with the following procedure



Install the Process Unit CAUTION: Be sure not to close the Front Cover



Waiting for 15 minutes or more while the power is OFF, and then close the Front Cover



Turn ON the power



■ Preparation 1. Open the Inner Cover.(“Removing the Primary Charging Assembly” on page 439) 2. Remove the Primary Charging Assembly. (“Removing the Primary Charging Assembly” on page 439) 3. Remove the Pre-transfer Charging Assembly. (“Removing the Pre-transfer Charging Assembly” on page 449) 4. Remove the Process Unit(“Removing the Process Unit” on page 454) 5. Remove the Drum Cleaning Unit.(“Removing the Drum Cleaning Unit” on page 457)



458



4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning 2. Remove the Drum Cleaning Blade.



Cleaning the Drum Cleaning Unit



• 5 Screws (to loosen)



■ Preparation



Loosen



1. Open the Inner Cover.(“Removing the Primary Charging Assembly” on page 439) 2. Remove the Primary Charging Assembly. (“Removing the Primary Charging Assembly” on page 439) 3. Remove the Pre-transfer Charging Assembly. (“Removing the Pre-transfer Charging Assembly” on page 449) 4. Remove the Process Unit. (“Removing the Process Unit” on page 454)



CAUTION: Points to Caution when Installing the Drum Cleaning Blade Be sure to apply toner on the contact area (edge) on the Drum of the Drum Cleaning Blade. In particular, be sure to apply toner on both edges of the Blade.



5. Remove the Drum Cleaning Unit. (“Removing the Drum Cleaning Unit” on page 457)



■ CAUTION: Do not touch the surface of the Photosensitive Drum.



CAUTION: Points to Caution when Installing the Drum Cleaning Blade Unit 1. Wipe out the toner on both edges of the Drum Cleaning Unit before installation. 2. Be sure to fit in the center position, and then temporarily tighten the screws following the numeric order (from 1 to 4) and also securely tighten the screws (from 5 to 9).



1. Clean the Drum Cleaning Unit Plate with lint-free paper moistened with alcohol.



5x



■ Actions after Parts Replacement 1. Clear the parts counter. (Lv.1) COPIER > COUNTER > DRBL-1 > CLN-BLD



459



4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning 2. Clean the 2 Pre-exposure Plastic Films of the Drum Cleaning Blade Unit with lint-free paper.



Replacing the Pre-exposure Plastic Film ■ Preparation 1. Open the Inner Cover. (“Removing the Primary Charging Assembly” on page 439) 2. Remove the Primary Charging Assembly. (“Removing the Primary Charging Assembly” on page 439) 3. Remove the Pre-transfer Charging Assembly. (“Removing the Pre-transfer Charging Assembly” on page 449) 4. Remove the Process Unit. (“Removing the Process Unit” on page 454) 5. Remove the Drum Cleaning Unit. (“Removing the Drum Cleaning Unit” on page 457)



3. Crumb toner clusters in the toner collection area and then clean it.



■ 1. Remove the Pre-exposure Plastic Film. 2. Fit the Pre-exposure Plastic Film to the edge and lower grooves of the Drum Cleaning Unit.



■ Actions after Parts Replacement 1. Clear the parts counter. (Lv.1) COPIER > COUNTER > DRBL-1 > EXP-SCRP



Removing the Drum Unit ■ Preparation 1. Open the Inner Cover.(“Removing the Primary Charging Assembly” on page 439)



460



4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning 2. Push to move the rear side of the Photosensitive Drum with your fingers and pull out the Drum Unit to the front to remove.



2. Remove the Primary Charging Assembly. (“Removing the Primary Charging Assembly” on page 439) 3. Remove the Pre-transfer Charging Assembly. (“Removing the Pre-transfer Charging Assembly” on page 449) 4. Remove the Process Unit(“Removing the Process Unit” on page 454) 5. Put paper on the Photosensitive Drum, so that it is not exposed to direct sunlight. 6. Remove the Drum Cleaning Blade.(“Removing the Drum Cleaning Blade” on page 458)



■ Procedure CAUTION: When handling the Process Unit and Photosensitive Drum, be sure to follow the following points to note. 1. When removing the Process Unit, be sure to block light to the Photosensitive Drum. Cover with the Photosensitive Drum Protection Sheet or wrap 5 or more papers around the drum to block light. 2. Do not place the Process Unit and Photosensitive Drum in a location where is exposed to direct rays of the sun (e.g. near the window). 3. Do not store in a location with high/low temperature/humidity, or in a location where temperature or humidity is dramatically changed. 4. Do not store in a dusty area or in a location full of ammonia gas or organic solvent gas. When installing a new Photosensitive Drum, be sure to remove the Lightproof Sheet after installing the drum to the main body. In addition, be sure to rotate the drum counterclockwise at removal of the Lightproof Sheet. If the drum is rotated clockwise, the Drum Cleaner Blade may be everted.



Removing the Photosensitive Drum ■ Preparation 1. Open the Inner Cover.(“Removing the Primary Charging Assembly” on page 439) 2. Remove the Primary Charging Assembly. (“Removing the Primary Charging Assembly” on page 439) 3. Remove the Pre-transfer Charging Assembly. (“Removing the Pre-transfer Charging Assembly” on page 449)



1. Remove the Drum Retainer Plate. • 3 Screws



4. Remove the Process Unit.(“Removing the Process Unit” on page 454)



3x



5. Put paper on the Photosensitive Drum, so that it is not exposed to direct sunlight. 6. Remove the Drum Cleaning Blade.(“Removing the Drum Cleaning Blade” on page 458) 7. Remove the Drum Retainer Plate.(“Removing the Drum Unit” on page 460) 8. Remove the Drum Unit. (“Removing the Drum Unit” on page 460)



461



4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning



■



3. Disconnect the connector and remove the Drum Heater.



CAUTION: When handling the Process Unit and Photosensitive Drum, be sure to follow the following points to note. 1. When removing the Process Unit, be sure to block light to the Photosensitive Drum. Cover with the Photosensitive Drum Protection Sheet or wrap 5 or more papers around the drum to block light. 2. Do not place the Process Unit and Photosensitive Drum in a location where is exposed to direct rays of the sun (e.g. near the window). 3. Do not store in a location with high/low temperature/humidity, or in a location where temperature or humidity is dramatically changed. 4. Do not store in a dusty area or in a location full of ammonia gas or organic solvent gas. When installing a new Photosensitive Drum, be sure to remove the Lightproof Sheet after installing the drum to the main body. In addition, be sure to rotate the drum counterclockwise at removal of the Lightproof Sheet. If the drum is rotated clockwise, the Drum Cleaning Blade may be everted.



Drum Heater



1x



1. Wrap paper around the Drum Unit to block light.



2. Remove the 2 screws and the Flange.



2x



462



4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning 4. Remove the Heater Control PCB Unit.



CAUTION: • Align the yellow marker of the drum with the hole position of the unit when installing the Heater Control PCB Unit to the drum.



NOTE: Serial ID of the drum is written on the seal inside the drum.



• When securing the Flange, align the protrusion of the Flange with the yellow marker to install.



NOTE: If the yellow marker is not aligned with the protrusion, the following control cannot be executed properly. 1. 2D shading 2. D-MAX control 3. D-half control



463



4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning



■ Adjustment when Replacing the Parts



3. Affix the ID Label included in the drum to the inside of the Front Cover.



1. Remove the EEROM. • 1 Screw • 1 Connector



1x



1x 4. Activate the drum replacement mode. (Lv.1) COPIER > FUNCTION > INSTALL > DRM-INIT 5. Check the 2-dimensional shading ROM. (Lv.1) COPIER > FUNCTION > 2D-SHADE > 2D-READ 6. Execute the auto adjust gradation using the user mode.



2. Replace the ROM connected to the host machine with the drum ROM included in the drum.



Settings/Registration > Adjustment/Maintenance > Image Quality Adjustment > Auto Adjust Gradation



CAUTION: If the ROM is not replaced, the replaced drum and the drum-unique data stored in the ROM are not matched. As a result, the 2D shading is not functioned normally.



Cleaning Photosensitive Drum 1. Moisten lint-free paper with 5 to 10 cc of alcohol solutions ; then, pour 0.2 to 0.3 g of the drum cleaning powder (FY9-6024) on the lint-free paper. 2. While butting the lint-free paper relatively strongly against the photosensitive drum, wipe the surface of



464



4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning 2. Remove the Primary Charging Assembly. (“Removing the Primary Charging Assembly” on page 439)



the drum from the front to the rear and from the rear to the front. Drum Cleaning Powder FY9-6024



Alcohol Solutions



3. Remove the Pre-transfer Charging Assembly. (“Removing the Pre-transfer Charging Assembly” on page 449) 4. Remove the Process Unit.(“Removing the Process Unit” on page 454) 5. Put paper on the Photosensitive Drum, so that it is not exposed to direct sunlight. 6. Remove the Drum Cleaning Blade. (“Removing the Drum Cleaning Blade” on page 458)



Lint-Free Paper



7. Remove the Drum Retainer Plate.(“Removing the Drum Unit” on page 460)



CAUTION: • Keep the widths of cleaning to 5 to 10 cm in the peripheral direction of the drum. • Move the lint-free paper back and forth 15 to 20 times over a single area. Forcing the lint-free paper will not affect the life of the drum.



8. Remove the Drum Unit.(“Removing the Drum Unit” on page 460)



■ 1. Rotate the Drum and dry wipe the soiling on the surface of the Drum edges with lint-free paper.



3. After the alcohol has evaporated, dry wipe the surface with the lint-free paper. If the area is uneven, go back to the step 1, and increase the back-andforth movements. 4. Rotate the drum for the width (5 to 10 cm), and repeat the step 1 through 3 until the entire area of the surface has been cleaned.



Removing the Cleaner Separation Claw ■ Preparation 1. Open the Inner Cover.(“Removing the Primary Charging Assembly” on page 439) 2. Remove the Primary Charging Assembly. (“Removing the Primary Charging Assembly” on page 439) 3. Remove the Pre-transfer Charging Assembly. (“Removing the Pre-transfer Charging Assembly” on page 449) 4. Remove the Process Unit.(“Removing the Process Unit” on page 454)



Cleaning the Drum edges



5. Remove the Drum Cleaning Blade.(“Removing the Drum Cleaning Blade” on page 458)



■ Preparation



6. Remove the Drum Unit.(“Removing the Drum Unit” on page 460)



1. Open the Inner Cover.(“Removing the Primary Charging Assembly” on page 439)



465



4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning



■



5. Remove the Drum Cleaning Blade.(“Removing the Drum Cleaning Blade” on page 458)



1. Put the Process Unit Frame perpendiculararly.



6. Remove the Drum Unit. (“Removing the Drum Unit” on page 460)



2. Remove the 3 Cleaner Separation Claws. • 1 Spring each



■ Procedure 1. Remove the Side Seals (Front and Rear).



2. Apply Tospearl on the surfaces of the new Drum Side Seals (Front and Rear) and adhere it uniformly with lint-free paper. NOTE: In order to reduce adhesion of toner at both ends of the Photosensitive Drum



Cleaner Separation Claws



Tospearl



Spring



■ Actions after Parts Replacement



Sheet



1. Clear the parts counter. (Lv.1) COPIER > COUNTER > DRBL-1 > SP-CLAW



Removing the Side Seal ■ Preparation 1. Open the Inner Cover. (“Removing the Primary Charging Assembly” on page 439) 2. Remove the Primary Charging Assembly. (“Removing the Primary Charging Assembly” on page 439)



lint-free paper



3. Remove the Pre-transfer Charging Assembly. (“Removing the Pre-transfer Charging Assembly” on page 449) 4. Remove the Process Unit.(“Removing the Process Unit” on page 454)



466



4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning 4. Remove the Developing Assembly by following the Rail.



3. Align the Drum Side Seals (Front and Rear) with the edges of the sheets and affix them.



• 1 Connector Seal



1x



Edge



Seal



Edge



CAUTION: How to Hold the Developing Assembly When holding the Developing Assembly, be sure to hold the handle of the Developing Assembly as shown in the figure. Do not touch the shutter area of the Developing Assembly. The shutter area is slippery,so it may cause a fall of the assembly.



■ Actions after Parts Replacement 1. Clear the parts counter. (Lv.1) COPIER > COUNTER > DRBL-1 > BS-SL-F 2. Clear the parts counter. (Lv.1) COPIER > COUNTER > DRBL-1 > BS-SL-R



Removing the Developing Assembly 1. Place paper underneath the Developing Assembly. 2. Open the Right Cover. 3. Turn the Tab to open the Plate Cover. • 1 Screw



1x



467



4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning • As shown in the figure, hold the Developing Assembly and fit the protrusions at right and left sides of the Developing Assembly to the rail of the host machine.



CAUTION: Points to Caution when Installing the Developing Assembly Before installing the Developing Assembly, check that the Buffer Shutter is not open. If the Developing Assembly is forcibly installed while the Buffer Shutter is open, the shutter may get damage. When the Buffer Shutter is open, pull out the shutter to the front and then close it.



Protrusion



Rail



Protrusion



Whether the shutter is open or not can be checked with the Shutter Arm.



Rail



Protrusion



Shutter Arm



Shutter Arm



468



4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning 2. Clean the lower side of Cylinder in the Developing Assembly with lint-free paper moistened with alcohol.



• Install the Developing Assembly horizontally by following the rail.



1x 3. Remove toner in the main body.



Cleaning the Developing Assembly ■ Preparation 1. Remove the Developing Assembly.(“Removing the Developing Assembly” on page 467)



Removing the Developing Cylinder and the Developing Roller



■ Procedure 1. Clean the 2 Developing Rollers with lint-free paper moistened with alcohol while rotating them.



■ Preparation 1. Remove the Developing Assembly.“Removing the Developing Assembly” on page 467 NOTE: When the Developing Assembly is put on the floor or the desk, be sure to place paper underneath to work on the Developing Assembly.



2. Remove the Developing Cylinder Blade.



469



4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning 3. Remove the Developing Assembly Cover.



6. Remove the Sleeve Bias Plate.



• 4 Screws • 5 Claws • 2 Protrusions



• 1 Screw



x4



x5



4. Empty the toner in the Developing Assembly on the paper. 5. Remove the Developing Assembly Front Cover. • 3 Screws



CAUTION: Points to Caution at Installation: Since white lines may occur on the image, go through the following steps to match the phase of the Sleeve Bias Plate and Developing Cylinder Blade. Fit the Sleeve Bias Plate with the shaft of the Developing Cylinder to install.



x3



CAUTION: Be sure to hold the Developing Assembly Front Cover to remove the screw. Otherwise, the Developing Assembly Front Cover may fall, which can cause damage on the Developing Cylinder.



470



4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning CAUTION: Points to Caution at Installation: Check that the long hole of the Sleeve Bias Plate is fitted with the hole of the Developing Cylinder Blade. If it is not fitted, rotate the Sleeve Bias Plate counterclockwise to match the phase. Be careful not to rotate the Sleeve Bias Plate clockwise since this direction is to be a reverse direction of the proper Developing Cylinder rotation.



CAUTION: Points to Caution at Installation: Find the position in which either scale of Sleeve Bias Plate is most matched with one of the Developing Cylinder Blade scales. (If the Developing Cylinder Blade is not marked with scales, put a mark on the Developing Cylinder Blade at a point that matches one of the scales on the Sleeve Bias Plate and use the point as a reference point.) See the Sleeve Bias Plate from the front side, and from the most matched position (scales), rotate the plate clockwise by 3 scales of the Developing Cylinder Blade. With the position where the plate was rotated by 3 scales, hold the Sleeve Bias Plate and secure with the removed screw. This is a reverse direction of the proper Developing Cylinder rotation, but this would be no problem in this procedure.



471



4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning 2. Remove the C Ring, the Spacer, the Developing Roller and the O Ring.



7. Lift the left side to remove the Developing Cylinder Blade in the direction of the arrow. • 2 Bosses



Developing Spacer Roller O Ring



x2



C Ring



O Ring (Black)



Spacer



CAUTION: The C Rings and the O Rings removed in step 2 and 3 cannot be reused. Be sure to use the C Rings and the O Rings included in the package. Be sure to use a dedicated tool when installing/ removing the Grip Ring and C Ring.



CAUTION: Do not disassemble the Developing Cylinder Blade. Otherwise, cleaning of the Developing Cylinder is not properly executed when removing just the Blade (as a single part).



■ Procedure 1. Remove the Grip Ring, the Gear, the Parallel Pin, the C Ring, the Spacer, the Developing Roller and the O Ring in the rear. CAUTION: Point to Caution at Installation Be sure to install the C Ring and the Spacer correctly. Be sure to use a dedicated tool when installing/ removing the Grip Ring and C Ring.



Developing Roller



O Ring



Spacer C Ring Parallel Pin Gear



Spacer



O Ring (Black)



Grip Ring



472



4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning 2. Supplying Developing Assembly toner.



CAUTION: How to Install the C Ring When installing the C Rings removed in step 2 and 3, be sure to perform the following to fit the C Rings into the groove of the Developing Cylinder securely. 1. Fit the C Ring into the groove of the Developing Cylinder Shaft using a dedicated tool. 2. Locate the side of the Gear where the Parallel Pin removed in step 2 was set inside, and install the Gear to the Developing Cylinder Shaft temporarily.



(Lv.1) COPIER > FUNCTION > INSTALL > TONER-S



Removing the ETB Unit ■ 1. Pull out the Fixing Feed Unit. 1. Open the Front Cover. 2. Turn the Fixing Feed Unit Pressure Release Lever in the direction of the arrow to pull out the Fixing Feed Unit.



3. Insert the Gear while pushing it against the C Ring, and check that click sound which occurs when the C Ring fits into the groove of the Developing Cylinder Shaft is heard. 4. Pull out the Gear from the Developing Cylinder Shaft, and check visually that the C Ring is fitted into the groove of the shaft.



3. Remove the Bearing to remove the Developing Cylinder.



Bearing



Bearing



■ Actions after Parts Replacement 1. Clear the parts counter. (Lv.1) COPIER > COUNTER > DRBL-1 > DVG-CYL



473



4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning 3. Push to release the Release Springs at both sides of the Rail, and then further pull out the Fixing Feed Unit until it stops.



CAUTION: Caution when pushing the Fixing Feed Unit in While pressing the Release Springs, slowly push the Fixing Feed Unit in so that the fingers do not get caught.



CAUTION: Do not touch the surface of the ETB when handling the ETB Unit.



474



4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning



■ Procedure



NOTE: How to push the Fixing Feed Unit in 1. Release the Release Springs [A] on the side of either rail. Slowly push the Fixing Feed Unit in by approximately 5 mm while keeping it level.



1. Remove the Fixing Feed Right Front Upper Cover. • 1 Screw



1x



2. Hold the 2 Handles to remove the ETB Unit in the direction of the arrow.



[A]



approx. 5 mm



2. Take the fingers off the Release Springs and slowly push the Fixing Feed Unit in to the end.



■ Adjustment when Replacing the Parts 1. Clear the ETB control counter. (Lv.1)COPIER > FUNCTION > CLEAR > TR-BLT Parts counter(COPIER > COUNTER > DRBL-1 > TRBLT)is also cleared coincidentally.



475



4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning 2. Set up the ETB Unit to remove the Roller Unit from the ETB.



Removing the ETB ■ Preparation 1. Pull out the Fixing Feed Unit.(“Removing the ETB Unit” on page 473) 2. Remove the ETB Unit.(“Removing the ETB Unit” on page 473) CAUTION: Do not touch the surface of the ETB when handling the ETB Unit.



■ 1. Fold the ETB Drive Roller Unit. • 2 Screws



2x CAUTION: • Be sure to hold within 10mm from both edges of the ETB when handling the ETB. • Do not touch the surface of the ETB Drive Roller and the Transfer Roller; otherwise, it can cause image faults.



476



4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning



■



■ Actions after Parts Replacement



1. Clean the Transfer Roller and Drive Roller with lintfree paper moistened with alcohol.



1. Clear the ETB control counter. (Lv.1)COPIER > FUNCTION > CLEAR > TR-BLT Parts counter(COPIER > COUNTER > DRBL-1 > TRBLT)is also cleared coincidentally.



CAUTION: Do not touch the surface of the ETB Drive Roller and the Transfer Roller; otherwise, it can cause image faults.



CAUTION: Points to Caution when Installing the ETB Set the ETB to make the ETB located inside the Guides at both edges.



Removing the Transfer Roller ■ Preparation 1. Pull out the Fixing Feed Unit.(“Removing the ETB Unit” on page 473) 2. Remove the ETB Unit. (“Removing the ETB Unit” on page 473) 3. Remove the ETB(“Removing the ETB” on page 476) CAUTION: Do not touch the surface of the ETB Drive Roller and the Transfer Roller; otherwise, it can cause image faults.



Cleaning the ETB ■ Preparation 1. Pull out the Fixing Feed Unit.(“Removing the ETB Unit” on page 473) 2. Remove the ETB Unit.(“Removing the ETB Unit” on page 473) 3. Remove the Roller Unit from the ETB Unit.



477



4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning



■



2. Remove the Transfer Roller Shaft Support from the Transfer Roller.



1. Turn over the Roller Unit to remove the Claw of the Transfer Roller Shaft Support with needlenose pliers.



2x



NOTE: When installing the Transfer Roller Shaft Support to the Roller Unit, be sure to check that the bosses of the Transfer Roller Shaft Support are fitted into the Springs.



■ Actions after Parts Replacement 1. Clear the parts counter. (Lv.1) COPIER > COUNTER > DRBL-1 > TR-ROLL



Removing the ETB Cleaning Blade ■ Preparation 1. Pull out the Fixing Feed Unit.(“Removing the ETB Unit” on page 473) 2. Remove the ETB Unit.(“Removing the ETB Unit” on page 473)



478



4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning



■



■



1. Remove the ETB Cleaning Blade.



1. Remove the Post-transfer Guide.



• 4 Screws



• 1 Screw



1x



4x



■ Actions after Parts Replacement



CAUTION: • Be sure to keep in contact with the Grounding Plate when installing the Post-transfer Guide. • Do not deform the Grounding Plate when installing the Post-transfer Guide.



1. Clear the parts counter. (Lv.1) COPIER > COUNTER > DRBL-1 > T-CLN-BD



Removing the ETB Brush Roller ■ Preparation 1. Pull out the Fixing Feed Unit.(“Removing the ETB Unit” on page 473) 2. Remove the ETB Unit.(“Removing the ETB Unit” on page 473)



479



4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning 4. Remove the Shaft Support from the ETB Brush Roller.



2. Remove the Connection Gear and the N-ring from the ETB Brush Roller.



• 1 N-ring



Shaft Support



ETB Brush Roller Shaft Support



■ Actions after Parts Replacement 1. Clear the parts counter. (Lv.1) COPIER > COUNTER > DRBL-1 > T-CN-BRU



Removing the Waste Toner Container 1. Loosen the 1 Coin Screw and then remove the Right Rear Lower Cover.



3. Remove the ETB Brush Roller Unit. • 2 Screws



2x Loosen



480



4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning 2. Remove the Primary Charging Assembly. (“Removing the Primary Charging Assembly” on page 439)



2. Remove the Waste Toner Container.



3. Remove the Pre-transfer Charging Assembly. (“Removing the Pre-transfer Charging Assembly” on page 449) 4. Remove the Process Unit.(“Removing the Process Unit” on page 454) 5. Put paper on the Photosensitive Drum, so that it is not exposed to direct sunlight. 6. Remove the Drum Cleaning Blade. (“Removing the Drum Cleaning Blade” on page 458) 7. Remove the Drum Retainer Plate.(“Removing the Drum Unit” on page 460)



NOTE: • In the case of toner spill when removing the Waste Toner Container, be sure to wipe out the spilled toner. • After taking the Waste Toner Container out of the machine, be sure to promptly collect waste toner to prevent toner scattering.



8. Remove the Drum Unit.(“Removing the Drum Unit” on page 460)



■ CAUTION: When handling the Process Unit and Photosensitive Drum, be sure to follow the following points to note. 1. When removing the Process Unit, be sure to block light to the Photosensitive Drum. Cover with the Photosensitive Drum Protection Sheet or wrap 5 or more papers around the drum to block light. 2. Do not place the Process Unit and Photosensitive Drum in a location where is exposed to direct rays of the sun (e.g. near the window). 3. Do not store in a location with high/low temperature/humidity, or in a location where temperature or humidity is dramatically changed. 4. Do not store in a dusty area or in a location full of ammonia gas or organic solvent gas. When installing a new Photosensitive Drum, be sure to remove the Lightproof Sheet after installing the drum to the main body. In addition, be sure to rotate the drum counterclockwise at removal of the Lightproof Sheet. If the drum is rotated clockwise, the Drum Cleaner Blade may be everted.



■ Adjustment when Replacing the Parts 1. Set the new Waste Toner Container. NOTE: When replacing the Waste Toner Container with a new one after preparation warning or full warning is displayed, display on the LUI is cleared after a certain period of time has passed. The parts counter ((Lv.1) COPIER > COUNTER > DRBL-1 > WST-TNR) is automatically cleared at replacement.



NOTE: Related service modes when a user replaces the Waste Toner Container The Waste Toner Container preparation warning message can be set to be displayed or hidden by executing the following service mode. (Lv.1) COPIER > OPTION > DSPLY-SW > WT-WARN Setting value 0: Hide, 1: Display



1. Wrap paper around the Drum Unit to block light.



Procedure for replacing the Waste Toner Container can be set to be displayed or hidden by executing the following service mode. When a user replaces the Waste Toner Container, set 1. (Lv.1) COPIER > OPTION > USER > W-TN-DSP Setting value 0: OFF, 1: ON



Removing the Drum Heater ■ Preparation 1. Open the Inner Cover.(“Removing the Primary Charging Assembly” on page 439)



481



4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning



■



2. Remove the 2 screws and the Flange.



1. Move the Primary Charging Wire Cleaners (Left and Right).



2x



• 2 Screws (to loosen)



Loosen



3. Disconnect the connector and remove the Drum Heater. Drum Heater



1x



CAUTION: Do not remove both Shield Plates (Right and Left) of the Primary Charging Assembly at the same time. Be sure to work on one Shield Plate at a time. (Otherwise, the frame of the Primary Charging Assembly can be deformed.)



Removing the Primary Charging Shutter Unit ■ Preparation 1. Open the Front Cover.



2. Move down the Primary Charging Assembly to remove the Shield Plate (Right).



2. Open the Inner Cover. (“Removing the Primary Charging Assembly” on page 439)



• 2 Screws



3. Remove the Primary Charging Assembly. (“Removing the Primary Charging Assembly” on page 439)



2x



482



4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning 8. Remove the Primary Charging Shutter Unit.



3. Remove the Leaf Spring of the Primary Charging Shutter from the claw.



• 2 Screws



1x



4. Install the Shield Plate (Right). • 2 Screws



■



5. Remove the Shield Plate (Left). • 2 Screws



CAUTION: Points to Caution at Installation Be careful not to get the Leaf Spring caught by the Charging Wire to install it to the Cleaner Claw.



2x



NOTE: The Shield Plate does not need to be removed when installing the Shutter Unit.



1. Set the Leaf Spring of the Primary Charging Shutter to the Cleaner Claw.



6. Remove the Leaf Spring of the Primary Charging Shutter from the claw.



2x



1x



2. Install the Primary Charging Shutter Unit.



7. Install the Shield Plate (Left).



• 2 Screws



• 2 Screws



3. Return the Primary Charging Wire Cleaners (Left and Right) to the original position.



CAUTION: Do not make the Leaf Spring caught by the Charging Wire when removing the Primary Charging Shutter Unit.



Removing the Pre-transfer Charging Assembly Shutter Unit ■ Preparation 1. Open the Front Cover.



483



4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning 2. Open the Inner Cover. (“Removing the Primary Charging Assembly” on page 439)



3. Hold the screw to remove the Pre-transfer Charging Assembly Shutter Unit while the Motor Unit is Installed.



3. Remove the Pre-transfer Charging Assembly. (“Removing the Pre-transfer Charging Assembly” on page 449)



• 3 Screws CAUTION: Be careful not to remove the screw and the Screw Gear when removing the Pre-transfer Charging Assembly Shutter Unit.



■ Procedure 1. Move the Shield Plate Retainer Block to open the Shield Plate in the direction of the arrow. • 1 Screw (to loosen)



x3



Loosen



4. Remove the Motor Unit from the Pre-transfer Charging Assembly Shutter Unit. • 3 Claws



3x



2. Remove the claw at the edge of the Shutter.



484



4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning



■ Installation Method



3. Install the Motor Unit. • 3 Claws



1. Install the Pre-transfer Charging Assembly Shutter Unit.



CAUTION: When installing the Motor Unit, fit the PCB into the slot.



• 3 Screws



3x



2. Pull the Shutter with your fingers to hook it to the Cleaner Unit.



3x 1x



NOTE: Be sure to check that the rear shaft is secured.



485



4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning 4. Move the Shield Plate Retainer Block fully to the inside to secure with the screw.



Removing the Drum Brush Roller



CAUTION: Points to Caution when Securing the Shield Plate Be sure to check that the rear pin is fit into the frame hole.



CAUTION: • Do not touch the Photosensitive Drum. • Cover the Photosensitive Drum with paper to avoid direct exposure to light.



■ Preparation 1. Open the Inner Cover.(“Removing the Primary Charging Assembly” on page 439) 2. Remove the Primary Charging Assembly. (“Removing the Primary Charging Assembly” on page 439) 3. Remove the Pre-transfer Charging Assembly. (“Removing the Pre-transfer Charging Assembly” on page 449) 4. Remove the Process Unit.(“Removing the Process Unit” on page 454) 5. Remove the Drum Cleaning Unit.(“Removing the Drum Cleaning Unit” on page 457) 6. Remove the Drum Unit.(“Removing the Drum Unit” on page 460) 7. Remove the Side Seal.(“Removing the Side Seal” on page 466)



■ Procedure 1. Remove the sheet. CAUTION: The removed sheet will be used at the time of assembly, so be sure to remove the sheet neatly and keep it in a safe place.



Sheet



NOTE: Move the Shield Plate back and forth to check that the Shield Plate is secured.



486



4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning



■



2. Remove the 2 Gears and the 2 Bearings. • 3 E-rings



1. Remove the Fixing Feed Lever. • 1 Screw



1x



3. Remove the Drum Brush Roller by following the procedure as shown in the figure.



Removing the ETB Drive Unit ■ Preparation 1. Pull out the Fixing Feed Unit.(“Removing the ETB Unit” on page 473 ) 2. Remove the ETB Unit(“Removing the ETB Unit” on page 473)



487



4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning 3. Remove the Fixing Feed Left Cover.



2. Remove the Fixing Feed Right Front Cover.



• 3 Screws



• 2 Screws • 1 Claw



3x



2x



1x



CAUTION: When installing the Fixing Feed Left Cover, be sure to follow the order as shown in the figure to tighten screws. CAUTION: When installing the Fixing Feed Right Front Cover, be sure to follow the order as shown in the figure to tighten screws.



3x



2x



4. Remove the Duct. • 2 Screws • 1 Connector • Harness



2x



488



1x



1x



4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning 3. Remove the ETB Drive Unit.(“Removing the ETB Drive Unit” on page 487)



5. Remove the ETB Drive Unit. • 3 Screws • 1 Connector



■ 1. Disconnect the connectors.



3x



1x



1x



CAUTION: When installing, turn the gear so that the gear is engaged.



2. Remove the Transfer Cleaning Unit. • 1 Stepped Screw



1x



Removing the Post-transfer Static Eliminator



Removing the Transfer Cleaning Unit



■ 1. Pull out the Fixing Feed Unit. (Refer to “Removing the ETB Unit” on page 473)



■ Preparation



■



1. Pull out the Fixing Feed Unit.(“Removing the ETB Unit” on page 473) 2. Remove the ETB Unit.(“Removing the ETB Unit” on page 473)



CAUTION: Do not touch the surface of the ETB when handling the ETB Unit.



489



4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning 4. Remove the Post-transfer Static Eliminator.



1. Remove the Post-transfer Guide Unit. • 1 Screw



1x



Removing the Toner Receptacle Tray



2. Remove the Post-transfer Guide. • 2 Protrusions • 2 Springs



■ 1. Open the Front Upper Cover. 2. Remove the Toner Bottle.



CAUTION: Be careful not to lose the springs when removing the Post-transfer Guide.



3. Remove the Separation Guide Reinforcing Plate. • 3 Screws



3x



490



4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning



■



Removing the Hopper Unit



1. Remove the Toner Receptacle Tray.



1. Open the Front Cover.



• 1 Screw • 1 Protrusion



2. Open the Inner Cover (Primary Charging Air Supply Fan Unit). • 1 Screws (to loosen)



1x



3. Remove the Inner Cover (Primary Charging Air Supply Fan Unit). • 1 Connector • 2 Protrusions



1x



CAUTION: 1. Be sure to fit the protrusion into the groove of the plate to install. 2. Toner can be accumulated in the Toner Receptacle Tray; therefore, be careful not to spill toner when removing. 4. Move the lever in the direction of the arrow to close the Shutter.



&/26(



23(1



2. Clean the Toner Receptacle Tray with lint-free paper.



CAUTION: When starting the host machine, be sure to set the Shutter from CLOSE to OPEN.



491



4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning 7. Remove the Toner Receptacle Tray.



5. Remove the Front Upper Cover.



• 1 Screw • 1 Protrusion



• 2 Hinge Pins • 2 Springs



1x



CAUTION: 1. Toner can be accumulated in the Toner Receptacle Tray; therefore, be careful not to spill toner when removing. 2. Be sure to fit the protrusion into the groove of the plate to install.



NOTE: Clean the Toner Receptacle Tray with lint-free paper.



6. Release the Lock Lever to remove the Toner Bottle.



8. Remove the Connecting Drive Unit. • 1 Screw



1x



492



4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning 12. Remove the Right Upper Inner Cover.



9. Pull out the Fixing Feed Unit.



• 4 Screws • 1 Connector • Harness



CAUTION: When pulling out the Fixing Feed Unit, be sure to place paper over the ETB Unit for protection.



4x 10. Remove the Left Upper Cover 2.



1x



• 1 Screw • 1 Protrusion



1x 1x



13. Set the Lock Lever back.



11. Set the Fixing Feed Unit back.



493



4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning 14. Remove the Hopper Unit.



15. Remove the 4 Tapping Screws.



• 4 Screws • 2 Connectors • 1 Hook



4x



CAUTION: Put the removed Hopper Unit on paper placed on the work space.



4x



CAUTION: Points to Note when Installing the Tapping Screws When tightening the Tapping Screws, turn them in the reverse direction to check the screw thread on the Hopper Unit side before tightening them. Otherwise, the screw thread on the Hopper Unit side may be broken, which makes it impossible to tighten the screw.



2x



16. Remove the Bottle Cam. • 1 E-ring • 1 Roller • 1 Bearing E-ring



CAUTION: When installing the Hopper Unit, be sure to follow the order as shown in the figure to tighten screws.



Roller Bearing



4x Bottle Cam



17. Remove the Bottle Box. • 4 Hooks



Hooks



Bottle Box Hook Hook



494



4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning 4. Move the lever in the direction of the arrow to close the Shutter.



Removing the Buffer Unit ■ Preparation 1. Open the Right Cover. 2. Remove the Developing Assembly.(“Removing the Developing Assembly” on page 467)



&/26(



23(1



■ 1. Open the Front Cover. 2. Open the Inner Cover (Primary Charging Air Supply Fan Unit). • 1 Screws (to loosen) 3. Remove the Inner Cover (Primary Charging Air Supply Fan Unit). • 1 Connector • 2 Protrusions



1x



CAUTION: When starting the host machine, be sure to set the Shutter from CLOSE to OPEN.



5. Remove the Front Upper Cover. • 2 Hinge Pins • 2 Springs



495



4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning 6. Release the Lock Lever to remove the Toner Bottle.



8. Remove the Connecting Drive Unit. • 1 Screw



1x



7. Remove the Toner Receptacle Tray. • 1 Screw • 1 Protrusion



9. Disconnect the connector of the Pre-transfer Charging Assembly.



1x



1x



CAUTION: 1. Be sure to fit the protrusion into the groove of the plate to install. 2. Toner can be accumulated in the Toner Receptacle Tray; therefore, be careful not to spill toner when removing.



NOTE: Clean the Toner Receptacle Tray with lint-free paper.



496



4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning 10. Remove the Buffer Unit.



Removing the Potential Control PCB Unit



• 2 Screws • 1 Connector



2x



■ Preparation



1x



1. Remove the Primary Charging Assembly Unit. (“Removing the Primary Charging Assembly” on page 439) 2. Remove the Pre-transfer Charging Assembly. (“Removing the Pre-transfer Charging Assembly” on page 449) 3. Remove the Process Unit.(“Removing the Process Unit” on page 454) 4. Remove the Hopper Unit.(“Removing the Hopper Unit” on page 491) 5. Open the Right Door. 6. Remove the Right Upper Cover. 1. 2. 3. 4.



CAUTION: When removing the Buffer Unit, be sure not to tilt the unit to prevent toner scattering.



CAUTION: Points to Caution When Installing the Buffer Unit • Be sure to securely set the Buffer Unit on the Rail. • Do not get the harness caught. • Fit the emboss into the proper position; otherwise, toner can be scattered. • Be sure to set the Shutter from CLOSE to OPEN.



Open the Front Upper Cover. Open the Right Door. Open the Box Cover (Right). Remove the Right Upper Cover. • 2 Screws • 1 Boss • 3 Protrusions



2x



497



4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning



■



4. Remove the Potential Sensor Control PCB. • 1 Screw • 4 Claws • 2 Connectors



1. Remove the Right Door Link Unit from the pin. • 1 E-ring



1x



2x



4x



5. Remove the harness. • 1 Connector • Edge Saddle • Wire Saddle



2. Remove the Right Shield Plate. • 2 Screws



2x



1x



1x



3. Remove the Potential Control Tray.



6. Remove the Potential Sensor.



• 3 Screws • 2 Connectors • Wire Saddle



• 1 Screw



1x



3x



2x



1x



■ Adjustment when Replacing the Parts 1. Adjust the Potential Sensor offset. (Lv.1) COPIER > FUNCTION > DPC > OFST



498



4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning



Removing the Waste Toner Feed Unit



[2]



x4



■ Preparation [1]



1. Remove the Left Rear Cover .



[2]



2. Open the Controller Box [1]. • 4 Screws [2]



499



4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning CAUTION: Points to Note when Installing the Controller Box While installing the Controller Box, be sure to lift it to avoid hitting the hook of the Waste Toner Container Shutter Unit.



3x



[1]



■ 1. Open the Motor Driver Support Plate. • • • •



If the Inner Cover of the Controller Box hits the hook of the Waste Toner Container Shutter Unit, the hook may be removed.



2 Screws 5 Connectors Wire Saddle Reuse Band



NOTE: When opening the Motor Driver Support Plate, be sure to free from the protrusion.



[2]



Projection [2]



1x



5x



[1]



2x



3. Remove the Rear Lower Cover. • 3 Screws



500



4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning 5. Remove the Duct.



2. Remove the Flywheel.



• 2 Screws



• 2 Screws



2x



2x



6. Open the Front Cover to move the Fixing Feed Lever down.



3. Loosen the screw and move the Belt Tensioner in the direction of the arrow, and then again tighten the screw.



(To move the cam at the rear of the Fixing Feed Lever Shaft to the position where it does not interfere with the Waste Toner Feed Unit.)



4. Remove the belt from the pully.



7. Remove the Waste Toner Feed Unit. • 2 Connectors • 4 Screws



4x



2x



501



4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning 3. Remove the belt from the pully.



Removing the Drum Drive Unit ■ Preparation 1. Open the Inner Cover. (“Removing the Primary Charging Assembly” on page 439) 2. Remove the Primary Charging Assembly. (“Removing the Primary Charging Assembly” on page 439) 3. Remove the Pre-transfer Charging Assembly. (“Removing the Pre-transfer Charging Assembly” on page 449) 4. Remove the Process Unit.(“Removing the Process Unit” on page 454)



4. Remove the transformer. • 2 Screws • 3 Connectors • 1 Wire Saddle



5. Remove the Left Rear Cover.(“Removing the Waste Toner Feed Unit” on page 499) 6. Open the Controller Box.(“Removing the Waste Toner Feed Unit” on page 499)



2x



■ Procedure 1. Remove the Flywheel.



3x



• 2 Screws • 2 Washers



1x 2x



5. Free the harness and remove the Transformer Support Base. • 1 Screw • Harness



1x 2. Loosen the screw and move the Belt Tensioner in the direction of the arrow, and then again tighten the screw.



1x



502



4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning



■



6. Remove the Duct Unit. • 3 Screws • 1 Connector • Harness



3x



1. Remove the Flywheel. • 2 Screws • 2 Washers



1x



1x 2x



2. Loosen the screw and move the Belt Tensioner in the direction of the arrow, and then again tighten the screw.



7. Remove the Drum Drive Unit. • 5 Connectors • 1 Wire Saddle • 3 Screws



3x



5x



1x 3. Remove the belt from the pully.



Removing the Developing Drive Unit ■ Preparation 1. Remove the Developing Assembly.(“Removing the Developing Assembly” on page 467) 2. Remove the Box Cover (Left).(“Removing the Waste Toner Feed Unit” on page 499) 3. Open the Controller Box.(“Removing the Waste Toner Feed Unit” on page 499)



503



4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning 7. Disconnect the Pre-transfer Charging High Voltage Connector.



4. Remove the transformer. • 2 Screws • 3 Connectors



• 1 Screw



2x



1x



3x



5. Free the harness and remove the Transformer Support Base.



8. Remove the Developing Drive Unit. • 3 Connectors • 1 Reuse Band • 3 Screws



• 1 Screw • Harness



3x



1x



1x



6. Remove the Duct Unit. • 3 Screws • 1 Connector • Harness



3x



1x



1x



504



3x



1x



4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning 3. Push to release the Release Springs at both sides of the Rail, and then further pull out the Fixing Feed Unit until it stops.



Fixing System Removing the Fixing Assembly ■ 1. Pull out the Fixing Feed Unit. 1. Open the Front Cover. 2. Turn the Fixing Feed Unit Pressure Release Lever in the direction of the arrow to pull out the Fixing Feed Unit.



505



4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning NOTE: How to push the Fixing Feed Unit in 1. Release the Release Springs [A] on the side of either rail. Slowly push the Fixing Feed Unit in by approximately 5 mm while keeping it level.



CAUTION: Caution when pushing the Fixing Feed Unit in While pressing the Release Springs, slowly push the Fixing Feed Unit in so that the fingers do not get caught.



[A]



approx. 5 mm



2. Take the fingers off the Release Springs and slowly push the Fixing Feed Unit in to the end.



506



4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning



■



2. Remove the Fixing Assembly. • 2 Screws



1. Hold the Lever of the Feed Unit to open the Feed Unit.



Flat Head Screw



2x



Stepped Screw



507



4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning



Fixing Right Stay, Dowel, Dowel Holder



CAUTION: Points to Caution at Installation • Be careful not to damage the Inner Delivery Sensor Flag.



■ Preparation 1. Pull out the Fixing Feed Unit.(“Removing the Fixing Assembly” on page 505) 2. Remove the Fixing Assembly.(“Removing the Fixing Assembly” on page 505)



■ 1. Clean the Fixing Inlet Guide with lint-free paper moistened with alcohol. 2. Clean the Fixing Right Stay, Dowel, Dowel Holder with lint-free paper moistened with alcohol.



• When installing the Fixing Assembly, be sure that the Inner Delivery Sensor Flag passes through the cut-off of the Fixing Outlet Guide.



Cleaning the Fixing Inlet Guide,Fixing Inlet Sensor Flag,



508



4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning Plate to remove the accumulated paper lint by dry wipe.



3. Remove the Fixing Inlet Guide Unit. • • • •



1 Connector 2 Wire Saddles 1 Harness Guide 2 Screws



CAUTION: When removing the Fixing Inlet Guide Unit, be careful no to turn the 2 Adjustment Screws.



5. Slide the sensor flag to the rear side, and insert lintfree paper into the clearance (rear side) between the Fixing Inlet Sensor Flag Shaft and the Shaft Support Plate to remove the accumulated paper lint by dry wipe.



1x



3x



CAUTION: Checking after Cleaning the Fixing Inlet Sensor Flag Shaft Be sure to check that the sensor flag rotates and moves back and forth smoothly by moving it manually. 4. Turn over the Fixing Inlet Guide Unit, and insert lintfree paper into the clearance (front side) between the Fixing Inlet Sensor Flag Shaft and the Shaft Support



Cleaning the Inner Delivery Roller ■ Preparation 1. Pull out the Fixing Feed Unit.(“Removing the Fixing Assembly” on page 505)



509



4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning 2. Remove the Fixing Assembly.(“Removing the Fixing Assembly” on page 505)



2. Clean the surface of the Fixing Cleaning Web Guide with lint-free paper.



■ 1. Clean the Inner Delivery Roller with lint-free paper moistened with alcohol.



Removing the Fixing Cleaning Web ■ Preparation



Cleaning the Fixing Oil Pan, Fixing Cleaning Web Guide



1. Pull out the Fixing Feed Unit.(“Removing the Fixing Assembly” on page 505) 2. Remove the Fixing Front Cover.



■ Preparation



1. Remove the Fixing Front Cover. • 2 Screws



1. Pull out the Fixing Feed Unit.(“Removing the Fixing Assembly” on page 505)



2x



2. Remove the Fixing Front Cover. (“Removing the Fixing Cleaning Web” on page 510) 3. Remove the Fixing Upper Cover.(“Removing the Fixing Cleaning Web” on page 510)



■ Procedure 1. Clean the surface of the Fixing Oil Pan with lint-free paper.



3. Remove the Fixing Upper Cover. 1. Remove the Handle • 1 Screw



1x



Grip



510



4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning 2. Remove the Fixing Upper Cover. • 1 Screw



2. Remove the Fixing Cleaning Web.



1x



■ 1. Open the Fixing Cleaning Web Cover. • 2 Screws NOTE: Because it is engaged, hold the Fixing Cleaning Web Cover to remove the screws.



2x



511



4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning



■ Actions after Parts Replacement



CAUTION: Points to Caution at Installation • Be sure to install the Fixing Cleaning Web in the correct direction.



1. Clear the Fixing Cleaning Web take-up counter. (COPIER > COUNTER > MISC > FIX-WEB) 2. Clear the parts counter.(COPIER > COUNTER > DRBL-1 > FX-WEB)



Separating the Fixing Upper Unit from the Fixing Lower Unit ■ Preparation 1. Pull out the Fixing Feed Unit.(“Removing the Fixing Assembly” on page 505) 2. Remove the Fixing Assembly.(“Removing the Fixing Assembly” on page 505) 3. Remove the Fixing Front Cover.(“Removing the Fixing Cleaning Web” on page 510) 4. Remove the Fixing Drive Unit 1. • • • • •



Wire Saddle Edge Saddle Reuse Band 3 Connectors 3 Screws



• When installing the Fixing Cleaning Web, be sure to wind the web around the Web Take-up Roller until the green line on the web disappears from view.



x3



x5



x3



512



4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning 5. Secure the Shutter Drive Gear.



3. Remove the Fixing Pin for the Shutter Drive Gear (Front). • 1 Screw



1. Remove the Fixing Pin for the Shutter Drive Gear (Rear). • 1 Screw



4. Align the cut-off of the Shutter Drive Gear (Front) with the hole position of the Plate, and then secure with the Fixing Pin removed previously. • 1 Screw



2. Rotate the Shutter Drive Gear (Rear) with fingers. Then, align the cut-off of the Shutter Gear with the hole position, and secure with the Fixing Pin removed in step 5-1. • 1 Screw



513



4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning



■ Procedure



NOTE: Because it is engaged, hold the Fixing Upper Unit to remove the Fixing Pin.



1. Remove the Fixing Drive Unit 2. • • • •



Wire Saddle Reuse Band 2 Connectors 2 Screws



x5



x3 x2



x2



2. Remove the Fixing Pin. • 1 Screw



3. Disconnect the 5 Connectors on the other side of the Fixing Assembly. • Wire Saddle 4. Remove the Fixing Pin. • 1 Screw



514



4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning 5. Separate the Fixing Upper Unit from the Fixing Lower Unit.



Removing the Fixing Roller, Insulating Bush and Thrust Stopper



Fixing Upper Unit



■ Preparation 1. Pull out the Fixing Feed Unit.(“Removing the Fixing Assembly” on page 505) 2. Remove the Fixing Assembly.(“Removing the Fixing Assembly” on page 505) 3. Remove the Fixing Front Cover.(“Removing the Fixing Cleaning Web” on page 510)



Fixing Lower Unit



4. Remove the Fixing Drive Unit 1.(“Separating the Fixing Upper Unit from the Fixing Lower Unit” on page 512)



CAUTION: Points to Caution at Installation of the Fixing Drive Unit 2 Be sure to fit the protrusion of the Fixing Shutter to the groove of the Fixing Shutter Drive Gear (Front) to install.



5. Secure the Shutter Drive Gear.(“Separating the Fixing Upper Unit from the Fixing Lower Unit” on page 512) 6. Separate the Fixing Upper Unit from the Fixing Lower Unit.(“Separating the Fixing Upper Unit from the Fixing Lower Unit” on page 512) 7. Remove the Heater Unit. • 4 Screws



x4



Remove the Fixing Pin for the Shutter Drive Gear (Front) and return to the original position. (Refer to "Separating the Fixing Upper Unit from the Fixing Lower Unit") CAUTION: Points to Caution at Installation of the Heater Unit Remove the Fixing Pin for the Shutter Drive Gear (Rear) and return to the original position. (Refer to “Separating the Fixing Upper Unit from the Fixing Lower Unit” on page 512)



515



4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning



■ Procedure



3. Remove the Thrust Stopper from the Fixing Roller Unit to remove the Fixing Roller.



1. Place the Fixing Upper Unit as shown in the figure and remove the Fixing Roller Bearing Retainer.



Bearing Insulating Bush



2. Remove the Fixing Roller Unit.



Bushing Spacer Fixing Roller Thrust Retainer



Fixing Roller Thrust Retainer



Fixing Roller



Gear Insulating Bush Bearing



CAUTION: Points to Caution at Installation Be sure to locate the groove of the Fixing Roller Bearing inside the Fixing Upper Unit to install.



CAUTION: Points to Caution when Replacing the Fixing Roller Do not reuse the once removed Thrust Stopper. If the Thrust Stopper is reused, it may come off during printing.



■ Adjustment when Replacing the Parts 1. Grease Application Apply approx. 20mg of grease (MOLYKOTE HP-300; CK-8012) to inner circumference and outer circumference of the Insulating Bush so that all circumferences are covered with white film.



516



4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning 2. Clear the parts counter.



2. Remove the Pressure Roller Unit.



(Lv.1) COPIER > COUNTER > DRBL-1 > FX-UP-RL (Lv.1) COPIER > COUNTER > DRBL-1 > FX-IN-BS (Lv.1) COPIER > COUNTER > DRBL-1 > FX-RTNR



Removing the Pressure Roller ■ Preparation 1. Pull out the Fixing Feed Unit.(“Removing the Fixing Assembly” on page 505) 2. Remove the Fixing Assembly.(“Removing the Fixing Assembly” on page 505) 3. Remove the Fixing Front Cover.(“Removing the Fixing Cleaning Web” on page 510)



■ Actions after Parts Replacement



4. Remove the Fixing Drive Unit 1.(“Removing the Fixing Cleaning Web” on page 510)



1. Clear the parts counter.(COPIER > COUNTER > DRBL-1 > FX-LW-RL)



5. Secure the Shutter Drive Gear.(“Removing the Fixing Cleaning Web” on page 510)



Removing the Pressure Roller Static Eliminator



6. Separate the Fixing Upper Unit from the Fixing Lower Unit.(“Separating the Fixing Upper Unit from the Fixing Lower Unit” on page 512 )



■ Preparation



■ Procedure



1. Pull out the Fixing Feed Unit.(“Removing the Fixing Assembly” on page 505 )



1. Remove the Fixing Inlet Guide. • • • •



2 Screws Wire Saddle Edge Saddle 1 Connector Stepped Screw



2. Remove the Fixing Assembly. (“Removing the Fixing Assembly” on page 505) 3. Remove the Fixing Front Cover.(“Removing the Fixing Cleaning Web” on page 510 ) 4. Remove the Fixing Drive Unit 1.(“Removing the Fixing Cleaning Web” on page 510)



Screw (Binding)



x2



5. Secure the Shutter Drive Gear.(“Removing the Fixing Cleaning Web” on page 510) 6. Separate the Fixing Upper Unit from the Fixing Lower Unit.(“Removing the Fixing Cleaning Web” on page 510) 7. Remove the Pressure Roller Unit.(“Removing the Pressure Roller” on page 517)



517



4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning



■ Procedure



6. Remove the Fixing Drive Unit 1.(“Removing the Fixing Cleaning Web” on page 510)



1. Remove the Pressure Roller Static Eliminator Unit.



7. Secure the Shutter Drive Gear.(“Removing the Fixing Cleaning Web” on page 510)



• 2 Screws



8. Separate the Fixing Upper Unit from the Fixing Lower Unit.(“Removing the Fixing Cleaning Web” on page 510)



x2



9. Remove the Heater Unit.(“Removing the Fixing Roller, Insulating Bush and Thrust Stopper” on page 515) 10. Remove the Fixing Roller.(“Removing the Fixing Roller, Insulating Bush and Thrust Stopper” on page 515)



■ Procedure 1. Remove the Harness Guide Cover and free the Harness from the Guide.



2. Remove the Pressure Roller Static Eliminator. • 1 Screw



• 1 Screw • Edge Saddle • Harness Guide



■ Actions after Parts Replacement 1. Clear the parts counter.(COPIER > COUNTER > DRBL-1 > FX-L-STC)



Removing the Main Thermistor, Sub Thermistor2 ■ Preparation 1. Pull out the Fixing Feed Unit.(“Removing the Fixing Assembly” on page 505 ) 2. Remove the Fixing Assembly. (“Removing the Fixing Assembly” on page 505) 3. Remove the Fixing Front Cover.(“Removing the Fixing Cleaning Web” on page 510 ) 4. Remove the Fixing Upper Cover.(“Removing the Fixing Cleaning Web” on page 510 ) 5. Remove the Fixing Cleaning Web.(“Removing the Fixing Cleaning Web” on page 510 )



518



4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning 4. Remove the Thermistor Unit Support Plate to remove the Thermistor Reciprocating Shaft from the Fixing Upper Unit.



2. Remove the Harness Guide and remove the Harness Band. • 1 Screw



• 2 Screws



x2



5. Remove the Leaf Spring and remove the Main Thermistor and the SubThermistor 2 from the Thermistor Holder.



3. Place the Fixing Upper Unit as shown in the figure and remove the Fixing Oil Pan. • 1 Screw



519



4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning



■ Procedure



CAUTION: Points to Note when Installing the Main Thermistor and the Sub Thermistor 2 When the harness on the Thermistor side is short, the Sub Thermistor 2 may not be engaged with the Fixing Roller. Perform the following procedure to check the engagement. 1. After installing the Thermistor, temporarily place the Fixing Roller. 2. While sliding the Thermistor for at least one reciprocation by rotating the Reciprocating Cam, check that there is no gap between the Sub Thermistor 2 and the Fixing Roller. If a gap is found, perform the following procedure. 3. Remove the Fixing Roller. 4. Arrange the harness of the Sub Thermistor 2 so as to give the harness some slack on the Thermistor side. 5. Perform steps 1 and 2 for double check.



1. Remove the Harness Guide Cover. • 1 Screw



2. Remove the Harness to free as shown in the figure. • 5 Connectors • Edge Saddle • Wire Saddle



Fixing Roller



Sub Thermistor 2 Sub Thermistor 2



Fixing Roller



Reciprocating Cam



x5



Harness of Sub Thermistor 2



■ Actions after Parts Replacement 1. Clear the parts counter. (Lv.1) COPIER > COUNTER > PRDC-1 > FIX-TH1



Removing the Sub Thermistor 1 ■ Preparation 1. Pull out the Fixing Feed Unit.(“Removing the Fixing Assembly” on page 505) 2. Remove the Fixing Assembly.(“Removing the Fixing Assembly” on page 505)



520



4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning 2. While holding the Upper Separation Claw Retaining Spring, remove the Upper Separation Claw.



3. Remove the Sub Thermistor Holder. • 1 Screw



4. Remove the Sub Thermistor 1. • 1 Screw



1x



Upper Separation Claw Spring



Upper Separation Claw



■ Actions after Parts Replacement 1. Clear the parts counter.(COPIER > COUNTER > DRBL-1 > DLV-UCLW)



■ Actions after Parts Replacement



Cleaning the Upper Separation Claw



1. Clear the parts counter. (Lv.1) COPIER > COUNTER > PRDC-1 > FIX-TH2



■



Removing the Upper Separation Claw



1. Pull out the Fixing Feed Unit. (Refer to“Removing the Fixing Assembly” on page 505)



■ 1. Pull out the Fixing Feed Unit. (Refer to “Removing the Fixing Assembly” on page 505)



■ 1. Hold the Lever of the Left Guide to open the Left Guide.



521



4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning



■ Procedure



Removing the Thermoswitch



1. Hold the Lever of the Feed Unit to open the Feed Unit.



■ Preparation 1. Pull out the Fixing Feed Unit.(“Removing the Fixing Assembly” on page 505 ) 2. Remove the Fixing Assembly. (“Removing the Fixing Assembly” on page 505) 3. Remove the Fixing Upper Cover.(“Removing the Fixing Cleaning Web” on page 510 ) 4. Remove the Fixing Cleaning Web.(“Removing the Fixing Cleaning Web” on page 510 ) 5. Remove the Fixing Drive Unit 1.(“Removing the Fixing Cleaning Web” on page 510)



2. Clean the Upper Separation Claw with lint-free paper moistened.



6. Secure the Shutter Drive Gear.(“Removing the Fixing Cleaning Web” on page 510) 7. Separate the Fixing Upper Unit from the Fixing Lower Unit.(“Removing the Fixing Cleaning Web” on page 510) 8. Remove the Heater Unit.(“Removing the Fixing Roller, Insulating Bush and Thrust Stopper” on page 515) 9. Remove the Fixing Roller.(“Removing the Fixing Roller, Insulating Bush and Thrust Stopper” on page 515)



3. Wipe toner off the 4 Inner Delivery Rollers with lintfree paper moistened with alcohol.



522



4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning



■ Procedure



3. Place the Fixing Upper Unit as shown in the figure and remove the Web Lower Cover. • 1 Screw



1. Remove the Harness Guide Cover and free the harness from the Harness Guide. • 1 Screw • Edge Saddle • Harness Guide



4. Remove the Thermoswitch Unit. • 1 Screw



2. Remove the Harness Guide. • 1 Screw



5. Remove the Retainer Plate and Thermoswitch.



Leaf Spring



523



Thermoswitch



4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning



■



Pickup/Feed System



1. Remove the Left Deck Pickup Roller. • 1 Claw



Removing the Left Pickup Deck 1. Open the Front Cover. 2. Pull out the Left Pickup Deck to remove. • 2 Screws



2x



1x



NOTE: When installing the Left Pickup Deck, be sure to fit the 4 protrusions on the Rail into the 4 grooves of the Left Pickup Deck to install.



■ Actions after Parts Replacement 1. Clear the parts counter.(COPIER > COUNTER > DRBL-1 > C2-PU-RL)



Removing the Left Deck Feed Roller ■ Preparation 1. Open the Front Cover.



Groove



2. Remove the Left Pickup Deck.(“Removing the Left Pickup Deck” on page 524)



Protrusion



Removing the Left Deck Pickup Roller ■ Preparation 1. Open the Front Cover. 2. Remove the Left Pickup Deck.(“Removing the Left Pickup Deck” on page 524)



524



4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning



■



2. Pull out the Right Pickup Deck to remove. • 2 Screws



1. Remove the Stopper to remove the Left Deck Feed Roller.



2x



NOTE: When installing the Right Pickup Deck, be sure to fit the 4 protrusions on the Rail into the 4 grooves of the Right Pickup Deck to install.



■ Actions after Parts Replacement



Groove



1. Clear the parts counter.(COPIER > COUNTER > DRBL-1 > C2-FD-RL) Protrusion



Removing the Right Pickup Deck 1. Open the Front Cover.



Removing the Left Deck Separation Roller ■ Preparation 1. Open the Front Cover. 2. Remove the Right Pickup Deck.(“Removing the Right Pickup Deck” on page 525 )



■ Procedure 1. Pull out the Left Pickup Deck.



525



4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning



■



2. Remove the Stopper to remove the Left Deck Separation Roller.



1. Remove the Right Deck Pickup Roller. • 1 Claw



1x



■ Actions after Parts Replacement 1. Clear the parts counter.



■ Actions after Parts Replacement



(Lv.1) COPIER > COUNTER > DRBL-1 > C2-SP-RL



1. Clear the parts counter.(COPIER > COUNTER > DRBL-1 > C1-PU-RL)



Removing the Right Deck Pickup Roller



Removing the Right Deck Feed Roller



■ Preparation 1. Open the Front Cover.



■ Preparation



2. Remove the Right Pickup Deck.(Removing the Right Pickup Deck)



1. Open the Front Cover. 2. Remove the Right Pickup Deck.(Removing the Right Pickup Deck)



526



4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning



■



3. Remove the Feed Guide. • 1 Boss



1. Remove the Stopper to remove the Right Deck Feed Roller.



4. Remove the Stopper to remove the Right Deck Separation Roller.



■ Actions after Parts Replacement 1. Clear the parts counter.(COPIER > COUNTER > DRBL-1 > C1-FD-RL)



Removing the Right Deck Separation Roller 1. Open the Right Upper Cover. 2. Pull out the Right Pickup Deck.



■ Actions after Parts Replacement 1. Clear the parts counter. (Lv.1) COPIER > COUNTER > DRBL-1 > C1-SP-RL



527



4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning



■ Actions after Parts Replacement



Removing the Upper Cassette



1. Clear the parts counter.(COPIER > COUNTER > DRBL-1 > C3-PU-RL)



1. Pull out the Upper Cassette to remove. • 4 Screws



Removing the Upper Cassette Feed Roller



4x



■ Preparation 1. Remove the Upper Cassette.(“Removing the Upper Cassette” on page 528)



■ Procedure 1. Remove the Stopper to remove the Upper Cassette Feed Roller.



Removing the Upper Cassette Pickup Roller ■ Preparation 1. Remove the Upper Cassette.(“Removing the Upper Cassette” on page 528)



■ 1. Remove the Upper Cassette Pickup Roller. • 1 Claw



1x



■ Actions after Parts Replacement 1. Clear the parts counter.(COPIER > COUNTER > DRBL-1 > C3-FD-RL)



1x



Removing the Upper Cassette Separation Roller 1. Open the Right Lower Cover. 2. Remove the Upper Cassette. (“Removing the Upper Cassette” on page 528)



528



4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning 3. Remove the Feed Guide.



Removing the Lower Cassette



• 1 Boss



1. Pull out the Lower Cassette to remove. • 4 Screws



4x



Removing the Lower Cassette Pickup Roller ■ Preparation 4. Remove the Stopper to remove the Upper Cassette Separation Roller.



1. Remove the Lower Cassette.(“Removing the Lower Cassette” on page 529)



■ 1. Remove the Lower Cassette Pickup Roller. • 1 Claw



■ Actions after Parts Replacement 1. Clear the parts counter.



1x



(Lv.1) COPIER > COUNTER > DRBL-1 > C3-SP-RL



■ Actions after Parts Replacement 1. Clear the parts counter.(COPIER > COUNTER > DRBL-1 > C4-PU-RL)



529



4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning 3. Remove the Feed Guide.



Removing the Lower Cassette Feed Roller



• 1 Boss



■ Preparation 1. Remove the Lower Cassette.(Removing the Lower Cassette)



■ 1. Remove the Stopper to remove the Lower Cassette Feed Roller.



1x



4. Remove the Stopper to remove the Lower Cassette Separation Roller.



■ Actions after Parts Replacement 1. Clear the parts counter.(COPIER > COUNTER > DRBL-1 > C4-FD-RL)



■ Actions after Parts Replacement



Removing the Lower Cassette Separation Roller



1. Clear the parts counter. (Lv.1) COPIER > COUNTER > DRBL-1 > C4-SP-RL



1. Open the Right Lower Cover.



Removing the Multi-purpose Tray Feed Roller



2. Remove the Lower Cassette. (“Removing the Lower Cassette” on page 529)



■ 1. Open the Inner Cover. 1. Open the Front Cover.



530



4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning 2. Open the Inner Cover. • 1 Screw (to loosen)



2. Remove the bushing. • 1 E-ring



Loosen



■



3. Remove the Multi-purpose Tray Pickup Guide.



1. Remove the gear. • 1 Claw



4. Remove the Multi-purpose Tray Feed Roller. • 1 E-ring



1x



■ Actions after Parts Replacement 1. Clear the parts counter.(COPIER > COUNTER > DRBL-1 > M-FD-RL)



531



4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning



■



Removing the Multi-purpose Tray Separation Roller



1. Remove the Multi-purpose Tray Lower Guide. • 2 Screws • 6 Claws • 6 Protrusions



■ Preparation 1. Open the Inner Cover.(“Removing the Multi-purpose Tray Feed Roller” on page 530)



2x



2. Remove the Multi-purpose Tray Feed Roller. (“Removing the Multi-purpose Tray Feed Roller” on page 530)



6x



CAUTION: Installation work gets difficult if the plate and the spring (as shown in the figure) are removed when removing the cover; therefore, be careful not to remove them.



532



4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning 2. Remove the Multi-purpose Tray Separation Roller.



5. Clean paper dust on the Vertical Path Sensor 1 (PS24) and the Writing Judging Sensor (PS28) with a blower.



• 1 Claw



1x



PS28



■ Actions after Parts Replacement PS24



1. Clear the parts counter.(COPIER > COUNTER > DRBL-1 > M-SP-RL)



Cleaning the Pickup and Fixing Feed Assembly 6. Clean paper dust on the Feed Guide [A] with lint-free paper.



■ Cleaning the Vertical Path Assembly 1. Open the Right Cover. 2. Open the Right Lower Cover. 3. Open the Multi-purpose Tray Pickup Guide Unit, and clean the 2 areas of the Feed Guide [A]. (Remove paper lint.) 4. Clean a whole circumference of 2 Rollers [B] and the 3 Rollers [C] by manually rotating them with lint-free paper moistened with alcohol.



[A]



CAUTION: When rotating the Roller by hand, do not touch the surface of the Roller. Be sure to hold the side of the Roller to rotate manually.



[B]



[A]



[C]



533



4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning



■



7. Clean a whole circumference of 10 Rollers by manually rotating them with lint-free paper moistened with alcohol.



1. Open the Fixing Feed Unit fully. CAUTION: When rotating the Roller by hand, do not touch the surface of the Roller. Be sure to hold the side of the Roller to rotate manually.



2. Open the Registration Upper Guide, insert the paper lint cleaning tool into the clearance between the Registration Upper Guide and the Registration Lower Guide, and clean the feed area [A]. CAUTION: Be careful not to damage the sheet on the edge of the Registration Upper Guide.



[A]



Sheet



8. Clean a whole circumference of 10 Rollers by manually rotating them with lint-free paper moistened with alcohol.



3. Insert lint-free paper into the clearance between the Registration Upper Guide and the Registration Lower Guide, and clean the feed area [B] and the sheet on the edge of the Registration Upper Guide. CAUTION: Be careful not to damage the sheet on the edge of the Registration Upper Guide.



9. Open the Duplex Merging Guide and clean paper dust on the Feed Guide [A] with lint-free paper.



Sheet [B]



[A]



534



4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning 4. Open the Registration Upper Guide and clean paper dust on the Registration Sensor (PS29) with a blower.



7. Hold the 2 handles to lift the ETB Unit in the direction of the arrow.



PS29



5. Point the leading edge of Blower to the Static Eliminator and clean adhered soiling.



8. Clean the soiling adhered on the Magnet and the Sheet with lint-free paper moistened with alcohol. Sheet



6. Remove the Fixing Feed Cover (Upper). • 1 Screw



1x



Magnet



9. I return an ETB unit to the original position.



535



4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning 14. Clean paper dust on the Reverse Vertical Path Sensor (PS65) with a blower.



10. Clean the Fixing Inlet Guide [A] with lint-free paper moistened with alcohol.



PS65



[A]



15. Clean a whole circumference of 4 Rollers by manually rotating them with lint-free paper moistened with alcohol.



11. Hold the lever of the Feed Unit to open the Feed Unit. 12. Clean paper dust on the Feed Guide [A] with lint-free paper.



[A]



16. Hold the lever of the Feed Unit to close the Feed Unit.



13. Clean a whole circumference of 4 Rollers by manually rotating them with lint-free paper moistened with alcohol.



17. Clean paper dust on the feed area [A] of the Reverse Path with lint-free paper.



CAUTION: When rotating the Roller by hand, do not touch the surface of the Roller. Be sure to hold the side of the Roller to rotate manually.



[A]



536



4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning 21. Clean a whole circumference of 10 Rollers by manually rotating them with lint-free paper moistened with alcohol.



18. Clean paper dust on the feed area [A] inside the equipment with lint-free paper.



[A]



CAUTION: When rotating the Roller by hand, do not touch the surface of the Roller. Be sure to hold the side of the Roller to rotate manually.



NOTE: To clean the feed area [A] inside main body, removing the Fixing Assembly can improve the operability.



[A]



22. Clean paper dust on the Duplex Outlet Sensor (PS64), Duplex Merge Sensor (PS67), and Duplex Left Sensor (PS66) with a blower.



19. Open the Duplex Path. 20. Clean paper dust on the feed area [A] of the Duplex Path (Upper/Lower) with lint-free paper.



PS66



[A]



537



PS67



PS64



4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning 23. Clean a whole circumference of 5 Rollers by manually rotating them with lint-free paper moistened with alcohol.



25. Insert the paper lint cleaning tool to the gap of Reverse Path [A] to remove paper lint.



[A]



24. Place a paper on the Duplex Path. Then, point the leading edge of Blower to the Roller frame to remove paper lint. NOTE: The Cleaning Brush is engaged with 4 Rollers, causing accumulation of paper lint. By blowing air with the Blower, paper lint can be fallen down.



26. Close the Duplex Path. 27. Install the Fixing Feed Cover (Upper). 28. Push in the Fixing Feed Unit.



Removing the Left Deck Pickup Unit ■ Preparation 1. Remove the Right Pickup Deck.(“Removing the Right Pickup Deck” on page 525) 2. Remove the Left Pickup Deck.(“Removing the Left Pickup Deck” on page 524)



538



4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning



■



3. Remove the Left Deck Pickup Unit.



1. Disconnect the Connectors.



1x



CAUTION: Points to Caution at Installation When installing the Left Deck Pickup Unit, pull out the Fixing Feed Unit for approx. 10cm to install, and then return the unit to its original position after installation.



NOTE: Be sure to check that the parts number of Pickup Unit is correct.



2. Remove the Pickup Unit Fixation Plate (Upper/ Right). • 3 Screws Pickup Unit Fixation Plate(Upper)



3x



Removing the Right Deck Pickup Unit



Pickup Unit Fixation Plate(Right)



■ Preparation 1. Remove the Right Cover. (“Removing the Laser Scanner Unit” on page 435) 2. Pull out the Right Deck. (“Removing the Right Pickup Deck” on page 525)



■ 1. Open the Right Lower Cover.



539



4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning 4. Remove the Right Deck Pickup Unit.



2. Remove the Connector Cover.



• 1 Screw



• 1 Screw



1x



1x



NOTE: Be sure to check that the parts number of Pickup Unit is correct.



3. Disconnect the Connectors.



1x



Removing the Cassettes 3 and 4 Pickup Unit ■ 1. Remove the Right Lower Cover. 1. Open the Right Lower Cover.



540



4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning 1. Remove the Connector Cover.



2. Remove the Right Lower Cover. • 2 Hinge Pins



• 1 Screw



1x



2. Disconnect the Connectors.



1x 2. Pull out the Cassettes 3 and 4.



■ NOTE: This procedure explains the case for Cassette 3 Pickup Unit. Be sure to perform the same procedure when the Cassette 4 Pickup Unit is used.



541



4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning 3. Remove the Pickup Unit. • 1 Screw



[2]



x4 1x [1]



[2]



NOTE: Be sure to check that the parts number of Pickup Unit is correct.



Removing the Vertical Path Cassette Pickup Drive Unit ■ Preparation 1. Remove the Box Cover (Left).



2. Open the Controller Box in the direction of the arrow. • 4 Screws



542



4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning CAUTION: Points to Note when Installing the Controller Box While installing the Controller Box, be sure to lift it to avoid hitting the hook of the Waste Toner Container Shutter Unit.



3x



[1]



4. Remove the Waste Toner Container.(“Removing the Waste Toner Container” on page 480) 5. Remove the Cassette 3 and Cassette 4 Pickup Units. (“Removing the Cassettes 3 and 4 Pickup Unit” on page 540) If the Inner Cover of the Controller Box hits the hook of the Waste Toner Container Shutter Unit, the hook may be removed.



■ Procedure 1. Remove the 2 E-rings and move the bushings to remove the Vertical Path Rollers 3 and 4 in the direction of the arrow.



[2]



[2]



[1]



3. Remove the Rear Lower Cover. • 3 Screws CAUTION: Do not lose the bushings when removing the Roller Shaft.



543



4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning 4. Remove the Feed Driver PCB Unit.



2. Remove the Shield Plate. • • • •



• • • • •



2 Screw 2 Protrusions 4 Wire Saddles 2 Connectors



4 Screws 13 Connectors 9 Wire Saddles 1 Reuse Band Harness



2x



4x



13x



9x



4x



2x



5. Remove the Right Rear Handle. • 4 Screws



4x



3. Remove the Waste Toner Container Shutter Unit. • 3 Screws • 1 Hook



3x CAUTION: When installing the handle, be sure to follow the order as shown in the figure to tighten screws.



4x



544



4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning 3. Push to release the Release Springs at both sides of the Rail, and then further pull out the Fixing Feed Unit until it stops.



6. Free the harness and remove the Vertical Path Cassette Drive Unit. • 1 Connector • 3 Wire Saddles • 6 Screws



6x



1x



3x



Removing the Registration Unit ■ 1. Pull out the Fixing Feed Unit. 1. Open the Front Cover. 2. Turn the Fixing Feed Unit Pressure Release Lever in the direction of the arrow to pull out the Fixing Feed Unit.



545



4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning NOTE: How to push the Fixing Feed Unit in 1. Release the Release Springs [A] on the side of either rail. Slowly push the Fixing Feed Unit in by approximately 5 mm while keeping it level.



CAUTION: Caution when pushing the Fixing Feed Unit in While pressing the Release Springs, slowly push the Fixing Feed Unit in so that the fingers do not get caught.



[A]



approx. 5 mm



2. Take the fingers off the Release Springs and slowly push the Fixing Feed Unit in to the end.



546



4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning



■ Procedure



4. Disconnect the 2 Connecters.



1. Remove the Fixing Feed Right Front Upper Cover • 1 Screw



2x



1x



2. Lift the ETB Unit in the direction of the arrow.



5. Set the ETB Unit back.



3. Remove the Cover. • 1 Screw



1x



547



4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning 6. Remove the Registration Unit.



Removing the Left Deck Pickup Drive Unit



• 4 Screws



■ Preparation



4x



1. Remove the Box Cover (Left).(“Removing the Vertical Path Cassette Pickup Drive Unit” on page 542) 2. Open the Controller Box.(“Removing the Vertical Path Cassette Pickup Drive Unit” on page 542) 3. Remove the Rear Lower Cover.(“Removing the Vertical Path Cassette Pickup Drive Unit” on page 542) 4. Remove the Power Supply Assembly.(“Removing the Power Supply Assembly” on page 556)



CAUTION: When installing, be sure to check that the 2 Positioning Pins are secured.



5. Remove the Left Deck Pickup Unit.(“Removing the Left Deck Pickup Unit” on page 538)



■ 1. Remove the Left Deck Pickup Drive Unit in the direction of the arrow. • 6 Screws • 1 Connector • 1 Wire Saddle



6x



1x



1x



[A]



NOTE: When installing the Registration Unit, be sure to follow the order as shown in the figure to tighten screws.



4x



Removing the Main Drive Unit ■ Preparation 1. Remove the Box Cover (Left).(“Removing the Vertical Path Cassette Pickup Drive Unit” on page 542) 2. Open the Controller Box.(“Removing the Vertical Path Cassette Pickup Drive Unit” on page 542) 3. Remove the Rear Lower Cover.(“Removing the Vertical Path Cassette Pickup Drive Unit” on page 542)



548



4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning 4. Remove the Waste Toner Container.(“Removing the Waste Toner Container” on page 480)



3. Remove the 2 E-rings and move the bushings to remove the Vertical Path Rollers 1 and 2 in the direction of the arrow.



5. Remove the Right Lower Cover.(“Removing the Cassettes 3 and 4 Pickup Unit” on page 540) 6. Remove the Right Deck Pickup Unit.(“Removing the Right Deck Pickup Unit” on page 539)



■ Procedure 1. Remove the Pre-registration Guide Unit. • 2 Screws



2x



2. Remove the Middle Vertical Path Guide. • 1 Screw



CAUTION: Do not lose the bushings when removing the Vertical Path Rollers 1 and 2.



1x



549



4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning 4. Remove the Shield Plate. • • • •



5. Remove the Waste Toner Container Shutter Unit.



2 Screws 2 Protrusions 4 Wire Saddles 2 Connectors



• 3 Screws



3x



2x



CAUTION: When removing the Waste Toner Container Shutter Unit, be careful of toner scattering.



4x



NOTE: When installing the Waste Toner Container Shutter Unit, be sure to follow the order as shown in the figure to tighten screws.



2x



3x



550



4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning 6. Remove the Feed Driver PCB Unit. • • • • •



7. Remove the Flywheel.



4 Screws 13 Connectors 9 Wire Saddles 1 Reuse Band Harness



4x



• 2 Screws • 2 Washers



2x



13x



9x



8. Loosen the screw and move the Belt Tensioner in the direction of the arrow, and then again tighten the screw.



CAUTION: When installing the Feed Driver PCB Unit, be sure to follow the order as shown in the figure to tighten screws.



4x



9. Remove the belt from the pully.



551



4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning 13. Disconnect the Pre-transfer Charging High Voltage Connector.



10. Remove the transformer. • 2 Screws • 3 Connectors



• 1 Screw



1x



2x



3x



14. Remove the Right Rear Handle.



11. Free the harness and remove the Transformer Support Base.



• 4 Screws



• 1 Screw • Harness



4x 1x



1x



CAUTION: When installing the Right Rear Handle, be sure to follow the order as shown in the figure to tighten screws.



12. Remove the Duct Unit. • 3 Screws • 1 Connector • Harness



4x



3x



1x



1x



552



4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning 15. Remove the Main Drive Unit. • 6 Screws • 1 Connector



6x



1x



553



4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning 2. Remove the Ozone Filter.



External Auxiliary System Removing the Filter (for primary charging) 1. Open the Front Cover. 2. Remove the Filter (for primary charging). • 1 Screw



1x



■ Actions after Parts Replacement 1. Clear the parts counter.(COPIER > COUNTER > PRDC-1 > OZ-FIL1)



Removing the DC Controller PCB ■ Error Location Code



■ Actions after Parts Replacement



U7100-0001 DC Controller PCB (UN1)



1. Clear the parts counter.(COPIER > COUNTER > PRDC-1 > AR-FIL1)



■ Before Parts Replacement



Removing the Ozone Filter



CAUTION: When replacing the DC Controller PCB, be sure to use a new one. Do not use the DC Controller PCB which was used with another machine.



1. Remove the Filter Cover. • 1 Screw



1. Execute the following service mode to output setting values for just in case of restoration failure of backup data.



1x



COPIER > FUNCTION > MISC-P > P-PRINT 2. Execute the following service mode to back up the service mode setting values. (Lv.2) COPIER > FUNCTION > SYSTEM > DSRAMBUP During execution, "ACTIVE" flashes in the status column of the service mode. It takes approx. 2 minutes. Upon success, [OK!] is displayed in the status column. 3. After confirming that [OK!] is displayed in the status column of the service mode, turn OFF the power of the machine.



NOTE: To prevent falling of the Filter Cover, be sure to hold the Filter Cover to remove the screw.



554



4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning



■ Preparation



CAUTION: Points to Note when Installing the Controller Box While installing the Controller Box, be sure to lift it to avoid hitting the hook of the Waste Toner Container Shutter Unit.



1. Remove the Box Cover (Left).



[1]



If the Inner Cover of the Controller Box hits the hook of the Waste Toner Container Shutter Unit, the hook may be removed.



2. Open the Controller Box [1] in the direction of the arrow. • 4 Screws [2]



[2] [2]



x4 [1]



[2]



[2]



[1]



555



4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning



■ Works During Parts Replacement



■ Procedure



1. If the firmware combination is incorrect, execute an update with the Automatic Update function.



1. Remove the Controller Box Inner Cover. • 4 Screws (TP)



4x



2. Disconnect the 20 Connectors.



Screen example CAUTION: Automatic Update is available only when the following Service Mode settings are at 1 or 2. (Lv.2) COPIER > OPTION > FNC-SW > VER-CHNG



x20



2. When the setting value data is backed up before parts replacement, execute the following service mode to restore the backed-up setting value data. (Lv.2) COPIER > FUNCTION > SYSTEM > DSRAMRES During execution, "ACTIVE" flashes in the status column of the service mode. It takes approx. 2 minutes. Upon success, [OK!] is displayed in the status column.



3. Remove the DC Controller PCB in the direction of the arrow.



3. When setting values cannot be backed up before replacement or when the backed-up data cannot be restored in this step due to reasons such as damage of the DC Controller PCB, enter the values of each service mode item written on the service label or PPRINT before parts replacement.



• 8 Screws



8x



Removing the Power Supply Assembly ■ 1. Remove the Box Cover (Left). (Refer to “Removing the DC Controller PCB” on page 554) 2. Open the Controller Box. (Refer to“Removing the DC Controller PCB” on page 554)



556



4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning 3. Remove the Rear Lower Cover.



2. Disconnect the 20 Connectors and free the Harness to the top of the Power Supply Assembly.



1. Remove the Rear Lower Cover in the direction of the arrow. • 3 Screws



20x



3x



■ Procedure 1. Free the Harness from the Wire Saddle.



1x



3. Remove the Power Supply Assembly in the direction of the arrow. • 2 Screws



2x



557



4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning 2. Remove the Left Upper Cover.



Removing the Fixing Power Unit



• 3 Screws



3x CAUTION: Points to Caution before Operation When executing this procedure, be sure to turn OFF the breaker beforehand.



3. Remove the Left Upper Frame. • 5 Screws Leakage Breaker



5x



■ 1. Remove the Box Cover (Left). (Refer to “Removing the DC Controller PCB” on page 554)



4. Free the harness and remove the Fixing Power Unit. • 4 Connectors • 2 Screws



■ 1. Open the 2 Finisher Connector Covers.



4x



• 2 Claws



1x



2x



2x



558



4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning 2. Remove the Feed Driver PCB.



5. Remove the Fixing Power Unit Plate.



• 6 Screws • 15 Connectors



• 5 Screws



5x 15x



6x



Removing the Feed Driver PCB Removing the Upper High Voltage Unit



■ Preparation 1. Remove the Waste Toner Container.(“Removing the Waste Toner Container” on page 480)



■



2. Remove the Box Cover (Left).(“Removing the DC Controller PCB” on page 554)



1. Remove the Box Cover (Left). (Refer to“Removing the DC Controller PCB” on page 554)



3. Open the Controller Box.(“Removing the DC Controller PCB” on page 554)



2. Open the Controller Box. (Refer to “Removing the DC Controller PCB” on page 554)



4. Remove the Rear Lower Cover.(“Removing the Power Supply Assembly” on page 556)



■ 1. Remove the frame of Waste Toner Container. • 2 Screws • 2 Protrusions



2x



559



4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning



■ Procedure



2. Disconnect the connector and Grounding Wire. • 1 Screw



1. Open the Motor Driver PCB Unit. NOTE: When opening the Motor Driver PCB Unit, free the top side from the protrusion.



• • • •



2x



10x



5 Connectors 2 Screws Wire Saddle Reuse Band



Projection



1x



1x 3. While avoiding the harness and Motor Driver PCB Unit, remove the Upper High Voltage Unit.



5x



• 1 Screw



1x



2x



Removing the Flat Control Panel Unit ■ Preparation ● For the DADF + Reader Unit 1. Remove the DADF + Reader Unit. “Removing the DADF + Reader Unit” on page 372



● For the Printer Model 1. Open the covers. “Removing the DADF + Reader Unit” on page 372



560



4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning



■ Procedure



2. Remove the Right Upper Cover. “Removing the DADF + Reader Unit” on page 372



1. Remove the Harness Guide (Lower).



3. Remove the Left Rear Cover“Removing the DADF + Reader Unit” on page 372



• 1 Screw • 2 Bosses



4. Open the Controller Box.“Removing the DC Controller PCB” on page 554 5. Remove the Finisher Connection Cover. “Removing the DADF + Reader Unit” on page 372 6. Remove the Left Upper Cover.“Removing the DADF + Reader Unit” on page 372 7. Remove the Upper Rear Cover.“Removing the DADF + Reader Unit” on page 372 8. Remove the Printer Cover[1]. • 5 Screws[2]



Boss



[2]



x1



[2]



2. Remove the Harness Guide (Upper).



x5



• 1 Screw • 2 Bosses



[1]



Boss



561



4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning 3. Disconnect the 2 cables.



5. Remove the screw of the Control Panel Left Upper Cover.



• 2 Connectors



x2



6. Remove the Control Panel Left Upper Cover.



4. Open the Toner Replacement Cover, and remove the Bottle Guide Rail.



• 1 Claw • 2 Hooks



• 1 Screw • 1 Hook



562



4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning 9. Remove the Cable Retaining Member.



7. Remove the Control Panel Right Cover.



• 1 Boss • 2 Hooks



• 1 Claw • 1 Hook



• 1 Reuse Band [A] • 1 Boss • 3 Hooks



8. Remove the 4 screws of the Flat Control Panel Unit and raise the Flat Control Panel Unit.



[A]



x4



563



4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning 10. Disconnect the 2 cables and the connector, and remove the Flat Control Panel Unit.



11. Disconnect the 2 cables. • 2 Edge Saddles • 2 Reuse Bands • 11 Wire Saddles



x3 x15



Removing the Upright Control Panel



1. Remove the Joint Cover L[1] and Joint Cover R[2]. • 2 Screws [3] [3]



x3 [1]



[2]



x2



[3]



564



4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning 2. Remove the Reuse Band[1] and the Wire Saddle[2].



4. Remove the Upright Control Panel. • 4 Screws • 2 Protrusions



[1]



x2



[3]



[2]



x4



[2]



[2]



3. Disconnect the 3 Cable. • 3 Connectors[1]



[1]



x3



[1]



NOTE: When installing the Upright Control Panel, be sure to tighten the screws from the upper part.



565



5



Adjustment Overview........................................... 567 When replacing parts........................ 569



5. Adjustment



Overview In this chapter, measures of adjustment when replacing parts in servicing operation are mentioned. Category



Name



Actions after Parts Replacement



Original ExDADF posure and DADF Scanner Unit Feed System



Reference



○



“DADF” on page 569



○



“DADF Scanner Unit” on page 582



Original Width Volume



○



“Original Width Volume” on page 583



Post-separation sensor 1/2/3 Registration sensor Lead sensor 1 Delivery sensor



○



“Post-separation sensor 1/2/3, Registration sensor, Lead sensor 1, Delivery sensor ” on page 583



Reader Controller PCB



○



“Reader Controller PCB” on page 584



Reader Scanner Unit



○



“Reader Scanner Unit” on page 585



Copyboard Glass



○



“Copyboard Glass” on page 586



Hinge Unit (Left/Right)



○



“Hinge Unit (Left/Right)” on page 587



Stream Reading Adjustment



○



“Stream Reading Adjustment” on page 596



Registration Roller Wheel Skew Adjustment



○



“Registration Roller Wheel Skew Adjustment” on page 597



Main Control- HDD ler Main Controller PCB1



○



“Hard Disk” on page 598



○



“Main controller PCB 1” on page 600



TPM PCB



○



“TPM PCB” on page 601



FLASH PCB



○



“FLASH PCB” on page 601



Control Panel CPU PCB(Flat Control Panel Unit)



○



“ LCD Unit (Flat Control Panel), Control Panel CPU PCB (Flat Control Panel) ” on page 601



○



“Primary Charging Wire” on page 603



Primary Charging Assembly



○



“Primary Charging Assembly” on page 604



Pre-Transfer Charging Assembly



○



“Pre-transfer Charging Assembly” on page 606



Pre-Transfer Charging Wire



○



“Pre-transfer Charging Wire” on page 607



Photosensitive Drum



○



“Photosensitive Drum” on page 607



Drum Side Seals (Front and Rear)



○



“Drum Side Seals (Front and Rear)” on page 608



Developing Cylinder/Developing Roller



○



“ Developing Cylinder/Developing Roller” on page 609



Potential Sensor / Potential Control PCB



○



“Potential Sensor / Potential Control PCB” on page 609



ETB Unit / ETB



○



“ETB Unit / ETB” on page 610



Waste Toner Container



○



“Waste Toner Container” on page 610



Fixing Roller



○



“Fixing Roller” on page 610



Image Forma- Primary Charging Wire tion System



Fixing



Adjustment



567



5. Adjustment Category



Name



Actions after Parts Replacement



External Aux- DC Controller PCB iliary System



○



568



Adjustment



Reference



“DC Controller PCB” on page 611



5. Adjustment



When replacing parts Original Exposure and Feed System ■ DADF ● Procedure of parts replacement Refer to “Removing from the Connection Equipment(DADF)” on page 290.



● Adjustment when Replacing the Parts When replacing the DADF, in the following procedures. No.



Item



Description



Reference



[1]



Angle Restriction ReAngle Restriction Release (Opening Angle at 90 deg) lease (Opening Angle at 90 deg)



“Angle Restriction Release (Opening Angle at 90 deg)” on page 570



[2]



Sensor Output Adjustment



“Sensor Output Adjustment” on page 294



[3]



Tray Width Adjustment Tray Width Adjustment



“Tray Width Adjustment” on page 294



[4]



Tilt Adjustment



Tilt Adjustment



“Tilt Adjustment” on page 295



[5]



Height Adjustment



Checking the height of front height adjustment roll.



“Checking the height of front height adjustment roll 1” on page 367



Left Hinge Height Adjustment



“ Left Hinge Height Adjustment 1” on page 296



Right Hinge Height Adjustment



“Right Hinge Height Adjustment” on page 573



Checking the height of front height adjustment roll.



“Checking the height of front height adjustment roll 2” on page 297



Checking the height of rear height adjustment roll.



“Checking the height of rear height adjustment roll.” on page 297



Left Hinge Height Adjustment



“Left Hinge Height Adjustment 2” on page 575



Side Registration Adjustment



“Side Registration Adjustment” on page 578



Sensor Output Adjustment



[6]



Side Registration Adjustment



[7]



Leading Edge Registra- Leading Edge Registration Adjustment tion Adjustment



“Leading Edge Registration Adjustment” on page 580



[8]



Magnification Adjustment



“Magnification Adjustment” on page 581



[9]



White Level Adjustment White Level Adjustment



Magnification Adjustment



“White Level Adjustment” on page 307



Preparation or Creation of Test Chart Prepare a test chart. If there is no test chart, create a test chart. Create a test chart that has a 10 mm smaller rectangle from the edge of A4 or LTR paper.



569



5. Adjustment 10 mm



10 mm



10 mm



10 mm



NOTE: Be sure to write a character or mark to identify the printed image direction.



Angle Restriction Release (Opening Angle at 90 deg) Change the opening angle of DADF from 70 deg to 90 deg. NOTE: Increasing the opening angle of DADF makes some operation easier.



1. Open the rubber cover and remove the angle restriction plate. • 2 screws Rubber cover



Rubber cover



Angle restriction plate



CAUTION: After adjustment, be sure to install the angle restriction plate.



Sensor Output Adjustment CAUTION: • When the sensor is replaced, be sure to clean the surface of prism before adjustment. • Make sure that there is no paper in DADF. 1. Execute the service mode item. (Lv.1) FEEDER > FUNCTION > SENS-INT



Tray Width Adjustment Execute either [a. AB type adjustment] or [b. Inch type adjustment] in this adjustment. a. AB type adjustment



570



Screw



5. Adjustment 1. Highlight the service mode item. (Lv.1) FEEDER > FUNCTION > TRY-A4 2. Set the slide guide to [A4/A3] display. 3. Press OK key to register the A4 width. 4. Highlight the service mode item. (Lv.1) FEEDER > FUNCTION > TRY-A5R 5. Set the slide guide to [A5R] display. 6. Press OK key to register the A5R width. b.Inch type adjustment 1. Highlight the service mode item. (Lv.1) FEEDER > FUNCTION > TRY-LTR 2. Set the slide guide to [LTR/11 x 17] display. 3. Press OK key and register the letter width. 4. Highlight the service mode item. (Lv.1) FEEDER > FUNCTION > TRY-LTRR 5. Set the slide guide to [STMT/ LTRR/ LGL] display. 6. Press OK key and register the LTRR width.



Tilt Adjustment CAUTION: Execute this adjustment after releasing the angle restriction (opening angle at 90 deg). “Angle Restriction Release (Opening Angle at 90 deg)” on page 570 1. Loosen the fixing nut on the back of the left hinge. 2. Rotate the hexagon socket bolt and move the fixing material to the marking line. To move it forward: rotate it clockwise To move it backward: rotate it counter clockwise



Hexagon socket bolt



Fixing nut



Fixing material Marking line



3. Tighten the fixing nut after adjustment.



571



5. Adjustment



Height Adjustment Checking the height of front height adjustment roll 1 1. Remove the DADF Glass Retainer. • 2 Screws



x2



2. Close the DADF. 3. Check that the 2 height adjustment rolls on the front/rear left come contact with the stream reading glass. NOTE: Turning ON the LED helps the check operation. (Lv.1) COPIER > FUNCTION > MISC-R > SCANLAMP



Height adjustment roll



Stream reading glass



Height adjustment roll



4. If not, execute the height adjustment of Left Hinge.



572



5. Adjustment



Left Hinge Height Adjustment 1 Check that the Height Adjustment Rolls on the rear come contact with the stream reading glass. 1. Rotate the fixing screw on top of the left hinge to adjust it. To remove the space on the front: rotate it clockwise (black arrow direction) To remove the space on the rear or both sides: rotate it counterclockwise (white arrow direction) Blanking cover



Fixing screw



Right Hinge Height Adjustment 1. Check that the space between the ADF and the Reader is 1 to 2 mm. If the space is less than 1 mm or more than 2 mm, make adjustment.



1.0 mm-2.0mm



2. Make adjustment by turning the Fixation Screw on the upper side of the Right Hinge. If the space is larger than 2 mm: Turn the screw counterclockwise (white arrow). If the space is less than 1 mm: Turn the screw clockwise (black arrow).



Claw



Blanking cover Fixing screw



Checking the height of front height adjustment roll 2 1. Prepare the paper (plain) with approx. 10 mm in width and approx. 200 mm in length.



573



5. Adjustment 2. Align the edge of prepared paper with the contact point of DADF Glass Retainer and the Stream Reading Glass. Reading Glass



Height adjustment roll



Plate



20



0. 0



m



m



Paper



10



.0 mm



CAUTION: Place the paper in the position where it does not contact with the Platen Roller 1. If it is placed in the position where it contacts with the Platen Roller 1, checking cannot be performed correctly.



3. Close the DADF. 4. Pull out the paper in the direction of the arrow and check that there is resistance.



Paper



5. If there is no resistance, perform the height adjustment.



Checking the height of rear height adjustment roll. 1. Prepare the paper (plain) with approx. 10 mm in width and approx. 200 mm in length. 2. Align the edge of prepared paper with the contact point of DADF Glass Retainer and the Stream Reading Glass.



574



5. Adjustment Height adjustment roll



2



.0 00



mm



Reading Glass



Paper



10 .0 m m



Plate



CAUTION: Place the paper in the position where it does not contact with the Platen Roller 1. If it is placed in the position where it contacts with the Platen Roller 1, checking cannot be performed correctly.



3. Close the DADF. 4. Pull out the paper in the direction of the arrow and check that there is resistance.



Paper



5. If there is no resistance, perform the height adjustment.



Left Hinge Height Adjustment 2 1. Make adjustment by turning the Fixation Screw on the upper side of the Left Hinge. If the front side is not installed properly: Turn the screw clockwise (black arrow). If the rear side or both sides are not installed properly: Turn the screw counterclockwise (white arrow). Blanking cover



Fixing screw



2. Check the height again to make sure that it becomes appropriate. 3. Check that the White Plate is in contact with the Copyboard Glass.



575



5. Adjustment



ADF



ADF



White Plate



Index Sheet Reader Unit



Index Sheet White Plate Reader Unit



ADF



ADF



Index Sheet



White Plate Reader Unit



White Plate Index Sheet Reader Unit



Right Angle Adjustment NOTE: There are 2 adjustment methods; for front side reading (reader side scanner unit) and for back side reading (DADF side scanner unit).



576



5. Adjustment 1. Adjustment for front side reading 1. Set a test chart to DADF and make a 1-sided print. (“Preparation or Creation of Test Chart” on page 293) 2. Check the right angle accuracy of angle A on the printed paper. If it is not right angle, make an adjustment. Image on test chart Printed image



Feed direction



3. Loosen the 2 knurled screws on front of right hinge unit. 4. Loosen the knurled screw at the left side of left hinge unit front part. 5. Open the rubber cover on the back of right hinge unit and loosen the screw, and then make an adjustment by the hexagon socket bolt. If A is less than 90 deg, rotate it clockwise. If A is more than 90 deg, rotate it counterclockwise. Rubber cover



Hexagon socket bolt



Knurled screw (Loosen)



Fixing nut



Knurled screw (Loosen)



(LEFT SIDE)



(RIGHT SIDE)



6. After adjustment, tighten the fixing nut and 3 knurled screws. 7. Printout a test chart again and check that angle A is right angle.



577



5. Adjustment 2. Adjustment for back side reading 1. Set a test chart to DADF upside down and make a 2-sided print. 2. Check the right angle accuracy of angle A on the printed paper. If it is not right angle, make an adjustment. Image on test chart Printed image



Feed direction



3. Remove the front cover. 4. Loosen the adjustment screw. 5. Adjust the position of the guide that supports the scanner unit. If A is less than 90 deg, move the guide to right direction (black arrow direction). If A is more than 90 deg, move the guide to left direction (white arrow direction). [A]



[B]



6. After adjustment, tighten the screw. 7. Printout a test chart again and check that it is right angle.



Side Registration Adjustment NOTE: There are 2 adjustment methods; for front side reading (reader side scanner unit) and for back side reading (DADF side scanner unit).



a. Adjustment for front side reading 1. Set a test chart on the original pickup tray and make a 1-sided print.( “Preparation or Creation of Test Chart” on page 293) 2. Overlap the printed paper with the test chart.



578



5. Adjustment 3. Check that the rear side of the printed image is within the standard. Standard: A



< If the image is displaced toward front >



Rear side of printed image



Image rear side of test chart



A A



Image rear side of test chart



Feed direction



Rear side of printed image



Feed direction



4. If it is out of standard, make an adjustment in service mode. (Lv.1) COPIER > ADJUST > ADJ-XY > ADJ-Y-DF If the image is displaced toward rear, increase the value (image is moved toward front). If the image is displaced toward front, decrease the value (image is moved toward rear). • Changes per 1 unit: 0.1 mm • Adjustment range: -35 to 35 (default: 0) 5. Printout a test chart again and check that the image is within the standard. b. Adjustment for back side reading 1. Set a test chart on the original pickup tray upside down and make a 2-sided print. 2. Overlap the printed paper with the test chart. 3. Check that the rear side of the printed image is within the standard. Standard: A



< If the image is displaced toward front >



Rear side of printed image



Image rear side of test chart



A A



Image rear side of test chart



Feed direction



Rear side of printed image



Feed direction



4. If it is out of standard, make an adjustment in service mode. (Lv.1) COPIER > ADJUST > ADJ-XY > ADJY-DF2 If the image is displaced toward front, increase the value (image is moved toward rear). If the image is displaced toward rear, decrease the value (image is moved toward front). • Changes per 1 unit: 0.1 mm • Adjustment range: -35 to 35 (default: 0) 5. Printout a test chart again and check that the image is within the standard.



579



5. Adjustment



Leading Edge Registration Adjustment NOTE: There are 2 adjustment methods; for front side reading (reader side scanner unit) and for back side reading (DADF side scanner unit).



a. Adjustment for front side reading 1. Set a test chart on the original pickup tray and make a 1-sided print. (“Preparation or Creation of Test Chart” on page 293) 2. Overlap the printed paper with the test chart. 3. Check that the leading edge of the printed image is within the standard. Standard: A < If the image is displaced toward leading edge > Leading edge of printed image



Image leading edge of test chart



Leading edge of printed image



A



Image leading edge of test chart



A



Feed direction



Feed direction



4. If it is out of standard, make an adjustment in service mode. (Lv.1) FEEDER > ADJUST > DOCST If the image is displaced toward trailing edge, increase the value (image is moved forward). If the image is displaced toward leading edge, decrease the value (image is moved backward). • Changes per 1 unit: 0.1 mm • Adjustment range: -50 to +50 5. Printout a test chart again and check that the image is within the standard. b. Adjustment for back side reading 1. Set a test chart on the original pickup tray upside down and make a 2-sided print. 2. Overlap the printed paper with the test chart. 3. Check that the leading edge of the printed image is within the standard. Standard: A < If the image is displaced toward leading edge > Leading edge of printed image



Image leading edge of test chart



Leading edge of printed image



A



Image leading edge of test chart



A



Feed direction



Feed direction



580



5. Adjustment 4. If it is out of standard, make an adjustment in service mode. (Lv.1) FEEDER > ADJUST > DOCST2 If the image is displaced toward trailing edge, increase the value (image is moved forward). If the image is displaced toward leading edge, decrease the value (image is moved backward). • Changes per 1 unit: 0.1 mm • Adjustment range: -50 to +50 5. Printout a test chart again and check that the image is within the standard.



Magnification Adjustment NOTE: • There are 2 adjustment methods; for front side reading (reader side scanner unit) and for back side reading (DADF side scanner unit). • Compare the image printed by stream reading and printed by copyboard reading to adjust.



a. Adjustment for front side reading 1. Set a test chart on the copyboard glass of the connected device and make a print. This is deemed as print1. (“Preparation or Creation of Test Chart” on page 293) 2. Set a test chart on the original pickup tray and make a 1-sided print. This is deemed as print2. 3. Overlap the print2 on the print1. 4. Check that the trailing edge of the image of print2 is within the standard. Standard: A Trailing edge of print 1



< If the image of print2 is shorter >



Trailing edge of print 2



A



Trailing edge of print 2



Trailing edge of print 1



A



Feed direction



Feed direction



5. If it is out of standard, make an adjustment in service mode. (Lv.1) FEEDER > ADJUST > LA-SPEED If the image of print2 is longer, increase the value (make the stream reading speed faster). If the image of print2 is shorter, decrease the value (make the stream reading speed slower). • Changes per 1 unit: 0.1% • Adjustment range: -30 to +30 6. Printout a test chart again and check that the image is within the standard. b. Adjustment for back side reading 1. Set a test chart on the copyboard glass of the connected device and make a print. This is deemed as print1. 2. Set a test chart on the original pickup tray upside down and make a 2-sided print. This is deemed as print2. 3. Overlap the print2 on the print1.



581



5. Adjustment 4. Check that the trailing edge of the image of print2 is within the standard. Standard: A Trailing edge of print 1



< If the image of print2 is shorter >



Trailing edge of print 2



Trailing edge of print 2



A



Trailing edge of print 1



A



Feed direction



Feed direction



5. If it is out of standard, make an adjustment in service mode. (Lv.1) FEEDER > ADJUST > LA-SPD2 If the image of print2 is longer, increase the value (make the sub scanning width shorter). If the image of print2 is shorter, decrease the value (make the sub scanning width longer). • Changes per 1 unit: 0.1% • Adjustment range: -30 to +30 6. Printout a test chart again and check that the image is within the standard.



White Level Adjustment 1. Set A4 or LTR paper on the copyboard glass and close the DADF. CAUTION: If the paper with narrow width is used for white level adjustment, the adjustment may not be complete properly.



2. Execute the service mode item. (Lv.1) COPIER > FUNCTION > CCD > DF-WLVL1 3. Remove the paper from the copyboard glass and set it to the original pickup tray of DADF. 4. Execute the service mode item. (Lv.1) COPIER > FUNCTION > CCD > DF-WLVL2 5. Set the paper to the copyboard glass again and close the DADF. 6. Execute the service mode item. (Lv.1) COPIER > FUNCTION > CCD > DF-WLVL3 7. Remove the paper from the copyboard glass and set it to the original pickup tray of DADF. 8. Execute the service mode item. (Lv.1) COPIER > FUNCTION > CCD > DF-WLVL4



■ DADF Scanner Unit ● Procedure of parts replacement Refer to “Removing the DADF Scanner Unit” on page 308.



582



5. Adjustment



● Adjustment when Replacing the Parts 1. Input the service label value packaged in the Scanner Unit content. (Lv.2) COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > 100DF2RG , 100DF2GB 2. Perform sampling of B&W shading target. (Lv.1) COPIER > FUNCTION > CCD > BW-TGT 3. Perform white level adjustment. 1. Set A4 or LTR paper in the copyboard glass, close the DADF. CAUTION: If white level is adjusted in the small width paper, there is possibility that it will not adjust. 2. Execute the service mode item. (Lv.1) COPIER > FUNCTION > CCD > DF-WLVL1 3. Remove the paper from copyboard glass, set it in the DADF document pickup tray. 4. Execute the service mode item. (Lv.1) COPIER > FUNCTION > CCD > DF-WLVL2 5. Again, Set A4 or LTR paper in the copyboard glass, close the DADF. 6. Execute the service mode item. (Lv.1) COPIER > FUNCTION > CCD > DF-WLVL3 7. Remove the paper from copyboard glass, set it in the DADF document pickup tray. 8. Perform service mode item. (Lv.1) COPIER > FUNCTION > CCD > DF-WLVL4 4. After turning OFF/ON the power, make a copy and check the copied image. 5. Write the value in service label (inside the PCB cover). (Lv.1) COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > DFTBK-R , DFTBK-G , DFTBK-B , DFTBK-BW (Lv.1) COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > 100DF2RG , 100DF2GB



■ Original Width Volume a. AB size 1. Set the slide guide of the original tray to [A4/A3] position. 2. Select and highlight the following service mode item and press OK key. (Lv.1) FEEDER > FUNCTION > TRY-A4 3. Set the slide guide of the original tray to [A5R] position. 4. Select and highlight the following service mode item and press OK key. (Lv.1) FEEDER > FUNCTION > TRY-A5R b. Inch size 1. Set the slide guide of the original tray to [LTR/11x17] position. 2. Select and highlight the following service mode item and press OK key. (Lv.1) FEEDER > FUNCTION > TRY-LTR 3. Set the slide guide of the original tray to [STMT/LTRR/LGL] position. 4. Select and highlight the following service mode item and press OK key. (Lv.1) FEEDER > FUNCTION > TRY-LTRR



■ Post-separation sensor 1/2/3, Registration sensor, Lead sensor 1, Delivery sensor NOTE: Be sure to clean the surface of prism before adjustment. Also, make sure that there is no paper in DADF.



1. Execute the output adjustment of the sensor. (Lv.1) FEEDER > FUNCTION > SENS-INT



583



5. Adjustment



■ Reader Controller PCB ● Adjustment before replacement/ RAM clear 1. If necessary,output the servise mode setting values by P-PRINT before execution. (Lv.1) COPIER > FUNCTION > MISC-P > P-PRINT 2. Backup of Reader Controller PCB SRAM. (Lv.2)COPIER > FUNCTION > SYSTEM > RSRAMBUP



● Procedure of parts replacement Refer to “Removing the Reader Controller PCB” on page 388.



● Adjustment when Replacing the Parts 1. Using SST, download the newest system software (R-CON). 2. Perform RAM clear. (Lv.1) COPIER > FUNCTION > CLEAR > R-CON 3. Turn the connecting equipment OFF/ON. (Lv.2) COPIER > FUNCTION > SYSTEM > RSRAMRES(Restore) 4. Perform the input or adjustment for MTF value. 1. Input the MTF value of P-PRINT outputted before replacement. (Lv.1) COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > MTF2-M1 - MTF2-M12 , MTF2-S1 - MTF2-S12 2. Input the MTF value of P-PRINT outputted before replacement. (Lv.1) COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > MTF-M1 - MTF-M12 , MTF-S1 - MTF-S12 3. Perform the MTF filter coefficient computation (Lv.1) COPIER > FUNCTION > CCD > MTF-CLC 5. Input the value written the service label (the inside of PCB cover) (Total: 42 items). (Lv.1) COPIER > ADJUST > ADJ-XY > ADJ-X, ADJ-Y, ADJ-Y-DF, STRD-POS , ADJ-X-MG, ADJ-Y-DF2 (Lv.1) COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > W-PLT-X, W-PLT-Y, W-PLT-Z , SH-TRGT , DFTAR-R, DFTAR-G, DFTAR-B, DFTAR-BW , DFTBK-R, DFTBK-G, DFTBK-B, DFTBK-BW , DFCH2R2, DFCH2R10 , DFCH2B2, DFCH2B10 , DFCH2G2, DFCH2G10 , DFCH2K2, DFCH2K10 , DFCH-R2, DFCH-R10 , DFCH-B2, DFCH-B10 , DFCH-G2, DFCH-G10 , DFCH-K2, DFCH-K10 , 100-RG, 100GB (Lv.2) COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > 100DF2RG, 100DF2GB (Lv.1) COPIER > ADJUST > PASCAL > OFST-P-K 6. Perform computation for front & back linearity matching. (Lv.1) COPIER > FUNCTION > CCD > DF-LNR 7. Input the value written in the service label (inside PCB cover). (Lv.1) FEEDER > ADJUST > DOCST, LA-SPEED, DOCST2, LA-SPD2 8. Perform output adjustment of the sensor. (Lv.1) FEEDER > FUNCTION > SENS-INT



584



5. Adjustment 9. Adjust tray width. Perform either AB system or Inch system. a. AB system adjustment. 1. Adjust the slide guide to the index “A4/A3”. 2. Select the item in the service mode. (Lv.1) FEEDER > FUNCTION > TRY-A4 3. Press OK, and register the A4 width. 4. Adjust the slide guide to the index “A5R”. 5. Select the item in the service mode. (Lv.1) FEEDER > FUNCTION > TRY- A5R 6. Press OK, and register the A5R width. b.Inch system adjustment. 1. Adjust the slide guide to the index “LTR/ 11x17”. 2. Select the item in the service mode. (Lv.1) FEEDER > FUNCTION > TRY-LTR 3. Press OK, and register the letter width. 4. Adjust the slide guide to the index “STMT/ LTRR/ LGL”. 5. Select the item in the service mode. (Lv.1) FEEDER > FUNCTION > TRY- LTRR 6. Press OK, and register the LTRR width. 10. Make an output of P-PRINT. (Lv.1) COPIER > FUNCTION > MISC-P > P-PRINT 11. Store the outputted P-PRINT into the service book. 12. After turning OFF/ON the power, make a copy and check the copied image.



■ Reader Scanner Unit ● Procedure of parts replacement Refer to “Removing the Scanner Unit (Reader)” on page 384



● Adjustment when Replacing the Parts 1. Input the service label value packaged in the Scanner Unit content. (Lv.1) COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > 100-RG , 100-GB 2. Perform sampling of B&W shading target. (Lv.1) COPIER > FUNCTION > CCD > BW-TGT 3. Perform white level adjustment. 1. Set A4 or LTR paper in the copyboard glass, close the DADF. CAUTION: If white level is adjusted in the small width paper, there is possibility that it will not adjust. 2. Execute the service mode item. (Lv.1) COPIER > FUNCTION > CCD > DF-WLVL1 3. Remove the paper from copyboard glass, set it in the DADF document pickup tray. 4. Execute the service mode item. (Lv.1) COPIER > FUNCTION > CCD > DF-WLVL2 5. Again, Set A4 or LTR paper in the copyboard glass, close the DADF. 6. Execute the service mode item. (Lv.1) COPIER > FUNCTION > CCD > DF-WLVL3 7. Remove the paper from copyboard glass, set it in the DADF document pickup tray. 8. Perform service mode item. (Lv.1) COPIER > FUNCTION > CCD > DF-WLVL4 4. After turning OFF/ON the power, make a copy and check the copied image. 5. Write the value in service label (inside the PCB cover). (Lv.1) COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > DFTAR-R , DFTAR-G , DFTAR-B , DFTAR-BW,



585



5. Adjustment SH-TRGT , 100-RG , 100-GB



■ Copyboard Glass ● Procedure of parts replacement • Refer to “Cleaning the Copyboard Glass (Large)” on page 395. • Refer to “Cleaning the Copyboard Glass (Small)” on page 396.



● Adjustment when Replacing the Parts 1. Input the white level data (barcode value in the copyboard glass right upper) of the standard white plate. (Lv.1) COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > W-PLT-X , W-PLT-Y , W-PLT-Z



Label



* 820686679349 *



W- PLT- X



W- PLT- Z W- PLT- Y



2. Perform sampling of the B&W shading target. (Lv.1) COPIER > FUNCTION > CCD > BW-TGT 3. Perform white level adjustment. 1. Set A4 or LTR paper in the copyboard glass, close the DADF. CAUTION: If white level is adjusted in the small width paper, there is possibility that it will not adjust. 2. Perform service mode item. (Lv.1) COPIER > FUNCTION > CCD > DF-WLVL1 3. Remove the paper from copyboard glass, set it in the DADF document pickup tray. 4. Perform service mode item. (Lv.1) COPIER > FUNCTION > CCD > DF-WLVL2 5. Again, Set A4 or LTR paper in the copyboard glass, close the DADF. 6. Perform service mode item. (Lv.1) COPIER > FUNCTION > CCD > DF-WLVL3 7. Remove the paper from copyboard glass, set it in the DADF document pickup tray. 8. Perform service mode item. (Lv.1) COPIER > FUNCTION > CCD > DF-WLVL4 4. Write the value in the service label (inside the PCB cover). (Lv.1) COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > SH-TRGT , DFTAR-R , DFTAR-G , DFTAR-B , DFTAR-BW, DFTBK-R , DFTBK-G , DFTBK-B , DFTBK-BW



586



5. Adjustment



■ Hinge Unit (Left/Right) ● Procedure of parts replacement Refer to “Removing the Hinge Unit (Right)” on page 325. Refer to “Removing the Hinge Unit (Left)” on page 326.



● Adjustment when Replacing the Parts When replacing the Hinge(Left/Right), in the following procedures. No.



Item



Description



Reference



[1]



Left Hinge Slant Adjust- Left Hinge Slant Adjustment ment



“Left Hinge Slant Adjustment ” on page 587



[2]



Magnet Catch Adjustment



“Magnet Catch Adjustment ” on page 588



[3]



Hinge Pressure Adjust- Hinge Pressure Adjustment ment



[4]



Height Adjustment



Magnet Catch Adjustment



“Hinge Pressure Adjustment ” on page 590



Checking the Height of the Height Adjustment Boss on the “Checking the height of front height Front Side adjustment roll 1” on page 367 Left Hinge Height Adjustment



“ Left Hinge Height Adjustment 1” on page 296



Right Hinge Height Adjustment



“Right Hinge Height Adjustment” on page 573



Checking the Height of the Height Adjustment Boss on the “Checking the height of front height Front Side adjustment roll 2” on page 297 Checking the Height of the Height Adjustment Boss on the “Checking the height of rear height Rear Side adjustment roll.” on page 297 Left Hinge Height Adjustment



“Left Hinge Height Adjustment 2” on page 575



Left Hinge Slant Adjustment CAUTION: Execute this adjustment after releasing the angle restriction (opening angle at 90 deg). “Angle Restriction Release (Opening Angle at 90 deg)” on page 570 1. Loosen the fixing nut on the back of the left hinge. 2. Turn the bolt with hexagonal hole, and move the Fixation Member to the center marking line among the 7 marking lines (4th line). To move it forward: rotate it clockwise To move it backward: rotate it counter clockwise



Hexagon socket bolt



Fixing material Marking line



3. Tighten the fixing nut after adjustment.



587



Fixing nut



5. Adjustment 4. Check that the White Plate is not placed on the Size Index. If it is placed on the index, install it again while referring to Parts Replacement and Cleaning Removing the DADF White Plate.



ADF



ADF



White Plate



Index Sheet Reader Unit



Index Sheet White Plate Reader Unit



ADF



ADF



Index Sheet



White Plate Reader Unit



White Plate Index Sheet Reader Unit



Magnet Catch Adjustment 1. Remove the Front Cover.



x5



x2



2. Loosen the screw of the Magnet Catch. (Backlash state)



588



5. Adjustment



Loosen



3. Push the left upper side of the ADF until the Height Adjustment Boss on the front side is in contact with the Stream Reading Glass, and tighten the screw of the Magnet Catch. NOTE: Locations of the Height Adjustment Boss on the front side and the Stream Reading Glass Stream reading glass



Height adjustment roll



Tighten



589



5. Adjustment CAUTION: Be sure that the Magnet Catch is not tilted.



4. Install the Front Cover.



Hinge Pressure Adjustment 1. Hold the handle of the ADF Front Cover, and release the Magnet Catch.



Lose hold



Release the lever



CAUTION: Release it while paying attention not to put opening force.



590



5. Adjustment 2. Check that the flip-up angle of the ADF falls within the following range. CAUTION: Standard: 184 mm to 246 mm (Angle: 18.5 degrees to 25 degrees)



3. If it is less than 184 mm, turn the hexagonal wrench clockwise. CAUTION: • Do not rotate it by more than one turn. • The angle never becomes larger than 25 degrees due to initial setting of the hinge.



184mm㹼 246mm 90°



Hex wrench



NOTE: Service tool: Hexagonal wrench (8 mm)



Height Adjustment Checking the height of front height adjustment roll 1 1. Remove the DADF Glass Retainer. • 2 Screws



x2



591



5. Adjustment 2. Close the DADF. 3. Check that the 2 height adjustment rolls on the front/rear left come contact with the stream reading glass. NOTE: Turning ON the LED helps the check operation. (Lv.1) COPIER > FUNCTION > MISC-R > SCANLAMP



Height adjustment roll



Stream reading glass



Height adjustment roll



4. If not, execute the height adjustment of Left Hinge.



Left Hinge Height Adjustment 1 Check that the Height Adjustment Rolls on the rear come contact with the stream reading glass. 1. Rotate the fixing screw on top of the left hinge to adjust it. To remove the space on the front: rotate it clockwise (black arrow direction) To remove the space on the rear or both sides: rotate it counterclockwise (white arrow direction) Blanking cover



Fixing screw



592



5. Adjustment



Right Hinge Height Adjustment 1. Check that the space between the ADF and the Reader is 1 to 2 mm. If the space is less than 1 mm or more than 2 mm, make adjustment.



1.0 mm-2.0mm



2. Make adjustment by turning the Fixation Screw on the upper side of the Right Hinge. If the space is larger than 2 mm: Turn the screw counterclockwise (white arrow). If the space is less than 1 mm: Turn the screw clockwise (black arrow).



Claw



Blanking cover Fixing screw



Checking the height of front height adjustment roll 2 1. Prepare the paper (plain) with approx. 10 mm in width and approx. 200 mm in length. 2. Align the edge of prepared paper with the contact point of DADF Glass Retainer and the Stream Reading Glass.



593



5. Adjustment Reading Glass



Height adjustment roll



Plate



20



0. 0



m



m



Paper



10



.0 mm



CAUTION: Place the paper in the position where it does not contact with the Platen Roller 1. If it is placed in the position where it contacts with the Platen Roller 1, checking cannot be performed correctly.



3. Close the DADF. 4. Pull out the paper in the direction of the arrow and check that there is resistance.



Paper



5. If there is no resistance, perform the height adjustment.



Checking the height of rear height adjustment roll. 1. Prepare the paper (plain) with approx. 10 mm in width and approx. 200 mm in length. 2. Align the edge of prepared paper with the contact point of DADF Glass Retainer and the Stream Reading Glass.



594



5. Adjustment Height adjustment roll



2



.0 00



mm



Reading Glass



Paper



10 .0 m m



Plate



CAUTION: Place the paper in the position where it does not contact with the Platen Roller 1. If it is placed in the position where it contacts with the Platen Roller 1, checking cannot be performed correctly.



3. Close the DADF. 4. Pull out the paper in the direction of the arrow and check that there is resistance.



Paper



5. If there is no resistance, perform the height adjustment.



Left Hinge Height Adjustment 2 1. Make adjustment by turning the Fixation Screw on the upper side of the Left Hinge. If the front side is not installed properly: Turn the screw clockwise (black arrow). If the rear side or both sides are not installed properly: Turn the screw counterclockwise (white arrow). Blanking cover



Fixing screw



2. Check the height again to make sure that it becomes appropriate. 3. Check that the White Plate is in contact with the Copyboard Glass.



595



5. Adjustment



ADF



ADF



White Plate



Index Sheet Reader Unit



Index Sheet White Plate Reader Unit



ADF



ADF



Index Sheet



White Plate Reader Unit



White Plate Index Sheet Reader Unit



■ Stream Reading Adjustment 1. Create a read position adjustment paper with the paper that is used by customer (white paper). 1. Prepare the paper with 40 mm or more in width and 50 mm or more in height. Tolerance of width 14 mm: -/+ 0.3 2. Draw a straight line 15 mm or more away from the right edge on the paper created in step 1-1) with a pencil (black). Right angle accuracy of paper with line: unnecessary(right angle does not affect the adjustment accuracy). 3. Draw a straight line 14 mm left from the line in step 1-2) (tolerance: -/+ 0.3) with a pencil (black). Approx. 40 mm



Approx. 50 mm 14 mm



596



15 mm or more



5. Adjustment 2. Align the straight line with the clearance between the sheet and the mold, and fix the read position adjustment paper with a piece of elastic tape. Position accuracy of read position adjustment paper: -/+0.3 mm Elastic tape



Straight line



Sheet Mold



3. Execute the following service mode item. (Lv.1) COPIER > FUNCTION > INSTALL > STRD-POS



■ Registration Roller Wheel Skew Adjustment CAUTION: Execute this adjustment after the right angle adjustment.



NOTE: On this machine, same registration roller/roller wheel is used to correct the skew on both sides.



1. Checking the skew 1. Set a test chart on DADF and make a 2-sided print.( “Preparation or Creation of Test Chart” on page 293) 2. Compare the rear [A] with front [B] on the leading edge on both front and back sides on the printed paper to check the leading edge image margin. Printed image



A



B



Feed direction



597



5. Adjustment 2. Adjustment procedure 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.



Remove the DADF Front Cover. Refer to Disassembly/Assembly Removing the DADF Front Cover Remove the DADF Rear Cover. Refer to Disassembly/Assembly Removing the DADF Rear Cover Remove the DADF Left cover.Refer to Disassembly/Assembly Removing the DADF Left Cover Remove the Feeder cover.Refer to Disassembly/Assembly Removing the Feeder Cover Remove the Screw[2] of the Positioning Plate[1] and temporary tighten it in the screw hole[3].



x1



[1]



[3]



x1



[2]



6. Loosen the Screw[1] and adjust the Positioning Plate[2] by referencing the mark[3]. In case of A > B, move it upward. In case of A < B, move it downward.



[2]



[3] [1]



7. After adjustment, tighten the 2 screws. 8. Printout a test chart again and check that the skew is corrected.



Main Controller ■ Hard Disk ● Overview The following describes the tasks when replacing the HDD. Note that procedures to backup/restore the data in the HDD is required when replacing the HDD. Perform backup/restoration based on the following. Backup List Backup target data



Backup Method User



Service



DCM



Power OFF



(excluding DCM) Address List



Yes*1



-



Yes*9



-



Forwarding Settings



Yes*1



-



Yes*9



-



Preferences (Except for Paper Type Management Settings)



-



-



Yes*9



Yes*10



Adjustment/Maintenance



-



-



Yes*9



Yes*10



Settings / Registration



598



5. Adjustment Backup target data



Backup Method User



Service



DCM



Power OFF



(excluding DCM) Function Settings (Except for Printer Custom Settings,Forwarding Settings)



-



-



Yes*9



Yes*10



Set Destination (Except for Address List)



-



-



Yes*9



Yes*10



Management Settings (Except for Address List)



-



-



Yes*9



Yes*10



User authentication information used for local device authentication of UA (User Authentication)



Yes*2



-



Yes*9



-



Printer Settings



Yes*1



-



Yes*9



Yes*10



Set Paper Information



Yes*1



-



Yes*9



-



Setting items for each menu in Main Menu (Copy, Scan and Send, Fax, Scan and Store, Access Stored Files, Fax/I-Fax Inbox) Favorite Settings



Yes*1



Yes*8



Yes*9



-



Default Settings



-



Yes*8



Yes*9



-



Shortcut settings for "Options"



-



Yes*8



Yes*9



-



Previous Settings



-



Yes*8



-



-



Button Size information



-



-



Yes*9



-



Wallpaper Setting



-



-



Yes*9



-



Button information in Quick Menu



-



-



Yes*9



-



Restrict Quick Menu



-



-



Yes*9



-



Button settings in Main Menu



-



-



Yes*9



-



Button settings on the top of the screen



-



-



Yes*9



-



Wallpaper Setting for Main Menu



-



-



Yes*9



-



Other settings for Main Menu



-



-



Yes*9



-



Mail Box Settings (Register Box Name, PIN, Time Until File Auto Delete, Printer upon Storing from Printer Driver)



Yes*4



-



Yes*9



-



Image data in Mail Box, Fax Inbox, and Memory RX Inbox



Yes*4



-



-



-



-



-



Yes*9



Yes*10



-



Yes*8



Yes*9



-



Setting items for Quick Menu



Setting items for Main Menu



Function Settings > Store/Access Files



Network Place Settings Web browser settings Web Access setting information MEAP settings MEAP application



-



Yes*8



-



-



License files for MEAP applications



Yes*5



-



-



-



Data saved using MEAP applications



Yes*5



△*8



Yes*9



-



-



Yes*8



-



-



-



-



-



-



Job logs



-



-



-



-



Audit Log



Yes*6



-



-



-



Key Pair and Server Certificate in Certificate Settings in TCP/IP Settings in Network Set-tings in System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen)



-



-



Yes*9



-



Auto Adjust Gradation setting values



-



-



-



-



PS font



-



-



-



-



Key information to be used for encryption when TPM is OFF



-



-



-



-



Yes*7



-



-



-



Display Language



-



-



Yes *9



-



Accessibility Settings



-



-



Yes *9



-



Default Screen



-



-



Yes *9



-



Default Job Settings



-



-



Yes *9



-



SMS (Service Management Service) password Universal data settings Unsent documents (documents waiting to be sent with the Delayed Send mode)



Key and settings information to be used for encryption when TPM is ON Personal Settings



599



5. Adjustment Backup target data



Backup Method User



Service



DCM



Power OFF



(excluding DCM) Quick Menu (Personal, layout of the Personal tab, and background of the Personal tab) Address Book (Personal/Group) Key ring (for host machine functions) Personal settings of MEAP



-



-



Yes *9



-



Yes *1



-



Yes *9



-



-



-



Yes *9



-



Yes *11



Yes *8



Yes *9



-



-



-



△*9



Yes*10



Service Mode Service Mode setting values (MN-CON)



*1: Remote UI > Settings/Registration > Management Settings > Data Management > Import or Export *2: Remote UI > Settings/Registration > Management Settings > User Management > Authentication Management > User Management *3: Remote UI > Quick Menu > Export *4: Remote UI > Settings/Registration > Management Settings > Data Management > Back Up or Restore *5: Remote UI > Service Management Service *6: Remote UI > Settings/Registration > Management Settings > Device Management > Save Audit Log Audit log that was exported cannot be put back to the device from which the log was exported. *7: Settings/Registration > Management Settings > Data Management > TPM Settings *8: Download mode > [5]: Backup/Restore > [3] : MEAP Backup > Meapback.bin Backup is possible using SST or USB memory The data saved using a MEAP application can be backed up only when the MEAP application has a backup function. *9: Backup Method using DCM When You set it in COPIER> OPTION> USER> SMD-EXPT> ON, a backup/restore is possible in Service Mode Settings from the Remote UI. There is a backup button on the TOP page of the service mode. • Remote UI > Settings/Registration > Management Settings > Data Management > Import/Export All • Remote UI > Settings/Registration > Management Settings > Data Management > Import/Export • Service mode top screen > BACKUP • Web Service *10: The setting value that was set when the main power was turned OFF the last time is automatically backed up to the Flash PCB. When a HDD is replaced with a new one, the setting value is automatically inherited from the Flash PCB at the time of HDD formatting. *11: iWEMC DAM plug-in



● Actions before Parts Replacement 1. Backup the required data based on the “Table: Backup List” on page 598. 2. Execute the following service mode and printout the setting data to be ready in case of failing to restore the data. COPIER > FUNCTION > MISC-P > USER-PRT COPIER > FUNCTION > MISC-P > P-PRINT



● Aftter Replacement 1. HDD format Start the machine in safe mode, and format all partitions using SST or a USB memory. 2. Turning OFF and ON the main power switch 3. Restoring the backup data 4. Resetting/registering the data While referring to the list which was printed before replacement, reset/register the data. 5. When the user generates and adds the encryption key, certificate and/or CA certificate, request the user to generate them again.



■ Main controller PCB 1 When replacing the Main Controller PCB 1, perform the following works. 1. Replacing method ( Refer to “Procedure” on page 406) 2. Aftter Replacing ( Refer to “Aftter Replacement” on page 407)



600



5. Adjustment CAUTION: Prohibited Operation Do not transfer the following parts to another model (which has a different serial number). If you fail to do so, the Main Body does not activate normally and this might cause to fail the restoration. • Main controller PCB1 • FLASH PCB • TPM PCB • Memorey PCB



● Aftter Replacement 1. Replace parts from an old PCB to a new PCB. • Memorey PCB • FLASH PCB • TPM PCB



■ Main controller PCB 2 The actions at parts replacement are only for replacement of the Main Controller PCB 2.



■ TPM PCB When replacing the TPM PCB, refer to "Security Function (Encryption Key, Certificate and Protection of Password)" . ( Refer to System Service Manual )



■ FLASH PCB Before replacing the FLASH PCB, contact the sales company. CAUTION: Points to Note Replace the Parts Do not remove it unless a failure is suspected. A FLASH PCB which had been used in another machine cannot be reused.



■ LCD Unit (Flat Control Panel), Control Panel CPU PCB (Flat Control Panel) When replacing the LCD Unit (Flat Control Panel) or the Control Panel CPU PCB (Flat Control Panel), perform the following works. 1. Replacing method LCD Unit (Flat Control Panel) (Refer to“Removing the LCD Unit (Flat Control Panel) ” on page 419 ) Control Panel CPU PCB (Flat Control Panel) (Refer to “Removing the Control Panel CPU PCB(Flat Control Panel Unit)” on page 412 )



601



5. Adjustment



● Aftter Replacement < Adjusting Touch Pannel > 1. If the coordinate on the Touch Panel is not correct, adjustment of the Touch Panel may not be performed. In that case, the Touch Panel can be adjusted by performing the following menu operation using hardware keys. • Press [5] key 3 times on the service mode top screen.



■ LCD Unit (Upright Control Panel Unit), Control Panel CPU PCB (Upright Control Panel Unit) When replacing the LCD Unit (Upright Control Panel Unit) or the Control Panel CPU PCB (Upright Control Panel Unit), perform the following works. 1. Replacing method LCD Unit (Upright Control Panel Unit) (Refer to“Removing the LCD Unit (Upright Control Panel Unit)” on page 430) Control Panel CPU PCB (Upright Control Panel Unit) (Refer to“Removing the Control Panel CPU PCB(Upright Control Panel Unit)” on page 428)



602



5. Adjustment



● Aftter Replacement < Adjusting Touch Pannel > 1. If the coordinate on the Touch Panel is not correct, adjustment of the Touch Panel may not be performed. In that case, the Touch Panel can be adjusted by performing the following menu operation using hardware keys. • Press [5] key 3 times on the service mode top screen.



Laser Exposure System ■ Procedure of parts replacement Refer to “Removing the Laser Scanner Unit” on page 435



■ Adjustment when Replacing the Parts 1. Execute the potential control. (Lv.1) COPIER > FUNCTION > DPC > DPC2 2. Write the value in service label. (Lv.1) COPIER > ADJUST > LASER > PVE-OFST (Adjust of write start position of laser)



Image Formation System ■ Primary Charging Wire ● Procedure of parts replacement Refer to “Replacing the Primary Charging Wire” on page 447.



● Adjustment when Replacing the Parts 1. Clear the parts counter. (Lv.1)COPIER > COUNTER > PRDC-1 > PRM-WIRE



603



5. Adjustment 2. Clean the Charging Wire. (necessary time : about 120 second) (Lv.1)COPIER > FUNCTION > CLEANING > WIRE-CLN 3. Init of Primary Charging Wire current VL (Lv.1)COPIER > FUNCTION > CLEAR > GRD-CRNT 4. Execute the potential control. (Lv.1)COPIER > FUNCTION > DPC > DPC2



■ Primary Charging Assembly ● Procedure of parts replacement Refer to “Removing the Primary Charging Assembly” on page 439.



● Adjustment when Replacing the Parts 1. Clear the parts counter. (Lv.1)COPIER > COUNTER > DRBL-1 > PRM-UNIT 2. Output a halftone image using the service mode. (Lv.1)COPIER > TEST > PG > TYPE : 5 3. Execute the following procedure according to the density difference on the front and rear sides of the test print image. • When the front side test print image is dark, execute step 3. • When the rear side test print image is dark, execute step 4. • When there is no uneven density, execute step 5 and the following. When the front side test print image is dark NOTE: • When the front side test print image is dark [1], execute step 3 until the density becomes even. When the density becomes even, execute step 5 and the following. • When the adjustment screw is turned clockwise, the Charging Wire goes down and up (gap between grid and Charging Wire becomes narrow and wide). As a result, the density of output image becomes light.



CAUTION: • Be sure to adjust the dark side (density of the test print image) to be the light side.



604



5. Adjustment 4. Make the resin screws [A] and [C] a full turn clockwise. While referring to the replacement procedure of the Primary Charging Assembly, install it to the main body, output a test print and check the image. CAUTION: • Since uneven density might occur, be sure to adjust by turning the 2 adjustment screws with the same amount. [1]



[C]



[A]



When the rear side test print image is dark NOTE: • When the rear side test print image is dark [2], execute step 4 until the density becomes even. When the density becomes even, execute step 5 and the following. • When the adjustment screw is turned clockwise, the Charging Wire goes down and up (gap between grid and Charging Wire becomes narrow and wide). As a result, the density of output image becomes light.



CAUTION: • Be sure to adjust the dark side (density of the test print image) to be the light side.



605



5. Adjustment 5. Make the resin screws [B] and [D] a full turn clockwise. While referring to the replacement procedure of the Primary Charging Assembly, install it to the main body, output a test print and check the image. CAUTION: • Since uneven density might occur, be sure to adjust by turning the 2 adjustment screws with the same amount. [2]



[D]



[B]



6. Clean the Charging Wire. (necessary time : about 120 second) (Lv.1)COPIER > FUNCTION > CLAENING > WIRE-CLN 7. Init of Primary Charging Wire current VL. (Lv.1)COPIER > FUNCTION > CLEAR > GRD-CRNT 8. Execute the potential control. (Lv.1)COPIER > FUNCTION > DPC > DPC2 9. Execute the density correction using the user mode. Settings/Registration > Adjustment/Maintenance > Adjust Image Quality > Correct Density



■ Pre-transfer Charging Assembly ● Procedure of parts replacement Refer to “Removing the Pre-transfer Charging Assembly” on page 449.



606



5. Adjustment



● Adjustment when Replacing the Parts 1. Clear the parts counter. (Lv.1) COPIER > COUNTER > DRBL-1 > PO-UNIT 2. Clean the Charging Wire. (necessary time : about 120 second) (Lv.1) COPIER > FUNCTION > CLEANING > WIRE-CLN



■ Pre-transfer Charging Wire ● Procedure of parts replacement Refer to “Replacing the Pre-transfer Charging Wire” on page 452.



● Adjustment when Replacing the Parts 1. Clear the parts counter. (Lv.1) COPIER > COUNTER > PRDC-1 > PO-WIRE 2. Clean the Charging Wire. (necessary time : about 120 second) (Lv.1) COPIER > FUNCTION > CLEANING > WIRE-CLN



■ Photosensitive Drum ● Procedure of parts replacement Refer to “Removing the Photosensitive Drum” on page 461.



● Adjustment when Replacing the Parts 1. Remove the EEROM. • 1 Screw • 1 Connector



1x



1x



607



5. Adjustment 2. Replace the ROM connected to the host machine with the drum ROM included in the drum. CAUTION: If the ROM is not replaced, the replaced drum and the drum-unique data stored in the ROM are not matched. As a result, the 2D shading is not functioned normally.



3. Affix the ID Label included in the drum to the inside of the Front Cover.



4. Activate the drum replacement mode. (Lv.1) COPIER > FUNCTION > INSTALL > DRM-INIT 5. Check the 2-dimensional shading ROM. (Lv.1) COPIER > FUNCTION > 2D-SHADE > 2D-READ 6. Execute the auto adjust gradation using the user mode. Settings/Registration > Adjustment/Maintenance > Image Quality Adjustment > Auto Adjust Gradation



■ Drum Side Seals (Front and Rear) ● Procedure of parts replacement Refer to “Removing the Side Seal” on page 466.



608



5. Adjustment



● Adjustment when Replacing the Parts 1. Applying Tospearl Apply Tospearl on the surfaces of the Drum Side Seals (Front and Rear) and adhere it uniformly with lint-free paper. In order to reduce adhesion of toner at both ends of the Photosensitive Drum. Tospearl



Sheet



lint-free paper



2. Clear the parts counter. (Lv.1) COPIER > COUNTER > DRBL-1 > BS-SL-F (Lv.1) COPIER > COUNTER > DRBL-1 > BS-SL-R



■ Developing Cylinder/Developing Roller ● Procedure of parts replacement Refer to “Removing the Developing Cylinder and the Developing Roller” on page 469.



● Adjustment when Replacing the Parts 1. Clear the parts counter. (Lv.1) COPIER > COUNTER > DRBL-1 > DVG-CYL 2. Supplying Developing Assembly toner. (Lv.1) COPIER > FUNCTION > INSTALL > TONER-S



■ Potential Sensor / Potential Control PCB ● Procedure of parts replacement Refer to“Removing the Potential Control PCB Unit” on page 497.



● Adjustment when Replacing the Parts 1. Adjust the Potential Sensor offset. (Lv.1) COPIER > FUNCTION > DPC > OFST



609



5. Adjustment



■ ETB Unit / ETB ● Procedure of parts replacement • Refer to“Removing the ETB Unit” on page 473. • Refer to“Removing the ETB” on page 476.



● Adjustment when Replacing the Parts 1. Clear the ETB control counter. (Lv.1)COPIER > FUNCTION > CLEAR > TR-BLT Parts counter(COPIER > COUNTER > DRBL-1 > TR-BLT)is also cleared coincidentally.



■ Waste Toner Container ● Procedure of parts replacement Refer to “Removing the Waste Toner Container” on page 480.



● Adjustment when Replacing the Parts 1. Set the new Waste Toner Container. NOTE: When replacing the Waste Toner Container with a new one after preparation warning or full warning is displayed, display on the LUI is cleared after a certain period of time has passed. The parts counter ((Lv.1) COPIER > COUNTER > DRBL-1 > WST-TNR) is automatically cleared at replacement.



NOTE: Related service modes when a user replaces the Waste Toner Container The Waste Toner Container preparation warning message can be set to be displayed or hidden by executing the following service mode. (Lv.1) COPIER > OPTION > DSPLY-SW > WT-WARN Setting value 0: Hide, 1: Display Procedure for replacing the Waste Toner Container can be set to be displayed or hidden by executing the following service mode. When a user replaces the Waste Toner Container, set 1. (Lv.1) COPIER > OPTION > USER > W-TN-DSP Setting value 0: OFF, 1: ON



Fixing System ■ Fixing Roller ● Procedure of parts replacement Refer to “Removing the Fixing Roller, Insulating Bush and Thrust Stopper” on page 515.



● Adjustment when Replacing the Parts 1. Grease Application Apply approx. 20mg of grease (MOLYKOTE HP-300; CK-8012) to inner circumference and outer circumference of the Insulating Bush so that all circumferences are covered with white film. 2. Clear the parts counter. (Lv.1) COPIER > COUNTER > DRBL-1 > FX-UP-RL (Lv.1) COPIER > COUNTER > DRBL-1 > FX-IN-BS (Lv.1) COPIER > COUNTER > DRBL-1 > FX-RTNR



610



5. Adjustment



External Auxiliary System ■ DC Controller PCB ● Before Parts Replacement CAUTION: When replacing the DC Controller PCB, be sure to use a new one. Do not use the DC Controller PCB which was used with another machine. 1. Execute the following service mode to output setting values for just in case of restoration failure of backup data. COPIER > FUNCTION > MISC-P > P-PRINT 2. Execute the following service mode to back up the service mode setting values. (Lv.2) COPIER > FUNCTION > SYSTEM > DSRAMBUP During execution, "ACTIVE" flashes in the status column of the service mode. It takes approx. 2 minutes. Upon success, [OK!] is displayed in the status column. 3. After confirming that [OK!] is displayed in the status column of the service mode, turn OFF the power of the machine.



● Procedure of parts replacement Refer to “Removing the DC Controller PCB” on page 554 .



● Works During Parts Replacement 1. If the firmware combination is incorrect, execute an update with the Automatic Update function.



Screen example CAUTION: Automatic Update is available only when the following Service Mode settings are at 1 or 2. (Lv.2) COPIER > OPTION > FNC-SW > VER-CHNG



2. When the setting value data is backed up before parts replacement, execute the following service mode to restore the backed-up setting value data. (Lv.2) COPIER > FUNCTION > SYSTEM > DSRAMRES During execution, "ACTIVE" flashes in the status column of the service mode. It takes approx. 2 minutes. Upon success, [OK!] is displayed in the status column. 3. When setting values cannot be backed up before replacement or when the backed-up data cannot be restored in this step due to reasons such as damage of the DC Controller PCB, enter the values of each service mode item written on the service label or P-PRINT before parts replacement.



611



6



Troubleshooting Making Initial Checks........................ 613 Test Print...........................................614 Image Faults..................................... 619 Feed Faults....................................... 640 Other................................................. 641 Debug Log.........................................655 Startup System Failure Diagnosis.....673 Controller Self Diagnosis...................682



6. Troubleshooting



Making Initial Checks List of Initial Check Items Item Site Environment



No.



Detail



1



The voltage of the power supply is as rated (±10%).



2



The site is not a high temperature / humidity environment (near a water faucet, water boiler, humidifi er), and it is not in a cold place. The machine is not near a source of fire or dust.



3



The site is not subject to ammonium gas.



4



The site is not exposed to direct rays of the sun. (Otherwise, provide curtains.)



5



The site is well ventilated, and the floor keeps the machine level.



6



The machine's power plug remains connected to the power outlet.



7



The paper is of a recommended type.



8



The paper is not moist. Try paper fresh out of package.



9



Check the cassette and the manual feed tray to see if the paper is not in excess of a specific level.



10



If a transparency is used, check to make sure that it is placed in the correct orientation in the manual feed tray.



Checking the Durables



11



Check the table of durables to see if any has reached the end of its life.



Checking the Periodically Replaced Parts



12



Check the scheduled servicing table and the periodically replaced parts table, and replace any part that has reached the time of replacement.



Checking the Paper Checking the Placement of Paper



613



Check



6. Troubleshooting



Test Print Overview P G T Y P E



Pattern



Image check item



PCB to generate PG Gra- Fog Tran Bla Wh Un- Un- Right Side Shoc Magda- gin sfer ck ite even even angle regk nification g fail- line line pitch den- accu- istration ure sity racy tion ratio (rear Straigh / t line front accu) racy



0 Normal copy/print



-



1 Grid



Yes



Yes



Yes



Main Controller PCB 2



2 17 gradations Tbic rank 2



Yes



Yes Yes



Main Controller PCB 2



3 17 gradations 600dpi (134line screen or 141-line screen)



Yes



Yes Yes



Main Controller PCB 2



4 Solid white



Yes



Main Controller PCB 2



5 Halftone (density: 80H, Tbic rank 2, without image correction)



Yes



Yes Yes



Yes



Yes



Yes



Main Controller PCB 2



6 Halftone (density: 80H, 134line screen or 141-line screen, without image correction)



Yes



Yes Yes



Yes



Yes



Yes



Main Controller PCB 2



7 Solid black



Yes



Yes



Yes



Yes



Main Controller PCB 2



8 Horizontal line (4 dots, 27 spaces)



Yes Yes



Yes



Yes



Main Controller PCB 2



9 Horizontal line (6 dots, 50 spaces)



Yes Yes



Yes



Yes



Main Controller PCB 2



10 Horizontal line (2 dots, 3 spaces)



Yes Yes



Yes



Yes



Main Controller PCB 2



11 Halftone (density: 60H, Tbic rank 2, without image correction)



Yes



Yes Yes



Yes



Yes



12 Halftone (density: 60H, 134line screen or 141-line screen, without image correction)



Yes



Yes Yes



Yes



13 Halftone (density: 30H, Tbic rank 2, without image correction)



Yes



Yes Yes



14 Halftone (density: 30H, 134line screen or 141-line screen, without image correction)



Yes



Yes Yes



Yes



Main Controller PCB 2



Yes



Yes



Main Controller PCB 2



Yes



Yes



Yes



Main Controller PCB 2



Yes



Yes



Yes



Main Controller PCB 2



15 15 to 50: For development



Yes



-



NOTE: When outputting a halftone test print, be sure to use PG TYPE:6 except in the following cases. 1. When checking the image of side registration adjustment, use PG TYPE:11. 2. When the setting value of the following service mode(Lv.2) is "2" (TBIC is used for both the photo part and the text part), use PG TYPE:5. COPIER > OPTION > USER > PH-D-SL2



614



6. Troubleshooting



How to View the Test Print ■ Grid (TYPE=1)



Check item



Check method



Assumed cause



Right angle accuracy/ Straight line accuracy



Check whether lines in the horizontal/ vertical scan- Feed system failure or Laser Scanner Unit failure is ning directions are paralleled to the paper and these considered. lines are at right angles to one another.



Side registration



Check the left margin.



Magnification ratio



Check whether the grid is printed at 9.99mm intervals. ETB and rollers’ feed system failure or laser exposure (Check the image on the second side at duplex print- system failure (drum, Laser Scanner) is considered. ing.)



Floor at the installation site is extremely distorted, or the feed system failure is considered.



■ 17 gradations (TYPE=2/3)



Check item



Check method



Assumed cause



Gradation



Check whether gradation in density is made appropriately.



Drum failure, laser exposure system failure or developing system failure is considered.



Black line



Check whether black lines appear on the image.



Laser light path failure, grid failure, developing system failure, cleaning (drum, ETB) failure or Pre-transfer Charging Assembly failure is considered.



White line



Check whether white lines appear on the image.



Primary Charging Wire failure or developing system failure is considered.



615



6. Troubleshooting



Solid white (TYPE=4)



Check item Fogging



Check method



Assumed cause



Check whether foggy image appears in the blank area.



Drum failure, laser exposure system failure or developing system failure is considered.



Halftone (TYPE=5/6/11/12/13/14)



NOTE: • When outputting a halftone test print, be sure to use PG TYPE:6 except in the following cases. 1. When checking the image of side registration adjustment, use PG TYPE:11. 2. When the setting value of the following service mode(Lv.2) is "2" (TBIC is used for both the photo part and the text part), use PG TYPE:5. COPIER > OPTION > USER > PH-D-SL2 • When changing the density of the test print (TYPE=5), use the following service mode to change the density: COPIER > TEST > PG > DENS-K



Check item



Check method



Assumed cause



Transfer failure



Check the evenness of halftone density. Check whether uneven image or foggy image appears.



Transfer system failure or Pre-transfer Charging Assembly failure is considered.



Black line



Check whether black lines appear on the image.



Laser light path failure, grid failure, developing system failure, cleaning (drum, ETB) failure or Pre-transfer Charging Assembly failure is considered.



White line



Check whether white lines appear on the image.



Primary Charging Wire failure or developing system failure is considered.



616



6. Troubleshooting Check item Uneven pitch



Check method



Assumed cause



Check whether lines appear on the image in the horizontal scanning direction.



Drum failure, developing system failure, laser exposure system failure or driverelated failure is considered.



Uneven density (rear/front) Check the density difference between the front and Primary Charging Assembly failure, drum failure or rear sides. developing system failure is considered. Side registration



Check the left margin.



Floor at the installation site is extremely distorted, or the feed system failure is considered.



Shock



Check whether horizontal lines appear on the image.



ETB and rollers’ feed system failure or laser exposure system failure (drum, Laser Scanner) is considered.



Solid black (TYPE=7)



Check item



Check method



Assumed cause



Transfer failure



Check the evenness of halftone density. Check whether uneven image or foggy image appears.



Uneven pitch



Check whether lines appear on the image in the hor- Drum failure, developing system failure, laser expoizontal scanning direction. sure system failure or drive-related failure is considered.



Uneven density (rear/ front)



Check the density difference between the front and Primary Charging Assembly failure, drum failure or derear sides. veloping system failure is considered.



Horizontal line (TYPE=8/9/10)



617



Transfer system failure or Pre-transfer Charging Assembly failure is considered.



6. Troubleshooting Check item



Check method



Assumed cause



Black line



Check whether black lines appear on the image.



Laser light path failure, grid failure, developing system failure, cleaning (drum, ETB) failure or Pre-transfer Charging Assembly failure is considered.



White line



Check whether white lines appear on the image.



Primary Charging Wire failure or developing system failure is considered.



Uneven pitch



Check whether lines appear on the image in the hori- Drum failure, developing system failure, laser exposure zontal scanning direction. system failure or drive-related failure is considered.



Uneven density (rear/front)



Check the density difference between the front and rear sides.



618



Primary Charging Assembly failure, drum failure or developing system failure is considered.



6. Troubleshooting



Image Faults Parts Pitch Related to Periodical Image Failure Name



Outer Circumference (mm)



Photosensitive Drum



Approx. 264



Developing Cylinder



Approx. 53



Developing Roller



Approx. 79



Transfer Roller



Approx. 50



ETB



Approx. 298



Fixing Roller



Approx. 127



Pressure Roller



Approx. 120



CAUTION: The outer circumference may be different from the width of the image failure depending on the factors including processing speed and/or amount of image shrink/expansion.



Image with a line on the trailing edge [Location] ETB [Cause] Lines occur on the image due to shock when distortion on the belt is released while rotation speed between the ETB and drum differs [Condition] When replacing the ETB [Field Remedy] 1. Output a halftone image with the following conditions and check the output image COPIER > TEST > PG > TYPE 6 COPIER > TEST > PG > PG-PICK A3 (LDR) Select the cassette which the following paper is set:or larger. Image with a line on the trailing edge: Go to step 2. Image without a line on the trailing edge: End 2. Measure the distance from the trailing edge of the image with a line. 3. Use the following service mode to make an adjustment. • Adjust the Transfer Belt speed COPIER > ADJUST > FEED-ADJ > TBLT-SPD A line on the image is located approx. 55mm from the trailing edge: Adjust the value by +10 gradually. A line on the image is located approx. 63mm from the trailing edge: Adjust the value by -10 gradually. 4. Output a halftone image with the condition described in step 1 again and check the image. Image with a line on the trailing edge: Go to step 3. Image without a line on the trailing edge: End [Image Sample]



619



6. Troubleshooting )HHGGLUHFWLRQ



6KRFNLPDJHORFDWHGDSSUR[PP IURPWKHWUDLOLQJHGJH!



Common>Print Settings>Secure Watermark Settings>Adjust Background/Character Contrast 1. Check that the two dimensional shading is enabled. 1:When uneven image occurs 2:When low edge density occurs COPIER>OPTION>IMG-LSR>2D-SHADE 1: Enabled(VD) 2: Enabled(VL) 2. Read the two dimensional shading ROM data. COPIER>FUNCTION>2D-SHADE>2D-READ



620



6. Troubleshooting 3. Read the two dimensional shading ROM data. CAUTION: Be sure to turn OFF and then ON the main power switch after step 2. Uneven density may be reduced by the two dimensional shading correction at the startup.



4. Output a halftone image with the following conditions and check if uneven density occurs. COPIER > TEST > PG > TYPE 6 COPIER > TEST > PG > PG-PICK A3 (LDR) Select the cassette which the following paper is set or larger. When uneven density is seen: Go to step 5. When uneven density is not seen: Procedure is ended.



5. Output a test pattern for two dimensional shading. COPIER > FUNCTION > 2D-SHADE > SHD-P1 1. Set the cassette.Select the cassette which A3 (LDR) or larger paper is set. Select "SHD-P1" and cassette using "numeric keypad". 2. Output 3 sheets of the test pattern. Press OK, output 1 sheet of the test pattern.



621



6. Troubleshooting CAUTION: It is difficult to judge whether uneven potential of the Photosensitive Drum causes uneven density of the output image, so output 3 sheets of the test print and adjust the area where all. (If the same symptom is seen on the same spot of all 3 sheets, it is possibly caused from the Drum.)



NOTE: For the test print, the following 3 types can be output, but basically set SHD-P1 to output. The following shows the use case of each test print. • When the image which uneven density occurs is the halftone image with light density COPIER>FUNCTION>2D-SHADE>SHD-P1 • When the image which uneven density occurs is the halftone image with dark density COPIER>FUNCTION>2D-SHADE>SHD-P2 • When the image which uneven density occurs is the halftone image with dark density COPIER>FUNCTION>2D-SHADE>SHD-P3



6. Check (T-shaped) halftone area of the output test print visually and adjust the area of uneven density. 1. Take a note to write down the values of the following service mode(Lv.2). When the adjustment cannot be performed appropriately, these values are required to return to the initial values. COPIER>FUNCTION>2D-SHADE>M-LINE1 COPIER>FUNCTION>2D-SHADE>M-LINE2 2. Adjust the target horizontal scanning direction (A to O) which uneven density is seen. After selecting "M-LINE1/M-LINE2", select the target horizontal scanning window (A to O), and enter the numerical value using "numerical keypad".(Lv.2) • Horizontal scanning direction A to H COPIER>FUNCTION>2D-SHADE>M-LINE1 • Horizontal scanning direction I to O COPIER>FUNCTION>2D-SHADE>M-LINE2



622



6. Troubleshooting 3. Turn OFF and then ON the main power switch to reflect the setting value. CAUTION: • Be sure to switch the screen after entering the value. Unless the screen is switched, the numerical value is not reflected. (Actually, the value is not reflected on the screen, but it is retained internally.) • When the horizontal scanning direction (H line) is adjusted, the adjustment value of the vertical scanning direction (1 to 27) is also changed. • As the value is larger, the density becomes lighter. As the value is smaller, the density becomes darker. • Enter the adjustment value in a unit of +/- 30 gradually, output the test pattern and make adjustment while checking the test pattern. If the value is changed dramatically, the image error (while line) may occur. • Entering 96 or larger value can generate an error in potential control (E061). In the case of an error, adjust the setting value between 0 and 95.



1RW8VH



4. After the adjustment, output a test print and check the image to complete the procedure. CAUTION: If the image cannot be adjusted correctly even with this adjustment procedure, reenter the values written in step 6-1.



ADF black line Image processing has been improved with this equipment, which applies optimal image processing to the text part and the photo part respectively. Improvement in image processing, however, highlights imperceptible dusts at the original scanning position, which may appear as a line on the image.



623



6. Troubleshooting Before Reading Original



After Reading



Result



Platen roller 1



Platen roller 1



Stream reading glass Scanning position



It sticks on the original during scanning.



[Location] ADF [Cause] At stream reading with the ADF, imperceptible dusts (paper dust, toner, dust, etc.) adhere and remain at the original scanning position, which causes a black line on the original image. (Occurrence frequency is roughly 3/10,000 of scanning documents) The dusts causing a black line are delivered outside the ADF together with the scanning original; therefore, there will be no black line with the next original. [Remedy] Changing the setting value in the following service mode improves the problem of a black line. • Text density adjustment when adjusting image density COPIER > ADJUST > AE > AE-TBL Setting value: Change the default (5) to 3 • Setting of the sharpness level on the image (Lv.2) COPIER > OPTION > IMG-MCON > SHARP Setting value: Change the default (3) to 1 • Setting of the halftone processing in text/photo mode (Lv.2) COPIER > OPTION > USER > PH-D-SL2 Setting value: Change the default (0) to 2 CAUTION: When performing a field remedy, remind that the scan result changes as follows: • Scanning of light halftone base is skipped (to be scanned as white color) • Blur text outline due to reduced edge emphasis level with the text • Photo part appears coarsely



Separation Failure Jam due to Deformation of Separation Claw [Location] Drum Separation Claw [Cause] When the paper enters to the drum at separation failure, the Separation Claw may be deformed. When the Separation Claw is deformed, the paper is easily caught by the leading edge of the Separation Claw when the paper (especially curled paper) is fed, and a jam (Jam Code: 0205) is likely to occur.



[Condition]



624



6. Troubleshooting Job after a jam which occurs when the paper enters to the drum When using curled paper (when using backside of printed paper, etc.) [Field Remedy] Replace the Separation Claw. NOTE: eplace the Separation Claw when a separation failure jam occurs even once.



Image error due to soil attached to the Cleaning Brushes for the Duplex Right Roller and the Duplex Outlet Roller [Location] Fixing Feed Unit [Cause] Soil attached to the 4 Cleaning Brushes contacting the Duplex Right Roller and the Duplex Outlet Roller [Condition] When soil is attached to the 4 Cleaning Brushes contacting the Duplex Right Roller and the Duplex Outlet Roller, paper is fed with minor soil (paper dust and toner) attached to it, and the soil is gradually attached to the Registration Front Roller. When the paper stops at the time of registration, the rotating Registration Front Roller contacts the paper, which causes two trails of soil of the roller width at 143mm from the paper edge. Cleaning Brush Paper



Duplex Right Roller



Registration Roller



143



Duplex Outlet Roller



Registration Front Roller



mm



[Image Sample]



625



6. Troubleshooting Feed Direction



143mm



[Field Remedy] Follow the following procedure to replace the Cleaning Brushes contacting the Duplex Right Roller and the Duplex Outlet Roller and clean the relevant parts.



Remove the Registration Unit. (See “Removing the Registration Unit” on page 545)



1. Open the Duplex Path. 2. Remove the Fixed Feed Cover 1. • 2 Screws • 1 Claw



x2



626



6. Troubleshooting 3. Remove the right side Duct. • • • •



1 Connector 1 Wire Saddle 2 Screws 1 Protrusion Protrusion



x2



4. Remove the left side Duct. • • • •



1 Connector 2 Harness Guide 1 Wire Saddle 2 Screws



x3



x2



627



6. Troubleshooting 5. Remove the Duplex Driver PCB and the Mounting Base. • • • • •



4 Wire Saddles 1 Edge Saddle 11 Connectors 3 Screws 2 Claws



x5 x11



x3 x2



6. Remove the following parts. • • • •



2 E-rings 1 Timing Belt 2 Pulleys 2 Parallel Pin



7. Lift the ETB Unit in the direction of the arrow.



628



6. Troubleshooting 8. Free the 2 claws, and remove the Transfer High Voltage PCB Unit Upper Cover in the direction of the arrow. • 2 Protrusions



Protrusion



x2



9. Remove the following parts. • 3 Connectors • 1 Wire Saddle • 2 Screws



x3



x2



10. Remove the Transfer High Voltage PCB Unit in the direction of the arrow. • 2 Hooks



Hook



Hook



629



6. Troubleshooting 11. Place a sheet of paper on the Duplex Path, and remove a N-ring each from the Duplex Right Roller and the Duplex Outlet Roller. CAUTION: Be sure to place a sheet of paper on the Duplex Path because paper dust drops during the following work.



Paper N-ring



12. Remove the Fan Unit. • 2 Wire Saddles • 1 Connector • 1 Screws



x2



630



6. Troubleshooting 13. Pull out the Duplex Right Roller and remove the shaft at the rear. NOTE: In this procedure, the procedure for removing the Duplex Right Roller is shown in steps 13 and 14. When removing the Duplex Outlet Roller, check the installation position in step 15 and remove the Duplex Outlet Roller by a similar procedure.



CAUTION: oints to Caution at Work • Be careful not to damage the surfaces of the Duplex Right Roller and the Duplex Outlet Roller. • The bearing at the front and the bushing at the rear of the Duplex Right/Duplex Outlet Roller are not fixed, so be careful not to drop them.



Bearing



Bushing



Bushing



14. Move the Duplex Right Roller toward the rear and remove the shaft from the Fixing Feed Unit Side Plate. Then, move the Duplex Right Roller in the direction of the arrow and take it out from the opening on the top of the Fixing Feed Unit.



631



6. Troubleshooting 15. Remove the Duplex Outlet Roller in a similar procedure referring to the procedure for removing the Duplex Right Roller in steps 13 and 14. NOTE: The installation position of the Duplex Outlet Roller is shown in the following figure.



16. Remove the 4 Cleaning Brushes contacting the Duplex Right Roller and the Duplex Outlet Roller. 17. Clean the four areas where the Cleaning Brushes are attached with lint-free paper moistened with alcohol.



632



6. Troubleshooting 18. Remove the paper on the Duplex Path, and clean the entire perimeter of each of the 4 rollers with lint-free paper moistened with alcohol while rotating the roller by hand.



19. Attach new 4 Cleaning Brushes with reference to the upper right of the plate where they are going to be attached.



Reference for attachment



20. Clean the four areas on the removed Duplex Right Roller and the Duplex Outlet Roller with lint-free paper moistened with alcohol.



21. Install the removed parts in reverse order. 22. Open the Right Door. 23. Open the Right Lower Cover.



633



6. Troubleshooting 24. Clean the entire perimeter of each of the 2 rollers and Registration Front Roller with lint free moistened with alcohol while rotating the roller by hand. CAUTION: When rotating the roller by hand, be sure not to touch the surface of the roller but to hold a side face.



Registration Front Roller



Roller



Uneven density [Cause] Uneven density occurs on the image because of uneven developing performance or change in drum characteristics due to wear. [Field Remedy] Start the field remedy



Is it straight uneven density?



YES



NO Adjust developing bias COPIER > ADJUST > V-CONT > DE-OFST



Is it fixed?



YES



NO Enable 2D shading COPIER > OPTION > IMG-LSR > 2D-SHADE; ON



Is it fixed?



YES



NO Execute 2D shading individual correction



Field remedy is complete



634



Adjust height of the Primary Charging Wire (Set the dark area apart)



6. Troubleshooting



OR 㻲㼑㼑㼐㻌㻰㼕㼞㼑㼏㼠㼕㼛㼚



In the case of dark/light image at either the left or right side on the image in horizontal direction, adjust height of the Primary Charging Wire and check the output result. When making adjustment, execute the work while keeping the wire at dark area apart.



OR 㻲㼑㼑㼐㻌㻰㼕㼞㼑㼏㼠㼕㼛㼚 If it is not a straight uneven density, change the value of the following service mode in decrement of -10 and check the output result. COPIER > ADJUST > V-CONT > DE-OFST (Setting value: default 0, -10, -20, …-50) CAUTION: Executing the above setting can generate smeared image or foggy image. If the service mode has been changed, write the new adjustment value on the service label.



After switching the mode to enable 2D shading in the following service mode, turn OFF/ON the main power and check the output result. After switching the mode to enable 2D shading in the following service mode, turn OFF/ON the main power and check the output result. (For detailed procedure, see Troubleshooting > Uneven density correction by 2D shading >Step 1) to 3) (“Uneven density correction by 2D shading” on page 620)) COPIER > OPTION > IMG-LSR > 2D-SHADE 1: Enabled(VD), 2: Enabled(VL) Output the test pattern for 2D shading and adjust the uneven density area individually. (For detailed procedure, see “Troubleshooting > Uneven density correction by 2D shading > Step 4) to 5)(“Uneven density correction by 2D shading” on page 620))



Smeared image [Cause] Excess toner is transferred on the paper that causes toner collapse at the time of fixing, which can generate smeared image on the image. The following are assumed causes of smeared image: • When the paper type is changed • Toner deterioration • Rapid change in environment (High temperature Low temperature) Feed Direction < Smeared Image >



Side Line



Smeared image may also occur exclusively in the area 5 to 10 mm from the leading edge of the paper when there is burr on the leading edge of the paper (jagged edge formed when the paper was cut by a cutter). It is caused by toner being pushed backward by the power of the ETB, which is pushed down by the burr when it passes through the transfer nips, to go back to the original position.



635



6. Troubleshooting Burr



Toner



Photosensitive Drum



ETB Transfer Roller



Paper



Smeared image



[Field Remedy] Start the field remedy



Execute Auto Adjust Gradation Settings/Registration> Adjustment/Maintenance> Adjust Image Quality> Auto Adjust Gradation



Is it fixed?



YES



NO Increased current of the Pre-transfer Charging Assembly (Lv.2) COPIER > ADJUST > HV-TR > P-TR-OF1; set the values to +10" Check the image



Is it fixed?



YES



NO Reduce the density Increase the value of COPIER > ADJUST > V-CONT > VL-OFST and decrease the value of COPIER > ADJUST > V-CONT > VD-OFST. COPIER> FUNCTION> DPC> DPC2; Execute DPC



Is the density/line width fixed within the acceptable range?



YES



NO Execute skipping processing (within the acceptable range for density/line width) COPIER> OPTION> IMG-FIX> RAG-SW; set 1 COPIER> OPTION> IMG-FIX> RAG-CONT; set 1 to 3 Check the image



Complete



Select the following to execute Full Adjust: "Settings/Registration > Adjustment Maintenance > Adjust Image > Auto Adjust Gradation < Full Adjust"; and check the output result. COPIER > ADJUST > HV-TR > P-TR-OF1



636



6. Troubleshooting 1. In the following service mode (Lv. 2), set "+10" in the rightmost field, and check the output result. CAUTION: Executing the above setting may cause the Pre-transfer Charging Wire to be easily soiled. Be sure to check for soiling of the Charging Wire at the time of inspection since heavy soiling may cause vertical lines to occur on the rear side of the image. 2. Decrease the value of the following service mode (LV. 1) from the default value 895 by +10. COPIER > ADJUST > V-CONT > VL-OFST 3. Execute the following service mode, and then check the output result. COPIER > FUNCTION > DPC > DPC2 If the symptom is not improved, increase the value in step 2) by +20,+30 and then execute step 3). If the symptoms still persist, reduce the following service mode values to -10, -20, -30, and then perform step 3). COPIER > ADJUST > V-CONT > VD-OFST CAUTION: Changing the above setting can cause reduced density or thinner line.



NOTE: Simultaneous setting of smeared image suppression Lv.2) COPIER> ADJUST> V-CONT> SMR-IPRV When SMR-IPRV is set to 1, the offset values of the following service modes can be changed collectively. • Lv.2) COPIER > ADJUST > HV-TR > P-TR-OF1 to 6 : +10 • Lv.1) COPIER > ADJUST > V-CONT > VL-OFST : +30 • Lv.1) COPIER > ADJUST > V-CONT > VD-OFST : -30 After changing the setting, turn the main power OFF/ON and execute auto adjust gradation.



If the smeared image is not improved within the acceptable range for density and line width, execute skipping process in the following procedure: 4. COPIER > OPTION > IMG-FIX > RAG-SW: change the value to 1 5. COPIER > OPTION > IMG-FIX > RAG-CONT: change to 1 and check the output result. 6. If the symptom is not improved, change the value in step 5) to 2, 3…and check the output result. CAUTION: Changing the above setting can cause minor skipping in the text part.



Adjusting the Edge Emphasis Level The edge emphasis level of image can be adjusted in both user mode and service mode, but the use conditions differ. User mode



Service mode



Item code



Other Functions > Sharpness



Lv.2) COPIER> OPTION> IMG-MCON> SHARP



Operator



User



Service technician



Purpose



To make adjustment for each original to be cop- To set the central value of edge emphasis to conied trol individual variability or environmental change during transportation/after installation.



Text/photo area



Individual



Batch



Setting range



-3 to +3 level



1 to 5



Default value



0 level



3



Setting value at power OFF/ON or Canceled (Default value can be retained.) at reset



Retained



The following table shows the edge emphasis level by the combination of "SHARP" and "Sharpness" settings, using the relative value when the default is 100.



637



6. Troubleshooting User mode "Sharpness" Service mode "SHARP"



1



-3



-2



-1



0



+1



+2



+3



25



175



40



50



60



100



140



2



45



65



85



115



145



3



50



75



100



125



150



4



55



85



115



135



155



5



65



100



140



150



160



Images become smoother as values in the table become smaller, while they become sharper as values become larger. Note that, when "Sharpness" is the upper limit or lower limit, the relative value stays constant regardless of the "SHARP" setting, therefore the edge emphasis effect does not change even if the settings are changed. Normally, adjustment is made for each copy on the Touch Panel based on the service mode setting, but depending on the environment or paper type (coarse surface, etc.), edge emphasis may not turn out the way the user expected. In this case, edge emphasis level customized for the user can be set by setting the current value of "Sharpness" as the default value. Example: In the case of the environment where the relative value "135" is suitable as the default value. 1. Set "SHARP" to "4". 2. Set "Sharpness", which is set to "+1" level, as the default in the user mode (Function Settings > Copy > Change Default Settings).



Soil at interval equal to Developing Sleeve circumference [Location] Developing Sleeve [Cause] If the surface of the sleeve is soiled, uneven toner coating occurs, causing the soiling of the same shape to appear at intervals equal to the circumference of the sleeve (approx. 53 mm) in the vertical scanning direction.



[Field Remedy] 1. Rotate the sleeve in the normal direction and identify the location where the soiling occurs. CAUTION: Do not turn the sleeve in the reverse direction.



2. Remove the toner found at that location using a blower, etc. CAUTION: If toner is dry wiped instead of removed, it may be fixed on the surface of the sleeve.



638



6. Troubleshooting 3. Wipe the surface of the sleeve with dry lint-free paper. CAUTION: Do not use water or alcohol.



4. Execute the following service mode to output a halftone image (TYPE 12), and check the image. If white spots occur, go to step 5. COPIER > TEST > PG > TYPE 5. Execute the following service mode. COPIER > FUNCTION > MISC-P > DV-RT 6. Check the image. If the white spots persist, execute step 5 again. CAUTION: Heavy use of DEV-RT can result in deterioration of developer or toner scattering.



639



6. Troubleshooting



Feed Faults Paper wrinkle



Fixing Roller, Pressure Roller



Right after the startup, temperature is different between the center and the edge of the Fixing Roller (temperature: center > edge). Because a slippery solid black image does not match to the nip shape when it is fed, the center of paper is pulled toward the feeding direction, causing paper wrinkle.



Timing: Approx. 20 sheets immediately after the startup first time for the day Paper size: Paper size larger than B4



Normally, when printing to paper larger than A3 or LDR size paper at the start of printing in a high humidity environment, control temperature is increased by performing idle rotation. Paper wrinkle which occurs at this time can be decreased, but first copy time becomes longer. In other cases, idle rotation is not performed. If paper wrinkle occurs on paper larger than B4, increase the setting value from 2 in increments of 1 until paper wrinkle is alleviated. If paper wrinkle occurs on B4 size paper, increase the setting value from 4 in increments of 1 until paper wrinkle is alleviated. Change the value of the following service mode (LV. 2). COPIER > OPTION > IMG-FIX > FX-WNKL [Setting values] 0 to 6 0: OFF, 1: Normal, 2: Level 1, 3: Level 2, 4: Level 3, 5: Level 4, 6: Level 5



640



6. Troubleshooting



Other Adjusting rotation of the Upright Control Panel Arm If rotation of the Upright Control Panel Arm has become loose, retighten the Fixation Screws securing the Arm Rotation Adjustment Ring according to the following procedure.



1. Remove the Shaft Support Cover (Left) and the Shaft Support Cover (Right). 2. Open the DADF and retighten the 2 Fixation Screws securing the Arm Rotation Adjustment Ring.



NOTE: If rotation of the arm is still loose after retightening the Fixation Screws according to “Adjusting rotation of the Upright Control Panel Arm”, change the phase difference between the Arm Rotation Adjustment Ring and the Fixation Screws according to the following procedure.



3. Open the DADF and loosen the 2 Fixation Screws securing the Arm Rotation Adjustment Ring.



641



6. Troubleshooting 4. Remove the 3 Stepped Screws securing the Arm Shaft.



x3



5. Pull out the Upright Control Panel and the Arm Shaft, and rotate the Arm Rotation Adjustment Ring to change the phase so that the Fixation Screws do not contact with the dents formed by tightening the screws.



6. Insert the Upright Control Panel and the Arm Shaft, and retighten the 2 screws loosened in step 3. 7. Install the removed parts.



Remedy to be implemented when the ETB Disengage Member (Transfer Frame Stopper) is left unremoved When the power is turned ON after installation, E017-0003 may occur due to the ETB Disengage Member (Transfer Frame Stopper) left unremoved. When this error occurs, the ETB Disengage Member (Transfer Frame Stopper) is caught between the ETB Unit and the plate of the machine and cannot be removed. Moreover, one side of the Photosensitive Drum is in contact with the ETB Unit, so pulling out the Fixing Feed Unit by sheer force may result in damage to the ETB Unit. When the ETB Disengage Member (Transfer Frame Stopper) is left unremoved, follow the following steps to implement remedy.



1. Turn OFF the power.



642



6. Troubleshooting 2. Open the Inner Cover. Loosen



3. Remove the Fixing Feed Right Front Cover. • 2 Screws



x2



Fixing Feed Right Front Cover



4. Remove the Fixing Feed Right Front Upper Cover. • 1 Screw Fixing Feed Right Front Upper Cover



643



6. Troubleshooting 5. Remove the Fan Duct. • 2 Screws Duct



6. Rotate the Disengage Gear about 90 degrees counterclockwise by hand and lower the ITB Unit. CAUTION: The load of rotating the gear is heavy, so be careful not to get injured.



ITB Unit Disengage Gear



7. Remove the Transfer Frame Stopper.



Transfer Frame Stopper



Checking nip width In the case of paper wrinkle or fixing failure, check that the fixing nip width is within the specified range. Note that the fixing nip width of this equipment cannot be adjusted in the field. 1. Print approx. 20 sheets of A4 size paper. 2. Set A4 size plain paper/recycled paper on the Multi-purpose Tray.



644



6. Troubleshooting 3. Lv.1) COPIER > FUNCTION > FIXING > NIP-CHK A sheet is stopped once in a state held by the Fixing Nip area, and is delivered approx. 20 seconds later. 4. Measure the nip width of delivered sheet. If the nip widths are as follow it is judged as normal: 4.0 to 5.0 mm at the center (b), and difference between front (c) and rear (a) is within 0.5 mm. In the case of failure, check if there are any damaged parts (*), and replace the damaged parts (if any). * Gear, Bearing, Fixing Roller, Pressure Roller and Fixing Assembly 㻺㼕㼜㻌㼣㼕㼐㼠㼔 㻱㼐㼓㼑



㼍



㼎



㻯㼑㼚㼠㼑㼞



㼏



㻱㼐㼓㼑



㻼㼍㼜㼑㼞㻌㼒㼑㼑㼐㻌㼐㼕㼞㼑㼏㼠㼕㼛㼚



ETB Displacement The ETB is configured to keep the center position in the unit. Therefore, position adjustment is not necessary at installation or after ETB replacement. Even in the case of ETB displacement in the front or rear direction while the machine is running, there is no problem with the operation if it is within the appropriate range. However, when the positional relationship between the Transfer Drum and the ETB Unit becomes displaced, the ETB may get damaged due to its full displacement. The following shows a method to check the appropriate range of the ETB position, and an adjustment method in case it is out of the range.



■ 1. Pull out the Fixing Feed Unit. 1. Open the Front Cover. 2. Turn the Fixing Feed Unit Pressure Release Lever in the direction of the arrow to pull out the Fixing Feed Unit.



645



6. Troubleshooting 3. Push to release the Release Springs at both sides of the rail, and then further pull out the Fixing Feed Unit until it stops.



CAUTION: Do not touch the surface of the ETB when handling the ETB Unit.



2. Check whether the ETB is displaced toward the rear side or the front side of the host machine as follows.



646



6. Troubleshooting 3. Checking the displacement toward the rear side of the machine • Be sure to perform the following when there is a distance [La] of 8 mm or more between the mark [A] (the line) on the Transfer Roller Holder (Front) at the front side and the ETB edge [1]



[1]



[A]



[La]



4. Checking the displacement toward the front side of the machine • Be sure to perform the following when there is a distance [Lb] of 8 mm or more between the mark [B] (the line) on the Transfer Roller Holder (Rear) at the rear side and the ETB edge [1]



[B]



[1]



[Lb]



■ 1. Remove the Fixing Feed Right Front Upper Cover. • 1 Screw



1x



2. Open the Duplex Path.



647



6. Troubleshooting 3. Remove the Fixing Feed Cover 1. • 2 Screws • 1 Claw



x2



4. Remove the duct. • 1 Connector • 1 Reuse Band • 2 Screws



x2



5. Loosen the 3 screws [2] of the ETB Drive Unit [1].



[1]



[2]



[2] [2]



648



6. Troubleshooting 6. Loosen the screw [2] of the Adjustment Cam [1]. [1]



[2]



7. Adjust the ETB Drive Unit [1] and the Adjustment Cam [2] as follows according to the displacement direction of the ETB. [2]



[1]



NOTE: • Be sure to perform adjustment by referring to step 8 of when the ETB is displaced toward the front side, and to step 9 of the same procedure when the ETB is displaced toward the rear side. • The holes at the top and the bottom of the Adjustment Cam are not used.



8. When the ETB is displaced toward the front side, release the hole [A] of the Adjustment Cam [1] from the boss [2] of the ETB Drive Support Plate B, and fit the hole [B] to the boss [2] of the ETB Drive Support Plate B. [1] [2]



[B] [A]



[B] [A]



[2]



649



6. Troubleshooting 9. When the ETB is displaced toward the front side, release the hole [A] of the Adjustment Cam [1] from the boss [2] of the ETB Drive Support Plate B, and fit the hole [B] to the boss [2] of the ETB Drive Support Plate B. [1]



[A] [A]



[C]



[C]



[2]



[2]



10. Fully tighten the loosened screw [1] to secure the Adjustment Cam [2] (The figure shows the case when the ETB is displaced toward the front side). • 2 Bosses [3] [2] [3]



[3]



[1]



CAUTION: Be sure to secure the Adjustment Cam [2] such that it will not be placed on top of the 2 bosses [3].



11. Fully tighten the 3 loosened screws [1] to secure the ETB Drive Support Plate A [2]. • 2 Bosses [3] [3] [1]



[2]



[1] [1]



CAUTION: Be sure to secure the ETB Drive Support Plate A [2] such that it will not be placed on top of the 2 bosses [3].



650



6. Troubleshooting 12. Reassemble the host machine back together in reverse order of the removal procedure. CAUTION: When installing the Fixing Feed Cover 1, be sure to follow the order as shown in the figure to tighten screws.



x2



■ 1. Perform double-sided feeding of the total of 200 sheets of A4 or letter size paper. 2. After feeding, perform to check that the ETB is no longer fully displaced



Remedies to be performed when E602-xxxx or E614-xxxx error is displayed Remedy procedure for E602 or E614 differs according to the status of the screen where error is displayed. Check the remedy procedure by referring to the following flow chart. Start



An error code is displayed on a black screen



YES



NO Go to [Error code descriptions]



Go to [Flow Chart 2]



Flow Chart 1 Turn OFF the main power.



+------------------------------------+ | E602-0801 | +------------------------------------+



Cannot access the hard disk. If the optional removable hard disk is use, check it is connected then restart the machine. IF this is error tou occur, content your service representative.



Display Sample : If an error code is displayed on a black screen Execute a remedy described in service mode by referring to Error / Jam / Alarm in the Service Manual.



651



6. Troubleshooting If an error code and a message is displayed on a black screen (as above), shift to the hard disk maintenance mode referring to the Flow Chart 2 and execute the remedy described in Error / Jam / Alarm in the Service Manual. Start Confirmation or judgment



(1) Check cable connector connected to HDD and restart the machine.



YES



Detail change of initialization and /or Inspection



(2) Did the machine start and the issue solved?



Initialization and /or inspection fails and related parts are replaced



NO



Automatic process of the machine



(3) Shift to the hard disk maintenance mode.



(4) Is the issue judged to be unsolvable YES by hard disk maintenance mode?



YES



NO (5) Specify target area (CHK TYPE) (6) Schedule the process to conduct, turn OFF and then ON the main power.



(9) Cancel the scheduled process and turn OFF the power.



(10) Replace related parts.



(7) Scheduled process is conducted.



NO



(8) Did the machine start and issue solved? YES



End



Flow Chart 2 CAUTION: Numbers in the Flow Chart 2 are corresponding to the procedure numbers. Check the remedy procedure by referring to the flow chart. 1. Check cable connector connected to the hard disk and restart the machine. 2. Check if the machine is started normally. If the machine is started normally, the analysis is complete.



652



6. Troubleshooting 3. If the machine is not started normally, execute key operation to shift to the service mode for shifting to hard disk maintenance mode. [1] : CHK TYPE [2] : HD CHECK [3] : HD CLEAR [4] : HD OPERATION CANCEL



+------------------------------------+ | E602-0801 | +------------------------------------+



Cannot access the hard disk. If the optional removable hard disk is use, check it is connected then restart the machine. IF this is error tou occur, content your service representative.



Example of hard disk maintenance mode screen 4. Determine if the issue is solved in the hard disk maintenance mode. • Proceed to 5 for diagnosis for the first time or trying to restore with the hard disk maintenance mode. • If the issue cannot be solved by hard disk maintenance (HD-CHECK/HD-CLEAR is not executed or issue unsolved even executed), proceed to 9. 5. Press "1" of Numeric Keypad, then two digits number to specify the target area (CHK TYPE). [1] : CHK TYPE [2] : HD CHECK [3] : HD CLEAR [4] : HD OPERATION CANCEL ------------------------------------------------[1] has been selected - Change to (0)



CAUTION: The CHK - TYPE to be specified needs to be entered in two digits even the number to be specified is one digit. Enter "01" to specify "1" and enter "04" to specify "4". For example, in the case of the above display (E602-0801), specify No. 8 because Partition No. 8 is in error. (Enter the number as "08") If you made a mistake, press "1" again then enter two digits number.



6. Specify and schedule the process stated as a remedy for error code by referring to the Flow chart No.6, "Error / Jam / Alarm" in the Service Manual. Then turn OFF and then ON the main power of the machine. • To schedule disk check (COPIER > FUNCTION > SYSTEM >HD-CHECK), select [2]:HD-CHECK. • To schedule formatting (COPIER / FUNCTION / SYSTEM /HD-CLEAR), select [3]:HD CLEAR. NOTE: When the menu [2] to [4] is selected, key cannot be re-entered. If you made a wrong selection, Turn OFF and then ON the main power of the machine, shift to hard disk maintenance mode and specify again.



7. Scheduled process is automatically executed. 8. If the process is complete and the machine is restarted normally, analysis is complete. The same black screen and the error code is displayed, shift back to the hard disk maintenance mode and conduct other maintenance.



653



6. Troubleshooting 9. Consider the HDD cannot be restored, select [4] and cancel the schedule. Switch OFF the main power of the machine. [1] : CHK TYPE [2] : HD CHECK [3] : HD CLEAR [4] : HD OPERATION CANCEL ------------------------------------------------[4] has been selected Turn OFF the main power.



CAUTION: Replacing HDD without canceling the schedule causes the scheduled process is executed to replaced HDD at the next normal startup. When replacing parts, specify [4] to cancel the schedule.



10. Refer to the Service Manual to replace the related parts. NOTE: Related parts for E602 • Harness between main controller PCB and the HDD • HDD • Main Controller PCB Related parts for E614 • Flash PCB • Main Controller PCB



654



6. Troubleshooting



Debug Log Function Overview As for debug log, following logs are available: continuous log that saves the operation log, automatic log that is saved when an event occurs, manual log which is collected and saved each time at log saving, packet log, and key operation log.



Host machine Main Controller Save area Auto save area



Module As needed / When an event occurs



Log



Log



When executing log saving



Automatic Continuous logs logs



Module



Log Log Log



Module



Log



Manual logs



Log



Packets



When executing log saving



Each Controller



When executing log saving Log



Key operation logs



NOTE: Debug logs are used for analysis of program operations of the machine and identification of the problem by the developer. This machine has a function for compiling operation history of each software module as debug logs and outputting them as unified logs for analyzing problems. Since the frequency of outputting debug logs and the type of logs can be changed by the settings, the settings need to be changed according to the trouble that occurs and the situation.



Types of Debug Logs Types of Debug Logs Sublogs



Description Manual logs Logs collected in each module and controller are archived and can be collected when log saving is executed. Logs of the Main Controller, RCON, and DCON are saved together with automatic logs as up to 10 logs in total. Automatic logs Logs that are automatically saved to the machine when an event (exceptional behavior, error code, or reboot) occurs. Logs of the Main Controller, RCON, and DCON are saved together with manual logs as up to 10 logs in total. Continuous logs Logs that are continuously saved while the machine is running. Up to 100 logs of only the Main Controller can be stored.



Key operation logs History of key operations. Log collection starts by enabling the setting and starting the function. Logs that are archived and can be collected when log saving is executed. Network packet logs



Logs of network packet data sent from or received by the host machine. Log collection starts by enabling the setting and starting the function. Logs that are archived and can be collected when log saving is executed.



Storage location and types of Sublogs The locations where Sublogs are stored and the types of logs are shown below. Logs may be stored in controllers and parts other than those shown below.



655



6. Troubleshooting Type Main Controller



Automatic logs



Manual logs



Continuous logs



Yes (more detailed than continu- Yes (more detailed than continuous logs) ous logs)



Yes



DCON



Yes



Yes



No



RCON



Yes



Yes



No



Cases Where Debug Logs Need to Be Collected • When the result of identification of the cause shows that the trouble was caused by host machine (firmware, hardware-related controller) • When the failure occurs only at the customer's site and cannot be reproduced by the department in charge of quality management or Canon Inc.



■ Sublogs Sublog is the general term for the unified logs for analyzing problem in which operation histories of software modules are compiled as debug logs. When a problem relating to the host machine occurs in the field and it is difficult to identify the cause of it at the user site, collecting Sublogs and sending them to Design Dept./R&D can improve the efficiency of analyzing the problem and reduce the time it takes to deal with the problem. CAUTION: • Sublogs are basically stored in volatile memory. Therefore, almost all information will be erased by turning OFF and ON the power before saving the log data. When obtaining the log data, make sure to implement the operation to save the log data (manually saving log) before turning OFF and ON the power. • I order to prevent failure of collecting necessary information because the log is overwritten with the succeeding process, be sure to collect the Sublog while the symptom has occurred or immediately after the occurrence. • Once the Sublog files are collected, they are deleted from the machine. In the case of collecting Sublogs consecutively, the number of continuous log files may be fewer than usual.



■ Key operation logs This function collects the history of key operations in order to distinguish between a failure of the Main machine and an operation error of the user in the case of trouble of erroneous fax transmission. If it cannot be denied the possibility that the user operation caused the error, collect the key operation logs. The key operation log are stored/recovered in a form included in the Sublog files. The following confidential information in the stored key operation log is masked. • Personal identification number, PIN code, password, etc., to be entered • Information that is hidden by turned letters on the UI screen CAUTION: To obtain permission from a user in advance for recording key operations for failure analysis.



■ Network packet logs This function collects the transmitted and received network packet data as a debug log in the storage (capture). When it is expected that the trouble was caused by network, collect network packet logs. NOTE: To use this function, you need to register a license, so you need to ask the Support Dept. of the sales company to issue a license.



CAUTION: When obtaining the network packet log, explain to the user and obtain permission before proceeding.



CAUTION: Under heavy network load environment, packets can be dropped.



656



6. Troubleshooting



■ Flow of Determining the Procedure for Collecting Logs Check the following flow to determine the procedure for collecting logs according to the type of problem. Service call for trouble



Does the problem repeat restart? Key operation logs need to be collected



Does the problem cause the Control Panel to be locked? Network packet logs need to be collected



Does the problem repeat restart?



See Case A of the "Procedure for Obtaining Logs"



Does the problem cause the Control Panel to be locked?



See Case B of the "Procedure for Obtaining Logs"



Is the problem related to the sleep mode?



See Case C of the "Procedure for Obtaining Logs"



Is the problem still occurring or just finished occurring?



See Case D of the "Procedure for Obtaining Logs"



See Case D of the "Procedure for Obtaining Logs"



When the user's operation such as wrong fax transmission may be the cause of the problem, enable [Store Key Operation Log].



657



6. Troubleshooting



Procedure for Collecting Logs Log Collection Procedure List Problem Case



Details of Problem



DEBUG SRAM PCB ASS'Y Board



Case A



Problem that repeats restart



Necessary



1. Refer to “Preparation” on page 660 and make the preparations such as installing the DEBUG SRAM PCB ASS'Y Board or change the settings. 2. Execute log saving by referring to “Saving of Manual Logs, Network Packet Logs and Key Operation Logs” on page 663 immediately after restart. 3. Save and collect reports by referring to “Saving and Collecting Report Files” on page 664. 4. Collect debug logs by referring to “Collection of Log” on page 665.



Case B



Problem causing the Control Panel to be locked



Necessary



1. Refer to “Preparation” on page 660 and make the preparations such as installing the DEBUG SRAM PCB ASS'Y Board or change the settings. 2. Turn OFF and then ON the power immediately after the Control Panel is locked. 3. Execute log saving by referring to “Saving of Manual Logs, Network Packet Logs and Key Operation Logs” on page 663 after startup. 4. Save and collect reports by referring to “Saving and Collecting Report Files” on page 664. 5. Collect debug logs by referring to “Collection of Log” on page 665.



Case C



Problem related to the sleep mode



Necessary



1. Refer to “Preparation” on page 660 and make the preparations such as installing the DEBUG SRAM PCB ASS'Y Board or change the settings. 2. After the problem occurs, turn OFF and then ON the power if necessary, and execute log saving by referring to “Saving of Manual Logs, Network Packet Logs and Key Operation Logs” on page 663. 3. Save and collect reports by referring to “Saving and Collecting Report Files” on page 664. 4. Collect debug logs by referring to “Collection of Log” on page 665.



Case D



Problem when executing a job (Example: Printing is not performed, etc.)



Not necessary



1. Execute log saving while the problem is occurring by referring to “Saving of Manual Logs, Network Packet Logs and Key Operation Logs” on page 663. 2. Execute log saving by referring to “Saving of Manual Logs, Network Packet Logs and Key Operation Logs” on page 663. 3. Collect debug logs by referring to “Collection of Log” on page 665.



When an E code error has occurred



Not necessary



Execute log saving by referring to “Saving of Manual Logs, Network Packet Logs and Key Operation Logs” on page 663. However, if the background of the Control Panel is blank and an error code is displayed in text, logs cannot be obtained.



Problems other than above



Not necessary



Execute log saving by referring to “Saving of Manual Logs, Network Packet Logs and Key Operation Logs” on page 663. Check with the user on the date and time when the problem occurred and the procedure.



Case E



Procedure for Obtaining Logs



Saving and Collecting Debug Logs ■ Tools Required The following tools are necessary to save/collect debug logs of the machine. Exporting to a USB Device • USB device When exporting debug logs to a USB device, use a USB device in which the system software for the machine is registered using SST. Since the size and number of log files to collect varies according to the device status and the logs that have been saved, the size of the collected files may be several hundred MB. Therefore, it is recommended to use a USB device with 1 GB or more of free space. The USB device must be formatted with the FAT file system.



658



6. Troubleshooting CAUTION: Be sure to check that the USB device has 1 GB or more of free space before collecting a log. If capacity of the USB device is insufficient, logs that failed to be saved will be deleted so that analysis of the symptom cannot be performed. Exporting to a PC • PC with SST installed • Network connection cable When exporting debug logs to a PC, a PC with SST installed and a network connection cable are required. Common (When Exporting to a USB Device, or When Exporting to a PC) • DEBUG SRAM PCB ASS'Y Board In the following conditions, debug logs cannot be saved, therefore the DEBUG SRAM PCB ASS'Y Board is required. • When restart is repeated • When all the operations of the device are frozen and manual logs cannot be collected. • When the machine would not recover from sleep mode Refer to the following regarding installation on to the Controller PCB.



Reference example of installation



■ Work Flow The flow of saving/collecting Sublogs is shown below. 1. Preparation Refer to “Flow of Determining the Procedure for Collecting Logs” on page 657, and make the preparation as needed according to a situation where an event has occurred. 2. Reproduction of the symptom Reproduce the symptom. 3. Saving of manual logs Save manual logs that require manual operation. 4. Output of reports Output reports necessary for escalation.



659



6. Troubleshooting 5. Collecting log files Start the machine in download mode, and save (collect) the log files to a USB device or a PC. CAUTION: In the case of analysis using Sublog, the following information needs to be obtained together with the Sublog. • Symptom that has occurred (from service technician's viewpoint as far as possible) • Date and time of the event (from an hour before the event to an hour after the event) • Reports (P-Print, HIST-PRT, job logs, communication management report, etc.) • Printed data and original at the time of reproduction (depends on the trouble that has occurred) Besides Sublog, the above-mentioned information is required due to the following reasons: • Failures such as a process being stopped due to an error or an unintended behavior are easy to find, but failures such as "the behavior is slow" are difficult to analyze based on operation logs only. • Since the number and size of the files are huge, the information helps to find the operation log where the problem occurred. • When R&D reproduces the failure, it is necessary to use information such as the procedure used by the customer, frequency of use, and job data at the time of occurrence of the failure.



6. Remove the board installed in step 1 and return the settings back to the original values.



■ Preparation Follow the procedure shown below to make preparations for collecting debug logs. 1. Refer to “Flow of Determining the Procedure for Collecting Logs” on page 657 and when it is judged that DEBUG SRAM PCB ASS'Y Board is required, install the board.



DEBUG SRAM PCB



Reference example of installation 2. Refer to “Flow of Determining the Procedure for Collecting Logs” on page 657 and when it is judged that collection of the key operation logs is required, enable [Store Key Operation Log] by following the procedure shown below. 1. Select [Settings/Registration] > [Management Settings] > [Device Management] > [Store Key Operation Log]. 2. Select [ON] and press [OK] to start saving key operation logs. CAUTION: When collecting the key operation logs, be sure to obtain user's permission in advance.



660



6. Troubleshooting 3. Refer to “Flow of Determining the Procedure for Collecting Logs” on page 657 and when it is judged that collection of the network packet logs is required, enable the network packet log collection function by following the procedure shown below and start the function. 1. Enter a license in the following menu to enable network packet capture. [Settings/Registration] > [Management Settings] > [License/Other] > [Register License] NOTE: Use the license issued by the Support Dept. of the sales company to activate it.



2. Enable the setting (ON) in the following menu. [Settings/Registration] > [Preferences] > [Network] > [Store Network Packet Log] 3. Set "1" in the following service mode (Lv.2). Service mode > COPIER > TEST > NET-CAP > CAPOFFON 4. Refer to “Initial setting of the network packet log collection function” on page 662, and configure the required option settings. 5. Set "0" or "1" in the following service mode (Lv.2) to start capture of network packets. Service mode > COPIER > TEST > NET-CAP > STT-STP • 0: Not automatically collect at startup (factory default setting) • 1: Automatically collects at startup 6. Execute the following service mode (Lv.2) to check the status of the capture. Service mode > COPIER > TEST > NET-CAP > CAPSTATE The following types of status are displayed. • RUNNING: Packets are being captured. • STOP: Packet capturing is stopped. • HDDFULL: The maximum amount of 1 GB of packets has been captured. 4. When an instruction to change the automatic log settings is given by the Support Dept. of the sales company, change the settings by referring to“Automatic Log Settings” on page 661.



● Automatic Log Settings Automatic log is collected triggered by "occurrence of an unexpected error", "occurrence of an error code" or "restart of the machine". If you want to change the triggers, change the setting in the following service mode. COPIER > Function > DBG-LOG > LOG-TRIG However, there is no need to change the setting unless otherwise instructed by the Support Dept. of the sales company. The events that trigger collection of automatic logs and their setting values are shown below. List of conditions for automatic saving of logs and setting values Setting value



Event condition for saving automatic log



101 (Default setting)



When an unexpected error occurs, an error code occurs, or the machine is restarted



111



Only when an unexpected error occurs



121



Only when an error code occurs



131



Only when the machine is restarted



201



When an unexpected error occurs, an error code occurs, the machine is restarted, or an alarm occurs



211



When an unexpected error occurs or an alarm occurs



221



When an error code occurs or an alarm occurs



231



When the machine is restarted or an alarm occurs



291



Only when an alarm occurs



301



When an unexpected error occurs, an error code occurs, the machine is restarted, or a jam occurs



311



When an unexpected error occurs or a jam occurs



321



When an error code occurs or a jam occurs



331



When the machine is restarted or a jam occurs



391



Only when a jam occurs



The procedure for changing the log auto save conditions with LOG-TRIG is indicated below. 1. Press [LOG-TRIG], enter the value for the conditions you want to set, and press [OK]. "ACTIVE!" flashes in the display column, and the log settings in the machine are changed. 2. When [OK!] is displayed in the display column, the work is complete. If the processing fails, "NG" is displayed. It is not necessary to restart the device.



661



6. Troubleshooting NOTE: • A value between 0 and 99999 can be set, but make sure to set the value instructed by the Support Dept. of your sales company. Operations are not guaranteed when value other than the above is set. • The displayed setting is not changed simply by changing the setting or pressing [DEFAULT]. It is necessary to exit the DBG-LOG screen once by pressing the [Reset] key, etc. and then display it again, after performing these operations.



Executing Auto Saving (Reference Example) An example of executing auto saving using LOG-TRIG is shown below so that you can experience the log collection work. It is an example of log collection in the event of jam in the Delivery Assembly during copy operation. 1. Connect a USB device to the machine while the machine is ready for operation. 2. Set "301" in the following service mode (Lv.2). • COPIER > Function > DBG-LOG > LOG-TRIG 3. Make a copy. Open the Delivery Feed Assembly before paper is delivered from the Delivery Assembly to generate a jam. 4. When a jam occurs, confirm "Storing System Information..." is displayed at the bottom of the Control Panel.



● Initial setting of the network packet log collection function When collecting the network packet logs, configure the initial settings as needed.



Setting the overwrite function 1. To enable this function, set "1" in the following service mode (Lv.2). Service mode > COPIER > TEST > NET-CAP > OVERWRIT NOTE: When this setting is enabled, old logs will be overwritten. If the symptom cannot be reproduced, disable this setting (setting value: 0) and secure logs (save them using SST or USB). After securing the logs, enable the setting (setting value: 1) again.



Behavior when HDD reaches the limit When this setting is enabled (setting value: 1), the following behaviors will occur when the HDD reaches the limit. • When overwrite setting is ON • The oldest packet file is deleted. This "oldest file" is judged not by the date and time allocated to the file but by the last update time of the file. • If the HDD reaches the maximum size while retrieving packets, the oldest file will be deleted, and CAPSTATE of the capture, which continues the retrieval process for the file which is being saved, remains "RUNNING". • When overwrite setting is OFF • The capture is stopped. • The CAPSTATE of the capture will be "HDDFULL". However, STT-STP will remain as Start (1) status. By changing STT-STP (0) to STTSTP (1), the capture resumes. • When the capture resumes, the capture starts if HDDFULL has been solved. • The CAPSTATE of the capture will be "RUNNING". • If HDDFULL has not been solved, an error is generated as the result of resuming the capture. • The CAPSTATE of the capture remains "HDDFULL". • If the capture is stopped while the CAPSTATE is "HDDFULL", the CAPSTATE of the capture remains "STOP".



Setting the encryption function 1. To enable this function, set "2" in the following service mode (Lv.2). COPIER > TEST > NET-CAP > ENCDATA • 0: Encrypted when data is extracted (factory default setting). • 1: Not encrypted when data is extracted. • 2: When data is extracted, a ciphertext file and a plaintext file are extracted. The extension of extracted packet data will be "XXX.can" when encryption settings are enabled. The extension of extracted packet data will be "XXX.cap" when encryption settings are disabled. This setting only applies when extracting data by the USB flash drive. NOTE: When SST is used to collect data, both plaintext data and ciphertext data are extracted, and this setting is ignored.



662



6. Troubleshooting



Setting the payload drop function 1. To enable this setting, set "1" in the following service mode (Lv.2). COPIER > TEST > NET-CAP > PAYLOAD • 0: Not drop the payload (factory default settings) • 1: Drop the payload The obtained packet data includes a header part and data part. The header part includes data such as the TCP header and IP header. The data part includes the actual data. Enabling this function discards the actual payload data and extracts only the data from the header part, which has the following effects. • Can be used when customer data is not allowed to be extracted • Can be used in an environment where traffic is highly overloaded Header part Data part Discarded part



Packet data structure image



Setting the filter function 1. To enable this function, set "1" in the following service mode (Lv.2). COPIER > TEST > NET-CAP > SIMPFILT • 0: All data is collected without being filtered (factory default setting). • 1: Data is filtered. If this function is enabled, only packet data that includes the machine's MAC address in the packet header is captured.



Setting the startup collection function 1. To enable this function, set "1" in the following service mode (Lv.2). COPIER > TEST > NET-CAP > PONSTART • 0: Not automatically collect at startup (factory default setting) • 1: Data is filtered. If this function is enabled, only packet data that includes the machine's MAC address in the packet header is captured.



■ Saving of Manual Logs, Network Packet Logs and Key Operation Logs Follow the steps shown below to save debug logs (manual logs, network packet logs, and key operation logs) to the save area of the host machine that require manual operation. 1. After the symptom has reproduced, hold down the Counter key on the Control Panel for approx. 10 seconds, and then press 1, 2, and 3 in that order on the Numeric Keypad. CAUTION: If power is turned OFF during the period from when the symptom occurs to when the manual log is saved (hold down the Counter key and press numeric keys 1, 2, and 3), necessary log data will be deleted so that analysis cannot be performed.



2



663



1



6. Troubleshooting 2. Check that "Storing System Information..." is displayed on the Control Panel. • For platform version 3.7 or later, following screen is displayed.



Save screen for platform version 3.7 or later • For the platform version 3.6 or earlier, following message is displayed.



Massage during saving logs for platform version 3.6 or earlier CAUTION: • While logs are being saved, other operations cannot be performed. • If above screen or message does not appear, press the Reset button and then try again.



NOTE: When network packet logs have been collected and necessary network packets have been captured, stop the capture from the following menu. [Settings/Registration] > [Preferences] > [Network] > [Store Network Packet Log] When this setting is disabled, all the service mode settings configured in step 3 are initialized. After completion of analysis of the network trouble, be sure to disable the network capture function. It is therefore necessary to disable and then transfer the license, but it is not necessary to transfer the LMS license after that.



■ Saving and Collecting Report Files Follow the procedure shown below to save report files to the the Main Unit internal storage and collect them using a USB device.



664



6. Troubleshooting 1. Execute the following service mode to save report files. COPIER > Function > MISC-P > RPT-FILE



2. Connect the USB and verify that Main machine recognizes the USB. 3. Execute the following service mode and retrieve the report file to USB. COPIER > Function > MISC-P > RPT2USB



■ Collection of Log Save the Sublogs stored in the host machine to a USB device or a PC with SST installed. The procedure for storing Sublogs to a USB device differs from that for storing Sublogs to a PC



● Collecting into a USB Device To save (collect) Sublogs to a USB device, perform the procedure shown below to collect the logs. If SST is used to save (collect) Sublogs to a PC, this work is not necessary. CAUTION: If the log is stored multiple times to the USB flash drive on the host machine with the platform version 3.6 or earlier, make sure to move the stored log file to a different location each time. Log files are stored in the root directory of USB flash drive. If multiple files are stored, the file, "LOGLIST.txt" is overwritten. Note that on the host machine with the platform version 3.7 later, specifications are changed and this file is not overwritten. 1. Connect the USB flash drive to the machine.



665



6. Troubleshooting 2. Execute the following service mode. COPIER > Function > SYSTEM > DOWNLOAD



3. The host machine will enter download mode. Press [8] on the Numeric Keypad. [ [ [ [ [ [ [ [ Root Menu (USB) ] ] ] ] ] ] ] ] (v25.12) ------------------------------------------------------[ 1 ] : Select Version [ 4 ] : Clear/Format [ 5 ] : Backup/Restore [ 8 ] : Download File [ 9 ] : Version Information [ Reset ] : Start shutdown sequence



4. [Download File Menu] will appear. Press a numeric key for the file to download. [ [ [ [ [ [ [ [ Download File Menu (USB) ] ] ] ] ] ] ] ] (v25.12) -----------------------------------------------------------------------[ 1 ] : SUBLOG Download [ 4 ] : ServicePrint Download [ 5 ] : NetCap Download [ C ] : Return to Menu



• Press [1] key to download Sublog. • Press [5] to download network packet log. 5. The files to be downloaded and the number of files are displayed. Check the following items and press [0] on the Numeric Keypad. • Whether the manual log that was saved at the time of reproduction of the symptom is displayed under Event Logs • Whether the date and time at which the symptom was reproduced is within the period of Continuous Log Example: When the symptom was reproduced at 9:40 on April 14, 2017 and a manual log was saved Check that the manual log that was generated at 9:40 on April 14, 2017 is displayed under Event Logs. Check whether 9:40 on April 14, 2017 is included in the logged period(from 8:03:33 on March 22, 2017 to 9:45:14 April 14, 2017) of the ContinuousLog. [ [ [ [ [ [ [ [ Sublog Download (EventLog + CuntinuousLog) ] ] ] ] ] ] ] ] ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Event Logs ( lastest 10 files) : 20170414_09-40-UPN00003-V2512_Debuglog@Cnt123 20170404_16-02-ZZZ00000-V0254_ServiceCall-E719-0001 20170328_08-22-ZZZ00000-V0254_exception ContinuousLog : Period :



Automatic (event) log / manual log: Check that the manual logs that have been saved when the symptom occurs.



20170322_0803-33 to 20170414_0945-14



Continuous log: Check that the date and time at which the symptom occurred are included within the collection period of continuous logs.



Toral : 102files / Execute ? / -(OK) : 0 / (CANCEL) : Any other keys -



666



6. Troubleshooting 6. When downloading the log files is complete, the following message will appear. Press any key. --- Please press any keys --[68/102]20170405_0949-57-ZZZ00000-2512-clog.bin [69/102]20170405_0908-19-ZZZ00000-2512-clog.bin [70/102]20170404_1822-52-ZZZ00000-2512-clog.bin [71/102]20170404_1702-57-ZZZ00000-2512-clog.bin [97/102]20170322_1324-37-ZZZ00000-2512-clog.bin [98/102]20170322_1204-56-ZZZ00000-2512-clog.bin [99/102]20170322_1102-52-ZZZ00000-2512-clog.bin [100/102]20170322_0954-48-ZZZ00000-2512-clog.bin [101/102]20170322_0848-16-ZZZ00000-2512-clog.bin [102/102]20170322_0803-33-ZZZ00000-2512-clog.bin Sub log full Download OK. ---Please press any keys--Do not turn OFF the power without.......



● Saving to a PC with SST installed Follow the procedure shown below to save (collect) Sublogs to a PC using SST. If a USB device is used to save (collect) Sublogs, this work is not necessary. 1. Connect a PC with SST installed to the network where the host machine is connected. 2. Start SST, and select the model name of the machine from Model List. Press the Start button.



3. Click [Upload Data].



667



6. Troubleshooting 4. Check that continuous logs are stored in the device. When connection with the device is completed, the screen shown below will appear. Select [Upload Data]. The set of data stored in the device is shown on the right. Click "+" at "Log" to expand the tree, and check that there are continuous logs (date_model number_clog.bin).



5. Select the data to upload, and click [Start]. Select the check box on the left of "Log", and click the "Start" button. It is not necessary to select MeapBack.bin and SramImg.bin because they are not necessary for analysis.



6. Enter a file name (arbitrary), and click the SAVE button to save the file to the PC.



668



6. Troubleshooting



● Checking the Saved Files NOTE: If log files are stored in the USB flash drive, the path to the storage destination is different by the platform version. Platform version prior to 3.7 They are stored in the root directory of USB flash drive. Platform version 3.7 or later Folders of "iA_sublog" and "model name + serial number + date (year, month, day + hour, minute, second)" are automatically created in the root directory of USB flash drive and files are stored in the latter folder.



Sublog files Check the saved log files whether the necessary log has been collected. • Whether it is a log file of the target model (It contains the serial number of the target machine.) • Whether the time and date the symptom occurred is included in the logged period. (Date and time in the log file name represent those of when the log collection is started. There are files with dates before the symptom occurs.) Storage locations of log files Storage locations of log files are shown below. When using USB device: Root folder of the USB device When using SST: PC's C:\ServData\\serial number folder How to check the continuous log files The continuous log files are stored in the log file storage location. Check the names (date and time) of the files that end with "clog.bin" to see whether the date and time the symptom was reproduced is included. In the case of the following figure, the oldest continuous log is 08:03:33 on March 22, 2017 and the latest file is 08:43:44 on April 14, 2017. The date and time the symptom was reproduced should be included within the period.



669



6. Troubleshooting 20170322_0803-33-ZZZ00000-2512-clog.bin 20170322_0848-16-ZZZ00000-2512-clog.bin 20170322_0954-48-ZZZ00000-2512-clog.bin 20170322_1102-52-ZZZ00000-2512-clog.bin 20170413_1408-46-ZZZ00000-2512-clog.bin 20170413_1409-12-ZZZ00000-2512-clog.bin 20170413_1455-57-ZZZ00000-2512-clog.bin 20170414_00-26-ZZZ00000-V2512_SAFE.bin 20170414_0843-44-ZZZ00000-2512-clog.bin LOGLIST.TXT sxldlog_2017-04-14_00-28-22.bin



20161013_1733-36_ZZZ99999_1406_clog.bin Data and time when a file was archived (year, month, day, hour, minute, second).



Serial Number



Firmware Version Identification indicating that it is a continuous log



File name of continuous log How to check the manual log files and automatic (event) log files The manual log files and automatic (event) log files are stored in the log file storage location. At the time of collection, these logs will be archived as a one binary file (the name of the file ends with "_SAFE.bin").



20161013_19-34-ZZZ99999-V1406_SAFE.bin YYYYMMDD_HH-MM



Serial Number



Firmware Version



Which logs have been stored in this binary file is described in LOGLIST.TXT stored in the log file storage location. Open this file to check the manual logs and automatic (event) logs. CAUTION: If a manual log was saved when the symptom was reproduced, check that a log with the date and time immediately after the reproduction is included. If there is no log file collected immediately after the symptom was reproduced, the file may have been overwritten and lost.



20170413_1408-46-ZZZ00000-2512-clog.bin 20170328_08-18-ZZZ00000-V0254_exception 20170413_1409-12-ZZZ00000-2512-clog.bin 20170328_08-22-ZZZ00000-V0254_exception 20170413_1455-57-ZZZ00000-2512-clog.bin 20170404_16-02-ZZZ00000-V0254_ServiceCall-E719-0001 20170414_00-26-ZZZ00000-V2512_SAFE.bin 20170404_16-04-ZZZ00000-V0254_ServiceCall-E719-0001 20170414_0843-44-ZZZ00000-2512-clog.bin 20170414_09-40_ZZZ00000_V0254_Debuglog@Cnt123 LOGLIST.TXT UPDATELOG_LOG sxldlog_2017-04-14_00-28-22.bin



20161013_10-10_ZZZ99999_V 1308_Debuglog@Cnt123 Identification indicating that Serial Number Data and time when key Firmware Version a key operation was performed operation was performed (year, month, day, hour, minute, second).



File name of manual log



670



6. Troubleshooting



20161012_14-48_ZZZ99999_V1406_Fatal00-exception Serial Number Data and time when Firmware Version an even occurred (year, month, day, hour, minute, second).



Cause of occurrence



20161012_14-48_ZZZ99999_V1406_ServiceCall-E719-0031 Serial Number Data and time when Firmware Version an even occurred (year, month, day, hour, minute, second).



Cause of occurrence



File name of automatic log How to check the network packet log files The network packet log file is stored in the "NC + date" folder created in the log file storage location. Open the folder and check that two types of files have been saved: a plaintext file which file name starts with "NC" and ends with ".cap", and a ciphertext file which file name starts with "NC" and ends with ".can".



Report files Report files saved to the USB device are stored in the folder under the name shown below where the firmware is stored. • [Serial No.] > SP [Date (year, month, day, hour, minute (12 digits))] L



Service Mode Relating to Debug Logs Although the procedure for collecting debug logs of this equipment is as indicated above, there are other service modes related to debug logs. Use the following service modes (Lv.2) as needed. COPIER > Function > DBG-LOG > HIT-STS COPIER > Function > DBG-LOG > DEFAULT COPIER > Function > DBG-LOG > LOG-DEL



671



6. Troubleshooting NOTE: If log collection is continued or setting change is repeated when an abnormality is found in operation of the function related to debug logs, temporary files or log files may be remained in the machine. In that case, execute "DEFAULT" in service mode to clear the settings related to debug logs and repeat the operation again.



Confirming the Existence of Debug Logs (HIT-STS) This service mode confirms whether debug logs exist in the auto save area. "OK!" is displayed if logs exist in the auto save area. NOTE: "OK!" is displayed even after pressing the Counter key + numeric keys 1, 2, and 3.



Initializing the Debug Log Settings (DEFAULT) This service mode changes all the settings related to debug logs back to the default (settings at the time of shipment). • Be sure to perform when returning the device to the customer after completion of trouble investigation. (Operations required) • Execute this service mode when resetting the settings related to debug logs during investigation of log collection and perform the operation again. However, note that the log files automatically saved to the debug log save area in the controller are kept within the range not exceeding the upper limit. If you want to delete the saved logs (want to use HIT-STS), use "LOG-DEL" indicated later.



Deleting the Automatically Saved Log Files (LOG-DEL) This service mode deletes the automatically saved and stored log files. The settings of log operation such as trigger for saving log are not cleared. Although it is not used normally (the upper limit of the number of saved logs is automatically controlled by firmware), it is necessary to delete logs with LOG-DEL once when judging whether logs are collected using HIT-STS after changing the trigger for saving log. (It is because OK is displayed in HIT-STS as long as the saved logs exist.)



672



6. Troubleshooting



Startup System Failure Diagnosis How to See the Startup System Failure Diagnosis The goal of the startup system failure diagnosis is to be able to solve troubles associated with a Control Panel display failure by performing the following steps. It is assumed that the users have already learned the following items: • How to use a tester • Roles of the All-night Power Supply (5 V) and Non-all-night Power Supply (12 V) • How to back up data (HDD and Main Controller) It is recommended to execute the diagnosis again after executing the diagnosis and troubleshooting to check that the machine starts normally.



■ Useful Operations The items of detailed procedure explanation start with a description of the flow diagram. The items and procedures checked in the flow diagram are described separately in a check item table. The flow diagram contains numbers (e.g. (1)) corresponding to the check items so that the readers can grasp the relevant parts of the check item table.



Flow



Check item list



Start (1) Whether there is nothing displayed on the Control Panel LCD -1Is the Control Panel Main Power LED blinking? YES



Check item Check whether the Control Panel LCD is blank and nothing is displayed on it.



NO



-2Is the Control Panel Main Power LED ON? YES



Replace the following parts. - microUSB Cable between the Main Controller PCB (J4501) and the Control Panel CPU PCB (J1020).



NO



-3Is the Control Panel Energy Saver LED lit or blinking?



NO



YES Replace the following parts. - microUSB Cable between the Main Controller PCB (J4501) and the Control Panel CPU PCB (J1020).



The location of each check item can be referenced by the corresponding number in the flow diagram.



Startup Failure Analysis Policy If the host machine does not start successfully even when its Power Switch is turned ON, one of the following displays will appear on the Control Panel LCD. • Blank • Only the bar is displayed • The logo is displayed • E-code is displayed Execute troubleshooting by performing the procedure described in the reference according to the following flow.



673



6. Troubleshooting



Start



Turn ON the power switch



Display of Control Panel LED Blank



The Control Panel LCD is "blank"



YES Execute "Flow A: Control Panel LED Check Flow"



NO Only the bar is displayed



Only the bar remains displayed on the Control Panel LCD and the machine does not start NO The logo remains displayed on the Control Panel LCD and the machine does not start NO



The logo is displayed



E-code is displayed



E-code is displayed on the Control Panel LCD NO



YES



Execute "Flow B: Controller Self Diagnosis"



YES Execute countermeasures related to system software - Reinstall the system - Replace the HDD YES Execute countermeasures by referring to the error code correspondence table



Check that the machine can be started without any problem



End of analysis



NOTE: It may take about 5 minutes or more to display E 602-0001.



Flow A: Control Panel LED Check Flow When the Control Panel LCD screen is "black", the location of the failure can be identified by checking whether initial rotation has been performed and the Control Panel LED status. There are three types of LED status: On, Off, and blinking. As for blinking, there are the following two types of blinking. Pattern 1 (Controller error) An LED blinks twice in 4 seconds.



... 1 sec 4 sec



Pattern 2 (Power supply error) • • An LED blinks three times in 4 seconds.



674



6. Troubleshooting



. . .



1 sec 4 sec



Identify the location of the failure according to the following flow. The Control Panel LCD is "blank"



Check that the Leakage Breaker has been tripped



Turn OFF the main power switch, and check that the Power Supply Cord of the machine is connected securely.



Is "blank" Control Panel LCD solved?



YES



Go to “Startup Failure Analysis Policy”



NO



Is the Control Panel LED blinking?



YES



NO Is it blinking in Pattern 1?



NO Go to "Flow C: Power Supply Assembly Check Flow"



YES



1. Replace the Main Controller PCB 1 2. Replace the harness between the Main Controller PCB 1 and the Control Panel Unit *



*: Note that working with 2 or more people is required to lift the Reader/ADF when replacing the corresponding parts.



Flow B: Controller Self Diagnosis Reference : “Controller Self Diagnosis” on page 682



Flow C: Power Supply Assembly Check Flow ■ Status Check If nothing is displayed on the Control Panel when the power of the host machine is turned ON, identify the location of the failure according to the flow.



■ Flow for narrowing down troubles If the Main Power LED is ON, the All-night Power Supply (5 V) is being supplied. If the 12 V Power Supply is activated, the Control Panel Backlight can be activated. If the power-on signal is supplied to the 12 V power supply, the 12 V can still activate the Control Panel Backlight. If the power-on signal is blocked, the 12 V power supply stops supplying power.



675



6. Troubleshooting Consult this flow when checking the 5 V and 12 V power supplies and identifying the location of the failure in "Execution Flow for Control Panel Startup Failure" described below. Start



ձ Is the Control Panel LED ON?



YES



NO



ղ Check the 5V supplied from pin 1 of the J9001 on the Main Controller PCB 2.



YES



1.Replace Main Controller 2 2.Replace Control Panel Unit 3.Replace Connection Cable between the Main Controller PCB 2 and Control Panel. *



NO



Flow C-2 : To All-night Power Supply (5V) System Flow



ճ Check the 12V supplied from pin 6 of the J9001 on the Main Controller PCB 2. NO



Flow C-1 : To 12V Power Supply System Flow



YES



1.Replace Main Controller 2 2.Replace Control Panel Unit 3.Replace Connection Cable between the Main Controller PCB 2 and Control Panel. * *: Note that working with 2 or more people is required to lift the Reader/ADF when replacing the corresponding parts.



■ Check item Item 1



Check item



Location



Control Panel LED



676



6. Troubleshooting Item 2



Check item



Location



Main Controller PCB 2 Check the pin 1 (5 V) of J9001. Example: Pin 1 (5 V) and pin 7 (GND) Normal value: 5 V



-







3







Main Controller PCB 2 Check the pin 6 (12 V) of J9001. Example: Pin 6 (12 V) and pin 7 (GND) Normal value: 12 V



-







Flow C-1: DC Power (12 V) Check Flow ■ DC Power (12 V) Check Flow The following diagram shows the 12 V power supply route.



J605



AC Driver PCB



J101 AC



J102 DC Power Supply (12V)



J511



J508



J9001



Relay PCB DC 12V



Identify the location of the assumed failure according to the following flow.



677



DC 12V



Main Controller PCB 2







6. Troubleshooting 12V is not supplied from pin 6 of the J9001 on the Main Controller PCB 2.



(1) Check the 12V output from pin 6 of the J508 on the Relay PCB.



YES



[Assumed failure location] 1.Main Controller PCB2 2.Connection Cable between the Relay PCB and Main Controller PCB 2.



NO



(2) Check the 12V supplied from pin 3 of the J511 on the Relay PCB.



YES



NO



[Assumed failure location] 1.Relay PCB



(3) Check the Power-on signal supplied from pin 1 of the J511 on the Relay PCB.



YES



[Assumed failure location] 1.DC Power Supply PCB(12V) 2.Connection Cable between the DC Power Supply PCB and Relay PCB. 3.AC Driver PCB 4.Connection Cable between the AC Driver PCB and DC Power Supply PCB.



NO



(4) Does the LED6002 on the Main Controller PCB 1 light up?



YES



NO



[Assumed failure location] Main Controller PCB 1



[Assumed failure location] 1.Relay PCB 2.Connection Cable between the Relay PCB and Main Controller PCB 2. 3.Main Controller PCB 2



■ Check item Item 1



Check item



Location



Relay PCB Connector side of J508 Example: Pin 6 (12 V) and pin 7 (GND) Normal value: 12 V



 



-



678



6. Troubleshooting Item 2



Check item



Location



Relay PCB Connector side of J511 Example: Pin 3 (12 V) and pin 10 (GND) Normal value: 12 V



-







3







Relay PCB Connector side of J511 Example: Pin 1 (power-on signal) and pin 10 (GND) Normal value: Within 1.79 to 2.37 V



-











4



Main Controller PCB 1 Check the LED6002 activation



/('



Flow C-2: All-night Power Supply (5 V) Check Flow ■ All-night Power Supply (5 V) Check Flow The following diagram shows the 5 V power supply route.



J603



AC Driver PCB



J681 AC



J691 All-night Power Supply (5V)



J510



J508



J9001



Relay PCB DC 5V



679



DC 5V



Main Controller PCB 2



6. Troubleshooting Identify the location of the assumed failure according to the following flow. 5V is not supplied from pin 1 of the J510 on the Main Controller PCB 2



(1) Check the 5V output from pin 1 of the J508 on the Relay PCB



YES



[Assumed failure location] 1.Main Controller PCB2 2.Connection Cable between the Relay PCB and Main Controller PCB 2.



NO



(2) Check the 5V supplied from pin 1 of the J510 on the Relay PCB



YES



NO



[Assumed failure location] 1.All-night Power Supply (5V) 2.Connection Cable between the All-night Power Supply and Relay PCB. 3.AC Driver PCB 4.Connection Cable between the AC Driver PCB and All-night Power Supply.



[Assumed failure location] 1.Relay PCB



■ Check item Item 1



Check item



Location



Relay PCB Connector side of J508 Example: Pin 1 (5 V) and pin 7 (GND) Normal value: 5 V











-



2



Relay PCB Connector side of J510 Example: Pin 1 (5 V) and pin 6 (GND) Normal value: 5 V



-



 



680



6. Troubleshooting



Reference: Activation Conditions of the Control Panel Backlight ■ Overview : 12 V Ppower Supply control The Control Panel Backlight is turned ON when 12 V power is supplied from the Man Controller PCB 2. The details of 12 V power supply route and route of power-on signal that controls power are shown below. 1. The Control Panel Backlight is turned ON when 12 V power is supplied. The 12 V power is supplied through the following route: AC Driver PCB > DC Power Supply PCB (12 V) > Relay PCB > Main Controller PCB 2 > Control Panel 2. Supply of 12 V power is controlled by the power-on signal output from the Main Controller PCB 1. The 5 V power used for the Main Controller PCB 1 is supplied through the following route. AC Driver PCB > All-night Power Supply PCB (5 V) > Relay PCB > Main Controller PCB 2 > Main Controller PCB 1 3. The Main Controller PCB 2 receives its power supply from the DC Power Supply PCB (12 V) and the power-on signal that controls the DC Power Supply PCB (12 V) is sent through the following route. Main Controller PCB 1 > Main Controller PCB 2 > Relay PCB > DC Power Supply PCB (12 V) 4. The DC Power Supply PCB (12 V) receives its power supply from the AC Driver PCB and the power-on signal that controls the AC Driver PCB is sent through the following route. Main Controller PCB 1 > Main Controller PCB 2 > Relay PCB > AC Driver PCB Relay PCB



AC Driver PCB All-night Power Supply (5V)



H N



5V Power Supply



Main Controller PCB 2



Main Controller PCB 1 LED



(2)



Power-on signal Control Panel control signal (4) (3)



DC Power Supply PCB (12V)



12V Power Supply



Control Panel Unit



(1)



NOTE: • When the power-on signal output from the Main Controller PCB 1 is blocked, the power supply stops even if the Power Supply Unit is operating properly. • The power-on signal is output at 3.3 V.



681



6. Troubleshooting



Controller Self Diagnosis In order to reduce the time for identifying the cause of error occurred in the field and improve the accuracy of identifying the error locations, operation of the controller system error diagnosis tool added to the host machine and the remedies for errors are described. This manual can be used when the host machine is in the following conditions. • When a failure of the Main Controller PCB and the related PCBs (child PCBs such as TPM installed on the Main Controller PCB) is suspected PCBs and units diagnosed by the tool are as follow:



Option



HDD



DC Controler PCB



Main Controller PCB 1



Reader



Operation panel



Main Controller PCB 2



Flash PCB Controller Self Diagnosis tool



TPM PCB



Memory PCB



Option



All-night/Non-allnight Power Supply



The area framed in blue (dotted line) in the figure shows the components to be checked by the controller system error diagnosis tool. The Main Controller PCB, child PCBs installed on the Main Controller PCB and HDD are automatically checked, and the result is displayed on the Control Panel.



682



6. Troubleshooting



Boot Method 1. Turn ON the Main Power Supply Switch while pressing the numeric keys '2' and '4' simultaneously.



2. Keep pressing the numeric keys (for approx. 20 seconds) until the following screen appears on the Control Panel.



=============================================== BOX Checker Ver 0. 58 SCENARIO-1 Processing BoxMode check start. . .



---------------------------------------------------------------------------------SN-1 IA-DDR2 SDRAM check start. . .



683



6. Troubleshooting NOTE: When this tool is not installed correctly, the regular Startup screen is displayed.



In this case, perform the following remedy. Turn OFF the Main Power Switch again, and execute steps 1 and 2 shown above. If this tool still does not boot, it means that BCT (Box Checker Test) is deleted, so install BCT. If BCT is not installed correctly, "- - . - -" is displayed in Service Mode (BCT) in the host machine. • COPIER > DISPLAY > VERSION > BCT



Diagnosis Result Diagnosis Time Diagnosis is completed in approx. 3 minutes. The result is displayed on the Control Panel.



When the diagnosis result is normal



When an error is detected by diagnosis Detailed information is displayed under the judgment result. In detailed information, the name of the test where the error was detected is displayed.



How to view the error result The following screen is an enlarged view of the detailed information indicated above. Explanation of the detailed error information is described.



684



6. Troubleshooting >> The result of Box checker is displayed below. [no] : SN-9 PCI Configuration PCI-Bridge [NG] : SN-13 TPM [no] : SN-19 O-SDRAM >> Please Turn off main switch.



[NO] means that optional PCBs are not mounted. A fault has occurred when [NO] is displayed irrespective of whether the Option PCB is attached. [NG] means that an error occurred to PCBs mounted as standard.



■ Controller System Error Diagnosis Table The error locations are identified according to the following table. Test name



Detailed test name



Presumed failure location



Remedy



Relevant Error Code



SN-1 MNCheck the SDRAM of DDR3 SDRAM the Main Controller PCB1



• Main Controller PCB1



Replacement of the Main Controller PCB1



-



SN-2 SM BUS Check the circuit in the MN DDR3 On Main Controller PCB1 Board



• Main Controller PCB1



Replacement of the Main Controller PCB1



-



SN-5 PCI Con- Check the circuit in the figuration Cai- Main Controller PCB1 man



• Main Controller PCB1



Replacement of the Main Controller PCB1



-



SN-8 CPLD



Check the circuit in the Main Controller PCB1



• Main Controller PCB1



Replacement of the Main Controller PCB1



-



SN-9 LANC FLASH



Check the circuit in the Main Controller PCB1



• Main Controller PCB1



Replacement of the Main Controller PCB1



-



SN-10 RTC CHECK



Check RTC setting time



• Main Controller PCB1



Replacement of the Main Controller PCB1



-



SN-11 TPM



Check TPM PCB device Remarks: It is always [NG] in machines for China because the TPM PCB is not installed.



• Main Controller PCB1 • TPM PCB



SN-12 SOC Check the circuit in the DDR3 SDRAM Main Controller PCB1



• Main Controller PCB1 • Main Controller PCB2



SN-13 FRAM



Check the Memory PCB lead



• Memory PCB



SN-16 HDD



Check the HDD lead (see the display example shown below)



• HDD



1. Replacement of the TPM PCB E746 2. Replacement of the Main Controller PCB1



Replacement of the Main Controller PCB1



-



1. Check the Memory PCB installation 2. Replace the Memory PCB



E355



In case of a single HDD configuration



E602



1. Check the HDD connection (If it is displayed in a mirroring configuration, it indicates that the HDD 1 is faully.) 2. Replace the HDD Cable 3. Replace the HDD In case of an HDD mirroring configuration



-



1. Check the connection of the HDD indicated in the diagnosis result. 2. Replace the cable of the HDD indicated in the diagnosis result. 3. Replace the HDD indicated in the diagnosis result. SN-17 SRI



SRI BUS device Connection check



• Main Controller PCB1



Replacement of the Main Controller PCB1



-



SN-25 FAN1



Check the rotation of the Controller Fan



• Main Controller PCB1



Check the connection of the Controller Fan



E880



685



6. Troubleshooting Test name



Detailed test name



SN-100 HDD HEALTH CHECK



Check the S.M.A.R.T. acquisition and lead performance (see the example displayed in the figure below)



Presumed failure location



Remedy



• HDD



Relevant Error Code



• If the S.M.A.R.T. Check displays a numeric value apart from [0], a backup of customer data is recommended. • If the CheckResult is judged as CAUTION, a backup of customer data is recommended. • If the Performance is displayed as [20 MB/s] or less, replacement of the HDD is recommended. • If Exec SN-100 HDD HEALTH CHECK is judged as NG, replace the HDD.



SN-16 HDD >0%V@ &KHFN5HVXOW !>1250$/@ ([HF61+''+($/7+&+(&. !>2.@ ([HF6&(1$5,23URFHVVLQJ%R[0RGH !>2.@



        



[Rebuilding] = During rebuilding of mirrored HDD [HDD1 Failure] = Failure of the HDD1



!!7KHUHVXOWRI%R[FKH[FNHULVGLVSOD\HGEHORZ >:DUQLQJ@61+''>+'')DLOXUH@



[HDD2 Failure] = Failure of the HDD2



3OHDVHKLW5HVHW.H\WRVWDUWVKXWGRZQ



SN-100 HDD HEALTH CHECK --------------------------------------------------------------------------------SN-23 FAN check start. . . Exec SN-23 FAN => [OK] --------------------------------------------------------------------------------SN-100 HDD HEALTH CHECK check start. . . S.M.A.R.T Check ----05 : Reallocated Sectors Count :[00000000000000] c5 : Current Pending Sector Count :[00000000000000] c6 : Uncorrectable Sector Count :[00000000000000]



S.M.A.R.T Check ----05: Reallcated Sectors Count:[000000000000] C5: Current Pending Sector Count:[000000000000]



Refer to . See below.



C6: Uncorrectable Sector Count:[000000000000]



Read Performance Check ----136. 8 [MB/s] CheckResult => [NORMAL] Exec SN-100 HDD HEALTH CHECK => [OK] ========================================== Exec SCENARIO-1 Processing BoxMode => [OK]



%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% %%%%%%%%%%% %%%%%%%%%% %%%%% %%%%%%%% %%%%%%%% %%%%%%%% %%%%%%%% %%%% %%%%%%%%%%% %%%%%% %%%%%%%%%%%% %%%%%% %% %%%%%%%%%%%%% %%%%%% %%%%%%%%%%%% %%%%%% %%%%%%%%%%%%%% %%%%%% %%%%%%%%%%%% %%%%%% %%%%%%%%%%%% %%%%%%% %%%%%%%% %%%%%%% %%%% %%%%%%%%%% %%%%%%%%%%% %%%%%%%%%% %%%%%% %%%%%%% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% >> The result of Box chexcker is displayed below. [NO] : SN-8 PCI Configuration PCI-Bridge [NO] : SN-18 GOR(0)-DDR2 SDRAM



If "Performance" is [20 MB/s] or less, recommend to replace the HDD.



Read Performance Check ----[90.8MB/s] CheckResult => [NORMAL] Exec SN-100 HDD HEALTH CHECK => [OK]



If the result is CAUTION, recommend the backup of user data.



=================================== Exec SCENARIO-1 Preocessing BoxMode => [OK]



--- Please hit Reset Key to start shutdown. ---



If the result is NG, replace the HDD.



● HDD S.M.A.R.T Information S.M.A.R.T Check S.M.A.R.T Check



Description



Remedy



05: Reallocated Sectors Count: Number of alternative processed defec- If a numeric value besides [0000000000000] is displayed, [000000000000] tive sectors backup is recommended to avoid losing customer data. c5: Current Pending Sector Count: [000000000000]



Number of pending sectors (sectors that may have defective sectors)



c6: Uncorrectable Sector Count: [0000000000000]



Number of defective sectors (uncorrect- If a numeric value apart from [0000000000000] is displayed, able sectors) which do not allow alter• backup is recommended to avoid losing customer data. native processing • Replace the HDD * Alarm 31-0008 may have occurred in the Host Machine.



686



If a numeric value apart from [0000000000000] is displayed, backup is recommended to avoid losing customer data.



6. Troubleshooting NOTE: When replacing one of the mirrored HDDs, replace the HDD indicated in the controller self-diagnosis result or indicated by the error display of the HDD LED. Of the two HDDs installed, the HDD installed on the front side is the HDD 1 (on the left in the picture), and the HDD installed on the rear side is the HDD 2 (on the right in the picture). The location of the LED and the location of the HDD differ depending on the model. A reference example is shown below.



HDD1



HDD2 HDD LED



Reference example



Limitations • If there is a problem with the test name (SN-1, 2, 8, 12), this diagnosis tool itself will not startup. • When no PCBs are installed on the Main Controller PCB, the following judgment results are displayed. Standard PCB: [NG] Optional PCB: [OK] However, [NO] is displayed in detailed error information for optional PCBs.



687



7



Error/Jam/Alarm Outline...............................................689 Error Code.........................................696 Error Code (FAX).............................. 926 Alarm Code....................................... 929 Jam Code..........................................984



7. Error/Jam/Alarm



Outline This chapter describes various codes which are displayed when a failure occurs on the product. These are classified into 3 codes as follows. Code type



Explanation



Error code



This code is displayed when an error occurs on the machine.



Jam code



This code is displayed when a jam occurs inside the machine.



Alarm code



This code is displayed when a function of the machine is malfunctioned.



Error code notation An error code is shown in 7-digit [E000XXX] on the display on the operation panel. However, [000] in 2 to 4 digit is not used. Thus, an error code is described as [EXXX] using 5 to 7 digit in the service manual. (e.g.: E012 = E000012)



Location code Error code, jam code, and alarm code include the location information. Location information is displayed as 2-digit numbers as follows. In the jam display screen, the "L" row corresponds to the location code.



Location code display example Device



Location code JAM



ERR



ALARM



imageRUNNER ADVANCE 6575/6565/6555 Series



00



Main Controller = 00 Printer engine = 05



Others of listed below



Duplex Color Image Reader Unit



01



04



02, 33, 50



Paper Deck Unit-E1



00



05



04



POD Deck Lite-C1



00



05



04



Staple Finisher-V1/V2, Booklet Finisher-V1/V2



02



02



61, 62, 65



Paper Folding Inserter Unit-J1



02



02



-



-



07



-



FAX Board



689



7. Error/Jam/Alarm



Pickup Position Code When a jam occurs, the pickup location is indicated with the following pickup position code. (On the jam display screen, the pickup position code is shown in the "P" column.)



Display example of pickup position code Pickup position code



Pickup position



00



At Finisher jam/At error avoidance jam/At ADF jam without pickup operation (at SEND, Inbox, etc.)



01



Cassette 1



02



Cassette 2



03



Cassette 3



04



Cassette 4



05



Multi-purpose Tray Pickup Assembly



F0



2-sided



Pickup size When a jam occurs, a paper size is displayed. (The row displaying "SIZE" on the jam screen refers to the paper size.)



Due to the limitation of displayable number of characters, some paper size names are omitted. The following is the list of displayed row of texts and corresponding paper sizes. * The following is based on the display specification and not all paper sizes can actually be used.



690



7. Error/Jam/Alarm Display



Paper Size



Display



Paper Size



A0



A0



LDR



LEDGER



A1



A1



LDRFB



LEDGERFULLBLEED



A2



A2



LGL



LEGAL



A3



A3



LTR



LETTER



A3FB



A3FULLBLEED



EXE



EXECUTIVE



A4



A4



STMT



STATEMENT



A5



A5



10x8



10x8



A6



A6



12x18



12x18



A7



A7



13x19



13x19



I-B0



ISOB0



15x11



15x11



I-B1



ISOB1



17x22



17x22



I-B2



ISOB2



18x24



18x24



I-B3



ISOB3



A-FLS



Australian-FOOLSCAP



I-B4



ISOB4



ALGL



Argentina-LEGAL



I-B5



ISOB5



ALTR



Argentina-LETTER



I-B6



ISOB6



OFI



OFICIO



I-B7



ISOB7



A-OFI



Argentina-OFICIO



I-C0



ISOC0



B-OFI



Bolivia-OFICIO



I-C1



ISOC1



E-OFI



Ecuador-OFICIO



I-C2



ISOC2



M-OFI



Mexico-OFICIO



I-C3



ISOC3



KLGL



Korea-LEGAL



I-C4



ISOC4



GLGL



Government-LEGAL



I-C5



ISOC5



GLTR



Government-LETTER



I-C6



ISOC6



IND-LGL



India-LEGAL



I-C7



ISOC7



COM10



COM10



I-SRA3



SRA3



DL



DL



J-B0



JISB0



E_C2



Nagagata 2



J-B1



JISB1



E_C3



Nagagata 3



J-B2



JISB2



E_C4



Nagagata 4



J-B3



JISB3



E_C5



Nagagata 5



J-B4



JISB4



E-K2



Kakugata 2



J-B5



JISB5



E_K3



Kakugata 3



J-B6



JISB6



E_K4



Kakugata 4



J-B7



JISB7



E_K5



Kakugata 5



K16



K16



E_K6



Kakugata 6



K8



K8



E_K7



Kakugata 7



ND-PCD



Newdry Postcard



E_K8



Kakugata 8



OTHER



OTHER



E_Y1



Yougata 1



PCARD



Postcard



E-Y2



Yougata 2



PCARD4



4 on 1 Postcard



E_Y3



Yougata 3



F4A



F4A



E-Y4



Yougata 4



F4B



F4B



E_Y5



Yougata 5



FLSC



FOOLCAP



E_Y6



Yougata 6



FOLIO



FLIO



E_Y7



Yougata 7



FREE



FREE SIZE



EVLP_YN3



Yougatanaga 3



ICARD



INDEXCARD



E-B5



B5 Envelope



USER



Custom



E-C5



C5 Envelope



MONA



MONARCH



EVLP



Unknown size envelope



691



7. Error/Jam/Alarm



Points to Note When Clearing MN-CON • Execution of clearing MN-COM deletes all data in Address Book, Forwarding Settings, Settings/Registration (Adjustment/ Maintenance, Function Settings, Set Destination, Management Settings, TPM Settings), etc. Before execution of this operation, ask user to back up the data and get approval for this operation. • Clearing MN-CON will clear the service mode setting values. Be sure to enter the service mode setting values again in accordance with the configuration of the options of the host machine and requests from the user. • When clearing MN-CON while any login application other than User Authentication is, error such as not displayed login screen occurred. In this case, access SMS once and switch login application to User Authentication to recover to the normal status.



Points to Note When Clearing HDD As a remedy for error codes (E602-XXXX), HDD partition is selected and the target partition may be cleared. When clearing partition, be sure to check which data will be deleted by referring Detail of HDD partition and explain to the user before starting work.



Remedies to be performed when E602-xxxx or E614-xxxx error is displayed Remedy procedure for E602 or E614 differs according to the status of the screen where error is displayed. Check the remedy procedure by referring to the following flow chart. Start



An error code is displayed on a black screen



YES



NO Go to [Error code descriptions]



Go to [Flow Chart 2]



Flow Chart 1 Turn OFF the main power.



+------------------------------------+ | E602-0801 | +------------------------------------+



Cannot access the hard disk. If the optional removable hard disk is use, check it is connected then restart the machine. IF this is error tou occur, content your service representative.



Display Sample : If an error code is displayed on a black screen Execute a remedy described in service mode by referring to Error / Jam / Alarm in the Service Manual. If an error code and a message is displayed on a black screen (as above), shift to the hard disk maintenance mode referring to the Flow Chart 2 and execute the remedy described in Error / Jam / Alarm in the Service Manual.



692



7. Error/Jam/Alarm Start Confirmation or judgment



(1) Check cable connector connected to HDD and restart the machine.



YES



Detail change of initialization and /or Inspection



(2) Did the machine start and the issue solved?



Initialization and /or inspection fails and related parts are replaced



NO



Automatic process of the machine



(3) Shift to the hard disk maintenance mode.



(4) Is the issue judged to be unsolvable YES by hard disk maintenance mode?



YES



NO (5) Specify target area (CHK TYPE) (6) Schedule the process to conduct, turn OFF and then ON the main power.



(9) Cancel the scheduled process and turn OFF the power.



(10) Replace related parts.



(7) Scheduled process is conducted.



NO



(8) Did the machine start and issue solved? YES



End



Flow Chart 2 CAUTION: Numbers in the Flow Chart 2 are corresponding to the procedure numbers. Check the remedy procedure by referring to the flow chart. 1. Check cable connector connected to the hard disk and restart the machine. 2. Check if the machine is started normally. If the machine is started normally, the analysis is complete.



693



7. Error/Jam/Alarm 3. If the machine is not started normally, execute key operation to shift to the service mode for shifting to hard disk maintenance mode. [1] : CHK TYPE [2] : HD CHECK [3] : HD CLEAR [4] : HD OPERATION CANCEL



+------------------------------------+ | E602-0801 | +------------------------------------+



Cannot access the hard disk. If the optional removable hard disk is use, check it is connected then restart the machine. IF this is error tou occur, content your service representative.



Example of hard disk maintenance mode screen 4. Determine if the issue is solved in the hard disk maintenance mode. • Proceed to 5 for diagnosis for the first time or trying to restore with the hard disk maintenance mode. • If the issue cannot be solved by hard disk maintenance (HD-CHECK/HD-CLEAR is not executed or issue unsolved even executed), proceed to 9. 5. Press "1" of Numeric Keypad, then two digits number to specify the target area (CHK TYPE). [1] : CHK TYPE [2] : HD CHECK [3] : HD CLEAR [4] : HD OPERATION CANCEL ------------------------------------------------[1] has been selected - Change to (0)



CAUTION: The CHK - TYPE to be specified needs to be entered in two digits even the number to be specified is one digit. Enter "01" to specify "1" and enter "04" to specify "4". For example, in the case of the above display (E602-0801), specify No. 8 because Partition No. 8 is in error. (Enter the number as "08") If you made a mistake, press "1" again then enter two digits number.



6. Specify and schedule the process stated as a remedy for error code by referring to the Flow chart No.6, "Error / Jam / Alarm" in the Service Manual. Then turn OFF and then ON the main power of the machine. • To schedule disk check (COPIER > FUNCTION > SYSTEM >HD-CHECK), select [2]:HD-CHECK. • To schedule formatting (COPIER / FUNCTION / SYSTEM /HD-CLEAR), select [3]:HD CLEAR. NOTE: When the menu [2] to [4] is selected, key cannot be re-entered. If you made a wrong selection, Turn OFF and then ON the main power of the machine, shift to hard disk maintenance mode and specify again.



7. Scheduled process is automatically executed. 8. If the process is complete and the machine is restarted normally, analysis is complete. The same black screen and the error code is displayed, shift back to the hard disk maintenance mode and conduct other maintenance.



694



7. Error/Jam/Alarm 9. Consider the HDD cannot be restored, select [4] and cancel the schedule. Switch OFF the main power of the machine. [1] : CHK TYPE [2] : HD CHECK [3] : HD CLEAR [4] : HD OPERATION CANCEL ------------------------------------------------[4] has been selected Turn OFF the main power.



CAUTION: Replacing HDD without canceling the schedule causes the scheduled process is executed to replaced HDD at the next normal startup. When replacing parts, specify [4] to cancel the schedule.



10. Refer to the Service Manual to replace the related parts. NOTE: Related parts for E602 • Harness between main controller PCB and the HDD • HDD • Main Controller PCB Related parts for E614 • Flash PCB • Main Controller PCB



695



7. Error/Jam/Alarm



Error Code Error Code Details E000-0001-05



Fixing Thermistor low temperature detection error



Detection Description Remedy



After temperature control of the Fixing Roller, the Fixing Main Thermistor detected 70 deg C or lower. [Related parts] - Harness between the Main Driver PCB (UN78/J129, J104 and J105) and the Fixing Drawer Unit (J3001) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, FIXING DRAWER) - Harness between the Fixing Main Thermistor (THM01/J3271) and the Fixing Drawer Unit (J3001) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, FIXING DC DRAWER) - Harnesses from the Main Driver PCB to the Fixing Power Supply PCB 1. Main Driver PCB (UN78/J118 and J119) to Relay Connector (19P and 13P) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, MAIN DRIVER IH) 2. Relay Connector (19P and 13P) to Fixing Power Supply PCB (UN03/J312 and J314) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, IH SIGNAL) - Harness between the Fixing Power Supply PCB (UN03/J9004) and the Fixing Heater (CB1005) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, IH DRAWER) - Harness between the Main Driver PCB (UN78/J108 and J101) and the Relay PCB (UN86/J522 and J515) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, SIGNAL) - Harness between the DC Controller PCB (UN01/J414, J411, J412 and J413) and the Main Driver PCB (UN78/J128, J126, J125 and J124) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, SIGNAL) - Fixing Heater Unit (CB1005) - Fixing Main Thermistor (THM01) (Unit of replacement: THERMISTOR UNIT, MAIN) - Fixing Power Supply PCB (UN03) (Unit of replacement: IH POWER SUPPLY PCB ASS'Y) - Main Driver PCB (UN78) (Unit of replacement: MAIN DRIVE DRIVER PCB ASS'Y) - Relay PCB (UN86) (Unit of replacement: RELAY PCB ASSEMBLY) - DC Controller PCB (UN01) (Unit of replacement: DC CONTROLLER PCB ASS'Y) [Remedy] Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts. After performing the remedy work, go through the following to clear the error: COPIER> FUNCTION> CLEAR> ERR. [Reference] Before replacing the DC Controller PCB, back up the service mode data (approx. 2 min) and restore the backup data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected. - Backup: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMBUP - Restoration: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMRES



696



7. Error/Jam/Alarm E000-0002-05



Fixing Thermistor low temperature detection error



Detection Description Remedy



E000-0010-05



After temperature control of the Fixing Roller, the Fixing Main Thermistor detected 10 deg C or lower. [Related parts] - Harness between the Main Driver PCB (UN78/J129, J104 and J105) and the Fixing Drawer Unit (J3001) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, FIXING DRAWER) - Harness between the Fixing Main Thermistor (THM01/J3271) and the Fixing Drawer Unit (J3001) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, FIXING DC DRAWER) - Harnesses from the Main Driver PCB to the Fixing Power Supply PCB 1. Main Driver PCB (UN78/J118 and J119) to Relay Connector (19P and 13P) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, MAIN DRIVER IH) 2. Relay Connector (19P and 13P) to Fixing Power Supply PCB (UN03/J312 and J314) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, IH SIGNAL) - Harness between the Fixing Power Supply PCB (UN03/J9004) and the Fixing Heater (CB1005) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, IH DRAWER) - Harness between the Main Driver PCB (UN78/J108 and J101) and the Relay PCB (UN86/J522 and J515) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, SIGNAL) - Harness between the DC Controller PCB (UN01/J414, J411, J412 and J413) and the Main Driver PCB (UN78/J128, J126, J125 and J124) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, SIGNAL) - Fixing Heater Unit (CB1005) - Fixing Main Thermistor (THM01) (Unit of replacement: THERMISTOR UNIT, MAIN) - Fixing Power Supply PCB (UN03) (Unit of replacement: IH POWER SUPPLY PCB ASS'Y) - Main Driver PCB (UN78) (Unit of replacement: MAIN DRIVE DRIVER PCB ASS'Y) - Relay PCB (UN86) (Unit of replacement: RELAY PCB ASSEMBLY) - DC Controller PCB (UN01) (Unit of replacement: DC CONTROLLER PCB ASS'Y) [Remedy] Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts. After performing the remedy work, go through the following to clear the error: COPIER> FUNCTION> CLEAR> ERR. [Reference] Before replacing the DC Controller PCB, back up the service mode data (approx. 2 min) and restore the backup data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected. - Backup: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMBUP - Restoration: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMRES Fixing Thermistor low temperature detection error



Detection Description Remedy



Turning OFF and then ON the power without clearing the error. Go through the following to clear the error: COPIER> FUNCTION> CLEAR> ERR.



697



7. Error/Jam/Alarm E001-0002-05



Fixing Thermistor high temperature detection error



Detection Description Remedy



The Fixing Main Thermistor in the Fixing Assembly detected 230 deg C or higher. [Related parts] - Harness between the Main Driver PCB (UN78/J129, J104 and J105) and the Fixing Drawer Unit (J3001) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, FIXING DRAWER) - Harness between the Fixing Thermistor (THM01/J3271, THM02/J3206 and THM04/J3204) and the Fixing Drawer Unit (J3001) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, FIXING DC DRAWER) - Harnesses from the Main Driver PCB to the Fixing Power Supply PCB 1. Main Driver PCB (UN78/J118 and J119) to Relay Connector (19P and 13P) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, MAIN DRIVER IH) 2. Relay Connector (19P and 13P) to Fixing Power Supply PCB (UN03/J312 and J314) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, IH SIGNAL) - Harness between the Main Driver PCB (UN78/J108 and J101) and the Relay PCB (UN86/J522 and J515) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, SIGNAL) - Harness between the DC Controller PCB (UN01/J414, J411, J412 and J413) and the Main Driver PCB (UN78/J128, J126, J125 and J124) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, SIGNAL) - Fixing Main Thermistor (THM01) (Unit of replacement: THERMISTOR UNIT, MAIN) - Fixing Sub Thermistor 1 and 2 (THM02 and THM04) (Unit of replacement: THERMISTOR UNIT, SUB) - Fixing Upper Unit (Unit of replacement: FIXING ASS'Y, UPPER) - Fixing Power Supply PCB (UN03) (Unit of replacement: IH POWER SUPPLY PCB ASS'Y) - Main Driver PCB (UN78) (Unit of replacement: MAIN DRIVE DRIVER PCB ASS'Y) - Relay PCB (UN86) (Unit of replacement: RELAY PCB ASSEMBLY) - DC Controller PCB (UN01) (Unit of replacement: DC CONTROLLER PCB ASS'Y) [Remedy] Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts. After performing the remedy work, go through the following to clear the error: COPIER> FUNCTION> CLEAR> ERR. [Reference] Before replacing the DC Controller PCB, back up the service mode data (approx. 2 min) and restore the backup data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected. - Backup: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMBUP - Restoration: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMRES



698



7. Error/Jam/Alarm E001-0003-05



Fixing Assembly high temperature error (hardware detection)



Detection Description



Remedy



- The Fixing Main Thermistor (THM1) detects hardware overheating. - The Fixing Sub Thermistor 1 (THM2)/Fixing Sub Thermistor 2 (THM3) detects hardware overheating. [Related parts] - Harness between the Main Driver PCB (UN78/J129, J104 and J105) and the Fixing Drawer Unit (J3001) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, FIXING DRAWER) - Harness between the Fixing Thermistor (THM01/J3271, THM02/J3206 and THM04/J3204) and the Fixing Drawer Unit (J3001) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, FIXING DC DRAWER) - Harnesses from the Main Driver PCB to the Fixing Power Supply PCB 1. Main Driver PCB (UN78/J118 and J119) to Relay Connector (19P and 13P) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, MAIN DRIVER IH) 2. Relay Connector (19P and 13P) to Fixing Power Supply PCB (UN03/J312 and J314) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, IH SIGNAL) - Harness between the Main Driver PCB (UN78/J108 and J101) and the Relay PCB (UN86/J522 and J515) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, SIGNAL) - Harness between the DC Controller PCB (UN01/J414, J411, J412 and J413) and the Main Driver PCB (UN78/J128, J126, J125 and J124) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, SIGNAL) - Fixing Main Thermistor (THM01) (Unit of replacement: THERMISTOR UNIT, MAIN) - Fixing Sub Thermistor 1 and 2 (THM02 and THM04) (Unit of replacement: THERMISTOR UNIT, SUB) - Fixing Upper Unit (Unit of replacement: FIXING ASS'Y, UPPER) - Fixing Power Supply PCB (UN03) (Unit of replacement: IH POWER SUPPLY PCB ASS'Y) - Main Driver PCB (UN78) (Unit of replacement: MAIN DRIVE DRIVER PCB ASS'Y) - Relay PCB (UN86) (Unit of replacement: RELAY PCB ASSEMBLY) - DC Controller PCB (UN01) (Unit of replacement: DC CONTROLLER PCB ASS'Y) [Remedy] Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts. After performing the remedy work, go through the following to clear the error: COPIER> FUNCTION> CLEAR> ERR. [Reference] Before replacing the DC Controller PCB, back up the service mode data (approx. 2 min) and restore the backup data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected. - Backup: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMBUP - Restoration: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMRES



699



7. Error/Jam/Alarm E001-0004-05



Fixing Thermistor high temperature detection error



Detection Description Remedy



E001-0010-05



Abnormal temperature difference among the Thermistors was detected. [Related parts] - Harness between the Main Driver PCB (UN78/J129, J104 and J105) and the Fixing Drawer Unit (J3001) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, FIXING DRAWER) - Harness between the Fixing Thermistor (THM01/J3271, THM02/J3206 and THM04/J3204) and the Fixing Drawer Unit (J3001) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, FIXING DC DRAWER) - Harnesses from the Main Driver PCB to the Fixing Power Supply PCB 1. Main Driver PCB (UN78/J118 and J119) to Relay Connector (19P and 13P) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, MAIN DRIVER IH) 2. Relay Connector (19P and 13P) to Fixing Power Supply PCB (UN03/J312 and J314) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, IH SIGNAL) - Harness between the Main Driver PCB (UN78/J108 and J101) and the Relay PCB (UN86/J522 and J515) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, SIGNAL) - Harness between the DC Controller PCB (UN01/J414, J411, J412 and J413) and the Main Driver PCB (UN78/J128, J126, J125 and J124) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, SIGNAL) - Fixing Main Thermistor (THM01) (Unit of replacement: THERMISTOR UNIT, MAIN) - Fixing Sub Thermistor 1 and 2 (THM02 and THM04) (Unit of replacement: THERMISTOR UNIT, SUB) - Fixing Upper Unit (Unit of replacement: FIXING ASS'Y, UPPER) - Fixing Power Supply PCB (UN03) (Unit of replacement: IH POWER SUPPLY PCB ASS'Y) - Main Driver PCB (UN78) (Unit of replacement: MAIN DRIVE DRIVER PCB ASS'Y) - Relay PCB (UN86) (Unit of replacement: RELAY PCB ASSEMBLY) - DC Controller PCB (UN01) (Unit of replacement: DC CONTROLLER PCB ASS'Y) [Remedy] Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts. After performing the remedy work, go through the following to clear the error: COPIER> FUNCTION> CLEAR> ERR. [Reference] Before replacing the DC Controller PCB, back up the service mode data (approx. 2 min) and restore the backup data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected. - Backup: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMBUP - Restoration: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMRES Fixing Thermistor high temperature detection error



Detection Description Remedy



Turning OFF and then ON the power without clearing the error. Go through the following to clear the error: COPIER> FUNCTION> CLEAR> ERR.



700



7. Error/Jam/Alarm E002-0001-05



Fixing Thermistor temperature increase detection error



Detection Description Remedy



E002-0010-05



After the start of temperature control of the Fixing Roller, the Fixing Main Thermistor detected abnormal temperature rise. [Related parts] - Harness between the Main Driver PCB (UN78/J129, J104 and J105) and the Fixing Drawer Unit (J3001) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, FIXING DRAWER) - Harness between the Fixing Main Thermistor (THM01/J3271) and the Fixing Drawer Unit (J3200) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, FIXING DC DRAWER) - Harnesses from the Main Driver PCB to the Fixing Power Supply PCB 1. Main Driver PCB (UN78/J118 and J119) to Relay Connector (19P and 13P) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, MAIN DRIVER IH) 2. Relay Connector (19P and 13P) to Fixing Power Supply PCB (UN03/J312 and J314) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, IH SIGNAL) - Harness between the Main Driver PCB (UN78/J108 and J101) and the Relay PCB (UN86/J522 and J515) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, SIGNAL) - Harness between the DC Controller PCB (UN01/J414, J411, J412 and J413) and the Main Driver PCB (UN78/J128, J126, J125 and J124) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, SIGNAL) - Fixing Main Thermistor (THM01) (Unit of replacement: THERMISTOR UNIT, MAIN) - Fixing Upper Unit (Unit of replacement: FIXING ASS'Y, UPPER) - Fixing Power Supply PCB (UN03) (Unit of replacement: IH POWER SUPPLY PCB ASS'Y) - Main Driver PCB (UN78) (Unit of replacement: MAIN DRIVE DRIVER PCB ASS'Y) - Relay PCB (UN86) (Unit of replacement: RELAY PCB ASSEMBLY) - DC Controller PCB (UN01) (Unit of replacement: DC CONTROLLER PCB ASS'Y) [Remedy] Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts. After performing the remedy work, go through the following to clear the error: COPIER> FUNCTION> CLEAR> ERR. [Reference] Before replacing the DC Controller PCB, back up the service mode data (approx. 2 min) and restore the backup data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected. - Backup: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMBUP - Restoration: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMRES Fixing Thermistor low temperature detection error



Detection Description Remedy



Turning OFF and then ON the power without clearing the error. Go through the following to clear the error: COPIER> FUNCTION> CLEAR> ERR.



701



7. Error/Jam/Alarm E003-0000-05



Fixing Thermistor temperature decrease error



Detection Description Remedy



E003-0010-05



The Fixing Main Thermistor detects 70 degC or lower for 2 seconds or longer although the temperature reached above 100 degC after starting the Fixing Roller temperature control. [Related parts] - Harness between the Main Driver PCB (UN78/J129, J104 and J105) and the Fixing Drawer Unit (J3001) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, FIXING DRAWER) - Harness between the Fixing Main Thermistor (THM01/J3271) and the Fixing Drawer Unit (J3001) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, FIXING DC DRAWER) - Harnesses from the Main Driver PCB to the Fixing Power Supply PCB 1. Main Driver PCB (UN78/J118 and J119) to Relay Connector (19P and 13P) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, MAIN DRIVER IH) 2. Relay Connector (19P and 13P) to Fixing Power Supply PCB (UN03/J312 and J314) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, IH SIGNAL) - Harness between the Main Driver PCB (UN78/J108 and J101) and the Relay PCB (UN86/J522 and J515) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, SIGNAL) - Harness between the DC Controller PCB (UN01/J414, J411, J412 and J413) and the Main Driver PCB (UN78/J128, J126, J125 and J124) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, SIGNAL) - Fixing Main Thermistor (THM01) (Unit of replacement: THERMISTOR UNIT, MAIN) - Fixing Upper Unit (Unit of replacement: FIXING ASS'Y, UPPER) - Fixing Power Supply PCB (UN03) (Unit of replacement: IH POWER SUPPLY PCB ASS'Y) - Main Driver PCB (UN78) (Unit of replacement: MAIN DRIVE DRIVER PCB ASS'Y) - Relay PCB (UN86) (Unit of replacement: RELAY PCB ASSEMBLY) - DC Controller PCB (UN01) (Unit of replacement: DC CONTROLLER PCB ASS'Y) [Remedy] Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts. After performing the remedy work, go through the following to clear the error: COPIER> FUNCTION> CLEAR> ERR. [Reference] Before replacing the DC Controller PCB, back up the service mode data (approx. 2 min) and restore the backup data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected. - Backup: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMBUP - Restoration: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMRES Fixing Thermistor low temperature detection error



Detection Description Remedy E004-0001-05



Turning OFF and then ON the power without clearing the error. Go through the following to clear the error: COPIER> FUNCTION> CLEAR> ERR. Fixing Power Supply error



Detection Description Remedy



E004-0010-05



An error in the fixing current was detected. [Related parts] - Harnesses from the Main Driver PCB to the Fixing Power Supply PCB 1. Main Driver PCB (UN78/J118 and J119) to Relay Connector (19P and 13P) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, MAIN DRIVER IH) 2. Relay Connector (19P and 13P) to Fixing Power Supply PCB (UN03/J312 and J314) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, IH SIGNAL) - Fixing Power Supply PCB (UN03) (Unit of replacement: IH POWER SUPPLY PCB ASS'Y) - Main Driver PCB (UN78) (Unit of replacement: MAIN DRIVE DRIVER PCB ASS'Y) [Remedy] Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts. After performing the remedy work, go through the following to clear the error: COPIER> FUNCTION> CLEAR> ERR. Fixing Thermistor low temperature detection error



Detection Description Remedy



Turning OFF and then ON the power without clearing the error. Go through the following to clear the error: COPIER> FUNCTION> CLEAR> ERR.



702



7. Error/Jam/Alarm E004-0205-05



Fixing Power Supply error



Detection Description Remedy



E005-0000-05



Detect that the Fixing Main Thermistor is not connected. [Related parts] - Harness between the Main Driver PCB (UN78/J104 and J105) and the Fixing Drawer Unit (J3001) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, FIXING DRAWER) - Harness between the Fixing Drawer Unit (J3001) and the Fixing Main Thermistor (THM01/J3271) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, FIXING DC DRAWER) - Fixing Main Thermistor (Unit of replacement: THERMISTOR UNIT, MAIN) - Main Driver PCB (UN78) (Unit of replacement: MAIN DRIVE DRIVER PCB ASS'Y) [Remedy] Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts. After performing the remedy work, go through the following to clear the error: COPIER> FUNCTION> CLEAR> ERR. Fixing Cleaning Web absent error



Detection Description Remedy



E005-0001-05



After noticing the Fixing Cleaning Web absent, the web was pulled out 2000 times. [Related parts] - DC Controller PCB (UN01) (Unit of replacement: DC CONTROLLER PCB ASS'Y) [Remedy]Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared. 1. Replace the Fixing Cleaning Web. (Unit of replacement: CLEANER SUPPLY ROLL) 2. Replace the Fixing Cleaning Web Level Sensor (PS45). 3. Replace the DC Controller PCB (UN01). (Unit of replacement: DC CONTROLLER PCB ASS'Y) After performing the remedy work, perform the following. - Clear the counter value of the Fixing Cleaning Web (COPIER> COUNTER> MISC> FIXWEB).Then, turn OFF and then ON the main power. - Go through the following to clear the error: COPIER> FUNCTION> CLEAR> ERR. [Reference] Before replacing the DC Controller PCB, back up the service mode data (approx. 2 min) and restore the backup data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected. - Backup: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMBUP - Restoration: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMRES Error in Fixing Cleaning Web Drive Solenoid connection



Detection Description Remedy



Disconnection of the Fixing Cleaning Web Drive Solenoid was detected at power-on. [Related parts] - Harnesses from the Fixing Cleaning Web Drive Solenoid to the Fixing Drawer Unit 1. Fixing Cleaning Web Drive Solenoid (SL09/J2162) to Relay Connector (9P) to Relay Connector (9P) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, FIXING MOTOR, 1, CABLE, FIXING MOTOR) 2. Relay Connector (9P) to Fixing Drawer Unit (J3001) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, FIXING DC DRAWER) - Harness between the Main Driver PCB (UN78/J129, J104 and J105) and the Fixing Drawer Unit (J3001) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, FIXING DRAWER) - Harness between the Main Driver PCB (UN78/J108 and J101) and the Relay PCB (UN86/J522 and J515) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, SIGNAL) - Harness between the Relay PCB (UN86/J512) and the DC Power Supply PCB (24V) (J202A) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, DC 24V, A) - Harness between the Relay PCB (UN86/J513) and the DC Power Supply PCB (24V) (J202B) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, DC 24V, B) - Harness between the AC Driver PCB (UN20/J606) and the DC Power Supply PCB (24V) (J102A/ J102B) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, AC MAIN) - Harness between the AC Driver PCB (UN20/J611) and the Relay PCB (UN86/J507F) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, AC DRIVER RELAY) - Fixing Cleaning Web Drive Solenoid (SL09) - DC Power Supply PCB (24V) (Unit of replacement: 24V POWER SUPPLY ASS'Y, LEFT) - DC Power Supply PCB (24V) (Unit of replacement: 24V POWER SUPPLY ASS'Y, RIGHT) - Relay PCB (UN86) (Unit of replacement: RELAY PCB ASSEMBLY) - Main Driver PCB (UN78) (Unit of replacement: MAIN DRIVE DRIVER PCB ASS'Y) - AC Driver PCB (Unit of replacement: AC DRIVER PCB ASS'Y) [Remedy] Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts. After performing the remedy work, go through the following to clear the error: COPIER> FUNCTION> CLEAR> ERR.



703



7. Error/Jam/Alarm E012-0001-05



Drum Motor error



Detection Description Remedy



E013-0001-05



Lock error of the Drum Motor was detected. [Related parts] - Harness between the Main Driver PCB (UN78/J109) and the Drum Motor (M01/J2138) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, MAIN, REAR UPPER) - Harnesses from the Relay PCB to the Drum Motor 1. Relay PCB (UN86/J520) to Relay Connector (5P) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, SIGNAL) 2. Relay Connector (5P) to Drum Motor (M01/J2151) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, MAIN, REAR UPPER) - Drum Motor (M01) - Drum Drive Unit (Unit of replacement: DRUM DRIVE ASS'Y) - Main Driver PCB (UN78) (Unit of replacement: MAIN DRIVE DRIVER PCB ASS'Y) - Relay PCB (UN86) (Unit of replacement: RELAY PCB ASSEMBLY) - DC Controller PCB (UN01) (Unit of replacement: DC CONTROLLER PCB ASS'Y) [Remedy] Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared. - If the gear group of the Drum Drive Unit is not rotated, replace the unit. - Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts. [Reference] Before replacing the DC Controller PCB, back up the service mode data (approx. 2 min) and restore the backup data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected. - Backup: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMBUP - Restoration: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMRES Waste Toner Lock detection error



Detection Description Remedy



E013-0002-05



The Waste Toner Lock Detection Switch detects locked at power-on. [Related parts] - Harness between the Main Driver PCB (UN78/J103) and the Waste Toner Lock Detection Switch (SW05/J3050) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, MAIN DRIVER RELAY) - Waste Toner Lock Detection Switch (SW05) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, LOCK DETECT SWITCH) - Main Driver PCB (UN78) (Unit of replacement: MAIN DRIVE DRIVER PCB ASS'Y) [Remedy] Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts. Waste Toner Lock detection error



Detection Description



The Waste Toner Lock Detection Switch detects locked while the Developing Assembly is driven.



Remedy



[Related parts] - Harness between the Main Driver PCB (UN78/J103) and the Waste Toner Lock Detection Switch (SW05/J3050) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, MAIN DRIVER RELAY) - Waste Toner Lock Detection Switch (SW05) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, LOCK DETECT SWITCH) - Main Driver PCB (UN78) (Unit of replacement: MAIN DRIVE DRIVER PCB ASS'Y) - DC Controller PCB (UN01) (Unit of replacement: DC CONTROLLER PCB ASS'Y) [Remedy] Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared. 1. Check the Waste Toner Container and the Waste Toner Pipe, and remove clogged toner if there is any. 2. Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts. [Reference] Before replacing the DC Controller PCB, back up the service mode data (approx. 2 min) and restore the backup data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected. - Backup: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMBUP - Restoration: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMRES



704



7. Error/Jam/Alarm E013-0003-05



Waste toner full detection error



Detection Description Remedy



E014-0001-05



Output was detected while the Waste Toner Full Sensor was OFF. [Related parts] - Harnesses from the Main Driver PCB to the Toner Sensor 1. Main Driver PCB (UN78/J151) to Relay Connector (7P) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, DECK, LEFT) 2. Relay Connector (7P) to Relay Connector (4P) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, WASTE TONER RELAY, 2) 3. Relay Connector (4P) to Toner Sensor (TS04/J5003) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, WASTE TONER RELAY, 3) - Toner Sensor (TS04) (Unit of replacement: SENSOR, TONER) - Main Driver PCB (UN78) (Unit of replacement: MAIN DRIVE DRIVER PCB ASS'Y) - DC Controller PCB (UN01) (Unit of replacement: DC CONTROLLER PCB ASS'Y) [Remedy] Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts. [Reference] Before replacing the DC Controller PCB, back up the service mode data (approx. 2 min) and restore the backup data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected. - Backup: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMBUP - Restoration: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMRES Fixing Motor error



Detection Description Remedy



Lock error of the Fixing Motor was detected. [Related parts] - Harness between the Main Driver PCB (UN78/J104 and J105) and the Fixing Drawer Unit (J3001) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, FIXING DRAWER) - Harness between the Relay PCB (UN86/J520) and the Fixing Drawer Unit (J3218M) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, SIGNAL) - Harness between the Fixing Drawer Unit (J3001) and the Fixing Motor (M03/J2163P) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, FIXING MOTOR, 1) - Fixing Drive Unit (Unit of replacement: FIXING DRIVE ASS'Y) - Fixing Drive Gear (Unit of replacement: GEAR,71T/26T, GEAR, 20T, GEAR, 33T/20T, GEAR, 16T/38T) - Fixing Motor (M03) - Relay PCB (UN86) (Unit of replacement: RELAY PCB ASSEMBLY) - Main Driver PCB (UN78) (Unit of replacement: MAIN DRIVE DRIVER PCB ASS'Y) [Remedy] Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts.



705



7. Error/Jam/Alarm E017-0001-05



ETB disengagement error



Detection Description Remedy



E017-0002-05



Disengagement of the ETB is not completed within the specified period of time. [Related parts] - Harnesses from the Duplex Driver PCB to the ETB Disengage Sensor 1. Duplex Driver PCB (UN80/J343) to Relay Connector (8P) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, FIXING/ FEEDER DRAWER) 2. Relay Connector (8P) to ETB Disengage Sensor (PS56/J2101) (Unit of replacement: SOLENOID ASSEMBLY) - Harnesses from the Duplex Driver PCB to the ETB Engage Sensor 1. Duplex Driver PCB (UN80/J343) to Relay Connector (8P) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, FIXING/ FEEDER DRAWER) 2. Relay Connector (8P) to ETB Engage Sensor (PS55/J2100) (Unit of replacement: SOLENOID ASSEMBLY) - Harness between the Duplex Driver PCB (UN80/J331) and the Duplex Feed Left Motor (M19/ J2111) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, MOTOR) - Harness between the DC Controller PCB (UN01/J431, J9, J432 and J8) and the Fixing Feed Drawer Unit (J5005) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, SIGNAL) - Harness between the Duplex Driver PCB (UN80/J300 and J301) and the Fixing Feed Drawer Unit (J5005) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, FIXING/FEEDER DRAWER) - ETB Disengage Sensor (PS56) - ETB Engage Sensor (PS55) - Duplex Feed Left Motor (M19) - Duplex Driver PCB (UN80) (Unit of replacement: DUPLEXING DRIVER PCB ASSEMBLY) - DC Controller PCB (UN01) (Unit of replacement: DC CONTROLLER PCB ASS'Y) [Remedy] Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts. [Reference] Before replacing the DC Controller PCB, back up the service mode data (approx. 2 min) and restore the backup data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected. - Backup: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMBUP - Restoration: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMRES ETB engagement error



Detection Description Remedy



Engagement of the ETB is not completed within the specified period of time. [Related parts] - Harnesses from the Duplex Driver PCB to the ETB Engage Sensor 1. Duplex Driver PCB (UN80/J343) to Relay Connector (8P) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, FIXING/ FEEDER DRAWER) 2. Relay Connector (8P) to ETB Engage Sensor (PS55/J2100) (Unit of replacement: SOLENOID ASSEMBLY) - Harnesses from the Duplex Driver PCB to the ETB Disengage Sensor 1. Duplex Driver PCB (UN80/J343) to Relay Connector (8P) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, FIXING/ FEEDER DRAWER) 2. Relay Connector (8P) to ETB Disengage Sensor (PS56/J2101) (Unit of replacement: SOLENOID ASSEMBLY) - Harness between the Duplex Driver PCB (UN80/J331) and the Duplex Feed Left Motor (M19/ J2111) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, MOTOR) - Harness between the DC Controller PCB (UN01/J431, J9, J432 and J8) and the Fixing Feed Drawer Unit (J5005) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, SIGNAL) - Harness between the Duplex Driver PCB (UN80/J300 and J301) and the Fixing Feed Drawer Unit (J5005) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, FIXING/FEEDER DRAWER) - ETB Engage Sensor (PS55) - ETB Disengage Sensor (PS56) - Duplex Feed Left Motor (M19) - Duplex Driver PCB (UN80) (Unit of replacement: DUPLEXING DRIVER PCB ASSEMBLY) - DC Controller PCB (UN01) (Unit of replacement: DC CONTROLLER PCB ASS'Y) [Remedy] Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts. [Reference] Before replacing the DC Controller PCB, back up the service mode data (approx. 2 min) and restore the backup data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected. - Backup: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMBUP - Restoration: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMRES



706



7. Error/Jam/Alarm E017-0003-05



ETB HP error



Detection Description Remedy



Engagement of the ETB was not completed at initialization. [Related parts] - Harnesses from the Duplex Driver PCB to the ETB Disengage Sensor 1. Duplex Driver PCB (UN80/J343) to Relay Connector (8P) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, FIXING/ FEEDER DRAWER) 2. Relay Connector (8P) to ETB Disengage Sensor (PS56/J2101) (Unit of replacement: SOLENOID ASSEMBLY) - Harnesses from the Duplex Driver PCB to the ETB Engage Sensor 1. Duplex Driver PCB (UN80/J343) to Relay Connector (8P) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, FIXING/ FEEDER DRAWER) 2. Relay Connector (8P) to ETB Engage Sensor (PS55/J2100) (Unit of replacement: SOLENOID ASSEMBLY) - Harness between the Duplex Driver PCB (UN80/J331) and the Duplex Feed Left Motor (M19/ J2111) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, MOTOR) - Harness between the DC Controller PCB (UN01/J431, J9, J432 and J8) and the Fixing Feed Drawer Unit (J5005) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, SIGNAL) - Harness between the Duplex Driver PCB (UN80/J300 and J301) and the Fixing Feed Drawer Unit (J5005) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, FIXING/FEEDER DRAWER) - ETB Disengage Sensor (PS56) - ETB Engage Sensor (PS55) - Duplex Feed Left Motor (M19) - Duplex Driver PCB (UN80) (Unit of replacement: DUPLEXING DRIVER PCB ASSEMBLY) - DC Controller PCB (UN01) (Unit of replacement: DC CONTROLLER PCB ASS'Y) [Remedy] - Check the ETB Disengagement Member (Transfer Frame Stopper). If it is left unremoved, remove it. - Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts. [Reference] - To remove the ETB Disengagement Member, refer to the troubleshooting "Remedy to be implemented when the ETB Disengagement Member (Transfer Frame Stopper) is left unremoved" in the Service Manual. - Before replacing the DC Controller PCB, back up the service mode data (approx. 2 min) and restore the backup data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected. - Backup: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMBUP - Restoration: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMRES



707



7. Error/Jam/Alarm E020-0000-05



Developing Assembly toner absent error



Detection Description Remedy



E020-0001-05



The state without toner in the Developing Assembly was detected consecutively. [Related parts] - Harnesses from the Main Driver PCB to the Developing Toner Sensor 1. Main Driver PCB (UN78/J114) to Relay Connector (31P) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, MAIN DRIVER, REAR UPPER) 2. Relay Connector (31P) to Relay Connector (25P) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, RELAY, FRONT) 3. Relay Connector (25P) to Developing Toner Sensor (TS01/J2133) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, MAIN DRIVER, FRONT) - Harnesses from the Main Driver PCB to the Buffer Unit 1. Main Driver PCB (UN78/J115) to Relay Connector (21P) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, MAIN DRIVER, REAR UPPER) 2. Relay Harness (21P) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, RELAY, FRONT) 3. Relay Connector (21P) to Buffer Unit (J3124) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, MAIN DRIVER, FRONT) - Harness connecting from the Buffer Unit (J3124) to the Magnet Roller Clutch (CL05/J2036), Toner Feed Motor (M28/J2035) and Buffer Toner Sensor 2 (TS03/J2039) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, BUFFER) - Developing Toner Sensor (TS01) - Magnet Roller Clutch (CL05) - Toner Feed Motor (M28) - Buffer Toner Sensor 2 (TS03) - Main Driver PCB (UN78) (Unit of replacement: MAIN DRIVE DRIVER PCB ASS'Y) - DC Controller PCB (UN01) (Unit of replacement: DC CONTROLLER PCB ASS'Y) [Remedy] Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts. [Reference] Before replacing the DC Controller PCB, back up the service mode data (approx. 2 min) and restore the backup data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected. - Backup: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMBUP - Restoration: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMRES Error in Developing Toner Sensor connection detection



Detection Description Remedy



The connection detection port was OFF at power-on. [Related parts] - Harnesses from the main Driver PCB to the Developing Toner Sensor 1. Main Driver PCB (UN78/J114) to Relay Connector (31P) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, MAIN DRIVER, REAR UPPER) 2. Relay Connector (31P) to Relay Connector (25P) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, RELAY, FRONT) 3. Relay Connector (25P) to Developing Toner Sensor (TS01/J2133) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, MAIN DRIVER, FRONT) - Developing Toner Sensor (TS01) - Main Driver PCB (UN78) (Unit of replacement: MAIN DRIVE DRIVER PCB ASS'Y) - DC Controller PCB (UN01) (Unit of replacement: DC CONTROLLER PCB ASS'Y) [Remedy] Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts. [Reference] Before replacing the DC Controller PCB, back up the service mode data (approx. 2 min) and restore the backup data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected. - Backup: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMBUP - Restoration: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMRES



708



7. Error/Jam/Alarm E020-0002-05



Error in Buffer Toner Sensor connection detection



Detection Description Remedy



E020-0003-05



The connection detection port was OFF at power-on. [Related parts] - Harnesses from the Main Driver PCB to the Buffer Unit 1. Main Driver PCB (UN78/J115) to Relay Connector (21P) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, MAIN DRIVER, REAR UPPER) 2. Relay Harness (21P) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, RELAY, FRONT) 3. Relay Connector (21P) to Buffer Unit (J3124) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, MAIN DRIVER, FRONT) - Harness between the Buffer Unit (J3124) to the Buffer Toner Sensor 2 (TS03/J2039) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, BUFFER) - Buffer Toner Sensor 2 (TS03) - Main Driver PCB (UN78) (Unit of replacement: MAIN DRIVE DRIVER PCB ASS'Y) - DC Controller PCB (UN01) (Unit of replacement: DC CONTROLLER PCB ASS'Y) [Remedy] Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts. [Reference] Before replacing the DC Controller PCB, back up the service mode data (approx. 2 min) and restore the backup data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected. - Backup: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMBUP - Restoration: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMRES Error in the Toner Excess Supply Sensor connection detection



Detection Description Remedy



E020-0004-05



The connection detection port was OFF at power-on. [Related parts] - Harnesses from the Main Driver PCB to the Buffer Unit 1. Main Driver PCB (UN78/J115) to Relay Connector (21P) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, MAIN DRIVER, REAR UPPER) 2. Relay Harness (21P) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, RELAY, FRONT) 3. Relay Connector (21P) to Buffer Unit (J3124) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, MAIN DRIVER, FRONT) - Harness between the Buffer Unit (J3124) and the Toner Excess Supply Sensor (TS02/J2038) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, BUFFER) - Toner Excess Supply Sensor (TS02) - Main Driver PCB (UN78) (Unit of replacement: MAIN DRIVE DRIVER PCB ASS'Y) - DC Controller PCB (UN01) (Unit of replacement: DC CONTROLLER PCB ASS'Y) [Remedy] Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts. [Reference] Before replacing the DC Controller PCB, back up the service mode data (approx. 2 min) and restore the backup data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected. - Backup: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMBUP - Restoration: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMRES Error in Developing Buffer Clutch connection detection



Detection Description Remedy



The connection detection port was OFF at power-on. [Related parts] - Harnesses from the Main Driver PCB to the Buffer Unit 1. Main Driver PCB (UN78/J115) to Relay Connector (21P) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, MAIN DRIVER, REAR UPPER) 2. Relay Harness (21P) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, RELAY, FRONT) 3. Relay Connector (21P) to Buffer Unit (J3124) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, MAIN DRIVER, FRONT) - Harness between the Buffer Unit (J3124) and the Magnet Roller Clutch (CL05/J2036) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, BUFFER) - Magnet Roller Clutch (CL05) - Main Driver PCB (UN78) (Unit of replacement: MAIN DRIVE DRIVER PCB ASS'Y) - DC Controller PCB (UN01) (Unit of replacement: DC CONTROLLER PCB ASS'Y) [Remedy] Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts. [Reference] Before replacing the DC Controller PCB, back up the service mode data (approx. 2 min) and restore the backup data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected. - Backup: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMBUP - Restoration: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMRES



709



7. Error/Jam/Alarm E020-0020-05



Developing Toner Sensor Cleaning Scraper error



Detection Description Remedy E020-0021-05



Disengagement of the Developing Toner Sensor Cleaning Scraper was detected. Replace the Developing Assembly. Developing Toner Sensor Cleaning Scraper error



Detection Description Remedy E023-0001-05



It was detected that the Developing Toner Sensor Cleaning Scraper was being bent. Replace the Developing Assembly. Developing Motor error



Detection Description Remedy



E023-0002-05



Lock error of the Developing Motor was detected. [Related parts] - Harness connecting from the Main Driver PCB (UN78/J109) to the Developing Motor (M02/J2139) and Developing Clutch (CL01/J2006) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, MAIN, REAR UPPER) - Harnesses from the Relay PCB to the Developing Motor 1. Relay PCB (UN86/J520) to Relay Connector (5P) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, SIGNAL) 2. Relay Connector (5P) to Developing Motor (M02/J2152) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, MAIN, REAR UPPER) - Developing Motor (M02) - Developing Clutch (CL01) - Main Driver PCB (UN78) (Unit of replacement: MAIN DRIVE DRIVER PCB ASS'Y) - Relay PCB (UN86) (Unit of replacement: RELAY PCB ASSEMBLY) - DC Controller PCB (UN01) (Unit of replacement: DC CONTROLLER PCB ASS'Y) [Remedy] Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts. [Reference] Before replacing the DC Controller PCB, back up the service mode data (approx. 2 min) and restore the backup data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected. - Backup: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMBUP - Restoration: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMRES Error in Developing Clutch connection detection



Detection Description Remedy



Connection of the Developing Clutch cannot be detected. [Related parts] - Harness between the Main Driver PCB (UN78/J109) and the Developing Clutch (CL01/J2006) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, MAIN, REAR UPPER) - Harness between the Main Driver PCB (UN78/J101) and the Relay PCB (UN86/J515) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, SIGNAL) - Harness between the Relay PCB (UN86/J513) and the DC Power Supply PCB (24V) (J202B) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, DC 24V, B) - Developing Clutch (CL01) - Main Driver PCB (UN78) (Unit of replacement: MAIN DRIVE DRIVER PCB ASS'Y) - Relay PCB (UN86) (Unit of replacement: RELAY PCB ASSEMBLY) - DC Power Supply PCB (24V) (Unit of replacement: 24V POWER SUPPLY ASS'Y, RIGHT) - DC Controller PCB (UN01) (Unit of replacement: DC CONTROLLER PCB ASS'Y) [Remedy] Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts. [Reference] Before replacing the DC Controller PCB, back up the service mode data (approx. 2 min) and restore the backup data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected. - Backup: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMBUP - Restoration: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMRES



710



7. Error/Jam/Alarm E025-0001-05



Toner Feed Motor error



Detection Description Remedy



E027-0001-05



Overcurrent of the Toner Feed Motor was detected. [Related parts] - Harnesses from the Main Driver PCB to the Buffer Unit 1. Main Driver PCB (UN78/J115) to Relay Connector (21P) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, MAIN DRIVER, REAR UPPER) 2. Relay Harness (21P) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, RELAY, FRONT) 3. Relay Connector (21P) to Buffer Unit (J3124) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, MAIN DRIVER, FRONT) - Harness between the Buffer Unit (J3124) and the Toner Feed Motor (M28/J2035) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, BUFFER) - Toner Feed Motor (M28) - Main Driver PCB (UN78) (Unit of replacement: MAIN DRIVE DRIVER PCB ASS'Y) - DC Controller PCB (UN01) (Unit of replacement: DC CONTROLLER PCB ASS'Y) [Remedy] Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts. [Reference] Before replacing the DC Controller PCB, back up the service mode data (approx. 2 min) and restore the backup data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected. - Backup: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMBUP - Restoration: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMRES Toner Supply Motor error



Detection Description Remedy



E032-0001-00



Lock error of the Toner Supply Motor was detected. [Related parts] - Harnesses from the Main Driver PCB to the Toner Supply Motor 1. Main Driver PCB (UN78/J117) to Relay Connector (6P) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, MAIN DRIVER, REAR UPPER) 2. Relay Harness (6P) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, RELAY, FRONT) 3. Relay Connector (6P) to Toner Supply Motor (M10/J2037) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, MAIN DRIVER, FRONT) - Toner Supply Motor (M10) - Main Driver PCB (UN78) (Unit of replacement: MAIN DRIVE DRIVER PCB ASS'Y) - DC Controller PCB (UN01) (Unit of replacement: DC CONTROLLER PCB ASS'Y) [Remedy] - Remove and then reinstall the Toner Container, and check if the error is cleared. - If the error is not cleared, check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts. [Reference] Before replacing the DC Controller PCB, back up the service mode data (approx. 2 min) and restore the backup data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected. - Backup: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMBUP - Restoration: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMRES Failure of NE Controller Counter



Detection Description Remedy E041-0001-05



Detection of open circuit of count pulse signal. Disconnection of cable. Right Deck Lifter Motor error



Detection Description Remedy



E041-0002-05



Overcurrent of the Right Deck Lifter Motor was detected. Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared. 1. Check for displacement of the wire of the Right Deck Lifter, and correct it if necessary. 2. Check for smoothness of the movement of the Base Plate of the Right Deck, and correct it if necessary. 3. Replace the Right Deck Lifter Motor (M04). Left Deck Lifter Motor error



Detection Description Remedy



Overcurrent of the Left Deck Lifter Motor was detected. Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared. 1. Check for displacement of the wire of the Left Deck Lifter, and correct it if necessary. 2. Check for smoothness of the movement of the Base Plate of the Left Deck, and correct it if necessary. 3. Replace the Left Deck Lifter Motor (M05).



711



7. Error/Jam/Alarm E041-0003-05



Cassette 3 Lifter Motor error



Detection Description Remedy



E041-0004-05



Overcurrent of the Cassette 3 Lifter Motor was detected. Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared. 1. Check for error around the Cassette 3 Lifter, and correct it if necessary. 2. Check for smoothness of the movement of the Base Plate of the Cassette 3, and correct it if necessary. 3. Replace the Cassette 3 Lifter Motor (M20). Cassette 4 Lifter Motor error



Detection Description Remedy



E053-0001-05



Overcurrent of the Cassette 4 Lifter Motor was detected. Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared. 1. Check for error around the Cassette 4 Lifter, and correct it if necessary. 2. Check for smoothness of the movement of the Base Plate of the Cassette 4, and correct it if necessary. 3. Replace the Cassette 4 Lifter Motor (M21). Error in Reverse Upper Flapper Solenoid connection detection



Detection Description



Connection of the Reverse Upper Flapper Solenoid cannot be detected 5 times with 20 msec time interval.



Remedy



[Related parts] - Harness between the Duplex (UN80/J340) and the Reverse Upper Flapper Solenoid (SL05/ J2115) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, FIXING/FEEDER DRAWER) - Harness between the Duplex Driver PCB (UN80/J300, J301 and J310) and the Fixing Feed Drawer Unit (J5005) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, FIXING/FEEDER DRAWER) - Harness between the DC Controller PCB (UN01/J431, J9, J432 and J8) and the Fixing Feed Drawer Unit (J5005) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, SIGNAL) - Harness between the Main Driver PCB (UN78/J108) and the Relay PCB (UN86/J522) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, SIGNAL) - Harness between the Relay PCB (UN86/J517) and the Fixing Feed Drawer Unit (J5005) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, FIXING/FEEDER DRAWER) - Reverse Upper Flapper Solenoid (Unit of replacement: REVERSE SOLENOID ASS'Y) - Duplex Driver PCB (UN80) (Unit of replacement: DUPLEXING DRIVER PCB ASSEMBLY) - Relay PCB (UN86) (Unit of replacement: RELAY PCB ASSEMBLY) - Main Driver PCB (UN78) (Unit of replacement: MAIN DRIVE DRIVER PCB ASS'Y) - DC Controller PCB (UN01) (Unit of replacement: DC CONTROLLER PCB ASS'Y) [Remedy] Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts. [Reference] Before replacing the DC Controller PCB, back up the service mode data (approx. 2 min) and restore the backup data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected. - Backup: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMBUP - Restoration: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMRES



712



7. Error/Jam/Alarm E060-0001-05



Primary Charging Shutter HP open error



Detection Description



The Primary Charging Shutter Sensor detected the open status although the shutter of the Primary Charging Assembly was moved to the close position.



Remedy



[Related parts] - Harnesses from the Main Driver PCB to the Primary Charging Wire Cleaning Motor 1. Main Driver PCB (UN78/J107) to Relay Connector (12P) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, MAIN, REAR UPPER) 2. Relay Connector (12P) to Relay Connector (20P) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, AP. KIT DRAWER) 3. Relay Connector (20P) to Primary Charging Wire Cleaning Motor (M06/J3107) (Unit of replacement: DRAWER ASSEMBLY) - Harnesses from the Main Driver PCB to the Primary Charging Shutter Sensor 1. Main Driver PCB (UN78/J114) to Relay Connector (31P) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, MAIN DRIVER, REAR UPPER) 2. Relay Connector (31P) to Relay Connector (25P) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, MAIN, REAR UPPER) 3. Relay Connector (25P) to Primary Charging Shutter Sensor (PS94/J2029) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, MAIN DRIVER, FRONT) - Primary Charging Wire Cleaning Motor (M06) - Primary Charging Shutter Sensor (PS94) - Slide Pin - Primary Charging Assembly - Primary Charging Shutter (Unit of replacement: SHUTTER UNIT) - Main Driver PCB (UN78) (Unit of replacement: MAIN DRIVE DRIVER PCB ASS'Y) - DC Controller PCB (UN01) (Unit of replacement: DC CONTROLLER PCB ASS'Y) [Remedy] Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared. 1. Check the Primary Charging Shutter. a. If the Primary Charging Shutter and the Cleaning Pad do not work (stop at HP at front side), - Check/replace the Primary Charging Wire Cleaning Motor. b. If the Primary Charging Shutter and the Cleaning Pad stop at rear side (close position), - Check/replace the Primary Charging Shutter Sensor. c. If the Primary Charging Shutter and the Cleaning Pad stop halfway, - Check/replace the Slide Pin. d. If the Primary Charging Shutter stops at front side but the Cleaning Pad moves to rear until it stops, - Check/replace the shutter and the Slide Pin. e. Replace the Primary Charging Assembly. 2. Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts. [Reference] Before replacing the DC Controller PCB, back up the service mode data (approx. 2 min) and restore the backup data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected. - Backup: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMBUP - Restoration: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMRES



713



7. Error/Jam/Alarm E060-0002-05



Primary Charging Shutter HP close error



Detection Description



The Primary Charging Shutter Sensor detected the close status although the shutter of the Primary Charging Assembly was moved to the open position.



Remedy



[Related parts] - Harnesses from the Main Driver PCB to the Primary Charging Wire Cleaning Motor 1. Main Driver PCB (UN78/J107) to Relay Connector (12P) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, MAIN, REAR UPPER) 2. Relay Connector (12P) to Relay Connector (20P) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, AP. KIT DRAWER) 3. Relay Connector (20P) to Primary Charging Wire Cleaning Motor (M06/J3107) (Unit of replacement: DRAWER ASSEMBLY) - Harnesses from the Main Driver PCB to the Primary Charging Shutter Sensor 1. Main Driver PCB (UN78/J114) to Relay Connector (31P) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, MAIN DRIVER, REAR UPPER) 2. Relay Connector (31P) to Relay Connector (25P) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, MAIN, REAR UPPER) 3. Relay Connector (25P) to Primary Charging Shutter Sensor (PS94/J2029) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, MAIN DRIVER, FRONT) - Primary Charging Wire Cleaning Motor (M06) - Primary Charging Shutter Sensor (PS94) - Slide Pin - Primary Charging Assembly - Primary Charging Shutter (Unit of replacement: SHUTTER UNIT) - Main Driver PCB (UN78) (Unit of replacement: MAIN DRIVE DRIVER PCB ASS'Y) - DC Controller PCB (UN01) (Unit of replacement: DC CONTROLLER PCB ASS'Y) [Remedy] Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared. 1. Check the Primary Charging Shutter. a. If the Primary Charging Shutter and the Cleaning Pad do not work (stop at HP at front side), - Check/replace the Primary Charging Wire Cleaning Motor. b. If the Primary Charging Shutter and the Cleaning Pad stop at rear side (close position), - Check/replace the Primary Charging Shutter Sensor. c. If the Primary Charging Shutter and the Cleaning Pad stop halfway, - Check/replace the Slide Pin. d. Replace the Primary Charging Assembly. 2. Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts. [Reference] Before replacing the DC Controller PCB, back up the service mode data (approx. 2 min) and restore the backup data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected. - Backup: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMBUP - Restoration: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMRES



714



7. Error/Jam/Alarm E061-0001-05



Potential control error (VL)



Detection Description Remedy



The dark area potential (VL) failed to be 200 V or less at potential control. [Related parts] - Harnesses from the Main Driver PCB to the Pre-exposure LED 1. Main Driver PCB (UN78/J107) to Relay Connector (12P) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, MAIN, REAR UPPER) 2. Relay Connector (12P) to Relay Connector (20P) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, AP. KIT DRAWER) 3. Relay Connector (20P) to Pre-exposure LED (LE01/J2141) (Unit of replacement: DRAWER ASSEMBLY) - Harnesses from the Main Driver PCB to the Primary Charging High Voltage PCB 1. Main Driver PCB (UN78/J111) to Relay Connector (9P) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, MAIN, REAR UPPER) 2. Relay Connector (9P) to Primary Charging High Voltage PCB (J3501) (Unit of replacement: HIGH VOLTAGE PCB ASS'Y) - Harnesses from the Main Driver PCB to the Potential Sensor 1. Main Driver PCB (UN78/J114) to Relay Connector (31P) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, MAIN DRIVER, REAR UPPER) 2. Relay Connector (31P) to Relay Connector (25P) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, RELAY, FRONT) 3. Relay Connector (25P) to Relay Connector (7P) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, MAIN DRIVER, FRONT) 4. Relay Connector (7P) to Potential Sensor (EPC01/J5014) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, POTENTIAL SENSOR) - Harness between the Main Driver PCB (UN78/J109) and the Drum Motor (M01/J2138) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, MAIN, REAR UPPER) - Primary Charging Assembly - Laser Scanner Unit - Potential Sensor (EPC01) (Unit of replacement: POTENTIAL MEASURING PCB ASS'Y) - Primary Charging High Voltage PCB (Unit of replacement: HIGH VOLTAGE PCB ASS'Y) - Drum Motor (M01) - Pre-exposure LED (LE01) - Main Driver PCB (UN78) (Unit of replacement: MAIN DRIVE DRIVER PCB ASS'Y) - DC Controller PCB (UN01) (Unit of replacement: DC CONTROLLER PCB ASS'Y) [Remedy] Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts. [Reference] Before replacing the DC Controller PCB, back up the service mode data (approx. 2 min) and restore the backup data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected. - Backup: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMBUP - Restoration: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMRES



715



7. Error/Jam/Alarm E061-0101-05



Potential control error (VD)



Detection Description Remedy



E064-00FF-05



Potential in the dark area did not fall within the range (target value +/-5 V) although retry was executed 8 times at VD potential control. [Related parts] - Harnesses from the Main Driver PCB to the Pre-exposure LED 1. Main Driver PCB (UN78/J107) to Relay Connector (12P) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, MAIN, REAR UPPER) 2. Relay Connector (12P) to Relay Connector (20P) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, AP. KIT DRAWER) 3. Relay Connector (20P) to Pre-exposure LED (LE01/J2141) (Unit of replacement: DRAWER ASSEMBLY) - Harnesses from the Main Driver PCB to the Primary Charging High Voltage PCB 1. Main Driver PCB (UN78/J111) to Relay Connector (9P) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, MAIN, REAR UPPER) 2. Relay Connector (9P) to Primary Charging High Voltage PCB (J3501) (Unit of replacement: HIGH VOLTAGE PCB ASS'Y) - Harness between the Main Driver PCB (UN78/J109) and the Drum Motor (M01/J2138) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, MAIN, REAR UPPER) - Primary Charging Assembly - Primary Charging High Voltage PCB (Unit of replacement: HIGH VOLTAGE PCB ASS'Y) - Drum Motor (M01) - Pre-exposure LED (LE01) - Main Driver PCB (UN78) (Unit of replacement: MAIN DRIVE DRIVER PCB ASS'Y) - DC Controller PCB (UN01) (Unit of replacement: DC CONTROLLER PCB ASS'Y) [Remedy] Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared. 1. If the current value of the Primary Charging Roller (COPIER (LEVEL2)> DISPLAY> DPOT> PRIM-C) is 1550 micro A or higher, perform the following. a. Set 100 V for the grid voltage of the Primary Charging Assembly (COPIER> ADJUST> HV-PRI> PRI-GRID). b. Execute potential control (COPIER> FUNCTION> DPC> DPC). 2. Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts. [Reference] Before replacing the DC Controller PCB, back up the service mode data (approx. 2 min) and restore the backup data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected. - Backup: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMBUP - Restoration: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMRES High voltage setting error



Detection Description Remedy



With the state in which the developing AC is output, 600 V or higher developing DC output was detected. [Related parts] - DC Controller PCB (UN01) (Unit of replacement: DC CONTROLLER PCB ASS'Y) [Remedy]Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared. 1. Turn OFF and then ON the power of the host machine. 2. Replace the DC Controller PCB. (Unit of replacement: DC CONTROLLER PCB ASS'Y) [Reference] Before replacing the DC Controller PCB, back up the service mode data (approx. 2 min) and restore the backup data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected. - Backup: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMBUP - Restoration: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMRES



716



7. Error/Jam/Alarm E065-0001-05



Primary charging/grid high voltage output leak error



Detection Description Remedy



E066-0001-05



The leak detection signal was detected 5 times in a row for every 20 msec. [Related parts] - Harness between the Main Driver PCB (UN78/J111) and the High Voltage Unit (J3097) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, MAIN, REAR UPPER) - Harness between the Relay PCB (UN86/J519) and the High Voltage Unit (J3099) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, SIGNAL) - Harnesses in the High Voltage Unit (J3098L, J3511, J3544, J3097L, J3501, J3500, J3545, J3510 and J3099M) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, HIGH VOLTAGE SIGNAL) - Primary Grid High Voltage Connector (Unit of replacement: DRUM DRIVE ASS'Y) - Primary Charging High Voltage PCB (Unit of replacement: HIGH VOLTAGE PCB ASS'Y) - Main Driver PCB (UN78) (Unit of replacement: MAIN DRIVE DRIVER PCB ASS'Y) [Remedy] Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts. Pre-transfer Charging Shutter HP open error



Detection Description



The Pre-transfer Charging Shutter Sensor detects that the shutter is opened although it is moved to the close position.



Remedy



[Related parts] - Harnesses from the Main Driver PCB to the Pre-transfer Charging Wire Cleaning Motor 1. Main Driver PCB (UN78/J114) to Relay Connector (31P) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, MAIN DRIVER, REAR UPPER) 2. Relay Connector (31P) to Relay Connector (25P) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, MAIN, REAR UPPER) 3. Relay Connector (25P) to Pre-transfer Charging Wire Cleaning Motor (M7/J3108) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, MAIN DRIVER, FRONT) - Harnesses from the Main Driver PCB to the Pre-transfer Charging Shutter Sensor 1. Main Driver PCB (UN78/J130) to Relay Connector (17P) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, MAIN DRIVER, REAR UPPER) 2. Relay Harness (17P) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, RELAY, FRONT, CABLE, MAIN DRIVER, FRONT) 3. Relay Connector (17P) to Pre-transfer Charging Shutter Sensor (PS95/J2114) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, FAN) - Pre-transfer Charging Wire Cleaning Motor (M7) - Pre-transfer Charging Shutter Sensor (PS95) - Pre-transfer Charging Shutter (Unit of replacement: SHUTTER UNIT) - Slide Pin - Pre-transfer Charging Assembly - Main Driver PCB (UN78) (Unit of replacement: MAIN DRIVE DRIVER PCB ASS'Y) - DC Controller PCB (UN01) (Unit of replacement: DC CONTROLLER PCB ASS'Y) [Remedy] Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared. 1. Check the Pre-transfer Charging Shutter. a. If the Pre-transfer Charging Shutter does not work (stops at HP at front side), - Check/replace the Pre-transfer Charging Wire Cleaning Motor. b. If the Pre-transfer Charging Shutter stops at rear side (close position), a. Check and close the Primary Fan Duct if it is open. b. Check/replace the Pre-transfer Charging Shutter Sensor. c. If the Pre-transfer Charging Shutter stops halfway, a. Check/replace the Slide Pin. b. Replace the Pre-transfer Charging Assembly. 2. Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts. [Reference] Before replacing the DC Controller PCB, back up the service mode data (approx. 2 min) and restore the backup data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected. - Backup: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMBUP - Restoration: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMRES



717



7. Error/Jam/Alarm E066-0002-05



Pre-transfer Charging Shutter HP close error



Detection Description



The Pre-transfer Charging Shutter Sensor detects that the shutter is closed although it is moved to the open position.



Remedy



[Related parts] - Harnesses from the Main Driver PCB to the Pre-transfer Charging Wire Cleaning Motor 1. Main Driver PCB (UN78/J114) to Relay Connector (31P) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, MAIN DRIVER, REAR UPPER) 2. Relay Connector (31P) to Relay Connector (25P) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, MAIN, REAR UPPER) 3. Relay Connector (25P) to Pre-transfer Charging Wire Cleaning Motor (M7/J3108) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, MAIN DRIVER, FRONT) - Harnesses from the Main Driver PCB to the Pre-transfer Charging Shutter Sensor 1. Main Driver PCB (UN78/J130) to Relay Connector (17P) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, MAIN DRIVER, REAR UPPER) 2. Relay Harness (17P) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, RELAY, FRONT, CABLE, MAIN DRIVER, FRONT) 3. Relay Connector (17P) to Pre-transfer Charging Shutter Sensor (PS95/J2114) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, FAN) - Pre-transfer Charging Wire Cleaning Motor (M7) - Pre-transfer Charging Shutter Sensor (PS95) - Pre-transfer Charging Shutter (Unit of replacement: SHUTTER UNIT) - Slide Pin - Pre-transfer Charging Assembly - Main Driver PCB (UN78) (Unit of replacement: MAIN DRIVE DRIVER PCB ASS'Y) - DC Controller PCB (UN01) (Unit of replacement: DC CONTROLLER PCB ASS'Y) [Remedy] Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared. 1. Check the Pre-transfer Charging Shutter. a. If the Pre-transfer Charging Shutter does not work (stops at HP at front side), - Check/replace the Pre-transfer Charging Wire Cleaning Motor. b. If the Pre-transfer Charging Shutter stops at rear side (close position), a. Check and close the Primary Fan Duct if it is open. b. Check/replace the Pre-transfer Charging Shutter Sensor. c. If the Pre-transfer Charging Shutter stops halfway, a. Check/replace the Slide Pin. b. Replace the Pre-transfer Charging Assembly. 2. Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts. [Reference] Before replacing the DC Controller PCB, back up the service mode data (approx. 2 min) and restore the backup data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected. - Backup: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMBUP - Restoration: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMRES



E067-0001-05



Developing high voltage output leak error



Detection Description Remedy



The leak detection signal was detected 5 times in a row for every 20 msec. [Related parts] - Harness between the Main Driver PCB (UN78/J112) and the High Voltage Unit (J3098) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, MAIN, REAR UPPER) - Harness between the Relay PCB (UN86/J519) and the High Voltage Unit (J3099) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, SIGNAL) - Harnesses in the High Voltage Unit (J3098L, J3511, J3544, J3097L, J3501, J3500, J3545, J3510 and J3099M) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, HIGH VOLTAGE SIGNAL) - Developing Assembly - Develop High Voltage PCB (Unit of replacement: HIGH VOLTAGE PCB ASS'Y) - Main Driver PCB (UN78) (Unit of replacement: MAIN DRIVE DRIVER PCB ASS'Y) [Remedy] Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared. 1. Check the contact point of the Developing Assembly, and remove soiling. 2. Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts.



718



7. Error/Jam/Alarm E068-0001-05



Pre-transfer charging high voltage output leak error



Detection Description Remedy



E069-0001-05



The leak detection signal was detected 5 times in a row for every 20 msec. [Related parts] - Harness between the Main Driver PCB (UN78/J112) and the High Voltage Unit (J3098) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, MAIN, REAR UPPER) - Harness between the Relay PCB (UN86/J519) and the High Voltage Unit (J3099) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, SIGNAL) - Harnesses in the High Voltage Unit (J3098L, J3511, J3544, J3097L, J3501, J3500, J3545, J3510 and J3099M) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, HIGH VOLTAGE SIGNAL) - Pre-transfer Charging Assembly - Pre-transfer High Voltage Connector (Unit of replacement: CABLE, PRE-TRANS. CORONA H.V.) - Pre-transfer Charging PCB (Unit of replacement: PRE-TRANSFER CHARGE PCB ASS'Y) - Main Driver PCB (UN78) (Unit of replacement: MAIN DRIVE DRIVER PCB ASS'Y) [Remedy] Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts. Transfer high voltage output leak error



Detection Description Remedy



E100-1100-05



The leak detection signal was detected 5 times in a row for every 20 msec. [Related parts] - Harness between the Duplex Driver PCB (UN80/J311 and J343) and the Transfer High Voltage PCB (UN76/J3061 and J3062) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, FIXING/FEEDER DRAWER) - Harness connecting the Transfer High Voltage PCB (UN76/FT20), the Relay Connector (J3306) and the Transfer High Voltage Resistance PCB (Unit of replacement: CABLE, TRANSFER HIGH VOLTAGE) - Transfer High Voltage PCB (UN76) (Unit of replacement: HIGH VOLTAGE PCB ASS'Y) - ETB Unit (Unit of replacement: E.T.BELT ASSEMBLY) - Duplex Driver PCB (UN80) (Unit of replacement: DUPLEXING DRIVER PCB ASSEMBLY) [Remedy] Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts. Scanner Motor BD unlock error



Detection Description Remedy



Locked state was not detected within the specified period of time at start-up. [Related parts] - Harness between the DC Controller PCB (UN01/J472) and the Laser Driver PCB (PCB35/J9912) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, LASER) - Harness between the DC Controller PCB (UN01/J471) and the Laser Driver PCB (PCB35/J2169) - Harnesses from the DC Controller PCB to the BD PCB and the Polygon Motor 1. DC Controller PCB (J472) to Relay Connector (9P) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, LASER) 2. Relay Connector (9P) to Relay Connector (9P) 3. Relay Connector (9P) to BD PCB (J2160) and Polygon Motor (J2159) - Scanner Unit (Unit of replacement: LASER SCANNER UNIT) - Laser Driver PCB (Unit of replacement: READER CONTROLLER PCB ASSEMBLY) - DC Controller PCB (Unit of replacement: DC CONTROLLER PCB ASS'Y) [Remedy] Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared. 1. Check that all covers (Front Cover, etc.) that can be opened and closed are closed. 2. Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts. [Reference] - Condensation inside the host machine or the Scanner Unit may trigger this error. In that case, leave the machine or the unit as it is until condensation disappears. - Before replacing the DC Controller PCB, back up the service mode data (approx. 2 min) and restore the backup data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected. - Backup: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMBUP - Restoration: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMRES



719



7. Error/Jam/Alarm E100-1110-05



Scanner Motor BD unlock error



Detection Description Remedy



E100-1120-05



Locked state was not detected within the specified period of time at start-up. [Related parts] - Harness between the DC Controller PCB (UN01/J472) and the Laser Driver PCB (PCB35/J9912) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, LASER) - Harness between the DC Controller PCB (UN01/J471) and the Laser Driver PCB (PCB35/J2169) - Harnesses from the DC Controller PCB to the BD PCB and the Polygon Motor 1. DC Controller PCB (J472) to Relay Connector (9P) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, LASER) 2. Relay Connector (9P) to Relay Connector (9P) 3. Relay Connector (9P) to BD PCB (J2160) and Polygon Motor (J2159) - Scanner Unit (Unit of replacement: LASER SCANNER UNIT) - Laser Driver PCB (Unit of replacement: READER CONTROLLER PCB ASSEMBLY) - DC Controller PCB (Unit of replacement: DC CONTROLLER PCB ASS'Y) [Remedy] Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared. 1. Check that all covers (Front Cover, etc.) that can be opened and closed are closed. 2. Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts. [Reference] - Condensation inside the host machine or the Scanner Unit may trigger this error. In that case, leave the machine or the unit as it is until condensation disappears. - Before replacing the DC Controller PCB, back up the service mode data (approx. 2 min) and restore the backup data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected. - Backup: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMBUP - Restoration: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMRES Scanner Motor BD unlock error



Detection Description Remedy



Locked state was not detected within the specified period of time at start-up. [Related parts] - Harness between the DC Controller PCB (UN01/J472) and the Laser Driver PCB (PCB35/J9912) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, LASER) - Harness between the DC Controller PCB (UN01/J471) and the Laser Driver PCB (PCB35/J2169) - Harnesses from the DC Controller PCB to the BD PCB and the Polygon Motor 1. DC Controller PCB (J472) to Relay Connector (9P) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, LASER) 2. Relay Connector (9P) to Relay Connector (9P) 3. Relay Connector (9P) to BD PCB (J2160) and Polygon Motor (J2159) - Scanner Unit (Unit of replacement: LASER SCANNER UNIT) - Laser Driver PCB (Unit of replacement: READER CONTROLLER PCB ASSEMBLY) - DC Controller PCB (Unit of replacement: DC CONTROLLER PCB ASS'Y) [Remedy] Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared. 1. Check that all covers (Front Cover, etc.) that can be opened and closed are closed. 2. Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts. [Reference] - Condensation inside the host machine or the Scanner Unit may trigger this error. In that case, leave the machine or the unit as it is until condensation disappears. - Before replacing the DC Controller PCB, back up the service mode data (approx. 2 min) and restore the backup data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected. - Backup: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMBUP - Restoration: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMRES



720



7. Error/Jam/Alarm E100-1130-05



Scanner Motor BD unlock error



Detection Description Remedy



E100-1140-05



Locked state was not detected within the specified period of time at start-up. [Related parts] - Harness between the DC Controller PCB (UN01/J472) and the Laser Driver PCB (PCB35/J9912) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, LASER) - Harness between the DC Controller PCB (UN01/J471) and the Laser Driver PCB (PCB35/J2169) - Harnesses from the DC Controller PCB to the BD PCB and the Polygon Motor 1. DC Controller PCB (J472) to Relay Connector (9P) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, LASER) 2. Relay Connector (9P) to Relay Connector (9P) 3. Relay Connector (9P) to BD PCB (J2160) and Polygon Motor (J2159) - Scanner Unit (Unit of replacement: LASER SCANNER UNIT) - Laser Driver PCB (Unit of replacement: READER CONTROLLER PCB ASSEMBLY) - DC Controller PCB (Unit of replacement: DC CONTROLLER PCB ASS'Y) [Remedy] Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared. 1. Check that all covers (Front Cover, etc.) that can be opened and closed are closed. 2. Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts. [Reference] - Condensation inside the host machine or the Scanner Unit may trigger this error. In that case, leave the machine or the unit as it is until condensation disappears. - Before replacing the DC Controller PCB, back up the service mode data (approx. 2 min) and restore the backup data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected. - Backup: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMBUP - Restoration: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMRES Scanner Motor BD unlock error



Detection Description Remedy



Locked state was not detected within the specified period of time at start-up. [Related parts] - Harness between the DC Controller PCB (UN01/J472) and the Laser Driver PCB (PCB35/J9912) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, LASER) - Harness between the DC Controller PCB (UN01/J471) and the Laser Driver PCB (PCB35/J2169) - Harnesses from the DC Controller PCB to the BD PCB and the Polygon Motor 1. DC Controller PCB (J472) to Relay Connector (9P) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, LASER) 2. Relay Connector (9P) to Relay Connector (9P) 3. Relay Connector (9P) to BD PCB (J2160) and Polygon Motor (J2159) - Scanner Unit (Unit of replacement: LASER SCANNER UNIT) - Laser Driver PCB (Unit of replacement: READER CONTROLLER PCB ASSEMBLY) - DC Controller PCB (Unit of replacement: DC CONTROLLER PCB ASS'Y) [Remedy] Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared. 1. Check that all covers (Front Cover, etc.) that can be opened and closed are closed. 2. Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts. [Reference] - Condensation inside the host machine or the Scanner Unit may trigger this error. In that case, leave the machine or the unit as it is until condensation disappears. - Before replacing the DC Controller PCB, back up the service mode data (approx. 2 min) and restore the backup data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected. - Backup: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMBUP - Restoration: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMRES



721



7. Error/Jam/Alarm E100-1150-05



Scanner Motor BD unlock error



Detection Description Remedy



E100-1160-05



Locked state was not detected within the specified period of time at start-up. [Related parts] - Harness between the DC Controller PCB (UN01/J472) and the Laser Driver PCB (PCB35/J9912) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, LASER) - Harness between the DC Controller PCB (UN01/J471) and the Laser Driver PCB (PCB35/J2169) - Harnesses from the DC Controller PCB to the BD PCB and the Polygon Motor 1. DC Controller PCB (J472) to Relay Connector (9P) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, LASER) 2. Relay Connector (9P) to Relay Connector (9P) 3. Relay Connector (9P) to BD PCB (J2160) and Polygon Motor (J2159) - Scanner Unit (Unit of replacement: LASER SCANNER UNIT) - Laser Driver PCB (Unit of replacement: READER CONTROLLER PCB ASSEMBLY) - DC Controller PCB (Unit of replacement: DC CONTROLLER PCB ASS'Y) [Remedy] Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared. 1. Check that all covers (Front Cover, etc.) that can be opened and closed are closed. 2. Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts. [Reference] - Condensation inside the host machine or the Scanner Unit may trigger this error. In that case, leave the machine or the unit as it is until condensation disappears. - Before replacing the DC Controller PCB, back up the service mode data (approx. 2 min) and restore the backup data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected. - Backup: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMBUP - Restoration: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMRES Scanner Motor BD unlock error



Detection Description Remedy



Locked state was not detected within the specified period of time at start-up. [Related parts] - Harness between the DC Controller PCB (UN01/J472) and the Laser Driver PCB (PCB35/J9912) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, LASER) - Harness between the DC Controller PCB (UN01/J471) and the Laser Driver PCB (PCB35/J2169) - Harnesses from the DC Controller PCB to the BD PCB and the Polygon Motor 1. DC Controller PCB (J472) to Relay Connector (9P) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, LASER) 2. Relay Connector (9P) to Relay Connector (9P) 3. Relay Connector (9P) to BD PCB (J2160) and Polygon Motor (J2159) - Scanner Unit (Unit of replacement: LASER SCANNER UNIT) - Laser Driver PCB (Unit of replacement: READER CONTROLLER PCB ASSEMBLY) - DC Controller PCB (Unit of replacement: DC CONTROLLER PCB ASS'Y) [Remedy] Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared. 1. Check that all covers (Front Cover, etc.) that can be opened and closed are closed. 2. Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts. [Reference] - Condensation inside the host machine or the Scanner Unit may trigger this error. In that case, leave the machine or the unit as it is until condensation disappears. - Before replacing the DC Controller PCB, back up the service mode data (approx. 2 min) and restore the backup data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected. - Backup: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMBUP - Restoration: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMRES



722



7. Error/Jam/Alarm E100-11F0-05



Scanner Motor BD unlock error



Detection Description Remedy



E100-1200-05



Locked state was not detected within the specified period of time at start-up. [Related parts] - Harness between the DC Controller PCB (UN01/J472) and the Laser Driver PCB (PCB35/J9912) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, LASER) - Harness between the DC Controller PCB (UN01/J471) and the Laser Driver PCB (PCB35/J2169) - Harnesses from the DC Controller PCB to the BD PCB and the Polygon Motor 1. DC Controller PCB (J472) to Relay Connector (9P) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, LASER) 2. Relay Connector (9P) to Relay Connector (9P) 3. Relay Connector (9P) to BD PCB (J2160) and Polygon Motor (J2159) - Scanner Unit (Unit of replacement: LASER SCANNER UNIT) - Laser Driver PCB (Unit of replacement: READER CONTROLLER PCB ASSEMBLY) - DC Controller PCB (Unit of replacement: DC CONTROLLER PCB ASS'Y) [Remedy] Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared. 1. Check that all covers (Front Cover, etc.) that can be opened and closed are closed. 2. Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts. [Reference] - Condensation inside the host machine or the Scanner Unit may trigger this error. In that case, leave the machine or the unit as it is until condensation disappears. - Before replacing the DC Controller PCB, back up the service mode data (approx. 2 min) and restore the backup data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected. - Backup: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMBUP - Restoration: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMRES Scanner Motor BD unlock error



Detection Description Remedy



The BD lock was unlocked although it had been locked once. [Related parts] - Harness between the DC Controller PCB (UN01/J472) and the Laser Driver PCB (PCB35/J9912) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, LASER) - Harness between the DC Controller PCB (UN01/J471) and the Laser Driver PCB (PCB35/J2169) - Harnesses from the DC Controller PCB to the BD PCB and the Polygon Motor 1. DC Controller PCB (J472) to Relay Connector (9P) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, LASER) 2. Relay Connector (9P) to Relay Connector (9P) 3. Relay Connector (9P) to BD PCB (J2160) and Polygon Motor (J2159) - Scanner Unit (Unit of replacement: LASER SCANNER UNIT) - Laser Driver PCB (Unit of replacement: READER CONTROLLER PCB ASSEMBLY) - DC Controller PCB (Unit of replacement: DC CONTROLLER PCB ASS'Y) [Remedy] Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared. 1. Check that all covers (Front Cover, etc.) that can be opened and closed are closed. 2. Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts. [Reference] - Condensation inside the host machine or the Scanner Unit may trigger this error. In that case, leave the machine or the unit as it is until condensation disappears. - Before replacing the DC Controller PCB, back up the service mode data (approx. 2 min) and restore the backup data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected. - Backup: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMBUP - Restoration: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMRES



723



7. Error/Jam/Alarm E100-1210-05



Scanner Motor BD unlock error



Detection Description Remedy



E100-1220-05



The BD lock was unlocked although it had been locked once. [Related parts] - Harness between the DC Controller PCB (UN01/J472) and the Laser Driver PCB (PCB35/J9912) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, LASER) - Harness between the DC Controller PCB (UN01/J471) and the Laser Driver PCB (PCB35/J2169) - Harnesses from the DC Controller PCB to the BD PCB and the Polygon Motor 1. DC Controller PCB (J472) to Relay Connector (9P) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, LASER) 2. Relay Connector (9P) to Relay Connector (9P) 3. Relay Connector (9P) to BD PCB (J2160) and Polygon Motor (J2159) - Scanner Unit (Unit of replacement: LASER SCANNER UNIT) - Laser Driver PCB (Unit of replacement: READER CONTROLLER PCB ASSEMBLY) - DC Controller PCB (Unit of replacement: DC CONTROLLER PCB ASS'Y) [Remedy] Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared. 1. Check that all covers (Front Cover, etc.) that can be opened and closed are closed. 2. Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts. [Reference] - Condensation inside the host machine or the Scanner Unit may trigger this error. In that case, leave the machine or the unit as it is until condensation disappears. - Before replacing the DC Controller PCB, back up the service mode data (approx. 2 min) and restore the backup data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected. - Backup: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMBUP - Restoration: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMRES Scanner Motor BD unlock error



Detection Description Remedy



The BD lock was unlocked although it had been locked once. [Related parts] - Harness between the DC Controller PCB (UN01/J472) and the Laser Driver PCB (PCB35/J9912) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, LASER) - Harness between the DC Controller PCB (UN01/J471) and the Laser Driver PCB (PCB35/J2169) - Harnesses from the DC Controller PCB to the BD PCB and the Polygon Motor 1. DC Controller PCB (J472) to Relay Connector (9P) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, LASER) 2. Relay Connector (9P) to Relay Connector (9P) 3. Relay Connector (9P) to BD PCB (J2160) and Polygon Motor (J2159) - Scanner Unit (Unit of replacement: LASER SCANNER UNIT) - Laser Driver PCB (Unit of replacement: READER CONTROLLER PCB ASSEMBLY) - DC Controller PCB (Unit of replacement: DC CONTROLLER PCB ASS'Y) [Remedy] Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared. 1. Check that all covers (Front Cover, etc.) that can be opened and closed are closed. 2. Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts. [Reference] - Condensation inside the host machine or the Scanner Unit may trigger this error. In that case, leave the machine or the unit as it is until condensation disappears. - Before replacing the DC Controller PCB, back up the service mode data (approx. 2 min) and restore the backup data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected. - Backup: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMBUP - Restoration: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMRES



724



7. Error/Jam/Alarm E100-1230-05



Scanner Motor BD unlock error



Detection Description Remedy



E100-1240-05



The BD lock was unlocked although it had been locked once. [Related parts] - Harness between the DC Controller PCB (UN01/J472) and the Laser Driver PCB (PCB35/J9912) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, LASER) - Harness between the DC Controller PCB (UN01/J471) and the Laser Driver PCB (PCB35/J2169) - Harnesses from the DC Controller PCB to the BD PCB and the Polygon Motor 1. DC Controller PCB (J472) to Relay Connector (9P) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, LASER) 2. Relay Connector (9P) to Relay Connector (9P) 3. Relay Connector (9P) to BD PCB (J2160) and Polygon Motor (J2159) - Scanner Unit (Unit of replacement: LASER SCANNER UNIT) - Laser Driver PCB (Unit of replacement: READER CONTROLLER PCB ASSEMBLY) - DC Controller PCB (Unit of replacement: DC CONTROLLER PCB ASS'Y) [Remedy] Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared. 1. Check that all covers (Front Cover, etc.) that can be opened and closed are closed. 2. Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts. [Reference] - Condensation inside the host machine or the Scanner Unit may trigger this error. In that case, leave the machine or the unit as it is until condensation disappears. - Before replacing the DC Controller PCB, back up the service mode data (approx. 2 min) and restore the backup data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected. - Backup: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMBUP - Restoration: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMRES Scanner Motor BD unlock error



Detection Description Remedy



The BD lock was unlocked although it had been locked once. [Related parts] - Harness between the DC Controller PCB (UN01/J472) and the Laser Driver PCB (PCB35/J9912) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, LASER) - Harness between the DC Controller PCB (UN01/J471) and the Laser Driver PCB (PCB35/J2169) - Harnesses from the DC Controller PCB to the BD PCB and the Polygon Motor 1. DC Controller PCB (J472) to Relay Connector (9P) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, LASER) 2. Relay Connector (9P) to Relay Connector (9P) 3. Relay Connector (9P) to BD PCB (J2160) and Polygon Motor (J2159) - Scanner Unit (Unit of replacement: LASER SCANNER UNIT) - Laser Driver PCB (Unit of replacement: READER CONTROLLER PCB ASSEMBLY) - DC Controller PCB (Unit of replacement: DC CONTROLLER PCB ASS'Y) [Remedy] Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared. 1. Check that all covers (Front Cover, etc.) that can be opened and closed are closed. 2. Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts. [Reference] - Condensation inside the host machine or the Scanner Unit may trigger this error. In that case, leave the machine or the unit as it is until condensation disappears. - Before replacing the DC Controller PCB, back up the service mode data (approx. 2 min) and restore the backup data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected. - Backup: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMBUP - Restoration: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMRES



725



7. Error/Jam/Alarm E100-1250-05



Scanner Motor BD unlock error



Detection Description Remedy



E100-1260-05



The BD lock was unlocked although it had been locked once. [Related parts] - Harness between the DC Controller PCB (UN01/J472) and the Laser Driver PCB (PCB35/J9912) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, LASER) - Harness between the DC Controller PCB (UN01/J471) and the Laser Driver PCB (PCB35/J2169) - Harnesses from the DC Controller PCB to the BD PCB and the Polygon Motor 1. DC Controller PCB (J472) to Relay Connector (9P) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, LASER) 2. Relay Connector (9P) to Relay Connector (9P) 3. Relay Connector (9P) to BD PCB (J2160) and Polygon Motor (J2159) - Scanner Unit (Unit of replacement: LASER SCANNER UNIT) - Laser Driver PCB (Unit of replacement: READER CONTROLLER PCB ASSEMBLY) - DC Controller PCB (Unit of replacement: DC CONTROLLER PCB ASS'Y) [Remedy] Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared. 1. Check that all covers (Front Cover, etc.) that can be opened and closed are closed. 2. Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts. [Reference] - Condensation inside the host machine or the Scanner Unit may trigger this error. In that case, leave the machine or the unit as it is until condensation disappears. - Before replacing the DC Controller PCB, back up the service mode data (approx. 2 min) and restore the backup data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected. - Backup: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMBUP - Restoration: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMRES Scanner Motor BD unlock error



Detection Description Remedy



The BD lock was unlocked although it had been locked once. [Related parts] - Harness between the DC Controller PCB (UN01/J472) and the Laser Driver PCB (PCB35/J9912) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, LASER) - Harness between the DC Controller PCB (UN01/J471) and the Laser Driver PCB (PCB35/J2169) - Harnesses from the DC Controller PCB to the BD PCB and the Polygon Motor 1. DC Controller PCB (J472) to Relay Connector (9P) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, LASER) 2. Relay Connector (9P) to Relay Connector (9P) 3. Relay Connector (9P) to BD PCB (J2160) and Polygon Motor (J2159) - Scanner Unit (Unit of replacement: LASER SCANNER UNIT) - Laser Driver PCB (Unit of replacement: READER CONTROLLER PCB ASSEMBLY) - DC Controller PCB (Unit of replacement: DC CONTROLLER PCB ASS'Y) [Remedy] Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared. 1. Check that all covers (Front Cover, etc.) that can be opened and closed are closed. 2. Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts. [Reference] - Condensation inside the host machine or the Scanner Unit may trigger this error. In that case, leave the machine or the unit as it is until condensation disappears. - Before replacing the DC Controller PCB, back up the service mode data (approx. 2 min) and restore the backup data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected. - Backup: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMBUP - Restoration: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMRES



726



7. Error/Jam/Alarm E100-12F0-05



Scanner Motor BD unlock error



Detection Description Remedy



E100-1300-05



The BD lock was unlocked although it had been locked once. [Related parts] - Harness between the DC Controller PCB (UN01/J472) and the Laser Driver PCB (PCB35/J9912) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, LASER) - Harness between the DC Controller PCB (UN01/J471) and the Laser Driver PCB (PCB35/J2169) - Harnesses from the DC Controller PCB to the BD PCB and the Polygon Motor 1. DC Controller PCB (J472) to Relay Connector (9P) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, LASER) 2. Relay Connector (9P) to Relay Connector (9P) 3. Relay Connector (9P) to BD PCB (J2160) and Polygon Motor (J2159) - Scanner Unit (Unit of replacement: LASER SCANNER UNIT) - Laser Driver PCB (Unit of replacement: READER CONTROLLER PCB ASSEMBLY) - DC Controller PCB (Unit of replacement: DC CONTROLLER PCB ASS'Y) [Remedy] Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared. 1. Check that all covers (Front Cover, etc.) that can be opened and closed are closed. 2. Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts. [Reference] - Condensation inside the host machine or the Scanner Unit may trigger this error. In that case, leave the machine or the unit as it is until condensation disappears. - Before replacing the DC Controller PCB, back up the service mode data (approx. 2 min) and restore the backup data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected. - Backup: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMBUP - Restoration: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMRES Scanner Motor BD unlock error



Detection Description Remedy



During the Polygon speed change, lock was unlocked for 1 second or longer. [Related parts] - Harness between the DC Controller PCB (UN01/J472) and the Laser Driver PCB (PCB35/J9912) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, LASER) - Harness between the DC Controller PCB (UN01/J471) and the Laser Driver PCB (PCB35/J2169) - Harnesses from the DC Controller PCB to the BD PCB and the Polygon Motor 1. DC Controller PCB (J472) to Relay Connector (9P) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, LASER) 2. Relay Connector (9P) to Relay Connector (9P) 3. Relay Connector (9P) to BD PCB (J2160) and Polygon Motor (J2159) - Scanner Unit (Unit of replacement: LASER SCANNER UNIT) - Laser Driver PCB (Unit of replacement: READER CONTROLLER PCB ASSEMBLY) - DC Controller PCB (Unit of replacement: DC CONTROLLER PCB ASS'Y) [Remedy] Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared. 1. Check that all covers (Front Cover, etc.) that can be opened and closed are closed. 2. Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts. [Reference] - Condensation inside the host machine or the Scanner Unit may trigger this error. In that case, leave the machine or the unit as it is until condensation disappears. - Before replacing the DC Controller PCB, back up the service mode data (approx. 2 min) and restore the backup data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected. - Backup: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMBUP - Restoration: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMRES



727



7. Error/Jam/Alarm E100-1310-05



Scanner Motor BD unlock error



Detection Description Remedy



E100-1320-05



During the Polygon speed change, lock was unlocked for 1 second or longer. [Related parts] - Harness between the DC Controller PCB (UN01/J472) and the Laser Driver PCB (PCB35/J9912) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, LASER) - Harness between the DC Controller PCB (UN01/J471) and the Laser Driver PCB (PCB35/J2169) - Harnesses from the DC Controller PCB to the BD PCB and the Polygon Motor 1. DC Controller PCB (J472) to Relay Connector (9P) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, LASER) 2. Relay Connector (9P) to Relay Connector (9P) 3. Relay Connector (9P) to BD PCB (J2160) and Polygon Motor (J2159) - Scanner Unit (Unit of replacement: LASER SCANNER UNIT) - Laser Driver PCB (Unit of replacement: READER CONTROLLER PCB ASSEMBLY) - DC Controller PCB (Unit of replacement: DC CONTROLLER PCB ASS'Y) [Remedy] Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared. 1. Check that all covers (Front Cover, etc.) that can be opened and closed are closed. 2. Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts. [Reference] - Condensation inside the host machine or the Scanner Unit may trigger this error. In that case, leave the machine or the unit as it is until condensation disappears. - Before replacing the DC Controller PCB, back up the service mode data (approx. 2 min) and restore the backup data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected. - Backup: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMBUP - Restoration: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMRES Scanner Motor BD unlock error



Detection Description Remedy



During the Polygon speed change, lock was unlocked for 1 second or longer. [Related parts] - Harness between the DC Controller PCB (UN01/J472) and the Laser Driver PCB (PCB35/J9912) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, LASER) - Harness between the DC Controller PCB (UN01/J471) and the Laser Driver PCB (PCB35/J2169) - Harnesses from the DC Controller PCB to the BD PCB and the Polygon Motor 1. DC Controller PCB (J472) to Relay Connector (9P) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, LASER) 2. Relay Connector (9P) to Relay Connector (9P) 3. Relay Connector (9P) to BD PCB (J2160) and Polygon Motor (J2159) - Scanner Unit (Unit of replacement: LASER SCANNER UNIT) - Laser Driver PCB (Unit of replacement: READER CONTROLLER PCB ASSEMBLY) - DC Controller PCB (Unit of replacement: DC CONTROLLER PCB ASS'Y) [Remedy] Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared. 1. Check that all covers (Front Cover, etc.) that can be opened and closed are closed. 2. Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts. [Reference] - Condensation inside the host machine or the Scanner Unit may trigger this error. In that case, leave the machine or the unit as it is until condensation disappears. - Before replacing the DC Controller PCB, back up the service mode data (approx. 2 min) and restore the backup data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected. - Backup: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMBUP - Restoration: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMRES



728



7. Error/Jam/Alarm E100-1330-05



Scanner Motor BD unlock error



Detection Description Remedy



E100-1340-05



During the Polygon speed change, lock was unlocked for 1 second or longer. [Related parts] - Harness between the DC Controller PCB (UN01/J472) and the Laser Driver PCB (PCB35/J9912) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, LASER) - Harness between the DC Controller PCB (UN01/J471) and the Laser Driver PCB (PCB35/J2169) - Harnesses from the DC Controller PCB to the BD PCB and the Polygon Motor 1. DC Controller PCB (J472) to Relay Connector (9P) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, LASER) 2. Relay Connector (9P) to Relay Connector (9P) 3. Relay Connector (9P) to BD PCB (J2160) and Polygon Motor (J2159) - Scanner Unit (Unit of replacement: LASER SCANNER UNIT) - Laser Driver PCB (Unit of replacement: READER CONTROLLER PCB ASSEMBLY) - DC Controller PCB (Unit of replacement: DC CONTROLLER PCB ASS'Y) [Remedy] Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared. 1. Check that all covers (Front Cover, etc.) that can be opened and closed are closed. 2. Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts. [Reference] - Condensation inside the host machine or the Scanner Unit may trigger this error. In that case, leave the machine or the unit as it is until condensation disappears. - Before replacing the DC Controller PCB, back up the service mode data (approx. 2 min) and restore the backup data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected. - Backup: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMBUP - Restoration: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMRES Scanner Motor BD unlock error



Detection Description Remedy



During the Polygon speed change, lock was unlocked for 1 second or longer. [Related parts] - Harness between the DC Controller PCB (UN01/J472) and the Laser Driver PCB (PCB35/J9912) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, LASER) - Harness between the DC Controller PCB (UN01/J471) and the Laser Driver PCB (PCB35/J2169) - Harnesses from the DC Controller PCB to the BD PCB and the Polygon Motor 1. DC Controller PCB (J472) to Relay Connector (9P) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, LASER) 2. Relay Connector (9P) to Relay Connector (9P) 3. Relay Connector (9P) to BD PCB (J2160) and Polygon Motor (J2159) - Scanner Unit (Unit of replacement: LASER SCANNER UNIT) - Laser Driver PCB (Unit of replacement: READER CONTROLLER PCB ASSEMBLY) - DC Controller PCB (Unit of replacement: DC CONTROLLER PCB ASS'Y) [Remedy] Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared. 1. Check that all covers (Front Cover, etc.) that can be opened and closed are closed. 2. Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts. [Reference] - Condensation inside the host machine or the Scanner Unit may trigger this error. In that case, leave the machine or the unit as it is until condensation disappears. - Before replacing the DC Controller PCB, back up the service mode data (approx. 2 min) and restore the backup data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected. - Backup: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMBUP - Restoration: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMRES



729



7. Error/Jam/Alarm E100-1350-05



Scanner Motor BD unlock error



Detection Description Remedy



E100-1360-05



During the Polygon speed change, lock was unlocked for 1 second or longer. [Related parts] - Harness between the DC Controller PCB (UN01/J472) and the Laser Driver PCB (PCB35/J9912) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, LASER) - Harness between the DC Controller PCB (UN01/J471) and the Laser Driver PCB (PCB35/J2169) - Harnesses from the DC Controller PCB to the BD PCB and the Polygon Motor 1. DC Controller PCB (J472) to Relay Connector (9P) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, LASER) 2. Relay Connector (9P) to Relay Connector (9P) 3. Relay Connector (9P) to BD PCB (J2160) and Polygon Motor (J2159) - Scanner Unit (Unit of replacement: LASER SCANNER UNIT) - Laser Driver PCB (Unit of replacement: READER CONTROLLER PCB ASSEMBLY) - DC Controller PCB (Unit of replacement: DC CONTROLLER PCB ASS'Y) [Remedy] Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared. 1. Check that all covers (Front Cover, etc.) that can be opened and closed are closed. 2. Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts. [Reference] - Condensation inside the host machine or the Scanner Unit may trigger this error. In that case, leave the machine or the unit as it is until condensation disappears. - Before replacing the DC Controller PCB, back up the service mode data (approx. 2 min) and restore the backup data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected. - Backup: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMBUP - Restoration: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMRES Scanner Motor BD unlock error



Detection Description Remedy



During the Polygon speed change, lock was unlocked for 1 second or longer. [Related parts] - Harness between the DC Controller PCB (UN01/J472) and the Laser Driver PCB (PCB35/J9912) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, LASER) - Harness between the DC Controller PCB (UN01/J471) and the Laser Driver PCB (PCB35/J2169) - Harnesses from the DC Controller PCB to the BD PCB and the Polygon Motor 1. DC Controller PCB (J472) to Relay Connector (9P) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, LASER) 2. Relay Connector (9P) to Relay Connector (9P) 3. Relay Connector (9P) to BD PCB (J2160) and Polygon Motor (J2159) - Scanner Unit (Unit of replacement: LASER SCANNER UNIT) - Laser Driver PCB (Unit of replacement: READER CONTROLLER PCB ASSEMBLY) - DC Controller PCB (Unit of replacement: DC CONTROLLER PCB ASS'Y) [Remedy] Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared. 1. Check that all covers (Front Cover, etc.) that can be opened and closed are closed. 2. Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts. [Reference] - Condensation inside the host machine or the Scanner Unit may trigger this error. In that case, leave the machine or the unit as it is until condensation disappears. - Before replacing the DC Controller PCB, back up the service mode data (approx. 2 min) and restore the backup data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected. - Backup: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMBUP - Restoration: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMRES



730



7. Error/Jam/Alarm E100-13F0-05



Scanner Motor BD unlock error



Detection Description Remedy



E100-FFFF-05



During the Polygon speed change, lock was unlocked for 1 second or longer. [Related parts] - Harness between the DC Controller PCB (UN01/J472) and the Laser Driver PCB (PCB35/J9912) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, LASER) - Harness between the DC Controller PCB (UN01/J471) and the Laser Driver PCB (PCB35/J2169) - Harnesses from the DC Controller PCB to the BD PCB and the Polygon Motor 1. DC Controller PCB (J472) to Relay Connector (9P) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, LASER) 2. Relay Connector (9P) to Relay Connector (9P) 3. Relay Connector (9P) to BD PCB (J2160) and Polygon Motor (J2159) - Scanner Unit (Unit of replacement: LASER SCANNER UNIT) - Laser Driver PCB (Unit of replacement: READER CONTROLLER PCB ASSEMBLY) - DC Controller PCB (Unit of replacement: DC CONTROLLER PCB ASS'Y) [Remedy] Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared. 1. Check that all covers (Front Cover, etc.) that can be opened and closed are closed. 2. Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts. [Reference] - Condensation inside the host machine or the Scanner Unit may trigger this error. In that case, leave the machine or the unit as it is until condensation disappears. - Before replacing the DC Controller PCB, back up the service mode data (approx. 2 min) and restore the backup data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected. - Backup: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMBUP - Restoration: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMRES Scanner Motor BD unlock error



Detection Description Remedy



Failed to get the Detailed Code. [Related parts] - Harness between the DC Controller PCB (UN01/J472) and the Laser Driver PCB (PCB35/J9912) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, LASER) - Harness between the DC Controller PCB (UN01/J471) and the Laser Driver PCB (PCB35/J2169) - Harnesses from the DC Controller PCB to the BD PCB and the Polygon Motor 1. DC Controller PCB (J472) to Relay Connector (9P) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, LASER) 2. Relay Connector (9P) to Relay Connector (9P) 3. Relay Connector (9P) to BD PCB (J2160) and Polygon Motor (J2159) - Scanner Unit (Unit of replacement: LASER SCANNER UNIT) - Laser Driver PCB (Unit of replacement: READER CONTROLLER PCB ASSEMBLY) - DC Controller PCB (Unit of replacement: DC CONTROLLER PCB ASS'Y) [Remedy] Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared. 1. Check that all covers (Front Cover, etc.) that can be opened and closed are closed. 2. Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts. [Reference] - Condensation inside the host machine or the Scanner Unit may trigger this error. In that case, leave the machine or the unit as it is until condensation disappears. - Before replacing the DC Controller PCB, back up the service mode data (approx. 2 min) and restore the backup data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected. - Backup: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMBUP - Restoration: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMRES



731



7. Error/Jam/Alarm E102-0001-05



EEPROM error



Detection Description Remedy



E103-0001-05



Failed to write to EEPROM. [Related parts] - Harness between the DC Controller PCB (UN01/J472) and the Laser Driver PCB (PCB35/J9912) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, LASER) - Harness between the DC Controller PCB (UN01/J471) and the Laser Driver PCB (PCB35/J2169) - Harnesses from the DC Controller PCB to the BD PCB and the Polygon Motor 1. DC Controller PCB (J472) to Relay Connector (9P) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, LASER) 2. Relay Connector (9P) to Relay Connector (9P) 3. Relay Connector (9P) to BD PCB (J2160) and Polygon Motor (J2159) - Scanner Unit (Unit of replacement: LASER SCANNER UNIT) - Laser Driver PCB (Unit of replacement: READER CONTROLLER PCB ASSEMBLY) - DC Controller PCB (Unit of replacement: DC CONTROLLER PCB ASS'Y) [Remedy] Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared. 1. Check that all covers (Front Cover, etc.) that can be opened and closed are closed. 2. Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts. [Reference] - Condensation inside the host machine or the Scanner Unit may trigger this error. In that case, leave the machine or the unit as it is until condensation disappears. - Before replacing the DC Controller PCB, back up the service mode data (approx. 2 min) and restore the backup data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected. - Backup: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMBUP - Restoration: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMRES Different Laser Scanner Unit model error



Detection Description Remedy E110-1100-05



The scanner for iR-ADV 6555 series has been installed to iR-ADV 8505 series machine, and vice versa. Replace the Laser Scanner Unit with the one for the correct model. Scanner Motor FG unlock error



Detection Description Remedy



Locked state was not detected within the specified period of time at start-up. [Related parts] - Harness between the DC Controller PCB (UN01/J472) and the Laser Driver PCB (PCB35/J9912) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, LASER) - Harness between the DC Controller PCB (UN01/J471) and the Laser Driver PCB (PCB35/J2169) - Harnesses from the DC Controller PCB to the BD PCB and the Polygon Motor 1. DC Controller PCB (J472) to Relay Connector (9P) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, LASER) 2. Relay Connector (9P) to Relay Connector (9P) 3. Relay Connector (9P) to BD PCB (J2160) and Polygon Motor (J2159) - Scanner Unit (Unit of replacement: LASER SCANNER UNIT) - Laser Driver PCB (Unit of replacement: READER CONTROLLER PCB ASSEMBLY) - DC Controller PCB (Unit of replacement: DC CONTROLLER PCB ASS'Y) [Remedy] Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared. 1. Check that all covers (Front Cover, etc.) that can be opened and closed are closed. 2. Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts. [Reference] Before replacing the DC Controller PCB, back up the service mode data (approx. 2 min) and restore the backup data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected. - Backup: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMBUP - Restoration: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMRES



732



7. Error/Jam/Alarm E110-1101-05



Scanner Motor FG unlock error



Detection Description Remedy



E110-1102-05



Locked state was not detected within the specified period of time at start-up. [Related parts] - Harness between the DC Controller PCB (UN01/J472) and the Laser Driver PCB (PCB35/J9912) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, LASER) - Harness between the DC Controller PCB (UN01/J471) and the Laser Driver PCB (PCB35/J2169) - Harnesses from the DC Controller PCB to the BD PCB and the Polygon Motor 1. DC Controller PCB (J472) to Relay Connector (9P) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, LASER) 2. Relay Connector (9P) to Relay Connector (9P) 3. Relay Connector (9P) to BD PCB (J2160) and Polygon Motor (J2159) - Scanner Unit (Unit of replacement: LASER SCANNER UNIT) - Laser Driver PCB (Unit of replacement: READER CONTROLLER PCB ASSEMBLY) - DC Controller PCB (Unit of replacement: DC CONTROLLER PCB ASS'Y) [Remedy] Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared. 1. Check that all covers (Front Cover, etc.) that can be opened and closed are closed. 2. Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts. [Reference] Before replacing the DC Controller PCB, back up the service mode data (approx. 2 min) and restore the backup data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected. - Backup: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMBUP - Restoration: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMRES Scanner Motor FG unlock error



Detection Description Remedy



Locked state was not detected within the specified period of time at start-up. [Related parts] - Harness between the DC Controller PCB (UN01/J472) and the Laser Driver PCB (PCB35/J9912) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, LASER) - Harness between the DC Controller PCB (UN01/J471) and the Laser Driver PCB (PCB35/J2169) - Harnesses from the DC Controller PCB to the BD PCB and the Polygon Motor 1. DC Controller PCB (J472) to Relay Connector (9P) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, LASER) 2. Relay Connector (9P) to Relay Connector (9P) 3. Relay Connector (9P) to BD PCB (J2160) and Polygon Motor (J2159) - Scanner Unit (Unit of replacement: LASER SCANNER UNIT) - Laser Driver PCB (Unit of replacement: READER CONTROLLER PCB ASSEMBLY) - DC Controller PCB (Unit of replacement: DC CONTROLLER PCB ASS'Y) [Remedy] Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared. 1. Check that all covers (Front Cover, etc.) that can be opened and closed are closed. 2. Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts. [Reference] Before replacing the DC Controller PCB, back up the service mode data (approx. 2 min) and restore the backup data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected. - Backup: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMBUP - Restoration: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMRES



733



7. Error/Jam/Alarm E110-1104-05



Scanner Motor FG unlock error



Detection Description Remedy



E110-1105-05



Locked state was not detected within the specified period of time at start-up. [Related parts] - Harness between the DC Controller PCB (UN01/J472) and the Laser Driver PCB (PCB35/J9912) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, LASER) - Harness between the DC Controller PCB (UN01/J471) and the Laser Driver PCB (PCB35/J2169) - Harnesses from the DC Controller PCB to the BD PCB and the Polygon Motor 1. DC Controller PCB (J472) to Relay Connector (9P) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, LASER) 2. Relay Connector (9P) to Relay Connector (9P) 3. Relay Connector (9P) to BD PCB (J2160) and Polygon Motor (J2159) - Scanner Unit (Unit of replacement: LASER SCANNER UNIT) - Laser Driver PCB (Unit of replacement: READER CONTROLLER PCB ASSEMBLY) - DC Controller PCB (Unit of replacement: DC CONTROLLER PCB ASS'Y) [Remedy] Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared. 1. Check that all covers (Front Cover, etc.) that can be opened and closed are closed. 2. Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts. [Reference] Before replacing the DC Controller PCB, back up the service mode data (approx. 2 min) and restore the backup data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected. - Backup: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMBUP - Restoration: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMRES Scanner Motor FG unlock error



Detection Description Remedy



Locked state was not detected within the specified period of time at start-up. [Related parts] - Harness between the DC Controller PCB (UN01/J472) and the Laser Driver PCB (PCB35/J9912) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, LASER) - Harness between the DC Controller PCB (UN01/J471) and the Laser Driver PCB (PCB35/J2169) - Harnesses from the DC Controller PCB to the BD PCB and the Polygon Motor 1. DC Controller PCB (J472) to Relay Connector (9P) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, LASER) 2. Relay Connector (9P) to Relay Connector (9P) 3. Relay Connector (9P) to BD PCB (J2160) and Polygon Motor (J2159) - Scanner Unit (Unit of replacement: LASER SCANNER UNIT) - Laser Driver PCB (Unit of replacement: READER CONTROLLER PCB ASSEMBLY) - DC Controller PCB (Unit of replacement: DC CONTROLLER PCB ASS'Y) [Remedy] Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared. 1. Check that all covers (Front Cover, etc.) that can be opened and closed are closed. 2. Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts. [Reference] Before replacing the DC Controller PCB, back up the service mode data (approx. 2 min) and restore the backup data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected. - Backup: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMBUP - Restoration: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMRES



734



7. Error/Jam/Alarm E110-1107-05



Scanner Motor FG unlock error



Detection Description Remedy



E110-110F-05



Locked state was not detected within the specified period of time at start-up. [Related parts] - Harness between the DC Controller PCB (UN01/J472) and the Laser Driver PCB (PCB35/J9912) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, LASER) - Harness between the DC Controller PCB (UN01/J471) and the Laser Driver PCB (PCB35/J2169) - Harnesses from the DC Controller PCB to the BD PCB and the Polygon Motor 1. DC Controller PCB (J472) to Relay Connector (9P) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, LASER) 2. Relay Connector (9P) to Relay Connector (9P) 3. Relay Connector (9P) to BD PCB (J2160) and Polygon Motor (J2159) - Scanner Unit (Unit of replacement: LASER SCANNER UNIT) - Laser Driver PCB (Unit of replacement: READER CONTROLLER PCB ASSEMBLY) - DC Controller PCB (Unit of replacement: DC CONTROLLER PCB ASS'Y) [Remedy] Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared. 1. Check that all covers (Front Cover, etc.) that can be opened and closed are closed. 2. Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts. [Reference] Before replacing the DC Controller PCB, back up the service mode data (approx. 2 min) and restore the backup data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected. - Backup: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMBUP - Restoration: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMRES Scanner Motor FG unlock error



Detection Description Remedy



Locked state was not detected within the specified period of time at start-up. [Related parts] - Harness between the DC Controller PCB (UN01/J472) and the Laser Driver PCB (PCB35/J9912) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, LASER) - Harness between the DC Controller PCB (UN01/J471) and the Laser Driver PCB (PCB35/J2169) - Harnesses from the DC Controller PCB to the BD PCB and the Polygon Motor 1. DC Controller PCB (J472) to Relay Connector (9P) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, LASER) 2. Relay Connector (9P) to Relay Connector (9P) 3. Relay Connector (9P) to BD PCB (J2160) and Polygon Motor (J2159) - Scanner Unit (Unit of replacement: LASER SCANNER UNIT) - Laser Driver PCB (Unit of replacement: READER CONTROLLER PCB ASSEMBLY) - DC Controller PCB (Unit of replacement: DC CONTROLLER PCB ASS'Y) [Remedy] Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared. 1. Check that all covers (Front Cover, etc.) that can be opened and closed are closed. 2. Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts. [Reference] Before replacing the DC Controller PCB, back up the service mode data (approx. 2 min) and restore the backup data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected. - Backup: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMBUP - Restoration: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMRES



735



7. Error/Jam/Alarm E110-1110-05



Scanner Motor FG unlock error



Detection Description Remedy



E110-1111-05



Locked state was not detected within the specified period of time at start-up. [Related parts] - Harness between the DC Controller PCB (UN01/J472) and the Laser Driver PCB (PCB35/J9912) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, LASER) - Harness between the DC Controller PCB (UN01/J471) and the Laser Driver PCB (PCB35/J2169) - Harnesses from the DC Controller PCB to the BD PCB and the Polygon Motor 1. DC Controller PCB (J472) to Relay Connector (9P) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, LASER) 2. Relay Connector (9P) to Relay Connector (9P) 3. Relay Connector (9P) to BD PCB (J2160) and Polygon Motor (J2159) - Scanner Unit (Unit of replacement: LASER SCANNER UNIT) - Laser Driver PCB (Unit of replacement: READER CONTROLLER PCB ASSEMBLY) - DC Controller PCB (Unit of replacement: DC CONTROLLER PCB ASS'Y) [Remedy] Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared. 1. Check that all covers (Front Cover, etc.) that can be opened and closed are closed. 2. Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts. [Reference] Before replacing the DC Controller PCB, back up the service mode data (approx. 2 min) and restore the backup data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected. - Backup: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMBUP - Restoration: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMRES Scanner Motor FG unlock error



Detection Description Remedy



Locked state was not detected within the specified period of time at start-up. [Related parts] - Harness between the DC Controller PCB (UN01/J472) and the Laser Driver PCB (PCB35/J9912) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, LASER) - Harness between the DC Controller PCB (UN01/J471) and the Laser Driver PCB (PCB35/J2169) - Harnesses from the DC Controller PCB to the BD PCB and the Polygon Motor 1. DC Controller PCB (J472) to Relay Connector (9P) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, LASER) 2. Relay Connector (9P) to Relay Connector (9P) 3. Relay Connector (9P) to BD PCB (J2160) and Polygon Motor (J2159) - Scanner Unit (Unit of replacement: LASER SCANNER UNIT) - Laser Driver PCB (Unit of replacement: READER CONTROLLER PCB ASSEMBLY) - DC Controller PCB (Unit of replacement: DC CONTROLLER PCB ASS'Y) [Remedy] Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared. 1. Check that all covers (Front Cover, etc.) that can be opened and closed are closed. 2. Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts. [Reference] Before replacing the DC Controller PCB, back up the service mode data (approx. 2 min) and restore the backup data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected. - Backup: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMBUP - Restoration: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMRES



736



7. Error/Jam/Alarm E110-1112-05



Scanner Motor FG unlock error



Detection Description Remedy



E110-1114-05



Locked state was not detected within the specified period of time at start-up. [Related parts] - Harness between the DC Controller PCB (UN01/J472) and the Laser Driver PCB (PCB35/J9912) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, LASER) - Harness between the DC Controller PCB (UN01/J471) and the Laser Driver PCB (PCB35/J2169) - Harnesses from the DC Controller PCB to the BD PCB and the Polygon Motor 1. DC Controller PCB (J472) to Relay Connector (9P) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, LASER) 2. Relay Connector (9P) to Relay Connector (9P) 3. Relay Connector (9P) to BD PCB (J2160) and Polygon Motor (J2159) - Scanner Unit (Unit of replacement: LASER SCANNER UNIT) - Laser Driver PCB (Unit of replacement: READER CONTROLLER PCB ASSEMBLY) - DC Controller PCB (Unit of replacement: DC CONTROLLER PCB ASS'Y) [Remedy] Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared. 1. Check that all covers (Front Cover, etc.) that can be opened and closed are closed. 2. Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts. [Reference] Before replacing the DC Controller PCB, back up the service mode data (approx. 2 min) and restore the backup data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected. - Backup: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMBUP - Restoration: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMRES Scanner Motor FG unlock error



Detection Description Remedy



Locked state was not detected within the specified period of time at start-up. [Related parts] - Harness between the DC Controller PCB (UN01/J472) and the Laser Driver PCB (PCB35/J9912) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, LASER) - Harness between the DC Controller PCB (UN01/J471) and the Laser Driver PCB (PCB35/J2169) - Harnesses from the DC Controller PCB to the BD PCB and the Polygon Motor 1. DC Controller PCB (J472) to Relay Connector (9P) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, LASER) 2. Relay Connector (9P) to Relay Connector (9P) 3. Relay Connector (9P) to BD PCB (J2160) and Polygon Motor (J2159) - Scanner Unit (Unit of replacement: LASER SCANNER UNIT) - Laser Driver PCB (Unit of replacement: READER CONTROLLER PCB ASSEMBLY) - DC Controller PCB (Unit of replacement: DC CONTROLLER PCB ASS'Y) [Remedy] Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared. 1. Check that all covers (Front Cover, etc.) that can be opened and closed are closed. 2. Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts. [Reference] Before replacing the DC Controller PCB, back up the service mode data (approx. 2 min) and restore the backup data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected. - Backup: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMBUP - Restoration: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMRES



737



7. Error/Jam/Alarm E110-1115-05



Scanner Motor FG unlock error



Detection Description Remedy



E110-1117-05



Locked state was not detected within the specified period of time at start-up. [Related parts] - Harness between the DC Controller PCB (UN01/J472) and the Laser Driver PCB (PCB35/J9912) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, LASER) - Harness between the DC Controller PCB (UN01/J471) and the Laser Driver PCB (PCB35/J2169) - Harnesses from the DC Controller PCB to the BD PCB and the Polygon Motor 1. DC Controller PCB (J472) to Relay Connector (9P) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, LASER) 2. Relay Connector (9P) to Relay Connector (9P) 3. Relay Connector (9P) to BD PCB (J2160) and Polygon Motor (J2159) - Scanner Unit (Unit of replacement: LASER SCANNER UNIT) - Laser Driver PCB (Unit of replacement: READER CONTROLLER PCB ASSEMBLY) - DC Controller PCB (Unit of replacement: DC CONTROLLER PCB ASS'Y) [Remedy] Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared. 1. Check that all covers (Front Cover, etc.) that can be opened and closed are closed. 2. Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts. [Reference] Before replacing the DC Controller PCB, back up the service mode data (approx. 2 min) and restore the backup data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected. - Backup: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMBUP - Restoration: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMRES Scanner Motor FG unlock error



Detection Description Remedy



Locked state was not detected within the specified period of time at start-up. [Related parts] - Harness between the DC Controller PCB (UN01/J472) and the Laser Driver PCB (PCB35/J9912) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, LASER) - Harness between the DC Controller PCB (UN01/J471) and the Laser Driver PCB (PCB35/J2169) - Harnesses from the DC Controller PCB to the BD PCB and the Polygon Motor 1. DC Controller PCB (J472) to Relay Connector (9P) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, LASER) 2. Relay Connector (9P) to Relay Connector (9P) 3. Relay Connector (9P) to BD PCB (J2160) and Polygon Motor (J2159) - Scanner Unit (Unit of replacement: LASER SCANNER UNIT) - Laser Driver PCB (Unit of replacement: READER CONTROLLER PCB ASSEMBLY) - DC Controller PCB (Unit of replacement: DC CONTROLLER PCB ASS'Y) [Remedy] Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared. 1. Check that all covers (Front Cover, etc.) that can be opened and closed are closed. 2. Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts. [Reference] Before replacing the DC Controller PCB, back up the service mode data (approx. 2 min) and restore the backup data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected. - Backup: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMBUP - Restoration: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMRES



738



7. Error/Jam/Alarm E110-111F-05



Scanner Motor FG unlock error



Detection Description Remedy



E110-1120-05



Locked state was not detected within the specified period of time at start-up. [Related parts] - Harness between the DC Controller PCB (UN01/J472) and the Laser Driver PCB (PCB35/J9912) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, LASER) - Harness between the DC Controller PCB (UN01/J471) and the Laser Driver PCB (PCB35/J2169) - Harnesses from the DC Controller PCB to the BD PCB and the Polygon Motor 1. DC Controller PCB (J472) to Relay Connector (9P) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, LASER) 2. Relay Connector (9P) to Relay Connector (9P) 3. Relay Connector (9P) to BD PCB (J2160) and Polygon Motor (J2159) - Scanner Unit (Unit of replacement: LASER SCANNER UNIT) - Laser Driver PCB (Unit of replacement: READER CONTROLLER PCB ASSEMBLY) - DC Controller PCB (Unit of replacement: DC CONTROLLER PCB ASS'Y) [Remedy] Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared. 1. Check that all covers (Front Cover, etc.) that can be opened and closed are closed. 2. Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts. [Reference] Before replacing the DC Controller PCB, back up the service mode data (approx. 2 min) and restore the backup data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected. - Backup: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMBUP - Restoration: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMRES Scanner Motor FG unlock error



Detection Description Remedy



Locked state was not detected within the specified period of time at start-up. [Related parts] - Harness between the DC Controller PCB (UN01/J472) and the Laser Driver PCB (PCB35/J9912) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, LASER) - Harness between the DC Controller PCB (UN01/J471) and the Laser Driver PCB (PCB35/J2169) - Harnesses from the DC Controller PCB to the BD PCB and the Polygon Motor 1. DC Controller PCB (J472) to Relay Connector (9P) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, LASER) 2. Relay Connector (9P) to Relay Connector (9P) 3. Relay Connector (9P) to BD PCB (J2160) and Polygon Motor (J2159) - Scanner Unit (Unit of replacement: LASER SCANNER UNIT) - Laser Driver PCB (Unit of replacement: READER CONTROLLER PCB ASSEMBLY) - DC Controller PCB (Unit of replacement: DC CONTROLLER PCB ASS'Y) [Remedy] Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared. 1. Check that all covers (Front Cover, etc.) that can be opened and closed are closed. 2. Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts. [Reference] Before replacing the DC Controller PCB, back up the service mode data (approx. 2 min) and restore the backup data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected. - Backup: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMBUP - Restoration: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMRES



739



7. Error/Jam/Alarm E110-1121-05



Scanner Motor FG unlock error



Detection Description Remedy



E110-1124-05



Locked state was not detected within the specified period of time at start-up. [Related parts] - Harness between the DC Controller PCB (UN01/J472) and the Laser Driver PCB (PCB35/J9912) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, LASER) - Harness between the DC Controller PCB (UN01/J471) and the Laser Driver PCB (PCB35/J2169) - Harnesses from the DC Controller PCB to the BD PCB and the Polygon Motor 1. DC Controller PCB (J472) to Relay Connector (9P) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, LASER) 2. Relay Connector (9P) to Relay Connector (9P) 3. Relay Connector (9P) to BD PCB (J2160) and Polygon Motor (J2159) - Scanner Unit (Unit of replacement: LASER SCANNER UNIT) - Laser Driver PCB (Unit of replacement: READER CONTROLLER PCB ASSEMBLY) - DC Controller PCB (Unit of replacement: DC CONTROLLER PCB ASS'Y) [Remedy] Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared. 1. Check that all covers (Front Cover, etc.) that can be opened and closed are closed. 2. Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts. [Reference] Before replacing the DC Controller PCB, back up the service mode data (approx. 2 min) and restore the backup data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected. - Backup: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMBUP - Restoration: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMRES Scanner Motor FG unlock error



Detection Description Remedy



Locked state was not detected within the specified period of time at start-up. [Related parts] - Harness between the DC Controller PCB (UN01/J472) and the Laser Driver PCB (PCB35/J9912) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, LASER) - Harness between the DC Controller PCB (UN01/J471) and the Laser Driver PCB (PCB35/J2169) - Harnesses from the DC Controller PCB to the BD PCB and the Polygon Motor 1. DC Controller PCB (J472) to Relay Connector (9P) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, LASER) 2. Relay Connector (9P) to Relay Connector (9P) 3. Relay Connector (9P) to BD PCB (J2160) and Polygon Motor (J2159) - Scanner Unit (Unit of replacement: LASER SCANNER UNIT) - Laser Driver PCB (Unit of replacement: READER CONTROLLER PCB ASSEMBLY) - DC Controller PCB (Unit of replacement: DC CONTROLLER PCB ASS'Y) [Remedy] Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared. 1. Check that all covers (Front Cover, etc.) that can be opened and closed are closed. 2. Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts. [Reference] Before replacing the DC Controller PCB, back up the service mode data (approx. 2 min) and restore the backup data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected. - Backup: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMBUP - Restoration: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMRES



740



7. Error/Jam/Alarm E110-1125-05



Scanner Motor FG unlock error



Detection Description Remedy



E110-1127-05



Locked state was not detected within the specified period of time at start-up. [Related parts] - Harness between the DC Controller PCB (UN01/J472) and the Laser Driver PCB (PCB35/J9912) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, LASER) - Harness between the DC Controller PCB (UN01/J471) and the Laser Driver PCB (PCB35/J2169) - Harnesses from the DC Controller PCB to the BD PCB and the Polygon Motor 1. DC Controller PCB (J472) to Relay Connector (9P) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, LASER) 2. Relay Connector (9P) to Relay Connector (9P) 3. Relay Connector (9P) to BD PCB (J2160) and Polygon Motor (J2159) - Scanner Unit (Unit of replacement: LASER SCANNER UNIT) - Laser Driver PCB (Unit of replacement: READER CONTROLLER PCB ASSEMBLY) - DC Controller PCB (Unit of replacement: DC CONTROLLER PCB ASS'Y) [Remedy] Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared. 1. Check that all covers (Front Cover, etc.) that can be opened and closed are closed. 2. Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts. [Reference] Before replacing the DC Controller PCB, back up the service mode data (approx. 2 min) and restore the backup data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected. - Backup: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMBUP - Restoration: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMRES Scanner Motor FG unlock error



Detection Description Remedy



Locked state was not detected within the specified period of time at start-up. [Related parts] - Harness between the DC Controller PCB (UN01/J472) and the Laser Driver PCB (PCB35/J9912) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, LASER) - Harness between the DC Controller PCB (UN01/J471) and the Laser Driver PCB (PCB35/J2169) - Harnesses from the DC Controller PCB to the BD PCB and the Polygon Motor 1. DC Controller PCB (J472) to Relay Connector (9P) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, LASER) 2. Relay Connector (9P) to Relay Connector (9P) 3. Relay Connector (9P) to BD PCB (J2160) and Polygon Motor (J2159) - Scanner Unit (Unit of replacement: LASER SCANNER UNIT) - Laser Driver PCB (Unit of replacement: READER CONTROLLER PCB ASSEMBLY) - DC Controller PCB (Unit of replacement: DC CONTROLLER PCB ASS'Y) [Remedy] Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared. 1. Check that all covers (Front Cover, etc.) that can be opened and closed are closed. 2. Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts. [Reference] Before replacing the DC Controller PCB, back up the service mode data (approx. 2 min) and restore the backup data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected. - Backup: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMBUP - Restoration: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMRES



741



7. Error/Jam/Alarm E110-112F-05



Scanner Motor FG unlock error



Detection Description Remedy



E110-1130-05



Locked state was not detected within the specified period of time at start-up. [Related parts] - Harness between the DC Controller PCB (UN01/J472) and the Laser Driver PCB (PCB35/J9912) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, LASER) - Harness between the DC Controller PCB (UN01/J471) and the Laser Driver PCB (PCB35/J2169) - Harnesses from the DC Controller PCB to the BD PCB and the Polygon Motor 1. DC Controller PCB (J472) to Relay Connector (9P) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, LASER) 2. Relay Connector (9P) to Relay Connector (9P) 3. Relay Connector (9P) to BD PCB (J2160) and Polygon Motor (J2159) - Scanner Unit (Unit of replacement: LASER SCANNER UNIT) - Laser Driver PCB (Unit of replacement: READER CONTROLLER PCB ASSEMBLY) - DC Controller PCB (Unit of replacement: DC CONTROLLER PCB ASS'Y) [Remedy] Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared. 1. Check that all covers (Front Cover, etc.) that can be opened and closed are closed. 2. Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts. [Reference] Before replacing the DC Controller PCB, back up the service mode data (approx. 2 min) and restore the backup data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected. - Backup: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMBUP - Restoration: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMRES Scanner Motor FG unlock error



Detection Description Remedy



Locked state was not detected within the specified period of time at start-up. [Related parts] - Harness between the DC Controller PCB (UN01/J472) and the Laser Driver PCB (PCB35/J9912) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, LASER) - Harness between the DC Controller PCB (UN01/J471) and the Laser Driver PCB (PCB35/J2169) - Harnesses from the DC Controller PCB to the BD PCB and the Polygon Motor 1. DC Controller PCB (J472) to Relay Connector (9P) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, LASER) 2. Relay Connector (9P) to Relay Connector (9P) 3. Relay Connector (9P) to BD PCB (J2160) and Polygon Motor (J2159) - Scanner Unit (Unit of replacement: LASER SCANNER UNIT) - Laser Driver PCB (Unit of replacement: READER CONTROLLER PCB ASSEMBLY) - DC Controller PCB (Unit of replacement: DC CONTROLLER PCB ASS'Y) [Remedy] Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared. 1. Check that all covers (Front Cover, etc.) that can be opened and closed are closed. 2. Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts. [Reference] Before replacing the DC Controller PCB, back up the service mode data (approx. 2 min) and restore the backup data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected. - Backup: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMBUP - Restoration: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMRES



742



7. Error/Jam/Alarm E110-1131-05



Scanner Motor FG unlock error



Detection Description Remedy



E110-1132-05



Locked state was not detected within the specified period of time at start-up. [Related parts] - Harness between the DC Controller PCB (UN01/J472) and the Laser Driver PCB (PCB35/J9912) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, LASER) - Harness between the DC Controller PCB (UN01/J471) and the Laser Driver PCB (PCB35/J2169) - Harnesses from the DC Controller PCB to the BD PCB and the Polygon Motor 1. DC Controller PCB (J472) to Relay Connector (9P) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, LASER) 2. Relay Connector (9P) to Relay Connector (9P) 3. Relay Connector (9P) to BD PCB (J2160) and Polygon Motor (J2159) - Scanner Unit (Unit of replacement: LASER SCANNER UNIT) - Laser Driver PCB (Unit of replacement: READER CONTROLLER PCB ASSEMBLY) - DC Controller PCB (Unit of replacement: DC CONTROLLER PCB ASS'Y) [Remedy] Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared. 1. Check that all covers (Front Cover, etc.) that can be opened and closed are closed. 2. Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts. [Reference] Before replacing the DC Controller PCB, back up the service mode data (approx. 2 min) and restore the backup data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected. - Backup: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMBUP - Restoration: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMRES Scanner Motor FG unlock error



Detection Description Remedy



Locked state was not detected within the specified period of time at start-up. [Related parts] - Harness between the DC Controller PCB (UN01/J472) and the Laser Driver PCB (PCB35/J9912) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, LASER) - Harness between the DC Controller PCB (UN01/J471) and the Laser Driver PCB (PCB35/J2169) - Harnesses from the DC Controller PCB to the BD PCB and the Polygon Motor 1. DC Controller PCB (J472) to Relay Connector (9P) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, LASER) 2. Relay Connector (9P) to Relay Connector (9P) 3. Relay Connector (9P) to BD PCB (J2160) and Polygon Motor (J2159) - Scanner Unit (Unit of replacement: LASER SCANNER UNIT) - Laser Driver PCB (Unit of replacement: READER CONTROLLER PCB ASSEMBLY) - DC Controller PCB (Unit of replacement: DC CONTROLLER PCB ASS'Y) [Remedy] Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared. 1. Check that all covers (Front Cover, etc.) that can be opened and closed are closed. 2. Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts. [Reference] Before replacing the DC Controller PCB, back up the service mode data (approx. 2 min) and restore the backup data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected. - Backup: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMBUP - Restoration: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMRES



743



7. Error/Jam/Alarm E110-1134-05



Scanner Motor FG unlock error



Detection Description Remedy



E110-1135-05



Locked state was not detected within the specified period of time at start-up. [Related parts] - Harness between the DC Controller PCB (UN01/J472) and the Laser Driver PCB (PCB35/J9912) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, LASER) - Harness between the DC Controller PCB (UN01/J471) and the Laser Driver PCB (PCB35/J2169) - Harnesses from the DC Controller PCB to the BD PCB and the Polygon Motor 1. DC Controller PCB (J472) to Relay Connector (9P) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, LASER) 2. Relay Connector (9P) to Relay Connector (9P) 3. Relay Connector (9P) to BD PCB (J2160) and Polygon Motor (J2159) - Scanner Unit (Unit of replacement: LASER SCANNER UNIT) - Laser Driver PCB (Unit of replacement: READER CONTROLLER PCB ASSEMBLY) - DC Controller PCB (Unit of replacement: DC CONTROLLER PCB ASS'Y) [Remedy] Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared. 1. Check that all covers (Front Cover, etc.) that can be opened and closed are closed. 2. Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts. [Reference] Before replacing the DC Controller PCB, back up the service mode data (approx. 2 min) and restore the backup data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected. - Backup: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMBUP - Restoration: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMRES Scanner Motor FG unlock error



Detection Description Remedy



Locked state was not detected within the specified period of time at start-up. [Related parts] - Harness between the DC Controller PCB (UN01/J472) and the Laser Driver PCB (PCB35/J9912) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, LASER) - Harness between the DC Controller PCB (UN01/J471) and the Laser Driver PCB (PCB35/J2169) - Harnesses from the DC Controller PCB to the BD PCB and the Polygon Motor 1. DC Controller PCB (J472) to Relay Connector (9P) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, LASER) 2. Relay Connector (9P) to Relay Connector (9P) 3. Relay Connector (9P) to BD PCB (J2160) and Polygon Motor (J2159) - Scanner Unit (Unit of replacement: LASER SCANNER UNIT) - Laser Driver PCB (Unit of replacement: READER CONTROLLER PCB ASSEMBLY) - DC Controller PCB (Unit of replacement: DC CONTROLLER PCB ASS'Y) [Remedy] Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared. 1. Check that all covers (Front Cover, etc.) that can be opened and closed are closed. 2. Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts. [Reference] Before replacing the DC Controller PCB, back up the service mode data (approx. 2 min) and restore the backup data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected. - Backup: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMBUP - Restoration: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMRES



744



7. Error/Jam/Alarm E110-1137-05



Scanner Motor FG unlock error



Detection Description Remedy



E110-113F-05



Locked state was not detected within the specified period of time at start-up. [Related parts] - Harness between the DC Controller PCB (UN01/J472) and the Laser Driver PCB (PCB35/J9912) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, LASER) - Harness between the DC Controller PCB (UN01/J471) and the Laser Driver PCB (PCB35/J2169) - Harnesses from the DC Controller PCB to the BD PCB and the Polygon Motor 1. DC Controller PCB (J472) to Relay Connector (9P) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, LASER) 2. Relay Connector (9P) to Relay Connector (9P) 3. Relay Connector (9P) to BD PCB (J2160) and Polygon Motor (J2159) - Scanner Unit (Unit of replacement: LASER SCANNER UNIT) - Laser Driver PCB (Unit of replacement: READER CONTROLLER PCB ASSEMBLY) - DC Controller PCB (Unit of replacement: DC CONTROLLER PCB ASS'Y) [Remedy] Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared. 1. Check that all covers (Front Cover, etc.) that can be opened and closed are closed. 2. Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts. [Reference] Before replacing the DC Controller PCB, back up the service mode data (approx. 2 min) and restore the backup data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected. - Backup: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMBUP - Restoration: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMRES Scanner Motor FG unlock error



Detection Description Remedy



Locked state was not detected within the specified period of time at start-up. [Related parts] - Harness between the DC Controller PCB (UN01/J472) and the Laser Driver PCB (PCB35/J9912) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, LASER) - Harness between the DC Controller PCB (UN01/J471) and the Laser Driver PCB (PCB35/J2169) - Harnesses from the DC Controller PCB to the BD PCB and the Polygon Motor 1. DC Controller PCB (J472) to Relay Connector (9P) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, LASER) 2. Relay Connector (9P) to Relay Connector (9P) 3. Relay Connector (9P) to BD PCB (J2160) and Polygon Motor (J2159) - Scanner Unit (Unit of replacement: LASER SCANNER UNIT) - Laser Driver PCB (Unit of replacement: READER CONTROLLER PCB ASSEMBLY) - DC Controller PCB (Unit of replacement: DC CONTROLLER PCB ASS'Y) [Remedy] Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared. 1. Check that all covers (Front Cover, etc.) that can be opened and closed are closed. 2. Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts. [Reference] Before replacing the DC Controller PCB, back up the service mode data (approx. 2 min) and restore the backup data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected. - Backup: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMBUP - Restoration: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMRES



745



7. Error/Jam/Alarm E110-1140-05



Scanner Motor FG unlock error



Detection Description Remedy



E110-1141-05



Locked state was not detected within the specified period of time at start-up. [Related parts] - Harness between the DC Controller PCB (UN01/J472) and the Laser Driver PCB (PCB35/J9912) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, LASER) - Harness between the DC Controller PCB (UN01/J471) and the Laser Driver PCB (PCB35/J2169) - Harnesses from the DC Controller PCB to the BD PCB and the Polygon Motor 1. DC Controller PCB (J472) to Relay Connector (9P) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, LASER) 2. Relay Connector (9P) to Relay Connector (9P) 3. Relay Connector (9P) to BD PCB (J2160) and Polygon Motor (J2159) - Scanner Unit (Unit of replacement: LASER SCANNER UNIT) - Laser Driver PCB (Unit of replacement: READER CONTROLLER PCB ASSEMBLY) - DC Controller PCB (Unit of replacement: DC CONTROLLER PCB ASS'Y) [Remedy] Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared. 1. Check that all covers (Front Cover, etc.) that can be opened and closed are closed. 2. Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts. [Reference] Before replacing the DC Controller PCB, back up the service mode data (approx. 2 min) and restore the backup data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected. - Backup: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMBUP - Restoration: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMRES Scanner Motor FG unlock error



Detection Description Remedy



Locked state was not detected within the specified period of time at start-up. [Related parts] - Harness between the DC Controller PCB (UN01/J472) and the Laser Driver PCB (PCB35/J9912) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, LASER) - Harness between the DC Controller PCB (UN01/J471) and the Laser Driver PCB (PCB35/J2169) - Harnesses from the DC Controller PCB to the BD PCB and the Polygon Motor 1. DC Controller PCB (J472) to Relay Connector (9P) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, LASER) 2. Relay Connector (9P) to Relay Connector (9P) 3. Relay Connector (9P) to BD PCB (J2160) and Polygon Motor (J2159) - Scanner Unit (Unit of replacement: LASER SCANNER UNIT) - Laser Driver PCB (Unit of replacement: READER CONTROLLER PCB ASSEMBLY) - DC Controller PCB (Unit of replacement: DC CONTROLLER PCB ASS'Y) [Remedy] Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared. 1. Check that all covers (Front Cover, etc.) that can be opened and closed are closed. 2. Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts. [Reference] Before replacing the DC Controller PCB, back up the service mode data (approx. 2 min) and restore the backup data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected. - Backup: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMBUP - Restoration: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMRES



746



7. Error/Jam/Alarm E110-1142-05



Scanner Motor FG unlock error



Detection Description Remedy



E110-1144-05



Locked state was not detected within the specified period of time at start-up. [Related parts] - Harness between the DC Controller PCB (UN01/J472) and the Laser Driver PCB (PCB35/J9912) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, LASER) - Harness between the DC Controller PCB (UN01/J471) and the Laser Driver PCB (PCB35/J2169) - Harnesses from the DC Controller PCB to the BD PCB and the Polygon Motor 1. DC Controller PCB (J472) to Relay Connector (9P) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, LASER) 2. Relay Connector (9P) to Relay Connector (9P) 3. Relay Connector (9P) to BD PCB (J2160) and Polygon Motor (J2159) - Scanner Unit (Unit of replacement: LASER SCANNER UNIT) - Laser Driver PCB (Unit of replacement: READER CONTROLLER PCB ASSEMBLY) - DC Controller PCB (Unit of replacement: DC CONTROLLER PCB ASS'Y) [Remedy] Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared. 1. Check that all covers (Front Cover, etc.) that can be opened and closed are closed. 2. Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts. [Reference] Before replacing the DC Controller PCB, back up the service mode data (approx. 2 min) and restore the backup data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected. - Backup: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMBUP - Restoration: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMRES Scanner Motor FG unlock error



Detection Description Remedy



Locked state was not detected within the specified period of time at start-up. [Related parts] - Harness between the DC Controller PCB (UN01/J472) and the Laser Driver PCB (PCB35/J9912) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, LASER) - Harness between the DC Controller PCB (UN01/J471) and the Laser Driver PCB (PCB35/J2169) - Harnesses from the DC Controller PCB to the BD PCB and the Polygon Motor 1. DC Controller PCB (J472) to Relay Connector (9P) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, LASER) 2. Relay Connector (9P) to Relay Connector (9P) 3. Relay Connector (9P) to BD PCB (J2160) and Polygon Motor (J2159) - Scanner Unit (Unit of replacement: LASER SCANNER UNIT) - Laser Driver PCB (Unit of replacement: READER CONTROLLER PCB ASSEMBLY) - DC Controller PCB (Unit of replacement: DC CONTROLLER PCB ASS'Y) [Remedy] Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared. 1. Check that all covers (Front Cover, etc.) that can be opened and closed are closed. 2. Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts. [Reference] Before replacing the DC Controller PCB, back up the service mode data (approx. 2 min) and restore the backup data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected. - Backup: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMBUP - Restoration: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMRES



747



7. Error/Jam/Alarm E110-1145-05



Scanner Motor FG unlock error



Detection Description Remedy



E110-1147-05



Locked state was not detected within the specified period of time at start-up. [Related parts] - Harness between the DC Controller PCB (UN01/J472) and the Laser Driver PCB (PCB35/J9912) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, LASER) - Harness between the DC Controller PCB (UN01/J471) and the Laser Driver PCB (PCB35/J2169) - Harnesses from the DC Controller PCB to the BD PCB and the Polygon Motor 1. DC Controller PCB (J472) to Relay Connector (9P) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, LASER) 2. Relay Connector (9P) to Relay Connector (9P) 3. Relay Connector (9P) to BD PCB (J2160) and Polygon Motor (J2159) - Scanner Unit (Unit of replacement: LASER SCANNER UNIT) - Laser Driver PCB (Unit of replacement: READER CONTROLLER PCB ASSEMBLY) - DC Controller PCB (Unit of replacement: DC CONTROLLER PCB ASS'Y) [Remedy] Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared. 1. Check that all covers (Front Cover, etc.) that can be opened and closed are closed. 2. Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts. [Reference] Before replacing the DC Controller PCB, back up the service mode data (approx. 2 min) and restore the backup data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected. - Backup: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMBUP - Restoration: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMRES Scanner Motor FG unlock error



Detection Description Remedy



Locked state was not detected within the specified period of time at start-up. [Related parts] - Harness between the DC Controller PCB (UN01/J472) and the Laser Driver PCB (PCB35/J9912) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, LASER) - Harness between the DC Controller PCB (UN01/J471) and the Laser Driver PCB (PCB35/J2169) - Harnesses from the DC Controller PCB to the BD PCB and the Polygon Motor 1. DC Controller PCB (J472) to Relay Connector (9P) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, LASER) 2. Relay Connector (9P) to Relay Connector (9P) 3. Relay Connector (9P) to BD PCB (J2160) and Polygon Motor (J2159) - Scanner Unit (Unit of replacement: LASER SCANNER UNIT) - Laser Driver PCB (Unit of replacement: READER CONTROLLER PCB ASSEMBLY) - DC Controller PCB (Unit of replacement: DC CONTROLLER PCB ASS'Y) [Remedy] Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared. 1. Check that all covers (Front Cover, etc.) that can be opened and closed are closed. 2. Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts. [Reference] Before replacing the DC Controller PCB, back up the service mode data (approx. 2 min) and restore the backup data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected. - Backup: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMBUP - Restoration: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMRES



748



7. Error/Jam/Alarm E110-114F-05



Scanner Motor FG unlock error



Detection Description Remedy



E110-1150-05



Locked state was not detected within the specified period of time at start-up. [Related parts] - Harness between the DC Controller PCB (UN01/J472) and the Laser Driver PCB (PCB35/J9912) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, LASER) - Harness between the DC Controller PCB (UN01/J471) and the Laser Driver PCB (PCB35/J2169) - Harnesses from the DC Controller PCB to the BD PCB and the Polygon Motor 1. DC Controller PCB (J472) to Relay Connector (9P) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, LASER) 2. Relay Connector (9P) to Relay Connector (9P) 3. Relay Connector (9P) to BD PCB (J2160) and Polygon Motor (J2159) - Scanner Unit (Unit of replacement: LASER SCANNER UNIT) - Laser Driver PCB (Unit of replacement: READER CONTROLLER PCB ASSEMBLY) - DC Controller PCB (Unit of replacement: DC CONTROLLER PCB ASS'Y) [Remedy] Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared. 1. Check that all covers (Front Cover, etc.) that can be opened and closed are closed. 2. Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts. [Reference] Before replacing the DC Controller PCB, back up the service mode data (approx. 2 min) and restore the backup data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected. - Backup: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMBUP - Restoration: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMRES Scanner Motor FG unlock error



Detection Description Remedy



Locked state was not detected within the specified period of time at start-up. [Related parts] - Harness between the DC Controller PCB (UN01/J472) and the Laser Driver PCB (PCB35/J9912) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, LASER) - Harness between the DC Controller PCB (UN01/J471) and the Laser Driver PCB (PCB35/J2169) - Harnesses from the DC Controller PCB to the BD PCB and the Polygon Motor 1. DC Controller PCB (J472) to Relay Connector (9P) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, LASER) 2. Relay Connector (9P) to Relay Connector (9P) 3. Relay Connector (9P) to BD PCB (J2160) and Polygon Motor (J2159) - Scanner Unit (Unit of replacement: LASER SCANNER UNIT) - Laser Driver PCB (Unit of replacement: READER CONTROLLER PCB ASSEMBLY) - DC Controller PCB (Unit of replacement: DC CONTROLLER PCB ASS'Y) [Remedy] Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared. 1. Check that all covers (Front Cover, etc.) that can be opened and closed are closed. 2. Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts. [Reference] Before replacing the DC Controller PCB, back up the service mode data (approx. 2 min) and restore the backup data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected. - Backup: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMBUP - Restoration: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMRES



749



7. Error/Jam/Alarm E110-1151-05



Scanner Motor FG unlock error



Detection Description Remedy



E110-1152-05



Locked state was not detected within the specified period of time at start-up. [Related parts] - Harness between the DC Controller PCB (UN01/J472) and the Laser Driver PCB (PCB35/J9912) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, LASER) - Harness between the DC Controller PCB (UN01/J471) and the Laser Driver PCB (PCB35/J2169) - Harnesses from the DC Controller PCB to the BD PCB and the Polygon Motor 1. DC Controller PCB (J472) to Relay Connector (9P) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, LASER) 2. Relay Connector (9P) to Relay Connector (9P) 3. Relay Connector (9P) to BD PCB (J2160) and Polygon Motor (J2159) - Scanner Unit (Unit of replacement: LASER SCANNER UNIT) - Laser Driver PCB (Unit of replacement: READER CONTROLLER PCB ASSEMBLY) - DC Controller PCB (Unit of replacement: DC CONTROLLER PCB ASS'Y) [Remedy] Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared. 1. Check that all covers (Front Cover, etc.) that can be opened and closed are closed. 2. Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts. [Reference] Before replacing the DC Controller PCB, back up the service mode data (approx. 2 min) and restore the backup data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected. - Backup: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMBUP - Restoration: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMRES Scanner Motor FG unlock error



Detection Description Remedy



Locked state was not detected within the specified period of time at start-up. [Related parts] - Harness between the DC Controller PCB (UN01/J472) and the Laser Driver PCB (PCB35/J9912) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, LASER) - Harness between the DC Controller PCB (UN01/J471) and the Laser Driver PCB (PCB35/J2169) - Harnesses from the DC Controller PCB to the BD PCB and the Polygon Motor 1. DC Controller PCB (J472) to Relay Connector (9P) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, LASER) 2. Relay Connector (9P) to Relay Connector (9P) 3. Relay Connector (9P) to BD PCB (J2160) and Polygon Motor (J2159) - Scanner Unit (Unit of replacement: LASER SCANNER UNIT) - Laser Driver PCB (Unit of replacement: READER CONTROLLER PCB ASSEMBLY) - DC Controller PCB (Unit of replacement: DC CONTROLLER PCB ASS'Y) [Remedy] Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared. 1. Check that all covers (Front Cover, etc.) that can be opened and closed are closed. 2. Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts. [Reference] Before replacing the DC Controller PCB, back up the service mode data (approx. 2 min) and restore the backup data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected. - Backup: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMBUP - Restoration: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMRES



750



7. Error/Jam/Alarm E110-1154-05



Scanner Motor FG unlock error



Detection Description Remedy



E110-1155-05



Locked state was not detected within the specified period of time at start-up. [Related parts] - Harness between the DC Controller PCB (UN01/J472) and the Laser Driver PCB (PCB35/J9912) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, LASER) - Harness between the DC Controller PCB (UN01/J471) and the Laser Driver PCB (PCB35/J2169) - Harnesses from the DC Controller PCB to the BD PCB and the Polygon Motor 1. DC Controller PCB (J472) to Relay Connector (9P) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, LASER) 2. Relay Connector (9P) to Relay Connector (9P) 3. Relay Connector (9P) to BD PCB (J2160) and Polygon Motor (J2159) - Scanner Unit (Unit of replacement: LASER SCANNER UNIT) - Laser Driver PCB (Unit of replacement: READER CONTROLLER PCB ASSEMBLY) - DC Controller PCB (Unit of replacement: DC CONTROLLER PCB ASS'Y) [Remedy] Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared. 1. Check that all covers (Front Cover, etc.) that can be opened and closed are closed. 2. Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts. [Reference] Before replacing the DC Controller PCB, back up the service mode data (approx. 2 min) and restore the backup data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected. - Backup: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMBUP - Restoration: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMRES Scanner Motor FG unlock error



Detection Description Remedy



Locked state was not detected within the specified period of time at start-up. [Related parts] - Harness between the DC Controller PCB (UN01/J472) and the Laser Driver PCB (PCB35/J9912) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, LASER) - Harness between the DC Controller PCB (UN01/J471) and the Laser Driver PCB (PCB35/J2169) - Harnesses from the DC Controller PCB to the BD PCB and the Polygon Motor 1. DC Controller PCB (J472) to Relay Connector (9P) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, LASER) 2. Relay Connector (9P) to Relay Connector (9P) 3. Relay Connector (9P) to BD PCB (J2160) and Polygon Motor (J2159) - Scanner Unit (Unit of replacement: LASER SCANNER UNIT) - Laser Driver PCB (Unit of replacement: READER CONTROLLER PCB ASSEMBLY) - DC Controller PCB (Unit of replacement: DC CONTROLLER PCB ASS'Y) [Remedy] Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared. 1. Check that all covers (Front Cover, etc.) that can be opened and closed are closed. 2. Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts. [Reference] Before replacing the DC Controller PCB, back up the service mode data (approx. 2 min) and restore the backup data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected. - Backup: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMBUP - Restoration: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMRES



751



7. Error/Jam/Alarm E110-1157-05



Scanner Motor FG unlock error



Detection Description Remedy



E110-115F-05



Locked state was not detected within the specified period of time at start-up. [Related parts] - Harness between the DC Controller PCB (UN01/J472) and the Laser Driver PCB (PCB35/J9912) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, LASER) - Harness between the DC Controller PCB (UN01/J471) and the Laser Driver PCB (PCB35/J2169) - Harnesses from the DC Controller PCB to the BD PCB and the Polygon Motor 1. DC Controller PCB (J472) to Relay Connector (9P) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, LASER) 2. Relay Connector (9P) to Relay Connector (9P) 3. Relay Connector (9P) to BD PCB (J2160) and Polygon Motor (J2159) - Scanner Unit (Unit of replacement: LASER SCANNER UNIT) - Laser Driver PCB (Unit of replacement: READER CONTROLLER PCB ASSEMBLY) - DC Controller PCB (Unit of replacement: DC CONTROLLER PCB ASS'Y) [Remedy] Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared. 1. Check that all covers (Front Cover, etc.) that can be opened and closed are closed. 2. Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts. [Reference] Before replacing the DC Controller PCB, back up the service mode data (approx. 2 min) and restore the backup data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected. - Backup: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMBUP - Restoration: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMRES Scanner Motor FG unlock error



Detection Description Remedy



Locked state was not detected within the specified period of time at start-up. [Related parts] - Harness between the DC Controller PCB (UN01/J472) and the Laser Driver PCB (PCB35/J9912) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, LASER) - Harness between the DC Controller PCB (UN01/J471) and the Laser Driver PCB (PCB35/J2169) - Harnesses from the DC Controller PCB to the BD PCB and the Polygon Motor 1. DC Controller PCB (J472) to Relay Connector (9P) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, LASER) 2. Relay Connector (9P) to Relay Connector (9P) 3. Relay Connector (9P) to BD PCB (J2160) and Polygon Motor (J2159) - Scanner Unit (Unit of replacement: LASER SCANNER UNIT) - Laser Driver PCB (Unit of replacement: READER CONTROLLER PCB ASSEMBLY) - DC Controller PCB (Unit of replacement: DC CONTROLLER PCB ASS'Y) [Remedy] Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared. 1. Check that all covers (Front Cover, etc.) that can be opened and closed are closed. 2. Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts. [Reference] Before replacing the DC Controller PCB, back up the service mode data (approx. 2 min) and restore the backup data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected. - Backup: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMBUP - Restoration: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMRES



752



7. Error/Jam/Alarm E110-1160-05



Scanner Motor FG unlock error



Detection Description Remedy



E110-1161-05



Locked state was not detected within the specified period of time at start-up. [Related parts] - Harness between the DC Controller PCB (UN01/J472) and the Laser Driver PCB (PCB35/J9912) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, LASER) - Harness between the DC Controller PCB (UN01/J471) and the Laser Driver PCB (PCB35/J2169) - Harnesses from the DC Controller PCB to the BD PCB and the Polygon Motor 1. DC Controller PCB (J472) to Relay Connector (9P) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, LASER) 2. Relay Connector (9P) to Relay Connector (9P) 3. Relay Connector (9P) to BD PCB (J2160) and Polygon Motor (J2159) - Scanner Unit (Unit of replacement: LASER SCANNER UNIT) - Laser Driver PCB (Unit of replacement: READER CONTROLLER PCB ASSEMBLY) - DC Controller PCB (Unit of replacement: DC CONTROLLER PCB ASS'Y) [Remedy] Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared. 1. Check that all covers (Front Cover, etc.) that can be opened and closed are closed. 2. Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts. [Reference] Before replacing the DC Controller PCB, back up the service mode data (approx. 2 min) and restore the backup data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected. - Backup: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMBUP - Restoration: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMRES Scanner Motor FG unlock error



Detection Description Remedy



Locked state was not detected within the specified period of time at start-up. [Related parts] - Harness between the DC Controller PCB (UN01/J472) and the Laser Driver PCB (PCB35/J9912) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, LASER) - Harness between the DC Controller PCB (UN01/J471) and the Laser Driver PCB (PCB35/J2169) - Harnesses from the DC Controller PCB to the BD PCB and the Polygon Motor 1. DC Controller PCB (J472) to Relay Connector (9P) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, LASER) 2. Relay Connector (9P) to Relay Connector (9P) 3. Relay Connector (9P) to BD PCB (J2160) and Polygon Motor (J2159) - Scanner Unit (Unit of replacement: LASER SCANNER UNIT) - Laser Driver PCB (Unit of replacement: READER CONTROLLER PCB ASSEMBLY) - DC Controller PCB (Unit of replacement: DC CONTROLLER PCB ASS'Y) [Remedy] Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared. 1. Check that all covers (Front Cover, etc.) that can be opened and closed are closed. 2. Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts. [Reference] Before replacing the DC Controller PCB, back up the service mode data (approx. 2 min) and restore the backup data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected. - Backup: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMBUP - Restoration: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMRES



753



7. Error/Jam/Alarm E110-1162-05



Scanner Motor FG unlock error



Detection Description Remedy



E110-1164-05



Locked state was not detected within the specified period of time at start-up. [Related parts] - Harness between the DC Controller PCB (UN01/J472) and the Laser Driver PCB (PCB35/J9912) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, LASER) - Harness between the DC Controller PCB (UN01/J471) and the Laser Driver PCB (PCB35/J2169) - Harnesses from the DC Controller PCB to the BD PCB and the Polygon Motor 1. DC Controller PCB (J472) to Relay Connector (9P) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, LASER) 2. Relay Connector (9P) to Relay Connector (9P) 3. Relay Connector (9P) to BD PCB (J2160) and Polygon Motor (J2159) - Scanner Unit (Unit of replacement: LASER SCANNER UNIT) - Laser Driver PCB (Unit of replacement: READER CONTROLLER PCB ASSEMBLY) - DC Controller PCB (Unit of replacement: DC CONTROLLER PCB ASS'Y) [Remedy] Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared. 1. Check that all covers (Front Cover, etc.) that can be opened and closed are closed. 2. Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts. [Reference] Before replacing the DC Controller PCB, back up the service mode data (approx. 2 min) and restore the backup data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected. - Backup: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMBUP - Restoration: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMRES Scanner Motor FG unlock error



Detection Description Remedy



Locked state was not detected within the specified period of time at start-up. [Related parts] - Harness between the DC Controller PCB (UN01/J472) and the Laser Driver PCB (PCB35/J9912) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, LASER) - Harness between the DC Controller PCB (UN01/J471) and the Laser Driver PCB (PCB35/J2169) - Harnesses from the DC Controller PCB to the BD PCB and the Polygon Motor 1. DC Controller PCB (J472) to Relay Connector (9P) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, LASER) 2. Relay Connector (9P) to Relay Connector (9P) 3. Relay Connector (9P) to BD PCB (J2160) and Polygon Motor (J2159) - Scanner Unit (Unit of replacement: LASER SCANNER UNIT) - Laser Driver PCB (Unit of replacement: READER CONTROLLER PCB ASSEMBLY) - DC Controller PCB (Unit of replacement: DC CONTROLLER PCB ASS'Y) [Remedy] Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared. 1. Check that all covers (Front Cover, etc.) that can be opened and closed are closed. 2. Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts. [Reference] Before replacing the DC Controller PCB, back up the service mode data (approx. 2 min) and restore the backup data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected. - Backup: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMBUP - Restoration: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMRES



754



7. Error/Jam/Alarm E110-1165-05



Scanner Motor FG unlock error



Detection Description Remedy



E110-1167-05



Locked state was not detected within the specified period of time at start-up. [Related parts] - Harness between the DC Controller PCB (UN01/J472) and the Laser Driver PCB (PCB35/J9912) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, LASER) - Harness between the DC Controller PCB (UN01/J471) and the Laser Driver PCB (PCB35/J2169) - Harnesses from the DC Controller PCB to the BD PCB and the Polygon Motor 1. DC Controller PCB (J472) to Relay Connector (9P) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, LASER) 2. Relay Connector (9P) to Relay Connector (9P) 3. Relay Connector (9P) to BD PCB (J2160) and Polygon Motor (J2159) - Scanner Unit (Unit of replacement: LASER SCANNER UNIT) - Laser Driver PCB (Unit of replacement: READER CONTROLLER PCB ASSEMBLY) - DC Controller PCB (Unit of replacement: DC CONTROLLER PCB ASS'Y) [Remedy] Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared. 1. Check that all covers (Front Cover, etc.) that can be opened and closed are closed. 2. Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts. [Reference] Before replacing the DC Controller PCB, back up the service mode data (approx. 2 min) and restore the backup data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected. - Backup: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMBUP - Restoration: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMRES Scanner Motor FG unlock error



Detection Description Remedy



Locked state was not detected within the specified period of time at start-up. [Related parts] - Harness between the DC Controller PCB (UN01/J472) and the Laser Driver PCB (PCB35/J9912) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, LASER) - Harness between the DC Controller PCB (UN01/J471) and the Laser Driver PCB (PCB35/J2169) - Harnesses from the DC Controller PCB to the BD PCB and the Polygon Motor 1. DC Controller PCB (J472) to Relay Connector (9P) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, LASER) 2. Relay Connector (9P) to Relay Connector (9P) 3. Relay Connector (9P) to BD PCB (J2160) and Polygon Motor (J2159) - Scanner Unit (Unit of replacement: LASER SCANNER UNIT) - Laser Driver PCB (Unit of replacement: READER CONTROLLER PCB ASSEMBLY) - DC Controller PCB (Unit of replacement: DC CONTROLLER PCB ASS'Y) [Remedy] Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared. 1. Check that all covers (Front Cover, etc.) that can be opened and closed are closed. 2. Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts. [Reference] Before replacing the DC Controller PCB, back up the service mode data (approx. 2 min) and restore the backup data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected. - Backup: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMBUP - Restoration: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMRES



755



7. Error/Jam/Alarm E110-116F-05



Scanner Motor FG unlock error



Detection Description Remedy



E110-11F0-05



Locked state was not detected within the specified period of time at start-up. [Related parts] - Harness between the DC Controller PCB (UN01/J472) and the Laser Driver PCB (PCB35/J9912) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, LASER) - Harness between the DC Controller PCB (UN01/J471) and the Laser Driver PCB (PCB35/J2169) - Harnesses from the DC Controller PCB to the BD PCB and the Polygon Motor 1. DC Controller PCB (J472) to Relay Connector (9P) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, LASER) 2. Relay Connector (9P) to Relay Connector (9P) 3. Relay Connector (9P) to BD PCB (J2160) and Polygon Motor (J2159) - Scanner Unit (Unit of replacement: LASER SCANNER UNIT) - Laser Driver PCB (Unit of replacement: READER CONTROLLER PCB ASSEMBLY) - DC Controller PCB (Unit of replacement: DC CONTROLLER PCB ASS'Y) [Remedy] Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared. 1. Check that all covers (Front Cover, etc.) that can be opened and closed are closed. 2. Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts. [Reference] Before replacing the DC Controller PCB, back up the service mode data (approx. 2 min) and restore the backup data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected. - Backup: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMBUP - Restoration: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMRES Scanner Motor FG unlock error



Detection Description Remedy



Locked state was not detected within the specified period of time at start-up. [Related parts] - Harness between the DC Controller PCB (UN01/J472) and the Laser Driver PCB (PCB35/J9912) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, LASER) - Harness between the DC Controller PCB (UN01/J471) and the Laser Driver PCB (PCB35/J2169) - Harnesses from the DC Controller PCB to the BD PCB and the Polygon Motor 1. DC Controller PCB (J472) to Relay Connector (9P) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, LASER) 2. Relay Connector (9P) to Relay Connector (9P) 3. Relay Connector (9P) to BD PCB (J2160) and Polygon Motor (J2159) - Scanner Unit (Unit of replacement: LASER SCANNER UNIT) - Laser Driver PCB (Unit of replacement: READER CONTROLLER PCB ASSEMBLY) - DC Controller PCB (Unit of replacement: DC CONTROLLER PCB ASS'Y) [Remedy] Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared. 1. Check that all covers (Front Cover, etc.) that can be opened and closed are closed. 2. Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts. [Reference] Before replacing the DC Controller PCB, back up the service mode data (approx. 2 min) and restore the backup data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected. - Backup: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMBUP - Restoration: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMRES



756



7. Error/Jam/Alarm E110-11F1-05



Scanner Motor FG unlock error



Detection Description Remedy



E110-11F2-05



Locked state was not detected within the specified period of time at start-up. [Related parts] - Harness between the DC Controller PCB (UN01/J472) and the Laser Driver PCB (PCB35/J9912) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, LASER) - Harness between the DC Controller PCB (UN01/J471) and the Laser Driver PCB (PCB35/J2169) - Harnesses from the DC Controller PCB to the BD PCB and the Polygon Motor 1. DC Controller PCB (J472) to Relay Connector (9P) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, LASER) 2. Relay Connector (9P) to Relay Connector (9P) 3. Relay Connector (9P) to BD PCB (J2160) and Polygon Motor (J2159) - Scanner Unit (Unit of replacement: LASER SCANNER UNIT) - Laser Driver PCB (Unit of replacement: READER CONTROLLER PCB ASSEMBLY) - DC Controller PCB (Unit of replacement: DC CONTROLLER PCB ASS'Y) [Remedy] Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared. 1. Check that all covers (Front Cover, etc.) that can be opened and closed are closed. 2. Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts. [Reference] Before replacing the DC Controller PCB, back up the service mode data (approx. 2 min) and restore the backup data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected. - Backup: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMBUP - Restoration: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMRES Scanner Motor FG unlock error



Detection Description Remedy



Locked state was not detected within the specified period of time at start-up. [Related parts] - Harness between the DC Controller PCB (UN01/J472) and the Laser Driver PCB (PCB35/J9912) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, LASER) - Harness between the DC Controller PCB (UN01/J471) and the Laser Driver PCB (PCB35/J2169) - Harnesses from the DC Controller PCB to the BD PCB and the Polygon Motor 1. DC Controller PCB (J472) to Relay Connector (9P) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, LASER) 2. Relay Connector (9P) to Relay Connector (9P) 3. Relay Connector (9P) to BD PCB (J2160) and Polygon Motor (J2159) - Scanner Unit (Unit of replacement: LASER SCANNER UNIT) - Laser Driver PCB (Unit of replacement: READER CONTROLLER PCB ASSEMBLY) - DC Controller PCB (Unit of replacement: DC CONTROLLER PCB ASS'Y) [Remedy] Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared. 1. Check that all covers (Front Cover, etc.) that can be opened and closed are closed. 2. Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts. [Reference] Before replacing the DC Controller PCB, back up the service mode data (approx. 2 min) and restore the backup data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected. - Backup: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMBUP - Restoration: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMRES



757



7. Error/Jam/Alarm E110-11F4-05



Scanner Motor FG unlock error



Detection Description Remedy



E110-11F5-05



Locked state was not detected within the specified period of time at start-up. [Related parts] - Harness between the DC Controller PCB (UN01/J472) and the Laser Driver PCB (PCB35/J9912) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, LASER) - Harness between the DC Controller PCB (UN01/J471) and the Laser Driver PCB (PCB35/J2169) - Harnesses from the DC Controller PCB to the BD PCB and the Polygon Motor 1. DC Controller PCB (J472) to Relay Connector (9P) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, LASER) 2. Relay Connector (9P) to Relay Connector (9P) 3. Relay Connector (9P) to BD PCB (J2160) and Polygon Motor (J2159) - Scanner Unit (Unit of replacement: LASER SCANNER UNIT) - Laser Driver PCB (Unit of replacement: READER CONTROLLER PCB ASSEMBLY) - DC Controller PCB (Unit of replacement: DC CONTROLLER PCB ASS'Y) [Remedy] Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared. 1. Check that all covers (Front Cover, etc.) that can be opened and closed are closed. 2. Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts. [Reference] Before replacing the DC Controller PCB, back up the service mode data (approx. 2 min) and restore the backup data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected. - Backup: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMBUP - Restoration: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMRES Scanner Motor FG unlock error



Detection Description Remedy



Locked state was not detected within the specified period of time at start-up. [Related parts] - Harness between the DC Controller PCB (UN01/J472) and the Laser Driver PCB (PCB35/J9912) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, LASER) - Harness between the DC Controller PCB (UN01/J471) and the Laser Driver PCB (PCB35/J2169) - Harnesses from the DC Controller PCB to the BD PCB and the Polygon Motor 1. DC Controller PCB (J472) to Relay Connector (9P) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, LASER) 2. Relay Connector (9P) to Relay Connector (9P) 3. Relay Connector (9P) to BD PCB (J2160) and Polygon Motor (J2159) - Scanner Unit (Unit of replacement: LASER SCANNER UNIT) - Laser Driver PCB (Unit of replacement: READER CONTROLLER PCB ASSEMBLY) - DC Controller PCB (Unit of replacement: DC CONTROLLER PCB ASS'Y) [Remedy] Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared. 1. Check that all covers (Front Cover, etc.) that can be opened and closed are closed. 2. Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts. [Reference] Before replacing the DC Controller PCB, back up the service mode data (approx. 2 min) and restore the backup data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected. - Backup: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMBUP - Restoration: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMRES



758



7. Error/Jam/Alarm E110-11F7-05



Scanner Motor FG unlock error



Detection Description Remedy



E110-11FF-05



Locked state was not detected within the specified period of time at start-up. [Related parts] - Harness between the DC Controller PCB (UN01/J472) and the Laser Driver PCB (PCB35/J9912) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, LASER) - Harness between the DC Controller PCB (UN01/J471) and the Laser Driver PCB (PCB35/J2169) - Harnesses from the DC Controller PCB to the BD PCB and the Polygon Motor 1. DC Controller PCB (J472) to Relay Connector (9P) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, LASER) 2. Relay Connector (9P) to Relay Connector (9P) 3. Relay Connector (9P) to BD PCB (J2160) and Polygon Motor (J2159) - Scanner Unit (Unit of replacement: LASER SCANNER UNIT) - Laser Driver PCB (Unit of replacement: READER CONTROLLER PCB ASSEMBLY) - DC Controller PCB (Unit of replacement: DC CONTROLLER PCB ASS'Y) [Remedy] Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared. 1. Check that all covers (Front Cover, etc.) that can be opened and closed are closed. 2. Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts. [Reference] Before replacing the DC Controller PCB, back up the service mode data (approx. 2 min) and restore the backup data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected. - Backup: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMBUP - Restoration: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMRES Scanner Motor FG unlock error



Detection Description Remedy



Locked state was not detected within the specified period of time at start-up. [Related parts] - Harness between the DC Controller PCB (UN01/J472) and the Laser Driver PCB (PCB35/J9912) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, LASER) - Harness between the DC Controller PCB (UN01/J471) and the Laser Driver PCB (PCB35/J2169) - Harnesses from the DC Controller PCB to the BD PCB and the Polygon Motor 1. DC Controller PCB (J472) to Relay Connector (9P) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, LASER) 2. Relay Connector (9P) to Relay Connector (9P) 3. Relay Connector (9P) to BD PCB (J2160) and Polygon Motor (J2159) - Scanner Unit (Unit of replacement: LASER SCANNER UNIT) - Laser Driver PCB (Unit of replacement: READER CONTROLLER PCB ASSEMBLY) - DC Controller PCB (Unit of replacement: DC CONTROLLER PCB ASS'Y) [Remedy] Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared. 1. Check that all covers (Front Cover, etc.) that can be opened and closed are closed. 2. Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts. [Reference] Before replacing the DC Controller PCB, back up the service mode data (approx. 2 min) and restore the backup data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected. - Backup: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMBUP - Restoration: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMRES



759



7. Error/Jam/Alarm E110-1200-05



Scanner Motor FG unlock error



Detection Description Remedy



E110-1201-05



Locked state was not detected within the specified period of time at start-up. [Related parts] - Harness between the DC Controller PCB (UN01/J472) and the Laser Driver PCB (PCB35/J9912) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, LASER) - Harness between the DC Controller PCB (UN01/J471) and the Laser Driver PCB (PCB35/J2169) - Harnesses from the DC Controller PCB to the BD PCB and the Polygon Motor 1. DC Controller PCB (J472) to Relay Connector (9P) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, LASER) 2. Relay Connector (9P) to Relay Connector (9P) 3. Relay Connector (9P) to BD PCB (J2160) and Polygon Motor (J2159) - Scanner Unit (Unit of replacement: LASER SCANNER UNIT) - Laser Driver PCB (Unit of replacement: READER CONTROLLER PCB ASSEMBLY) - DC Controller PCB (Unit of replacement: DC CONTROLLER PCB ASS'Y) [Remedy] Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared. 1. Check that all covers (Front Cover, etc.) that can be opened and closed are closed. 2. Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts. [Reference] Before replacing the DC Controller PCB, back up the service mode data (approx. 2 min) and restore the backup data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected. - Backup: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMBUP - Restoration: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMRES Scanner Motor FG unlock error



Detection Description Remedy



Locked state was not detected within the specified period of time at start-up. [Related parts] - Harness between the DC Controller PCB (UN01/J472) and the Laser Driver PCB (PCB35/J9912) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, LASER) - Harness between the DC Controller PCB (UN01/J471) and the Laser Driver PCB (PCB35/J2169) - Harnesses from the DC Controller PCB to the BD PCB and the Polygon Motor 1. DC Controller PCB (J472) to Relay Connector (9P) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, LASER) 2. Relay Connector (9P) to Relay Connector (9P) 3. Relay Connector (9P) to BD PCB (J2160) and Polygon Motor (J2159) - Scanner Unit (Unit of replacement: LASER SCANNER UNIT) - Laser Driver PCB (Unit of replacement: READER CONTROLLER PCB ASSEMBLY) - DC Controller PCB (Unit of replacement: DC CONTROLLER PCB ASS'Y) [Remedy] Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared. 1. Check that all covers (Front Cover, etc.) that can be opened and closed are closed. 2. Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts. [Reference] Before replacing the DC Controller PCB, back up the service mode data (approx. 2 min) and restore the backup data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected. - Backup: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMBUP - Restoration: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMRES



760



7. Error/Jam/Alarm E110-1202-05



Scanner Motor FG unlock error



Detection Description Remedy



E110-1204-05



Locked state was not detected within the specified period of time at start-up. [Related parts] - Harness between the DC Controller PCB (UN01/J472) and the Laser Driver PCB (PCB35/J9912) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, LASER) - Harness between the DC Controller PCB (UN01/J471) and the Laser Driver PCB (PCB35/J2169) - Harnesses from the DC Controller PCB to the BD PCB and the Polygon Motor 1. DC Controller PCB (J472) to Relay Connector (9P) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, LASER) 2. Relay Connector (9P) to Relay Connector (9P) 3. Relay Connector (9P) to BD PCB (J2160) and Polygon Motor (J2159) - Scanner Unit (Unit of replacement: LASER SCANNER UNIT) - Laser Driver PCB (Unit of replacement: READER CONTROLLER PCB ASSEMBLY) - DC Controller PCB (Unit of replacement: DC CONTROLLER PCB ASS'Y) [Remedy] Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared. 1. Check that all covers (Front Cover, etc.) that can be opened and closed are closed. 2. Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts. [Reference] Before replacing the DC Controller PCB, back up the service mode data (approx. 2 min) and restore the backup data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected. - Backup: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMBUP - Restoration: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMRES Scanner Motor FG unlock error



Detection Description Remedy



Locked state was not detected within the specified period of time at start-up. [Related parts] - Harness between the DC Controller PCB (UN01/J472) and the Laser Driver PCB (PCB35/J9912) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, LASER) - Harness between the DC Controller PCB (UN01/J471) and the Laser Driver PCB (PCB35/J2169) - Harnesses from the DC Controller PCB to the BD PCB and the Polygon Motor 1. DC Controller PCB (J472) to Relay Connector (9P) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, LASER) 2. Relay Connector (9P) to Relay Connector (9P) 3. Relay Connector (9P) to BD PCB (J2160) and Polygon Motor (J2159) - Scanner Unit (Unit of replacement: LASER SCANNER UNIT) - Laser Driver PCB (Unit of replacement: READER CONTROLLER PCB ASSEMBLY) - DC Controller PCB (Unit of replacement: DC CONTROLLER PCB ASS'Y) [Remedy] Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared. 1. Check that all covers (Front Cover, etc.) that can be opened and closed are closed. 2. Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts. [Reference] Before replacing the DC Controller PCB, back up the service mode data (approx. 2 min) and restore the backup data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected. - Backup: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMBUP - Restoration: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMRES



761



7. Error/Jam/Alarm E110-1205-05



Scanner Motor FG unlock error



Detection Description Remedy



E110-1207-05



Locked state was not detected within the specified period of time at start-up. [Related parts] - Harness between the DC Controller PCB (UN01/J472) and the Laser Driver PCB (PCB35/J9912) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, LASER) - Harness between the DC Controller PCB (UN01/J471) and the Laser Driver PCB (PCB35/J2169) - Harnesses from the DC Controller PCB to the BD PCB and the Polygon Motor 1. DC Controller PCB (J472) to Relay Connector (9P) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, LASER) 2. Relay Connector (9P) to Relay Connector (9P) 3. Relay Connector (9P) to BD PCB (J2160) and Polygon Motor (J2159) - Scanner Unit (Unit of replacement: LASER SCANNER UNIT) - Laser Driver PCB (Unit of replacement: READER CONTROLLER PCB ASSEMBLY) - DC Controller PCB (Unit of replacement: DC CONTROLLER PCB ASS'Y) [Remedy] Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared. 1. Check that all covers (Front Cover, etc.) that can be opened and closed are closed. 2. Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts. [Reference] Before replacing the DC Controller PCB, back up the service mode data (approx. 2 min) and restore the backup data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected. - Backup: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMBUP - Restoration: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMRES Scanner Motor FG unlock error



Detection Description Remedy



Locked state was not detected within the specified period of time at start-up. [Related parts] - Harness between the DC Controller PCB (UN01/J472) and the Laser Driver PCB (PCB35/J9912) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, LASER) - Harness between the DC Controller PCB (UN01/J471) and the Laser Driver PCB (PCB35/J2169) - Harnesses from the DC Controller PCB to the BD PCB and the Polygon Motor 1. DC Controller PCB (J472) to Relay Connector (9P) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, LASER) 2. Relay Connector (9P) to Relay Connector (9P) 3. Relay Connector (9P) to BD PCB (J2160) and Polygon Motor (J2159) - Scanner Unit (Unit of replacement: LASER SCANNER UNIT) - Laser Driver PCB (Unit of replacement: READER CONTROLLER PCB ASSEMBLY) - DC Controller PCB (Unit of replacement: DC CONTROLLER PCB ASS'Y) [Remedy] Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared. 1. Check that all covers (Front Cover, etc.) that can be opened and closed are closed. 2. Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts. [Reference] Before replacing the DC Controller PCB, back up the service mode data (approx. 2 min) and restore the backup data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected. - Backup: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMBUP - Restoration: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMRES



762



7. Error/Jam/Alarm E110-120F-05



Scanner Motor FG unlock error



Detection Description Remedy



E110-1210-05



Locked state was not detected within the specified period of time at start-up. [Related parts] - Harness between the DC Controller PCB (UN01/J472) and the Laser Driver PCB (PCB35/J9912) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, LASER) - Harness between the DC Controller PCB (UN01/J471) and the Laser Driver PCB (PCB35/J2169) - Harnesses from the DC Controller PCB to the BD PCB and the Polygon Motor 1. DC Controller PCB (J472) to Relay Connector (9P) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, LASER) 2. Relay Connector (9P) to Relay Connector (9P) 3. Relay Connector (9P) to BD PCB (J2160) and Polygon Motor (J2159) - Scanner Unit (Unit of replacement: LASER SCANNER UNIT) - Laser Driver PCB (Unit of replacement: READER CONTROLLER PCB ASSEMBLY) - DC Controller PCB (Unit of replacement: DC CONTROLLER PCB ASS'Y) [Remedy] Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared. 1. Check that all covers (Front Cover, etc.) that can be opened and closed are closed. 2. Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts. [Reference] Before replacing the DC Controller PCB, back up the service mode data (approx. 2 min) and restore the backup data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected. - Backup: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMBUP - Restoration: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMRES Scanner Motor FG unlock error



Detection Description Remedy



Locked state was not detected within the specified period of time at start-up. [Related parts] - Harness between the DC Controller PCB (UN01/J472) and the Laser Driver PCB (PCB35/J9912) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, LASER) - Harness between the DC Controller PCB (UN01/J471) and the Laser Driver PCB (PCB35/J2169) - Harnesses from the DC Controller PCB to the BD PCB and the Polygon Motor 1. DC Controller PCB (J472) to Relay Connector (9P) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, LASER) 2. Relay Connector (9P) to Relay Connector (9P) 3. Relay Connector (9P) to BD PCB (J2160) and Polygon Motor (J2159) - Scanner Unit (Unit of replacement: LASER SCANNER UNIT) - Laser Driver PCB (Unit of replacement: READER CONTROLLER PCB ASSEMBLY) - DC Controller PCB (Unit of replacement: DC CONTROLLER PCB ASS'Y) [Remedy] Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared. 1. Check that all covers (Front Cover, etc.) that can be opened and closed are closed. 2. Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts. [Reference] Before replacing the DC Controller PCB, back up the service mode data (approx. 2 min) and restore the backup data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected. - Backup: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMBUP - Restoration: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMRES



763



7. Error/Jam/Alarm E110-1211-05



Scanner Motor FG unlock error



Detection Description Remedy



E110-1212-05



Locked state was not detected within the specified period of time at start-up. [Related parts] - Harness between the DC Controller PCB (UN01/J472) and the Laser Driver PCB (PCB35/J9912) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, LASER) - Harness between the DC Controller PCB (UN01/J471) and the Laser Driver PCB (PCB35/J2169) - Harnesses from the DC Controller PCB to the BD PCB and the Polygon Motor 1. DC Controller PCB (J472) to Relay Connector (9P) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, LASER) 2. Relay Connector (9P) to Relay Connector (9P) 3. Relay Connector (9P) to BD PCB (J2160) and Polygon Motor (J2159) - Scanner Unit (Unit of replacement: LASER SCANNER UNIT) - Laser Driver PCB (Unit of replacement: READER CONTROLLER PCB ASSEMBLY) - DC Controller PCB (Unit of replacement: DC CONTROLLER PCB ASS'Y) [Remedy] Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared. 1. Check that all covers (Front Cover, etc.) that can be opened and closed are closed. 2. Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts. [Reference] Before replacing the DC Controller PCB, back up the service mode data (approx. 2 min) and restore the backup data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected. - Backup: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMBUP - Restoration: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMRES Scanner Motor FG unlock error



Detection Description Remedy



Locked state was not detected within the specified period of time at start-up. [Related parts] - Harness between the DC Controller PCB (UN01/J472) and the Laser Driver PCB (PCB35/J9912) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, LASER) - Harness between the DC Controller PCB (UN01/J471) and the Laser Driver PCB (PCB35/J2169) - Harnesses from the DC Controller PCB to the BD PCB and the Polygon Motor 1. DC Controller PCB (J472) to Relay Connector (9P) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, LASER) 2. Relay Connector (9P) to Relay Connector (9P) 3. Relay Connector (9P) to BD PCB (J2160) and Polygon Motor (J2159) - Scanner Unit (Unit of replacement: LASER SCANNER UNIT) - Laser Driver PCB (Unit of replacement: READER CONTROLLER PCB ASSEMBLY) - DC Controller PCB (Unit of replacement: DC CONTROLLER PCB ASS'Y) [Remedy] Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared. 1. Check that all covers (Front Cover, etc.) that can be opened and closed are closed. 2. Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts. [Reference] Before replacing the DC Controller PCB, back up the service mode data (approx. 2 min) and restore the backup data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected. - Backup: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMBUP - Restoration: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMRES



764



7. Error/Jam/Alarm E110-1214-05



Scanner Motor FG unlock error



Detection Description Remedy



E110-1215-05



Locked state was not detected within the specified period of time at start-up. [Related parts] - Harness between the DC Controller PCB (UN01/J472) and the Laser Driver PCB (PCB35/J9912) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, LASER) - Harness between the DC Controller PCB (UN01/J471) and the Laser Driver PCB (PCB35/J2169) - Harnesses from the DC Controller PCB to the BD PCB and the Polygon Motor 1. DC Controller PCB (J472) to Relay Connector (9P) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, LASER) 2. Relay Connector (9P) to Relay Connector (9P) 3. Relay Connector (9P) to BD PCB (J2160) and Polygon Motor (J2159) - Scanner Unit (Unit of replacement: LASER SCANNER UNIT) - Laser Driver PCB (Unit of replacement: READER CONTROLLER PCB ASSEMBLY) - DC Controller PCB (Unit of replacement: DC CONTROLLER PCB ASS'Y) [Remedy] Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared. 1. Check that all covers (Front Cover, etc.) that can be opened and closed are closed. 2. Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts. [Reference] Before replacing the DC Controller PCB, back up the service mode data (approx. 2 min) and restore the backup data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected. - Backup: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMBUP - Restoration: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMRES Scanner Motor FG unlock error



Detection Description Remedy



Locked state was not detected within the specified period of time at start-up. [Related parts] - Harness between the DC Controller PCB (UN01/J472) and the Laser Driver PCB (PCB35/J9912) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, LASER) - Harness between the DC Controller PCB (UN01/J471) and the Laser Driver PCB (PCB35/J2169) - Harnesses from the DC Controller PCB to the BD PCB and the Polygon Motor 1. DC Controller PCB (J472) to Relay Connector (9P) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, LASER) 2. Relay Connector (9P) to Relay Connector (9P) 3. Relay Connector (9P) to BD PCB (J2160) and Polygon Motor (J2159) - Scanner Unit (Unit of replacement: LASER SCANNER UNIT) - Laser Driver PCB (Unit of replacement: READER CONTROLLER PCB ASSEMBLY) - DC Controller PCB (Unit of replacement: DC CONTROLLER PCB ASS'Y) [Remedy] Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared. 1. Check that all covers (Front Cover, etc.) that can be opened and closed are closed. 2. Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts. [Reference] Before replacing the DC Controller PCB, back up the service mode data (approx. 2 min) and restore the backup data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected. - Backup: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMBUP - Restoration: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMRES



765



7. Error/Jam/Alarm E110-1217-05



Scanner Motor FG unlock error



Detection Description Remedy



E110-121F-05



Locked state was not detected within the specified period of time at start-up. [Related parts] - Harness between the DC Controller PCB (UN01/J472) and the Laser Driver PCB (PCB35/J9912) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, LASER) - Harness between the DC Controller PCB (UN01/J471) and the Laser Driver PCB (PCB35/J2169) - Harnesses from the DC Controller PCB to the BD PCB and the Polygon Motor 1. DC Controller PCB (J472) to Relay Connector (9P) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, LASER) 2. Relay Connector (9P) to Relay Connector (9P) 3. Relay Connector (9P) to BD PCB (J2160) and Polygon Motor (J2159) - Scanner Unit (Unit of replacement: LASER SCANNER UNIT) - Laser Driver PCB (Unit of replacement: READER CONTROLLER PCB ASSEMBLY) - DC Controller PCB (Unit of replacement: DC CONTROLLER PCB ASS'Y) [Remedy] Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared. 1. Check that all covers (Front Cover, etc.) that can be opened and closed are closed. 2. Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts. [Reference] Before replacing the DC Controller PCB, back up the service mode data (approx. 2 min) and restore the backup data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected. - Backup: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMBUP - Restoration: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMRES Scanner Motor FG unlock error



Detection Description Remedy



Locked state was not detected within the specified period of time at start-up. [Related parts] - Harness between the DC Controller PCB (UN01/J472) and the Laser Driver PCB (PCB35/J9912) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, LASER) - Harness between the DC Controller PCB (UN01/J471) and the Laser Driver PCB (PCB35/J2169) - Harnesses from the DC Controller PCB to the BD PCB and the Polygon Motor 1. DC Controller PCB (J472) to Relay Connector (9P) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, LASER) 2. Relay Connector (9P) to Relay Connector (9P) 3. Relay Connector (9P) to BD PCB (J2160) and Polygon Motor (J2159) - Scanner Unit (Unit of replacement: LASER SCANNER UNIT) - Laser Driver PCB (Unit of replacement: READER CONTROLLER PCB ASSEMBLY) - DC Controller PCB (Unit of replacement: DC CONTROLLER PCB ASS'Y) [Remedy] Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared. 1. Check that all covers (Front Cover, etc.) that can be opened and closed are closed. 2. Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts. [Reference] Before replacing the DC Controller PCB, back up the service mode data (approx. 2 min) and restore the backup data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected. - Backup: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMBUP - Restoration: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMRES



766



7. Error/Jam/Alarm E110-1220-05



Scanner Motor FG unlock error



Detection Description Remedy



E110-1221-05



Locked state was not detected within the specified period of time at start-up. [Related parts] - Harness between the DC Controller PCB (UN01/J472) and the Laser Driver PCB (PCB35/J9912) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, LASER) - Harness between the DC Controller PCB (UN01/J471) and the Laser Driver PCB (PCB35/J2169) - Harnesses from the DC Controller PCB to the BD PCB and the Polygon Motor 1. DC Controller PCB (J472) to Relay Connector (9P) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, LASER) 2. Relay Connector (9P) to Relay Connector (9P) 3. Relay Connector (9P) to BD PCB (J2160) and Polygon Motor (J2159) - Scanner Unit (Unit of replacement: LASER SCANNER UNIT) - Laser Driver PCB (Unit of replacement: READER CONTROLLER PCB ASSEMBLY) - DC Controller PCB (Unit of replacement: DC CONTROLLER PCB ASS'Y) [Remedy] Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared. 1. Check that all covers (Front Cover, etc.) that can be opened and closed are closed. 2. Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts. [Reference] Before replacing the DC Controller PCB, back up the service mode data (approx. 2 min) and restore the backup data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected. - Backup: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMBUP - Restoration: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMRES Scanner Motor FG unlock error



Detection Description Remedy



Locked state was not detected within the specified period of time at start-up. [Related parts] - Harness between the DC Controller PCB (UN01/J472) and the Laser Driver PCB (PCB35/J9912) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, LASER) - Harness between the DC Controller PCB (UN01/J471) and the Laser Driver PCB (PCB35/J2169) - Harnesses from the DC Controller PCB to the BD PCB and the Polygon Motor 1. DC Controller PCB (J472) to Relay Connector (9P) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, LASER) 2. Relay Connector (9P) to Relay Connector (9P) 3. Relay Connector (9P) to BD PCB (J2160) and Polygon Motor (J2159) - Scanner Unit (Unit of replacement: LASER SCANNER UNIT) - Laser Driver PCB (Unit of replacement: READER CONTROLLER PCB ASSEMBLY) - DC Controller PCB (Unit of replacement: DC CONTROLLER PCB ASS'Y) [Remedy] Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared. 1. Check that all covers (Front Cover, etc.) that can be opened and closed are closed. 2. Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts. [Reference] Before replacing the DC Controller PCB, back up the service mode data (approx. 2 min) and restore the backup data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected. - Backup: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMBUP - Restoration: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMRES



767



7. Error/Jam/Alarm E110-1224-05



Scanner Motor FG unlock error



Detection Description Remedy



E110-1225-05



Locked state was not detected within the specified period of time at start-up. [Related parts] - Harness between the DC Controller PCB (UN01/J472) and the Laser Driver PCB (PCB35/J9912) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, LASER) - Harness between the DC Controller PCB (UN01/J471) and the Laser Driver PCB (PCB35/J2169) - Harnesses from the DC Controller PCB to the BD PCB and the Polygon Motor 1. DC Controller PCB (J472) to Relay Connector (9P) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, LASER) 2. Relay Connector (9P) to Relay Connector (9P) 3. Relay Connector (9P) to BD PCB (J2160) and Polygon Motor (J2159) - Scanner Unit (Unit of replacement: LASER SCANNER UNIT) - Laser Driver PCB (Unit of replacement: READER CONTROLLER PCB ASSEMBLY) - DC Controller PCB (Unit of replacement: DC CONTROLLER PCB ASS'Y) [Remedy] Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared. 1. Check that all covers (Front Cover, etc.) that can be opened and closed are closed. 2. Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts. [Reference] Before replacing the DC Controller PCB, back up the service mode data (approx. 2 min) and restore the backup data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected. - Backup: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMBUP - Restoration: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMRES Scanner Motor FG unlock error



Detection Description Remedy



Locked state was not detected within the specified period of time at start-up. [Related parts] - Harness between the DC Controller PCB (UN01/J472) and the Laser Driver PCB (PCB35/J9912) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, LASER) - Harness between the DC Controller PCB (UN01/J471) and the Laser Driver PCB (PCB35/J2169) - Harnesses from the DC Controller PCB to the BD PCB and the Polygon Motor 1. DC Controller PCB (J472) to Relay Connector (9P) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, LASER) 2. Relay Connector (9P) to Relay Connector (9P) 3. Relay Connector (9P) to BD PCB (J2160) and Polygon Motor (J2159) - Scanner Unit (Unit of replacement: LASER SCANNER UNIT) - Laser Driver PCB (Unit of replacement: READER CONTROLLER PCB ASSEMBLY) - DC Controller PCB (Unit of replacement: DC CONTROLLER PCB ASS'Y) [Remedy] Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared. 1. Check that all covers (Front Cover, etc.) that can be opened and closed are closed. 2. Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts. [Reference] Before replacing the DC Controller PCB, back up the service mode data (approx. 2 min) and restore the backup data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected. - Backup: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMBUP - Restoration: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMRES



768



7. Error/Jam/Alarm E110-1227-05



Scanner Motor FG unlock error



Detection Description Remedy



E110-122F-05



Locked state was not detected within the specified period of time at start-up. [Related parts] - Harness between the DC Controller PCB (UN01/J472) and the Laser Driver PCB (PCB35/J9912) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, LASER) - Harness between the DC Controller PCB (UN01/J471) and the Laser Driver PCB (PCB35/J2169) - Harnesses from the DC Controller PCB to the BD PCB and the Polygon Motor 1. DC Controller PCB (J472) to Relay Connector (9P) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, LASER) 2. Relay Connector (9P) to Relay Connector (9P) 3. Relay Connector (9P) to BD PCB (J2160) and Polygon Motor (J2159) - Scanner Unit (Unit of replacement: LASER SCANNER UNIT) - Laser Driver PCB (Unit of replacement: READER CONTROLLER PCB ASSEMBLY) - DC Controller PCB (Unit of replacement: DC CONTROLLER PCB ASS'Y) [Remedy] Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared. 1. Check that all covers (Front Cover, etc.) that can be opened and closed are closed. 2. Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts. [Reference] Before replacing the DC Controller PCB, back up the service mode data (approx. 2 min) and restore the backup data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected. - Backup: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMBUP - Restoration: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMRES Scanner Motor FG unlock error



Detection Description Remedy



Locked state was not detected within the specified period of time at start-up. [Related parts] - Harness between the DC Controller PCB (UN01/J472) and the Laser Driver PCB (PCB35/J9912) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, LASER) - Harness between the DC Controller PCB (UN01/J471) and the Laser Driver PCB (PCB35/J2169) - Harnesses from the DC Controller PCB to the BD PCB and the Polygon Motor 1. DC Controller PCB (J472) to Relay Connector (9P) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, LASER) 2. Relay Connector (9P) to Relay Connector (9P) 3. Relay Connector (9P) to BD PCB (J2160) and Polygon Motor (J2159) - Scanner Unit (Unit of replacement: LASER SCANNER UNIT) - Laser Driver PCB (Unit of replacement: READER CONTROLLER PCB ASSEMBLY) - DC Controller PCB (Unit of replacement: DC CONTROLLER PCB ASS'Y) [Remedy] Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared. 1. Check that all covers (Front Cover, etc.) that can be opened and closed are closed. 2. Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts. [Reference] Before replacing the DC Controller PCB, back up the service mode data (approx. 2 min) and restore the backup data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected. - Backup: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMBUP - Restoration: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMRES



769



7. Error/Jam/Alarm E110-1230-05



Scanner Motor FG unlock error



Detection Description Remedy



E110-1231-05



Locked state was not detected within the specified period of time at start-up. [Related parts] - Harness between the DC Controller PCB (UN01/J472) and the Laser Driver PCB (PCB35/J9912) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, LASER) - Harness between the DC Controller PCB (UN01/J471) and the Laser Driver PCB (PCB35/J2169) - Harnesses from the DC Controller PCB to the BD PCB and the Polygon Motor 1. DC Controller PCB (J472) to Relay Connector (9P) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, LASER) 2. Relay Connector (9P) to Relay Connector (9P) 3. Relay Connector (9P) to BD PCB (J2160) and Polygon Motor (J2159) - Scanner Unit (Unit of replacement: LASER SCANNER UNIT) - Laser Driver PCB (Unit of replacement: READER CONTROLLER PCB ASSEMBLY) - DC Controller PCB (Unit of replacement: DC CONTROLLER PCB ASS'Y) [Remedy] Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared. 1. Check that all covers (Front Cover, etc.) that can be opened and closed are closed. 2. Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts. [Reference] Before replacing the DC Controller PCB, back up the service mode data (approx. 2 min) and restore the backup data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected. - Backup: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMBUP - Restoration: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMRES Scanner Motor FG unlock error



Detection Description Remedy



Locked state was not detected within the specified period of time at start-up. [Related parts] - Harness between the DC Controller PCB (UN01/J472) and the Laser Driver PCB (PCB35/J9912) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, LASER) - Harness between the DC Controller PCB (UN01/J471) and the Laser Driver PCB (PCB35/J2169) - Harnesses from the DC Controller PCB to the BD PCB and the Polygon Motor 1. DC Controller PCB (J472) to Relay Connector (9P) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, LASER) 2. Relay Connector (9P) to Relay Connector (9P) 3. Relay Connector (9P) to BD PCB (J2160) and Polygon Motor (J2159) - Scanner Unit (Unit of replacement: LASER SCANNER UNIT) - Laser Driver PCB (Unit of replacement: READER CONTROLLER PCB ASSEMBLY) - DC Controller PCB (Unit of replacement: DC CONTROLLER PCB ASS'Y) [Remedy] Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared. 1. Check that all covers (Front Cover, etc.) that can be opened and closed are closed. 2. Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts. [Reference] Before replacing the DC Controller PCB, back up the service mode data (approx. 2 min) and restore the backup data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected. - Backup: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMBUP - Restoration: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMRES



770



7. Error/Jam/Alarm E110-1232-05



Scanner Motor FG unlock error



Detection Description Remedy



E110-1234-05



Locked state was not detected within the specified period of time at start-up. [Related parts] - Harness between the DC Controller PCB (UN01/J472) and the Laser Driver PCB (PCB35/J9912) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, LASER) - Harness between the DC Controller PCB (UN01/J471) and the Laser Driver PCB (PCB35/J2169) - Harnesses from the DC Controller PCB to the BD PCB and the Polygon Motor 1. DC Controller PCB (J472) to Relay Connector (9P) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, LASER) 2. Relay Connector (9P) to Relay Connector (9P) 3. Relay Connector (9P) to BD PCB (J2160) and Polygon Motor (J2159) - Scanner Unit (Unit of replacement: LASER SCANNER UNIT) - Laser Driver PCB (Unit of replacement: READER CONTROLLER PCB ASSEMBLY) - DC Controller PCB (Unit of replacement: DC CONTROLLER PCB ASS'Y) [Remedy] Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared. 1. Check that all covers (Front Cover, etc.) that can be opened and closed are closed. 2. Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts. [Reference] Before replacing the DC Controller PCB, back up the service mode data (approx. 2 min) and restore the backup data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected. - Backup: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMBUP - Restoration: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMRES Scanner Motor FG unlock error



Detection Description Remedy



Locked state was not detected within the specified period of time at start-up. [Related parts] - Harness between the DC Controller PCB (UN01/J472) and the Laser Driver PCB (PCB35/J9912) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, LASER) - Harness between the DC Controller PCB (UN01/J471) and the Laser Driver PCB (PCB35/J2169) - Harnesses from the DC Controller PCB to the BD PCB and the Polygon Motor 1. DC Controller PCB (J472) to Relay Connector (9P) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, LASER) 2. Relay Connector (9P) to Relay Connector (9P) 3. Relay Connector (9P) to BD PCB (J2160) and Polygon Motor (J2159) - Scanner Unit (Unit of replacement: LASER SCANNER UNIT) - Laser Driver PCB (Unit of replacement: READER CONTROLLER PCB ASSEMBLY) - DC Controller PCB (Unit of replacement: DC CONTROLLER PCB ASS'Y) [Remedy] Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared. 1. Check that all covers (Front Cover, etc.) that can be opened and closed are closed. 2. Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts. [Reference] Before replacing the DC Controller PCB, back up the service mode data (approx. 2 min) and restore the backup data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected. - Backup: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMBUP - Restoration: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMRES



771



7. Error/Jam/Alarm E110-1235-05



Scanner Motor FG unlock error



Detection Description Remedy



E110-1237-05



Locked state was not detected within the specified period of time at start-up. [Related parts] - Harness between the DC Controller PCB (UN01/J472) and the Laser Driver PCB (PCB35/J9912) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, LASER) - Harness between the DC Controller PCB (UN01/J471) and the Laser Driver PCB (PCB35/J2169) - Harnesses from the DC Controller PCB to the BD PCB and the Polygon Motor 1. DC Controller PCB (J472) to Relay Connector (9P) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, LASER) 2. Relay Connector (9P) to Relay Connector (9P) 3. Relay Connector (9P) to BD PCB (J2160) and Polygon Motor (J2159) - Scanner Unit (Unit of replacement: LASER SCANNER UNIT) - Laser Driver PCB (Unit of replacement: READER CONTROLLER PCB ASSEMBLY) - DC Controller PCB (Unit of replacement: DC CONTROLLER PCB ASS'Y) [Remedy] Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared. 1. Check that all covers (Front Cover, etc.) that can be opened and closed are closed. 2. Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts. [Reference] Before replacing the DC Controller PCB, back up the service mode data (approx. 2 min) and restore the backup data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected. - Backup: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMBUP - Restoration: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMRES Scanner Motor FG unlock error



Detection Description Remedy



Locked state was not detected within the specified period of time at start-up. [Related parts] - Harness between the DC Controller PCB (UN01/J472) and the Laser Driver PCB (PCB35/J9912) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, LASER) - Harness between the DC Controller PCB (UN01/J471) and the Laser Driver PCB (PCB35/J2169) - Harnesses from the DC Controller PCB to the BD PCB and the Polygon Motor 1. DC Controller PCB (J472) to Relay Connector (9P) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, LASER) 2. Relay Connector (9P) to Relay Connector (9P) 3. Relay Connector (9P) to BD PCB (J2160) and Polygon Motor (J2159) - Scanner Unit (Unit of replacement: LASER SCANNER UNIT) - Laser Driver PCB (Unit of replacement: READER CONTROLLER PCB ASSEMBLY) - DC Controller PCB (Unit of replacement: DC CONTROLLER PCB ASS'Y) [Remedy] Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared. 1. Check that all covers (Front Cover, etc.) that can be opened and closed are closed. 2. Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts. [Reference] Before replacing the DC Controller PCB, back up the service mode data (approx. 2 min) and restore the backup data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected. - Backup: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMBUP - Restoration: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMRES



772



7. Error/Jam/Alarm E110-123F-05



Scanner Motor FG unlock error



Detection Description Remedy



E110-1240-05



Locked state was not detected within the specified period of time at start-up. [Related parts] - Harness between the DC Controller PCB (UN01/J472) and the Laser Driver PCB (PCB35/J9912) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, LASER) - Harness between the DC Controller PCB (UN01/J471) and the Laser Driver PCB (PCB35/J2169) - Harnesses from the DC Controller PCB to the BD PCB and the Polygon Motor 1. DC Controller PCB (J472) to Relay Connector (9P) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, LASER) 2. Relay Connector (9P) to Relay Connector (9P) 3. Relay Connector (9P) to BD PCB (J2160) and Polygon Motor (J2159) - Scanner Unit (Unit of replacement: LASER SCANNER UNIT) - Laser Driver PCB (Unit of replacement: READER CONTROLLER PCB ASSEMBLY) - DC Controller PCB (Unit of replacement: DC CONTROLLER PCB ASS'Y) [Remedy] Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared. 1. Check that all covers (Front Cover, etc.) that can be opened and closed are closed. 2. Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts. [Reference] Before replacing the DC Controller PCB, back up the service mode data (approx. 2 min) and restore the backup data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected. - Backup: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMBUP - Restoration: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMRES Scanner Motor FG unlock error



Detection Description Remedy



Locked state was not detected within the specified period of time at start-up. [Related parts] - Harness between the DC Controller PCB (UN01/J472) and the Laser Driver PCB (PCB35/J9912) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, LASER) - Harness between the DC Controller PCB (UN01/J471) and the Laser Driver PCB (PCB35/J2169) - Harnesses from the DC Controller PCB to the BD PCB and the Polygon Motor 1. DC Controller PCB (J472) to Relay Connector (9P) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, LASER) 2. Relay Connector (9P) to Relay Connector (9P) 3. Relay Connector (9P) to BD PCB (J2160) and Polygon Motor (J2159) - Scanner Unit (Unit of replacement: LASER SCANNER UNIT) - Laser Driver PCB (Unit of replacement: READER CONTROLLER PCB ASSEMBLY) - DC Controller PCB (Unit of replacement: DC CONTROLLER PCB ASS'Y) [Remedy] Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared. 1. Check that all covers (Front Cover, etc.) that can be opened and closed are closed. 2. Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts. [Reference] Before replacing the DC Controller PCB, back up the service mode data (approx. 2 min) and restore the backup data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected. - Backup: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMBUP - Restoration: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMRES



773



7. Error/Jam/Alarm E110-1241-05



Scanner Motor FG unlock error



Detection Description Remedy



E110-1242-05



Locked state was not detected within the specified period of time at start-up. [Related parts] - Harness between the DC Controller PCB (UN01/J472) and the Laser Driver PCB (PCB35/J9912) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, LASER) - Harness between the DC Controller PCB (UN01/J471) and the Laser Driver PCB (PCB35/J2169) - Harnesses from the DC Controller PCB to the BD PCB and the Polygon Motor 1. DC Controller PCB (J472) to Relay Connector (9P) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, LASER) 2. Relay Connector (9P) to Relay Connector (9P) 3. Relay Connector (9P) to BD PCB (J2160) and Polygon Motor (J2159) - Scanner Unit (Unit of replacement: LASER SCANNER UNIT) - Laser Driver PCB (Unit of replacement: READER CONTROLLER PCB ASSEMBLY) - DC Controller PCB (Unit of replacement: DC CONTROLLER PCB ASS'Y) [Remedy] Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared. 1. Check that all covers (Front Cover, etc.) that can be opened and closed are closed. 2. Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts. [Reference] Before replacing the DC Controller PCB, back up the service mode data (approx. 2 min) and restore the backup data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected. - Backup: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMBUP - Restoration: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMRES Scanner Motor FG unlock error



Detection Description Remedy



Locked state was not detected within the specified period of time at start-up. [Related parts] - Harness between the DC Controller PCB (UN01/J472) and the Laser Driver PCB (PCB35/J9912) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, LASER) - Harness between the DC Controller PCB (UN01/J471) and the Laser Driver PCB (PCB35/J2169) - Harnesses from the DC Controller PCB to the BD PCB and the Polygon Motor 1. DC Controller PCB (J472) to Relay Connector (9P) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, LASER) 2. Relay Connector (9P) to Relay Connector (9P) 3. Relay Connector (9P) to BD PCB (J2160) and Polygon Motor (J2159) - Scanner Unit (Unit of replacement: LASER SCANNER UNIT) - Laser Driver PCB (Unit of replacement: READER CONTROLLER PCB ASSEMBLY) - DC Controller PCB (Unit of replacement: DC CONTROLLER PCB ASS'Y) [Remedy] Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared. 1. Check that all covers (Front Cover, etc.) that can be opened and closed are closed. 2. Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts. [Reference] Before replacing the DC Controller PCB, back up the service mode data (approx. 2 min) and restore the backup data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected. - Backup: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMBUP - Restoration: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMRES



774



7. Error/Jam/Alarm E110-1244-05



Scanner Motor FG unlock error



Detection Description Remedy



E110-1245-05



Locked state was not detected within the specified period of time at start-up. [Related parts] - Harness between the DC Controller PCB (UN01/J472) and the Laser Driver PCB (PCB35/J9912) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, LASER) - Harness between the DC Controller PCB (UN01/J471) and the Laser Driver PCB (PCB35/J2169) - Harnesses from the DC Controller PCB to the BD PCB and the Polygon Motor 1. DC Controller PCB (J472) to Relay Connector (9P) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, LASER) 2. Relay Connector (9P) to Relay Connector (9P) 3. Relay Connector (9P) to BD PCB (J2160) and Polygon Motor (J2159) - Scanner Unit (Unit of replacement: LASER SCANNER UNIT) - Laser Driver PCB (Unit of replacement: READER CONTROLLER PCB ASSEMBLY) - DC Controller PCB (Unit of replacement: DC CONTROLLER PCB ASS'Y) [Remedy] Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared. 1. Check that all covers (Front Cover, etc.) that can be opened and closed are closed. 2. Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts. [Reference] Before replacing the DC Controller PCB, back up the service mode data (approx. 2 min) and restore the backup data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected. - Backup: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMBUP - Restoration: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMRES Scanner Motor FG unlock error



Detection Description Remedy



Locked state was not detected within the specified period of time at start-up. [Related parts] - Harness between the DC Controller PCB (UN01/J472) and the Laser Driver PCB (PCB35/J9912) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, LASER) - Harness between the DC Controller PCB (UN01/J471) and the Laser Driver PCB (PCB35/J2169) - Harnesses from the DC Controller PCB to the BD PCB and the Polygon Motor 1. DC Controller PCB (J472) to Relay Connector (9P) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, LASER) 2. Relay Connector (9P) to Relay Connector (9P) 3. Relay Connector (9P) to BD PCB (J2160) and Polygon Motor (J2159) - Scanner Unit (Unit of replacement: LASER SCANNER UNIT) - Laser Driver PCB (Unit of replacement: READER CONTROLLER PCB ASSEMBLY) - DC Controller PCB (Unit of replacement: DC CONTROLLER PCB ASS'Y) [Remedy] Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared. 1. Check that all covers (Front Cover, etc.) that can be opened and closed are closed. 2. Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts. [Reference] Before replacing the DC Controller PCB, back up the service mode data (approx. 2 min) and restore the backup data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected. - Backup: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMBUP - Restoration: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMRES



775



7. Error/Jam/Alarm E110-1247-05



Scanner Motor FG unlock error



Detection Description Remedy



E110-124F-05



Locked state was not detected within the specified period of time at start-up. [Related parts] - Harness between the DC Controller PCB (UN01/J472) and the Laser Driver PCB (PCB35/J9912) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, LASER) - Harness between the DC Controller PCB (UN01/J471) and the Laser Driver PCB (PCB35/J2169) - Harnesses from the DC Controller PCB to the BD PCB and the Polygon Motor 1. DC Controller PCB (J472) to Relay Connector (9P) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, LASER) 2. Relay Connector (9P) to Relay Connector (9P) 3. Relay Connector (9P) to BD PCB (J2160) and Polygon Motor (J2159) - Scanner Unit (Unit of replacement: LASER SCANNER UNIT) - Laser Driver PCB (Unit of replacement: READER CONTROLLER PCB ASSEMBLY) - DC Controller PCB (Unit of replacement: DC CONTROLLER PCB ASS'Y) [Remedy] Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared. 1. Check that all covers (Front Cover, etc.) that can be opened and closed are closed. 2. Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts. [Reference] Before replacing the DC Controller PCB, back up the service mode data (approx. 2 min) and restore the backup data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected. - Backup: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMBUP - Restoration: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMRES Scanner Motor FG unlock error



Detection Description Remedy



Locked state was not detected within the specified period of time at start-up. [Related parts] - Harness between the DC Controller PCB (UN01/J472) and the Laser Driver PCB (PCB35/J9912) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, LASER) - Harness between the DC Controller PCB (UN01/J471) and the Laser Driver PCB (PCB35/J2169) - Harnesses from the DC Controller PCB to the BD PCB and the Polygon Motor 1. DC Controller PCB (J472) to Relay Connector (9P) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, LASER) 2. Relay Connector (9P) to Relay Connector (9P) 3. Relay Connector (9P) to BD PCB (J2160) and Polygon Motor (J2159) - Scanner Unit (Unit of replacement: LASER SCANNER UNIT) - Laser Driver PCB (Unit of replacement: READER CONTROLLER PCB ASSEMBLY) - DC Controller PCB (Unit of replacement: DC CONTROLLER PCB ASS'Y) [Remedy] Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared. 1. Check that all covers (Front Cover, etc.) that can be opened and closed are closed. 2. Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts. [Reference] Before replacing the DC Controller PCB, back up the service mode data (approx. 2 min) and restore the backup data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected. - Backup: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMBUP - Restoration: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMRES



776



7. Error/Jam/Alarm E110-1250-05



Scanner Motor FG unlock error



Detection Description Remedy



E110-1251-05



Locked state was not detected within the specified period of time at start-up. [Related parts] - Harness between the DC Controller PCB (UN01/J472) and the Laser Driver PCB (PCB35/J9912) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, LASER) - Harness between the DC Controller PCB (UN01/J471) and the Laser Driver PCB (PCB35/J2169) - Harnesses from the DC Controller PCB to the BD PCB and the Polygon Motor 1. DC Controller PCB (J472) to Relay Connector (9P) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, LASER) 2. Relay Connector (9P) to Relay Connector (9P) 3. Relay Connector (9P) to BD PCB (J2160) and Polygon Motor (J2159) - Scanner Unit (Unit of replacement: LASER SCANNER UNIT) - Laser Driver PCB (Unit of replacement: READER CONTROLLER PCB ASSEMBLY) - DC Controller PCB (Unit of replacement: DC CONTROLLER PCB ASS'Y) [Remedy] Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared. 1. Check that all covers (Front Cover, etc.) that can be opened and closed are closed. 2. Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts. [Reference] Before replacing the DC Controller PCB, back up the service mode data (approx. 2 min) and restore the backup data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected. - Backup: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMBUP - Restoration: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMRES Scanner Motor FG unlock error



Detection Description Remedy



Locked state was not detected within the specified period of time at start-up. [Related parts] - Harness between the DC Controller PCB (UN01/J472) and the Laser Driver PCB (PCB35/J9912) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, LASER) - Harness between the DC Controller PCB (UN01/J471) and the Laser Driver PCB (PCB35/J2169) - Harnesses from the DC Controller PCB to the BD PCB and the Polygon Motor 1. DC Controller PCB (J472) to Relay Connector (9P) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, LASER) 2. Relay Connector (9P) to Relay Connector (9P) 3. Relay Connector (9P) to BD PCB (J2160) and Polygon Motor (J2159) - Scanner Unit (Unit of replacement: LASER SCANNER UNIT) - Laser Driver PCB (Unit of replacement: READER CONTROLLER PCB ASSEMBLY) - DC Controller PCB (Unit of replacement: DC CONTROLLER PCB ASS'Y) [Remedy] Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared. 1. Check that all covers (Front Cover, etc.) that can be opened and closed are closed. 2. Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts. [Reference] Before replacing the DC Controller PCB, back up the service mode data (approx. 2 min) and restore the backup data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected. - Backup: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMBUP - Restoration: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMRES



777



7. Error/Jam/Alarm E110-1252-05



Scanner Motor FG unlock error



Detection Description Remedy



E110-1254-05



Locked state was not detected within the specified period of time at start-up. [Related parts] - Harness between the DC Controller PCB (UN01/J472) and the Laser Driver PCB (PCB35/J9912) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, LASER) - Harness between the DC Controller PCB (UN01/J471) and the Laser Driver PCB (PCB35/J2169) - Harnesses from the DC Controller PCB to the BD PCB and the Polygon Motor 1. DC Controller PCB (J472) to Relay Connector (9P) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, LASER) 2. Relay Connector (9P) to Relay Connector (9P) 3. Relay Connector (9P) to BD PCB (J2160) and Polygon Motor (J2159) - Scanner Unit (Unit of replacement: LASER SCANNER UNIT) - Laser Driver PCB (Unit of replacement: READER CONTROLLER PCB ASSEMBLY) - DC Controller PCB (Unit of replacement: DC CONTROLLER PCB ASS'Y) [Remedy] Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared. 1. Check that all covers (Front Cover, etc.) that can be opened and closed are closed. 2. Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts. [Reference] Before replacing the DC Controller PCB, back up the service mode data (approx. 2 min) and restore the backup data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected. - Backup: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMBUP - Restoration: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMRES Scanner Motor FG unlock error



Detection Description Remedy



Locked state was not detected within the specified period of time at start-up. [Related parts] - Harness between the DC Controller PCB (UN01/J472) and the Laser Driver PCB (PCB35/J9912) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, LASER) - Harness between the DC Controller PCB (UN01/J471) and the Laser Driver PCB (PCB35/J2169) - Harnesses from the DC Controller PCB to the BD PCB and the Polygon Motor 1. DC Controller PCB (J472) to Relay Connector (9P) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, LASER) 2. Relay Connector (9P) to Relay Connector (9P) 3. Relay Connector (9P) to BD PCB (J2160) and Polygon Motor (J2159) - Scanner Unit (Unit of replacement: LASER SCANNER UNIT) - Laser Driver PCB (Unit of replacement: READER CONTROLLER PCB ASSEMBLY) - DC Controller PCB (Unit of replacement: DC CONTROLLER PCB ASS'Y) [Remedy] Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared. 1. Check that all covers (Front Cover, etc.) that can be opened and closed are closed. 2. Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts. [Reference] Before replacing the DC Controller PCB, back up the service mode data (approx. 2 min) and restore the backup data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected. - Backup: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMBUP - Restoration: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMRES



778



7. Error/Jam/Alarm E110-1255-05



Scanner Motor FG unlock error



Detection Description Remedy



E110-1257-05



Locked state was not detected within the specified period of time at start-up. [Related parts] - Harness between the DC Controller PCB (UN01/J472) and the Laser Driver PCB (PCB35/J9912) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, LASER) - Harness between the DC Controller PCB (UN01/J471) and the Laser Driver PCB (PCB35/J2169) - Harnesses from the DC Controller PCB to the BD PCB and the Polygon Motor 1. DC Controller PCB (J472) to Relay Connector (9P) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, LASER) 2. Relay Connector (9P) to Relay Connector (9P) 3. Relay Connector (9P) to BD PCB (J2160) and Polygon Motor (J2159) - Scanner Unit (Unit of replacement: LASER SCANNER UNIT) - Laser Driver PCB (Unit of replacement: READER CONTROLLER PCB ASSEMBLY) - DC Controller PCB (Unit of replacement: DC CONTROLLER PCB ASS'Y) [Remedy] Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared. 1. Check that all covers (Front Cover, etc.) that can be opened and closed are closed. 2. Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts. [Reference] Before replacing the DC Controller PCB, back up the service mode data (approx. 2 min) and restore the backup data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected. - Backup: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMBUP - Restoration: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMRES Scanner Motor FG unlock error



Detection Description Remedy



Locked state was not detected within the specified period of time at start-up. [Related parts] - Harness between the DC Controller PCB (UN01/J472) and the Laser Driver PCB (PCB35/J9912) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, LASER) - Harness between the DC Controller PCB (UN01/J471) and the Laser Driver PCB (PCB35/J2169) - Harnesses from the DC Controller PCB to the BD PCB and the Polygon Motor 1. DC Controller PCB (J472) to Relay Connector (9P) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, LASER) 2. Relay Connector (9P) to Relay Connector (9P) 3. Relay Connector (9P) to BD PCB (J2160) and Polygon Motor (J2159) - Scanner Unit (Unit of replacement: LASER SCANNER UNIT) - Laser Driver PCB (Unit of replacement: READER CONTROLLER PCB ASSEMBLY) - DC Controller PCB (Unit of replacement: DC CONTROLLER PCB ASS'Y) [Remedy] Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared. 1. Check that all covers (Front Cover, etc.) that can be opened and closed are closed. 2. Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts. [Reference] Before replacing the DC Controller PCB, back up the service mode data (approx. 2 min) and restore the backup data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected. - Backup: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMBUP - Restoration: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMRES



779



7. Error/Jam/Alarm E110-125F-05



Scanner Motor FG unlock error



Detection Description Remedy



E110-1260-05



Locked state was not detected within the specified period of time at start-up. [Related parts] - Harness between the DC Controller PCB (UN01/J472) and the Laser Driver PCB (PCB35/J9912) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, LASER) - Harness between the DC Controller PCB (UN01/J471) and the Laser Driver PCB (PCB35/J2169) - Harnesses from the DC Controller PCB to the BD PCB and the Polygon Motor 1. DC Controller PCB (J472) to Relay Connector (9P) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, LASER) 2. Relay Connector (9P) to Relay Connector (9P) 3. Relay Connector (9P) to BD PCB (J2160) and Polygon Motor (J2159) - Scanner Unit (Unit of replacement: LASER SCANNER UNIT) - Laser Driver PCB (Unit of replacement: READER CONTROLLER PCB ASSEMBLY) - DC Controller PCB (Unit of replacement: DC CONTROLLER PCB ASS'Y) [Remedy] Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared. 1. Check that all covers (Front Cover, etc.) that can be opened and closed are closed. 2. Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts. [Reference] Before replacing the DC Controller PCB, back up the service mode data (approx. 2 min) and restore the backup data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected. - Backup: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMBUP - Restoration: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMRES Scanner Motor FG unlock error



Detection Description Remedy



Locked state was not detected within the specified period of time at start-up. [Related parts] - Harness between the DC Controller PCB (UN01/J472) and the Laser Driver PCB (PCB35/J9912) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, LASER) - Harness between the DC Controller PCB (UN01/J471) and the Laser Driver PCB (PCB35/J2169) - Harnesses from the DC Controller PCB to the BD PCB and the Polygon Motor 1. DC Controller PCB (J472) to Relay Connector (9P) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, LASER) 2. Relay Connector (9P) to Relay Connector (9P) 3. Relay Connector (9P) to BD PCB (J2160) and Polygon Motor (J2159) - Scanner Unit (Unit of replacement: LASER SCANNER UNIT) - Laser Driver PCB (Unit of replacement: READER CONTROLLER PCB ASSEMBLY) - DC Controller PCB (Unit of replacement: DC CONTROLLER PCB ASS'Y) [Remedy] Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared. 1. Check that all covers (Front Cover, etc.) that can be opened and closed are closed. 2. Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts. [Reference] Before replacing the DC Controller PCB, back up the service mode data (approx. 2 min) and restore the backup data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected. - Backup: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMBUP - Restoration: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMRES



780



7. Error/Jam/Alarm E110-1261-05



Scanner Motor FG unlock error



Detection Description Remedy



E110-1262-05



Locked state was not detected within the specified period of time at start-up. [Related parts] - Harness between the DC Controller PCB (UN01/J472) and the Laser Driver PCB (PCB35/J9912) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, LASER) - Harness between the DC Controller PCB (UN01/J471) and the Laser Driver PCB (PCB35/J2169) - Harnesses from the DC Controller PCB to the BD PCB and the Polygon Motor 1. DC Controller PCB (J472) to Relay Connector (9P) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, LASER) 2. Relay Connector (9P) to Relay Connector (9P) 3. Relay Connector (9P) to BD PCB (J2160) and Polygon Motor (J2159) - Scanner Unit (Unit of replacement: LASER SCANNER UNIT) - Laser Driver PCB (Unit of replacement: READER CONTROLLER PCB ASSEMBLY) - DC Controller PCB (Unit of replacement: DC CONTROLLER PCB ASS'Y) [Remedy] Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared. 1. Check that all covers (Front Cover, etc.) that can be opened and closed are closed. 2. Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts. [Reference] Before replacing the DC Controller PCB, back up the service mode data (approx. 2 min) and restore the backup data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected. - Backup: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMBUP - Restoration: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMRES Scanner Motor FG unlock error



Detection Description Remedy



Locked state was not detected within the specified period of time at start-up. [Related parts] - Harness between the DC Controller PCB (UN01/J472) and the Laser Driver PCB (PCB35/J9912) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, LASER) - Harness between the DC Controller PCB (UN01/J471) and the Laser Driver PCB (PCB35/J2169) - Harnesses from the DC Controller PCB to the BD PCB and the Polygon Motor 1. DC Controller PCB (J472) to Relay Connector (9P) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, LASER) 2. Relay Connector (9P) to Relay Connector (9P) 3. Relay Connector (9P) to BD PCB (J2160) and Polygon Motor (J2159) - Scanner Unit (Unit of replacement: LASER SCANNER UNIT) - Laser Driver PCB (Unit of replacement: READER CONTROLLER PCB ASSEMBLY) - DC Controller PCB (Unit of replacement: DC CONTROLLER PCB ASS'Y) [Remedy] Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared. 1. Check that all covers (Front Cover, etc.) that can be opened and closed are closed. 2. Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts. [Reference] Before replacing the DC Controller PCB, back up the service mode data (approx. 2 min) and restore the backup data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected. - Backup: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMBUP - Restoration: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMRES



781



7. Error/Jam/Alarm E110-1264-05



Scanner Motor FG unlock error



Detection Description Remedy



E110-1265-05



Locked state was not detected within the specified period of time at start-up. [Related parts] - Harness between the DC Controller PCB (UN01/J472) and the Laser Driver PCB (PCB35/J9912) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, LASER) - Harness between the DC Controller PCB (UN01/J471) and the Laser Driver PCB (PCB35/J2169) - Harnesses from the DC Controller PCB to the BD PCB and the Polygon Motor 1. DC Controller PCB (J472) to Relay Connector (9P) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, LASER) 2. Relay Connector (9P) to Relay Connector (9P) 3. Relay Connector (9P) to BD PCB (J2160) and Polygon Motor (J2159) - Scanner Unit (Unit of replacement: LASER SCANNER UNIT) - Laser Driver PCB (Unit of replacement: READER CONTROLLER PCB ASSEMBLY) - DC Controller PCB (Unit of replacement: DC CONTROLLER PCB ASS'Y) [Remedy] Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared. 1. Check that all covers (Front Cover, etc.) that can be opened and closed are closed. 2. Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts. [Reference] Before replacing the DC Controller PCB, back up the service mode data (approx. 2 min) and restore the backup data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected. - Backup: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMBUP - Restoration: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMRES Scanner Motor FG unlock error



Detection Description Remedy



Locked state was not detected within the specified period of time at start-up. [Related parts] - Harness between the DC Controller PCB (UN01/J472) and the Laser Driver PCB (PCB35/J9912) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, LASER) - Harness between the DC Controller PCB (UN01/J471) and the Laser Driver PCB (PCB35/J2169) - Harnesses from the DC Controller PCB to the BD PCB and the Polygon Motor 1. DC Controller PCB (J472) to Relay Connector (9P) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, LASER) 2. Relay Connector (9P) to Relay Connector (9P) 3. Relay Connector (9P) to BD PCB (J2160) and Polygon Motor (J2159) - Scanner Unit (Unit of replacement: LASER SCANNER UNIT) - Laser Driver PCB (Unit of replacement: READER CONTROLLER PCB ASSEMBLY) - DC Controller PCB (Unit of replacement: DC CONTROLLER PCB ASS'Y) [Remedy] Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared. 1. Check that all covers (Front Cover, etc.) that can be opened and closed are closed. 2. Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts. [Reference] Before replacing the DC Controller PCB, back up the service mode data (approx. 2 min) and restore the backup data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected. - Backup: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMBUP - Restoration: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMRES



782



7. Error/Jam/Alarm E110-1267-05



Scanner Motor FG unlock error



Detection Description Remedy



E110-126F-05



Locked state was not detected within the specified period of time at start-up. [Related parts] - Harness between the DC Controller PCB (UN01/J472) and the Laser Driver PCB (PCB35/J9912) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, LASER) - Harness between the DC Controller PCB (UN01/J471) and the Laser Driver PCB (PCB35/J2169) - Harnesses from the DC Controller PCB to the BD PCB and the Polygon Motor 1. DC Controller PCB (J472) to Relay Connector (9P) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, LASER) 2. Relay Connector (9P) to Relay Connector (9P) 3. Relay Connector (9P) to BD PCB (J2160) and Polygon Motor (J2159) - Scanner Unit (Unit of replacement: LASER SCANNER UNIT) - Laser Driver PCB (Unit of replacement: READER CONTROLLER PCB ASSEMBLY) - DC Controller PCB (Unit of replacement: DC CONTROLLER PCB ASS'Y) [Remedy] Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared. 1. Check that all covers (Front Cover, etc.) that can be opened and closed are closed. 2. Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts. [Reference] Before replacing the DC Controller PCB, back up the service mode data (approx. 2 min) and restore the backup data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected. - Backup: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMBUP - Restoration: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMRES Scanner Motor FG unlock error



Detection Description Remedy



Locked state was not detected within the specified period of time at start-up. [Related parts] - Harness between the DC Controller PCB (UN01/J472) and the Laser Driver PCB (PCB35/J9912) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, LASER) - Harness between the DC Controller PCB (UN01/J471) and the Laser Driver PCB (PCB35/J2169) - Harnesses from the DC Controller PCB to the BD PCB and the Polygon Motor 1. DC Controller PCB (J472) to Relay Connector (9P) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, LASER) 2. Relay Connector (9P) to Relay Connector (9P) 3. Relay Connector (9P) to BD PCB (J2160) and Polygon Motor (J2159) - Scanner Unit (Unit of replacement: LASER SCANNER UNIT) - Laser Driver PCB (Unit of replacement: READER CONTROLLER PCB ASSEMBLY) - DC Controller PCB (Unit of replacement: DC CONTROLLER PCB ASS'Y) [Remedy] Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared. 1. Check that all covers (Front Cover, etc.) that can be opened and closed are closed. 2. Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts. [Reference] Before replacing the DC Controller PCB, back up the service mode data (approx. 2 min) and restore the backup data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected. - Backup: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMBUP - Restoration: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMRES



783



7. Error/Jam/Alarm E110-12F0-05



Scanner Motor FG unlock error



Detection Description Remedy



E110-12F1-05



Locked state was not detected within the specified period of time at start-up. [Related parts] - Harness between the DC Controller PCB (UN01/J472) and the Laser Driver PCB (PCB35/J9912) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, LASER) - Harness between the DC Controller PCB (UN01/J471) and the Laser Driver PCB (PCB35/J2169) - Harnesses from the DC Controller PCB to the BD PCB and the Polygon Motor 1. DC Controller PCB (J472) to Relay Connector (9P) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, LASER) 2. Relay Connector (9P) to Relay Connector (9P) 3. Relay Connector (9P) to BD PCB (J2160) and Polygon Motor (J2159) - Scanner Unit (Unit of replacement: LASER SCANNER UNIT) - Laser Driver PCB (Unit of replacement: READER CONTROLLER PCB ASSEMBLY) - DC Controller PCB (Unit of replacement: DC CONTROLLER PCB ASS'Y) [Remedy] Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared. 1. Check that all covers (Front Cover, etc.) that can be opened and closed are closed. 2. Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts. [Reference] Before replacing the DC Controller PCB, back up the service mode data (approx. 2 min) and restore the backup data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected. - Backup: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMBUP - Restoration: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMRES Scanner Motor FG unlock error



Detection Description Remedy



Locked state was not detected within the specified period of time at start-up. [Related parts] - Harness between the DC Controller PCB (UN01/J472) and the Laser Driver PCB (PCB35/J9912) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, LASER) - Harness between the DC Controller PCB (UN01/J471) and the Laser Driver PCB (PCB35/J2169) - Harnesses from the DC Controller PCB to the BD PCB and the Polygon Motor 1. DC Controller PCB (J472) to Relay Connector (9P) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, LASER) 2. Relay Connector (9P) to Relay Connector (9P) 3. Relay Connector (9P) to BD PCB (J2160) and Polygon Motor (J2159) - Scanner Unit (Unit of replacement: LASER SCANNER UNIT) - Laser Driver PCB (Unit of replacement: READER CONTROLLER PCB ASSEMBLY) - DC Controller PCB (Unit of replacement: DC CONTROLLER PCB ASS'Y) [Remedy] Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared. 1. Check that all covers (Front Cover, etc.) that can be opened and closed are closed. 2. Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts. [Reference] Before replacing the DC Controller PCB, back up the service mode data (approx. 2 min) and restore the backup data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected. - Backup: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMBUP - Restoration: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMRES



784



7. Error/Jam/Alarm E110-12F2-05



Scanner Motor FG unlock error



Detection Description Remedy



E110-12F4-05



Locked state was not detected within the specified period of time at start-up. [Related parts] - Harness between the DC Controller PCB (UN01/J472) and the Laser Driver PCB (PCB35/J9912) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, LASER) - Harness between the DC Controller PCB (UN01/J471) and the Laser Driver PCB (PCB35/J2169) - Harnesses from the DC Controller PCB to the BD PCB and the Polygon Motor 1. DC Controller PCB (J472) to Relay Connector (9P) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, LASER) 2. Relay Connector (9P) to Relay Connector (9P) 3. Relay Connector (9P) to BD PCB (J2160) and Polygon Motor (J2159) - Scanner Unit (Unit of replacement: LASER SCANNER UNIT) - Laser Driver PCB (Unit of replacement: READER CONTROLLER PCB ASSEMBLY) - DC Controller PCB (Unit of replacement: DC CONTROLLER PCB ASS'Y) [Remedy] Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared. 1. Check that all covers (Front Cover, etc.) that can be opened and closed are closed. 2. Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts. [Reference] Before replacing the DC Controller PCB, back up the service mode data (approx. 2 min) and restore the backup data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected. - Backup: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMBUP - Restoration: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMRES Scanner Motor FG unlock error



Detection Description Remedy



Locked state was not detected within the specified period of time at start-up. [Related parts] - Harness between the DC Controller PCB (UN01/J472) and the Laser Driver PCB (PCB35/J9912) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, LASER) - Harness between the DC Controller PCB (UN01/J471) and the Laser Driver PCB (PCB35/J2169) - Harnesses from the DC Controller PCB to the BD PCB and the Polygon Motor 1. DC Controller PCB (J472) to Relay Connector (9P) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, LASER) 2. Relay Connector (9P) to Relay Connector (9P) 3. Relay Connector (9P) to BD PCB (J2160) and Polygon Motor (J2159) - Scanner Unit (Unit of replacement: LASER SCANNER UNIT) - Laser Driver PCB (Unit of replacement: READER CONTROLLER PCB ASSEMBLY) - DC Controller PCB (Unit of replacement: DC CONTROLLER PCB ASS'Y) [Remedy] Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared. 1. Check that all covers (Front Cover, etc.) that can be opened and closed are closed. 2. Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts. [Reference] Before replacing the DC Controller PCB, back up the service mode data (approx. 2 min) and restore the backup data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected. - Backup: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMBUP - Restoration: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMRES



785



7. Error/Jam/Alarm E110-12F5-05



Scanner Motor FG unlock error



Detection Description Remedy



E110-12F7-05



Locked state was not detected within the specified period of time at start-up. [Related parts] - Harness between the DC Controller PCB (UN01/J472) and the Laser Driver PCB (PCB35/J9912) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, LASER) - Harness between the DC Controller PCB (UN01/J471) and the Laser Driver PCB (PCB35/J2169) - Harnesses from the DC Controller PCB to the BD PCB and the Polygon Motor 1. DC Controller PCB (J472) to Relay Connector (9P) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, LASER) 2. Relay Connector (9P) to Relay Connector (9P) 3. Relay Connector (9P) to BD PCB (J2160) and Polygon Motor (J2159) - Scanner Unit (Unit of replacement: LASER SCANNER UNIT) - Laser Driver PCB (Unit of replacement: READER CONTROLLER PCB ASSEMBLY) - DC Controller PCB (Unit of replacement: DC CONTROLLER PCB ASS'Y) [Remedy] Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared. 1. Check that all covers (Front Cover, etc.) that can be opened and closed are closed. 2. Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts. [Reference] Before replacing the DC Controller PCB, back up the service mode data (approx. 2 min) and restore the backup data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected. - Backup: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMBUP - Restoration: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMRES Scanner Motor FG unlock error



Detection Description Remedy



Locked state was not detected within the specified period of time at start-up. [Related parts] - Harness between the DC Controller PCB (UN01/J472) and the Laser Driver PCB (PCB35/J9912) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, LASER) - Harness between the DC Controller PCB (UN01/J471) and the Laser Driver PCB (PCB35/J2169) - Harnesses from the DC Controller PCB to the BD PCB and the Polygon Motor 1. DC Controller PCB (J472) to Relay Connector (9P) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, LASER) 2. Relay Connector (9P) to Relay Connector (9P) 3. Relay Connector (9P) to BD PCB (J2160) and Polygon Motor (J2159) - Scanner Unit (Unit of replacement: LASER SCANNER UNIT) - Laser Driver PCB (Unit of replacement: READER CONTROLLER PCB ASSEMBLY) - DC Controller PCB (Unit of replacement: DC CONTROLLER PCB ASS'Y) [Remedy] Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared. 1. Check that all covers (Front Cover, etc.) that can be opened and closed are closed. 2. Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts. [Reference] Before replacing the DC Controller PCB, back up the service mode data (approx. 2 min) and restore the backup data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected. - Backup: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMBUP - Restoration: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMRES



786



7. Error/Jam/Alarm E110-12FF-05



Scanner Motor FG unlock error



Detection Description Remedy



E110-1300-05



Locked state was not detected within the specified period of time at start-up. [Related parts] - Harness between the DC Controller PCB (UN01/J472) and the Laser Driver PCB (PCB35/J9912) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, LASER) - Harness between the DC Controller PCB (UN01/J471) and the Laser Driver PCB (PCB35/J2169) - Harnesses from the DC Controller PCB to the BD PCB and the Polygon Motor 1. DC Controller PCB (J472) to Relay Connector (9P) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, LASER) 2. Relay Connector (9P) to Relay Connector (9P) 3. Relay Connector (9P) to BD PCB (J2160) and Polygon Motor (J2159) - Scanner Unit (Unit of replacement: LASER SCANNER UNIT) - Laser Driver PCB (Unit of replacement: READER CONTROLLER PCB ASSEMBLY) - DC Controller PCB (Unit of replacement: DC CONTROLLER PCB ASS'Y) [Remedy] Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared. 1. Check that all covers (Front Cover, etc.) that can be opened and closed are closed. 2. Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts. [Reference] Before replacing the DC Controller PCB, back up the service mode data (approx. 2 min) and restore the backup data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected. - Backup: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMBUP - Restoration: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMRES Scanner Motor FG unlock error



Detection Description Remedy



Locked state was not detected within the specified period of time at start-up. [Related parts] - Harness between the DC Controller PCB (UN01/J472) and the Laser Driver PCB (PCB35/J9912) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, LASER) - Harness between the DC Controller PCB (UN01/J471) and the Laser Driver PCB (PCB35/J2169) - Harnesses from the DC Controller PCB to the BD PCB and the Polygon Motor 1. DC Controller PCB (J472) to Relay Connector (9P) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, LASER) 2. Relay Connector (9P) to Relay Connector (9P) 3. Relay Connector (9P) to BD PCB (J2160) and Polygon Motor (J2159) - Scanner Unit (Unit of replacement: LASER SCANNER UNIT) - Laser Driver PCB (Unit of replacement: READER CONTROLLER PCB ASSEMBLY) - DC Controller PCB (Unit of replacement: DC CONTROLLER PCB ASS'Y) [Remedy] Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared. 1. Check that all covers (Front Cover, etc.) that can be opened and closed are closed. 2. Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts. [Reference] Before replacing the DC Controller PCB, back up the service mode data (approx. 2 min) and restore the backup data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected. - Backup: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMBUP - Restoration: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMRES



787



7. Error/Jam/Alarm E110-1301-05



Scanner Motor FG unlock error



Detection Description Remedy



E110-1302-05



Locked state was not detected within the specified period of time at start-up. [Related parts] - Harness between the DC Controller PCB (UN01/J472) and the Laser Driver PCB (PCB35/J9912) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, LASER) - Harness between the DC Controller PCB (UN01/J471) and the Laser Driver PCB (PCB35/J2169) - Harnesses from the DC Controller PCB to the BD PCB and the Polygon Motor 1. DC Controller PCB (J472) to Relay Connector (9P) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, LASER) 2. Relay Connector (9P) to Relay Connector (9P) 3. Relay Connector (9P) to BD PCB (J2160) and Polygon Motor (J2159) - Scanner Unit (Unit of replacement: LASER SCANNER UNIT) - Laser Driver PCB (Unit of replacement: READER CONTROLLER PCB ASSEMBLY) - DC Controller PCB (Unit of replacement: DC CONTROLLER PCB ASS'Y) [Remedy] Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared. 1. Check that all covers (Front Cover, etc.) that can be opened and closed are closed. 2. Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts. [Reference] Before replacing the DC Controller PCB, back up the service mode data (approx. 2 min) and restore the backup data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected. - Backup: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMBUP - Restoration: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMRES Scanner Motor FG unlock error



Detection Description Remedy



Locked state was not detected within the specified period of time at start-up. [Related parts] - Harness between the DC Controller PCB (UN01/J472) and the Laser Driver PCB (PCB35/J9912) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, LASER) - Harness between the DC Controller PCB (UN01/J471) and the Laser Driver PCB (PCB35/J2169) - Harnesses from the DC Controller PCB to the BD PCB and the Polygon Motor 1. DC Controller PCB (J472) to Relay Connector (9P) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, LASER) 2. Relay Connector (9P) to Relay Connector (9P) 3. Relay Connector (9P) to BD PCB (J2160) and Polygon Motor (J2159) - Scanner Unit (Unit of replacement: LASER SCANNER UNIT) - Laser Driver PCB (Unit of replacement: READER CONTROLLER PCB ASSEMBLY) - DC Controller PCB (Unit of replacement: DC CONTROLLER PCB ASS'Y) [Remedy] Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared. 1. Check that all covers (Front Cover, etc.) that can be opened and closed are closed. 2. Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts. [Reference] Before replacing the DC Controller PCB, back up the service mode data (approx. 2 min) and restore the backup data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected. - Backup: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMBUP - Restoration: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMRES



788



7. Error/Jam/Alarm E110-1304-05



Scanner Motor FG unlock error



Detection Description Remedy



E110-1305-05



Locked state was not detected within the specified period of time at start-up. [Related parts] - Harness between the DC Controller PCB (UN01/J472) and the Laser Driver PCB (PCB35/J9912) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, LASER) - Harness between the DC Controller PCB (UN01/J471) and the Laser Driver PCB (PCB35/J2169) - Harnesses from the DC Controller PCB to the BD PCB and the Polygon Motor 1. DC Controller PCB (J472) to Relay Connector (9P) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, LASER) 2. Relay Connector (9P) to Relay Connector (9P) 3. Relay Connector (9P) to BD PCB (J2160) and Polygon Motor (J2159) - Scanner Unit (Unit of replacement: LASER SCANNER UNIT) - Laser Driver PCB (Unit of replacement: READER CONTROLLER PCB ASSEMBLY) - DC Controller PCB (Unit of replacement: DC CONTROLLER PCB ASS'Y) [Remedy] Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared. 1. Check that all covers (Front Cover, etc.) that can be opened and closed are closed. 2. Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts. [Reference] Before replacing the DC Controller PCB, back up the service mode data (approx. 2 min) and restore the backup data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected. - Backup: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMBUP - Restoration: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMRES Scanner Motor FG unlock error



Detection Description Remedy



Locked state was not detected within the specified period of time at start-up. [Related parts] - Harness between the DC Controller PCB (UN01/J472) and the Laser Driver PCB (PCB35/J9912) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, LASER) - Harness between the DC Controller PCB (UN01/J471) and the Laser Driver PCB (PCB35/J2169) - Harnesses from the DC Controller PCB to the BD PCB and the Polygon Motor 1. DC Controller PCB (J472) to Relay Connector (9P) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, LASER) 2. Relay Connector (9P) to Relay Connector (9P) 3. Relay Connector (9P) to BD PCB (J2160) and Polygon Motor (J2159) - Scanner Unit (Unit of replacement: LASER SCANNER UNIT) - Laser Driver PCB (Unit of replacement: READER CONTROLLER PCB ASSEMBLY) - DC Controller PCB (Unit of replacement: DC CONTROLLER PCB ASS'Y) [Remedy] Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared. 1. Check that all covers (Front Cover, etc.) that can be opened and closed are closed. 2. Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts. [Reference] Before replacing the DC Controller PCB, back up the service mode data (approx. 2 min) and restore the backup data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected. - Backup: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMBUP - Restoration: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMRES



789



7. Error/Jam/Alarm E110-1307-05



Scanner Motor FG unlock error



Detection Description Remedy



E110-130F-05



Locked state was not detected within the specified period of time at start-up. [Related parts] - Harness between the DC Controller PCB (UN01/J472) and the Laser Driver PCB (PCB35/J9912) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, LASER) - Harness between the DC Controller PCB (UN01/J471) and the Laser Driver PCB (PCB35/J2169) - Harnesses from the DC Controller PCB to the BD PCB and the Polygon Motor 1. DC Controller PCB (J472) to Relay Connector (9P) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, LASER) 2. Relay Connector (9P) to Relay Connector (9P) 3. Relay Connector (9P) to BD PCB (J2160) and Polygon Motor (J2159) - Scanner Unit (Unit of replacement: LASER SCANNER UNIT) - Laser Driver PCB (Unit of replacement: READER CONTROLLER PCB ASSEMBLY) - DC Controller PCB (Unit of replacement: DC CONTROLLER PCB ASS'Y) [Remedy] Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared. 1. Check that all covers (Front Cover, etc.) that can be opened and closed are closed. 2. Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts. [Reference] Before replacing the DC Controller PCB, back up the service mode data (approx. 2 min) and restore the backup data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected. - Backup: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMBUP - Restoration: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMRES Scanner Motor FG unlock error



Detection Description Remedy



Locked state was not detected within the specified period of time at start-up. [Related parts] - Harness between the DC Controller PCB (UN01/J472) and the Laser Driver PCB (PCB35/J9912) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, LASER) - Harness between the DC Controller PCB (UN01/J471) and the Laser Driver PCB (PCB35/J2169) - Harnesses from the DC Controller PCB to the BD PCB and the Polygon Motor 1. DC Controller PCB (J472) to Relay Connector (9P) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, LASER) 2. Relay Connector (9P) to Relay Connector (9P) 3. Relay Connector (9P) to BD PCB (J2160) and Polygon Motor (J2159) - Scanner Unit (Unit of replacement: LASER SCANNER UNIT) - Laser Driver PCB (Unit of replacement: READER CONTROLLER PCB ASSEMBLY) - DC Controller PCB (Unit of replacement: DC CONTROLLER PCB ASS'Y) [Remedy] Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared. 1. Check that all covers (Front Cover, etc.) that can be opened and closed are closed. 2. Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts. [Reference] Before replacing the DC Controller PCB, back up the service mode data (approx. 2 min) and restore the backup data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected. - Backup: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMBUP - Restoration: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMRES



790



7. Error/Jam/Alarm E110-1310-05



Scanner Motor FG unlock error



Detection Description Remedy



E110-1311-05



Locked state was not detected within the specified period of time at start-up. [Related parts] - Harness between the DC Controller PCB (UN01/J472) and the Laser Driver PCB (PCB35/J9912) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, LASER) - Harness between the DC Controller PCB (UN01/J471) and the Laser Driver PCB (PCB35/J2169) - Harnesses from the DC Controller PCB to the BD PCB and the Polygon Motor 1. DC Controller PCB (J472) to Relay Connector (9P) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, LASER) 2. Relay Connector (9P) to Relay Connector (9P) 3. Relay Connector (9P) to BD PCB (J2160) and Polygon Motor (J2159) - Scanner Unit (Unit of replacement: LASER SCANNER UNIT) - Laser Driver PCB (Unit of replacement: READER CONTROLLER PCB ASSEMBLY) - DC Controller PCB (Unit of replacement: DC CONTROLLER PCB ASS'Y) [Remedy] Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared. 1. Check that all covers (Front Cover, etc.) that can be opened and closed are closed. 2. Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts. [Reference] Before replacing the DC Controller PCB, back up the service mode data (approx. 2 min) and restore the backup data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected. - Backup: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMBUP - Restoration: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMRES Scanner Motor FG unlock error



Detection Description Remedy



Locked state was not detected within the specified period of time at start-up. [Related parts] - Harness between the DC Controller PCB (UN01/J472) and the Laser Driver PCB (PCB35/J9912) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, LASER) - Harness between the DC Controller PCB (UN01/J471) and the Laser Driver PCB (PCB35/J2169) - Harnesses from the DC Controller PCB to the BD PCB and the Polygon Motor 1. DC Controller PCB (J472) to Relay Connector (9P) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, LASER) 2. Relay Connector (9P) to Relay Connector (9P) 3. Relay Connector (9P) to BD PCB (J2160) and Polygon Motor (J2159) - Scanner Unit (Unit of replacement: LASER SCANNER UNIT) - Laser Driver PCB (Unit of replacement: READER CONTROLLER PCB ASSEMBLY) - DC Controller PCB (Unit of replacement: DC CONTROLLER PCB ASS'Y) [Remedy] Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared. 1. Check that all covers (Front Cover, etc.) that can be opened and closed are closed. 2. Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts. [Reference] Before replacing the DC Controller PCB, back up the service mode data (approx. 2 min) and restore the backup data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected. - Backup: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMBUP - Restoration: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMRES



791



7. Error/Jam/Alarm E110-1312-05



Scanner Motor FG unlock error



Detection Description Remedy



E110-1314-05



Locked state was not detected within the specified period of time at start-up. [Related parts] - Harness between the DC Controller PCB (UN01/J472) and the Laser Driver PCB (PCB35/J9912) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, LASER) - Harness between the DC Controller PCB (UN01/J471) and the Laser Driver PCB (PCB35/J2169) - Harnesses from the DC Controller PCB to the BD PCB and the Polygon Motor 1. DC Controller PCB (J472) to Relay Connector (9P) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, LASER) 2. Relay Connector (9P) to Relay Connector (9P) 3. Relay Connector (9P) to BD PCB (J2160) and Polygon Motor (J2159) - Scanner Unit (Unit of replacement: LASER SCANNER UNIT) - Laser Driver PCB (Unit of replacement: READER CONTROLLER PCB ASSEMBLY) - DC Controller PCB (Unit of replacement: DC CONTROLLER PCB ASS'Y) [Remedy] Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared. 1. Check that all covers (Front Cover, etc.) that can be opened and closed are closed. 2. Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts. [Reference] Before replacing the DC Controller PCB, back up the service mode data (approx. 2 min) and restore the backup data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected. - Backup: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMBUP - Restoration: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMRES Scanner Motor FG unlock error



Detection Description Remedy



Locked state was not detected within the specified period of time at start-up. [Related parts] - Harness between the DC Controller PCB (UN01/J472) and the Laser Driver PCB (PCB35/J9912) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, LASER) - Harness between the DC Controller PCB (UN01/J471) and the Laser Driver PCB (PCB35/J2169) - Harnesses from the DC Controller PCB to the BD PCB and the Polygon Motor 1. DC Controller PCB (J472) to Relay Connector (9P) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, LASER) 2. Relay Connector (9P) to Relay Connector (9P) 3. Relay Connector (9P) to BD PCB (J2160) and Polygon Motor (J2159) - Scanner Unit (Unit of replacement: LASER SCANNER UNIT) - Laser Driver PCB (Unit of replacement: READER CONTROLLER PCB ASSEMBLY) - DC Controller PCB (Unit of replacement: DC CONTROLLER PCB ASS'Y) [Remedy] Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared. 1. Check that all covers (Front Cover, etc.) that can be opened and closed are closed. 2. Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts. [Reference] Before replacing the DC Controller PCB, back up the service mode data (approx. 2 min) and restore the backup data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected. - Backup: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMBUP - Restoration: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMRES



792



7. Error/Jam/Alarm E110-1315-05



Scanner Motor FG unlock error



Detection Description Remedy



E110-1317-05



Locked state was not detected within the specified period of time at start-up. [Related parts] - Harness between the DC Controller PCB (UN01/J472) and the Laser Driver PCB (PCB35/J9912) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, LASER) - Harness between the DC Controller PCB (UN01/J471) and the Laser Driver PCB (PCB35/J2169) - Harnesses from the DC Controller PCB to the BD PCB and the Polygon Motor 1. DC Controller PCB (J472) to Relay Connector (9P) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, LASER) 2. Relay Connector (9P) to Relay Connector (9P) 3. Relay Connector (9P) to BD PCB (J2160) and Polygon Motor (J2159) - Scanner Unit (Unit of replacement: LASER SCANNER UNIT) - Laser Driver PCB (Unit of replacement: READER CONTROLLER PCB ASSEMBLY) - DC Controller PCB (Unit of replacement: DC CONTROLLER PCB ASS'Y) [Remedy] Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared. 1. Check that all covers (Front Cover, etc.) that can be opened and closed are closed. 2. Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts. [Reference] Before replacing the DC Controller PCB, back up the service mode data (approx. 2 min) and restore the backup data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected. - Backup: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMBUP - Restoration: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMRES Scanner Motor FG unlock error



Detection Description Remedy



Locked state was not detected within the specified period of time at start-up. [Related parts] - Harness between the DC Controller PCB (UN01/J472) and the Laser Driver PCB (PCB35/J9912) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, LASER) - Harness between the DC Controller PCB (UN01/J471) and the Laser Driver PCB (PCB35/J2169) - Harnesses from the DC Controller PCB to the BD PCB and the Polygon Motor 1. DC Controller PCB (J472) to Relay Connector (9P) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, LASER) 2. Relay Connector (9P) to Relay Connector (9P) 3. Relay Connector (9P) to BD PCB (J2160) and Polygon Motor (J2159) - Scanner Unit (Unit of replacement: LASER SCANNER UNIT) - Laser Driver PCB (Unit of replacement: READER CONTROLLER PCB ASSEMBLY) - DC Controller PCB (Unit of replacement: DC CONTROLLER PCB ASS'Y) [Remedy] Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared. 1. Check that all covers (Front Cover, etc.) that can be opened and closed are closed. 2. Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts. [Reference] Before replacing the DC Controller PCB, back up the service mode data (approx. 2 min) and restore the backup data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected. - Backup: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMBUP - Restoration: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMRES



793



7. Error/Jam/Alarm E110-131F-05



Scanner Motor FG unlock error



Detection Description Remedy



E110-1320-05



Locked state was not detected within the specified period of time at start-up. [Related parts] - Harness between the DC Controller PCB (UN01/J472) and the Laser Driver PCB (PCB35/J9912) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, LASER) - Harness between the DC Controller PCB (UN01/J471) and the Laser Driver PCB (PCB35/J2169) - Harnesses from the DC Controller PCB to the BD PCB and the Polygon Motor 1. DC Controller PCB (J472) to Relay Connector (9P) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, LASER) 2. Relay Connector (9P) to Relay Connector (9P) 3. Relay Connector (9P) to BD PCB (J2160) and Polygon Motor (J2159) - Scanner Unit (Unit of replacement: LASER SCANNER UNIT) - Laser Driver PCB (Unit of replacement: READER CONTROLLER PCB ASSEMBLY) - DC Controller PCB (Unit of replacement: DC CONTROLLER PCB ASS'Y) [Remedy] Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared. 1. Check that all covers (Front Cover, etc.) that can be opened and closed are closed. 2. Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts. [Reference] Before replacing the DC Controller PCB, back up the service mode data (approx. 2 min) and restore the backup data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected. - Backup: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMBUP - Restoration: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMRES Scanner Motor FG unlock error



Detection Description Remedy



Locked state was not detected within the specified period of time at start-up. [Related parts] - Harness between the DC Controller PCB (UN01/J472) and the Laser Driver PCB (PCB35/J9912) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, LASER) - Harness between the DC Controller PCB (UN01/J471) and the Laser Driver PCB (PCB35/J2169) - Harnesses from the DC Controller PCB to the BD PCB and the Polygon Motor 1. DC Controller PCB (J472) to Relay Connector (9P) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, LASER) 2. Relay Connector (9P) to Relay Connector (9P) 3. Relay Connector (9P) to BD PCB (J2160) and Polygon Motor (J2159) - Scanner Unit (Unit of replacement: LASER SCANNER UNIT) - Laser Driver PCB (Unit of replacement: READER CONTROLLER PCB ASSEMBLY) - DC Controller PCB (Unit of replacement: DC CONTROLLER PCB ASS'Y) [Remedy] Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared. 1. Check that all covers (Front Cover, etc.) that can be opened and closed are closed. 2. Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts. [Reference] Before replacing the DC Controller PCB, back up the service mode data (approx. 2 min) and restore the backup data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected. - Backup: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMBUP - Restoration: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMRES



794



7. Error/Jam/Alarm E110-1321-05



Scanner Motor FG unlock error



Detection Description Remedy



E110-1324-05



Locked state was not detected within the specified period of time at start-up. [Related parts] - Harness between the DC Controller PCB (UN01/J472) and the Laser Driver PCB (PCB35/J9912) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, LASER) - Harness between the DC Controller PCB (UN01/J471) and the Laser Driver PCB (PCB35/J2169) - Harnesses from the DC Controller PCB to the BD PCB and the Polygon Motor 1. DC Controller PCB (J472) to Relay Connector (9P) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, LASER) 2. Relay Connector (9P) to Relay Connector (9P) 3. Relay Connector (9P) to BD PCB (J2160) and Polygon Motor (J2159) - Scanner Unit (Unit of replacement: LASER SCANNER UNIT) - Laser Driver PCB (Unit of replacement: READER CONTROLLER PCB ASSEMBLY) - DC Controller PCB (Unit of replacement: DC CONTROLLER PCB ASS'Y) [Remedy] Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared. 1. Check that all covers (Front Cover, etc.) that can be opened and closed are closed. 2. Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts. [Reference] Before replacing the DC Controller PCB, back up the service mode data (approx. 2 min) and restore the backup data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected. - Backup: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMBUP - Restoration: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMRES Scanner Motor FG unlock error



Detection Description Remedy



Locked state was not detected within the specified period of time at start-up. [Related parts] - Harness between the DC Controller PCB (UN01/J472) and the Laser Driver PCB (PCB35/J9912) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, LASER) - Harness between the DC Controller PCB (UN01/J471) and the Laser Driver PCB (PCB35/J2169) - Harnesses from the DC Controller PCB to the BD PCB and the Polygon Motor 1. DC Controller PCB (J472) to Relay Connector (9P) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, LASER) 2. Relay Connector (9P) to Relay Connector (9P) 3. Relay Connector (9P) to BD PCB (J2160) and Polygon Motor (J2159) - Scanner Unit (Unit of replacement: LASER SCANNER UNIT) - Laser Driver PCB (Unit of replacement: READER CONTROLLER PCB ASSEMBLY) - DC Controller PCB (Unit of replacement: DC CONTROLLER PCB ASS'Y) [Remedy] Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared. 1. Check that all covers (Front Cover, etc.) that can be opened and closed are closed. 2. Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts. [Reference] Before replacing the DC Controller PCB, back up the service mode data (approx. 2 min) and restore the backup data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected. - Backup: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMBUP - Restoration: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMRES



795



7. Error/Jam/Alarm E110-1325-05



Scanner Motor FG unlock error



Detection Description Remedy



E110-1327-05



Locked state was not detected within the specified period of time at start-up. [Related parts] - Harness between the DC Controller PCB (UN01/J472) and the Laser Driver PCB (PCB35/J9912) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, LASER) - Harness between the DC Controller PCB (UN01/J471) and the Laser Driver PCB (PCB35/J2169) - Harnesses from the DC Controller PCB to the BD PCB and the Polygon Motor 1. DC Controller PCB (J472) to Relay Connector (9P) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, LASER) 2. Relay Connector (9P) to Relay Connector (9P) 3. Relay Connector (9P) to BD PCB (J2160) and Polygon Motor (J2159) - Scanner Unit (Unit of replacement: LASER SCANNER UNIT) - Laser Driver PCB (Unit of replacement: READER CONTROLLER PCB ASSEMBLY) - DC Controller PCB (Unit of replacement: DC CONTROLLER PCB ASS'Y) [Remedy] Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared. 1. Check that all covers (Front Cover, etc.) that can be opened and closed are closed. 2. Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts. [Reference] Before replacing the DC Controller PCB, back up the service mode data (approx. 2 min) and restore the backup data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected. - Backup: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMBUP - Restoration: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMRES Scanner Motor FG unlock error



Detection Description Remedy



Locked state was not detected within the specified period of time at start-up. [Related parts] - Harness between the DC Controller PCB (UN01/J472) and the Laser Driver PCB (PCB35/J9912) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, LASER) - Harness between the DC Controller PCB (UN01/J471) and the Laser Driver PCB (PCB35/J2169) - Harnesses from the DC Controller PCB to the BD PCB and the Polygon Motor 1. DC Controller PCB (J472) to Relay Connector (9P) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, LASER) 2. Relay Connector (9P) to Relay Connector (9P) 3. Relay Connector (9P) to BD PCB (J2160) and Polygon Motor (J2159) - Scanner Unit (Unit of replacement: LASER SCANNER UNIT) - Laser Driver PCB (Unit of replacement: READER CONTROLLER PCB ASSEMBLY) - DC Controller PCB (Unit of replacement: DC CONTROLLER PCB ASS'Y) [Remedy] Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared. 1. Check that all covers (Front Cover, etc.) that can be opened and closed are closed. 2. Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts. [Reference] Before replacing the DC Controller PCB, back up the service mode data (approx. 2 min) and restore the backup data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected. - Backup: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMBUP - Restoration: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMRES



796



7. Error/Jam/Alarm E110-132F-05



Scanner Motor FG unlock error



Detection Description Remedy



E110-1330-05



Locked state was not detected within the specified period of time at start-up. [Related parts] - Harness between the DC Controller PCB (UN01/J472) and the Laser Driver PCB (PCB35/J9912) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, LASER) - Harness between the DC Controller PCB (UN01/J471) and the Laser Driver PCB (PCB35/J2169) - Harnesses from the DC Controller PCB to the BD PCB and the Polygon Motor 1. DC Controller PCB (J472) to Relay Connector (9P) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, LASER) 2. Relay Connector (9P) to Relay Connector (9P) 3. Relay Connector (9P) to BD PCB (J2160) and Polygon Motor (J2159) - Scanner Unit (Unit of replacement: LASER SCANNER UNIT) - Laser Driver PCB (Unit of replacement: READER CONTROLLER PCB ASSEMBLY) - DC Controller PCB (Unit of replacement: DC CONTROLLER PCB ASS'Y) [Remedy] Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared. 1. Check that all covers (Front Cover, etc.) that can be opened and closed are closed. 2. Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts. [Reference] Before replacing the DC Controller PCB, back up the service mode data (approx. 2 min) and restore the backup data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected. - Backup: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMBUP - Restoration: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMRES Scanner Motor FG unlock error



Detection Description Remedy



Locked state was not detected within the specified period of time at start-up. [Related parts] - Harness between the DC Controller PCB (UN01/J472) and the Laser Driver PCB (PCB35/J9912) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, LASER) - Harness between the DC Controller PCB (UN01/J471) and the Laser Driver PCB (PCB35/J2169) - Harnesses from the DC Controller PCB to the BD PCB and the Polygon Motor 1. DC Controller PCB (J472) to Relay Connector (9P) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, LASER) 2. Relay Connector (9P) to Relay Connector (9P) 3. Relay Connector (9P) to BD PCB (J2160) and Polygon Motor (J2159) - Scanner Unit (Unit of replacement: LASER SCANNER UNIT) - Laser Driver PCB (Unit of replacement: READER CONTROLLER PCB ASSEMBLY) - DC Controller PCB (Unit of replacement: DC CONTROLLER PCB ASS'Y) [Remedy] Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared. 1. Check that all covers (Front Cover, etc.) that can be opened and closed are closed. 2. Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts. [Reference] Before replacing the DC Controller PCB, back up the service mode data (approx. 2 min) and restore the backup data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected. - Backup: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMBUP - Restoration: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMRES



797



7. Error/Jam/Alarm E110-1331-05



Scanner Motor FG unlock error



Detection Description Remedy



E110-1332-05



Locked state was not detected within the specified period of time at start-up. [Related parts] - Harness between the DC Controller PCB (UN01/J472) and the Laser Driver PCB (PCB35/J9912) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, LASER) - Harness between the DC Controller PCB (UN01/J471) and the Laser Driver PCB (PCB35/J2169) - Harnesses from the DC Controller PCB to the BD PCB and the Polygon Motor 1. DC Controller PCB (J472) to Relay Connector (9P) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, LASER) 2. Relay Connector (9P) to Relay Connector (9P) 3. Relay Connector (9P) to BD PCB (J2160) and Polygon Motor (J2159) - Scanner Unit (Unit of replacement: LASER SCANNER UNIT) - Laser Driver PCB (Unit of replacement: READER CONTROLLER PCB ASSEMBLY) - DC Controller PCB (Unit of replacement: DC CONTROLLER PCB ASS'Y) [Remedy] Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared. 1. Check that all covers (Front Cover, etc.) that can be opened and closed are closed. 2. Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts. [Reference] Before replacing the DC Controller PCB, back up the service mode data (approx. 2 min) and restore the backup data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected. - Backup: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMBUP - Restoration: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMRES Scanner Motor FG unlock error



Detection Description Remedy



Locked state was not detected within the specified period of time at start-up. [Related parts] - Harness between the DC Controller PCB (UN01/J472) and the Laser Driver PCB (PCB35/J9912) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, LASER) - Harness between the DC Controller PCB (UN01/J471) and the Laser Driver PCB (PCB35/J2169) - Harnesses from the DC Controller PCB to the BD PCB and the Polygon Motor 1. DC Controller PCB (J472) to Relay Connector (9P) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, LASER) 2. Relay Connector (9P) to Relay Connector (9P) 3. Relay Connector (9P) to BD PCB (J2160) and Polygon Motor (J2159) - Scanner Unit (Unit of replacement: LASER SCANNER UNIT) - Laser Driver PCB (Unit of replacement: READER CONTROLLER PCB ASSEMBLY) - DC Controller PCB (Unit of replacement: DC CONTROLLER PCB ASS'Y) [Remedy] Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared. 1. Check that all covers (Front Cover, etc.) that can be opened and closed are closed. 2. Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts. [Reference] Before replacing the DC Controller PCB, back up the service mode data (approx. 2 min) and restore the backup data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected. - Backup: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMBUP - Restoration: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMRES



798



7. Error/Jam/Alarm E110-1334-05



Scanner Motor FG unlock error



Detection Description Remedy



E110-1335-05



Locked state was not detected within the specified period of time at start-up. [Related parts] - Harness between the DC Controller PCB (UN01/J472) and the Laser Driver PCB (PCB35/J9912) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, LASER) - Harness between the DC Controller PCB (UN01/J471) and the Laser Driver PCB (PCB35/J2169) - Harnesses from the DC Controller PCB to the BD PCB and the Polygon Motor 1. DC Controller PCB (J472) to Relay Connector (9P) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, LASER) 2. Relay Connector (9P) to Relay Connector (9P) 3. Relay Connector (9P) to BD PCB (J2160) and Polygon Motor (J2159) - Scanner Unit (Unit of replacement: LASER SCANNER UNIT) - Laser Driver PCB (Unit of replacement: READER CONTROLLER PCB ASSEMBLY) - DC Controller PCB (Unit of replacement: DC CONTROLLER PCB ASS'Y) [Remedy] Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared. 1. Check that all covers (Front Cover, etc.) that can be opened and closed are closed. 2. Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts. [Reference] Before replacing the DC Controller PCB, back up the service mode data (approx. 2 min) and restore the backup data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected. - Backup: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMBUP - Restoration: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMRES Scanner Motor FG unlock error



Detection Description Remedy



Locked state was not detected within the specified period of time at start-up. [Related parts] - Harness between the DC Controller PCB (UN01/J472) and the Laser Driver PCB (PCB35/J9912) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, LASER) - Harness between the DC Controller PCB (UN01/J471) and the Laser Driver PCB (PCB35/J2169) - Harnesses from the DC Controller PCB to the BD PCB and the Polygon Motor 1. DC Controller PCB (J472) to Relay Connector (9P) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, LASER) 2. Relay Connector (9P) to Relay Connector (9P) 3. Relay Connector (9P) to BD PCB (J2160) and Polygon Motor (J2159) - Scanner Unit (Unit of replacement: LASER SCANNER UNIT) - Laser Driver PCB (Unit of replacement: READER CONTROLLER PCB ASSEMBLY) - DC Controller PCB (Unit of replacement: DC CONTROLLER PCB ASS'Y) [Remedy] Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared. 1. Check that all covers (Front Cover, etc.) that can be opened and closed are closed. 2. Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts. [Reference] Before replacing the DC Controller PCB, back up the service mode data (approx. 2 min) and restore the backup data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected. - Backup: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMBUP - Restoration: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMRES



799



7. Error/Jam/Alarm E110-1337-05



Scanner Motor FG unlock error



Detection Description Remedy



E110-133F-05



Locked state was not detected within the specified period of time at start-up. [Related parts] - Harness between the DC Controller PCB (UN01/J472) and the Laser Driver PCB (PCB35/J9912) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, LASER) - Harness between the DC Controller PCB (UN01/J471) and the Laser Driver PCB (PCB35/J2169) - Harnesses from the DC Controller PCB to the BD PCB and the Polygon Motor 1. DC Controller PCB (J472) to Relay Connector (9P) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, LASER) 2. Relay Connector (9P) to Relay Connector (9P) 3. Relay Connector (9P) to BD PCB (J2160) and Polygon Motor (J2159) - Scanner Unit (Unit of replacement: LASER SCANNER UNIT) - Laser Driver PCB (Unit of replacement: READER CONTROLLER PCB ASSEMBLY) - DC Controller PCB (Unit of replacement: DC CONTROLLER PCB ASS'Y) [Remedy] Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared. 1. Check that all covers (Front Cover, etc.) that can be opened and closed are closed. 2. Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts. [Reference] Before replacing the DC Controller PCB, back up the service mode data (approx. 2 min) and restore the backup data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected. - Backup: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMBUP - Restoration: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMRES Scanner Motor FG unlock error



Detection Description Remedy



Locked state was not detected within the specified period of time at start-up. [Related parts] - Harness between the DC Controller PCB (UN01/J472) and the Laser Driver PCB (PCB35/J9912) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, LASER) - Harness between the DC Controller PCB (UN01/J471) and the Laser Driver PCB (PCB35/J2169) - Harnesses from the DC Controller PCB to the BD PCB and the Polygon Motor 1. DC Controller PCB (J472) to Relay Connector (9P) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, LASER) 2. Relay Connector (9P) to Relay Connector (9P) 3. Relay Connector (9P) to BD PCB (J2160) and Polygon Motor (J2159) - Scanner Unit (Unit of replacement: LASER SCANNER UNIT) - Laser Driver PCB (Unit of replacement: READER CONTROLLER PCB ASSEMBLY) - DC Controller PCB (Unit of replacement: DC CONTROLLER PCB ASS'Y) [Remedy] Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared. 1. Check that all covers (Front Cover, etc.) that can be opened and closed are closed. 2. Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts. [Reference] Before replacing the DC Controller PCB, back up the service mode data (approx. 2 min) and restore the backup data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected. - Backup: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMBUP - Restoration: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMRES



800



7. Error/Jam/Alarm E110-1340-05



Scanner Motor FG unlock error



Detection Description Remedy



E110-1341-05



Locked state was not detected within the specified period of time at start-up. [Related parts] - Harness between the DC Controller PCB (UN01/J472) and the Laser Driver PCB (PCB35/J9912) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, LASER) - Harness between the DC Controller PCB (UN01/J471) and the Laser Driver PCB (PCB35/J2169) - Harnesses from the DC Controller PCB to the BD PCB and the Polygon Motor 1. DC Controller PCB (J472) to Relay Connector (9P) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, LASER) 2. Relay Connector (9P) to Relay Connector (9P) 3. Relay Connector (9P) to BD PCB (J2160) and Polygon Motor (J2159) - Scanner Unit (Unit of replacement: LASER SCANNER UNIT) - Laser Driver PCB (Unit of replacement: READER CONTROLLER PCB ASSEMBLY) - DC Controller PCB (Unit of replacement: DC CONTROLLER PCB ASS'Y) [Remedy] Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared. 1. Check that all covers (Front Cover, etc.) that can be opened and closed are closed. 2. Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts. [Reference] Before replacing the DC Controller PCB, back up the service mode data (approx. 2 min) and restore the backup data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected. - Backup: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMBUP - Restoration: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMRES Scanner Motor FG unlock error



Detection Description Remedy



Locked state was not detected within the specified period of time at start-up. [Related parts] - Harness between the DC Controller PCB (UN01/J472) and the Laser Driver PCB (PCB35/J9912) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, LASER) - Harness between the DC Controller PCB (UN01/J471) and the Laser Driver PCB (PCB35/J2169) - Harnesses from the DC Controller PCB to the BD PCB and the Polygon Motor 1. DC Controller PCB (J472) to Relay Connector (9P) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, LASER) 2. Relay Connector (9P) to Relay Connector (9P) 3. Relay Connector (9P) to BD PCB (J2160) and Polygon Motor (J2159) - Scanner Unit (Unit of replacement: LASER SCANNER UNIT) - Laser Driver PCB (Unit of replacement: READER CONTROLLER PCB ASSEMBLY) - DC Controller PCB (Unit of replacement: DC CONTROLLER PCB ASS'Y) [Remedy] Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared. 1. Check that all covers (Front Cover, etc.) that can be opened and closed are closed. 2. Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts. [Reference] Before replacing the DC Controller PCB, back up the service mode data (approx. 2 min) and restore the backup data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected. - Backup: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMBUP - Restoration: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMRES



801



7. Error/Jam/Alarm E110-1342-05



Scanner Motor FG unlock error



Detection Description Remedy



E110-1344-05



Locked state was not detected within the specified period of time at start-up. [Related parts] - Harness between the DC Controller PCB (UN01/J472) and the Laser Driver PCB (PCB35/J9912) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, LASER) - Harness between the DC Controller PCB (UN01/J471) and the Laser Driver PCB (PCB35/J2169) - Harnesses from the DC Controller PCB to the BD PCB and the Polygon Motor 1. DC Controller PCB (J472) to Relay Connector (9P) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, LASER) 2. Relay Connector (9P) to Relay Connector (9P) 3. Relay Connector (9P) to BD PCB (J2160) and Polygon Motor (J2159) - Scanner Unit (Unit of replacement: LASER SCANNER UNIT) - Laser Driver PCB (Unit of replacement: READER CONTROLLER PCB ASSEMBLY) - DC Controller PCB (Unit of replacement: DC CONTROLLER PCB ASS'Y) [Remedy] Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared. 1. Check that all covers (Front Cover, etc.) that can be opened and closed are closed. 2. Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts. [Reference] Before replacing the DC Controller PCB, back up the service mode data (approx. 2 min) and restore the backup data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected. - Backup: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMBUP - Restoration: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMRES Scanner Motor FG unlock error



Detection Description Remedy



Locked state was not detected within the specified period of time at start-up. [Related parts] - Harness between the DC Controller PCB (UN01/J472) and the Laser Driver PCB (PCB35/J9912) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, LASER) - Harness between the DC Controller PCB (UN01/J471) and the Laser Driver PCB (PCB35/J2169) - Harnesses from the DC Controller PCB to the BD PCB and the Polygon Motor 1. DC Controller PCB (J472) to Relay Connector (9P) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, LASER) 2. Relay Connector (9P) to Relay Connector (9P) 3. Relay Connector (9P) to BD PCB (J2160) and Polygon Motor (J2159) - Scanner Unit (Unit of replacement: LASER SCANNER UNIT) - Laser Driver PCB (Unit of replacement: READER CONTROLLER PCB ASSEMBLY) - DC Controller PCB (Unit of replacement: DC CONTROLLER PCB ASS'Y) [Remedy] Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared. 1. Check that all covers (Front Cover, etc.) that can be opened and closed are closed. 2. Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts. [Reference] Before replacing the DC Controller PCB, back up the service mode data (approx. 2 min) and restore the backup data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected. - Backup: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMBUP - Restoration: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMRES



802



7. Error/Jam/Alarm E110-1345-05



Scanner Motor FG unlock error



Detection Description Remedy



E110-1347-05



Locked state was not detected within the specified period of time at start-up. [Related parts] - Harness between the DC Controller PCB (UN01/J472) and the Laser Driver PCB (PCB35/J9912) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, LASER) - Harness between the DC Controller PCB (UN01/J471) and the Laser Driver PCB (PCB35/J2169) - Harnesses from the DC Controller PCB to the BD PCB and the Polygon Motor 1. DC Controller PCB (J472) to Relay Connector (9P) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, LASER) 2. Relay Connector (9P) to Relay Connector (9P) 3. Relay Connector (9P) to BD PCB (J2160) and Polygon Motor (J2159) - Scanner Unit (Unit of replacement: LASER SCANNER UNIT) - Laser Driver PCB (Unit of replacement: READER CONTROLLER PCB ASSEMBLY) - DC Controller PCB (Unit of replacement: DC CONTROLLER PCB ASS'Y) [Remedy] Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared. 1. Check that all covers (Front Cover, etc.) that can be opened and closed are closed. 2. Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts. [Reference] Before replacing the DC Controller PCB, back up the service mode data (approx. 2 min) and restore the backup data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected. - Backup: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMBUP - Restoration: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMRES Scanner Motor FG unlock error



Detection Description Remedy



Locked state was not detected within the specified period of time at start-up. [Related parts] - Harness between the DC Controller PCB (UN01/J472) and the Laser Driver PCB (PCB35/J9912) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, LASER) - Harness between the DC Controller PCB (UN01/J471) and the Laser Driver PCB (PCB35/J2169) - Harnesses from the DC Controller PCB to the BD PCB and the Polygon Motor 1. DC Controller PCB (J472) to Relay Connector (9P) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, LASER) 2. Relay Connector (9P) to Relay Connector (9P) 3. Relay Connector (9P) to BD PCB (J2160) and Polygon Motor (J2159) - Scanner Unit (Unit of replacement: LASER SCANNER UNIT) - Laser Driver PCB (Unit of replacement: READER CONTROLLER PCB ASSEMBLY) - DC Controller PCB (Unit of replacement: DC CONTROLLER PCB ASS'Y) [Remedy] Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared. 1. Check that all covers (Front Cover, etc.) that can be opened and closed are closed. 2. Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts. [Reference] Before replacing the DC Controller PCB, back up the service mode data (approx. 2 min) and restore the backup data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected. - Backup: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMBUP - Restoration: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMRES



803



7. Error/Jam/Alarm E110-134F-05



Scanner Motor FG unlock error



Detection Description Remedy



E110-1350-05



Locked state was not detected within the specified period of time at start-up. [Related parts] - Harness between the DC Controller PCB (UN01/J472) and the Laser Driver PCB (PCB35/J9912) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, LASER) - Harness between the DC Controller PCB (UN01/J471) and the Laser Driver PCB (PCB35/J2169) - Harnesses from the DC Controller PCB to the BD PCB and the Polygon Motor 1. DC Controller PCB (J472) to Relay Connector (9P) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, LASER) 2. Relay Connector (9P) to Relay Connector (9P) 3. Relay Connector (9P) to BD PCB (J2160) and Polygon Motor (J2159) - Scanner Unit (Unit of replacement: LASER SCANNER UNIT) - Laser Driver PCB (Unit of replacement: READER CONTROLLER PCB ASSEMBLY) - DC Controller PCB (Unit of replacement: DC CONTROLLER PCB ASS'Y) [Remedy] Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared. 1. Check that all covers (Front Cover, etc.) that can be opened and closed are closed. 2. Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts. [Reference] Before replacing the DC Controller PCB, back up the service mode data (approx. 2 min) and restore the backup data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected. - Backup: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMBUP - Restoration: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMRES Scanner Motor FG unlock error



Detection Description Remedy



Locked state was not detected within the specified period of time at start-up. [Related parts] - Harness between the DC Controller PCB (UN01/J472) and the Laser Driver PCB (PCB35/J9912) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, LASER) - Harness between the DC Controller PCB (UN01/J471) and the Laser Driver PCB (PCB35/J2169) - Harnesses from the DC Controller PCB to the BD PCB and the Polygon Motor 1. DC Controller PCB (J472) to Relay Connector (9P) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, LASER) 2. Relay Connector (9P) to Relay Connector (9P) 3. Relay Connector (9P) to BD PCB (J2160) and Polygon Motor (J2159) - Scanner Unit (Unit of replacement: LASER SCANNER UNIT) - Laser Driver PCB (Unit of replacement: READER CONTROLLER PCB ASSEMBLY) - DC Controller PCB (Unit of replacement: DC CONTROLLER PCB ASS'Y) [Remedy] Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared. 1. Check that all covers (Front Cover, etc.) that can be opened and closed are closed. 2. Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts. [Reference] Before replacing the DC Controller PCB, back up the service mode data (approx. 2 min) and restore the backup data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected. - Backup: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMBUP - Restoration: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMRES



804



7. Error/Jam/Alarm E110-1351-05



Scanner Motor FG unlock error



Detection Description Remedy



E110-1352-05



Locked state was not detected within the specified period of time at start-up. [Related parts] - Harness between the DC Controller PCB (UN01/J472) and the Laser Driver PCB (PCB35/J9912) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, LASER) - Harness between the DC Controller PCB (UN01/J471) and the Laser Driver PCB (PCB35/J2169) - Harnesses from the DC Controller PCB to the BD PCB and the Polygon Motor 1. DC Controller PCB (J472) to Relay Connector (9P) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, LASER) 2. Relay Connector (9P) to Relay Connector (9P) 3. Relay Connector (9P) to BD PCB (J2160) and Polygon Motor (J2159) - Scanner Unit (Unit of replacement: LASER SCANNER UNIT) - Laser Driver PCB (Unit of replacement: READER CONTROLLER PCB ASSEMBLY) - DC Controller PCB (Unit of replacement: DC CONTROLLER PCB ASS'Y) [Remedy] Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared. 1. Check that all covers (Front Cover, etc.) that can be opened and closed are closed. 2. Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts. [Reference] Before replacing the DC Controller PCB, back up the service mode data (approx. 2 min) and restore the backup data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected. - Backup: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMBUP - Restoration: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMRES Scanner Motor FG unlock error



Detection Description Remedy



Locked state was not detected within the specified period of time at start-up. [Related parts] - Harness between the DC Controller PCB (UN01/J472) and the Laser Driver PCB (PCB35/J9912) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, LASER) - Harness between the DC Controller PCB (UN01/J471) and the Laser Driver PCB (PCB35/J2169) - Harnesses from the DC Controller PCB to the BD PCB and the Polygon Motor 1. DC Controller PCB (J472) to Relay Connector (9P) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, LASER) 2. Relay Connector (9P) to Relay Connector (9P) 3. Relay Connector (9P) to BD PCB (J2160) and Polygon Motor (J2159) - Scanner Unit (Unit of replacement: LASER SCANNER UNIT) - Laser Driver PCB (Unit of replacement: READER CONTROLLER PCB ASSEMBLY) - DC Controller PCB (Unit of replacement: DC CONTROLLER PCB ASS'Y) [Remedy] Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared. 1. Check that all covers (Front Cover, etc.) that can be opened and closed are closed. 2. Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts. [Reference] Before replacing the DC Controller PCB, back up the service mode data (approx. 2 min) and restore the backup data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected. - Backup: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMBUP - Restoration: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMRES



805



7. Error/Jam/Alarm E110-1354-05



Scanner Motor FG unlock error



Detection Description Remedy



E110-1355-05



Locked state was not detected within the specified period of time at start-up. [Related parts] - Harness between the DC Controller PCB (UN01/J472) and the Laser Driver PCB (PCB35/J9912) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, LASER) - Harness between the DC Controller PCB (UN01/J471) and the Laser Driver PCB (PCB35/J2169) - Harnesses from the DC Controller PCB to the BD PCB and the Polygon Motor 1. DC Controller PCB (J472) to Relay Connector (9P) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, LASER) 2. Relay Connector (9P) to Relay Connector (9P) 3. Relay Connector (9P) to BD PCB (J2160) and Polygon Motor (J2159) - Scanner Unit (Unit of replacement: LASER SCANNER UNIT) - Laser Driver PCB (Unit of replacement: READER CONTROLLER PCB ASSEMBLY) - DC Controller PCB (Unit of replacement: DC CONTROLLER PCB ASS'Y) [Remedy] Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared. 1. Check that all covers (Front Cover, etc.) that can be opened and closed are closed. 2. Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts. [Reference] Before replacing the DC Controller PCB, back up the service mode data (approx. 2 min) and restore the backup data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected. - Backup: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMBUP - Restoration: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMRES Scanner Motor FG unlock error



Detection Description Remedy



Locked state was not detected within the specified period of time at start-up. [Related parts] - Harness between the DC Controller PCB (UN01/J472) and the Laser Driver PCB (PCB35/J9912) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, LASER) - Harness between the DC Controller PCB (UN01/J471) and the Laser Driver PCB (PCB35/J2169) - Harnesses from the DC Controller PCB to the BD PCB and the Polygon Motor 1. DC Controller PCB (J472) to Relay Connector (9P) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, LASER) 2. Relay Connector (9P) to Relay Connector (9P) 3. Relay Connector (9P) to BD PCB (J2160) and Polygon Motor (J2159) - Scanner Unit (Unit of replacement: LASER SCANNER UNIT) - Laser Driver PCB (Unit of replacement: READER CONTROLLER PCB ASSEMBLY) - DC Controller PCB (Unit of replacement: DC CONTROLLER PCB ASS'Y) [Remedy] Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared. 1. Check that all covers (Front Cover, etc.) that can be opened and closed are closed. 2. Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts. [Reference] Before replacing the DC Controller PCB, back up the service mode data (approx. 2 min) and restore the backup data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected. - Backup: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMBUP - Restoration: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMRES



806



7. Error/Jam/Alarm E110-1357-05



Scanner Motor FG unlock error



Detection Description Remedy



E110-135F-05



Locked state was not detected within the specified period of time at start-up. [Related parts] - Harness between the DC Controller PCB (UN01/J472) and the Laser Driver PCB (PCB35/J9912) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, LASER) - Harness between the DC Controller PCB (UN01/J471) and the Laser Driver PCB (PCB35/J2169) - Harnesses from the DC Controller PCB to the BD PCB and the Polygon Motor 1. DC Controller PCB (J472) to Relay Connector (9P) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, LASER) 2. Relay Connector (9P) to Relay Connector (9P) 3. Relay Connector (9P) to BD PCB (J2160) and Polygon Motor (J2159) - Scanner Unit (Unit of replacement: LASER SCANNER UNIT) - Laser Driver PCB (Unit of replacement: READER CONTROLLER PCB ASSEMBLY) - DC Controller PCB (Unit of replacement: DC CONTROLLER PCB ASS'Y) [Remedy] Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared. 1. Check that all covers (Front Cover, etc.) that can be opened and closed are closed. 2. Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts. [Reference] Before replacing the DC Controller PCB, back up the service mode data (approx. 2 min) and restore the backup data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected. - Backup: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMBUP - Restoration: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMRES Scanner Motor FG unlock error



Detection Description Remedy



Locked state was not detected within the specified period of time at start-up. [Related parts] - Harness between the DC Controller PCB (UN01/J472) and the Laser Driver PCB (PCB35/J9912) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, LASER) - Harness between the DC Controller PCB (UN01/J471) and the Laser Driver PCB (PCB35/J2169) - Harnesses from the DC Controller PCB to the BD PCB and the Polygon Motor 1. DC Controller PCB (J472) to Relay Connector (9P) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, LASER) 2. Relay Connector (9P) to Relay Connector (9P) 3. Relay Connector (9P) to BD PCB (J2160) and Polygon Motor (J2159) - Scanner Unit (Unit of replacement: LASER SCANNER UNIT) - Laser Driver PCB (Unit of replacement: READER CONTROLLER PCB ASSEMBLY) - DC Controller PCB (Unit of replacement: DC CONTROLLER PCB ASS'Y) [Remedy] Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared. 1. Check that all covers (Front Cover, etc.) that can be opened and closed are closed. 2. Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts. [Reference] Before replacing the DC Controller PCB, back up the service mode data (approx. 2 min) and restore the backup data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected. - Backup: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMBUP - Restoration: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMRES



807



7. Error/Jam/Alarm E110-1360-05



Scanner Motor FG unlock error



Detection Description Remedy



E110-1361-05



Locked state was not detected within the specified period of time at start-up. [Related parts] - Harness between the DC Controller PCB (UN01/J472) and the Laser Driver PCB (PCB35/J9912) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, LASER) - Harness between the DC Controller PCB (UN01/J471) and the Laser Driver PCB (PCB35/J2169) - Harnesses from the DC Controller PCB to the BD PCB and the Polygon Motor 1. DC Controller PCB (J472) to Relay Connector (9P) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, LASER) 2. Relay Connector (9P) to Relay Connector (9P) 3. Relay Connector (9P) to BD PCB (J2160) and Polygon Motor (J2159) - Scanner Unit (Unit of replacement: LASER SCANNER UNIT) - Laser Driver PCB (Unit of replacement: READER CONTROLLER PCB ASSEMBLY) - DC Controller PCB (Unit of replacement: DC CONTROLLER PCB ASS'Y) [Remedy] Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared. 1. Check that all covers (Front Cover, etc.) that can be opened and closed are closed. 2. Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts. [Reference] Before replacing the DC Controller PCB, back up the service mode data (approx. 2 min) and restore the backup data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected. - Backup: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMBUP - Restoration: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMRES Scanner Motor FG unlock error



Detection Description Remedy



Locked state was not detected within the specified period of time at start-up. [Related parts] - Harness between the DC Controller PCB (UN01/J472) and the Laser Driver PCB (PCB35/J9912) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, LASER) - Harness between the DC Controller PCB (UN01/J471) and the Laser Driver PCB (PCB35/J2169) - Harnesses from the DC Controller PCB to the BD PCB and the Polygon Motor 1. DC Controller PCB (J472) to Relay Connector (9P) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, LASER) 2. Relay Connector (9P) to Relay Connector (9P) 3. Relay Connector (9P) to BD PCB (J2160) and Polygon Motor (J2159) - Scanner Unit (Unit of replacement: LASER SCANNER UNIT) - Laser Driver PCB (Unit of replacement: READER CONTROLLER PCB ASSEMBLY) - DC Controller PCB (Unit of replacement: DC CONTROLLER PCB ASS'Y) [Remedy] Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared. 1. Check that all covers (Front Cover, etc.) that can be opened and closed are closed. 2. Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts. [Reference] Before replacing the DC Controller PCB, back up the service mode data (approx. 2 min) and restore the backup data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected. - Backup: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMBUP - Restoration: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMRES



808



7. Error/Jam/Alarm E110-1362-05



Scanner Motor FG unlock error



Detection Description Remedy



E110-1364-05



Locked state was not detected within the specified period of time at start-up. [Related parts] - Harness between the DC Controller PCB (UN01/J472) and the Laser Driver PCB (PCB35/J9912) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, LASER) - Harness between the DC Controller PCB (UN01/J471) and the Laser Driver PCB (PCB35/J2169) - Harnesses from the DC Controller PCB to the BD PCB and the Polygon Motor 1. DC Controller PCB (J472) to Relay Connector (9P) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, LASER) 2. Relay Connector (9P) to Relay Connector (9P) 3. Relay Connector (9P) to BD PCB (J2160) and Polygon Motor (J2159) - Scanner Unit (Unit of replacement: LASER SCANNER UNIT) - Laser Driver PCB (Unit of replacement: READER CONTROLLER PCB ASSEMBLY) - DC Controller PCB (Unit of replacement: DC CONTROLLER PCB ASS'Y) [Remedy] Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared. 1. Check that all covers (Front Cover, etc.) that can be opened and closed are closed. 2. Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts. [Reference] Before replacing the DC Controller PCB, back up the service mode data (approx. 2 min) and restore the backup data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected. - Backup: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMBUP - Restoration: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMRES Scanner Motor FG unlock error



Detection Description Remedy



Locked state was not detected within the specified period of time at start-up. [Related parts] - Harness between the DC Controller PCB (UN01/J472) and the Laser Driver PCB (PCB35/J9912) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, LASER) - Harness between the DC Controller PCB (UN01/J471) and the Laser Driver PCB (PCB35/J2169) - Harnesses from the DC Controller PCB to the BD PCB and the Polygon Motor 1. DC Controller PCB (J472) to Relay Connector (9P) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, LASER) 2. Relay Connector (9P) to Relay Connector (9P) 3. Relay Connector (9P) to BD PCB (J2160) and Polygon Motor (J2159) - Scanner Unit (Unit of replacement: LASER SCANNER UNIT) - Laser Driver PCB (Unit of replacement: READER CONTROLLER PCB ASSEMBLY) - DC Controller PCB (Unit of replacement: DC CONTROLLER PCB ASS'Y) [Remedy] Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared. 1. Check that all covers (Front Cover, etc.) that can be opened and closed are closed. 2. Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts. [Reference] Before replacing the DC Controller PCB, back up the service mode data (approx. 2 min) and restore the backup data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected. - Backup: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMBUP - Restoration: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMRES



809



7. Error/Jam/Alarm E110-1365-05



Scanner Motor FG unlock error



Detection Description Remedy



E110-1367-05



Locked state was not detected within the specified period of time at start-up. [Related parts] - Harness between the DC Controller PCB (UN01/J472) and the Laser Driver PCB (PCB35/J9912) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, LASER) - Harness between the DC Controller PCB (UN01/J471) and the Laser Driver PCB (PCB35/J2169) - Harnesses from the DC Controller PCB to the BD PCB and the Polygon Motor 1. DC Controller PCB (J472) to Relay Connector (9P) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, LASER) 2. Relay Connector (9P) to Relay Connector (9P) 3. Relay Connector (9P) to BD PCB (J2160) and Polygon Motor (J2159) - Scanner Unit (Unit of replacement: LASER SCANNER UNIT) - Laser Driver PCB (Unit of replacement: READER CONTROLLER PCB ASSEMBLY) - DC Controller PCB (Unit of replacement: DC CONTROLLER PCB ASS'Y) [Remedy] Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared. 1. Check that all covers (Front Cover, etc.) that can be opened and closed are closed. 2. Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts. [Reference] Before replacing the DC Controller PCB, back up the service mode data (approx. 2 min) and restore the backup data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected. - Backup: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMBUP - Restoration: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMRES Scanner Motor FG unlock error



Detection Description Remedy



Locked state was not detected within the specified period of time at start-up. [Related parts] - Harness between the DC Controller PCB (UN01/J472) and the Laser Driver PCB (PCB35/J9912) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, LASER) - Harness between the DC Controller PCB (UN01/J471) and the Laser Driver PCB (PCB35/J2169) - Harnesses from the DC Controller PCB to the BD PCB and the Polygon Motor 1. DC Controller PCB (J472) to Relay Connector (9P) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, LASER) 2. Relay Connector (9P) to Relay Connector (9P) 3. Relay Connector (9P) to BD PCB (J2160) and Polygon Motor (J2159) - Scanner Unit (Unit of replacement: LASER SCANNER UNIT) - Laser Driver PCB (Unit of replacement: READER CONTROLLER PCB ASSEMBLY) - DC Controller PCB (Unit of replacement: DC CONTROLLER PCB ASS'Y) [Remedy] Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared. 1. Check that all covers (Front Cover, etc.) that can be opened and closed are closed. 2. Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts. [Reference] Before replacing the DC Controller PCB, back up the service mode data (approx. 2 min) and restore the backup data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected. - Backup: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMBUP - Restoration: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMRES



810



7. Error/Jam/Alarm E110-136F-05



Scanner Motor FG unlock error



Detection Description Remedy



E110-13F0-05



Locked state was not detected within the specified period of time at start-up. [Related parts] - Harness between the DC Controller PCB (UN01/J472) and the Laser Driver PCB (PCB35/J9912) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, LASER) - Harness between the DC Controller PCB (UN01/J471) and the Laser Driver PCB (PCB35/J2169) - Harnesses from the DC Controller PCB to the BD PCB and the Polygon Motor 1. DC Controller PCB (J472) to Relay Connector (9P) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, LASER) 2. Relay Connector (9P) to Relay Connector (9P) 3. Relay Connector (9P) to BD PCB (J2160) and Polygon Motor (J2159) - Scanner Unit (Unit of replacement: LASER SCANNER UNIT) - Laser Driver PCB (Unit of replacement: READER CONTROLLER PCB ASSEMBLY) - DC Controller PCB (Unit of replacement: DC CONTROLLER PCB ASS'Y) [Remedy] Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared. 1. Check that all covers (Front Cover, etc.) that can be opened and closed are closed. 2. Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts. [Reference] Before replacing the DC Controller PCB, back up the service mode data (approx. 2 min) and restore the backup data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected. - Backup: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMBUP - Restoration: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMRES Scanner Motor FG unlock error



Detection Description Remedy



Locked state was not detected within the specified period of time at start-up. [Related parts] - Harness between the DC Controller PCB (UN01/J472) and the Laser Driver PCB (PCB35/J9912) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, LASER) - Harness between the DC Controller PCB (UN01/J471) and the Laser Driver PCB (PCB35/J2169) - Harnesses from the DC Controller PCB to the BD PCB and the Polygon Motor 1. DC Controller PCB (J472) to Relay Connector (9P) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, LASER) 2. Relay Connector (9P) to Relay Connector (9P) 3. Relay Connector (9P) to BD PCB (J2160) and Polygon Motor (J2159) - Scanner Unit (Unit of replacement: LASER SCANNER UNIT) - Laser Driver PCB (Unit of replacement: READER CONTROLLER PCB ASSEMBLY) - DC Controller PCB (Unit of replacement: DC CONTROLLER PCB ASS'Y) [Remedy] Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared. 1. Check that all covers (Front Cover, etc.) that can be opened and closed are closed. 2. Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts. [Reference] Before replacing the DC Controller PCB, back up the service mode data (approx. 2 min) and restore the backup data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected. - Backup: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMBUP - Restoration: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMRES



811



7. Error/Jam/Alarm E110-13F1-05



Scanner Motor FG unlock error



Detection Description Remedy



E110-13F2-05



Locked state was not detected within the specified period of time at start-up. [Related parts] - Harness between the DC Controller PCB (UN01/J472) and the Laser Driver PCB (PCB35/J9912) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, LASER) - Harness between the DC Controller PCB (UN01/J471) and the Laser Driver PCB (PCB35/J2169) - Harnesses from the DC Controller PCB to the BD PCB and the Polygon Motor 1. DC Controller PCB (J472) to Relay Connector (9P) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, LASER) 2. Relay Connector (9P) to Relay Connector (9P) 3. Relay Connector (9P) to BD PCB (J2160) and Polygon Motor (J2159) - Scanner Unit (Unit of replacement: LASER SCANNER UNIT) - Laser Driver PCB (Unit of replacement: READER CONTROLLER PCB ASSEMBLY) - DC Controller PCB (Unit of replacement: DC CONTROLLER PCB ASS'Y) [Remedy] Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared. 1. Check that all covers (Front Cover, etc.) that can be opened and closed are closed. 2. Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts. [Reference] Before replacing the DC Controller PCB, back up the service mode data (approx. 2 min) and restore the backup data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected. - Backup: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMBUP - Restoration: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMRES Scanner Motor FG unlock error



Detection Description Remedy



Locked state was not detected within the specified period of time at start-up. [Related parts] - Harness between the DC Controller PCB (UN01/J472) and the Laser Driver PCB (PCB35/J9912) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, LASER) - Harness between the DC Controller PCB (UN01/J471) and the Laser Driver PCB (PCB35/J2169) - Harnesses from the DC Controller PCB to the BD PCB and the Polygon Motor 1. DC Controller PCB (J472) to Relay Connector (9P) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, LASER) 2. Relay Connector (9P) to Relay Connector (9P) 3. Relay Connector (9P) to BD PCB (J2160) and Polygon Motor (J2159) - Scanner Unit (Unit of replacement: LASER SCANNER UNIT) - Laser Driver PCB (Unit of replacement: READER CONTROLLER PCB ASSEMBLY) - DC Controller PCB (Unit of replacement: DC CONTROLLER PCB ASS'Y) [Remedy] Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared. 1. Check that all covers (Front Cover, etc.) that can be opened and closed are closed. 2. Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts. [Reference] Before replacing the DC Controller PCB, back up the service mode data (approx. 2 min) and restore the backup data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected. - Backup: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMBUP - Restoration: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMRES



812



7. Error/Jam/Alarm E110-13F4-05



Scanner Motor FG unlock error



Detection Description Remedy



E110-13F5-05



Locked state was not detected within the specified period of time at start-up. [Related parts] - Harness between the DC Controller PCB (UN01/J472) and the Laser Driver PCB (PCB35/J9912) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, LASER) - Harness between the DC Controller PCB (UN01/J471) and the Laser Driver PCB (PCB35/J2169) - Harnesses from the DC Controller PCB to the BD PCB and the Polygon Motor 1. DC Controller PCB (J472) to Relay Connector (9P) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, LASER) 2. Relay Connector (9P) to Relay Connector (9P) 3. Relay Connector (9P) to BD PCB (J2160) and Polygon Motor (J2159) - Scanner Unit (Unit of replacement: LASER SCANNER UNIT) - Laser Driver PCB (Unit of replacement: READER CONTROLLER PCB ASSEMBLY) - DC Controller PCB (Unit of replacement: DC CONTROLLER PCB ASS'Y) [Remedy] Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared. 1. Check that all covers (Front Cover, etc.) that can be opened and closed are closed. 2. Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts. [Reference] Before replacing the DC Controller PCB, back up the service mode data (approx. 2 min) and restore the backup data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected. - Backup: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMBUP - Restoration: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMRES Scanner Motor FG unlock error



Detection Description Remedy



Locked state was not detected within the specified period of time at start-up. [Related parts] - Harness between the DC Controller PCB (UN01/J472) and the Laser Driver PCB (PCB35/J9912) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, LASER) - Harness between the DC Controller PCB (UN01/J471) and the Laser Driver PCB (PCB35/J2169) - Harnesses from the DC Controller PCB to the BD PCB and the Polygon Motor 1. DC Controller PCB (J472) to Relay Connector (9P) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, LASER) 2. Relay Connector (9P) to Relay Connector (9P) 3. Relay Connector (9P) to BD PCB (J2160) and Polygon Motor (J2159) - Scanner Unit (Unit of replacement: LASER SCANNER UNIT) - Laser Driver PCB (Unit of replacement: READER CONTROLLER PCB ASSEMBLY) - DC Controller PCB (Unit of replacement: DC CONTROLLER PCB ASS'Y) [Remedy] Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared. 1. Check that all covers (Front Cover, etc.) that can be opened and closed are closed. 2. Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts. [Reference] Before replacing the DC Controller PCB, back up the service mode data (approx. 2 min) and restore the backup data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected. - Backup: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMBUP - Restoration: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMRES



813



7. Error/Jam/Alarm E110-13F7-05



Scanner Motor FG unlock error



Detection Description Remedy



E110-13FF-05



Locked state was not detected within the specified period of time at start-up. [Related parts] - Harness between the DC Controller PCB (UN01/J472) and the Laser Driver PCB (PCB35/J9912) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, LASER) - Harness between the DC Controller PCB (UN01/J471) and the Laser Driver PCB (PCB35/J2169) - Harnesses from the DC Controller PCB to the BD PCB and the Polygon Motor 1. DC Controller PCB (J472) to Relay Connector (9P) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, LASER) 2. Relay Connector (9P) to Relay Connector (9P) 3. Relay Connector (9P) to BD PCB (J2160) and Polygon Motor (J2159) - Scanner Unit (Unit of replacement: LASER SCANNER UNIT) - Laser Driver PCB (Unit of replacement: READER CONTROLLER PCB ASSEMBLY) - DC Controller PCB (Unit of replacement: DC CONTROLLER PCB ASS'Y) [Remedy] Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared. 1. Check that all covers (Front Cover, etc.) that can be opened and closed are closed. 2. Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts. [Reference] Before replacing the DC Controller PCB, back up the service mode data (approx. 2 min) and restore the backup data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected. - Backup: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMBUP - Restoration: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMRES Scanner Motor FG unlock error



Detection Description Remedy



Locked state was not detected within the specified period of time at start-up. [Related parts] - Harness between the DC Controller PCB (UN01/J472) and the Laser Driver PCB (PCB35/J9912) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, LASER) - Harness between the DC Controller PCB (UN01/J471) and the Laser Driver PCB (PCB35/J2169) - Harnesses from the DC Controller PCB to the BD PCB and the Polygon Motor 1. DC Controller PCB (J472) to Relay Connector (9P) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, LASER) 2. Relay Connector (9P) to Relay Connector (9P) 3. Relay Connector (9P) to BD PCB (J2160) and Polygon Motor (J2159) - Scanner Unit (Unit of replacement: LASER SCANNER UNIT) - Laser Driver PCB (Unit of replacement: READER CONTROLLER PCB ASSEMBLY) - DC Controller PCB (Unit of replacement: DC CONTROLLER PCB ASS'Y) [Remedy] Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared. 1. Check that all covers (Front Cover, etc.) that can be opened and closed are closed. 2. Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts. [Reference] Before replacing the DC Controller PCB, back up the service mode data (approx. 2 min) and restore the backup data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected. - Backup: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMBUP - Restoration: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMRES



814



7. Error/Jam/Alarm E110-FFFF-05



Scanner Motor FG unlock error



Detection Description Remedy



E121-0001-05



Failed to get the Detailed Code. [Related parts] - Harness between the DC Controller PCB (UN01/J472) and the Laser Driver PCB (PCB35/J9912) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, LASER) - Harness between the DC Controller PCB (UN01/J471) and the Laser Driver PCB (PCB35/J2169) - Harnesses from the DC Controller PCB to the BD PCB and the Polygon Motor 1. DC Controller PCB (J472) to Relay Connector (9P) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, LASER) 2. Relay Connector (9P) to Relay Connector (9P) 3. Relay Connector (9P) to BD PCB (J2160) and Polygon Motor (J2159) - Scanner Unit (Unit of replacement: LASER SCANNER UNIT) - Laser Driver PCB (Unit of replacement: READER CONTROLLER PCB ASSEMBLY) - DC Controller PCB (Unit of replacement: DC CONTROLLER PCB ASS'Y) [Remedy] Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared. 1. Check that all covers (Front Cover, etc.) that can be opened and closed are closed. 2. Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts. [Reference] Before replacing the DC Controller PCB, back up the service mode data (approx. 2 min) and restore the backup data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected. - Backup: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMBUP - Restoration: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMRES Laser Scanner Cooling Fan error



Detection Description Remedy



E197-0001-05



The fan stop signal was detected consecutively although the Laser Scanner Cooling Fan was turned ON. [Related parts] - Harness between the Main Driver PCB (UN78/J109) and the Laser Scanner Cooling Fan (FM16/ J2007) - Laser Scanner Cooling Fan (FM16) - Main Driver PCB (UN78) (Unit of replacement: MAIN DRIVE DRIVER PCB ASS'Y) [Remedy] Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts. Serial communication error



Detection Description Remedy



A communication error between the DC Controller PCB and the Main Driver PCB was detected. [Related parts] - Harness between the DC Controller PCB (UN01/J411, J412, J413 and J414) and the Main Driver PCB (UN78/J126, J125, J124 and J128) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, SIGNAL) - Harness between the Main Driver PCB (UN78/J101) and the Relay PCB (UN86/J515) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, SIGNAL) - Harness between the DC Controller PCB (UN01/J451) and the Relay PCB (UN86/J514) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, SIGNAL) - Main Driver PCB (UN78) (Unit of replacement: MAIN DRIVE DRIVER PCB ASS'Y) - Relay PCB (UN86) (Unit of replacement: RELAY PCB ASSEMBLY) - DC Controller PCB (UN01) (Unit of replacement: DC CONTROLLER PCB ASS'Y) [Remedy] Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts. [Reference] Before replacing the DC Controller PCB, back up the service mode data (approx. 2 min) and restore the backup data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected. - Backup: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMBUP - Restoration: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMRES



815



7. Error/Jam/Alarm E197-0002-05



Serial communication error



Detection Description



A communication error between the DC Controller PCB and the Feed Driver PCB was detected.



Remedy



[Related parts] - Harnesses from the DC Controller PCB to the Feed Driver PCB 1. DC Controller PCB (UN01/J421) to Relay Connector (17P) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, SIGNAL) 2. Relay Connector (17P) to Feed Driver PCB (UN79/J204) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, SERIAL) - Harness between the Feed Driver PCB (UN79/J218) and the DC-DC Converter PCB (PCB08/ J9033) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, DC) - Harness between the Feed Driver PCB (UN79/J201) and the Relay PCB (UN86/J516) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, DECK, LEFT) - Harness between the DC Controller PCB (UN01/J451) and the Relay PCB (UN86/J514) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, SIGNAL) - Feed Driver PCB (UN79) (Unit of replacement: FEED DRIVER PCB ASSEMBLY) - DC-DC Converter PCB (PCB08) (Unit of replacement: DC-DC CONVERT PCB ASS'Y) - Relay PCB (UN86) (Unit of replacement: RELAY PCB ASSEMBLY) - DC Controller PCB (UN01) (Unit of replacement: DC CONTROLLER PCB ASS'Y) [Remedy] Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts. [Reference] Before replacing the DC Controller PCB, back up the service mode data (approx. 2 min) and restore the backup data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected. - Backup: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMBUP - Restoration: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMRES



E197-0003-05



Serial communication error



Detection Description



A communication error between the DC Controller PCB and the Duplex Driver PCB was detected.



Remedy



[Related parts] - Harness between the DC Controller PCB (UN01/J431, J9, J432 and J8) and the Fixing Feed Drawer Unit (J5005) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, SIGNAL) - Harness between the Duplex Driver (UN80/J300, J301 and ,J310) and the Fixing Feed Drawer Unit (J5005) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, FIXING/FEEDER DRAWER) - Harness between the Duplex Driver PCB (UN80/J311) and the DC-DC Converter PCB (PCB08/ J9034) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, FIXING/FEEDER DRAWER) - Harness between the Relay PCB (UN86/J517) and the Fixing Feed Drawer Unit (J5005) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, FIXING/FEEDER DRAWER) - Harness between the DC Controller PCB (UN01/J451) and the Relay PCB (UN86/J514) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, SIGNAL) - DC-DC Converter PCB (PCB08) (Unit of replacement: DC-DC CONVERT PCB ASS'Y) - Duplex Driver PCB (UN80) (Unit of replacement: DUPLEXING DRIVER PCB ASSEMBLY) - Relay PCB (UN86) (Unit of replacement: RELAY PCB ASSEMBLY) - DC Controller PCB (UN01) (Unit of replacement: DC CONTROLLER PCB ASS'Y) [Remedy] Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts. [Reference] Before replacing the DC Controller PCB, back up the service mode data (approx. 2 min) and restore the backup data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected. - Backup: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMBUP - Restoration: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMRES



E197-0004-05



Serial communication error



Detection Description



Disconnection of the harness between the DC Controller PCB and the Relay PCB was detected.



Remedy



[Related parts] - Harness between the DC Controller PCB (UN01/J451) and the Relay PCB (UN86/J514) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, SIGNAL) - Relay PCB (UN86) (Unit of replacement: RELAY PCB ASSEMBLY) - DC Controller PCB (UN01) (Unit of replacement: DC CONTROLLER PCB ASS'Y) [Remedy] Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts. [Reference] Before replacing the DC Controller PCB, back up the service mode data (approx. 2 min) and restore the backup data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected. - Backup: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMBUP - Restoration: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMRES



816



7. Error/Jam/Alarm E197-0005-05



Serial communication error



Detection Description Remedy



E197-0006-05



Disconnection of the harness between the DC Controller PCB and the Main Driver PCB was detected. [Related parts] - Harness between the DC Controller PCB (UN01/J413) and the Main Driver PCB (UN78/J124) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, SIGNAL) - Main Driver PCB (UN78) (Unit of replacement: MAIN DRIVE DRIVER PCB ASS'Y) - DC Controller PCB (UN01) (Unit of replacement: DC CONTROLLER PCB ASS'Y) [Remedy] Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts. [Reference] Before replacing the DC Controller PCB, back up the service mode data (approx. 2 min) and restore the backup data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected. - Backup: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMBUP - Restoration: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMRES Serial communication error



Detection Description Remedy



E197-0008-05



Disconnection of the harness between the DC Controller PCB and the Duplex Driver PCB was detected. [Related parts] - Harness between the DC Controller PCB (UN01/J431, J9, J432 and J8) and the Fixing Feed Drawer Unit (J5005) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, SIGNAL) - Harness between the Duplex Driver PCB (UN80/J300 and J301) and the Fixing Feed Drawer Unit (J5005) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, FIXING/FEEDER DRAWER) - Duplex Driver PCB (UN80) (Unit of replacement: DUPLEXING DRIVER PCB ASSEMBLY) - DC Controller PCB (UN01) (Unit of replacement: DC CONTROLLER PCB ASS'Y) [Remedy] Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts. [Reference] Before replacing the DC Controller PCB, back up the service mode data (approx. 2 min) and restore the backup data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected. - Backup: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMBUP - Restoration: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMRES Serial communication error



Detection Description Remedy



E197-0009-05



Disconnection of the harness between the Main Driver PCB and the Fixing Drawer Unit was detected. [Related parts] - Harness between the Main Driver PCB (UN78/J104 and J105) and the Fixing Drawer Unit (J3001) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, FIXING DRAWER) - Fixing Drawer Unit (J3200) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, FIXING DC DRAWER) - Main Driver PCB (UN78) (Unit of replacement: MAIN DRIVE DRIVER PCB ASS'Y) [Remedy] Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts. Serial communication error



Detection Description Remedy



Disconnection of the harness between the Main Driver PCB and the Process Assembly was detected. [Related parts] - Harnesses from the Main Driver PCB to the AP Drawer Unit 1. Main Driver PCB (UN78/J107) to Relay Connector (12P) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, MAIN, REAR UPPER) 2. Relay Connector (12P) to AP Drawer Unit (J3060) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, AP. KIT DRAWER) - AP Drawer Unit (Unit of replacement: DRAWER ASSEMBLY) - Main Driver PCB (UN78) (Unit of replacement: MAIN DRIVE DRIVER PCB ASS'Y) [Remedy] Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts.



817



7. Error/Jam/Alarm E197-0010-05



Serial communication error



Detection Description Remedy



E197-0011-05



Disconnection of the harness between the Main Driver PCB and the Primary Charging High Voltage PCB was detected. [Related parts] - Harnesses from the Main Driver PCB to the Primary Charging High Voltage PCB 1. Main Driver PCB (UN78/J111) to Relay Connector (9P) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, MAIN, REAR UPPER) 2. Relay Connector (9P) to Primary Charging High Voltage PCB (PCB111/J3501) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, HIGH VOLTAGE SIGNAL) - Primary Charging High Voltage PCB (PCB111) (Unit of replacement: HIGH VOLTAGE PCB ASS'Y) - Main Driver PCB (UN78) (Unit of replacement: MAIN DRIVE DRIVER PCB ASS'Y) [Remedy] Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts. Serial communication error



Detection Description



Disconnection of the harness between the Main Driver PCB and the Develop High Voltage PCB was detected.



Remedy



[Related parts] - Harnesses from the Main Driver PCB to the Develop High Voltage PCB 1. Main Driver PCB (UN78/J112) to Relay Connector (25P) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, MAIN, REAR UPPER) 2. Relay Connector (25P) to Develop High Voltage PCB (PCB112/J3511) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, HIGH VOLTAGE SIGNAL) - Develop High Voltage PCB (PCB112) (Unit of replacement: HIGH VOLTAGE PCB ASS'Y) - Main Driver PCB (UN78) (Unit of replacement: MAIN DRIVE DRIVER PCB ASS'Y) [Remedy] Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts.



E197-0012-05



Serial communication error



Detection Description



Disconnection of the harness between the Duplex Driver PCB and the Transfer High Voltage PCB was detected.



Remedy



[Related parts] - Harness between the Duplex Driver PCB (UN80/J311 and J343) and the Transfer High Voltage PCB (UN76/J3061 and J3062) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, FIXING/FEEDER DRAWER) - Transfer High Voltage PCB (UN76) (Unit of replacement: HIGH VOLTAGE PCB ASS'Y) - Duplex Driver PCB (UN80) (Unit of replacement: DUPLEXING DRIVER PCB ASSEMBLY) [Remedy] Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts.



E199-0000-05



Error in high voltage sequence



Detection Description Remedy



E202-0001-04



Error for collecting log. [Remedy] Collect debug log and contact to the sales company. [Reference] By setting "COPIER (LEVEL2)> OPTION> FNC-SW> SELF-CHK" to "1", it is handled as an error. Reader Scanner Unit HP error



Detection Description Remedy



The Reader Scanner Unit could not detect the home position when starting scanning operation. [Related parts] - Harness between the Scanner Unit HP Sensor (SR2/J5202) and the Reader Controller PCB (UN1/J102) (Unit of replacement: DF MOUNT ASSEMBLY, L) - Harness between the Scanner Motor (M1/J601) and the Reader Controller PCB (PCB1/J108) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, MOTOR) - Scanner Unit HP Sensor (SR2) - Scanner Motor (M1) - Reader Controller PCB (UN1) (Unit of replacement: READER CONTROLLER PCB ASSEMBLY) [Remedy] Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts. [Reference] Before replacing the Reader Controller PCB, back up the service mode data (approx. 2 min) and restore the backup data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected. - Backup: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> RSRAMBUP - Restoration: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> RSRAMRES



818



7. Error/Jam/Alarm E202-0002-04



Reader Scanner Unit HP error



Detection Description



The Reader Scanner Unit could not detect the home position when completing scanning operation.



Remedy



[Related parts] - Harness between the Scanner Unit HP Sensor (SR2/J5202) and the Reader Controller PCB (UN1/J102) (Unit of replacement: DF MOUNT ASSEMBLY, L) - Harness between the Scanner Motor (M1/J601) and the Reader Controller PCB (PCB1/J108) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, MOTOR) - Scanner Unit HP Sensor (SR2) - Scanner Motor (M1) - Reader Controller PCB (UN1) (Unit of replacement: READER CONTROLLER PCB ASSEMBLY) [Remedy] Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts. [Reference] Before replacing the Reader Controller PCB, back up the service mode data (approx. 2 min) and restore the backup data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected. - Backup: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> RSRAMBUP - Restoration: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> RSRAMRES



E202-0003-04



Reader Scanner Unit HP error



Detection Description Remedy



E202-0010-04



An error in the Reader Scanner Unit position was detected when reading of a job was started. [Related parts] - Harness between the Scanner Unit HP Sensor (SR2/J5202) and the Reader Controller PCB (UN1/J102) (Unit of replacement: DF MOUNT ASSEMBLY, L) - Harness between the Scanner Motor (M1/J601) and the Reader Controller PCB (PCB1/J108) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, MOTOR) - Scanner Unit HP Sensor (SR2) - Scanner Motor (M1) - Reader Controller PCB (UN1) (Unit of replacement: READER CONTROLLER PCB ASSEMBLY) [Remedy] Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts. [Reference] Before replacing the Reader Controller PCB, back up the service mode data (approx. 2 min) and restore the backup data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected. - Backup: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> RSRAMBUP - Restoration: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> RSRAMRES Reader Scanner Unit HP error



Detection Description Remedy



The Reader Scanner Unit could not detect the home position when starting scanning operation. [Related parts] - Harness between the Reader Controller PCB (UN_BO1/J102) and the Scanner Unit HP Sensor (PS_A1/J5002) - Harness between the Reader Controller PCB (UN_BO1/J108) and the Scanner Motor (STM1/ J5015) - Scanner Unit HP Sensor (PS_A1) - Scanner Motor (STM1) - Reader Controller PCB (UN_BO1) [Remedy] Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts. [Reference] Before replacing the Reader Controller PCB, back up the service mode data (approx. 2 min) and restore the backup data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected. - Backup: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> RSRAMBUP - Restoration: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> RSRAMRES



819



7. Error/Jam/Alarm E202-0101-04



DADF Scanner Unit HP error



Detection Description Remedy



E202-0102-04



The DADF Scanner Unit could not detect the home position when starting scanning operation. [Related parts] - Harnesses from the Glass HP Sensor to the DADF Driver PCB 1. Glass HP Sensor (SR18/J630) to Relay Connector (6P) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, READ 2 SENSOR) 2. Relay Connector (6P) to Relay Connector (9P) (Unit of replacement: PAPER DELIVERY ASSEMBLY) 3. Relay Connector (9P) to Relay Connector (9P) 4. Relay Connector (9P) to DADF Driver PCB (UN03/J413) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, MAIN SENSOR) - Harnesses from the Glass Shift Motor to the DADF Driver PCB 1. Glass Shift Motor (M8/J1225) to Relay Connector (9P) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, FRONT MOTOR) 2. Relay Connector (9P) to Relay Connector (9P) 3. Relay Connector (9P) to DADF Driver PCB (UN03/J415) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, MOTOR) - Glass HP Sensor (SR18) - Glass Shift Motor (M8) - DADF Driver PCB (UN03) (Unit of replacement: DF DRIVER PCB ASSEMBLY) [Remedy] Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts. DADF Scanner Unit HP error



Detection Description



The DADF Scanner Unit could not detect the home position when completing scanning operation.



Remedy



[Related parts] - Harnesses from the Glass HP Sensor to the DADF Driver PCB 1. Glass HP Sensor (SR18/J630) to Relay Connector (6P) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, READ 2 SENSOR) 2. Relay Connector (6P) to Relay Connector (9P) (Unit of replacement: PAPER DELIVERY ASSEMBLY) 3. Relay Connector (9P) to Relay Connector (9P) 4. Relay Connector (9P) to DADF Driver PCB (UN03/J413) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, MAIN SENSOR) - Harnesses from the Glass Shift Motor to the DADF Driver PCB 1. Glass Shift Motor (M8/J1225) to Relay Connector (9P) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, FRONT MOTOR) 2. Relay Connector (9P) to Relay Connector (9P) 3. Relay Connector (9P) to DADF Driver PCB (UN03/J415) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, MOTOR) - Glass HP Sensor (SR18) - Glass Shift Motor (M8) - DADF Driver PCB (UN03) (Unit of replacement: DF DRIVER PCB ASSEMBLY) [Remedy] Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts.



820



7. Error/Jam/Alarm E227-0001-04



Power supply error



Detection Description Remedy



The Reader Controller PCB did not detect 24 V when the main power was turned ON. [Related parts] - Harness between the Reader Controller PCB (UN1/J111) and the DADF Driver PCB (UN03/J402) (Unit of replacement: ADF POWER CABLE) - Harnesses from the Reader Controller PCB to the Relay PCB 1. Reader Controller PCB (UN1/J101) to Relay Connector (6P) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, READER POWER SUPPLY) 2. Relay Connector (6P) to Relay PCB (UN86/J505) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, SIGNAL ) - Harness between the Relay PCB (UN86/J512) and the DC Power Supply PCB (24V) (J202A) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, DC 24V, A) - Harness between the Relay PCB (UN86/J513) and the DC Power Supply PCB (24V) (J202B) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, DC 24V, B) - Harness between the DC Power Supply PCB (24V) (J102A/J102B) and the AC Driver PCB (UN20/J606) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, AC MAIN) - Harness between the Relay PCB (UN86/J518 and J514) and the DC Controller PCB (UN01/J401 and J451) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, SIGNAL) - Reader Controller PCB (UN1) (Unit of replacement: READER CONTROLLER PCB ASSEMBLY) - DADF Driver PCB (UN03) (Unit of replacement: DF DRIVER PCB ASSEMBLY) - Relay PCB (UN86) (Unit of replacement: RELAY PCB ASSEMBLY) - DC Power Supply PCB (24V) (Unit of replacement: 24V POWER SUPPLY ASS'Y, LEFT) - DC Power Supply PCB (24V) (Unit of replacement: 24V POWER SUPPLY ASS'Y, RIGHT) - AC Driver PCB (UN20) (Unit of replacement: AC DRIVER PCB ASS'Y) - DC Controller PCB (UN2) (Unit of replacement: DC CONTROLLER PCB ASS'Y) [Remedy] Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts. [Reference] - When an error is detected, conduction of 24 V is stopped. At power check, check if 24 V is conducted or rated voltage is output by repeating power cycling of the machine. - Before replacing the Reader Controller PCB, back up the service mode data (approx. 2 min) and restore the backup data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected. Backup: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> RSRAMBUP Restoration: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> RSRAMRES - Before replacing the DC Controller PCB, back up the service mode data (approx. 2 min) and restore the backup data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected. Backup: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMBUP Restoration: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMRES



821



7. Error/Jam/Alarm E227-0101-04



Power supply error



Detection Description Remedy



E240-0000-05



The DADF Driver PCB did not detect 24 V when the main power was turned ON. [Related parts] - Harness between the Reader Controller PCB (UN1/J111) and the DADF Driver PCB (UN03/J402) (Unit of replacement: ADF POWER CABLE) - Harnesses from the Reader Controller PCB to the Relay PCB 1. Reader Controller PCB (UN1/J101) to Relay Connector (6P) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, READER POWER SUPPLY) 2. Relay Connector (6P) to Relay PCB (UN86/J505) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, SIGNAL ) - Harness between the Relay PCB (UN86/J512) and the DC Power Supply PCB (24V) (J202A) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, DC 24V, A) - Harness between the Relay PCB (UN86/J513) and the DC Power Supply PCB (24V) (J202B) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, DC 24V, B) - Harness between the DC Power Supply PCB (24V) (J102A/J102B) and the AC Driver PCB (UN20/J606) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, AC MAIN) - Harness between the Relay PCB (UN86/J518 and J514) and the DC Controller PCB (UN01/J401 and J451) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, SIGNAL) - Reader Controller PCB (UN1) (Unit of replacement: READER CONTROLLER PCB ASSEMBLY) - DADF Driver PCB (UN03) (Unit of replacement: DF DRIVER PCB ASSEMBLY) - Relay PCB (UN86) (Unit of replacement: RELAY PCB ASSEMBLY) - DC Power Supply PCB (24V) (Unit of replacement: 24V POWER SUPPLY ASS'Y, LEFT) - DC Power Supply PCB (24V) (Unit of replacement: 24V POWER SUPPLY ASS'Y, RIGHT) - AC Driver PCB (UN20) (Unit of replacement: AC DRIVER PCB ASS'Y) - DC Controller PCB (UN2) (Unit of replacement: DC CONTROLLER PCB ASS'Y) [Remedy] Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts. [Reference] - When an error is detected, conduction of 24 V is stopped. At power check, check if 24 V is conducted or rated voltage is output by repeating power cycling of the machine. - Before replacing the Reader Controller PCB, back up the service mode data (approx. 2 min) and restore the backup data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected. Backup: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> RSRAMBUP Restoration: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> RSRAMRES - Before replacing the DC Controller PCB, back up the service mode data (approx. 2 min) and restore the backup data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected. Backup: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMBUP Restoration: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMRES Controller communication error



Detection Description Remedy



A communication error occurred between the Main Controller PCB and the DC Controller PCB. [Related parts] - Harness between the Main Controller PCB 2 (PWB02/J5201) and the DC Controller PCB (UN01/ J443) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, COMMUNICATION) - Harness between the Main Controller PCB 2 (PWB02/J5202) and the DC Controller PCB (UN01/ J442) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, SIGNAL) - DC Controller PCB (UN01) (Unit of replacement: DC CONTROLLER PCB ASS'Y) - Main Controller PCB 2 (PWB02) (Unit of replacement: MAIN CONTROLLER PCB ASS'Y, 2) - Main Controller PCB 1 (PWB01) (Unit of replacement: MAIN CONTROLLER PCB ASS'Y, 1) [Remedy] Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts. [Reference] Before replacing the DC Controller PCB, back up the service mode data (approx. 2 min) and restore the backup data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected. - Backup: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMBUP - Restoration: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMRES



822



7. Error/Jam/Alarm E240-0001-05



Controller communication error



Detection Description Remedy



E240-0002-05



Pickup request waiting status was detected. [Related parts] - Harness between the Main Controller PCB 2 (PWB02/J5201) and the DC Controller PCB (UN01/ J443) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, COMMUNICATION) - Harness between the Main Controller PCB 2 (PWB02/J5202) and the DC Controller PCB (UN01/ J442) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, SIGNAL) - DC Controller PCB (UN01) (Unit of replacement: DC CONTROLLER PCB ASS'Y) - Main Controller PCB 2 (PWB02) (Unit of replacement: MAIN CONTROLLER PCB ASS'Y, 2) - Main Controller PCB 1 (PWB01) (Unit of replacement: MAIN CONTROLLER PCB ASS'Y, 1) [Remedy] Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts. [Reference] Before replacing the DC Controller PCB, back up the service mode data (approx. 2 min) and restore the backup data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected. - Backup: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMBUP - Restoration: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMRES Controller communication error



Detection Description Remedy



E240-0003-05



Image output request waiting status was detected. [Related parts] - Harness between the Main Controller PCB 2 (PWB02/J5201) and the DC Controller PCB (UN01/ J443) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, COMMUNICATION) - Harness between the Main Controller PCB 2 (PWB02/J5202) and the DC Controller PCB (UN01/ J442) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, SIGNAL) - DC Controller PCB (UN01) (Unit of replacement: DC CONTROLLER PCB ASS'Y) - Main Controller PCB 2 (PWB02) (Unit of replacement: MAIN CONTROLLER PCB ASS'Y, 2) - Main Controller PCB 1 (PWB01) (Unit of replacement: MAIN CONTROLLER PCB ASS'Y, 1) [Remedy] Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts. [Reference] Before replacing the DC Controller PCB, back up the service mode data (approx. 2 min) and restore the backup data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected. - Backup: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMBUP - Restoration: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMRES Controller communication error



Detection Description Remedy



E246-0001-00



A sequence error was detected after the jam. [Related parts] - Harness between the Main Controller PCB 2 (PWB02/J5201) and the DC Controller PCB (UN01/ J443) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, COMMUNICATION) - Harness between the Main Controller PCB 2 (PWB02/J5202) and the DC Controller PCB (UN01/ J442) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, SIGNAL) - DC Controller PCB (UN01) (Unit of replacement: DC CONTROLLER PCB ASS'Y) - Main Controller PCB 2 (PWB02) (Unit of replacement: MAIN CONTROLLER PCB ASS'Y, 2) - Main Controller PCB 1 (PWB01) (Unit of replacement: MAIN CONTROLLER PCB ASS'Y, 1) [Remedy] Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts. [Reference] Before replacing the DC Controller PCB, back up the service mode data (approx. 2 min) and restore the backup data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected. - Backup: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMBUP - Restoration: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMRES System error



Detection Description Remedy E246-0002-00



System error Contact to the sales company. System error



Detection Description Remedy E246-0003-00



System error Contact to the sales company. System error



Detection Description Remedy



System error Contact to the sales company.



823



7. Error/Jam/Alarm E246-0005-00



System error



Detection Description Remedy E247-0001-00



System error Contact to the sales company. System error



Detection Description Remedy E247-0002-00



System error Contact to the sales company. System error



Detection Description Remedy E247-0003-00



System error Contact to the sales company. System error



Detection Description Remedy E247-0004-00



System error Contact to the sales company. System error



Detection Description Remedy E248-0001-04



System error Contact to the sales company. EEPROM error



Detection Description



Reading error was detected when the Main Controller PCB 1 read the Reader backup value in the Reader Controller PCB.



Remedy



[Related parts] - Reader Controller PCB (UN1) (Unit of replacement: READER CONTROLLER PCB ASSEMBLY) [Remedy]Check/replace the Reader Controller PCB (UN1). (Unit of replacement: READER CONTROLLER PCB ASSEMBLY) [Reference] Before replacing the Reader Controller PCB, back up the service mode data (approx. 2 min) and restore the backup data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected. - Backup: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> RSRAMBUP - Restoration: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> RSRAMRES



E248-0002-04



EEPROM error



Detection Description



The Main Controller PCB 1 failed writing of the Reader backup value in the Reader Controller PCB.



Remedy



[Related parts] - Reader Controller PCB (UN1) (Unit of replacement: READER CONTROLLER PCB ASSEMBLY) [Remedy]Check/replace the Reader Controller PCB (UN1). (Unit of replacement: READER CONTROLLER PCB ASSEMBLY) [Reference] Before replacing the Reader Controller PCB, back up the service mode data (approx. 2 min) and restore the backup data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected. - Backup: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> RSRAMBUP - Restoration: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> RSRAMRES



E248-0003-04



EEPROM error



Detection Description



The Main Controller PCB 1 detected an error at inspection after completion of writing of the Reader backup value in the Reader Controller PCB.



Remedy



[Related parts] - Reader Controller PCB (UN1) (Unit of replacement: READER CONTROLLER PCB ASSEMBLY) [Remedy]Check/replace the Reader Controller PCB (UN1). (Unit of replacement: READER CONTROLLER PCB ASSEMBLY) [Reference] Before replacing the Reader Controller PCB, back up the service mode data (approx. 2 min) and restore the backup data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected. - Backup: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> RSRAMBUP - Restoration: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> RSRAMRES



824



7. Error/Jam/Alarm E248-0010-04



EEPROM error



Detection Description Remedy



E263-0000-05



The Main Controller PCB detected reading error of the Reader backup value in the Reader Controller PCB. [Related parts] - Reader Controller PCB (UN1) (Unit of replacement: READER CONTROLLER PCB ASSEMBLY) [Remedy]Check/replace the Reader Controller PCB (UN_BO1). [Reference] Before replacing the Reader Controller PCB, back up the service mode data (approx. 2 min) and restore the backup data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected. - Backup: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> RSRAMBUP - Restoration: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> RSRAMRES Current Sensor error



Detection Description Remedy



E263-0001-05



An error in voltage of the Current Sensor was detected. [Related parts] - Harnesses from the AC Driver PCB to the Main Driver PCB 1. AC Driver PCB (UN20/J615) to Relay Connector (13P) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, SIGNAL) 2. Relay Connector (13P) to Main Driver PCB (UN78/J103) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, MAIN DRIVER RELAY) - AC Driver PCB (Unit of replacement: AC DRIVER PCB ASS'Y) - Main Driver PCB (UN78) (Unit of replacement: MAIN DRIVE DRIVER PCB ASS'Y) [Remedy] Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts. Current Sensor error



Detection Description Remedy



E263-0002-05



It was detected that the value of the Current Sensor was higher than the upper limit. [Related parts] - Harnesses from the AC Driver PCB to the Main Driver PCB 1. AC Driver PCB (UN20/J615) to Relay Connector (13P) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, SIGNAL) 2. Relay Connector (13P) to Main Driver PCB (UN78/J103) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, MAIN DRIVER RELAY) - AC Driver PCB (Unit of replacement: AC DRIVER PCB ASS'Y) - Main Driver PCB (UN78) (Unit of replacement: MAIN DRIVE DRIVER PCB ASS'Y) [Remedy] Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts. Current Sensor error



Detection Description Remedy



E280-0001-04



It was detected that the value of the Current Sensor was lower than the lower limit. [Related parts] - Harnesses from the AC Driver PCB to the Main Driver PCB 1. AC Driver PCB (UN20/J615) to Relay Connector (13P) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, SIGNAL) 2. Relay Connector (13P) to Main Driver PCB (UN78/J103) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, MAIN DRIVER RELAY) - AC Driver PCB (Unit of replacement: AC DRIVER PCB ASS'Y) - Main Driver PCB (UN78) (Unit of replacement: MAIN DRIVE DRIVER PCB ASS'Y) [Remedy] Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts. Communication error



Detection Description Remedy



Communication between the Reader Controller PCB and the Reader Scanner Unit was not completed within the specified period of time. [Related parts] - Harness between the Reader Scanner Unit (UN2/J1101) and the Reader Controller PCB (UN1/ J106) (Unit of replacement: FLEXIBLE FLAT CABLE UNIT) - Harness between the Reader Controller PCB (UN1/J109) and the Main Controller PCB 2 (PWB02/J4031) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, INTERFACE) - Reader Scanner Unit (UN2) (Unit of replacement: SCANNER UNIT, READER) - Reader Controller PCB (UN1) (Unit of replacement: READER CONTROLLER PCB ASSEMBLY) [Remedy] Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts. [Reference] Before replacing the Reader Controller PCB, back up the service mode data (approx. 2 min) and restore the backup data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected. - Backup: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> RSRAMBUP - Restoration: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> RSRAMRES



825



7. Error/Jam/Alarm E280-0002-04



Communication error



Detection Description Remedy



E280-0101-04



Disconnection of FFC between the Reader Controller PCB and the Reader Scanner Unit was detected. [Related parts] - Harness between the Reader Scanner Unit (UN2/J1101) and the Reader Controller PCB (UN1/ J106) (Unit of replacement: FLEXIBLE FLAT CABLE UNIT) - Harness between the Reader Controller PCB (UN1/J109) and the Main Controller PCB 2 (PWB02/J4031) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, INTERFACE) [Remedy] Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts. Communication error



Detection Description Remedy



E280-0102-04



Communication between the Reader Controller PCB and the DADF Scanner Unit was not completed within the specified period of time. [Related parts] - Harness between the DADF Scanner Unit (J1102) and the Reader Controller PCB (UN1/J105) (Unit of replacement: FLEXIBLE FLAT CABLE UNIT) - Harness between the Reader Controller PCB (UN1/J109) and the Main Controller PCB 2 (PWB02/J4031) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, INTERFACE) - DADF Scanner Unit (Unit of replacement: SCANNER UNIT, ADF) - Reader Controller PCB (UN1) (Unit of replacement: READER CONTROLLER PCB ASSEMBLY) [Remedy] Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts. [Reference] Before replacing the Reader Controller PCB, back up the service mode data (approx. 2 min) and restore the backup data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected. - Backup: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> RSRAMBUP - Restoration: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> RSRAMRES Communication error



Detection Description Remedy



E302-0001-04



Disconnection of FFC between the Reader Controller PCB and the DADF Scanner Unit was detected. [Related parts] - Harness between the DADF Scanner Unit (J1102) and the Reader Controller PCB (UN1/J105) (Unit of replacement: FLEXIBLE FLAT CABLE UNIT) - Harness between the Reader Controller PCB (UN1/J109) and the Main Controller PCB 2 (PWB02/J4031) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, INTERFACE) [Remedy] Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts. Error in paper front white shading



Detection Description Remedy



An access error to the paper front white shading RAM or a paper front white shading value that was higher than the specified value was detected. [Related parts] - Harness between the Reader Scanner Unit (UN2/J1101) and the Reader Controller PCB (UN1/ J106) (Unit of replacement: FLEXIBLE FLAT CABLE UNIT) - Harness between the Reader Controller PCB (UN1/J109) and the Main Controller PCB 2 (PWB02/J4031) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, INTERFACE) - Reader Scanner Unit (UN2) (Unit of replacement: SCANNER UNIT, READER) - Reader Controller PCB (UN1) (Unit of replacement: READER CONTROLLER PCB ASSEMBLY) [Remedy] Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts. [Reference] Before replacing the Reader Controller PCB, back up the service mode data (approx. 2 min) and restore the backup data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected. - Backup: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> RSRAMBUP - Restoration: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> RSRAMRES



826



7. Error/Jam/Alarm E302-0002-04



Error in paper front black shading



Detection Description Remedy



E302-0003-04



An access error to the paper front black shading RAM or a paper front black shading value that was higher than the specified value was detected. [Related parts] - Harness between the Reader Scanner Unit (UN2/J1101) and the Reader Controller PCB (UN1/ J106) (Unit of replacement: FLEXIBLE FLAT CABLE UNIT) - Harness between the Reader Controller PCB (UN1/J109) and the Main Controller PCB 2 (PWB02/J4031) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, INTERFACE) - Reader Scanner Unit (UN2) (Unit of replacement: SCANNER UNIT, READER) - Reader Controller PCB (UN1) (Unit of replacement: READER CONTROLLER PCB ASSEMBLY) [Remedy] Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts. [Reference] Before replacing the Reader Controller PCB, back up the service mode data (approx. 2 min) and restore the backup data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected. - Backup: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> RSRAMBUP - Restoration: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> RSRAMRES Error in paper front white shading



Detection Description Remedy



E302-0101-04



The paper front white shading value gradually became out of the specified range. [Related parts] - Harness between the Reader Scanner Unit (J101) and the Reader Controller PCB (J105) - Reader Scanner Unit - Reader Controller PCB [Remedy] 1. Clean the LED, mirror, and Stream Reading Glass of Scanner Unit. 2. Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts. [Reference] Before replacing the Reader Controller PCB, back up the service mode data (approx. 2 min) and restore the backup data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected. - Backup: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> RSRAMBUP - Restoration: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> RSRAMRES Error in paper back white shading



Detection Description Remedy



E302-0102-04



An access error to the paper back white shading RAM or a paper back white shading value that was higher than the specified value was detected. [Related parts] - Harness between the DADF Scanner Unit (J1102) and the Reader Controller PCB (UN1/J105) (Unit of replacement: FLEXIBLE FLAT CABLE UNIT) - Harness between the Reader Controller PCB (UN1/J109) and the Main Controller PCB 2 (PWB02/J4031) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, INTERFACE) - DADF Scanner Unit (Unit of replacement: SCANNER UNIT, ADF) - Reader Controller PCB (UN1) (Unit of replacement: READER CONTROLLER PCB ASSEMBLY) [Remedy] Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts. [Reference] Before replacing the Reader Controller PCB, back up the service mode data (approx. 2 min) and restore the backup data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected. - Backup: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> RSRAMBUP - Restoration: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> RSRAMRES Error in paper back black shading



Detection Description Remedy



An access error to the paper back black shading RAM or a paper back black shading value that was higher than the specified value was detected. [Related parts] - Harness between the DADF Scanner Unit (J1102) and the Reader Controller PCB (UN1/J105) (Unit of replacement: FLEXIBLE FLAT CABLE UNIT) - Harness between the Reader Controller PCB (UN1/J109) and the Main Controller PCB 2 (PWB02/J4031) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, INTERFACE) - DADF Scanner Unit (Unit of replacement: SCANNER UNIT, ADF) - Reader Controller PCB (UN1) (Unit of replacement: READER CONTROLLER PCB ASSEMBLY) [Remedy] Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts. [Reference] Before replacing the Reader Controller PCB, back up the service mode data (approx. 2 min) and restore the backup data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected. - Backup: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> RSRAMBUP - Restoration: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> RSRAMRES



827



7. Error/Jam/Alarm E302-0103-04



Error in paper back white shading



Detection Description Remedy



E315-0007-00



The paper back white shading value gradually became out of the specified range. [Related parts] - Harness between the DADF Scanner Unit (J1102) and the Reader Controller PCB (J105) (Unit of replacement: FLEXIBLE FLAT CABLE UNIT) - Harness between the Reader Controller PCB (J109) and the Main Controller PCB 2 (PWB02/ J4031) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, INTERFACE) - DADF Scanner Unit (Unit of replacement: SCANNER UNIT, ADF) - Reader Controller PCB (Unit of replacement: READER CONTROLLER PCB ASSEMBLY) [Remedy] 1. Clean the LED, mirror, and Stream Reading Glass of Scanner Unit. 2. Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts. [Reference] Before replacing the Reader Controller PCB, back up the service mode data (approx. 2 min) and restore the backup data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected. - Backup: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> RSRAMBUP - Restoration: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> RSRAMRES Image process device timeout error



Detection Description Remedy



E315-000D-00



Image compression process was not completed within the specified period of time (120 sec) at scanning. [Related parts] - Harness between the Reader Controller PCB (UN1/J109) and Main Controller PCB 2 (PWB02/ J4031) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, INTERFACE) - Main Controller PCB 2 (PWB02) (Unit of replacement: MAIN CONTROLLER PCB ASS'Y, 2) - Main Controller PCB 1 (PWB01) (Unit of replacement: MAIN CONTROLLER PCB ASS'Y, 1) - Reader Controller PCB (UN1) (Unit of replacement: READER CONTROLLER PCB ASSEMBLY) [Points to note at work] After performing the remedy, check that the copy image is output normally. [Remedy] Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared. 1. Reinstall the latest system software using SST or a USB memory. 2. Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts. [Reference] Before replacing the Reader Controller PCB, back up the service mode data (approx. 2 min) and restore the backup data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected. - Backup: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> RSRAMBUP - Restoration: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> RSRAMRES Image process device timeout error



Detection Description Remedy



E315-000F-00



Processing of a JBIG-compressed data was not completed within the specified period of time (120 sec) at printing or SEND. [Related parts] - Main Controller PCB 1 (PWB01) (Unit of replacement: MAIN CONTROLLER PCB ASS'Y, 1) [Remedy]Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared. 1. Reinstall the latest system software using SST or a USB memory. 2. Replace the Main Controller PCB. (PWB01) (Unit of replacement: MAIN CONTROLLER PCB ASS'Y, 1) Image process device timeout error



Detection Description Remedy



Duplication of image data in the memory was not completed within the specified period of time (120 sec). [Related parts] - Main Controller PCB 1 (PWB01) (Unit of replacement: MAIN CONTROLLER PCB ASS'Y, 1) [Remedy]Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared. 1. Reinstall the latest system software using SST or a USB memory. 2. Replace the Main Controller PCB. (PWB01) (Unit of replacement: MAIN CONTROLLER PCB ASS'Y, 1)



828



7. Error/Jam/Alarm E315-0027-00



Image process device timeout error



Detection Description Remedy



E315-0033-00



Image processing (change in magnification ratio, rotating, and shifting) was not completed normally within the specified period of time (120 sec). [Related parts] - Main Controller PCB 1 (PWB01) (Unit of replacement: MAIN CONTROLLER PCB ASS'Y, 1) [Remedy]Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared. 1. Reinstall the latest system software using SST or a USB memory. 2. Replace the Main Controller PCB. (PWB01) (Unit of replacement: MAIN CONTROLLER PCB ASS'Y, 1) Image process device timeout error



Detection Description Remedy



E315-0035-00



Processing to clear image data in the memory was not completed normally within the specified period of time (120 sec). [Related parts] - Main Controller PCB 1 (PWB01) (Unit of replacement: MAIN CONTROLLER PCB ASS'Y, 1) [Remedy]Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared. 1. Reinstall the latest system software using SST or a USB memory. 2. Replace the Main Controller PCB. (PWB01) (Unit of replacement: MAIN CONTROLLER PCB ASS'Y, 1) Image process device timeout error



Detection Description Remedy



E315-0100-00



Processing to clear image data in the memory was not completed normally within the specified period of time (120 sec). [Related parts] - Main Controller PCB 1 (PWB01) (Unit of replacement: MAIN CONTROLLER PCB ASS'Y, 1) [Remedy]Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared. 1. Reinstall the latest system software using SST or a USB memory. 2. Replace the Main Controller PCB. (PWB01) (Unit of replacement: MAIN CONTROLLER PCB ASS'Y, 1) Image process device timeout error



Detection Description Remedy



Image transfer could not be started because the signal that is a trigger to start printing was not detected within the specified period of time (60 sec) at printing. [Related parts] - Harness between the Reader Controller PCB (UN1/J109) and Main Controller PCB 2 (PWB02/ J4031) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, INTERFACE) - Main Controller PCB 2 (PWB02) (Unit of replacement: MAIN CONTROLLER PCB ASS'Y, 2) - Main Controller PCB 1 (PWB01) (Unit of replacement: MAIN CONTROLLER PCB ASS'Y, 1) - Reader Controller PCB (UN1) (Unit of replacement: READER CONTROLLER PCB ASSEMBLY) [Points to note at work] After performing the remedy, check that the copy image is output normally. [Remedy] Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared. 1. Reinstall the latest system software using SST or a USB memory. 2. Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts. [Reference] Before replacing the Reader Controller PCB, back up the service mode data (approx. 2 min) and restore the backup data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected. - Backup: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> RSRAMBUP - Restoration: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> RSRAMRES



829



7. Error/Jam/Alarm E315-0500-00



Image process device timeout error



Detection Description Remedy



E315-0510-00



Image transfer could not be started because the signal that is a trigger to start printing was not detected within the specified period of time (60 sec) at printing. [Related parts] - Harness between the Reader Controller PCB (UN1/J109) and Main Controller PCB 2 (PWB02/ J4031) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, INTERFACE) - Main Controller PCB 2 (PWB02) (Unit of replacement: MAIN CONTROLLER PCB ASS'Y, 2) - Main Controller PCB 1 (PWB01) (Unit of replacement: MAIN CONTROLLER PCB ASS'Y, 1) - Reader Controller PCB (UN1) (Unit of replacement: READER CONTROLLER PCB ASSEMBLY) [Points to note at work] After performing the remedy, check that the copy image is output normally. [Remedy] Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared. 1. Reinstall the latest system software using SST or a USB memory. 2. Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts. [Reference] Before replacing the Reader Controller PCB, back up the service mode data (approx. 2 min) and restore the backup data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected. - Backup: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> RSRAMBUP - Restoration: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> RSRAMRES Image process device timeout error



Detection Description Remedy



E315-0520-00



Image processing was not completed within the specified period of time (30 sec) at scanning. [Related parts] - Harness between the Reader Controller PCB (UN1/J109) and Main Controller PCB 2 (PWB02/ J4031) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, INTERFACE) - Main Controller PCB 2 (PWB02) (Unit of replacement: MAIN CONTROLLER PCB ASS'Y, 2) - Main Controller PCB 1 (PWB01) (Unit of replacement: MAIN CONTROLLER PCB ASS'Y, 1) - Reader Controller PCB (UN1) (Unit of replacement: READER CONTROLLER PCB ASSEMBLY) [Points to note at work] After performing the remedy, check that the copy image is output normally. [Remedy] Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared. 1. Reinstall the latest system software using SST or a USB memory. 2. Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts. [Reference] Before replacing the Reader Controller PCB, back up the service mode data (approx. 2 min) and restore the backup data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected. - Backup: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> RSRAMBUP - Restoration: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> RSRAMRES Image process device timeout error



Detection Description Remedy



E315-0530-00



Image processing was not completed within the specified period of time (120 sec) at scanning. [Related parts] - Main Controller PCB 1 (PWB01) (Unit of replacement: MAIN CONTROLLER PCB ASS'Y, 1) [Points to note at work] After performing the remedy, check that the copy image is output normally. [Remedy] Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared. 1. Reinstall the latest system software using SST or a USB memory. 2. Replace the Main Controller PCB. (PWB01) (Unit of replacement: MAIN CONTROLLER PCB ASS'Y, 1) Image process device error



Detection Description Remedy



Compression processing of the scanned image into JPEG was terminated abnormally. [Related parts] - Main Controller PCB 1 (PWB01) (Unit of replacement: MAIN CONTROLLER PCB ASS'Y, 1) [Points to note at work] After performing the remedy, check that the copy image is output normally. [Remedy] Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared. 1. Reinstall the latest system software using SST or a USB memory. 2. Replace the Main Controller PCB. (PWB01) (Unit of replacement: MAIN CONTROLLER PCB ASS'Y, 1)



830



7. Error/Jam/Alarm E315-0531-00



Image process device timeout error



Detection Description



Compression processing of the scanned image into JPEG was not completed within the specified period of time (120 sec).



Remedy



[Related parts] - Harness between the Reader Controller PCB (UN1/J109) and Main Controller PCB 2 (PWB02/ J4031) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, INTERFACE) - Main Controller PCB 2 (PWB02) (Unit of replacement: MAIN CONTROLLER PCB ASS'Y, 2) - Main Controller PCB 1 (PWB01) (Unit of replacement: MAIN CONTROLLER PCB ASS'Y, 1) - Reader Controller PCB (UN1) (Unit of replacement: READER CONTROLLER PCB ASSEMBLY) [Points to note at work] After performing the remedy, check that the copy image is output normally. [Remedy] Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared. 1. Reinstall the latest system software using SST or a USB memory. 2. Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts. [Reference] Before replacing the Reader Controller PCB, back up the service mode data (approx. 2 min) and restore the backup data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected. - Backup: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> RSRAMBUP - Restoration: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> RSRAMRES



E315-0540-00



Image process device error



Detection Description Remedy



E315-0541-00



An error occurred during decompression of JPEG. [Related parts] - Main Controller PCB 1 (PWB01) (Unit of replacement: MAIN CONTROLLER PCB ASS'Y, 1) [Remedy]Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared. 1. Reinstall the latest system software using SST or a USB memory. 2. Replace the Main Controller PCB. (PWB01) (Unit of replacement: MAIN CONTROLLER PCB ASS'Y, 1) Image process device timeout error



Detection Description Remedy



E315-0561-00



Decompression of JPEG was not completed within the specified period of time (120 sec). [Related parts] - Main Controller PCB 1 (PWB01) (Unit of replacement: MAIN CONTROLLER PCB ASS'Y, 1) [Remedy]Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared. 1. Reinstall the latest system software using SST or a USB memory. 2. Replace the Main Controller PCB. (PWB01) (Unit of replacement: MAIN CONTROLLER PCB ASS'Y, 1) Image process device timeout error



Detection Description Remedy



Image transfer was not completed within the specified period of time (120 sec) after the start of printing. [Related parts] - Harness between the Reader Controller PCB (UN1/J109) and Main Controller PCB 2 (PWB02/ J4031) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, INTERFACE) - Main Controller PCB 2 (PWB02) (Unit of replacement: MAIN CONTROLLER PCB ASS'Y, 2) - Main Controller PCB 1 (PWB01) (Unit of replacement: MAIN CONTROLLER PCB ASS'Y, 1) - Reader Controller PCB (UN1) (Unit of replacement: READER CONTROLLER PCB ASSEMBLY) [Points to note at work] After performing the remedy, check that the copy image is output normally. [Remedy] Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared. 1. Reinstall the latest system software using SST or a USB memory. 2. Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts. [Reference] Before replacing the Reader Controller PCB, back up the service mode data (approx. 2 min) and restore the backup data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected. - Backup: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> RSRAMBUP - Restoration: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> RSRAMRES



831



7. Error/Jam/Alarm E330-0001-05



Image signal communication error



Detection Description Remedy



E350-0000-00



An image signal communication error between the DC Controller PCB and the Main Controller PCB was detected. [Related parts] - Harness between the DC Controller PCB (UN1/J443) and the Main Controller PCB 2 (UN8/J711) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, SIGNAL) - Main Controller PCB 2 (UN8) (Unit of replacement: MAIN CONTROLLER PCB ASS'Y, 2) - Main Controller PCB 1 (UN34) (Unit of replacement: MAIN CONTROLLER PCB ASS'Y, 1) - DC Controller PCB (UN1) (Unit of replacement: DC CONTROLLER PCB ASS'Y) [Remedy] Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts. [Reference] Before replacing the DC Controller PCB, back up the service mode data (approx. 2 min) and restore the backup data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected. - Backup: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMBUP - Restoration: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMRES System error



Detection Description Remedy E350-0001-00



System error Contact to the sales company. System error



Detection Description Remedy E350-0002-00



System error Contact to the sales company. System error



Detection Description Remedy E350-0003-00



System error Contact to the sales company. System error



Detection Description Remedy E350-3000-00



System error Contact to the sales company. System error



Detection Description Remedy E351-0000-00



System error Contact to the sales company. System error



Detection Description Remedy E354-0001-00



System error Contact to the sales company. System error



Detection Description Remedy E354-0002-00



System error Contact to the sales company. System error



Detection Description Remedy E355-0001-00



System error Contact to the sales company. System error



Detection Description Remedy E355-0002-00



System error Contact to the sales company. System error



Detection Description Remedy E355-0003-00



System error Contact to the sales company. System error



Detection Description Remedy



System error Contact to the sales company.



832



7. Error/Jam/Alarm E355-0004-00



System error



Detection Description Remedy E400-0002-04



System error Contact to the sales company. Communication error



Detection Description Remedy



E400-0003-04



A communication error between the Reader Controller PCB and the DADF Driver PCB was detected. [Related parts] - Harness between the DADF Driver PCB (UN03/J401) and the Reader Controller PCB (UN1/J104) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, FLAT) - Harness between the DADF Driver PCB (UN03/J402) and the Reader Controller PCB (UN1/J111) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, ADF POWER SUPPLY) - DADF Driver PCB (UN3) (Unit of replacement: DF DRIVER PCB ASSEMBLY) - Reader Controller PCB (UN1) (Unit of replacement: READER CONTROLLER PCB ASSEMBLY) [Remedy] Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts. [Reference] Before replacing the Reader Controller PCB, back up the service mode data (approx. 2 min) and restore the backup data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected. - Backup: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> RSRAMBUP - Restoration: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> RSRAMRES Communication error



Detection Description



Disconnection of the harness between the Reader Controller PCB and the DADF Driver PCB was detected.



Remedy



[Related parts] - Harness between the DADF Driver PCB (UN03/J401) and the Reader Controller PCB (UN1/J104) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, FLAT) - Harness between the DADF Driver PCB (UN03/J402) and the Reader Controller PCB (UN1/J111) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, ADF POWER SUPPLY) - DADF Driver PCB (UN3) (Unit of replacement: DF DRIVER PCB ASSEMBLY) - Reader Controller PCB (UN1) (Unit of replacement: READER CONTROLLER PCB ASSEMBLY) [Remedy] Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts. [Reference] Before replacing the Reader Controller PCB, back up the service mode data (approx. 2 min) and restore the backup data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected. - Backup: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> RSRAMBUP - Restoration: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> RSRAMRES



E401-0001-04



Pickup Roller Unit Lifting HP Sensor error



Detection Description Remedy



The Pickup Roller Unit Lifting HP Sensor in the DADF did not detect the ON status. [Related parts] - Harnesses from the Pickup Roller Unit Lifting HP Sensor to the DADF Driver PCB 1. Pickup Roller Unit Lifting HP Sensor (SR11/J614) to Relay Connector (7P) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, PAPER PICK-UP REAR, UP.) 2. Relay Connector (7P) to DADF Driver PCB (UN03/J409) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, MAIN SENSOR) - Harness between the Pickup Roller Unit Lifting Motor (M1/J612) and the DADF Driver PCB (UN03/J403) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, REAR MOTOR, 2) - Pickup Roller Unit Lifting HP Sensor (SR11) - Pickup Roller Unit Lifting Motor (M1) - DADF Driver PCB (UN03) (Unit of replacement: DF DRIVER PCB ASSEMBLY) [Remedy] Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts.



833



7. Error/Jam/Alarm E401-0002-04



Pickup Roller Unit Lifting HP Sensor error



Detection Description Remedy



E407-0001-04



The Pickup Roller Unit Lifting HP Sensor in the DADF did not detect the OFF status. [Related parts] - Harnesses from the Pickup Roller Unit Lifting HP Sensor to the DADF Driver PCB 1. Pickup Roller Unit Lifting HP Sensor (SR11/J614) to Relay Connector (7P) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, PAPER PICK-UP REAR, UP.) 2. Relay Connector (7P) to DADF Driver PCB (UN03/J409) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, MAIN SENSOR) - Harness between the Pickup Roller Unit Lifting Motor (M1/J612) and the DADF Driver PCB (UN03/J403) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, REAR MOTOR, 2) - Pickup Roller Unit Lifting HP Sensor (SR11) - Pickup Roller Unit Lifting Motor (M1) - DADF Driver PCB (UN03) (Unit of replacement: DF DRIVER PCB ASSEMBLY) [Remedy] Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts. Tray Lifting Motor error



Detection Description Remedy



E407-0002-04



The Tray HP Sensor in the DADF did not detect the ON/OFF status within the specified period of time. [Related parts] - Harness between the DADF Driver PCB and the Tray HP Sensor - Tray HP Sensor - Tray Lifting Motor - DADF Driver PCB [Remedy] Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts. Tray Lifting Motor error



Detection Description Remedy



E412-0001-04



The Paper Surface Sensor in the DADF was not turned ON within the specified period of time when lifting up the lifter. [Related parts] - Harness between the DADF Driver PCB and the ADF Paper Surface Sensor - Paper Surface Sensor - Tray Lifting Motor - DADF Driver PCB [Remedy] Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts. Fan error



Detection Description



Rotation of fan was detected after the stop signal for the Scanner Unit Cooling Fan was transmitted.



Remedy



[Related parts] - Harnesses from the Scanner Unit Cooling Fan to the Reader Controller PCB 1. Scanner Unit Cooling Fan (FM1/J125) to Relay Connector (3P) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, FAN) 2. Relay Connector (3P) to Relay Connector (3P) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, FAN CONNECTING, 2) 3. Relay Connector (3P) to Reader Controller PCB (UN1/J103) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, FAN) - Scanner Unit Cooling Fan (FM1) - Reader Controller PCB (PCB1) (Unit of replacement: READER CONTROLLER PCB ASSEMBLY) [Remedy] Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts. [Reference] Before replacing the Reader Controller PCB, back up the service mode data (approx. 2 min) and restore the backup data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected. - Backup: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> RSRAMBUP - Restoration: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> RSRAMRES



834



7. Error/Jam/Alarm E412-0002-04



Fan error



Detection Description Remedy



E412-0005-04



Stop of fan was detected after rotation signal for the Scanner Unit Cooling Fan was transmitted. [Related parts] - Harnesses from the Scanner Unit Cooling Fan to the Reader Controller PCB 1. Scanner Unit Cooling Fan (FM1/J125) to Relay Connector (3P) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, FAN) 2. Relay Connector (3P) to Relay Connector (3P) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, FAN CONNECTING, 2) 3. Relay Connector (3P) to Reader Controller PCB (UN1/J103) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, FAN) - Scanner Unit Cooling Fan (FM1) - Reader Controller PCB (PCB1) (Unit of replacement: READER CONTROLLER PCB ASSEMBLY) [Remedy] Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts. [Reference] Before replacing the Reader Controller PCB, back up the service mode data (approx. 2 min) and restore the backup data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected. - Backup: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> RSRAMBUP - Restoration: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> RSRAMRES Fan error



Detection Description



Rotation of fan was detected after the stop signal for the DADF Cooling Fan 1/2 was transmitted.



Remedy



[Related parts] - Harness between DADF Cooling Fan 2 (FM2/J620) and the DADF Driver PCB (UN03/J408) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, REAR MOTOR, 2) - DADF Cooling Fan 1 (FM1) - DADF Cooling Fan 2 (FM2) - DADF Driver PCB (UN03) (Unit of replacement: DF DRIVER PCB ASSEMBLY) [Remedy] Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts.



E412-0006-04



Fan error



Detection Description Remedy



E423-0001-04



Stop of fan was detected after rotation signal for the DADF Cooling Fan 1/2 was transmitted. [Related parts] - Harness between DADF Cooling Fan 2 (FM2/J620) and the DADF Driver PCB (UN03/J408) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, REAR MOTOR, 2) - DADF Cooling Fan 1 (FM1) - DADF Cooling Fan 2 (FM2) - DADF Driver PCB (UN03) (Unit of replacement: DF DRIVER PCB ASSEMBLY) [Remedy] Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts. SDRAM error in the Reader Controller PCB



Detection Description



Either an access error to SDRAM in the Reader Controller PCB or an error at data inspection was detected.



Remedy



[Remedy] Replace the Reader Controller PCB (PCB1). (Unit of replacement: READER CONTROLLER PCB ASSEMBLY) [Reference] Before replacing the Reader Controller PCB, back up the service mode data (approx. 2 min) and restore the backup data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected. - Backup: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> RSRAMBUP - Restoration: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> RSRAMRES



E423-0002-04



SDRAM error in the Reader Controller PCB



Detection Description



Either an access error to SDRAM in the Reader Controller PCB or an error at data inspection was detected.



Remedy



[Related parts] - Reader Controller PCB (UN1) (Unit of replacement: READER CONTROLLER PCB ASSEMBLY) [Remedy] Replace the Reader Controller PCB (PCB1). (Unit of replacement: READER CONTROLLER PCB ASSEMBLY) [Reference] Before replacing the Reader Controller PCB, back up the service mode data (approx. 2 min) and restore the backup data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected. - Backup: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> RSRAMBUP - Restoration: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> RSRAMRES



835



7. Error/Jam/Alarm E500-0001-05



Communication error



Detection Description Remedy



E500-0002-05



A communication error between the DC Controller PCB and the POD Deck was detected. [Related parts] - Harnesses from the DC Controller PCB to the Deck Driver PCB 1. DC Controller PCB (UN01/J461) to Relay Connector (9P) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, SIGNAL) 2. Relay PCB (UN86/J502) to Relay Connector (4P) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, DECK, DC) 3. Relay Connector (9P and 4P) to Deck Lattice Connector (Unit of replacement: CABLE, DECK CONNECTOR) 4. Deck Lattice Connector to Deck Driver PCB - Deck Driver PCB - DC Controller PCB (UN01) (Unit of replacement: DC CONTROLLER PCB ASS'Y) [Remedy] Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared. 1. Check that the Power Supply Cable is connected to the deck/there is electrical current in the outlet/breaker of the deck is ON. 2. Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts. [Reference] - After replacement of the Deck Driver PCB, refer to "Adjustments> Adjustment when Replacing the Parts" in the Service Manual. - Before replacing the DC Controller PCB, back up the service mode data (approx. 2 min) and restore the backup data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected. - Backup: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMBUP - Restoration: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMRES Communication error



Detection Description



A communication error between the DC Controller PCB and the Side Paper Deck was detected.



Remedy



[Related parts] - Harnesses from the DC Controller PCB to the Deck Driver PCB 1. DC Controller PCB (UN01/J461) to Relay Connector (9P) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, SIGNAL) 2. Relay PCB (UN86/J502) to Relay Connector (4P) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, DECK, DC) 3. Relay Connector (9P and 4P) to Deck Lattice Connector (Unit of replacement: CABLE, DECK CONNECTOR) 4. Deck Lattice Connector to Deck Driver PCB - Deck Driver PCB - DC Controller PCB (UN01) (Unit of replacement: DC CONTROLLER PCB ASS'Y) [Remedy] Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts. [Reference] - After replacement of the Deck Driver PCB, refer to "Adjustments> Adjustment when Replacing the Parts" in the Service Manual. - Before replacing the DC Controller PCB, back up the service mode data (approx. 2 min) and restore the backup data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected. - Backup: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMBUP - Restoration: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMRES



E503-0021-02



Error in communication between the Finisher and Saddle Unit (Finisher-V)



Detection Description



Communication error between the Finisher Controller PCB and the Saddle Stitcher Controller PCB was detected. (Command transmission error)



Remedy



STAPLE FIN-V/BOOKLET FIN-V [Related parts] - Harnesses and connectors from the Finisher Controller PCB to the Saddle Stitcher Controller PCB - Finisher Controller PCB (PCB101) - Saddle Stitcher Controller PCB (PCB201) [Remedy] Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared. 1. Check/replace the harness and connector between the Finisher Controller PCB and the Saddle Stitcher Controller PCB. 2. Replace the Finisher Controller PCB. [Reference] When replacing the Finisher Controller PCB, refer to "Adjustment> When Replacing the Parts" in the Service Manual. 3. Replace the Saddle Stitcher Controller PCB.



836



7. Error/Jam/Alarm E503-0022-02



Error in communication between the Finisher and Saddle Unit (Finisher-V)



Detection Description



Communication error between the Finisher Controller PCB and the Saddle Stitcher Controller PCB was detected. (Command reception error)



Remedy



STAPLE FIN-V/BOOKLET FIN-V [Related parts] - Harnesses and connectors from the Finisher Controller PCB to the Saddle Stitcher Controller PCB - Finisher Controller PCB (PCB101) - Saddle Stitcher Controller PCB (PCB201) [Remedy] Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared. 1. Check/replace the harness and connector between the Finisher Controller PCB and the Saddle Stitcher Controller PCB. 2. Replace the Finisher Controller PCB. [Reference] When replacing the Finisher Controller PCB, refer to "Adjustment> When Replacing the Parts" in the Service Manual. 3. Replace the Saddle Stitcher Controller PCB.



E503-0031-02



Error in communication between the Finisher and Puncher Unit (Finisher-V)



Detection Description



Communication error between the Finisher Controller PCB and the Puncher Controller PCB was detected. (Command transmission error)



Remedy



STAPLE FIN-V/BOOKLET FIN-V [Related parts] - Harnesses and connectors from the Finisher Controller PCB to the Puncher Controller PCB - Finisher Controller PCB (PCB101) - Puncher Controller PCB (PCB301) [Remedy] Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared. 1. Check/replace the harness and connector between the Finisher Controller PCB and the Puncher Controller PCB. 2. Replace the Finisher Controller PCB. [Reference] When replacing the Finisher Controller PCB, refer to "Adjustment> When Replacing the Parts" in the Service Manual. 3. Replace the Puncher Controller PCB. [Reference] When replacing the Puncher Controller PCB, refer to "Adjustment> When Replacing the Parts" in the Service Manual.



E503-0032-02



Error in communication between the Finisher and Puncher Unit (Finisher-V)



Detection Description



Communication error between the Finisher Controller PCB and the Puncher Controller PCB was detected. (Command reception error)



Remedy



STAPLE FIN-V/BOOKLET FIN-V [Related parts] - Harnesses and connectors from the Finisher Controller PCB to the Puncher Controller PCB - Finisher Controller PCB (PCB101) - Puncher Controller PCB (PCB301) [Remedy] Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared. 1. Check/replace the harness and connector between the Finisher Controller PCB and the Puncher Controller PCB. 2. Replace the Finisher Controller PCB. [Reference] When replacing the Finisher Controller PCB, refer to "Adjustment> When Replacing the Parts" in the Service Manual. 3. Replace the Puncher Controller PCB. [Reference] When replacing the Puncher Controller PCB, refer to "Adjustment> When Replacing the Parts" in the Service Manual.



837



7. Error/Jam/Alarm E503-0051-02



Error in communication between the Finisher and Document Insertion/Folding Unit (Finisher-V)



Detection Description



Communication error between the Finisher and the Document Insertion/Folding Unit was detected. (Hand-shake error)



Remedy



STAPLE FIN-V/BOOKLET FIN-V [Related parts] - Harnesses from the Finisher Controller PCB to the Inserter/folder Controller PCB - Finisher Controller PCB (PCB101) - Inserter/folder Controller PCB [Remedy] Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared. 1. Check that the breaker of the Document Insertion/Folding Unit is ON. 2. Check that the Power Supply Cable is connected to the Document Insertion/Folding Unit/there is electrical current in the outlet. 3. Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts. [Reference] - When replacing the Finisher Controller PCB, refer to "Adjustment> When Replacing the Parts" in the Service Manual. - When replacing the Inserter/folder Controller PCB, refer to "Adjustment> Adjustment at Time of Parts Replacement" in the Service Manual.



E503-0052-02



Error in communication between the Finisher and Document Insertion/Folding Unit (Finisher-V)



Detection Description



Communication error between the Finisher and the Document Insertion/Folding Unit was detected. (Command transmission error)



Remedy



STAPLE FIN-V/BOOKLET FIN-V [Related parts] - Harnesses from the Finisher Controller PCB to the Inserter/folder Controller PCB - Finisher Controller PCB (PCB101) - Inserter/folder Controller PCB [Remedy] Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared. 1. Check that the breaker of the Document Insertion/Folding Unit is ON. 2. Check that the Power Supply Cable is connected to the Document Insertion/Folding Unit/there is electrical current in the outlet. 3. Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts. [Reference] - When replacing the Finisher Controller PCB, refer to "Adjustment> When Replacing the Parts" in the Service Manual. - When replacing the Inserter/folder Controller PCB, refer to "Adjustment> Adjustment at Time of Parts Replacement" in the Service Manual.



E503-0053-02



Error in communication between the Finisher and Document Insertion/Folding Unit (Finisher-V)



Detection Description



Communication error between the Finisher and the Document Insertion/Folding Unit was detected. (Time out error)



Remedy



STAPLE FIN-V/BOOKLET FIN-V [Related parts] - Harnesses from the Finisher Controller PCB to the Inserter/folder Controller PCB - Finisher Controller PCB (PCB101) - Inserter/folder Controller PCB [Remedy] Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared. 1. Check that the breaker of the Document Insertion/Folding Unit is ON. 2. Check that the Power Supply Cable is connected to the Document Insertion/Folding Unit/there is electrical current in the outlet. 3. Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts. [Reference] - When replacing the Finisher Controller PCB, refer to "Adjustment> When Replacing the Parts" in the Service Manual. - When replacing the Inserter/folder Controller PCB, refer to "Adjustment> Adjustment at Time of Parts Replacement" in the Service Manual.



838



7. Error/Jam/Alarm E503-0061-02



Error in communication between the IC of Finisher Controller PCB (Finisher-V)



Detection Description Remedy



E503-0062-02



Communication error between the IC of Finisher Controller PCB was detected. (Command transmission error) STAPLE FIN-V/BOOKLET FIN-V [Related parts] - Finisher Controller PCB (PCB101) [Remedy] Replace the Finisher Controller PCB. [Reference] When replacing the Finisher Controller PCB, refer to "Adjustment> When Replacing the Parts" in the Service Manual. Error in communication between the IC of Finisher Controller PCB (Finisher-V)



Detection Description Remedy



E505-0001-02



Communication error between the IC of Finisher Controller PCB was detected. (Command reception error) STAPLE FIN-V/BOOKLET FIN-V [Related parts] - Finisher Controller PCB (PCB101) [Remedy] Replace the Finisher Controller PCB. [Reference] When replacing the Finisher Controller PCB, refer to "Adjustment> When Replacing the Parts" in the Service Manual. Finisher data error (Finisher-V)



Detection Description



The data read from Finisher Controller PCB has an error. (The read data doesn't match with the written data.)



Remedy



STAPLE FIN-V/BOOKLET FIN-V [Related parts] - Finisher Controller PCB (PCB101) [Remedy] Replace the Finisher Controller PCB. [Reference] When replacing the Finisher Controller PCB, refer to "Adjustment> When Replacing the Parts" in the Service Manual.



E505-0003-02



Back-up RAM error (Document Insertion/Folding Unit-J1, Document Insertion Unit-P1)



Detection Description Remedy



E505-0004-02



The value written in EEPROM and the value extracted from EEPROM doesn't conform. [Related parts] - Inserter/folder Controller PCB [Remedy] Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts. [Reference] - When replacing the Inserter/folder Controller PCB, refer to "Adjustment> Adjustment at Time of Parts Replacement" in the Service Manual. Puncher unit data error (Finisher-V)



Detection Description



The data read from Puncher Controller PCB has an error. (The read data doesn't match with the written data.)



Remedy



STAPLE FIN-V/BOOKLET FIN-V [Related parts] - Puncher Controller PCB (PCB301) [Remedy] Replace the Puncher Controller PCB. [Reference] When replacing the Puncher Controller PCB, refer to "Adjustment> When Replacing the Parts" in the Service Manual.



839



7. Error/Jam/Alarm E514-8001-02



Error in the Paper End Assist Motor (Finisher-V)



Detection Description Remedy



E514-8002-02



The assist belt does not come off the Paper End Assist HP Sensor when the Paper End Assist Motor has been driven for 1 second. STAPLE FIN-V/BOOKLET FIN-V [Related parts] - Harnesses from the Paper End Assist HP Sensor (PS123) to the Finisher Controller PCB - Harnesses from the Paper End Assist Motor (M113) to the Finisher Controller PCB - Paper End Assist HP Sensor (PS123) - Paper End Assist Motor (M113) - Finisher Controller PCB (PCB101) [Remedy] Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts. [Reference] When replacing the Finisher Controller PCB, refer to "Adjustment> When Replacing the Parts" in the Service Manual. Error in the Paper End Assist Motor (Finisher-V)



Detection Description



The Paper End Assist HP Sensor does not detect the assist belt when the Paper End Assist Motor has been driven for 2 seconds.



Remedy



STAPLE FIN-V/BOOKLET FIN-V [Related parts] - Harnesses from the Paper End Assist HP Sensor (PS123) to the Finisher Controller PCB - Harnesses from the Paper End Assist Motor (M113) to the Finisher Controller PCB - Paper End Assist HP Sensor (PS123) - Paper End Assist Motor (M113) - Finisher Controller PCB (PCB101) [Remedy] Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts. [Reference] When replacing the Finisher Controller PCB, refer to "Adjustment> When Replacing the Parts" in the Service Manual.



E518-8001-02



Error in Fold Transport Motor (Insertion Folding Unit-P1)



Detection Description



Fold Transport Motor lock signal has been detected for more than the specified period of time.



Remedy



[Related parts] - Harnesses from the Inserter/Folder Controller PCB (PCB2) to the Fold Transport Motor(M5) - Inserter/Folder Controller PCB (PCB2) - Fold Transport Motor(M5) [Remedy] Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts. [Reference] - When replacing the Inserter/Folder Controller PCB, refer to "Adjustments> Adjustment when Replacing the Parts" in the Service Manual.



E530-8001-02



Error in the Front Alignment Motor (Finisher-V)



Detection Description Remedy



The front alignment plate does not come off the Front Alignment HP Sensor when the Front Alignment Motor has been driven for 1 second. STAPLE FIN-V/BOOKLET FIN-V [Related parts] - Harnesses from the Front Alignment HP Sensor (PS115) to the Finisher Controller PCB - Harnesses from the Front Alignment Motor (M107) to the Finisher Controller PCB - Front Alignment HP Sensor (PS115) - Front Alignment Motor (M107) - Finisher Controller PCB (PCB101) [Points to note at work] Perform this work only for old type*. When the Swing Guide Safety Switch (SW102) turns on at the detection timing of this error, this error code may be displayed. Accordingly, perform the following work before checking the related parts. 1. Check whether there is not the malfunction in the swing guide unit. 2. Check whether there is not the malfunction in the Swing Guide Safety Switch (SW102). *: Distinguishing Between the New/Old Types New Type (J132: Short Connector) Old Type (J132: Swing Guide Safety Switch (SW102)) [Remedy] Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts. [Reference] When replacing the Finisher Controller PCB, refer to "Adjustment> When Replacing the Parts" in the Service Manual.



840



7. Error/Jam/Alarm E530-8002-02



Error in the Front Alignment Motor (Finisher-V)



Detection Description Remedy



E531-8001-02



The Front Alignment HP Sensor does not detect the Front Alignment plate when the Front Alignment Motor has been driven for 1 second. STAPLE FIN-V/BOOKLET FIN-V [Related parts] - Harnesses from the Front Alignment HP Sensor (PS115) to the Finisher Controller PCB - Harnesses from the Front Alignment Motor (M107) to the Finisher Controller PCB - Front Alignment HP Sensor (PS115) - Front Alignment Motor (M107) - Finisher Controller PCB (PCB1) [Points to note at work] Perform this work only for old type*. When the Swing Guide Safety Switch (SW102) turns on at the detection timing of this error, this error code may be displayed. Accordingly, perform the following work before checking the related parts. 1. Check whether there is not the malfunction in the swing guide unit. 2. Check whether there is not the malfunction in the Swing Guide Safety Switch (SW102). *: Distinguishing Between the New/Old Types New Type (J132: Short Connector) Old Type (J132: Swing Guide Safety Switch (SW102)) [Remedy] Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts. [Reference] When replacing the Finisher Controller PCB, refer to "Adjustment> When Replacing the Parts" in the Service Manual. Error in the Staple Motor (Finisher-V)



Detection Description



The staple unit does not come off the Staple HP Sensor when the Staple Motor has been driven for 0.4 seconds.



Remedy



STAPLE FIN-V/BOOKLET FIN-V [Related parts] - Harnesses from the Stapler Unit to the Stapler Relay PCB - Harnesses from the Stapler Unit Relay PCB to the Finisher Controller PCB - Stapler Unit - Stapler Unit Relay PCB (PCB102) - Finisher Controller PCB (PCB101) [Points to note at work] Perform this work only for old type*. When the Swing Guide Safety Switch (SW102) turns on at the detection timing of this error, this error code may be displayed. Accordingly, perform the following work before checking the related parts. 1. Check whether there is not the malfunction in the swing guide unit. 2. Check whether there is not the malfunction in the Swing Guide Safety Switch (SW102). *: Distinguishing Between the New/Old Types New Type (J132: Short Connector) Old Type (J132: Swing Guide Safety Switch (SW102)) [Remedy] Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts. [Reference] When replacing the Finisher Controller PCB, refer to "Adjustment> When Replacing the Parts" in the Service Manual.



841



7. Error/Jam/Alarm E531-8002-02



Error in the Staple Motor (Finisher-V)



Detection Description



The Staple HP Sensor does nor detect the staple unit when the Staple Motor has been driven for 0.4 seconds.



Remedy



STAPLE FIN-V/BOOKLET FIN-V [Related parts] - Harnesses from the Stapler Unit to the Stapler Relay PCB - Harnesses from the Stapler Unit Relay PCB to the Finisher Controller PCB - Stapler Unit - Stapler Unit Relay PCB (PCB102) - Finisher Controller PCB (PCB101) [Points to note at work] Perform this work only for old type*. When the Swing Guide Safety Switch (SW102) turns on at the detection timing of this error, this error code may be displayed. Accordingly, perform the following work before checking the related parts. 1. Check whether there is not the malfunction in the swing guide unit. 2. Check whether there is not the malfunction in the Swing Guide Safety Switch (SW102). *: Distinguishing Between the New/Old Types New Type (J132: Short Connector) Old Type (J132: Swing Guide Safety Switch (SW102)) [Remedy] Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts. [Reference] When replacing the Finisher Controller PCB, refer to "Adjustment> When Replacing the Parts" in the Service Manual.



E532-8001-02



Error in the Stapler Shift Motor (Finisher-V)



Detection Description



The stapler unit does not come off the Stapler Shift HP Sensor when the Stapler Shift Motor has been driven for 1 second.



Remedy



STAPLE FIN-V/BOOKLET FIN-V [Related parts] - Harnesses from the Stapler Shift HP Sensor (PS124) to the Finisher Controller PCB - Harnesses from the Stapler Shift Motor (M114) to the Finisher Controller PCB - Stapler Shift HP Sensor (PS124) - Stapler Shift Motor (M114) - Finisher Controller PCB (PCB101) [Remedy] Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts. [Reference] When replacing the Finisher Controller PCB, refer to "Adjustment> When Replacing the Parts" in the Service Manual.



E532-8002-02



Error in the Stapler Shift Motor (Finisher-V)



Detection Description



The Stapler Shift HP Sensor does not detect the stapler unit when the Stapler Shift Motor has been driven for 15 seconds.



Remedy



STAPLE FIN-V/BOOKLET FIN-V [Related parts] - Harnesses from the Stapler Shift HP Sensor (PS124) to the Finisher Controller PCB - Harnesses from the Stapler Shift Motor (M114) to the Finisher Controller PCB - Stapler Shift HP Sensor (PS124) - Stapler Shift Motor (M114) - Finisher Controller PCB (PCB101) [Remedy] Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts. [Reference] When replacing the Finisher Controller PCB, refer to "Adjustment> When Replacing the Parts" in the Service Manual.



842



7. Error/Jam/Alarm E533-8001-02



Staple-free Binding Motor Clock error (Finisher-V)



Detection Description



The clock signal from the Staple-free Binding Motor Clock Sensor does not detect during from 0.24 seconds to 0.25 seconds after operating the Staple-free Binding Motor.



Remedy



STAPLE FIN-V/BOOKLET FIN-V [Related parts] - Harnesses from the Staple-free Binding Unit to the Finisher Controller PCB - Staple-free Binding Unit - Finisher Controller PCB (PCB101) [Points to note at work] Perform this work only for old type*. When the Swing Guide Safety Switch (SW102) turns on at the detection timing of this error, this error code may be displayed. Accordingly, perform the following work before checking the related parts. 1. Check whether there is not the malfunction in the swing guide unit. 2. Check whether there is not the malfunction in the Swing Guide Safety Switch (SW102). *: Distinguishing Between the New/Old Types New Type (J132: Short Connector) Old Type (J132: Swing Guide Safety Switch (SW102)) [Remedy] Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts. [Reference] When replacing the Finisher Controller PCB, refer to "Adjustment> When Replacing the Parts" in the Service Manual.



E533-8002-02



Error in the Staple-free Binding Motor (Finisher-V)



Detection Description



The staple-free binding unit does not come off the Staple-free Binding HP Sensor when the Staplefree Binding Motor has been driven for 0.25 seconds.



Remedy



STAPLE FIN-V/BOOKLET FIN-V [Related parts] - Harnesses from the Staple-free Binding Unit to the Finisher Controller PCB - Staple-free Binding Unit - Finisher Controller PCB (PCB101) [Points to note at work] Perform this work only for old type*. When the Swing Guide Safety Switch (SW102) turns on at the detection timing of this error, this error code may be displayed. Accordingly, perform the following work before checking the related parts. 1. Check whether there is not the malfunction in the swing guide unit. 2. Check whether there is not the malfunction in the Swing Guide Safety Switch (SW102). *: Distinguishing Between the New/Old Types New Type (J132: Short Connector) Old Type (J132: Swing Guide Safety Switch (SW102)) [Remedy] Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts. [Reference] When replacing the Finisher Controller PCB, refer to "Adjustment> When Replacing the Parts" in the Service Manual.



E533-8003-02



Error in the Staple-free Binding Motor (Finisher-V)



Detection Description



The clock signal from the Staple-free Binding Motor Clock Sensor does not detect during from 0.24 seconds to 0.25 seconds after operating the Staple-free Binding Motor, and the staple-free binding unit does not come off the Staple-free Binding HP Sensor when the Staple-free Binding Motor has been driven for 0.25 seconds.



Remedy



STAPLE FIN-V/BOOKLET FIN-V [Related parts] - Harnesses from the Staple-free Binding Unit to the Finisher Controller PCB - Staple-free Binding Unit - Finisher Controller PCB (PCB101) [Points to note at work] Perform this work only for old type*. When the Swing Guide Safety Switch (SW102) turns on at the detection timing of this error, this error code may be displayed. Accordingly, perform the following work before checking the related parts. 1. Check whether there is not the malfunction in the swing guide unit. 2. Check whether there is not the malfunction in the Swing Guide Safety Switch (SW102). *: Distinguishing Between the New/Old Types New Type (J132: Short Connector) Old Type (J132: Swing Guide Safety Switch (SW102)) [Remedy] Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts. [Reference] When replacing the Finisher Controller PCB, refer to "Adjustment> When Replacing the Parts" in the Service Manual.



843



7. Error/Jam/Alarm E533-8004-02



Staple-free binding time out error (Finisher-V)



Detection Description



Remedy



E533-8005-02



The staple-free binding does not be executed within 2 seconds after starting the operation. (The rotation speed of the motor that detected by the Staple-free Binding Motor Clock Sensor don't decrease.) STAPLE FIN-V/BOOKLET FIN-V [Related parts] - Harnesses from the Staple-free Binding Unit to the Finisher Controller PCB - Staple-free Binding Unit - Finisher Controller PCB (PCB101) [Points to note at work] Perform this work only for old type*. When the Swing Guide Safety Switch (SW102) turns on at the detection timing of this error, this error code may be displayed. Accordingly, perform the following work before checking the related parts. 1. Check whether there is not the malfunction in the swing guide unit. 2. Check whether there is not the malfunction in the Swing Guide Safety Switch (SW102). *: Distinguishing Between the New/Old Types New Type (J132: Short Connector) Old Type (J132: Swing Guide Safety Switch (SW102)) [Remedy] Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts. [Reference] When replacing the Finisher Controller PCB, refer to "Adjustment> When Replacing the Parts" in the Service Manual. Error in the Staple-free Binding Motor (Finisher-V)



Detection Description



The Staple-free Binding HP Sensor does not detect the staple-free binding part when the Staplefree Binding Motor has been driven. (The return operation of the binding parts isn't completed.)



Remedy



STAPLE FIN-V/BOOKLET FIN-V [Related parts] - Harnesses from the Staple-free Binding Unit to the Finisher Controller PCB - Staple-free Binding Unit - Finisher Controller PCB (PCB101) [Points to note at work] Perform this work only for old type*. When the Swing Guide Safety Switch (SW102) turns on at the detection timing of this error, this error code may be displayed. Accordingly, perform the following work before checking the related parts. 1. Check whether there is not the malfunction in the swing guide unit. 2. Check whether there is not the malfunction in the Swing Guide Safety Switch (SW102). *: Distinguishing Between the New/Old Types New Type (J132: Short Connector) Old Type (J132: Swing Guide Safety Switch (SW102)) [Remedy] Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts. [Reference] When replacing the Finisher Controller PCB, refer to "Adjustment> When Replacing the Parts" in the Service Manual.



844



7. Error/Jam/Alarm E535-8001-02



Error in the Swing Guide Motor (Finisher-V)



Detection Description



The swing guide does not come off the Swing Guide HP Sensor when the Swing Guide Motor has been driven for 1 second.



Remedy



STAPLE FIN-V/BOOKLET FIN-V [Related parts] - Harnesses from the Swing Guide HP Sensor (PS119) to the Finisher Controller PCB - Harnesses from the Swing Guide Motor (M110) to the Finisher Controller PCB - Swing Guide HP Sensor (PS119) - Swing Guide Motor (M110) - Finisher Controller PCB (PCB101) [Points to note at work] Perform this work only for old type*. When the Swing Guide Safety Switch (SW102) turns on at the detection timing of this error, this error code may be displayed. Accordingly, perform the following work before checking the related parts. 1. Check whether there is not the malfunction in the swing guide unit. 2. Check whether there is not the malfunction in the Swing Guide Safety Switch (SW102). *: Distinguishing Between the New/Old Types New Type (J132: Short Connector) Old Type (J132: Swing Guide Safety Switch (SW102)) [Remedy] Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts. [Reference] When replacing the Finisher Controller PCB, refer to "Adjustment> When Replacing the Parts" in the Service Manual.



E535-8002-02



Error in the Swing Guide Motor (Finisher-V)



Detection Description Remedy



The Swing Guide HP Sensor does not detect the swing guide when the Swing Guide Motor has been driven for 1 second. STAPLE FIN-V/BOOKLET FIN-V [Related parts] - Harnesses from the Swing Guide HP Sensor (PS119) to the Finisher Controller PCB - Harnesses from the Swing Guide Motor (M110) to the Finisher Controller PCB - Swing Guide HP Sensor (PS119) - Swing Guide Motor (M110) - Finisher Controller PCB (PCB101) [Points to note at work] Perform this work only for old type*. When the Swing Guide Safety Switch (SW102) turns on at the detection timing of this error, this error code may be displayed. Accordingly, perform the following work before checking the related parts. 1. Check whether there is not the malfunction in the swing guide unit. 2. Check whether there is not the malfunction in the Swing Guide Safety Switch (SW102). *: Distinguishing Between the New/Old Types New Type (J132: Short Connector) Old Type (J132: Swing Guide Safety Switch (SW102)) [Remedy] Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts. [Reference] When replacing the Finisher Controller PCB, refer to "Adjustment> When Replacing the Parts" in the Service Manual.



845



7. Error/Jam/Alarm E537-8001-02



Error in the Rear Alignment Motor (Finisher-V)



Detection Description Remedy



E537-8002-02



The rear alignment plate does not come off the Rear Alignment HP Sensor when the Rear Alignment Motor has been driven for 1 second. STAPLE FIN-V/BOOKLET FIN-V [Related parts] - Harnesses from the Rear Alignment HP Sensor (PS116) to the Finisher Controller PCB - Harnesses from the Rear Alignment Motor (M108) to the Finisher Controller PCB - Rear Alignment HP Sensor (PS116) - Rear Alignment Motor (M108) - Finisher Controller PCB (PCB101) [Points to note at work] Perform this work only for old type*. When the Swing Guide Safety Switch (SW102) turns on at the detection timing of this error, this error code may be displayed. Accordingly, perform the following work before checking the related parts. 1. Check whether there is not the malfunction in the swing guide unit. 2. Check whether there is not the malfunction in the Swing Guide Safety Switch (SW102). *: Distinguishing Between the New/Old Types New Type (J132: Short Connector) Old Type (J132: Swing Guide Safety Switch (SW102)) [Remedy] Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts. [Reference] When replacing the Finisher Controller PCB, refer to "Adjustment> When Replacing the Parts" in the Service Manual. Error in the Rear Alignment Motor (Finisher-V)



Detection Description



The Rear Alignment HP Sensor does not detect the rear alignment plate when the Rear Alignment Motor has been driven for 1 second.



Remedy



STAPLE FIN-V/BOOKLET FIN-V [Related parts] - Harnesses from the Rear Alignment HP Sensor (PS116) to the Finisher Controller PCB - Harnesses from the Rear Alignment Motor (M108) to the Finisher Controller PCB - Rear Alignment HP Sensor (PS116) - Rear Alignment Motor (M108) - Finisher Controller PCB (PCB101) [Points to note at work] Perform this work only for old type*. When the Swing Guide Safety Switch (SW102) turns on at the detection timing of this error, this error code may be displayed. Accordingly, perform the following work before checking the related parts. 1. Check whether there is not the malfunction in the swing guide unit. 2. Check whether there is not the malfunction in the Swing Guide Safety Switch (SW102). *: Distinguishing Between the New/Old Types New Type (J132: Short Connector) Old Type (J132: Swing Guide Safety Switch (SW102)) [Remedy] Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts. [Reference] When replacing the Finisher Controller PCB, refer to "Adjustment> When Replacing the Parts" in the Service Manual.



846



7. Error/Jam/Alarm E540-8001-02



Stack tray time out error (Finisher-V)



Detection Description



The operation of the stack tray don't finish when the Stack Tray Shift Motor has been driven for 28 seconds. The stack tray does not come off the same area when the Stack Tray Shift Motor has been driven for 15 seconds.



Remedy



STAPLE FIN-V/BOOKLET FIN-V [Related parts] - Harnesses from the Stack Tray HP Sensor (PS106) to the Finisher Controller PCB - Harnesses from the Stack Tray Full Sensor 1/2/3 (PS107/PS108/PS109) to the Finisher Controller PCB - Harnesses from the Stack Tray Upper Limit Sensor (PS110) to the Finisher Controller PCB - Harnesses from the Stack Tray Shift Motor (M105) to the Finisher Controller PCB - Stack Tray HP Sensor (PS106) - Stack Tray Full Sensor 1/2/3 (PS107/PS108/PS109) - Stack Tray Shift Motor (M105) - Finisher Controller PCB (PCB101) [Points to note at work] Perform this work only for old type*. When the Swing Guide Safety Switch (SW102) turns on at the detection timing of this error, this error code may be displayed. Accordingly, perform the following work before checking the related parts. 1. Check whether there is not the malfunction in the swing guide unit. 2. Check whether there is not the malfunction in the Swing Guide Safety Switch (SW102). *: Distinguishing Between the New/Old Types New Type (J132: Short Connector) Old Type (J132: Swing Guide Safety Switch (SW102)) [Remedy] Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts. [Reference] When replacing the Finisher Controller PCB, refer to "Adjustment> When Replacing the Parts" in the Service Manual.



E540-8002-02



Stack tray area error (Finisher-V)



Detection Description Remedy



The stack tray detects the discontinuous area during the operation. STAPLE FIN-V/BOOKLET FIN-V [Related parts] - Harnesses from the Stack Tray HP Sensor (PS106) to the Finisher Controller PCB - Harnesses from the Stack Tray Full Sensor 1/2/3 (PS107/PS108/PS109) to the Finisher Controller PCB - Harnesses from the Stack Tray Upper Limit Sensor (PS110) to the Finisher Controller PCB - Harnesses from the Stack Tray Shift Motor (M105) to the Finisher Controller PCB - Stack Tray HP Sensor (PS106) - Stack Tray Full Sensor 1/2/3 (PS107/PS108/PS109) - Stack Tray Upper Limit Sensor (PS110) - Stack Tray Shift Motor (M105) - Finisher Controller PCB (PCB1) [Points to note at work] Perform this work only for old type*. When the Swing Guide Safety Switch (SW102) turns on at the detection timing of this error, this error code may be displayed. Accordingly, perform the following work before checking the related parts. 1. Check whether there is not the mulfunction in the swing guide unit. 2. Check whether there is not the mulfunction in the Swing Guide Safety Switch (SW102). *: Distinguishing Between the New/Old Types New Type (J132: Short Connector) Old Type (J132: Swing Guide Safety Switch (SW102)) [Remedy] Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts. [Reference] When replacing the Finisher Controller PCB, refer to "Adjustment> When Replacing the Parts" in the Service Manual.



847



7. Error/Jam/Alarm E540-8004-02



Stack tray paper surface detection error (Finisher-V)



Detection Description



The Stack Tray Paper Surface Sensor does not turn off when the stack tray has been lowered for 10 seconds.



Remedy



STAPLE FIN-V/BOOKLET FIN-V [Related parts] - Harnesses from the Stack Tray Paper Surface Sensor (light-emitting) (PBA101) to the Finisher Controller PCB - Harnesses from the Stack Tray Paper Surface Sensor (light-receiving) (PBA102/PBA103) to the Finisher Controller PCB - Harnesses from the Stack Tray Shift Motor (M105) to the Finisher Controller PCB - Stack Tray Paper Surface Sensor (light-emitting) (PBA101) - Stack Tray Paper Surface Sensor (light-receiving) (PBA102/PBA103) - Stack Tray Shift Motor (M105) - Finisher Controller PCB (PCB101) [Points to note at work] Perform this work only for old type*. When the Swing Guide Safety Switch (SW102) turns on at the detection timing of this error, this error code may be displayed. Accordingly, perform the following work before checking the related parts. 1. Check whether there is not the malfunction in the swing guide unit. 2. Check whether there is not the malfunction in the Swing Guide Safety Switch (SW102). *: Distinguishing Between the New/Old Types New Type (J132: Short Connector) Old Type (J132: Swing Guide Safety Switch (SW102)) [Remedy] Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts. [Reference] When replacing the Finisher Controller PCB, refer to "Adjustment> When Replacing the Parts" in the Service Manual.



E551-0003-02



Error in the Cooling Fan (Finisher-V)



Detection Description Remedy



E551-0004-02



The lock signal is detected 1.2 seconds or more while the fan operates. STAPLE FIN-V/BOOKLET FIN-V [Related parts] - Harnesses from the Cooling Fan (FM101) to the Finisher Controller PCB - Cooling Fan (FM101) - Finisher Controller PCB (PCB101) [Remedy] Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts. [Reference] When replacing the Finisher Controller PCB, refer to "Adjustment> When Replacing the Parts" in the Service Manual. Error in the Cooling Fan of the Finisher (Finisher-V)



Detection Description Remedy



The lock status is released when the fan stops. STAPLE FIN-V/BOOKLET FIN-V [Related parts] - Harnesses from the Cooling Fan (FM101) to the Finisher Controller PCB - Cooling Fan (FM101) - Finisher Controller PCB (PCB101) [Remedy] Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts. [Reference] When replacing the Finisher Controller PCB, refer to "Adjustment> When Replacing the Parts" in the Service Manual.



848



7. Error/Jam/Alarm E553-8001-02



Error in the Lower Escape Delivery Shift Motor (Finisher-V)



Detection Description



The lower escape delivery roller does not come off the Lower Escape Delivery Roller HP Sensor when the Lower Escape Delivery Shift Motor has been driven for 1 second.



Remedy



STAPLE FIN-V/BOOKLET FIN-V [Related parts] - Harnesses from the Lower Escape Delivery Roller HP Sensor (PS112) to the Finisher Controller PCB - Harnesses from the Lower Escape Delivery Shift Motor (M106) to the Finisher Controller PCB - Lower Escape Delivery Roller HP Sensor (PS112) - Lower Escape Delivery Shift Motor (M106) - Finisher Controller PCB (PCB101) [Points to note at work] Perform this work only for old type*. When the Swing Guide Safety Switch (SW102) turns on at the detection timing of this error, this error code may be displayed. Accordingly, perform the following work before checking the related parts. 1. Check whether there is not the malfunction in the swing guide unit. 2. Check whether there is not the malfunction in the Swing Guide Safety Switch (SW102). *: Distinguishing Between the New/Old Types New Type (J132: Short Connector) Old Type (J132: Swing Guide Safety Switch (SW102)) [Remedy] Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts. [Reference] When replacing the Finisher Controller PCB, refer to "Adjustment> When Replacing the Parts" in the Service Manual.



E553-8002-02



Error in the Lower Escape Delivery Shift Motor (Finisher-V)



Detection Description Remedy



The Lower Escape Delivery Roller HP Sensor does not detect the lower escape delivery roller when the Lower Escape Delivery Shift Motor has been driven for 1 second. STAPLE FIN-V/BOOKLET FIN-V [Related parts] - Harnesses from the Lower Escape Delivery Roller HP Sensor (PS112) to the Finisher Controller PCB - Harnesses from the Lower Escape Delivery Shift Motor (M106) to the Finisher Controller PCB - Lower Escape Delivery Roller HP Sensor (PS112) - Lower Escape Delivery Shift Motor (M106) - Finisher Controller PCB (PCB101) [Points to note at work] Perform this work only for old type*. When the Swing Guide Safety Switch (SW102) turns on at the detection timing of this error, this error code may be displayed. Accordingly, perform the following work before checking the related parts. 1. Check whether there is not the malfunction in the swing guide unit. 2. Check whether there is not the malfunction in the Swing Guide Safety Switch (SW102). *: Distinguishing Between the New/Old Types New Type (J132: Short Connector) Old Type (J132: Swing Guide Safety Switch (SW102)) [Remedy] Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts. [Reference] When replacing the Finisher Controller PCB, refer to "Adjustment> When Replacing the Parts" in the Service Manual.



849



7. Error/Jam/Alarm E553-8003-02



Error in the Upper Escape Delivery Shift Motor (Finisher-V)



Detection Description



The upper escape delivery roller does not come off the Upper Escape Delivery Roller HP Sensor when the Upper Escape Delivery Shift Motor has been driven for 1 second.



Remedy



STAPLE FIN-V/BOOKLET FIN-V [Related parts] - Harnesses from the Upper Escape Delivery Roller HP Sensor (PS134) to the Finisher Controller PCB - Harnesses from the Upper Escape Delivery Shift Motor (M119) to the Finisher Controller PCB - Upper Escape Delivery Roller HP Sensor (PS134) - Upper Escape Delivery Shift Motor (M119) - Finisher Controller PCB (PCB101) [Points to note at work] Perform this work only for old type*. When the Swing Guide Safety Switch (SW102) turns on at the detection timing of this error, this error code may be displayed. Accordingly, perform the following work before checking the related parts. 1. Check whether there is not the malfunction in the swing guide unit. 2. Check whether there is not the malfunction in the Swing Guide Safety Switch (SW102). *: Distinguishing Between the New/Old Types New Type (J132: Short Connector) Old Type (J132: Swing Guide Safety Switch (SW102)) [Remedy] Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts. [Reference] When replacing the Finisher Controller PCB, refer to "Adjustment> When Replacing the Parts" in the Service Manual.



E553-8004-02



Error in the Upper Escape Delivery Shift Motor (Finisher-V)



Detection Description Remedy



The Upper Escape Delivery Roller HP Sensor does not detect the upper escape delivery roller when the Upper Escape Delivery Shift Motor has been driven for 1 second. STAPLE FIN-V/BOOKLET FIN-V [Related parts] - Harnesses from the Upper Escape Delivery Roller HP Sensor (PS134) to the Finisher Controller PCB - Harnesses from the Upper Escape Delivery Shift Motor (M119) to the Finisher Controller PCB - Upper Escape Delivery Roller HP Sensor (PS134) - Upper Escape Delivery Shift Motor (M119) - Finisher Controller PCB (PCB101) [Points to note at work] Perform this work only for old type*. When the Swing Guide Safety Switch (SW102) turns on at the detection timing of this error, this error code may be displayed. Accordingly, perform the following work before checking the related parts. 1. Check whether there is not the malfunction in the swing guide unit. 2. Check whether there is not the malfunction in the Swing Guide Safety Switch (SW102). *: Distinguishing Between the New/Old Types New Type (J132: Short Connector) Old Type (J132: Swing Guide Safety Switch (SW102)) [Remedy] Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts. [Reference] When replacing the Finisher Controller PCB, refer to "Adjustment> When Replacing the Parts" in the Service Manual.



850



7. Error/Jam/Alarm E553-8011-02



Error in the Flapper Motor (Finisher-V)



Detection Description Remedy



E553-8012-02



The flapper does not come off the Flapper HP Sensor when the Flapper Motor has been driven for 1 second. STAPLE FIN-V/BOOKLET FIN-V [Related parts] - Harnesses from the Flapper HP Sensor (PS105) to the Finisher Controller PCB - Harnesses from the Flapper Motor (M104) to the Finisher Controller PCB - Flapper HP Sensor (PS105) - Flapper Motor (M104) - Finisher Controller PCB (PCB101) [Points to note at work] Perform this work only for old type*. When the Swing Guide Safety Switch (SW102) turns on at the detection timing of this error, this error code may be displayed. Accordingly, perform the following work before checking the related parts. 1. Check whether there is not the malfunction in the swing guide unit. 2. Check whether there is not the malfunction in the Swing Guide Safety Switch (SW102). *: Distinguishing Between the New/Old Types New Type (J132: Short Connector) Old Type (J132: Swing Guide Safety Switch (SW102)) [Remedy] Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts. [Reference] When replacing the Finisher Controller PCB, refer to "Adjustment> When Replacing the Parts" in the Service Manual. Error in the Flapper Motor (Finisher-V)



Detection Description Remedy



The Flapper HP Sensor does not detect the flapper when the Flapper Motor has been driven for 1 second. STAPLE FIN-V/BOOKLET FIN-V [Related parts] - Harnesses from the Flapper HP Sensor (PS105) to the Finisher Controller PCB - Harnesses from the Flapper Motor (M104) to the Finisher Controller PCB - Flapper HP Sensor (PS105) - Flapper Motor (M104) - Finisher Controller PCB (PCB101) [Points to note at work] Perform this work only for old type*. When the Swing Guide Safety Switch (SW102) turns on at the detection timing of this error, this error code may be displayed. Accordingly, perform the following work before checking the related parts. 1. Check whether there is not the malfunction in the swing guide unit. 2. Check whether there is not the malfunction in the Swing Guide Safety Switch (SW102). *: Distinguishing Between the New/Old Types New Type (J132: Short Connector) Old Type (J132: Swing Guide Safety Switch (SW102)) [Remedy] Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts. [Reference] When replacing the Finisher Controller PCB, refer to "Adjustment> When Replacing the Parts" in the Service Manual.



851



7. Error/Jam/Alarm E553-8013-02



Error in the Escape Flapper Motor (Finisher-V)



Detection Description



The escape flapper does not come off the Escape Flapper HP Sensor when the Escape Flapper Motor has been driven for 1 second.



Remedy



STAPLE FIN-V/BOOKLET FIN-V [Related parts] - Harnesses from the Escape Flapper HP Sensor (PS132) to the Finisher Controller PCB - Harnesses from the Escape Flapper Motor (M118) to the Finisher Controller PCB - Escape Flapper HP Sensor (PS132) - Escape Flapper Motor (M118) - Finisher Controller PCB (PCB101) [Points to note at work] Perform this work only for old type*. When the Swing Guide Safety Switch (SW102) turns on at the detection timing of this error, this error code may be displayed. Accordingly, perform the following work before checking the related parts. 1. Check whether there is not the malfunction in the swing guide unit. 2. Check whether there is not the malfunction in the Swing Guide Safety Switch (SW102). *: Distinguishing Between the New/Old Types New Type (J132: Short Connector) Old Type (J132: Swing Guide Safety Switch (SW102)) [Remedy] Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts. [Reference] When replacing the Finisher Controller PCB, refer to "Adjustment> When Replacing the Parts" in the Service Manual.



E553-8014-02



Error in the Escape Flapper Motor (Finisher-V)



Detection Description Remedy



E553-80F1-02



The Escape Flapper HP Sensor does not detect the escape flapper when the Escape Flapper Motor has been driven for 1 second. STAPLE FIN-V/BOOKLET FIN-V [Related parts] - Harnesses from the Escape Flapper HP Sensor (PS132) to the Finisher Controller PCB - Harnesses from the Escape Flapper Motor (M118) to the Finisher Controller PCB - Escape Flapper HP Sensor (PS132) - Escape Flapper Motor (M118) - Finisher Controller PCB (PCB101) [Points to note at work] Perform this work only for old type*. When the Swing Guide Safety Switch (SW102) turns on at the detection timing of this error, this error code may be displayed. Accordingly, perform the following work before checking the related parts. 1. Check whether there is not the malfunction in the swing guide unit. 2. Check whether there is not the malfunction in the Swing Guide Safety Switch (SW102). *: Distinguishing Between the New/Old Types New Type (J132: Short Connector) Old Type (J132: Swing Guide Safety Switch (SW102)) [Remedy] Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts. [Reference] When replacing the Finisher Controller PCB, refer to "Adjustment> When Replacing the Parts" in the Service Manual. Error in the Saddle Feed/Paddle Motor (Finisher-V)



Detection Description



The paddle does not come off the Saddle Paddle HP Sensor when the Saddle Feed/Paddle Motor has been driven for 1 second.



Remedy



STAPLE FIN-V/BOOKLET FIN-V [Related parts] - Harnesses from the Saddle Paddle HP Sensor (PS206) to the Saddle Stitcher Controller PCB - Harnesses from the Saddle Feed/Paddle Motor (M201) to the Saddle Stitcher Controller PCB - Saddle Paddle HP Sensor (PS206) - Saddle Feed/Paddle Motor (M201) - Saddle Stitcher Controller PCB (PCB201) - Finisher Controller PCB (PCB101) [Remedy] Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts. [Reference] When replacing the Finisher Controller PCB, refer to "Adjustment> When Replacing the Parts" in the Service Manual.



852



7. Error/Jam/Alarm E553-80F2-02



Error in the Saddle Feed/Paddle Motor (Finisher-V)



Detection Description



The Saddle Paddle HP Sensor does not detect the paddle when the Saddle Feed/Paddle Motor has been driven for 1 second.



Remedy



STAPLE FIN-V/BOOKLET FIN-V [Related parts] - Harnesses from the Saddle Paddle HP Sensor (PS206) to the Saddle Stitcher Controller PCB - Harnesses from the Saddle Feed/Paddle Motor (M201) to the Saddle Stitcher Controller PCB - Saddle Paddle HP Sensor (PS206) - Saddle Feed/Paddle Motor (M201) - Saddle Stitcher Controller PCB (PCB201) - Finisher Controller PCB (PCB101) [Remedy] Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts. [Reference] When replacing the Finisher Controller PCB, refer to "Adjustment> When Replacing the Parts" in the Service Manual.



E554-8001-02



Safety switch ON error (Finisher-V)



Detection Description



The Front Cover Switch is turned OFF for 0.3 seconds when the Front Cover Sensor is ON. An error of Short Connector (J132) was detected. (New Type *) The Swing Guide Safety Switch is turned ON for 0.3 seconds. (Old Type*)



Remedy



STAPLE FIN-V/BOOKLET FIN-V [Related parts] - Harnesses from the Swing Guide Safety Switch (SW102) to the Finisher Controller PCB (Old Type*) - Harnesses from the Stack Tray Shift Motor (M105) to the Finisher Controller PCB - Short Connector (J132) (New Type*) - Swing Guide Safety Switch (SW102) (Old Type*) - Stack Tray Shift Motor (M105) - Finisher Controller PCB (PCB101) *: Distinguishing Between the New/Old Types New Type (J132: Short Connector) Old Type (J132: Swing Guide Safety Switch (SW102)) [Remedy] Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts. [Reference] When replacing the Finisher Controller PCB, refer to "Adjustment> When Replacing the Parts" in the Service Manual.



E562-8001-02



Error in Slowdown Timing Sensor (Insertion Folding Unit-P1)



Detection Description Remedy



E562-8002-02



The light-receiving amount of the Slowdown Timing Sensor was not within the threshold level although the light-emitting amount of the sensor was adjusted to be within the threshold level. [Related parts] - Harnesses from the Inserter/Folder Controller PCB (PCB2) to the Slowdown Timing Sensor (S24) - Inserter/Folder Controller PCB (PCB2) - Slowdown Timing Sensor (S24) [Remedy] Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts. [Reference] - When replacing the Inserter/Folder Controller PCB, refer to "Adjustments> Adjustment when Replacing the Parts" in the Service Manual. Error in Release Timing Sensor (Insertion Folding Unit-P1)



Detection Description Remedy



The light-receiving amount of the Release Timing Sensor was not within the threshold level although the light-emitting amount of the sensor was adjusted to be within the threshold level. [Related parts] - Harnesses from the Inserter/Folder Controller PCB (PCB2) to the Release Timing Sensor (S21) - Inserter/Folder Controller PCB (PCB2) - Release Timing Sensor (S21) [Remedy] Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts. [Reference] - When replacing the Inserter/Folder Controller PCB, refer to "Adjustments> Adjustment when Replacing the Parts" in the Service Manual.



853



7. Error/Jam/Alarm E562-8003-02



Error in Fold Position Sensor (Insertion Folding Unit-P1)



Detection Description Remedy



E562-8004-02



The light-receiving amount of the Fold Position Sensor was not within the threshold level although the light-emitting amount of the sensor was adjusted to be within the threshold level. [Related parts] - Harnesses from the Inserter/Folder Controller PCB (PCB2) to the Fold Position Sensor (S23) - Inserter/Folder Controller PCB (PCB2) - Fold Position Sensor (S23) [Remedy] Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts. [Reference] - When replacing the Inserter/Folder Controller PCB, refer to "Adjustments> Adjustment when Replacing the Parts" in the Service Manual. Error in Upper Stopper Sensor (Insertion Folding Unit-P1)



Detection Description



The light-receiving amount of the Upper Stopper Sensor was not within the threshold level although the light-emitting amount of the sensor was adjusted to be within the threshold level.



Remedy



[Related parts] - Harnesses from the Inserter/Folder Controller PCB (PCB2) to the Upper Stopper Sensor (S16) - Inserter/Folder Controller PCB (PCB2) - Upper Stopper Sensor (S16) [Remedy] Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts. [Reference] - When replacing the Inserter/Folder Controller PCB, refer to "Adjustments> Adjustment when Replacing the Parts" in the Service Manual.



E569-8001-02



Upper Stopper Motor failed to go through HP (Insertion Folding Unit-P1)



Detection Description



The Upper Stopper Sensor failed to be OFF despite the drive of specified pulse in the case that the Upper Stopper Motor started to be driven while the Upper Stopper Sensor was ON.



Remedy



[Related parts] - Harnesses from the Inserter/Folder Controller PCB (PCB2) to the Upper Stopper Sensor (S16) - Harnesses from the Inserter/Folder Controller PCB (PCB2) to the Upper Stopper Motor (M7) - Inserter/Folder Controller PCB (PCB2) - Upper Stopper Sensor (S16) - Upper Stopper Motor (M7) [Remedy] Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts. [Reference] - When replacing the Inserter/Folder Controller PCB, refer to "Adjustments> Adjustment when Replacing the Parts" in the Service Manual.



E569-8002-02



Upper Stopper Motor failed to return to HP (Insertion Folding Unit-P1)



Detection Description



The Upper Stopper Sensor failed to be ON despite the drive of specified pulse in the case that the Upper Stopper Motor started to be driven while the Upper Stopper Sensor was OFF.



Remedy



[Related parts] - Harnesses from the Inserter/Folder Controller PCB (PCB2) to the Upper Stopper Sensor (S16) - Harnesses from the Inserter/Folder Controller PCB (PCB2) to the Upper Stopper Motor (M7) - Inserter/Folder Controller PCB (PCB2) - Upper Stopper Sensor (S16) - Upper Stopper Motor (M7) [Remedy] Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts. [Reference] - When replacing the Inserter/Folder Controller PCB, refer to "Adjustments> Adjustment when Replacing the Parts" in the Service Manual.



854



7. Error/Jam/Alarm E56A-8001-02



C Fold Stopper Motor failed to go through HP (Insertion Folding Unit-P1)



Detection Description



The C Fold Stopper Sensor failed to be OFF despite the drive of specified pulse in the case that the C Fold Stopper Motor started to be driven while the C Fold Stopper Sensor was ON.



Remedy



[Related parts] - Harnesses from the Inserter/Folder Controller PCB (PCB2) to the C Fold Stopper Sensor (S17) - Harnesses from the Inserter/Folder Controller PCB (PCB2) to the C Fold Stopper Motor (M8) - Inserter/Folder Controller PCB (PCB2) - C Fold Stopper Sensor (S17) - C Fold Stopper Motor (M8) [Remedy] Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts. [Reference] - When replacing the Inserter/Folder Controller PCB, refer to "Adjustments> Adjustment when Replacing the Parts" in the Service Manual.



E56A-8002-02



C Fold Stopper Motor failed to go through HP (Insertion Folding Unit-P1)



Detection Description Remedy



E56B-8001-02



The C Fold Stopper Sensor failed to be ON despite the drive of specified pulse in the case that the C Fold Stopper Motor started to be driven while the C Fold Stopper Sensor was OFF. [Related parts] - Harnesses from the Inserter/Folder Controller PCB (PCB2) to the C Fold Stopper Sensor (S17) - Harnesses from the Inserter/Folder Controller PCB (PCB2) to the C Fold Stopper Motor (M8) - Inserter/Folder Controller PCB (PCB2) - C Fold Stopper Sensor (S17) - C Fold Stopper Motor (M8) [Remedy] Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts. [Reference] - When replacing the Inserter/Folder Controller PCB, refer to "Adjustments> Adjustment when Replacing the Parts" in the Service Manual. C Fold Tray Motor failed to go through HP (Insertion Folding Unit-P1)



Detection Description Remedy



E56B-8002-02



The C Fold Tray Motor Sensor failed to be OFF despite the drive of specified pulse in the case that the C Fold Tray Motor started to be driven while the C Fold Tray Motor Sensor was ON. [Related parts] - Harnesses from the Inserter/Folder Controller PCB (PCB2) to the C Fold Tray Motor Sensor (S19) - Harnesses from the Inserter/Folder Controller PCB (PCB2) to the C Fold Tray Motor (M6) - Inserter/Folder Controller PCB (PCB2) - C Fold Tray Motor Sensor (S19) - C Fold Tray Motor (M6) [Remedy] Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts. [Reference] - When replacing the Inserter/Folder Controller PCB, refer to "Adjustments> Adjustment when Replacing the Parts" in the Service Manual. C Fold Tray Motor failed to go through HP (Insertion Folding Unit-P1)



Detection Description



The C Fold Tray Motor Sensor failed to be ON despite the drive of specified pulse in the case that the C Fold Tray Motor started to be driven while the C Fold Tray Motor Sensor was OFF.



Remedy



[Related parts] - Harnesses from the Inserter/Folder Controller PCB (PCB2) to the C Fold Tray Motor Sensor (S19) - Harnesses from the Inserter/Folder Controller PCB (PCB2) to the C Fold Tray Motor (M6) - Inserter/Folder Controller PCB (PCB2) - C Fold Tray Motor Sensor (S19) - C Fold Tray Motor (M6) [Remedy] Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts. [Reference] - When replacing the Inserter/Folder Controller PCB, refer to "Adjustments> Adjustment when Replacing the Parts" in the Service Manual.



855



7. Error/Jam/Alarm E577-8001-02



Error in the Stack Delivery/Paddle Motor (Finisher-V)



Detection Description



The paddle does not come off the Paddle HP Sensor when the Stack Delivery/Paddle Motor has been driven for 1 second.



Remedy



STAPLE FIN-V/BOOKLET FIN-V [Related parts] - Harnesses from the Paddle HP Sensor (PS120) to the Finisher Controller PCB - Harnesses from the Stack Delivery/Paddle Motor (M103) to the Finisher Controller PCB - Paddle HP Sensor (PS120) - Stack Delivery/Paddle Motor (M103) - Finisher Controller PCB (PCB101) [Points to note at work] Perform this work only for old type*. When the Swing Guide Safety Switch (SW102) turns on at the detection timing of this error, this error code may be displayed. Accordingly, perform the following work before checking the related parts. 1. Check whether there is not the malfunction in the swing guide unit. 2. Check whether there is not the malfunction in the Swing Guide Safety Switch (SW102). *: Distinguishing Between the New/Old Types New Type (J132: Short Connector) Old Type (J132: Swing Guide Safety Switch (SW102)) [Remedy] Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts. [Reference] When replacing the Finisher Controller PCB, refer to "Adjustment> When Replacing the Parts" in the Service Manual.



E577-8002-02



Error in the Stack Delivery/Paddle Motor (Finisher-V)



Detection Description Remedy



The Paddle HP Sensor does not detect the paddle when the Stack Delivery/Paddle Motor has been driven for 1 second. STAPLE FIN-V/BOOKLET FIN-V [Related parts] - Harnesses from the Paddle HP Sensor (PS120) to the Finisher Controller PCB - Harnesses from the Stack Delivery/Paddle Motor (M103) to the Finisher Controller PCB - Paddle HP Sensor (PS120) - Stack Delivery/Paddle Motor (M103) - Finisher Controller PCB (PCB101) [Points to note at work] Perform this work only for old type*. When the Swing Guide Safety Switch (SW102) turns on at the detection timing of this error, this error code may be displayed. Accordingly, perform the following work before checking the related parts. 1. Check whether there is not the malfunction in the swing guide unit. 2. Check whether there is not the malfunction in the Swing Guide Safety Switch (SW102). *: Distinguishing Between the New/Old Types New Type (J132: Short Connector) Old Type (J132: Swing Guide Safety Switch (SW102)) [Remedy] Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts. [Reference] When replacing the Finisher Controller PCB, refer to "Adjustment> When Replacing the Parts" in the Service Manual.



856



7. Error/Jam/Alarm E578-8001-02



Error in the Return Roller Lift Motor (Finisher-V)



Detection Description



The return roller does not come off the Return Roller HP Sensor when the Return Roller Lift Motor has been driven for 1 second.



Remedy



STAPLE FIN-V/BOOKLET FIN-V [Related parts] - Harnesses from the Return Roller HP Sensor (PS121) to the Finisher Controller PCB - Harnesses from the Return Roller Lift Motor (M111) to the Finisher Controller PCB - Return Roller HP Sensor (PS121) - Return Roller Lift Motor (M111) - Finisher Controller PCB (PCB101) [Points to note at work] Perform this work only for old type*. When the Swing Guide Safety Switch (SW102) turns on at the detection timing of this error, this error code may be displayed. Accordingly, perform the following work before checking the related parts. 1. Check whether there is not the malfunction in the swing guide unit. 2. Check whether there is not the malfunction in the Swing Guide Safety Switch (SW102). *: Distinguishing Between the New/Old Types New Type (J132: Short Connector) Old Type (J132: Swing Guide Safety Switch (SW102)) [Remedy] Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts. [Reference] When replacing the Finisher Controller PCB, refer to "Adjustment> When Replacing the Parts" in the Service Manual.



E578-8002-02



Error in the Return Roller Lift Motor (Finisher-V)



Detection Description Remedy



The Return Roller HP Sensor does not detect the return roller when the Return Roller Lift Motor has been driven for 1 second. STAPLE FIN-V/BOOKLET FIN-V [Related parts] - Harnesses from the Return Roller HP Sensor (PS121) to the Finisher Controller PCB - Harnesses from the Return Roller Lift Motor (M111) to the Finisher Controller PCB - Return Roller HP Sensor (PS121) - Return Roller Lift Motor (M111) - Finisher Controller PCB (PCB101) [Points to note at work] Perform this work only for old type*. When the Swing Guide Safety Switch (SW102) turns on at the detection timing of this error, this error code may be displayed. Accordingly, perform the following work before checking the related parts. 1. Check whether there is not the malfunction in the swing guide unit. 2. Check whether there is not the malfunction in the Swing Guide Safety Switch (SW102). [Points to note at work] Perform this work only for old type*. When the Swing Guide Safety Switch (SW102) turns on at the detection timing of this error, this error code may be displayed. Accordingly, perform the following work before checking the related parts. 1. Check whether there is not the malfunction in the swing guide unit. 2. Check whether there is not the malfunction in the Swing Guide Safety Switch (SW102). *: Distinguishing Between the New/Old Types New Type (J132: Short Connector) Old Type (J132: Swing Guide Safety Switch (SW102)) [Remedy] Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts. [Reference] When replacing the Finisher Controller PCB, refer to "Adjustment> When Replacing the Parts" in the Service Manual.



857



7. Error/Jam/Alarm E57B-8001-02



Error in the Paper End Pushing Guide Motor (Finisher-V)



Detection Description



The paper end pushing guide does not come off the Paper End Pushing Guide HP Sensor when the Paper End Pushing Guide Motor has been driven for 1 second.



Remedy



STAPLE FIN-V/BOOKLET FIN-V [Related parts] - Harnesses from the Paper End Pushing Guide HP Sensor (PS122) to the Finisher Controller PCB - Harnesses from the Paper End Pushing Guide Motor (M112) to the Finisher Controller PCB - Paper End Pushing Guide HP Sensor (PS122) - Paper End Pushing Guide Motor (M112) - Finisher Controller PCB (PCB101) [Points to note at work] Perform this work only for old type*. When the Swing Guide Safety Switch (SW102) turns on at the detection timing of this error, this error code may be displayed. Accordingly, perform the following work before checking the related parts. 1. Check whether there is not the malfunction in the swing guide unit. 2. Check whether there is not the malfunction in the Swing Guide Safety Switch (SW102). *: Distinguishing Between the New/Old Types New Type (J132: Short Connector) Old Type (J132: Swing Guide Safety Switch (SW102)) [Remedy] Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts. [Reference] When replacing the Finisher Controller PCB, refer to "Adjustment> When Replacing the Parts" in the Service Manual.



E57B-8002-02



Error in the Paper End Pushing Guide Motor (Finisher-V)



Detection Description



The Paper End Pushing Guide HP Sensor does not detect the paper end pushing guide when the Paper End Pushing Guide Motor has been driven for 1 second.



Remedy



STAPLE FIN-V/BOOKLET FIN-V [Related parts] - Harnesses from the Paper End Pushing Guide HP Sensor (PS122) to the Finisher Controller PCB - Harnesses from the Paper End Pushing Guide Motor (M112) to the Finisher Controller PCB - Paper End Pushing Guide HP Sensor (PS122) - Paper End Pushing Guide Motor (M112) - Finisher Controller PCB (PCB101) [Points to note at work] Perform this work only for old type*. When the Swing Guide Safety Switch (SW102) turns on at the detection timing of this error, this error code may be displayed. Accordingly, perform the following work before checking the related parts. 1. Check whether there is not the malfunction in the swing guide unit. 2. Check whether there is not the malfunction in the Swing Guide Safety Switch (SW102). *: Distinguishing Between the New/Old Types New Type (J132: Short Connector) Old Type (J132: Swing Guide Safety Switch (SW102)) [Remedy] Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts. [Reference] When replacing the Finisher Controller PCB, refer to "Adjustment> When Replacing the Parts" in the Service Manual.



858



7. Error/Jam/Alarm E583-8001-02



Error in the Tray Auxiliary Guide Motor (Finisher-V)



Detection Description



The tray auxiliary guides don't come off the Front/Rear Tray Auxiliary Guide HP Sensors when the Tray Auxiliary Guide Motor has been driven for 1 second.



Remedy



STAPLE FIN-V/BOOKLET FIN-V [Related parts] - Harnesses from the Front Tray Auxiliary Guide HP Sensor (PS117) to the Finisher Controller PCB - Harnesses from the Rear Tray Auxiliary Guide HP Sensor (PS118) to the Finisher Controller PCB - Harnesses from the Tray Auxiliary Guide Motor (M109) to the Finisher Controller PCB - Front Tray Auxiliary Guide HP Sensor (PS117) - Rear Tray Auxiliary Guide HP Sensor (PS118) - Tray Auxiliary Guide Motor (M109) - Finisher Controller PCB (PCB101) [Points to note at work] Perform this work only for old type*. When the Swing Guide Safety Switch (SW102) turns on at the detection timing of this error, this error code may be displayed. Accordingly, perform the following work before checking the related parts. 1. Check whether there is not the malfunction in the swing guide unit. 2. Check whether there is not the malfunction in the Swing Guide Safety Switch (SW102). *: Distinguishing Between the New/Old Types New Type (J132: Short Connector) Old Type (J132: Swing Guide Safety Switch (SW102)) [Remedy] Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts. [Reference] When replacing the Finisher Controller PCB, refer to "Adjustment> When Replacing the Parts" in the Service Manual.



E583-8002-02



Error in the Tray Auxiliary Guide Motor (Finisher-V)



Detection Description Remedy



The Front/Rear Tray Auxiliary Guide HP Sensors don't detect the tray auxiliary guides when the Tray Auxiliary Guide Motor has been driven for 1 second. STAPLE FIN-V/BOOKLET FIN-V [Related parts] - Harnesses from the Front Tray Auxiliary Guide HP Sensor (PS117) to the Finisher Controller PCB - Harnesses from the Rear Tray Auxiliary Guide HP Sensor (PS118) to the Finisher Controller PCB - Harnesses from the Tray Auxiliary Guide Motor (M109) to the Finisher Controller PCB - Front Tray Auxiliary Guide HP Sensor (PS117) - Rear Tray Auxiliary Guide HP Sensor (PS118) - Tray Auxiliary Guide Motor (M109) - Finisher Controller PCB (PCB101) [Points to note at work] Perform this work only for old type*. When the Swing Guide Safety Switch (SW102) turns on at the detection timing of this error, this error code may be displayed. Accordingly, perform the following work before checking the related parts. 1. Check whether there is not the malfunction in the swing guide unit. 2. Check whether there is not the malfunction in the Swing Guide Safety Switch (SW102). *: Distinguishing Between the New/Old Types New Type (J132: Short Connector) Old Type (J132: Swing Guide Safety Switch (SW102)) [Remedy] Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts. [Reference] When replacing the Finisher Controller PCB, refer to "Adjustment> When Replacing the Parts" in the Service Manual.



859



7. Error/Jam/Alarm E590-8001-02



Error in the Punch Motor (Puncher Unit-A1)



Detection Description Remedy



E590-8002-02



The punch does not come off the Punch HP Sensor when the Punch Motor has been driven for 0.2 seconds. Puncher Unit-A1 [Related parts] - Harnesses from the Punch HP Sensor 1 (PS303) to the Puncher Relay PCB - Harnesses from the Punch HP Sensor 2 (PS304) to the Puncher Relay PCB - Harnesses from the Punch Motor Clock Sensor (PS305) to the Puncher Relay PCB - Harnesses from the Punch Motor (M301) to the Puncher Relay PCB - Punch HP Sensor 1 (PS303) - Punch HP Sensor 2 (PS304) - Punch Motor Clock Sensor (PS305) - Punch Motor (M301) - Puncher Relay PCB (PCB302) - Puncher Controller PCB (PCB301) - Finisher Controller PCB (PCB101) [Points to note at work] Perform this work only for old type*. When the Swing Guide Safety Switch (SW102) turns on at the detection timing of this error, this error code may be displayed. Accordingly, perform the following work before checking the related parts. 1. Check whether there is not the malfunction in the swing guide unit. 2. Check whether there is not the malfunction in the Swing Guide Safety Switch (SW102). *: Distinguishing Between the New/Old Types New Type (J132: Short Connector) Old Type (J132: Swing Guide Safety Switch (SW102)) [Remedy] Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts. [Reference] When replacing the Puncher Controller PCB, refer to "Adjustment> When Replacing the Parts" in the Service Manual. [Reference] When replacing the Finisher Controller PCB, refer to "Adjustment> When Replacing the Parts" in the Service Manual. Error in the Punch Motor (Puncher Unit-A1)



Detection Description



The Punch HP Sensor does not detect the punch during initialization. The Punch HP Sensor does not detect the punch when the Punch Motor has been driven for 0.4 seconds for returning the punch after the punch jam.



Remedy



Puncher Unit-A1 [Related parts] - Harnesses from the Punch HP Sensor 1 (PS303) to the Puncher Relay PCB - Harnesses from the Punch HP Sensor 2 (PS304) to the Puncher Relay PCB - Harnesses from the Punch Motor Clock Sensor (PS305) to the Puncher Relay PCB - Harnesses from the Punch Motor (M301) to the Puncher Relay PCB - Punch HP Sensor 1 (PS303) - Punch HP Sensor 2 (PS304) - Punch Motor Clock Sensor (PS305) - Punch Motor (M301) - Puncher Relay PCB (PCB302) - Puncher Controller PCB (PCB301) - Finisher Controller PCB (PCB101) [Points to note at work] Perform this work only for old type*. When the Swing Guide Safety Switch (SW102) turns on at the detection timing of this error, this error code may be displayed. Accordingly, perform the following work before checking the related parts. 1. Check whether there is not the malfunction in the swing guide unit. 2. Check whether there is not the malfunction in the Swing Guide Safety Switch (SW102). *: Distinguishing Between the New/Old Types New Type (J132: Short Connector) Old Type (J132: Swing Guide Safety Switch (SW102)) [Remedy] Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts. [Reference] When replacing the Puncher Controller PCB, refer to "Adjustment> When Replacing the Parts" in the Service Manual. [Reference] When replacing the Finisher Controller PCB, refer to "Adjustment> When Replacing the Parts" in the Service Manual.



860



7. Error/Jam/Alarm E593-8001-02



Error in the Punch Shift Motor (Puncher Unit-A1)



Detection Description



The punch unit does not come off the Punch Slide HP Sensor when shifting the punch unit by 9mm toward rear.



Remedy



Puncher Unit-A1 [Related parts] - Harnesses from the Punch Slide HP Sensor (PS302) to the Puncher Controller PCB - Harnesses from the Punch Shift Motor (M302) to the Puncher Controller PCB - Punch Slide HP Sensor (PS302) - Punch Shift Motor (M302) - Puncher Controller PCB (PCB301) - Finisher Controller PCB (PCB101) [Remedy] Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts. [Reference] When replacing the Puncher Controller PCB, refer to "Adjustment> When Replacing the Parts" in the Service Manual. [Reference] When replacing the Finisher Controller PCB, refer to "Adjustment> When Replacing the Parts" in the Service Manual.



E593-8002-02



Error in the Punch Shift Motor (Puncher Unit-A1)



Detection Description



The Punch Slide HP Sensor does not detect the punch unit when shifting the punch unit by 37mm toward front.



Remedy



Puncher Unit-A1 [Related parts] - Harnesses from the Punch Slide HP Sensor (PS302) to the Puncher Controller PCB - Harnesses from the Punch Shift Motor (M302) to the Puncher Controller PCB - Punch Slide HP Sensor (PS302) - Punch Shift Motor (M302) - Puncher Controller PCB (PCB301) - Finisher Controller PCB (PCB101) [Remedy] Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts. [Reference] When replacing the Puncher Controller PCB, refer to "Adjustment> When Replacing the Parts" in the Service Manual. [Reference] When replacing the Finisher Controller PCB, refer to "Adjustment> When Replacing the Parts" in the Service Manual.



E5E1-8001-02



Tray Lift Motor failed to go through HP (Insertion Folding Unit-P1)



Detection Description Remedy



E5E1-8002-02



Paper Feed Sensor was not turned ON. [Related parts] - Harnesses from the Inserter/Folder Controller PCB (PCB2) to the Paper Feed Sensor (S3) - Harnesses from the Inserter/Folder Controller PCB (PCB2) to the Tray Lift Motor (M2) - Inserter/Folder Controller PCB (PCB2) - Paper Feed Sensor (S3) - Tray Lift Motor (M2) [Remedy] Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts. [Reference] - When replacing the Inserter/Folder Controller PCB, refer to "Adjustments> Adjustment when Replacing the Parts" in the Service Manual. Tray Lift Motor failed to go through HP (Insertion Folding Unit-P1)



Detection Description



While the tray is moving down or initialization, the Folding belt HP sensor has not turned ON within the specified pulse.



Remedy



[Related parts] - Harnesses from the Inserter/Folder Controller PCB (PCB2) to the Tray Lower Limit Sensor (S5) - Harnesses from the Inserter/Folder Controller PCB (PCB2) to the Tray Lift Motor (M2) - Inserter/Folder Controller PCB (PCB2) - Tray Lower Limit Sensor (S5) - Tray Lift Motor (M2) [Remedy] Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts. [Reference] - When replacing the Inserter/Folder Controller PCB, refer to "Adjustments> Adjustment when Replacing the Parts" in the Service Manual.



861



7. Error/Jam/Alarm E5F0-8001-02



Error in the Saddle Paper End Stopper Motor (Finisher-V)



Detection Description



The saddle paper end stopper does not come off the Saddle Paper End Stopper HP Sensor when the Saddle Paper End Stopper Motor has been driven for 1 second.



Remedy



STAPLE FIN-V/BOOKLET FIN-V [Related parts] - Harnesses from the Saddle Paper End Stopper HP Sensor (PS210) to the Saddle Stitcher Controller PCB - Harnesses from the Saddle Paper End Stopper Motor (M206) to the Saddle Stitcher Controller PCB - Saddle Paper End Stopper HP Sensor (PS210) - Saddle Paper End Stopper Motor (M206) - Saddle Stitcher Controller PCB (PCB201) - Finisher Controller PCB (PCB101) [Points to note at work] Perform this work only for old type*. When the Swing Guide Safety Switch (SW102) turns on at the detection timing of this error, this error code may be displayed. Accordingly, perform the following work before checking the related parts. 1. Check whether there is not the malfunction in the swing guide unit. 2. Check whether there is not the malfunction in the Swing Guide Safety Switch (SW102). *: Distinguishing Between the New/Old Types New Type (J132: Short Connector) Old Type (J132: Swing Guide Safety Switch (SW102)) [Remedy] Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts. [Reference] When replacing the Finisher Controller PCB, refer to "Adjustment> When Replacing the Parts" in the Service Manual.



E5F0-8002-02



Error in the Saddle Paper End Stopper Motor (Finisher-V)



Detection Description Remedy



The Saddle Paper End Stopper HP Sensor does not detect the saddle paper end stopper when the Saddle Paper End Stopper Motor has been driven for 4 seconds. STAPLE FIN-V/BOOKLET FIN-V [Related parts] - Harnesses from the Saddle Paper End Stopper HP Sensor (PS210) to the Saddle Stitcher Controller PCB - Harnesses from the Saddle Paper End Stopper Motor (M206) to the Saddle Stitcher Controller PCB - Saddle Paper End Stopper HP Sensor (PS210) - Saddle Paper End Stopper Motor (M206) - Saddle Stitcher Controller PCB (PCB201) - Finisher Controller PCB (PCB101) [Points to note at work] Perform this work only for old type*. When the Swing Guide Safety Switch (SW102) turns on at the detection timing of this error, this error code may be displayed. Accordingly, perform the following work before checking the related parts. 1. Check whether there is not the malfunction in the swing guide unit. 2. Check whether there is not the malfunction in the Swing Guide Safety Switch (SW102). *: Distinguishing Between the New/Old Types New Type (J132: Short Connector) Old Type (J132: Swing Guide Safety Switch (SW102)) [Remedy] Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts. [Reference] When replacing the Finisher Controller PCB, refer to "Adjustment> When Replacing the Parts" in the Service Manual.



862



7. Error/Jam/Alarm E5F1-8003-02



Saddle Delivery Motor clock error (Finisher-V)



Detection Description



The lock state of Saddle Delivery Motor is detected 0.2 seconds or more while the motor operates.



Remedy



STAPLE FIN-V/BOOKLET FIN-V [Related parts] - Harnesses from the Saddle Delivery Motor Clock Sensor (PS211) to the Saddle Stitcher Controller PCB - Harnesses from the Saddle Delivery Motor (M207) to the Saddle Stitcher Controller PCB - Saddle Delivery Motor Clock Sensor (PS211) - Saddle Delivery Motor (M207) - Saddle Stitcher Controller PCB (PCB201) - Finisher Controller PCB (PCB101) [Points to note at work] Perform this work only for old type*. When the Swing Guide Safety Switch (SW102) turns on at the detection timing of this error, this error code may be displayed. Accordingly, perform the following work before checking the related parts. 1. Check whether there is not the malfunction in the swing guide unit. 2. Check whether there is not the malfunction in the Swing Guide Safety Switch (SW102). *: Distinguishing Between the New/Old Types New Type (J132: Short Connector) Old Type (J132: Swing Guide Safety Switch (SW102)) [Remedy] Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts. [Reference] When replacing the Finisher Controller PCB, refer to "Adjustment> When Replacing the Parts" in the Service Manual.



E5F3-8001-02



Error in the Saddle Alignment Motor (Finisher-V)



Detection Description



The saddle alignment plate does not come off the Saddle Alignment HP Sensor when the Saddle Alignment Motor has been driven for 1 second.



Remedy



STAPLE FIN-V/BOOKLET FIN-V [Related parts] - Harnesses from the Saddle Alignment HP Sensor (PS207) to the Saddle Stitcher Controller PCB - Harnesses from the Saddle Alignment Motor (M203) to the Saddle Stitcher Controller PCB - Saddle Alignment HP Sensor (PS207) - Saddle Alignment Motor (M203) - Saddle Stitcher Controller PCB (PCB201) - Finisher Controller PCB (PCB101) [Points to note at work] Perform this work only for old type*. When the Swing Guide Safety Switch (SW102) turns on at the detection timing of this error, this error code may be displayed. Accordingly, perform the following work before checking the related parts. 1. Check whether there is not the malfunction in the swing guide unit. 2. Check whether there is not the malfunction in the Swing Guide Safety Switch (SW102). *: Distinguishing Between the New/Old Types New Type (J132: Short Connector) Old Type (J132: Swing Guide Safety Switch (SW102)) [Remedy] Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts. [Reference] When replacing the Finisher Controller PCB, refer to "Adjustment> When Replacing the Parts" in the Service Manual.



863



7. Error/Jam/Alarm E5F3-8002-02



Error in the Saddle Alignment Motor (Finisher-V)



Detection Description Remedy



E5F4-8001-02



The Saddle Alignment HP Sensor does not detect the saddle alignment plate when the Saddle Alignment Motor has been driven for 1 second. STAPLE FIN-V/BOOKLET FIN-V [Related parts] - Harnesses from the Saddle Alignment HP Sensor (PS207) to the Saddle Stitcher Controller PCB - Harnesses from the Saddle Alignment Motor (M203) to the Saddle Stitcher Controller PCB - Saddle Alignment HP Sensor (PS207) - Saddle Alignment Motor (M203) - Saddle Stitcher Controller PCB (PCB201) - Finisher Controller PCB (PCB101) [Points to note at work] Perform this work only for old type*. When the Swing Guide Safety Switch (SW102) turns on at the detection timing of this error, this error code may be displayed. Accordingly, perform the following work before checking the related parts. 1. Check whether there is not the malfunction in the swing guide unit. 2. Check whether there is not the malfunction in the Swing Guide Safety Switch (SW102). *: Distinguishing Between the New/Old Types New Type (J132: Short Connector) Old Type (J132: Swing Guide Safety Switch (SW102)) [Remedy] Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts. [Reference] When replacing the Finisher Controller PCB, refer to "Adjustment> When Replacing the Parts" in the Service Manual. Error in the Saddle Stitcher Motor (Finisher-V)



Detection Description Remedy



The saddle stitcher does not come off the Saddle Stitcher HP Sensor when the Saddle Stitcher Motor has been driven for 1.2 seconds. STAPLE FIN-V/BOOKLET FIN-V [Related parts] - Harnesses from the Saddle Stitcher HP Sensor (PS215) to the Saddle Stitcher Controller PCB - Harnesses from the Saddle Stitcher Motor (M208) to the Saddle Stitcher Controller PCB - Saddle Stitcher HP Sensor (PS215) - Saddle Stitcher Motor (M208) - Saddle Stitcher Controller PCB (PCB201) - Finisher Controller PCB (PCB101) [Points to note at work] Perform this work only for old type*. When the Swing Guide Safety Switch (SW102) turns on at the detection timing of this error, this error code may be displayed. Accordingly, perform the following work before checking the related parts. 1. Check whether there is not the malfunction in the swing guide unit. 2. Check whether there is not the malfunction in the Swing Guide Safety Switch (SW102). *: Distinguishing Between the New/Old Types New Type (J132: Short Connector) Old Type (J132: Swing Guide Safety Switch (SW102)) [Remedy] Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts. [Reference] When replacing the Finisher Controller PCB, refer to "Adjustment> When Replacing the Parts" in the Service Manual.



864



7. Error/Jam/Alarm E5F4-8002-02



Error in the Saddle Stitcher Motor (Finisher-V)



Detection Description



The Saddle Stitcher HP Sensor does not detect the saddle stitcher when the Saddle Stitcher Motor has been driven for 1.2 seconds.



Remedy



STAPLE FIN-V/BOOKLET FIN-V [Related parts] - Harnesses from the Saddle Stitcher HP Sensor (PS215) to the Saddle Stitcher Controller PCB - Harnesses from the Saddle Stitcher Motor (M208) to the Saddle Stitcher Controller PCB - Saddle Stitcher HP Sensor (PS215) - Saddle Stitcher Motor (M208) - Saddle Stitcher Controller PCB (PCB201) - Finisher Controller PCB (PCB101) [Points to note at work] Perform this work only for old type*. When the Swing Guide Safety Switch (SW102) turns on at the detection timing of this error, this error code may be displayed. Accordingly, perform the following work before checking the related parts. 1. Check whether there is not the malfunction in the swing guide unit. 2. Check whether there is not the malfunction in the Swing Guide Safety Switch (SW102). *: Distinguishing Between the New/Old Types New Type (J132: Short Connector) Old Type (J132: Swing Guide Safety Switch (SW102)) [Remedy] Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts. [Reference] When replacing the Finisher Controller PCB, refer to "Adjustment> When Replacing the Parts" in the Service Manual.



E5F6-8001-02



Error in the Saddle Paper Pushing Plate/Folding Motor (Finisher-V)



Detection Description Remedy



The saddle paper pushing plate does not come off the Saddle Paper Pushing Plate HP Sensor when the Saddle Paper Pushing Plate/Folding Motor has been driven for 1 second. STAPLE FIN-V/BOOKLET FIN-V [Related parts] - Harnesses from the Saddle Paper Pushing Plate HP Sensor (PS208) to the Saddle Stitcher Controller PCB - Harnesses from the Saddle Paper Pushing Plate/Folding Motor (M204) to the Saddle Stitcher Controller PCB - Saddle Paper Pushing Plate HP Sensor (PS208) - Saddle Paper Pushing Plate/Folding Motor (M204) - Saddle Stitcher Controller PCB (PCB201) - Finisher Controller PCB (PCB101) [Points to note at work] Perform this work only for old type*. When the Swing Guide Safety Switch (SW102) turns on at the detection timing of this error, this error code may be displayed. Accordingly, perform the following work before checking the related parts. 1. Check whether there is not the malfunction in the swing guide unit. 2. Check whether there is not the malfunction in the Swing Guide Safety Switch (SW102). *: Distinguishing Between the New/Old Types New Type (J132: Short Connector) Old Type (J132: Swing Guide Safety Switch (SW102)) [Remedy] Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts. [Reference] When replacing the Finisher Controller PCB, refer to "Adjustment> When Replacing the Parts" in the Service Manual.



865



7. Error/Jam/Alarm E5F6-8002-02



Error in the Saddle Paper Pushing Plate/Folding Motor (Finisher-V)



Detection Description



The Saddle Paper Pushing Plate HP Sensor does not detect the saddle paper pushing plate when the Saddle Paper Pushing Plate/Folding Motor has been driven for 3 seconds.



Remedy



STAPLE FIN-V/BOOKLET FIN-V [Related parts] - Harnesses from the Saddle Paper Pushing Plate HP Sensor (PS208) to the Saddle Stitcher Controller PCB - Harnesses from the Saddle Paper Pushing Plate/Folding Motor (M204) to the Saddle Stitcher Controller PCB - Saddle Paper Pushing Plate HP Sensor (PS208) - Saddle Paper Pushing Plate/Folding Motor (M204) - Saddle Stitcher Controller PCB (PCB201) - Finisher Controller PCB (PCB101) [Points to note at work] Perform this work only for old type*. When the Swing Guide Safety Switch (SW102) turns on at the detection timing of this error, this error code may be displayed. Accordingly, perform the following work before checking the related parts. 1. Check whether there is not the malfunction in the swing guide unit. 2. Check whether there is not the malfunction in the Swing Guide Safety Switch (SW102). *: Distinguishing Between the New/Old Types New Type (J132: Short Connector) Old Type (J132: Swing Guide Safety Switch (SW102)) [Remedy] Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts. [Reference] When replacing the Finisher Controller PCB, refer to "Adjustment> When Replacing the Parts" in the Service Manual.



E5F6-8003-02



Saddle Paper Pushing Plate/Folding Motor clock error (Finisher-V)



Detection Description



The lock state of Saddle Paper Pushing Plate/Folding Motor is detected 0.2 seconds or more while the motor operates.



Remedy



STAPLE FIN-V/BOOKLET FIN-V [Related parts] - Harnesses from the Saddle Paper Pushing Plate/Folding Motor Clock Sensor (PS212) to the Saddle Stitcher Controller PCB - Harnesses from the Saddle Paper Pushing Plate/Folding Motor (M204) to the Saddle Stitcher Controller PCB - Saddle Paper Pushing Plate/Folding Motor Clock Sensor (PS212) - Saddle Paper Pushing Plate/Folding Motor (M204) - Saddle Stitcher Controller PCB (PCB201) - Finisher Controller PCB (PCB101) [Points to note at work] Perform this work only for old type*. When the Swing Guide Safety Switch (SW102) turns on at the detection timing of this error, this error code may be displayed. Accordingly, perform the following work before checking the related parts. 1. Check whether there is not the malfunction in the swing guide unit. 2. Check whether there is not the malfunction in the Swing Guide Safety Switch (SW102). *: Distinguishing Between the New/Old Types New Type (J132: Short Connector) Old Type (J132: Swing Guide Safety Switch (SW102)) [Remedy] Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts. [Reference] When replacing the Finisher Controller PCB, refer to "Adjustment> When Replacing the Parts" in the Service Manual.



866



7. Error/Jam/Alarm E5F8-8001-02



Error in the Saddle Switching Lever Motor (Finisher-V)



Detection Description Remedy



E5F8-8002-02



The saddle switching lever does not come off the Saddle Switching Lever HP Sensor when the Saddle Switching Lever Motor has been driven for 1 second. STAPLE FIN-V/BOOKLET FIN-V [Related parts] - Harnesses from the Saddle Switching Lever HP Sensor (PS205) to the Saddle Stitcher Controller PCB - Harnesses from the Saddle Switching Lever Motor (M202) to the Saddle Stitcher Controller PCB - Saddle Switching Lever HP Sensor (PS205) - Saddle Switching Lever Motor (M202) - Saddle Stitcher Controller PCB (PCB201) - Finisher Controller PCB (PCB101) [Points to note at work] Perform this work only for old type*. When the Swing Guide Safety Switch (SW102) turns on at the detection timing of this error, this error code may be displayed. Accordingly, perform the following work before checking the related parts. 1. Check whether there is not the malfunction in the swing guide unit. 2. Check whether there is not the malfunction in the Swing Guide Safety Switch (SW102). *: Distinguishing Between the New/Old Types New Type (J132: Short Connector) Old Type (J132: Swing Guide Safety Switch (SW102)) [Remedy] Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts. [Reference] When replacing the Finisher Controller PCB, refer to "Adjustment> When Replacing the Parts" in the Service Manual. Error in the Saddle Switching Lever Motor (Finisher-V)



Detection Description Remedy



The Saddle Switching Lever HP Sensor does not detect the saddle switching lever when the Saddle Switching Lever Motor has been driven for 1 second. STAPLE FIN-V/BOOKLET FIN-V [Related parts] - Harnesses from the Saddle Switching Lever HP Sensor (PS205) to the Saddle Stitcher Controller PCB - Harnesses from the Saddle Switching Lever Motor (M202) to the Saddle Stitcher Controller PCB - Saddle Switching Lever HP Sensor (PS205) - Saddle Switching Lever Motor (M202) - Saddle Stitcher Controller PCB (PCB201) - Finisher Controller PCB (PCB101) [Points to note at work] Perform this work only for old type*. When the Swing Guide Safety Switch (SW102) turns on at the detection timing of this error, this error code may be displayed. Accordingly, perform the following work before checking the related parts. 1. Check whether there is not the malfunction in the swing guide unit. 2. Check whether there is not the malfunction in the Swing Guide Safety Switch (SW102). *: Distinguishing Between the New/Old Types New Type (J132: Short Connector) Old Type (J132: Swing Guide Safety Switch (SW102)) [Remedy] Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts. [Reference] When replacing the Finisher Controller PCB, refer to "Adjustment> When Replacing the Parts" in the Service Manual.



867



7. Error/Jam/Alarm E5FA-8001-02



Error in the Saddle Gripper Motor (Finisher-V)



Detection Description Remedy



E5FA-8002-02



The saddle gripper does not come off the Saddle Gripper HP Sensor when the Saddle Gripper Motor has been driven for 1 second. STAPLE FIN-V/BOOKLET FIN-V [Related parts] - Harnesses from the Saddle Gripper HP Sensor (PS209) to the Saddle Stitcher Controller PCB - Harnesses from the Saddle Gripper Motor (M205) to the Saddle Stitcher Controller PCB - Saddle Gripper HP Sensor (PS209) - Saddle Gripper Motor (M205) - Saddle Stitcher Controller PCB (PCB201) - Finisher Controller PCB (PCB101) [Points to note at work] Perform this work only for old type*. When the Swing Guide Safety Switch (SW102) turns on at the detection timing of this error, this error code may be displayed. Accordingly, perform the following work before checking the related parts. 1. Check whether there is not the malfunction in the swing guide unit. 2. Check whether there is not the malfunction in the Swing Guide Safety Switch (SW102). *: Distinguishing Between the New/Old Types New Type (J132: Short Connector) Old Type (J132: Swing Guide Safety Switch (SW102)) [Remedy] Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts. [Reference] When replacing the Finisher Controller PCB, refer to "Adjustment> When Replacing the Parts" in the Service Manual. Error in the Saddle Gripper Motor (Finisher-V)



Detection Description



The Saddle Gripper HP Sensor does not detect the saddle gripper when the Saddle Gripper Motor has been driven for 1 second.



Remedy



STAPLE FIN-V/BOOKLET FIN-V [Related parts] - Harnesses from the Saddle Gripper HP Sensor (PS209) to the Saddle Stitcher Controller PCB - Harnesses from the Saddle Gripper Motor (M205) to the Saddle Stitcher Controller PCB - Saddle Gripper HP Sensor (PS209) - Saddle Gripper Motor (M205) - Saddle Stitcher Controller PCB (PCB201) - Finisher Controller PCB (PCB101) [Points to note at work] Perform this work only for old type*. When the Swing Guide Safety Switch (SW102) turns on at the detection timing of this error, this error code may be displayed. Accordingly, perform the following work before checking the related parts. 1. Check whether there is not the malfunction in the swing guide unit. 2. Check whether there is not the malfunction in the Swing Guide Safety Switch (SW102). *: Distinguishing Between the New/Old Types New Type (J132: Short Connector) Old Type (J132: Swing Guide Safety Switch (SW102)) [Remedy] Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts. [Reference] When replacing the Finisher Controller PCB, refer to "Adjustment> When Replacing the Parts" in the Service Manual.



E602-0001-00



HDD error



Detection Description



Remedy



HDD failed to be Ready, or HDD was not formatted. When this error occurs, the system has not been started normally. Therefore, it may not be recorded in the error log. [Related parts] - Cable between the Main Controller PCB (PWB01/J6003, J6004) and the HDD (Unit of replacement: CABLE, HARD DISK DRIVE, 1) - HDD (Unit of replacement: HARD DISK DRIVE) - Main Controller PCB (PWB01) (Unit of replacement: MAIN CONTROLLER PCB ASS'Y, 1) [Remedy] Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared. 1. Check the related harness/cable and connector. 2. If the above-mentioned service mode cannot be executed due to an error, etc., enter safe mode using (2+8) startup. Then format the HDD using SST or a USB flash drive. 3. Reinstall the system software using SST or a USB flash drive. 4. Check/replace the related parts.



868



7. Error/Jam/Alarm E602-0020-00



HDD error



Detection Description Remedy



E602-0101-00



Corruption of database managing user mode/service mode data was detected. [Related parts] - HDD [Remedy]While this error occurs, backup of the setting values is disabled. In addition, it may not be recorded in the error log. Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared. 1. Turn OFF and then ON the main power. 2. Enter safe mode using (2+8) startup, and format the HDD using a USB flash drive. 3. Replace the HDD. HDD error



Detection Description



Remedy



An error was detected in the PDL-related file storage area. (Initialization failed at startup or I/O error at startup) When this error occurs, the system has not been started normally. Therefore, it may not be recorded in the error log. [Related parts] - Cable between the Main Controller PCB (PWB01/J6003, J6004) and the HDD (Unit of replacement: CABLE, HARD DISK DRIVE, 1) - HDD (Unit of replacement: HARD DISK DRIVE) - Main Controller PCB (PWB01) (Unit of replacement: MAIN CONTROLLER PCB ASS'Y, 1) [Remedy] Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared. When prioritizing clearing of the error, skip Remedies 2 and 3. Although the error is cleared by "HD-CHECK", it may occur again. Thus, perform Remedies 1 to 4. 1. Check the related harness/cable and connector. 2. Select COPIER> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> CHK-TYPE> "1", and execute "HD-CHECK". Then, turn OFF and then ON the main power. 3. Obtain the necessary backup data by referring to "Appendix> Backup Data List" in the System Service Manual. 4. Select COPIER> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> CHK-TYPE> "1", and execute "HD-CLEAR". Then, turn OFF and then ON the main power to delete the data in the corresponding partition. 5. If the above-mentioned service mode cannot be executed due to an error, etc., enter safe mode using (2+8) startup. Then format the HDD using SST or a USB flash drive. 6. Check/replace the related parts. [Reference] When replacing the HDD, back up the setting values by referring to "Chapter 5. Adjustment> Actions when Replacing the Parts> HDD" in the Service Manual.



869



7. Error/Jam/Alarm E602-0111-00



HDD error



Detection Description Remedy



E602-0201-00



An error was detected in the PDL-related file storage area. (File could not be written in the HDD after startup or I/O error after startup) [Related parts] - Cable between the Main Controller PCB (PWB01/J6003, J6004) and the HDD (Unit of replacement: CABLE, HARD DISK DRIVE, 1) - HDD (Unit of replacement: HARD DISK DRIVE) - Main Controller PCB (PWB01) (Unit of replacement: MAIN CONTROLLER PCB ASS'Y, 1) [Remedy] Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared. When prioritizing clearing of the error, skip Remedies 2 and 3. Although the error is cleared by "HD-CHECK", it may occur again. Thus, perform Remedies 1 to 4. 1. Check the related harness/cable and connector. 2. Select COPIER> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> CHK-TYPE> "1", and execute "HD-CHECK". Then, turn OFF and then ON the main power. 3. Obtain the necessary backup data by referring to "Appendix> Backup Data List" in the System Service Manual. 4. Select COPIER> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> CHK-TYPE> "1", and execute "HD-CLEAR". Then, turn OFF and then ON the main power to delete the data in the corresponding partition. 5. If the above-mentioned service mode cannot be executed due to an error, etc., enter safe mode using (2+8) startup. Then format the HDD using SST or a USB flash drive. 6. Check/replace the related parts. [Reference] When replacing the HDD, back up the setting values by referring to "Chapter 5. Adjustment> Actions when Replacing the Parts> HDD" in the Service Manual. HDD error



Detection Description



An error was detected in the storage area of image data after startup. (Initialization failed at startup or I/O error at startup) When this error occurs, the system has not been started normally. Therefore, it may not be recorded in the error log.



Remedy



[Related parts] - Cable between the Main Controller PCB (PWB01/J6003, J6004) and the HDD (Unit of replacement: CABLE, HARD DISK DRIVE, 1) - HDD (Unit of replacement: HARD DISK DRIVE) - Main Controller PCB (PWB01) (Unit of replacement: MAIN CONTROLLER PCB ASS'Y, 1) [Remedy] Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared. When prioritizing clearing of the error, skip Remedies 2 and 3. Although the error is cleared by "HD-CHECK", it may occur again. Thus, perform Remedies 1 to 4. 1. Check the related harness/cable and connector. 2. Select COPIER> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> CHK-TYPE> "2", and execute "HD-CHECK". Then, turn OFF and then ON the main power. 3. Obtain the necessary backup data by referring to "Appendix> Backup Data List" in the System Service Manual. 4. Select COPIER> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> CHK-TYPE> "2", and execute "HD-CLEAR". Then, turn OFF and then ON the main power to delete the data in the corresponding partition. 5. If the above-mentioned service mode cannot be executed due to an error, etc., enter safe mode using (2+8) startup. Then format the HDD using SST or a USB flash drive. 6. Check/replace the related parts. [Reference] When replacing the HDD, back up the setting values by referring to "Chapter 5. Adjustment> Actions when Replacing the Parts> HDD" in the Service Manual.



870



7. Error/Jam/Alarm E602-0211-00



HDD error



Detection Description



An error was detected in the storage area of image data after startup. (File could not be written in the HDD after startup or I/O error after startup)



Remedy



[Related parts] - Cable between the Main Controller PCB (PWB01/J6003, J6004) and the HDD (Unit of replacement: CABLE, HARD DISK DRIVE, 1) - HDD (Unit of replacement: HARD DISK DRIVE) - Main Controller PCB (PWB01) (Unit of replacement: MAIN CONTROLLER PCB ASS'Y, 1) [Remedy] Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared. When prioritizing clearing of the error, skip Remedies 2 and 3. Although the error is cleared by "HD-CHECK", it may occur again. Thus, perform Remedies 1 to 4. 1. Check the related harness/cable and connector. 2. Select COPIER> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> CHK-TYPE> "2", and execute "HD-CHECK". Then, turn OFF and then ON the main power. 3. Obtain the necessary backup data by referring to "Appendix> Backup Data List" in the System Service Manual. 4. Select COPIER> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> CHK-TYPE> "2", and execute "HD-CLEAR". Then, turn OFF and then ON the main power to delete the data in the corresponding partition. 5. If the above-mentioned service mode cannot be executed due to an error, etc., enter safe mode using (2+8) startup. Then format the HDD using SST or a USB flash drive. 6. Check/replace the related parts. [Reference] When replacing the HDD, back up the setting values by referring to "Chapter 5. Adjustment> Actions when Replacing the Parts> HDD" in the Service Manual.



E602-0301-00



HDD error



Detection Description



Remedy



An error was detected in the MEAP-related area. (Initialization failed at startup or I/O error at startup) When this error occurs, the system has not been started normally. Therefore, it may not be recorded in the error log. [Related parts] - Cable between the Main Controller PCB (PWB01/J6003, J6004) and the HDD (Unit of replacement: CABLE, HARD DISK DRIVE, 1) - HDD (Unit of replacement: HARD DISK DRIVE) - Main Controller PCB (PWB01) (Unit of replacement: MAIN CONTROLLER PCB ASS'Y, 1) [Remedy] Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared. When prioritizing clearing of the error, skip Remedies 2 and 3. Although the error is cleared by "HD-CHECK", it may occur again. Thus, perform Remedies 1 to 4. 1. Check the related harness/cable and connector. 2. Select COPIER> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> CHK-TYPE> "3", and execute "HD-CHECK". Then, turn OFF and then ON the main power. 3. Obtain the necessary backup data by referring to "Appendix> Backup Data List" in the System Service Manual. 4. Select COPIER> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> CHK-TYPE> "3", and execute "HD-CLEAR". Then, turn OFF and then ON the main power to delete the data in the corresponding partition. 5. If the above-mentioned service mode cannot be executed due to an error, etc., enter safe mode using (2+8) startup. Then format the HDD using SST or a USB flash drive. 6. Check/replace the related parts. [Reference] When replacing the HDD, back up the setting values by referring to "Chapter 5. Adjustment> Actions when Replacing the Parts> HDD" in the Service Manual.



871



7. Error/Jam/Alarm E602-0311-00



HDD error



Detection Description



An error was detected in the MEAP-related area. (File could not be written in the HDD after startup or I/O error after startup)



Remedy



[Related parts] - Cable between the Main Controller PCB (PWB01/J6003, J6004) and the HDD (Unit of replacement: CABLE, HARD DISK DRIVE, 1) - HDD (Unit of replacement: HARD DISK DRIVE) - Main Controller PCB (PWB01) (Unit of replacement: MAIN CONTROLLER PCB ASS'Y, 1) [Remedy] Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared. When prioritizing clearing of the error, skip Remedies 2 and 3. Although the error is cleared by "HD-CHECK", it may occur again. Thus, perform Remedies 1 to 4. 1. Check the related harness/cable and connector. 2. Select COPIER> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> CHK-TYPE> "3", and execute "HD-CHECK". Then, turn OFF and then ON the main power. 3. Obtain the necessary backup data by referring to "Appendix> Backup Data List" in the System Service Manual. 4. Select COPIER> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> CHK-TYPE> "3", and execute "HD-CLEAR". Then, turn OFF and then ON the main power to delete the data in the corresponding partition. 5. If the above-mentioned service mode cannot be executed due to an error, etc., enter safe mode using (2+8) startup. Then format the HDD using SST or a USB flash drive. 6. Check/replace the related parts. [Reference] When replacing the HDD, back up the setting values by referring to "Chapter 5. Adjustment> Actions when Replacing the Parts> HDD" in the Service Manual.



E602-0401-00



HDD error



Detection Description



Remedy



Logical partition error was detected. (Initialization failed at startup or I/O error at startup) When this error occurs, the system has not been started normally. Therefore, it may not be recorded in the error log. [Related parts] - Cable between the Main Controller PCB (PWB01/J6003, J6004) and the HDD (Unit of replacement: CABLE, HARD DISK DRIVE, 1) - HDD (Unit of replacement: HARD DISK DRIVE) - Main Controller PCB (PWB01) (Unit of replacement: MAIN CONTROLLER PCB ASS'Y, 1) [Remedy] Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared. When prioritizing clearing of the error, skip Remedies 2 and 3. Although the error is cleared by "HD-CHECK", it may occur again. Thus, perform Remedies 1 to 4. 1. Check the related harness/cable and connector. 2. Select COPIER> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> CHK-TYPE> "4", and execute "HD-CHECK". Then, turn OFF and then ON the main power. 3. Obtain the necessary backup data by referring to "Appendix> Backup Data List" in the System Service Manual. 4. Select COPIER> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> CHK-TYPE> "4", and execute "HD-CLEAR". Then, turn OFF and then ON the main power to delete the data in the corresponding partition. 5. If the above-mentioned service mode cannot be executed due to the error, enter safe mode using (2+8) startup. Then format the HDD using SST or a USB flash drive. 6. Check/replace the related parts. [Reference] When replacing the HDD, back up the setting values by referring to "Chapter 5. Adjustment> Actions when Replacing the Parts> HDD" in the Service Manual.



872



7. Error/Jam/Alarm E602-0411-00



HDD error



Detection Description



Logical partition error was detected. (File could not be written in the HDD after startup or I/O error after startup)



Remedy



[Related parts] - Cable between the Main Controller PCB (PWB01/J6003, J6004) and the HDD (Unit of replacement: CABLE, HARD DISK DRIVE, 1) - HDD (Unit of replacement: HARD DISK DRIVE) - Main Controller PCB (PWB01) (Unit of replacement: MAIN CONTROLLER PCB ASS'Y, 1) [Remedy] Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared. When prioritizing clearing of the error, skip Remedies 2 and 3. Although the error is cleared by "HD-CHECK", it may occur again. Thus, perform Remedies 1 to 4. 1. Check the related harness/cable and connector. 2. Select COPIER> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> CHK-TYPE> "4", and execute "HD-CHECK". Then, turn OFF and then ON the main power. 3. Obtain the necessary backup data by referring to "Appendix> Backup Data List" in the System Service Manual. 4. Select COPIER> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> CHK-TYPE> "4", and execute "HD-CLEAR". Then, turn OFF and then ON the main power to delete the data in the corresponding partition. 5. If the above-mentioned service mode cannot be executed due to the error, enter safe mode using (2+8) startup. Then format the HDD using SST or a USB flash drive. 6. Check/replace the related parts. [Reference] When replacing the HDD, back up the setting values by referring to "Chapter 5. Adjustment> Actions when Replacing the Parts> HDD" in the Service Manual.



E602-0501-00



HDD error



Detection Description



An error was detected in the storage area of image data after startup. (Initialization failed at startup or I/O error at startup) When this error occurs, the system has not been started normally. Therefore, it may not be recorded in the error log.



Remedy



[Related parts] - Cable between the Main Controller PCB (PWB01/J6003, J6004) and the HDD (Unit of replacement: CABLE, HARD DISK DRIVE, 1) - HDD (Unit of replacement: HARD DISK DRIVE) - Main Controller PCB (PWB01) (Unit of replacement: MAIN CONTROLLER PCB ASS'Y, 1) [Remedy] Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared. When prioritizing clearing of the error, skip Remedies 2 and 3. Although the error is cleared by "HD-CHECK", it may occur again. Thus, perform Remedies 1 to 4. 1. Check the related harness/cable and connector. 2. Select COPIER> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> CHK-TYPE> "5", and execute "HD-CHECK". Then, turn OFF and then ON the main power. 3. Obtain the necessary backup data by referring to "Appendix> Backup Data List" in the System Service Manual. 4. Select COPIER> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> CHK-TYPE> "5", and execute "HD-CLEAR". Then, turn OFF and then ON the main power to delete the data in the corresponding partition. 5. If the above-mentioned service mode cannot be executed due to an error, etc., enter safe mode using (2+8) startup. Then format the HDD using SST or a USB flash drive. 6. Check/replace the related parts. [Reference] When replacing the HDD, back up the setting values by referring to "Chapter 5. Adjustment> Actions when Replacing the Parts> HDD" in the Service Manual.



873



7. Error/Jam/Alarm E602-0511-00



HDD error



Detection Description



An error was detected in the storage area of image data after startup. (File could not be written in the HDD after startup or I/O error after startup)



Remedy



[Related parts] - Cable between the Main Controller PCB (PWB01/J6003, J6004) and the HDD (Unit of replacement: CABLE, HARD DISK DRIVE, 1) - HDD (Unit of replacement: HARD DISK DRIVE) - Main Controller PCB (PWB01) (Unit of replacement: MAIN CONTROLLER PCB ASS'Y, 1) [Remedy] Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared. When prioritizing clearing of the error, skip Remedies 2 and 3. Although the error is cleared by "HD-CHECK", it may occur again. Thus, perform Remedies 1 to 4. 1. Check the related harness/cable and connector. 2. Select COPIER> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> CHK-TYPE> "5", and execute "HD-CHECK". Then, turn OFF and then ON the main power. 3. Obtain the necessary backup data by referring to "Appendix> Backup Data List" in the System Service Manual. 4. Select COPIER> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> CHK-TYPE> "5", and execute "HD-CLEAR". Then, turn OFF and then ON the main power to delete the data in the corresponding partition. 5. If the above-mentioned service mode cannot be executed due to an error, etc., enter safe mode using (2+8) startup. Then format the HDD using SST or a USB flash drive. 6. Check/replace the related parts. [Reference] When replacing the HDD, back up the setting values by referring to "Chapter 5. Adjustment> Actions when Replacing the Parts> HDD" in the Service Manual.



E602-0601-00



HDD error



Detection Description



An error was detected in the storage area of image data after startup. (Initialization failed at startup or I/O error at startup) When this error occurs, the system has not been started normally. Therefore, it may not be recorded in the error log.



Remedy



[Related parts] - Cable between the Main Controller PCB (PWB01/J6003, J6004) and the HDD (Unit of replacement: CABLE, HARD DISK DRIVE, 1) - HDD (Unit of replacement: HARD DISK DRIVE) - Main Controller PCB (PWB01) (Unit of replacement: MAIN CONTROLLER PCB ASS'Y, 1) [Remedy] Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared. When prioritizing clearing of the error, skip Remedies 2 and 3. Although the error is cleared by "HD-CHECK", it may occur again. Thus, perform Remedies 1 to 4. 1. Check the related harness/cable and connector. 2. Select COPIER> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> CHK-TYPE> "6", and execute "HD-CHECK". Then, turn OFF and then ON the main power. 3. Obtain the necessary backup data by referring to "Appendix> Backup Data List" in the System Service Manual. 4. Select COPIER> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> CHK-TYPE> "6", and execute "HD-CLEAR". Then, turn OFF and then ON the main power to delete the data in the corresponding partition. 5. If the above-mentioned service mode cannot be executed due to an error, etc., enter safe mode using (2+8) startup. Then format the HDD using SST or a USB flash drive. 6. Check/replace the related parts. [Reference] When replacing the HDD, back up the setting values by referring to "Chapter 5. Adjustment> Actions when Replacing the Parts> HDD" in the Service Manual.



874



7. Error/Jam/Alarm E602-0611-00



HDD error



Detection Description



An error was detected in the storage area of image data after startup. (File could not be written in the HDD after startup or I/O error after startup)



Remedy



[Related parts] - Cable between the Main Controller PCB (PWB01/J6003, J6004) and the HDD (Unit of replacement: CABLE, HARD DISK DRIVE, 1) - HDD (Unit of replacement: HARD DISK DRIVE) - Main Controller PCB (PWB01) (Unit of replacement: MAIN CONTROLLER PCB ASS'Y, 1) [Remedy] Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared. When prioritizing clearing of the error, skip Remedies 2 and 3. Although the error is cleared by "HD-CHECK", it may occur again. Thus, perform Remedies 1 to 4. 1. Check the related harness/cable and connector. 2. Select COPIER> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> CHK-TYPE> "6", and execute "HD-CHECK". Then, turn OFF and then ON the main power. 3. Obtain the necessary backup data by referring to "Appendix> Backup Data List" in the System Service Manual. 4. Select COPIER> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> CHK-TYPE> "6", and execute "HD-CLEAR". Then, turn OFF and then ON the main power to delete the data in the corresponding partition. 5. If the above-mentioned service mode cannot be executed due to an error, etc., enter safe mode using (2+8) startup. Then format the HDD using SST or a USB flash drive. 6. Check/replace the related parts. [Reference] When replacing the HDD, back up the setting values by referring to "Chapter 5. Adjustment> Actions when Replacing the Parts> HDD" in the Service Manual.



E602-0701-00



HDD error



Detection Description



An error was detected in general application temporary area (temporary file). (Initialization failed at startup or I/O error at startup) When this error occurs, the system has not been started normally. Therefore, it may not be recorded in the error log.



Remedy



[Related parts] - Cable between the Main Controller PCB (PWB01/J6003, J6004) and the HDD (Unit of replacement: CABLE, HARD DISK DRIVE, 1) - HDD (Unit of replacement: HARD DISK DRIVE) - Main Controller PCB (PWB01) (Unit of replacement: MAIN CONTROLLER PCB ASS'Y, 1) [Remedy] Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared. When prioritizing clearing of the error, skip Remedies 2 and 3. Although the error is cleared by "HD-CHECK", it may occur again. Thus, perform Remedies 1 to 4. 1. Check the related harness/cable and connector. 2. Select COPIER> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> CHK-TYPE> "7", and execute "HD-CHECK". Then, turn OFF and then ON the main power. 3. Obtain the necessary backup data by referring to "Appendix> Backup Data List" in the System Service Manual. 4. Select COPIER> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> CHK-TYPE> "7", and execute "HD-CLEAR". Then, turn OFF and then ON the main power to delete the data in the corresponding partition. 5. If the above-mentioned service mode cannot be executed due to an error, etc., enter safe mode using (2+8) startup. Then format the HDD using SST or a USB flash drive. 6. Check/replace the related parts. [Reference] When replacing the HDD, back up the setting values by referring to "Chapter 5. Adjustment> Actions when Replacing the Parts> HDD" in the Service Manual.



875



7. Error/Jam/Alarm E602-0711-00



HDD error



Detection Description Remedy



E602-0801-00



An error was detected in general application temporary area (temporary file). (File could not be written in the HDD after startup or I/O error after startup) [Related parts] - Cable between the Main Controller PCB (PWB01/J6003, J6004) and the HDD (Unit of replacement: CABLE, HARD DISK DRIVE, 1) - HDD (Unit of replacement: HARD DISK DRIVE) - Main Controller PCB (PWB01) (Unit of replacement: MAIN CONTROLLER PCB ASS'Y, 1) [Remedy] Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared. When prioritizing clearing of the error, skip Remedies 2 and 3. Although the error is cleared by "HD-CHECK", it may occur again. Thus, perform Remedies 1 to 4. 1. Check the related harness/cable and connector. 2. Select COPIER> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> CHK-TYPE> "7", and execute "HD-CHECK". Then, turn OFF and then ON the main power. 3. Obtain the necessary backup data by referring to "Appendix> Backup Data List" in the System Service Manual. 4. Select COPIER> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> CHK-TYPE> "7", and execute "HD-CLEAR". Then, turn OFF and then ON the main power to delete the data in the corresponding partition. 5. If the above-mentioned service mode cannot be executed due to an error, etc., enter safe mode using (2+8) startup. Then format the HDD using SST or a USB flash drive. 6. Check/replace the related parts. [Reference] When replacing the HDD, back up the setting values by referring to "Chapter 5. Adjustment> Actions when Replacing the Parts> HDD" in the Service Manual. HDD error



Detection Description



An error was detected in the general application-related area. (Initialization failed at startup or I/O error at startup) When this error occurs, the system has not been started normally. Therefore, it may not be recorded in the error log.



Remedy



[Related parts] - Cable between the Main Controller PCB (PWB01/J6003, J6004) and the HDD (Unit of replacement: CABLE, HARD DISK DRIVE, 1) - HDD (Unit of replacement: HARD DISK DRIVE) - Main Controller PCB (PWB01) (Unit of replacement: MAIN CONTROLLER PCB ASS'Y, 1) [Remedy] Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared. When prioritizing clearing of the error, skip Remedies 2 and 3. Although the error is cleared by "HD-CHECK", it may occur again. Thus, perform Remedies 1 to 4. 1. Check the related harness/cable and connector. 2. Select COPIER> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> CHK-TYPE> "8", and execute "HD-CHECK". Then, turn OFF and then ON the main power. 3. Obtain the necessary backup data by referring to "Appendix> Backup Data List" in the System Service Manual. 4. Select COPIER> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> CHK-TYPE> "8", and execute "HD-CLEAR". Then, turn OFF and then ON the main power to delete the data in the corresponding partition. 5. If the above-mentioned service mode cannot be executed due to an error, etc., enter safe mode using (2+8) startup. Then format the HDD using SST or a USB flash drive. 6. Check/replace the related parts. [Reference] When replacing the HDD, back up the setting values by referring to "Chapter 5. Adjustment> Actions when Replacing the Parts> HDD" in the Service Manual.



876



7. Error/Jam/Alarm E602-0811-00



HDD error



Detection Description



An error was detected in the general application-related area. (File could not be written in the HDD after startup or I/O error after startup)



Remedy



[Related parts] - Cable between the Main Controller PCB (PWB01/J6003, J6004) and the HDD (Unit of replacement: CABLE, HARD DISK DRIVE, 1) - HDD (Unit of replacement: HARD DISK DRIVE) - Main Controller PCB (PWB01) (Unit of replacement: MAIN CONTROLLER PCB ASS'Y, 1) [Remedy] Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared. When prioritizing clearing of the error, skip Remedies 2 and 3. Although the error is cleared by "HD-CHECK", it may occur again. Thus, perform Remedies 1 to 4. 1. Check the related harness/cable and connector. 2. Select COPIER> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> CHK-TYPE> "8", and execute "HD-CHECK". Then, turn OFF and then ON the main power. 3. Obtain the necessary backup data by referring to "Appendix> Backup Data List" in the System Service Manual. 4. Select COPIER> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> CHK-TYPE> "8", and execute "HD-CLEAR". Then, turn OFF and then ON the main power to delete the data in the corresponding partition. 5. If the above-mentioned service mode cannot be executed due to an error, etc., enter safe mode using (2+8) startup. Then format the HDD using SST or a USB flash drive. 6. Check/replace the related parts. [Reference] When replacing the HDD, back up the setting values by referring to "Chapter 5. Adjustment> Actions when Replacing the Parts> HDD" in the Service Manual.



E602-0901-00



HDD error



Detection Description



An error was detected in PDL spool data (temporary file). (Initialization failed at startup or I/O error at startup) When this error occurs, the system has not been started normally. Therefore, it may not be recorded in the error log.



Remedy



[Related parts] - Cable between the Main Controller PCB (PWB01/J6003, J6004) and the HDD (Unit of replacement: CABLE, HARD DISK DRIVE, 1) - HDD (Unit of replacement: HARD DISK DRIVE) - Main Controller PCB (PWB01) (Unit of replacement: MAIN CONTROLLER PCB ASS'Y, 1) [Remedy] Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared. When prioritizing clearing of the error, skip Remedies 2 and 3. Although the error is cleared by "HD-CHECK", it may occur again. Thus, perform Remedies 1 to 4. 1. Check the related harness/cable and connector. 2. Select COPIER> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> CHK-TYPE> "9", and execute "HD-CHECK". Then, turn OFF and then ON the main power. 3. Obtain the necessary backup data by referring to "Appendix> Backup Data List" in the System Service Manual. 4. Select COPIER> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> CHK-TYPE> "9", and execute "HD-CLEAR". Then, turn OFF and then ON the main power to delete the data in the corresponding partition. 5. If the above-mentioned service mode cannot be executed due to an error, etc., enter safe mode using (2+8) startup. Then format the HDD using SST or a USB flash drive. 6. Check/replace the related parts. [Reference] When replacing the HDD, back up the setting values by referring to "Chapter 5. Adjustment> Actions when Replacing the Parts> HDD" in the Service Manual.



877



7. Error/Jam/Alarm E602-0911-00



HDD error



Detection Description Remedy



E602-1001-00



An error was detected in PDL spool data (temporary file). (File could not be written in the HDD after startup or I/O error after startup) [Related parts] - Cable between the Main Controller PCB (PWB01/J6003, J6004) and the HDD (Unit of replacement: CABLE, HARD DISK DRIVE, 1) - HDD (Unit of replacement: HARD DISK DRIVE) - Main Controller PCB (PWB01) (Unit of replacement: MAIN CONTROLLER PCB ASS'Y, 1) [Remedy] Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared. When prioritizing clearing of the error, skip Remedies 2 and 3. Although the error is cleared by "HD-CHECK", it may occur again. Thus, perform Remedies 1 to 4. 1. Check the related harness/cable and connector. 2. Select COPIER> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> CHK-TYPE> "9", and execute "HD-CHECK". Then, turn OFF and then ON the main power. 3. Obtain the necessary backup data by referring to "Appendix> Backup Data List" in the System Service Manual. 4. Select COPIER> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> CHK-TYPE> "9", and execute "HD-CLEAR". Then, turn OFF and then ON the main power to delete the data in the corresponding partition. 5. If the above-mentioned service mode cannot be executed due to an error, etc., enter safe mode using (2+8) startup. Then format the HDD using SST or a USB flash drive. 6. Check/replace the related parts. [Reference] When replacing the HDD, back up the setting values by referring to "Chapter 5. Adjustment> Actions when Replacing the Parts> HDD" in the Service Manual. HDD error



Detection Description



Remedy



An error was detected in the SEND-related area. (Initialization failed at startup or I/O error at startup) When this error occurs, the system has not been started normally. Therefore, it may not be recorded in the error log. [Related parts] - Cable between the Main Controller PCB (PWB01/J6003, J6004) and the HDD (Unit of replacement: CABLE, HARD DISK DRIVE, 1) - HDD (Unit of replacement: HARD DISK DRIVE) - Main Controller PCB (PWB01) (Unit of replacement: MAIN CONTROLLER PCB ASS'Y, 1) [Remedy] Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared. When prioritizing clearing of the error, skip Remedies 2 and 3. Although the error is cleared by "HD-CHECK", it may occur again. Thus, perform Remedies 1 to 4. 1. Check the related harness/cable and connector. 2. Select COPIER> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> CHK-TYPE> "10", and execute "HD-CHECK". Then, turn OFF and then ON the main power. 3. Obtain the necessary backup data by referring to "Appendix> Backup Data List" in the System Service Manual. 4. Select COPIER> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> CHK-TYPE> "10", and execute "HD-CLEAR". Then, turn OFF and then ON the main power to delete the data in the corresponding partition. 5. If the above-mentioned service mode cannot be executed due to an error, etc., enter safe mode using (2+8) startup. Then format the HDD using SST or a USB flash drive. 6. Check/replace the related parts. [Reference] When replacing the HDD, back up the setting values by referring to "Chapter 5. Adjustment> Actions when Replacing the Parts> HDD" in the Service Manual.



878



7. Error/Jam/Alarm E602-1011-00



HDD error



Detection Description



An error was detected in the SEND-related area. (File could not be written in the HDD after startup or I/O error after startup)



Remedy



[Related parts] - Cable between the Main Controller PCB (PWB01/J6003, J6004) and the HDD (Unit of replacement: CABLE, HARD DISK DRIVE, 1) - HDD (Unit of replacement: HARD DISK DRIVE) - Main Controller PCB (PWB01) (Unit of replacement: MAIN CONTROLLER PCB ASS'Y, 1) [Remedy] Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared. When prioritizing clearing of the error, skip Remedies 2 and 3. Although the error is cleared by "HD-CHECK", it may occur again. Thus, perform Remedies 1 to 4. 1. Check the related harness/cable and connector. 2. Select COPIER> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> CHK-TYPE> "10", and execute "HD-CHECK". Then, turn OFF and then ON the main power. 3. Obtain the necessary backup data by referring to "Appendix> Backup Data List" in the System Service Manual. 4. Select COPIER> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> CHK-TYPE> "10", and execute "HD-CLEAR". Then, turn OFF and then ON the main power to delete the data in the corresponding partition. 5. If the above-mentioned service mode cannot be executed due to an error, etc., enter safe mode using (2+8) startup. Then format the HDD using SST or a USB flash drive. 6. Check/replace the related parts. [Reference] When replacing the HDD, back up the setting values by referring to "Chapter 5. Adjustment> Actions when Replacing the Parts> HDD" in the Service Manual.



E602-1101-00



HDD error



Detection Description



Remedy



An error was detected in the update-related area. (Initialization failed at startup or I/O error at startup) When this error occurs, the system has not been started normally. Therefore, it may not be recorded in the error log. [Related parts] - Cable between the Main Controller PCB (PWB01/J6003, J6004) and the HDD (Unit of replacement: CABLE, HARD DISK DRIVE, 1) - HDD (Unit of replacement: HARD DISK DRIVE) - Main Controller PCB (PWB01) (Unit of replacement: MAIN CONTROLLER PCB ASS'Y, 1) [Remedy] Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared. When prioritizing clearing of the error, skip Remedies 2 and 3. Although the error is cleared by "HD-CHECK", it may occur again. Thus, perform Remedies 1 to 4. 1. Check the related harness/cable and connector. 2. Select COPIER> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> CHK-TYPE> "11", and execute "HD-CHECK". Then, turn OFF and then ON the main power. 3. Obtain the necessary backup data by referring to "Appendix> Backup Data List" in the System Service Manual. 4. Select COPIER> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> CHK-TYPE> "11", and execute "HD-CLEAR". Then, turn OFF and then ON the main power to delete the data in the corresponding partition. 5. If the above-mentioned service mode cannot be executed due to an error, etc., enter safe mode using (2+8) startup. Then format the HDD using SST or a USB flash drive. 6. Check/replace the related parts. [Reference] When replacing the HDD, back up the setting values by referring to "Chapter 5. Adjustment> Actions when Replacing the Parts> HDD" in the Service Manual.



879



7. Error/Jam/Alarm E602-1111-00



HDD error



Detection Description



An error was detected in the update-related area. (File could not be written in the HDD after startup or I/O error after startup)



Remedy



[Related parts] - Cable between the Main Controller PCB (PWB01/J6003, J6004) and the HDD (Unit of replacement: CABLE, HARD DISK DRIVE, 1) - HDD (Unit of replacement: HARD DISK DRIVE) - Main Controller PCB (PWB01) (Unit of replacement: MAIN CONTROLLER PCB ASS'Y, 1) [Remedy] Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared. When prioritizing clearing of the error, skip Remedies 2 and 3. Although the error is cleared by "HD-CHECK", it may occur again. Thus, perform Remedies 1 to 4. 1. Check the related harness/cable and connector. 2. Select COPIER> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> CHK-TYPE> "11", and execute "HD-CHECK". Then, turn OFF and then ON the main power. 3. Obtain the necessary backup data by referring to "Appendix> Backup Data List" in the System Service Manual. 4. Select COPIER> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> CHK-TYPE> "11", and execute "HD-CLEAR". Then, turn OFF and then ON the main power to delete the data in the corresponding partition. 5. If the above-mentioned service mode cannot be executed due to an error, etc., enter safe mode using (2+8) startup. Then format the HDD using SST or a USB flash drive. 6. Check/replace the related parts. [Reference] When replacing the HDD, back up the setting values by referring to "Chapter 5. Adjustment> Actions when Replacing the Parts> HDD" in the Service Manual.



E602-1201-00



HDD error



Detection Description



Remedy



An error was detected in the license-related area. (Initialization failed at startup or I/O error at startup) When this error occurs, the system has not been started normally. Therefore, it may not be recorded in the error log. [Related parts] - Cable between the Main Controller PCB (PWB01/J6003, J6004) and the HDD (Unit of replacement: CABLE, HARD DISK DRIVE, 1) - HDD (Unit of replacement: HARD DISK DRIVE) - Main Controller PCB (PWB01) (Unit of replacement: MAIN CONTROLLER PCB ASS'Y, 1) [Remedy] Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared. Although the error is cleared by "HD-CHECK", it may occur again. Thus, perform Remedies 1 to 5. 1. Check the related harness/cable and connector. 2. Turn OFF and then ON the main power, and check whether the error is cleared. 3. Select COPIER> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> CHK-TYPE> "12", and execute "HD-CHECK". Then, turn OFF and then ON the main power. 4. Obtain the necessary backup data by referring to "Appendix> Backup Data List" in the System Service Manual. 5. Enter safe mode using (2+8) startup, and format the HDD using SST or a USB flash drive. 6. Check/replace the related parts. [Reference] When replacing the HDD, back up the setting values by referring to "Chapter 5. Adjustment> Actions when Replacing the Parts> HDD" in the Service Manual.



880



7. Error/Jam/Alarm E602-1211-00



HDD error



Detection Description



An error was detected in the license-related area. (File could not be written in the HDD after startup or I/O error after startup)



Remedy



[Related parts] - Cable between the Main Controller PCB (PWB01/J6003, J6004) and the HDD (Unit of replacement: CABLE, HARD DISK DRIVE, 1) - HDD (Unit of replacement: HARD DISK DRIVE) - Main Controller PCB (PWB01) (Unit of replacement: MAIN CONTROLLER PCB ASS'Y, 1) [Remedy] Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared. Although the error is cleared by "HD-CHECK", it may occur again. Thus, perform Remedies 1 to 5. 1. Check the related harness/cable and connector. 2. Turn OFF and then ON the main power, and check whether the error is cleared. 3. Select COPIER> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> CHK-TYPE> "12", and execute "HD-CHECK". Then, turn OFF and then ON the main power. 4. Obtain the necessary backup data by referring to "Appendix> Backup Data List" in the System Service Manual. 5. Enter safe mode using (2+8) startup, and format the HDD using SST or a USB flash drive. 6. Check/replace the related parts. [Reference] When replacing the HDD, back up the setting values by referring to "Chapter 5. Adjustment> Actions when Replacing the Parts> HDD" in the Service Manual.



E602-1301-00



HDD error



Detection Description



Remedy



An error was detected in the system area. (Initialization failed at startup or I/O error at startup) When this error occurs, the system has not been started normally. Therefore, it may not be recorded in the error log. [Related parts] - Cable between the Main Controller PCB (PWB01/J6003, J6004) and the HDD (Unit of replacement: CABLE, HARD DISK DRIVE, 1) - HDD (Unit of replacement: HARD DISK DRIVE) - Main Controller PCB (PWB01) (Unit of replacement: MAIN CONTROLLER PCB ASS'Y, 1) [Remedy] Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared. Although the error is cleared by "HD-CHECK", it may occur again. Thus, perform Remedies 1 to 5. 1. Check the related harness/cable and connector. 2. Turn OFF and then ON the main power, and check whether the error is cleared. 3. Select COPIER> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> CHK-TYPE> "13", and execute "HD-CHECK". Then, turn OFF and then ON the main power. 4. Obtain the necessary backup data by referring to "Appendix> Backup Data List" in the System Service Manual. 5. Enter safe mode using (2+8) startup, and format the HDD using SST or a USB flash drive. 6. Check/replace the related parts. [Reference] When replacing the HDD, back up the setting values by referring to "Chapter 5. Adjustment> Actions when Replacing the Parts> HDD" in the Service Manual.



881



7. Error/Jam/Alarm E602-1311-00



HDD error



Detection Description Remedy



E602-1371-00



An error was detected in the system area. (File could not be written in the HDD after startup or I/O error after startup) [Related parts] - Cable between the Main Controller PCB (PWB01/J6003, J6004) and the HDD (Unit of replacement: CABLE, HARD DISK DRIVE, 1) - HDD (Unit of replacement: HARD DISK DRIVE) - Main Controller PCB (PWB01) (Unit of replacement: MAIN CONTROLLER PCB ASS'Y, 1) [Remedy] Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared. Although the error is cleared by "HD-CHECK", it may occur again. Thus, perform Remedies 1 to 5. 1. Check the related harness/cable and connector. 2. Turn OFF and then ON the main power, and check whether the error is cleared. 3. Select COPIER> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> CHK-TYPE> "13", and execute "HD-CHECK". Then, turn OFF and then ON the main power. 4. Obtain the necessary backup data by referring to "Appendix> Backup Data List" in the System Service Manual. 5. Enter safe mode using (2+8) startup, and format the HDD using SST or a USB flash drive. 6. Check/replace the related parts. [Reference] When replacing the HDD, back up the setting values by referring to "Chapter 5. Adjustment> Actions when Replacing the Parts> HDD" in the Service Manual. System verification error



Detection Description Remedy



E602-1372-00



At startup, a verification error occurred due to invalid data of a MEAP login application. [Remedy] 1. Set the following service mode setting value to 1: COPIIER > OPTION > USER > MEAPSAFE 2. Turn OFF and then ON the main power. 3. Reinstall the corresponding MEAP application from RUI. [Caution] After performing the remedy work, return the MEAPSAFE value to 0 and turn OFF and then ON the main power. Verification error by "Falsification detection at startup" function



Detection Description Remedy



At startup, a verification error occurred due to invalid data in the MEAP area. [Remedy] Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared. 1. Turn OFF and then ON the main power, and check whether the error is cleared. 2. Select COPIER> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> CHK-TYPE> "13", and execute "HD-CHECK". Then, turn OFF and then ON the main power. 3. Obtain necessary backup data referring to "Appendix > Backup Data List" in System Service Manual. 4. Select COPIER> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> CHK-TYPE> "13", and execute "HD-CLEAR". Then, turn OFF and then ON the main power to delete the data in the corresponding partition. 5. Re-install MEAP application(s) via RUI and restore the backup data. [Reference] Restore the backup data if the data has been deleted.



882



7. Error/Jam/Alarm E602-1401-00



HDD error



Detection Description



Remedy



E602-1411-00



An error was detected in SWAP (temporary file/alternative memory area). (Initialization failed at startup or I/O error at startup) When this error occurs, the system has not been started normally. Therefore, it may not be recorded in the error log. [Related parts] - Cable between the Main Controller PCB (PWB01/J6003, J6004) and the HDD (Unit of replacement: CABLE, HARD DISK DRIVE, 1) - HDD (Unit of replacement: HARD DISK DRIVE) - Main Controller PCB (PWB01) (Unit of replacement: MAIN CONTROLLER PCB ASS'Y, 1) [Remedy] Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared. When prioritizing clearing of the error, skip Remedies 2 and 3. Although the error is cleared by "HD-CHECK", it may occur again. Thus, perform Remedies 1 to 4. 1. Check the related harness/cable and connector. 2. Select COPIER> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> CHK-TYPE> "14", and execute "HD-CHECK". Then, turn OFF and then ON the main power. 3. Obtain the necessary backup data by referring to "Appendix> Backup Data List" in the System Service Manual. 4. Select COPIER> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> CHK-TYPE> "14", and execute "HD-CLEAR". Then, turn OFF and then ON the main power to delete the data in the corresponding partition. 5. If the above-mentioned service mode cannot be executed due to an error, etc., enter safe mode using (2+8) startup. Then format the HDD using SST or a USB flash drive. 6. Check/replace the related parts. [Reference] When replacing the HDD, back up the setting values by referring to "Chapter 5. Adjustment> Actions when Replacing the Parts> HDD" in the Service Manual. HDD error



Detection Description



An error was detected in SWAP (temporary file/alternative memory area). (File could not be written in the HDD after startup or I/O error after startup)



Remedy



[Related parts] - Cable between the Main Controller PCB (PWB01/J6003, J6004) and the HDD (Unit of replacement: CABLE, HARD DISK DRIVE, 1) - HDD (Unit of replacement: HARD DISK DRIVE) - Main Controller PCB (PWB01) (Unit of replacement: MAIN CONTROLLER PCB ASS'Y, 1) [Remedy] Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared. When prioritizing clearing of the error, skip Remedies 2 and 3. Although the error is cleared by "HD-CHECK", it may occur again. Thus, perform Remedies 1 to 4. 1. Check the related harness/cable and connector. 2. Select COPIER> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> CHK-TYPE> "14", and execute "HD-CHECK". Then, turn OFF and then ON the main power. 3. Obtain the necessary backup data by referring to "Appendix> Backup Data List" in the System Service Manual. 4. Select COPIER> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> CHK-TYPE> "14", and execute "HD-CLEAR". Then, turn OFF and then ON the main power to delete the data in the corresponding partition. 5. If the above-mentioned service mode cannot be executed due to an error, etc., enter safe mode using (2+8) startup. Then format the HDD using SST or a USB flash drive. 6. Check/replace the related parts. [Reference] When replacing the HDD, back up the setting values by referring to "Chapter 5. Adjustment> Actions when Replacing the Parts> HDD" in the Service Manual.



883



7. Error/Jam/Alarm E602-1701-00



HDD error



Detection Description



An error was detected in the debug log area. (Initialization failed at startup or I/O error at startup) When this error occurs, the system has not been started normally. Therefore, it may not be recorded in the error log.



Remedy



[Related parts] - Cable between the Main Controller PCB (PWB01/J6003, J6004) and the HDD (Unit of replacement: CABLE, HARD DISK DRIVE, 1) - HDD (Unit of replacement: HARD DISK DRIVE) - Main Controller PCB (PWB01) (Unit of replacement: MAIN CONTROLLER PCB ASS'Y, 1) [Remedy] Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared. When prioritizing clearing of the error, skip Remedies 2 and 3. Although the error is cleared by "HD-CHECK", it may occur again. Thus, perform Remedies 1 to 4. 1. Check the related harness/cable and connector. 2. Select COPIER> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> CHK-TYPE> "17", and execute "HD-CHECK". Then, turn OFF and then ON the main power. 3. Obtain the necessary backup data by referring to "Appendix> Backup Data List" in the System Service Manual. 4. Select COPIER> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> CHK-TYPE> "17", and execute "HD-CLEAR". Then, turn OFF and then ON the main power to delete the data in the corresponding partition. 5. Enter safe mode using (2+8) startup, and format the HDD using SST or a USB flash drive. 6. Check/replace the related parts. [Reference] When replacing the HDD, back up the setting values by referring to "Chapter 5. Adjustment> Actions when Replacing the Parts> HDD" in the Service Manual.



E602-1711-00



HDD error



Detection Description



An error was detected in the debug log area. (File could not be written in the HDD after startup or I/O error after startup)



Remedy



[Related parts] - Cable between the Main Controller PCB (PWB01/J6003, J6004) and the HDD (Unit of replacement: CABLE, HARD DISK DRIVE, 1) - HDD (Unit of replacement: HARD DISK DRIVE) - Main Controller PCB (PWB01) (Unit of replacement: MAIN CONTROLLER PCB ASS'Y, 1) [Remedy] Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared. When prioritizing clearing of the error, skip Remedies 2 and 3. Although the error is cleared by "HD-CHECK", it may occur again. Thus, perform Remedies 1 to 4. 1. Check the related harness/cable and connector. 2. Select COPIER> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> CHK-TYPE> "17", and execute "HD-CHECK". Then, turn OFF and then ON the main power. 3. Obtain the necessary backup data by referring to "Appendix> Backup Data List" in the System Service Manual. 4. Select COPIER> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> CHK-TYPE> "17", and execute "HD-CLEAR". Then, turn OFF and then ON the main power to delete the data in the corresponding partition. 5. If the above-mentioned service mode cannot be executed due to an error, etc., enter safe mode using (2+8) startup. Then format the HDD using SST or a USB flash drive. 6. Check/replace the related parts. [Reference] When replacing the HDD, back up the setting values by referring to "Chapter 5. Adjustment> Actions when Replacing the Parts> HDD" in the Service Manual.



884



7. Error/Jam/Alarm E602-1801-00



HDD error



Detection Description



Remedy



E602-1811-00



An error was detected in the image data storage area in Advanced Box. (Initialization failed at startup or I/O error at startup) When this error occurs, the system has not been started normally. Therefore, it may not be recorded in the error log. [Related parts] - Cable between the Main Controller PCB (PWB01/J6003, J6004) and the HDD (Unit of replacement: CABLE, HARD DISK DRIVE, 1) - HDD (Unit of replacement: HARD DISK DRIVE) - Main Controller PCB (PWB01) (Unit of replacement: MAIN CONTROLLER PCB ASS'Y, 1) [Remedy] Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared. When prioritizing clearing of the error, skip Remedies 2 and 3. Although the error is cleared by "HD-CHECK", it may occur again. Thus, perform Remedies 1 to 4. 1. Check the related harness/cable and connector. 2. Select COPIER> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> CHK-TYPE> "18", and execute "HD-CHECK". Then, turn OFF and then ON the main power. 3. Obtain the necessary backup data by referring to "Appendix> Backup Data List" in the System Service Manual. 4. Select COPIER> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> CHK-TYPE> "18", and execute "HD-CLEAR". Then, turn OFF and then ON the main power to delete the data in the corresponding partition. 5. Enter safe mode using (2+8) startup, and format the HDD using SST or a USB flash drive. 6. Check/replace the related parts. [Reference] When replacing the HDD, back up the setting values by referring to "Chapter 5. Adjustment> Actions when Replacing the Parts> HDD" in the Service Manual. HDD error



Detection Description



An error was detected in the image data storage area in Advanced Box. (File could not be written in the HDD after startup or I/O error after startup)



Remedy



[Related parts] - Cable between the Main Controller PCB (PWB01/J6003, J6004) and the HDD (Unit of replacement: CABLE, HARD DISK DRIVE, 1) - HDD (Unit of replacement: HARD DISK DRIVE) - Main Controller PCB (PWB01) (Unit of replacement: MAIN CONTROLLER PCB ASS'Y, 1) [Remedy] Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared. When prioritizing clearing of the error, skip Remedies 2 and 3. Although the error is cleared by "HD-CHECK", it may occur again. Thus, perform Remedies 1 to 4. 1. Check the related harness/cable and connector. 2. Select COPIER> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> CHK-TYPE> "18", and execute "HD-CHECK". Then, turn OFF and then ON the main power. 3. Obtain the necessary backup data by referring to "Appendix> Backup Data List" in the System Service Manual. 4. Select COPIER> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> CHK-TYPE> "18", and execute "HD-CLEAR". Then, turn OFF and then ON the main power to delete the data in the corresponding partition. 5. Enter safe mode using (2+8) startup, and format the HDD using SST or a USB flash drive. 6. Check/replace the related parts. [Reference] When replacing the HDD, back up the setting values by referring to "Chapter 5. Adjustment> Actions when Replacing the Parts> HDD" in the Service Manual.



885



7. Error/Jam/Alarm E602-1901-00



HDD error



Detection Description



An error was detected in the storage area of data for printing. (Initialization failed at startup or I/O error at startup) When this error occurs, the system has not been started normally. Therefore, it may not be recorded in the error log.



Remedy



[Related parts] - Cable between the Main Controller PCB (PWB01/J6003, J6004) and the HDD (Unit of replacement: CABLE, HARD DISK DRIVE, 1) - HDD (Unit of replacement: HARD DISK DRIVE) - Main Controller PCB (PWB01) (Unit of replacement: MAIN CONTROLLER PCB ASS'Y, 1) [Remedy] Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared. When prioritizing clearing of the error, skip Remedies 2 and 3. Although the error is cleared by "HD-CHECK", it may occur again. Thus, perform Remedies 1 to 4. 1. Check the related harness/cable and connector. 2. Select COPIER> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> CHK-TYPE> "19", and execute "HD-CHECK". Then, turn OFF and then ON the main power. 3. Obtain the necessary backup data by referring to "Appendix> Backup Data List" in the System Service Manual. 4. Select COPIER> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> CHK-TYPE> "19", and execute "HD-CLEAR". Then, turn OFF and then ON the main power to delete the data in the corresponding partition. 5. Enter safe mode using (2+8) startup, and format the HDD using SST or a USB flash drive. 6. Check/replace the related parts. [Reference] When replacing the HDD, back up the setting values by referring to "Chapter 5. Adjustment> Actions when Replacing the Parts> HDD" in the Service Manual.



E602-1911-00



HDD error



Detection Description



An error was detected in the storage area of data for printing. (File could not be written in the HDD after startup or I/O error after startup)



Remedy



[Related parts] - Cable between the Main Controller PCB (PWB01/J6003, J6004) and the HDD (Unit of replacement: CABLE, HARD DISK DRIVE, 1) - HDD (Unit of replacement: HARD DISK DRIVE) - Main Controller PCB (PWB01) (Unit of replacement: MAIN CONTROLLER PCB ASS'Y, 1) [Remedy] Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared. When prioritizing clearing of the error, skip Remedies 2 and 3. Although the error is cleared by "HD-CHECK", it may occur again. Thus, perform Remedies 1 to 4. 1. Check the related harness/cable and connector. 2. Select COPIER> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> CHK-TYPE> "19", and execute "HD-CHECK". Then, turn OFF and then ON the main power. 3. Obtain the necessary backup data by referring to "Appendix> Backup Data List" in the System Service Manual. 4. Select COPIER> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> CHK-TYPE> "19", and execute "HD-CLEAR". Then, turn OFF and then ON the main power to delete the data in the corresponding partition. 5. If the above-mentioned service mode cannot be executed due to an error, etc., enter safe mode using (2+8) startup. Then format the HDD using SST or a USB flash drive. 6. Check/replace the related parts. [Reference] When replacing the HDD, back up the setting values by referring to "Chapter 5. Adjustment> Actions when Replacing the Parts> HDD" in the Service Manual.



E602-2000-00



HDD error



Detection Description Remedy



I/O error was detected in the file system after startup. Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared. 1. Check that the HDD optional board is properly installed. 2. Turn ON the main power, and check whether the error is cleared. 3. Execute the key clear using SST (to make an unformatted disk). [CAUTION] E602-0001 will be indicated if activating the machine with the unformatted disk. Therefore, be sure to format the HDD. 4. Enter safe mode using (2+8) startup, and format the HDD using SST or a USB flash drive.



886



7. Error/Jam/Alarm E602-5001-00



Encryption Chip error



Detection Description Remedy E602-5002-00



Error of the encryption chip on the Main Controller [Related parts] Main Controller PCB [Remedy] Replace the Main Controller PCB HDD error



Detection Description Remedy



E602-FF01-00



A non-genuine HDD was detected. [Related parts] HDD [Remedy] 1. Replace the HDD with a genuine one. [Reference] When replacing the HDD, back up the setting values by referring to "Chapter 5. Adjustment> Actions when Replacing the Parts> HDD" in the Service Manual. 2. Format the HDD using SST or a USB flash drive. HDD error



Detection Description



Remedy



E602-FF11-00



An unidentified HDD error was detected at startup. When this error occurs, the system has not been started normally. Therefore, it may not be recorded in the error log. [Related parts] - Main Controller PCB (PWB01) (Unit of replacement: MAIN CONTROLLER PCB ASS'Y, 1) - HDD (Unit of replacement: HARD DISK DRIVE) [Reference] For backup and restoration, refer to "Appendix> Backup Data List" in the System Service Manual. [Remedy] Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared. 1. Check the related harness/cable and connector. 2. Format the HDD using SST or a USB flash drive. 3. Check/replace the related parts. [Reference] When replacing the HDD, back up the setting values by referring to "Chapter 5. Adjustment> Actions when Replacing the Parts> HDD" in the Service Manual. HDD error



Detection Description Remedy



E612-0007-00



An unidentified HDD error was detected after startup. [Related parts] - Main Controller PCB (PWB01) (Unit of replacement: MAIN CONTROLLER PCB ASS'Y, 1) - HDD (Unit of replacement: HARD DISK DRIVE) [Reference] For backup and restoration, refer to "Appendix> Backup Data List" in the System Service Manual. [Remedy] Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared. 1. Check the related harness/cable and connector. 2. Format the HDD using SST or a USB flash drive. 3. Check/replace the related parts. [Reference] When replacing the HDD, back up the setting values by referring to "Chapter 5. Adjustment> Actions when Replacing the Parts> HDD" in the Service Manual. System error



Detection Description



Initial license has not yet been registered.



Remedy



Register the initial license (speed license).



E614-0001-00



Flash PCB error



Detection Description Remedy



The Flash PCB could not be recognized, or the Flash PCB was not formatted. [Related parts] - Sata Flash PCB (PWB3) (Unit of replacement: SATA-FLASH PCB ASS'Y) - Main Controller PCB (PWB01) (Unit of replacement: MAIN CONTROLLER PCB ASS'Y, 1) [Remedy] Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared. - Reinstall the necessary application software once the error is cleared. 1. After turning OFF the main power, remove and then install the Flash PCB again to check that it is installed properly. 2. After replacing the Flash PCB, reinstall the system software using SST or a USB flash drive. 3. Replace the Main Controller PCB.



887



7. Error/Jam/Alarm E614-0002-00



Error in system on the Flash PCB



Detection Description



Remedy



E614-0006-00



The file system could not be initialized normally at startup. When this error occurs, the system has not been started normally. Therefore, it may not be recorded in the error log. [Related parts] - Sata Flash PCB (PWB3) (Unit of replacement: SATA-FLASH PCB ASS'Y) - Main Controller PCB (PWB01) (Unit of replacement: MAIN CONTROLLER PCB ASS'Y, 1) [Reference] For backup and restoration, refer to "Appendix> Backup Data List" in the System Service Manual. [Remedy] Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared. - Reinstall the necessary application software once the error is cleared. 1. After turning OFF the main power, remove and then install the Flash PCB to check that it is installed properly. 2. After replacing the Flash PCB, reinstall the system software using SST or a USB flash drive. 3. Replace the Main Controller PCB. Error in system on the Flash PCB



Detection Description Remedy



E614-0071-00



Bootable was not found on the Flash PCB. [Related parts] - Sata Flash PCB (PWB3) (Unit of replacement: SATA-FLASH PCB ASS'Y) - Main Controller PCB (PWB01) (Unit of replacement: MAIN CONTROLLER PCB ASS'Y, 1) [Remedy] Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared. - Reinstall the necessary application software once the error is cleared. 1. After turning OFF the main power, remove and then install the Flash PCB again to check that it is installed properly. 2. After replacing the Flash PCB, reinstall the system software using SST or a USB flash drive. 3. Replace the Main Controller PCB. System verification error



Detection Description



Remedy



E614-0072-00



At normal startup, an error may occur due to invalid data of the firmware for startup. When this error occurs, the system has not been started normally. Therefore, it is not recorded in the error log. [Related parts] - Flash PCB [Remedy] Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared. 1. Start the machine in safe mode, and reinstall the system using SST or a USB flash drive. * [2]: Select Update (Overwrite all) to update the system. 2. Replace the FLASH PCB, and reinstall the system software using SST or a USB flash drive. System verification error



Detection Description



Remedy



E614-0073-00



At normal startup, an error may occur due to invalid data of the firmware for safe mode startup. When this error occurs, the system has not been started normally. Therefore, it is not recorded in the error log. [Related parts] - Flash PCB [Remedy] 1. Replace the Flash PCB and reinstall the system using SST or a USB flash drive. System verification error



Detection Description



Remedy



At startup in safe mode, an error may occur due to invalid data of the startup firmware. When this error occurs, the system has not been started normally. Therefore, it is not recorded in the error log. [Related parts] - Flash PCB [Remedy] 1. Replace the Flash PCB and reinstall the system using SST or a USB flash drive.



888



7. Error/Jam/Alarm E614-0074-00



Start system verification function error



Detection Description



Remedy



E614-0101-00



At startup in safe mode, an error may occur due to invalid data of the firmware for safe mode startup. When this error occurs, the system has not been started normally. Therefore, it is not recorded in the error log. [Related parts] - Flash PCB [Remedy] 1. Replace the Flash PCB and reinstall the system using SST or a USB flash drive. Error in system on the Flash PCB



Detection Description



Remedy



E614-0111-00



An error was detected in the system area. (Initialization failed at startup or I/O error at startup) When this error occurs, the system has not been started normally. Therefore, it may not be recorded in the error log. [Related parts] - Sata Flash PCB (PWB3) (Unit of replacement: SATA-FLASH PCB ASS'Y) - Main Controller PCB (PWB01) (Unit of replacement: MAIN CONTROLLER PCB ASS'Y, 1) [Remedy] Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared. Although the error is cleared by "HD-CHECK", it may occur again. Thus, perform Remedies 1 to 4. 1. Check the related harness/cable and connector. 2. Select COPIER> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> CHK-TYPE> "0", and execute "HD-CHECK". Then, turn OFF and then ON the main power. 3. Obtain the necessary backup data by referring to "Appendix> Backup Data List" in the System Service Manual. 4. After replacing the Flash PCB, reinstall the system software using SST or a USB flash drive. 5. Replace the Main Controller PCB. Error in system on the Flash PCB



Detection Description



An error was detected in the system area. (File could not be written in the Flash PCB after startup or I/O error after startup)



Remedy



[Related parts] - Sata Flash PCB (PWB3) (Unit of replacement: SATA-FLASH PCB ASS'Y) - Main Controller PCB (PWB01) (Unit of replacement: MAIN CONTROLLER PCB ASS'Y, 1) [Remedy] Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared. Although the error is cleared by "HD-CHECK", it may occur again. Thus, perform Remedies 1 to 4. 1. Check the related harness/cable and connector. 2. Select COPIER> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> CHK-TYPE> "0", and execute "HD-CHECK". Then, turn OFF and then ON the main power. 3. Obtain the necessary backup data by referring to "Appendix> Backup Data List" in the System Service Manual. 4. After replacing the Flash PCB, reinstall the system software using SST or a USB flash drive. 5. Replace the Main Controller PCB.



E614-0201-00



Error in system on the Flash PCB



Detection Description



Remedy



An error was detected in the system area. (Initialization failed at startup or I/O error at startup) When this error occurs, the system has not been started normally. Therefore, it may not be recorded in the error log. [Related parts] - Sata Flash PCB (PWB3) (Unit of replacement: SATA-FLASH PCB ASS'Y) - Main Controller PCB (PWB01) (Unit of replacement: MAIN CONTROLLER PCB ASS'Y, 1) [Remedy] Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared. Although the error is cleared by "HD-CHECK", it may occur again. Thus, perform Remedies 1 to 4. 1. Check the related harness/cable and connector. 2. Select COPIER> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> CHK-TYPE> "0", and execute "HD-CHECK". Then, turn OFF and then ON the main power. 3. Obtain the necessary backup data by referring to "Appendix> Backup Data List" in the System Service Manual. 4. After replacing the Flash PCB, reinstall the system software using SST or a USB flash drive. 5. Replace the Main Controller PCB.



889



7. Error/Jam/Alarm E614-0211-00



Error in system on the Flash PCB



Detection Description



An error was detected in the system area. (File could not be written in the Flash PCB after startup or I/O error after startup)



Remedy



[Related parts] - Sata Flash PCB (PWB3) (Unit of replacement: SATA-FLASH PCB ASS'Y) - Main Controller PCB (PWB01) (Unit of replacement: MAIN CONTROLLER PCB ASS'Y, 1) [Remedy] Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared. Although the error is cleared by "HD-CHECK", it may occur again. Thus, perform Remedies 1 to 4. 1. Check the related harness/cable and connector. 2. Select COPIER> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> CHK-TYPE> "0", and execute "HD-CHECK". Then, turn OFF and then ON the main power. 3. Obtain the necessary backup data by referring to "Appendix> Backup Data List" in the System Service Manual. 4. After replacing the Flash PCB, reinstall the system software using SST or a USB flash drive. 5. Replace the Main Controller PCB.



E614-0301-00



Error in system on the Flash PCB



Detection Description



Remedy



E614-0311-00



An error was detected in the system area. (Initialization failed at startup or I/O error at startup) When this error occurs, the system has not been started normally. Therefore, it may not be recorded in the error log. [Related parts] - Sata Flash PCB (PWB3) (Unit of replacement: SATA-FLASH PCB ASS'Y) - Main Controller PCB (PWB01) (Unit of replacement: MAIN CONTROLLER PCB ASS'Y, 1) [Remedy] Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared. Although the error is cleared by "HD-CHECK", it may occur again. Thus, perform Remedies 1 to 4. 1. Check the related harness/cable and connector. 2. Select COPIER> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> CHK-TYPE> "0", and execute "HD-CHECK". Then, turn OFF and then ON the main power. 3. Obtain the necessary backup data by referring to "Appendix> Backup Data List" in the System Service Manual. 4. After replacing the Flash PCB, reinstall the system software using SST or a USB flash drive. 5. Replace the Main Controller PCB. Error in system on the Flash PCB



Detection Description



An error was detected in the system area. (File could not be written in the Flash PCB after startup or I/O error after startup)



Remedy



[Related parts] - Sata Flash PCB (PWB3) (Unit of replacement: SATA-FLASH PCB ASS'Y) - Main Controller PCB (PWB01) (Unit of replacement: MAIN CONTROLLER PCB ASS'Y, 1) [Remedy] Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared. Although the error is cleared by "HD-CHECK", it may occur again. Thus, perform Remedies 1 to 4. 1. Check the related harness/cable and connector. 2. Select COPIER> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> CHK-TYPE> "0", and execute "HD-CHECK". Then, turn OFF and then ON the main power. 3. Obtain the necessary backup data by referring to "Appendix> Backup Data List" in the System Service Manual. 4. After replacing the Flash PCB, reinstall the system software using SST or a USB flash drive. 5. Replace the Main Controller PCB.



E614-0401-00



Error in system on the Flash PCB



Detection Description



Remedy



Logical partition error was detected. (Initialization failed at startup or I/O error at startup) When this error occurs, the system has not been started normally. Therefore, it may not be recorded in the error log. [Related parts] - Sata Flash PCB (PWB3) (Unit of replacement: SATA-FLASH PCB ASS'Y) - Main Controller PCB (PWB01) (Unit of replacement: MAIN CONTROLLER PCB ASS'Y, 1) [Remedy] Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared. 1. Obtain the necessary backup data by referring to "Appendix> Backup Data List" in the System Service Manual. 2. After replacing the Flash PCB, reinstall the system software using SST or a USB flash drive. 3. Replace the Main Controller PCB.



890



7. Error/Jam/Alarm E614-0411-00



Error in system on the Flash PCB



Detection Description Remedy



E614-0501-00



Logical partition error was detected. (File could not be written in the Flash PCB after startup or I/O error after startup) [Related parts] - Sata Flash PCB (PWB3) (Unit of replacement: SATA-FLASH PCB ASS'Y) - Main Controller PCB (PWB01) (Unit of replacement: MAIN CONTROLLER PCB ASS'Y, 1) [Remedy] Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared. 1. Obtain the necessary backup data by referring to "Appendix> Backup Data List" in the System Service Manual. 2. After replacing the Flash PCB, reinstall the system software using SST or a USB flash drive. 3. Replace the Main Controller PCB. Error in file system on the Flash PCB



Detection Description



An error was detected in the general application-related area. (Initialization failed at startup or I/O error at startup) When this error occurs, the system has not been started normally. Therefore, it may not be recorded in the error log.



Remedy



[Related parts] - Sata Flash PCB (PWB3) (Unit of replacement: SATA-FLASH PCB ASS'Y) - Main Controller PCB (PWB01) (Unit of replacement: MAIN CONTROLLER PCB ASS'Y, 1) [Remedy] Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared. When prioritizing clearing of the error, skip Remedies 2 and 3. Although the error is cleared by "HD-CHECK", it may occur again. Thus, perform Remedies 1 to 4. 1. Check the related harness/cable and connector. 2. Select COPIER> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> CHK-TYPE> "8", and execute "HD-CHECK". Then, turn OFF and then ON the main power. 3. Obtain the necessary backup data by referring to "Appendix> Backup Data List" in the System Service Manual. 4. Select COPIER> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> CHK-TYPE> "8", and execute "HD-CLEAR". Then, turn OFF and then ON the main power to delete the data in the corresponding partition. 5. Enter safe mode using (2+8) startup, and reinstall the system software using SST or a USB flash drive. 6. Check/replace the related parts.



E614-0511-00



Error in file system on the Flash PCB



Detection Description



An error was detected in the general application-related area. (File could not be written in the Flash PCB after startup or I/O error after startup)



Remedy



[Related parts] - Sata Flash PCB (PWB3) (Unit of replacement: SATA-FLASH PCB ASS'Y) - Main Controller PCB (PWB01) (Unit of replacement: MAIN CONTROLLER PCB ASS'Y, 1) [Remedy] Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared. When prioritizing clearing of the error, skip Remedies 2 and 3. Although the error is cleared by "HD-CHECK", it may occur again. Thus, perform Remedies 1 to 4. 1. Check the related harness/cable and connector. 2. Select COPIER> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> CHK-TYPE> "8", and execute "HD-CHECK". Then, turn OFF and then ON the main power. 3. Obtain the necessary backup data by referring to "Appendix> Backup Data List" in the System Service Manual. 4. Select COPIER> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> CHK-TYPE> "8", and execute "HD-CLEAR". Then, turn OFF and then ON the main power to delete the data in the corresponding partition. 5. Enter safe mode using (2+8) startup, and reinstall the system software using SST or a USB flash drive. 6. Check/replace the related parts.



891



7. Error/Jam/Alarm E614-0601-00



Error in system on the Flash PCB



Detection Description



Remedy



E614-0611-00



An error was detected in the license-related area. (Initialization failed at startup or I/O error at startup) When this error occurs, the system has not been started normally. Therefore, it may not be recorded in the error log. [Related parts] - Sata Flash PCB (PWB3) (Unit of replacement: SATA-FLASH PCB ASS'Y) - Main Controller PCB (PWB01) (Unit of replacement: MAIN CONTROLLER PCB ASS'Y, 1) [Remedy] Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared. 1. Obtain the necessary backup data by referring to "Appendix> Backup Data List" in the System Service Manual. 2. After replacing the Flash PCB, reinstall the system software using SST or a USB flash drive. 3. Replace the Main Controller PCB. Error in system on the Flash PCB



Detection Description



An error was detected in the license-related area. (File could not be written in the Flash PCB after startup or I/O error after startup)



Remedy



[Related parts] - Sata Flash PCB (PWB3) (Unit of replacement: SATA-FLASH PCB ASS'Y) - Main Controller PCB (PWB01) (Unit of replacement: MAIN CONTROLLER PCB ASS'Y, 1) [Remedy] Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared. 1. Obtain the necessary backup data by referring to "Appendix> Backup Data List" in the System Service Manual. 2. After replacing the Flash PCB, reinstall the system software using SST or a USB flash drive. 3. Replace the Main Controller PCB.



E614-0701-00



Error in file system on the Flash PCB



Detection Description



An error was detected in system setting value (service mode, etc.) storage area. (Initialization failed at startup or I/O error at startup) When this error occurs, the system has not been started normally. Therefore, it may not be recorded in the error log.



Remedy



[Related parts] - Sata Flash PCB (PWB3) (Unit of replacement: SATA-FLASH PCB ASS'Y) - Main Controller PCB (PWB01) (Unit of replacement: MAIN CONTROLLER PCB ASS'Y, 1) [Remedy] Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared. When prioritizing clearing of the error, skip Remedies 2 and 3. Although the error is cleared by "HD-CHECK", it may occur again. Thus, perform Remedies 1 to 4. 1. Check the related harness/cable and connector. 2. Select COPIER> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> CHK-TYPE> "8", and execute "HD-CHECK". Then, turn OFF and then ON the main power. 3. Obtain the necessary backup data by referring to "Appendix> Backup Data List" in the System Service Manual. 4. Select COPIER> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> CHK-TYPE> "8", and execute "HD-CLEAR". Then, turn OFF and then ON the main power to delete the data in the corresponding partition. 5. Check/replace the related parts.



892



7. Error/Jam/Alarm E614-0711-00



Error in file system on the Flash PCB



Detection Description Remedy



E614-4000-00



An error was detected in system setting value (service mode, etc.) storage area. (File could not be written in the Flash PCB after startup or I/O error after startup) [Related parts] - Sata Flash PCB (PWB3) (Unit of replacement: SATA-FLASH PCB ASS'Y) - Main Controller PCB (PWB01) (Unit of replacement: MAIN CONTROLLER PCB ASS'Y, 1) [Remedy] Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared. When prioritizing clearing of the error, skip Remedies 2 and 3. Although the error is cleared by "HD-CHECK", it may occur again. Thus, perform Remedies 1 to 4. 1. Check the related harness/cable and connector. 2. Select COPIER> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> CHK-TYPE> "8", and execute "HD-CHECK". Then, turn OFF and then ON the main power. 3. Obtain the necessary backup data by referring to "Appendix> Backup Data List" in the System Service Manual. 4. Select COPIER> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> CHK-TYPE> "8", and execute "HD-CLEAR". Then, turn OFF and then ON the main power to delete the data in the corresponding partition. 5. Check/replace the related parts. Error in system on the Flash PCB



Detection Description



Remedy



E614-4001-00



The OS could not be recognized. When this error occurs, the system has not been started normally. Therefore, it may not be recorded in the error log. [Related parts] - Sata Flash PCB (PWB3) (Unit of replacement: SATA-FLASH PCB ASS'Y) - Main Controller PCB (PWB01) (Unit of replacement: MAIN CONTROLLER PCB ASS'Y, 1) [Remedy] Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared. 1. After turning OFF the main power, remove and then install the Flash PCB again to check that it is installed properly. 2. After replacing the Flash PCB, reinstall the system software using SST or a USB flash drive. 3. Check that the HDD and the cables are properly installed. 4. Enter safe mode using (2+8) startup, and format the HDD using SST or a USB flash drive. 5. If another error occurs, clear the error by performing the remedy for it. 6. Replace the Main Controller PCB. Error in system on the Flash PCB



Detection Description



Remedy



The OS boot file was not found. When this error occurs, the system has not been started normally. Therefore, it may not be recorded in the error log. [Related parts] - Sata Flash PCB (PWB3) (Unit of replacement: SATA-FLASH PCB ASS'Y) - Main Controller PCB (PWB01) (Unit of replacement: MAIN CONTROLLER PCB ASS'Y, 1) [Remedy] Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared. 1. After turning OFF the main power, remove and then install the Flash PCB again to check that it is installed properly. 2. After replacing the Flash PCB, reinstall the system software using SST or a USB flash drive. 3. Check that the HDD and the cables are properly installed. 4. Enter safe mode using (2+8) startup, and format the HDD using SST or a USB flash drive. 5. If another error occurs, clear the error by performing the remedy for it. 6. Replace the Main Controller PCB.



893



7. Error/Jam/Alarm E614-4002-00



Error in system on the Flash PCB



Detection Description



Remedy



E614-4003-00



The OS kernel was not found. When this error occurs, the system has not been started normally. Therefore, it may not be recorded in the error log. [Related parts] - Sata Flash PCB (PWB3) (Unit of replacement: SATA-FLASH PCB ASS'Y) - Main Controller PCB (PWB01) (Unit of replacement: MAIN CONTROLLER PCB ASS'Y, 1) [Remedy] Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared. 1. After turning OFF the main power, remove and then install the Flash PCB again to check that it is installed properly. 2. After replacing the Flash PCB, reinstall the system software using SST or a USB flash drive. 3. Check that the HDD and the cables are properly installed. 4. Enter safe mode using (2+8) startup, and format the HDD using SST or a USB flash drive. 5. If another error occurs, clear the error by performing the remedy for it. 6. Replace the Main Controller PCB. Error in system on the Flash PCB



Detection Description



Remedy



E614-4010-00



The OS boot loader was not found. When this error occurs, the system has not been started normally. Therefore, it may not be recorded in the error log. [Related parts] - Sata Flash PCB (PWB3) (Unit of replacement: SATA-FLASH PCB ASS'Y) - Main Controller PCB (PWB01) (Unit of replacement: MAIN CONTROLLER PCB ASS'Y, 1) [Remedy] Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared. 1. After turning OFF the main power, remove and then install the Flash PCB again to check that it is installed properly. 2. After replacing the Flash PCB, reinstall the system software using SST or a USB flash drive. 3. Check that the HDD and the cables are properly installed. 4. Enter safe mode using (2+8) startup, and format the HDD using SST or a USB flash drive. 5. If another error occurs, clear the error by performing the remedy for it. 6. Replace the Main Controller PCB. Error in system on the Flash PCB



Detection Description



Remedy



E614-4011-00



The OS in safe mode could not be recognized. When this error occurs, the system has not been started normally. Therefore, it may not be recorded in the error log. [Related parts] - Sata Flash PCB (PWB3) (Unit of replacement: SATA-FLASH PCB ASS'Y) [Remedy]Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared. 1. After turning OFF the main power, remove and then install the Flash PCB again to check that it is installed properly. 2. After replacing the Flash PCB, reinstall the system software using SST or a USB flash drive. Error in system on the Flash PCB



Detection Description



Remedy



The file for booting the OS in safe mode was not found. When this error occurs, the system has not been started normally. Therefore, it may not be recorded in the error log. [Related parts] - Sata Flash PCB (PWB3) (Unit of replacement: SATA-FLASH PCB ASS'Y) [Remedy]Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared. 1. After turning OFF the main power, remove and then install the Flash PCB again to check that it is installed properly. 2. After replacing the Flash PCB, reinstall the system software using SST or a USB flash drive.



894



7. Error/Jam/Alarm E614-4012-00



Error in system on the Flash PCB



Detection Description



Remedy



E614-9000-00



The kernel in safe mode was not found. When this error occurs, the system has not been started normally. Therefore, it may not be recorded in the error log. [Related parts] - Sata Flash PCB (PWB3) (Unit of replacement: SATA-FLASH PCB ASS'Y) [Remedy]Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared. 1. After turning OFF the main power, remove and then install the Flash PCB again to check that it is installed properly. 2. After replacing the Flash PCB, reinstall the system software using SST or a USB flash drive. Error in system on the Flash PCB



Detection Description



Remedy



E614-9001-00



SRAM device access-related error (at startup) When this error occurs, the system has not been started normally. Therefore, it may not be recorded in the error log. [Related parts] - Sata Flash PCB (PWB3) (Unit of replacement: SATA-FLASH PCB ASS'Y) [Remedy]Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared. 1. After turning OFF the main power, remove and then install the Flash PCB again to check that it is installed properly. 2. After replacing the Flash PCB, reinstall the system software using SST or a USB flash drive. Error in system on the Flash PCB



Detection Description



Remedy



E614-9002-00



Error in memory allocation/invalid memory (at startup) When this error occurs, the system has not been started normally. Therefore, it may not be recorded in the error log. [Related parts] - Sata Flash PCB (PWB3) (Unit of replacement: SATA-FLASH PCB ASS'Y) [Remedy]Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared. 1. After turning OFF the main power, remove and then install the Flash PCB again to check that it is installed properly. 2. After replacing the Flash PCB, reinstall the system software using SST or a USB flash drive. Error in system on the Flash PCB



Detection Description



Remedy



E614-9003-00



Setting file error was detected at startup. When this error occurs, the system has not been started normally. Therefore, it may not be recorded in the error log. [Related parts] - Sata Flash PCB (PWB3) (Unit of replacement: SATA-FLASH PCB ASS'Y) [Remedy]Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared. 1. After turning OFF the main power, remove and then install the Flash PCB again to check that it is installed properly. 2. After replacing the Flash PCB, reinstall the system software using SST or a USB flash drive. Error in system on the Flash PCB



Detection Description



Remedy



Parameter error was detected at startup. When this error occurs, the system has not been started normally. Therefore, it may not be recorded in the error log. [Related parts] - Sata Flash PCB (PWB3) (Unit of replacement: SATA-FLASH PCB ASS'Y) [Remedy]Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared. 1. After turning OFF the main power, remove and then install the Flash PCB again to check that it is installed properly. 2. After replacing the Flash PCB, reinstall the system software using SST or a USB flash drive.



895



7. Error/Jam/Alarm E614-9004-00



Error in system on the Flash PCB



Detection Description



Remedy



E614-FF01-00



Startup error was detected. When this error occurs, the system has not been started normally. Therefore, it may not be recorded in the error log. [Related parts] - Sata Flash PCB (PWB3) (Unit of replacement: SATA-FLASH PCB ASS'Y) [Remedy]Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared. 1. After turning OFF the main power, remove and then install the Flash PCB again to check that it is installed properly. 2. After replacing the Flash PCB, reinstall the system software using SST or a USB flash drive. Error in system on the Flash PCB



Detection Description



Remedy



E614-FF11-00



An unidentified Flash error was detected at startup. (Initialization failed at startup or I/O error at startup) When this error occurs, the system has not been started normally. Therefore, it may not be recorded in the error log. [Related parts] - Sata Flash PCB (PWB3) (Unit of replacement: SATA-FLASH PCB ASS'Y) - Main Controller PCB (PWB01) (Unit of replacement: MAIN CONTROLLER PCB ASS'Y, 1) [Remedy] Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared. Although the error is cleared by "HD-CHECK", it may occur again. Thus, perform Remedies 1 to 5. 1. Check the related harness/cable and connector. 2. Select COPIER> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> CHK-TYPE> "0", and execute "HD-CHECK". Then, turn OFF and then ON the main power. 3. Obtain the necessary backup data by referring to "Appendix> Backup Data List" in the System Service Manual. 4. After replacing the Flash PCB, reinstall the system software using SST or a USB flash drive. 5. Replace the Main Controller PCB. Error in system on the Flash PCB



Detection Description Remedy



E615-0001-00



An unidentified Flash error was detected at startup. (File could not be written in the Flash PCB after startup or I/O error after startup) [Related parts] - Sata Flash PCB (PWB3) (Unit of replacement: SATA-FLASH PCB ASS'Y) - Main Controller PCB (PWB01) (Unit of replacement: MAIN CONTROLLER PCB ASS'Y, 1) [Remedy] Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared. Although the error is cleared by "HD-CHECK", it may occur again. Thus, perform Remedies 1 to 5. 1. Check the related harness/cable and connector. 2. Select COPIER> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> CHK-TYPE> "0", and execute "HD-CHECK". Then, turn OFF and then ON the main power. 3. Obtain the necessary backup data by referring to "Appendix> Backup Data List" in the System Service Manual. 4. After replacing the Flash PCB, reinstall the system software using SST or a USB flash drive. 5. Replace the Main Controller PCB. Error in self-diagnosis of the encryption module



Detection Description Remedy



An error was detected in self-diagnosis of the encryption library. Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared. - Reinstall the necessary application software and restore the backup data once the error is cleared. 1. After reinstalling the system software using SST or a USB memory, turn OFF and then ON the main power. 2. Obtain the necessary backup data by referring to the backup data list. 3. Enter safe mode using (2+8) startup, and execute [4] Clear/Format> [2] Flash Format (Flash format) using a USB memory. 4. After replacing the Flash PCB (UN61), reinstall the system software using SST or a USB memory. [Reference] For backup and restoration, refer to "Adjustment> Main Controller System" and "Appendix> Backup Data List" in the Service Manual.



896



7. Error/Jam/Alarm E674-0001-07



Fax Board communication error



Detection Description Remedy



E674-0002-07



An error was detected for the specified number of times in communication with the Fax Board. [Related parts] - Harness between the Fax Board and the Main Controller PCB 1 (PWB01/J4011) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, SIGNAL) - Fax Board - Main Controller PCB 1 (PWB01) (Unit of replacement: MAIN CONTROLLER PCB ASSEMBLY, 1) [Remedy] Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts. Fax Board communication error



Detection Description Remedy



E674-0004-07



An error was detected for the specified number of times in communication with the Fax Board. [Related parts] - Harness between the Fax Board and the Main Controller PCB 1 (PWB01/J4011) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, SIGNAL) - Fax Board - Main Controller PCB 1 (PWB01) (Unit of replacement: MAIN CONTROLLER PCB ASSEMBLY, 1) [Remedy] Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts. Fax Board communication error



Detection Description Remedy



E674-0008-07



A communication error occurred when accessing the modem IC used for fax. [Related parts] - Harness between the Fax Board and the Main Controller PCB 1 (PWB01/J4011) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, SIGNAL) - Fax Board - Main Controller PCB 1 (PWB01) (Unit of replacement: MAIN CONTROLLER PCB ASSEMBLY, 1) [Remedy] Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts. Fax Board communication error



Detection Description Remedy



E674-000C-07



A communication error occurred when accessing the port IC used for fax. [Related parts] - Harness between the Fax Board and the Main Controller PCB 1 (PWB01/J4011) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, SIGNAL) - Fax Board - Main Controller PCB 1 (PWB01) (Unit of replacement: MAIN CONTROLLER PCB ASSEMBLY, 1) [Remedy] Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts. Fax Board communication error



Detection Description Remedy



E674-0010-07



An error was detected when accessing the modem IC and the port IC used for fax. [Related parts] - Harness between the Fax Board and the Main Controller PCB 1 (PWB01/J4011) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, SIGNAL) - Fax Board - Main Controller PCB 1 (PWB01) (Unit of replacement: MAIN CONTROLLER PCB ASSEMBLY, 1) [Remedy] Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts. Fax Board communication error



Detection Description Remedy



A communication error occurred when opening the Timer Device used for fax. [Related parts] - Main Controller PCB 1 (PWB01) (Unit of replacement: MAIN CONTROLLER PCB ASSEMBLY, 1) [Remedy] Replace the Main Controller PCB 1 (PWB01) (Unit of replacement: MAIN CONTROLLER PCB ASSEMBLY, 1)



897



7. Error/Jam/Alarm E674-0011-07



Fax Board communication error



Detection Description Remedy



E674-0020-07



A communication error occurred when starting the Timer Device used for fax. [Related parts] - Main Controller PCB 1 (PWB01) (Unit of replacement: MAIN CONTROLLER PCB ASSEMBLY, 1) [Remedy] Replace the Main Controller PCB 1 (PWB01) (Unit of replacement: MAIN CONTROLLER PCB ASSEMBLY, 1) Fax Board communication error



Detection Description Remedy



E674-0021-07



An error occurred in the modem IC used for fax. [Related parts] - Harness between the Fax Board and the Main Controller PCB 1 (PWB01/J4011) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, SIGNAL) - Fax Board - Main Controller PCB 1 (PWB01) (Unit of replacement: MAIN CONTROLLER PCB ASSEMBLY, 1) [Remedy] Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts. Fax Board communication error



Detection Description Remedy E674-0030-07



A Fax Board for non-supported modem has been connected. Replace it with a genuine Fax Board (for 1-line, 2-line, or 3/4-line). Fax Board communication error



Detection Description Remedy E674-0100-07



Check sum error System software download for 2 line FAX Fax Board communication error



Detection Description



After completion of fax communication, writing of the communication information (log) failed, and the log could not be read.



Remedy



Turn OFF and then ON the main power. If it occurs when the power is turned OFF and then ON after executing FAX > Clear > ALL, execute FAX > Clear > ALL and turn OFF and then ON the power again. [CAUTION] The previous communication information (log) will be cleared by turning OFF and then ON the main power.



E674-0200-07



HDD access error



Detection Description Remedy



E674-0300-07



An error occurred when accessing the HDD. [Related parts] - HDD (Unit of replacement: HARD DISK DRIVE) - Main Controller PCB 1 (PWB01) (Unit of replacement: MAIN CONTROLLER PCB ASSEMBLY, 1) [Remedy] Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared. 1. After deleting the system software using a USB memory, reinstall it using SST or a USB memory. 2. After replacing the HDD, execute [4] Clear/Format> [1] Disk Format (HDD format) using SST or a USB memory. 3. Replace the Main Controller PCB 1. Fax configuration error



Detection Description Remedy E674-0301-07



It was detected that there was a Fax Board for multiple lines installed while the IP Fax license was enabled. - Remove the Fax Board for multiple lines to use the machine as an IP Fax model. - Uninstall the IP Fax license to use the machine as a G3 Fax model. Fax configuration error



Detection Description



It was detected that there was no 1-line Fax Board installed while the IP Fax license was enabled.



Remedy



- Install the Fax Board (1-line) to use the machine as an IP Fax model. - Uninstall the IP Fax license and install the G3 Fax Board to use the machine as a G3 Fax model.



898



7. Error/Jam/Alarm E677-0001-00



Print server error



Detection Description Remedy



E677-0003-00



Exhaust Fan operation error on the print server is detected. Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared. 1. Check power supply to the Exhaust Fan. 2. Replace the Exhaust Fan. Print server error



Detection Description Remedy



E677-0004-00



Error was detected at the configuration check performed at startup. Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared. 1. Check the connection cable between the host machine and the print server. 2. Reinstall the system of the print server. Print server error



Detection Description Remedy



E677-0010-00



CPU Fan operation error on the print server is detected. Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared. 1. Check power supply to the CPU Fan. 2. Replace the CPU Fan. Print server error



Detection Description Remedy



E677-0080-00



Not proper print server is connected. Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared. 1. Replace the print server with the proper one. 2. Reinstall the system of the print server. Print server error



Detection Description Remedy



E710-0001-00



A communication error between the print server and the host machine was detected. Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared. 1. Check the connection cable between the host machine and the print server. 2. Reinstall the system of the print server. IPC initialization error



Detection Description Remedy E711-0001-05



The machine did not become ready status within 3 sec after startup of the IPC Chip. Check the connection cable between the host machine and the Finisher. IPC communication error (time out error)



Detection Description Remedy



Timeout was detected in communication between the host machine and the finisher. [Related parts] - Harnesses from the DC Controller PCB/Relay PCB to the Finisher Lattice Connector 1. DC Controller PCB (UN01/J462) to Relay Connector (9P) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, SIGNAL) 2. Relay PCB (UN86/J505) to Relay Connector (4P) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, SIGNAL) 3. Relay Connector (9P and 4P) to Finisher Lattice Connector (J9043) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, FINISHER CONNECTOR) - Finisher Controller PCB - Relay PCB (UN86) (Unit of replacement: RELAY PCB ASSEMBLY) - DC Controller PCB (UN01) (Unit of replacement: DC CONTROLLER PCB ASS'Y) [Remedy] Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts. [Reference] - Before replacing the DC Controller PCB, back up the service mode data (approx. 2 min) and restore the backup data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected. Backup: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMBUP Restoration: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMRES - After replacement of the Finisher Controller PCB, refer to "Adjustments> Adjustment when Replacing the Parts" in the Service Manual for the Finisher.



899



7. Error/Jam/Alarm E711-0008-05



IPC communication error (initialization error)



Detection Description Remedy



E711-0020-05



An initialization error was detected in communication between the host machine and the finisher. [Related parts] - Harnesses from the DC Controller PCB/Relay PCB to the Finisher Lattice Connector 1. DC Controller PCB (UN01/J462) to Relay Connector (9P) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, SIGNAL) 2. Relay PCB (UN86/J505) to Relay Connector (4P) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, SIGNAL) 3. Relay Connector (9P and 4P) to Finisher Lattice Connector (J9043) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, FINISHER CONNECTOR) - Finisher Controller PCB - Relay PCB (UN86) (Unit of replacement: RELAY PCB ASSEMBLY) - DC Controller PCB (UN01) (Unit of replacement: DC CONTROLLER PCB ASS'Y) [Remedy] Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts. [Reference] - Before replacing the DC Controller PCB, back up the service mode data (approx. 2 min) and restore the backup data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected. Backup: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMBUP Restoration: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMRES - After replacement of the Finisher Controller PCB, refer to "Adjustments> Adjustment when Replacing the Parts" in the Service Manual for the Finisher. IPC communication error (recovery error)



Detection Description Remedy



A recovery error was detected in communication between the host machine and the finisher. [Related parts] - Harnesses from the DC Controller PCB/Relay PCB to the Finisher Lattice Connector 1. DC Controller PCB (UN01/J462) to Relay Connector (9P) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, SIGNAL) 2. Relay PCB (UN86/J505) to Relay Connector (4P) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, SIGNAL) 3. Relay Connector (9P and 4P) to Finisher Lattice Connector (J9043) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, FINISHER CONNECTOR) - Finisher Controller PCB - Relay PCB (UN86) (Unit of replacement: RELAY PCB ASSEMBLY) - DC Controller PCB (UN01) (Unit of replacement: DC CONTROLLER PCB ASS'Y) [Remedy] Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts. [Reference] - Before replacing the DC Controller PCB, back up the service mode data (approx. 2 min) and restore the backup data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected. Backup: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMBUP Restoration: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMRES - After replacement of the Finisher Controller PCB, refer to "Adjustments> Adjustment when Replacing the Parts" in the Service Manual for the Finisher.



900



7. Error/Jam/Alarm E713-0001-05



Finisher communication error (retransmission request reception error)



Detection Description Remedy



E713-0002-05



A retransmission request reception error was detected consecutively in communication between the host machine and the finisher. [Related parts] - Harnesses from the DC Controller PCB/Relay PCB to the Finisher Lattice Connector 1. DC Controller PCB (UN01/J462) to Relay Connector (9P) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, SIGNAL) 2. Relay PCB (UN86/J505) to Relay Connector (4P) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, SIGNAL) 3. Relay Connector (9P and 4P) to Finisher Lattice Connector (J9043) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, FINISHER CONNECTOR) - Finisher Controller PCB - Relay PCB (UN86) (Unit of replacement: RELAY PCB ASSEMBLY) - DC Controller PCB (UN01) (Unit of replacement: DC CONTROLLER PCB ASS'Y) [Remedy] Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts. [Reference] - Before replacing the DC Controller PCB, back up the service mode data (approx. 2 min) and restore the backup data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected. Backup: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMBUP Restoration: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMRES - After replacement of the Finisher Controller PCB, refer to "Adjustments> Adjustment when Replacing the Parts" in the Service Manual for the Finisher. Finisher communication error (transmission error of retransmission request)



Detection Description Remedy



A transmission error of retransmission request was detected consecutively in communication between the host machine and the finisher. [Related parts] - Harnesses from the DC Controller PCB/Relay PCB to the Finisher Lattice Connector 1. DC Controller PCB (UN01/J462) to Relay Connector (9P) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, SIGNAL) 2. Relay PCB (UN86/J505) to Relay Connector (4P) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, SIGNAL) 3. Relay Connector (9P and 4P) to Finisher Lattice Connector (J9043) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, FINISHER CONNECTOR) - Finisher Controller PCB - Relay PCB (UN86) (Unit of replacement: RELAY PCB ASSEMBLY) - DC Controller PCB (UN01) (Unit of replacement: DC CONTROLLER PCB ASS'Y) [Remedy] Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts. [Reference] - Before replacing the DC Controller PCB, back up the service mode data (approx. 2 min) and restore the backup data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected. Backup: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMBUP Restoration: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMRES - After replacement of the Finisher Controller PCB, refer to "Adjustments> Adjustment when Replacing the Parts" in the Service Manual for the Finisher.



901



7. Error/Jam/Alarm E713-0004-05



Finisher communication error (reception timeout error)



Detection Description Remedy



E713-0008-05



Reception incomplete was detected for more than the specified period of time in communication between the host machine and the finisher. [Related parts] - Harnesses from the DC Controller PCB/Relay PCB to the Finisher Lattice Connector 1. DC Controller PCB (UN01/J462) to Relay Connector (9P) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, SIGNAL) 2. Relay PCB (UN86/J505) to Relay Connector (4P) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, SIGNAL) 3. Relay Connector (9P and 4P) to Finisher Lattice Connector (J9043) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, FINISHER CONNECTOR) - Finisher Controller PCB - Relay PCB (UN86) (Unit of replacement: RELAY PCB ASSEMBLY) - DC Controller PCB (UN01) (Unit of replacement: DC CONTROLLER PCB ASS'Y) [Remedy] Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts. [Reference] - Before replacing the DC Controller PCB, back up the service mode data (approx. 2 min) and restore the backup data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected. Backup: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMBUP Restoration: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMRES - After replacement of the Finisher Controller PCB, refer to "Adjustments> Adjustment when Replacing the Parts" in the Service Manual for the Finisher. Finisher communication error (checksum error)



Detection Description



A checksum error was detected in communication between the host machine and the finisher.



Remedy



[Related parts] - Harnesses from the DC Controller PCB/Relay PCB to the Finisher Lattice Connector 1. DC Controller PCB (UN01/J462) to Relay Connector (9P) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, SIGNAL) 2. Relay PCB (UN86/J505) to Relay Connector (4P) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, SIGNAL) 3. Relay Connector (9P and 4P) to Finisher Lattice Connector (J9043) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, FINISHER CONNECTOR) - Finisher Controller PCB - Relay PCB (UN86) (Unit of replacement: RELAY PCB ASSEMBLY) - DC Controller PCB (UN01) (Unit of replacement: DC CONTROLLER PCB ASS'Y) [Remedy] Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts. [Reference] - Before replacing the DC Controller PCB, back up the service mode data (approx. 2 min) and restore the backup data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected. Backup: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMBUP Restoration: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMRES - After replacement of the Finisher Controller PCB, refer to "Adjustments> Adjustment when Replacing the Parts" in the Service Manual for the Finisher.



902



7. Error/Jam/Alarm E713-0010-05



Finisher communication error (time out error)



Detection Description Remedy



E713-0011-05



Timeout was detected in communication between the host machine and the finisher. [Related parts] - Harnesses from the DC Controller PCB/Relay PCB to the Finisher Lattice Connector 1. DC Controller PCB (UN01/J462) to Relay Connector (9P) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, SIGNAL) 2. Relay PCB (UN86/J505) to Relay Connector (4P) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, SIGNAL) 3. Relay Connector (9P and 4P) to Finisher Lattice Connector (J9043) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, FINISHER CONNECTOR) - Finisher Controller PCB - Relay PCB (UN86) (Unit of replacement: RELAY PCB ASSEMBLY) - DC Controller PCB (UN01) (Unit of replacement: DC CONTROLLER PCB ASS'Y) [Remedy] Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts. [Reference] - Before replacing the DC Controller PCB, back up the service mode data (approx. 2 min) and restore the backup data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected. Backup: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMBUP Restoration: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMRES - After replacement of the Finisher Controller PCB, refer to "Adjustments> Adjustment when Replacing the Parts" in the Service Manual for the Finisher. Finisher communication error (NACK reception error)



Detection Description Remedy



Retransmission of NACK was detected consecutively in communication between the host machine and the finisher. [Related parts] - Harnesses from the DC Controller PCB/Relay PCB to the Finisher Lattice Connector 1. DC Controller PCB (UN01/J462) to Relay Connector (9P) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, SIGNAL) 2. Relay PCB (UN86/J505) to Relay Connector (4P) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, SIGNAL) 3. Relay Connector (9P and 4P) to Finisher Lattice Connector (J9043) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, FINISHER CONNECTOR) - Finisher Controller PCB - Relay PCB (UN86) (Unit of replacement: RELAY PCB ASSEMBLY) - DC Controller PCB (UN01) (Unit of replacement: DC CONTROLLER PCB ASS'Y) [Remedy] Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts. [Reference] - Before replacing the DC Controller PCB, back up the service mode data (approx. 2 min) and restore the backup data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected. Backup: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMBUP Restoration: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMRES - After replacement of the Finisher Controller PCB, refer to "Adjustments> Adjustment when Replacing the Parts" in the Service Manual for the Finisher.



903



7. Error/Jam/Alarm E713-0020-05



Finisher communication error (invalid BCC in received data)



Detection Description Remedy



E713-0021-05



Invalid BCC in received data was detected in communication between the host machine and the finisher. [Related parts] - Harnesses from the DC Controller PCB/Relay PCB to the Finisher Lattice Connector 1. DC Controller PCB (UN01/J462) to Relay Connector (9P) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, SIGNAL) 2. Relay PCB (UN86/J505) to Relay Connector (4P) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, SIGNAL) 3. Relay Connector (9P and 4P) to Finisher Lattice Connector (J9043) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, FINISHER CONNECTOR) - Finisher Controller PCB - Relay PCB (UN86) (Unit of replacement: RELAY PCB ASSEMBLY) - DC Controller PCB (UN01) (Unit of replacement: DC CONTROLLER PCB ASS'Y) [Remedy] Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts. [Reference] - Before replacing the DC Controller PCB, back up the service mode data (approx. 2 min) and restore the backup data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected. Backup: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMBUP Restoration: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMRES - After replacement of the Finisher Controller PCB, refer to "Adjustments> Adjustment when Replacing the Parts" in the Service Manual for the Finisher. Finisher communication error (reception timeout error)



Detection Description Remedy



Reception incomplete was detected consecutively in communication between the host machine and the finisher. [Related parts] - Harnesses from the DC Controller PCB/Relay PCB to the Finisher Lattice Connector 1. DC Controller PCB (UN01/J462) to Relay Connector (9P) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, SIGNAL) 2. Relay PCB (UN86/J505) to Relay Connector (4P) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, SIGNAL) 3. Relay Connector (9P and 4P) to Finisher Lattice Connector (J9043) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, FINISHER CONNECTOR) - Finisher Controller PCB - Relay PCB (UN86) (Unit of replacement: RELAY PCB ASSEMBLY) - DC Controller PCB (UN01) (Unit of replacement: DC CONTROLLER PCB ASS'Y) [Remedy] Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts. [Reference] - Before replacing the DC Controller PCB, back up the service mode data (approx. 2 min) and restore the backup data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected. Backup: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMBUP Restoration: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMRES - After replacement of the Finisher Controller PCB, refer to "Adjustments> Adjustment when Replacing the Parts" in the Service Manual for the Finisher.



904



7. Error/Jam/Alarm E713-0022-05



Finisher communication error (undefined error)



Detection Description Remedy



E713-0030-05



An undefined error was detected consecutively in communication between the host machine and the finisher. [Related parts] - Harnesses from the DC Controller PCB/Relay PCB to the Finisher Lattice Connector 1. DC Controller PCB (UN01/J462) to Relay Connector (9P) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, SIGNAL) 2. Relay PCB (UN86/J505) to Relay Connector (4P) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, SIGNAL) 3. Relay Connector (9P and 4P) to Finisher Lattice Connector (J9043) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, FINISHER CONNECTOR) - Finisher Controller PCB - Relay PCB (UN86) (Unit of replacement: RELAY PCB ASSEMBLY) - DC Controller PCB (UN01) (Unit of replacement: DC CONTROLLER PCB ASS'Y) [Remedy] Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts. [Reference] - Before replacing the DC Controller PCB, back up the service mode data (approx. 2 min) and restore the backup data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected. Backup: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMBUP Restoration: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMRES - After replacement of the Finisher Controller PCB, refer to "Adjustments> Adjustment when Replacing the Parts" in the Service Manual for the Finisher. Finisher communication error (initialization error)



Detection Description Remedy



E717-0001-00



An initialization error was detected in communication between the host machine and the finisher. [Related parts] - Harnesses from the DC Controller PCB/Relay PCB to the Finisher Lattice Connector 1. DC Controller PCB (UN01/J462) to Relay Connector (9P) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, SIGNAL) 2. Relay PCB (UN86/J505) to Relay Connector (4P) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, SIGNAL) 3. Relay Connector (9P and 4P) to Finisher Lattice Connector (J9043) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, FINISHER CONNECTOR) - Finisher Controller PCB - Relay PCB (UN86) (Unit of replacement: RELAY PCB ASSEMBLY) - DC Controller PCB (UN01) (Unit of replacement: DC CONTROLLER PCB ASS'Y) [Remedy] Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts. [Reference] - Before replacing the DC Controller PCB, back up the service mode data (approx. 2 min) and restore the backup data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected. Backup: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMBUP Restoration: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMRES - After replacement of the Finisher Controller PCB, refer to "Adjustments> Adjustment when Replacing the Parts" in the Service Manual for the Finisher. Communication error with the NE Controller



Detection Description



Remedy E717-0002-00



Error when the NE Controller is started. The NE Controller which was connected before turning OFF the power is not connected at poweron. Check the cable, and then go through the following to clear the error: Service Mode> COPIER> FUNCTION> CLEAR> ERR. Communication error with the NE Controller



Detection Description Remedy



IPC error at NE Controller operation. Open circuit of IPC, unable to recover the IPC communication. Check the cable, and then go through the following to clear the error: Service Mode> COPIER> FUNCTION> CLEAR> ERR.



905



7. Error/Jam/Alarm E719-0001-00



Coin vendor error



Detection Description



The coin vendor which was connected before turning OFF the main power was not connected at power-on.



Remedy



Check/replace the cable between the charging management equipment and the host machine. [Reference] When operating the machine without the charging management equipment, execute "COPIER> FUNCTION> CLEAR> ERR". (It is designed to generate an error to prevent the misuse by removing the charging management equipment.)



E719-0002-00



Coin vendor error



Detection Description



Remedy



E719-0003-00



IPC error when the coin vendor is running - Open circuit of the IPC, or IPC communication could not be recovered. - Open circuit of the pickup/delivery signal cable was detected. - Invalid connection was detected. Check/replace the cable between the charging management equipment and the host machine. [Reference] When operating the machine without the charging management equipment, execute "COPIER> FUNCTION> CLEAR> ERR". (It is designed to generate an error to prevent the misuse by removing the charging management equipment.) Coin vendor error



Detection Description



A communication error with the coin vendor was detected during unit price acquisition at startup.



Remedy



Check/replace the cable between the charging management equipment and the host machine. [Reference] When operating the machine without the charging management equipment, execute "COPIER> FUNCTION> CLEAR> ERR". (It is designed to generate an error to prevent the misuse by removing the charging management equipment.)



E719-0031-00



Card Reader communication error



Detection Description Remedy



E719-0032-00



Communication with the Card Reader could not be established at startup. Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared. 1. Check/replace the harness between the Card Reader and the Main Controller PCB (PWB1/ J4023 (white connector at the upper side). 2. Replace the Card Reader. [Reference] In the case of operating the device without the Card Reader which had been used, execute "COPIER> FUNCTION> CLEAR> CARD" after removing the Card Reader. Card Reader communication error



Detection Description Remedy



E719-0041-00



Although communication with the Card Reader was available at startup, it became unavailable in the middle of it. Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared. 1. Check/replace the harness between the Card Reader and the Main Controller PCB (PWB1/ J4023 (white connector at the upper side). 2. Replace the Card Reader. [Reference] In the case of operating the device without the Card Reader which had been used, execute "COPIER> FUNCTION> CLEAR> CARD" after removing the Card Reader. Coin vendor error



Detection Description Remedy



Communication with the coin vendor could not be established at startup of the host machine. (Charge mode (COIN = 6) has been set.) 1. If it operates in charge mode (COIN = 6) - Check that it is the supported charging management equipment. - Check the cable to be connected. - Check the power of the charging management equipment. 2. If charge mode is canceled - Select COPIER> OPTION> ACC> COIN> "0", and turn OFF and then ON the main power.



906



7. Error/Jam/Alarm E719-0042-00



Coin vendor error



Detection Description Remedy



E720-0001-05



Communication with the coin vendor could not be established at startup of the host machine. (Charge mode (COIN = 6) has been set.) 1. If it operates in charge mode (COIN = 6) - Check that it is the supported charging management equipment. - Check the cable to be connected. - Check the power of the charging management equipment. 2. If charge mode is canceled - Select COPIER> OPTION> ACC> COIN> "0", and turn OFF and then ON the main power. Error due to non-compatible Finisher



Detection Description Remedy E720-0002-05



A finisher not supported by the host machine has been connected. Connect the finisher (STAPLE FIN-V/BOOKLET FIN-V) for this model. Error due to non-compatible option deck



Detection Description Remedy E720-0400-05



An option deck not supported by the host machine has been connected. Connect the option deck (POD DECK LITE-C1/PAPER DECK UNIT-E1) for this model. Error due to non-compatible Finisher



Detection Description Remedy E730-9004-00



A finisher not supported by the host machine has been connected. Connect the finisher (STAPLE FIN-V/BOOKLET FIN-V) for this model. Third party PDL communication error



Detection Description Remedy



E730-9005-00



Communication error with the print server. [Related parts] - Main Controller PCB (PWB01) (Unit of replacement: MAIN CONTROLLER PCB ASS'Y, 1) [Remedy]Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared. 1. Turn OFF and then ON the power. 2. Check the cable connection. 3. Replace the Open I/F PCB, F Link PCB (Main/Sub). 4. Replace the Main Controller PCB. Third party PDL communication error



Detection Description Remedy



E730-A006-00



Error in video cable connection with the print server. [Related parts] - Main Controller PCB (PWB01) (Unit of replacement: MAIN CONTROLLER PCB ASS'Y, 1) [Remedy]Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared. 1. Turn OFF and then ON the power. 2. Check the cable connection. 3. Replace the Open I/F PCB, F Link PCB (Main/Sub). 4. Replace the Main Controller PCB. PDL communication error



Detection Description Remedy



Response from PDL could not be detected. [Related parts] - Main Controller PCB (PWB01) (Unit of replacement: MAIN CONTROLLER PCB ASS'Y, 1) [Remedy]Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared. 1. Select "Settings/Registration> Function Settings> Printer> Printer Settings> Utility> Initialize Printer", and execute PDL reset processing. 2. Reinstall the system software. 3. Replace the Main Controller PCB 1 (PWB01) (Unit of replacement: MAIN CONTROLLER PCB ASS'Y, 1)



907



7. Error/Jam/Alarm E730-A007-00



Mismatch of PDL version



Detection Description



Version of the host machine control software and version of PDL control software were different.



Remedy



[Related parts] - Main Controller PCB (PWB01) (Unit of replacement: MAIN CONTROLLER PCB ASS'Y, 1) [Remedy]Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared. 1. Reinstall the system software. 2. Replace the Main Controller PCB 1 (PWB01) (Unit of replacement: MAIN CONTROLLER PCB ASS'Y, 1)



E730-B013-00



PDL embedded font error



Detection Description Remedy



E732-0000-04



Font data was corrupted. [Related parts] - Main Controller PCB (PWB01) (Unit of replacement: MAIN CONTROLLER PCB ASS'Y, 1) [Remedy]Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared. 1. Reinstall the system software. 2. Replace the Main Controller PCB 1 (PWB01) (Unit of replacement: MAIN CONTROLLER PCB ASS'Y, 1) Communication error



Detection Description Remedy



E732-0001-04



Negotiation between the Reader Controller and the Main Controller failed. [Related parts] - Harness between the Reader Controller PCB (UN1/J109) and the Main Controller PCB 2 (PWB02/J4031) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, INTERFACE) - Harnesses from the Relay PCB to the Reader Controller PCB 1. Relay PCB (UN7/J505) to Relay Connector (6P) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, SIGNAL) 2. Relay Connector (6P) to Reader Controller PCB (PCB1/J101) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, READER POWER SUPPLY) - Main Controller PCB 2 (PWB02) (Unit of replacement: MAIN CONTROLLER PCB ASS'Y, 2) - Main Controller PCB 1 (PWB01) (Unit of replacement: MAIN CONTROLLER PCB ASSEMBLY, 1) - Reader Controller PCB (UN1) (Unit of replacement: READER CONTROLLER PCB ASSEMBLY) - Relay PCB (UN7) (Unit of replacement: RELAY PCB ASSEMBLY) [Points to note at work] After performing the remedy, check that the copy image is output normally. [Remedy] Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts. [Reference] Before replacing the Reader Controller PCB, back up the service mode data (approx. 2 min) and restore the backup data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected. - Backup: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> RSRAMBUP - Restoration: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> RSRAMRES Communication error



Detection Description Remedy



A communication error between the Reader Controller PCB and the Main Controller PCB 1 was detected. [Related parts] - Harness between the Reader Controller PCB (UN1/J109) and the Main Controller PCB 2 (PWB02/J4031) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, INTERFACE) - Harnesses from the Relay PCB to the Reader Controller PCB 1. Relay PCB (UN7/J505) to Relay Connector (6P) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, SIGNAL) 2. Relay Connector (6P) to Reader Controller PCB (PCB1/J101) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, READER POWER SUPPLY) - Main Controller PCB 2 (PWB02) (Unit of replacement: MAIN CONTROLLER PCB ASS'Y, 2) - Main Controller PCB 1 (PWB01) (Unit of replacement: MAIN CONTROLLER PCB ASSEMBLY, 1) - Reader Controller PCB (UN1) (Unit of replacement: READER CONTROLLER PCB ASSEMBLY) - Relay PCB (UN7) (Unit of replacement: RELAY PCB ASSEMBLY) [Points to note at work] After performing the remedy, check that the copy image is output normally. [Remedy] Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts. [Reference] Before replacing the Reader Controller PCB, back up the service mode data (approx. 2 min) and restore the backup data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected. - Backup: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> RSRAMBUP - Restoration: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> RSRAMRES



908



7. Error/Jam/Alarm E732-0010-00



Scanner communication error



Detection Description



A signal to start image transfer could not be detected at scanning although the specified period of time (120 sec) has passed.



Remedy



[Related parts] - Harness between the Reader Controller PCB (UN1/J109) and the Main Controller PCB 2 (PWB02/J4031) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, INTERFACE) - Main Controller PCB 2 (PWB02) (Unit of replacement: MAIN CONTROLLER PCB ASS'Y, 2) - Main Controller PCB 1 (PWB01) (Unit of replacement: MAIN CONTROLLER PCB ASS'Y, 1) - Reader Controller PCB (UN1) (Unit of replacement: READER CONTROLLER PCB ASSEMBLY) [Points to note at work] After performing the remedy, check that the copy image is output normally. [Remedy] Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared. 1. Reinstall the latest system software using SST or a USB memory. 2. Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts. [Reference] Before replacing the Reader Controller PCB, back up the service mode data (approx. 2 min) and restore the backup data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected. - Backup: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> RSRAMBUP - Restoration: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> RSRAMRES



E732-0023-04



Communication error



Detection Description Remedy



E732-0F01-04



A communication error between the Reader Controller PCB and the Main Controller PCB 1 was detected at startup/recovery from sleep. [Related parts] - Harness between the Reader Controller PCB (UN1/J109) and the Main Controller PCB 2 (PWB02/J4031) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, INTERFACE) - Harnesses from the Relay PCB to the Reader Controller PCB 1. Relay PCB (UN7/J505) to Relay Connector (6P) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, SIGNAL) 2. Relay Connector (6P) to Reader Controller PCB (PCB1/J101) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, READER POWER SUPPLY) - Main Controller PCB 2 (PWB02) (Unit of replacement: MAIN CONTROLLER PCB ASS'Y, 2) - Main Controller PCB 1 (PWB01) (Unit of replacement: MAIN CONTROLLER PCB ASSEMBLY, 1) - Reader Controller PCB (UN1) (Unit of replacement: READER CONTROLLER PCB ASSEMBLY) - Relay PCB (UN7) (Unit of replacement: RELAY PCB ASSEMBLY) [Points to note at work] After performing the remedy, check that the copy image is output normally. [Remedy] Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts. [Reference] Before replacing the Reader Controller PCB, back up the service mode data (approx. 2 min) and restore the backup data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected. - Backup: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> RSRAMBUP - Restoration: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> RSRAMRES Communication error



Detection Description Remedy E732-0F23-04



Communication error that can be recovered by reboot If it is detected again immediately after reboot, E732-0001 is generated. It is not necessary to perform a remedy because the machine is automatically rebooted after log collection. Communication error



Detection Description Remedy E732-8888-00



Communication error that can be recovered by reboot If it is detected again immediately after reboot, E732-0023 is generated. It is not necessary to perform a remedy because the machine is automatically rebooted after log collection. Error in the reader type



Detection Description Remedy



When a scanner for the different model is detected during the communication with the reader. Replace to the proper reader.



909



7. Error/Jam/Alarm E733-0000-05



Communication error between the Main Controller PCB 1 and the DC Controller PCB



Detection Description



Unable to make communication between the Main Controller PCB 1 and the DC Controller PCB. (Communication error was detected at startup.)



Remedy



[Related parts] - Harness between the Main Controller PCB 2 (PWB02/J5201) and the DC Controller PCB (UN01/ J443) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, COMMUNICATION) - Harness between the Main Controller PCB 2 (PWB02/J5202) and the DC Controller PCB (UN01/ J442) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, SIGNAL) - Connector between the Main Controller PCB 1 (PWB01) and the Main Controller PCB 2 (PWB02) - DC Controller PCB (UN01) (Unit of replacement: DC CONTROLLER PCB ASS'Y) - Main Controller PCB 2 (PWB02) (Unit of replacement: MAIN CONTROLLER PCB ASS'Y, 2) - Main Controller PCB 1 (PWB01) (Unit of replacement: MAIN CONTROLLER PCB ASS'Y, 1) [Remedy] Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts. [Reference] Before replacing the DC Controller PCB, back up the service mode data (approx. 2 min) and restore the backup data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected. - Backup: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMBUP - Restoration: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMRES



E733-0001-05



Communication error between the Main Controller PCB 1 and the DC Controller PCB



Detection Description



Unable to make communication between the Main Controller PCB 1 and the DC Controller PCB. (Communication error was detected during power distribution (while the power is ON).)



Remedy



[Related parts] - Harness between the Main Controller PCB 2 (PWB02/J5201) and the DC Controller PCB (UN01/ J443) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, COMMUNICATION) - Harness between the Main Controller PCB 2 (PWB02/J5202) and the DC Controller PCB (UN01/ J442) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, SIGNAL) - Connector between the Main Controller PCB 1 (PWB01) and the Main Controller PCB 2 (PWB02) - DC Controller PCB (UN01) (Unit of replacement: DC CONTROLLER PCB ASS'Y) - Main Controller PCB 2 (PWB02) (Unit of replacement: MAIN CONTROLLER PCB ASS'Y, 2) - Main Controller PCB 1 (PWB01) (Unit of replacement: MAIN CONTROLLER PCB ASS'Y, 1) [Remedy] Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts. [Reference] Before replacing the DC Controller PCB, back up the service mode data (approx. 2 min) and restore the backup data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected. - Backup: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMBUP - Restoration: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMRES



E733-0002-05



Communication error between the Main Controller PCB 1 and the DC Controller PCB



Detection Description Remedy



Error was detected in the signal from the DC Controller PCB to the Main Controller PCB 1. (Communication between the DC Controller PCB and the Main Controller PCB 1 is normal.) [Related parts] - Harness between the Main Controller PCB 2 (PWB02/J5201) and the DC Controller PCB (UN01/ J443) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, COMMUNICATION) - Harness between the Main Controller PCB 2 (PWB02/J5202) and the DC Controller PCB (UN01/ J442) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, SIGNAL) - Connector between the Main Controller PCB 1 (PWB01) and the Main Controller PCB 2 (PWB02) - DC Controller PCB (UN01) (Unit of replacement: DC CONTROLLER PCB ASS'Y) - Main Controller PCB 2 (PWB02) (Unit of replacement: MAIN CONTROLLER PCB ASS'Y, 2) - Main Controller PCB 1 (PWB01) (Unit of replacement: MAIN CONTROLLER PCB ASS'Y, 1) [Remedy] Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts. [Reference] Before replacing the DC Controller PCB, back up the service mode data (approx. 2 min) and restore the backup data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected. - Backup: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMBUP - Restoration: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMRES



910



7. Error/Jam/Alarm E733-0010-00



Printer communication error



Detection Description



A communication error between the DC Controller PCB and the Main Controller PCB was detected.



Remedy



[Related parts] - Harness between the Main Controller PCB 2 (PPWB2/J5201) and the DC Controller PCB (UN01/ J443) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, COMMUNICATION) - Harness between the Main Controller PCB 2 (PPWB2/J5202) and the DC Controller PCB (UN01/ J442) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, SIGNAL) - DC Controller PCB (UN01) (Unit of replacement: DC CONTROLLER PCB ASS'Y) - Main Controller PCB 2 (PWB02) (Unit of replacement: MAIN CONTROLLER PCB ASS'Y, 2) - Main Controller PCB 1 (PWB01) (Unit of replacement: MAIN CONTROLLER PCB ASS'Y, 1) [Remedy] Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared. 1. Reinstall the latest system software using SST or a USB memory. 2. Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts. [Reference] Before replacing the DC Controller PCB, back up the service mode data (approx. 2 min) and restore the backup data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected. - Backup: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMBUP - Restoration: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMRES



E733-0F00-05



Printer communication error



Detection Description Remedy E733-0F01-05



Communication error that can be recovered by reboot If it is detected again immediately after reboot, E733-0000 is generated. It is not necessary to perform a remedy because the machine is automatically rebooted after log collection. Printer communication error



Detection Description Remedy E733-0F02-05



Communication error that can be recovered by reboot If it is detected again immediately after reboot, E733-0001 is generated. It is not necessary to perform a remedy because the machine is automatically rebooted after log collection. Printer communication error



Detection Description Remedy E733-9999-05



Communication error that can be recovered by reboot If it is detected again immediately after reboot, E733-0002 is generated. It is not necessary to perform a remedy because the machine is automatically rebooted after log collection. Printer communication error



Detection Description



Remedy E743-0000-04



The Finisher connection information differs between the Main Controller PCB 2 and the DC Controller PCB. The information on the Main Controller PCB 2 side is overwritten by turning OFF and then ON the power. 1. Turn OFF and then ON the power Communication error



Detection Description



The Reader Controller PCB detected a communication error between the Main Controller PCB 1 and the Reader Controller PCB.



Remedy



[Related parts] - Harness between the Reader Controller PCB (UN1/J109) and the Main Controller PCB 2 (PWB02/J4031) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, INTERFACE) - Reader Controller PCB (UN1) (Unit of replacement: READER CONTROLLER PCB ASSEMBLY) - Main Controller PCB 2 (PWB02) (Unit of replacement: MAIN CONTROLLER PCB ASS'Y, 2) - Main Controller PCB 1 (PWB01) (Unit of replacement: MAIN CONTROLLER PCB ASSEMBLY, 1) [Remedy] Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts. [Reference] Before replacing the Reader Controller PCB, back up the service mode data (approx. 2 min) and restore the backup data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected. - Backup: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> RSRAMBUP - Restoration: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> RSRAMRES



911



7. Error/Jam/Alarm E743-0003-04



Communication error



Detection Description



The Reader Controller PCB detected a communication error between the Main Controller PCB 1 and the Reader Controller PCB.



Remedy



[Related parts] - Harness between the Reader Controller PCB (UN1/J109) and the Main Controller PCB 2 (PWB02/J4031) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, INTERFACE) - Reader Controller PCB (UN1) (Unit of replacement: READER CONTROLLER PCB ASSEMBLY) - Main Controller PCB 2 (PWB02) (Unit of replacement: MAIN CONTROLLER PCB ASS'Y, 2) - Main Controller PCB 1 (PWB01) (Unit of replacement: MAIN CONTROLLER PCB ASSEMBLY, 1) [Remedy] Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts. [Reference] Before replacing the Reader Controller PCB, back up the service mode data (approx. 2 min) and restore the backup data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected. - Backup: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> RSRAMBUP - Restoration: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> RSRAMRES



E743-0004-04



Communication error



Detection Description



The Reader Controller PCB detected a communication error between the Main Controller PCB 1 and the Reader Controller PCB.



Remedy



[Related parts] - Harness between the Reader Controller PCB (UN1/J109) and the Main Controller PCB 2 (PWB02/J4031) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, INTERFACE) - Reader Controller PCB (UN1) (Unit of replacement: READER CONTROLLER PCB ASSEMBLY) - Main Controller PCB 2 (PWB02) (Unit of replacement: MAIN CONTROLLER PCB ASS'Y, 2) - Main Controller PCB 1 (PWB01) (Unit of replacement: MAIN CONTROLLER PCB ASSEMBLY, 1) [Remedy] Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts. [Reference] Before replacing the Reader Controller PCB, back up the service mode data (approx. 2 min) and restore the backup data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected. - Backup: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> RSRAMBUP - Restoration: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> RSRAMRES



E744-0001-00



Language file error



Detection Description Remedy E744-2000-00



The language file in the HDD was not supported by the version of Bootable. Reinstall the correct language file or system software using SST or a USB memory. Controller firmware mismatch



Detection Description Remedy



E744-4000-05



Invalid controller firmware was detected. [Related parts] - HDD [Remedy]This error normally does not occur. This error occurs when using the HDD which was used with another model. Replace the HDD with the one which was originally installed or a new one for the model. Error due to the DC Controller PCB not compatible with the model



Detection Description Remedy



E744-5000-07



The DC Controller PCB which was used with another model was detected. [Related parts] - DC Controller PCB (UN01) (Unit of replacement: DC CONTROLLER PCB ASS'Y) [Remedy] Replace the DC Controller PCB (UN01). (Unit of replacement: DC CONTROLLER PCB ASSEMBLY) [Reference] Before replacing the DC Controller PCB, back up the service mode data (approx. 2 min) and restore the backup data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected. - Backup: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMBUP - Restoration: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMRES Mismatch of software version for fax



Detection Description Remedy



After the Fax Board (option) has been installed, mismatch of version of software in the Fax Board was detected at transmission and reception. Upgrade the system software version to the latest one.



912



7. Error/Jam/Alarm E746-0003-00



Image Analysis Board error



Detection Description Remedy



E746-0021-00



Different Image Analysis PCB model. Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared. 1. Check that the Image Analysis Board is installed properly by removing and then installing it again. 2. Turn OFF and then ON the main power, and check whether the error is cleared. 3. After replacing the Image Analysis Board, reinstall the firmware of the Image Analysis Board or the system software which version is supported by this model using SST or a USB memory. Image Analysis Board error



Detection Description Remedy



E746-0022-00



Self-check NG of Image Analysis Board Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared. 1. Check that the Image Analysis Board is installed properly by removing and then installing it again. 2. Turn OFF and then ON the main power, and check whether the error is cleared. 3. After replacing the Image Analysis Board, reinstall the firmware of the Image Analysis Board or the system software which version is supported by this model using SST or a USB memory. Image Analysis Board error



Detection Description Remedy



E746-0023-00



Wrong version of the Image Analysis Board was detected. Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared. 1. Reinstall the firmware of the Image Analysis Board or the system software which version is supported by this model using SST or a USB memory. 2. After replacing the Image Analysis Board, perform step 1. Image Analysis Board error



Detection Description Remedy



E746-0024-00



Communication from the Image Analysis Board could not be detected. Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared. 1. Check that the Image Analysis Board is installed properly by removing and then installing it again. 2. Turn OFF and then ON the main power, and check whether the error is cleared. 3. After replacing the Image Analysis Board, reinstall the firmware of the Image Analysis Board or the system software which version is supported by this model using SST or a USB memory. Image Analysis Board error



Detection Description Remedy



An error in the operation of the Image Analysis Board was detected. Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared. 1. Check that the Image Analysis Board is installed properly by removing and then installing it again. 2. Turn OFF and then ON the main power, and check whether the error is cleared. 3. After replacing the Image Analysis Board, reinstall the firmware of the Image Analysis Board or the system software which version is supported by this model using SST or a USB memory.



913



7. Error/Jam/Alarm E746-0031-00



TPM error



Detection Description Remedy



E746-0032-00



A communication error between the Main Controller PCB and the TPM PCB was detected at startup. [Related parts] - TPM PCB. (Unit of replacement: TPM PCB ASSEMBLY) [Remedy]Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared. 1. Turn OFF and then ON the main power, and check whether the error is cleared. 2. After turning OFF the main power, replace the TPM PCB. (Unit of replacement: TPM PCB ASSEMBLY) 3. If the TPM key was backed up, restore the key. 3-1. Connect the USB memory which stores the TPM key. 3-2. Execute "Settings/Registration> Log In> Management Settings> Data Management> TPM Settings> Restore TPM Key". [CAUTION] Ask the customer to enter "System Manager ID" and "System Manager PIN" when logging in. 3-3. Enter the password set at backup operation. 3-4. When the restoration completion screen is displayed, click "OK". Remove the USB memory, and turn OFF and then ON the main power. TPM error



Detection Description Remedy



E746-0033-00



Mismatch of the TPM key was detected. [Related parts] - TPM PCB. (Unit of replacement: TPM PCB ASSEMBLY) [Remedy]Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared. 1. Format the system. 1-1. Enter safe mode using (2+8) startup, and execute [4]: Clear/Format> [2]: Flash Format (Flash format) using a USB memory. 1-2. Reinstall the system software using SST or a USB memory. 2. Replace the TPM PCB. (Unit of replacement: TPM PCB ASSEMBLY) 3. If the TPM key was backed up, restore the key. 3-1. Connect the USB memory which stores the TPM key. 3-2. Execute "Settings/Registration> Log In> Management Settings> Data Management> TPM Settings> Restore TPM Key". [CAUTION] Ask the customer to enter "System Manager ID" and "System Manager PIN" when logging in. 3-3. Enter the password set at backup operation. 3-4. When the restoration completion screen is displayed, click "OK". Remove the USB memory, and turn OFF and then ON the main power. TPM error



Detection Description Remedy



It was detected that data in TPM was inconsistent. Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared. Perform the appropriate remedy according to the status whether the TPM key was backed up. a. If the TPM key was backed up, restore the key. 1. Connect the USB memory which stores the TPM key. 2. Execute "Settings/Registration> Log In> Management Settings> Data Management> TPM Settings> Restore TPM Key". [CAUTION] Ask the customer to enter "System Manager ID" and "System Manager PIN" when logging in. 3. Enter the password set at backup operation. 4. When the restoration completion screen is displayed, click "OK". Remove the USB memory, and turn OFF and then ON the main power. b. If the TPM key was not backed up, format the system. 1. Enter safe mode using (2+8) startup, and execute [4] Clear/Format> [2] Flash Format (Flash format) using a USB memory. 2. Reinstall the system software using SST or a USB memory.



914



7. Error/Jam/Alarm E746-0034-00



TPM auto-recovery error



Detection Description Remedy



E746-0035-00



The error occurred when clearing HDD while TPM setting was ON. Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared. 1. Turn OFF and then ON the main power, and check whether the error is cleared. a. If the error is cleared, execute "Settings/Registration> Log In> Management Settings> Data Management> Initialize All Data/Settings". b. If the error is not cleared, format the system. 1. Enter safe mode using (2+8) startup, and execute [4] Clear/Format> [2] Flash Format (Flash format) using a USB memory. 2. Reinstall the system software using SST or a USB memory. 2. If the TPM key was backed up, restore the key. 2-1. Connect the USB memory which stores the TPM key. 2-2. Execute "Settings/Registration> Log In> Management Settings> Data Management> TPM Settings> Restore TPM Key". [CAUTION] Ask the customer to enter "System Manager ID" and "System Manager PIN" when logging in. 2-3. Enter the password set at backup operation. 2-4. When the restoration completion screen is displayed, click "OK". Remove the USB memory, and turn OFF and then ON the main power. TPM version error



Detection Description Remedy



E748-2000-00



TPM PCB which cannot be used in this machine was installed. [Related parts] - TPM PCB. (Unit of replacement: TPM PCB ASSEMBLY) [Remedy]Install the TPM PCB for this model. (Unit of replacement: TPM PCB ASSEMBLY) Main Controller PCB access error



Detection Description Remedy



E748-2001-00



Main Controller PCB Chip access error. [Related parts] - Main Controller PCB 1 (PWB01) (Unit of replacement: MAIN CONTROLLER PCB ASS'Y, 1) [Remedy]Replace the Main Controller PCB 1 (PWB01) (Unit of replacement: MAIN CONTROLLER PCB ASS'Y, 1) Main Controller PCB access error



Detection Description Remedy



E748-2010-00



Main Controller PCB memory access error. [Related parts] - Main Controller PCB 1 (PWB01) (Unit of replacement: MAIN CONTROLLER PCB ASS'Y, 1) [Remedy]Replace the Main Controller PCB 1 (PWB01) (Unit of replacement: MAIN CONTROLLER PCB ASS'Y, 1) Flash PCB error / HDD error



Detection Description Remedy



IPL (startup program) was not found, or the HDD could not be recognized. [Related parts] - Cable between the Main Controller PCB 1 (PWB01/J6003,J6004) and the HDD (Unit of replacement: CABLE, HARD DISK DRIVE, 1) - SATA-FLASH PCB (PWB03) [Remedy] Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared. 1. Disconnect the cable between the Main Controller PCB and the HDD, and turn ON the main power. a. When the error code has not been changed: 1. Obtain the necessary backup data by referring to the backup data list. 2. After replacing the Flash PCB, reinstall the system software using SST or a USB memory. 3. Restore the backup data. b. When the error code has been changed to another one, see the remedy for the corresponding code. [Reference] For backup and restoration, refer to "Adjustment> Main Controller System" and "Appendix> Backup Data List" in the Service Manual.



915



7. Error/Jam/Alarm E748-2011-00



Flash PCB error



Detection Description Remedy



E748-2012-00



OS is not found [Related parts] - SATA-FLASH PCB (PWB03) [Remedy]After replacing the SATA-FLASH PCB (PWB03) (unit of replacement: SATA-FLASH PCB ASS'Y), reinstall the system software using SST or a USB memory. Flash PCB error



Detection Description Remedy



E748-2021-00



Cannot mount the OS in safe mode startup or No OS startup script [Related parts] - SATA-FLASH PCB (PWB03) [Remedy]After replacing the SATA-FLASH PCB (PWB03) (unit of replacement: SATA-FLASH PCB ASS'Y), reinstall the system software using SST or a USB memory. Main Controller PCB access error



Detection Description Remedy



E748-2022-00



Main controller board 2 access errors [Related parts] - Main Controller PCB 1 (PWB01) (Unit of replacement: MAIN CONTROLLER PCB ASS'Y, 1) [Remedy]Replace the Main Controller PCB 1 (PWB01) (Unit of replacement: MAIN CONTROLLER PCB ASS'Y, 1) Main controller startup error



Detection Description Remedy E748-2023-00



An fatal error was detected in the Main Controller at startup Replace the Main Controller PCB Main Controller PCB access error



Detection Description Remedy



E748-2024-00



Main controller board 2 access errors [Related parts] - Main Controller PCB 1 (PWB01) (Unit of replacement: MAIN CONTROLLER PCB ASS'Y, 1) [Remedy]Replace the Main Controller PCB 1 (PWB01) (Unit of replacement: MAIN CONTROLLER PCB ASS'Y, 1) Main Controller PCB access error



Detection Description Remedy



E748-4910-00



Main controller board 2 access errors [Related parts] - Main Controller PCB 1 (PWB01) (Unit of replacement: MAIN CONTROLLER PCB ASS'Y, 1) [Remedy]Replace the Main Controller PCB 1 (PWB01) (Unit of replacement: MAIN CONTROLLER PCB ASS'Y, 1) Main Controller PCB access error



Detection Description Remedy



E748-7011-00



Main controller board 2 access errors [Related parts] - Main Controller PCB 1 (PWB01) (Unit of replacement: MAIN CONTROLLER PCB ASS'Y, 1) [Remedy]Replace the Main Controller PCB 1 (PWB01) (Unit of replacement: MAIN CONTROLLER PCB ASS'Y, 1) Start system verification function error



Detection Description



Remedy



At startup, an error may occur due to invalid data of the OS boot loader on the flash PCB. When this error occurs, the system has not been started normally. Therefore, it is not recorded in the error log. [Related parts] - Flash PCB [Remedy] 1. Replace the Flash PCB and reinstall the system using SST or a USB flash drive.



916



7. Error/Jam/Alarm E748-7021-00



Start system verification function error



Detection Description



Remedy



E748-7022-00



At startup, an error may occur due to invalid data of the OS kernel on the flash PCB. When this error occurs, the system has not been started normally. Therefore, it is not recorded in the error log. [Related parts] - Flash PCB [Remedy] 1. Replace the Flash PCB and reinstall the system using SST or a USB flash drive. Start system verification function error



Detection Description



Remedy



E748-9000-00



At startup, an error may occur due to invalid data of the OS kernel on the flash PCB. When this error occurs, the system has not been started normally. Therefore, it is not recorded in the error log. [Related parts] - Flash PCB [Remedy] 1. Replace the Flash PCB and reinstall the system using SST or a USB flash drive. System error



Detection Description Remedy E753-0001-00



System error Contact to the sales company. Download error



Detection Description Remedy



E804-0000-05



Update of the Main Controller PCB ended in failure. [Related parts] - SATA-FLASH PCB (PWB03) [Remedy]Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared. 1. Reinstall the system software using SST or a USB memory. 2. After replacing the Sata Flash PCB (PWB3) (Unit of replacement: SATA-FLASH PCB ASS'Y), reinstall the system software using SST or a USB memory. 3. Collect debug log and contact to the sales company. Power Supply Cooling Fan error



Detection Description Remedy



E804-0001-05



It was detected that the Power Supply Cooling Fan was locked. [Related parts] - Harnesses from the Relay PCB to the Power Supply Cooling Fan 1 1. Relay PCB (UN86/J509) to Relay Connector (3P) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, POWER FAN) 2. Relay Connector (3P) to Power Supply Cooling Fan 1 (FM14/J2134) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, POWER FAN) - Harness between the Relay PCB (UN86/J509) to Power Supply Cooling Fan 2 (FM15/J2154) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, POWER FAN) - Power Supply Cooling Fan 1 (FM14) - Power Supply Cooling Fan 2 (FM15) - Relay PCB (UN86) (Unit of replacement: RELAY PCB ASSEMBLY) [Remedy] Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts. Fixing Power Supply Cooling Fan error



Detection Description Remedy



It was detected that the Fixing Power Supply Cooling Fan was locked. [Related parts] - Harnesses from the Relay PCB to the Fixing Power Supply Cooling Fan 1. Main Driver PCB (UN78/J119) to Relay Connector (13P) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, MAIN DRIVER IH) 2. Relay Connector (13P) to Fixing Power Supply Cooling Fan (FM7/J2130) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, IH SIGNAL) - Power Supply Cooling Fan (FM7) - Main Driver PCB (UN78) (Unit of replacement: MAIN DRIVE DRIVER PCB ASS'Y) [Remedy] Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts.



917



7. Error/Jam/Alarm E806-0000-05



Making Image Exhaust Fan error



Detection Description Remedy



E808-0001-05



It was detected that the Making Image Exhaust Fan was locked. [Related parts] - Harnesses from the Feed Driver PCB to the Making Image Exhaust Fan 1. Feed Driver PCB (UN79/J225) to Relay Connector (3P) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, CASSETTE, 3 , 4) 2. Relay Connector (3P) to Making Image Exhaust Fan (FM01/J2099 or FM03/J2088) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, FAN) - Making Image Exhaust Fan (FM01 or FM03) (Unit of replacement: FAN UNIT) - Feed Driver PCB (UN79) (Unit of replacement: FEED DRIVER PCB ASSEMBLY) [Remedy] Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts. Fixing Power Supply error



Detection Description



Remedy



E808-0002-05



Overvoltage was detected at power-on. - 145 V or higher for 100V/120V machine - 290 V or higher for 230V machine [Related parts] - Harnesses from the Main Driver PCB to the Fixing Power Supply PCB 1. Main Driver PCB (UN78/J118 and J119) to Relay Connector (19P and 13P) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, MAIN DRIVER IH) 2. Relay Connector (19P and 13P) to Fixing Power Supply PCB (UN03/J314 and J312) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, IH SIGNAL) - Harnesses from the AC Driver PCB to the Fixing Power Supply PCB 1. AC Driver PCB (UN20/J601) to Relay Connector (2P) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, AC-IH) 2. Relay Connector (2P) to Fixing Power Supply PCB (UN03/J2401) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, AC MAIN BODY) - Fixing Power Supply PCB (UN03) (Unit of replacement: IH POWER SUPPLY PCB ASS'Y) - Main Driver PCB (UN78) (Unit of replacement: MAIN DRIVE DRIVER PCB ASS'Y) [Remedy] - Check the voltage of the outlet, and connect the machine to the correct outlet if it is wrong. - Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts. Fixing Power Supply error



Detection Description



Remedy



Under voltage was detected at power-on. - 75 V or lower for 100V/120V machine - 150 V or lower for 230V machine [Related parts] - Harnesses from the Main Driver PCB to the Fixing Power Supply PCB 1. Main Driver PCB (UN78/J118 and J119) to Relay Connector (19P and 13P) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, MAIN DRIVER IH) 2. Relay Connector (19P and 13P) to Fixing Power Supply PCB (UN03/J314 and J312) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, IH SIGNAL) - Harnesses from the AC Driver PCB to the Fixing Power Supply PCB 1. AC Driver PCB (UN20/J601) to Relay Connector (2P) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, AC-IH) 2. Relay Connector (2P) to Fixing Power Supply PCB (UN03/J2401) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, AC MAIN BODY) - Fixing Power Supply PCB (UN03) (Unit of replacement: IH POWER SUPPLY PCB ASS'Y) - Main Driver PCB (UN78) (Unit of replacement: MAIN DRIVE DRIVER PCB ASS'Y) [Remedy] - Check the voltage of the outlet, and connect the machine to the correct outlet if it is wrong. - Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts.



918



7. Error/Jam/Alarm E808-0003-05



Fixing Power Supply error



Detection Description Remedy



E808-0004-05



Inlet current is 1 A or lower for 1 second or longer although the maximum voltage is output. [Related parts] - Harnesses from the Main Driver PCB to the Fixing Power Supply PCB 1. Main Driver PCB (UN78/J118 and J119) to Relay Connector (19P and 13P) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, MAIN DRIVER IH) 2. Relay Connector (19P and 13P) to Fixing Power Supply PCB (UN03/J314 and J312) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, IH SIGNAL) - Harness between the Fixing Power Supply PCB (UN03/J9904) and the Fixing Heater (CB1006 and CB1007/J9072 and J9071) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, IH DRAWER) - Fixing Power Supply PCB (UN03) (Unit of replacement: IH POWER SUPPLY PCB ASS'Y) - Fixing Heater (CB1006 and CB1007) (Unit of replacement: FIXING HEATER UNIT) - Main Driver PCB (UN78) (Unit of replacement: MAIN DRIVE DRIVER PCB ASS'Y) [Remedy] - Clean the Fixing Power Supply Cooling Fan and the Louver on right side of the host machine to remove dust. - Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts. Fixing Power Supply error



Detection Description Remedy



E808-0005-05



Detected OFF with output 12 V of the Main Driver PCB. [Related parts] - Harnesses from the Main Driver PCB to the Fixing Power Supply PCB 1. Main Driver PCB (UN78/J118 and J119) to Relay Connector (19P and 13P) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, MAIN DRIVER IH) 2. Relay Connector (19P and 13P) to Fixing Power Supply PCB (UN03/J314 and J312) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, IH SIGNAL) - Fixing Power Supply PCB (UN03) (Unit of replacement: IH POWER SUPPLY PCB ASS'Y) - Main Driver PCB (UN78) (Unit of replacement: MAIN DRIVE DRIVER PCB ASS'Y) [Remedy] Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts. Fixing Power Supply error



Detection Description Remedy



E808-0006-05



Detected OFF with output 12 V of the Fixing Power Supply after IH relay is turned ON. [Related parts] - Harnesses from the Main Driver PCB to the Fixing Thermoswitch 1. Main Driver PCB (UN78/J129) to Relay Connector (3P) to Fixing Drawer Unit (J3001) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, FIXING DRAWER) 2. Fixing Drawer Unit (J3200) to Fixing Thermoswitch (TP01 and TP02) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, FIXING DC DRAWER) - Harnesses from the Main Driver PCB to the Fixing Power Supply PCB 1. Main Driver PCB (UN78/J118 and J119) to Relay Connector (19P and 13P) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, MAIN DRIVER IH) 2. Relay Connector (19P and 13P) to Fixing Power Supply PCB (UN03/J314 and J312) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, IH SIGNAL) - Fixing Power Supply PCB (UN03) (Unit of replacement: IH POWER SUPPLY PCB ASS'Y) - Main Driver PCB (UN78) (Unit of replacement: MAIN DRIVE DRIVER PCB ASS'Y) - Fixing Thermoswitch (TP01 and TP02) (Unit of replacement: THERMOSWITCH) [Remedy] Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts. Fixing Power Supply error



Detection Description Remedy



An error in ASIC on the DC Controller was detected. [Related parts] - DC Controller PCB (UN01) (Unit of replacement: DC CONTROLLER PCB ASS'Y) [Remedy]Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared. 1. Turn OFF and then ON the power of the host machine. 2. Replace the DC Controller PCB. (Unit of replacement: DC CONTROLLER PCB ASS'Y) [Reference] Before replacing the DC Controller PCB, back up the service mode data (approx. 2 min) and restore the backup data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected. - Backup: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMBUP - Restoration: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMRES



919



7. Error/Jam/Alarm E808-0007-05



Fixing Power Supply error



Detection Description Remedy



E808-0008-05



An error in voltage inside the Fixing Power Supply PCB was detected. [Related parts] - Harnesses from the Main Driver PCB to the Fixing Power Supply PCB 1. Main Driver PCB (UN78/J118 and J119) to Relay Connector (19P and 13P) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, MAIN DRIVER IH) 2. Relay Connector (19P and 13P) to Fixing Power Supply PCB (UN03/J316 and J313) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, IH SIGNAL) - Fixing Power Supply PCB (UN03) (Unit of replacement: IH POWER SUPPLY PCB ASS'Y) - DC Controller PCB (UN01) (Unit of replacement: DC CONTROLLER PCB ASS'Y) [Remedy] Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts. [Reference] Before replacing the DC Controller PCB, back up the service mode data (approx. 2 min) and restore the backup data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected. - Backup: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMBUP - Restoration: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMRES Fixing Power Supply error



Detection Description Remedy



E808-0009-05



Current fluctuation error of the Fixing Assembly was detected. [Related parts] - Harnesses from the Main Driver PCB to the Fixing Power Supply PCB 1. Main Driver PCB (UN78/J118 and J119) to Relay Connector (19P and 13P) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, MAIN DRIVER IH) 2. Relay Connector (19P and 13P) to Fixing Power Supply PCB (UN03/J314 and J312) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, IH SIGNAL) - Harness between the Fixing Power Supply PCB (UN03/J9904) and the Fixing Heater (Unit of replacement: CABLE, IH DRAWER) - Fixing Heater Unit - Fixing Roller - Fixing Power Supply PCB (UN03) - Main Driver PCB (UN78) [Remedy] Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts. Fixing Power Supply error



Detection Description Remedy



E820-0000-05



Unable to clear the error flag at power-on. [Related parts] - DC Controller PCB (UN01) (Unit of replacement: DC CONTROLLER PCB ASS'Y) [Remedy]Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared. 1. Turn OFF and then ON the power of the host machine. 2. Replace the DC Controller PCB. (Unit of replacement: DC CONTROLLER PCB ASS'Y) [Reference] Before replacing the DC Controller PCB, back up the service mode data (approx. 2 min) and restore the backup data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected. - Backup: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMBUP - Restoration: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMRES Developer Lower Cooling Fan error



Detection Description



The Fan stop signal is detected for 5 seconds or longer and retry is failed 4 times in a row although the Developer Lower Cooling Fan is turned ON.



Remedy



[Related parts] - Harnesses from the Main Driver PCB to the Developer Lower Cooling Fan 1. Main Driver PCB (UN78/J130) to Relay Connector (17P) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, MAIN DRIVER, REAR UPPER) 2. Relay Harness (17P) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, RELAY, FRONT, CABLE, MAIN DRIVER, FRONT) 3. Relay Connector (17P) to Developer Lower Cooling Fan (FM30/J2170) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, FAN) - Developer Lower Cooling Fan (FM30) - Main Driver PCB (UN78) (Unit of replacement: MAIN DRIVE DRIVER PCB ASS'Y) [Remedy] Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts.



920



7. Error/Jam/Alarm E820-0001-05



Developer Upper Cooling Fan error



Detection Description



The Fan stop signal is detected for 5 seconds or longer and retry is failed 4 times in a row although the Developer Upper Cooling Fan is turned ON.



Remedy



[Related parts] - Harnesses from the Main Driver PCB to the Developer Upper Cooling Fan 1. Main Driver PCB (UN78/J130) to Relay Connector (17P) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, MAIN DRIVER, REAR UPPER) 2. Relay Harness (17P) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, RELAY, FRONT, CABLE, MAIN DRIVER, FRONT) 3. Relay Connector (17P) to Developer Upper Cooling Fan (FM31/J2171) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, FAN) - Developer Upper Cooling Fan (FM31) - Main Driver PCB (UN78) (Unit of replacement: MAIN DRIVE DRIVER PCB ASS'Y) [Remedy] Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts.



E820-0002-05



Duplex Driver Cooling Fan error



Detection Description



The Fan stop signal is detected for 5 seconds or longer and retry is failed 4 times in a row although the Duplex Driver Cooling Fan is turned ON.



Remedy



[Related parts] - Harnesses from the Duplex Driver PCB to the Transfer Cleaner Cooling Fan 1. Duplex Driver PCB (UN80/J340) to Relay Connector (3P) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, FIXING/ FEEDER DRAWER) 2. Relay Connector (3P) to Transfer Cleaner Cooling Fan (FM08/J2121) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, DUPLEXING FEED FAN) - Transfer Cleaner Cooling Fan (FM08) - Duplex Driver PCB (UN80) (Unit of replacement: DUPLEXING DRIVER PCB ASSEMBLY) [Remedy] Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts.



E824-0000-05



Primary Charging Air Supply Fan error



Detection Description



The Fan stop signal is detected for 5 seconds or longer and retry is failed 4 times in a row although the Primary Charging Air Supply Fan is turned ON.



Remedy



[Related parts] - Harnesses from the Main Driver PCB to the Primary Charging Air Supply Fan 1. Main Driver PCB (UN78/J130) to Relay Connector (17P) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, MAIN DRIVER, REAR UPPER) 2. Relay Harness (17P) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, RELAY, FRONT, CABLE, MAIN DRIVER, FRONT) 3. Relay Connector (17P) to Primary Charging Air Supply Fan (FM02/J2131) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, FAN) - Primary Charging Air Supply Fan (FM02) - Main Driver PCB (UN78) (Unit of replacement: MAIN DRIVE DRIVER PCB ASS'Y) [Remedy] Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts.



921



7. Error/Jam/Alarm E840-0001-05



Fixing Shutter Motor error



Detection Description Remedy



E880-0001-00



HP error of the Fixing Shutter was detected. [Related parts] - Harnesses from the Fixing Drawer Unit to the Fixing Shutter HP Sensor 1. Fixing Drawer Unit (J3001) to Relay Connector (7P) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, FIXING DRAWER) 2. Relay Connector (7P) to Fixing Shutter HP Sensor (PS53/J2012) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, FIXING CLEANER) - Harnesses from the Fixing Drawer Unit to the Fixing Shutter Motor 1. Fixing Drawer Unit (J3001) to Relay Connector (4P) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, FIXING DRAWER) 2. Relay Connector (4P) to Fixing Shutter Motor (M15/J2014) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, MOTOR) - Harness between the Main Driver PCB (UN78/J104 and J105) and the Fixing Drawer Unit (J3001) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, FIXING DRAWER) - Fixing Shutter HP Sensor (PS53) - Fixing Shutter Motor (M15) - Fixing Upper Unit (Unit of replacement: FIXING ASS'Y, UPPER) - Main Driver PCB (UN78) (Unit of replacement: MAIN DRIVE DRIVER PCB ASS'Y) [Remedy] Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts. Controller Fan error



Detection Description Remedy



E881-0001-00



It was detected that the Controller Fan was locked. [Related parts] - Controller Cooling Fan (FM04) - Main Controller PCB 1 (PWB01) (Unit of replacement: MAIN CONTROLLER PCB ASS'Y, 1) [Remedy] Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared. 1. Check the connector of the Controller Cooling Fan. 2. Visually check that the Controller Cooling Fan is rotated. a. If it is not rotated, replace the Controller Cooling Fan. b. If it is rotated, replace the Main Controller PCB. Board over heat error



Detection Description Remedy



Abnormal temperature of the Main Controller CPU was detected. [Related parts] - Main Controller PCB 1 (PWB01) (Unit of replacement: MAIN CONTROLLER PCB ASS'Y, 1) - Main Controller PCB 2 (PWB02) (Unit of replacement: MAIN CONTROLLER PCB ASS'Y, 2) [Remedy] Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared. a. If the error occurred during a service visit and then occurred again: 1. Replace the Main Controller PCB 1. 2. Replace the Main Controller PCB 2. [CAUTION] When replacing the Main Controller PCB 2, execute "Adjustment after the Main Controller PCB 2 replacement" in situation mode. b. If the error does not occur during a service visit but is found in the log: 1. Clean the inlet on the side where the fan is installed and remove dust. 2. Remove dust from the fan in the Controller Box. 3. If the space on the side where the fan is installed is less than 10 cm, ask the customer to secure enough space.



922



7. Error/Jam/Alarm E882-0001-05



Main Power Supply Switch error



Detection Description Remedy



E905-0001-05



The main power was not turned OFF due to the solenoid in the Main Power Switch not working. [Related parts] - Harnesses connecting the Main Controller PCB 2 (UN8/J523), the Relay Connector (4P) and the Power ON Switch (SW01/J3800 and J3801) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, LASER, CABLE, MAIN SWITCH DC) - Power ON Switch (SW01) (Unit of replacement: SWITCH, POWER SUPPLY) - Main Controller PCB 2 (UN8) (Unit of replacement: MAIN CONTROLLER PCB ASS'Y, 2) [Remedy] Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared. a. If the fuse of the Main Controller PCB 2 is blown out, 1. Check the harness and connector (caught cable, short circuit). 2. Check/replace the Main Controller PCB 2. b. If the fuse of the Main Controller PCB 2 is not blown out, 1. Check for any open circuit of the harness. 2. Check/replace the Main Power Supply Switch. POD Deck Air Assist Fan error



Detection Description Remedy



E905-0002-05



[POD Deck Lite] When the Air Assist Swing Motor fails to return to the HP although a specified period of time has passed [Related parts] - Harnesses from the Deck driver PCB to Box driver PCB - Harnesses from the Box driver PCB to Swing driver PCB - Harnesses from the Swing driver PCB to Swing motor - Swing motor - Swing HP sensor - Warming fan - Cooling fan - Box driver PCB - Swing driver PCB - Deck driver PCB - DC Controller PCB (UN01) (Unit of replacement: DC CONTROLLER PCB ASS'Y) [Remedy] Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts. [Reference] Before replacing the DC Controller PCB, back up the service mode data (approx. 2 min) and restore the backup data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected. - Backup: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMBUP - Restoration: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMRES POD Deck Air Assist Fan error



Detection Description Remedy



[POD Deck Lite] When the Pickup Motor Cooling Fan is not locked [Related parts] - Harnesses from the Deck driver PCB to Box driver PCB - Harnesses from the Box driver PCB to Swing driver PCB - Harnesses from the Swing driver PCB to Swing motor - Warming fan - Box driver PCB - Swing driver PCB - Deck driver PCB - DC Controller PCB (UN01) (Unit of replacement: DC CONTROLLER PCB ASS'Y) [Remedy] Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts. [Reference] Before replacing the DC Controller PCB, back up the service mode data (approx. 2 min) and restore the backup data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected. - Backup: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMBUP - Restoration: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMRES



923



7. Error/Jam/Alarm E905-0003-05



POD Deck Air Assist Fan error



Detection Description Remedy



E906-0001-05



[POD Deck Lite] When the Pickup Motor Cooling Fan is not unlocked [Related parts] - Harnesses from the Deck driver PCB to Box driver PCB - Harnesses from the Box driver PCB to Swing driver PCB - Harnesses from the Swing driver PCB to Swing motor - Cooling fan - Box driver PCB - Swing driver PCB - Deck driver PCB - DC Controller PCB (UN01) (Unit of replacement: DC CONTROLLER PCB ASS'Y) [Remedy] Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts. [Reference] Before replacing the DC Controller PCB, back up the service mode data (approx. 2 min) and restore the backup data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected. - Backup: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMBUP - Restoration: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMRES POD Deck Air Heater error



Detection Description Remedy



E906-0002-05



[POD Deck Lite] Air Heater high temperature error When 120 deg C or higher temperature is detected for 1 second consecutively [Related parts] - Harnesses from the Deck driver PCB to Air heater driver PCB - Harnesses from the Air heater driver PCB to Air heater - Air heater - Air heater driver - Deck driver PCB - DC Controller PCB (UN01) (Unit of replacement: DC CONTROLLER PCB ASS'Y) [Remedy] Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts. [Reference] Before replacing the DC Controller PCB, back up the service mode data (approx. 2 min) and restore the backup data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected. - Backup: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMBUP - Restoration: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMRES POD Deck Air Heater error



Detection Description Remedy



E996-0071-04



[POD Deck Lite] Air Heater low temperature error When the heater does not become Ready although a specified period of time has passed [Related parts] - Harnesses from the Deck driver PCB to Air heater driver PCB - Harnesses from the Air heater driver PCB to Air heater - Air heater - Air heater driver - Deck driver PCB - DC Controller PCB (UN01) (Unit of replacement: DC CONTROLLER PCB ASS'Y) [Remedy] Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts. [Reference] Before replacing the DC Controller PCB, back up the service mode data (approx. 2 min) and restore the backup data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected. - Backup: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMBUP - Restoration: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMRES Error for collecting sequence jam log (ADF)



Detection Description Remedy



E996-0CA1-05



Error for collecting jam log (ADF) [Remedy] Collect debug log and contact to the sales company. [Reference] By setting "COPIER (LEVEL2)> OPTION> FNC-SW> JM-ERR-R" to "1", it is handled as an error instead of a jam from the first occurrence. Error for collecting sequence jam log (Printer)



Detection Description Remedy



Error for collecting jam log (Printer) Collect debug log and contact to the sales company. [Reference] By setting "COPIER (LEVEL2)> OPTION> FNC-SW> JM-ERR-D" to "1", it is handled as an error instead of a jam from the first occurrence.



924



7. Error/Jam/Alarm E996-0CA2-05



Error for collecting sequence jam log (Printer)



Detection Description Remedy



E996-0CA3-05



Error for collecting jam log (Printer) Collect debug log and contact to the sales company. [Reference] By setting "COPIER (LEVEL2)> OPTION> FNC-SW> JM-ERR-D" to "1", it is handled as an error instead of a jam from the first occurrence. Error for collecting sequence jam log (Printer)



Detection Description Remedy



E996-0CA4-05



Error for collecting jam log (Printer) Collect debug log and contact to the sales company. [Reference] By setting "COPIER (LEVEL2)> OPTION> FNC-SW> JM-ERR-D" to "1", it is handled as an error instead of a jam from the first occurrence. Error for collecting sequence jam log (Printer)



Detection Description Remedy



E996-0CA5-05



Error for collecting jam log (Printer) Collect debug log and contact to the sales company. [Reference] By setting "COPIER (LEVEL2)> OPTION> FNC-SW> JM-ERR-D" to "1", it is handled as an error instead of a jam from the first occurrence. Error for collecting sequence jam log (Printer)



Detection Description Remedy



E996-0CAF-05



Error for collecting jam log (Printer) Collect debug log and contact to the sales company. [Reference] By setting "COPIER (LEVEL2)> OPTION> FNC-SW> JM-ERR-D" to "1", it is handled as an error instead of a jam from the first occurrence. Error for collecting sequence jam log (Printer)



Detection Description Remedy



Error for collecting jam log (Printer) Collect debug log and contact to the sales company. [Reference] By setting "COPIER (LEVEL2)> OPTION> FNC-SW> JM-ERR-D" to "1", it is handled as an error instead of a jam from the first occurrence.



925



7. Error/Jam/Alarm



Error Code (FAX) How to View Fax Error Codes When the service mode #1 SSSW SW01 Bit0 is set to "1" after installing the Fax Board, service error code is output on the communication management report, reception result report, and error transmission report in the event that the communication is resulted in an error. Moreover, when an error occurs, the error code can be checked by performing the following procedure. Status Monitor/Cancel > Send > Job Log > Details



The error codes displayed on the screen are shown in a list in "User Error Codes" and "Service Error Codes". For remedies for user error codes, refer to the User's Guide. For remedies for service error codes, refer to "G3/G4 Facsimile Error Code List (REVISION 2)" (document number: HY8-23A0-020) provided as a separate volume.



User error codes Regarding the user error codes, refer to Top > Troubleshooting > A Message or a Number Starting with "#" (an Error Code) Is Displayed > Countermeasures for Each Error Code.



Service Error Code Code ##3016



Cause



Remedy



[T/R] An instruction of disconnec- Perform a communication again. tion (BYE) was received from the network at an unexpected time.



*1: G3FAX *2: IPFAX No.*1



No.*2



T/R



Description



##100



##3100



[T]



at time of transmission, the procedural signal has been transmitted more than specified.



##101



##3101



[T/R]



the modem speed does not match that of the other party.



##102



##3102



[T]



at time of transmission, fall-back cannot be used.



##103



##3103



[R]



at time of reception, EOL cannot be detected for 5 sec (15 sec if CBT).



##104



##3104



[T]



at time of transmission, RTN or PIN is received.



##106



##3106



[R]



at time of reception, the procedural signal is received for 6 sec while in wait for the signal.



##107



##3107



[R]



at time of reception, the transmitting party cannot use fall-back.



##109



##3109



[T]



at time of transmission, a signal other than DIS, DTC, FTT, CFR, or CRP is received, and the procedural signal has been sent more than specified.



##111



##3111



[T/R]



memory error has occurred.



926



7. Error/Jam/Alarm No.*1



No.*2



T/R



Description



##114



##3114



[R]



at time of reception, RTN is transmitted.



##116



##3116



[T/R]



Disconnection of loop current was detected during communication.



##200



##3200



[R]



at time of reception, no image carrier is detected for 5 sec.



##201



##3201



[T/R]



DCN is received outside the normal parity procedure.



##204



##3204



[T]



DTC without transmission data is received.



##220



##3220



[T/R]



system error (main program out of control) has occurred.



##223



##3223



[T/R]



while a communication is under way, the line is cut.



##224



##3224



[T/R]



in communication, an error has occurred in the procedural signal.



##226



##3226



[T/R]



the stack printer has fallen outside the RAM area.



##227



##3227



[R]



An attempt was made to record a file without image.



##229



##3229



[R]



the recording unit has remained locked for 1 min.



##230



##3230



[T/R]



A unit for controlling the display has malfunctioned.



##231



##3231



[T/R]



A unit for controlling the Control Panel buttons has malfunctioned.



##232



##3232



[T]



encoding error has occurred.



##237



##3237



[R]



decoding error has occurred.



##238



##3238



[R]



the print control unit is out of order.



##261



##3261



[T/R]



system error has occurred.



##280



##3280



[T]



at time of transmission, the procedural signal has been transmitted more than specified.



##281



##3281



[T]



at time of transmission, the procedural signal has been transmitted more than specified.



##282



##3282



[T]



at time of transmission, the procedural signal has been transmitted more than specified.



##283



##3283



[T]



at time of transmission, the procedural signal has been transmitted more than specified.



##284



##3284



[T]



at time of transmission, DCN is received after transmission of TCF.



##285



##3285



[T]



at time of transmission, DCN is received after transmission of EOP.



##286



##3286



[T]



at time of transmission, DCN is received after transmission of EOM.



##287



##3287



[T]



at time of transmission DCN is received after transmission of MPS.



##288



##3288



[T]



after transmission of EOP, a signal other than PIN, PIP, MCF, RTP, or RTN has been received.



##289



##3289



[T]



after transmission of EOM, a signal other than PIN, PIP, MCF, RTP, or RTN has been received.



##290



##3290



[T]



after transmission of MPS, a signal other than PIN, PIP, MCF, RTP, or RTN has been received.



##670



##3670



[T]



at time of V.8 late start, the V.8 ability of DIS front the receiving party is expected to be detected, and the CI signal is expected to be transmitted in response; however, the procedure fails to advance, and the line is released because of T1 time-out.



##671



##3671



[R]



at time of V.8 arrival, procedure fails to move to phase 2 after detection of CM signal from caller, causing T1 time-out and releasing line.



##672



##3672



[T]



at time of V.34 transmission, a shift in procedure from phase 2 to phase 3 and thereafter stops, causing the machine to release the line and suffer T1 timeout.



##673



##3673



[R]



at time of V.34 reception, a shift in procedure from phase 2 to phase 3 and thereafter stops, causing the machine to release the line and suffer T1 timeout.



##674



##3674



[T]



at time of V.34 transmission, a shift in procedure from phase 3 and phase 4 to the control channel and thereafter stops, causing the machine to release the line and suffer T1 timeout.



##675



##3675



[R]



at time of V.34 reception, a shift in procedure from phase 3 and phase 4 to the control channel and thereafter stops, causing the machine to release the line and suffer T1 timeout.



##750



##3750



[T]



at time of ECM transmission, no meaningful signal is received after transmission of PPS-NULL, causing the procedural signal to be transmitted more than specified.



##752



##3752



[T]



at time of ECM transmission, DCN is received after transmission of PPS-NULL.



##753



##3753



[T]



at time of ECM transmission, the procedural signal has been transmitted more than specified after transmission of PPS-NULL, or T5 time-out (60 sec) has occurred.



##754



##3754



[T]



at time of ECM transmission, the procedural signal has been transmitted more than specified after transmission of PPS-NULL.



927



7. Error/Jam/Alarm No.*1



No.*2



T/R



Description



##755



##3755



[T]



at time of ECM transmission, no meaningful signal is received after transmission of PPS-MPS, causing the procedural signal to be transmitted more than specified.



##757



##3757



[T]



at time of ECM transmission, DCN is received after retransmission of PPS-MPS.



##758



##3758



[T]



at time of ECM transmission, the procedural signal has been transmitted more than specified after transmission of PPS-MPS, or T5 time-out (60 sec) has occurred.



##759



##3759



[T]



at time of ECM transmission, the procedural signal has been transmitted more than specified after transmission of PPS-MPS.



##760



##3760



[T]



at time of ECM transmission, no meaningful signal is received after transmission of PPS-EOM, causing the procedural signal to be transmitted more than specified.



##762



##3762



[T]



at time of ECM transmission, DCN is received after transmission of PPS-EOM.



##763



##3763



[T]



at time of ECM transmission, the procedural signal has been transmitted more than specified after transmission of PPS-MPS, or T5 time-out (60 sec) has occurred.



##764



##3764



[T]



at time of ECM transmission, the procedural signal has been transmitted more than specified after transmission of PPS-EOM.



##765



##3765



[T]



at time of ECM transmission, no meaningful signal is received after transmission of PPS-EOP, causing the procedural signal to be transmitted more than specified.



##767



##3767



[T]



at time of ECM transmission, DCN is received after transmission of PPS-EOP.



##768



##3768



[T]



at time of ECM transmission, the procedural signal has been transmitted more than specified after transmission of PPS-EOP, or T5 time-out (60 sec) has occurred.



##769



##3769



[T]



at time of ECM transmission, the procedural signal has been transmitted more than specified after transmission of PPS-EOP.



##770



##3770



[T]



at time of ECM transmission, no meaningful signal is received after transmission of EOR-NULL, causing the procedural signal to be transmitted more than specified.



##772



##3772



[T]



at time of ECM transmission, DCN is received after transmission of EOR-NULL.



##773



##3773



[T]



at time of ECM transmission, the procedural signal has been transmitted more than specified after transmission of EOR-NULL, or T5 time-out (60 sec) has occurred.



##774



##3774



[T]



at time of ECM transmission, ERR is received after transmission of EOR-NULL.



##775



##3775



[T]



at time of ECM transmission, no meaningful signal is received after transmission of EOR-MPS, causing the procedural signal to be transmitted more than specified.



##777



##3777



[T]



at time of ECM transmission, DCN is received after transmission of EOR-MPS.



##778



##3778



[T]



at time of ECM transmission, the procedural signal has been transmitted more than specified after transmission EOR-MPS, or T5 time-out (60 sec) has occurred.



##779



##3779



[T]



at time of ECM transmission, ERR is received after transmission of EOR-MPS.



##780



##3780



[T]



at time of ECM transmission, no meaningful signal is received after transmission of EOR-EOM, causing the procedural signal to be transmitted more than specified.



##782



##3782



[T]



at time of ECM transmission, DCN is received after transmission of EOR-EOM.



##783



##3783



[T]



at time of ECM transmission, the procedural signal has been transmitted more than specified after transmission of EOR-EOM, or T5 time-out (60 sec) has occurred.



##784



##3784



[T]



at time of ECM transmission, ERR is received after transmission of EOR-EOM.



##785



##3785



[T]



at time of ECM transmission, no meaningful signal is received after transmission of EOR-EOP, causing the procedural signal to be transmitted more than specified.



##787



##3787



[T]



at time of ECM transmission, DCN is received after transmission of EOR-EOP.



##788



##3788



[T]



at time of ECM transmission, the procedural signal has been transmitted more than specified after transmission of EOR-EOP, or T5 time-out (60 sec) has occurred.



##789



##3789



[T]



at time of ECM transmission, ERR is received after transmission of EOR-EOP.



##790



##3790



[R]



at time of ECM reception, ERR is transmitted after transmission of EOR-Q.



##791



##3791



[T/R]



while ECM mode procedure is under way, a signal other than a meaningful signal is received.



##792



##3792



[R]



at time of ECM reception, PPS-NULL cannot be detected over partial page processing.



##793



##3793



[R]



at time of ECM reception, no effective frame is received while high-speed signal reception is under way, thus causing time-out.



##794



##3794



[T]



at time of ECM reception, PPR with all 0s is received.



##795



##3795



[T/R]



a fault has occurred in code processing for communication.



##796



##3796



[T/R]



a fault has occurred in code processing for communication.



928



7. Error/Jam/Alarm



Alarm Code Alarm Code Details 00-0085



A notice of stat



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



-



00-0246



Error code display (4-digit)



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



Soft counter PCB cannot write normally



00-0247



Error code display (4-digit)



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



Soft counter PCB cannot restore data



01-0001



Notification of disabled to obtain counter values for a certain period of time



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



Counter information is not set to UGW * Not displayed on service mode history due to the alarm being generated by UGW



01-0002



No change in device status after specified period of time has passed (RDS server creates)



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



-



01-0004



Notification of IP address change



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



IP address has been changed * Not displayed on service mode history due to the alarm being generated by UGW



01-0005



Restricted operation notification



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



The device entered limited function mode for some reason. * Not displayed on service mode history due to the alarm being generated by UGW



02-0020



Dust correction (paper front) occurrence



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



Movement: Execute correction process to the pixel where dust is detected (image on paper front) Cause: Dust is detected on the Stream Read Glass (paper front). Measures: Clean the Stream Read Glass (paper front), and check if the Platen Roller 1 is soiled. If necessary, clean it.



02-0021



Dust correction (paper back) occurrence



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



Movement: Execute correction process to the pixel where dust is detected (image on paper back with 1-Path DADF). Cause: Dust is detected on the Scanner Glass (paper back). Measures: Clean and check the Scanner Glass (paper back), and check if the Platen Roller 2 is soiled.



02-0025



Insufficient Scanner Unit LED light intensity alarm



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



In the case that the light intensity is insufficient at LED lighting. (Some of the LEDs are OFF. Scanning can be continued.)



929



7. Error/Jam/Alarm 04-0001



Right Deck Lifter error



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



Movement: The Right Deck Lifter Motor (M4) is stopped. Not using the Right Deck. Cause: The Right Deck Lifter does not rise, failure of the Right Deck Paper Height Sensor (PS6). Measures: 1. Turn OFF/ON the power. When it is recovered, the measure is completed. If it is not recovered, execute the following measures. 2. Check if the Deck Lifter rises. If not, execute the following measures. If an alarm occurs although it rises, execute step 5 and later steps. 3. Check the connection between the Right Deck Lifter Motor (M4) and the Feed Driver PCB (PCB3). Motor side: J2069, PCB side: J225 4. Replace the Right Deck. 5. Check the connection between the Right Deck Paper Height Sensor (PS6) and the Feed Driver PCB (PCB3). Sensor side: J2063, J3633 (relay), PCB side: J222 6. Check the operation of the Right Deck Paper Height Sensor (PS6), and replace it. 7. Replace the Feed Driver PCB (PCB3).



04-0002



Left Deck Lifter error



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



Movement: The Left Deck Lifter Motor (M5) is stopped. Not using the Left Deck. Cause: The Left Deck Lifter does not rise, failure of the Left Deck Paper Height Sensor (PS10). Measures: 1. Turn OFF and then ON the power. When it is recovered, the measure is completed. If it is not recovered, execute the following measures. 2. Check if the Deck Lifter rises. If not, execute the following measures. If an alarm occurs although it rises, execute step 5 and later steps. 3. Check the connection between the Left Deck Lifter Motor (M5) and the Feed Driver PCB (PCB3). Motor side: J2051, PCB side: J225 4. Replace the Left Deck. 5. Check the connection between the Left Deck Paper Height Sensor (PS10) and the Feed Driver PCB (PCB3). Sensor side: J2045, J3634 (relay), PCB side: J221 6. Check the operation of the Left Deck Paper Height Sensor (PS10), and replace it if necessary. 7. Replace the Feed Driver PCB (PCB3).



04-0003



Cassette 3 Lifter error



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



Movement: The Cassette 3 Lifter Motor (M20) is stopped. Not using the Cassette 3. Cause: The Cassette Lifter does not rise, failure of the Cassette 3 Paper Height Sensor (PS17). Measures: 1. Turn OFF and then ON the power. When it is recovered, the measure is completed. If it is not recovered, execute the following measures. 2. Check if the Deck Lifter rises. If not, execute the following measures. If an alarm occurs although it rises, execute step 5 and later steps. 3. Check the connection between the Cassette 3 Lifter Motor (M20) and the Feed Driver PCB (PCB3). Motor side: J2072, PCB side: J225 4. Replace the Cassette 3. 5. Check the connection between the Cassette 3 Paper Height Sensor (PS17) and the Feed Driver PCB (PCB3). Sensor side: J2080, J3635 (relay), PCB side: J223 6. Check the operation of the Cassette 3 Paper Height Sensor (PS17), and replace it if necessary. 7. Replace the Feed Driver PCB (PCB3).



930



7. Error/Jam/Alarm 04-0004



Cassette 4 Lifter error



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



Movement: The Cassette 4 Lifter Motor (M21) is stopped. Not using the Cassette 4. Cause: The Cassette 4 Lifter does not rise, failure of the Cassette 4 Paper Height Sensor (PS18). Measures: 1. Turn OFF and then ON the power. When it is recovered, the measure is completed. If it is not recovered, execute the following measures. 2. Check if the Deck Lifter rises. If not, execute the following measures. If an alarm occurs although it rises, execute step 5 and later steps. 3. Check the connection between the Cassette 4 Lifter Motor (M21) and the Feed Driver PCB (PCB3). Motor side: J2074, PCB side: J225 4. Replace the Cassette 4. 5. Check the connection between the Cassette 4 Paper Height Sensor (PS18) and the Feed Driver PCB (PCB3). Sensor side: J2091, J3636 (relay), PCB side: J224 6. Check the operation of the Cassette 4 Paper Height Sensor (PS18), and replace it if necessary. 7. Replace the Feed Driver PCB (PCB3).



04-0010



Notification of jam left untouched



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



Jam is left untouched * Not displayed on service mode history due to the alarm being generated by UGW



04-0031



Right Deck Lifter Motor overcurrent alarm



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



Movement: The Right Deck Lifter Motor (M4) is stopped. Not using the Right Deck. Cause: The Right Deck is above the upper limit or is stopped along the way. Measures: 1. Check the connection between the Right Deck Lifter Motor (M4) and the Feed Driver PCB (PCB3). Motor side: J2069, PCB side: J225 2. Replace the Right Deck Lifter Motor (M4). 3. Check the Right Deck Upper Limit Sensor (PS8). 4. Check the Right Deck Lifter Gear (damage, foreign matter, etc.). 5.Replace the Feed Driver PCB (PCB3).



04-0032



Left Deck Lifter Motor overcurrent alarm



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



Movement: The Left Deck Lifter Motor (M5) is stopped. Not using the Left Deck. Cause: The Left Deck is above the upper limit or is stopped along the way. Measures: 1. Check the connection between the Left Deck Lifter Motor (M5) and the Feed Driver PCB (PCB3). Motor side: J2069, PCB side: J225 2. Replace the Left Deck Lifter Motor (M5). 3. Check the Left Deck Upper Limit Sensor (PS12). 4. Check the Left Deck Lifter Gear (damage, foreign matter, etc.). 5. Replace the Feed Driver PCB (PCB3).



04-0033



Cassette 3 Lifter Motor overcurrent alarm



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



Movement: The Cassette 3 Lifter Motor (M20) is stopped. Not using the Cassette 3. Cause: The Cassette 3 is above the upper limit or is stopped along the way. Measures: 1. Check the connection between the Cassette 3 Lifter Motor (M20) and the Feed Driver PCB (PCB3). Motor side: J2072, PCB side: J225 2. Replace the Cassette 3 Lifter Motor (M20). 3. Check the Cassette 3 Upper Limit Sensor (PS68). 4. Check the Cassette 3 Lifter Gear (damage, foreign matter, etc.). 5. Replace the Feed Driver PCB (PCB3).



931



7. Error/Jam/Alarm 04-0034



Cassette 4 Lifter Motor overcurrent alarm



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



Movement: The Cassette 4 Lifter Motor (M21) is stopped. Not using the Cassette 4. Cause: The Cassette 4 is above the upper limit or is stopped along the way. Measures: 1. Check the connection between the Cassette 4 Lifter Motor (M21) and the Feed Driver PCB (PCB3). Motor side: J2072, PCB side: J225 2. Replace the Cassette 4 Lifter Motor (M21). 3. Check the Cassette 4 Upper Limit Sensor (PS71). 4. Check the Cassette 4 Lifter Gear (damage, foreign matter, etc.). 5. Replace the Feed Driver PCB (PCB3).



04-0069



Error in Right Deck Pickup Solenoid connection



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



Movement: Jam occurred when picking up from the Right Deck. Cause: Connection of the Right Deck Pickup Solenoid (SL6) cannot be detected. Measures: 1. Check the connection of the Right Deck Pickup Solenoid (SL6). Solenoid side: J2070, Pickup Unit side: J3633, Feed Driver PCB side: J222 2. Replace the Right Deck Pickup Solenoid (SL6). 3. Replace the Feed Driver PCB (PCB3).



04-0070



Error in Left Deck Pickup Solenoid connection



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



Movement: Jam occurred when picking up from the Left Deck. Cause: Connection of the Left Deck Pickup Solenoid (SL7) cannot be detected. Measures: 1. Check the connection of the Left Deck Pickup Solenoid (SL7). Solenoid side: J2052, Pickup Unit side: J3634, Feed Driver PCB side: J221 2. Replace the Left Deck Pickup Solenoid (SL7). 3. Replace the Feed Driver PCB (PCB3).



04-0071



Error in Cassette 3 Pickup Solenoid connection



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



Movement: Jam occurred when picking up from the Cassette 3. Cause: Connection of the Cassette 3 Pickup Solenoid (SL3) cannot be detected. Measures: 1. Check the connection of the Cassette 3 Pickup Solenoid (SL3). Solenoid side: J2073, Pickup Unit side: J3635, Feed Driver PCB side: J223 2. Replace the Cassette 3 Pickup Solenoid (SL3). 3. Replace the Feed Driver PCB (PCB3).



04-0072



Error in Cassette 4 Pickup Solenoid connection



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



Movement: Jam occurred when picking up from the Cassette 4. Cause: Connection of the Cassette 4 Pickup Solenoid (SL4) cannot be detected. Measures: 1. Check the connection of the Cassette 4 Pickup Solenoid (SL4). Solenoid side: J2075, Pickup Unit side: J3636, Feed Driver PCB side: J224 2. Replace the Cassette 4 Pickup Solenoid (SL4). 3. Replace the Feed Driver PCB (PCB3).



04-0073



Error in Multi-purpose Pickup Solenoid connection



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



Movement: Jam occurred when picking up from the Multi-purpose Tray. Cause: Connection of the Multi-purpose Pickup Solenoid (SL2) cannot be detected. Measures: 1. Check the connection of the Multi-purpose Pickup Solenoid (SL2). Solenoid side: J2001, Relay: J3060, J3121, J3235, Main Driver PCB side: J106 2. Replace the Multi-purpose Pickup Solenoid (SL2). 3. Replace the Main Driver PCB (PCB2).



932



7. Error/Jam/Alarm 04-0074



Error in Left Deck Merging Solenoid connection



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



Movement: Jam occurred when picking up from the Left Deck. Cause: Connection of the Left Deck Merging Solenoid (SL11) cannot be detected. Measures: 1. Check the connection of the Left Deck Merging Solenoid (SL11). Solenoid side: J2106, Relay side: J3270, Duplex Driver PCB side: J343 2. Replace the Left Deck Merging Solenoid (SL11). 3. Replace the Duplex Driver PCB (PCB4).



04-0075



Error in Reverse Detachment Solenoid connection



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



Movement: Jam occurred at the time of large size paper reverse delivery. Cause: Connection of the Reverse Detachment Solenoid (SL12) cannot be detected. Measures: 1. Check the connection of the Reverse Detachment Solenoid (SL12). Solenoid side: J2176, Duplex Driver PCB side: J340 2. Replace the Reverse Detachment Solenoid (SL12). 3. Replace the Duplex Driver PCB (PCB4).



04-1537



Deck Lifter descent alarm (POD Deck Lite/Paper Deck Unit)



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



Cause: - Error in the Lifter Plate or error in the Lifter Wire - Error in the Deck Lifter Motor or error in the harness - Error in the Deck Lifter Lower Position Sensor or error in the harness - Error in the Relay Paper Sensor or error in the harness Detection condition/timing: The Deck Lifter Lower Position Sensor was not turned ON within the specified period of time when lowering the lifter. Movement/symptom: The machine automatically enters limited functions mode. (The Deck cannot be used.) Measures: 1.Open the compartment and check for any foreign matter in it. If there is any foreign matter, remove it. 2.Check that the Lifter Plate is not caught by the Side Guide. If there is a catch, repair it. 3.Remove the deck front cover, and check that the lifter wire is properly installed (no coming off, disconnection, slack, or winding in the reverse direction). If there is an error, repair it. When the lifter wire is wound in the reverse direction at the deck lifter alarm (04-1537) occurrence, execute the following service mode. - Drive of Deck Lifter Motor: COPIER> FUNCTION> CST> DK1-LIFT 4.Execute service mode: COPIER> FUNCTION> CLEAR> DK-RCV and clear the Deck Lifter descent alarm. 5.Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 6.Push the Relay Paper Sensor Flag and check that the Lifter Plate being lowered stops at the lowest position. a. If it is not lowered: - Check/replace the harness and connector between the Deck Driver PCB and the Relay Paper Sensor. - Check/replace the harness and connector between the Box Driver PCB and the Deck Lifter Motor. - Replace the Relay Paper Sensor. - Replace the Box Driver PCB. b. Although it is lowered, it does not stop at the lowest position. - Check/replace the harness and connector between the Box Driver PCB and the Deck Lifter Lower Position Sensor. - Replace the Box Driver PCB. - Replace the Deck Lifter Lower Position Sensor.



933



7. Error/Jam/Alarm 04-1539



Deck Paper Level Sensor alarm (POD Deck Lite/Paper Deck Unit)



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



Cause: - Error in the Lifter Plate or error in the Lifter Wire - Error in the Paper Level Sensor or error in the harness - Error in the Relay Paper Sensor or error in the harness - Error in the Deck Lifter Motor or error in the harness Detection condition/timing: The Deck Paper Level Sensor was not turned ON within the specified period of time when raising the lifter. Movement/symptom: The machine automatically enters limited functions mode. (The Deck cannot be used.) Measures: 1.Open the compartment and check that the Lifter Plate is not caught by the Side Guide. If there is a catch, repair it. 2.Remove the deck front cover, and check that the lifter wire is properly installed (no coming off, disconnection, or slack). If there is an error, repair it. 3.Remove the deck right cover, close the compartment. 4.Turn OFF/ON the main power switch, and check if the Lifter Plate is raised from the right side. 5.If it is not raised, execute the following operations. - Check/replace the harness and connector between the Deck Driver PCB and the Paper Level Sensor. - Check/replace the harness and connector between the Deck Driver PCB and the Relay Paper Sensor. - Check/replace the harness and connector between the Box Driver PCB and the Deck Lifter Motor. - Check/replace the harness and connector between the Box Driver PCB and the Deck Driver PCB. - Replace the Paper Level Sensor. - Replace the Relay Paper Sensor. - Replace the Deck Lifter Motor. - Replace the Box Driver PCB. - Replace the Deck Driver PCB.



04-1542



Deck Lifter upper limit alarm (POD Deck Lite/Paper Deck Unit)



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



Cause: - Error in the Deck Lifter Upper Limit Sensor 1/2 or error in the harness - Error in the Paper Level Sensor or error in the harness Detection condition/timing: The Deck Lifter Upper Limit Sensor 1/2 were turned ON while raising the lifter. Movement/symptom: The machine automatically enters limited functions mode. (The Deck cannot be used.) Measures: 1.Check for any damaged parts around the flag of the Deck Lifter Upper Limit Sensor 1/2. 2.Check/replace the harness and connector between the Box Driver PCB and the Deck Lifter Upper Limit Sensor 1/2. 3.Check/replace the harness and connector between the Box Driver PCB and the Paper Level Sensor. 4.Replace the Deck Lifter Upper Limit Sensor 1/2. 5.Replace the Paper Level Sensor. 6.Replace the Box Driver PCB.



934



7. Error/Jam/Alarm 04-1543



Deck lifter lower limit alarm (POD Deck Lite/Paper Deck Unit)



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



Cause: - Error in the Deck Lifter Lower Position Sensor or error in the harness - Error in the Deck Lifter Lower Limit Switch or error in the harness Detection condition/timing: The Deck Lifter Lower Limit Switch was turned ON while lowering the lifter. Movement/symptom: The machine automatically enters limited functions mode. (The Deck cannot be used.) Measures: 1.Check for any damaged parts around the flag of the Deck Lifter Lower Position Sensor. If there are damaged parts, replace it. 2.Check/replace the harness and connector between the Box Driver PCB and the Deck Lifter Lower Position Sensor. 3.Check/replace the harness and connector between the Box Driver PCB and the Deck Lifter Lower Limit Switch. 4.Check/replace the harness and connector between the Box Driver PCB and the Deck Lifter Lower Limit Switch. 5.Replace the Deck Lifter Lower Position Sensor. 6.Replace the Deck Lifter Lower Limit Switch. 7.Replace the Box Driver PCB.



04-1553



Deck Warming Fan alarm (POD Deck Lite)



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



Cause: Error in the Warming Fan (FM2) or error in the harness Detection condition/timing: Rotation speed error of the Warming Fan was detected. Movement/symptom: The machine automatically enters limited functions mode. (The Deck cannot be used.) Measures: 1.Check/replace the harness and connector between the Swing Driver PCB and the Warming Fan. 2.Check/replace the harness and connector between the Swing Driver PCB and the Box Driver PCB. 3.Check/replace the harness and connector between the Box Driver PCB and the Deck Driver PCB. 4.Replace the Warming Fan. 5.Replace the Swing Driver PCB. 6.Replace the Box Driver PCB. 7.Replace the Deck Driver PCB.



04-1555



Deck Cooling Fan alarm (POD Deck Lite)



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



Cause: Error in the Cooling Fan (FM3) or error in the harness Detection condition/timing: Rotation speed error of the Cooling Fan was detected. Movement/symptom: The machine automatically enters limited functions mode. (The Deck cannot be used.) Measures: 1.Check/replace the harness and connector between the Swing Driver PCB and the Cooling Fan. 2.Check/replace the harness and connector between the Swing Driver PCB and the Box Driver PCB. 3.Check/replace the harness and connector between the Box Driver PCB and the Deck Driver PCB. 4.Replace the Cooling Fan. 5.Replace the Swing Driver PCB. 6.Replace the Box Driver PCB. 7.Replace the Deck Driver PCB.



935



7. Error/Jam/Alarm 04-1581



Deck Swing HP Sensor alarm (POD Deck Lite)



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



Cause: - Error in the Swing HP Sensor (SR16) or error in the harness - Error in the Swing Motor (M4) or error in the harness Detection condition/timing: There was no change in the Swing HP Sensor although a specified period of time has passed. Movement/symptom: The machine automatically enters limited functions mode. (The Deck cannot be used.) Measures: 1.Check/replace the harness and connector between the Swing Driver PCB and the Swing HP Sensor. 2.Check/replace the harness and connector between the Swing Driver PCB and the Swing Motor. 3.Check/replace the harness and connector between the Swing Driver PCB and the Box Driver PCB. 4.Check/replace the harness and connector between the Box Driver PCB and the Deck Driver PCB. 5.Replace the Swing HP Sensor. 6.Replace the Swing Motor. 7.Replace the Swing Driver PCB. 8.Replace the Box Driver PCB. 9.Replace the Deck Driver PCB.



04-1582



Deck Power Supply Cooling Fan alarm (POD Deck Lite)



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



Cause: Error in the Power Supply Cooling Fan (FM1) or error in the harness Detection condition/timing: The lock signal of the Power Supply Cooling Fan could not be detected for 1 sec. Movement/symptom: The machine automatically enters limited functions mode. (The Deck cannot be used.) Measures: 1.Check/replace the harness and connector between the Deck Driver PCB and the Power Supply Cooling Fan. 2.Replace the Power Supply Cooling Fan. 3.Replace the Deck Driver PCB.



04-1583



Deck Air Heater low temperature alarm (POD Deck Lite)



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



Cause: Error in the Air Heater (H2) or error in the harness Detection condition/timing: After the Air Heater was turned on, the heater Ready signal is not turned on within 6 minutes. Movement/symptom: The machine automatically enters limited functions mode. (The Deck cannot be used.) Measures: 1.Check/replace the harness and connector between the Air Heater Driver PCB and the Air Heater. 2.Replace the Air Heater. 3.Replace the Air Heater Driver PCB. 4.Replace the Deck Driver PCB.



04-1584



Deck Air Heater overheating alarm (POD Deck Lite)



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



Cause: Error in the Air Heater (H2) or error in the harness Detection condition/timing: After the Air Heater was turned on, the heater error signal was turned on 2 minutes or later. Movement/symptom: The machine automatically enters limited functions mode. (The Deck cannot be used.) Measures: 1.Check/replace the harness and connector between the Air Heater Driver PCB and the Air Heater. 2.Replace the Air Heater. 3.Replace the Air Heater Driver PCB. 4.Replace the Deck Driver PCB.



936



7. Error/Jam/Alarm 04-1585



Deck Pickup Release Solenoid Cooling Fan alarm (POD Deck Lite/Paper Deck Unit)



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



Cause: Error in the Pickup Release Solenoid Cooling Fan (FM4) or error in the harness Detection condition/timing: The fan lock detection signal is not detected ON while the Pickup Release Solenoid Cooling Fan is driven. Movement/symptom: The machine automatically enters limited functions mode. (The Deck cannot be used.) Measures: 1.Check/replace the harness and connector between the Deck Driver PCB and the Pickup Release Solenoid Cooling Fan. 2.Replace the Pickup Release Solenoid Cooling Fan. 3.Replace the Deck Driver PCB.



04-1586



Deck interlock alarm (POD Deck Lite/Paper Deck Unit)



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



Cause: - Error in the Compartment Open/Close Sensor or error in the harness - Error in the Compartment Open/Close Switch or error in the harness Detection condition/timing: The interlock was not detected with the Compartment Open/Close Sensor ON. Movement/symptom: The machine automatically enters limited functions mode. (The Deck cannot be used.) Measures: 1.Check if the compartment is halfway closed. If it is halfway closed, close it properly. 2.Close the compartment and check whether the Compartment Open/Close Sensor and the Compartment Open/Close Switch respond normally by I/O of the service mode. 3.Check/replace the harness (integrated with a switch) and connector between the Deck Driver PCB and the Compartment Open/Close Switch. 4.Check/replace the harness and connector between the Deck Driver PCB and the Compartment Open/Close Sensor. 5.Replace the Compartment Open/Close Sensor. 6.Replace the Deck Driver PCB.



04-1587



Deck Pickup Motor disengagement alarm (POD Deck Lite/Paper Deck Unit)



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



Cause: - Error in the Deck Pickup Motor or error in the harness - Error in the Separation Roller Sensor or error in the harness - Error in the Pickup Assembly Detection condition/timing: The Separation Roller Sensor did not respond when disengaging the Feed/Separation Roller. Movement/symptom: The machine automatically enters limited functions mode. (The Deck cannot be used.) Measures: 1.Check/replace the harness and connector between the Deck Driver PCB and the Deck Pickup Motor. 2.Check/replace the harness and connector between the Deck Driver PCB and the Separation Roller Sensor. 3.Replace the Deck Pickup Motor and Separation Roller Sensor. 4.Replace the Deck Driver PCB. 5.Check the rear coupling of the Deck Pickup Assembly. If there is an error, replace it.



06-0003



Web absence notice



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



Movement: The Web Drive Solenoid is turned ON 4 times after the Fixing Cleaning Web Level Sensor performs detection. Cause: Remaining level of the Fixing Cleaning Web is low. Measures: Replace the Fixing Cleaning Web.



09-0006



2D Shading ROM error 1



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



Movement: Turn OFF the 2D Shading. Cause: After clearing the drum, not reading the EEPROM. Measures: Execute COPIER>FUNCTION>2D-SHADE>2D-READ.



937



7. Error/Jam/Alarm 09-0007



2D Shading ROM error 2



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



Movement: Turn OFF the 2D Shading. Cause: After reading ROM data, calculated checksum value and checksum of ROM does not match. Measures: Install the correct ROM.



09-0008



Drum HP signal noise alarm



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



Movement: Only when the 2D shading is ON, the accuracy of shading is degraded and an image error occurs. Uneven density may occur. Cause: The Drum HP cycle is shorter than the specified cycle. Measures: 1. Install the Drum HP Sensor (PS61) and check the connector. 2. Check the Drum HP Flag. 3. Check the harness between the Drum HP Sensor (PS61) and the Main Driver PCB (PCB2). (Between J2137 and J107) 4. Replace the Drum HP Sensor (PS61). 5. Replace the Main Driver PCB (PCB2). 6. Check the harness between the Main Driver PCB (PCB2) and the DCON PCB (PCB1). (Between J125 and J411 and between J126 and J412) 7. Replace the DCON PCB (PCB1).



09-0009



Drum HP signal absence alarm



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



Movement: Only when the 2D shading is ON, the accuracy of shading is degraded and an image error occurs. Uneven density may occur. Cause: The Drum HP cycle is longer than the specified cycle. Measures: 1. Install the Drum HP Sensor (PS61) and check the connector. 2. Check the Drum HP Flag. 3. Check the harness between the Drum HP Sensor (PS61) and the Main Driver PCB (PCB2). (Between J2137 and J107) 4. Replace the Drum HP Sensor (PS61). 5. Replace the Main Driver PCB (PCB2). 6. Check the harness between the Main Driver PCB (PCB2) and the DCON PCB (PCB1). (Between J125 and J411 and between J126 and J412) 7. Replace the DCON PCB (PCB1).



10-0001



Toner Low (Black) alarm



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



Low toner was detected and UGW generated an alarm. * Not displayed on service mode history due to the alarm being generated by UGW



10-0002



Toner Low (Cyan) alarm



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



Low toner was detected and UGW generated an alarm. * Not displayed on service mode history due to the alarm being generated by UGW



10-0003



Toner Low (Magenta) alarm



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



Low toner was detected and UGW generated an alarm. * Not displayed on service mode history due to the alarm being generated by UGW



10-0004



Toner Low (Yellow) alarm



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



Low toner was detected and UGW generated an alarm. * Not displayed on service mode history due to the alarm being generated by UGW



10-0020



Toner (Bk) prior delivery alarm



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy 10-0100



Toner bottle change notification alarm



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



938



7. Error/Jam/Alarm 10-0404



Toner Bottle empty alarm (Bk)



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



It was detected that Toner (Bk) was emptied.



10-F020



Toner (Bk) high consumption alarm



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



It was detected that the target part was at a high level of daily consumption.



11-0001



Waste Toner Container full



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



Movement: A message "The waste toner container is full." is displayed on the Control Panel, and the machine is stopped. Cause: Detected waste toner bottle full. Measures: Clean the Waste Toner Container. Reset the Waste Toner Counter.



11-0010



Near-full state of the Waste Toner Container



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



Detection of near-full state of the Waste Toner Container



11-0100



Waste Toner Container replacement completion alarm



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



Completion of Waste Toner Container replacement was detected.



11-F010



Waste Toner Container high consumption alarm



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



It was detected that the target part was at a high level of daily consumption.



13-002F



For R&D



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy 13-0FFC



For R&D



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy 13-0FFD



For R&D



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy 13-0FFE



For R&D



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy 13-0FFF



For R&D



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy 14-0000



For R&D



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy 14-0001



For R&D



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy 14-1000



For R&D



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



939



7. Error/Jam/Alarm 30-0004



Pre-transfer Charging PCB Harness disconnection (connection error)



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



Movement: Pre-transfer charging high voltage is not output. An image error like discharge trace occurs. Cause: Connection error of the Pre-transfer Charging PCB (PCB26). Measures: 1. Check the connection between the Main Driver PCB (PCB2) and the High Voltage Unit. Main Driver PCB side: J112, High Voltage Unit side: J3098 2. Check the connection inside of the High Voltage Unit. High Voltage Unit inlet side: J3098, Pre-transfer Charging PCB side: J3544 3. Replace the Pre-transfer Charging PCB (PCB26). 4. Replace the Main Driver PCB (PCB2).



31-0005



Environment Sensor reading alarm



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



Movement: It becomes as follow: environment temperature= 0 degC, environment humidity= 0%. Cause: Connection of the Environment Sensor cannot be detected. Measures: 1) Check the connection of the Environment Sensor (THU1). 2) Replace the Environment Sensor (THU1).



31-0006



HDD failure when equipped with the mirroring function



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



HDD failure when equipped with the mirroring function



31-0008



HDD failure prediction alarm



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



Movement: HDD failure is expected to occur in a short time due to occurrence of physical error in HDD. It does not occur in the HDD of mirroring configuration. Cause: Error in the S.M.A.R.T. value of HDD Measures: 1. Back up the data stored in HDD. 2. Replace the HDD. 3. Restore the data. S.M.A.R.T. (Self-Monitoring Analysis and Reporting Technology): Self-diagnosis function built in the HDD. The occurrence rate of reading error, reading and writing speed, the total number of Motor start-up and stop times, the total length of power-on time, etc. are monitored.



31-0009



FLASH failure prediction alarm



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



Cause: Error in the S.M.A.R.T. value of FLASH memory It indicates a physical error of the FLASH memory, which is expected to soon lead to a failure. *: S.M.A.R.T. (Self-Monitoring Analysis and Reporting Technology) = It is a self-diagnosis function built in the FLASH memory, and monitors the occurrence rate of reading errors, reading/writing speed, total number of times of motor start-up/stop, total length of power-on time, etc. Continuously using the machine without taking any measures may lead to E614. Measures: Back up the data stored in the FLASH memory, and restore the data after replacing the FLASH memory.



31-0010



The configuration of an option controlled by the Main Controller has been changed



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



A change in configuration of an option such as a change in the configuration of the Fax Board, a change in the configuration of the Voice Board, or a change in the configuration of the option HDD, which requires turning OFF and then ON the power, was detected. Detection condition/timing:At the time of startup only Remedy:Turn OFF and then ON the main power.



31-0020



The configuration of an option controlled by the RCON has been changed



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



Due to a change in the configuration related to the scanner, a change in the hardware configuration which requires turning OFF and then ON the power was detected. Detection condition/timing:At the time of startup only Remedy:Turn OFF and then ON the main power.



940



7. Error/Jam/Alarm 31-0030



The configuration of an option controlled by the DCON has been changed



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



Due to a change in the configuration related to the printer, a change in the hardware configuration which requires turning OFF and then ON the power was detected. Detection condition/timing:At the time of startup only Remedy:Turn OFF and then ON the main power.



31-0106



For R&D



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



-



31-0116



For R&D



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



-



31-0126



For R&D



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



-



31-0136



For R&D



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



-



31-01F1



For R&D



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



-



31-01F2



For R&D



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



-



31-01F3



For R&D



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



-



31-01F4



For R&D



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



-



31-01F5



For R&D



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



-



31-01F6



For R&D



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



-



941



7. Error/Jam/Alarm 32-0002



Potential control (VL control) error



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



Cause: The measured value in the dark area (VL) differs over +/-10V but less than +/-30V than the target potential at potential control. Movement: Not reflecting the result of VL control. To the laser power determined with VL control, the power with which the previous potential control was succeeded (within target potential +/-10V) is applied. Measures: If there is no influence on image, measures are not needed. If not, execute the following measures. 1. Check the installation of the Pre-exposure LED (connector connection, open circuit, the caught cable). 2. Check the installation of the Primary Charging Assembly (connector connection, open circuit, the caught cable). 3. Check the fixation state of the Drum and the Drum Shaft (check if the drum fixation cylinder is properly installed). 4. Check if the Dustproof Glass is soiled. If necessary, clean it. 5. Check the installation of the Laser Scanner Unit (connector connection, open circuit, the caught cable). 6. Check the installation and connection of the Primary Charging High Voltage PCB (PCB11) (connector connection, open circuit, the caught cable). 7. Check the installation of the Potential Sensor (connector connection, open circuit, the caught cable). 8. Check the installation and connection of the Drum Motor (M1) (connector connection, open circuit, the caught cable). 9. Replace the parts. - Primary Charging Assembly - Laser Scanner Unit - Potential Sensor - Primary Charging High Voltage PCB (PCB11) - Drum Motor (M1) - Main Driver PCB (PCB2) - DC Controller PCB (PCB1)



33-0001



Delivery Assembly Decurler Fan alarm



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



Movement: No change. Cause: Connector disconnection of the Paper Cooling Fan (FM5). Failure of the Paper Cooling Fan (FM5). Measures: Check the connector -> Replace the Paper Cooling Fan (FM5).



33-0002



Feed Fan alarm



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



Movement: No change. Cause: Connector disconnection of the Registration Motor/Duplex Motor Cooling Fan (FM42). Failure of the Registration Motor/Duplex Motor Cooling Fan (FM42). Measures: Check the connector -> Replace the Registration Motor/Duplex Motor Cooling Fan (FM42).



33-0010



Stream Reading Fan alarm



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



Movement: Nothing in particular (Fan stops). Cause: The Fan rotation signal cannot be detected after 3 seconds have passed since the Scanner Unit Heat Exhaust Fan (FM1) is turned ON. Measures: Check the connector connection -> Replace the Scanner Unit Heat Exhaust Fan (FM1).



33-0013



Power Unit Fan 1 alarm



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



Movement: No change. Cause: Connector disconnection of the Feed Driver Cooling Fan (FM40). Failure of the Feed Driver Cooling Fan (FM40). Measures: Check the connector -> Replace the Feed Driver Cooling Fan (FM40).



942



7. Error/Jam/Alarm 33-0022



Read Motor Cooling Fan alarm



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



Movement: Nothing in particular (Fan stops). Cause: The Fan rotation signal cannot be detected after 3 seconds have passed since the Motor Driver Cooling Fan (FM1) or the Read Motor Cooling Fan (FM2) is turned ON. Measures: Check the connector connection -> Replace the Motor Driver Cooling Fan (FM1) or the Read Motor Cooling Fan (FM2).



33-0023



Scanner Unit (DADF) Cooling Fan alarm



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



Movement: Nothing in particular (Fan stops). Cause: The Fan rotation signal cannot be detected after 3 seconds have passed since the (DADF) Scanner Unit Cooling Fan (FM3) is turned ON. Measures: Check the connector connection -> Replace the DADF Scanner Unit Cooling Fan (FM3).



33-0025



Scanner Unit (Reader) Cooling Fan alarm



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



Movement: Nothing in particular (Fan stops). Cause: The Fan rotation signal cannot be detected after 3 seconds have passed since the (Reader) Scanner Unit Cooling Fan (FM2) is turned ON. Measures: Check the connector connection -> Replace the (Reader) Scanner Unit Cooling Fan (FM2).



33-0026



Charging Assembly Fan 1 alarm



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



Movement: No change. Cause: Connector disconnection of the Pre-transfer Charging Assembly Air Supply Fan (FM32) or the Pre-transfer Charging Assembly Exhaust Fan (FM33). Failure of the Pre-transfer Charging Assembly Air Supply Fan (FM32) or the Pre-transfer Charging Assembly Exhaust Fan (FM33). Measures: Check the connector connection -> Replace the Pre-transfer Charging Assembly Air Supply Fan (FM32) or the Pre-transfer Charging Assembly Exhaust Fan (FM33).



33-0027



Charging Assembly Fan 2 alarm



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



Movement: No change. Cause: Connector disconnection of the Primary Charging Assembly Exhaust Fan (FM17). Failure of the Primary Charging Assembly Exhaust Fan (FM17). Measures: Check the connector -> Replace the Primary Charging Assembly Exhaust Fan (FM17).



33-0028



Power Unit Fan 2 alarm



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



Movement: No change. Cause: Connector disconnection of the Duplex Driver Cooling Fan (FM41). Failure of the Duplex Driver Cooling Fan (FM41). Measures: Check the connector -> Replace the Duplex Driver Cooling Fan (FM41).



37-0001



For R&D



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



-



37-0002



For R&D



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



-



37-0003



For R&D



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



-



37-0004



For R&D



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



-



37-0005



For R&D



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



-



943



7. Error/Jam/Alarm 37-0006



For R&D



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



-



37-0007



For R&D



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



-



37-1000



For R&D



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



-



37-2000



For R&D



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



-



38-0001



For R&D



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



-



38-0002



For R&D



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



-



38-0101



Application-generated alarm



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



Data Backup Service Application Error (Error by the rock-out of the Device Configuration Management function), Error message (E-code: EBD0001) * This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.



38-0102



Application-generated alarm



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



Data Backup Service Application Error (Error when Device Configuration Management data export), Error message (E-code: EBD0002) * This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.



38-0103



Application-generated alarm



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



Data Backup Service Application Error (Error for MDAS4BR not to be available), Error message (E-code: EBD0003) * This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.



38-0104



Application-generated alarm



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



Data Backup Service Application Error (Error when Address book (ADB) folder setting export), Error message (E-code: EBA0001) * This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.



38-0105



Application-generated alarm



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



Data Backup Service Application Error (Error with the expiration of the start time for scheduled backup), Error message (E-code: EBS9997) * This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.



38-0106



Application-generated alarm



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



Data Backup Service Application Error (Error with the power supply of the device having been shut down forcibly), Error message (E-code: EBS9998) * This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.



38-0107



Application-generated alarm



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



Data Backup Service Application Error (System error of the export), Error message (E-code: EBS9999) * This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.



944



7. Error/Jam/Alarm 38-0108



Application-generated alarm



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



Data Backup Service Application Error (Communication error with CBIO backup service (DCFS)), Error message (E-code: EBC0001) * This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.



38-0109



Application-generated alarm



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



Data Backup Service Application Error (Error on the CBIO backup service (DCFS) side), Error message (E-code: EBC0002) * This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.



38-0110



Application-generated alarm



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



Data Backup Service Application Error (Error with the backup refusal on the CBIO backup service (DCFS) side), Error message (E-code: EBC0003) * This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.



38-0111



Application-generated alarm



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



Data Backup Service Application Error (System error by the communication with CBIO backup service (DCFS)), Error message (E-code: EBC9999) * This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.



38-0112



Application-generated alarm



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



Data Backup Service Application Error (Error for Access Token Provider to be unconnected, or not to be installed), Error message (E-code: EAC0001) * This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.



38-0113



Application-generated alarm



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



Data Backup Service Application Error (Error by the certification failure of the Access Token Provider), Error message (E-code: EAC0002) * This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.



38-0114



Application-generated alarm



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



Data Backup Service Application Error (Error of the communication time-out of the Access Token Provider), Error message (E-code: EAC0003) * This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.



38-0115



Application-generated alarm



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



Data Backup Service Application Error (Communication error of the Access Token Provider by the network origin at proxy effective time), Error message (E-code: EAC0004) * This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.



38-0116



Application-generated alarm



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



Data Backup Service Application Error (The error that proxy connection of the Access Token Provider failed in at proxy effective time), Error message (E-code: EAC0005) * This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.



38-0117



Application-generated alarm



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



Data Backup Service Application Error (Communication error of the Access Token Provider by the network origin at the time of proxy invalidity), Error message (E-code: EAC0006) * This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.



945



7. Error/Jam/Alarm 38-0118



Application-generated alarm



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



Data Backup Service Application Error (Communication error of the Access Token Provider that name solution was not possible), Error message (E-code: EAC0007) * This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.



38-0119



Application-generated alarm



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



Data Backup Service Application Error (System error of the Access Token Provider in other factors), Error message (E-code: EAC9999) * This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.



39-0111



Application-generated alarm



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



Service call application Error message (E-code) * This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.



39-0210



Application-generated alarm



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



Service call application Paper jam_Inside the machine_Not specified * This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.



39-0211



Application-generated alarm



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



Service call application Paper jam_Inside the machine_Frequently * This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.



39-0212



Application-generated alarm



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



Service call application Paper jam_Inside the machine_Occasionally * This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.



39-0213



Application-generated alarm



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



Service call application Paper jam_Inside the machine_First time in the day * This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.



39-0220



Application-generated alarm



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



Service call application Paper jam_Document Feeder_Not specified * This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.



39-0221



Application-generated alarm



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



Service call application Paper jam_Document Feeder_Frequently * This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.



39-0222



Application-generated alarm



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



Service call application Paper jam_Document Feeder_Occasionally * This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.



39-0223



Application-generated alarm



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



Service call application Paper jam_Document Feeder_First time in the day * This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.



39-0230



Application-generated alarm



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



Service call application Paper jam_Cassette_Not specified * This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.



946



7. Error/Jam/Alarm 39-0231



Application-generated alarm



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



Service call application Paper jam_Cassette_Right Deck * This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.



39-0232



Application-generated alarm



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



Service call application Paper jam_Cassette_Left Deck * This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.



39-0233



Application-generated alarm



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



Service call application Paper jam_Cassette_Cassette 3 * This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.



39-0234



Application-generated alarm



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



Service call application Paper jam_Cassette_Cassette 4 * This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.



39-0235



Application-generated alarm



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



Service call application Spare (Not selectable) * This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.



39-0240



Application-generated alarm



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



Service call application Paper jam_Multi-purpose Tray_Not specified * This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.



39-0241



Application-generated alarm



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



Service call application Paper jam_Multi-purpose Tray_Envelope * This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.



39-0242



Application-generated alarm



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



Service call application Paper jam_Multi-purpose Tray_Postcard * This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.



39-0243



Application-generated alarm



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



Service call application Paper jam_Multi-purpose Tray_Plain paper * This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.



39-0244



Application-generated alarm



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



Service call application Paper jam_Multi-purpose Tray_Label paper * This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.



39-0245



Application-generated alarm



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



Service call application Paper jam_Multi-purpose Tray_Heavy paper * This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.



39-0250



Application-generated alarm



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



Service call application Paper jam_Outlet_Not specified * This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.



947



7. Error/Jam/Alarm 39-0251



Application-generated alarm



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



Service call application Paper jam_Outlet_Frequently * This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.



39-0252



Application-generated alarm



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



Service call application Paper jam_Outlet_Occasionally * This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.



39-0253



Application-generated alarm



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



Service call application Paper jam_Outlet_First time in the day * This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.



39-0260



Application-generated alarm



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



Service call application Paper jam_At 2-sided printing_Not specified * This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.



39-0261



Application-generated alarm



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



Service call application Paper jam_At 2-sided printing_Frequently * This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.



39-0262



Application-generated alarm



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



Service call application Paper jam_At 2-sided printing_Occasionally * This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.



39-0263



Application-generated alarm



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



Service call application Paper jam_At 2-sided printing_First time in the day * This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.



39-0290



Application-generated alarm



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



Service call application Paper jam_Others * This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.



39-0310



Application-generated alarm



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



Service call application Image failure_Displacement_Color not specified * This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.



39-0311



Application-generated alarm



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



Service call application Image failure_Displacement_Black * This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.



39-0312



Application-generated alarm



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



Service call application Image failure_Displacement_Yellow * This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.



39-0313



Application-generated alarm



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



Service call application Image failure_Displacement_Magenta * This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.



948



7. Error/Jam/Alarm 39-0314



Application-generated alarm



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



Service call application Image failure_Displacement_Cyan * This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.



39-0320



Application-generated alarm



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



Service call application Image failure_Blank image_Color not specified * This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.



39-0321



Application-generated alarm



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



Service call application Image failure_Blank image_Black * This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.



39-0322



Application-generated alarm



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



Service call application Image failure_Blank image_Yellow * This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.



39-0323



Application-generated alarm



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



Service call application Image failure_Blank image_Magenta * This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.



39-0324



Application-generated alarm



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



Service call application Image failure_Blank image_Cyan * This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.



39-0330



Application-generated alarm



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



Service call application Image failure_Soiling_Color not specified * This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.



39-0331



Application-generated alarm



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



Service call application Image failure_Soiling_Black * This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.



39-0332



Application-generated alarm



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



Service call application Image failure_Soiling_Yellow * This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.



39-0333



Application-generated alarm



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



Service call application Image failure_Soiling_Magenta * This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.



39-0334



Application-generated alarm



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



Service call application Image failure_Soiling_Cyan * This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.



39-0340



Application-generated alarm



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



Service call application Image failure_Lines_Color not specified * This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.



949



7. Error/Jam/Alarm 39-0341



Application-generated alarm



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



Service call application Image failure_Lines_Black * This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.



39-0342



Application-generated alarm



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



Service call application Image failure_Lines_Yellow * This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.



39-0343



Application-generated alarm



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



Service call application Image failure_Lines_Magenta * This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.



39-0344



Application-generated alarm



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



Service call application Image failure_Lines_Cyan * This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.



39-0350



Application-generated alarm



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



Service call application Image failure_Light_Color not specified * This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.



39-0351



Application-generated alarm



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



Service call application Image failure_Light_Black * This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.



39-0352



Application-generated alarm



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



Service call application Image failure_Light_Yellow * This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.



39-0353



Application-generated alarm



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



Service call application Image failure_Light_Magenta * This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.



39-0354



Application-generated alarm



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



Service call application Image failure_Light_Cyan * This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.



39-0360



Application-generated alarm



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



Service call application Image failure_Hue_Color not specified * This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.



39-0361



Application-generated alarm



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



Service call application Image failure_Hue_Black * This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.



39-0362



Application-generated alarm



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



Service call application Image failure_Hue_Yellow * This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.



950



7. Error/Jam/Alarm 39-0363



Application-generated alarm



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



Service call application Image failure_Hue_Magenta * This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.



39-0364



Application-generated alarm



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



Service call application Image failure_Hue_Cyan * This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.



39-0370



Application-generated alarm



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



Service call application Image failure_Dark_Color not specified * This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.



39-0371



Application-generated alarm



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



Service call application Image failure_Dark_Black * This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.



39-0372



Application-generated alarm



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



Service call application Image failure_Dark_Yellow * This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.



39-0373



Application-generated alarm



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



Service call application Image failure_Dark_Magenta * This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.



39-0374



Application-generated alarm



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



Service call application Image failure_Dark_Cyan * This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.



39-0380



Application-generated alarm



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



Service call application Image failure_Color displacement_Color not specified * This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.



39-0381



Application-generated alarm



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



Service call application Image failure_Color displacement_Black * This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.



39-0382



Application-generated alarm



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



Service call application Image failure_Color displacement_Yellow * This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.



39-0383



Application-generated alarm



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



Service call application Image failure_Color displacement_Magenta * This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.



39-0384



Application-generated alarm



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



Service call application Image failure_Color displacement_Cyan * This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.



951



7. Error/Jam/Alarm 39-0390



Application-generated alarm



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



Service call application Image failure_Others * This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.



39-0511



Application-generated alarm



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



Service call application Operation failure_Print * This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.



39-0520



Application-generated alarm



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



Service call application Operation failure_Fax_Not specified * This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.



39-0521



Application-generated alarm



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



Service call application Operation failure_Fax_Transmission and reception * This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.



39-0522



Application-generated alarm



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



Service call application Operation failure_Fax_Reception * This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.



39-0523



Application-generated alarm



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



Service call application Operation failure_Fax_Transmission * This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.



39-0524



Application-generated alarm



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



Service call application Operation failure_Fax_Forwarding * This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.



39-0530



Application-generated alarm



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



Service call application Operation failure_Control Panel_Not specified * This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.



39-0531



Application-generated alarm



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



Service call application Operation failure_Control Panel_Slow response * This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.



39-0532



Application-generated alarm



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



Service call application Operation failure_Control Panel_Occasional freeze-up (Not work) * This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.



39-0541



Application-generated alarm



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



Service call application Operation failure_Scan (SEND) * This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.



39-0551



Application-generated alarm



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



Service call application Operation failure_Abnormal noise_Main * This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.



952



7. Error/Jam/Alarm 39-0552



Application-generated alarm



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



Service call application Operation failure_Abnormal noise_Options * This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.



39-0590



Application-generated alarm



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



Service call application Operation failure_Others * This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.



39-0611



Application-generated alarm



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



Service call application Settings_Training * This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.



39-0612



Application-generated alarm



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



Service call application Settings_Addition * This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.



39-0621



Application-generated alarm



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



Service call application Settings_Forwarding_Fax * This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.



39-0622



Application-generated alarm



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



Service call application Settings_Forwarding_SEND * This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.



39-0631



Application-generated alarm



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



Service call application Settings_Printer driver installation * This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.



39-0641



Application-generated alarm



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



Service call application Settings_Address book * This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.



39-0651



Application-generated alarm



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



Service call application Settings_Network * This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.



39-0690



Application-generated alarm



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



Service call application Settings_Others * This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.



39-0811



Application-generated alarm



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



Service call application Order_Toner_Black * This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.



39-0812



Application-generated alarm



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



Service call application Order_Toner_Yellow * This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.



953



7. Error/Jam/Alarm 39-0813



Application-generated alarm



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



Service call application Order_Toner_Magenta * This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.



39-0814



Application-generated alarm



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



Service call application Order_Toner_Cyan * This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.



39-0821



Application-generated alarm



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



Service call application Order_Waste Toner Container * This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.



39-1111



Application-generated alarm



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



Service call application Error message (E-code)_(Cancel) * This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.



39-1210



Application-generated alarm



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



Service call application Paper jam_Inside the machine_Not specified_(Cancel) * This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.



39-1211



Application-generated alarm



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



Service call application Paper jam_Inside the machine_Frequently_(Cancel) * This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.



39-1212



Application-generated alarm



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



Service call application Paper jam_Inside the machine_Occasionally_(Cancel) * This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.



39-1213



Application-generated alarm



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



Service call application Paper jam_Inside the machine_First time in the day_(Cancel) * This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.



39-1220



Application-generated alarm



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



Service call application Paper jam_Document Feeder_Not specified_(Cancel) * This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.



39-1221



Application-generated alarm



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



Service call application Paper jam_Document Feeder_Frequently_(Cancel) * This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.



39-1222



Application-generated alarm



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



Service call application Paper jam_Document Feeder_Occasionally_(Cancel) * This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.



39-1223



Application-generated alarm



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



Service call application Paper jam_Document Feeder_First time in the day_(Cancel) * This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.



954



7. Error/Jam/Alarm 39-1230



Application-generated alarm



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



Service call application Paper jam_Cassette_Not specified_(Cancel) * This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.



39-1231



Application-generated alarm



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



Service call application Paper jam_Cassette_Right Deck_(Cancel) * This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.



39-1232



Application-generated alarm



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



Service call application Paper jam_Cassette_Left Deck_(Cancel) * This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.



39-1233



Application-generated alarm



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



Service call application Paper jam_Cassette_Cassette 3_(Cancel) * This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.



39-1234



Application-generated alarm



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



Service call application Paper jam_Cassette_Cassette 4_(Cancel) * This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.



39-1235



Application-generated alarm



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



Service call application Spare (Cancel) * This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.



39-1240



Application-generated alarm



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



Service call application Paper jam_Multi-purpose Tray_Not specified_(Cancel) * This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.



39-1241



Application-generated alarm



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



Service call application Paper jam_Multi-purpose Tray_Envelope_(Cancel) * This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.



39-1242



Application-generated alarm



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



Service call application Paper jam_Multi-purpose Tray_Postcard_(Cancel) * This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.



39-1243



Application-generated alarm



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



Service call application Paper jam_Multi-purpose Tray_Plain paper_(Cancel) * This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.



39-1244



Application-generated alarm



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



Service call application Paper jam_Multi-purpose Tray_Label paper_(Cancel) * This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.



39-1245



Application-generated alarm



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



Service call application Paper jam_Multi-purpose Tray_Heavy paper_(Cancel) * This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.



955



7. Error/Jam/Alarm 39-1250



Application-generated alarm



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



Service call application Paper jam_Outlet_Not specified_(Cancel) * This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.



39-1251



Application-generated alarm



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



Service call application Paper jam_Outlet_Frequently_(Cancel) * This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.



39-1252



Application-generated alarm



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



Service call application Paper jam_Outlet_Occasionally_(Cancel) * This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.



39-1253



Application-generated alarm



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



Service call application Paper jam_Outlet_First time in the day_(Cancel) * This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.



39-1260



Application-generated alarm



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



Service call application Paper jam_At 2-sided printing_Not specified_(Cancel) * This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.



39-1261



Application-generated alarm



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



Service call application Paper jam_At 2-sided printing_Frequently_(Cancel) * This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.



39-1262



Application-generated alarm



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



Service call application Paper jam_At 2-sided printing_Occasionally_(Cancel) * This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.



39-1263



Application-generated alarm



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



Service call application Paper jam_At 2-sided printing_First time in the day_(Cancel) * This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.



39-1290



Application-generated alarm



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



Service call application Paper jam_Others_(Cancel) * This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.



39-1310



Application-generated alarm



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



Service call application Image failure_Displacement_Color not specified_(Cancel) * This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.



39-1311



Application-generated alarm



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



Service call application Image failure_Displacement_Black_(Cancel) * This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.



39-1312



Application-generated alarm



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



Service call application Image failure_Displacement_Yellow_(Cancel) * This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.



956



7. Error/Jam/Alarm 39-1313



Application-generated alarm



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



Service call application Image failure_Displacement_Magenta_(Cancel) * This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.



39-1314



Application-generated alarm



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



Service call application Image failure_Displacement_Cyan_(Cancel) * This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.



39-1320



Application-generated alarm



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



Service call application Image failure_Blank image_Color not specified_(Cancel) * This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.



39-1321



Application-generated alarm



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



Service call application Image failure_Blank image_Black_(Cancel) * This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.



39-1322



Application-generated alarm



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



Service call application Image failure_Blank image_Yellow_(Cancel) * This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.



39-1323



Application-generated alarm



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



Service call application Image failure_Blank image_Magenta_(Cancel) * This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.



39-1324



Application-generated alarm



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



Service call application Image failure_Blank image_Cyan_(Cancel) * This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.



39-1330



Application-generated alarm



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



Service call application Image failure_Soiling_Color not specified_(Cancel) * This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.



39-1331



Application-generated alarm



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



Service call application Image failure_Soiling_Black_(Cancel) * This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.



39-1332



Application-generated alarm



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



Service call application Image failure_Soiling_Yellow_(Cancel) * This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.



39-1333



Application-generated alarm



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



Service call application Image failure_Soiling_Magenta_(Cancel) * This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.



39-1334



Application-generated alarm



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



Service call application Image failure_Soiling_Cyan_(Cancel) * This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.



957



7. Error/Jam/Alarm 39-1340



Application-generated alarm



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



Service call application Image failure_Lines_Color not specified_(Cancel) * This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.



39-1341



Application-generated alarm



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



Service call application Image failure_Lines_Black_(Cancel) * This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.



39-1342



Application-generated alarm



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



Service call application Image failure_Lines_Yellow_(Cancel) * This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.



39-1343



Application-generated alarm



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



Service call application Image failure_Lines_Magenta_(Cancel) * This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.



39-1344



Application-generated alarm



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



Service call application Image failure_Lines_Cyan_(Cancel) * This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.



39-1350



Application-generated alarm



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



Service call application Image failure_Light_Color not specified_(Cancel) * This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.



39-1351



Application-generated alarm



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



Service call application Image failure_Light_Black_(Cancel) * This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.



39-1352



Application-generated alarm



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



Service call application Image failure_Light_Yellow_(Cancel) * This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.



39-1353



Application-generated alarm



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



Service call application Image failure_Light_Magenta_(Cancel) * This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.



39-1354



Application-generated alarm



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



Service call application Image failure_Light_Cyan_(Cancel) * This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.



39-1360



Application-generated alarm



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



Service call application Image failure_Hue_Color not specified_(Cancel) * This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.



39-1361



Application-generated alarm



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



Service call application Image failure_Hue_Black_(Cancel) * This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.



958



7. Error/Jam/Alarm 39-1362



Application-generated alarm



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



Service call application Image failure_Hue_Yellow_(Cancel) * This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.



39-1363



Application-generated alarm



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



Service call application Image failure_Hue_Magenta_(Cancel) * This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.



39-1364



Application-generated alarm



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



Service call application Image failure_Hue_Cyan_(Cancel) * This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.



39-1370



Application-generated alarm



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



Service call application Image failure_Dark_Color not specified_(Cancel) * This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.



39-1371



Application-generated alarm



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



Service call application Image failure_Dark_Black_(Cancel) * This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.



39-1372



Application-generated alarm



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



Service call application Image failure_Dark_Yellow_(Cancel) * This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.



39-1373



Application-generated alarm



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



Service call application Image failure_Dark_Magenta_(Cancel) * This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.



39-1374



Application-generated alarm



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



Service call application Image failure_Dark_Cyan_(Cancel) * This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.



39-1380



Application-generated alarm



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



Service call application Image failure_Color displacement_Color not specified_(Cancel) * This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.



39-1381



Application-generated alarm



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



Service call application Image failure_Color displacement_Black_(Cancel) * This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.



39-1382



Application-generated alarm



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



Service call application Image failure_Color displacement_Yellow_(Cancel) * This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.



39-1383



Application-generated alarm



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



Service call application Image failure_Color displacement_Magenta_(Cancel) * This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.



959



7. Error/Jam/Alarm 39-1384



Application-generated alarm



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



Service call application Image failure_Color displacement_Cyan_(Cancel) * This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.



39-1390



Application-generated alarm



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



Service call application Image failure_Others_(Cancel) * This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.



39-1511



Application-generated alarm



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



Service call application Image failure_Print_(Cancel) * This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.



39-1520



Application-generated alarm



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



Service call application Operation failure_Fax_Not specified_(Cancel) * This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.



39-1521



Application-generated alarm



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



Service call application Operation failure_Fax_Transmission and reception_(Cancel) * This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.



39-1522



Application-generated alarm



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



Service call application Operation failure_Fax_Reception_(Cancel) * This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.



39-1523



Application-generated alarm



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



Service call application Operation failure_Fax_Transmission_(Cancel) * This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.



39-1524



Application-generated alarm



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



Service call application Operation failure_Fax_Forwarding_(Cancel) * This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.



39-1530



Application-generated alarm



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



Service call application Operation failure_Control Panel_Not specified_(Cancel) * This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.



39-1531



Application-generated alarm



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



Service call application Operation failure_Control Panel_Slow response_(Cancel) * This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.



39-1532



Application-generated alarm



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



Service call application Operation failure_Control Panel_Occasional freeze-up (Not work)_(Cancel) * This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.



39-1541



Application-generated alarm



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



Service call application Operation failure_Scan (SEND)_(Cancel) * This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.



960



7. Error/Jam/Alarm 39-1551



Application-generated alarm



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



Service call application Operation failure_Abnormal noise_Main_(Cancel) * This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.



39-1552



Application-generated alarm



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



Service call application Operation failure_Abnormal noise_Options_(Cancel) * This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.



39-1590



Application-generated alarm



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



Service call application Operation failure_Others_(Cancel) * This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.



39-1611



Application-generated alarm



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



Service call application Settings_Training_(Cancel) * This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.



39-1612



Application-generated alarm



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



Service call application Settings_Addition_(Cancel) * This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.



39-1621



Application-generated alarm



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



Service call application Settings_Forwarding_Fax_(Cancel) * This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.



39-1622



Application-generated alarm



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



Service call application Settings_Forwarding_SEND_(Cancel) * This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.



39-1631



Application-generated alarm



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



Service call application Settings_Printer driver installation_(Cancel) * This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.



39-1641



Application-generated alarm



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



Service call application Settings_Address book_(Cancel) * This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.



39-1651



Application-generated alarm



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



Service call application Settings_Network_(Cancel) * This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.



39-1690



Application-generated alarm



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



Service call application Settings_Others_(Cancel) * This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.



39-1811



Application-generated alarm



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



Service call application Order_Toner_Black_(Cancel) * This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.



961



7. Error/Jam/Alarm 39-1812



Application-generated alarm



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



Service call application Order_Toner_Yellow_(Cancel) * This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.



39-1813



Application-generated alarm



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



Service call application Order_Toner_Magenta_(Cancel) * This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.



39-1814



Application-generated alarm



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



Service call application Order_Toner_Cyan_(Cancel) * This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.



39-1821



Application-generated alarm



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



Service call application Order_Waste Toner Container_(Cancel) * This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.



39-19EE



Application-generated alarm



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



Service call application Test signal * This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.



39-19FF



Application-generated alarm



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



Service call application Remedy completed * This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.



39-2111



Application-generated alarm



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



Service call application Error message (E-code)_(Customer information change) * This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.



39-2210



Application-generated alarm



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



Service call application Paper jam_Inside the machine_Not specified_(Customer information change) * This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.



39-2211



Application-generated alarm



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



Service call application Paper jam_Inside the machine_Frequently_(Customer information change) * This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.



39-2212



Application-generated alarm



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



Service call application Paper jam_Inside the machine_Occasionally_(Customer information change) * This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.



39-2213



Application-generated alarm



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



Service call application Paper jam_Inside the machine_First time in the day_(Customer information change) * This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.



39-2220



Application-generated alarm



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



Service call application Paper jam_Document Feeder_Not specified_(Customer information change) * This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.



962



7. Error/Jam/Alarm 39-2221



Application-generated alarm



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



Service call application Paper jam_Document Feeder_Frequently_(Customer information change) * This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.



39-2222



Application-generated alarm



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



Service call application Paper jam_Document Feeder_Occasionally_(Customer information change) * This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.



39-2223



Application-generated alarm



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



Service call application Paper jam_Document Feeder_First time in the day_(Customer information change) * This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.



39-2230



Application-generated alarm



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



Service call application Paper jam_Cassette_Not specified_(Customer information change) * This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.



39-2231



Application-generated alarm



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



Service call application Paper jam_Cassette_Right Deck_(Customer information change) * This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.



39-2232



Application-generated alarm



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



Service call application Paper jam_Cassette_Left Deck_(Customer information change) * This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.



39-2233



Application-generated alarm



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



Service call application Paper jam_Cassette_Cassette 3_(Customer information change) * This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.



39-2234



Application-generated alarm



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



Service call application Paper jam_Cassette_Cassette 4_(Customer information change) * This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.



39-2240



Application-generated alarm



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



Service call application Paper jam_Multi-purpose Tray_Not specified_(Customer information change) * This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.



39-2241



Application-generated alarm



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



Service call application Paper jam_Multi-purpose Tray_Envelope_(Customer information change) * This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.



39-2242



Application-generated alarm



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



Service call application Paper jam_Multi-purpose Tray_Postcard_(Customer information change) * This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.



39-2243



Application-generated alarm



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



Service call application Paper jam_Multi-purpose Tray_Plain paper_(Customer information change) * This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.



963



7. Error/Jam/Alarm 39-2244



Application-generated alarm



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



Service call application Paper jam_Multi-purpose Tray_Label paper_(Customer information change) * This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.



39-2245



Application-generated alarm



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



Service call application Paper jam_Multi-purpose Tray_Heavy paper_(Customer information change) * This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.



39-2250



Application-generated alarm



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



Service call application Paper jam_Outlet_Not specified_(Customer information change) * This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.



39-2251



Application-generated alarm



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



Service call application Paper jam_Outlet_Frequently_(Customer information change) * This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.



39-2252



Application-generated alarm



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



Service call application Paper jam_Outlet_Occasionally_(Customer information change) * This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.



39-2253



Application-generated alarm



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



Service call application Paper jam_Outlet_First time in the day_(Customer information change) * This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.



39-2260



Application-generated alarm



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



Service call application Paper jam_At 2-sided printing_Not specified_(Customer information change) * This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.



39-2261



Application-generated alarm



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



Service call application Paper jam_At 2-sided printing_Frequently_(Customer information change) * This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.



39-2262



Application-generated alarm



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



Service call application Paper jam_At 2-sided printing_Occasionally_(Customer information change) * This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.



39-2263



Application-generated alarm



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



Service call application Paper jam_At 2-sided printing_First time in the day_(Customer information change) * This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.



39-2290



Application-generated alarm



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



Service call application Paper jam_Others_(Customer information change) * This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.



39-2310



Application-generated alarm



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



Service call application Image failure_Displacement_Color not specified_(Customer information change) * This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.



964



7. Error/Jam/Alarm 39-2311



Application-generated alarm



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



Service call application Image failure_Displacement_Black_(Customer information change) * This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.



39-2312



Application-generated alarm



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



Service call application Image failure_Displacement_Yellow_(Customer information change) * This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.



39-2313



Application-generated alarm



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



Service call application Image failure_Displacement_Magenta_(Customer information change) * This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.



39-2314



Application-generated alarm



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



Service call application Image failure_Displacement_Cyan_(Customer information change) * This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.



39-2320



Application-generated alarm



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



Service call application Image failure_Blank image_Color not specified_(Customer information change) * This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.



39-2321



Application-generated alarm



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



Service call application Image failure_Blank image_Black_(Customer information change) * This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.



39-2322



Application-generated alarm



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



Service call application Image failure_Blank image_Yellow_(Customer information change) * This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.



39-2323



Application-generated alarm



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



Service call application Image failure_Blank image_Magenta_(Customer information change) * This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.



39-2324



Application-generated alarm



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



Service call application Image failure_Blank image_Cyan_(Customer information change) * This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.



39-2330



Application-generated alarm



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



Service call application Image failure_Soiling_Color not specified_(Customer information change) * This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.



39-2331



Application-generated alarm



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



Service call application Image failure_Soiling_Black_(Customer information change) * This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.



39-2332



Application-generated alarm



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



Service call application Image failure_Soiling_Yellow_(Customer information change) * This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.



965



7. Error/Jam/Alarm 39-2333



Application-generated alarm



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



Service call application Image failure_Soiling_Magenta_(Customer information change) * This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.



39-2334



Application-generated alarm



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



Service call application Image failure_Soiling_Cyan_(Customer information change) * This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.



39-2340



Application-generated alarm



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



Service call application Image failure_Lines_Color not specified_(Customer information change) * This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.



39-2341



Application-generated alarm



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



Service call application Image failure_Lines_Black_(Customer information change) * This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.



39-2342



Application-generated alarm



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



Service call application Image failure_Lines_Yellow_(Customer information change) * This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.



39-2343



Application-generated alarm



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



Service call application Image failure_Lines_Magenta_(Customer information change) * This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.



39-2344



Application-generated alarm



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



Service call application Image failure_Lines_Cyan_(Customer information change) * This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.



39-2350



Application-generated alarm



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



Service call application Image failure_Light_Color not specified_(Customer information change) * This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.



39-2351



Application-generated alarm



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



Service call application Image failure_Light_Black_(Customer information change) * This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.



39-2352



Application-generated alarm



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



Service call application Image failure_Light_Yellow_(Customer information change) * This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.



39-2353



Application-generated alarm



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



Service call application Image failure_Light_Magenta_(Customer information change) * This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.



39-2354



Application-generated alarm



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



Service call application Image failure_Light_Cyan_(Customer information change) * This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.



966



7. Error/Jam/Alarm 39-2360



Application-generated alarm



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



Service call application Image failure_Hue_Color not specified_(Customer information change) * This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.



39-2361



Application-generated alarm



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



Service call application Image failure_Hue_Black_(Customer information change) * This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.



39-2362



Application-generated alarm



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



Service call application Image failure_Hue_Yellow_(Customer information change) * This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.



39-2363



Application-generated alarm



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



Service call application Image failure_Hue_Magenta_(Customer information change) * This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.



39-2364



Application-generated alarm



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



Service call application Image failure_Hue_Cyan_(Customer information change) * This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.



39-2370



Application-generated alarm



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



Service call application Image failure_Dark_Color not specified_(Customer information change) * This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.



39-2371



Application-generated alarm



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



Service call application Image failure_Dark_Black_(Customer information change) * This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.



39-2372



Application-generated alarm



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



Service call application Image failure_Dark_Yellow_(Customer information change) * This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.



39-2373



Application-generated alarm



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



Service call application Image failure_Dark_Magenta_(Customer information change) * This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.



39-2374



Application-generated alarm



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



Service call application Image failure_Dark_Cyan_(Customer information change) * This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.



39-2380



Application-generated alarm



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



Service call application Image failure_Color displacement_Color not specified_(Customer information change) * This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.



39-2381



Application-generated alarm



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



Service call application Image failure_Color displacement_Black_(Customer information change) * This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.



967



7. Error/Jam/Alarm 39-2382



Application-generated alarm



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



Service call application Image failure_Color displacement_Yellow_(Customer information change) * This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.



39-2383



Application-generated alarm



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



Service call application Image failure_Color displacement_Magenta_(Customer information change) * This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.



39-2384



Application-generated alarm



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



Service call application Image failure_Color displacement_Cyan_(Customer information change) * This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.



39-2390



Application-generated alarm



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



Service call application Image failure_Others_(Customer information change) * This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.



39-2511



Application-generated alarm



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



Service call application Operation failure_Print_(Customer information change) * This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.



39-2520



Application-generated alarm



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



Service call application Operation failure_Fax_Not specified_(Customer information change) * This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.



39-2521



Application-generated alarm



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



Service call application Operation failure_Fax_Transmission and reception_(Customer information change) * This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.



39-2522



Application-generated alarm



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



Service call application Operation failure_Fax_Reception_(Customer information change) * This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.



39-2523



Application-generated alarm



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



Service call application Operation failure_Fax_Transmission_(Customer information change) * This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.



39-2524



Application-generated alarm



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



Service call application Operation failure_Fax_Forwarding_(Customer information change) * This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.



39-2530



Application-generated alarm



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



Service call application Operation failure_Control Panel_Not specified_(Customer information change) * This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.



39-2531



Application-generated alarm



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



Service call application Operation failure_Control Panel_Slow response_(Customer information change) * This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.



968



7. Error/Jam/Alarm 39-2532



Application-generated alarm



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



Service call application Operation failure_Control Panel_Occasional freeze-up (Not work)_(Customer information change) * This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.



39-2541



Application-generated alarm



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



Service call application Operation failure_Scan (SEND)_(Customer information change) * This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.



39-2551



Application-generated alarm



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



Service call application Operation failure_Abnormal noise_Main_(Customer information change) * This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.



39-2552



Application-generated alarm



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



Service call application Operation failure_Abnormal noise_Options_(Customer information change) * This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.



39-2590



Application-generated alarm



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



Service call application Operation failure_Others_(Customer information change) * This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.



39-2611



Application-generated alarm



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



Service call application Settings_Training_(Customer information change) * This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.



39-2612



Application-generated alarm



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



Service call application Settings_Addition_(Customer information change) * This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.



39-2621



Application-generated alarm



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



Service call application Settings_Forwarding_Fax_(Customer information change) * This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.



39-2622



Application-generated alarm



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



Service call application Settings_Forwarding_SEND_(Customer information change) * This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.



39-2631



Application-generated alarm



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



Service call application Settings_Printer driver installation_(Customer information change) * This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.



39-2641



Application-generated alarm



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



Service call application Settings_Address book_(Customer information change) * This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.



39-2651



Application-generated alarm



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



Service call application Settings_Network_(Customer information change) * This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.



969



7. Error/Jam/Alarm 39-2690



Application-generated alarm



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



Service call application Settings_Others_(Customer information change) * This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.



39-2811



Application-generated alarm



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



Service call application Order_Toner_Black_(Customer information change) * This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.



39-2812



Application-generated alarm



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



Service call application Order_Toner_Yellow_(Customer information change) * This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.



39-2813



Application-generated alarm



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



Service call application Order_Toner_Magenta_(Customer information change) * This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.



39-2814



Application-generated alarm



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



Service call application Order_Toner_Cyan_(Customer information change) * This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.



39-2821



Application-generated alarm



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



Service call application Order_Waste Toner Container_(Customer information change) * This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.



40-0006



For R&D



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



-



40-0013



For R&D



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



-



40-0073



Drum Unit (K) prior notification alarm



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



The life value of a target part reached the number of days left as set in COPIER > OPTION > PMDLV-D > PT-DRM.



40-0077



For R&D



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



-



40-0078



For R&D



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



-



40-0079



For R&D



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



-



40-0080



For R&D



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



-



40-0081



For R&D



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



-



970



7. Error/Jam/Alarm 40-0082



For R&D



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



-



40-0083



For R&D



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



-



40-0084



For R&D



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



-



40-0085



For R&D



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



-



40-0086



For R&D



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



-



40-0087



For R&D



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



-



40-0088



For R&D



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



-



40-0089



For R&D



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



-



40-0090



For R&D



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



-



40-0091



For R&D



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



-



40-0092



For R&D



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



-



40-0123



For R&D



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



-



40-0125



For R&D



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



-



40-0133



For R&D



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



-



40-0173



For R&D



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



-



40-0193



For R&D



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



-



971



7. Error/Jam/Alarm 40-0350



For R&D



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



-



40-0352



For R&D



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



-



40-0353



For R&D



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



-



40-0354



For R&D



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



-



40-0355



For R&D



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



-



40-0370



For R&D



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



-



40-0372



For R&D



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



-



40-0376



For R&D



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



-



40-0377



For R&D



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



-



40-0378



For R&D



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



-



40-0389



For R&D



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



-



40-0390



For R&D



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



-



40-0391



For R&D



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



-



40-0394



For R&D



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



-



40-0398



For R&D



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



-



40-0402



For R&D



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



-



972



7. Error/Jam/Alarm 40-0470



For R&D



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



-



40-0483



For R&D



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



-



40-0488



For R&D



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



-



40-0511



For R&D



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



-



40-0512



For R&D



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



-



40-0568



For R&D



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



-



40-0572



For R&D



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



-



40-0576



For R&D



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



-



43-0006



ETB replacement completion alarm



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



ETB counter was cleared.



43-0013



Transfer Roller replacement completion alarm



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



Transfer Roller counter was cleared.



43-0073



Drum Unit (K) replacement completion alarm



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



Drum Unit (K) counter was cleared.



43-0077



Multi-purpose Tray Feed Roller replacement completion alarm



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



Multi-purpose Tray Feed Roller counter was cleared.



43-0078



Multi-purpose Tray Separation Roller replacement completion alarm



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



Multi-purpose Tray Separation Roller counter was cleared.



43-0079



Right Deck Pickup Roller replacement completion alarm



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



Right Deck Pickup Roller counter was cleared.



43-0080



Right Deck Feed Roller replacement completion alarm



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



Right Deck Feed Roller counter was cleared.



43-0081



Right Deck Separation Roller replacement completion alarm



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



Right Deck Separation Roller counter was cleared.



973



7. Error/Jam/Alarm 43-0082



Left Deck Pickup Roller replacement completion alarm



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



Left Deck Pickup Roller counter was cleared.



43-0083



Left Deck Feed Roller replacement completion alarm



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



Left Deck Feed Roller counter was cleared.



43-0084



Left Deck Separation Roller replacement completion alarm



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



Left Deck Separation Roller counter was cleared.



43-0085



Cassette 3 Pickup Roller replacement completion alarm



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



Cassette 3 Pickup Roller counter was cleared.



43-0086



Cassette 3 Feed Roller replacement completion alarm



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



Cassette 3 Feed Roller counter was cleared.



43-0087



Cassette 3 Separation Roller replacement completion alarm



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



Cassette 3 Separation Roller counter was cleared.



43-0088



Cassette 4 Pickup Roller replacement completion alarm



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



Cassette 4 Pickup Roller counter was cleared.



43-0089



Cassette 4 Feed Roller replacement completion alarm



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



Cassette 4 Feed Roller counter was cleared.



43-0090



Cassette 4 Separation Roller replacement completion alarm



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



Cassette 4 Separation Roller counter was cleared.



43-0091



Feed Roller (DADF) replacement completion alarm



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



Feed Roller (DADF) counter was cleared.



43-0092



Separation Roller (DADF) replacement completion alarm



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



Separation Roller (DADF) counter was cleared.



43-0123



Developing Cylinder replacement completion alarm



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



Developing Cylinder counter was cleared.



43-0125



Pickup Roller (DADF) replacement completion alarm



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



Pickup Roller (DADF) counter was cleared.



43-0133



Primary Charging Wire replacement completion alarm



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



Primary Charging Wire counter was cleared.



43-0173



Primary Charging Assembly replacement completion alarm



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



Primary Charging Assembly counter was cleared.



43-0193



Drum Cleaning Blade replacement completion alarm



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



Drum Cleaning Blade counter was cleared.



974



7. Error/Jam/Alarm 43-0350



Primary Charging Wire Cleaning Pad replacement completion alarm



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



Primary Charging Wire Cleaning Pad counter was cleared.



43-0352



Drum Cleaner Side Seal (Front) replacement completion alarm



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



Drum Cleaner Side Seal (Front) counter was cleared.



43-0353



Drum Cleaner Side Seal (Rear) replacement completion alarm



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



Drum Cleaner Side Seal (Rear) counter was cleared.



43-0354



Drum Separation Claw replacement completion alarm



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



Drum Separation Claw counter was cleared.



43-0355



Pre-exposure Scraper replacement completion alarm



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



Pre-exposure Scraper counter was cleared.



43-0356



Developing Assembly replacement completion alarm



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



Developing Assembly counter was cleared.



43-0370



ETB Cleaning Blade replacement completion alarm



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



ETB Cleaning Blade counter was cleared.



43-0372



Brush Roller replacement completion alarm



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



Brush Roller counter was cleared.



43-0376



Primary Pre-transfer Charging Wire replacement completion alarm



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



Primary Pre-transfer Charging Wire counter was cleared.



43-0377



Primary Pre-transfer Charging Wire Cleaning Pad replacement completion alarm



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



Primary Pre-transfer Charging Wire Cleaning Pad counter was cleared.



43-0378



Primary Pre-transfer Charging Assembly replacement completion alarm



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



Primary Pre-transfer Charging Assembly counter was cleared.



43-0389



Fixing Roller replacement completion alarm



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



Fixing Roller counter was cleared.



43-0390



Fixing Main Thermistor replacement completion alarm



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



Fixing Main Thermistor counter was cleared.



43-0391



Fixing Sub Thermistor replacement completion alarm



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



Fixing Sub Thermistor counter was cleared.



43-0394



Fixing Roller Thrust Retainer replacement completion alarm



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



Fixing Roller Thrust Retainer counter was cleared.



43-0398



Pressure Roller replacement completion alarm



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



Pressure Roller counter was cleared.



975



7. Error/Jam/Alarm 43-0402



Pressure Roller Static Eliminator replacement completion alarm



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



Pressure Roller Static Eliminator counter was cleared.



43-0419



Fixing Web replacement completion alarm



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



Fixing Web counter was cleared.



43-0470



Upper Separation Claw replacement completion alarm



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



Upper Separation Claw counter was cleared.



43-0483



Ozone Filter replacement completion alarm



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



Ozone Filter counter was cleared.



43-0488



Dustproof Filter replacement completion alarm



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



Dustproof Filter counter was cleared.



43-0511



Dust Removal Sheet 1 (DADF) replacement completion alarm



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



Dust Removal Sheet 1 (DADF) counter was cleared.



43-0512



Dust Removal Sheet 2 (DADF) replacement completion alarm



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



Dust Removal Sheet 2 (DADF) counter was cleared.



43-0568



Pickup Roller (Deck) replacement completion alarm



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



Pickup Roller (Deck) counter was cleared.



43-0572



Separation Roller Parts (Deck) replacement completion alarm



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



Separation Roller Parts (Deck) counter was cleared.



43-0576



Feed Roller (Deck) replacement completion alarm



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



Feed Roller (Deck) counter was cleared.



50-0007



Insufficient light intensity in Post-separation Sensor 3



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



Movement: Nothing in particular. Cause: Light intensity is insufficient when adjusting output of the Post-separation Sensor 3 (SR20). Measures: Clean the Post-separation Sensor 3 (SR20) (periodical maintenance).



50-0008



Insufficient light intensity in Lead Sensor 1



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



Movement: Nothing in particular. Cause: Light intensity is insufficient when adjusting output of the Lead Sensor 1 (SR22). Measures: Clean the Lead Sensor 1 (SR22) (periodical maintenance).



50-0009



Insufficient light intensity in Delivery Sensor



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



Movement: Nothing in particular. Cause: Light intensity is insufficient when adjusting output of the Delivery Sensor (SR21). Measures: Clean the Delivery Sensor (SR21) (periodical maintenance).



50-0010



Alarm due to original separation failure



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



Movement: Nothing in particular. Cause: Condition unable to separate 1st sheet of original from the ADF occurs 3 times. Measures: Check rotation of the Pickup Motor (M1) -> Check the life of the Pickup Roller -> Check if paper lint is at the Pickup Slot.



976



7. Error/Jam/Alarm 50-0013



Insufficient light intensity in Registration Sensor



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



Movement: Nothing in particular. Cause: Light intensity is insufficient when adjusting output of the Registration Sensor (SR23). Measures: Clean the Registration Sensor (SR23) (periodical maintenance).



50-0014



Insufficient Scanner Unit (Paper Back) LED light intensity alarm (Some of the LEDs are OFF. Scanning can be continued.)



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



In the case that the light intensity is insufficient at LED lighting.



50-0015



ADF Double Feed Detection Sensor trouble



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



Cause: Failure of the Double Feed Sensor installed in the ADF Detection condition/timing: - When a paper feed error of the Double Feed Sensor was detected at power-on - When an error of the output value of the Double Feed Sensor was detected during ADF job (While an ADF job is being executed, it is handled as a jam once and retry is performed.) Clearing condition: When communication and the sensor output value are normal at power-on Movement/symptom: "Check area where multi. sheet feed was detected. (Call serv. rep.)" is displayed in the status line. Although reading from the ADF is possible, double feed cannot be detected when it occurs. Message displayed on the Control Panel: Check area where multi. sheet feed was detected. (Call serv. rep.) Measures: Check for any foreign matter, clean paper lint, disconnect and then connect the connectors, replace the Double Feed Detection PCB, replace the RCON/DF Driver PCB, replace the harnesses



60-0001



Shift Tray alarm



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



Movement: Shift Tray operation is stopped. Cause: Home position at startup of the host machine cannot be detected. Measure: Check connector disconnection of the HP Sensor (Front) (PS101) and the HP Sensor (Rear) (PS102) -> Replace the HP Sensor (Front) (PS101) and the HP Sensor (Rear) (PS102).



61-0002



Finisher Staple Free Stapling alarm



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



Cause: The staple free staple unit is broken. Operation : Operation stops as jam. After jam processing, the paper is delivered without stapling until a job is finished. Recovery method : Replace the Staple free staple unit. After performing the remedy work, go through the following to clear the alarm: SORTER> FUNCTION> EMSG-CLR.



70-0071



Verification error by Falsification detection at startup function



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



Cause: At normal startup, verification error occurred due to invalid data of the firmware (for startup in safe mode). Measures: 1. Replace the Flash PCB, and reinstall the system software using SST or a USB flash drive. 2. Settings/Registration > Management Settings > Security Settings > System verification at startup > OFF



70-0086



For R&D



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



977



7. Error/Jam/Alarm 70-0087



Firmware combination mismatch



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



Cause: An option with the firmware which version is newer than that of the firmware installed in the host machine was detected. It is an alarm when the automatic update cancellation message is displayed on the Control Panel. Detection condition: When the following two conditions are satisfied: 1. "1" is set in COPIER>Option>FNC-SW>VER-CHNG. 2. The version of the firmware installed in the option that has been installed to the host machine is newer than that of the firmware in the host machine. Timing: At startup Movement/symptom: Cancel the automatic update. Measures: Update the firmware of the host machine.



73-0004



For R&D



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



-



73-0006



LIPS



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



Error in configuration acquisition/management



73-0007



For R&D



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



-



73-0008



For R&D



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



-



73-0009



For R&D



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



-



73-0011



For R&D



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



-



73-0014



For R&D



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



-



73-0015



For R&D



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



-



73-0017



For R&D



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



-



73-0021



For R&D



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



-



73-0024



For R&D



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



-



73-0026



For R&D



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



-



978



7. Error/Jam/Alarm 75-0001



For R&D



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



-



75-0002



For R&D



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



-



76-0001



For R&D



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



-



76-0002



Font



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



Fails to secure the work area to analyze the font that is downloaded at "Resource Download".



76-0003



For R&D



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



-



76-0004



For R&D



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



-



76-0005



For R&D



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



-



76-0006



For R&D



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



-



76-0007



For R&D



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



-



76-0008



For R&D



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



-



77-0001



For R&D



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



-



77-0002



For R&D



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



-



77-0003



For R&D



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



-



77-0005



For R&D



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



-



77-0006



For R&D



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



-



78-0001



For R&D



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



-



979



7. Error/Jam/Alarm 78-0002



For R&D



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



-



78-0003



For R&D



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



-



78-0004



For R&D



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



-



78-0005



For R&D



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



-



79-0001



For R&D



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



-



79-0002



For R&D



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



-



79-0003



Canon-made PCL



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



Overflow of work memory for translator



79-0004



Canon-made PCL



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



Download overflow



80-0001



For R&D



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



-



80-0003



For R&D



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



-



80-0004



For R&D



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



-



80-0007



For R&D



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



-



80-0008



For R&D



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



-



80-0009



For R&D



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



-



80-0010



For R&D



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



-



80-0011



For R&D



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



-



980



7. Error/Jam/Alarm 80-0012



For R&D



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



-



80-0013



For R&D



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



-



80-0015



BDL



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



Print data cannot process this version.



80-0016



For R&D



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



-



80-0019



For R&D



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



-



81-0001



Imaging



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



Fails to allocate the memory.



81-0002



Imaging



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



Rendering error



81-0003



For R&D



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



-



81-0004



For R&D



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



-



81-0005



For R&D



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



-



81-0006



For R&D



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



-



81-0007



For R&D



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



-



83-0005



PDF



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



PDF memory full



83-0015



PDF



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



PDF data decoding error



83-0016



PDF



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



Page range error



83-0017



For R&D



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



-



981



7. Error/Jam/Alarm 83-0020



Reception of ESCP unanalyzable data



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



Since PDL automatic judgment may be wrong, select the appropriate PDL in Settings/Registration > Function Settings > Printer > Printer Settings > Settings > Printer Operation Mode, and send the data.



83-0021



Reception of I5577 unanalyzable data



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



Since PDL automatic judgment may be wrong, select the appropriate PDL in Settings/Registration > Function Settings > Printer > Printer Settings > Settings > Printer Operation Mode, and send the data.



83-0022



Reception of HPGL unanalyzable data



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



Since PDL automatic judgment may be wrong, select the appropriate PDL in Settings/Registration > Function Settings > Printer > Printer Settings > Settings > Printer Operation Mode, and send the data.



83-0023



Reception of N201 unanalyzable data



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



Since PDL automatic judgment may be wrong, select the appropriate PDL in Settings/Registration > Function Settings > Printer > Printer Settings > Settings > Printer Operation Mode, and send the data.



84-0001



For R&D



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



-



84-0002



For R&D



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



-



84-0003



XPS print range error



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



-



84-0004



For R&D



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



-



84-0005



For R&D



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



-



84-0006



For R&D



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



-



84-0007



For R&D



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



-



84-0008



XPS non-support image error



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



-



84-0009



For R&D



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



-



85-0001



For R&D



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



-



85-0002



For R&D



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



-



982



7. Error/Jam/Alarm 85-0004



For R&D



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



-



85-0005



For R&D



A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy



-



983



7. Error/Jam/Alarm



Jam Code Jam Type Type



Overview of detection



Check items (in arbitrary order)



DELAY



A delay jam occurs when a sensor was not turned ON although a specified period of time had passed after the start of detection by the sensor.



• • • • •



STNRY



A stationary jam occurs when a sensor was not turned OFF although a specified period of time had passed after the sensor was turned ON.



• • • • •



DOOR OP



A door open jam occurs when a sensor detected door open during printing operation.



• Door open during printing



COVER OP



A door open jam occurs when a sensor detected cover open during printing operation.



• Cover open during printing



ADF OPEN



A door open jam occurs when a sensor detected ADF open during printing operation.



• ADF open during printing



SEQUENCE



A sequence jam occurs when there was an error in sensor detection signal at printing operation sequence. Since the jam may occur due to sporadic noise with software of each equipment or communication line (interruption of communication), failure of the part is not the cause of the jam. After the jam is removed, the machine works.



• Opening/closing of the door • Turning OFF and then ON the power • Error near the target sensor (soiling/displacement/failure of the sensor, error in harness/open circuit of harness, soiling (grease)/deterioration/failure of a drive motor, or soiling (paper dust)/deterioration/failure of a drive roller)



POWER ON



A power-on jam occurs when a sensor detected ON state at power-on.



• • • •



ERROR



An error avoidance jam occurs when an error in the machine (excluding parts failure) was detected. Printing operation is suspended to avoid error occurrence by error code; therefore, parts failure is not the cause of the jam. After the jam is removed, the machine works. If it is due to parts failure, an error code instead of the error avoidance jam is displayed on UI and printing operation is suspended. In such case, service technician should perform remedial work for the error code.



• Opening/closing of the door after jam removal • Turning OFF and then ON the power after jam removal



SIZE ERR



A size error jam occurs when the difference between the paper length detected by the Cassette Guide Plate/specified on the Control Panel and the length measured by the Registration Sensor is out of the specified range.



• Difference in paper size • Wrong paper size setting • Error in the Document Size Sensor (soiling/displacement/ failure of the sensor) • Error in the Paper Size Detection Unit (failure of mechanical structure for size detection, failure of the Guide Plate, or failure of the Cassette Size Switch)



P-STOP



Forcible stop of paper feed It occurs when a sheet of paper stops at the position specified in service mode.



• Using at problem analysis.



984



Remaining paper at the upstream of the target sensor Soiling on the target sensor Displacement of the target sensor position Failure of the target sensor Soiling (grease)/deterioration/failure of a drive motor located upstream of the target sensor • Soiling (paper dust)/deterioration/failure of a drive roller located upstream of the target sensor



Remaining paper near the target sensor Soiling on the target sensor Displacement of the target sensor position Failure of the target sensor Soiling (grease)/deterioration/failure of a drive motor located upstream of the target sensor • Soiling (paper dust)/deterioration/failure of a drive roller located upstream of the target sensor



Remaining paper in the machine Soiling on the target sensor Failure of the target sensor Foreign matter on the target sensor (paper dust, paper lint)



7. Error/Jam/Alarm Type Wrapping jam



Overview of detection



Check items (in arbitrary order)



When the first sensor after the fixing roller is turned ON is turned OFF immediately detection after the detection. Alternatively, when the second sensor after fixing roller is turned ON and immediately after detection, the first sensor is detection turned OFF.



• • • •



Fixing Assembly remaining in Paper Failure of the target sensor Fixing Assembly failure Paper Type Confirmation (Check if paper type cannot be used.)



Jam screen display specification Due to one jam code being used for multiple options, the illustration for the different option may be displayed on the jam screen. In this case, "1/2" or similar information is displayed on top left side of the screen and this area can be pushed. This operation can be used to switch information on the screen.



Main Unit PS51



PS52



PS29



PS28



PS03



PS36 PS35 PS04



PS24



PS65



PS19 PS32



PS66



PS02



PS20



PS25



PS33



PS21



PS67



PS26



PS64



PS22 PS27



ACC ID



Jam Code



Type



Sensor Name/Description



00



0101



DELAY



Right Deck Pickup Sensor 1



00



0102



DELAY



Right Deck Pull Out Sensor



PS32



00



0103



DELAY



Vertical Path Sensor 1



PS24



985



Sensor ID PS19



7. Error/Jam/Alarm ACC ID



Jam Code



Type



Sensor Name/Description



00



0104



DELAY



Writing Judging Sensor



PS28



00



0105



DELAY



Registration Sensor



PS29



00



0106



DELAY



Left Deck Pickup Sensor 1



PS20



00



0107



DELAY



Left Deck Pull Out Sensor



PS33



00



0108



DELAY



Duplex Merging Sensor



PS67



00



0109



DELAY



Duplex Outlet Sensor



PS64



00



010A



DELAY



Cassette 3 Pickup Sensor 1



PS21



00



010B



DELAY



Vertical Path Sensor 3



PS26



00



010C



DELAY



Vertical Path Sensor 2



PS25



00



010D



DELAY



Cassette 4 Pickup Sensor 1



PS22



00



010E



DELAY



Vertical Path Sensor 4



PS27



00



0111



DELAY



Fixing Outlet Sensor



PS52



00



0112



DELAY



Inner Delivery Sensor



PS35



00



0113



DELAY



Outer Delivery Sensor



PS36



00



0114



DELAY



Reverse Vertical Path Sensor



PS65



00



0115



DELAY



Duplex Left Sensor



PS66



00



0202



STNRY



Right Deck Pull Out Sensor



PS32



00



0203



STNRY



Vertical Path Sensor 1



PS24



00



0204



STNRY



Writing Judging Sensor



PS28



00



0205



STNRY



Registration Sensor



PS29



00



0207



STNRY



Left Deck Pull Out Sensor



PS33



00



0208



STNRY



Duplex Merging Sensor



PS67



00



0209



STNRY



Duplex Outlet Sensor



PS64



00



020B



STNRY



Vertical Path Sensor 3



PS26



00



020C



STNRY



Vertical Path Sensor 2



PS25



00



020E



STNRY



Vertical Path Sensor 4



PS27



00



0212



STNRY



Inner Delivery Sensor



PS35



00



0213



STNRY



Outer Delivery Sensor



PS36



00



0214



STNRY



Reverse Vertical Path Sensor



PS65



00



0215



STNRY



Duplex Left Sensor



PS66



00



0305



TIMING NG



Registration Sensor



PS29



00



0A02



POWER ON



Right Deck Pull Out Sensor



PS32



00



0A03



POWER ON



Vertical Path Sensor 1



PS24



00



0A04



POWER ON



Writing Judging Sensor



PS28



00



0A05



POWER ON



Registration Sensor



PS29



00



0A07



POWER ON



Left Deck Pull Out Sensor



PS33



00



0A08



POWER ON



Duplex Merging Sensor



PS67



00



0A09



POWER ON



Duplex Outlet Sensor



PS64



00



0A0B



POWER ON



Vertical Path Sensor 3



PS26



00



0A0C



POWER ON



Vertical Path Sensor 2



PS25



00



0A0E



POWER ON



Vertical Path Sensor 4



PS27



00



0A0F



POWER ON



Fixing Entrance Sensor



PS51



00



0A10



POWER ON



Fixing Toenail



PS4



00



0A11



POWER ON



Fixing Outlet Sensor



PS52



00



0A12



POWER ON



Inner Delivery Sensor



PS35



00



0A13



POWER ON



Outer Delivery Sensor



PS36



00



0A14



POWER ON



Reverse Vertical Path Sensor



PS65



00



0A15



POWER ON



Duplex Left Sensor



PS66



00



0B00



DOOR OP



Door Open



00



0B01



DOOR OP



Front cover open/close sensor



DOOR OP



00



0B02



DOOR OP



Manua cover open/close sensor



DOOR OP



00



0B03



DOOR OP



Vertical Path Cover Open/Close Sensor



DOOR OP



00



0C10



OTHER



Fixing Toenail jam



OTHER



00



0CA1



OTHER



FeedSts time out jam



OTHER



986



Sensor ID



-



7. Error/Jam/Alarm ACC ID



Jam Code



Type



Sensor Name/Description



00



0CA2



OTHER



RefeedStart time out jam



OTHER



00



0CA3



OTHER



ImageSet time out jam



OTHER



00



0CA4



OTHER



PageComplete time out jam



OTHER



00



0CA5



OTHER



Fixing temperature control time out jam



OTHER



00



0CAF



OTHER



FeedSts time out jam



OTHER



00



0CF1



OTHER



Retry jam



OTHER



00



0D91



OTHER



Different Size jam(short paper length)



OTHER



00



AA01



P-STOP



Jam upon executing paper feed stop mode



-



00



AA02



P-STOP



Jam upon executing paper feed stop mode



-



00



AA03



P-STOP



Jam upon executing paper feed stop mode



-



00



AA04



P-STOP



Jam upon executing paper feed stop mode



-



00



AA05



P-STOP



Jam upon executing paper feed stop mode



-



00



AA06



P-STOP



Jam upon executing paper feed stop mode



-



00



AA07



P-STOP



Jam upon executing paper feed stop mode



-



00



AA08



P-STOP



Jam upon executing paper feed stop mode



-



00



AA20



P-STOP



Jam upon executing paper feed stop mode



-



00



AA21



P-STOP



Jam upon executing paper feed stop mode



-



00



AA22



P-STOP



Jam upon executing paper feed stop mode



-



00



AA23



P-STOP



Jam upon executing paper feed stop mode



-



00



AA30



P-STOP



Jam upon executing paper feed stop mode



-



00



AA31



P-STOP



Jam upon executing paper feed stop mode



-



00



AA40



P-STOP



Jam upon executing paper feed stop mode



-



00



AA41



P-STOP



Jam upon executing paper feed stop mode



-



00



AA70



P-STOP



Jam upon executing paper feed stop mode



-



00



AA71



P-STOP



Jam upon executing paper feed stop mode



-



00



AA72



P-STOP



Jam upon executing paper feed stop mode



-



00



AA73



P-STOP



Jam upon executing paper feed stop mode



-



00



AA74



P-STOP



Jam upon executing paper feed stop mode



-



00



AA75



P-STOP



Jam upon executing paper feed stop mode



-



00



AA76



P-STOP



Jam upon executing paper feed stop mode



-



00



AA99



P-STOP



Jam upon executing paper feed stop mode



-



987



Sensor ID



7. Error/Jam/Alarm



Paper Deck Unit-E1 PS2



PS1



ACC ID



Jam Code



Type



00



0117



DELAY



Deck pickup sensor



Sensor Name/Description



PS1



00



0118



DELAY



Deck pull-out sensor



PS2



00



0218



STNRY



Deck pull-out sensor



PS2



00



0A18



POWER ON



Deck pull-out sensor



PS2



988



Sensor ID



7. Error/Jam/Alarm



POD Deck Lite-C1 SR6



SR7



ACC ID



Jam Code



Type



00



0117



DELAY



Deck pickup sensor



Sensor Name/Description



SR7



00



0118



DELAY



Deck pull-out sensor



SR6



00



0218



STNRY



Deck pull-out sensor



SR6



00



0A18



POWER ON



Deck pull-out sensor



SR6



989



Sensor ID



7. Error/Jam/Alarm



Duplex Color Image Reader Unit SR13



SR24



SR12



SR20 SR17



SR25



SR7 SR11



SR10



SR22 SR19 SR14 SR21 SR9 SR23 SR15 SR18 SR8



SR6



SR1



SR5 SR3



SR2



SR4 VR1



CF2 CF1



PS1 PS3 PS2



ACC ID



Jam Code



Type



01



0001



DELAY



Sensor Name/Description Post-separation sensor 3



990



Sensor ID SR20



7. Error/Jam/Alarm ACC ID



Jam Code



Type



Sensor Name/Description



Sensor ID



01



0002



STNRY



Post-separation sensor 3



SR20



01



0003



DELAY



Delay detection sensor



SR8



01



0004



STNRY



Delay detection sensor



SR8



01



0005



DELAY



Registration Sensor



SR23



01



0006



STNRY



Registration Sensor



SR23



01



0007



DELAY



Lead sensor 1



SR22



01



0008



STNRY



Lead sensor 1



SR22



01



0009



DELAY



Lead sensor 2



SR19



01



0010



STNRY



Lead sensor 2



SR19



01



0011



DELAY



Delivery Sensor



SR21



01



0012



STNRY



Delivery Sensor



01



0020



OVERLAP



Double Feed Detection Sensor



SR24,SR25



01



0021



COM-ERR



Double Feed Detection Sensor



SR24,SR25



01



0042



STNRY



Post-separation sensor 3



SR20



01



0043



DELAY



Delay detection sensor



SR8



01



0044



STNRY



Delay detection sensor



SR8



01



0045



DELAY



Registration Sensor



SR23



01



0046



STNRY



Registration Sensor



SR23



01



0047



DELAY



Lead sensor 1



SR22



01



0048



STNRY



Lead sensor 1



SR22



01



0049



DELAY



Lead sensor 2



SR19



01



0050



STNRY



Lead sensor 2



SR19



01



0051



DELAY



Delivery Sensor



SR21



01



0052



STNRY



Delivery Sensor



SR21



01



0060



OVERLAP



Double Feed Detection Sensor



SR24,SR25



01



0061



COM-ERR



Double Feed Detection Sensor



SR24,SR25



01



0062



ERROR



Double Feed Detection Sensor



SR24,SR25



01



0063



COM-ERR



Double Feed Detection Sensor



SR24,SR25



01



0071



SEQ NG



-



01



0075



ERROR



-



01



0076



OTH JAM



01



0090



01 01



SR21



SR11



Original Size Sensor 1 Original Size Sensor 2



CF2,CF1



ADF OP



DADF open/closed sensor 1/2



PS1,PS3



0091



ADF OP



DADF open/closed sensor 1/2



PS1,PS3



0092



COVER OP



Cover open/closed sensor



SR17



01



0093



COVER OP



Cover open/closed sensor



SR17



01



0094



RESIDUAL



All feed sensor



01



0095



PICKUP NG



Post-separation sensor 1/2/3



01



0096



01



00A1



POWER ON



Post-separation sensor 3



SR20



01



00A2



POWER ON



Delay detection sensor



SR8



01



00A3



POWER ON



Registration Sensor



SR23



01



00A4



POWER ON



Lead sensor 1



SR22



01



00A5



POWER ON



Lead sensor 2



SR19



01



00A6



POWER ON



Delivery Sensor



SR21



LIMITED FUNCTION -



SR6,SR7,SR20 -



991



7. Error/Jam/Alarm



Staple Finisher-AC1, Booklet Finisher-AC1 PS133 PS131 PS111 PS102 PS101 PS103 PS104 SW101 PS201



PS130 PS114 PS128 PS129 PS125 PS203



PS215 PS202



ACC ID



Jam Code



Type



02



1001



DELAY



Inlet Sensor



Sensor Name/Description



Sensor ID PS101



02



1002



DELAY



Delivery Sensor



PS102



02



1003



DELAY



Buffer Sensor



PS103



02



1004



DELAY



Lower Escape Delivery Sensor



PS111



02



1005



DELAY



Upper Escape Delivery Sensor



PS133



02



1006



DELAY



Escape Feed Sensor



PS131



02



1008



DELAY



Saddle Delivery Sensor



PS203



02



1009



DELAY



Saddle Inlet Sensor



PS201



02



1101



STNRY



Inlet Sensor



PS101



02



1102



STNRY



Delivery Sensor



PS102



02



1103



STNRY



Buffer Sensor



PS103



02



1104



STNRY



Lower Escape Delivery Sensor



PS111



02



1105



STNRY



Upper Escape Delivery Sensor



PS133



02



1106



STNRY



Escape Feed Sensor



PS131



02



1108



STNRY



Saddle Delivery Sensor



PS203



02



1109



STNRY



Saddle Inlet Sensor



PS201



02



1200



TIMING



-



02



1301



POWER ON



Inlet Sensor



PS101



02



1302



POWER ON



Delivery Sensor



PS102



02



1303



POWER ON



Buffer Sensor



PS103



02



1304



POWER ON



Lower Escape Delivery Sensor



PS111



02



1305



POWER ON



Upper Escape Delivery Sensor



PS133



02



1306



POWER ON



Escape Feed Sensor



PS131



02



1307



POWER ON



Saddle Processing Tray Paper Sensor



PS202



02



1308



POWER ON



Saddle Delivery Sensor



PS203



02



1309



POWER ON



Saddle Inlet Sensor



02



1400



COVER OP



Front Cover Sensor/Front Cover Switch



02



1500



STAPLE



Staple HP Sensor



PS125



02



1501



SDL STP



Saddle Stitcher HP Sensor



PS215



-



992



PS201 PS104,SW101



7. Error/Jam/Alarm ACC ID



Jam Code



Type



Sensor Name/Description



02



1801



ERROR



Staple-free Binding Motor Clock Sensor



PS130



02



1802



ERROR



Staple-free Binding HP Sensor



PS129



02



1803



ERROR



-



-



02



1804



ERROR



-



-



02



1805



ERROR



-



-



02



1C14



ERROR



-



-



02



1C30



ERROR



-



-



02



1C32



ERROR



-



-



02



1C33



ERROR



-



-



02



1C35



ERROR



-



-



02



1C37



ERROR



-



-



02



1C40



ERROR



-



-



02



1C53



ERROR



-



-



02



1C77



ERROR



-



-



02



1C78



ERROR



-



-



02



1C7B



ERROR



-



-



02



1C83



ERROR



-



-



02



1CF0



ERROR



-



-



02



1CF1



ERROR



-



-



02



1CF3



ERROR



-



-



02



1CF6



ERROR



-



-



02



1CF8



ERROR



-



-



02



1CFA



ERROR



-



-



02



1F01



OTHER



-



-



02



1F32



OTHER



-



-



02



1F90



SEQUENCE



-



-



Document Insertion / Folding Unit-J1 S2



S3



S4 S12



S1



SW1



S10



S11



S24



S25 S22 S21



S23 S15 S8



993



Sensor ID



7. Error/Jam/Alarm ACC ID



Jam Code



Type



02



1010



DELAY



Paper Registration Sensor



Sensor Name/Description



Sensor ID S4



02



1011



DELAY



Paper Registration Sensor Reverse Entrance Sensor



S4,S12



02



1012



DELAY



Reverse Sensor Reverse Entrance Sensor



S10,S12



02



1013



DELAY



Reverse Sensor Reverse Timing Sensor Reverse Entrance Sensor



S10,S11,S12



02



1014



DELAY



Slowdown Timing Sensor



S24



02



1015



DELAY



Release Timing Sensor Slowdown Timing Sensor



S21,S24



02



1016



DELAY



Fold Position Sensor



02



1017



DELAY



Upper Stopper Path Sensor



S22



02



1018



DELAY



Delivery Sensor 1 Upper Stopper Path Sensor



S15,S22



02



1019



DELAY



Delivery Sensor 1 Delivery Sensor 2



S15,S25



02



101A



DELAY



Delivery Sensor 1 C Fold Tray Empty Sensor



S15,S18



02



1110



STNRY



Paper Registration Sensor



S4



02



1111



STNRY



Paper Registration Sensor Reverse Entrance Sensor



S4,S12



02



1112



STNRY



Reverse Sensor Reverse Entrance Sensor



S10,S12



02



1113



STNRY



Reverse Sensor Reverse Timing Sensor Reverse Entrance Sensor



S10,S11,S12



02



1114



STNRY



Slowdown Timing Sensor



02



1115



STNRY



Release Timing Sensor Fold Position Sensor



02



1116



STNRY



Fold Position Sensor



02



1117



STNRY



Upper Stopper Path Sensor



S22



02



1118



STNRY



Delivery Sensor 1 Upper Stopper Path Sensor



S15,S22



02



1119



STNRY



Delivery Sensor 1 Delivery Sensor 2



S15,S25



02



111A



STNRY



Delivery Sensor 1 C Fold Tray Empty Sensor



S15,S18



02



1310



POWER ON



-



02



1404



POWER ON



Front Upper Cover Open / Close Sensor Inserter Open / Close Sensor Top Cover Open / Close Sensor



02



1FD1



OTHER



S23



S24 S21,S23 S23



-



Tray Paper Sensor 1 Tray Paper Sensor 2



994



SW1,S1,S2



S7,S8



7. Error/Jam/Alarm



PUNCHER UNIT-A1 PS303



PS304 PS301



ACC ID



Jam Code



Type



02



1600



PUNCH



Punch HP Sensor 1/Punch HP Sensor 2



Sensor Name/Description



02



1C90



ERROR



-



-



02



1C93



ERROR



-



-



995



Sensor ID PS303,PS304



8



Service Mode Overview........................................... 997 COPIER (Service mode for printer) .....................................................1014 FEEDER (ADF service mode).........1262 SORTER (Service mode for delivery options)........................................1269 BOARD (Option board setting mode) .....................................................1287 FAX (Serivce Mode for FAX)...........1288



8. Service Mode



Overview It is possible to see each item of service mode so that those who access to service mode can understand how to use them. The main types of this machine's service mode are shown below.



Basic Operations This section describes the basic operation of service mode.



■ Entering Service Mode For information on how to enter service mode, contact the Support Dept. of the sales company.



■ Service Mode Menu Press the button in the service mode menu to display the initial screen of each mode. The differences between these modes are described below.



Top Screen MODELIST In this mode, functions for referring to each item in service mode, etc. are available. Updater This button is used to access the CDS and UGW servers and update system software. BACKUP This button is used to back up the service mode setting values. RESTORE This button is used to restore the service mode setting values backed up by [BACKUP]. SITUATION This function displays service mode items according to the situation. LUI MASK This button is used to display a mask screen to prevent operations from being performed from the Control Panel while the service mode is being accessed from a remote PC. NOTE: For the detailed information on how to use Updater, BACKUP, and RESTORE, refer to the imageRUNNER ADVANCE System Service Manual.



■ Description of Service Mode Items The description of the initial screen, the main items, the intermediate items and the sub items can be displayed. After selecting any item of the initial screen, main item, the intermediate item or the sub item, pressing “i” (Information Button) displays the description of the selected item (hereinafter referred to as the service mode contents).



997



8. Service Mode CAUTION: • Displayed language of the service mode contents can be selected from J/E/F/I/G/S/C/K/T. • The service mode contents can be upgraded using SST or a USB flash drive just like other system software. Example: COPIER > DISPLAY > VERSION screen 1. Press the [i] button.



2. The title of each sub item is displayed.



To check the details of each item, select the relevant item and press the [i] button. 3. A detailed description of the sub item (specifications and use methods, setting screen, etc.) is displayed.



■ Switching the Screen Display (Level 1 2) Switching of screens between Level 1 and Level 2 becomes easier.



998



8. Service Mode By pressing at the upper right of the screen while Level 1 screen is displayed, the screen is switched to Level 2 screen.



Examples of Screen Display NOTE: This key combination can be used to enter the Level 2 screen. • Mode List screen > [Settings/Registration] > [2]



999



8. Service Mode



SITUATION Mode Situation mode has been implemented in this machine to improve workability and searchability at the site. This mode makes it possible to easily use the service mode appropriate for the scene at the site.



The following items are available in situation mode. • Install: To be referred at installation of the machine. • Troubleshooting: To be referred at problem solving. • Parts Replacement: To be referred at parts replacement. • Major Adjustment: To be referred at installation of the machine. • Sensor Check: To be referred at checking of the sensor. • Part Check: To be referred at operation check of the part. The following three points are made available depending on each situation: • Display of related service mode that requires adjustment • Display of causes and remedies • Display of related images



■ How to Use Sensor Check You can find a desired electrical component in Sensor Check of situation mode to review its I/O info. To do this, follow the procedure below. 1. Start service mode.



1000



8. Service Mode 2. Select "SITUATION".



3. On the "SITUATION MODE" screen, select "Sensor Check".



4. Press a button according to the type of electrical component and the corresponding device type. Example: In the case of the Registration Sensor of the host machine, press the button (red dotted frame) at "COPIER"/"PSENSOR". Device classification



Electrical parts classification



1001



8. Service Mode 5. A list of electrical component types for the selected device is displayed.



6. Select an electrical component to display the details in the frame (red dotted frame) at the bottom of the screen.



7. Press the [i] button to display the screen showing the locations of electrical components.



■ How to Use Parts Check In the Parts Check of situation mode, among electrical components used (motors, fans, solenoids, and clutches), those that can operate alone can be operated from the screen and the operations can be checked. The operation procedure is shown below.



1002



8. Service Mode NOTE: The service mode used below utilizes the system where electrical components used are operated by control signals sent from the DC Controller. If a control signal is sent but the electrical component does not operate, a failure of the electrical component, open circuit of the cable for transmitting control signals, or poor contact of the connector is suspected.



1. Select SERVICE MODE > SITUATION > Parts Check. 2. Press a button according to the type of electrical component and the corresponding device type. Example: In the case of a motor of the host machine, press the button (red dotted frame) at "COPIER"/"MOTOR". Device classification



Electrical parts classification



3. A list of electrical component types for the selected device whose operation can be checked is displayed.



4. Select the electrical component you want to operate and then press the Start button to send a signal for driving the selected electrical component for a specified period of time from the DC Controller.



1003



8. Service Mode



5. "ACTIVE" is displayed while the electrical component is driven. After the electrical component has been driven for a specified period of time, "OK!" is displayed if transmission of the drive signal succeeded, or "NG !" is displayed if failed.



1004



8. Service Mode Press the [i] button to display the screen showing the locations of electrical components.



6. The screen showing the locations of electrical components is displayed.



Security Support A password can be specified to prevent unauthorized access to the service mode.



Related Service Mode: Setting password type when the screen is switched to the service mode • COPIER > OPTION > FNC-SW > PSWD-SW (Level 1) The password for service engineer when the screen is switched to the service mode • (Level 2) COPIER > OPTION > FNC-SW > SM-PSWD



1005



8. Service Mode



■ Procedure for Setting Password 1. Set "1" or "2" in the following service mode. • COPIER > OPTION > FNC-SW > PSWD-SW



0: No password [Default] 1: Service technician 2: System administrator + Service technician CAUTION: • This setting is enabled without restarting the host machine. • After setting the password, the following screen will be displayed by accessing service mode. • Therefore, when the PSWD-SW is set to "2" (system administrator + service technician), enter the system administrator password ([System Manager ID] and [System Manager PIN] in [Settings/Registrations] > [Management Settings] > [User Management] > [System Manager Information Settings]), and then press the [OK] button.



2. Follow the following procedure to check that you can login to service mode. 1. When setting PSWD-SW to "1" (system administrator) or "2" (ServiceMode_070Backup) in step 1, the system administrator password entry screen will be displayed, so enter the system administrator ID in [Sys Manager ID ] (1) and system administrator password in [Password] (2), and then press the [OK] button.



(1) (2)



2. When setting PSWD-SW to "2" (system administrator + service technician) in step 1, the service technician password entry screen will be displayed after step 2. Enter the service technician password in [Password] (1), and then press the [OK] button.



(1)



CAUTION: • The service technician password is the password set in COPIER > OPTION > FNC-SW > SM-PSWD. • If you forget the password for service technician, disable the password function using the Service Support Tool (SST). Check that you can access service mode and finish the work.



1006



8. Service Mode



■ Function to Mask the Screen during Remote Access This function ensures security during servicing work using remote connection. The machine has an option called Remote Operation Viewer for remote control via a network. This option enables a service technician to perform maintenance on the machine from a remote location. However, the same screen is displayed on the Remote Operation Viewer screen and the Control Panel during the work, which carries the following risks. • The screen being operated can be seen by the user. • During remote operation, the user may perform an operation on the Control Panel and an unexpected processing may be executed.



To solve these security problems, a function has been added to display a message on the Control Panel screen when the machine is being operated remotely using Remote Operation Viewer in order to prevent the user from performing unexpected operations. As shown in the figure below, the mask screen is displayed when this function is enabled.



Canon Remote Operation Viewer screen



The mask screen is displayed on the Control Panel screen when this function is enabled.



Examples of Screen Display



Functional Specification The specifications of this function are shown below.



1007



Operation Panel



8. Service Mode • When this function is enabled, a mask screen is displayed on the Control Panel. When the function is disabled, the original screen is displayed again.



Example of the displayed mask screen • This function is disabled when the following operations are performed. • Press [LUI MASK] on the service mode top screen. • Exit Remote Operation Viewer. • The remote access is disconnected due to a network failure, etc. • The machine is shut down (power down) or restarted. • If this function is disabled while the service mode is being operated, the service mode is forcibly exited, and the previous screen is displayed. (However, the service mode is not forcibly terminated if the Updater screen has been accessed from service mode.) • When this function is enabled, all operations (operations from the Touch Panel or hardware keys) other than screen brightness adjustment and operation on the Energy Saver key are disabled.



● Procedure for Enabling This Function The procedure for enabling this function is shown below. 1. Use the Remote Operation Viewer to access the machine, and start service mode. 2. Press [LUI MASK], and check that the button is enabled (has turned light blue).



● Procedure for Disabling This Function The procedure for disabling this function is shown below. 1. Perform one of the following operations. • Access the service mode, press [LUI MASK], and check that the button is disabled (has turned gray).



• Exit the Remote Operation Viewer. • Disconnect the network (disconnect the network cable, disable the network function, etc.). • Shut down or restart the machine.



1008



8. Service Mode



Service Mode Backup Adjustment is made to every machine at the time of shipment to write the adjustment value in the service label. When replacing the DC Controller PCB or clearing RAM, the adjusted values of ADJUST and OPTION return to the default; therefore, be sure to adjust the value in the field, and in the case of changing the service mode value, be sure to write down the changed value in the service label. When the corresponding item is not found on the service label, write the value in blank field.



Place of service label



Output of Service Print Data • The service print data such as P-PRINT can be output as a file. • By executing the following service mode, data at the time can be saved in the Storage Service Mode Level 1 > Copier > Function > MISC-P > RPT-FILE • The saved data will be deleted from the Storage when it is exported to SST or a USB flash drive. • When multiple service data such as P-PRINT and HIST-PRINT is saved in the host machine, it is collectively exported to SST or a USB flash drive. NOTE: • Service print data cannot be output when an error has occurred. • When connecting a USB flash drive that runs on external power, start the machine with the power is turned ON in advance. A USB flash drive connected after the machine has been started cannot be recognized.



How to obtain the report data



Location



“Moving the file in service mode” on page 1010



USB flash drive



“Moving the file in download mode” on page 1011



USB flash drive



“How to Export Service Print File to a PC Using SST ” on page 1012



PC



■ Service Print and Data File Name Supported for File Output Service Mode



Content



COPIER > Function> MISC-P > P-PRINT



Output of service mode setting values



COPIER > Function > MISC-P > HIST-PRT



Output of jam and error history



COPIER > Function > MISC-P > USER-PRT



Output of Settings/Registration menu setting values list



COPIER > Function > MISC-P > D-PRINT



Output of service mode (DISPLAY)



COPIER > Function > MISC-P > ENV-PRT



Output of the temperature and humidity inside the machine/surface temperature of the Fixing Roller as a log



COPIER > Function > MISC-P > PJH-P-1



Output of details on print job history (100 jobs)



COPIER > Function > MISC-P > PJH-P-2



Output of details on print job history (all jobs)



COPIER > Function > MISC-P > USBH-PRT



Output of USB device information report



COPIER > Function > MISC-P > TNRB-RPT



Output of the Toner Container ID report



1009



8. Service Mode NOTE: When each service mode is individually executed, the report corresponding to the service mode as of the time of execution is output.



■ Moving the file in service mode Preparation The following item needs to be prepared to export the service print file to a USB flash drive. • USB flash drive (FAT32 format file system that is not locked with a password. To display the USB menu, the said model's firmware must already be registered.) Overall flow 1. Selecting RPT-FILE Select service mode > Copier > Function > MISC-P > RPT-FILE; and then press OK. 2. Generating report file After the “ACTIVE” blinks for 3 to 4 minutes, generation of a report file is complete as “OK!” is displayed.



3-+3 86%+357 537),/( 53786%



2.



3. Connect the USB flash drive storage device to the USB port. 4. Select service mode > Copier > Function > MISC-P > RPT2USB; and then press OK.



3-+3 86%+357 537),/( 53786%



OK



NOTE: • If the downloaded file is opened as plain text, the paragraphs are misaligned, which makes it difficult to read the data. • When the file is dragged to WordPad, an image similar to the image output on paper may be displayed in some cases.



1010



8. Service Mode



■ Moving the file in download mode Preparation The following item needs to be prepared to export the service print file to a USB flash drive. • USB flash drive (FAT32 format file system that is not locked with a password. To display the USB menu, the said model's firmware must already be registered.) Overall flow 1. Selecting RPT-FILE Select service mode > Copier > Function > MISC-P > RPT-FILE; and then press OK. 2. Generating report file After the “ACTIVE” blinks for 3 to 4 minutes, generation of a report file is complete as “OK!” is displayed.



3-+3 86%+357 537),/( 53786%



2.



3. Execute Download mode > [5]: Download File > [4]: ServicePrint Download.



>>>>>>>'RZQORDG)LOH0HQX86% @@@@@@@  >@68%/2*'RZQORDG >@6HUYLFH3ULQW'RZQORDG >&@5HWXUQWR0DLQ0HQX >5HVHW@6WDUWVKXWGRZQVHTXHQFH >@KDVEHHQVHOHFWHG([HFXWH" 2. &$1&(/ $Q\RWKHUNH\V



1011



8. Service Mode



■ How to Export Service Print File to a PC Using SST The procedure for exporting the service print file to a PC using SST will now be described. (SST described in the procedure is Ver 4.72.) 1. Start the SST. 2. Select the model [1] to be connected and the information file for separate download [2] ([Single]). Then, check the network settings and click the "Start" button. 7



[1] [2]



iA4245



3. Click the [Upload Data] button. 7



iA4245



iA4245



iA4245



4. Select [Report] and click the [Start] button. 7



iA4245



1012



8. Service Mode 5. Specify the folder name to be saved and enter comments if necessary. Then click the [Store] button. 7



iA4245



6. Click the [OK] button.



1013



8. Service Mode



COPIER (Service mode for printer) DISPLAY (State display mode) ■ VERSION COPIER (Service mode for printer) > DISPLAY (State display mode) > VERSION DC-CON



1 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range R-CON



1 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range PANEL



1 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range SORTER



1 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range PS/PCL



1 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range SDL-STCH



1 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range MN-CONT



1 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range



Display of DCON firmware version To display the firmware version of DC Controller PCB. When upgrading the firmware N/A (Display only) 00.01 to 99.99 Display of RCON firmware version To display the firmware version of Reader Controller PCB. When upgrading the firmware N/A (Display only) 00.01 to 99.99 Dspl of Control Panel CPU PCB ROM ver To display the ROM version of Control Panel CPU PCB. When upgrading the firmware N/A (Display only) 00.01 to 99.99 Dspl of FIN-CONT (Main) firmware version To display the firmware version of Finisher Controller PCB (Main). When upgrading the firmware N/A (Display only) 00.01 to 99.99 Display of PS/PCL function version To display the version of PS/PCL function. When upgrading the firmware N/A (Display only) 00.01 to 99.99 Dspl of Saddle Sttch Ctrollr PCB ROM ver To display the ROM version of the Saddle Stitcher Controller PCB. When upgrading the firmware N/A (Display only) 00.01 to 99.99 Display of MNCON firmware version To display the firmware version of Main Controller PCB. When upgrading the firmware N/A (Display only) 00.01 to 99.99



1014



8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > DISPLAY (State display mode) > VERSION RIP1



1 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range DIAG-DVC



1 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range PUNCH



1 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range LANG-FR



1 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range LANG-DE



1 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range LANG-IT



1 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range LANG-CS



2 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range LANG-DA



2 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range LANG-EL



2 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range



Display of RIP1 software version To display the software version to be downloaded to RIP1 (PS/PCL Expansion Accelerator Board). When upgrading the firmware N/A (Display only) 00.01 to 99.99 Dspl of self diagnosis device ROM ver To display the ROM version of self diagnosis device. When upgrading the firmware N/A (Display only) 00.01 to 99.99 Display of Finisher Inner Punch Unit To display the version of Finisher Inner Puncher Unit. When upgrading the firmware N/A (Display only) 00.01 to 99.99 Display of French language file version To display the version of French language file. When upgrading the firmware N/A (Display only) 00.01 to 99.99 Display of German language file version To display the version of German language file. When upgrading the firmware N/A (Display only) 00.01 to 99.99 Display of Italian language file version To display the version of Italian language file. When upgrading the firmware N/A (Display only) 00.01 to 99.99 Display of Czech language file version To display the version of Czech language file. When upgrading the firmware N/A (Display only) 00.01 to 99.99 Display of Danish language file version To display the version of Danish language file. When upgrading the firmware N/A (Display only) 00.01 to 99.99 Display of Greek language file version To display the version of Greek language file. When upgrading the firmware N/A (Display only) 00.01 to 99.99



1015



8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > DISPLAY (State display mode) > VERSION LANG-ES



1 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range LANG-ET



2 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range LANG-FI



2 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range LANG-HU



2 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range LANG-KO



2 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range LANG-NL



2 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range LANG-NO



2 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range LANG-PL



2 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range LANG-PT



2 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range



Display of Spanish language file version To display the version of Spanish language file. When upgrading the firmware N/A (Display only) 00.01 to 99.99 Display of Estonian language file ver To display the version of Estonian language file. When upgrading the firmware N/A (Display only) 00.01 to 99.99 Display of Finnish language file version To display the version of Finnish language file. When upgrading the firmware N/A (Display only) 00.01 to 99.99 Display of Hungarian language file ver To display the version of Hungarian language file. When upgrading the firmware N/A (Display only) 00.01 to 99.99 Display of Korean language file version To display the version of Korean language file. When upgrading the firmware N/A (Display only) 00.01 to 99.99 Display of Dutch language file version To display the version of Dutch language file. When upgrading the firmware N/A (Display only) 00.01 to 99.99 Display of Norwegian language file ver To display the version of Norwegian language file. When upgrading the firmware N/A (Display only) 00.01 to 99.99 Display of Polish language file version To display the version of Polish language file. When upgrading the firmware N/A (Display only) 00.01 to 99.99 Display of Portuguese language file ver To display the version of Portuguese language file. When upgrading the firmware N/A (Display only) 00.01 to 99.99



1016



8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > DISPLAY (State display mode) > VERSION LANG-RU



2 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range LANG-SL



2 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range LANG-SV



2 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range LANG-TW



2 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range LANG-ZH



2 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range LANG-BU



2 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range LANG-CR



2 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range LANG-RM



2 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range LANG-SK



2 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range



Display of Russian language file version To display the version of Russian language file. When upgrading the firmware N/A (Display only) 00.01 to 99.99 Display of Slovenian language file ver To display the version of Slovenian language file. When upgrading the firmware N/A (Display only) 00.01 to 99.99 Display of Swedish language file version To display the version of Swedish language file. When upgrading the firmware N/A (Display only) 00.01 to 99.99 Dspl of Chinese language file ver: trad To display the version of Chinese language file (traditional). When upgrading the firmware N/A (Display only) 00.01 to 99.99 Dspl of Chinese language file ver: smpl To display the version of Chinese language file (simplified). When upgrading the firmware N/A (Display only) 00.01 to 99.99 Display of Bulgarian language file ver To display the version of Bulgarian language file. When upgrading the firmware N/A (Display only) 00.01 to 99.99 Display of Croatian language file ver To display the version of Croatian language file. When upgrading the firmware N/A (Display only) 00.01 to 99.99 Display of Romanian language file ver To display the version of Romanian language file. When upgrading the firmware N/A (Display only) 00.01 to 99.99 Display of Slovak language file version To display the version of Slovak language file. When upgrading the firmware N/A (Display only) 00.01 to 99.99



1017



8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > DISPLAY (State display mode) > VERSION LANG-TK



2 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range LANG-CA



2 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range MEDIA-JA



2 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range MEDIA-EN



2 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range MEDIA-DE



2 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range MEDIA-IT



2 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range MEDIA-FR



2 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range MEDIA-ZH



2 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range MEDIA-SK



2 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range



Display of Turkish language file version To display the version of Turkish language file. When upgrading the firmware N/A (Display only) 00.01 to 99.99 Display of Catalan language file version To display the version of Catalan language file. When upgrading the firmware N/A (Display only) 00.01 to 99.99 Dspl of Japanese media information ver To display the version of Japanese media information. When upgrading the firmware N/A (Display only) 00.01 to 99.99 Dspl of English media information ver To display the version of English media information. When upgrading the firmware N/A (Display only) 00.01 to 99.99 Dspl of German media information version To display the version of German media information. When upgrading the firmware N/A (Display only) 00.01 to 99.99 Dspl of Italian media information ver To display the version of Italian media information. When upgrading the firmware N/A (Display only) 00.01 to 99.99 Dspl of French media information version To display the version of French media information. When upgrading the firmware N/A (Display only) 00.01 to 99.99 Dspl of Chinese media info ver: smpl To display the version of Chinese media information (simplified). When upgrading the firmware N/A (Display only) 00.01 to 99.99 Dspl of Slovak media information version To display the version of Slovak media information. When upgrading the firmware N/A (Display only) 00.01 to 99.99



1018



8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > DISPLAY (State display mode) > VERSION MEDIA-TK



2 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range MEDIA-CS



2 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range MEDIA-EL



2 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range MEDIA-ES



2 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range MEDIA-ET



2 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range MEDIA-FI



2 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range MEDIA-HU



2 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range MEDIA-KO



2 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range MEDIA-NL



2 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range



Dspl of Turkish media information ver To display the version of Turkish media information. When upgrading the firmware N/A (Display only) 00.01 to 99.99 Dspl of Czech media information version To display the version of Czech media information. When upgrading the firmware N/A (Display only) 00.01 to 99.99 Dspl of Greek media information version To display the version of Greek media information. When upgrading the firmware N/A (Display only) 00.01 to 99.99 Dspl of Spanish media information ver To display the version of Spanish media information. When upgrading the firmware N/A (Display only) 00.01 to 99.99 Dspl of Estonian media information ver To display the version of Estonian media information. When upgrading the firmware N/A (Display only) 00.01 to 99.99 Dspl of Finnish media information ver To display the version of Finnish media information. When upgrading the firmware N/A (Display only) 00.01 to 99.99 Dspl of Hungarian media information ver To display the version of Hungarian media information. When upgrading the firmware N/A (Display only) 00.01 to 99.99 Dspl of Korean media information version To display the version of Korean media information. When upgrading the firmware N/A (Display only) 00.01 to 99.99 Dspl of Dutch media information version To display the version of Dutch media information. When upgrading the firmware N/A (Display only) 00.01 to 99.99



1019



8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > DISPLAY (State display mode) > VERSION MEDIA-NO



2 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range MEDIA-PL



2 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range MEDIA-PT



2 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range MEDIA-RU



2 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range MEDIA-SL



2 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range MEDIA-SV



2 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range MEDIA-TW



2 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range MEDIA-BU



2 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range MEDIA-CR



2 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range



Dspl of Norwegian media information ver To display the version of Norwegian media information. When upgrading the firmware N/A (Display only) 00.01 to 99.99 Dspl of Polish media information version To display the version of Polish media information. When upgrading the firmware N/A (Display only) 00.01 to 99.99 Dspl of Portuguese media information ver To display the version of Portuguese media information. When upgrading the firmware N/A (Display only) 00.01 to 99.99 Dspl of Russian media information ver To display the version of Russian media information. When upgrading the firmware N/A (Display only) 00.01 to 99.99 Dspl of Slovenian media information ver To display the version of Slovenian media information. When upgrading the firmware N/A (Display only) 00.01 to 99.99 Dspl of Swedish media information ver To display the version of Swedish media information. When upgrading the firmware N/A (Display only) 00.01 to 99.99 Dspl of Chinese media info version:trad To display the version of Chinese media information (traditional). When upgrading the firmware N/A (Display only) 00.01 to 99.99 Dspl of Bulgarian media information ver To display the version of Bulgarian media information. When upgrading the firmware N/A (Display only) 00.01 to 99.99 Dspl of Croatian media information ver To display the version of Croatian media information. When upgrading the firmware N/A (Display only) 00.01 to 99.99



1020



8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > DISPLAY (State display mode) > VERSION MEDIA-RM



2 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range MEDIA-CA



2 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range FAX1



1 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range FAX2/3/4



1 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range IOCS



1 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range INS



1 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range S-LNG-JP



1 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range S-LNG-EN



1 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range



Dspl of Romanian media information ver To display the version of Romanian media information. When upgrading the firmware N/A (Display only) 00.01 to 99.99 Dspl of Catalan media information ver To display the version of Catalan media information. When upgrading the firmware N/A (Display only) 00.01 to 99.99 Display of 1-line FAX PCB ROM version To display the ROM version of 1-line FAX PCB. Nothing is displayed if the PCB is not connected. When upgrading the firmware N/A (Display only) ASCII character string (21 digits) Dspl of 2/3/4-line FAX PCB ROM version To display the ROM version of 2/3/4-line FAX PCB. Nothing is displayed if the PCB is not connected. When checking the version N/A (Display only) ASCII character string (21 digits) Display of IOCS version To display the IOCS version. When upgrading the firmware N/A (Display only) 00.01 to 99.99 Display of Inserter ROM version To display the ROM version of Inserter. When upgrading the firmware N/A (Display only) 00.01 to 99.99 Dspl of service mode Japanese file ver To display the version of Japanese language file in service mode. When upgrading the firmware N/A (Display only) 00.01 to 99.99 Dspl of service mode English file ver To display the version of English language file in service mode. When upgrading the firmware N/A (Display only) 00.01 to 99.99



1021



8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > DISPLAY (State display mode) > VERSION S-LNG-FR



1 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range S-LNG-IT



1 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range S-LNG-GR



1 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range S-LNG-SP



1 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range TSP-JLK



1 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range LS-ROM-V



2 Detail



Dspl of service mode French file version To display the version of French language file in service mode. When upgrading the firmware N/A (Display only) 00.01 to 99.99 Dspl of service mode Italian file ver To display the version of Italian language file in service mode. When upgrading the firmware N/A (Display only) 00.01 to 99.99 Dspl of service mode German file version To display the version of German language file in service mode. When upgrading the firmware N/A (Display only) 00.01 to 99.99 Dspl of service mode Spanish file ver To display the version of Spanish language file in service mode. When upgrading the firmware N/A (Display only) 00.01 to 99.99 Dspl Image Data Analyzer Board version To display the version of Image Data Analyzer Board. When upgrading the firmware N/A (Display only) 00.01 to 99.99 Dspl of Laser Scanner Unit EEPROM ver To display the EEPROM version of Laser Scanner Unit.



Use Case



At trouble analysis



Adj/Set/Operate Method



N/A (Display only)



Display/Adj/Set Range LS-UNT-V



2 Detail



001 to 999 Dspl of Laser Scanner Unit version To display the version of Laser Scanner Unit.



Use Case



At trouble analysis



Adj/Set/Operate Method



N/A (Display only)



Display/Adj/Set Range LS-SRL



2 Detail



001 to 999 Dspl of serial No. of Laser Scanner Unit To display the serial number of Laser Scanner Unit.



Use Case



At trouble analysis



Adj/Set/Operate Method



N/A (Display only)



Display/Adj/Set Range BCT



1 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range



00000001 to 99999999 Display of self diagnosis tool version To display the version of self diagnosis tool. When upgrading the firmware N/A (Display only) 00.01 to 99.99



1022



8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > DISPLAY (State display mode) > VERSION LANG-TH



2 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range LANG-VN



2 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range LANG-AR



2 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range LANG-MS



2 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range LANG-HI



2 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range LANG-EU



2 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range SORT-SLV



1 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range CONT-PF



1 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range LANG-HE



2 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range



Display of Thai language file version To display the version of Thai language file. When upgrading the firmware N/A (Display only) 00.01 to 99.99 Display of Vietnamese language file ver To display the version of Vietnamese language file. When upgrading the firmware N/A (Display only) 00.01 to 99.99 Dspl of Arabic language file ver To display the version of Arabic language file. When upgrading the firmware N/A (Display only) 00.01 to 99.99 Dspl of Malay language file ver To display the version of Malay language file. When upgrading the firmware N/A (Display only) 00.01 to 99.99 Dspl of Hindi language file ver To display the version of Hindi language file. When upgrading the firmware N/A (Display only) 00.01 to 99.99 Dspl of Euskera language file ver To display the version of Euskera language file. When upgrading the firmware N/A (Display only) 00.01 to 99.99 Dspl of FIN-CONT (Sub) firmware version To display the firmware version of Finisher Controller PCB (Sub). When upgrading the firmware N/A (Display only) 00.01 to 99.99 Display of Controller firmware version To display the platform version of the controller. When checking the platform version at upgrade/problem occurrence N/A (Display only) 00.01 to 99.99 Display of Hebrew language file version To display the version of Hebrew language file. When upgrading the firmware N/A (Display only) 00.01 to 99.99



1023



8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > DISPLAY (State display mode) > VERSION LANG-LT



2 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range LANG-LV



2 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range LANG-UK



2 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range LANG-MI



2 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range



Dspl of Lithuanian language file version To display the version of Lithuanian language file. When upgrading the firmware N/A (Display only) 00.01 to 99.99 Display of Latvian language file version To display the version of Latvian language file. When upgrading the firmware N/A (Display only) 00.01 to 99.99 Dspl of Ukrainian language file ver To display the Ukrainian language file version When the firmware is upgraded None (display only) 00.00 to 99.99 Dspl of Maori language file ver To display the Maori language file version When the firmware is upgraded None (display only) 00.00 to 99.99



■ USER COPIER (Service mode for printer) > DISPLAY (State display mode) > USER SPDTYPE



1 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method ADFTYPE



1 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method



Display of engine speed type To display the engine speed type of this machine. When checking the engine speed type N/A (Display only) Display of DADF type To display the type of the DADF currently installed. When replacing the DADF N/A (Display only)



Display/Adj/Set Range



0 to 2 0: Reverse type, 1: 1-path type, 2: Not installed (Copyboard model)



Related Service Mode



COPIER> OPTION> CUSTOM> SCANTYPE



SER-NAME



1



Dspl firmware registration series name



Detail



Display firmware registration series name



Use Case Adj/Set/Operate Method



To check the folder name for firmware registration in USB flash drive N/A (Display only)



1024



8. Service Mode



■ ACC-STS COPIER (Service mode for printer) > DISPLAY (State display mode) > ACC-STS FEEDER



1 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range SORTER



1 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range



DECK



1 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range



CARD



1 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range



DATA-CON



1 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range



Display of DADF connection state To display the connecting state of DADF. When checking the connection between the machine and DADF N/A (Display only) 0 to 1 0: Not connected, 1: Connected Connect state of Finisher-related option To display the connection state of Finisher-related options. When checking the connection of Finisher-related options N/A (Display only) Left column (connection state of Finisher-related options): 1 to 5 1: Without Saddle 2: With Saddle, without Folding Unit 3: With Saddle and Inserter, without Folding Unit 4: With Saddle and Folding Unit, without Inserter 5: With Saddle, Inserter and Folding Unit Right column (connection state of Finisher-belonged Puncher): 0 to 4 0: No hole, 1: 2-hole, 2/4-hole switching, 2: 3-hole, 2/3-hole, 2/3-hole switching, 3: 4-hole, 4: 4hole (SW) Dspl of Paper Deck connection state To display the connecting state of the Paper Deck. When checking the connection between the machine and the Paper Decks N/A (Display only) 0 to 8 0: Not connected 1: Connected (small) 2: Connected (large) (Display is hidden on this machine.) 3: POD Deck Lite (with Multi-purpose Tray) 4: POD Deck Lite (without Multi-purpose Tray ) 5: Multi-purpose Tray only 6: POD deck 7: 2-POD deck connected (Display is hidden on this machine.) 8: 3-POD deck connected (Display is hidden on this machine.) Dspl of connection state of Card Reader To display the connecting state of Card Reader. When checking the connection between the machine and the Card Reader N/A (Display only) 0 to 1 0: No card is inserted while the Card Reader is connected. (Copy is not available.) 1: Card Reader is not connected, or card is inserted while the Card Reader is connected. (Copy is available.) Dspl of NE Controller connection state To display the connecting state of NE Controller. When checking the connection between the machine and the NE Controller N/A (Display only) 0 to 1 0: Not connected, 1: Connected



1025



8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > DISPLAY (State display mode) > ACC-STS RAM



1 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method Unit COINROBO



1 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range PS/PCL



1 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range RIP1



1 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range NETWARE



1 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range TRIM-CN



1 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range HDD



1 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method PCI1



1 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range



Dspl MNCON PCB 1 img proc memory cpcty To display the memory capacity for image processing (DDR2-SDRAM) on the Main Controller PCB 1. When checking the memory capacity of the machine N/A (Display only) MB Dspl of Coin Manager connection state To display the connecting state of the Coin Manager. When checking the connection between the machine and the Coin Manager N/A (Display only) 0 to 1 0: Not connected, 1: Connected Install state dspl of PS/PCL firmware To display the installation state of PS/PCL firmware. When checking whether PS/PCL firmware is installed to the machine N/A (Display only) 0 to 2 0: Not installed, 1: PS/PCL, 2: PS Kanji Display of RIP1 software version To display the software version to be downloaded to RIP1 (PS/PCL Expansion Accelerator Board). When upgrading the firmware N/A (Display only) 00.01 to 99.99 Install state dspl of NetWare firmware To display the installation state of the NetWare firmware. When checking whether NetWare firmware is installed to the machine N/A (Display only) 0 to 1 0: Not installed, 1: Installed Display of Trimmer connection state To display the connecting state of Trimmer. When checking the connection between the machine and Trimmer N/A (Display only) 0 to 1 0: Not connected, 1: Connected Display of HDD model name To display the model name of HDD. When checking the model name of HDD used on the machine N/A (Display only) Display of PCI1-connected PCB name To display the name of the PCB that is connected to PCI1. When checking the name of the PCB that is connected to PCI1 N/A (Display only) -: No PCB connected Voice Board: Voice PCB 3DES Board: Encryption PCB 1Gbit-Board: Giga Ethernet PCB



1026



8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > DISPLAY (State display mode) > ACC-STS IA-RAM



1 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method Unit



Display of MNCON PCB memory capacity To display the memory capacity of the Main Controller PCB. When checking the memory capacity of the Main Controller PCB N/A (Display only) MB



■ ANALOG COPIER (Service mode for printer) > DISPLAY (State display mode) > ANALOG TEMP



1 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range Unit Appropriate Target Value Amount of Change per Unit HUM



1 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range Unit Appropriate Target Value Amount of Change per Unit ABS-HUM



1 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range Unit Appropriate Target Value Amount of Change per Unit FIX-U



1 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range Unit Amount of Change per Unit



Display of inside temperature To display the temperature inside the machine detected by Environment Sensor. When checking the temperature inside the machine N/A (Display only) 0 to 60 deg C 20 - 27 1 Display of inside humidity To display the humidity inside the machine detected by Environment Sensor. When checking the humidity inside the machine N/A (Display only) 0 to 100 % 30 - 70 1 Display of inside moisture content To display the absolute moisture content inside the machine detected by Environment Sensor. When checking the moisture content inside the machine N/A (Display only) 0 to 100 g/m3 0 - 22 1 Dspl of Fixing Roller center temperature To display the center temperature of the Fixing Roller detected by the Fixing Main Thermistor. When checking the temperature at the center of Fixing Roller N/A (Display only) 0 to 999 deg C 1



1027



8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > DISPLAY (State display mode) > ANALOG FIX-UE



1 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range Unit Amount of Change per Unit FIX-SHTR



1 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range Unit Amount of Change per Unit PDK-TEMP



1 Detail



Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range Unit Related Service Mode Amount of Change per Unit PDK-HUM



1 Detail



Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range Unit Related Service Mode Amount of Change per Unit



Dspl of Fixing Roller edge temperature To display the edge temperature of the Fixing Roller detected by the Fixing Sub Thermistor 1. Fixing Sub Thermistor 1 is located in the rear nip inlet side of Fixing Roller. When checking the edge temperature of the Fixing Roller N/A (Display only) 0 to 999 deg C 1 Display of Fixing Shutter temperature To display the temperature of the Fixing Shutter detected by the Fixing Shutter Thermistor. When checking the temperature of Fixing Shutter N/A (Display only) 0 to 999 deg C 1 Dspl of POD Deck compartment temp To display the compartment temperature of POD Deck Lite. It may be out of order if the indicated temperature is greatly different from the machine right after power-on. N/A (Display only) 0 to 60 deg C COPIER> DISPLAY> ANALOG> TEMP, PDK-HUM 1 Dspl of POD Deck compartment humidity To display the compartment humidity of POD Deck Lite. It may be out of order if the indicated humidity is greatly different from the machine right after poweron. N/A (Display only) 0 to 100 % COPIER> DISPLAY> ANALOG> HUM, PDK-TEMP 1



■ CST-STS COPIER (Service mode for printer) > DISPLAY (State display mode) > CST-STS DK1-FGD



2



Amount of Change per Unit DK1-FGU



2



Amount of Change per Unit DK1-HADV



2



Amount of Change per Unit



For R&D 1 For R&D 1 For R&D 1



1028



8. Service Mode



■ HV-STS COPIER (Service mode for printer) > DISPLAY (State display mode) > HV-STS PRIMARY



1 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range Unit Related Service Mode Amount of Change per Unit PRI-GRID



1 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range Unit Related Service Mode Amount of Change per Unit PRE-TR



1 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range Unit Amount of Change per Unit TR



1 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method Unit Amount of Change per Unit BIAS



1 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method



Display of primary charging current To display the current that is applied to the Primacy Charging Assembly at the latest. The result set in COPIER> ADJUST> HV-PRI> PRIMARY is reflected. When checking ON/OFF of potential control N/A (Display only) 0 to 1600 uA COPIER> ADJUST> HV-PRI> PRIMARY 1 Dspl of Primary Charging Ass'y grid bias To display the grid bias voltage that is applied to the Primacy Charging Assembly at the latest. The result set in COPIER> ADJUST> HV-PRI> PRI-GRID is reflected. When checking ON/OFF of potential control N/A (Display only) 500 to 900 V COPIER> ADJUST> HV-PRI> PRI-GRID 1 Dspl of pre-transfer charge DC current To display the DC component of current that is applied to the Pre-transfer Charging Assembly at the latest. For checking N/A (Display only) -650 to 0 uA 1 Dspl of trns current: Plain, 1st side To display the current flown to the Transfer Roller for the 1st side of the latest plain paper. For checking N/A (Display only) uA 1 Dspl of developing DC bias setting VL To display the setting value of developing DC bias. For checking N/A (Display only)



Unit



V



Amount of Change per Unit



1



1029



8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > DISPLAY (State display mode) > HV-STS TR-V



1 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method



Dspl of ATVC detection voltage value To display the ATVC detection voltage value. For checking N/A (Display only)



Unit



V



Amount of Change per Unit



1



TR-LV-I



1 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range Unit Amount of Change per Unit TR-LV-T



1 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range



Dspl ppr lead edge trns bias outpt crrnt To display the current value in the paper leading edge position at transfer bias output. For checking N/A (Display only) 0 to 100 uA 1 Dspl ppr lead edge trns bias output tmg To display the transfer bias output timing in the paper leading edge position. For checking N/A (Display only) -50 to 50



Unit



mm



Amount of Change per Unit



0.1



■ CCD COPIER (Service mode for printer) > DISPLAY (State display mode) > CCD TARGET-B



2 Detail



Use Case Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range



Shading target value (B) To display the shading target value of Blue. Continuous display of 0 (minimum) or FFFF (maximum) is considered a failure of the Reader Controller PCB. - When replacing the Reader Controller PCB - At scanned image failure N/A (Display only) 0 to FFFF



Appropriate Target Value



512 - 2047



TARGET-G



Shading target value (G)



2 Detail



Use Case Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range Appropriate Target Value



To display the shading target value of Green. Continuous display of 0 (minimum) or 65535 (maximum) is considered as a failure of the Reader Controller PCB. - When replacing the Reader Controller PCB - At scanned image failure N/A (Display only) 0 to FFFF 512 - 2047



1030



8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > DISPLAY (State display mode) > CCD TARGET-R



2 Detail



Use Case Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range



Shading target value (R) To display the shading target value of Red. Continuous display of 0 (minimum) or 65535 (maximum) is considered as a failure of the Reader Controller PCB. - When replacing the Reader Controller PCB - At scanned image failure N/A (Display only) 0 to FFFF



Appropriate Target Value



512 - 2047



GAIN-OB



Gain level of Read Sensor odd bit(B):frt



2 Detail



Use Case Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range



To display the Blue gain level adjustment value in odd-numbered bit on the Reading Sensor of Scanner Unit (for front side). Continuous display of upper limit is considered a failure of the Scanner Unit/Reader Controller PCB. - When replacing the Reader Controller PCB - At scanned image failure N/A (Display only) 0 to FFFF



Appropriate Target Value



0 - 143



GAIN-OG



Gain level of Read Sensor odd bit(G):frt



2 Detail



Use Case Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range



To display the Green gain level adjustment value in odd-numbered bit on the Reading Sensor of Scanner Unit (for front side). Continuous display of upper limit is considered a failure of the Scanner Unit/Reader Controller PCB. - When replacing the Reader Controller PCB - At scanned image failure N/A (Display only) 0 to FFFF



Appropriate Target Value



0 - 143



GAIN-OR



Gain level of Read Sensor odd bit(R):frt



2 Detail



Use Case Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range



To display the Red gain level adjustment value in odd-numbered bit on the Reading Sensor of Scanner Unit (for front side). Continuous display of upper limit is considered a failure of the Scanner Unit/Reader Controller PCB. - When replacing the Reader Controller PCB - At scanned image failure N/A (Display only) 0 to FFFF



Appropriate Target Value



0 - 143



GAIN-EB



Gain lvl of Read Sensor even bit(B):frt



2 Detail



Use Case Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range Appropriate Target Value



To display the Blue gain level adjustment value in even-numbered bit on the Reading Sensor of Scanner Unit (for front side). Continuous display of upper limit is considered a failure of the Scanner Unit/Reader Controller PCB. - When replacing the Reader Controller PCB - At scanned image failure N/A (Display only) 0 to FFFF 0 - 143



1031



8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > DISPLAY (State display mode) > CCD GAIN-EG



2 Detail



Use Case Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range



Gain lvl of Read Sensor even bit(G):frt To display the Green gain level adjustment value in even-numbered bit on the Reading Sensor of Scanner Unit (for front side). Continuous display of upper limit is considered a failure of the Scanner Unit/Reader Controller PCB. - When replacing the Reader Controller PCB - At scanned image failure N/A (Display only) 0 to FFFF



Appropriate Target Value



0 - 143



GAIN-ER



Gain lvl of Read Sensor even bit(R):frt



2 Detail



Use Case Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range



To display the Red gain level adjustment value in even-numbered bit on the Reading Sensor of Scanner Unit (for front side). Continuous display of upper limit is considered a failure of the Scanner Unit/Reader Controller PCB. - When replacing the Reader Controller PCB - At scanned image failure N/A (Display only) 0 to FFFF



Appropriate Target Value



0 - 143



LAMP-BW



Dspl LED light intnsty adj VL:B&W, front



2 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method



To display the LED light intensity adjustment value of Scanner Unit (for front side) in B&W scanning mode. When an image failure occurs at front side reading in black mode N/A (Display only)



Display/Adj/Set Range



0 to FFFF



Appropriate Target Value



100 - 275



Supplement/Memo LAMP-CL



2 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method



LED cannot be replaced individually. Replace the Scanner Unit. Dspl LED light intnsty adj VL:clr, front To display the LED light intensity adjustment value of Scanner Unit (for front side) in color scanning mode. When an image failure occurs at front side reading in color mode N/A (Display only)



Display/Adj/Set Range



0 to FFFF



Appropriate Target Value



100 - 275



Supplement/Memo LAMP2-BW



2 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method



LED cannot be replaced individually. Replace the Scanner Unit. Dspl LED light intnsty adj VL: B&W, back To display the LED light intensity adjustment value of Scanner Unit (for back side) in B&W scanning mode. When an image failure occurs at back side reading in black mode N/A (Display only)



Display/Adj/Set Range



0 to FFFF



Appropriate Target Value



100 - 275



Supplement/Memo



LED cannot be replaced individually. Replace the Scanner Unit.



1032



8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > DISPLAY (State display mode) > CCD LAMP2-CL



2 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method



Dspl LED light intnsty adj VL: clr, back To display the LED light intensity adjustment value of Scanner Unit (for back side) in color scanning mode. When an image failure occurs at back side reading in color mode N/A (Display only)



Display/Adj/Set Range



0 to FFFF



Appropriate Target Value



100 - 275



Supplement/Memo OFST-BW



2 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range



LED cannot be replaced individually. Replace the Scanner Unit. Dspl Read Sensor offset value:B&W, front To display the offset value of the Reading Sensor of Scanner Unit (for front side) in B&W scanning mode. When an image failure occurs at front side reading in black mode N/A (Display only) 0 to FFFF



Appropriate Target Value



0 - 116



OFST-CL



Dspl Read Sensor offset value:clr, front



2 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range



To display the offset value of the Reading Sensor of Scanner Unit (for front side) in color scanning mode. When an image failure occurs at front side reading in color mode N/A (Display only) 0 to FFFF



Appropriate Target Value



0 - 116



OFST2-BW



Dspl Read Sensor offset value: B&W, back



2 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range



To display the offset value of the Reading Sensor of Scanner Unit (for back side) in B&W scanning mode. When an image failure occurs at back side reading in black mode N/A (Display only) 0 to FFFF



Appropriate Target Value



0 - 116



GAIN-BW1



Read Sensor gain level adj VL1: B&W, frt



2 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range



To display the Reading Sensor B&W gain level adjustment value 1 of Scanner Unit (for front side). When an image failure occurs at front side reading in black mode N/A (Display only) 0 to FFFF



Appropriate Target Value



0 - 143



GAIN-BW2



Read Sensor gain level adj VL2: B&W, frt



2 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range



To display the Reading Sensor B&W gain level adjustment value 2 of Scanner Unit (for front side). When an image failure occurs at front side reading in black mode N/A (Display only) 0 to FFFF



Appropriate Target Value



0 - 143



GAIN-BW3



Read Sensor gain level adj VL3: B&W, frt



2 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range Appropriate Target Value



To display the Reading Sensor B&W gain level adjustment value 3 of Scanner Unit (for front side). When an image failure occurs at front side reading in black mode N/A (Display only) 0 to FFFF 0 - 143



1033



8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > DISPLAY (State display mode) > CCD GAIN-BW4



2 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range



Read Sensor gain level adj VL4: B&W, frt To display the Reading Sensor B&W gain level adjustment value 4 of Scanner Unit (for front side). When an image failure occurs at front side reading in black mode N/A (Display only) 0 to FFFF



Appropriate Target Value



0 - 143



GAIN2BW1



Read Sensor gain level adj VL1:B&W, back



2 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range



To display the Reading Sensor B&W gain level adjustment value 1 of Scanner Unit (for back side). When an image failure occurs at back side reading in black mode N/A (Display only) 0 to FFFF



Appropriate Target Value



0 - 143



GAIN2BW2



Read Sensor gain level adj VL2:B&W, back



2 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range



To display the Reading Sensor B&W gain level adjustment value 2 of Scanner Unit (for back side). When an image failure occurs at back side reading in black mode N/A (Display only) 0 to FFFF



Appropriate Target Value



0 - 143



GAIN2BW3



Read Sensor gain level adj VL3:B&W, back



2 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range



To display the Reading Sensor B&W gain level adjustment value 3 of Scanner Unit (for back side). When an image failure occurs at back side reading in black mode N/A (Display only) 0 to FFFF



Appropriate Target Value



0 - 143



GAIN2BW4



Read Sensor gain level adj VL4:B&W, back



2 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range



To display the Reading Sensor B&W gain level adjustment value 4 of Scanner Unit (for back side). When an image failure occurs at back side reading in black mode N/A (Display only) 0 to FFFF



Appropriate Target Value



0 - 143



GAIN2-OR



Gain lvl of Read Sensor odd bit(R):back



2 Detail



Use Case Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range Appropriate Target Value



To display the Red gain level adjustment value in odd-numbered bit on the Reading Sensor of Scanner Unit (for back side). Continuous display of upper limit is considered a failure of the Scanner Unit/Reader Controller PCB. - When replacing the Reader Controller PCB - At scanned image failure N/A (Display only) 0 to FFFF 0 - 143



1034



8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > DISPLAY (State display mode) > CCD GAIN2-OG



2 Detail



Use Case Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range



Gain lvl of Read Sensor odd bit(G):back To display the Green gain level adjustment value in odd-numbered bit on the Reading Sensor of Scanner Unit (for back side). Continuous display of upper limit is considered a failure of the Scanner Unit/Reader Controller PCB. - When replacing the Reader Controller PCB - At scanned image failure N/A (Display only) 0 to FFFF



Appropriate Target Value



0 - 143



GAIN2-OB



Gain lvl of Read Sensor odd bit(B):back



2 Detail



Use Case Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range



To display the Blue gain level adjustment value in odd-numbered bit on the Reading Sensor of Scanner Unit (for back side). Continuous display of upper limit is considered a failure of the Scanner Unit/Reader Controller PCB. - When replacing the Reader Controller PCB - At scanned image failure N/A (Display only) 0 to FFFF



Appropriate Target Value



0 - 143



GAIN2-ER



Gain lvl of Read Sensor even bit(R):back



2 Detail



Use Case Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range



To display the Red gain level adjustment value in even-numbered bit on the Reading Sensor of Scanner Unit (for back side). Continuous display of upper limit is considered a failure of the Scanner Unit/Reader Controller PCB. - When replacing the Reader Controller PCB - At scanned image failure N/A (Display only) 0 to FFFF



Appropriate Target Value



0 - 143



GAIN2-EG



Gain lvl of Read Sensor even bit(G):back



2 Detail



Use Case Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range



To display the Green gain level adjustment value in even-numbered bit on the Reading Sensor of Scanner Unit (for back side). Continuous display of upper limit is considered a failure of the Scanner Unit/Reader Controller PCB. - When replacing the Reader Controller PCB - At scanned image failure N/A (Display only) 0 to FFFF



Appropriate Target Value



0 - 143



GAIN2-EB



Gain lvl of Read Sensor even bit(B):back



2 Detail



Use Case Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range Appropriate Target Value



To display the Blue gain level adjustment value in even-numbered bit on the Reading Sensor of Scanner Unit (for back side). Continuous display of upper limit is considered a failure of the Scanner Unit/Reader Controller PCB. - When replacing the Reader Controller PCB - At scanned image failure N/A (Display only) 0 to FFFF 0 - 143



1035



8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > DISPLAY (State display mode) > CCD OFST2-CL



2 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range Appropriate Target Value



Dspl Read Sensor offset value:clr, back To display the offset value of the Reading Sensor of Scanner Unit (for back side) in color scanning mode. When an image failure occurs at back side reading in color mode N/A (Display only) 0 to FFFF 0 - 116



■ DPOT COPIER (Service mode for printer) > DISPLAY (State display mode) > DPOT DPOT-K



1 Detail



Use Case Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range



Display of Bk Drum surface potential To display the current surface potential Vd on the Bk Photosensitive Drum that is specified as a result of the potential control. The value after the calculation of potential offset is displayed. If the offset value is not adjusted, negative value may be detected during printing. When checking whether the surface potential of the drum is the cause of density failure or fogging N/A (Display only) -30 to 600



Unit



V



Amount of Change per Unit



1



VL1T



1 Detail



Adj/Set/Operate Method



Dspl of bright area target potential VL To display the bright area target potential value. N/A (Display only)



Unit



V



Amount of Change per Unit



1



VL1M



1 Detail



Adj/Set/Operate Method



Dspl bright area measured potential VL To display the bright area measured potential value. N/A (Display only)



Unit



V



Amount of Change per Unit



1



VDT



1 Detail



Adj/Set/Operate Method



Dspl of dark area target potential VL To display the dark area target potential value. N/A (Display only)



Unit



V



Amount of Change per Unit



1



VDM



1 Detail



Adj/Set/Operate Method



Dspl of dark area measured potential VL To display the dark area measured potential value. N/A (Display only)



Unit



V



Amount of Change per Unit



1



1036



8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > DISPLAY (State display mode) > DPOT BIAS-C



2 Detail



Adj/Set/Operate Method



Dspl dev bias potential control result To display the developing bias potential control result. N/A (Display only)



Unit



V



Amount of Change per Unit



1



LPOWER-C



2 Detail



Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range PRIM-C



2 Detail



Adj/Set/Operate Method Unit Related Service Mode VLT-L



1 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range



Output laser intnsty potntl ctrl result To display the output laser intensity potential control result. N/A (Display only) 0 to 255 Dspl pry chg current potntl ctrl result To display the potential control result of primary charging current. N/A (Display only) uA COPIER> ADJUST> HV-PRI> PRI-GRID Bright area target potential VL: thin To display the bright area target potential VL with thin paper. At occurrence of an image density failure N/A (Display only) 50 to 500



Unit



V



Amount of Change per Unit



1



VLT-H1



1 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range



Bright area tgt potential VL:pln3/hvy1-4 To display the bright area target potential VL with plain paper 3 and heavy paper 1 to 4. At occurrence of an image density failure N/A (Display only) 50 to 500



Unit



V



Amount of Change per Unit



1



VLT-H2



1 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range



Bright area target potential VL: hvy 5,6 To display the bright area target potential VL with heavy paper 5 and 6. At occurrence of an image density failure N/A (Display only) 50 to 500



Unit



V



Amount of Change per Unit



1



■ MISC COPIER (Service mode for printer) > DISPLAY (State display mode) > MISC LPOWER



2 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range



Display of laser light intensity To display the laser power setting value during image formation in real time. At occurrence of an image failure N/A (Display only) 0 to 255



1037



8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > DISPLAY (State display mode) > MISC SD-INFO



2



For R&D



STC-REC



1



Check High Consumption Alarm Send Status



Detail Use Case Adj/Set/Operate Method Caution



Display/Adj/Set Range



Default Value



To express whether High Consumption Alarm is sent or not with 0 and 1. - When checking whether High Consumption Alarm is sent or not Display only The value returns to 0 only in the following cases: - When performing COPIER > FUNCTION > CLEAR > CNT-DCON - When performing "Initialize All Data/Settings" - When the DC Controller is replaced 0 to 1 0: Transmission disabled, 1: Transmission enabled 1st column: Toner (Y) 2nd column: Toner (M) 3rd column: Toner (C) 4th column: Toner (K) 5th column: Waste Toner Container 6th column: Fixing Web 7th to 8th column: Spare 0



■ 2D-SHADE COPIER (Service mode for printer) > DISPLAY (State display mode) > 2D-SHADE 2D-STS



1 Detail



Use Case Adj/Set/Operate Method



Display of 2D shading ON/OFF To display ON/OFF of 2D shading. When 0 is displayed although 1 or 2 is set with COPIER> OPTION> IMG-LSR> 2D-SHADE, check the Drum Lot number with DRM-LOT. If no number has been registered, execute COPIER> FUNCTION> 2D-SHADE> 2D-READ. When uneven image occurs N/A (Display only)



Display/Adj/Set Range



0 to 1 0: OFF, 1: ON



Related Service Mode



COPIER> DISPLAY> 2D-SHADE> DRM-LOT COPIER> FUNCTION> 2D-SHADE> 2D-READ COPIER> OPTION> IMG-LSR> 2D-SHADE



DRM-LOT



2 Detail



Use Case Adj/Set/Operate Method



Display of Drum Lot number To display the Photosensitive Drum Lot number (10 digits) read at power-on. Lot number is stored in ROM for 2D shading. Check that the displayed value is matched with the Lot number in the seal affixed on the Photosensitive Drum. When uneven image occurs N/A (Display only)



Display/Adj/Set Range



10-digit alphanumerics



Related Service Mode



COPIER> DISPLAY> 2D-SHADE> 2D-STS



CHK-SUM



1 Detail



Use Case Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range



Display of checksum calculation result To display the checksum calculation result at power-on. Calculation result is stored in ROM for 2D shading. When the calculation result is NG, ROM for 2D shading has a failure, so replace this ROM. When uneven image occurs N/A (Display only) 0 to 1 0: at normal state, 1: at failure occurrence



1038



8. Service Mode



I/O For Platform version 3.3 and later, this item is for R&D use only and not for actual use. The I/O information can be found in service mode > SITUATION > Sensor Check.



ADJUST (Adjustment mode) ■ AE COPIER (Service mode for printer) > ADJUST (Adjustment mode) > AE AE-TBL



1 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method Caution Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value



Adj of text density at image density adj To adjust text density according to the adjusted image density. As the greater value is set, text gets darker. When clearing the RAM data of the Reader Controller PCB 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. When clearing the RAM data of the Reader Controller PCB, enter the value of service label. 1 to 9 5



■ ADJ-XY COPIER (Service mode for printer) > ADJUST (Adjustment mode) > ADJ-XY ADJ-X



1 Detail



Use Case Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range Unit Default Value Amount of Change per Unit ADJ-Y



1 Detail



Use Case Adj/Set/Operate Method Caution Display/Adj/Set Range Unit Default Value Amount of Change per Unit



Adj start pstn in book mode: vert scan To adjust the image reading start position (image leading edge position) in the vertical scanning direction at copyboard reading. When replacing the Reader Controller PCB/clearing RAM data, enter the value of service label. Decrease the value when the non-image width is larger than the standard value. Increase the value when out of original area is copied. As the value is incremented by 1, the image position is moved to the trailing edge side by 0.1 mm. When replacing the Reader Controller PCB/clearing RAM data 1) Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. -50 to 50 mm 0 0.1 Adj start pstn in book mode: horz scan To adjust the image reading start position in the horizontal scanning direction at copyboard reading. When replacing the Reader Controller PCB/clearing RAM data, enter the value of service label. Decrease the value when the non-image width is larger than the standard value. Increase the value when out of original area is copied. As the value is incremented by 1, the image position is moved to the rear side by 0.1 mm. When replacing the Reader Controller PCB/clearing RAM data 1) Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. After the setting value is changed, write the changed value in the service label. -35 to 35 mm 0 0.1



1039



8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > ADJUST (Adjustment mode) > ADJ-XY ADJ-Y-DF



1 Detail



Use Case Adj/Set/Operate Method Caution Display/Adj/Set Range Unit Default Value Amount of Change per Unit STRD-POS



1 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method Caution Display/Adj/Set Range Unit Default Value Related Service Mode Amount of Change per Unit ADJ-X-MG



1 Detail



Use Case Adj/Set/Operate Method Caution Display/Adj/Set Range Unit Default Value Amount of Change per Unit



Adj start pstn:DADF mode, horz scan, frt To adjust the front side image reading start position in horizontal scanning direction at DADF reading. When replacing the Reader Controller PCB/clearing RAM data, enter the value of service label. As the value is incremented by 1, the image position is moved to the rear side by 0.1 mm. When replacing the Reader Controller PCB/clearing RAM data 1) Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. After the setting value is changed, write the changed value in the service label. -35 to 35 mm 0 0.1 Adj read pstn in DADF mode: front side To adjust the reading position at DADF reading (front side). When replacing the Reader Controller PCB/clearing RAM data, enter the value of service label. When replacing the Reader Controller PCB/clearing RAM data 1) Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. After the setting value is changed, write the changed value in the service label. -100 to 35 mm 0 COPIER> FUNCTION> INSTALL> STRD-POS 0.1 Fine adj img ratio: book mode, vert scan To make a fine adjustment of image magnification ratio in vertical scanning direction at copyboard reading. When replacing the Reader Controller PCB/clearing RAM data, enter the value of service label. As the value is changed by 1, the image magnification ratio is changed by 0.01 %. +: Enlarge -: Reduce When replacing the Reader Controller PCB/clearing RAM data 1) Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. After the setting value is changed, write the changed value in the service label. -50 to 50 % 0 0.01



1040



8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > ADJUST (Adjustment mode) > ADJ-XY ADJY-DF2



1 Detail



Use Case Adj/Set/Operate Method Caution Display/Adj/Set Range Unit Default Value Amount of Change per Unit



Adj start pstn:DADF mode, horz scan, bck To adjust the back side image reading start position in horizontal scanning direction at DADF reading. When replacing the Reader Controller PCB/clearing RAM data, enter the value of service label. As the value is incremented by 1, the image position is moved to the rear side by 0.1 mm. When replacing the Reader Controller PCB/clearing RAM data 1) Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. After the setting value is changed, write the changed value in the service label. -35 to 35 mm 0 0.1



■ CCD COPIER (Service mode for printer) > ADJUST (Adjustment mode) > CCD W-PLT-X



1 Detail



Use Case Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value Related Service Mode W-PLT-Y



1 Detail



Use Case Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value Related Service Mode W-PLT-Z



1 Detail



Use Case Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value Related Service Mode



Stdrd White Plt white lvl data (X) entry To enter the white level data (X) for the Standard White Plate. When replacing the Reader Controller PCB/clearing RAM data/replacing the Copyboard Glass, enter the value of barcode label which is affixed on the glass. - When replacing the Reader Controller PCB/clearing RAM data - When replacing the Copyboard Glass 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 1 to 9999 8271 COPIER> ADJUST> CCD> W-PLT-Y/Z Stdrd White Plt white lvl data (Y) entry To enter the white level data (Y) for the Standard White Plate. When replacing the Reader Controller PCB/clearing RAM data/replacing the Copyboard Glass, enter the value of barcode label which is affixed on the glass. - When replacing the Reader Controller PCB/clearing RAM data - When replacing the Copyboard Glass 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 1 to 9999 8735 COPIER> ADJUST> CCD> W-PLT-X/Z Stdrd White Plt white lvl data (Z) entry To enter the white level data (Z) for the Standard White Plate. When replacing the Reader Controller PCB/clearing RAM data/replacing the Copyboard Glass, enter the value of barcode label which is affixed on the glass. - When replacing the Reader Controller PCB/clearing RAM data - When replacing the Copyboard Glass 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 1 to 9999 9418 COPIER> ADJUST> CCD> W-PLT-X/Y



1041



8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > ADJUST (Adjustment mode) > CCD SH-TRGT



1 Detail



Use Case Adj/Set/Operate Method Caution Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value 100-RG



1 Detail



Use Case Adj/Set/Operate Method Caution Display/Adj/Set Range Unit Default Value Amount of Change per Unit 100-GB



1 Detail



Use Case Adj/Set/Operate Method Caution Display/Adj/Set Range Unit Default Value Amount of Change per Unit DFTAR-R



1 Detail



Use Case Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value Related Service Mode



Shading target VL (B&W) entry: Copyboard To enter the B&W shading target value in copyboard reading mode. When replacing the Reader Controller PCB, enter the value of service label. When replacing the Scanner Unit, execute COPIER> FUNCTION> CCD> DF-WLVL3, and write the value which is automatically set in the service label. - When replacing the Reader Controller PCB/clearing RAM data - When replacing the Scanner Unit 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. After the setting value is changed, write the changed value in the service label. 1 to 2047 1126 Img Sensr RG color displace crrct: front To correct the color displacement between R and G lines in vertical scanning direction due to the Scanner Unit (for front side). When replacing the Reader Controller PCB/clearing RAM data, enter the value of service label. When replacing the Reader Controller PCB/clearing RAM data 1) Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. After the setting value is changed, write the changed value in the service label. -256 to 256 line 0 0.001 Img Sensr GB color displace crrct: front To correct the color displacement between G and B lines in vertical scanning direction due to the Scanner Unit (for front side). When replacing the Reader Controller PCB/clearing RAM data, enter the value of service label. When replacing the Reader Controller PCB/clearing RAM data 1) Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. After the setting value is changed, write the changed value in the service label. -256 to 256 line 0 0.001 Shading target VL (R) entry: front side To enter the shading target value of Red on the front side at DADF reading. When replacing the Reader Controller PCB, enter the value of service label. When replacing the Copyboard Glass/Scanner Unit (for front side), execute COPIER> FUNCTION> CCD> DF-WLVL1, DF-WLVL2 and write the value which is automatically set in the service label. - When replacing the Reader Controller PCB/clearing RAM data - When replacing the Copyboard Glass/Scanner Unit (for front side) 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 1 to 2047 1159 COPIER> FUNCTION> CCD> DF-WLVL1, DF-WLVL2



1042



8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > ADJUST (Adjustment mode) > CCD DFTAR-G



1 Detail



Use Case Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value Related Service Mode DFTAR-B



1 Detail



Use Case Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value Related Service Mode MTF2-M1



1 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value Related Service Mode MTF2-M2



1 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value Related Service Mode



Shading target VL (G) entry: front side To enter the shading target value of Green on the front side at DADF reading. When replacing the Reader Controller PCB, enter the value of service label. When replacing the Copyboard Glass/Scanner Unit (for front side), execute COPIER> FUNCTION> CCD> DF-WLVL1, DF-WLVL2 and write the value which is automatically set in the service label. - When replacing the Reader Controller PCB/clearing RAM data - When replacing the Copyboard Glass/Scanner Unit (for front side) 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 1 to 2047 1189 COPIER> FUNCTION> CCD> DF-WLVL1, DF-WLVL2 Shading target VL (B) entry: front side To enter the shading target value of Blue on the front side at DADF reading. When replacing the Reader Controller PCB, enter the value of service label. When replacing the Copyboard Glass/Scanner Unit (for front side), execute COPIER> FUNCTION> CCD> DF-WLVL1, DF-WLVL2 and write the value which is automatically set in the service label. - When replacing the Reader Controller PCB/clearing RAM data - When replacing the Copyboard Glass/Scanner Unit (for front side) 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 1 to 2047 1209 COPIER> FUNCTION> CCD> DF-WLVL1, DF-WLVL2 MTF value 1 entry: horz scan, front side To enter the setting value 1 for MTF filter coefficient calculation in horizontal scanning direction. Enter the value of service label on the Reader. When replacing the Reader Controller PCB/clearing RAM data 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 20 to 85 50 COPIER> FUNCTION> CCD> MTF-CLC MTF value 2 entry: horz scan, front side To enter the setting value 2 for MTF filter coefficient calculation in horizontal scanning direction. Enter the value of service label on the Reader. When replacing the Reader Controller PCB/clearing RAM data 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 20 to 85 50 COPIER> FUNCTION> CCD> MTF-CLC



1043



8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > ADJUST (Adjustment mode) > CCD MTF2-M3



1 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value Related Service Mode MTF2-M4



1 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value Related Service Mode MTF2-M5



1 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value Related Service Mode MTF2-M6



1 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value Related Service Mode MTF2-M7



1 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value Related Service Mode



MTF value 3 entry: horz scan, front side To enter the setting value 3 for MTF filter coefficient calculation in horizontal scanning direction. Enter the value of service label on the Reader. When replacing the Reader Controller PCB/clearing RAM data 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 20 to 85 50 COPIER> FUNCTION> CCD> MTF-CLC MTF value 4 entry: horz scan, front side To enter the setting value 4 for MTF filter coefficient calculation in horizontal scanning direction. Enter the value of service label on the Reader. When replacing the Reader Controller PCB/clearing RAM data 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 20 to 85 50 COPIER> FUNCTION> CCD> MTF-CLC MTF value 5 entry: horz scan, front side To enter the setting value 5 for MTF filter coefficient calculation in horizontal scanning direction. Enter the value of service label on the Reader. When replacing the Reader Controller PCB/clearing RAM data 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 20 to 85 50 COPIER> FUNCTION> CCD> MTF-CLC MTF value 6 entry: horz scan, front side To enter the setting value 6 for MTF filter coefficient calculation in horizontal scanning direction. Enter the value of service label on the Reader. When replacing the Reader Controller PCB/clearing RAM data 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 20 to 85 50 COPIER> FUNCTION> CCD> MTF-CLC MTF value 7 entry: horz scan, front side To enter the setting value 7 for MTF filter coefficient calculation in horizontal scanning direction. Enter the value of service label on the Reader. When replacing the Reader Controller PCB/clearing RAM data 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 20 to 85 50 COPIER> FUNCTION> CCD> MTF-CLC



1044



8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > ADJUST (Adjustment mode) > CCD MTF2-M8



1 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value Related Service Mode MTF2-M9



1 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value Related Service Mode MTF2-S1



1 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value Related Service Mode MTF2-S2



1 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value Related Service Mode MTF2-S3



1 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value Related Service Mode



MTF value 8 entry: horz scan, front side To enter the setting value 8 for MTF filter coefficient calculation in horizontal scanning direction. Enter the value of service label on the Reader. When replacing the Reader Controller PCB/clearing RAM data 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 20 to 85 50 COPIER> FUNCTION> CCD> MTF-CLC MTF value 9 entry: horz scan, front side To enter the setting value 9 for MTF filter coefficient calculation in horizontal scanning direction. Enter the value of service label on the Reader. When replacing the Reader Controller PCB/clearing RAM data 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 20 to 85 50 COPIER> FUNCTION> CCD> MTF-CLC MTF value 1 entry: vert scan, front side To enter the setting value 1 for MTF filter coefficient calculation in vertical scanning direction. Enter the value of service label on the Reader. When replacing the Reader Controller PCB/clearing RAM data 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 20 to 85 50 COPIER> FUNCTION> CCD> MTF-CLC MTF value 2 entry: vert scan, front side To enter the setting value 2 for MTF filter coefficient calculation in vertical scanning direction. Enter the value of service label on the Reader. When replacing the Reader Controller PCB/clearing RAM data 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 20 to 85 50 COPIER> FUNCTION> CCD> MTF-CLC MTF value 3 entry: vert scan, front side To enter the setting value 3 for MTF filter coefficient calculation in vertical scanning direction. Enter the value of service label on the Reader. When replacing the Reader Controller PCB/clearing RAM data 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 20 to 85 50 COPIER> FUNCTION> CCD> MTF-CLC



1045



8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > ADJUST (Adjustment mode) > CCD MTF2-S4



1 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value Related Service Mode MTF2-S5



1 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value Related Service Mode MTF2-S6



1 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value Related Service Mode MTF2-S7



1 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value Related Service Mode MTF2-S8



1 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value Related Service Mode



MTF value 4 entry: vert scan, front side To enter the setting value 4 for MTF filter coefficient calculation in vertical scanning direction. Enter the value of service label on the Reader. When replacing the Reader Controller PCB/clearing RAM data 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 20 to 85 50 COPIER> FUNCTION> CCD> MTF-CLC MTF value 5 entry: vert scan, front side To enter the setting value 5 for MTF filter coefficient calculation in vertical scanning direction. Enter the value of service label on the Reader. When replacing the Reader Controller PCB/clearing RAM data 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 20 to 85 50 COPIER> FUNCTION> CCD> MTF-CLC MTF value 6 entry: vert scan, front side To enter the setting value 6 for MTF filter coefficient calculation in vertical scanning direction. Enter the value of service label on the Reader. When replacing the Reader Controller PCB/clearing RAM data 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 20 to 85 50 COPIER> FUNCTION> CCD> MTF-CLC MTF value 7 entry: vert scan, front side To enter the setting value 7 for MTF filter coefficient calculation in vertical scanning direction. Enter the value of service label on the Reader. When replacing the Reader Controller PCB/clearing RAM data 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 20 to 85 50 COPIER> FUNCTION> CCD> MTF-CLC MTF value 8 entry: vert scan, front side To enter the setting value 8 for MTF filter coefficient calculation in vertical scanning direction. Enter the value of service label on the Reader. When replacing the Reader Controller PCB/clearing RAM data 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 20 to 85 50 COPIER> FUNCTION> CCD> MTF-CLC



1046



8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > ADJUST (Adjustment mode) > CCD MTF2-S9



1 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value Related Service Mode 100DF2GB



2 Detail



Use Case Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range Unit Default Value Amount of Change per Unit 100DF2RG



2 Detail



Use Case Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range Unit Default Value Amount of Change per Unit DFCH2R2



1 Detail



Use Case Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value



MTF value 9 entry: vert scan, front side To enter the setting value 9 for MTF filter coefficient calculation in vertical scanning direction. Enter the value of service label on the Reader. When replacing the Reader Controller PCB/clearing RAM data 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 20 to 85 50 COPIER> FUNCTION> CCD> MTF-CLC Img Sensr GB color displace crrct: back To correct the color displacement between G and B lines in vertical scanning direction due to the Scanner Unit (for back side). When replacing the Reader Controller PCB/clearing RAM data, enter the value of service label. When replacing the Reader Controller PCB/clearing RAM data 1) Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. -256 to 256 line 0 0.001 Img Sensr RG color displace crrct: back To correct the color displacement between R and G lines in vertical scanning direction due to the Scanner Unit (for back side). When replacing the Reader Controller PCB/clearing RAM data, enter the value of service label. When replacing the Reader Controller PCB/clearing RAM data 1) Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. -256 to 256 line 0 0.001 Complex chart No.2 data (R) entry: front To derive the front/back side linearity, enter the Red data on the front side of No.2 image in DADF complex chart. Enter the value of service label on the Reader. When replacing the Reader Controller PCB/clearing RAM data 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 1 to 2550 2000



1047



8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > ADJUST (Adjustment mode) > CCD DFCH2R10



1 Detail



Use Case Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value DFCH2B2



1 Detail



Use Case Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value DFCH2B10



1 Detail



Use Case Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value DFCH2G2



1 Detail



Use Case Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value DFCH2G10



1 Detail



Use Case Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value



Complex chart No.10 data (R) entry:front To derive the front/back side linearity, enter the Red data on the front side of No.10 image in DADF complex chart. Enter the value of service label on the Reader. When replacing the Reader Controller PCB/clearing RAM data 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 0 to 2550 0 Complex chart No.2 data (B) entry: front To derive the front/back side linearity, enter the Blue data on the front side of No.2 image in DADF complex chart. Enter the value of service label on the Reader. When replacing the Reader Controller PCB/clearing RAM data 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 1 to 2550 2000 Complex chart No.10 data (B) entry:front To derive the front/back side linearity, enter the Blue data on the front side of No.10 image in DADF complex chart. Enter the value of service label on the Reader. When replacing the Reader Controller PCB/clearing RAM data 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 0 to 2550 0 Complex chart No.2 data (G) entry: front To derive the front/back side linearity, enter the Green data on the front side of No.2 image in DADF complex chart. Enter the value of service label on the Reader. When replacing the Reader Controller PCB/clearing RAM data 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 1 to 2550 2000 Complex chart No.10 data (G) entry:front To derive the front/back side linearity, enter the Green data on the front side of No.10 image in DADF complex chart. Enter the value of service label on the Reader. When replacing the Reader Controller PCB/clearing RAM data 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 0 to 2550 0



1048



8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > ADJUST (Adjustment mode) > CCD MTF-M1



1 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value Related Service Mode MTF-M2



1 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value Related Service Mode MTF-M3



1 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value Related Service Mode MTF-M4



1 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value Related Service Mode MTF-M5



1 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value Related Service Mode



MTF value 1 entry: horz scan, back side To enter the setting value 1 for MTF filter coefficient calculation in horizontal scanning direction. Enter the value of service label on the Reader. When replacing the Reader Controller PCB/clearing RAM data 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 20 to 85 50 COPIER> FUNCTION> CCD> MTF-CLC MTF value 2 entry: horz scan, back side To enter the setting value 2 for MTF filter coefficient calculation in horizontal scanning direction. Enter the value of service label on the Reader. When replacing the Reader Controller PCB/clearing RAM data 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 20 to 85 50 COPIER> FUNCTION> CCD> MTF-CLC MTF value 3 entry: horz scan, back side To enter the setting value 3 for MTF filter coefficient calculation in horizontal scanning direction. Enter the value of service label on the Reader. When replacing the Reader Controller PCB/clearing RAM data 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 20 to 85 50 COPIER> FUNCTION> CCD> MTF-CLC MTF value 4 entry: horz scan, back side To enter the setting value 4 for MTF filter coefficient calculation in horizontal scanning direction. Enter the value of service label on the Reader. When replacing the Reader Controller PCB/clearing RAM data 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 20 to 85 50 COPIER> FUNCTION> CCD> MTF-CLC MTF value 5 entry: horz scan, back side To enter the setting value 5 for MTF filter coefficient calculation in horizontal scanning direction. Enter the value of service label on the Reader. When replacing the Reader Controller PCB/clearing RAM data 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 20 to 85 50 COPIER> FUNCTION> CCD> MTF-CLC



1049



8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > ADJUST (Adjustment mode) > CCD MTF-M6



1 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value Related Service Mode MTF-M7



1 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value Related Service Mode MTF-M8



1 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value Related Service Mode MTF-M9



1 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value Related Service Mode MTF-S1



1 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value Related Service Mode



MTF value 6 entry: horz scan, back side To enter the setting value 6 for MTF filter coefficient calculation in horizontal scanning direction. Enter the value of service label on the Reader. When replacing the Reader Controller PCB/clearing RAM data 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 20 to 85 50 COPIER> FUNCTION> CCD> MTF-CLC MTF value 7 entry: horz scan, back side To enter the setting value 7 for MTF filter coefficient calculation in horizontal scanning direction. Enter the value of service label on the Reader. When replacing the Reader Controller PCB/clearing RAM data 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 20 to 85 50 COPIER> FUNCTION> CCD> MTF-CLC MTF value 8 entry: horz scan, back side To enter the setting value 8 for MTF filter coefficient calculation in horizontal scanning direction. Enter the value of service label on the Reader. When replacing the Reader Controller PCB/clearing RAM data 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 20 to 85 50 COPIER> FUNCTION> CCD> MTF-CLC MTF value 9 entry: horz scan, back side To enter the setting value 9 for MTF filter coefficient calculation in horizontal scanning direction. Enter the value of service label on the Reader. When replacing the Reader Controller PCB/clearing RAM data 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 20 to 85 50 COPIER> FUNCTION> CCD> MTF-CLC MTF value 1 entry: vert scan, back side To enter the setting value 1 for MTF filter coefficient calculation in vertical scanning direction. Enter the value of service label on the Reader. When replacing the Reader Controller PCB/clearing RAM data 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 20 to 85 50 COPIER> FUNCTION> CCD> MTF-CLC



1050



8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > ADJUST (Adjustment mode) > CCD MTF-S2



1 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value Related Service Mode MTF-S3



1 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value Related Service Mode MTF-S4



1 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value Related Service Mode MTF-S5



1 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value Related Service Mode MTF-S6



1 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value Related Service Mode



MTF value 2 entry: vert scan, back side To enter the setting value 2 for MTF filter coefficient calculation in vertical scanning direction. Enter the value of service label on the Reader. When replacing the Reader Controller PCB/clearing RAM data 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 20 to 85 50 COPIER> FUNCTION> CCD> MTF-CLC MTF value 3 entry: vert scan, back side To enter the setting value 3 for MTF filter coefficient calculation in vertical scanning direction. Enter the value of service label on the Reader. When replacing the Reader Controller PCB/clearing RAM data 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 20 to 85 50 COPIER> FUNCTION> CCD> MTF-CLC MTF value 4 entry: vert scan, back side To enter the setting value 4 for MTF filter coefficient calculation in vertical scanning direction. Enter the value of service label on the Reader. When replacing the Reader Controller PCB/clearing RAM data 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 20 to 85 50 COPIER> FUNCTION> CCD> MTF-CLC MTF value 5 entry: vert scan, back side To enter the setting value 5 for MTF filter coefficient calculation in vertical scanning direction. Enter the value of service label on the Reader. When replacing the Reader Controller PCB/clearing RAM data 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 20 to 85 50 COPIER> FUNCTION> CCD> MTF-CLC MTF value 6 entry: vert scan, back side To enter the setting value 6 for MTF filter coefficient calculation in vertical scanning direction. Enter the value of service label on the Reader. When replacing the Reader Controller PCB/clearing RAM data 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 20 to 85 50 COPIER> FUNCTION> CCD> MTF-CLC



1051



8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > ADJUST (Adjustment mode) > CCD MTF-S7



1 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value Related Service Mode MTF-S8



1 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value Related Service Mode MTF-S9



1 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value Related Service Mode DFCH-R2



1 Detail



Use Case Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value Related Service Mode DFCH-R10



1 Detail



Use Case Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value Related Service Mode



MTF value 7 entry: vert scan, back side To enter the setting value 7 for MTF filter coefficient calculation in vertical scanning direction. Enter the value of service label on the Reader. When replacing the Reader Controller PCB/clearing RAM data 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 20 to 85 50 COPIER> FUNCTION> CCD> MTF-CLC MTF value 8 entry: vert scan, back side To enter the setting value 8 for MTF filter coefficient calculation in vertical scanning direction. Enter the value of service label on the Reader. When replacing the Reader Controller PCB/clearing RAM data 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 20 to 85 50 COPIER> FUNCTION> CCD> MTF-CLC MTF value 9 entry: vert scan, back side To enter the setting value 9 for MTF filter coefficient calculation in vertical scanning direction. Enter the value of service label on the Reader. When replacing the Reader Controller PCB/clearing RAM data 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 20 to 85 50 COPIER> FUNCTION> CCD> MTF-CLC Complex chart No.2 data (R) entry: back To derive the front/back side linearity, enter the Red data on the back side of No.2 image in DADF complex chart. Enter the value of service label on the Reader. When replacing the Reader Controller PCB/clearing RAM data 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 1 to 2550 2000 COPIER> ADJUST> CCD> DFCH-R10, DFCH-B2, DFCH-B10, DFCH-G2, DFCH-G10 COPIER> FUNCTION> CCD> DF-LNR Complex chart No.10 data (R) entry: back To derive the front/back side linearity, enter the Red data on the back side of No.10 image in DADF complex chart. Enter the value of service label on the Reader. When replacing the Reader Controller PCB/clearing RAM data 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 0 to 2550 0 COPIER> ADJUST> CCD> DFCH-R2, DFCH-B2, DFCH-B10, DFCH-G2, DFCH-G10 COPIER> FUNCTION> CCD> DF-LNR



1052



8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > ADJUST (Adjustment mode) > CCD DFCH-B2



1 Detail



Use Case Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value Related Service Mode DFCH-B10



1 Detail



Use Case Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value Related Service Mode DFCH-G2



1 Detail



Use Case Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value Related Service Mode DFCH-G10



1 Detail



Use Case Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value Related Service Mode



Complex chart No.2 data (B) entry: back To derive the front/back side linearity, enter the Blue data on the back side of No.2 image in DADF complex chart. Enter the value of service label on the Reader. When replacing the Reader Controller PCB/clearing RAM data 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 1 to 2550 2000 COPIER> ADJUST> CCD> DFCH-R10, DFCH-B2, DFCH-B10, DFCH-G2, DFCH-G10 COPIER> FUNCTION> CCD> DF-LNR Complex chart No.10 data (B) entry: back To derive the front/back side linearity, enter the Blue data on the back side of No.10 image in DADF complex chart. Enter the value of service label on the Reader. When replacing the Reader Controller PCB/clearing RAM data 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 0 to 2550 0 COPIER> ADJUST> CCD> DFCH-R2, DFCH-B2, DFCH-B10, DFCH-G2, DFCH-G10 COPIER> FUNCTION> CCD> DF-LNR Complex chart No.2 data (G) entry: back To derive the front/back side linearity, enter the Green data on the back side of No.2 image in DADF complex chart. Enter the value of service label on the Reader. When replacing the Reader Controller PCB/clearing RAM data 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 1 to 2550 2000 COPIER> ADJUST> CCD> DFCH-R10, DFCH-B2, DFCH-B10, DFCH-G2, DFCH-G10 COPIER> FUNCTION> CCD> DF-LNR Complex chart No.10 data (G) entry: back To derive the front/back side linearity, enter the Green data on the back side of No.10 image in DADF complex chart. Enter the value of service label on the Reader. When replacing the Reader Controller PCB/clearing RAM data 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 0 to 2550 0 COPIER> ADJUST> CCD> DFCH-R2, DFCH-B2, DFCH-B10, DFCH-G2, DFCH-G10 COPIER> FUNCTION> CCD> DF-LNR



1053



8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > ADJUST (Adjustment mode) > CCD MTF2-M10



1 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value Related Service Mode MTF2-M11



1 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value Related Service Mode MTF2-M12



1 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value Related Service Mode MTF2-S10



1 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value Related Service Mode MTF2-S11



1 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value Related Service Mode



MTF value 10 entry:horz scan, front side To enter the setting value 10 for MTF filter coefficient calculation in horizontal scanning direction. Enter the value of service label on the Reader. When replacing the Reader Controller PCB/clearing RAM data 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 20 to 85 50 COPIER> FUNCTION> CCD> MTF-CLC MTF value 11 entry:horz scan, front side To enter the setting value 11 for MTF filter coefficient calculation in horizontal scanning direction. Enter the value of service label on the Reader. When replacing the Reader Controller PCB/clearing RAM data 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 20 to 85 50 COPIER> FUNCTION> CCD> MTF-CLC MTF value 12 entry:horz scan, front side To enter the setting value 12 for MTF filter coefficient calculation in horizontal scanning direction. Enter the value of service label on the Reader. When replacing the Reader Controller PCB/clearing RAM data 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 20 to 85 50 COPIER> FUNCTION> CCD> MTF-CLC MTF value 10 entry:vert scan, front side To enter the setting value 10 for MTF filter coefficient calculation in vertical scanning direction. Enter the value of service label on the Reader. When replacing the Reader Controller PCB/clearing RAM data 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 20 to 85 50 COPIER> FUNCTION> CCD> MTF-CLC MTF value 11 entry:vert scan, front side To enter the setting value 11 for MTF filter coefficient calculation in vertical scanning direction. Enter the value of service label on the Reader. When replacing the Reader Controller PCB/clearing RAM data 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 20 to 85 50 COPIER> FUNCTION> CCD> MTF-CLC



1054



8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > ADJUST (Adjustment mode) > CCD MTF2-S12



1 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value Related Service Mode MTF-M10



1 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value Related Service Mode MTF-M11



1 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value Related Service Mode MTF-M12



1 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value Related Service Mode MTF-S10



1 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value Related Service Mode



MTF value 12 entry:vert scan, front side To enter the setting value 12 for MTF filter coefficient calculation in vertical scanning direction. Enter the value of service label on the Reader. When replacing the Reader Controller PCB/clearing RAM data 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 20 to 85 50 COPIER> FUNCTION> CCD> MTF-CLC MTF value 10 entry: horz scan, back side To enter the setting value 10 for MTF filter coefficient calculation in horizontal scanning direction. Enter the value of service label on the Reader. When replacing the Reader Controller PCB/clearing RAM data 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 20 to 85 50 COPIER> FUNCTION> CCD> MTF-CLC MTF value 11 entry: horz scan, back side To enter the setting value 11 for MTF filter coefficient calculation in horizontal scanning direction. Enter the value of service label on the Reader. When replacing the Reader Controller PCB/clearing RAM data 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 20 to 85 50 COPIER> FUNCTION> CCD> MTF-CLC MTF value 12 entry: horz scan, back side To enter the setting value 12 for MTF filter coefficient calculation in horizontal scanning direction. Enter the value of service label on the Reader. When replacing the Reader Controller PCB/clearing RAM data 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 20 to 85 50 COPIER> FUNCTION> CCD> MTF-CLC MTF value 10 entry: vert scan, back side To enter the setting value 10 for MTF filter coefficient calculation in vertical scanning direction. Enter the value of service label on the Reader. When replacing the Reader Controller PCB/clearing RAM data 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 20 to 85 50 COPIER> FUNCTION> CCD> MTF-CLC



1055



8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > ADJUST (Adjustment mode) > CCD MTF-S11



1 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value Related Service Mode MTF-S12



1 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value Related Service Mode DFCH2K2



1 Detail



Use Case Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value DFCH2K10



1 Detail



Use Case Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value DFCH-K2



1 Detail



Use Case Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value Related Service Mode



MTF value 11 entry: vert scan, back side To enter the setting value 11 for MTF filter coefficient calculation in vertical scanning direction. Enter the value of service label on the Reader. When replacing the Reader Controller PCB/clearing RAM data 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 20 to 85 50 COPIER> FUNCTION> CCD> MTF-CLC MTF value 12 entry: vert scan, back side To enter the setting value 12 for MTF filter coefficient calculation in vertical scanning direction. Enter the value of service label on the Reader. When replacing the Reader Controller PCB/clearing RAM data 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 20 to 85 50 COPIER> FUNCTION> CCD> MTF-CLC Complex chart No.2 data (B&W) entr: frt To derive the front/back side linearity, enter the B&W data on the front side of No.2 image in DADF complex chart. Enter the value of service label on the Reader. When replacing the Reader Controller PCB/clearing RAM data 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 1 to 2550 2000 Complex chart No.10 data (B&W) entr: frt To derive the front/back side linearity, enter the B&W data on the front side of No.10 image in DADF complex chart. Enter the value of service label on the Reader. When replacing the Reader Controller PCB/clearing RAM data 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 0 to 2550 0 Complex chart No.2 data (B&W) entr: bck To derive the front/back side linearity, enter the B&W data on the back side of No.2 image in DADF complex chart. Enter the value of service label on the Reader. When replacing the Reader Controller PCB/clearing RAM data 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 1 to 2550 2000 COPIER> ADJUST> CCD> DFCH-R2, DFCH-R10, DFCH-B2, DFCH-B10, DFCH-G2, DFCHG10, DFCH-K10 COPIER> FUNCTION> CCD> DF-LNR



1056



8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > ADJUST (Adjustment mode) > CCD DFCH-K10



1 Detail



Use Case Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value Related Service Mode



DFTAR-BW



1 Detail



Use Case Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value Related Service Mode DFTBK-G



1 Detail



Use Case Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value Related Service Mode DFTBK-B



1 Detail



Use Case Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value Related Service Mode



Complex chart No.10 data (B&W) entr: bck To derive the front/back side linearity, enter the B&W data on the back side of No.10 image in DADF complex chart. Enter the value of service label on the Reader. When replacing the Reader Controller PCB/clearing RAM data 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 0 to 2550 0 COPIER> ADJUST> CCD> DFCH-R2, DFCH-R10, DFCH-B2, DFCH-B10, DFCH-G2, DFCHG10, DFCH-K2 COPIER> FUNCTION> CCD> DF-LNR Shading target VL (B&W) entry: front To enter the B&W shading target value on the front side at DADF reading. When replacing the Reader Controller PCB, enter the value of service label. When replacing the Copyboard Glass/Scanner Unit (for front side), execute COPIER> FUNCTION> CCD> DF-WLVL3, DF-WLVL4 and write the value which is automatically set in the service label. - When replacing the Reader Controller PCB/clearing RAM data - When replacing the Copyboard Glass/Scanner Unit (for front side) 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 1 to 2047 1209 COPIER> FUNCTION> CCD> DF-WLVL3, DF-WLVL4 Shading target VL (G) entry: back side To enter the shading target value of Green on the back side at DADF reading. When replacing the Reader Controller PCB, enter the value of service label. When replacing the Copyboard Glass/Scanner Unit (for back side), execute COPIER> FUNCTION> CCD> DF-WLVL1, DF-WLVL2 and write the value which is automatically set in the service label. - When replacing the Reader Controller PCB/clearing RAM data - When replacing the Scanner Unit (for back side) 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 700 to 1400 1136 COPIER> FUNCTION> CCD> DF-WLVL1, DF-WLVL2 Shading target VL (B) entry: back side To enter the shading target value of Blue on the back side at DADF reading. When replacing the Reader Controller PCB, enter the value of service label. When replacing the Copyboard Glass/Scanner Unit (for back side), execute COPIER> FUNCTION> CCD> DF-WLVL1, DF-WLVL2 and write the value which is automatically set in the service label. - When replacing the Reader Controller PCB/clearing RAM data - When replacing the Scanner Unit (for back side) 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 700 to 1400 1126 COPIER> FUNCTION> CCD> DF-WLVL1, DF-WLVL2



1057



8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > ADJUST (Adjustment mode) > CCD DFTBK-R



1 Detail



Use Case Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value Related Service Mode DFTBK-BW



1 Detail



Use Case Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value Related Service Mode



Shading target VL (R) entry: back side To enter the shading target value of Red on the back side at DADF reading. When replacing the Reader Controller PCB, enter the value of service label. When replacing the Copyboard Glass/Scanner Unit (for back side), execute COPIER> FUNCTION> CCD> DF-WLVL1, DF-WLVL2 and write the value which is automatically set in the service label. - When replacing the Reader Controller PCB/clearing RAM data - When replacing the Scanner Unit (for back side) 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 700 to 1400 1156 COPIER> FUNCTION> CCD> DF-WLVL1, DF-WLVL2 Shading target VL (B&W) entry: back To enter the B&W shading target value on the back side at DADF reading. When replacing the Reader Controller PCB, enter the value of service label. When replacing the Copyboard Glass/Scanner Unit (for back side), execute COPIER> FUNCTION> CCD> DF-WLVL3, DF-WLVL4 and write the value which is automatically set in the service label. - When replacing the Reader Controller PCB/clearing RAM data - When replacing the Copyboard Glass/Scanner Unit (for back side) 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 700 to 1400 1126 COPIER> FUNCTION> CCD> DF-WLVL3, DF-WLVL4



■ LASER COPIER (Service mode for printer) > ADJUST (Adjustment mode) > LASER PVE-OFST



1 Detail



Use Case Adj/Set/Operate Method Caution



Display/Adj/Set Range Unit Default Value Related Service Mode Amount of Change per Unit POWER



1 Detail



Adj of write start position of laser To adjust the image position by changing the laser emitting position. When replacing the DC Controller PCB/clearing RAM data, enter the value of service label. As the value is incremented by 1, the image moves by 0.1mm. +: Toward rear -: Toward front When adjusting image position Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key. Use this only when replacing the DC Controller PCB/Laser Scanner Unit. When adjusting the image write start position, use COPIER> ADJUST> FEED-ADJ> ADJ-C1/C2/C3/C4/MF/DK. If it is not sufficient enough, execute mechanical adjustment. -300 to 300 mm 0 COPIER> ADJUST> FEED-ADJ> ADJ-C1, ADJ-C2, ADJ-C3, ADJ-C4, ADJ-MF, ADJ-DK 0.1 Adj laser power at no potential control To adjust the laser power when the potential control is not performed.



Display/Adj/Set Range



0 to 255



Related Service Mode



COPIER> OPTION> FNC-SW> PO-CNT COPIER> OPTION> TEMPO> F-POT-SW



1058



8. Service Mode



■ IMG-REG COPIER (Service mode for printer) > ADJUST (Adjustment mode) > IMG-REG MAG-H-K



1 Detail



Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method Caution Display/Adj/Set Range Unit Default Value Amount of Change per Unit MAG-V



1



Amount of Change per Unit



Fine adj of magnification: horz scan To make a fine adjustment of image magnification in horizontal scanning direction by adjusting the rotation speed of the Polygon Mirror/modulating clock. Convert the magnification measurement line length of PG for image position adjustment into a percentage, and enter the amount of change in percentage. As the value is incremented by 1, the image magnification changes by 0.01%. +: Enlarge -: Reduce - When checking image at initial installation - At check operation when replacing the Laser Scanner Unit - When adjustment is requested by a user Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key. Do not use this at the normal service. -100 to 100 % 0 0.01 For R&D 0.01



■ DEVELOP COPIER (Service mode for printer) > ADJUST (Adjustment mode) > DEVELOP BIAS



1 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range Unit Default Value Amount of Change per Unit FRQ-DEV



2 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value



Adjustment of developing bias To adjust the developing bias when the potential control is not performed. When potential control is not performed 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 0 to 600 V 180 1 Setting of developing bias frequency To set the frequency of developing bias. Increase the value when fogging occurs. When fogging occurs Enter the setting value and press OK key. -2 to 3 -2 to -1: Not used, 0: 2.7kHZ, 1: 3.0kHz, 2: 3.2kHz, 3: 3.5kHz 0



1059



8. Service Mode



■ DENS COPIER (Service mode for printer) > ADJUST (Adjustment mode) > DENS DENS-ADJ



1 Detail



Use Case Adj/Set/Operate Method Caution Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value Supplement/Memo



Density correction of copy image To correct the density of copy image by changing the F-value table. When replacing the DC Controller PCB/clearing RAM data, enter the value of service label. Blurring is alleviated when the value is increased, and fogging is alleviated when the value is decreased. When fogging or blurring at high density area occurs with a copy image Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. Density of printer output image cannot be corrected. 1 to 9 5 F-value table: shows the relationship between original density and image density.



■ BLANK COPIER (Service mode for printer) > ADJUST (Adjustment mode) > BLANK BLANK-T



1 Detail



Use Case Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range Unit Default Value Amount of Change per Unit BLANK-L



1 Detail



Use Case Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range Unit Default Value Amount of Change per Unit



Adjustment of leading edge margin To adjust the margin on the leading edge of paper. As the value is incremented by 1, the margin is increased toward the center of the paper by 1 pixel (0.0212 mm). - When reducing the margin upon user's request - When enlarging the margin for transfer separation/fixing separation Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 0 to 1000 pixel 118 1 Adjustment of left edge margin To adjust the margin on the left edge of paper. As the value is incremented by 1, the margin is increased toward the center of the paper by 1 pixel (0.0212 mm). - When reducing the margin upon user's request - When enlarging the margin for transfer separation/fixing separation Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 0 to 1000 pixel 118 1



1060



8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > ADJUST (Adjustment mode) > BLANK BLANK-R



1 Detail



Use Case Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range Unit Default Value Amount of Change per Unit BLANK-B



1 Detail



Use Case Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range Unit Default Value Amount of Change per Unit



Adjustment of right edge margin To adjust the margin on the right edge of paper. As the value is incremented by 1, the margin is increased toward the center of the paper by 1 pixel (0.0212 mm). - When reducing the margin upon user's request - When enlarging the margin for transfer separation/fixing separation Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 0 to 1000 pixel 118 1 Adjustment of trailing edge margin To adjust the margin on the trailing edge of paper. As the value is incremented by 1, the margin is increased toward the center of the paper by 1 pixel (0.0212 mm). - When reducing the margin upon user's request - When enlarging the margin for transfer separation/fixing separation Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 0 to 1000 pixel 118 1



■ V-CONT COPIER (Service mode for printer) > ADJUST (Adjustment mode) > V-CONT EPOTOFST



1 Detail



Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range



Manual entry of Potential Sensor offset To set the offset auto adjustment value of Potential Sensor manually. As the value is incremented by 1, the offset value changes by 0.8 V. +: Identified as the lower potential than the detected one -: Identified as the higher potential than the detected one When an error is displayed by executing OFST (auto offset adjustment) at the replacement of Potential Sensor (When the value out of specified range is set due to Potential Sensor disconnection/connection failure/installation failure), restore to the factory setting values. 1) To stop the error, set 933 (V) in EPOTOFST. 2) Check around the Potential Sensor. If there is an error, address it and if not, go to the step 3). 3) Enter the value of service label. 4) If image fogging or the like occurs, increase the value by 10V increment. Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 765 to 1000



Unit



V



Default Value



0



Related Service Mode Amount of Change per Unit



COPIER> FUNCTION> DPC> OFST 0.8



1061



8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > ADJUST (Adjustment mode) > V-CONT VL-OFST



1 Detail



Use Case Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range



Bright area tgt potential ofst VL entry To set the offset auto adjustment value of bright area target potential VL manually. As the value is incremented by 1, the offset value changes by 1V. +: Increase -: Decrease When replacing the DC Controller PCB/clearing RAM data Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key. -30 to 30



Unit



V



Default Value



0



Amount of Change per Unit



1



VD-OFST



1 Detail



Use Case Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range



Dark area tgt potential ofst VL entry To set the offset auto adjustment value of dark area target potential VL manually. As the value is incremented by 1, the offset value changes by 1V. +: Increase -: Decrease When replacing the DC Controller PCB/clearing RAM data Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key. -30 to 30



Unit



V



Default Value



0



Amount of Change per Unit



1



DE-OFST



1 Detail



Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range



Copy image Vdc offset value entry To set the Vdc offset auto adjustment value for potential control of copy image manually. As the value is incremented by 1, the offset value changes by 1V. +: Increase -: Decrease Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key. -50 to 50



Unit



V



Default Value



0



Amount of Change per Unit



1



VCONT-1



1 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range



Dev contrast crrct potntl:first time/day To make a fine adjustment of correction potential of developing contrast target potential Vcont for the first time of the day. When image density for the first time of the day is low Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 0 to 10



Unit



V



Default Value



0



Amount of Change per Unit



1



1062



8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > ADJUST (Adjustment mode) > V-CONT VL-OF-L



2 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range Unit Default Value Amount of Change per Unit SMR-IPRV



2 Detail



Use Case Adj/Set/Operate Method



Caution



Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value Related Service Mode



Bright area target potential:thin To make a fine adjustment of bright area target potential VL with thin paper. When an image density failure occurs with thin paper Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key. -200 to 200 V 20 1 Smeared image control batch settings To set the service modes necessary for smeared image control (toner scattering) collectively. When 1 is set, offset value of each service mode is set. - COPIER> ADJUST> HV-TR> P-TR-OF1 to 6 (Environment: 4, feed mode: 7, offset value of pretransfer charging current: +10) - COPIER> ADJUST> V-CONT> VL-OFST (Offset value of bright area target potential: 30) - COPIER> ADJUST> V-CONT> VD-OFST (Offset value of dark area target potential: -30) When 0 is set, each offset value returns to 0 (default). When a smeared image occurs 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 3) Execute auto gradation adjustment (full adjustment). When the numerical value of the item (P-TR-OF1 to 6, VL-OFST, VD-OFDT) in which the offset value is collectively set is changed, SMR-IPRV becomes from 1 to 0. This will only appear as 0, and the settings will be retained. 0 to 1 0: OFF, 1: ON 0 COPIER> ADJUST> HV-TR> P-TR-OF1 - 6 COPIER> ADJUST> V-CONT> VL-OFST, VD-OFST



■ PASCAL COPIER (Service mode for printer) > ADJUST (Adjustment mode) > PASCAL OFST-P-Y



1 Detail



Use Case Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value Amount of Change per Unit



Y density adj at test print reading To adjust the offset of Y-color test print reading signal at auto gradation adjustment (full adjustment). When replacing the Reader Controller PCB/clearing RAM data, enter the value of service label. As the value is larger, the image after adjustment gets darker. When replacing the Reader Controller PCB/clearing RAM data 1) Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. -128 to 128 According to the adjustment value of the Reader at factory shipment 1



1063



8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > ADJUST (Adjustment mode) > PASCAL OFST-P-M



1 Detail



Use Case Adj/Set/Operate Method Caution Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value Amount of Change per Unit OFST-P-C



1 Detail



Use Case Adj/Set/Operate Method Caution Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value Amount of Change per Unit OFST-P-K



1 Detail



Use Case Adj/Set/Operate Method Caution Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value



M density adj at test print reading To adjust the offset of M-color test print reading signal at auto gradation adjustment (full adjustment). When replacing the Reader Controller PCB/clearing RAM data, enter the value of service label. As the value is larger, the image after adjustment gets darker. When replacing the Reader Controller PCB/clearing RAM data 1) Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. After the setting value is changed, write the changed value in the service label. -128 to 128 According to the adjustment value of the Reader at factory shipment 1 C density adj at test print reading To adjust the offset of C-color test print reading signal at auto gradation adjustment (full adjustment). When replacing the Reader Controller PCB/clearing RAM data, enter the value of service label. As the value is larger, the image after adjustment gets darker. When replacing the Reader Controller PCB/clearing RAM data 1) Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. After the setting value is changed, write the changed value in the service label. -128 to 128 According to the adjustment value of the Reader at factory shipment 1 Bk density adj at test print reading To adjust the offset of Bk-color test print reading signal at auto gradation adjustment (full adjustment). When replacing the Reader Controller PCB/clearing RAM data, enter the value of service label. As the value is larger, the image after adjustment gets darker. When replacing the Reader Controller PCB/clearing RAM data 1) Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. After the setting value is changed, write the changed value in the service label. -128 to 128 According to the adjustment value of the Reader at factory shipment



1064



8. Service Mode



■ HV-PRI COPIER (Service mode for printer) > ADJUST (Adjustment mode) > HV-PRI PRIMARY



1 Detail



Use Case Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range Unit Default Value Related Service Mode Amount of Change per Unit PRI-GRID



1 Detail



Use Case Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range



Adjustment of primary charging current To adjust the primary charging current flows to the Primary Charging Assembly when potential control is OFF. When potential control is turned OFF, the specified primary charging current is output. - When outputting image while potential control is OFF - When changing the primary charging current and then checking the high voltage output Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 0 to 1600 uA 1000 COPIER> OPTION> FNC-SW> PO-CNT 1 Adjustment of Pry Chg Ass'y grid bias To adjust the grid voltage of the Primary Charging Assembly at potential control. Adjust the offset value for the voltage table that changes according to the durability. When an image failure occurs due to the soiled Primary Charging Wire, set a negative value. If the value in COPIER> DISPLAY> DPOT> PRIM-C is 1550 (micro A) or higher when E061-0101 (potential control error) occurs, set a positive value. - When an image failure occurs due to the soiled Primary Charging Wire - When E061-0101 occurs Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key. -50 to 220



Unit



V



Default Value



0



Related Service Mode Amount of Change per Unit



COPIER> DISPLAY> DPOT> PRIM-C 1



■ HV-TR COPIER (Service mode for printer) > ADJUST (Adjustment mode) > HV-TR TR-OFS1



2 Detail



Use Case Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range Unit Default Value Related Service Mode Amount of Change per Unit



Adj trns tgt crrnt offset:plain1,2/color To adjust the offset value of the target current of the Transfer Roller for plain paper 1, 2/colored paper. Enter the offset value in the right column. The left 2 columns are not used. When transfer failure occurs Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key. -10 to 10 uA 0 COPIER> ADJUST> HV-TR> TR-OFS2 - 6 5



1065



8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > ADJUST (Adjustment mode) > HV-TR TR-OFS2



2 Detail



Use Case Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range Unit Default Value Related Service Mode Amount of Change per Unit TR-OFS3



2 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range Unit Default Value Related Service Mode Amount of Change per Unit TR-OFS4



2 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range Unit Default Value Related Service Mode Amount of Change per Unit TR-OFS5



2 Detail



Use Case Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range Unit Default Value Related Service Mode Amount of Change per Unit



Adj trns tgt crrnt offset: pln3/hvy1-4 To adjust the offset value of the target current of the Transfer Roller for plain paper 3 and heavy paper 1 to 4. Enter the offset value in the right column. The left 2 columns are not used. When transfer failure occurs Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key. -10 to 10 uA 0 COPIER> ADJUST> HV-TR> TR-OFS1, 3 - 8 5 Adj trns tgt crrnt offset: heavy 5, 6 To adjust the offset value of the target current of the Transfer Roller for heavy paper 5 and 6. Enter the offset value in the right column. The left 2 columns are not used. When transfer failure occurs Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key. -10 to 10 uA 0 COPIER> ADJUST> HV-TR> TR-OFS1, 2, 4 - 6 5 Adj transfer tgt current offset: Thin To adjust the offset value of the target current of the Transfer Roller for thin paper. Enter the offset value in the right column. The left 2 columns are not used. When transfer failure occurs Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key. -10 to 10 uA 0 COPIER> ADJUST> HV-TR> TR-OFS1 - 3, 5 - 6 5 Adj trns tgt crrnt offset: Spec ppr, 1st To adjust the offset value of the target current of the Transfer Roller when feeding 1st side of the specified paper. Enter the offset value in the right column. The left 2 columns are not used. Set the paper type with TR-SP1. When transfer failure occurs Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key. -10 to 10 uA 0 COPIER> ADJUST> HV-TR> TR-OFS1 - 4, 6, TR-SP1 5



1066



8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > ADJUST (Adjustment mode) > HV-TR TR-OFS6



2 Detail



Use Case Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range Unit Default Value Related Service Mode Amount of Change per Unit TR-L-OF1



2 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range Unit Default Value Related Service Mode Amount of Change per Unit TR-L-OF2



2 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range Unit Default Value Related Service Mode Amount of Change per Unit TR-L-OF3



2 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range Unit Default Value Related Service Mode Amount of Change per Unit



Adj trns tgt crrnt offset: Spec ppr, 2nd To adjust the offset value of the target current of the Transfer Roller when feeding 2nd side of the specified paper. Enter the offset value in the right column. The left 2 columns are not used. Set the paper type with TR-SP2. When transfer failure occurs Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key. -10 to 10 uA 0 COPIER> ADJUST> HV-TR> TR-OFS1 - 5, TR-SP2 5 Adj lead edge trns tgt crrnt ofst:Plain To adjust the leading edge transfer target current and the offset value of leading edge transfer bias output timing for plain paper. When a drum separation failure occurs Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key. Leading edge transfer target current offset value: -2 to 10 Offset value of leading edge transfer bias output timing: 0 to 20 uA 0 COPIER> ADJUST> HV-TR> TR-L-OF2 - 6 5 Adj lead edge trns tgt crrnt:pln3/hvy1-4 To adjust the leading edge transfer target current and the offset value of leading edge transfer bias output timing for plain paper 3 and heavy paper 1 to 4. When a drum separation failure occurs Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key. Leading edge transfer target current offset value: -2 to 10 Offset value of leading edge transfer bias output timing: 0 to 20 uA 0 COPIER> ADJUST> HV-TR> TR-L-OF1, 3 - 6 5 Adj lead edge trns tgt crrnt ofst:hvy5,6 To adjust the leading edge transfer target current and the offset value of leading edge transfer bias output timing for heavy paper 5 and 6. When a drum separation failure occurs Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key. Leading edge transfer target current offset value: -2 to 10 Offset value of leading edge transfer bias output timing: 0 to 20 uA 0 COPIER> ADJUST> HV-TR> TR-L-OF1, 2, 4 - 6 5



1067



8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > ADJUST (Adjustment mode) > HV-TR TR-L-OF4



2 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range Unit Default Value Related Service Mode Amount of Change per Unit TR-L-OF5



2 Detail



Use Case Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range Unit Default Value Related Service Mode Amount of Change per Unit TR-L-OF6



2 Detail



Use Case Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range Unit Default Value Related Service Mode Amount of Change per Unit P-TR-OF1



2 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range Unit Default Value Related Service Mode Amount of Change per Unit



Adj lead edge trns tgt crrnt ofst: Thin To adjust the leading edge transfer target current and the offset value of leading edge transfer bias output timing for thin paper. When a drum separation failure occurs Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key. Leading edge transfer target current offset value: -2 to 10 Offset value of leading edge transfer bias output timing: 0 to 20 uA 0 COPIER> ADJUST> HV-TR> TR-L-OF1 - 3, 5 - 6 5 Adj lead edg trn tgt crrnt ofst:Spec,1st To adjust the leading edge transfer target current and the offset value of leading edge transfer bias output timing when feeding 1st side of the specified paper. Set the paper type with TR-L-SP1. When a drum separation failure occurs Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key. Leading edge transfer target current offset value: -2 to 10 Offset value of leading edge transfer bias output timing: 0 to 20 uA 0 COPIER> ADJUST> HV-TR> TR-L-OF1 - 4, 6, TR-L-SP1 5 Adj lead edg trn tgt crrnt ofst:Spec,2nd To adjust the leading edge transfer target current and the offset value of leading edge transfer bias output timing when feeding 2nd side of the specified paper. Set the paper type with TR-L-SP2. When a drum separation failure occurs Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key. Leading edge transfer target current offset value: -2 to 10 Offset value of leading edge transfer bias output timing: 0 to 20 uA 0 COPIER> ADJUST> HV-TR> TR-L-OF1 - 5, TR-L-SP2 5 Adj pre-trn chg crrnt ofst: pln1,2/color To adjust the offset value of the pre-transfer charging current for plain paper 1, 2/colored paper. Enter the offset value in the right column. The left 2 columns are not used. When transfer failure occurs Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key. -10 to 10 uA 0 COPIER> ADJUST> HV-TR> P-TR-OF2 - 6 10



1068



8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > ADJUST (Adjustment mode) > HV-TR P-TR-OF2



2 Detail



Use Case Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range Unit Default Value Related Service Mode Amount of Change per Unit P-TR-OF3



2 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range Unit Default Value Related Service Mode Amount of Change per Unit P-TR-OF4



2 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range Unit Default Value Related Service Mode Amount of Change per Unit P-TR-OF5



2 Detail



Use Case Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range Unit Default Value Related Service Mode Amount of Change per Unit



Adj pre-trn chg crrnt ofst: pln3/hvy1-4 To adjust the offset value of the pre-transfer charging current for plain paper 3 and heavy paper 1 to 4. Enter the offset value in the right column. The left 2 columns are not used. When transfer failure occurs Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key. -10 to 10 uA 0 COPIER> ADJUST> HV-TR> P-TR-OF1, 3 - 6 10 Adj pre-trn charge crrnt ofst: heavy 5,6 To adjust the offset value of the pre-transfer charging current for heavy paper 5 and 6. Enter the offset value in the right column. The left 2 columns are not used. When transfer failure occurs Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key. -10 to 10 uA 0 COPIER> ADJUST> HV-TR> P-TR-OF1, 2, 4 - 6 10 Adj of pre-trn charge crrnt ofst: Thin To adjust the offset value of the pre-transfer charging current for thin paper. Enter the offset value in the right column. The left 2 columns are not used. When transfer failure occurs Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key. -10 to 10 uA 0 COPIER> ADJUST> HV-TR> P-TR-OF1 - 3, 5 - 6 10 Adj pre-trn chg crrnt ofst: Spec ppr,1st To adjust the offset value of the pre-transfer charging current when feeding 1st side of the specified paper. Enter the offset value in the right column. The left 2 columns are not used. Set the paper type with P-TR-SP1. When transfer failure occurs Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key. -10 to 10 uA 0 COPIER> ADJUST> HV-TR> P-TR-OF1 - 4, 6, P-TR-SP1 10



1069



8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > ADJUST (Adjustment mode) > HV-TR P-TR-OF6



2 Detail



Use Case Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range Unit Default Value Related Service Mode Amount of Change per Unit TR-SP1



2 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range



Default Value Related Service Mode TR-SP2



2 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range



Default Value Related Service Mode TR-L-SP1



2 Detail



Use Case Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range



Default Value Related Service Mode



Adj pre-trn chg crrnt ofst: Spec ppr,2nd To adjust the offset value of the pre-transfer charging current when feeding 2nd side of the specified paper. Enter the offset value in the right column. The left 2 columns are not used. Set the paper type with P-TR-SP2. When transfer failure occurs Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key. -10 to 10 uA 0 COPIER> ADJUST> HV-TR> P-TR-OF1 - 5, P-TR-SP2 10 Set ppr type(1st) for trns tgt crrnt adj To set the paper type (1st side) which the target current of the Transfer Roller is adjusted. Set the offset value of the current with TR-OFS5. When transfer failure occurs Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 0 to 10 0: No specification, 1: Transparency, 2: Postcard, 3: Tracing paper, 4: Bond paper, 5: Labels, 6: Recycled paper, 7: Not used, 8: Punched paper, 9: Tab paper, 10: Letterhead 0 COPIER> ADJUST> HV-TR> TR-OFS5 Set ppr type(2nd) for trns tgt crrnt adj To set the paper type (2nd side) which the target current of the Transfer Roller is adjusted. Set the offset value of the current with TR-OFS6. When transfer failure occurs Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 0 to 10 0: No specification, 1: Transparency, 2: Postcard, 3: Tracing paper, 4: Bond paper, 5: Labels, 6: Recycled paper, 7: Not used, 8: Punched paper, 9: Tab paper, 10: Letterhead 0 COPIER> ADJUST> HV-TR> TR-OFS6 Set ppr(1st): lead edg trn tgt crrnt adj To set the paper type (1st side) which the leading edge transfer target current and the leading edge transfer bias output timing are adjusted. Set the offset values with TR-L-OF5. When a drum separation failure occurs Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 0 to 10 0: No specification, 1: Transparency, 2: Postcard, 3: Tracing paper, 4: Bond paper, 5: Labels, 6: Recycled paper, 7: Plain paper/Colored paper, 8: Punched paper, 9: Tab paper, 10: Letterhead 0 COPIER> ADJUST> HV-TR> TR-L-OF5



1070



8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > ADJUST (Adjustment mode) > HV-TR TR-L-SP2



2 Detail



Use Case Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range



Default Value Related Service Mode P-TR-SP1



2 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range



Default Value Related Service Mode P-TR-SP2



2 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range



Default Value Related Service Mode



Set ppr(2nd): lead edg trn tgt crrnt adj To set the paper type (2nd side) which the leading edge transfer target current and the leading edge transfer bias output timing are adjusted. Set the offset values with TR-L-OF6. When a drum separation failure occurs Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 0 to 10 0: No specification, 1: Transparency, 2: Postcard, 3: Tracing paper, 4: Bond paper, 5: Labels, 6: Recycled paper, 7: Plain paper/Colored paper, 8: Punched paper, 9: Tab paper, 10: Letterhead 0 COPIER> ADJUST> HV-TR> TR-L-OF6 Set ppr type(1st) for pre-trns chg crrnt To set the paper type (1st side) which the pre-transfer charging current is adjusted. Set the offset value of the current with P-TR-OF5. When transfer failure occurs Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 0 to 10 0: No specification, 1: Transparency, 2: Postcard, 3: Tracing paper, 4: Bond paper, 5: Labels, 6: Recycled paper, 7: Not used, 8: Punched paper, 9: Tab paper, 10: Letterhead 0 COPIER> ADJUST> HV-TR> P-TR-OF5 Set ppr type(2nd) for pre-trns chg crrnt To set the paper type (2nd side) which the pre-transfer charging current is adjusted. Set the offset value of the current with P-TR-OF6. When transfer failure occurs Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 0 to 10 0: No specification, 1: Transparency, 2: Postcard, 3: Tracing paper, 4: Bond paper, 5: Labels, 6: Recycled paper, 7: Not used, 8: Punched paper, 9: Tab paper, 10: Letterhead 0 COPIER> ADJUST> HV-TR> P-TR-OF6



■ FEED-ADJ COPIER (Service mode for printer) > ADJUST (Adjustment mode) > FEED-ADJ REGIST



1 Detail



Use Case Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range Unit Default Value Amount of Change per Unit



Adj register start timing: ADJUST (Adjustment mode) > FEED-ADJ ADJ-C1



1 Detail



Use Case Adj/Set/Operate Method Caution Display/Adj/Set Range Unit Default Value Amount of Change per Unit ADJ-C2



1 Detail



Use Case Adj/Set/Operate Method Caution Display/Adj/Set Range Unit Default Value Amount of Change per Unit ADJ-C3



1 Detail



Use Case Adj/Set/Operate Method Caution Display/Adj/Set Range Unit Default Value Amount of Change per Unit



Right Deck write start pstn in horz scan To adjust the image write start position in the horizontal scanning direction when feeding paper from the Right Deck. As the value is incremented by 1, the margin on the left edge of paper is increased by 0.1 mm. +: Left margin becomes larger. (An image moves to the right.) -: Left margin becomes smaller. (An image moves to the left.) When replacing the DC Controller PCB/clearing RAM data, enter the value of service label. When replacing the DC Controller PCB/clearing RAM data Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key. If write start position cannot be adjusted in service mode, execute mechanical adjustment. -20 to 20 mm 0 0.1 Left Deck write start pstn in horz scan To adjust the image write start position in the horizontal scanning direction when feeding paper from the Left Deck. As the value is incremented by 1, the margin on the left edge of paper is increased by 0.1 mm. +: Left margin becomes larger. (An image moves to the right.) -: Left margin becomes smaller. (An image moves to the left.) When replacing the DC Controller PCB/clearing RAM data, enter the value of service label. When replacing the DC Controller PCB/clearing RAM data Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key. If write start position cannot be adjusted in service mode, execute mechanical adjustment. -20 to 20 mm 0 0.1 Cassette 3 write start pstn in horz scan To adjust the image write start position in the horizontal scanning direction when feeding paper from the Cassette 3. As the value is incremented by 1, the margin on the left edge of paper is increased by 0.1 mm. +: Left margin becomes larger. (An image moves to the right.) -: Left margin becomes smaller. (An image moves to the left.) When replacing the DC Controller PCB/clearing RAM data, enter the value of service label. When replacing the DC Controller PCB/clearing RAM data Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key. If write start position cannot be adjusted in service mode, execute mechanical adjustment. -20 to 20 mm 0 0.1



1072



8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > ADJUST (Adjustment mode) > FEED-ADJ ADJ-C4



1 Detail



Use Case Adj/Set/Operate Method Caution Display/Adj/Set Range Unit Default Value Amount of Change per Unit ADJ-MF



1 Detail



Use Case Adj/Set/Operate Method Caution Display/Adj/Set Range Unit Default Value Amount of Change per Unit ADJ-DK



1 Detail



Use Case Adj/Set/Operate Method Caution Display/Adj/Set Range Unit Default Value Amount of Change per Unit



Cassette 4 write start pstn in horz scan To adjust the image write start position in the horizontal scanning direction when feeding paper from the Cassette 4. As the value is incremented by 1, the margin on the left edge of paper is increased by 0.1 mm. +: Left margin becomes larger. (An image moves to the right.) -: Left margin becomes smaller. (An image moves to the left.) When replacing the DC Controller PCB/clearing RAM data, enter the value of service label. When replacing the DC Controller PCB/clearing RAM data Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key. If write start position cannot be adjusted in service mode, execute mechanical adjustment. -20 to 20 mm 0 0.1 Write start pstn in horz scan: MP Tray To adjust the image write start position in the horizontal scanning direction when feeding paper from the Multi-purpose Tray. As the value is incremented by 1, the margin on the left edge of paper is increased by 0.1 mm. +: Left margin becomes larger. (An image moves to the right.) -: Left margin becomes smaller. (An image moves to the left.) When replacing the DC Controller PCB/clearing RAM data, enter the value of service label. When replacing the DC Controller PCB/clearing RAM data Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key. If write start position cannot be adjusted in service mode, execute mechanical adjustment. -20 to 20 mm 0 0.1 Write start pstn in horz scan:Deck/POD D To adjust the image write start position in the horizontal scanning direction when feeding paper from the Paper Deck/ POD Deck Lite. As the value is incremented by 1, the margin on the left edge of paper is increased by 0.1 mm. +: Left margin becomes larger. (An image moves to the right.) -: Left margin becomes smaller. (An image moves to the left.) When replacing the DC Controller PCB/clearing RAM data, enter the value of service label. When replacing the DC Controller PCB/clearing RAM data Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key. If write start position cannot be adjusted in service mode, execute mechanical adjustment. -20 to 20 mm 0 0.1



1073



8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > ADJUST (Adjustment mode) > FEED-ADJ ADJ-REFE



1 Detail



Use Case Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range Unit Default Value Amount of Change per Unit RG-MF



1 Detail



Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range



Write start pstn in horz scan: 2nd side To adjust the image write start position on the second side in the horizontal scanning direction. The image write start position is set in the relative amount against the first side regardless of the paper pickup cassette/tray/deck. As the value is incremented by 1, the margin on the left edge of paper is increased by 0.1 mm. +: Left margin becomes larger. (An image moves to the right.) -: Left margin becomes smaller. (An image moves to the left.) When replacing the DC Controller PCB/clearing RAM data, enter the value of service label. When replacing the DC Controller PCB/clearing RAM data Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key. -50 to 50 mm 0 0.1 Adj register start tmg:/= 91g/m2 To adjust the leading edge margin by changing the timing to turn ON the Registration Motor when feeding paper which paper weight is 91 g/m2 or more (excluding transparency and clear film). As the value is incremented by 1, the margin on the leading edge of paper is increased by 0.1 mm. +: Top margin becomes smaller. (An image moves upward.) -: Top margin becomes larger. (An image moves downward.) Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key. -50 to 50



Unit



mm



Default Value



-20



Amount of Change per Unit



0.1



REG-OHT



1 Detail



Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range



Adj register start tmg:trnsp, clear film To adjust the leading edge margin by changing the timing to turn ON the Registration Motor when feeding transparency/clear film. As the value is incremented by 1, the margin on the leading edge of paper is increased by 0.1 mm. +: Top margin becomes smaller. (An image moves upward.) -: Top margin becomes larger. (An image moves downward.) Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key. -50 to 50



Unit



mm



Default Value



-20



Amount of Change per Unit



0.1



1074



8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > ADJUST (Adjustment mode) > FEED-ADJ REG-DUP1



1 Detail



Use Case Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range



Adj register start timing:/=91g/m2, 2nd To adjust the leading edge margin by changing the timing to turn ON the Registration Motor when feeding the 2nd side of paper which paper weight is 91 g/m2 or more. As the value is incremented by 1, the margin on the leading edge of paper is increased by 0.1 mm. +: Top margin becomes smaller. (An image moves upward.) -: Top margin becomes larger. (An image moves downward.) When adjusting the leading edge margin Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key. -50 to 50



Unit



mm



Default Value



-10



Amount of Change per Unit



0.1



LP-FEED1



1 Detail



Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range Unit Default Value Amount of Change per Unit LP-FEED2



1 Detail



Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range Unit Default Value Amount of Change per Unit



Adj pre-rgst arch amnt: casstt,/=91g/m2 To adjust the arch amount before registration when feeding paper which paper weight is 91 g/m2 or more from a cassette. As the value is incremented by 1, the pre-registration arch amount changes by 0.1 mm. +: Increase -: Decrease Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key. -50 to 50 mm 0 0.1



1075



8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > ADJUST (Adjustment mode) > FEED-ADJ LP-MULT1



1 Detail



Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range Unit Default Value Amount of Change per Unit LP-MULT2



1 Detail



Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range Unit Default Value Amount of Change per Unit LP-DUP1



1 Detail



Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range Unit Default Value Amount of Change per Unit LP-DUP2



1 Detail



Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range Unit Default Value Amount of Change per Unit



Adj pre-rgst arch amnt:MP Tray,/=91g/m2 To adjust the arch amount before registration when feeding paper which paper weight is 91 g/m2 or more from the Multi-purpose Tray. As the value is incremented by 1, the pre-registration arch amount changes by 0.1 mm. +: Increase -: Decrease Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key. -50 to 50 mm 0 0.1 Adj pre-rgst arch amnt: 2-side,/=91g/m2 To adjust the arch amount before registration when feeding paper which paper weight is 91 g/m2 or more in duplex mode. As the value is incremented by 1, the pre-registration arch amount changes by 0.1 mm. +: Increase -: Decrease Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key. -50 to 50 mm 0 0.1



1076



8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > ADJUST (Adjustment mode) > FEED-ADJ REG-SPD



1 Detail



Use Case Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value TBLT-SPD



1 Detail



Use Case Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range Unit Default Value Amount of Change per Unit LP-DK



1 Detail



Use Case Adj/Set/Operate Method Caution Display/Adj/Set Range Unit Default Value Amount of Change per Unit



Speed adj Registration Motor:1/1 speed To adjust 1/1 speed of the Registration Motor. +: The speed is increased. -: The speed is decreased. - At occurrence of an image failure - When the leading edge margin becomes larger due to wear of the Registration Roller Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key. -50 to 50 0 Fine adjustment of ETB speed To make a fine adjustment of the ETB speed. +: The speed is increased. -: The speed is decreased. When the speed is changed, image magnification in the vertical scanning direction is changed. When image magnification is changed due to replacement of ETB, etc. Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key. -200 to 200 mm 0 0.1 Adj pre-rgst arch amount: 1st side, Deck To adjust the arch amount before registration for the 1st side of paper when feeding paper from POD Deck Lite/Paper Deck Unit. As the value is changed by 1, the arch amount is changed by 0.1 mm. +: Increase -: Decrease When skew occurs on the 1st side at the time of picking up paper from POD Deck Lite/Paper Deck Unit Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key. If the value is too large, paper wrinkles or paper bending may occur. -50 to 50 mm 0 0.1



1077



8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > ADJUST (Adjustment mode) > FEED-ADJ DK1-PKLV



2 Detail



Use Case Adj/Set/Operate Method Caution Display/Adj/Set Range Unit



Adjustment of paper surface height: Deck To adjust the pickup position of the POD Deck Lite/Paper Deck Unit. As the value is changed by 1, the pickup position is moved by 1 mm. +: Move up -: Move down Increase the value when a pickup failure occurs, and decrease the value when double feed occurs. - When a pickup failure occurs - When double feed occurs Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key. If the value is too large, double feed may occur. If the value is too small, a pickup failure may occur. -10 to 10 -10 to -1: Move down by 1 mm, 0: 0 mm, 1: Move up by 1 mm, 2 to 10: Move up by 2 mm mm



Default Value



0



Amount of Change per Unit



1



■ CST-ADJ COPIER (Service mode for printer) > ADJUST (Adjustment mode) > CST-ADJ MF-A4R



1 Detail



Use Case Adj/Set/Operate Method Caution



Adj of MP Tray A4R paper width To adjust the width of A4R paper in the Multi-purpose Tray. When replacing the DC Controller PCB/clearing RAM data, enter the value of service label. When replacing the Multi-purpose Tray Paper Width Detection PCB or registering a new value, execute COPIER> FUNCTION> CST> A4R. - When replacing the DC Controller PCB/clearing RAM data - When replacing the Multi-purpose Tray Paper Width Detection PCB or registering a new value Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. After the setting value is changed, write the changed value in the service label.



Display/Adj/Set Range



0 to 255



Related Service Mode



COPIER> FUNCTION> CST> A4R



MF-A6R



1 Detail



Use Case Adj/Set/Operate Method Caution



Adj of MP Tray A6R paper width To adjust the width of A6R paper in the Multi-purpose Tray. When replacing the DC Controller PCB/clearing RAM data, enter the value of service label. When replacing the Multi-purpose Tray Paper Width Detection PCB or registering a new value, execute COPIER> FUNCTION> CST> A6R. - When replacing the DC Controller PCB/clearing RAM data - When replacing the Multi-purpose Tray Paper Width Detection PCB or registering a new value Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. After the setting value is changed, write the changed value in the service label.



Display/Adj/Set Range



0 to 255



Related Service Mode



COPIER> FUNCTION> CST> A6R



1078



8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > ADJUST (Adjustment mode) > CST-ADJ MF-A4



1 Detail



Use Case Adj/Set/Operate Method Caution



Adj of MP Tray A4 paper width To adjust the width of A4 paper in the Multi-purpose Tray. When replacing the DC Controller PCB/clearing RAM data, enter the value of service label. When replacing the Multi-purpose Tray Paper Width Detection PCB or registering a new value, execute COPIER> FUNCTION> CST> A4. - When replacing the DC Controller PCB/clearing RAM data - When replacing the Multi-purpose Tray Paper Width Detection PCB or registering a new value Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. After the setting value is changed, write the changed value in the service label.



Display/Adj/Set Range



0 to 255



Related Service Mode



COPIER> FUNCTION> CST> A4



PDK-A4



1 Detail



Use Case Adj/Set/Operate Method Caution Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value Related Service Mode PDK-A5R



1 Detail



Use Case Adj/Set/Operate Method Caution Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value Related Service Mode



Adj of POD Deck Lite A4 paper width To adjust the width of A4 paper in the POD Deck Lite. When replacing the DC Controller PCB/clearing RAM data, enter the value of service label. When replacing the Paper Width Sensor PCB or registering a new value, execute COPIER> FUNCTION> CST> PDK-A4. - When replacing the DC Controller PCB/clearing RAM data - When replacing the Paper Width Sensor PCB or registering a new value 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. After the setting value is changed, write the changed value in the service label. 0 to 1023 0 COPIER> FUNCTION> CST> PDK-A4 Adj of POD Deck Lite A5R paper width To adjust the width of A5R paper in the POD Deck Lite. When replacing the DC Controller PCB/clearing RAM data, enter the value of service label. When replacing the Paper Width Sensor PCB or registering a new value, execute COPIER> FUNCTION> CST> PDK-A5R. - When replacing the DC Controller PCB/clearing RAM data - When replacing the Paper Width Sensor PCB or registering a new value 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. After the setting value is changed, write the changed value in the service label. 0 to 1023 0 COPIER> FUNCTION> CST> PDK-A5R



■ MISC COPIER (Service mode for printer) > ADJUST (Adjustment mode) > MISC SEG-ADJ



1 Detail



Set criteria for text/photo: front side To set the judgment level of text/photo original in Text/Photo/Map mode. As the value is increased, the original tends to be detected as a photo document, and as the value is decreased, the original tends to be detected as a text document.



Use Case



When adjusting the classification level of text and photo in Text/Photo/Map mode



Adj/Set/Operate Method



1) Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.



Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value



-4 to 4 0



1079



8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > ADJUST (Adjustment mode) > MISC K-ADJ



1 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value ACS-ADJ



1 Detail



Use Case Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value ACS-EN



2 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value ACS-CNT



2 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value ACS-EN2



2 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value



Set criteria for black text: front side To set the judgment level of black characters at text processing. As the value is increased, the text tends to be detected as black. When preferring the text to be judged as black 1) Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. -3 to 3 0 Set criteria for B&W/color in ACS:front To set the judgment level of B&W/color original in ACS mode. As the value is increased, the original tends to be detected as a B&W document, and as the value is decreased, the original tends to be detected as a color document. When adjusting the color detection level in ACS mode 1) Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. -3 to 3 0 Set judgment area in ACS mode:front side To set the judgment area in ACS mode. As the greater value is set, the judgment area is widened. When adjusting the judgment area in ACS mode 1) Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. -2 to 2 1 Set jdgmt pixel count area in ACS:front To set the area which counts the pixel to judge the color presence in ACS mode. As the greater value is set, the judgment area is widened. When adjusting the area which counts the pixel to judge the color presence in ACS mode 1) Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. -2 to 2 0 Set ACS mode jdgmt area in DADF mode To set the judgment area in ACS mode at DADF reading. As the greater value is set, the judgment area is widened. When adjusting the judgment area in ACS mode at DADF reading 1) Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. -2 to 2 1



1080



8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > ADJUST (Adjustment mode) > MISC ACS-CNT2



2 Detail



To set the area which counts the pixel to judge the color presence in ACS mode at DADF reading. As the greater value is set, the judgment area is widened.



Use Case



When adjusting the area which counts the pixel to judge the color presence in ACS mode at DADF reading



Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value SEG-ADJ3



1 Detail



Use Case Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value K-ADJ3



1 Detail



Use Case Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value ACS-ADJ3



1 Detail



Use Case Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value ACS-EN3



Set ACS jdgmt pixel count area in DADF



2 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value



1) Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. -2 to 2 0 Set criteria for text/photo: back side To set the judgment level of text/photo original in Text/Photo/Map mode (back side at duplex reading with 1 path). As the value is increased, the original tends to be detected as a photo document, and as the value is decreased, the original tends to be detected as a text document. When adjusting the classification level of text and photo in Text/Photo/Map mode (back side at duplex reading with 1 path) 1) Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. -4 to 4 0 Set criteria for black text: back side To set the judgment level of black characters at text processing (back side at duplex reading with 1 path). As the value is increased, the text tends to be detected as black. When preferring the text to be judged as black (back side at duplex reading with 1 path) 1) Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. -3 to 3 0 Set ACS B&W/color jdgmt stdrd:back side To set the judgment level of B&W/color original in ACS mode (back side at duplex reading with 1 path). As the value is increased, the original tends to be detected as a B&W document, and as the value is decreased, the original tends to be detected as a color document. When adjusting the color detection level in ACS mode (back side at duplex reading with 1 path) 1) Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. -3 to 3 0 Set of ACS mode jdgmt area: back side To set the judgment area in ACS mode (back side at duplex reading with 1 path). As the greater value is set, the judgment area is widened. When adjusting the judgment area in ACS mode (back side at duplex reading with 1 path) 1) Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. -2 to 2 1



1081



8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > ADJUST (Adjustment mode) > MISC ACS-CNT3



2 Detail



Use Case Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value TBSIS-WB



2 Detail



Use Case Adj/Set/Operate Method Caution Display/Adj/Set Range Unit Default Value Amount of Change per Unit HP-OFST



1 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range Unit Default Value Amount of Change per Unit



ACS mode jdgmt pixel count area: back To set the area which counts the pixel to judge the color presence in ACS mode (back side at duplex reading with 1 path). As the greater value is set, the judgment area is widen. When adjusting the area which counts the pixel to judge the color presence in ACS mode (back side at duplex reading with 1 path) 1) Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. -2 to 2 0 Setting of blank band ejection time To set the blank band ejection time. As the value is incremented by 1, the ejection time changes by 0.1 second. +: Increase -: Decrease When an image failure (streaks of uneven density) occurs Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key. When a positive value is set, the ejection time increases. 0 to 100 sec 0 0.1 Setting of 2D shading drum HP offset To set the home position of Photosensitive Drum in the vertical scanning direction at 2D shading. As the value is incremented by 1, the home position moves by 10 mm. When adjusting the home position of the Photosensitive Drum at the replacement of the drum Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key. -5 to 5 mm 0 10



■ EXP-LED COPIER (Service mode for printer) > ADJUST (Adjustment mode) > EXP-LED PR-EXP



2



Setting of Pre-exposure LED current



Detail



To set the current of the Cleaning Pre-exposure LED. Increase the value when taking a measure for drum ghost. Decrease the value when potential is not applied well.



Use Case



- When drum ghost is significant (drum pitch is not correct) - When potential is not applied well



Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range



1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 110 to 233



Unit



mA



Default Value



181



Amount of Change per Unit



0.4



1082



8. Service Mode



FUNCTION (Operation / inspection mode) ■ INSTALL COPIER (Service mode for printer) > FUNCTION (Operation / inspection mode) > INSTALL TONER-S



1 Detail



Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method



Caution



Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value Required Time STRD-POS



1 Detail



Use Case Adj/Set/Operate Method



Caution



Toner supply to Developing Assembly To execute a series of operation necessary for supplying toner to the Developing Assembly/Toner Supply area (drive the Developing Cylinder, Toner Stirring/Feed Member, Photosensitive Drum and ETB, and output developing bias) as a whole. After counting down from 600 seconds, it is automatically stopped. - At installation - When replacing the Developing Assembly - When replacing toner in the Developing Assembly 1) Select the items. "Check the Developer" is displayed. 2) Check connection, and then press OK key. It automatically stops after 10 minutes. - Although "Check the Developer" is displayed when selecting the item, be sure to check the connection between the Developing Assembly and connector in advance. - The operation can be stopped manually with OK key when a failure occurs. During operation: xxx second (remaining time), When operation finished normally: END 600 13 min Auto adj frt side read pstn: stream read To automatically adjust the Scanner Unit (for front side) position in feed direction when stream reading original with DADF. The adjustment result is reflected to COPIER> ADJUST> ADJ-XY> STRD-POS. At DADF installation/uninstallation 1) Set a paper for stream reading position adjustment, and then close the DADF. 2) Select the item, and then press OK key. The operation automatically stops after the adjustment. 3) Write the value displayed by COPIER> ADJUST> ADJ-XY> STRD-POS in the service label. Write the adjusted value in the service label.



Display/Adj/Set Range



At normal termination: OK!, At abnormal termination: NG!



Related Service Mode



COPIER> ADJUST> ADJ-XY> STRD-POS



Supplement/Memo CARD



1 Detail



Use Case Adj/Set/Operate Method Caution Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value Related Service Mode



For the details of paper for stream reading position adjustment, refer to the Service Manual. Card number setting To set the card number to be used for Card Reader. A series of numbers from the entered number to the number of cards specified by CARD-RNG can be used. - At installation of the Card Reader - After replacement of the HDD 1) Enter the number, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. The card management information (department ID and password) is initialized. 1 to 2001 1 COPIER> OPTION> FNC-SW> CARD-RNG



1083



8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > FUNCTION (Operation / inspection mode) > INSTALL E-RDS



1 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method Caution Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value Related Service Mode Supplement/Memo RGW-PORT



1 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method Caution Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value Related Service Mode Supplement/Memo COM-TEST



1 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method Caution



ON/OFF of Embedded-RDS To set whether to use the E-RDS. When using Embedded-RDS 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Be sure to use E-RDS, RGW-PORT, COM-TEST, COM-LOG and RGW-ADR as a set. 0 to 1 0: Not used, 1: Used (All the counter information is sent.) It differs according to the location. COPIER> FUNCTION> INSTALL> RGW-PORT, COM-TEST, COM-LOG, RGW-ADR COPIER> FUNCTION> CLEAR> ERDS-DAT Embedded-RDS: Function to send device information such as the device counter, failure, and consumables to the sales company's server via SOAP protocol Set port number of Sales Co's server To set the port number of the sales company's server to be used for Embedded-RDS. When using Embedded-RDS 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Be sure to use E-RDS, RGW-PORT, COM-TEST, COM-LOG and RGW-ADR as a set. 1 to 65535 443 COPIER> FUNCTION> INSTALL> E-RDS, COM-TEST, COM-LOG, RGW-ADR Embedded-RDS: Function to send device information such as the device counter, failure, and consumables to the sales company's server via SOAP protocol Dspl connect result w/ Sales Co's server To display the result of the connection test with the sales company's server. When using Embedded-RDS Select the item, and then press OK key. Be sure to use E-RDS, RGW-PORT, COM-TEST, COM-LOG and RGW-ADR as a set.



Display/Adj/Set Range



During operation: ACTIVE, When connection is completed: OK, When connection is failed: NG



Related Service Mode



COPIER> FUNCTION> INSTALL> E-RDS, RGW-PORT, COM-LOG, RGW-ADR



Supplement/Memo COM-LOG



1 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method Caution



Embedded-RDS: Function to send device information such as the device counter, failure, and consumables to the sales company's server via SOAP protocol Dspl connect error w/ Sales Co's server To display error information when the connection with the sales company's server failed. When using Embedded-RDS N/A (Display only) Be sure to use E-RDS, RGW-PORT, COM-TEST, COM-LOG and RGW-ADR as a set.



Display/Adj/Set Range



Year, date, time, error code, error detail information (maximum 128 characters)



Related Service Mode



COPIER> FUNCTION> INSTALL> E-RDS, RGW-PORT, COM-TEST, RGW-ADR



Supplement/Memo



Embedded-RDS: Function to send device information such as the device counter, failure, and consumables to the sales company's server via SOAP protocol



1084



8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > FUNCTION (Operation / inspection mode) > INSTALL RGW-ADR



1 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method



Caution Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value Related Service Mode Supplement/Memo CNT-DATE



1 Detail



Use Case Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value Supplement/Memo CNT-INTV



1 Detail



Use Case Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range Unit Default Value Supplement/Memo Amount of Change per Unit



URL setting of Sales Company's server To set the URL of the sales company's server to be used for Embedded-RDS. When using Embedded-RDS 1) Select the URL. 2) Enter the URL, and then press OK key. 3) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. - Do not use Shift-JIS character strings. - Be sure to use E-RDS, RGW-PORT, COM-TEST, COM-LOG and RGW-ADR as a set. URL https://b01.ugwdevice.net/ugw/agentif010 COPIER> FUNCTION> INSTALL> E-RDS, RGW-PORT, COM-TEST, COM-LOG Embedded-RDS: Function to send device information such as the device counter, failure, and consumables to the sales company's server via SOAP protocol Set counter send start date to SC server To set the year, month, date, hour and minute to send counter information to the sales company's server. This is displayed only when the Embedded-RDS third-party extended function is available. When the non-Canon-made extension function of the Embedded-RDS is available 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. YYYYMMDDHHMM (12 digits) YYYY: Year, MM: Month, DD: Date, HH: Hour, MM: Minute 000000000000 Embedded-RDS: Function to send device information such as the device counter, failure, and consumables to the sales company's server via SOAP protocol Set counter send interval to SC server To set the interval of sending counter information to the sales company's server in a unit of one hour. This is displayed only when the Embedded-RDS third-party extended function is available. When using the Embedded-RDS third-party extended function 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 1 to 168 (=1 week) hour 24 Embedded-RDS: Function to send device information such as the device counter, failure, and consumables to the sales company's server via SOAP protocol 1



1085



8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > FUNCTION (Operation / inspection mode) > INSTALL CDS-CTL



1 Detail



Use Case Adj/Set/Operate Method



Set country/area when using CDS To set country/region to enable CDS. In principle, the default value is the same as that of CONFIG. If the value differs from the country/ region of the vice-company of sales, change the setting. When enabling CDS 1) Select the item, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.



Caution



If the setting value is not configured to be the same as the country/region of the vice-company of sales, the necessary firmware may not be able to be downloaded.



Display/Adj/Set Range



JP: Japan, US: USA, GB: Great Britain, FR: France, DE: Germany, IT: Italy, AU: Australia, SG: Singapore, NL: Netherlands, KR: Korea, CN: China, TW: Taiwan, ES: Spain, SE: Sweden, PT: Portugal, NO: Norway, DK: Denmark, FI: Finland, PL: Poland, HU: Hungary, CZ: Czech Republic, SI: Slovenia, GR: Greece, EE: Estonia, RU: Russia, SK: Slovakia, RO: Romania, HR: Croatia, BG: Bulgaria, TR: Turkey, TH: Thailand, VN: Vietnam, AR: Argentina, IN: India, CA: Canada, LA: Latin America, HK: Hong Kong



Default Value Related Service Mode Supplement/Memo DRM-INIT



1 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method



It differs according to the location. COPIER> OPTION> FNC-SW> CONFIG CDS: Contents Delivery System Initialization of Photosensitive Drum To initialize Photosensitive Drum. Clear drum counter (PT-DRM), Drum Lot number, and checksum stored in the DC Controller. After replacement of the Photosensitive Drum Select the item, and then press OK key.



Display/Adj/Set Range



During operation: ACTIVE, At normal termination: OK, At abnormal termination: NG



Related Service Mode



COPIER> COUNTER> LF> K-DRM-LF COPIER> DISPLAY> 2D-SHADE> CHK-SUM, DRM-LOT



BIT-SVC



1 Detail



Use Case Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value



OFF/ON of Web service of E-RDS *Operation on this item is restricted by the setting of [Restrict Service Representation Access]. To set ON/OFF of Web service function of E-RDS. When OFF is selected, authentication information cannot be obtained from E-RDS. Upon user's request 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 0 to 1 0: OFF, 1: ON 1



1086



8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > FUNCTION (Operation / inspection mode) > INSTALL DEV-G-R



2 Detail



Use Case Adj/Set/Operate Method Caution



Display/Adj/Set Range Required Time NFC-USE



1 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value Additional Functions Mode BLE-USE



1 Detail



Use Case Adj/Set/Operate Method Caution Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value INSTDTST



1 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method Related Service Mode



Exe ghost alleviate mode:Dev Ass'y rplce To execute the processing to remove unnecessary toner from the Photosensitive Drum when ghost occurs at replacement of the Developing Assembly. Although the effect increases as this item is repeated, there will be no effect from 4th repetition. When ghost occurs at replacement of the Developing Assembly with a new one 1) Set A4/LTR size paper on the Multi-purpose Tray. 2) Select the item, and then press OK key. - When executing this item, toner for 1200 sheets at 5% image ratio is consumed. Be sure to get approval from the user in advance by explaining that toner consumption is increased and it takes approx. 29 minutes. - Be sure to disconnect the network cable and telephone cord. Otherwise, this item will not be executed. - Although this item cannot be executed without placing paper, no paper will be consumed. - When Front Cover open/no toner/waste toner full is detected while this item is in process, the process is canceled. Once the process is canceled, cancel "local print" of "job" on the Status Monitor/Cancel screen. If it is not canceled, the process that is resumed after recovery will be printed/delivered as an actual job (wasting of paper). - After execution, make a copy to check the effect. If no effect is obtained, replace the Developing Assembly. During operation: ACTIVE, At normal termination: OK, At abnormal termination: NG 29 min ON/OFF of NFC option To set whether to enable the installed NFC option. Set 1 when using the NFC option. [Use NFC Card Emulation] is displayed in [Settings/Registration]. When installing the NFC option 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 0 to 1 0: OFF, 1: ON 0 Management Settings> Device Management> Use NFC Card Emulation ON/OFF of BLE module option To set whether to enable the installed BLE module option. Set 1 when using the BLE module option. The BLE setting screen is displayed in [Settings/ Registration]. When installing the BLE module option 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Do not set 1 when the BLE module option is not installed. 0 to 1 0: OFF, 1: ON 0 Batch set installation date info: YMDHN Information on the current date and time is entered collectively in YMDHN of INSTDT by pressing INSTDTST. At installation Select the item, and then press OK key. COPIER>OPTION>USER>INSTDT-Y COPIER>OPTION>USER>INSTDT-M COPIER>OPTION>USER>INSTDT-D COPIER>OPTION>USER>INSTDT-H COPIER>OPTION>USER>INSTDT-N



1087



8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > FUNCTION (Operation / inspection mode) > INSTALL FAX-USE



1 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value SUB-IF



1 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method



Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value



Enable/disable FAX function *Operation on this item is restricted by the setting of [Restrict Service Representation Access]. To switch enable/disable of the FAX function of a device mounted with a FAX Board. When disabling the FAX function of a device mounted with a FAX Board 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn ON/OFF the Main Power. 0 to 1 0: OFF, 1: ON 1 Set for line connecting to cloud service To select the network line connecting to the Canon cloud service When the Canon cloud service is used with a sub line 1) Select either [Wired LAN+Wireless LAN] or [Wired LAN+Wired LAN] when selecting interface 2) Configure the network setting for the sub line 3) Select 1 for this setting 4) Turn the main power OFF, and then ON 0 to 1 0: Main line, 1: Sub line 0



■ CCD COPIER (Service mode for printer) > FUNCTION (Operation / inspection mode) > CCD DF-WLVL1



1 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method Caution



White level adj in book mode: color To adjust the white level for copyboard scanning automatically by setting the paper which is usually used by the user on the Copyboard Glass. - When replacing the Copyboard Glass - When replacing the Scanner Unit - When replacing the Reader Controller PCB/clearing RAM data 1) Set a paper on the Copyboard Glass. 2) Select the item, and then press OK key. Be sure to execute DF-WLVL2 in a row.



Display/Adj/Set Range



During operation: ACTIVE, When operation finished normally: OK!



Related Service Mode



COPIER> FUNCTION> CCD> DF-WLVL2



DF-WLVL2



1 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method Caution



White level adj: stream reading, color To automatically adjust the white level for stream reading by placing the paper which is usually used by the user on the DADF. - When replacing the Copyboard Glass - When replacing the Scanner Unit - When replacing the Reader Controller PCB/clearing RAM data 1) Set paper on the DADF. 2) Select the item, and then press OK key. Be sure to execute this item after DF-WLVL1.



Display/Adj/Set Range



During operation: ACTIVE, When operation finished normally: OK!



Related Service Mode



COPIER> FUNCTION> CCD> DF-WLVL1



1088



8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > FUNCTION (Operation / inspection mode) > CCD DF-LNR



1 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method



Deriving of DADF front/back linearity To derive the front/back side linearity in DADF mode based on the scanning data which has been backed up at factory. When replacing the Reader Controller PCB/clearing RAM data 1) Enter the value of the reader's service label. COPIER> ADJUST> CCD> DFCH-R2, DFCH-G2, DFCH-B2, DFCH-K2, DFCH-R10, DFCH-G10, DFCH-B10, DFCH-K10, DFCH2R2, DFCH2G2, DFCH2B2, DFCH2K2, DFCH2R10, DFCH2G10, DFCH2B10, DFCH2K10 2) Select the item, and then press OK key.



Display/Adj/Set Range



During operation: ACTIVE, When operation finished normally: OK!



Related Service Mode



COPIER> ADJUST> CCD> DFCH-R2/R10/G2/G10/B2/B10/K2/K10, DFCH2R2/10, DFCH2G2/10, DFCH2B2/10, DFCH2K2/10



MTF-CLC



1 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method



Deriving of MTF filter coefficient To derive the MTF filter coefficient to be set for ASIC based on the MTF value which has been backed up. When replacing the Reader Controller PCB/clearing RAM data Select the item, and then press OK key.



Display/Adj/Set Range



During operation: ACTIVE, When operation finished normally: OK!



Related Service Mode



COPIER> ADJUST> CCD> MTF-M1 - M12, MTF-S1 - S12, MTF2-M1 - M12, MTF2-S1 - S12



Supplement/Memo DF-WLVL3



1 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method Caution



The scanning data of the DADF complex chart is indicated in the label of the Scanner Unit (DADF/ Reader). White level adj in book mode: B&W To adjust the white level for copyboard scanning automatically by setting a paper which is usually used by the user on the Copyboard Glass. - When replacing the Copyboard Glass - When replacing the Scanner Unit - When replacing the Reader Controller PCB/clearing RAM data 1) Set a paper on the Copyboard Glass. 2) Select the item, and then press OK key. Be sure to execute DF-WLVL4 in a row.



Display/Adj/Set Range



During operation: ACTIVE, When operation finished normally: OK!



Related Service Mode



COPIER> FUNCTION> CCD> DF-WLVL4



DF-WLVL4



1 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method Caution



White level adj: stream reading, B&W To automatically adjust the white level for stream reading by placing the paper which is usually used by the user on the DADF. - When replacing the Copyboard Glass - When replacing the Scanner Unit - When replacing the Reader Controller PCB/clearing RAM data 1) Set paper on the DADF. 2) Select the item, and then press OK key. Be sure to execute this item after DF-WLVL3.



Display/Adj/Set Range



During operation: ACTIVE, When operation finished normally: OK!



Related Service Mode



COPIER> FUNCTION> CCD> DF-WLVL3



1089



8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > FUNCTION (Operation / inspection mode) > CCD BW-TGT



1 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method Caution Related Service Mode



Set of B&W shading target value After the white level data (X/Y/Z) for the Standard White Plate is set, read the Standard White Plate and set the black and white shading target value. When replacing the Copyboard Glass/Scanner Unit Select the item, and then press OK key. Be sure to execute this item after execution of COPIER> ADJUST> CCD>W-PLT-X, W-PLT-Y, WPLT-Z. COPIER> ADJUST> CCD> W-PLT-X/Y/Z, SH-TRGT



■ DPC COPIER (Service mode for printer) > FUNCTION (Operation / inspection mode) > DPC DPC



1 Detail



Execution of potential control To execute potential control for the Photosensitive Drum manually. (It is usually executed automatically.)



Use Case



When checking potential control operation



Adj/Set/Operate Method



1) Select the item, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.



Required Time OFST



1 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method Caution



Required Time Related Service Mode DPC2



1 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method



Caution Required Time



10 sec Potential adjustment of Potential Sensor To adjust the detection potential offset value of the Potential Sensor automatically. - When replacing the Potential Sensor - At diagnosis for a failure of the Potential Sensor Select the item, and then press OK key. An error is displayed when open circuit/connection failure/installation failure occurs to the Potential Sensor at the time of replacement. In this case, manually set the value to 0 V in EPOTOFST and then make an adjustment. 4 sec COPIER> ADJUST> V-CONT> EPOTOFST Execution of potential control To execute potential control for the Photosensitive Drum manually (without restarting the host machine). When checking potential control operation 1) Select the item, and then press OK key. After 10 seconds, potential control is completed. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. The result of potential control is reflected after turning OFF/ON the power. 10 sec



■ CST COPIER (Service mode for printer) > FUNCTION (Operation / inspection mode) > CST MF-A4R



1 Detail



Adj/Set/Operate Method



Caution Related Service Mode



Reg Multi-purpose Tray A4R stdrd width To register the standard value of A4R paper width (210mm) on the Multi-purpose Tray. Make a fine adjustment by COPIER> ADJUST> CST-ADJ> MF-A4R. 1) Set A4R paper on the Multi-purpose Tray, and set the guide so that it fits the paper width. 2) Select the item, and then press OK key. The value is registered after automatic adjustment. After execution, check the registered value by COPIER> ADJUST> CST-ADJ> MF-A4R, and write it down on the service label. COPIER> ADJUST> CST-ADJ> MF-A4R



1090



8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > FUNCTION (Operation / inspection mode) > CST MF-A6R



1 Detail



Adj/Set/Operate Method



Caution Related Service Mode MF-A4



1 Detail



Adj/Set/Operate Method



Caution Related Service Mode DK1-FCK



1 Detail



Use Case Adj/Set/Operate Method Caution Display/Adj/Set Range DK1-INT1



1 Detail



Use Case Adj/Set/Operate Method Caution Display/Adj/Set Range Required Time DK1-SPAD



1 Detail



Use Case Adj/Set/Operate Method Caution Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value Related Service Mode



Reg Multi-purpose Tray A6R stdrd width To register the standard value of A6R paper width (105 mm) on the Multi-purpose Tray. Make a fine adjustment by COPIER> ADJUST> CST-ADJ> MF-A6R. 1) Set A6R paper on the Multi-purpose Tray, and set the guide so that it fits the paper width. 2) Select the item, and then press OK key. The value is registered after automatic adjustment. After execution, check the registered value by COPIER> ADJUST> CST-ADJ> MF-A6R, and write it down on the service label. COPIER> ADJUST> CST-ADJ> MF-A6R Reg Multi-purpose Tray A4 standard width To register the standard value of A4 paper width (297 mm) on the Multi-purpose Tray. Make a fine adjustment by COPIER> ADJUST> CST-ADJ> MF-A4. 1) Set A4 paper on the Multi-purpose Tray, and set the guide so that it fits the paper width. 2) Select the item, and then press OK key. The value is registered after automatic adjustment. After execution, check the registered value by COPIER> ADJUST> CST-ADJ> MF-A4, and write it down on the service label. COPIER> ADJUST> CST-ADJ> MF-A4 Checking of Deck individual delivery To check whether individual delivery of POD Deck Lite that is isolated from the host machine can be performed. If it operates normally, only a sheet of paper is delivered. When identifying the cause (pickup failure, skew feed, etc.) 1) Isolate the POD Deck Lite from the host machine. 2) Select the item, and then press OK key. Isolate the POD Deck Lite before execution. During operation: ACTIVE, When operation finished normally: OK! Initialization at Deck parts replacement To execute initialization of POD Deck Lite at parts replacement. By executing this item, the lifter moves up from the lower limit position and stops when the Paper Surface Sensor detects paper top face. The travel distance is reflected to the paper level detection control. When replacing the Pickup Unit/PCB/compartment Select the item, and then press OK key. Execute this item while there is no paper in a deck and the lifter is in stopped state. During operation: ACTIVE, When operation finished normally: OK! 30 sec Setting of Deck Lifter stop position To set stop position of the lifter when opening the compartment of the POD Deck Lite/Paper Deck Unit. When 0 is set, the lifter moves down to the lower limit position when the compartment is opened. When 1 is set, the lifer moves up to the pickup position and then the compartment opens. The height of the Pre-separation Plate can be adjusted. Even 1 is set, the value is returned to 0 when the compartment is opened. When adjusting pre-separation position after replacing the Pickup Unit/compartment Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. Set 0 for DK1-PKLV before execution. 0 to 1 0: Stop at lower limit position (normal), 1: Stop at pickup position 0 COPIER> ADJUST> FEED-ADJ> DK1-PKLV



1091



8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > FUNCTION (Operation / inspection mode) > CST PDK-A4



1 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method



Caution Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value Related Service Mode PDK-A5R



1 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method



Caution Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value Related Service Mode DK1-LIFT



1 Detail



Use Case Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range Required Time



Rgst POD Deck Lite A4 standard width To register the standard value of A4 paper width (297 mm) on the POD Deck Lite. Make a fine adjustment by COPIER> ADJUST> CST-ADJ> PDK-A4. - When replacing the DC Controller PCB/clearing RAM data - When replacing the Paper Width Sensor PCB or registering a new value 1) Set A4 paper on the POD Deck Lite, and set the guide so that it fits the paper width. 2) Select the item, and then press OK key. The value is registered after automatic adjustment. After execution, check the registered value by COPIER> ADJUST> CST-ADJ> PDK-A4, and write it down on the service label. 0 to 1023 0 COPIER> ADJUST> CST-ADJ> PDK-A4 Rgst POD Deck Lite A5R standard width To register the standard value of A5R paper width (148.5 mm) on the POD Deck Lite. Make a fine adjustment by COPIER> ADJUST> CST-ADJ> PDK-A5R. - When replacing the DC Controller PCB/clearing RAM data - When replacing the Paper Width Sensor PCB or registering a new value 1) Set A5R paper on the POD Deck Lite, and set the guide so that it fits the paper width. 2) Select the item, and then press OK key. The value is registered after automatic adjustment. After execution, check the registered value by COPIER> ADJUST> CST-ADJ> PDK-A5R, and write it down on the service label. 0 to 1023 0 COPIER> ADJUST> CST-ADJ> PDK-A5R Drive of Deck Lifter Motor To drive the Lifter Motor of the POD Deck Lite/Paper Deck Unit. When descent timeout alarm (04-1537) occurs, the lifter wire may be wound in the opposite direction. The Lifter Motor is driven for approximately 5 seconds to wind the wire correctly. At recovery from descent timeout alarm 1) Close the compartment. 2) Select the item, and then press OK key. During operation: ACTIVE, When operation finished normally: OK! 5 sec



■ CLEANING COPIER (Service mode for printer) > FUNCTION (Operation / inspection mode) > CLEANING TBLT-CLN



1 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range



ETB cleaning To execute three idle rotations of the ETB and clean the ETB. Disengage the Photosensitive Drum and Transfer Roller from the ETB. When ETB cleaning failure/stain on the back of paper occurs Select the item, and then press OK key. During operation: ACTIVE, When operation finished normally: OK!



1092



8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > FUNCTION (Operation / inspection mode) > CLEANING WIRE-CLN



1 Detail



Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range WIRE-EX



1



Cleaning of all Charging Wires To clean the Charging Wires of Primary Charging Assembly and Pre-transfer Charging Assembly simultaneously (5-reciprocation). Polish new Charging Wires to remove foreign matters or protrusions. - When replacing the Primary Charging Assembly/Pre-transfer Charging Assembly - When replacing the Charging Wire - When vertical lines occur on an image Select the item, and then press OK key. During operation: ACTIVE, When operation finished normally: OK! Check cleaning operation of all Chg Wir



Detail



To clean the Charging Wires of Primary Charging Assembly and Pre-transfer Charging Assembly simultaneously (1-reciprocation). Check the reciprocation operation of the Wire Cleaner.



Use Case



When checking operation of the Primary Charging Wire Cleaning Motor after removing and then installing the Primary Charging Assembly at working around the Process area



Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range Required Time



Select the item, and then press OK key. During operation: ACTIVE, When operation finished normally: OK! 30 sec



■ FIXING COPIER (Service mode for printer) > FUNCTION (Operation / inspection mode) > FIXING NIP-CHK



1 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method



Related Service Mode



Check of fixing nip width To check whether the fixing nip width is appropriate by printing. If it is not appropriate, a fixing failure may occur. - When replacing the fixing-related parts (Fixing Roller, Pressure Roller) - When a fixing failure occurs 1) Print approx. 20 sheets of A4 size paper. 2) Set A4 size plain paper/recycled paper on the Multi-purpose Tray. 3) Select the item, and then press OK key. A sheet is stopped once in a state held by the Fixing Nip area, and is delivered approx. 20 seconds later. 4) Measure the nip width of delivered sheet. If the nip widths are as follow it is judged as normal: 7.0 to 8.0 mm at the center, and difference between front and rear is within 0.5mm. If there is an error, execute step 5. 5) Check the Fixing Roller, Pressure Roller, and Fixing Lower Unit, and replace damaged part. COPIER> TEST> PG> TYPE



■ PANEL COPIER (Service mode for printer) > FUNCTION (Operation / inspection mode) > PANEL LCD-CHK



1 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method



Check of LCD Panel dot missing To check whether there is a missing dot on the LCD Panel of the Control Panel. When replacing the LCD Panel 1) Select the item, and then press OK key. 2) Check that the LCD Panel lights up in the order of white, black, red, green and blue. 3) Press STOP key to terminate checking.



1093



8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > FUNCTION (Operation / inspection mode) > PANEL LED-CHK



1 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method



Related Service Mode LED-OFF



1 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method Related Service Mode KEY-CHK



1 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method



TOUCHCHK



1 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method



Check of Control Panel LED To check whether the LED on the Control Panel lights up. When replacing the LCD Panel 1) Select the item, and then press OK key. 2) Check that the LED lights up in the order. 3) Use LED-OFF to terminate checking. COPIER> FUNCTION> PANEL> LED-OFF End check of Control Panel LED To terminate the check of LED on the Control Panel. During execution of LED-CHK Select the item, and then press OK key. COPIER> FUNCTION> PANEL> LED-CHK Check of key entry To check the key input on the Control Panel. When replacing the LCD Panel 1) Select the item and press the key on the Control Panel. 2) Check that the input value is displayed. 3) Cancel the selection to terminate checking. Adj of coordinate pstn of Touch Panel To adjust the coordinate position on the Touch Panel of the Control Panel. When replacing the LCD Panel 1) Select the item, and then press OK key. 2) Press the nine "+" keys in sequence.



■ PART-CHK COPIER (Service mode for printer) > FUNCTION (Operation / inspection mode) > PART-CHK CL



1 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range



Default Value Related Service Mode CL-ON



1 Detail



Use Case Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range Required Time Related Service Mode



Specification of operation Clutch To specify the Clutch to operate. When replacing the Clutch/checking the operation Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 1 to 6 1: Developing Clutch (CL1) 2: Magnet Roller Clutch (CL5) 3 to 6: Not used 0 COPIER> FUNCTION> PART-CHK> CL-ON Operation check of Clutch To start operation check of the Clutch specified by CL. The operation stops after "ON for 0.5 sec" => "OFF for 10 sec" => "ON for 0.5 sec" => "OFF for 10 sec" => "ON for 0.5 sec". When replacing the Clutch/checking the operation Select the item, and then press OK key. During operation: ACTIVE, When operation finished normally: OK! 22 sec COPIER> FUNCTION> PART-CHK> CL



1094



8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > FUNCTION (Operation / inspection mode) > PART-CHK MTR



1 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range



Default Value Related Service Mode MTR-ON



1 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range Required Time Related Service Mode SL



1 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range



Default Value Related Service Mode



Specification of operation Motor To specify the Motor to operate. When replacing the Motor/checking the operation Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 1 to 17 1: Not used 2: Toner Feed Motor (M28) 3: Delivery Motor (M13) 4: Reverse Motor (M14) 5: Side Registration Motor (M16) 6: Duplex Feed Right Motor (M18) 7: Duplex Feed Left Motor (M19) 8: Vertical Path Upper Motor (M26) 9: Vertical Path Lower Motor (M27) 10: Vertical Path Middle Motor (M31) 11: Duplex Feed Merging Motor (M32) 12: Multi-purpose Tray Registration Front Motor (M33) 13: Registration Motor (M34) 14: ETB Motor (M43) 15: (POD Deck Lite/Paper Deck Unit) Deck Pickup Motor (M1) 16: (POD Deck Lite/Paper Deck Unit) Deck Pull-out Motor (M2) 17: Fixing Motor (M03) 1 COPIER> FUNCTION> PART-CHK> MTR-ON Operation check of Motor To start operation check of the Motor specified by MTR. The operation automatically stops after operation of 30 seconds. When replacing the Motor/checking the operation Select the item, and then press OK key. During operation: ACTIVE, When operation finished normally: OK! 30 sec COPIER> FUNCTION> PART-CHK> MTR Specification of operation Solenoid To specify the Solenoid to operate. When replacing the Solenoid/checking the operation Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 1 to 11 1: Multi Middle Plate Release Solenoid (SL2) 2: Cassette 3 Pickup Solenoid (SL3) 3: Cassette 4 Pickup Solenoid (SL4) 4: Reverse Upper Flapper Solenoid (SL5) 5: Right Deck Pickup Solenoid (SL6) 6: Left Deck Pickup Solenoid (SL7) 7: Left Deck Merging Solenoid (SL11) 8: Fixing Cleaning Web Drive Solenoid (SL9) 9: Patch Sensor Shutter Solenoid (SL10) 10: Reverse Detachment Solenoid (SL12) 11: (POD Deck Lite/Paper Deck Unit) Deck Pickup Release Solenoid 1 COPIER> FUNCTION> PART-CHK> SL-ON



1095



8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > FUNCTION (Operation / inspection mode) > PART-CHK SL-ON



1 Detail



Use Case Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range Required Time Related Service Mode FN3-CL



1 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method



Operation check of Solenoid To start operation check for the Solenoid specified by SL. The operation stops after "ON for 0.5 sec" => "OFF for 10 sec" => "ON for 0.5 sec" => "OFF for 10 sec" => "ON for 0.5 sec". When replacing the Solenoid/checking the operation Select the item, and then press OK key. During operation: ACTIVE, When operation finished normally: OK! 1 min COPIER> FUNCTION> PART-CHK> SL Specify of operation Clutch: Fin-V To specify the Clutch to operate. When replacing the Clutch/checking the operation Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.



Display/Adj/Set Range



1 to 3 1: Lower Stack Delivery Roller Clutch (CL102) 2: Escape Feed Clutch (CL101) 3: Paddle Clutch (CL103)



Related Service Mode



COPIER> FUNCTION> PART-CHK> FN3CL-ON



Supplement/Memo FN3CL-ON



1 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method Caution



Finisher-V Operation check of Clutch: Fin-V To start operation check of the clutch specified by FN3-CL. The operation automatically stops after the specified period of time (10 to 30 seconds). When replacing the Clutch/checking the operation Select the item, and then press OK key. - When the job starts during the operation of the clutch, the finisher sequence error jam occurs. - When the error avoidance jam occurs during the operation of the clutch, the jam becomes the error immediately.



Display/Adj/Set Range



During operation: ACTIVE, At normal termination: OK, At abnormal termination: NG



Related Service Mode



COPIER> FUNCTION> PART-CHK> FN3-CL



Supplement/Memo FN3-FAN



1 Detail



Finisher-V Specification of operation fan: Fin-V To specify the Fan to operate.



Use Case



When replacing the Fan/checking the operation



Adj/Set/Operate Method



Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.



Display/Adj/Set Range



1:FAN



Related Service Mode



COPIER> FUNCTION> PART-CHK> FN3FANON



Supplement/Memo FN3FANON



1 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range Related Service Mode Supplement/Memo



Finisher-V Operation check of fan: Fin-V To start operation check of the fan specified by FN3-FAN. After the fan operates for the specified period of time (10 to 30 seconds), it automatically stops. When replacing the Fan/checking the operation Select the item, and then press OK key. During operation: ACTIVE, At normal termination: OK, At abnormal termination: NG COPIER> FUNCTION> PART-CHK> FN3-FAN Finisher-V



1096



8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > FUNCTION (Operation / inspection mode) > PART-CHK FN3-MTR



1 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method Caution



Specification of oprtn Motor: Fin-V To specify the Motor to operate. When replacing the Motor/checking the operation Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. When setting the staple motor or the saddle stitcher motor, remove each staple cartridge. When the staple cartridge is installed, the motor is not driven.



Display/Adj/Set Range



1 to 30 1: Inlet Feed Motor (M101) 2: Pre-processing/Buffer Motor (M102) 3: Stack Delivery/Paddle Motor (M103) 4: Escape Feed Motor (M117) 5: Paper End Pushing Guide Motor (M112) 6: Stapler Shift Motor (M114) 7: Stack Tray Shift Motor (M105) 8: Swing Guide Motor (M110) 9: Front Alignment Motor (M107) 10: Rear Alignment Motor (M108) 11: Return Roller Lift Motor (M111) 12: Flapper Motor (M104) 13: Upper Escape Delivery Shift Motor (M119) 14: Paper End Assist Motor (M113) 15: Escape Flapper Motor (M118) 16: Lower Escape Delivery Shift Motor (M106) 17: Tray Auxiliary Guide Motor (M109) 18: Not used 19: Staple Motor (M115) 20: Staple-free Binding Motor (M116) 21: Saddle Feed/Paddle Motor (M201) 22: Saddle Delivery Motor (M207) 23: Saddle Switching Lever Motor (M202) 24: Saddle Stitcher Motor (M208) 25: Saddle Paper End Stopper Motor (M206) 26: Saddle Gripper Motor (M205) 27: Saddle Alignment Motor (M203) 28: Saddle Paper Pushing Plate/ Folding Motor (M204) 29: Punch Motor (M301) 30: Punch Shift Motor (M302)



Related Service Mode



COPIER> FUNCTION> PART-CHK> FN3MTRON



Supplement/Memo FN3MTRON



1 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method Caution



Finisher-V Operation check of motor: Fin-V To start operation check of the motor specified by FN3-MTR. After the motor operates for the specified period of time (10 to 30 seconds), it automatically stops. When replacing the Motor/checking the operation Select the item, and then press OK key. - When the job starts during the operation of the motor, the finisher sequence error jam occurs. - When the error avoidance jam occurs during the operation of the motor, the jam becomes the error immediately.



Display/Adj/Set Range



During operation: ACTIVE, At normal termination: OK, At abnormal termination: NG



Related Service Mode



COPIER> FUNCTION> PART-CHK> FN3-MTR



Supplement/Memo



Finisher-V



1097



8. Service Mode



■ CLEAR COPIER (Service mode for printer) > FUNCTION (Operation / inspection mode) > CLEAR ERR



1 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method DC-CON



1 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method Caution



Related Service Mode R-CON



1 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method Caution



Related Service Mode JAM-HIST



1 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method Related Service Mode ERR-HIST



1 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method Related Service Mode PWD-CLR



1 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method ADRS-BK



1 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method Caution



Clear of error code To clear the specific error code. At error occurrence 1) Select the item, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. RAM clear of DC Controller PCB To clear the RAM data of the DC Controller PCB. Not clear the counter. When clearing RAM data of the DC Controller PCB 1) Select the item, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. - Output the service mode setting values by P-PRINT before execution. After execution, enter necessary setting values. - The RAM data is cleared After the main power switch is turned OFF/ON. COPIER> FUNCTION> MISC-P> P-PRINT RAM clear of Reader Controller PCB To clear the RAM data of the Reader Controller PCB. When clearing RAM data of the Reader Controller PCB 1) Select the item, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. - Output the service mode setting values by P-PRINT before execution. After execution, enter necessary setting values. - The RAM data is cleared after the main power switch is turned OFF/ON. COPIER> FUNCTION> MISC-P> P-PRINT Clear of jam history To clear the jam history. When clearing the jam history Select the item, and then press OK key. COPIER> DISPLAY> JAM Clear of error code history To clear the error code history. When clearing the error code history Select the item, and then press OK key. COPIER> DISPLAY> ERR Clear of system administrator password * Operation on this item is restricted by the setting of [Restrict Service Representation Access]. To clear the password of the system administrator set in [Settings/Registration]. When clearing the password of the system administrator Select the item, and then press OK key. Clear of address book *Operation on this item is restricted by the setting of [Restrict Service Representation Access]. To clear the address book data. When clearing the address book data 1) Select the item, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. The address book data is cleared after the main power switch is turned OFF/ON.



1098



8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > FUNCTION (Operation / inspection mode) > CLEAR CNT-MCON



1 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method Related Service Mode Supplement/Memo CNT-DCON



1 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method MMI



1 Detail



Use Case Adj/Set/Operate Method Caution



Supplement/Memo MN-CON



1 Detail



Use Case Adj/Set/Operate Method



Caution



Related Service Mode CARD



1 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method Caution



Clear of Main Controller service counter To clear the service counter counted by the Main Controller PCB. When clearing the service counter counted by the Main Controller PCB Select the item, and then press OK key. COPIER> COUNTER See COUNTER for the target counter. Clear of DC Controller service counter To clear the service counter counted by the DC Controller PCB. When clearing the service counter counted by the DC Controller PCB Select the item, and then press OK key. Clear Settings/Registration setting VL *Operation on this item is restricted by the setting of [Restrict Service Representation Access]. To clear the Settings/Registration setting values. - Preferences (excluding values for Paper Type Management Settings) - Adjustment/Maintenance - Function Settings - Set Destination (excluding Address Lists) - Management Settings (excluding Department ID Management) When clearing various setting values of [Settings/Registration] 1) Select the item, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. - The setting value is cleared after the main power switch is turned OFF/ON. - If this item is executed while a login application other than User Authentication is running, it switched to User Authentication after reboot. Set the login application using SMS as needed. SMS (Service Management Service): An application for management which can be used on remote UI. Deletion of setting values *Operation on this item is restricted by the setting of [Restrict Service Representation Access]. To delete the setting values of address lists, forwarding settings, Settings/Registration and service mode. For details, refer to "Backup Data List" in the Service Manual. When initializing the setting values 1) Select the item, and then press OK key. The machine is automatically rebooted. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. - Output the service mode setting values by P-PRINT before execution. After execution, enter necessary setting value. - RAM data is cleared after the main power switch is turned OFF/ON. COPIER> FUNCTION> MISC-P> P-PRINT Clear of card ID-related data *Operation on this item is restricted by the setting of [Restrict Service Representation Access]. To clear the data related to the card ID (department). When clearing the data related to the card ID 1) Select the item, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. The value is cleared after the main power switch is turned OFF/ON.



1099



8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > FUNCTION (Operation / inspection mode) > CLEAR ALARM



1



Clear of alarm log



Detail



To clear alarm log.



Use Case Adj/Set/Operate Method Caution Related Service Mode CA-KEY



2 Detail



Use Case Adj/Set/Operate Method



Caution



Display/Adj/Set Range Supplement/Memo



ERDS-DAT



1 Detail



Use Case Adj/Set/Operate Method



When clearing alarm log 1) Select the item, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. The alarm log is cleared after the main power switch is turned OFF/ON. COPIER> DISPLAY> ALARM-2 Deletion of CA certificate and key pair *Operation on this item is restricted by the setting of [Restrict Service Representation Access]. To simultaneously delete the CA certificate and key pair which are additionally registered by the user. When a service person replaces/discards the device 1) Select the item, and then press OK key. 2) Check that OK is displayed. 3) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. - Unless this item is executed at the time of replacement/discard of the device, the CA certificate and key pair which are additionally registered by the user remain in the HDD, which is a problem in terms of security. - Do not execute this item carelessly because the CA certificate and key pair which are additionally registered are deleted when it is executed. If they are deleted mistakenly, they need to be again registered by the user. If no CA certificate and key pair are additionally registered, the machine condition becomes the same as the one at the time of factory shipment. - When NG is displayed in 2), there is a possibility that deletion was not executed. In this case, surely execute the deletion by initializing the HDD, etc. At normal termination: OK!, At abnormal termination: NG! - The CA certificate is used in the MEAP application with E-RDS and SSL client connection, and the key pair is used in the SSL function of IPP, RUI and MEAP. - When the main power switch is turned OFF/ON, the CA certificate and key pair which were registered at the time of factory shipment are decompressed from the archive , and become available in the E-RDS/SSL function. Initialization of E-RDS SRAM data To initialize the "internal setting values" of the Embedded-RDS stored in the SRAM. "Internal setting values" are ON/OFF of E-RDS, server's port number, server's SOAP URL, and communication schedule with the server (how often the data is acquired), etc. The value set by COPIER> FUNCTION> INSTALL> E-RDS, RGW-PORT, RGW-ADR, COM-LOG is cleared. When clear the SRAM of the "internal setting values". Select the item, and then press OK key.



Display/Adj/Set Range



At normal termination: OK!, At abnormal termination: NG!



Related Service Mode



COPIER> FUNCTION> INSTALL> E-RDS, RGW-PORT, RGW-ADR, COM-LOG



USBM-CLR



1 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method JV-CACHE



1 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method



Initialize USB MEAP priority rgst info To initialize the registered ID data retained in the OS field by calling the API provided by the OS. When a failure occurs in USB MEAP priority registration Select the item, and then press OK key. Cache clear of JAVA application *Operation on this item is restricted by the setting of [Restrict Service Representation Access]. To clear the cache information used by JAVA application. When initializing the JAVA application Select the item, and then press OK key.



1100



8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > FUNCTION (Operation / inspection mode) > CLEAR TR-BLT



1 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method Related Service Mode GRD-CRNT



1 Detail



Use Case Adj/Set/Operate Method LANG-CLR



2 Detail



Use Case



Clearing Transfer Belt parts counter To clear ETB parts counter when replacing to a new Transfer Belt (ETB). When replacing to a new ETB Select the item, and then press OK key. COPIER> COUNTER> DRBL-1> TR-BLT Init of Primary Charging Wire current VL To initialize the current value of the Primary Charging Wire by initializing the voltage value of the grid wire. The current value of the Primary Charging Wire is linked with the usage status; thus, execute initialization at the time of replacement. When replacing the Primary Charging Wire Select the item, and then press OK key. Uninstallation of language files To uninstall the language files other than Japanese and English files installed in HDD. When installing a new language file while the maximum number of language files (11 files) have been already installed, an existing language file needs to be uninstalled. When deleting/switching language files



Adj/Set/Operate Method



1) Select the item, and then press OK key. 2) Download the firmware in which the necessary language files are included using SST or a USB flash drive.



Caution



A language file is not uninstalled unless the downloaded language files are installed by SST or a USB flash drive after the execution of this item. If installation is not executed, uninstallation will be canceled. (Status of the machine remains the same as it was before execution.)



Supplement/Memo



- After the execution, language displayed on the screen becomes English. Switch the language as needed. - There are 9 language files (JEFIGSCKT) installed at the time of shipment.



FIN-MCON



1 Detail



Use Case Adj/Set/Operate Method Additional Functions Mode PLPW-CLR



2 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method



Clearing Finisher delvry destination set To clear the setting of Delivery Tray of the Finisher specified in [Settings/Registration] (Function Settings> Common> Paper Output Settings> Output Tray Settings). Since the delivery destination settings are stored in the DC Controller PCB in the machine, malfunction occurs when replacing the Finisher with another type of it without clearing the settings. If the type of Finishers is the same, there is no need to clear the settings. When the Finisher is replaced with a different model in the field 1) Select the item, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Function Settings> Common> Paper Output Settings> Output Tray Settings Clear security policy setting password *Operation on this item is restricted by the setting of [Restrict Service Representation Access]. To clear the password of the security administrator set in the security policy settings. When clearing the password of the security administrator Select the item, and then press OK key.



1101



8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > FUNCTION (Operation / inspection mode) > CLEAR JV-TYPE



1 Detail



Use Case Adj/Set/Operate Method



Specification of MEAP cache clear target *Operation on this item is restricted by the setting of [Restrict Service Representation Access]. To specify the MEAP cache area to be cleared. The target area is divided into the 4 parts: - A jar file of MEAP application bundled as standard - Data of the application mentioned above - A jar file of MEAP application installed additionally - Data of the application mentioned above When JV-CACHE is executed, the area specified with this item is cleared. For details, refer to the Service Manual. When analyzing the cause of a problem due to MEAP application Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.



Display/Adj/Set Range



0 to 4 0: Entire MEAP cache area 1: A jar file of MEAP application bundled as standard 2: A jar file and data of MEAP application bundled as standard 3: Data of MEAP application which has been installed additionally 4: A jar file and data of MEAP application which has been installed additionally



Related Service Mode



COPIER> FUNCTION> CLEAR> JV-CACHE



Supplement/Memo



DK-RCV



1 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method



MEAP applications bundled as standard: system application, built-in login application MEAP applications installed additionally: non-Canon-made login application, general application, etc. Clearing of deck alarm To clear the descent timeout alarm (04-1537) occurred in the POD Deck Lite/Paper Deck Unit. At recovery from descent timeout alarm 1) Select the item, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.



CUSTOM2



2



[For customization]



CNT-RCON



1



Clear of RCON service counter



Detail Use Case Adj/Set/Operate Method



To clear the service counter counted by the RCON management software. When clearing the service counter counted by the RCON Select the item, and then press OK key.



KEY-HCD



2



For R&D



TPM-DA



2



For R&D



■ MISC-R COPIER (Service mode for printer) > FUNCTION (Operation / inspection mode) > MISC-R SCANLAMP



1 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range SCANLMP2



1 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range



Lighting check of Scanner Unit (frt) LED To light up the Scanning Lamp for 3 seconds under the White Plate and the Copyboard Glass respectively. When replacing the LED of the Scanner Unit Select the item, and then press OK key. During operation: ACTIVE, When operation finished normally: OK! Lighting check of Scanner Unit (bck) LED To light up the LED of the Scanner Unit (for back side) for 3 sec. Check whether there is a missing block or no lighting in LED. When replacing the LED of the Scanner Unit Select the item, and then press OK key. During operation: ACTIVE, When operation finished normally: OK!



1102



8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > FUNCTION (Operation / inspection mode) > MISC-R RD-SHPOS



2 Detail



Use Case Adj/Set/Operate Method Caution Display/Adj/Set Range



Moving to Reader Scanner Unit fix pstn To move the Reader Scanner Unit to the position where it is secured in when moving. When moving the Reader after installation, the Reader Scanner Unit may move and get damage. By moving the Scanner Unit to the specified position and securing it in place with a screw before moving, damage can be prevented. When moving the Reader after installation Select the item, and then press OK key. Be sure to move the Scanner Unit to the fixing position and secure it in place with a screw when moving the Reader after installation. Otherwise, the Scanner Unit may get damage. During operation: ACTIVE, When operation finished normally: OK!



■ MISC-P COPIER (Service mode for printer) > FUNCTION (Operation / inspection mode) > MISC-P P-PRINT



1 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method Caution



Output of service mode setting values To output the service mode setting values. Text data is saved in HDD as a file (P-PRINT-RPT.TXT). Before executing the CLEAR service mode, etc. Select the item, and then press OK key. Be sure to use A4/LTR size plain paper/recycled paper.



Display/Adj/Set Range



During operation: ACTIVE, When operation finished normally: OK!



Related Service Mode



COPIER> FUNCTION> MISC-P> RPT-FILE



HIST-PRT



1 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method Caution



Output of jam and error logs To output the jam log and error log. Text data is saved in HDD as a file (HIST-PRT-RPT.TXT). When outputting the jam/error log Select the item, and then press OK key. Be sure to use A4/LTR size plain paper/recycled paper.



Display/Adj/Set Range



During operation: ACTIVE, When operation finished normally: OK!



Related Service Mode



COPIER> FUNCTION> MISC-P> RPT-FILE



TRS-DATA



2 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method Additional Functions Mode USER-PRT



1 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method



Moving memory reception data to Inbox *Operation on this item is restricted by the setting of [Restrict Service Representation Access]. To move the data received in memory to Inbox. When moving the data received in memory to Inbox 1) Select the item, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Fax/I-Fax Inbox> Memory RX Inbox Settings/Registration menu list output To output Settings/Registration menu list. Text data is saved in HDD as a file (USER-PRT-RPT.TXT). When outputting Settings/Registration menu list. Select the item, and then press OK key.



Display/Adj/Set Range



During operation: ACTIVE, When operation finished normally: OK!



Related Service Mode



COPIER> FUNCTION> MISC-P> RPT-FILE



Supplement/Memo



It takes approximately 3 seconds before output starts.



1103



8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > FUNCTION (Operation / inspection mode) > MISC-P LBL-PRNT



1 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method Caution Required Time Supplement/Memo PRE-EXP



1 Detail



Use Case Adj/Set/Operate Method Caution Display/Adj/Set Range Required Time Supplement/Memo ENV-PRT



1 Detail



Use Case Adj/Set/Operate Method



Output of service label To print the service label. When printing the service label 1) Place A4/LTR paper in Right Deck. 2) Select the item, and then press OK key. Be sure to use A4/LTR size plain paper/recycled paper. 55 sec It takes approximately 15 seconds before printing starts. Light-up of Pre-exposure LED To light up the Cleaning Pre-exposure LED. Open the Front Cover, and check that the LEDs light up visually. It automatically stops after all light up. When checking that the Pre-exposure LEDs light up Select the item, and then press OK key. Drum memory may occur, so be sure not to execute this item frequently. During operation: ACTIVE, When operation finished normally: OK! 30 sec The required time is a rough standard, and it may take a shorter time. Outpt inside temp&hmdy/Fix Rol temp log To output data of the temperature and humidity inside the machine/surface temperature of the Fixing Roller as a log. Text data is saved in HDD as a file (ENV-PRT-RPT.TXT). When figuring out the past temperature inside the machine/fixing temperature information at problem analysis Select the item, and then press OK key.



Display/Adj/Set Range



During operation: ACTIVE, When operation finished normally: OK!



Related Service Mode



COPIER> FUNCTION> MISC-P> RPT-FILE



PJH-P-1



1 Detail



Use Case Adj/Set/Operate Method Caution



Outpt print job log detail info:100 jobs *Operation on this item is restricted by the setting of [Restrict Service Representation Access]. To output the print job logs of the latest 100 jobs with detailed information. In the case of less than 100 jobs, the logs of all print jobs are output. Text data is saved in HDD as a file (PJH-P-1-RPT.TXT). When outputting the print job logs with detailed information Select the item, and then press OK key. Be sure to use A4/LTR size plain paper/recycled paper.



Display/Adj/Set Range



During operation: ACTIVE, When operation finished normally: OK!



Related Service Mode



COPIER> FUNCTION> MISC-P> RPT-FILE



Supplement/Memo



Output the print job logs with detailed information which are not displayed/output in the job log screen under "System Monitor>Print>Log>Printer" and in the report of the print job log.



1104



8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > FUNCTION (Operation / inspection mode) > MISC-P PJH-P-2



1 Detail



Use Case Adj/Set/Operate Method Caution



Outpt print job log detail info:all jobs *Operation on this item is restricted by the setting of [Restrict Service Representation Access]. To output all print job logs stored in the machine with detailed information (for maximum 5000 jobs). The difference between PJH-P-1 and this item is only the number of jobs output. Text data is saved in HDD as a file (PJH-P-2-RPT.TXT). When printing the print job history with detailed information Select the item, and then press OK key. Be sure to use A4/LTR size plain paper/recycled paper.



Display/Adj/Set Range



During operation: ACTIVE, When operation finished normally: OK!



Related Service Mode



COPIER> FUNCTION> MISC-P> RPT-FILE



Supplement/Memo WB



2 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range Required Time Supplement/Memo BB



1 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range Required Time USBH-PRT



1 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method Caution



Output the print job logs with detailed information which are not displayed/output in the job log screen under "System Monitor>Print>Log>Printer" and in the report of the print job log. Reverse toner forcible eject: blank band To eject the reverse toner forcibly. After execution, it automatically stops. When operating in a high duty and low humidity environment for a long time (executed by administrator) Select the item, and then press OK key. During operation: ACTIVE, At normal termination: OK, At abnormal termination: NG 9 sec The required time is a rough standard, and it may take a shorter time. Toner forcible eject (black band) Forcibly discharge low-charge toner, and send it to the drum cleaner unit. The operation automatically stops after execution. When operating the machine in low-duty and high-humidity environment for a long period of time (implemented by the administrator) Select the item, and then press OK key. During operation: ACTIVE, At normal termination: OK, At abnormal termination: NG 60 sec Output of USB device information report To output information of the connected USB device in the form of a report. Text data is saved in HDD as a file (USBH-PRT-RPT.TXT). When outputting information of the USB device in the form of a report Select the item, and then press OK key. Be sure to use A4/LTR size plain paper/recycled paper.



Display/Adj/Set Range



During operation: ACTIVE, When operation finished normally: OK!



Related Service Mode



COPIER> FUNCTION> MISC-P> RPT-FILE



DV-RT



1 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method Caution



Idle rotation of Developing Assembly To execute idle rotation of the Developing Assembly. Duration can be set by COPIER> OPTION> IMG-DEV>DV-RT-LG. When small vertical lines occurs on an image Select the item, and then press OK key. If using frequently, deterioration of developer or toner scattering might occur.



Display/Adj/Set Range



During operation: ACTIVE, At normal termination: OK, At abnormal termination: NG



Related Service Mode



COPIER> OPTION> IMG-DEV> DV-RT-LG



1105



8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > FUNCTION (Operation / inspection mode) > MISC-P RPT-FILE



1 Detail



Use Case Adj/Set/Operate Method Supplement/Memo RPT2USB



1 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method Related Service Mode



Output of report print file To save various service reports in HDD as a file. The files can be obtained using PC to which SST has been installed or USB flash drive after starting the machine in download mode. When obtaining the service report as a file instead of printing the report out Select the item, and then press OK key. File size: Approx. 1 MB at a maximum Write serv rpt file to USB flash drive To store the report file of service mode saved in HDD by RPT-FILE to a USB flash drive. When storing the report file of service mode to a USB flash drive Select the item, and then press OK key. COPIER> FUNCTION> MISC-P> RPT-FILE



■ SENS-ADJ COPIER (Service mode for printer) > FUNCTION (Operation / inspection mode) > SENS-ADJ STCK-LMT



2 Detail



Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range



Adj of Shift Tray Full Sensor position To adjust position of the Shift Tray Full Sensor (front)/(rear). "ON" is displayed at detection of full, and "OFF" is displayed at other times. Select the item, and then press OK key. At detection of full: ON, At other times: OFF



■ SYSTEM COPIER (Service mode for printer) > FUNCTION (Operation / inspection mode) > SYSTEM DOWNLOAD



1 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method Caution Supplement/Memo



Shift to download mode To make the machine enter the download mode and wait for a command. Perform downloading by SST or a USB flash drive. At upgrade 1) Select the item, and then press OK key. 2) Perform downloading by SST or a USB flash drive. Do not turn OFF/ON the power during downloading. SST: Service Support Tool



1106



8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > FUNCTION (Operation / inspection mode) > SYSTEM CHK-TYPE



1 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range



Default Value Related Service Mode HD-CHECK



1 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method Caution Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value Related Service Mode HD-CLEAR



1 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method Caution Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value Related Service Mode



Spec HD-CLEAR/HD-CHECK exe partition No. To specify the partition number of the HDD to execute HD-CLEAR/HD-CHECK. When executing HD-CLEAR/HD-CHECK Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 0 to 65535 0: All partitions (only the areas where the operation can be executed) 1: PDL-related file storage area 2: Image data storage area 3: MEAP-related area 4: Not used 5 and 6: Image data storage area 7: General application temporary area (temporary file) 8: General application-related area 9: PDL spool data (temporary file) 10: SEND-related area 11: Update-related area 12: License-related area 13: System area 14: SWAP (temporary file/memory alternative area) 15 to 16: Not used 17: Debug log area 18: Advanced Box image data storage area 19: Print data storage area 20 to 65535: Not used * When 4, 12, 13, 15 or 16 is set, nothing is cleared even if HD-CLEAR is executed. * For 2, 5 and 6, HD-CLEAR/HD-CHECK is executed to all of the areas by selecting one of them. * By selecting 8, HD-CLEAR/HD-CHECK is also executed to 7, 9, 11 and 17. 0 COPIER> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> HD-CLEAR, HD-CHECK File system check of specified partition To execute system check of the partition specified by CHK-TYPE at the next startup. When E602/E614 error (file corruption, etc.) occurs Enter 1, and then press OK key. Be sure to execute this item after CHK-TYPE. 0 to 1 0: Not executed, 1: Executed at next startup 0 COPIER> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> CHK-TYPE Initialization of specified partition *Operation on this item is restricted by the setting of [Restrict Service Representation Access]. To initialize the partition specified by CHK-TYPE at next startup. When E602/E614 error (file corruption, etc.) occurs Enter 1, and then press OK key. Be sure to execute this item after CHK-TYPE. 0 to 1 0: Not executed, 1: Executed at next startup 0 COPIER> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> CHK-TYPE



1107



8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > FUNCTION (Operation / inspection mode) > SYSTEM DSRAMBUP



2 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method Caution



Related Service Mode DSRAMRES



2 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method Caution



Related Service Mode RSRAMBUP



2 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method Caution



Related Service Mode RSRAMRES



2 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method Caution



Related Service Mode R-REBOOT



1 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method FIXIP



1 Detail



Use Case Adj/Set/Operate Method Caution



Backup of DC Controller PCB SRAM To back up the setting data in SRAM of the DC Controller PCB. When replacing the DC Controller PCB for troubleshooting at the time of trouble occurrence Select the item, and then press OK key. During operation, the setting data changes by manual or automatic adjustment. When backup data which has been left for a long period of time is restored, it is overwritten with new setting data and the old data is deleted. COPIER> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMRES Restore of DC Controller PCB SRAM To restore the setting data which has been backed up in SRAM of the DC Controller PCB. When replacing the DC Controller PCB for troubleshooting at the time of trouble occurrence Select the item, and then press OK key. During operation, the setting data changes by manual or automatic adjustment. When backup data which has been left for a long period of time is restored, it is overwritten with new setting data and the old data is deleted. COPIER> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMBUP Backup of Reader Controller PCB SRAM To back up the setting data in SRAM of the Reader Controller PCB. When replacing the Reader Controller PCB for troubleshooting at the time of trouble occurrence Select the item, and then press OK key. During operation, the setting data changes by manual or automatic adjustment. When backup data which has been left for a long period of time is restored, it is overwritten with new setting data and the old data is deleted. COPIER> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> RSRAMRES Restore of Reader Controller PCB SRAM To restore the setting data which has been backed up in SRAM of the Reader Controller PCB. When replacing the Reader Controller PCB for troubleshooting at the time of trouble occurrence 1) Select the item, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. During operation, the setting data changes by manual or automatic adjustment. When backup data which has been left for a long period of time is restored, it is overwritten with new setting data and the old data is deleted. COPIER> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> RSRAMBUP Reboot of host machine (Remote) To reboot the host machine. When the reboot is carried out with the remote control by VNC Select the item, and then press OK key. Start of fixed IP mode IP address is set to "172.16.1.100". In an environment where wired LAN (main) and wireless LAN (sub) are used, the IP address of wired LAN becomes the fixed IP. During the fixed IP mode, "FIXIP" is displayed on the upper left of the screen. When preferring to use the network settings with the fixed IP address "172.16.1.100" Select the item, and then press OK key. - It is necessary to turn OFF/ON the power to recover from the fixed IP mode. - Whether to use RUI or not when the fixed IP mode is enabled follows the setting of "Management Settings> License/Other> Remote UI.



1108



8. Service Mode



■ 2D-SHADE COPIER (Service mode for printer) > FUNCTION (Operation / inspection mode) > 2D-SHADE M-LINE1



2 Detail



Adj/Set/Operate Method



2D shading horizontal scan 1 correction To set the correction value of the horizontal scanning direction 1 at 2D shading. 1) Enter the value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.



Display/Adj/Set Range



0 to 255



Related Service Mode



COPIER> OPTION> IMG-LSR> 2D-SHADE COPIER> FUNCTION> 2D-SHADE> M-LINE2



M-LINE2



2 Detail



Adj/Set/Operate Method



2D shading horizontal scan 2 correction To set the correction value of the horizontal scanning direction 2 at 2D shading. 1) Enter the value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.



Display/Adj/Set Range



0 to 255



Related Service Mode



COPIER> OPTION> IMG-LSR> 2D-SHADE COPIER> FUNCTION> 2D-SHADE> M-LINE1



Supplement/Memo S-LINE1



2 Detail



Adj/Set/Operate Method



The right column is not used. 2D shading vertical scan 1 correction To display the correction value of the vertical scanning direction 1 at 2D shading. N/A (Display only)



Display/Adj/Set Range



0 to 255



Related Service Mode



COPIER> OPTION> IMG-LSR> 2D-SHADE COPIER> FUNCTION> 2D-SHADE> S-LINE2 - LINE4



S-LINE2



2 Detail



Adj/Set/Operate Method



2D shading vertical scan 2 correction To display the correction value of the vertical scanning direction 2 at 2D shading. N/A (Display only)



Display/Adj/Set Range



0 to 255



Related Service Mode



COPIER> OPTION> IMG-LSR> 2D-SHADE COPIER> FUNCTION> 2D-SHADE> S-LINE1/LINE3/LINE4



S-LINE3



2 Detail



Adj/Set/Operate Method



2D shading vertical scan 3 correction To display the correction value of the vertical scanning direction 3 at 2D shading. N/A (Display only)



Display/Adj/Set Range



0 to 255



Related Service Mode



COPIER> OPTION> IMG-LSR> 2D-SHADE COPIER> FUNCTION> 2D-SHADE> S-LINE1/LINE2/LINE4



S-LINE4



2 Detail



Adj/Set/Operate Method



2D shading vertical scan 4 correction To display the correction value of the vertical scanning direction 4 at 2D shading. N/A (Display only)



Display/Adj/Set Range



0 to 255



Related Service Mode



COPIER> OPTION> IMG-LSR> 2D-SHADE COPIER> FUNCTION> 2D-SHADE> S-LINE1/LINE2/LINE3



SHD-P1



1 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method Related Service Mode



2D shading pattern 1 output To output pattern 1 for 2D shading. When checking 2D shading profile visually and entering manually Select the item, and then press OK key. COPIER> OPTION> IMG-LSR> 2D-SHADE COPIER> FUNCTION> 2D-SHADE> SHD-P2/P3



1109



8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > FUNCTION (Operation / inspection mode) > 2D-SHADE SHD-P2



1 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method Related Service Mode SHD-P3



1 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method Related Service Mode 2D-READ



1 Detail



Use Case Adj/Set/Operate Method



2D shading pattern 2 output To output pattern 2 for 2D shading. When checking 2D shading profile visually and entering manually Select the item, and then press OK key. COPIER> OPTION> IMG-LSR> 2D-SHADE COPIER> FUNCTION> 2D-SHADE> SHD-P1/P3 2D shading pattern 3 output To output pattern 3 for 2D shading. When checking 2D shading profile visually and entering manually Select the item, and then press OK key. COPIER> OPTION> IMG-LSR> 2D-SHADE COPIER> FUNCTION> 2D-SHADE> SHD-P1/P2 Read 2D shading ROM To read 2D shading ROM data. To check ROM for 2D shading, compare the calculated checksum and checksum of ROM. When they are matched, the checksum and Drum Lot number are stored in the DC Controller. When they are not matched, it is judged as an alarm. After executing initialization of Drum at Drum replacement Select the item, and then press OK key.



Display/Adj/Set Range



During operation: ACTIVE, At normal termination: OK, At abnormal termination: NG



Related Service Mode



COPIER> DISPLAY> 2D-SHADE> 2D-STS COPIER> OPTION> IMG-LSR> 2D-SHADE



2D-SET



2 Detail



Use Case Adj/Set/Operate Method Caution



Display/Adj/Set Range



Default Value Related Service Mode



Btch set of low dens prev: frt/rear side To execute a series of settings/operations to improve low density at the front/rear side. Conventionally, measures against low density at the front/rear side due to individual difference of the Photosensitive Drum have been taken by combining the following service modes. COPIER> OPTION> IMG-LSR> 2D-SHADE COPIER> FUNCTION> DPC> DPC COPIER> FUNCTION> 2D-SHADE> M-LINE1/2 With this item, these service modes are set/executed collectively so the results equivalent to those obtained by executing them manually can be obtained easily. Set 1 for low density at the front side, 2 for low density at the rear side, and 3 for low density at both sides. In each case, density is increased for a certain level. If further adjustment is required, it is necessary to make adjustment with conventional procedure. When 0 is set, all the settings of service modes are returned to the default. When low density at the front/rear side occurs at an early stage 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. - The setting is reflected after turning OFF/ON the power. - If adjustment is made with M-LINE1/2 after setting this item to 1, 2 or 3, the value 0 is displayed to indicate the setting of this item is changed. However, it does not mean that the setting is returned to the default. When returning the setting to the default, enter 0. - Make the setting again after replacing the Photosensitive Drum because the sensitivity is different between the old and new drums. 0 to 3 0: Set 2D shading to OFF, and return all of the setting values to the default values 1: Increase the density at the front side only 2: Increase the density at the rear side only 3: Increase the density on both sides 0 COPIER> OPTION> IMG-LSR> 2D-SHADE COPIER> FUNCTION> DPC> DPC COPIER> FUNCTION> 2D-SHADE> M-LINE1/LINE2



1110



8. Service Mode



■ DBG-LOG COPIER (Service mode for printer) > FUNCTION (Operation / inspection mode) > DBG-LOG LOG2USB



2 Detail



Use Case Adj/Set/Operate Method Caution



Storage of debug log to USB memory To store a set of debug logs to the USB flash drive at the error occurrence. A type of log to be collected is set in LOG-TRIG. If there is a debug log which has been automatically saved, it is archived at this time. Required time differs according to the device conditions and volume of log data. When analyzing the cause of a problem 1) Install the USB flash drive. 2) Select the item, and then press OK key. - Wait until the machine recognizes the USB memory (approx. 10 sec.). - During the data transfer ("ACTIVE" display), do not turn OFF the power/remove the USB memory/ use the screen for operations.



Display/Adj/Set Range



During operation: ACTIVE, At normal termination: OK, At abnormal termination: NG



Related Service Mode



COPIER> FUNCTION> DBG-LOG> LOG-TRIG



LOG2SRVR



2



For R&D



LOG-TRIG



2



Set of debug log storage condition



Detail



Use Case Adj/Set/Operate Method



To set the conditions (timing, types, etc.) to automatically store the debug logs (stored as an archive file). By reading the operation setting file of the setting value from the Main Controller, the conditions written in the file are set. When setting a new condition is necessary, read the operation setting file provided by R&D from the USB memory. - When changing the conditions of debug log to automatically store - When setting a new condition Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.



Display/Adj/Set Range



0 to 99999



Related Service Mode



COPIER> FUNCTION> DBG-LOG> LOG2USB, LOG2SRVR



HIT-STS



2 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method



Display of debug log state To display whether archive file of the debug log which is matched with the conditions set in LOGTRIG exists or not. When checking the debug log automatically saved N/A (Display only)



Display/Adj/Set Range



0 to 1 0: No log is available, 1: Log is available



Related Service Mode



COPIER> FUNCTION> DBG-LOG> LOG-TRIG



SYSLOG



2



For R&D



DEFAULT



2



Reset of debug log setting



Detail Use Case Adj/Set/Operate Method LOG-DEL



2 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method HIT-STS2



2



To clear all debug log settings and return to the state before debug log collection operation. - When returning the device in which analyzing the cause of a problem was completed - When resetting the debug log settings Select the item, and then press OK key. Clearing of debug logs To delete the debug log file. The debug log setting is not reset. When clearing the debug log Select the item, and then press OK key. For R&D



1111



8. Service Mode



OPTION (Specification setting mode) ■ FNC-SW COPIER (Service mode for printer) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > FNC-SW PO-CNT



1 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method Caution Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value PO-CNTMD



2 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range



Default Value MODEL-SZ



1 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range



Default Value



ON/OFF of potential control function To set ON/OFF of potential control function. When replacing the Potential Sensor 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Be sure to set the value back to 1 (ON) after servicing. 0 to 1 0: OFF, 1: ON 1 Set potential control execution timing To set the combination of timing to execute the potential control. When productivity is decreased at execution of potential control Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 0 to 2 0: - At warm-up rotation performed first time for the day in an HH environment - At last rotation in the case that a job right after startup first time for the day takes 10 minutes or longer - At last rotation after 1500 sheets since the last potential control - At last rotation of the first job after 90 minutes since the last potential control - At warm-up rotation of the fist job after 10 minutes since the startup first time for the day (30 seconds) 1: - At warm-up rotation performed first time for the day in an HH environment - At last rotation in the case that a job right after startup first time for the day takes 10 minutes or longer - At last rotation after 1500 sheets since the last potential control - At warm-up rotation of the fist job after 10 minutes since the startup first time for the day (30 seconds) 2: - At warm-up rotation performed first time for the day in an HH environment - At last rotation after 1500 sheets since the last potential control 0 Fixed magnifictn & DADF orgnl dtct size To set the fixed magnification ratio display and the original detection size with DADF. It is set automatically at the time of installation of the Reader according to the location. Upon user's request 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 0 to 3 0: AB configuration (6R5E) for Japan, 1: Inch configuration (5R4E) for North/Middle/South America, 2: A configuration (3R3E) for Europe, 3: AB/Inch configuration (6R5E) for Asia, Oceania, South America It differs according to the location.



1112



8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > FNC-SW SCANSLCT



2 Detail



Use Case



ON/OFF of scan area calculate function To set ON/OFF of the function to calculate scanning area from the specified paper size. When the paper size is larger than the original size, selecting ON reduces productivity because the scanning area gets larger. When matching the scanning area with the paper size



Adj/Set/Operate Method



1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.



Display/Adj/Set Range



0 to 1 0: OFF (calculated from the detected original size) 1: ON (calculated from the specified paper size)



Default Value SENS-CNF



2 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value CONFIG



1 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method



Display/Adj/Set Range



Default Value Related Service Mode W/SCNR



1 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value



0 Setting of original detection size To set original detection size according to AB configuration/Inch configuration. Set 0 for AB configuration machine, and set 1 for Inch configuration machine. When replacing the Reader Controller PCB/clearing RAM data 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 0 to 1 0: AB configuration, 1: Inch configuration 0 Set country/area/lang/location/ppr size To set the country/region, language, location, paper size configuration for multiple system software in HDD. Upon user's request 1) Select the setting item. 2) Switch with +/- key, and then press OK key. 3) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. XX YY.ZZ.AA XX: Country/region JP: Japan, US: USA, GB: Great Britain, FR: France, DE: Germany, IT: Italy, AU: Australia, SG: Singapore, NL: Netherlands, KR: Korea, CN: China, TW: Taiwan, ES: Spain, SE: Sweden, PT: Portugal, NO: Norway, DK: Denmark, FI: Finland, PL: Poland, HU: Hungary, CZ: Czech Republic, SI: Slovenia, GR: Greece, EE: Estonia, RU: Russia, SK: Slovakia, RO: Romania, HR: Croatia, BG: Bulgaria, TR: Turkey, TH: Thailand, VN: Vietnam, AR: Argentina, IN: India YY: Language (Fixed; e.g. ja: Japanese) ZZ: Location (Fixed; e.g. 00: CANON) AA: Paper size configuration (00: AB configuration, 01: Inch configuration, 02: A configuration, 03: Inch/AB configuration) It differs according to the location. COPIER> OPTION> FNC-SW> MODEL-SZ Setting of Reader Unit installation To set installation of the Reader Unit. When the Reader Unit is detected at startup of the machine, "1: Installed" is set automatically. When installing/removing the Reader Unit 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 0 to 1 0: Not installed, 1: Installed 0 (Printer model)/1 (Copier model)



1113



8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > FNC-SW ORG-LGL



2 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range



Default Value ORG-LTR



2 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value ORG-B5



2 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value MODELSZ2



2 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method Caution Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value SVMD-ENT



2 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range



Default Value



Special ppr size set at stream read: LGL To set the size of special paper (LGL configuration) that cannot be recognized at stream reading. - Upon user's request - When picking up special paper size original from DADF 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 0 to 12 0: LEGAL-R, 1: FOOLSCAP-R/FOLIO-R, 2: OFICIO-R, 3: Not used, 4: Australian FOOLSCAP-R, 5: Ecuador OFICIO-R, 6: Bolivia OFICIO-R, 7: Argentine OFICIO-R, 8: Not used, 9: Government LEGAL-R, 10: Mexico OFICIO-R, 11: F4A, 12: India LEGAL-R 0 Special ppr size set at stream read: LTR To set the size of special paper (LTR configuration) that cannot be recognized at stream reading. - Upon user's request - When picking up special paper size original from DADF 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 0 to 3 0: LETTER, 1: EXECUTIVE, 2: Argentine LETTER, 3: Government LETTER 0 Special ppr size set at stream read: B5 To set the size of special paper (B5) that cannot be recognized at stream reading. - Upon user's request - When picking up special paper size original from DADF 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 0 to 1 0: B5, 1: Korean government office paper 0 Ppr size dtct global support in bookmode To set whether to enable global support of original size detection at Copyboard reading. Upon user's request (original consists of mixed media (AB/Inch configuration)) 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. The Document Size Sensor (Photo Sensor) is additionally required to correctly detect the document size when the original consists of mixed media (AB/Inch configuration). 0 to 1 0: Detected with detection size according to location, 1: Detected with AB/Inch mixed media. 0 Setting of entry method to service mode To set the way to get in service mode to prevent information leak. As needed 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 0 to 1 0: Factory default 1: [Settings/Registration] - Pressing [4] and [9] at the same time - [Settings/Registration] 0



1114



8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > FNC-SW KSIZE-SW



2 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value Related Service Mode Supplement/Memo PDF-RDCT



2 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value SJB-UNW



2 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value CARD-RNG



2 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value SJOB-CL



1 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method Caution Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value Supplement/Memo



Setting of K-size paper support To set detection/display of K-size paper (for China). When MODEL-SZ is 0, this setting is enabled. When using K size paper 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 0 to 1 0: Not supported, 1: Supported It differs according to the location. COPIER> OPTION> FNC-SW> MODEL-SZ 8K paper: 270 x 390 mm, 16K paper: 270 x 195 mm PDF reduction set at forwarding To set whether to reduce the image for transmission when converting the image received by I-Fax into PDF for e-mail/file transmission. Upon user's request 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 0 to 1 0: Following the current setting, 1: Image reduction 0 Reserve upper limit of secured print job *Operation on this item is restricted by the setting of [Restrict Service Representation Access]. To set the upper limit for the number of reserved jobs in secured print job. Upon user's request 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 0 to 2 0: 50 jobs, 1: 90 jobs, 2: No limit 1 Card number setting (department number) To set the number of cards (departments) that can be used with the Card Reader. When setting the number of cards (departments) 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 1 to 1000 1000 Set of scan job canceling by logout *Operation on this item is restricted by the setting of [Restrict Service Representation Access]. To set whether to cancel the scan job in operation by logout of the user. Upon user's request 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. The job with scanning completed cannot be canceled. 0 to 2 0: Cancel only scan job in waiting state, 1: Cancel all scan jobs, 2: Not canceled 0 Scan job: A job after the scanning operation is completed.



1115



8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > FNC-SW MIBCOUNT



2 Detail



Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range



Default Value Related Service Mode CNTR-SW



1 Detail



Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value W/RAID



1 Detail



Use Case Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value PSWD-SW



1 Detail



Scope range set of Charge Counter MIB To set the range of counter information that can be obtained as MIB (Management Information Base). 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 0 to 2 0: All charge counters are obtained, 1: Only displayed counter* is obtained, 2: All charge counters are not obtained * : Counter specified by the following: COPIER> OPTION> USER> COUNTER 1 to 6 0 COPIER> OPTION> USER> COUNTER1 - COUNTER6 Init of parts counter replacement timing To return the estimated life of parts counter to the initial value. If either "00000000" or a value before the specification change is displayed in the estimated life value of the parts counter, set 0 after upgrading of the firmware. - When either "00000000" or a value before the specification change is displayed in the estimated life value of the parts counter - When changing the state back to the initial state after entering the estimated life value manually 1) Enter 0, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 0: Returned to the initial value 0 Set of HDD Mirroring Kit installation To set installation condition of HDD Mirroring Kit. Select "1: Installed" when installing the HDD Mirroring Kit. Select "0: Not installed" when removing the HDD Mirroring Kit. When installing/removing HDD Mirroring Kit 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 0 to 1 0: Not installed, 1: Installed 0 Password type set to enter service mode To set the type of password that is required to enter when getting into service mode. 2 types are available: one for "service technician" and the other for "system administrator + service technician". When selecting the type for "system administrator + service technician", enter the password for service technician after the password entry by the user's system administrator.



Use Case



Upon request from the user who concerns security



Adj/Set/Operate Method



1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.



Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value



0 to 2 0: No password, 1: Service technician, 2: System administrator + service technician 0



1116



8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > FNC-SW SM-PSWD



2 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method Caution Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value Related Service Mode RPT2SIDE



1 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value Related Service Mode STND-PNL



2 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value INVALPDL



1 Detail



Use Case



Password setting for service technician To set password for service technician that is used when getting into service mode. When password is required to get into service mode 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Be sure to select 1 or 2 with PSWD-SW in advance. 1 to 99999999 11111111 COPIER> OPTION> FNC-SW> PSWD-SW Set of report 1-sided/2-sided output To set whether to use 1-sided or 2-sided for report output of service mode. When making 1-sided report output 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 0 to 1 0: 1-sided, 1: 2-sided 1 COPIER> FUNCTION> MISC-P> P-PRINT Set Upright Control Panel installation To set whether the Upright Control Panel is installed. When the Upright Control Panel is installed, set 1. At installation of the Upright Control Panel Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 0 to 1 0: Not installed, 1: Installed 0 Disable of PDL license *Operation on this item is restricted by the setting of [Restrict Service Representation Access]. To disable the registered PDL license. When "1: Disabled" is set, PDL is disabled even if a PDL license is registered. This is set to the machines installed at convenience stores, which do not allow PDL to be used. When prohibiting the use of PDL



Adj/Set/Operate Method



1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.



Display/Adj/Set Range



0 to 1 0: Registered PDL license is enabled, 1: Disabled



Default Value



0



1117



8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > FNC-SW CDS-FIRM



1 Detail



Use Case Adj/Set/Operate Method Caution Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value Related Service Mode Additional Functions Mode Supplement/Memo CDS-MEAP



1 Detail



Use Case Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value Supplement/Memo CDS-UGW



1 Detail



Use Case Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value Supplement/Memo



Set to allow firmware update by admin * Operation on this item is restricted by the setting of [Restrict Service Representation Access]. To set whether to allow the user (administrator) to perform firmware update linked with CDS and collection of log files. When 1 is set, [Distribution Update] is added to remote UI, and [Firmware Update] is added to [Register/Update Software] of local UI. Log files can be collected from remote UI. When allowing the administrator to update the firmware 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Do not use it for purposes other than collecting log files. Be sure to return the value to 0 after use. 0 to 1 0: Disabled, 1: Enabled It differs according to the location. COPIER> OPTION> FNC-SW> LCDSFLG Management Settings> License/Other> Register/Update Software CDS: Contents Delivery System Set to allow MEAP installation by admin * Operation on this item is restricted by the setting of [Restrict Service Representation Access]. To set whether to allow the user (administrator) to install MEAP applications from CDS and enable iR options. When 1 is set, Updater can be activated from [Settings/Registration]. When allowing the administrator to install MEAP applications and enable iR options from CDS 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 0 to 1 0: Disabled, 1: Enabled 1 CDS: Contents Delivery System Set to allow firmware update from UGW *Operation on this item is restricted by the setting of [Restrict Service Representation Access]. To set whether to permit update of the firmware from the UGW server. When "1: Enabled" is set, Updater accepts the operation from the UGW server in cooperation with CDS. When allowing update of the firmware from the UGW server 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 0 to 1 0: Disabled, 1: Enabled It differs according to the location. CDS: Contents Delivery System



1118



8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > FNC-SW LOCLFIRM



1 Detail



Use Case Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value T-RUN-LV



1 Detail



Use Case Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value



Set to allow firmware update by file *Operation on this item is restricted by the setting of [Restrict Service Representation Access]. To set whether to permit the user (administrator) to update the firmware from the remote UI using a local file. This update is executed as a measure for vulnerability in emergency situations. When allowing the administrator to update the firmware using a file 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 0 to 1 0: Disabled, 1: Enabled 1 No.of keep print at Toner Cntner rplce To set the number of prints to be kept from the indication of Toner Container replacement until job is interrupted. The time to keep printing varies depending on image ratio and productivity. When preferring to shorten the time from replacement of the Toner Container to the recovery Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 0 to 1 0: Approx. 900 sheets, 1: Approx. 140 sheets (A4, 5% image ratio) 0



BXNUPLOG



2



[Not used]



SDLMTWRN



1



Cpcty warn dspl ON/OFF: E-mail/I-Fax TX



Detail Use Case Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value Additional Functions Mode JLK-PWSC



2 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value



To set whether to display the warning message when sending data that exceeds the upper limit value for the transmission data size via E-mail/I-Fax. For customization Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 0 to 1 0: OFF, 1: ON 0 Function Settings> Send> E-Mail/I-Fax Settings> Maximum Data Size for Sending ON/OFF of PCAM password auth doc scan *Operation on this item is restricted by the setting of [Restrict Service Representation Access]. To set whether to scan the PCAM password authentication document with the MEAP application. When scanning the PCAM password authentication document Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 0 to 1 0: OFF, 1: ON 0



1119



8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > FNC-SW FAX-INT



2 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method Caution



Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value CDS-LVUP



1 Detail



Use Case Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range



Default Value Related Service Mode Additional Functions Mode Supplement/Memo AMSOFFSW



1 Detail



Use Case Adj/Set/Operate Method



Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value Related Service Mode Additional Functions Mode Supplement/Memo



Set FAX RX print interruption oprtn mode To set the mode performing interruption operation of FAX reception print automatically. Upon user's request 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. - Do not set this item while charge management (charging by Coin Manager, a device alone, etc.) is used. - During an ongoing job for which delivery setting (offset, stapling, etc.) is made, interruption operation is performed between sets. 0 to 1 0: Normal, 1: Interruption operation mode 0 Set to allow CDS periodical update *Operation on this item is restricted by the setting of [Restrict Service Representation Access]. To set whether to allow the user (administrator) to perform periodical update linked with CDS. When 1 is set, setting of periodical update can be made in Settings/Registration menu/via remote UI. When 2 is set, setting of periodical update can be made on the Updater screen in service mode. When allowing the user/service technician to perform periodical update 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 0 to 2 0: Prohibited periodical update 1: Display the periodical update setting screen in Settings/Registration menu/on remote UI 2: Display the periodical update setting screen on the Updater in service mode It differs according to the location. Updater Management Settings> License/Other> Register/Update Software> Periodical Update CDS: Contents Delivery System Enabling of AMS mode *Operation on this item is restricted by the setting of [Restrict Service Representation Access]. To enable the AMS mode. When 0 is set, the AMS mode is enabled. The AMS mode is automatically enabled when the following 2 conditions are satisfied. - AMS license for an iR option is installed. - AMS-supported Login application (User Authentication, etc.) is activated. When enabling AMS mode 1) Check that AMS-supported Login application is activated. 2) Enter 0, and then press OK key. 3) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 4) Check that [Role Management] is displayed on remote UI. 0 to 1 0: AMS mode enabled, 1: AMS mode disabled 1 COPIER> OPTION> LCNS-TR> ST-AMS (Remote UI) User Management> Authentication Management> Role Management AMS: Access Management System In AMS mode, [Role Management] is displayed on remote UI.



1120



8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > FNC-SW UA-OFFSW



1 Detail



Use Case Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value Supplement/Memo MIB-NVTA



1 Detail



Use Case Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value Supplement/Memo



ON/OFF of unified auth function *Operation on this item is restricted by the setting of [Restrict Service Representation Access]. To set ON/OFF of the Unified Authentication function. Set 0 when not preferring to use the Unified Authentication function because of security concern. Upon user's request (not to use the Unified Authentication function) 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 0 to 1 0: ON, 1: OFF 0 Unified Authentication: A function with which it is considered that login authentication under it is performed by logging in it using SSO-H. RFC-compatible character stringMIB write As default, MIB object which NVT-ASCII can be written exists in order to link with local UI entry value. This violates RFC order, so a problem like garbled 2-byte characters may occur in the SNMP monitoring system, such as other vendor's MPS. Whether to allow writing of non-RFC-compatible character strings in MIB can be set using this item. When 1 is set, only the character strings which are strictly compatible with RFC are written. (Writing operation is executed from the SNMP manager.) It is not linked with local UI. Upon user's request (to operate with RFC-compatible system) 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 0 to 3 0: Compatible in a conventional manner, 1: RFC-compatible, 2 to 3: Not used 0 RFC: Document of internet-related technical standards NVT-ASCII: Network Virtual Terminal-ASCII



MIB-EXT



1



For R&D



SVC-RUI



1



Enabling of remote UI func for servicing



Detail



To set whether to enable the remote UI function for servicing (not provided to end users). When 0 is set, the remote UI function is disabled. When setting a value other than 0, the remote UI function is enabled and its value will be used as the password to use the function.



Use Case



When preferring to use the import function of background image file of main menu/custom menu



Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value LCDSFLG



1 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value Related Service Mode Additional Functions Mode Supplement/Memo



Enter the setting value (other than 0), and then press OK key. 0 to 65535 0 Enabling of local CDS server To set whether to use the local CDS server. When CDS-FIRM is 1, this setting is enabled. When using the local CDS server Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 0 to 1 0: Disabled, 1: Enabled 0 COPIER> OPTION> FNC-SW> CDS-FIRM Management Settings> License/Other> Register/Update Software> Software Management Settings> Connection Server Settings When local CDS is used, iW EMC/MC device firmware update plug-in is required.



1121



8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > FNC-SW BXSHIFT



1 Detail



Use Case Adj/Set/Operate Method Caution Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value



Setting of binding at 0mm binding margin To set whether to judge the job as a job "without binding" when storing a PDL job in Inbox while the binding margin is set to "0". By setting the binding margin to 0 mm while "0" is set, the job is processed as "without binding". "Booklet" in "Options" on the Inbox screen can be also used. When "1" is set, it is judged as "with binding" even the binding margin is 0 mm so "Booklet", which has an exclusive relationship with "binding", cannot be used. Upon user's request 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. When storing a PDL job in Mail Box while 1 is set, "Booklet" in "Options" on the Mail Box screen cannot be used. 0 to 1 0: Without binding, 1: With binding 0



SELF-CHK



2



For R&D



HOME-SW



1



Set screen displayed with Main Menu key



Detail Use Case Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value NO-LGOUT



1 Detail



Use Case Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value JM-ERR-D



2 Detail



Use Case Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value Related Service Mode



To set whether to display the main menu screen or the screen registered as the startup screen when pressing Main Menu key. Upon user's request (to change the startup screen) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 0 to 1 0: Main Menu screen, 1: Screen registered as the startup screen 0 Display/hide of logout button *Operation on this item is restricted by the setting of [Restrict Service Representation Access]. To set whether to display or hide [Logout] button. When 0 is set, [Logout] button is displayed on the screen, and logout with the ID key is enabled. (Normal) When 1 is set, [Logout] button is not displayed, and logout with the ID key is disabled. Upon user's request (for customization, etc.) 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 0 to 1 0: Display, 1: Hide 0 Set of error display of 0CAx jam (DCON) To set whether to display "0CAx" jam as the error "E996-0CAx". In the case of a jam, log cannot be obtained depending on the timing. By selecting 1 when the jam "0CAx" occurs, it is displayed as the error "E996-0CAx" so that the log can be obtained. When obtaining a log at the occurrence of 0CAx jam Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 0 to 1 0: Display as a jam, 1: Display as an error 0 COPIER> OPTION> FNC-SW> JM-ERR-R



1122



8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > FNC-SW JM-ERR-R



2 Detail



Use Case Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value Related Service Mode ASLPMAX



1 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value SEND-SPD



2 Detail



Use Case Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value



Set of error display of 0071 jam (RCON) To set whether to display 0071 jam as the error "E996-0071". In the case of a jam, a log may not be able to be obtained depending on the timing. By selecting 1 when the 0071 jam occurs, it is displayed as an error so that a log can be obtained. When obtaining a log at the occurrence of 0071 jam Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 0 to 1 0: Display as a jam, 1: Display as an error 0 COPIER> OPTION> FNC-SW> JM-ERR-D Set auto sleep shift time maximum value Set auto sleep shift time maximum value. Upon user's request Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 0 to 1 0: 240minutes, 1: 120 minutes It differs according to the location. ON/OFF of SEND operation speed-up To set whether to speed up the SEND operation. Usually, speed of SEND/XBOX is increased by performing image conversion during SEND and Scan. Reading speed may decrease when scanning large size color original at high resolution or when competing operation occurs with another job during scanning. Set 1 to keep the speed. When failure with MEAP application occurs, set 1. - When reading speed is decreased during SEND and Scan - When failure with MEAP application occurs 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 0 to 1 0: ON, 1: OFF 0



1123



8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > FNC-SW VER-CHNG



2 Detail



Use Case Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range



Default Value Supplement/Memo



Setting of firmware update operation To set how to update firmware of PCB/option which has been installed/replaced by comparing the version of it with the version stored in the Flash PCB of the Main Controller. If combination of firmware versions of PCB/option stored in the Main Controller and the version in PCB/option after installation/replacement is not appropriate (operation with the combination of firmware versions has not yet been checked), failure where analysis is difficult may occur. It is possible to check the firmware versions at the start of the machine, and automatically write the firmware stored in the Main Controller in PCB/option collectively as needed. When 0 is set, versions are not checked and firmware update is not performed. Therefore, it is necessary to manually update the versions using a USB memory/SST. When 1 is set, firmware is updated if the version in PCB/option is old. However, it is not updated if the version is new or old and new versions are mixed. When 2 is set, a compatible firmware (the version where operation has been checked) is written from the Main Controller regardless of whether the version in PCB/option is old or new. When installing/replacing PCB/option having firmware 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 0 to 2 0: Keep the current firmware version. 1: Update the firmware if the version in PCB/option is older than that stored in the Main controller. If the version is new or old and new versions are mixed, firmware is not updated. 2: Update the firmware regardless of whether the version is old or new if the version in PCB/option differs from that stored in the Main Controller. 1 When updating the firmware, the main menu is displayed on the Control Panel at startup and then a message prompting to update firmware is displayed. By pressing [Update], the machine reboots immediately and firmware is updated. By pressing [Skip], it returns to the main menu. The message is displayed again at next startup.



CE-SW



1



[Reserve]



PICLOGIN



1



ON/OFF of Picture Login display



Detail Use Case Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value Additional Functions Mode



To set whether to display [Picture Login] in [Settings/Registration]. When switching the Picture Login function 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 0 to 1 0: OFF, 1: ON 1 Management Settings> User Management> Authentication Management> Use User Authentication> Picture Login



FL-START



2



[For customization]



RCONRTRY



2



Set process at RCON communication error



Detail



Use Case Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value



To set the processing to be executed at occurrence of RCON communication error. Normally, recovery is performed without displaying an error. A log is not collected. Set 1 when recovery processing is performed frequently. An error is displayed and a log for analysis can be collected. When recovery processing due to RCON communication error is performed frequently 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 0 to 1 0: Perform recovery without collecting a log, 1: Collect a log and display an error 0



1124



8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > FNC-SW 3RDP-MSG



2 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method Caution Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value Related Service Mode MOJ-SW



2



ON/OFF pop-up screen dspl after upgrade To set whether to display the screen to prompt the user to "Third-Party Software" at the first startup after upgrading due to change in the platform version. There will be no occasion to use this item intentionally. 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Even if 0 is set, the screen is displayed if CDS-LVUP is set to 0. 0 to 1 0: Hide, 1: Display 0 COPIER> OPTION> FNC-SW> CDS-LVUP [For customization]



■ DSPLY-SW COPIER (Service mode for printer) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > DSPLY-SW UI-COPY



2 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value UI-BOX



2 Detail



Use Case Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range



Default Value Additional Functions Mode UI-SEND



2 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value



ON/OFF of copy screen display To set whether to display or hide the copy function. Upon user's request 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 0 to 1 0: Hide, 1: Display 1 ON/OFF of Inbox screen display *Operation on this item is restricted by the setting of [Restrict Service Representation Access]. To set whether to display the Inbox function. The setting values "1" and "2" of this item are linked with the values "ON" and "OFF" of [Mail Box] in [Settings/Registration] respectively. The setting is reflected after turning OFF/ON the power. Upon user's request 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 1 to 2 1: Inbox function is active 2: Inbox function is active (with limitation; Storing is available with PDL to Inbox despite no display on the Control Panel/remote UI) 1 Preferences> Display Settings> Store Location Display Settings> Mail Box ON/OFF of Send screen display To set whether to display or hide the SEND function. Upon user's request 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 0 to 1 0: Hide, 1: Display 1



1125



8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > DSPLY-SW UI-FAX



2 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value NWERR-SW



2 Detail



Use Case Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value ANIM-SW



2 Detail



Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value Related Service Mode Supplement/Memo



UI-PRINT



2 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range



Default Value



ON/OFF of fax screen display To set whether to display or hide the FAX function. Upon user's request 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 0 to 1 0: Hide, 1: Display 1 OFF/ON of network-related error display To set OFF/ON of network-related error message display. When setting "0: OFF" while the machine is not connected to network, the error message "Check the network connection." is not displayed. When using the machine as a copy machine 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 0 to 1 0: OFF, 1: ON 0 (Copier model)/1 (Printer model) Screen switch set from MEAP to warning To set to enable/disable switching from MEAP screen to the error/jam screen. If disabling this mode, the screen will not be switched to the warning screen in the case of an error/ jam/alarm, and a message is appeared on the MEAP screen indicating to contact the service person. 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 0 to 1 0: Enabled, 1: Disabled (No display of warning screen) 0 COPIER> OPTION> DSPLY-SW> MEAP-DSP If just disabling the switch with MEAP-DSP, the screen is switched to the standard screen in the case of an error/jam/alarm. If disabling the switch with ANIM-SW, the screen will not be switched to the standard screen and a warning is appeared on MEAP screen. Set of secured print-related UI display To set whether to display UI related to secured print. Upon user's request 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 0 to 2 0: Hide all UIs related to secured print 1: Display all UIs related to secured print 2: Hide Secured Print button in the main menu and the simple authentication settings in [Settings/ Registration] 0



1126



8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > DSPLY-SW IMGC-ADJ



1 Detail



Use Case Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value Additional Functions Mode UI-RSCAN



2 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value UI-EPRNT



2 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value UI-WEB



2 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value UI-HOLD



2 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range



Default Value Supplement/Memo



ON/OFF of img adj item dspl in [Set/Reg] To set whether to display the item relating to image adjustment in [Settings/Registration]. When 1 is set, detailed image adjustment procedure will be displayed only for the paper duplicated in Preferences> Paper Settings> Paper Type Management Settings. As needed 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 0 to 1 0: Hide, 1: Display 0 Preferences> Paper Settings> Set Paper Type Management ON/OFF of remote scan screen display To set whether to display the remote scan screen on the Control Panel. Upon user's request 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 0 to 1 0: OFF, 1: ON 1 ON/OFF of extended print screen display To set whether to display or hide the extended print screen (print screen for print server). Upon user's request 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 0 to 1 0: Hide, 1: Display 1 ON/OFF of Web browser screen display To set whether to display or hide the Web browser screen. Upon user's request 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 0 to 1 0: Hide, 1: Display 1 ON/OFF of hold job screen display To set whether to display the hold job screen on the Control Panel. Upon user's request 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 0 to 3 0: Hide (when POD function is OFF and JAL is OFF) 1: Display (when POD function is ON and JAL is OFF) 2: Hide (when POD function is OFF and JAL is ON) 3: Hide (when POD function is ON and JAL is ON) 1 POD function: JDF + HOLD functions JAL function: A function to save the print result as a thumbnail.



1127



8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > DSPLY-SW RMT-CNSL



1 Detail



Use Case Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value UI-SBOX



2 Detail



Use Case Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value Additional Functions Mode UI-MEM



2 Detail



Use Case Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value Additional Functions Mode UI-NAVI



2 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value



Allow console application connection To set whether to allow connection from a console application (RemoteConsole). When 1 is set, logs of MEAP application can be collected via the console application activated on a PC. When collecting logs of MEAP application 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 0 to 1 0: OFF, 1: ON 0 ON/OFF of Advanced Box screen display *Operation on this item is restricted by the setting of [Restrict Service Representation Access]. To set ON/OFF of the Advanced Box screen on the Control Panel. The setting values 0 (OFF) and 1 (ON) are linked with OFF and ON of [Advanced Box/Network] in [Settings/Registration] respectively. The setting is reflected after turning OFF/ON the power. When not displaying the Advanced Box screen on the Control Panel 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 0 to 1 0: OFF, 1: ON It differs according to the location. Preferences> Display Settings> Store Location Display Settings> Advanced Box/Network ON/OFF of memory media screen display *Operation on this item is restricted by the setting of [Restrict Service Representation Access]. To set ON/OFF of the memory media screen display on the Control Panel. The setting values 0 (OFF) and 1 (ON) are linked with OFF and ON of [Memory Media] in [Settings/ Registration] respectively. The setting is reflected after turning OFF/ON the power. When not displaying the memory media screen on the Control Panel 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 0 to 1 0: OFF, 1: ON 1 Preferences> Display Settings> Store Location Display Settings> Memory Media ON/OFF of Tutorial display To set whether to display or hide "Introduction to Useful Features" in the main menu. Upon user's request 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 0 to 1 0: Hide, 1: Display 1



1128



8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > DSPLY-SW SCT-BTN



1 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method Caution



Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value Supplement/Memo SDTM-DSP



1 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method Caution Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value Additional Functions Mode UI-PPA



2 Detail



Use Case Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value Related Service Mode Supplement/Memo CE-DSP



2



Set No. of shortcut buttons upper limit To set an upper limit on the number of shortcut buttons that appear at the top of the Control Panel screen. Upon user's request 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. When 1 is set, the number of shortcut buttons that can be set increases from 2 to 4. However, the buttons become smaller in width, and the number of characters that can be displayed decreases. Depending on the MEAP application allocated to the shortcut button, the character strings may not be fully displayed. Since the character strings displayed on the shortcut button are specified by the MEAP application, they cannot be changed. Therefore, if the number of characters are too many, foregoing symptom occurs. To prevent the symptom, a measure such as decreasing the number of characters on the MEAP application side needs to be taken. 0 to 1 0: 2 buttons, 1: 4 buttons 0 The settings for shortcut buttons are made in [Top Buttons Settings] which is displayed by pressing Advanced Menu button in upper right of the screen. ON/OFF of auto shutdown shift time dspl To set whether to display [Auto Shutdown Time] in [Settings/Registration]. Upon user's request Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. When 0 is set, automatic shutdown is not executed. 0 to 1 0: OFF, 1: ON It differs according to the location. Preferences> Timer/Energy Settings> Auto Shutdown Time ON/OFF of PPA screen display To set whether to display PPA-related information on the Control Panel or remote UI. The setting is linked with LGCY-SCP. When LGCY-SCP is set to 0, the setting of this item becomes 1. When LGCY-SCP is set to 1, the setting of this item becomes 0. When not displaying PPA-related information on the screen 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 0 to 1 0: OFF, 1: ON 0 (non PPA-installed machine)/1 (PPA-installed machine) COPIER> OPTION> USER> LGCY-SCP PPA (Personal Print Application): A function to hold print job. It contains the secured print function. [Reserve]



1129



8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > DSPLY-SW LOCAL-SZ



1 Detail



Use Case Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value Additional Functions Mode SND-NAME



1 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value PCMP-DSP



1 Detail



Use Case Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value Related Service Mode



ON/OFF area-spec stdrd size ppr set scrn To set whether to display the area-specific standard size paper on the paper settings screen in [Settings/Registration]. When 1 is set, paper type (FOOLSCAP, OFICIO, etc.) can be set on the paper settings screen for each paper source. Upon user's request Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 0 to 1 0: OFF, 1: ON It differs according to the location. Preferences> Paper Settings> Paper Settings Setting of [Scan and Send] button name To set the name of [Scan and Send] button displayed in the main menu. Upon user's request 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 0 to 2 0: [Scan and Send], 1: [Scan], 2: [Scan] 0 Set copy cmpl scrn dspl:chg w/devc alone To set whether to display the screen indicating completion of copying at the time of charging with a device alone. When 0 is set, a message "Copying is complete. Do you want to start the job again with the same settings?" is not displayed in a pop-up screen. When COIN is 4, this setting is enabled. Upon user's request Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 0 to 1 0: OFF, 1: ON 1 COPIER> OPTION> ACC> COIN



ERR-DISP



2



[For customization]



SVC-ACA



1



Display of ACA installation button



Detail Use Case



To set whether to display the [Install Auto Configuration Agent] button on the CDS Updater screen (user mode/service mode). When switching to install/not to install the ACA via network



Adj/Set/Operate Method



Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.



Display/Adj/Set Range



0 to 2 0: Hide (Hide user mode/service mode) 1: Display only service mode (Hide user mode) 2: Display all (Display user mode/service mode)



Default Value Related Service Mode Additional Functions Mode Supplement/Memo



It differs according to the location. Service Mode > Updater Management Settings> License/Other> Register/Update Software ACA : Auto Configuration Agent



1130



8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > DSPLY-SW SVC-SRA



1 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method Caution Display/Adj/Set Range



Default Value Related Service Mode Additional Functions Mode LF-DSP-S



2 Detail



Use Case Adj/Set/Operate Method Caution Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value Related Service Mode LF-DSP-U



2 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method Caution Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value Additional Functions Mode



Display/hide of DBS installation button To set whether to display the [Install Data Backup Service] button on the CDS Updater screen (user mode/service mode). When switching to install/not to install the Data Backup Service via network 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Depending on the setting value, display when entering from Settings/Registration and that from service mode differ. 0 to 2 0: Hide (Hide user mode/service mode) 1: Display only service mode (Hide user mode) 2: Display all (Display user mode/service mode) It differs according to the location. Service Mode> Updater> Install Data Backup Service Management Settings> License/Other> Register/Update Software> Install Data Backup Service Set Display/Hide Life VL in Service Mode To set whether to display Life Value and Replacement Life Value on the service mode counter screen. If this option is set to 1, Life Value is displayed in the third column and Replacement Life Value in the fourth column of all items under COPIER > COUNTER > LIFE. When displaying Live Value and Replacement Life Value Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. Change the setting in accordance with the instruction of the sales company HQ. 0 to 1 0: Hide, 1: Display The value differs according to the location. COPIER > COUNTER > LIFE Dspy/hide Chk Consumable State/Days Left To set whether to display the "Status" and "Number of Days Left" in Status Monitor/Cancel > Consmbls./Others > Check Consumables. When switching display/hide the Status and Number of Days Left. Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. Change the setting in accordance with the instruction of the sales company HQ. 0 to 1 0: Hide, 1: Display The value differs according to the location. Status Monitor/Cancel > Consmbls./Others > Consumables



ERRL-DSP



1



For R&D



JLG-UD-D



1



[For customization]



1131



8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > DSPLY-SW UFOS-DSP



1 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value Additional Functions Mode Supplement/Memo SVC-DAT



1



Display/hide of uniFLOW Setup Service mode to switch to display or hide [uniFLOW Setup]. When to switch to display or hide [uniFLOW Setup] 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 0 to 1 0: Hide, 1: Display It differs according to the location. Main Menu > uniFLOW Setup uniFLOW : The name of the product destined for China is "mdsFLOW". For R&D



■ NETWORK COPIER (Service mode for printer) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > NETWORK IFAX-LIM



2 Detail



Use Case Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value SMTPTXPN



2 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value SMTPRXPN



2 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value POP3PN



2 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value



No. of max print lines at IFAX reception To set the maximum number of lines for e-mail text to be printed when receiving IFAX. Setting of this item can prevent endless printing of the attached file data in the case of receiving an error e-mail or failure in interpretation of the context. Selecting 0 prints the header/footer in 1 sheet when receiving e-mail text without attached file. When preventing endless print in the case of failure in reception 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 0 to 999 0: E-mail text not printed, 999: Unlimited 500 Setting of SMTP TX port number *Operation on this item is restricted by the setting of [Restrict Service Representation Access]. To set SMTP transmission port number. Upon user's request 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 0 to 65535 25 Setting of SMTP reception port number *Operation on this item is restricted by the setting of [Restrict Service Representation Access]. To set SMTP reception port number. Upon user's request 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 0 to 65535 25 Setting of POP3 reception port number *Operation on this item is restricted by the setting of [Restrict Service Representation Access]. To set POP3 reception port number. Upon user's request 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 0 to 65535 110



1132



8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > NETWORK FTPTXPN



1 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value NW-SPEED



2 Detail



Use Case Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value



Specification of SEND port (FTP) number *Operation on this item is restricted by the setting of [Restrict Service Representation Access]. To specify address port (FTP) number for SEND. Upon user's request 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 0 to 65535 21 Setting of network data transfer speed To set the data transfer speed when the service network is connected. When downloading the firmware through network, use 0 in the normal operation. When fixed to 100Base-TX/10Base-T for any reason, change the setting. When fixing the communication speed 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 0 to 2 0: Auto, 1: 100Base-TX, 2: 10Base-T 0



STS-PORT



2



[Not used]



CMD-PORT



2



ON/OFF TOTasync command comctn port



Detail



Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value Related Service Mode Supplement/Memo



NS-CMD5



2 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value Supplement/Memo



*Operation on this item is restricted by the setting of [Restrict Service Representation Access]. To set ON/OFF for asynchronous command communication port with T.O.T. Select "1: ON" in the case of connecting the PC and the machine with the cross cable while Service NAVI is used. 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 0 to 1 0: OFF, 1: ON 0 COPIER> OPTION> NETWORK> STS-PORT T.O.T (TUIF over TCP): Communication protocol to be used for communication with the built-in application (UI) and the internal application such as COPY/ SEND/ BOX, etc. (Canon's own protocol). Limit CRAM-MD5 auth method at SMTP auth *Operation on this item is restricted by the setting of [Restrict Service Representation Access]. To restrict use of CRAM-MD5 authentication method at the time of SMTP authentication. Upon user's request 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 0 to 1 0: SMTP server-dependent, 1: Not used 0 SMTP authentication: Protocol in which user authentication function is added to SMTP, which is the protocol to be used for e-mail transmission. At the time of e-mail transmission, this protocol executes authentication of the user account and the password between the SMTP server and the user to approve e-mail transmission only when it's authenticated.



1133



8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > NETWORK NS-GSAPI



2 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value Supplement/Memo



NS-NTLM



2 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value Supplement/Memo



NS-PLNWS



2 Detail



Use Case Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value Supplement/Memo



Limit GSSAPI auth method at SMTP auth *Operation on this item is restricted by the setting of [Restrict Service Representation Access]. To restrict use of GSSAPI authentication method at the time of SMTP authentication. Upon user's request 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 0 to 1 0: SMTP server-dependent, 1: Not used 0 SMTP authentication: Protocol in which user authentication function is added to SMTP, which is the protocol to be used for e-mail transmission. At the time of e-mail transmission, this protocol executes authentication of the user account and the password between the SMTP server and the user to approve e-mail transmission only when it's authenticated. Limit NTLM auth method at SMTP auth *Operation on this item is restricted by the setting of [Restrict Service Representation Access]. To restrict use of NTLM authentication method at the time of SMTP authentication. Upon user's request 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 0 to 1 0: SMTP server-dependent, 1: Not used 0 SMTP authentication: Protocol in which user authentication function is added to SMTP, which is the protocol to be used for e-mail transmission. At the time of e-mail transmission, this protocol executes authentication of the user account and the password between the SMTP server and the user to approve e-mail transmission only when it's authenticated. Limit plaintext auth at SMTP auth encry *Operation on this item is restricted by the setting of [Restrict Service Representation Access]. To restrict use of PLAIN/LOGIN authentication, which is plaintext, at the time of SMTP authentication under the environment where the communication packet is encrypted. Upon user's request 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 0 to 1 0: SMTP server-dependent, 1: Not used 0 SMTP authentication: Protocol in which user authentication function is added to SMTP, which is the protocol to be used for e-mail transmission. At the time of e-mail transmission, this protocol executes authentication of the user account and the password between the SMTP server and the user to approve e-mail transmission only when it's authenticated.



1134



8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > NETWORK NS-PLN



2 Detail



Use Case Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value Supplement/Memo



NS-LGN



2 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value Supplement/Memo



MEAP-PN



2 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method Caution



Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value RMT-LGIN



2 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value Supplement/Memo



Limit plaintext auth at SMTPauth noencry *Operation on this item is restricted by the setting of [Restrict Service Representation Access]. To restrict use of PLAIN/LOGIN authentication, which is plaintext, at the time of SMTP authentication under the environment where the communication packet is not encrypted. Upon user's request 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 0 to 1 0: SMTP server-dependent, 1: Not used 0 SMTP authentication: Protocol in which user authentication function is added to SMTP, which is the protocol to be used for e-mail transmission. At the time of e-mail transmission, this protocol executes authentication of the user account and the password between the SMTP server and the user to approve e-mail transmission only when it's authenticated. Limit LOGIN authentication at SMTP auth *Operation on this item is restricted by the setting of [Restrict Service Representation Access]. To restrict use of LOGIN authentication at the time of SMTP authentication. Upon user's request 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 0 to 1 0: SMTP server-dependent, 1: Not used 0 SMTP authentication: Protocol in which user authentication function is added to SMTP, which is the protocol to be used for e-mail transmission. At the time of e-mail transmission, this protocol executes authentication of the user account and the password between the SMTP server and the user to approve e-mail transmission only when it's authenticated. HTTP port No.setting of MEAP application *Operation on this item is restricted by the setting of [Restrict Service Representation Access]. To set HTTP port number of MEAP application. Upon user's request 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Do not specify port 8080 when the Print Server is connected. Otherwise, you cannot browse the device RUI in which MEAP authentication application is running (Port 8080 is reserved for redirection of EFI Controller to the iR side.) 1 to 65535 8000 Set to allow remote login to SSH server To set whether to allow remote login from the remote host (SSH client: DA) to debug console of the SSH server. As needed (This mode is used for the Japanese models only and not used with overseas models (outside Japan)). 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 0 to 1 0: Disabled, 1: Enabled 1 DA: Digital Accessory



1135



8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > NETWORK CHNG-STS



2 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value Related Service Mode CHNG-CMD



2 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value Related Service Mode MEAP-SSL



2 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value LPD-PORT



2 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value Supplement/Memo WUEN-LIV



2 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range Unit Default Value Amount of Change per Unit



Set of TOT status connection port number To set the port number for status connection with T.O.T. When the Service NAVI is used 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 1 to 65535 20010 COPIER> OPTION> NETWORK> STS-PORT Set of TOT command connection port No. To set the port number for command connection with T.O.T. When the Service NAVI is used 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 1 to 65535 20000 COPIER> OPTION> NETWORK> CMD-PORT HTTPS port setting of MEAP *Operation on this item is restricted by the setting of [Restrict Service Representation Access]. To set the port of HTTPS server in the case of using SSL with HTTP of MEAP. When specifying the setting of HTTPS port for MEAP 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 0 to 65535 8443 Setting of LPD port number *Operation on this item is restricted by the setting of [Restrict Service Representation Access]. To set the LPD port number. Upon user's request 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 1 to 65535 515 LPD port: Network port for TCP/IP communication when making prints through network. Recovery time setting after sleep notice To set the time from the sleep start from network without job assignment until the mode is shifted to the sleep mode. When setting the startup time after sleep notification 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 10 to 600 sec 15 1



1136



8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > NETWORK IFX-CHIG



1 Detail



Use Case Adj/Set/Operate Method Caution Display/Adj/Set Range Unit Default Value Supplement/Memo Amount of Change per Unit DNSTRANS



1



To set the number of characters for the IFAX received mail content, so that the mail is not printed/ forwarded when the characters in the text is less than the number of specified characters. This machine can output blank paper because some senders send e-mail text consists of linefeed codes only. In such case, specify 2 (number of characters) so that there will be no output of blank paper. In the case of specifying any number other than 0, header/footer is printed/forwarded in 1 sheet only if the e-mail (body) text is less than the specified value while no TIFF file is attached. As the value is incremented by 1, the number of target characters in e-mail body text is increased by 1 character. When reducing print of blank paper due to e-mail received by IFAX 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Be sure to get approval from the user by telling that there will be no print of e-mail (body) text if the number of characters is less than the specified value. 0 to 999 0: E-mail (body) text is not ignored. char 0 1 Japanese Kanji character is calculated as 2 bytes, and the control codes (such as linefeed code, etc) are included in the number of characters. 1 Setting of DNS query priority protocol



Detail



*Operation on this item is restricted by the setting of [Restrict Service Representation Access]. To set priority of the protocol (IPv4/IPv6) for DNS query. In the case of using both IPv6 and IPv4 while the DNS server supports IPv4, it takes time because of timeout when executing DNS query with priority on IPv6. Giving priority on query by IPv4 can shorten the time.



Use Case



When it takes time to execute DNS query with priority on IPv6 because the DNS server supports IPv4



Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value PROXYRES



Set operation by IFAX recv mail content



2 Detail



Use Case Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value



1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 0 to 1 0: IPv4, 1: IPv6 1 Setting of proxy response to Windows *Operation on this item is restricted by the setting of [Restrict Service Representation Access]. To set whether to provide proxy response or return the device status when an inquiry is received via Windows while the device is in sleep mode. When executing status response for query from Windows correctly 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 0 to 1 0: No proxy response, 1: Proxy response 1



1137



8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > NETWORK WOLTRANS



1 Detail



Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value 802XTOUT



1 Detail



Use Case Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range Unit Default Value Amount of Change per Unit SPDALDEL



2 Detail



Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value Supplement/Memo



NCONF-SW



1 Detail



Use Case Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value Supplement/Memo



ON/OFF sleep recover by packet reception *Operation on this item is restricted by the setting of [Restrict Service Representation Access]. To set whether to recover from deep sleep when receiving unicast packets to the machine (excluding proxy response). 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 1 to 2 1: ON, 2: OFF 1 Set of IEEE802.1X authentication timeout *Operation on this item is restricted by the setting of [Restrict Service Representation Access]. To set timeout value for IEEE802.1X authentication. If the device executes 802.1X authentication, change the wait time for response from the authentication server. When response from the authentication server is slow/fast 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 10 to 120 sec 30 1 Initialization of SPD value *Operation on this item is restricted by the setting of [Restrict Service Representation Access]. To initialize all the SPD values that are under management. SPD values can be initialized without clearing SRAM. 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 0 to 1 0: OFF, 1: ON 0 SPD: Database that manages SA (Security Association). SPD value is managed when IPSec Board is used. Normally, SRAM needs to be cleared in the case of mismatch in SPD value. ON/OFF of Network Configurator function *Operation on this item is restricted by the setting of [Restrict Service Representation Access]. To set ON/OFF of Network Configurator function. If the user does not use the function, select OFF to prevent remote attack through network. Upon user's request 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 0 to 1 0: OFF, 1: ON 1 Network Configurator function is a function to be used for communication with NetSpot Device Installer, etc., and the network setting can be changed from the remote.



1138



8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > NETWORK AFS-JOB



1 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value Related Service Mode AFC-EVNT



1 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value Related Service Mode ILOGMODE



1 Detail



Use Case Adj/Set/Operate Method Caution Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value ILOGKEEP



1 Detail



Use Case Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range



Default Value



Set of FAX server job reception port *Operation on this item is restricted by the setting of [Restrict Service Representation Access]. To set the reception port of the fax server to which a fax client sends jobs. When changing the job reception port of the fax server 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 0 to 65535 20317 COPIER> OPTION> NETWORK> AFC-EVNT Set of FAX client event reception port *Operation on this item is restricted by the setting of [Restrict Service Representation Access]. To set the event notification reception port of a fax client. When changing the event notification reception port of a fax client 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 0 to 65535 29400 COPIER> OPTION> NETWORK> AFS-JOB Setting of filter log target packet *Operation on this item is restricted by the setting of [Restrict Service Representation Access]. To set the target packet to be recorded in the filter log. Usually, only the unicast packets to the machine are recorded in the filter log by PFW (personal firewall). When 1 is set, address filter is enabled for all protocols so all packets are recorded in the filter log. However, logs of multicast/broadcast packets sent from a harmless device or an address that are subject to rejection and have no direct relation to the machine are also recorded, and consequently the number of logs is increased. Upon user's request (to collect all filter logs) 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. When 1 is set, the number of logs is increased because logs of packets which have no direct relation to the machine are recorded. 0 to 1 0: Unicast packets to the machine only, 1: All packets 0 Set of IP address block log hold time *Operation on this item is restricted by the setting of [Restrict Service Representation Access]. To set the retention time from the log time of IP block. When access is made again from a same IP address which was blocked before, if it is within the retention time of the previous log, its log is not recorded. If access is frequently made from a same IP address, the log record of the UI might be filled with its logs. If the user considers that a single log for a same IP address is enough, set the longer retention time. Upon user's request 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 0 to 48 0: 1 minute (special mode) 1 to 48: 1 hour to 48 hours 1



1139



8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > NETWORK IPTBROAD



1 Detail



Use Case Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value PFWFTPRT



1 Detail



Use Case Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value DDNSINTV



1 Detail



Use Case Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range



Unit Default Value Amount of Change per Unit SIPAUDIO



2 Detail



Use Case Adj/Set/Operate Method Caution Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value Supplement/Memo



Set to allow broad/multicast TX *Operation on this item is restricted by the setting of [Restrict Service Representation Access]. To set whether to permit transmission of broadcast packets and multicast packets. Transmission of broadcast packets and multicast packets is permitted without specifying an exception address. It is permitted within the device even if it is rejected in the default setting of the IPv4/v6 transmission filter. Set "1: Disabled" when the user does not want to send them. Upon user's request Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 0 to 5 0: Enabled, 1: Disabled, 2 to 5: Not used 0 Set of RST reply at IP filter FTP SEND *Operation on this item is restricted by the setting of [Restrict Service Representation Access]. When FTP SEND is executed using an IP filter by which packets from a specific remote PC are rejected, SYN is returned to the port 113 if the PC supports authentication of the FTP port 113. However, since the IP filter blocks the packets, the block logs are increased and the performance is lowered. When 1 is set, RST is returned to the port 113 without blocking packets. When executing FTP SEND against the OS which supports authentication of the FTP port 113 while the IP filter is enabled Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 0 to 1 0: OFF, 1: ON 0 Set of DDNS periodical update interval DNS registration is executed only once at start-up with the current iR, so the registered contents are deleted in an environment where the DNS server settings are deleted at intervals. To set the interval of DDNS periodical update for not deleting the registered contents. When the DNS server settings are deleted at intervals Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 0 to 48 0: No periodical update, 1: 1-hour interval, 2: 2-hour interval, ..., 47: 47-hour interval, 48: 48-hour interval hour 24 1 Set of SIP session establishment order To set whether to establish audio session or T.38 session first with SIP. Usually, audio session followed by T.38 session is established when using IPFAX in an intranet environment. However, this order is not specified by the standard. Set 1 when connecting the SIP server or terminal where the session starts with T.38 session. When connecting the SIP server or terminal where the session starts with T.38 session Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. When 1 is set, IPFAX fails with the destination where the session starts with audio session. 0 to 1 0: audio, 1: T.38 0 SIP: Session Initiation Protocol



1140



8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > NETWORK SIPINOUT



2 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value Supplement/Memo SIPREGPR



2 Detail



Use Case Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value Additional Functions Mode VLAN-SW



2 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value Supplement/Memo



FTPMODE



1 Detail



Use Case Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value



Set of internal/external number to URI To set whether to store the external number or the internal number in From URI when using NGN. When a call cannot be made with external number while using NGN 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 0 to 1 0: External number, 1: Internal number 0 NGN: Next Generation Network URI: Uniform Resource Identifier Setting of registrar server use protocol To set the protocol used for communication with registrar server. Although the protocol that is the same as the one for proxy server is usually used, another protocol can be used in accordance with user and environment. Upon user's request (to use a protocol different from the one for proxy server) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 0 to 3 0: Protocol set in Settings/Registration menu, 1: UDP, 2: TCP, 3: SSL 0 Preferences> Network> TCP/IP Settings> SIP Settings> Intranet Settings ON/OFF VLAN participation packets send To set whether to send packets for participating in dynamic VLAN at link-up. When participating in dynamic VLAN Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 0 to 1 0: OFF, 1: ON 0 - VLAN (Virtual LAN): A method for realizing grouping of terminals depending on the hub, switch connection port, MAC address, protocol, etc. - At link-up: At startup, when LAN cable is connected, when recovering from deep sleep, when pressing the button to reflect the setting (dynamic update) - If IP address of the machine has not been set, an IP address is assigned after participating in VLAN. Set of FTP print default operation mode To set the default operation mode of FTP print. Switch the default operation mode between ASCII mode and BIN mode in accordance with user's environment. At installation 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 0 to 1 0: ASCII mode, 1: BIN mode 0



1141



8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > NETWORK SSLMODE



2 Detail



Use Case Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value Additional Functions Mode SSLSTRNG



2 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range



Default Value NW-WAIT



2 Detail



Use Case Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value Additional Functions Mode WLAN-USE



2 Detail



Use Case Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value Additional Functions Mode



Setting of HTTP/HTTPS port open/close *Operation on this item is restricted by the setting of [Restrict Service Representation Access]. To set whether to open or close HTTP/HTTPS port. When 1 is set while [Use HTTP] is ON and [Use TLS] is OFF in Settings/Registration menu, HTTP port is opened whereas HTTPS port is closed. When 2 is set while both [Use HTTP] and [Use TLS] are ON in Settings/Registration menu, HTTP port is closed whereas HTTPS port is opened. When limiting the port to open because of security concern 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 0 to 2 0: Normal, 1: Open HTTP port (80/8000) only, 2: Open HTTPS port (443/8443) only 0 Preferences> Network> TCP/IP Settings> Use HTTP Management Settings> License/Other> MEAP Settings> Use TLS Allow weak encryption algorithm for SSL To set whether to allow using weak encryption algorithm for SSL. When 1 is set, weak encryption algorithm cannot be used. When prohibiting weak encryption algorithm because of security concern 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 0 to 1 0: Normal mode, 1: Secure mode ( Not used TLS_RSA_WITH_RC4_128_SHA, TLS_RSA_WITH_ RC4_128_MD5) 1 Set connect wait at deep sleep recovery To set whether to send wakeup notice after the time set in Settings/Registration menu has elapsed when recovering from deep sleep. When 0 is set, wakeup notice is sent after "Waiting Time for Connection at Startup" has elapsed. When 1 is set, wakeup notice is sent when the machine becomes ready for communication. When a failure of the device management tool occurs 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 0 to 1 0: Wait, 1: Not wait 0 Preferences> Network> Waiting Time for Connection at Startup Setting of wireless LAN invalidation To set whether to disable the wireless LAN. Bringing in and installation of the wireless LAN equipment may be prohibited depending on user. In such case, set 0 to prevent the wireless LAN to be used. When 0 is set, [Wireless Connection Settings] is not displayed in [Settings/Registration]. When bringing in and installation of the wireless LAN equipment is prohibited 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 0 to 1 0: Disabled, 1: Enabled 1 Preferences> Network> Wireless Connection Settings



1142



8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > NETWORK WLANPORT



2 Detail



Use Case Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value



Set of port filter at wireless LAN side *Operation on this item is restricted by the setting of [Restrict Service Representation Access]. To set whether to open all ports at the wireless LAN side. When 0 is set, only the specific port is opened (filter is enabled). Set 1 when using an application which uses a port other than the specific port. All ports are opened (filter is disabled). Upon user's request 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 0 to 1 0: Open the specific port, 1: Open all ports 0



RAW-PORT



2



[For customization]



LINKWAKE



2



Set of deep sleep recovery at link-up



Detail



Use Case Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value WIFIRFCH



2



Amount of Change per Unit BLEPOWER



2 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method Caution Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value



To set whether to recover from deep sleep when link-up (disconnection and then connection of LAN cable) is detected. Set 0 if the closest hub or switch chatters at link-up. It can prevent recovery from deep sleep triggered by chattering. When the machine recovers from deep sleep due to chattering of the closest hub or switch 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 0 to 1 0: Not recovered, 1: Recovered 1 For R&D 1 Set of Bluetooth radio field strength To set the radio field strength for transmission over BLE (Bluetooth Low Energy). As the value is changed by 1, the radio field strength is changed by 1 dBm. When radio field strength of BLE is not appropriate 1) Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Do not change the setting in Singapore. It is prohibited by law. -10 to -1 (-10 to -1 dBm) -5



WSMC-USE



2



[Not used]



WSMC-RST



2



[Not used]



INTENT



2



For R&D



1143



8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > NETWORK UUID-SW



2 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method



Caution Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value Supplement/Memo



UUID generation method change To change to the new UUID generation method when a failure due to the UUID conflict occurred. When the UUID conflict between multiple devices occurred with following symptoms - When searching for the device, one of devices can't be found or the same device is duplicated - When using AirPrint from MacOS, second and later devices cannot be used for scanning 1) Change the setting to "1", and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 3) Delete the registered deice from a PC or mobile device. 4) Execute the device search and register the machine to the PC or mobile device. - After updating the UUID, it is necessary to delete the device and then add the device again from the printer driver, etc. 0 to 1 0: Old method, 1: New method 0 UUID : Universally Unique Identifier This is a unique identifier that is not shared by 2 or more items in the world. It is used to search and register the device on IPP/AirPrint.



■ ENV-SET COPIER (Service mode for printer) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > ENV-SET ENVP-INT



1 Detail



Use Case Adj/Set/Operate Method Caution Display/Adj/Set Range Unit Default Value Related Service Mode Additional Functions Mode Amount of Change per Unit DRY-CISU



1 Detail



Use Case Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value



Temp, humid/Fix Roll temp log get cycle To set the cycle to obtain log of the temperature and humidity inside the machine or the surface temperature of the Fixing Roller. As the value is incremented by 1, the cycle is increased by 1 minute. Obtained log can be displayed by selecting the following: COPIER > DISPLAY > ENVRNT At trouble analysis 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Be sure to set "High" for [Sleep Mode Energy Use] in [Settings/Registration] before collecting logs, and change the value back to its original setting after log collection. 0 to 480 min 60 COPIER> DISPLAY> ENVRNT Preferences> Timer/Energy Settings> Sleep Mode Energy Use 1 ON/OFF of condensation prevention mode To set ON/OFF of condensation prevention mode. Set 1 when an image failure or E225 occurs due to condensation in the Scanner Unit. From the next startup, the Scanner Unit (for front side) stops the fan for 15 sec and the Scanner Unit (for back side) lights LED for 30 sec. When droplets appear on the Scanner Unit due to condensation and image failure or E225 occurs 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 0 to 1 0: OFF (Normal mode), 1: ON (Condensation prevention mode) 0



1144



8. Service Mode



■ CLEANING COPIER (Service mode for printer) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > CLEANING W-CLN-P



2 Detail



Use Case Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range Unit Default Value Amount of Change per Unit CLN-SW



1 Detail



Use Case



Set last rotn Prmry Charge Wir cln intvl To set the offset value of the paper interval for automatic cleaning of the Primary Charging Wire. Default is 2000 sheets, and the paper interval can be changed within the range between 1000 and 5000 sheets. Upon user's request Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key. -1000 to 3000 sheet 0 (2000 sheets) 1 ON/OFF of cleaning black band sequence To set ON/OFF of black band sequence for cleaning. When printing a low duty image while toner ejection operation at low duty image is set to OFF, amount of toner supply to the Cleaning Blade is decreased extremely. Toner is supplied to the edge of Cleaning Blade if the sequence is executed. The execution of sequence is synchronized with the Primary Charging Wire cleaning timing. When setting CLN-SW to 2 and setting CLN-ADJ to 0, the setting value "7" of environment control for each process speed is executed. When setting CLN-SW to 2 and setting CLN-ADJ to other than 0, operation is accorded with the setting value of CLN-ADJ. When setting CLN-SW to 0, operation is not executed regardless of the CLN-ADJ setting. When amount of toner supply to the Cleaning Blade is decreased extremely



Adj/Set/Operate Method



Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.



Display/Adj/Set Range



0 to 2 0: OFF, 1: Based on environment control, 2: ON



Default Value Related Service Mode CLN-ADJ



1 Detail



Use Case Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value Related Service Mode



1 COPIER> OPTION> CLEANING> CLN-ADJ Set black band length for cleaning To set black band length for cleaning. When setting CLN-SW to 2 and setting CLN-ADJ to other than 0, operation is accorded with the setting value of CLN-ADJ. When setting CLN-SW to 0, operation is not executed regardless of the CLN-ADJ setting. When amount of toner supply to the Cleaning Blade is decreased extremely Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 0 to 4 0: Based on environment control, 1: 1000 mm, 2: 2098 mm, 3: 3548 mm, 4: 5000 mm 0 COPIER> OPTION> CLEANING> CLN-SW



1145



8. Service Mode



■ FEED-SW COPIER (Service mode for printer) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > FEED-SW TRY-CHG



2 Detail



Use Case Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value



Set Delivery Tray destn for next job:Fin To set which tray of the finisher the next job is delivered to. When 0 is set, paper is delivered to the Priority Tray unless the Priority Tray is full. When 1 is set, paper is delivered to the tray to which the previous job is delivered. When the tray is full, paper is delivered to an empty tray. Upon user's request 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 0 to 1 0: Deliver to the Priority Tray, 1: Deliver followed by the previous job 0



INSRT-SW



1



[Not used]



DK2-TURN



1



ON/OFF of L-Deck Pckup Rol little rotn



Detail



Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method Caution Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value Related Service Mode



To set whether to rotate the Left Deck Pickup Roller a little after completion of job or at the time of warm-up rotation. If the Pickup Deck has not been used for a long time, a part of the Separation Roller engaged with the Pickup Roller becomes worn and the roller stops rotation. As a result of that, jam may occur. When 1 is set, the Pickup Roller rotates 75mm after completion of job so that wear of the Separation Roller can be reduced. As the usage is extended or at the operation performed first time for the day in a low temperature environment, the Separation Roller is not rotated in response to rotation of the Pickup Roller. As a result of that, jam may occur. When 2 is set, the Pickup Roller rotates 75mm at warm-up rotation. When pickup jam occurs with the following conditions - Pickup Deck has not been used for a long time - The usage is extended - At the operation performed first time for the day in a low temperature environment Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. When ON is set, papers sticking out of the Receptacle may get stuck at the time of opening and closing the deck. 0 to 3 0: OFF, 1: ON after a job, 2: ON at warm-up rotation, 3: ON after a job and at warm-up rotation 0 COPIER> OPTION> FEED-SW> DK1-TURN, DK3-TURN, DK4-TURN, DK5-TURN



1146



8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > FEED-SW DK3-TURN



1 Detail



Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method Caution Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value Related Service Mode DK4-TURN



1 Detail



Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method Caution Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value Related Service Mode



ON/OFF of Casstt3 Pckup Rol little rotn To set whether to rotate the Cassette 3 Pickup Roller a little after completion of job or at the time of warm-up rotation. If the Pickup Cassette has not been used for a long time, a part of the Separation Roller engaged with the Pickup Roller becomes worn and the roller stops rotation. As a result of that, jam may occur. When 1 is set, the Pickup Roller rotates 75mm after completion of job so that wear of the Separation Roller can be reduced. As the usage is extended or at the operation performed first time for the day in a low temperature environment, the Separation Roller is not rotated in response to rotation of the Pickup Roller. As a result of that, jam may occur. When 2 is set, the Pickup Roller rotates 75mm at warm-up rotation. When pickup jam occurs with the following conditions - Pickup Cassette has not been used for a long time - The usage is extended - At the operation performed first time for the day in a low temperature environment Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. When ON is set, papers sticking out of the Receptacle may get stuck at the time of opening and closing the Cassette. 0 to 3 0: OFF, 1: ON after a job, 2: ON at warm-up rotation, 3: ON after a job and at warm-up rotation 0 COPIER> OPTION> FEED-SW> DK1-TURN, DK2-TURN, DK4-TURN, DK5-TURN ON/OFF of Casstt4 Pckup Rol little rotn To set whether to rotate the Cassette 4 Pickup Roller a little after completion of job or at the time of warm-up rotation. If the Pickup Cassette has not been used for a long time, a part of the Separation Roller engaged with the Pickup Roller becomes worn and the roller stops rotation. As a result of that, jam may occur. When 1 is set, the Pickup Roller rotates 75mm after completion of job so that wear of the Separation Roller can be reduced. As the usage is extended or at the operation performed first time for the day in a low temperature environment, the Separation Roller is not rotated in response to rotation of the Pickup Roller. As a result of that, jam may occur. When 2 is set, the Pickup Roller rotates 75mm at warm-up rotation. When pickup jam occurs with the following conditions - Pickup Cassette has not been used for a long time - The usage is extended - At the operation performed first time for the day in a low temperature environment Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. When ON is set, papers sticking out of the Receptacle may get stuck at the time of opening and closing the Cassette. 0 to 3 0: OFF, 1: ON after a job, 2: ON at warm-up rotation, 3: ON after a job and at warm-up rotation 0 COPIER> OPTION> FEED-SW> DK1-TURN, DK2-TURN, DK3-TURN, DK5-TURN



1147



8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > FEED-SW DK1-TURN



1 Detail



Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method Caution Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value Related Service Mode DK5-TURN



1 Detail



Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method Caution Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value Related Service Mode



ON/OFF of R-Deck Pckup Rol little rotn To set whether to rotate the Right Deck Pickup Roller a little after completion of job or at the time of warm-up rotation. If the Pickup Deck has not been used for a long time, a part of the Separation Roller engaged with the Pickup Roller becomes worn and the roller stops rotation. As a result of that, jam may occur. When 1 is set, the Pickup Roller rotates 75mm after completion of job so that wear of the Separation Roller can be reduced. As the usage is extended or at the operation performed first time for the day in a low temperature environment, the Separation Roller is not rotated in response to rotation of the Pickup Roller. As a result of that, jam may occur. When 2 is set, the Pickup Roller rotates 75mm at warm-up rotation. When pickup jam occurs with the following conditions - Pickup Deck has not been used for a long time - The usage is extended - At the operation performed first time for the day in a low temperature environment Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. When ON is set, papers sticking out of the Receptacle may get stuck at the time of opening and closing the deck. 0 to 3 0: OFF, 1: ON after a job, 2: ON at warm-up rotation, 3: ON after a job and at warm-up rotation 0 COPIER> OPTION> FEED-SW> DK2-TURN, DK3-TURN, DK4-TURN, DK5-TURN ON/OFF of OP-Deck Pckup Rol little rotn To set whether to rotate the Option Deck Pickup Roller a little after completion of job or at the time of warm-up rotation. If the Pickup Deck has not been used for a long time, a part of the Separation Roller engaged with the Pickup Roller becomes worn and the roller stops rotation. As a result of that, jam may occur. When 1 is set, the Pickup Roller rotates 75mm after completion of job so that wear of the Separation Roller can be reduced. As the usage is extended or at the operation performed first time for the day in a low temperature environment, the Separation Roller is not rotated in response to rotation of the Pickup Roller. As a result of that, jam may occur. When 2 is set, the Pickup Roller rotates 75mm at warm-up rotation. When pickup jam occurs with the following conditions - Pickup Deck has not been used for a long time - The usage is extended - At the operation performed first time for the day in a low temperature environment Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. When ON is set, papers sticking out of the Receptacle may get stuck at the time of opening and closing the deck. 0 to 3 0: OFF, 1: ON after a job, 2: ON at warm-up rotation, 3: ON after a job and at warm-up rotation 0 COPIER> OPTION> FEED-SW> DK1-TURN, DK2-TURN, DK3-TURN, DK4-TURN



1148



8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > FEED-SW DK1-AIR



1 Detail



Use Case Adj/Set/Operate Method



Caution Display/Adj/Set Range



Default Value Related Service Mode Additional Functions Mode Supplement/Memo



TFL-RTC



1 Detail



Use Case Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range



Default Value Additional Functions Mode



ON/OFF of POD Deck Lite air assist To set ON/OFF of the POD Deck Lite air assist. In the initial settings, the air assist is OFF for plain paper, and ON for coated paper and heavy paper. When do ON with constant air capacity in all paper, set the value to 1. When the transfer failure occurs with coated paper, heavy paper, etc., set the value to 2. When a jam or double feed error frequently occurs with paper of the air assist off, set the value to 3 and usually set air capacity of each paper class in an user mode. - When a jam or double feed error frequently occurs with plain paper - When transfer failure occurs with coated paper and heavy paper Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. -When do set air capacity in an user mode 1)Perform service mode item. COPIER > OPTION > DSPLY-SW > IMGC-ADJ 2)Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 3)Reproduce object media using the user mode. 4)Select the reproduce media setup. 5)Select the adjustment for paper flotation fan level, and set the value. 6)Set the reproduce media of the object deck. When set the value 3, an air capacity control is necessary in an user mode. 0 to 3 0 : Initial setting 1 : Air assist ON (Constant air capacity in all paper) 2 : Air assist OFF (All paper) 3 : Air assist ON (Paper classification setting) 0 COPIER> OPTION> DSPLY-SW> IMGC-ADJ Preference> Paper Settings> Set Paper Type Management When set the value 3, The media which were air assist OFF get possible to set the following air capacity in the adjustment for paper flotation fan level. -5 to 0 : 0% +1 : 20% +2 : 24% +3 : 28% +4 : 32% +5 : 36% Set delvry dest at rcvry after tray full To select the delivery destination for a job with multiple pages after recovering the Delivery Tray that reaches the full level. When 0 is set, a job is output from the delivery destination again from which the last job was delivered. When 1 is set, a job is output from the delivery destination which priority is set as high at "Output Tray Settings" in [Settings/Registration]. When changing the delivery tray 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 0 to 1 0: Output from the tray from which the last job was output, 1: Output from the delivery destination which priority is high among the delivery trays 0 Function Settings> Common> Paper Output Settings> Output Tray Settings



1149



8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > FEED-SW DK1-ALVD



2 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method Caution Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value Related Service Mode DK1-ALVU



2 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method Caution Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value Related Service Mode DK1-LDWN



2



To adjust the airflow amount of the Air Floatation Fan (Downstream) of the POD Deck Lite. When making an adjustment, be sure to adjust the setting of DK1-ALVU. When double-feed occurs. Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key. If the value is large, uneven transfer may occur. If the value is small, double feed may occur. -10 to 10 0 COPIER> OPTION> FEED-SW> DK1-ALVU Deck Air Float Fan airflow amnt:upstream To adjust the airflow amount of the Air Floatation Fan (Upstream) of the POD Deck Lite. When making an adjustment, be sure to adjust the setting of DK1-ALVD. When double-feed occurs. Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key. If the value is large, uneven transfer may occur. If the value is small, double feed may occur. -10 to 10 0 COPIER> OPTION> FEED-SW> DK1-ALVD Set ppr surface level down: Deck standby



Detail



To set whether to lower the paper surface level in the POD Deck Lite or Paper Deck Unit below pickup position during standby. When a trace which looks like that the Pickup Roller had contact with a paper occurs, set 1. It returns to pickup position at the time of starting a job.



Use Case



When trace of the Pickup Roller appears on transparency or the 1st sheet of coated paper in an LL environment



Adj/Set/Operate Method Caution Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value DK1-PSP



Deck Air Float Fan airflow amnt: dwstm



2 Detail



Use Case Adj/Set/Operate Method Caution Display/Adj/Set Range



Default Value



Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. When 1 is set, FCOT becomes longer. 0 to 1 0: Normal (Pickup Roller is in contact), 1: Paper surface level moves down 0 Setting of Deck Pickup Roller eng/diseng To set whether to disengage the Pickup Roller of the POD Deck Lite or Paper Deck Unit every time paper is picked up. When 0 is set, it is disengaged only for heavy paper (151 g/m2 or more), coated paper and transparency. When 1 is set, it is disengaged regardless of the paper type. When trace of the Pickup Roller appears on the 2nd sheet and later Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. If the machine is continued to be used while the setting value is 1, the life of the solenoid becomes shorter. 0 to 1 0: Disengaged only for heavy paper (151 g/m2 or more), coated paper and transparency 1: Disengaged regardless of the paper type 0



1150



8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > FEED-SW PDK-REST



1 Detail



Use Case Adj/Set/Operate Method Caution Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value



Set Deck ppr lvl thrshld: prdctvty prrty To set the threshold value for paper level to be determined as "no paper" in the Deck. As the value is increased, papers remaining in the Deck at the time of switching paper source by auto cassette change decrease. However, in some cases, the machine keeps pickup operation until paper runs out. As a result of that, adjustment needs to be made so productivity may decrease. Therefore, thickness of paper needs to be taken into consideration when making the setting. In case of heavy paper, keep the setting value as 0. In case of thin paper, set a relatively large value. Upon user's request (to use up paper in the Deck) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. As the value is increased, the machine keeps pickup operation until paper runs out so productivity may be decreased. 0 to 5 0: Maximum paper level, ... 5: Minimum paper level 0



■ IMG-RDR COPIER (Service mode for printer) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > IMG-RDR DF-BLINE



2 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method Caution Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value DFDST-L1



1 Detail



Use Case Adj/Set/Operate Method Caution



Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value Supplement/Memo



ON/OFF of dust dtct in DADF stream read To set ON/OFF of dust detection in DADF stream reading mode (measures for black line). When black line occurs due to dust on the Platen Roller 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. When 1 is set, black line is resolved, but sharpness of image edge is decreased. 0 to 1 0: OFF, 1: ON 0 Adj dust detect level: ppr intvl, DADF To adjust dust detection level with dust detection correction control that is executed at paper interval in DADF mode. Reduce the value in the case of frequent display of cleaning instruction at the time of dust detection. As the value is smaller, the dust is less detected. Increase the value when black lines appear. As the value is larger, the small dust is more likely detected. - When black line occurs due to dust - Upon user's request 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. When increasing the value too much, the cleaning instruction screen may appear too often since even small dust that will not be appeared on the image can be detected. When decreasing the value too much, black lines may appear. 0 to 255 0: OFF 170 Black lines may appear on the image if there is dust. With dust detection correction control, the image is corrected to prevent black lines once dust is detected.



1151



8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > IMG-RDR DFDST-L2



1 Detail



Use Case Adj/Set/Operate Method Caution



Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value Supplement/Memo ABC-MODE



1 Detail



Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range



Default Value Supplement/Memo



ABC-MD2



1 Detail



Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range



Default Value Supplement/Memo



Adj dust detect level: after job, DADF To adjust dust detection level with dust detection correction control that is executed after the job is completed in DADF mode. Reduce the value in the case of frequent display of cleaning instruction at the time of dust detection. As the value is smaller, the dust is less detected. Increase the value when black lines appear. As the value is larger, the small dust is more likely detected. - When black line occurs due to dust - Upon user's request 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. When increasing the value too much, the cleaning instruction screen may appear too often since even small dust that will not be appeared on the image can be detected. When decreasing the value too much, black lines may appear. 0 to 255 0: OFF 170 Black lines may appear on the image if there is dust. With dust detection correction control, the image is corrected to prevent black lines once dust is detected. Adj sface digital ABC bckgd dens reduct To adjust the background density reduction setting level of front side digital ABC (Auto Background Control) at B&W mode. Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key. -1 to 4 -1: Setting of the direction which the background reduction is less (For photo original and complex form original) 0: Default 1 to 3: Setting of the direction which the background reduction is more 4: Background density reduction according to the density in the 5 mm portion of the image leading edge 0 Auto Background Control: A control to make the background color of the original close to white with the image processing when reading the image on front side with the Scanner Unit (paper front). Adj back digital ABC bckgd dens reduct To adjust the background density reduction setting level of back side digital ABC (Auto Background Control) at B&W mode. Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key. -1 to 4 -1: Setting of the direction which the background reduction is less (For photo original and complex form original) 0: Default 1 to 3: Setting of the direction which the background reduction is more 4: Background density reduction according to the density in the 5 mm portion of the image leading edge 0 Auto Background Control: A control to make the background color of the original close to white with the image processing when reading the image on back side with the Scanner Unit (paper back).



1152



8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > IMG-RDR DF2DSTL1



1 Detail



Use Case Adj/Set/Operate Method Caution



Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value Supplement/Memo DF2DSTL2



1 Detail



Use Case Adj/Set/Operate Method Caution



Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value Supplement/Memo



Dust detect level: ppr intvl, back, DADF To adjust dust detection level with dust detection correction control that is executed at paper interval by the Scanner Unit (for back side) in DADF mode. Reduce the value in the case of frequent display of cleaning instruction at the time of dust detection. As the value is smaller, the dust is less detected. Increase the value when black lines appear. As the value is larger, the small dust is more likely detected. - When black line occurs due to dust - Upon user's request 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. When increasing the value too much, the cleaning instruction screen may appear too often since even small dust that will not be appeared on the image can be detected. When decreasing the value too much, black lines may appear. 0 to 255 0: OFF 170 Black lines may appear on the image if there is dust. With dust detection correction control, the image is corrected to prevent black lines once dust is detected. Dust detect level: after job, back, DADF To adjust dust detection level with dust detection correction control that is executed by the Scanner Unit (for back side) after the job is completed in DADF mode. Reduce the value in the case of frequent display of cleaning instruction at the time of dust detection. As the value is smaller, the dust is less detected. Increase the value when black lines appear. As the value is larger, the small dust is more likely detected. - When black line occurs due to dust - Upon user's request 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. When increasing the value too much, the cleaning instruction screen may appear too often since even small dust that will not be appeared on the image can be detected. When decreasing the value too much, black lines may appear. 0 to 255 0: OFF 170 Black lines may appear on the image if there is dust. With dust detection correction control, the image is corrected to prevent black lines once dust is detected.



■ IMG-MCON COPIER (Service mode for printer) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > IMG-MCON PASCAL



1 Detail



Use Case Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value



Set of auto gradation adjustment data To set the gradation adjustment data that is used at image formation. When 0 is set, the initial LUT is used. When 1 is set, the gradation adjustment data gamma LUT that is generated by auto gradation adjustment (full/quick adjustment) control is used. When PASCAL-related failure occurs/when identifying the cause of PASCAL-related failure 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 0 to 3 0: Initial LUT, 1: Auto gradation adjustment data, 2 to 3: Not used 1



1153



8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > IMG-MCON SHARP



2 Detail



Use Case Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value DRM-H-SW



2 Detail



Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value SCR-SLCT



2 Detail



Use Case Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value Additional Functions Mode TMC-SLCT



2 Detail



Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range



Default Value



Setting of sharpness level of image To set the setting level (center value) of sharpness of image. As the value is increased, the image tends to be sharp, and as the value is decreased, image tends to be soft. Upon user's request 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 1 to 5 3 ON/OFF of Drum Heater To set ON/OFF control of the Drum Heater at power-off/at sleep. 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 0 to 2 0: ON/OFF depending on the environment condition, 1: ON, 2: OFF 0 Halftone process in Photo Printout mode To set halftone process (error diffusion, 2 screen types) in Photo Printout mode when making a copy. When moire occurs on a copy image, set 0 (suitable for character reproduction). When halftone dots are rough, set 2. When moire image or rough dots occurs on copy image 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 0 to 2 0: Error diffusion, 1: Low screen ruling, 2: High screen ruling 1 Function Settings> Copy> Photo Printout Mode Setting of error diffusion coefficient To set coefficient to be used for error diffusion process. Specify according to the level of granularity and dot stability. 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 0 to 2 0: Small granularity/low dot stability 1: Small granularity/low dot stability (color mode), Large granularity/high dot stability (B&W mode) 2: Large granularity/high dot stability 2



1154



8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > IMG-MCON VP-ART



2 Detail



Use Case Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value VP-TXT



2 Detail



Use Case Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value C-PDL-T



2 Detail



Use Case Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value Supplement/Memo C-S-C-D



2 Detail



Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value Supplement/Memo



Setting of line art processing To set outline processing for line art on scalable PDF. In the outline processing, a binary image outline is extracted in the field which is recognized as line art, and is converted into vector data. Specify whether to convert the binary image outline into vector data or to recognize it as one line (as a thin line). For the thin line, the line width can be specified. Change this value when you want to obtain an output of a wide-width line as one line rather than as an outline (when you want to prioritize edit operation as a line rather than image quality). Upon user's request 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 0 to 99 1 Setting of character vectorization To set vector conversion processing for text on scalable PDF. In the vector conversion processing, a binary image outline is extracted in the field which is recognized as text, and is converted into vector data. In regular vector conversion, function approximation is not used for small text because the image quality is not changed. When the value is changed, function approximation processing is executed for small text, which realizes smooth text although the image quality is changed. Change this value when you want to prioritize smoothness in small text. Upon user's request 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 0 to 99 1 Setting of PDL gradation reference To set whether gradation or density to be prioritized as the gradation reference for PDL. With priority on gradation (% of halftone dots), gradation is matched with original on the shadow area although the maximum density decreases. With priority on density, density is always matched with original. Upon user's request Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 0 to 1 0: Priority on gradation (% of halftone dots), 1: Priority on density 0 Abbreviation of CAL_PDL_Target High density end edge crrct ON/OFF: copy To set ON/OFF of high density trailing edge correction function at copy. With CAL of COPY, high density trailing edge correction function is ON in normal operation; however, set OFF as needed. ON: When reducing jagged line and jagged outline of text OFF: When matching density with original on high density area, or when prioritizing density and gradation Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 0 to 1 0: OFF, 1: ON 1 Abbreviation of CAL_Shadow_COPY_Density. When adjusting the input signal 255 to low in the case that the density of solid area is too high, jaggy (jagged effect of halftone) may occur to text, etc. By entering the input signal 255 as solid, occurrence of jaggy can be prevented.



1155



8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > IMG-MCON WDREDUCT



1 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value Related Service Mode Additional Functions Mode VDADDCNT



1 Detail



Use Case Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value Related Service Mode HDADDCNT



1 Detail



Use Case Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value Related Service Mode LIN-OFST



1 Detail



Use Case Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value Related Service Mode



Setting of white dots reduction mode To set the white dots reduction mode. When 1 is set, white dots become less significant by enlarging black dots by thin line correction. When white dots are significant Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 0 to 1 0: OFF, 1: ON 0 COPIER> OPTION> IMG-MCON> VDADDCNT, HDADDCNT, LIN-OFST Function Settings> Printer> Printer Settings> Custom Settings> Print Quality> Line Refinement, Horizontal Line Refinement, Vertical Line Refinement Horz added dot amnt at white dots reduct To adjust the amount of dots added to side at white dots reduction mode. As the greater value is set, the size of white dot gets smaller. When WDREDUCT is 1, this setting is enabled. When adjusting the level of white dots reduction mode Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 0 to 4 1 COPIER> OPTION> IMG-MCON> WDREDUCT Vert added dot amnt at white dots reduct To adjust the amount of dots added to upside at white dots reduction mode. As the greater value is set, the size of white dot gets smaller. When WDREDUCT is 1, this setting is enabled. When adjusting the level of white dots reduction mode Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 0 to 4 0 COPIER> OPTION> IMG-MCON> WDREDUCT Set special paper added dot amnt offset To set the offset amount of dots added to vertical/horizontal direction when lines on special paper are thinner than those on plain paper. When printing special paper, compared to plain paper, the amount of dots specified with this item is added. As the value is larger, lines become thicker. When WDREDUCT is 0, this setting is enabled. When the line width of special paper is thinner than the one of plain paper Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 0 to 4 1 COPIER> OPTION> IMG-MCON> WDREDUCT



1156



8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > IMG-MCON DOTSCT



2 Detail



Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method Caution



Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value SP-GRAD



2 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value BIN-SEL



2



Set high dens area white dot reduct mode To set the mode to reduce white dots occur in the high density area with 600 dpi. Set 2 when white dots occur at regular intervals in the high density area. Set 0 when degree of gradation in the high density area is decreased due to parts life or environment. - When white dots occur at regular intervals in the high density area - When the degree of gradation is decreased because colors in the high density area become darker Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. - It is enabled only for PDL job. - When 0 is set, white dots may be significant. - When 2 is set, gradation in the high density area may become not noticeable. 0 to 2 0: OFF, 1: ON (Weak), 2: ON (Strong) 1 ON/OFF of special gradation processing To set whether to make the density gradation characteristics of halftone the same as that of conventional machines. When making the density gradation characteristic the same as that of conventional machines Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 0 to 1 0: ON, 1: OFF 1 For R&D



■ IMG-LSR COPIER (Service mode for printer) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > IMG-LSR LAPC-SW



2 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value 2D-SHADE



1 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method Caution Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value Related Service Mode



ON/OFF of ini rotn/last rotn APC crrct To set ON/OFF of laser APC correction executed at initial rotation and last rotation. Upon user's request 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 0 to 1 0: OFF, 1: ON 1 ON/OFF of 2D shading To set ON/OFF of 2D shading. - When uneven image occurs - When low edge density occurs 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. When ON is set, the Drum Heater is turned ON at power-off and during sleep so power consumption is increased. 0 to 2 0: OFF, 1: ON (VD), 2: ON (VL) 0 COPIER> DISPLAY> 2D-SHADE> 2D-STS



1157



8. Service Mode



■ IMG-DEV COPIER (Service mode for printer) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > IMG-DEV DRM-IDL



1 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range Unit Default Value Related Service Mode Amount of Change per Unit DV-RT-LG



1 Detail



Use Case Adj/Set/Operate Method Caution Display/Adj/Set Range Unit Default Value Related Service Mode Amount of Change per Unit ADJ-VPPN



1 Detail



Use Case Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range



Set first idle rotn time in NL Ev To set the duration of idle rotation to be performed first time for the day in an NL (normal temperature/low humidity) environment. When image density for the first time of the day is low 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 0 to 20 0: OFF, 1: 15 sec, 2: 45 sec, ..., 19: 555 sec, 20: 585 sec sec 1 COPIER> OPTION> IMG-DEV> DRM-IDL2, DRM-IDL3 30 Set Developing Assembly idle rotn time To set the duration of idle rotation of the Developing Assembly by COPIER> FUNCTION> MISCP> DV-RT. As the value is incremented by 1, the duration is increased by 1 minute. +: Increase -: Decrease When an image failure is not alleviated by executing idle rotation Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. If the duration is long, deterioration of developer or toner scattering might occur. 1 to 20 min 5 COPIER> FUNCTION> MISC-P> DV-RT 1 Adjustment of developing bias Vpp To adjust Vpp of the developing AC bias. The initial value is 1.5 kV, and as the value is decreased by 1, Vpp is decreased by 0.1 kV (density and fogging increase). Decrease the value when fogging or bias leak occurs, and increase the value when the density is low or white spots occur. When fogging, bias leak, low density, or white spots occur Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key. -2 to 4



Unit



V



Default Value



0



Amount of Change per Unit



100



1158



8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > IMG-DEV DRM-IDL2



1 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range Unit Default Value Related Service Mode Amount of Change per Unit ATM



2 Detail



Use Case Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value LWDTY-SW



1 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method Caution Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value Related Service Mode LWDTYADJ



1 Detail



Use Case Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range Unit Default Value Related Service Mode



Set first idle rotn time in NN Ev To set the duration of idle rotation to be performed first time for the day in an NN (normal temperature/normal humidity) environment. When image density for the first time of the day is low Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 0 to 20 0: OFF, 1: 15 sec, 2: 45 sec, ..., 19: 555 sec, 20: 585 sec sec 1 COPIER> OPTION> IMG-DEV> DRM-IDL, DRM-IDL3 30 Set of highland ev voltg reduction mode To set the highland environment voltage reduction mode in the case that leak occurs at a high latitude. When 1 is set, high voltage settings for the Primary Charging Assembly, Pre-transfer Charging Assembly and developing bias are decreased so that leak can be prevented. When leak occurs at high latitude Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 0 to 1 0: Normal, 1: Voltage reduction mode 0 ON/OFF of low duty ejection To set ON/OFF of low duty ejection control. When 1 is set, developer is ejected at the time of last rotation/during a job. Upon user's request (Reduction of toner consumption) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. Be sure to get approval from the user by telling possibility that the image density may be lowered due to deterioration of developer when setting 0. 0 to 1 0: OFF, 1: ON 0 COPIER> OPTION> IMG-DEV> LWDTYADJ Set low duty ejection threshold value To set offset of image density which becomes the threshold value for the low duty ejection control. The threshold value which becomes a reference differs depending on the environment (temperature and humidity). When a positive value is entered, the interval of low duty ejection control becomes shorter. Lowering of image density can be prevented, but replacement timing of the Waste Toner Container becomes early due to the increase of toner consumption. When density is lowered at the time of continuous output of low duty image Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key. -50 to 50 % 0 COPIER> OPTION> IMG-DEV> LWDTY-SW



1159



8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > IMG-DEV BB-CNT



1 Detail



Use Case Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range Unit Default Value Amount of Change per Unit PRI-SHUT



1 Detail



Use Case Adj/Set/Operate Method Caution



Display/Adj/Set Range Unit Default Value Amount of Change per Unit TBLTCLSW



1 Detail



Use Case Adj/Set/Operate Method Caution Display/Adj/Set Range



Default Value Related Service Mode



Set Bk band output intvl: Cleaning Blade To set the paper interval to output black band for preventing flip of the Cleaning Blade. As the value is changed by 1, the interval (the number of sheets) is changed by 100 sheets. When a negative value is entered, the interval to output black band becomes shorter. The possibility that the Cleaning Blade may be flipped is decreased, but replacement timing of the Waste Toner Container becomes early due to the increase of toner consumption. When flip of the Cleaning Blade occurs Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key. -15 to 15 sheet 0 100 Set Pry/Pre-trn Chg Shutter close timing To set the time from when the Photosensitive Drum stops to when the Primary/Pre-transfer Charging Shutter is closed. With the Primary/Pre-transfer Charging Shutter control, the Primary/Pre-transfer Charging Shutter is closed after 255 to 300 minutes* from the stop of the Photosensitive Drum to prevent image smear due to nitrogen oxide. * It differs according to the environment (moisture content). Decrease the value to close the shutter earlier when image smear occurs first time for the day. As the value is changed by 1, the time is changed by 30 minutes. Depending on the value, the shutter is closed before the machine shifts to sleep mode, so that the first copy time becomes longer for the time to open the shutter again (approx. 13 seconds). As the value is reduced, the life of the Primary/Pre-transfer Charging Wire Cleaning Pad is shortened because cleaning of the Charging Wire is performed every time the shutter is closed. When image smear occurs Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key. - If the shutter is closed before the machine shifts to sleep mode, the first copy time becomes longer for the time to open it again. - As the value is reduced, the life of the Primary/Pre-transfer Charging Wire Cleaning Pad is shortened. -7 to 0 min 0 30 Setting of ETB cleaning timing To set the timing to execute ETB cleaning control. When 1 or 2 is set, it is also executed at the time of the Charging Wire cleaning. As the value is increased, the soiling of the back side of paper is decreased, but the life of the ETB is shortened and productivity is decreased. When the back side of paper is soiled Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. As the number of times of ETB cleaning is increased, the life of the ETB is shortened and productivity is decreased. 0 to 2 0: OFF 1: At last rotation + At Charging Wire cleaning 2: At last rotation + At initial rotation + At Charging Wire cleaning 0 COPIER> OPTION> IMG-DEV> TBLTBIS+, TBLTBIS-, TBLTTMS



1160



8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > IMG-DEV TBLTBIS+



1 Detail



Use Case Adj/Set/Operate Method Caution Display/Adj/Set Range Unit Default Value Related Service Mode Amount of Change per Unit TBLTBIS-



1 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range Unit Default Value Related Service Mode Amount of Change per Unit TBLTTMS



1 Detail



Use Case Adj/Set/Operate Method Caution Display/Adj/Set Range Unit Default Value Related Service Mode Amount of Change per Unit



Setting of ETB cleaning bias (+) To set the transfer current value to apply cleaning bias(+) at the time of ETB cleaning. As the value is increased, the soiling of the back side of paper is decreased, but the life of the ETB is shortened. Compared with TBLTCLSW, productivity can be sustained, but the life of the ETB is shortened further. When the back side of paper is soiled Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key. As the greater value is set, the life of the ETB is shortened. -10 to 10 uA 0 COPIER> OPTION> IMG-DEV> TBLTCLSW, TBLTBIS-, TBLTTMS 10 Setting of ETB cleaning bias (-) To set the transfer current value to apply cleaning bias (-) at the time of ETB cleaning. When the back side of paper is soiled Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 0 to 5 uA 0 COPIER> OPTION> IMG-DEV> TBLTCLSW, TBLTBISP, TBLTTMS 10 Set ETB cleaning bias application times To set the number of times to apply cleaning bias at the time of ETB cleaning. Apply positive (+) and negative (-) cleaning bias alternately. As the value is increased, the soiling of the back side of paper is decreased, but the life of the ETB is shortened and productivity is decreased. When the back side of paper is soiled Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. As the greater value is set, the life of the ETB is shortened and productivity is decreased. 1 to 10 time 2 COPIER> OPTION> IMG-DEV> TBLTCLSW, TBLTBISP, TBLTBIS1



1161



8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > IMG-DEV DRM-IDL3



1 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range Unit Default Value Related Service Mode Amount of Change per Unit



Set first idle rotn time in HH Ev To set the idle rotation time to be performed first time for the day in an HH (high temperature and high humidity) environment. When image density for the first time of the day is low Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 0 to 20 0: OFF, 1: 45 sec, 2: 75 sec, ..., 19: 585 sec, 20: 615 sec sec 1 COPIER> OPTION> IMG-DEV> DRM-IDL, DRM-IDL2 30



■ IMG-FIX COPIER (Service mode for printer) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > IMG-FIX FIX-CLN



1 Detail



Use Case Adj/Set/Operate Method Caution Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value FIX-TEMP



1 Detail



Use Case Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range Unit



Set fixing cleaning execution interval To set the number of sheets as the intervals to execute fixing cleaning. By performing idle rotation of the Fixing Assembly for 5 seconds every time a specified number of sheets are fed , remove soil adhered on the Pressure Roller. Set 1 when an image failure occurs. If it is not alleviated, set 2 or 3. Because idle rotation is executed by interrupting an ongoing job, as the short execution interval is set, productivity decreases. When an image failure due to the Pressure Roller occurs Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. As the short execution interval is set, productivity decreases. 0 to 3 0: OFF, 1: 500 sheets, 2: 300 sheets, 3: 150 sheets 0 Set fixing/productivity: Heavy paper To set priority between productivity and fixing by changing temperature at which down sequence is applied to Heavy paper. When 2 is set, fixing has priority over productivity because the machine is likely to go into the down sequence. When 0 is set, productivity has priority over fixing. When changing priority between fixing and productivity for Heavy paper Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 0 to 2 0: Priority on productivity (-5 degC), 1: Normal, 2: Priority on fixing (+5 degC) deg C



Default Value



1



Amount of Change per Unit



5



FSPD-S1



2 Detail



Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value



Setting of fixing improvement mode To set whether to start the machine in fixing improvement mode. When 1 to 4 is set, duration of warm-up is increased for the specified time to increase the temperature of the Fixing Assembly. 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 0 to 4 0: 0 second, 1: 30 seconds, 2: 60 seconds, 3: 90 seconds, 4: 120 seconds 0



1162



8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > IMG-FIX CBLTINVL



1 Detail



Use Case Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range



Default Value TMP-TBL2



1 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range Unit Default Value TMP-TBL3



1 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range Unit Default Value TMP-TBL4



1 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range Unit Default Value RAG-CONT



1 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method Caution Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value Related Service Mode



Setting of Fixing Web Solenoid ON times To set frequency to turn ON the Fixing Cleaning Web Drive Solenoid. If an image failure occurs due to the soiled Pressure Roller, set 1. If an image failure occurs due to the soiled Separation Claw, set 2. If the life of Fixing Cleaning Web is shorter than the target (500,000 sheets) (in case of much takeup amount of web), set 3. - When an image failure due to the soiled Pressure Roller/Separation Claw occurs - When the life of Fixing Cleaning Web is too short 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 0 to 3 0: Normal, 1: 1.5 times of normal *, 2: 0.5 times of normal, 3: 0.75 times of normal *: Only for paper which length in feed direction is 236.0 mm or less or 364.0 mm or longer 0 Set fixing control temp table: Thin To set the control temperature table of the Fixing Roller for 52 to 63g/m2 size paper. When alleviating the curl Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key. -5 to 2 -5 to -1: -5 deg C, 0: 0 deg C, 1 to 2: +5 deg C deg C 0 Set fixing control temp table To set the control temperature table of the Fixing Roller for 91 to 256g/m2 size paper. When alleviating the curl 1) Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. -5 to 2 -5 to -2: -10 deg C, -1: -5 deg C, 0: 0 deg C, 1 to 2: +5 deg C deg C 0 Set fixing control temp table: Bond To set the control temperature table of the Fixing Roller for bond paper. When alleviating the curl Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key. -5 to 2 -5 to -1: -5 deg C, 0 to 2: 0 deg C deg C 0 Set fix smeared image ctrl mode level To set level of the mode (skipping) to control smeared image caused by fixing area. When a smeared image occurs 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Set RAG-SW to 1 to 3 to enable skipping. 0 to 3 0: No skipping, 1: Small skipping, 2: Medium skipping, 3: Large skipping 0 COPIER> OPTION> IMG-FIX> RAG-SW



1163



8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > IMG-FIX RAG-SW



1 Detail



Use Case Adj/Set/Operate Method Caution Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value Related Service Mode FIX-DWN



2 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value Supplement/Memo FIX-RT



2 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value P-BETWN



1 Detail



Use Case Adj/Set/Operate Method Caution Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value



ON/OFF of fixing burst prevention mode To set ON/OFF of fixing burst prevention mode (skipping) to prevent line burst. Select "1: ON" in the case all horizontal lines are burst. Set ON according to paper type in the case the degree of line burst differs depending on media. When horizontal lines burst Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. Set RAG-CONT to 1 to 3 to enable skipping. 0 to 1 0: OFF, 1: ON 0 COPIER> OPTION> IMG-FIX> RAG-CONT Set prdctvty reduct mode: small size To set the speed ratio in the case of reducing productivity when feeding small size paper. When an image failure (crepe mark) occurs Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key. -3 to 0 -3: 40%, -2: 60%, -1: 80%, 0: 100% 0 Small size paper: Paper width is 257 mm or less. Set idle rotation time at last rotation To set the idle rotation time at last rotation executed after completion of job using paper which width is B4 (257 mm) or less. When an image failure (crepe mark) occurs Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 0 to 3 0: No idle rotation, 1: 10 seconds, 2: 20 seconds, 3: 30 seconds 0 Setting of paper interval: 2-sided mode To set the paper interval at 2-sided mode. Use this item when uneven gloss occurs at intervals of the Fixing Roller circumference (126 mm) on 1st side of 2-sided print. When 1 is set, 150 mm or less paper interval at 2-sided mode becomes 150 mm or more. Uneven gloss can be alleviated, but productivity decreases. When uneven gloss occurs on 1st side of 2-sided print Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. When 1 is set, productivity decreases. 0 to 1 0: Normal, 1: Widening paper interval 0



1164



8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > IMG-FIX FX-IMGLV



2 Detail



Use Case Adj/Set/Operate Method Caution Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value Additional Functions Mode FX-WNKL



2 Detail



Use Case Adj/Set/Operate Method Caution Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value FIX-TMP4



1 Detail



Use Case Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range Unit Default Value



Set img qlty/prdctvty lvl:Qlty Prrty To set image quality/productivity level when "Quality Priority" is set. When "Quality Priority" is selected in [Productivity/Image Quality Priority for Thin/Plain Paper], productivity may be extremely decreased to prevent occurrence of image with crepe mark. When 0 is set, image quality is slightly decreased compared with its of normal Quality Priority mode, but productivity improves (suitable for text document). When 1 is set, image quality is prioritized so image with crepe mark does not occur but productivity decreases (suitable for photo document). This setting is enabled when "Quality Priority" is set in [Settings/Registration]. Upon user's request (Alleviation of image with crepe mark) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. Be sure to get approval from the user by telling that the productivity decreases to improve image quality. 0 to 1 0: Text document mode, 1: Photo document mode 0 Function Settings> Common> Print Settings> Thin/Plain Paper Printing Priority Settings Setting of paper wrinkle prevention mode To set paper wrinkle prevention mode. If the edge temperature of the Fixing Roller is lower than the center temperature, feeding speed at the center of a paper becomes faster than the speed at the edge so paper wrinkle occurs. Normally, when printing to paper larger than A3 or LDR size paper at the start of printing in a high humidity environment, control temperature is increased by performing idle rotation. Paper wrinkle which occurs at this time can be decreased, but first copy time becomes longer. In other cases, idle rotation is not performed. When paper wrinkle occurs with A3/LDR or larger size paper in a normal humidity/high humidity environment, set 2. If paper wrinkle is not alleviated with 2, set 3. (First copy time becomes longer.) When paper wrinkle occurs with B4 or larger size paper in all environments, set 4. If it is not alleviated with 4, set 5 or 6. (As the value is larger, first copy time becomes longer.) - When paper wrinkles occur - Upon user's request (shorten the first copy time) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. When 2 to 6 is set, the first copy time becomes longer. 0 to 6 0: OFF, 1: Normal, 2: Level 1, 3: Level 2, 4: Level 3, 5: Level 4, 6: Level 5 1 Set fixing/productivity: Plain paper To set priority between productivity and fixing by changing temperature at which down sequence is applied to plain paper (64 to 90g/m2). When a positive value is set, fixing has priority over productivity because the machine is likely to go into the down sequence. When a negative value is set, productivity has priority over fixing. - When fixing failure occurs on plain paper - When productivity is decreased due to down sequence Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key. -2 to 2 -2: -6 deg C, -1: -3 deg C, 0: 0 deg C, 1: +3 deg C, 2: +6 deg C deg C 0



1165



8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > IMG-FIX WEB-LIFE



1 Detail



Use Case Adj/Set/Operate Method Caution Display/Adj/Set Range



Default Value Related Service Mode



Set Fixing Web level alarm notice timing To set the timing to notify the Web absence alarm according to the time required for replacement of the Fixing Cleaning Web. The maximum output number until the error message appears after the Fixing Cleaning Web absence alarm is 3000 sheets (on a A4 size conversion basis). If a large volume of papers is output after the appearance of the alarm message, the machine may stop due to an error before replacing the Web. If 0 is set, an alarm is notified when the Fixing Cleaning Web Level Sensor detects "Web absence" as usual. If the value is between 1 and 7, an alarm is notified when the Fixing Cleaning Web Drive Solenoid counter reaches the specified value. As the value is incremented by 1, the threshold of the counter is increased by 50,000 sheets (on a A4 size conversion basis). When changing the timing to notify the Web absence alarm according to the output status Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. Depending on the setting value of COPIER> OPTION> IMG-FIX> CBLTINVL, the number of estimated prints to display an alarm differs. 0 to 7 0: Detection by the sensor, 1: Count of 500,000 sheets (on a A4 size conversion basis), 2: 550,000 sheets, 3: 600,000 sheets, 4: 650,000 sheets, 5: 700,000 sheets, 6: 750,000 sheets, 7: 800,000 sheets 0 COPIER> OPTION> IMG-FIX> CBLTINVL



■ CUSTOM COPIER (Service mode for printer) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > CUSTOM TEMP-TBL



1 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range Unit Default Value CCD-TYPE



2 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value Supplement/Memo



Set fixing control temp table: Plain To set the control temperature table of the Fixing Roller for 64 to 90 g/m2 size paper. When alleviating the curl Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key. -5 to 2 -5 to -1: -5 deg C, 0: 0 deg C, 1 to 2: +5 deg C deg C 0 Setting of CCD Unit type To set the CCD Unit type installed in the Reader to the backup area in the controller. Controller switches the image processing table according to the setting value. When changing the CCD Unit type 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 0 to 1 0: Initial type, 1: Improved type 0 If the CCD Unit is changed after factory shipment, the Reader cannot identify the type.



1166



8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > CUSTOM SC-L-CNT



1 Detail



Use Case Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value Related Service Mode FACT-DEF



2 Detail



Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value MAILYEAR



2 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value SCANTYPE



1 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value PDLEVCT1



2 Detail



Use Case Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value



Set large paper jdgmt reference at scan To set the judgment reference of the scan counter as to which to use B4 or LTR to determine large size. The threshold is determined by the combination with the setting of B4-L-CNT. SC-L-CNT=0, B4-L-CNT=0: paper exceeding B4 is determined as large size, paper with B4 or smaller is determined as small size. SC-L-CNT=0, B4-L-CNT=1: paper with B4 or larger is determined as large size, paper smaller than B4 is determined as small size. As needed 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 0 to 1 0: B4 size, 1: LTR size 0 COPIER> OPTION> USER> B4-L-CNT Set batch chng of factory setting values To set the batch change of factory setting values for customization. 0 to 1 0 Set auto add to e-mail Subject/File name To set whether to add date, time and split number automatically to the end of a character string of e-mail Subject/File name. Upon user's request 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 0 to 1 0: Following the current setting, 1: Adding 0 Switching of DADF + Reader type To switch the type of DADF + Reader to a different type. At installation 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 0 to 1 0: DADF (reverse model) + Reader, 1: DADF (1-path model) + Reader 1 Set event skipping at continuous PDL job To set event skipping at continuous PDL job. During continuous operation, processing performance may be decreased due to other events generated by the event in operation. In this case, decrease of processing performance can be prevented by skipping the amount of event. Processing performance: No event skipping < Subject of skipping 1 Upon user's request 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 0 to 1 0: No event skipping, 1: Subject of skipping 1 1



1167



8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > CUSTOM ABK-TOOL



1 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value Supplement/Memo DEV-SP1



2 Detail



Adj/Set/Operate Method Caution Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value DEV-SP2



2 Detail



Adj/Set/Operate Method Caution Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value DEV-SP3



2 Detail



Adj/Set/Operate Method Caution Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value DEV-SP4



2 Detail



Adj/Set/Operate Method Caution Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value DEV-SP5



2 Detail



Adj/Set/Operate Method Caution Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value



Allow access from address book mntc tool *Operation on this item is restricted by the setting of [Restrict Service Representation Access]. To set whether to accept import from the address book maintenance tool. When executing import from the address book maintenance tool 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 0 to 1 0: Disabled, 1: Enabled 0 Address book maintenance tool: Tool provided from CMJ. Device special settings 1 To execute the device special settings 1. 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Change the setting value in accordance with the instructions from the Quality Support Division. 00000000 to 11111111 00000000 Device special settings 2 To execute the device special settings 2. 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Change the setting value in accordance with the instructions from the Quality Support Division. 00000000 to 11111111 00000000 Device special settings 3 To execute the device special settings 3. 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Change the setting value in accordance with the instructions from the Quality Support Division. 00000000 to 11111111 00000000 Device special settings 4 To execute the device special settings 4. 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Change the setting value in accordance with the instructions from the Quality Support Division. 00000000 to 11111111 00000000 Device special settings 5 To execute the device special settings 5. 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Change the setting value in accordance with the instructions from the Quality Support Division. 00000000 to 11111111 00000000



1168



8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > CUSTOM DEV-SP6



2 Detail



Adj/Set/Operate Method Caution Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value DEV-SP7



2 Detail



Adj/Set/Operate Method Caution Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value DEV-SP8



2 Detail



Adj/Set/Operate Method Caution Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value AC-FREQ



2 Detail



Use Case Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range



Default Value DFEJCLED



1 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value



Device special settings 6 To execute the device special settings 6. 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Change the setting value in accordance with the instructions from the Quality Support Division. 00000000 to 11111111 00000000 Device special settings 7 To execute the device special settings 7. 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Change the setting value in accordance with the instructions from the Quality Support Division. 00000000 to 11111111 00000000 Device special settings 8 To execute the device special settings 8. 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Change the setting value in accordance with the instructions from the Quality Support Division. 00000000 to 11111111 00000000 Setting of frequency of AC power Although power frequency is judged for power control with the machine, it might be judged incorrectly depending on power circumstance at the installation location. At left side column, the power frequency (50 Hz/60 Hz) which the DC Controller judged at poweron is displayed. In the case that the power frequency is not matched with the one at the installation location, set the AC power frequency at right side column. When the breaker is frequently tripped during operation 1) Select the right side column. 2) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. Left side: 1 to 2 1: 50 Hz, 2: 60 Hz Right side: 0 to 2 0: Judged frequency is used, 1: 50 Hz, 2: 60 Hz 0 ON/OFF of DADF Original Output Indicator To set whether to light up the Original Output Indicator of the DADF. Upon user's request (The Original Output Indicator is too bright.) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 0 to 1 0: ON, 1: OFF 0



1169



8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > CUSTOM RDEV-SP1



2 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method Caution Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value RDEV-SP2



2 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method Caution Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value RDEV-SP3



2 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method Caution Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value RDEV-SP4



2 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method Caution Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value RDEV-SP5



2 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method Caution Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value



RCON device special settings 1 To execute the device special setting. For customization 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Use this mode only when specific instructions are given. 00000000 to 11111111 0 RCON device special settings 2 To execute the device special setting. For customization 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Use this mode only when specific instructions are given. 00000000 to 11111111 0 RCON device special settings 3 To execute the device special setting. For customization 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Use this mode only when specific instructions are given. 00000000 to 11111111 0 RCON device special settings 4 To execute the device special setting. For customization 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Use this mode only when specific instructions are given. 00000000 to 11111111 0 RCON device special settings 5 To execute the device special setting. For customization 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Use this mode only when specific instructions are given. 00000000 to 11111111 0



1170



8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > CUSTOM RDEV-SP6



2 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method Caution Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value RDEV-SP7



2 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method Caution Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value RDEV-SP8



2 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method Caution Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value



RCON device special settings 6 To execute the device special setting. For customization 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Use this mode only when specific instructions are given. 00000000 to 11111111 0 RCON device special settings 7 To execute the device special setting. For customization 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Use this mode only when specific instructions are given. 00000000 to 11111111 0 RCON device special settings 8 To execute the device special setting. For customization 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Use this mode only when specific instructions are given. 00000000 to 11111111 0



PAP-TYPE



2



[For customization]



DCM-EXCL



1



[For customization]



FPOT-MD



2



[For customization]



■ USER COPIER (Service mode for printer) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > USER COPY-LIM



1 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value



Setting of upper limit for copy To set the upper limit value for copy. Upon user's request 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 1 to 9999 9999



1171



8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > USER SLEEP



1 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value Additional Functions Mode Supplement/Memo SIZE-DET



2 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value COUNTER1



1 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method Caution Default Value COUNTER2



1 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value COUNTER3



1 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value



Setting of auto sleep function To set ON/OFF of auto sleep function. Upon user's request 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 0 to 1 0: OFF, 1: ON 1 Preferences> Timer/Energy Settings> Auto Sleep Time The time to shift to the sleep mode can be set in Settings/Registration> Preferences> Timer/Energy Settings> Auto Sleep Time. ON/OFF of original size detect function To set ON/OFF of original size detection function. Upon user's request (The LED is too bright, etc.) 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 0 to 1 0: OFF, 1: ON 1 Display of software counter 1 To display counter type for software counter 1 on the Counter Check screen. Upon user/dealer's request N/A (Display only) Display only. No change is available. It differs according to the location. Setting of software counter 2 To set counter type for software counter 2 on the Counter Check screen. Upon user/dealer's request 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 0 to 999 0: No registration It differs according to the location. Setting of software counter 3 To set counter type for software counter 3 on the Counter Check screen. Upon user/dealer's request 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 0 to 999 0: No registration It differs according to the location.



1172



8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > USER COUNTER4



1 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value COUNTER5



1 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value COUNTER6



1 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value DATE-DSP



2 Detail



Use Case Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value Additional Functions Mode MB-CCV



2 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value



Setting of software counter 4 To set counter type for software counter 4 on the Counter Check screen. Upon user/dealer's request 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 0 to 999 0: No registration It differs according to the location. Setting of software counter 5 To set counter type for software counter 5 on the Counter Check screen. Upon user/dealer's request 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 0 to 999 0: No registration 0 Setting of software counter 6 To set counter type for software counter 6 on the Counter Check screen. Upon user/dealer's request 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 0 to 999 0: No registration 0 Setting of data/time display format *Operation on this item is restricted by the setting of [Restrict Service Representation Access]. To set date/time display format according to the country or region. After the display format is set with this mode, the order of date is reflected to the followings: Preferences > Timer/Energy Settings > Date/Time Settings, and report output. Upon user's request 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 0 to 2 0: YYMM/DD, 1: DD/MMYY, 2: MM/DD/YY It differs according to the location. Preferences> Timer/Energy Settings> Date/Time Settings Control card usage limit for Mail Box *Operation on this item is restricted by the setting of [Restrict Service Representation Access]. To restrict use of control card for Mail Box. Upon user's request 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 0 to 1 0: Unlimited, 1: Limited 1



1173



8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > USER CONTROL



1 Detail



Use Case Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value Related Service Mode B4-L-CNT



1 Detail



Use Case Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value Related Service Mode MF-LG-ST



2 Detail



Use Case Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value Additional Functions Mode Supplement/Memo CNT-DISP



2 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value



Charge setting of PDL job *Operation on this item is restricted by the setting of [Restrict Service Representation Access]. To set charge count transmission of PDL job to the connecting charging management device (Coin Manager or non-Canon-made control card). Upon user's request 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 0 to 1 0: No charge, 1: Charge 0 COPIER> OPTION> ACC> COIN Count setting of B4 size To set B4 count with software counter 1 to 8 as to whether B4 is counted as large size or small size. Selecting 1 counts B4 or larger size paper as large size while paper smaller than B4 size as small size. Upon user's request 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 0 to 1 0: Small size, 1: Large size 0 COPIER> OPTION> CUSTOM> SC-L-CNT ON/OFF of long original mode display To set whether to display or hide the [Long Original] button. When 1 is set, [Long Original] button is displayed in Copy > Options screen and the long strip paper becomes available. Upon user's request (use of long strip original or long strip paper) 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 0 to 1 0: Hide, 1: Display 0 Copy> Options Up to 630mm length paper is supported when DADF is used. Display/hide of serial No. To set whether to display or hide the serial No. on the Counter Check screen. When setting to display/hide serial No. on the Counter Check screen. 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 0 to 1 0: OFF, 1: ON 0



1174



8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > USER PH-D-SEL



2 Detail



Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value Related Service Mode COPY-JOB



1 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value OP-SZ-DT



2 Detail



Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value NW-SCAN



2 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method Caution



Display/Adj/Set Range



Set dither matrix at screen processing To set the screen dither matrix to be used for halftoning processing at the time of copy output, B&W Inbox scan output and B&W SEND output. When moire occurs frequently, set to "0: 134 lines". When the setting is changed, the number of PG lines to be output at PASCAL control is also changed. When moire frequently occurs at the time of copy output, B&W Inbox scan output and B&W SEND output. Especially when moire frequently occurs in the halftone density area of photo and image gradation areas 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 0 to 1 0: 134 lines, 1: 141 lines 1 COPIER> OPTION> USER> PH-D-SL2 Setting of copy job reservation To set to enable/disable copy job reservation when the Card Reader/Coin Manager is used. Upon user's request 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 0 to 1 0: Enabled, 1: Disabled 0 Orgnl size dtct ON/OFF at copyboard open To set ON/OFF of original size detection while the Copyboard is opened. When "0: OFF" is set, enter original size manually from the Control Panel. When "1: ON" is set, original size is detected automatically. 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 0 to 1 0: OFF, 1: ON 0 Setting of network scan function usage *Operation on this item is restricted by the setting of [Restrict Service Representation Access]. To set to enable/disable use of network scan function. Upon user's request 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. - Do not change this mode in Japan. - For PS/PCL machines for overseas (outside Japan), fix the setting value as "1: Enabled". For others, permit the use. 0 to 1 0: Disabled, 1: Enabled



1175



8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > USER JOB-INVL



2 Detail



Use Case Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range



Default Value TAB-ROT



1 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value PR-PSESW



1 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value IDPRN-SW



1 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range



Default Value



Job intvl setting at interruption copy To set output interval between jobs at the time of interruption copy. Sorting is difficult after interruption copy because of the continuous output of the next job. Paper interval becomes longer when starting pickup for the next job after the last sheet of the previous job is delivered. Upon user's request 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 0 to 2 0: Continuous output of the interruption copy and the next job 1: Starting pickup for the next job after the interruption copy is delivered all. 2: Starting pickup for the next job after the previous job is delivered all. (For all jobs) 0 Set of landscape img rotn at PDL:tab ppr To set whether to rotate landscape image by 180 degrees when PDL print is made on tab paper. When 1 is set, image is rotated. Upon user's request 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 0 to 1 0: Not rotated, 1: Rotated 0 ON/OFF Pause All Print Jobs button dspl To set whether to display [Pause All Print Jobs] button on the Status Monitor/Cancel screen. - Upon user's request - When promptly stopping the print job in operation or under reservation 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 0 to 1 0: OFF, 1: ON 1 Charge target job set of dept mngm cntr *Operation on this item is restricted by the setting of [Restrict Service Representation Access]. To set the job type that advances the department management counter. Upon user's request 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 0 to 1 0: PRINT category: BoxPrint, ReportPrint, PDLPrint COPY category: COPY 1: PRINT category: ReportPrint, PDLPrint COPY category: COPY, BoxPrint 0



1176



8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > USER PCL-COPY



2 Detail



Use Case Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range



Default Value CNT-SW



1 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method Caution Display/Adj/Set Range



Default Value TAB-ACC



1 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method Caution



Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value



Set of PCL COPIES command control method To set the binder control method of COPIES command with PCL. Select whether to use the control method of Canon-made PCL or use the same control method of non-Canon-made PCL. Upon user's request 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 0 to 65535 0: Control method of Canon-made PCL (following the value of COPIES command that is specified for each page to control on a page basis) 1: Control method of non-Canon-made PCL (handling the value of COPIES command, which is specified for page 1 at the time of Collate mode, as bind figure while the value of COPIES command for the next page or later is invalid. Same control applies as Canon-made PCL at the time of nonsorted mode) 2 to 65535: For future use 0 Set default dspl items on charge counter To set default display items of the charge counter on the Counter Check screen. For details of each type, refer to the Service Manual. Upon user's request 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Do not use this mode overseas (outside Japan). 0 to 2 Typical combinations of locations are shown below. For other combinations, refer to the Service Manual. For Japan 0: Counter 1 - Total 1: 101 1: Counter 1 - Total 2: 102, Counter 2 - Copy (Total 2): 202, Counter 3 - Total A2: 127 2: Not used For UL 0: Counter 1 - Total 1: 101, Counter 2 - Total (Large): 103, Counter 3 - Copy (Total 1): 201, Counter 4 - Copy (Large): 203 1: Counter 1 - Total 2: 102, Counter 2 - Copy (Total 2): 202 2: Not used 0 ON/OFF of auto cst change for tab ppr To set to enable/disable auto cassette change when tab paper runs out. Upon user's request 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Be sure to instruct the user to thoroughly comply the following: - Use tab paper with the same number of tabs. - Set tab paper. Be sure to comply the above; otherwise, proper print is not available and it can cause soil inside the machine because of toner. 0 to 1 0: OFF, 1: ON 0



1177



8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > USER BCNT-AST



1 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value PRJOB-CP



2 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value Supplement/Memo DOC-REM



1 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value DPT-ID-7



2 Detail



Use Case



Set of box print charge target job *Operation on this item is restricted by the setting of [Restrict Service Representation Access]. To set the job type that advances the count in box print with NE Controller (ASSIST). When switching the job type that is subject to counting of the box print with NE Controller 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 0 to 1 0: PDL job, 1: Copy job 0 Set count TX at RX/report print To set to enable/disable a page-basis count pulse transmission to the charging management device at the time of reception print or report print. Upon user's request 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 0 to 1 0: No transmission, 1: Transmission 0 Charging management device: Coin Manager, Non-Canon-made control card Display/hide of original removal message To set whether to display or hide the message to remove original when scanning with DADF without opening/closing DADF after scanning with the Copyboard. Upon user's request 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 0 to 1 0: Hide, 1: Display 0 Password entry set at dept ID reg/auth *Operation on this item is restricted by the setting of [Restrict Service Representation Access]. To set whether to require a password entry at the time of registration/authentication of department ID. With the setting to require entry, entry of 7-digit password is required as well as entry of department ID. Upon user's request



Adj/Set/Operate Method



1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.



Display/Adj/Set Range



0 to 1 0: Department ID only, 1: 7-digit (password) entry



Default Value RUI-RJT



2 Detail



Use Case Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value



0 Connct set at invalid auth from remoteUI *Operation on this item is restricted by the setting of [Restrict Service Representation Access]. To set to disconnect HTTP port when the machine receives invalid authentication from remote UI 3 times. Upon user's request 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 0 to 1 0: Continued connection, 1: Disconnected 0



1178



8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > USER FREG-SW



2 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method Caution Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value Supplement/Memo IFAX-SZL



2 Detail



Use Case Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value Additional Functions Mode Supplement/Memo IFAX-PGD



2 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method Caution



Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value Additional Functions Mode Supplement/Memo



ON/OFF MEAP counter free reg area dspl To set whether to display or hide the free register area of MEAP counter for SEND At trouble analysis 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Take necessary action in accordance with the instructions from the Quality Support Division. 0 to 1 0: Hide, 1: Display 0 Individual count-up (counter advance) of MEAP application is available in the free register area of MEAP counter. Set of I-Fax transmission size limit To set for restricting data size at the time of I-Fax transmission that does not go through the server. With the setting to restrict the data size, it is to be #830 error in the case of sending data that exceeds the upper limit value. In the case that the data goes through the server, the size of transmission data is always restricted. Upon user's request 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 0 to 1 0: Limited, 1: Not limited (Restriction applies when data goes through the server.) 1 Function Settings> Send> E-Mail/I-Fax Settings> Maximum Data Size for Sending Set the upper limit value for transmission data size in Settings/Registration menu. Set page split TX at IFax Simple mode TX To set whether to perform split-data transmission on a page basis in the case that the transmission size in I-Fax Simple mode exceeds the upper limit value. Upon user's request 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. In the case to enable split-data transmission, be sure to get approval from the user by explaining the following: - No guarantee for page order on the reception side - There is a possibility of interruption of other received jobs between pages. 0 to 1 0: Disabled, 1: Enabled 0 Function Settings> Send> E-Mail/I-Fax Settings> Maximum Data Size for Sending Set the upper limit value for transmission data size in Settings/Registration menu.



1179



8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > USER MEAPSAFE



2 Detail



Use Case Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value AFN-PSWD



2 Detail



Use Case Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value PTJAM-RC



2 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value PDL-NCSW



2 Detail



Use Case Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range



Default Value



Setting of MEAP safe mode *Operation on this item is restricted by the setting of [Restrict Service Representation Access]. To set safe mode for MEAP platform. MPSF is displayed on the Control Panel in safe mode. In safe mode, MEAP application is stopped while just the system application, which starts with initial state, is activated. Logs for cause analysis of MEAP failure can be obtained. Perform system recovery processing when MEAP platform fails to be activated due to resource confliction between MEAP applications, service registration or use order. 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 0 to 1 0: Normal mode, 1: Safe mode 0 Setting of Set/Reg menu access limit *Operation on this item is restricted by the setting of [Restrict Service Representation Access]. To set restriction on accessing Settings/Registration menu by entering password. With the setting to enable this mode, password entry of system administrator is required after pressing Settings/Registration key. Upon user's request 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 0 to 1 0: Password is not required, 1: Password is required 0 Auto reprint setting at PDL print jam To set to automatically restart printing after jam recovery that occurs with PDL print. Upon user's request 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 0 to 1 0: Not automatically reprinted, 1: Automatically reprinted 1 Card mngm setting for PDL print job *Operation on this item is restricted by the setting of [Restrict Service Representation Access]. To set to make PDL print job to be subject to card management by the Card Reader. With the setting to enable this mode, PDL print is available only when the card ID of the card inserted to the Card Reader matches the department ID. Upon user's request 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 0 to 1 0: PDL print is available with no card inserted. 1: PDL print is available only when the card ID matches the department ID in the case that the card is inserted. 0



1180



8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > USER PS-MODE



2 Detail



Use Case Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range



Default Value CNCT-RLZ



2 Detail



Use Case Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value Supplement/Memo



JA-FUNC



2 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method Caution Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value JA-JOB



2 Detail



Use Case Adj/Set/Operate Method Caution Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value Related Service Mode



Setting of PS print line drawing To set the image processing at PS print. Set 8 when line width differs depending on the drawing position although the same line width is set. Use case When right and left ruled lines are different in width 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 0 to 65535 0 to 7: Spare 8: Strokeadjustment is enabled. 9 to 65535: Spare 0 Setting of connection serialize function Connection serialize is a function to assure job grouping function of imageWARE Output Manager Select Edition V1.0. The setting to enable this mode can avoid job rearrangement because the machine does not receive job data from other connection until it completes job data reception from the current connection. Upon user's request 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 0 to 1 0: OFF, 1: ON 0 Connection: Connection to be established through network between multiple hosts (PC, etc). Job grouping function: A function of imageWARE Output Manager Select Edition V1.0. This is to prevent job interruption from other PC by group job (sending multiple jobs in 1 session at job transmission). Display of job archive function ON/OFF To display ON/OFF of job archive function. Make the setting with the MEAP program which supports job archiving. When using the job archive function N/A (Display only) Setting cannot be made with this item. 0 to 1 0: OFF, 1: ON 0 Display of job archive target job To display the job type subject to job archive. When the job archive function is ON, archive operation is executed when executing the target job. Make the setting with the MEAP program which supports job archiving. When using the job archive function N/A (Display only) Setting cannot be made with this item. 0: N/A, 3: Limited to FAX/IFAX, 0xFFFFFFFF: All jobs 0 COPIER> OPTION> USER> JA-FUNC



1181



8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > USER JA-RESTR



2 Detail



Use Case Adj/Set/Operate Method Caution Display/Adj/Set Range



Default Value Related Service Mode LDAP-SW



1 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range



Default Value Supplement/Memo



FROM-OF



1 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value FILE-OF



1 Detail



Use Case Adj/Set/Operate Method Caution Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value



Display of job archive restriction items To display restriction items for job archive specification. When the job archive function is ON, follow the setting to execute operation to restrict specification. Make the setting with the MEAP program which supports job archiving. When using the job archive function N/A (Display only) Setting cannot be made with this item. 0 to 1 0: OFF, 1: ON 32 specification restrictions with Bit definition Bit0: Function to obtain image file (0: OFF, 1: ON) Bit1: Function to compose form registration (0: OFF, 1: ON) Bit2: Function to edit document (0: OFF, 1: ON) 0 COPIER> OPTION> USER> JA-FUNC Retrieval condition set for LDAP server To set the condition to search e-mail address, etc. from LDAP server. When specifying condition to search e-mail address, etc. from LDAP server 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 0 to 5 0: Includes the next, 1: Not include the next, 2: Equivalent to the next, 3: Not equivalent to the next, 4: Starts with the next, 5: Finishes with the next 4 LDAP (Lightweight Directory Access Protocol): Registering LDAP server enables to search e-mail address, etc. from LDAP server and the result can be registered in the Address Book, etc. Registration is available by the following: Set Destination > Register LDAP Server Deletion of mail sender's address *Operation on this item is restricted by the setting of [Restrict Service Representation Access]. To set whether to delete the sender's address (From) at the time of e-mail transmission. Upon user's request 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 0 to 1 0: Retained, 1: Deleted 0 Set file transmission to entered address *Operation on this item is restricted by the setting of [Restrict Service Representation Access]. To set whether to allow file transmission to a newly entered address. When 1 is set, file transmission is not available by entering the address because "File" is not displayed on the transmission screen. The addresses already registered in the Address Book can be used. Upon user's request 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. To restrict addresses for transmission, be sure to manually delete them because the addresses registered in the Address Book can be used. 0 to 1 0: Enabled, 1: Disabled 0



1182



8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > USER MAIL-OF



1 Detail



Use Case Adj/Set/Operate Method Caution Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value IFAX-OF



1 Detail



Use Case Adj/Set/Operate Method Caution Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value LDAP-DEF



1 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range



Default Value Related Service Mode



Setting of e-mail TX to entered address *Operation on this item is restricted by the setting of [Restrict Service Representation Access]. To set whether to allow e-mail transmission to a newly entered address. When 1 is set, e-mail transmission is not available by entering the address because "E-mail" is not displayed on the transmission screen. The addresses already registered in the Address Book can be used. Upon user's request 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. To restrict addresses for transmission, be sure to manually delete them because the addresses registered in the Address Book can be used. 0 to 1 0: Allowed, 1: Prohibited 0 Setting of I-Fax TX to entered address * Operation on this item is restricted by the setting of [Restrict Service Representation Access]. To set whether to allow I-Fax transmission to a newly entered address. When 1 is set, I-Fax transmission is not available by entering the address because "I-Fax" is not displayed on the transmission screen. The addresses already registered in the Address Book can be used. Upon user's request 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. To restrict addresses for transmission, be sure to manually delete them because the addresses registered in the Address Book can be used. 0 to 1 0: Enabled, 1: Disabled 0 Initial condtn set of LDAP server search To set initial condition for search target attribute that is specified at the time of LDAP server Details search. Upon user's request 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 0 to 6 0: Name, 1: E-mail, 2: FAX, 3: Organization, 4: Organization unit, 5: No registration 1 (any setting), 6: No registration 2 (any setting) 0 COPIER> OPTION> USER> LDAP-SW



1183



8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > USER FREE-DSP



2 Detail



To set whether to display or hide the "Use Charge Management" screen for switching between charge and no charge. The hardware switch for switching charge/no charge in the Coin Manager enables the mode in which all the services are available for free (store manager mode) by temporarily canceling the charging system. Even without the hardware switch, the mode can be switched with the software switch when it is set to display the "Use Charge Management" screen in [Settings/Registration].



Use Case



When enabling all the services to be provided for free by temporarily canceling the charging system



Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value Additional Functions Mode TNRB-SW



2 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value Supplement/Memo



DK1-ASST



ON/OFF of charge disable screen



1 Detail



Use Case Adj/Set/Operate Method Caution Display/Adj/Set Range



Default Value



1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 0 to 1 0: Hide, 1: Display 0 Management Settings> Charge Management> Use Charge Management Display/hide of Toner Container counter To set whether to display the Toner Container counter on the Counter Check screen. When showing the Toner Container counter to the user 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 0 to 1 0: Hide, 1: Display It differs according to the location. 60s: The number of premature replacements of the Toner Container 70s: The number of installations of a new Toner Container 80s: The number of installations of a new Toner Container + the number of premature replacements 180s: The number of installations of unidentified Toner Container Set of POD Deck Lite Air Heater control To set the condition to turn ON the Air Heater at the POD Deck Lite in accordance with media/ environment. When the media is switched from non-coated paper to coated paper, pickup operation does not start until the temperature of the Air Heater reaches the specified temperature; thus, waiting time occurs. When 1 is set, the Air Heater is turned ON for coated paper only. When the use environment is near the threshold for turning ON/OFF the Air Heater, switching occurs frequently, which increases the wait time. When 2 is set, the heater is always ON regardless of media and environment. Upon user's request (to shorten the waiting time) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. Be sure to get approval from the user in advance by explaining that there is a possibility that transfer performance may decrease in a low humidity environment when 2 is set. 0 to 2 0: ON/OFF depending on the media/environment condition 1: ON for coated paper only 2: Always ON (No environment/media-dependant) 0



1184



8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > USER USBH-DSP



2 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value Additional Functions Mode USBM-DSP



2 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method Caution Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value Additional Functions Mode USBI-DSP



2 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method Caution Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value Additional Functions Mode CTCHKDSP



1 Detail



Use Case Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value



ON/OFF of USB host use display To set whether to display "Preferences > External Interface > USB Settings > Use USB Host". By selecting "1: Display", whether to use USB host on USB Settings screen can be selected. When switching to display or hide "Use USB Host" on USB Settings screen 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 0 to 1 0: Hide, 1: Display 0 Preferences> External Interface> USB Settings> Use USB Host ON/OFF USB ex-mem device MEAP driver use To set whether to display [Use MEAP Driver for USB Storage Device] in [Settings/Registration]. When 0 is set, the item is not displayed so that the user administrator cannot change the setting. When not allowing the user administrator to select whether to use the MEAP driver 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. When setting 0, be sure to make the setting after the specified setting is completed. 0 to 1 0: OFF, 1: ON 1 Preferences> External Interface> USB Settings> Use MEAP Driver for USB External Device ON/OFF USB input device MEAP driver use To set whether to display [Use MEAP Driver for USB Input Device] in [Settings/Registration]. When 0 is set, the item is not displayed so that the user administrator cannot change the setting. When not allowing the user administrator to select whether to use the MEAP driver 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. When setting 0, be sure to make the setting after the specified setting is completed. 0 to 1 0: OFF, 1: ON 1 Preferences> External Interface> USB Settings> Use MEAP Driver for USB Input Device Display/hide of counter print To set whether to display or hide "Print List" on the Counter Check screen. Model name, model number information, counter check date and counter information can be output as a total count management report. Upon user's request 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 0 to 1 0: Hide, 1: Display 1



1185



8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > USER DFLT-ADJ



1 Detail



Use Case Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range



Default Value Additional Functions Mode USBR-DSP



2 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value Additional Functions Mode POL-SCAN



1 Detail



Use Case Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value



Tgt Auto Adj Gradation initial dspl set To set the initial display of the target full adjustment/quick adjustment items on [Auto Adjust Gradation] in [Settings/Registration]. This setting is enabled when EFI Controller is connected or only on the copy model which Adobe PS/PDF is available. When 0 is set, the target adjustment item is not displayed. When 1 to 3 is set, the target adjustment items (Copy/Printer/Both) are displayed and one of them is selected. When switching the initial display at the time of Auto Adjust Gradation 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 0 to 3 0: Adjustment item is not displayed. 1: "Copy" in the target adjustment items is selected. 2: "Printer" in the target adjustment items is selected. 3: "Both" in the target adjustment items is selected. 0 Adjustment/Maintenance> Adjust Image Quality> Auto Adjust Gradation ON/OFF USB infrared devc MEAP driver use To set whether to display "Use MEAP Driver for USB Infrared Device" in [Settings/Registration]. When 1 is set, whether to use MEAP driver can be selected on USB Settings screen. When allowing the user administrator to select whether to use the MEAP driver 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 0 to 1 0: OFF, 1: ON 0 Preferences> External Interface> USB Settings> Use MEAP Driver for USB Infrared Device ON/OFF Rights Management Server set dspl When "1: Display" is set, the Rights Management Server function screen is displayed. While the Rights Management Server function is a standard feature, it is possible to hide if not necessary. Upon user's request 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 0 to 1 0: Hide, 1: Display It differs according to the location.



1186



8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > USER PH-D-SL2



2 Detail



When copying or B&W scanning to Inbox in text/photo mode, halftone processing of the image which reproduces gradation of text and photo judgment areas can be specified with this setting. Set to 1 when jaggy occurs or request to use the same halftoning method (text area) as conventional one is raised. Set to 2 when moire occurs frequently or request to use the same halftoning method as conventional B&W MFP method is raised. Even 0 is set, TBIC is used for text judgment area and low screen ruling for photo judgment area at the time of B&W Inbox scan. The setting is disabled when the B&W Inbox scanning density is set to auto.



Use Case



- When jaggy occurs on the edge of text or thin lines at copy output. Especially when jaggy occurs in the text or thin lines (text in halftone dots) of the area where gradation in the halftone density is expressed like photo, graphics, etc. - When moire occurs frequently at the time of copy or B&W Inbox scan Especially when moire frequently occurs in the area where gradation in the halftone density is expressed like photo, graphics, etc. and this symptom is not alleviated with PH-D-SEL or sharpness adjustment - When receiving a request to use the same halftoning method (text area) as the conventional one (model with image area separation method) at copy output - When receiving a request to use the same halftoning method (both text and photo areas) as the conventional B&W MFP method at the time of copy or B&W Inbox output



Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range



Default Value Related Service Mode W-TN-DSP



1 Detail



Use Case Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value SCAN-RSL



Set halftone process in text/photo mode



2 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value



1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 0 to 2 0: Low screen ruling (134 lines) is used for photo judgment area and high screen ruling (141 lines) for text judgment area. 1: Low screen ruling is used for photo judgment area and TBIC for text judgment area. 2: TBIC is used for both photo and text judgment areas. 0 COPIER> OPTION> USER> PH-D-SEL ON/OFF of Wst Tonr Cont rplce procedure To set whether to display the replacement procedure on the Control Panel when the Waste Toner Container is full. Set 0 when a service technician replaces the Waste Toner Container. In this case, the replacement procedure is not displayed. Set 1 when the user performs the replacement. The animation showing the replacement procedure is displayed. When the user replaces the Waste Toner Container Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 0 to 1 0: OFF, 1: ON 0 Setting of scanned image resolution To set the resolution of image which is generated by scan processing. When the scan processing performance with 1200 dpi is low 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 0 to 1 0: 600 dpi, 1: 1200 dpi 0



1187



8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > USER JA-SBOX



2 Detail



Use Case Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value JA-DFAX



2 Detail



Use Case Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value JA-REP



2 Detail



Use Case Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value JA-FREP



2 Detail



Use Case Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value JA-BOX



2 Detail



Use Case Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value



Setting of linking with Advanced Box:SAM *Operation on this item is restricted by the setting of [Restrict Service Representation Access]. To set the link with Advanced Box when iW SAM is enabled. When 1 is set, linking with Advanced Box is enabled. When the operation restriction is cleared at the time of iW SAM 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 0 to 1 0: Disabled, 1: Enabled 0 Setting of direct fax transmission: SAM *Operation on this item is restricted by the setting of [Restrict Service Representation Access]. To set the direct fax transmission when iW SAM is enabled. When 1 is set, the direct fax transmission is enabled. When the operation restriction is cleared at the time of iW SAM 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 0 to 1 0: Disabled, 1: Enabled 0 Setting of TX Report with image: SAM *Operation on this item is restricted by the setting of [Restrict Service Representation Access]. To set the TX Report with image when iW SAM is enabled. When 1 is set, the TX Report with image is enabled. When the operation restriction is cleared at the time of iW SAM 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 0 to 1 0: Disabled, 1: Enabled 0 Setting of Fax TX Report with image: SAM *Operation on this item is restricted by the setting of [Restrict Service Representation Access]. To set the Fax TX Report with image when iW SAM is enabled. When 1 is set, the Fax TX Report with image is enabled. When the operation restriction is cleared at the time of iW SAM 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 0 to 1 0: Disabled, 1: Enabled 0 Setting of Inbox document operation: SAM *Operation on this item is restricted by the setting of [Restrict Service Representation Access]. To set the operation for Inbox document at the time of iW SAM When 1 is set, the Inbox document can be operated. When the operation restriction is cleared at the time of iW SAM 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 0 to 1 0: Disabled, 1: Enabled 0



1188



8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > USER JA-FORM



2 Detail



Use Case Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value JA-PREV



2 Detail



Use Case Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value JA-PULL



2 Detail



Use Case Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value JA-PDLB



2 Detail



Use Case Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value JA-JOBK



2 Detail



Use Case Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value



Setting of image composition: SAM *Operation on this item is restricted by the setting of [Restrict Service Representation Access]. To set the image composition when iW SAM is enabled. When 1 is set, the image composition is enabled. When the operation restriction is cleared at the time of iW SAM 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 0 to 1 0: Disabled, 1: Enabled 0 Setting of preview page deletion: SAM *Operation on this item is restricted by the setting of [Restrict Service Representation Access]. To set whether a page is deleted from the scan preview screen at the time of iW SAM When 1 is set, a page is deleted from the scan preview screen. When the operation restriction is cleared at the time of iW SAM 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 0 to 1 0: Disabled, 1: Enabled 0 Setting of network scan: SAM *Operation on this item is restricted by the setting of [Restrict Service Representation Access]. To set the network scan when iW SAM is enabled. When 1 is set, the network scan is enabled. When the operation restriction is cleared at the time of iW SAM 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 0 to 1 0: Disabled, 1: Enabled 0 Set of printer driver multi box save:SAM *Operation on this item is restricted by the setting of [Restrict Service Representation Access]. To set whether a document can be simultaneously saved to multiple Inboxes from the printer driver at the time of iW SAM. When 1 is set, a document can be saved to multiple Inboxes from the printer driver. When the operation restriction is cleared at the time of iW SAM 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 0 to 1 0: Disabled, 1: Enabled 0 Setting of job merge allowance:SAM *Operation on this item is restricted by the setting of [Restrict Service Representation Access]. To set whether merging jobs is allowed when iW SAM is enabled. When 1 is set, jobs can be merged. When the operation restriction is cleared at the time of iW SAM 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 0 to 1 0: Disabled, 1: Enabled 0



1189



8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > USER JA-JDF



2 Detail



Use Case Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value JA-RUI



2 Detail



Use Case Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value JA-WEB



2 Detail



Use Case Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value EXP-CRYP



1 Detail



Use Case Adj/Set/Operate Method Caution Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value



Setting of JDF: SAM *Operation on this item is restricted by the setting of [Restrict Service Representation Access]. To set the use of JDF when iW SAM is enabled. When 1 is set, JDF can be used. When the operation restriction is cleared at the time of iW SAM 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 0 to 1 0: Disabled, 1: Enabled 0 Setting of Inbox document access: SAM *Operation on this item is restricted by the setting of [Restrict Service Representation Access]. To set the Inbox document access from remote UI at the time of iW SAM When 1 is set, accessing to the Inbox document from remote UI is enabled. When the operation restriction is cleared at the time of iW SAM 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 0 to 1 0: Disabled, 1: Enabled 0 Setting of Inbox document upload: SAM *Operation on this item is restricted by the setting of [Restrict Service Representation Access]. To set the Inbox document upload with the Web browser at the time of iW SAM. When 1 is set uploading to the Inbox document with the Web Browser is enabled. When the operation restriction is cleared at the time of iW SAM 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 0 to 1 0: Disabled, 1: Enabled 0 Confdntial encrypt ON/OFF:add book exprt * Operation on this item is restricted by the setting of [Restrict Service Representation Access]. To set whether to encrypt the confidential part (password part) in the Address Book when exporting the address book and device settings via remote UI. When 0 is set, the confidential part in the address book is exported without encryption. When there is a need to export password without encryption because of operation and tool 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Be sure not to allow the user to execute export without encryption because of security concern. 0 to 1 0: OFF, 1: ON 1



1190



8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > USER SMD-EXPT



1 Detail



Use Case Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value Supplement/Memo SNDSTREN



1 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range



Default Value FAXSTREN



1 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range



Default Value SJ-UNMSK



2 Detail



Use Case Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value Related Service Mode



Setting of export target data: remote UI To set whether to export "service mode data" from remote UI. When 1 is set, "service mode data" is displayed as the target data of export on remote UI. When installing more than 1 machine at the same time, the same service mode data can be registered. When installing more than 1 machine at the same time 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 0 to 1 0: Hide, 1: Display 0 If selecting "service mode data" as the target data of export on remote UI after setting SMD-EXPT to 1, service mode data can be exported. Set of setting delete aftr scan and send To set whether to delete the transmission settings except for the address after transmission from the "Scan and Send" screen. Upon user's request 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 0 to 5 0: Deleted 1: Retained only the transmission setting 2: Retained the transmission setting and address * 3: Retained only address * 4: Retained the transmission setting and address 5: Retained only address * The setting for Options > Job Done Notice > Attach TX Image is not retained. It differs according to the location. Set of setting delete aftr fax transmit To set whether to delete the transmission settings except for the address after transmission from the "Fax" screen. Upon user's request 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 0 to 2 0: Delete 1: Retain * 2: Retain * The setting for Options > Job Done Notice > Attach TX Image is not retained. It differs according to the location. ON/OFF secured job masking cancellation *Operation on this item is restricted by the setting of [Restrict Service Representation Access]. To set whether to mask other people's secured jobs. When 0 is set, operation of other people's secured jobs is not possible because they are masked. When COIN is set to 6 or 7 (charge mode: Type-C), set 1. Masking is canceled and other people's secured jobs can be operated. It is enabled at MEAP authentication. When operating secured jobs in charge mode Type-C 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 0 to 1 0: OFF (Masking enabled), 1: ON (Masking canceled) 0 COPIER> OPTION> ACC> COIN



1191



8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > USER SJ-CLMSK



2 Detail



Use Case Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value Related Service Mode PRTDP-SW



1 Detail



Use Case Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value PDFD-MSW



2 Detail



Use Case Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value SFT-OUT



2 Detail



Use Case Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range



Default Value Additional Functions Mode



ON/OFF secured job stop button display *Operation on this item is restricted by the setting of [Restrict Service Representation Access]. To set whether to display the button to stop a secured job. When 0 is set, the stop button is displayed. When COIN is set to 6 or 7 (charge mode: Type-C), set 1. Since the stop button is not displayed, the secured job cannot be stopped. When prohibiting to stop the secured job in charge mode Type-C 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 0 to 1 0: OFF (Display), 1: ON (Hide) 0 COPIER> OPTION> ACC> COIN Set delivery side for 1-page job:2-sided To set whether to deliver paper face-up or face-down when printing only 1 page although 2-sided print is set. When 0 is set, paper is delivered face-down like 1-sided job. (Paper does not pass through the Duplex Path.) When 1 is set, paper is delivered face-up via the Duplex Path. Paper feed distance becomes longer so productivity is decreased. When changing the delivery side of 1-page print although 2-sided print is set 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 0 to 1 0: Face-down delivery, 1: Face-up delivery 0 Set output paper size: direct print PDF To set output paper size at direct print PDF. Usually, the region defined by MediaBox is output. However, in some cases, the region defined (trimmed) by CropBox is judged as output paper size depending on PDF file. Set 1 when output result differs from what is defined at direct print PDF. When preferring to output a PDF file with paper which size is defined by CropBox while the sizes of MediaBox and CropBox are different Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 0 to 1 0: MediaBox (Normal), 1: CropBox 0 Setting of offset priority delivery To set whether to deliver a job where offset and collate/offset group is set to the delivery destination with offset function. When 0 is set, a job is delivered to the delivery destination set in [Settings/Registration] even though the offset function is not available. When 1 is set, a job is delivered to the delivery destination with offset function even though a delivery destination without offset function is set in [Settings/Registration]. When preferring to deliver a job to the delivery destination with offset function 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 0 to 1 0: Based on Output Tray Settings, 1: Priority on job settings (deliver to a delivery destination where offset is possible) 0 Function Settings> Common> Paper Output Settings> Output Tray Settings



1192



8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > USER LGCY-SCP



2 Detail



Use Case Adj/Set/Operate Method Caution Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value Related Service Mode Supplement/Memo FLM-DSPL



2 Detail



Setting of PPA/secured print switch *Operation on this item is restricted by the setting of [Restrict Service Representation Access]. To set whether to use the PPA function or the conventional secured print function. Set 0 when using the PPA function. The conventional secured print function is disabled. Set 1 when using the conventional secured print function (when the EFI Controller is connected, etc.). The PPA function is disabled. When IMG-CONT is set to 3 or 4 for connecting the EFI Controller, the setting of this item becomes 1. When this item is set to 0, the setting of UI-PPA becomes 1. When this item is set to 1, the setting of UI-PPA becomes 0. When using the conventional secured print function (when the EFI Controller is connected, etc.) 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. The PPA function cannot be used when the EFI Controller is connected. 0 to 1 0: Use the PPA function, 1: Use the conventional secured print function 0 COPIER> OPTION> DSPLY-SW> UI-PPA COPIER> OPTION> INT-FACE> IMG-CONT PPA (Personal Print Application): A function to hold print job. It contains the function of secured print. ON/OFF of Clear Film usage To set whether to use the Clear Film. When 1 is set, "Clear Film" is displayed on the paper type screen so it can be registered as the paper to be used.



Use Case



When using large size transparency or special film



Adj/Set/Operate Method



1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.



Caution



Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value Additional Functions Mode CNT-PRT



2 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value Additional Functions Mode



- Since the clear film is not defined in the specifications, image quality is not guaranteed even though it can be fed. - After the setting is made, check image quality and get approval from the user. If there is an error, set the value back to 0. 0 to 1 0: OFF, 1: ON 0 Preferences> Paper Settings> Paper Settings> Set > Detailed Settings > Clear Film ON/OFF of parts counter report output To set whether to print parts counter values on the counter report. When grasping the estimated life of parts while the monitoring service function is not used 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 0 to 1 0: OFF (Not print), 1: ON (Print) It differs according to the location. Check Counter> Print List



1193



8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > USER JA-WIFI



2 Detail



Use Case Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value



Setting of SAM Wi-Fi direct print *Operation on this item is restricted by the setting of [Restrict Service Representation Access]. To set whether to allow Wi-Fi direct print when iW SAM is enabled. Wi-Fi direct print cannot be used when iW SAM is enabled. However, when 1 is set, it can be used. When the operation restriction is cleared at the time of iW SAM 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 0 to 1 0: Disabled, 1: Enabled 0



C-P-SIZE



2



[For customization]



MF-FEED



1



Manual restart w/OK key: no ppr on MP Tr



Detail



Use Case Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value Additional Functions Mode INSTDT-Y



1 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value Related Service Mode INSTDT-M



1 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value Related Service Mode INSTDT-D



1 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value Related Service Mode



If the following three conditions are satisfied, pickup is not restarted automatically when placing paper on the Multi-purpose Tray. 1. The setting of "Preferences> Paper Settings> Multi-Purpose Tray Defaults" is "Fixed". 2. The job type is PDL. 3. The setting value of this service mode is 1. 4. Paper is placed at occurrence of no paper on the Multi-Purpose Tray. Upon user's request. Use this item for customization for Aeon during application of service mode. Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 0 to 1 0: OFF, 1: ON 0 Preferences> Paper Settings> Multi-Purpose Tray Defaults Register installation date info: year To set the information on the installation date (year). - At installation - When replacing the HDD Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 0 to 2038 0 COPIER>FUNCTION>INSTALL>INSTDTST Register installation date info: month To set the information on the installation date (month). - At installation - When replacing the HDD Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 0 to 12 0 COPIER>FUNCTION>INSTALL>INSTDTST Register installation date info: day To set the information on the installation date (day). - At installation - When replacing the HDD Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 0 to 31 0 COPIER>FUNCTION>INSTALL>INSTDTST



1194



8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > USER INSTDT-H



1 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value Related Service Mode INSTDT-N



1 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value Related Service Mode STOP-USE



1 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method Caution Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value LASTREST



1 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method Caution Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value Additional Functions Mode SZCHKSW



2



Register installation date info: hour To set the information on the installation date (hour). - At installation - When replacing the HDD Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 0 to 23 0 COPIER>FUNCTION>INSTALL>INSTDTST Register installation date info: minute To set the information on the installation date (minute). - At installation - When replacing the HDD Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 0 to 59 0 COPIER>FUNCTION>INSTALL>INSTDTST ON/OFF of Stop key function To switch ON and OFF of the Stop key function. When Stop key is pressed, all print jobs are paused. When switching to use/not use Stop key according to the customer 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Be sure to explain to the customer in advance that all print jobs are paused when Stop key is pressed. 0 to 1 0: OFF, 1: ON 1 Set remaining consumables display specs To switch the percentage of increments in which the remaining level of consumables is shown at their near end. When the remaining level of toner or waste toner is suddenly displayed as 0% 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn ON/OFF the Main Power. The default value is properly set according to the country and the model, and thus should not be normally changed unless requested. 0 to 1 0: 5%, 1: 1% The value differs according to the location. Status Monitor/Cancel > Consmbls./Others > Consumables For R&D



1195



8. Service Mode



■ CST COPIER (Service mode for printer) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > CST P-SZ-C1



1 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method Caution Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value P-SZ-C2



1 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method Caution Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value



Setting of Right Deck paper size To set the paper size used in the Right Deck. Upon user's request Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. Be sure to match with the hardware setting size. 0 to 2 0: A4, 1: B5, 2: LTR 0 Setting of Left Deck paper size To set the paper size used in the Left Deck. Upon user's request Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. Be sure to match with the hardware setting size. 0 to 2 0: A4, 1: B5, 2: LTR 0



1196



8. Service Mode



■ ACC COPIER (Service mode for printer) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > ACC COIN



1 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method Caution



Display/Adj/Set Range



Default Value Related Service Mode



Additional Functions Mode Supplement/Memo DK-P



1 Detail



Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value CARD-SW



1 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range



Setting of charge management *Operation on this item is restricted by the setting of [Restrict Service Representation Access]. To set charging management method. At installation of Coin Manager 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Following items are automatically specified when changing the value to 3 (from 0 to 2). The change will not be returned even if changing back the value to 0 to 2 (from 3) once the mode has been changed. - COPIER> OPTION> USER> CONTROL=1 - COPIER> OPTION> NETWORK> DA-CNCT=1 - COPIER> OPTION> DSPLY-SW> UI-BOX, UI-SEND, UI-FAX=0 - Function Settings > Send > E-Mail/I-Fax Settings > Communication Settings > SMTP Receive, POP=OFF - Preferences> Network > TCP/IP Settings > DNS Settings > FTP Print Settings > Use FTP Printing=OFF - Preferences> Network > TCP/IP Settings > DNS Settings > IPP Print Settings > Use IPP Printing=ON 0 to 7 0: No charge 1: Charge with Coin Manager 2: Charge with remote counter 3: Charge with DA (only in Japan) 4: Charge with this machine itself 5: Not used 6: External charge mode 6 7: External charge mode 7 0 COPIER> OPTION> USER> CONTROL COPIER> OPTION> FNC-SW> DA-CNCT COPIER> OPTION> DSPLY-SW> UI-BOX, UI-SEND, UI-FAX COPIER> OPTION> ACC> PDL-THR Function Settings> Send> E-Mail/I-Fax Settings> Communication Settings Preferences> Network> TCP/IP Settings> DNS Settings> FTP Print Settings, IPP Print Settings Control card can be used with "No charge". DA: Digital Accessory Setting of Paper Deck paper size To set the paper size used in the Paper Deck. Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 0 to 2 0: A4, 1: B5, 2: LTR 0 Screen set when Coin Manager connected To set coin or card that the user is urged to insert on the Control Panel when the Coin Manager is connected. Upon user's request Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 0 to 3 0: Card, 1: certification by external device, 2: Coin and card, 3: Card



1197



8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > ACC CC-SPSW



2 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value UNIT-PRC



2 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range



Default Value MIN-PRC



1 Detail



Use Case Adj/Set/Operate Method Caution Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value Related Service Mode Supplement/Memo MAX-PRC



1 Detail



Use Case Adj/Set/Operate Method Caution Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value Related Service Mode Supplement/Memo



Support setting of control card I/F To set support level for control card (CCIV/CCV) interface. Upon user's request (when connecting to the external counter management system using the control card interface) 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 0 to 1 0: No support, 1: Support 0 Setting of Coin Manager currency unit To set currency unit to be handled with Coin Manager At installation of Coin Manager 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 0 to 6 0: Japanese yen, 1: Euro, 2: Pound, 3: Swiss Franc, 4: Dollar, 5: No currency unit (no fractional unit), 6: No currency unit (with fractional unit) 0 Set of Coin Manager minimum price To set the minimum amount to be handled with Coin Manager. Enter 10 when specifying 10 Japanese yen as the minimum amount to be handled with the Coin Manager that supports Japanese yen. In the case to specify 1 to 4 (Euro/Pound/Swiss Franc/Dollar) by going through the following: COPIER> OPTION> ACC > UNIT-PRC, entry is in fractional unit. Entry of 50 indicates 50 cents ($ 0.50). At installation of Coin Manager 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. This mode is enabled when selecting 4 for the following: COPIER> OPTION> ACC> COIN. 0 to 9999 10 COPIER> OPTION> ACC> COIN, UNIT-PRC When a value smaller than the minimum amount is entered in Settings/Registration menu as the charging amount, it causes an error. Set of Coin Manager maximum price To set the maximum amount to be handled with Coin Manager. Enter 8800 when specifying 8800 Japanese yen as the maximum amount to be handled with the Coin Manager that supports Japanese yen. At installation of Coin Manager 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. This mode is enabled when selecting 4 for the following: COPIER> OPTION> ACC> COIN. 0 to 9999 8800 COPIER> OPTION> ACC> COIN, UNIT-PRC When a value larger than the maximum amount is entered in Settings/Registration menu as the charging amount, it causes an error.



1198



8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > ACC MIC-TUN



1 Detail



Use Case Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value Additional Functions Mode SRL-SPSW



1 Detail



Use Case Adj/Set/Operate Method Caution



Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value PDL-THR



2 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value Related Service Mode CR-TYPE



1 Detail



Use Case Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value



Manual adj of voice recognize microphone To manually adjust the voice receiving level (sensitivity) of the connected voice recognition microphone. Microphone sensitivity is automatically tuned in [Settings/Registration]; however, adjust it manually as needed. When the sensitivity of microphone is not improved by auto tuning 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 0 to 255 128 Preferences> Accessibility> Voice Navigation Settings> Tune Microphone Setting of Serial I/F Kit support To set the support level of the Serial Interface Kit. To keep processing performance of printer engine, select "1: Priority on speed". To correctly stop the output by the upper limit number of sheets, select "2: Priority on upper limit number of sheets". At installation of Serial Interface Kit 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. With priority on speed, output cannot be correctly stopped by the upper limit number of sheets. With priority on the upper limit number of sheets, processing performance of the printer engine is decreased depending on pickup location. 0 to 2 0: No support, 1: Priority on speed, 2: Priority on upper limit number of sheets 0 ON/OFF PDL print: external charge mode *Operation on this item is restricted by the setting of [Restrict Service Representation Access]. To set whether to execute normal PDL print when COIN is set to external charge mode 6/7. When executing normal PDL print in external charge mode 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 0 to 1 0: OFF, 1: ON 0 COPIER> OPTION> ACC> COIN Setting of Card Reader To set the model of the Card Reader. Set 1 in the case of connecting the Card Reader-C1. It operates even 0 is set, but recognition rate decreases. When connecting the Card Reader-C1 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 0 to 1 0: Card Reader-F1, 1: Card Reader-C1 0



1199



8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > ACC MEAP-SRL



1 Detail



Use Case Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value CV-CSZ



1 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method Caution Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value COIN-AUT



1 Detail



Use Case Adj/Set/Operate Method Caution Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value Related Service Mode Additional Functions Mode



Set to allow serial comctn from MEAP app *Operation on this item is restricted by the setting of [Restrict Service Representation Access]. To set whether to allow serial communication of MEAP application. When 1 is set, serial communication of the machine is stopped and only the serial communication with MEAP application is available. When performing serial communication from MEAP application 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 0 to 1 0: Prohibited, 1: Allowed 0 Set outpt info notice:chg w/device alone To set whether to notify the Coin Manager of color mode and paper size at the time of charging with a device alone. When Coin Manager (CV3) is connected Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. Set 0 when a coin manager other than CV3 is connected. When 1 is set, an error occurs. 0 to 1 0: OFF, 1: ON 0 ON/OFF of charge/no charge mixed setting * Operation on this item is restricted by the setting of [Restrict Service Representation Access]. To set whether to switch charge/no charge according to the authentication setting in an environment where both charged and no charged users exist. When this item is set to 1 while the setting value of COIN is 4, the initial screen where the user can select charge/no charge can be set. Selecting "Charge" on the initial screen displays the copy screen, and selecting "No Charge" displays the main menu after authentication. At installation of Coin Manager 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. When setting 1, be sure to set COIN to 4 in advance. If COIN-AUT is set first, it is necessary to make the settings in the following order again: COIN and then COIN-AUT. 0 to 1 0: OFF, 1: ON 0 COPIER> OPTION> ACC> COIN COPIER> OPTION> DSPLY-SW> UI-BOX/SEND/FAX Preferences > Display Settings > Default Screen after Startup/Restoration



1200



8. Service Mode



■ INT-FACE COPIER (Service mode for printer) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > INT-FACE IMG-CONT



1 Detail



Use Case Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range



Default Value Related Service Mode Supplement/Memo



Connection setting of print server To set connection with print server. When Secure print is set to 3 or 4, Conventional secured print function becomes effective(LGCYSCP becomes 1). When Conventional secured print function becomes effective, Forced Hold Printing becomes invalid(UI-PPA become 0). If IMG-CONT is changed back from 3 or 4 to 0, LGCY-SCP do not link with each other. At installation/Removal 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 0 to 4 0: Print server not yet connected (normal), 1, 2: Not used, 3: Print server (color machine) connected, 4: Print server (B&W machine) connected 0 COPIER> OPTION> USER> LGCY-SCP COPIER> OPTION> DSPLY-SW> UI-PPA PPA (Personal Print Application): A function to Forced Hold Printing. It contains the function of secured print.



AP-OPT



2



[Not used]



AP-ACCNT



2



[Not used]



AP-CODE



2



[Not used]



NWCT-TM



2



Timeout setting of network connection



Detail



Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range Unit Default Value Supplement/Memo Amount of Change per Unit CNT-TYPE



1 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range



Default Value VTRNS-TO



2



Amount of Change per Unit



*Operation on this item is restricted by the setting of [Restrict Service Representation Access]. To set the time to keep network connection between this machine and the PC application (keepalive setting). As the value is incremented by 1, the time is increased by 1 minute. 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 1 to 5 min 5 Expected PC application: Network print application, E-mail function, cascade copy, MEAP network application, etc. 1 Display of print server ID To display the ID of the print server being recognized by the machine. At installation of print server N/A (Display only) 1 to 999 1: Not yet connected, 400 to 499: EFI print server, 600 to 699: Creo print server, 700 to 799: Oce print server 1 For R&D 1



1201



8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > INT-FACE ERRHNDL



2 Detail



Use Case Adj/Set/Operate Method Caution Display/Adj/Set Range



Default Value Supplement/Memo



Set PS Cont-related error recover proc To set the recovery process of the host machine and the PS Controller when a PS Controllerrelated error occurs. When 0 is set, print server error (E677-0080) is displayed on the Control Panel of the host machine. When 1 is set, the host machine automatically executes recovery process. Print server error is not displayed and received jobs are canceled. The PS Controller is automatically rebooted. This setting is enabled only when the PS Controller is connected. Upon user's request (automatic recovery at occurrence of E677-0080) 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Be sure to get approval from the user in advance by telling that jobs received by the host machine are canceled when a PS Controller-related error occurs so missing of jobs or pages may occur. 0 to 9 0: Display the error only 1: Cancel the received jobs and the PS Controller is rebooted 2 to 9: Not used 0 Even if 1 is set, E677-0080 is displayed if automatic recovery fails.



■ TEMPO COPIER (Service mode for printer) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > TEMPO F-POT-SW



2 Detail



Use Case Adj/Set/Operate Method Caution Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value Related Service Mode F-HUM-SW



2 Detail



Use Case Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value Related Service Mode



Setting at Potential Sensor failure To set the control at the Potential Sensor failure. If the potential control, D-max control, etc. are executed at the Potential Sensor failure, an image failure or error occurs. When 0 is set, the potential control and D-max become OFF, so the device can be run temporarily although the Potential Sensor failure occurs. Use the item as a temporary measure when it takes time until replacing the Potential Sensor. When replacing the Potential Sensor 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Be sure to set the value back to 1 (ON) after replacing. 0 to 1 0: OFF, 1: ON 0 COPIER> OPTION> FNC-SW> PO-CNT ON/OFF of humidity manual entry To set whether to enable F-HUM-D setting when an error (failure) in the Environment Sensor occurs. When 1 is set, the F-HUM-D setting is enabled. Use the item as a temporary measure until replacing the Environment Sensor. When an error (failure) in the Environment Sensor occurs Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 0 to 1 0: OFF, 1: ON 0 COPIER> OPTION> TEMPO> F-HUM-D



1202



8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > TEMPO F-HUM-D



2 Detail



Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range



Manual entry of humidity Enter the humidity at the installation location manually when an error in the Environment Sensor occurs. When F-HUM-SW is 1, this setting is enabled. Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 30 to 99



Unit



%



Default Value



35



Related Service Mode Amount of Change per Unit



COPIER> OPTION> TEMPO> F-HUM-SW 1



■ LCNS-TR COPIER (Service mode for printer) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > LCNS-TR ST-SEND



2 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method



Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value TR-SEND



2 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method



Display/Adj/Set Range ST-ENPDF



2 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method



Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value TR-ENPDF



2 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method



Caution Display/Adj/Set Range



Installation state dspl of SEND function To display installation state of SEND function when disabling and then transferring the license. When checking whether SEND function is installed 1) Select ST-SEND. 2) Enter 0, and then press OK key. When installation has been completed, the transfer license key is displayed under TR-SEND. When operation finished normally: OK! According to the setting at shipment Trns license key dspl of SEND function To display transfer license key to use SEND function when disabling and then transferring the license. - When replacing HDD - When replacing the device 1) Select ST-SEND. 2) Enter 0, and then press OK key. The transfer license key is displayed under TR-SEND. 24 digits Install state dspl of Encryption PDF To display installation state of encrypted PDF transmission function when disabling and then transferring the license. When checking whether Encryption PDF is installed 1) Select ST-ENPDF. 2) Enter 0, and then press OK key. When installation has been completed, the transfer license key is displayed under TR-ENPDF. When operation finished normally: OK! According to the setting at shipment Trns license key dspl of Encryption PDF To display transfer license key to use Encryption PDF when disabling and then transferring the license. - When replacing HDD - When replacing the device 1) Select ST-ENPDF. 2) Enter 0, and then press OK key. The transfer license key is displayed under TR-ENPDF. This mode is enabled when SEND function is installed. 24 digits



1203



8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > LCNS-TR ST-SPDF



2 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method



Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value TR-SPDF



2 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method



Caution Display/Adj/Set Range ST-EXPDF



2 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method



Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value TR-EXPDF



2 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method



Caution Display/Adj/Set Range ST-PDFDR



2 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method



Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value



Install state dspl of Searchable PDF To display installation state of Searchable PDF when disabling and then transferring the license. When checking whether Searchable PDF is installed 1) Select ST-SPDF. 2) Enter 0, and then press OK key. When installation has been completed, the transfer license key is displayed under TR-SPDF. When operation finished normally: OK! According to the setting at shipment Trns license key dspl of Searchable PDF To display transfer license key to use Searchable PDF when disabling and then transferring the license. - When replacing HDD - When replacing the device 1) Select ST-SPDF. 2) Enter 0, and then press OK key. The transfer license key is displayed under TR-SPDF. This mode is enabled when SEND function is installed. 24 digits Instal state of Encry PDF + Searchbl PDF To display installation state of encrypted PDF + searchable PDF when disabling and then transferring the license. When checking whether Encryption PDF + Searchable PDF is installed 1) Select ST-EXPDF. 2) Enter 0, and then press OK key. When installation has been completed, the transfer license key is displayed under TR-EXPDF. When operation finished normally: OK! According to the setting at shipment Trns lcns key of Encry PDF+Searchbl PDF To display transfer license key to use Encryption PDF + Searchable PDF when disabling and then transferring the license. - When replacing HDD - When replacing the device 1) Select ST-EXPDF. 2) Enter 0, and then press OK key. The transfer license key is displayed under TR-EXPDF. This mode is enabled when SEND function is installed for Japan. 24 digits Install state dspl of Direct Print PDF To display installation state of Direct Print PDF when disabling and then transferring the license. When checking whether Direct Print PDF is installed 1) Select ST-PDFDR. 2) Enter 0, and then press OK key. When installation has been completed, the transfer license key is displayed under TR-PDFDR. When operation finished normally: OK! According to the setting at shipment



1204



8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > LCNS-TR TR-PDFDR



2 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method



Display/Adj/Set Range ST-SCR



2 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method



Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value TR-SCR



2 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method



Caution Display/Adj/Set Range ST-HDCLR



2 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method



Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value TR-HDCLR



2 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method



Caution Display/Adj/Set Range



Trns lcns key dspl of Direct Print PDF To display transfer license key to use Direct Print PDF when disabling and then transferring the license. - When replacing HDD - When replacing the device 1) Select ST-PDFDR. 2) Enter 0, and then press OK key. The transfer license key is displayed under TR-PDFDR. 24 digits Install state dspl of Encry Secure Print To display installation state of Encrypted Secure Print when disabling and then transferring the license. When checking whether Encrypted Secure Print is installed 1) Select ST-SCR. 2) Enter 0, and then press OK key. When installation has been completed, the transfer license key is displayed under TR-SCR. When operation finished normally: OK! According to the setting at shipment Trns license key dspl: Encry Secure Pnt To display transfer license key to use Encrypted Secure Print when disabling and then transferring the license. - When replacing HDD - When replacing the device 1) Select ST-SCR. 2) Enter 0, and then press OK key. The transfer license key is displayed under TR-SCR. This mode is enabled when there is "3DES+USH-H" Board. 24 digits Installation state display of Data Erase To display installation state of Data Erase (for old model) when transfer is disabled. When checking whether Data Erase (for old model) is installed 1) Select ST-HDCLR. 2) Enter 0, and then press OK key. When installation has been completed, the transfer license key is displayed under TR-HDCLR. When operation finished normally: OK! 0 Transfer license key dspl of Data Erase To display transfer license key to use Data Erase (for old model) when transfer is disabled. - When replacing HDD - When replacing the device 1) Select ST-HDCLR. 2) Enter 0, and then press OK key. The transfer license key is displayed under TR-HDCLR. This mode is enabled when there is "3DES+USH-H" Board. 24 digits



1205



8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > LCNS-TR ST-BRDIM



2 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method



Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value TR-BRDIM



2 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method



Display/Adj/Set Range ST-VNC



2 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method



Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value TR-VNC



2 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method



Display/Adj/Set Range ST-WEB



2 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method



Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value



Install state dspl: PCL Barcode Printing To display installation state of BarDIMM when disabling and then transferring the license. When checking whether Barcode Printing for PCL is installed 1) Select ST-BRDIM. 2) Enter 0, and then press OK key. When installation has been completed, the transfer license key is displayed under TR-BRDIM. When operation finished normally: OK! According to the setting at shipment Trns lcns key dspl: PCL Barcode Printing To display transfer license key to use Barcode Printing for PCL when disabling and then transferring the license. - When replacing HDD - When replacing the device 1) Select ST-BRDIM. 2) Enter 0, and then press OK key. The transfer license key is displayed under TR-BRDIM. 24 digits Install state dspl of Remote Oprtr Soft To display installation state of Remote Operators Software when disabling and then transferring the license. When checking whether Remote Operators Software is installed 1) Select ST-VNC. 2) Enter 0, and then press OK key. When installation has been completed, the transfer license key is displayed under TR-VNC. When operation finished normally: OK! According to the setting at shipment Trns lcns dspl of Remote Operators Soft To display transfer license key to use Remote Operators Software when disabling and then transferring the license. - When replacing HDD - When replacing the device 1) Select ST-VNC. 2) Enter 0, and then press OK key. The transfer license key is displayed under TR-VNC. 24 digits Install state dspl: Web Access Software To display installation state of Web Access Software when disabling and then transferring the license. When checking whether Web Access Software is installed 1) Select ST-WEB. 2) Enter 0, and then press OK key. When installation has been completed, the transfer license key is displayed under TR-WEB. When operation finished normally: OK! According to the setting at shipment



1206



8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > LCNS-TR TR-WEB



2 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method



Display/Adj/Set Range ST-HRPDF



2 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method



Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value TR-HRPDF



2 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method



Display/Adj/Set Range ST-TRSND



2 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method



Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value TR-TRSND



2 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method



Display/Adj/Set Range



Trns license key dspl of Web Access Soft To display transfer license key to use Web Access Software when disabling and then transferring the license. - When replacing HDD - When replacing the device 1) Select ST-WEB. 2) Enter 0, and then press OK key. The transfer license key is displayed under TR-WEB. 24 digits Install state dspl of High Compress PDF To display installation state of High Compression PDF when disabling and then transferring the license. When checking whether High Compression PDF is installed 1) Select ST-HRPDF. 2) Enter 0, and then press OK key. When installation has been completed, the transfer license key is displayed under TR-HRPDF. When operation finished normally: OK! According to the setting at shipment Trns lcns key dspl of High Compress PDF To display transfer license key to use High Compression PDF when disabling and then transferring the license. - When replacing HDD - When replacing the device 1) Select ST-HRPDF. 2) Enter 0, and then press OK key. The transfer license key is displayed under TR-HRPDF. 24 digits Install state dspl: Trial SEND function To display installation state of Trial SEND function when disabling and then transferring the license. When checking whether Trial SEND function is installed 1) Select ST-TRSND. 2) Enter 0, and then press OK key. When installation has been completed, the transfer license key is displayed under TR-TRSND. When operation finished normally: OK! According to the setting at shipment Trns lcns key dspl: Trial SEND function To display transfer license key to use Trial SEND function when disabling and then transferring the license. - When replacing HDD - When replacing the device 1) Select ST-TRSND. 2) Enter 0, and then press OK key. The transfer license key is displayed under TR-TRSND. 24 digits



1207



8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > LCNS-TR ST-WTMRK



2 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method



Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value TR-WTMRK



2 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method



Display/Adj/Set Range ST-TSPDF



2 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method



Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value TR-TSPDF



2 Detail Use Case



Install state dspl of Secure Watermark To display installation state of Secure Watermark when disabling and then transferring the license. When checking whether Secure Watermark is installed 1) Select ST-WTMRK. 2) Enter 0, and then press OK key. When installation has been completed, the transfer license key is displayed under TR-WTMRK. When operation finished normally: OK! According to the setting at shipment Trns license key dspl: Secure Watermark To display transfer license key to use Secure Watermark when disabling and then transferring the license. - When replacing HDD - When replacing the device 1) Select ST-WTMRK. 2) Enter 0, and then press OK key. The transfer license key is displayed under TR-WTMRK. 24 digits Install state dspl of Time Stamp PDF: JP To display installation state of Time Stamp PDF (JP only) when disabling and then transferring the license. When checking whether Time Stamp PDF (JP only) is installed 1) Select ST-TSPDF. 2) Enter 0, and then press OK key. When installation has been completed, the transfer license key is displayed under TR-TSPDF. When operation finished normally: OK! According to the setting at shipment Trns lcns key dspl of Time Stamp PDF: JP To display transfer license key to use Time Stamp PDF (JP only) when disabling and then transferring the license. - When replacing HDD - When replacing the device



Adj/Set/Operate Method



1) Select ST-TSPDF. 2) Enter 0, and then press OK key. The transfer license key is displayed under TR-TSPDF.



Caution



This mode is enabled when SEND function is installed.



Display/Adj/Set Range ST-USPDF



2 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method



Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value



24 digits Install state dspl of Dgtl User Sign PDF To display installation state of Digital User Signature PDF when disabling and then transferring the license. When checking whether Digital User Signature PDF is installed 1) Select ST-USPDF. 2) Enter 0, and then press OK key. When installation has been completed, the transfer license key is displayed under TR-USPDF. When operation finished normally: OK! 0



1208



8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > LCNS-TR TR-USPDF



2 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method



Caution Display/Adj/Set Range ST-DVPDF



2 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method



Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value TR-DVPDF



2 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method



Caution Display/Adj/Set Range ST-SCPDF



2 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method



Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value TR-SCPDF



2 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method



Caution Display/Adj/Set Range



Trns lcns key dspl of Dgtl User Sign PDF To display transfer license key to use Digital User Signature PDF when disabling and then transferring the license. - When replacing HDD - When replacing the device 1) Select ST-USPDF. 2) Enter 0, and then press OK key. The transfer license key is displayed under TR-USPDF. This mode is enabled when SEND function is installed. 24 digits Install state dspl of Device Sign PDF To display installation state of device signature PDF transmission function when disabling and then transferring the license. When checking whether Device Signature PDF is installed 1) Select ST-DVPDF. 2) Enter 0, and then press OK key. When installation has been completed, the transfer license key is displayed under TR-DVPDF. When operation finished normally: OK! According to the setting at shipment Trns lcns key dspl of Device Sign PDF To display transfer license key to use Device Signature PDF when disabling and then transferring the license. - When replacing HDD - When replacing the device 1) Select ST-DVPDF. 2) Enter 0, and then press OK key. The transfer license key is displayed under TR-DVPDF. This mode is enabled when SEND function is installed. 24 digits Install state dspl of Trace & Smooth PDF To display installation state of Trace & Smooth PDF when disabling and then transferring the license. When checking whether Trace & Smooth PDF is installed 1) Select ST-SCPDF. 2) Enter 0, and then press OK key. When installation has been completed, the transfer license key is displayed under TR-SCPDF. When operation finished normally: OK! According to the setting at shipment Trns lcns key dspl of Trace & Smooth PDF To display transfer license key to use Trace & Smooth PDF when disabling and then transferring the license. - When replacing HDD - When replacing the device 1) Select ST-SCPDF. 2) Enter 0, and then press OK key. The transfer license key is displayed under TR-SCPDF. This mode is enabled when SEND function is installed. 24 digits



1209



8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > LCNS-TR ST-AMS



2 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method



Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value TR-AMS



2 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method



Display/Adj/Set Range ST-ERDS



2 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method



Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value Supplement/Memo TR-ERDS



2 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method



Display/Adj/Set Range Supplement/Memo ST-PS



2 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method



Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value



Install state dspl of Access Mngm System To display installation state of Access Management System when disabling and then transferring the license. When checking whether Access Management System is installed 1) Select ST-AMS. 2) Enter 0, and then press OK key. When installation has been completed, the transfer license key is displayed under TR-AMS. When operation finished normally: OK! According to the setting at shipment Trns lcns key dspl of Access Mngm System To display transfer license key to use Access Management System when disabling and then transferring the license. - When replacing HDD - When replacing the device 1) Select ST-AMS. 2) Enter 0, and then press OK key. The transfer license key is displayed under TR-AMS. 24 digits Install state dspl: E-RDS 3rd Pty Expnsn To display installation state of monitoring service function when disabling and then transferring the license. When checking whether E-RDS non-Canon-made extension function is installed 1) Select ST-ERDS. 2) Enter 0, and then press OK key. When installation has been completed, the transfer license key is displayed under TR-ERDS. When operation finished normally: OK! According to the setting at shipment Monitoring service function: A function to send charge counter to the non-Canon-made charge server. Trns lcns key dspl: E-RDS 3rd Pty Expnsn To display transfer license key to use E-RDS non-Canon-made extension function when disabling and then transferring the license. - When replacing HDD - When replacing the device 1) Select ST-ERDS. 2) Enter 0, and then press OK key. The transfer license key is displayed under TR-ERDS. 24 digits Monitoring service function: A function to send charge counter to the non-Canon-made charge server. Install state display of PS function To display installation state of PS function when disabling and then transferring the license. When checking whether PS function is installed 1) Select ST-PS. 2) Enter 0, and then press OK key. When installation has been completed, the transfer license key is displayed under TR-PS. When operation finished normally: OK! According to the setting at shipment



1210



8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > LCNS-TR TR-PS



2 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method



Display/Adj/Set Range ST-PCL



2 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method



Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value TR-PCL



2 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method



Display/Adj/Set Range ST-PSLI5



2 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method



Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value TR-PSLI5



2 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method



Display/Adj/Set Range



Transfer license key dspl of PS function To display transfer license key to use PS function when disabling and then transferring the license. - When replacing HDD - When replacing the device 1) Select ST-PS. 2) Enter 0, and then press OK key. The transfer license key is displayed under TR-PS. 24 digits Install state display of PCL function To display installation state of PCL function when disabling and then transferring the license. When checking whether PCL function is installed 1) Select ST-PCL. 2) Enter 0, and then press OK key. When installation has been completed, the transfer license key is displayed under TR-PCL. When operation finished normally: OK! According to the setting at shipment Transfer license key dspl: PCL function To display transfer license key to use PCL function when disabling and then transferring the license. - When replacing HDD - When replacing the device 1) Select ST-PCL. 2) Enter 0, and then press OK key. The transfer license key is displayed under TR-PCL. 24 digits Install state dspl: PS/LIPS4/LIPS LX: JP To display installation state of PS/LIPS4/LIPS LX function (JP only) when disabling and then transferring the license. When checking whether PS/LIPS4/LIPS LX function (JP only) is installed 1) Select ST-PSLI5. 2) Enter 0, and then press OK key. When installation has been completed, the transfer license key is displayed under TR-PSLI5. When operation finished normally: OK! 0 Trns lcns key dspl: PS/LIPS4/LIPS LX: JP To display transfer license key to use PS/LIPS4/LIPS LX function (JP only) when disabling and then transferring the license. - When replacing HDD - When replacing the device 1) Select ST-PSLI5. 2) Enter 0, and then press OK key. The transfer license key is displayed under TR-PSLI5. 24 digits



1211



8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > LCNS-TR ST-LIPS5



2 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method



Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value TR-LIPS5



2 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method



Display/Adj/Set Range ST-LIPS4



2 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method



Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value TR-LIPS4



2 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method



Display/Adj/Set Range ST-PSPCL



2 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method



Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value



Install state dspl:LIPS LX/LIPS4 func:JP To display installation state of LIPS LX/LIPS4 function (JP only) when disabling and then transferring the license. When checking whether LIPS LX/LIPS4 function (JP only) is installed 1) Select ST-LIPS5. 2) Enter 0, and then press OK key. When installation has been completed, the transfer license key is displayed under TR-LIPS5. When operation finished normally: OK! According to the setting at shipment Trns lcns key dspl:LIPS LX/LIPS4 func:JP To display transfer license key to use LIPS LX/LIPS4 function (JP only) when disabling and then transferring the license. - When replacing HDD - When replacing the device 1) Select ST-LIPS5. 2) Enter 0, and then press OK key. The transfer license key is displayed under TR-LIPS5. 24 digits Install state display of LIPS4 func: JP To display installation state of LIPS4 function (JP only) when disabling and then transferring the license. When checking whether LIPS4 function (JP only) is installed 1) Select ST-LIPS4. 2) Enter 0, and then press OK key. When installation has been completed, the transfer license key is displayed under TR-LIPS4. When operation finished normally: OK! According to the setting at shipment Trns license key dspl of LIPS4 func: JP To display transfer license key to use LIPS4 function (JP only) when disabling and then transferring the license. - When replacing HDD - When replacing the device 1) Select ST-LIPS4. 2) Enter 0, and then press OK key. The transfer license key is displayed under TR-LIPS4. 24 digits Install state dspl of PS/PCL function To display installation state of PS/PCL function when disabling and then transferring the license. When checking whether PS/PCL function is installed 1) Select ST-PSPCL. 2) Enter 0, and then press OK key. When installation has been completed, the transfer license key is displayed under TR-PSPCL. When operation finished normally: OK! According to the setting at shipment



1212



8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > LCNS-TR TR-PSPCL



2 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method



Display/Adj/Set Range ST-PCLUF



2 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method



Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value TR-PCLUF



2 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method



Display/Adj/Set Range ST-PSLIP



2 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method



Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value TR-PSLIP



2 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method



Display/Adj/Set Range



Transfer license key dspl of PS/PCL func To display transfer license key to use PS/PCL function when disabling and then transferring the license. - When replacing HDD - When replacing the device 1) Select ST-PSPCL. 2) Enter 0, and then press OK key. The transfer license key is displayed under TR-PSPCL. 24 digits Install state dspl: PCL/UFR II function To display installation state of PCL/UFR II function when disabling and then transferring the license. When checking whether PCL/UFR II function is installed 1) Select ST-PCLUF. 2) Enter 0, and then press OK key. When installation has been completed, the transfer license key is displayed under TR-PCLUF. When operation finished normally: OK! According to the setting at shipment Trns license key dspl of PCL/UFR II func To display transfer license key to use PCL/UFR II function when disabling and then transferring the license. - When replacing HDD - When replacing the device 1) Select ST-PCLUF. 2) Enter 0, and then press OK key. The transfer license key is displayed under TR-PCLUF. 24 digits Install state dspl of PS/LIPS4 func: JP To display installation state of PS/LIPS4 function (JP only) when disabling and then transferring the license. When checking whether PS/LIPS4 function (JP only) is installed 1) Select ST-PSLIP. 2) Enter 0, and then press OK key. When installation has been completed, the transfer license key is displayed under TR-PSLIP. When operation finished normally: OK! According to the setting at shipment Trns license key dspl: PS/LIPS4 func:JP To display transfer license key to use PS/LIPS4 function (JP only) when disabling and then transferring the license. - When replacing HDD - When replacing the device 1) Select ST-PSLIP. 2) Enter 0, and then press OK key. The transfer license key is displayed under TR-PSLIP. 24 digits



1213



8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > LCNS-TR ST-PSPCU



2 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method



Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value TR-PSPCU



2 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method



Display/Adj/Set Range ST-LXUFR



2 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method



Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value TR-LXUFR



2 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method



Display/Adj/Set Range ST-HDCR2



2 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method



Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value



Install state dspl of PS/PCL/UFR II func To display installation state of PS/PCL/UFR II function when disabling and then transferring the license. When checking whether PS/PCL/UFR II function is installed 1) Select ST-PSPCU. 2) Enter 0, and then press OK key. When installation has been completed, the transfer license key is displayed under TR-PSPCU. When operation finished normally: OK! According to the setting at shipment Trns lcns key dspl of PS/PCL/UFR II func To display transfer license key to use PS/PCL/UFR II function when disabling and then transferring the license. - When replacing HDD - When replacing the device 1) Select ST-PSPCU. 2) Enter 0, and then press OK key. The transfer license key is displayed under TR-PSPCU. 24 digits Install state display of UFR II function To display installation state of UFR II function when disabling and then transferring the license. When checking whether UFR II function is installed 1) Select ST-LXUFR. 2) Enter 0, and then press OK key. When installation has been completed, the transfer license key is displayed under TR-LXUFR. When operation finished normally: OK! According to the setting at shipment Trns license key dspl of UFR II function To display transfer license key to use UFR II function when disabling and then transferring the license. - When replacing HDD - When replacing the device 1) Select ST-LXUFR. 2) Enter 0, and then press OK key. The transfer license key is displayed under TR-LXUFR. 24 digits Install state dspl:HDD Init All Data/Set To display installation state of HDD Initialize All Data/Settings when disabling and then transferring the license. When checking whether HDD Initialize All Data/Settings is installed 1) Select ST-HDCR2. 2) Enter 0, and then press OK key. When installation has been completed, the transfer license key is displayed under TR-HDCR2. When operation finished normally: OK! 0



1214



8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > LCNS-TR TR-HDCR2



2 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method



Display/Adj/Set Range ST-JBLK



2 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method



Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value TR-JBLK



2 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method



Display/Adj/Set Range ST-AFAX



2 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method



Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value TR-AFAX



2 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method



Display/Adj/Set Range



Trns lcns key dspl:HDD Init All Data/Set To display transfer license key to use HDD Initialize All Data/Settings when disabling and then transferring the license. - When replacing HDD - When replacing the device 1) Select ST-HDCR2. 2) Enter 0, and then press OK key. The transfer license key is displayed under TR-HDCR2. 24 digits Install state dspl of Document Scan Lock To display installation state of Document Scan Lock when disabling and then transferring the license. When checking whether Document Scan Lock is installed 1) Select ST-JBLK. 2) Enter 0, and then press OK key. When installation has been completed, the transfer license key is displayed under TR-JBLK. When operation finished normally: OK! 0 Trns lcns key dspl of Document Scan Lock To display transfer license key to use Document Scan Lock when disabling and then transferring the license. - When replacing HDD - When replacing the device 1) Select ST-JBLK. 2) Enter 0, and then press OK key. The transfer license key is displayed under TR-JBLK. 24 digits Installation state display of Remote Fax To display installation state of remote fax client function when disabling and then transferring the license. When checking whether Remote Fax is installed 1) Select ST-AFAX. 2) Enter 0, and then press OK key. When installation has been completed, the transfer license key is displayed under TR-AFAX. When operation finished normally: OK! According to the setting at shipment Transfer license key dspl of Remote Fax To display transfer license key to use Remote Fax when disabling and then transferring the license. - When replacing HDD - When replacing the device 1) Select ST-AFAX. 2) Enter 0, and then press OK key. The transfer license key is displayed under TR-AFAX. 24 digits



1215



8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > LCNS-TR ST-POPDF



2 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method



Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value TR-POPDF



2 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method



Display/Adj/Set Range ST-REPDF



2 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method



Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value TR-REPDF



2 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method



Display/Adj/Set Range ST-OOXML



2 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method



Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value



Install state display of PDF w/ Policy To display installation state of PDF function with Policy when transfer is disabled. When checking whether PDF function with Policy is installed 1) Select ST-POPDF. 2) Enter 0, and then press OK key. When installation has been completed, the transfer license key is displayed under TR-POPDF. When operation finished normally: OK! 0 Trns lcns key display of PDF w/ Policy To display transfer license key to use PDF function with Policy when transfer is disabled. - When replacing HDD - When replacing the device 1) Select ST-POPDF. 2) Enter 0, and then press OK key. The transfer license key is displayed under TR-POPDF. 24 digits Install state dspl:Reader Extensions PDF To display installation state of Reader Extensions PDF when disabling and then transferring the license. When checking whether Reader Extensions PDF is installed 1) Select ST-REPDF. 2) Enter 0, and then press OK key. When installation has been completed, the transfer license key is displayed under TR-REPDF. When operation finished normally: OK! According to the setting at shipment Trns lcns key dspl:Reader Extensions PDF To display transfer license key to use Reader Extensions PDF when disabling and then transferring the license. - When replacing HDD - When replacing the device 1) Select ST-REPDF. 2) Enter 0, and then press OK key. The transfer license key is displayed under TR-REPDF. 24 digits Install state display of Office Open XML To display installation state of Office Open XML when disabling and then transferring the license. When checking whether Office Open XML is installed 1) Select ST-OOXML. 2) Enter 0, and then press OK key. When installation has been completed, the transfer license key is displayed under TR-OOXML. When operation finished normally: OK! According to the setting at shipment



1216



8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > LCNS-TR TR-OOXML



2 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method



Display/Adj/Set Range ST-XPS



2 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method



Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value TR-XPS



2 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method



Display/Adj/Set Range ST-2600



2 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method



Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value TR-2600



2 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method



Display/Adj/Set Range



Trns lcns key display of Office Open XML To display transfer license key to use Office Open XML when disabling and then transferring the license. - When replacing HDD - When replacing the device 1) Select ST-OOXML. 2) Enter 0, and then press OK key. The transfer license key is displayed under TR-OOXML. 24 digits Install state dspl of Direct Print XPS To display installation state of Direct Print XPS when disabling and then transferring the license. When checking whether Direct Print XPS is installed 1) Select ST-XPS. 2) Enter 0, and then press OK key. When installation has been completed, the transfer license key is displayed under TR-XPS. When operation finished normally: OK! According to the setting at shipment Trns lcns key dspl of Direct Print XPS To display transfer license key to use Direct Print XPS when disabling and then transferring the license. - When replacing HDD - When replacing the device 1) Select ST-XPS. 2) Enter 0, and then press OK key. The transfer license key is displayed under TR-XPS. 24 digits Instal state dspl: IEEE2600.1 scrty func To display installation state of security function of IEEE2600.1 when disabling and then transferring the license. When checking whether the IEEE2600.1 security function is installed 1) Select ST-2600. 2) Enter 0, and then press OK key. When installation has been completed, the transfer license key is displayed under TR-2600. When operation finished normally: OK! According to the setting at shipment Trn lcns key dspl: IEEE2600.1 scrty func To display transfer license key to use IEEE2600.1 security function when disabling and then transferring the license. - When replacing HDD - When replacing the device 1) Select ST-2600. 2) Enter 0, and then press OK key. The transfer license key is displayed under TR-2600. 24 digits



1217



8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > LCNS-TR ST-OPFNT



2 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method



Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value TR-OPFNT



2 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method



Display/Adj/Set Range ST-NCAPT



2 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method



Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value TR-NCAPT



2 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method



Display/Adj/Set Range ST-IPFAX



2 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method



Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value



Install state display of PCL Font Set To display installation state of PCL Font Set when disabling and then transferring the license. When checking whether PCL Font Set is installed 1) Select ST-OPFNT. 2) Enter 0, and then press OK key. When installation has been completed, the transfer license key is displayed under TR-OPFNT. When operation finished normally: OK! According to the setting at shipment Trns license key display of PCL Font Set To display transfer license key to use the PCL Font Set when disabling and then transferring the license. - When replacing HDD - When replacing the device 1) Select ST-OPFNT. 2) Enter 0, and then press OK key. The transfer license key is displayed under TR-OPFNT. 24 digits Install state display of NetCap function To display installation state of network packet capture function when disabling and then transferring the license. When checking whether network packet capture function is installed 1) Select ST-NCAPT. 2) Enter 0, and then press OK key. When installation has been completed, the transfer license key is displayed under TR-NCAPT. When operation finished normally: OK! 0 Transfer license key dspl of NetCap func To display transfer license key to use the network packet capture function when disabling and then transferring the license. - When replacing HDD - When replacing the device 1) Select ST-NCAPT. 2) Enter 0, and then press OK key. The transfer license key is displayed under TR-NCAPT. 24 digits Installation state display of IPFAX To display installation state of IPFAX when disabling and then transferring the license. When checking whether IPFAX is installed 1) Select ST-IPFAX. 2) Enter 0, and then press OK key. When installation has been completed, the transfer license key is displayed under TR-IPFAX. When operation finished normally: OK! According to the setting at shipment



1218



8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > LCNS-TR TR-IPFAX



2 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method



Display/Adj/Set Range ST-U-RDS



2 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method



Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value Related Service Mode TR-U-RDS



2 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method



Display/Adj/Set Range ST-SMLG



2 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method



Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value TR-SMLG



2 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method



Display/Adj/Set Range



Transfer license key dspl of IPFAX To display transfer license key to use IPFAX when disabling and then transferring the license. - When replacing HDD - When replacing the device 1) Select ST-IPFAX. 2) Enter 0, and then press OK key. The transfer license key is displayed under TR-IPFAX. 24 digits Install state display of E-RDS function To display installation state of Embedded-RDS function when disabling and then transferring the license. When checking whether Embedded-RDS function is installed 1) Select ST-U-RDS. 2) Enter 0, and then press OK key. When installation has been completed, the transfer license key is displayed under TR-U-RDS. When operation finished normally: OK! According to the setting at shipment COPIER> FUNCTION> INSTALL> E-RDS Trns license key dspl of E-RDS function To display transfer license key to use Embedded-RDS function when disabling and then transferring the license. - When replacing the HDD - When replacing the device 1) Select ST-U-RDS. 2) Enter 0, and then press OK key. The transfer license key is displayed under TR-U-RDS. 24 digits Install state dspl of picture login func To display installation state of picture login function when disabling and then transferring the license. When checking whether picture login function is installed 1) Select ST-SMLG. 2) Enter 0, and then press OK key. When installation has been completed, the transfer license key is displayed under TR-SMLG. When operation finished normally: OK! According to the setting at shipment Trns lcns key dspl: picture login func To display transfer license key to use picture login function when disabling and then transferring the license. - When replacing HDD - When replacing the device 1) Select ST-SMLG. 2) Enter 0, and then press OK key. The transfer license key is displayed under TR-SMLG. 24 digits



1219



8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > LCNS-TR ST-TCFNT



2 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method



Caution Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value Additional Functions Mode TR-TCFNT



2 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method



Display/Adj/Set Range Additional Functions Mode TR-FRWEB



2 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method



Display/Adj/Set Range ST-FRWEB



2 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method



Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value ST-HCD



2 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method



Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value



Inst state dspl:PCL Asian Font, trad CHI To display installation state of PCL Asian Font (traditional Chinese) when disabling and then transfer the license. When checking whether PCL Asian Font (traditional Chinese) is installed 1) Select ST-TCFNT. 2) Enter 0, and then press OK key. When installation has been completed, the transfer license key is displayed under TR-TCFNT. When replacing the HDD, check that "PCL Traditional Chinese Fonts" and "PCL Traditional Chinese Fonts (HKSCS)" are installed with [Font List] in [Settings/Registration]. When operation finished normally: OK! According to the setting at shipment Function Settings> Printer> Output Report> PCL> Font List Trn lic key dspl:PCL Asian Font,trad CHI To display transfer license key to use PCL Asian Font (traditional Chinese) when disabling and then transferring the license. - When replacing HDD - When replacing the device 1) Select ST-TCFNT. 2) Enter 0, and then press OK key. The transfer license key is displayed under TR-TCFNT. 24 digits Function Settings> Printer> Output Report> PCL> Font List Trn lcns key dspl:Web Access SW,free ver To display transfer license key to use the free version of Web Access Software when disabling and then transferring the license of it. - When replacing HDD - When replacing the device 1) Select ST-FRWEB. 2) Enter 0, and then press OK key. The transfer license key is displayed under TR-FRWEB. 24 digits Instl state dspl:Web Access SW, free ver To display installation state of the free version of Web Access Software when disabling and then transferring the license of it. When checking whether the free version of Web Access Software is installed 1) Select ST-FRWEB. 2) Enter 0, and then press OK key. When installation has been completed, the transfer license key is displayed under TR-FRWEB. When operation finished normally: OK! According to the setting at shipment Inst state dspl: IEEE2600 Security Kit To display installation state of Security Kit for IEEE2600 when disabling and then transferring the license. When checking whether the Security Kit for IEEE2600 is installed 1) Select ST-HCD. 2) Enter 0, and then press OK key. When installation has been completed, the transfer license key is displayed under TR-HCD. When operation finished normally: OK! According to the setting at shipment



1220



8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > LCNS-TR TR-HCD



2 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method



Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value ST-MECWL



2 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method



Display/Adj/Set Range Supplement/Memo



TR-MECWL



2 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method



Display/Adj/Set Range Supplement/Memo



Trn lcns key dspl: IEEE2600 Security Kit To display transfer license key to use the Security Kit for IEEE2600 when disabling and then transferring the license of it. - When replacing HDD - When replacing the device 1) Select ST-HCD. 2) Enter 0, and then press OK key. The transfer license key is displayed under TR-HCD. 24 digits 0 Inst state dspl: McAfee whitelist func To display installation state of McAfee whitelisting function when disabling the function and transferring the license. When checking whether McAfee whitelisting function is installed. 1) Select ST-MECWL. 2) Enter 0, and then press OK key. When installation has been completed, the transfer license key is displayed under TR-MECWL. When operation finished normally: OK! McAfee and the McAfee logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of McAfee, LLC or its subsidiaries in the United States and other countries. All other trademarks and registered trademarks are the property of their respective manufacturers. Copyright(c)2018 McAfee LLC Trn lcns key dspl: McAfee whitelist func To display transfer license key to use McAfee whitelisting function when disabling and then transferring the license of it. - When replacing the HDD - When replacing the device 1) Select ST-MECWL. 2) Enter 0, and then press OK key. The transfer license key is displayed under TR-MECWL. 24 digits McAfee and the McAfee logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of McAfee, LLC or its subsidiaries in the United States and other countries. All other trademarks and registered trademarks are the property of their respective manufacturers. Copyright(c)2018 McAfee LLC



■ CUSTOM2 COPIER (Service mode for printer) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > CUSTOM2 SP-B01



2



[For customization]



SP-B02



2



[For customization]



SP-B03



2



[For customization]



SP-B04



2



[For customization]



SP-B05



2



[For customization]



SP-B06



2



[For customization]



SP-B07



2



[For customization]



SP-B08



2



[For customization]



SP-B09



2



[For customization]



SP-B10



2



[For customization]



SP-B11



2



[For customization]



SP-B12



2



[For customization]



1221



8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > CUSTOM2 SP-B13



2



[For customization]



SP-B14



2



[For customization]



SP-B15



2



[For customization]



SP-B16



2



[For customization]



SP-B17



2



[For customization]



SP-B18



2



[For customization]



SP-B19



2



[For customization]



SP-B20



2



[For customization]



SP-B21



2



[For customization]



SP-B22



2



[For customization]



SP-B23



2



[For customization]



SP-B24



2



[For customization]



SP-B25



2



[For customization]



SP-B26



2



[For customization]



SP-B27



2



[For customization]



SP-B28



2



[For customization]



SP-B29



2



[For customization]



SP-B30



2



[For customization]



SP-B31



2



[For customization]



SP-B32



2



[For customization]



SP-B33



2



[For customization]



SP-B34



2



[For customization]



SP-B35



2



[For customization]



SP-B36



2



[For customization]



SP-B37



2



[For customization]



SP-B38



2



[For customization]



SP-B39



2



[For customization]



SP-B40



2



[For customization]



SP-B41



2



[For customization]



SP-B42



2



[For customization]



SP-B43



2



[For customization]



SP-B44



2



[For customization]



SP-B45



2



[For customization]



SP-B46



2



[For customization]



SP-B47



2



[For customization]



SP-B48



2



[For customization]



SP-B49



2



[For customization]



SP-B50



2



[For customization]



SP-B51



2



[For customization]



SP-B52



2



[For customization]



SP-B53



2



[For customization]



1222



8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > CUSTOM2 SP-B54



2



[For customization]



SP-B55



2



[For customization]



SP-B56



2



[For customization]



SP-B57



2



[For customization]



SP-B58



2



[For customization]



SP-B59



2



[For customization]



SP-B60



2



[For customization]



SP-B61



2



[For customization]



SP-B62



2



[For customization]



SP-B63



2



[For customization]



SP-B64



2



[For customization]



SP-B65



2



[For customization]



SP-B66



2



[For customization]



SP-B67



2



[For customization]



SP-B68



2



[For customization]



SP-B69



2



[For customization]



SP-B70



2



[For customization]



SP-B71



2



[For customization]



SP-B72



2



[For customization]



SP-B73



2



[For customization]



SP-B74



2



[For customization]



SP-B75



2



[For customization]



SP-B76



2



[For customization]



SP-B77



2



[For customization]



SP-B78



2



[For customization]



SP-B79



2



[For customization]



SP-B80



2



[For customization]



SP-V01



2



[For customization]



SP-V02



2



[For customization]



SP-V03



2



[For customization]



SP-V04



2



[For customization]



SP-V05



2



[For customization]



SP-V06



2



[For customization]



SP-V07



2



[For customization]



SP-V08



2



[For customization]



SP-V09



2



[For customization]



SP-V10



2



[For customization]



SP-V11



2



[For customization]



SP-V12



2



[For customization]



SP-V13



2



[For customization]



SP-V14



2



[For customization]



1223



8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > CUSTOM2 SP-V15



2



[For customization]



SP-V16



2



[For customization]



SP-V17



2



[For customization]



SP-V18



2



[For customization]



SP-V19



2



[For customization]



SP-V20



2



[For customization]



SP-V21



2



[For customization]



SP-V22



2



[For customization]



SP-V23



2



[For customization]



SP-V24



2



[For customization]



SP-V25



2



[For customization]



SP-V26



2



[For customization]



SP-V27



2



[For customization]



SP-V28



2



[For customization]



SP-V29



2



[For customization]



SP-V30



2



[For customization]



SP-V31



2



[For customization]



SP-V32



2



[For customization]



SP-V33



2



[For customization]



SP-V34



2



[For customization]



SP-V35



2



[For customization]



SP-V36



2



[For customization]



SP-V37



2



[For customization]



SP-V38



2



[For customization]



SP-V39



2



[For customization]



SP-V40



2



[For customization]



SP-V41



2



[For customization]



SP-V42



2



[For customization]



SP-V43



2



[For customization]



SP-V44



2



[For customization]



SP-V45



2



[For customization]



SP-V46



2



[For customization]



SP-V47



2



[For customization]



SP-V48



2



[For customization]



SP-V49



2



[For customization]



SP-V50



2



[For customization]



SP-V51



2



[For customization]



SP-V52



2



[For customization]



SP-V53



2



[For customization]



SP-V54



2



[For customization]



SP-V55



2



[For customization]



1224



8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > CUSTOM2 SP-V56



2



[For customization]



SP-V57



2



[For customization]



SP-V58



2



[For customization]



SP-V59



2



[For customization]



SP-V60



2



[For customization]



SP-V61



2



[For customization]



SP-V62



2



[For customization]



SP-V63



2



[For customization]



SP-V64



2



[For customization]



SP-V65



2



[For customization]



SP-V66



2



[For customization]



SP-V67



2



[For customization]



SP-V68



2



[For customization]



SP-V69



2



[For customization]



SP-V70



2



[For customization]



SP-V71



2



[For customization]



SP-V72



2



[For customization]



SP-V73



2



[For customization]



SP-V74



2



[For customization]



SP-V75



2



[For customization]



SP-V76



2



[For customization]



SP-V77



2



[For customization]



SP-V78



2



[For customization]



SP-V79



2



[For customization]



SP-V80



2



[For customization]



■ PM-PRE-M COPIER (Service mode for printer) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > PM-PRE-M TONER-K



1 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value WST-TNR



1 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value



Dspl/hide Toner (Bk) preparation warning To switch between display/hide the preparation warning on the Control Panel Status Bar. In the case of displaying the warning when consumables/consumable parts are not automatically delivered Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 0 to 1 0: Hide, 1: Display The value differs according to the location. Display/hide Wst Tonr Cont prep warning To switch between display/hide the preparation warning on the Control Panel Status Bar. In the case of displaying the warning when consumables/consumable parts are not automatically delivered Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 0 to 1 0: Hide, 1: Display The value differs according to the location.



1225



8. Service Mode



■ PM-U-DSP COPIER (Service mode for printer) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > PM-U-DSP PT-DRM



1



For R&D



FX-REP



1



For R&D



■ PM-MSG-D COPIER (Service mode for printer) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > PM-MSG-D TONER-K



1 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method Caution Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value WST-TNR



1 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method Caution Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value



Set days left before Toner(Bk) prep warn To set the timing (number of days left) at which the preparation warning will be displayed. When changing the timing (number of days left) at which the preparation warning will be displayed Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. Change the setting in accordance with the instruction of the sales company HQ. 0 to 365 The value differs according to the location. Set days left bef Wst Tnr Cont prep warn To set the timing (number of days left) at which the preparation warning will be displayed. When changing the timing (number of days left) at which the preparation warning will be displayed Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. Change the setting in accordance with the instruction of the sales company HQ. 0 to 365 The value differs according to the location.



■ PM-DLV-D COPIER (Service mode for printer) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > PM-DLV-D TONER-K



1 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value WST-TNR



1 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value PT-DRM



1 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value



Set Toner (Bk) prior alarm notice timing To set the number of days left before the prior notification alarm will be notified. When changing the timing to notify the prior notification alarm Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. -1 to 365 -1: The alarm not issued It differs according to the location. Set Wst Tonr Cont prior alarm notice tmg To set the number of days left before the prior notification alarm will be notified. When changing the timing to notify the prior notification alarm Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. -1 to 365 -1: The alarm not issued It differs according to the location. Set Drum-U(Bk) prior alarm notice timing To set the number of days left before the prior notification alarm will be notified. When changing the timing to notify the prior notification alarm Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. -1 to 365 -1: The alarm not issued It differs according to the location.



PRM-WIRE



1



For R&D



PRM-CLN



1



For R&D



1226



8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > PM-DLV-D PRM-UNIT



1



For R&D



CLN-BLD



1



For R&D



BS-SL-F



1



For R&D



BS-SL-R



1



For R&D



SP-CLAW



1



For R&D



EXP-SCRP



1



For R&D



DV-UNT-K



1



For R&D



TR-BLT



1



For R&D



TR-ROLL



1



For R&D



T-CLN-BD



1



For R&D



T-CN-BRU



1



For R&D



PO-WIRE



1



For R&D



PO-CLN



1



For R&D



PO-UNIT



1



For R&D



FX-UP-RL



1



For R&D



FIX-TH1



1



For R&D



FIX-TH2



1



For R&D



FX-RTNR



1



For R&D



FX-LW-RL



1



For R&D



FX-L-STC



1



For R&D



FX-WEB1



1



For R&D



C1-PU-RL



1



For R&D



C1-FD-RL



1



For R&D



C1-SP-RL



1



For R&D



C2-PU-RL



1



For R&D



C2-FD-RL



1



For R&D



C2-SP-RL



1



For R&D



C3-PU-RL



1



For R&D



C3-SP-RL



1



For R&D



C3-FD-RL



1



For R&D



C4-PU-RL



1



For R&D



C4-FD-RL



1



For R&D



C4-SP-RL



1



For R&D



M-FD-RL



1



For R&D



M-SP-RL



1



For R&D



DLV-UCLW



1



For R&D



OZ-FIL1



1



For R&D



AR-FIL1



1



For R&D



DF-PU-RL



1



For R&D



DF-FD-RL



1



For R&D



DF-SP-RL



1



For R&D



1227



8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > PM-DLV-D LNT-TAP1



1



For R&D



LNT-TAP2



1



For R&D



PD-PU-RL



1



For R&D



PD-SP-RL



1



For R&D



PD-FD-RL



1



For R&D



TEST (Print test mode) ■ PG COPIER (Service mode for printer) > TEST (Print test mode) > PG TYPE



1 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method



Caution Display/Adj/Set Range



Default Value DENS-K



1 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value PG-PICK



1 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range



Test print To execute the test print. At trouble analysis 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Press Start key. Test print is executed. Be sure to return the value to 0 after the test print output. 0 to 50 0: Normal print 1: Grid 2: 17 gradations Tbic rank 2 3: 17 gradations 600 dpi (134-line screen or 141-line screen) 4: Solid white 5: Halftone (density: 80H, Tbic rank 2, without image correction) 6: Halftone (density: 80H, 134-line screen or 141-line screen, without image correction) 7: Solid black 8: Horizontal line (4 dots, 27 spaces) 9: Horizontal line (6 dots, 50 spaces) 10: Horizontal line (2 dots, 3 spaces) 11: Halftone (density: 60H, Tbic rank 2, without image correction) 12: Halftone (density: 80H, 134-line screen or 141-line screen, without image correction) 13: Halftone (density: 30H, Tbic rank 2, without image correction) 14: Halftone (density: 30H, 134-line screen or 141-line screen, without image correction) 15 to 50: For development 0 Adj of Bk color density at test print To adjust Bk color density when performing test print (TYPE=5). As the greater value is set, the image gets darker. At test print (TYPE=5) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 0 to 255 128 Setting of test print Pickup Cassette To set the Pickup Cassette for test print output. - At trouble analysis - At test print output Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 1 to 8 1: Cassette 1 (Right Deck), 2: Cassette 2 (Left Deck), 3: Cassette 3 (Option Cassette 2), 4: Cassette 4 (Option Cassette 2), 5: Multi-purpose Tray, 6: Paper Deck, 7 to 8: Not used



1228



8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > TEST (Print test mode) > PG 2-SIDE



1 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value PG-QTY



1 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range Unit



Setting of PG 2-sided mode To set 1-sided/2-sided print for PG output. At trouble analysis Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 0 to 1 0: 1-sided, 1: 2-sided 0 Setting of PG output quantity To set the number of sheets for PG output. At trouble analysis Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 1 to 999 sheet



Default Value



1



Amount of Change per Unit



1



FINISH



1 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method



Display/Adj/Set Range



Default Value Related Service Mode



Accessory processing function test print To execute the test print relating to accessory processing function. When checking operation of accessory processing function 1) Enter the number of sheets for PG-QTY, and then press OK key. 2) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 3) Press Start button. The machine outputs a test print. 0 to 99 0: N/A 1: Staple (front) *1 2: Staple (2 points) *1 3: Staple (rear) *1 4: Booklet (saddle stitch) *1 5: Z-fold (single sleeve) *1 6: 2-fold *2 7: C-fold *2 8: V-fold *1 9: 4-fold *2 10: Z-fold (out-3-fold) *2 11: Punch (Inner Puncher) *3 12: Multiple-hole punch *4 13 to 15: Not used 16: Staple free stapling*1 17 to 99: Spare (for future use) *1 Finisher, *2 Multi-folding machine, *3 Inner Puncher, *4 Multiple-hole Puncher 0 COPIER> TEST> PG> PG-QTY



1229



8. Service Mode



■ NETWORK COPIER (Service mode for printer) > TEST (Print test mode) > NETWORK PING



1 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method



Display/Adj/Set Range



Supplement/Memo



IPV6-ADR



1 Detail



Adj/Set/Operate Method Caution



Related Service Mode PING-IP6



1 Detail



Adj/Set/Operate Method Related Service Mode



Network connection check To check connection between this machine and TCP/IP network. - When checking network connection at the time of installation - At network connection failure 1) Turn OFF the main power switch. 2) Connect the network cable to this machine, and then turn ON the main power switch. 3) Inform the system administrator at user's site that installation of this machine is complete, and ask for network setting. 4) Ask the system administrator to check the network connection, and check the remote host address of PING transmission target. 5) Select the item and enter the remote host address, and then press OK key and Start key. OK: Connection is normal. Checking procedure is complete. NG: Connection failed. Go to step 6) if the cable connection is OK. In case of cable connection failure, connect again and then go to step 5). 6) Select the item and enter loopback address, and then press OK key and Start key. OK: TCP/IP setting of this machine is normal. Go to step 7) to check NIC. NG: TCP/IP setting of this machine has failure. Go to step 3) to check the setting again. 7) Select the item and enter the local host address, and then press OK key. OK: Network setting of this machine and NIC are normal. Inform the system administrator that the trouble is due to network environment and ask for countermeasure. NG: Connection failure/fault with NIC. Check connection of NIC/ replace NIC. 0.0.0.0 to 255.255.255.255 At normal state: OK At failure occurrence: NG - Remote host address: IP address of PC terminal in network. - Loopback address: 127.0.0.1. Checking TCP/IP of this machine is available because the signal is returned before NIC. - NIC: Network interface - Local host address: IP address of this machine Setting of PING send address (IPv6) To set the IPv6 address to send PING. When PING is sent to this address by COPIER> TEST> NETWORK> PING-IP6, the network connection condition in the IPv6 environment can be checked. Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. - Enter a consistent character string as an address of IPv6. - Enter an address within 39 characters including hexadecimal numbers (0-9, a-f) and a separator (:). COPIER> TEST> NETWORK> PING-IP6 PING transmission to IPv6 address To send PING to the address specified by IPV6-ADR. The network connection condition in the IPv6 environment can be checked. Select the item, and then press OK key. COPIER> TEST> NETWORK> IPV6-ADR



1230



8. Service Mode



■ NET-CAP COPIER (Service mode for printer) > TEST (Print test mode) > NET-CAP CAPOFFON



2 Detail



Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value Related Service Mode Additional Functions Mode STT-STP



2 Detail



Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value Related Service Mode Additional Functions Mode CAPSTATE



2 Detail



Adj/Set/Operate Method Related Service Mode Additional Functions Mode PONSTART



2 Detail



Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value Related Service Mode Additional Functions Mode OVERWRIT



2 Detail



Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value Related Service Mode Additional Functions Mode



ON/OFF of NetCap function To set ON/OFF of network packet capture function. Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 0 to 1 0: OFF, 1: ON 0 COPIER> TEST> NET-CAP Store Network Packet Log Start and stop of network packet capture To start and stop network packet capture. Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 0 to 1 0: Stop, 1: Start 0 COPIER> TEST> NET-CAP Store Network Packet Log State display of network packet capture To display the state of network packet capture. N/A (Display only) COPIER> TEST> NET-CAP Store Network Packet Log Set network packet capture start timing To set whether to perform network packet capture from power-on. 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 0 to 1 0: OFF, 1: ON 0 COPIER> TEST> NET-CAP Store Network Packet Log Setting of NetCap data overwriting To set whether to finish network capturing or overwrite when HDD becomes full. 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 0 to 1 0: No overwriting (finish network packet capture), 1: Overwriting 1 COPIER> TEST> NET-CAP Store Network Packet Log



1231



8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > TEST (Print test mode) > NET-CAP PAYLOAD



2 Detail



Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value Related Service Mode Additional Functions Mode FILE-CLR



2 Detail



Adj/Set/Operate Method SIMPFILT



2 Detail



Use Case Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range ENCDATA



2 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method Caution Display/Adj/Set Range



Default Value CAPIF



2 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range



Default Value Related Service Mode



Set network packet capture data save To set whether to discard payload when saving the captured packet data. 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 0 to 1 0: Save captured packet data as is, 1: Discard payload and save the packet data 0 COPIER> TEST> NET-CAP Store Network Packet Log Deletion of network packet capture data To delete the captured packet data. 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Settings of packet data filtering To set whether to perform filtering when capturing packet data. When 0 is set, filtering is not performed (All the data are captured.) When 1 is set, packet data is captured only when the receiver's or sender's address coincides with the Mac address of this machine. At problem analysis (at packet data analysis) 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 0 to 1 0: Not filtered, 1: Filtered Setting of packet data encryption To set whether to encrypt the packet data when writing the captured packet data to the USB memory. - At problem analysis (at packet data analysis) - When improving security of written packet data 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. This setting is enabled only when writing data to the USB memory. Even when the packet data is loaded using SST, the file is specified, therefore the setting is disabled. 0 to 2 0: Encrypted (encrypted file) 1: Not encrypted (plain text file) 2: Encrypted (encrypted file + plain text file) 0 Setting of network packet capture target To set the network interface to capture the packet data. Make this setting before starting network packet capture. When changing the target of network packet capture Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 1 to 6 1: Local loopback, 2: Wired LAN, 3: Wireless LAN, 4: Wireless Soft AP mode, 5: Wi-Fi direct 6: Wired LAN (Sub-Line) 2 COPIER> TEST> NET-CAP



1232



8. Service Mode



■ P-STOP COPIER (Service mode for printer) > TEST (Print test mode) > P-STOP PRINTER



1 Detail



Use Case Adj/Set/Operate Method



Caution



Display/Adj/Set Range



Default Value



Forcible stop of paper feed To forcibly stop paper for the next job at the specified position (only once). Leading edge of paper stops at the specified position so that the cause of a problem can be identified. When the operation is stopped forcibly, jam code "AAxx" is displayed. When a normal jam occurs at a position other than the specified position or paper is delivered without being forcibly stopped, this setting is automatically cleared. - When bent paper/skew/wrinkles occur - When jam occurs frequently 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Execute a job (copy/test print). Paper stops at the specified position. - Remove the paper being stopped with the normal jam removal procedure. After jam removal, the job is automatically recovered. - Display of standard jam code indicates that a jam occurs somewhere other than the specified position. Setting of forcible stop is enabled until paper stops at the specified position. - The setting is disabled for job where paper does not pass through the specified position. - Unfixed toner may be adhered on paper depending on the stop position. Thus, handle it with care. 0 to 255 0: OFF 1: Outlet of the Right Deck Pickup Assembly 2: Outlet of the Left Deck Pickup Assembly 3: Outlet of the Cassette 3 Pickup Assembly 4: Outlet of the Cassette 4 Pickup Assembly 5: Outlet of the Pickup Option Deck 6: Vertical Path Assembly (Lower) 7: Vertical Path Assembly (Middle) 8: Vertical Path Assembly (Upper) 20: Outlet of the Vertical Path Assembly, 21: Outlet of the Vertical Path Assembly (2nd side) 22: Inlet of the Registration Assembly, 23: Inlet of the Registration Assembly (2nd side) 30: Inlet of the Fixing Assembly, 31: Inlet of the Fixing Assembly (2nd side) 40: Delivery outlet, 41: Delivery outlet (2nd side) 70: Inlet of the Reverse Assembly 71: Duplex reverse point (before reverse), 72: Duplex reverse point (at reverse) 73: Inlet of the Duplex Feed Unit 74: Duplex Feed Unit (before merging) 75: Duplex Feed Unit (after merging) 76: Outlet of the Duplex Feed Unit 99: Inlet of the Fixing Assembly (1st side, when checking image) * Any value other than those mentioned above: Not used * If image and paper is A3/LDR size, not only paper but also image on the Photosensitive Drum can be checked. 0



COUNTER (Counter mode) ■ TOTAL COPIER (Service mode for printer) > COUNTER (Counter mode) > TOTAL SERVICE1



1 Detail



Display/Adj/Set Range



Service-purposed total counter 1 To count up when the printout is delivered outside the machine. Large size: 1, Small size: 1 A blank sheet is not counted. 0 to 99999999



1233



8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > COUNTER (Counter mode) > TOTAL SERVICE2



1 Detail



Display/Adj/Set Range COPY



1 Detail



Display/Adj/Set Range PDL-PRT



1 Detail



Display/Adj/Set Range FAX-PRT



1 Detail



Display/Adj/Set Range RMT-PRT



1 Detail



Display/Adj/Set Range BOX-PRT



1 Detail



Display/Adj/Set Range RPT-PRT



1 Detail



Display/Adj/Set Range 2-SIDE



1 Detail



Display/Adj/Set Range



Service-purposed total counter 2 To count up when the printout is delivered outside the machine. Large size: 2, Small size: 1 A blank sheet is not counted. 0 to 99999999 Total copy counter To count up when the printout is delivered outside the machine. Large size: 1, Small size: 1 A blank sheet is not counted. 0 to 99999999 PDL print counter To count up when the printout is delivered outside the machine according to the charge counter at PDL print. Large size: 1, Small size: 1 A blank sheet is not counted. 0 to 99999999 FAX reception print counter To count up when the printout is delivered outside the machine according to the charge counter at FAX reception. Large size: 1, Small size: 1 A blank sheet is not counted. 0 to 99999999 Remote print counter To count up when the printout is delivered outside the machine/when the 2-sided printout is stacked according to the charge counter at remote print. Large size: 1, Small size: 1 A blank sheet is not counted. 0 to 99999999 Inbox print counter To count up when the printout is delivered outside the machine according to the charge counter at Inbox print. Large size: 1, Small size: 1 A blank sheet is not counted. 0 to 99999999 Report print counter To count up when the printout is delivered outside the machine according to the charge counter at report print. Large size: 1, Small size: 1 A blank sheet is not counted. 0 to 99999999 2-sided copy/print counter To count up the number of 2-sided copies/prints when the copy/printout is delivered outside the machine according to the charge counter. Large size: 1, Small size: 1 A blank sheet is not counted. 0 to 99999999



1234



8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > COUNTER (Counter mode) > TOTAL SCAN



1 Detail



Display/Adj/Set Range



Scan counter To count the number of scan operations according to the charge counter when the scanning operation is complete. Large size: 1, small size: 1 0 to 99999999



■ PICK-UP COPIER (Service mode for printer) > COUNTER (Counter mode) > PICK-UP C1



1 Detail Unit



Amount of Change per Unit C2



1 Detail Unit



Amount of Change per Unit C3



1 Detail Unit



Amount of Change per Unit C4



1 Detail Unit



Amount of Change per Unit MF



1 Detail Unit



Amount of Change per Unit DK



Small size: 1 sheet 1 Cassette 2 pickup total counter Small size: 1 sheet 1 Cassette 3 pickup total counter Large size: 1, Small size: 1 sheet 1 Cassette 4 pickup total counter Large size: 1, Small size: 1 sheet 1 Multi-purpose Tray pickup total counter Large size: 1, Small size: 1 sheet 1



1



Deck pickup total counter



Detail



Large size: 1, Small size: 1



Unit Amount of Change per Unit 2-SIDE



Cassette 1 pickup total counter



1 Detail Unit



Amount of Change per Unit



sheet 1 2-sided pickup total counter Large size: 1, Small size: 1 sheet 1



1235



8. Service Mode



■ FEEDER COPIER (Service mode for printer) > COUNTER (Counter mode) > FEEDER FEED



1 Detail Use Case



Display/Adj/Set Range Unit



DADF original pickup total counter DADF original pickup total counter When checking the total counter of original pickup by DADF 0 to 99999999 sheet



Default Value



0



Amount of Change per Unit



1



L-FEED



1 Detail Use Case



Display/Adj/Set Range Unit



DADF large size pickup total counter DADF large size pickup total counter When checking the total counter of large size pickup by DADF 0 to 99999999 sheet



Default Value



0



Amount of Change per Unit



1



S-FEED



1 Detail Use Case



Display/Adj/Set Range Unit



DADF small size pickup total counter DADF small size pickup total counter When checking the total counter of small size pickup by DADF 0 to 99999999 sheet



Default Value



0



Amount of Change per Unit



1



DFOP-CNT



1 Detail Use Case



Display/Adj/Set Range Unit



DADF hinge open/close counter DADF hinge open/close counter When checking the DADF hinge open/close counter 0 to 99999999 sheet



Default Value



0



Amount of Change per Unit



1



■ JAM COPIER (Service mode for printer) > COUNTER (Counter mode) > JAM TOTAL



1 Detail Use Case Unit



Amount of Change per Unit



Host machine total jam counter Host machine total jam counter When checking the total jam counter of the host machine time 1



1236



8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > COUNTER (Counter mode) > JAM FEEDER



1 Detail Use Case Unit



Amount of Change per Unit SORTER



1 Detail Use Case Unit



Amount of Change per Unit 2-SIDE



1 Detail Use Case Unit



Amount of Change per Unit MF



1 Detail Use Case Unit



Amount of Change per Unit C1



1 Detail Use Case Unit



Amount of Change per Unit C2



1 Detail Use Case Unit



Amount of Change per Unit C3



1 Detail Use Case Unit



Amount of Change per Unit



Feeder total jam counter Feeder total jam counter When checking the total jam counter of feeder time 1 Finisher total jam counter Finisher total jam counter When checking the total jam counter of finisher time 1 Duplex Unit jam counter Duplex Unit jam counter When checking the jam counter of Duplex Unit time 1 Multi-purpose Tray jam counter Multi-purpose Tray jam counter When checking the jam counter of Multi-purpose Tray time 1 Right Deck jam counter Right Deck jam counter When checking the jam counter of machine's Right Deck time 1 Left Deck jam counter Left Deck jam counter When checking the jam counter of machine's Left Deck time 1 Cassette 3 pickup jam counter Cassette 3 pickup jam counter When checking the jam counter of machine's Cassette 3 time 1



1237



8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > COUNTER (Counter mode) > JAM C4



1 Detail Use Case Unit



Amount of Change per Unit DK



1 Detail Use Case Unit



Amount of Change per Unit INS1



1 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range Unit Default Value



Cassette 4 pickup jam counter Cassette 4 pickup jam counter When checking the jam counter of machine's Cassette 4 time 1 Pickup decks jam counter Pickup decks jam counter When checking the jam counter of all pickup decks time 1 Inserter Tray pickup jam counter Pickup jam counter value of the Inserter Tray In the case of the Inserter, the Upper Tray is the target for advancing the counter. When checking the pickup jam counter To clear the counter value: Select the item, and then press Clear key. 0 to 99999999 time 0



■ MISC COPIER (Service mode for printer) > COUNTER (Counter mode) > MISC FIX-WEB



1 Detail



Use Case Adj/Set/Operate Method Caution Unit Amount of Change per Unit T-SPLY-K



1 Detail Use Case Unit



Amount of Change per Unit ALLPW-ON



1 Detail Use Case Unit



Fixing Cleaning Web counter The number of Fixing Cleaning Web Drive Solenoid (SL9) operations executed after the Fixing Cleaning Web Level Sensor (PS45) is ON. When the counter reaches 2000, E005-0001 occurs. At the time of Fixing Cleaning Web level detection/replacement To clear the counter value: Select the item, and then press Clear key. Clear the counter value after replacement. time 1 Toner supply counter Number of toner supply blocks. Counted for every one rotation of Toner Feed Screw. When checking the usage status of toner block 1 Number of DCON PCB power-on times Number of power-on times (Non-all-night Power Unit). To count up when power is turned ON (Non-all-night Power Unit). When checking the usage status of the product time



Default Value



0



Amount of Change per Unit



1



1238



8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > COUNTER (Counter mode) > MISC HDD-ON



1 Detail Use Case Unit



Number of HDD start-up times To count up at HDD start-up. When checking the usage status of the product time



Default Value



0



Amount of Change per Unit



1



SWG-RL



1



Amount of Change per Unit FIN-RBLT



1



Amount of Change per Unit



For R&D 1 For R&D 1



■ JOB COPIER (Service mode for printer) > COUNTER (Counter mode) > JOB DVPAPLEN



1



For R&D



DVRUNLEN



1



For R&D



■ PRDC-1 COPIER (Service mode for printer) > COUNTER (Counter mode) > PRDC-1 PRM-WIRE



1 Detail



Use Case Adj/Set/Operate Method Caution Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value Supplement/Memo PO-WIRE



1 Detail



Use Case Adj/Set/Operate Method Caution Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value



Primary Charging Wire parts counter Primary Charging Wire 1st line: Total counter value from the previous replacement 2nd line: Estimated life value When checking the consumption level of parts/replacing the parts To clear the counter value: Select the item, and then press Clear key. To change the estimated life: Select the item, enter the value, and then press OK key. Clear the counter value after replacement. 0 to 99999999 0 This is commonly used as operator maintenance parts counter. Pre-transfer Charging Wire parts cntr Pre-transfer Charging Wire 1st line: Total counter value from the previous replacement 2nd line: Estimated life value When checking the consumption level of parts/replacing the parts To clear the counter value: Select the item, and then press Clear key. To change the estimated life: Select the item, enter the value, and then press OK key. Clear the counter value after replacement. 0 to 99999999 0



1239



8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > COUNTER (Counter mode) > PRDC-1 PRM-CLN



1 Detail



Use Case Adj/Set/Operate Method Caution Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value PO-CLN



1 Detail



Use Case Adj/Set/Operate Method Caution Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value FIX-TH1



1 Detail



Use Case Adj/Set/Operate Method Caution Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value FIX-TH2



1 Detail



Use Case Adj/Set/Operate Method Caution Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value OZ-FIL1



1 Detail



Use Case Adj/Set/Operate Method Caution Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value



Primary Charge Wire Clean Pad prts cntr Primary Charging Wire Cleaning Pad 1, 2 1st line: Total counter value from the previous replacement 2nd line: Estimated life When checking the consumption level of parts/replacing the parts To clear the counter value: Select the item, and then press Clear key. To change the estimated life: Select the item, enter the value, and then press OK key. Clear the counter value after replacement. 0 to 99999999 0 Pre-trn Charge Wire Clean Pad prts cntr Pre-transfer Charging Wire Cleaning Pad 1, 2 1st line: Total counter value from the previous replacement 2nd line: Estimated life When checking the consumption level of parts/replacing the parts To clear the counter value: Select the item, and then press Clear key. To change the estimated life: Select the item, enter the value, and then press OK key. Clear the counter value after replacement. 0 to 99999999 0 Fixing Main Thermistor parts counter Fixing Main Thermistor 1st line: Total counter value from the previous replacement 2nd line: Estimated life value When checking the consumption level of parts/replacing the parts To clear the counter value: Select the item, and then press Clear key. To change the estimated life: Select the item, enter the value, and then press OK key. Clear the counter value after replacement. 0 to 99999999 0 Fixing Sub Thermistor parts counter Fixing Sub Thermistor 1, 2 1st line: Total counter value from the previous replacement 2nd line: Estimated life When checking the consumption level of parts/replacing the parts To clear the counter value: Select the item, and then press Clear key. To change the estimated life: Select the item, enter the value, and then press OK key. Clear the counter value after replacement. 0 to 99999999 0 Ozone Filter parts counter Ozone Filter 1st line: Total counter value from the previous replacement 2nd line: Estimated life value When checking the consumption level of parts/replacing the parts To clear the counter value: Select the item, and then press Clear key. To change the estimated life: Select the item, enter the value, and then press OK key. Clear the counter value after replacement. 0 to 99999999 0



1240



8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > COUNTER (Counter mode) > PRDC-1 AR-FIL1



1 Detail



Use Case Adj/Set/Operate Method Caution Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value Supplement/Memo



Primary Suction Air Filter prts cntr Dustproof Filter 1st line: Total counter value from the previous replacement 2nd line: Estimated life value When checking the consumption level of parts/replacing the parts To clear the counter value: Select the item, and then press Clear key. To change the estimated life: Select the item, enter the value, and then press OK key. Clear the counter value after replacement. 0 to 99999999 0 This is commonly used as operator maintenance parts counter.



■ DRBL-1 COPIER (Service mode for printer) > COUNTER (Counter mode) > DRBL-1 PRM-UNIT



1 Detail



Use Case Adj/Set/Operate Method Caution Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value PO-UNIT



1 Detail



Use Case Adj/Set/Operate Method Caution Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value T-CLN-BD



1 Detail



Use Case Adj/Set/Operate Method Caution Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value



Primary Charging Assembly parts counter Primary Charging Assembly 1st line: Total counter value from the previous replacement 2nd line: Estimated life value When checking the consumption level of parts/replacing the parts To clear the counter value: Select the item, and then press Clear key. To change the estimated life: Select the item, enter the value, and then press OK key. Clear the counter value after replacement. 0 to 99999999 0 Pre-transfer Charging Ass'y parts cntr Pre-transfer Charging Assembly 1st line: Total counter value from the previous replacement 2nd line: Estimated life value When checking the consumption level of parts/replacing the parts To clear the counter value: Select the item, and then press Clear key. To change the estimated life: Select the item, enter the value, and then press OK key. Clear the counter value after replacement. 0 to 99999999 0 ETB Cleaning Blade parts counter ETB Cleaning Blade 1st line: Total counter value from the previous replacement 2nd line: Estimated life value When checking the consumption level of parts/replacing the parts To clear the counter value: Select the item, and then press Clear key. To change the estimated life: Select the item, enter the value, and then press OK key. Clear the counter value after replacement. 0 to 99999999 0



1241



8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > COUNTER (Counter mode) > DRBL-1 T-CN-BRU



1 Detail



Use Case Adj/Set/Operate Method Caution Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value TR-BLT



1 Detail



Use Case Adj/Set/Operate Method Caution Display/Adj/Set Range Unit Default Value Related Service Mode TR-ROLL



1 Detail



Use Case Adj/Set/Operate Method Caution Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value Supplement/Memo PT-DRM



1 Detail



Use Case Adj/Set/Operate Method Caution Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value



Brush Roller parts counter Brush Roller 1st line: Total counter value from the previous replacement 2nd line: Estimated life value When checking the consumption level of parts/replacing the parts To clear the counter value: Select the item, and then press Clear key. To change the estimated life: Select the item, enter the value, and then press OK key. Clear the counter value after replacement. 0 to 99999999 0 ETB parts counter ETB 1st line: Total counter value from the previous replacement 2nd line: Estimated life value When checking the consumption level of parts/replacing the parts To clear the counter value: Select the item, and then press Clear key. To change the estimated life: Select the item, enter the value, and then press OK key. Clear the counter value after replacement. 0 to 99999999 sheet 0 COPIER> FUNCTION> CLEAR> TR-BLT Transfer Roller parts counter Transfer Roller 1st line: Total counter value from the previous replacement 2nd line: Estimated life value When checking the consumption level of parts/replacing the parts To clear the counter value: Select the item, and then press Clear key. To change the estimated life: Select the item, enter the value, and then press OK key. Clear the counter value after replacement. 0 to 99999999 0 This is commonly used as operator maintenance parts counter. Photosensitive Drum parts counter Photosensitive Drum 1st line: Total counter value from the previous replacement 2nd line: Estimated life value When checking the consumption level of parts/replacing the parts To clear the counter value: Select the item, and then press Clear key. To change the estimated life: Select the item, enter the value, and then press OK key. Clear the counter value after replacement. 0 to 99999999 0



1242



8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > COUNTER (Counter mode) > DRBL-1 CLN-BLD



1 Detail



Use Case Adj/Set/Operate Method Caution Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value SP-CLAW



1 Detail



Use Case Adj/Set/Operate Method Caution Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value BS-SL-F



1 Detail



Use Case Adj/Set/Operate Method Caution Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value BS-SL-R



1 Detail



Use Case Adj/Set/Operate Method Caution Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value DV-UNT-K



1 Detail



Use Case Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range Unit Default Value



Drum Cleaning Blade parts counter Drum Cleaning Blade 1st line: Total counter value from the previous replacement 2nd line: Estimated life value When checking the consumption level of parts/replacing the parts To clear the counter value: Select the item, and then press Clear key. To change the estimated life: Select the item, enter the value, and then press OK key. Clear the counter value after replacement. 0 to 99999999 0 Drum Separation Claw parts counter Drum Separation Claw 1st line: Total counter value from the previous replacement 2nd line: Estimated life value When checking the consumption level of parts/replacing the parts To clear the counter value: Select the item, and then press Clear key. To change the estimated life: Select the item, enter the value, and then press OK key. Clear the counter value after replacement. 0 to 99999999 0 Drum Front Side Seal parts counter Drum Front Side Seal 1st line: Total counter value from the previous replacement 2nd line: Estimated life value When checking the consumption level of parts/replacing the parts To clear the counter value: Select the item, and then press Clear key. To change the estimated life: Select the item, enter the value, and then press OK key. Clear the counter value after replacement. 0 to 99999999 0 Drum Rear Side Seal parts counter Drum Rear Side Seal 1st line: Total counter value from the previous replacement 2nd line: Estimated life value When checking the consumption level of parts/replacing the parts To clear the counter value: Select the item, and then press Clear key. To change the estimated life: Select the item, enter the value, and then press OK key. Clear the counter value after replacement. 0 to 99999999 0 Developing Cylinder parts counter Developing Cylinder 1st line: Total counter value from the previous replacement 2nd line: Estimated life value When checking the consumption level of parts/replacing the parts To clear the counter value: Select the item, and then press Clear key. To change the estimated life value: Select the item, enter the value, and then press OK key. 0 to 99999999 sheet 0



1243



8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > COUNTER (Counter mode) > DRBL-1 C1-PU-RL



1 Detail



Use Case Adj/Set/Operate Method Caution Display/Adj/Set Range Unit Default Value C1-SP-RL



1 Detail



Use Case Adj/Set/Operate Method Caution Display/Adj/Set Range Unit Default Value C1-FD-RL



1 Detail



Use Case Adj/Set/Operate Method Caution Display/Adj/Set Range Unit Default Value C2-PU-RL



1 Detail



Use Case Adj/Set/Operate Method Caution Display/Adj/Set Range Unit Default Value



Right Deck Pickup Roller parts counter Right Deck Pickup Roller 1st line: Total counter value from the previous replacement 2nd line: Estimated life value When checking the consumption level of parts/replacing the parts To clear the counter value: Select the item, and then press Clear key. To change the estimated life: Select the item, enter the value, and then press OK key. Clear the counter value after replacement. 0 to 99999999 sheet 0 Right Deck Separation Roller parts cntr Right Deck Separation Roller 1st line: Total counter value from the previous replacement 2nd line: Estimated life value When checking the consumption level of parts/replacing the parts To clear the counter value: Select the item, and then press Clear key. To change the estimated life: Select the item, enter the value, and then press OK key. Clear the counter value after replacement. 0 to 99999999 sheet 0 Right Deck Feed Roller parts counter Right Deck Feed Roller 1st line: Total counter value from the previous replacement 2nd line: Estimated life value When checking the consumption level of parts/replacing the parts To clear the counter value: Select the item, and then press Clear key. To change the estimated life: Select the item, enter the value, and then press OK key. Clear the counter value after replacement. 0 to 99999999 sheet 0 Left Deck Pickup Roller parts counter Left Deck Pickup Roller 1st line: Total counter value from the previous replacement 2nd line: Estimated life value When checking the consumption level of parts/replacing the parts To clear the counter value: Select the item, and then press Clear key. To change the estimated life: Select the item, enter the value, and then press OK key. Clear the counter value after replacement. 0 to 99999999 sheet 0



1244



8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > COUNTER (Counter mode) > DRBL-1 C2-SP-RL



1 Detail



Use Case Adj/Set/Operate Method Caution Display/Adj/Set Range Unit Default Value C2-FD-RL



1 Detail



Use Case Adj/Set/Operate Method Caution Display/Adj/Set Range Unit Default Value C3-PU-RL



1 Detail



Use Case Adj/Set/Operate Method Caution Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value C3-SP-RL



1 Detail



Use Case Adj/Set/Operate Method Caution Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value



Left Deck Separation Roller prts counter Left Deck Separation Roller 1st line: Total counter value from the previous replacement 2nd line: Estimated life value When checking the consumption level of parts/replacing the parts To clear the counter value: Select the item, and then press Clear key. To change the estimated life: Select the item, enter the value, and then press OK key. Clear the counter value after replacement. 0 to 99999999 sheet 0 Left Deck Feed Roller parts counter Left Deck Feed Roller 1st line: Total counter value from the previous replacement 2nd line: Estimated life value When checking the consumption level of parts/replacing the parts To clear the counter value: Select the item, and then press Clear key. To change the estimated life: Select the item, enter the value, and then press OK key. Clear the counter value after replacement. 0 to 99999999 sheet 0 Cassette 3 Pickup Roller parts counter Cassette 3 Pickup Roller 1st line: Total counter value from the previous replacement 2nd line: Estimated life value When checking the consumption level of parts/replacing the parts To clear the counter value: Select the item, and then press Clear key. To change the estimated life: Select the item, enter the value, and then press OK key. Clear the counter value after replacement. 0 to 99999999 0 Cassette 3 Separation Roller parts cntr Cassette 3 Separation Roller 1st line: Total counter value from the previous replacement 2nd line: Estimated life value When checking the consumption level of parts/replacing the parts To clear the counter value: Select the item, and then press Clear key. To change the estimated life: Select the item, enter the value, and then press OK key. Clear the counter value after replacement. 0 to 99999999 0



1245



8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > COUNTER (Counter mode) > DRBL-1 C3-FD-RL



1 Detail



Use Case Adj/Set/Operate Method Caution Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value C4-PU-RL



1 Detail



Use Case Adj/Set/Operate Method Caution Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value C4-SP-RL



1 Detail



Use Case Adj/Set/Operate Method Caution Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value C4-FD-RL



1 Detail



Use Case Adj/Set/Operate Method Caution Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value



Cassette 3 Feed Roller parts counter Cassette 3 Feed Roller 1st line: Total counter value from the previous replacement 2nd line: Estimated life value When checking the consumption level of parts/replacing the parts To clear the counter value: Select the item, and then press Clear key. To change the estimated life: Select the item, enter the value, and then press OK key. Clear the counter value after replacement. 0 to 99999999 0 Cassette 4 Pickup Roller parts counter Cassette 4 Pickup Roller 1st line: Total counter value from the previous replacement 2nd line: Estimated life value When checking the consumption level of parts/replacing the parts To clear the counter value: Select the item, and then press Clear key. To change the estimated life: Select the item, enter the value, and then press OK key. Clear the counter value after replacement. 0 to 99999999 0 Cassette 4 Separation Roller parts cntr Cassette 4 Separation Roller 1st line: Total counter value from the previous replacement 2nd line: Estimated life value When checking the consumption level of parts/replacing the parts To clear the counter value: Select the item, and then press Clear key. To change the estimated life: Select the item, enter the value, and then press OK key. Clear the counter value after replacement. 0 to 99999999 0 Cassette 4 Feed Roller parts counter Cassette 4 Feed Roller 1st line: Total counter value from the previous replacement 2nd line: Estimated life value When checking the consumption level of parts/replacing the parts To clear the counter value: Select the item, and then press Clear key. To change the estimated life: Select the item, enter the value, and then press OK key. Clear the counter value after replacement. 0 to 99999999 0



1246



8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > COUNTER (Counter mode) > DRBL-1 M-SP-RL



1 Detail



Use Case Adj/Set/Operate Method Caution Display/Adj/Set Range Unit Default Value M-FD-RL



1 Detail



Use Case Adj/Set/Operate Method Caution Display/Adj/Set Range Unit Default Value FX-UP-RL



1 Detail



Use Case Adj/Set/Operate Method Caution Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value FX-LW-RL



1 Detail



Use Case Adj/Set/Operate Method Caution Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value



Multi-purpose Tray Sprtn Roll prts cntr Multi-purpose Tray Separation Roller 1st line: Total counter value from the previous replacement 2nd line: Estimated life value When checking the consumption level of parts/replacing the parts To clear the counter value: Select the item, and then press Clear key. To change the estimated life: Select the item, enter the value, and then press OK key. Clear the counter value after replacement. 0 to 99999999 sheet 0 Multi-purpose Tray Feed Roll prts cntr Multi-purpose Tray Feed Roller 1st line: Total counter value from the previous replacement 2nd line: Estimated life value When checking the consumption level of parts/replacing the parts To clear the counter value: Select the item, and then press Clear key. To change the estimated life: Select the item, enter the value, and then press OK key. Clear the counter value after replacement. 0 to 99999999 sheet 0 Fixing Roller parts counter Fixing Roller 1st line: Total counter value from the previous replacement 2nd line: Estimated life value When checking the consumption level of parts/replacing the parts To clear the counter value: Select the item, and then press Clear key. To change the estimated life: Select the item, enter the value, and then press OK key. Clear the counter value after replacement. 0 to 99999999 0 Pressure Roller Unit parts counter Pressure Roller Unit 1st line: Total counter value from the previous replacement 2nd line: Estimated life value When checking the consumption level of parts/replacing the parts To clear the counter value: Select the item, and then press Clear key. To change the estimated life: Select the item, enter the value, and then press OK key. Clear the counter value after replacement. 0 to 99999999 0



1247



8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > COUNTER (Counter mode) > DRBL-1 FX-L-STC



1 Detail



Use Case Adj/Set/Operate Method Caution Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value DLV-UCLW



1 Detail



Use Case Adj/Set/Operate Method Caution Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value WST-TNR



1 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method Caution Display/Adj/Set Range Unit



Press Roller Static Eliminator prts cntr Pressure Roller Static Eliminator (Front/Rear) 1st line: Total counter value from the previous replacement 2nd line: Estimated life value When checking the consumption level of parts/replacing the parts To clear the counter value: Select the item, and then press Clear key. To change the estimated life: Select the item, enter the value, and then press OK key. Clear the counter value after replacement. 0 to 99999999 0 Upper Separation Claw parts counter Upper Separation Claw 1st line: Total counter value from the previous replacement 2nd line: Estimated life value When checking the consumption level of parts/replacing the parts To clear the counter value: Select the item, and then press Clear key. To change the estimated life: Select the item, enter the value, and then press OK key. Clear the counter value after replacement. 0 to 99999999 0 Waste Toner Container parts counter 1st line: Total counter value from the previous replacement 2nd line: Estimated life When checking the consumption level of parts/replacing the parts To clear the counter value: Select the item, and then press Clear key. To change the estimated life: Select the item, enter the value, and then press OK key. Clear the counter value after replacement. 0 to 99999999 image



Default Value



0



Amount of Change per Unit



1



FX-RTNR



1 Detail



Use Case Adj/Set/Operate Method Caution Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value



Fixing Roller Thrust Stopper parts cntr Fixing Roller Thrust Retainer 1st line: Total counter value from the previous replacement 2nd line: Estimated life value When checking the consumption level of parts/replacing the parts To clear the counter value: Select the item, and then press Clear key. To change the estimated life: Select the item, enter the value, and then press OK key. Clear the counter value after replacement. 0 to 99999999 0



1248



8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > COUNTER (Counter mode) > DRBL-1 EXP-SCRP



1 Detail



Use Case Adj/Set/Operate Method Caution Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value FX-WEB1



1 Detail



Use Case Adj/Set/Operate Method Caution Display/Adj/Set Range Unit



Pre-exposure Scraper parts counter Pre-exposure Scraper 1st line: Total counter value from the previous replacement 2nd line: Estimated life value When checking the consumption level of parts/replacing the parts To clear the counter value: Select the item, and then press Clear key. To change the estimated life: Select the item, enter the value, and then press OK key. Clear the counter value after replacement. 0 to 99999999 0 Fixing Web fed sheet cntr: accumulated To set the accumulated number of fed sheets (converted on the basis of small size, including at the time of cleaning) as the number of take-ups of the Fixing Web. 1st line: Total counter value from the previous replacement 2nd line: Estimated life value By pressing Clear key when replacing the Fixing Web/Fixing Assembly, the numbers of fed sheets are reset. When checking the consumption level of parts/replacing the parts To clear the counter value: Select the item, and then press Clear key. To change the estimated life value: Select the item, enter the value, and then press OK key. Clear the counter value after replacement. 0 to 99999999 sheet



Default Value



0



Amount of Change per Unit



1



■ DRBL-2 COPIER (Service mode for printer) > COUNTER (Counter mode) > DRBL-2 DF-PU-RL



1 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method Caution Display/Adj/Set Range Unit Default Value Supplement/Memo Amount of Change per Unit



Pickup Roller parts counter: All Reader 1st line: Total counter value from the previous replacement 2nd line: Estimated life When checking the consumption level of parts/replacing the parts To clear the counter value: Select the item, and then press Clear key. To change the estimated life: Select the item, enter the value, and then press OK key. Clear the counter value after replacement. 0 to 99999999 sheet 0 Regardless of the read mode (1-sided/2-sided), the counter is advanced every time a sheet is fed. 1



1249



8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > COUNTER (Counter mode) > DRBL-2 DF-FD-RL



1 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method Caution Display/Adj/Set Range Unit Default Value Supplement/Memo Amount of Change per Unit DF-SP-RL



1 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method Caution Display/Adj/Set Range Unit Default Value Supplement/Memo Amount of Change per Unit LNT-TAP1



1 Detail



Use Case Adj/Set/Operate Method Caution Display/Adj/Set Range Unit Default Value Supplement/Memo Amount of Change per Unit



Feed Roller parts counter: DADF 1st line: Total counter value from the previous replacement 2nd line: Estimated life When checking the consumption level of parts/replacing the parts To clear the counter value: Select the item, and then press Clear key. To change the estimated life: Select the item, enter the value, and then press OK key. Clear the counter value after replacement. 0 to 99999999 sheet 0 Regardless of the read mode (1-sided/2-sided), the counter is advanced every time a sheet is fed. 1 Separation Roller parts counter: DADF 1st line: Total counter value from the previous replacement 2nd line: Estimated life When checking the consumption level of parts/replacing the parts To clear the counter value: Select the item, and then press Clear key. To change the estimated life: Select the item, enter the value, and then press OK key. Clear the counter value after replacement. 0 to 99999999 sheet 0 Regardless of the read mode (1-sided/2-sided), the counter is advanced every time a sheet is fed. 1 Dust Removal Sheet 1 counter: DADF Dust-colleting 1st line: Total counter value from the previous replacement 2nd line: Estimated life When checking the consumption level of parts/replacing the parts To clear the counter value: Select the item, and then press Clear key. To change the estimated life: Select the item, enter the value, and then press OK key. Clear the counter value after replacement. 0 to 99999999 sheet 0 Regardless of the read mode (1-sided/2-sided), the counter is advanced every time a sheet is fed. 1



1250



8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > COUNTER (Counter mode) > DRBL-2 LNT-TAP2



1 Detail



Use Case Adj/Set/Operate Method Caution Display/Adj/Set Range Unit Default Value Supplement/Memo Amount of Change per Unit STAMP



1 Detail



Use Case Adj/Set/Operate Method Caution Display/Adj/Set Range Unit



Dust Removal Sheet 2 counter: DADF Dust-colleting type E 1st line: Total counter value from the previous replacement 2nd line: Estimated life When checking the consumption level of parts/replacing the parts To clear the counter value: Select the item, and then press Clear key. To change the estimated life: Select the item, enter the value, and then press OK key. Clear the counter value after replacement. 0 to 99999999 sheet 0 Regardless of the read mode (1-sided/2-sided), the counter is advanced every time a sheet is fed. 1 Stamp parts counter: DADF To display the estimated life and parts counter of DADF stamp. 1st line: Total counter value from the previous replacement 2nd line: Estimated life to be entered by operator At replacement To clear the counter value: Select the item, and then press Clear key. To change the estimated life: Select the item, enter the value, and then press OK key. Clear the counter value after replacement. 0 to 99999999 sheet



Default Value



0



Amount of Change per Unit



1



PD-PU-RL



1 Detail



Use Case Adj/Set/Operate Method Caution Display/Adj/Set Range Unit



Pickup Roller parts counter: Deck Pickup Roller (Front/Rear) of Paper Deck/POD Deck Lite 1st line: Total counter value from the previous replacement 2nd line: Estimated life When checking the consumption level of parts/replacing the parts To clear the counter value: Select the item, and then press Clear key. To change the estimated life: Select the item, enter the value, and then press OK key. Clear the counter value after replacement. 0 to 99999999 sheet



Default Value



0



Amount of Change per Unit



1



1251



8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > COUNTER (Counter mode) > DRBL-2 PD-SP-RL



1 Detail



Use Case Adj/Set/Operate Method Caution Display/Adj/Set Range Unit



Separation Roller parts counter: Deck Separation Roller of Paper Deck/POD Deck Lite 1st line: Total counter value from the previous replacement 2nd line: Estimated life When checking the consumption level of parts/replacing the parts To clear the counter value: Select the item, and then press Clear key. To change the estimated life: Select the item, enter the value, and then press OK key. Clear the counter value after replacement. 0 to 99999999 sheet



Default Value



0



Amount of Change per Unit



1



PD-FD-RL



1 Detail



Use Case Adj/Set/Operate Method Caution Display/Adj/Set Range Unit



Feed Roller parts counter: Deck Feed Roller of Paper Deck/POD Deck Lite 1st line: Total counter value from the previous replacement 2nd line: Estimated life When checking the consumption level of parts/replacing the parts To clear the counter value: Select the item, and then press Clear key. To change the estimated life: Select the item, enter the value, and then press OK key. Clear the counter value after replacement. 0 to 99999999 sheet



Default Value



0



Amount of Change per Unit



1



FIN-STPR



1 Detail



Use Case Adj/Set/Operate Method Caution Display/Adj/Set Range Unit



Stapler parts counter: Fin-V Stapler Unit 1st line: Total counter value from the previous replacement 2nd line: Estimated life value When checking the consumption level of parts/replacing the parts To clear the counter value: Select the item, and then press Clear key. To change the estimated life: Select the item, enter the value, and then press OK key. Clear the counter value after replacement. 0 to 99999999 time



Default Value



0



Amount of Change per Unit



1



1252



8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > COUNTER (Counter mode) > DRBL-2 PUNCH



1 Detail



Use Case Adj/Set/Operate Method Caution Display/Adj/Set Range Unit



Punch Unit parts counter: Fin-V Punch Unit 1st line: Total counter value from the previous replacement 2nd line: Estimated life value When checking the consumption level of parts/replacing the parts To clear the counter value: Select the item, and then press Clear key. To change the estimated life: Select the item, enter the value, and then press OK key. Clear the counter value after replacement. 0 to 99999999 time



Default Value



0



Amount of Change per Unit



1



IS-P-RL1



1 Detail



Use Case Adj/Set/Operate Method Caution Display/Adj/Set Range Unit



Pickup Roller parts counter: INS Pickup Roller 1st line: Total counter value from the previous replacement 2nd line: Estimated life When checking the consumption level of parts/replacing the parts To clear the counter value: Select the item, and then press Clear key. To change the estimated life: Select the item, enter the value, and then press OK key. Clear the counter value after replacement. 0 to 99999999 sheet



Default Value



0



Amount of Change per Unit



1



IS-S-RL1



1 Detail



Use Case Adj/Set/Operate Method Caution Display/Adj/Set Range Unit



Sprtn Roller parts counter: INS Separation Roller 1st line: Total counter value from the previous replacement 2nd line: Estimated life When checking the consumption level of parts/replacing the parts To clear the counter value: Select the item, and then press Clear key. To change the estimated life: Select the item, enter the value, and then press OK key. Clear the counter value after replacement. 0 to 99999999 sheet



Default Value



0



Amount of Change per Unit



1



1253



8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > COUNTER (Counter mode) > DRBL-2 IS-F-RL1



1 Detail



Use Case Adj/Set/Operate Method Caution Display/Adj/Set Range Unit



Feed Roller parts counter: INS Feed Roller 1st line: Total counter value from the previous replacement 2nd line: Estimated life When checking the consumption level of parts/replacing the parts To clear the counter value: Select the item, and then press Clear key. To change the estimated life: Select the item, enter the value, and then press OK key. Clear the counter value after replacement. 0 to 99999999 sheet



Default Value



0



Amount of Change per Unit



1



IS-TQLM1



1 Detail



Use Case Adj/Set/Operate Method Caution Display/Adj/Set Range Unit



Drv Torq Limt parts counter: INS Drive Torque Limiter 1st line: Total counter value from the previous replacement 2nd line: Estimated life When checking the consumption level of parts/replacing the parts To clear the counter value: Select the item, and then press Clear key. To change the estimated life: Select the item, enter the value, and then press OK key. Clear the counter value after replacement. 0 to 99999999 sheet



Default Value



0



Amount of Change per Unit



1



TRY-TQLM



1 Detail



Use Case Adj/Set/Operate Method Caution Display/Adj/Set Range Unit



Tray Torque Limiter parts cntr: Fin-V Stack Tray Torque Limiter 1st line: Total counter value from the previous replacement 2nd line: Estimated life value When checking the consumption level of parts/replacing the parts To clear the counter value: Select the item, and then press Clear key. To change the estimated life: Select the item, enter the value, and then press OK key. Clear the counter value after replacement. 0 to 99999999 sheet



Default Value



0



Amount of Change per Unit



1



1254



8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > COUNTER (Counter mode) > DRBL-2 DL-STC



1 Detail



Use Case Adj/Set/Operate Method Caution Display/Adj/Set Range Unit



Stck Tr Dvry Sttc Elim prts cntr: Fin-V Stack Tray Delivery Assembly Static Eliminator 1st line: Total counter value from the previous replacement 2nd line: Estimated life value When checking the consumption level of parts/replacing the parts To clear the counter value: Select the item, and then press Clear key. To change the estimated life: Select the item, enter the value, and then press OK key. Clear the counter value after replacement. 0 to 99999999 sheet



Default Value



0



Amount of Change per Unit



1



IS-COLL1



1 Detail



Use Case Adj/Set/Operate Method Caution Display/Adj/Set Range Unit



Horz Feed Drive Roller prts cntr: PF/INS Horizontal Feed Drive Roller 1st line: Total counter value from the previous replacement 2nd line: Estimated life When checking the consumption level of parts/replacing the parts To clear the counter value: Select the item, and then press Clear key. To change the estimated life: Select the item, enter the value, and then press OK key. Clear the counter value after replacement. 0 to 99999999 sheet



Default Value



0



Amount of Change per Unit



1



IS-COLL2



1 Detail



Use Case Adj/Set/Operate Method Caution Display/Adj/Set Range Unit



Z Fold Delivery Roller prts cntr: INS Z Fold Delivery Roller 1st line: Total counter value from the previous replacement 2nd line: Estimated life When checking the consumption level of parts/replacing the parts To clear the counter value: Select the item, and then press Clear key. To change the estimated life: Select the item, enter the value, and then press OK key. Clear the counter value after replacement. 0 to 99999999 sheet



Default Value



0



Amount of Change per Unit



1



1255



8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > COUNTER (Counter mode) > DRBL-2 FIN-MPDL



1 Detail



Use Case Adj/Set/Operate Method Caution Display/Adj/Set Range Unit



Paddle parts counter: Fin-V Paddle 1st line: Total counter value from the previous replacement 2nd line: Estimated life value When checking the consumption level of parts/replacing the parts To clear the counter value: Select the item, and then press Clear key. To change the estimated life: Select the item, enter the value, and then press OK key. Clear the counter value after replacement. 0 to 99999999 time



Default Value



0



Amount of Change per Unit



1



FR-STPL



1 Detail



Use Case Adj/Set/Operate Method Caution Display/Adj/Set Range Unit



Stpl-free Binding Unit prts cntr: Fin-V Staple-free Binding Unit 1st line: Total counter value from the previous replacement 2nd line: Estimated life value When checking the consumption level of parts/replacing the parts To clear the counter value: Select the item, and then press Clear key. To change the estimated life: Select the item, enter the value, and then press OK key. Clear the counter value after replacement. 0 to 99999999 time



Default Value



0



Amount of Change per Unit



1



ESC-CL



1 Detail



Use Case Adj/Set/Operate Method Caution Display/Adj/Set Range Unit



Escape Feed Clutch parts counter: Fin-V Escape Feed Clutch 1st line: Total counter value from the previous replacement 2nd line: Estimated life value When checking the consumption level of parts/replacing the parts To clear the counter value: Select the item, and then press Clear key. To change the estimated life: Select the item, enter the value, and then press OK key. Clear the counter value after replacement. 0 to 99999999 time



Default Value



0



Amount of Change per Unit



1



1256



8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > COUNTER (Counter mode) > DRBL-2 SDL-STC



1 Detail



Use Case Adj/Set/Operate Method Caution Display/Adj/Set Range Unit



Sddl Dvry Sttc Elim prts cntr: Fin-V Saddle Delivery Assembly Static Eliminator 1st line: Total counter value from the previous replacement 2nd line: Estimated life value When checking the consumption level of parts/replacing the parts To clear the counter value: Select the item, and then press Clear key. To change the estimated life: Select the item, enter the value, and then press OK key. Clear the counter value after replacement. 0 to 99999999 sheet



Default Value



0



Amount of Change per Unit



1



TRY-STC1



1 Detail



Use Case Adj/Set/Operate Method Caution Display/Adj/Set Range Unit



Low Escape Sttc Elim prts cntr: Fin-V Lower Escape Delivery Assembly Static Eliminator 1st line: Total counter value from the previous replacement 2nd line: Estimated life value When checking the consumption level of parts/replacing the parts To clear the counter value: Select the item, and then press Clear key. To change the estimated life: Select the item, enter the value, and then press OK key. Clear the counter value after replacement. 0 to 99999999 sheet



Default Value



0



Amount of Change per Unit



1



TRY-STC2



1 Detail



Use Case Adj/Set/Operate Method Caution Display/Adj/Set Range Unit



Upr Escape Sttc Elim prts cntr: Fin-V Upper Escape Delivery Assembly Static Eliminator 1st line: Total counter value from the previous replacement 2nd line: Estimated life value When checking the consumption level of parts/replacing the parts To clear the counter value: Select the item, and then press Clear key. To change the estimated life: Select the item, enter the value, and then press OK key. Clear the counter value after replacement. 0 to 99999999 sheet



Default Value



0



Amount of Change per Unit



1



1257



8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > COUNTER (Counter mode) > DRBL-2 SW-RL-CL



1 Detail



Use Case Adj/Set/Operate Method Caution Display/Adj/Set Range Unit



Low Stck Delvry Rol Clt prts cntr:Fin-V Lower Stack Delivery Roller Clutch 1st line: Total counter value from the previous replacement 2nd line: Estimated life value When checking the consumption level of parts/replacing the parts To clear the counter value: Select the item, and then press Clear key. To change the estimated life: Select the item, enter the value, and then press OK key. Clear the counter value after replacement. 0 to 99999999 time



Default Value



0



Amount of Change per Unit



1



SDL-STP



1 Detail



Use Case Adj/Set/Operate Method Caution Display/Adj/Set Range Unit



Saddle Stitcher parts counter: Fin-V Saddle Stitcher Unit 1st line: Total counter value from the previous replacement 2nd line: Estimated life value When checking the consumption level of parts/replacing the parts To clear the counter value: Select the item, and then press Clear key. To change the estimated life: Select the item, enter the value, and then press OK key. Clear the counter value after replacement. 0 to 99999999 time



Default Value



0



Amount of Change per Unit



1



■ MISC2 COPIER (Service mode for printer) > COUNTER (Counter mode) > MISC2 APW-TIME



2



For R&D



CPW-TIME



2



For R&D



BAT-TIME



2



For R&D



FUSE-CNT



2



For R&D



SPW-TIME



2



For R&D



1258



8. Service Mode



■ LIFE COPIER (Service mode for printer) > COUNTER (Counter mode) > LIFE TONER-K



1 Detail



Use Case Display/Adj/Set Range



Supplement/Memo



WST-TNR



1 Detail



Use Case Adj/Set/Operate Method Caution



Display/Adj/Set Range



Supplement/Memo



Toner (Bk): Life VL and No. of days left To display the life value and the number of days left of Toner (Bk).The 3rd and 4th columns may be hidden depending on the country. 1st column: Operation Life Value 2nd column: Number of Days Left 3rd column: Life Value 4th column: Replacement Life Value When checking Life VL/No. of days left 1st column: 0 to 999 (%) 2nd column: 0 to 999 (days) 3rd column: 0 to 999 (%) 4th column: 50 to 999 (%) Operation Life Value: Wear level value relative to Replacement Life Value (%) Operation Life Value = Life Value/Replacement Life Valuex100Number of Days Left: Expected number of days until the part reaches its end of life Replacement Life Value: Target replacement life value Waste Toner Container:Life VL/days left To display the life value and the number of days left of Waste Toner Container. The 3rd and 4th columns may be hidden depending on the country. 1st column: Operation Life Value 2nd column: Number of Days Left 3rd column: Life Value 4th column: Replacement Life Value When checking Life VL/No. of days left To reset Operation Life Value/Number of Days Left/Life Value: Select the item, and then press Clear key. - Clear the counters if the waste toner container is replaced when the Preparing Waste Toner Container warning or Waste Toner Full message is not displayed. - Operation Life Value/Number of Days Left/Life Value can be reset also by clearing the counters in COPIER> COUNTER> DRBL-1> WST-TNR. 1st column: 0 to 999 (%) 2nd column: 0 to 999 (days) 3rd column: 0 to 999 (%) 4th column: 50 to 999 (%) Operation Life Value: Wear level value relative to Replacement Life Value (%) Operation Life Value = Life Value/Replacement Life Valuex100Number of Days Left: Expected number of days until the part reaches its end of life Replacement Life Value: Target replacement life value



1259



8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > COUNTER (Counter mode) > LIFE PT-DRM



1 Detail



Use Case Adj/Set/Operate Method



Caution



Display/Adj/Set Range



Supplement/Memo



Drum Unit (Bk): Life VL/No. of days To display the life value and the number of days left of Drum Unit (Bk).The 3rd and 4th columns may be hidden depending on the country. 1st column: Operation Life Value 2nd column: Number of Days Left 3rd column: Life Value 4th column: Replacement Life Value - When checking Life VL/No. of days left of the part - At parts replacement To change the Replacement Life Value: Select the item, enter the value, and then press OK key. To reset Operation Life Value/Number of Days Left/Life Value: Select the item, and then press Clear key. - Be sure to reset Operation Life Value/Number of Days Left/Life Value after replacing the part. - Operation Life Value/Number of Days Left/Life Value can also be reset by clearing the parts counter. 1st column: 0 to 999 (%) 2nd column: 0 to 999 (days) 3rd column: 0 to 999 (%) 4th column: 50 to 999 (%) Operation Life Value: Wear level value relative to Replacement Life Value (%) Operation Life Value = Life Value/Replacement Life Valuex100Number of Days Left: Expected number of days until the part reaches its end of life Replacement Life Value: Target replacement life value



PRM-WIRE



1



For R&D



PRM-CLN



1



For R&D



PRM-UNIT



1



For R&D



CLN-BLD



1



For R&D



BS-SL-F



1



For R&D



BS-SL-R



1



For R&D



SP-CLAW



1



For R&D



EXP-SCRP



1



For R&D



DV-UNT-K



1



For R&D



TR-BLT



1



For R&D



TR-ROLL



1



For R&D



T-CLN-BD



1



For R&D



T-CN-BRU



1



For R&D



PO-WIRE



1



For R&D



PO-CLN



1



For R&D



PO-UNIT



1



For R&D



FX-UP-RL



1



For R&D



FIX-TH1



1



For R&D



FIX-TH2



1



For R&D



FX-RTNR



1



For R&D



FX-LW-RL



1



For R&D



FX-L-STC



1



For R&D



FX-WEB1



1



For R&D



C1-PU-RL



1



For R&D



1260



8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > COUNTER (Counter mode) > LIFE C1-FD-RL



1



For R&D



C1-SP-RL



1



For R&D



C2-PU-RL



1



For R&D



C2-FD-RL



1



For R&D



C2-SP-RL



1



For R&D



C3-PU-RL



1



For R&D



C3-SP-RL



1



For R&D



C3-FD-RL



1



For R&D



C4-PU-RL



1



For R&D



C4-FD-RL



1



For R&D



C4-SP-RL



1



For R&D



M-FD-RL



1



For R&D



M-SP-RL



1



For R&D



DLV-UCLW



1



For R&D



OZ-FIL1



1



For R&D



AR-FIL1



1



For R&D



DF-PU-RL



1



For R&D



DF-FD-RL



1



For R&D



DF-SP-RL



1



For R&D



LNT-TAP1



1



For R&D



LNT-TAP2



1



For R&D



PD-PU-RL



1



For R&D



PD-SP-RL



1



For R&D



PD-FD-RL



1



For R&D



1261



8. Service Mode



FEEDER (ADF service mode) DISPLAY (State display mode) FEEDER (ADF service mode) > DISPLAY (State display mode) FEEDSIZE



1 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method TRY-WIDE



1 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range



Dspl orgnl size detected by DADF/Cpybrd To display the original size detected by the DADF/Copyboard. When checking the paper size recognized by the device after scanning N/A (Display only) Distance of Original Width Detect Slider To display the distance between the Original Width Detection Sliders. At incorrect detection of original size N/A (Display only) 0 to 2970



Unit



mm



Amount of Change per Unit



0.1



SPSN-LMN



1 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range SPSN-RCV



1 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range RDSN-LMN



1 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range RDSN-RCV



1 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range DRSN-LMN



1 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range



Dspl of Post-sprtn Sensr emit voltage To display the light-emitting voltage value for the Post-separation Sensor. When jams frequently occur N/A (Display only) 0 to 255 Dspl of Post-sprtn Sensr recv voltage To display the light-receiving voltage value for the Post-separation Sensor. When jams frequently occur N/A (Display only) 0 to 1023 Display of Lead Sensor emission voltage To display the light-emitting voltage value for the Lead Sensor. When jams frequently occur N/A (Display only) 0 to 255 Display of Lead Sensor reception voltage To display the light-receiving voltage value for the Lead Sensor. When jams frequently occur N/A (Display only) 0 to 1023 Dspl of Delivery Sensor emission voltg To display the light-emitting voltage value for the Delivery Sensor. When jams frequently occur N/A (Display only) 0 to 255



1262



8. Service Mode FEEDER (ADF service mode) > DISPLAY (State display mode) DRSN-RCV



1 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range RGSN-LMN



1 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range RGSN-RCV



1 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range



Dspl of Delivery Sensor reception voltg To display the light-receiving voltage value for the Delivery Sensor. When jams frequently occur N/A (Display only) 0 to 1023 Display of Rgst Sensor emission voltage To display the light-emitting voltage value for the Registration Sensor. When jams frequently occur N/A (Display only) 0 to 255 Display of Rgst Sensor reception voltage To display the light-receiving voltage value for the Registration Sensor. When jams frequently occur N/A (Display only) 0 to 1023



ADJUST (Adjustment mode) FEEDER (ADF service mode) > ADJUST (Adjustment mode) DOCST



1 Detail



Use Case Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range Unit Default Value Amount of Change per Unit LA-SPEED



1 Detail



Use Case Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range Unit Default Value Amount of Change per Unit



Adj of DADF img lead edge margin: front To adjust the leading edge margin on the front side at DADF reading. Execute this item when the output image after DADF installation is displaced. When replacing the Reader Controller PCB/clearing RAM data, enter the value of service label. As the value is incremented by 1, the margin is reduced by 0.1 mm. (The image moves upward.) - When installing DADF - When replacing the Reader Controller PCB/clearing RAM data Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key. -50 to 50 mm 0 0.1 Fine adj img ratio: DADF,vert scan,front To make a fine adjustment of the front side image magnification ratio in vertical scanning direction at DADF reading. As the value is incremented by 1, the image is reduced by 0.1% in vertical scanning direction. (The feeding speed increases, and the image is reduced.) - When installing DADF - When replacing the Reader Controller PCB/clearing RAM data Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key. -30 to 30 % 0 0.1



1263



8. Service Mode FEEDER (ADF service mode) > ADJUST (Adjustment mode) DOCST2



1 Detail



Use Case Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range Unit Default Value Amount of Change per Unit LA-SPD2



1 Detail



Use Case Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range Unit Default Value Amount of Change per Unit ADJMSCN1



1 Detail



Use Case Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range Unit Default Value Amount of Change per Unit ADJMSCN2



1 Detail



Use Case Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range Unit Default Value Amount of Change per Unit



Adj of DADF img lead edge margin: back To adjust the leading edge margin on the back side at DADF reading. Execute this item when the output image after DADF installation is displaced. When replacing the Reader Controller PCB/clearing RAM data, enter the value of service label. As the value is incremented by 1, the margin is reduced by 0.1 mm. (The image moves upward.) - When installing DADF - When replacing the Reader Controller PCB/clearing RAM data Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key. -50 to 50 mm 0 0.1 Fine adj img ratio: DADF,vert scan,back To make a fine adjustment of the back side image magnification ratio in vertical scanning direction at DADF reading. As the value is incremented by 1, the image is reduced by 0.01% in vertical scanning direction. (The feeding speed increases, and the image is reduced.) - When installing DADF - When replacing the Reader Controller PCB/clearing RAM data Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key. -200 to 200 (-2.00 to 2.00%) % 0 0.01 Fine adj img ratio:2-sided,horz scan,frt To make a fine adjustment of the front side image magnification ratio in horizontal scanning direction at DADF 2-sided reading. As the value is incremented by 1, the image is enlarged by 0.1% in horizontal scanning direction. When image magnification ratio on the front side and back side are different at 2-sided reading Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key. -10 to 10 % 0 0.1 Fine adj img ratio:2-sided,horz scan,bck To make a fine adjustment of the back side image magnification ratio in horizontal scanning direction at DADF 2-sided reading. As the value is incremented by 1, the image is enlarged by 0.1% in horizontal scanning direction. When image magnification ratio on the front side and back side are different at 2-sided reading Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key. -10 to 10 % 0 0.1



1264



8. Service Mode



FUNCTION (Operation / inspection mode) FEEDER (ADF service mode) > FUNCTION (Operation / inspection mode) SENS-INT



1 Detail



Use Case Adj/Set/Operate Method MTR-CHK



Initialization of DADF Sensors To initialize DADF Sensors. - Post-separation Sensor 1 (SR2) - Post-separation Sensor 2 (SR3) - Post-separation Sensor 3 (PCB2) - Registration Sensor (PCB3) - Lead Sensor 1 (PCB4) - Lead Sensor 2 (SR5) When replacing the Sensor Select the item, and then press OK key.



1



Specification of DADF operation motor



Detail



To specify the motor of DADF to operate. The motor is activated by MTR-ON.



Use Case Adj/Set/Operate Method



At operation check Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.



Display/Adj/Set Range



0 to 9 0: Pickup Motor (M5), 1: Feed Motor (M3), 2: Registration Motor (M6), 3: Read Motor (M4), 4: Delivery Motor (M2), 5, 6: Not used, 7: Glass Movement Motor (M8), 8: Tray Lifter Motor (M7), 9: Pickup Roller Unit Lifter Motor (M1)



Related Service Mode



FEEDER> FUNCTION> MTR-ON



TRY-A4



1 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method TRY-A5R



1 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method TRY-LTR



1 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method TRY-LTRR



1 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method



Adj of DADF Tray width detect ref 1: A4 To automatically adjust the paper width detection reference point 1 for the DADF Original Pickup Tray. (A4) - When replacing the Original Width Volume (VR) - When replacing the Reader Controller PCB/clearing RAM data Select the item, and then press OK key. Adj of DADF Tray width detect ref 2: A5R To automatically adjust the paper width detection reference point 2 for the DADF Original Pickup Tray. (A5R) - When replacing the Original Width Volume (VR) - When replacing the Reader Controller PCB/clearing RAM data Select the item, and then press OK key. Adj of DADF Tray width detect ref 1: LTR To automatically adjust the paper width detection reference point 1 for the DADF Original Pickup Tray. (LTR) - When replacing the Original Width Volume (VR) - When replacing the Reader Controller PCB/clearing RAM data Select the item, and then press OK key. Adj of DADF Tray width detect ref2: LTRR To automatically adjust the paper width detection reference point 2 for the DADF Original Pickup Tray. (LTRR) - When replacing the Original Width Volume (VR) - When replacing the Reader Controller PCB/clearing RAM data Select the item, and then press OK key.



1265



8. Service Mode FEEDER (ADF service mode) > FUNCTION (Operation / inspection mode) FEED-CHK



1 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method



Specify DADF individual feed operation To specify the feed mode for DADF. Feed operation is activated by FEED-ON. At operation check Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.



Display/Adj/Set Range



0 to 2 0: 1-sided pickup/delivery operation, 1: Not used, 2: 1-sided pickup/delivery operation (with stamp)



Related Service Mode



FEEDER> FUNCTION> FEED-ON



FAN-CHK



1



Specification of DADF operation fan



Detail



To specify the fan of DADF to operate. The fan is activated by FAN-ON.



Use Case Adj/Set/Operate Method



At operation check Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.



Display/Adj/Set Range



0 to 1 0: Motor Driver Cooling Fan (FM1), 1: Read Motor Cooling Fan (FM2)



Related Service Mode



FEEDER> FUNCTION> FAN-ON



FAN-ON



1 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method



Caution



Related Service Mode SL-CHK



1 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method



Operation check of DADF fan To start operation check of the fan specified by FAN-CHK. At operation check 1) Select the item, and then press OK key. It is driven for approximately 5 seconds and is automatically stopped. 2) Press OK key. The operation check is completed. Be sure to press the OK key again after execution. The operation automatically stops after approximately 5 seconds, but is not completed unless the OK key is pressed (STOP is not displayed). FEEDER> FUNCTION> FAN-CHK Specification of DADF operation solenoid To specify the solenoid of DADF to operate. The solenoid is activated by SL-ON. At operation check Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.



Display/Adj/Set Range



0: Stamp Solenoid



Related Service Mode



FEEDER> FUNCTION> SL-ON



SL-ON



1 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method



Caution



Related Service Mode



Operation check of DADF solenoid To start operation check of the solenoid specified by SL-CHK. At operation check 1) Select the item, and then press OK key. It is driven for approximately 5 seconds and is automatically stopped. 2) Press OK key. The operation check is completed. Be sure to press the OK key again after execution. The operation automatically stops after approximately 5 seconds, but is not completed unless the OK key is pressed (STOP is not displayed). FEEDER> FUNCTION> SL-CHK



1266



8. Service Mode FEEDER (ADF service mode) > FUNCTION (Operation / inspection mode) MTR-ON



1 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method



Caution



Related Service Mode ROLL-CLN



1 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method



FEED-ON



1 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method Related Service Mode



Operation check of DADF motor To start operation check of the motor specified by MTR-CHK. At operation check 1) Select the item, and then press OK key. It is driven for approximately 5 seconds and is automatically stopped. 2) Press OK key. The operation check is completed. Be sure to press the OK key again after execution. The operation automatically stops after approximately 5 seconds, but is not completed unless the OK key is pressed (STOP is not displayed). FEEDER> FUNCTION> MTR-CHK Rotation of DADF rollers To rotate the rollers of DADF for cleaning. Check the rollers with lint-free paper moistened with alcohol while they are rotating. When cleaning the rollers 1) Select the item, and then press OK key. 2) Clean the rotating rollers with lint-free paper moistened with alcohol. 3) Press OK key. The rollers stop. Operation check of DADF individual feed To start operation check of the feed mode specified by FEED-CHK. At operation check Select the item, and then press OK key. FEEDER> FUNCTION> FEED-CHK



OPTION (Specification setting mode) FEEDER (ADF service mode) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) SIZE-SW



1 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value R-ATM



1 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value



ON/OFF of mixed paper detection: AB/Inch To set whether to detect mixed media detection: AB configuration and Inch configuration. When mixing AB and Inch configuration sizes original Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 0 to 1 0: OFF, 1: ON 0 Set DADF double feed dtct highland mode To set the Double Feed Sensor of the DADF to the highland mode. Set 1 if the installation site is above the altitude of 2000 meters. When the installation site is above the altitude of 2000 meters at installation Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 0 to 1 0: Normal, 1: Highland mode 0



1267



8. Service Mode FEEDER (ADF service mode) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) R-OVLPLV



2 Detail



Use Case Adj/Set/Operate Method Caution Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value Related Service Mode



Set DADF double feed dtct threshold VL To set the threshold value at which the Double Feed Sensor of the DADF judges whether papers are double fed. Decrease the value if single feed of paper is incorrectly detected as double feed. Increase the value if double feed of paper is incorrectly detected as single feed. When double feed is incorrectly detected with special paper not defined in the specifications Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key. In the case of highlands, be sure to set R-ATM in advance. -3 to 3 0 FEEDER> OPTION> R-ATM



1268



8. Service Mode



SORTER (Service mode for delivery options) ADJUST (Adjustment mode) SORTER (Service mode for delivery options) > ADJUST (Adjustment mode) PNCH-Y



1 Detail



Use Case Adj/Set/Operate Method Caution Display/Adj/Set Range Unit Default Value Related Service Mode Amount of Change per Unit STP-F1



1 Detail



Use Case Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value Amount of Change per Unit STP-R1



1 Detail



Use Case Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value Amount of Change per Unit



Adj Punch hole horz reg: Fin-V To adjust the punch hole position of the Puncher Unit in horizontal registration direction. As the value is changed by 1, the punch hole shifts by 0.1 mm. +: Toward rear -: Toward front When the punch hole is misaligned in the horizontal registration direction Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. When the setting of "PUN-Y-SW" is 0, the adjustable range is from -3 to 15. -25 to 25 mm 0 SORTER> OPTION> PUN-Y-SW 0.1 Adj Front 1-staple position: Fin-V To adjust the front 1-staple position on Finisher. As the value is changed by 1, the staple position shifts by 0.1mm. +: Toward rear -: Toward front When the front staple position is displaced Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. -30 to 30 0 0.1 Adj Rear 1-staple position: Fin-V To adjust the rear 1-staple position on Finisher. As the value is changed by 1, the staple position shifts by 0.1mm. +: Toward rear -: Toward front When the rear staple position is displaced Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. -30 to 30 0 0.1



1269



8. Service Mode SORTER (Service mode for delivery options) > ADJUST (Adjustment mode) STP-2P



1 Detail



Use Case Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value Amount of Change per Unit BFF-SFT



1 Detail



Use Case Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range Unit Default Value Amount of Change per Unit PNCH-X



1 Detail



Use Case Adj/Set/Operate Method Caution Display/Adj/Set Range Unit Default Value Related Service Mode Additional Functions Mode Amount of Change per Unit BFF-SFT2



1 Detail



Use Case Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range Unit Default Value Amount of Change per Unit



Adj Front/Rear 2-staple pstn: Fin-V To adjust the front/rear 2-staple position on Finisher. As the value is changed by 1, the staple position shifts by 0.1mm. +: Toward rear -: Toward front When the front/rear 2-staple position is displaced Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. -30 to 30 0 0.1 Adj Buffer ppr displc: 1-2 sht, Fin-V To adjust the paper displacement amount on Finisher Buffer Assembly. As the value is changed by 1, the paper position shifts by 0.1mm. +: The 1st sheet of buffered paper shifts toward the delivery side for the 2nd sheet of paper -: The 1st sheet of buffered paper shifts toward the inlet side for the 2nd sheet of paper When the paper displacement occurs on the 1st to 2nd sheets of buffered paper Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. -60 to 60 mm 0 0.1 Adj Punch hole pstn in fd way: Fin-V To adjust the punch hole position on puncher unit in feed direction. As the value is changed by 1, the punch hole shifts by 0.1mm. +: Toward delivery direction -: Toward inlet direction When the punch hole is displaced in feed direction Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. When setting the punch mode to the precision priority, this adjustment cannot be executed. -20 to 20 mm 0 SORTER> OPTION> PUCH-SW Adjustment/Maintenance> Adjust Action> Switch Finisher Puncher Mode 0.1 Adj Buffer ppr displc: 2-3 sht, Fin-V To adjust the paper displacement amount on Finisher Buffer Assembly. As the value is changed by 1, the paper position shifts by 0.1mm. +: The 2nd sheet of buffered paper shifts toward the delivery side for the 3rd sheet of paper -: The 2nd sheet of buffered paper shifts toward the inlet side for the 3rd sheet of paper When the paper displacement occurs on the 2nd to 3rd sheets of buffered paper Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. -60 to 60 mm 0 0.1



1270



8. Service Mode SORTER (Service mode for delivery options) > ADJUST (Adjustment mode) SDL-STP



1 Detail



Use Case Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range Unit Default Value Related Service Mode Supplement/Memo



Amount of Change per Unit SDL-FLD



1 Detail



Use Case Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range Unit Default Value Related Service Mode Supplement/Memo



Amount of Change per Unit SDL-ALG



1 Detail



Use Case Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value Amount of Change per Unit



Adj Saddle Sttch stpl pstn: Fin-V To adjust the staple position of Saddle Stitcher. As the value is changed by 1, the staple position shifts by 0.1mm. +: The staple position shifts toward the left at open page of the book -: The staple position shifts toward the right at open page of the book When the staple position of the Saddle Stitcher is displaced Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. -20 to 20 mm 0 SORTER> ADJUST> SDL-STP2 Because the staple position of the thin paper is changed by this adjustment at the same time, perform the adjustment of SDL-STP2 as needed after performing this adjustment if the staple position of the thin paper has been adjusted by SDL-STP2. 0.1 Adj Saddle Sttch fold pstn: Fin-V To adjust the fold position of Saddle Stitcher. As the value is changed by 1, the fold position shifts by 0.1 mm. +: The fold position shifts toward the left at open page of the book -: The fold position shifts toward the right at open page of the book When the fold position of the Saddle Stitcher is displaced Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. -20 to 20 mm 0 SORTER> ADJUST> SDL-FLD2 Because the fold position of the thin paper is changed by this adjustment at the same time, perform the adjustment of SDL-FLD2 as needed after performing this adjustment if the fold position of the thin paper has been adjusted by SDL-FLD2. 0.1 Adj of Saddle Sttch align wid: Fin-V To adjust the alignment width of Saddle Stitcher. As the value is changed by 1, the alignment width changes by 0.1 mm. +: The width of the alignment plate becomes narrow. -: The width of the alignment plate becomes wide. When the misalignment occurs within a paper stack on the Saddle Stitcher Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. -20 to 20 0 0.1



1271



8. Service Mode SORTER (Service mode for delivery options) > ADJUST (Adjustment mode) ST-ALG1



1 Detail



Use Case Adj/Set/Operate Method



Display/Adj/Set Range Unit Default Value Amount of Change per Unit ST-ALG2



1 Detail



Use Case Adj/Set/Operate Method



Display/Adj/Set Range Unit Default Value Amount of Change per Unit SW-UP-RL



1 Detail



Use Case Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value Amount of Change per Unit



Adj Stacker A4 align pstn: Fin-V To adjust the A4 size paper alignment position of the Processing Tray. As the value is changed by 1, the position of the alignment plate moves by 0.1 mm. +: Inward (The width of the alignment plates becomes narrow.) -: Outward (The width of the alignment plates becomes wide.) When misalignment occurs in A4 size paper 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) The alignment plate moves to position of the A4 width. 3) Set the A4 paper on the processing tray. 4) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 5) Check the adjustment movement of the alignment plate. 6) Repeat steps 4) and 5) and adjust alignment width. 7) After completion of the adjustment, remove paper on the processing tray. -50 to 50 mm 0 0.1 Adj Stacker LTR align pstn: Fin-V To adjust the LTR size paper alignment position of the Processing Tray. As the value is changed by 1, the position of the alignment plate moves by 0.1 mm. +: Inward (The width of the alignment plates becomes narrow.) -: Outward (The width of the alignment plates becomes wide.) When misalignment occurs in LTR size paper 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) The alignment plate moves to position of the LTR width. 3) Set the LTR paper on the processing tray. 4) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 5) Check the adjustment movement of the alignment plate. 6) Repeat steps 4) and 5) and adjust alignment width. 7) After completion of the adjustment, remove paper on the processing tray. -50 to 50 mm 0 0.1 Adj of Swing Unit height: Fin-V To adjust the height of the Swing Unit. As the value is changed by 1, the height of the swing unit changes by angle of 0.1 degree. +: Downward -: Upward When misalignment occurs by failure of the paper feeding to processing tray Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. -30 to 30 0 0.1



1272



8. Service Mode SORTER (Service mode for delivery options) > ADJUST (Adjustment mode) NST-SPD



1 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range Unit Default Value Amount of Change per Unit FR-ST-PS



1 Detail



Use Case Adj/Set/Operate Method Caution Display/Adj/Set Range Unit



Adj dvry speed at non-collate: Fin-V To adjust the delivery speed to the stack tray at non-collated mode. As the value is changed by 1, the delivery speed changes by 10 mm/sec. When the paper stacking at non-collated mode is misalignment Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. -10 to 10 mm/s 0 10 Adj Staple-free Binding pressure: Fin-V To adjust the binding pressure at the staple-free binding mode. As the value is changed by 1, the binding pressure changes by 1 mNm. +: Increased -: Decreased Upon user's request (When changing the binding pressure) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. The life of staple-free binding unit becomes shorter when increasing the setting value. -15 to 15 mNm



Default Value



0



Amount of Change per Unit



1



FR-STP-Y



1 Detail



Use Case Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range Unit Default Value Amount of Change per Unit



Adj Stpl-free Bind pstn (F/R way):Fin-V To adjust the binding position for front/rear direction at the staple-free binding mode. As the value is changed by 1, the binding position shifts by 0.1 mm. +: Toward rear -: Toward front When the binding position in front/rear direction is displaced at the staple-free binding mode Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. -20 to 15 mm 0 0.1



1273



8. Service Mode SORTER (Service mode for delivery options) > ADJUST (Adjustment mode) RBLT-PRS



1 Detail



To adjust the height of the Return Belt when stacking the 65 sheets on the processing tray. As the value is changed by 1, the height of the return belt changes by angle of 0.1 degree. +: Downward -: Upward When replacing the Finisher Controller PCB/clearing the RAM data of the Finisher Controller PCB, enter the value of service label.



Use Case



When the paper alignment position is displaced. When replacing the Finisher Controller PCB/clearing the RAM data of the Finisher Controller PCB.



Adj/Set/Operate Method Caution



Display/Adj/Set Range



Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key. The height of Return Belt of the stacking 1 sheet adjust in the RBLT-PS3. The height of Return Belt at the stacking 2 to 64 sheets alignment on the processing tray is the total of setting values of RBLT-PRS and PBLT-PS3, After the setting value is changed, write the changed value in the service label. -50 to 100



Unit



°



Default Value



0



Related Service Mode Supplement/Memo



Amount of Change per Unit MSTP-2P



Adj Return Belt height 1:Fin-V



1 Detail



Use Case Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range Unit Default Value Amount of Change per Unit



SORTER> ADJUST> RBLT-PS2,RBLT-PS3 The height of Return Belt when stacking the first sheet of paper or buffering the paper: The height of Return Belt is double of the setting value. (Escape position of Return Belt) The height of Return Belt when stacking the sheet of paper except for first sheet: The height of Return Belt is the setting value. (Paper feed position of Return Belt) 0.1 Adj manual staple position: Fin-V To adjust the staple position for front/rear direction at the manual staple mode. As the value is changed by 1, the staple position shifts by 0.1 mm. +: Toward rear -: Toward front When the staple position for front/rear direction is displaced at the manual staple mode Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. -20 to 30 mm 0 0.1



1274



8. Service Mode SORTER (Service mode for delivery options) > ADJUST (Adjustment mode) CENT-ALG



1 Detail



Use Case Adj/Set/Operate Method Caution Display/Adj/Set Range Unit Default Value Related Service Mode Amount of Change per Unit SDL-STP2



1 Detail



Use Case Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range Unit Default Value Related Service Mode Supplement/Memo



Amount of Change per Unit



Adj align plates ctr stdrd pstn: Fin-V To adjust the center standard position of the alignment plates. As the value is changed by 1, the center standard position of the alignment plates shifts by 0.1 mm. +: Toward rear -: Toward front - When the center standard position of the alignment plates is misaligned - When the paper alignment position is displaced Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. Do not use this at the normal service work to influence the alignment operation greatly. Adjust the alignment width with ST-ALG1/ST-ALG2 normally. -50 to 50 mm 0 SORTER> ADJUST> ST-ALG1/ST-ALG2 0.1 Adj Saddle Sttch stpl pstn: Thin, Fin-V To adjust the staple position of Saddle Stitcher (when using the thin paper; the paper that the paper weight is less than 64 g/m2). As the value is incremented by 1, the staple position moves by 0.1mm. +: The staple position moves toward the left at open page of the book -: The staple position moves toward the right at open page of the book When the staple position of the Saddle Stitcher is displaced with the thin paper Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. -20 to 20 mm 0 SORTER> ADJUST> SDL-STP Perform this adjustment after performing the adjustment of SDL-STP. Because the staple position of the thin paper is adjusted by the total setting values of SDL-STP and SDL-STP2, the actual adjustment of the staple position is performed in the staple position adjustable range (-20 to 20) even if entering the setting value beyond the mechanical staple position adjustable range. 0.1



1275



8. Service Mode SORTER (Service mode for delivery options) > ADJUST (Adjustment mode) SDL-FLD2



1 Detail



Use Case Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range Unit Default Value Related Service Mode Supplement/Memo



Amount of Change per Unit ESC1-SPD



1 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range Unit Default Value Amount of Change per Unit ESC2-SPD



1 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range Unit Default Value Amount of Change per Unit



Adj Saddle Sttch fold pstn: Thin, Fin-V To adjust the fold position of Saddle Stitcher (when using the thin paper; the paper that the paper weight is less than 64 g/m2). As the value is incremented by 1, the fold position moves by 0.1 mm. +: The fold position moves toward the left at open page of the book -: The fold position moves toward the right at open page of the book When the fold position of the Saddle Stitcher is displaced with the thin paper Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. -20 to 20 mm 0 SORTER> ADJUST> SDL-FLD Perform this adjustment after performing the adjustment of SDL-FLD. Because the fold position of the thin paper is adjusted by the total setting values of SDL-FLD and SDL-FLD2, the actual adjustment of the fold position is performed in the fold position adjustable range (-20 to 20) even if entering the setting value beyond the mechanical fold position adjustable range. 0.1 Adj Low Escape Tr delivery speed: Fin-V To adjust the delivery speed to the lower escape tray. As the value is changed by 1, the delivery speed to the lower escape tray changes by 10 mm/sec. When the paper stacking to the lower escape tray is misalignment Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. -10 to 0 mm/s 0 10 Adj Upr Escape Tr delivery speed: Fin-V To adjust the delivery speed to the upper escape tray. As the value is changed by 1, the delivery speed to the upper escape tray changes by 10 mm/sec. When the paper stacking to the upper escape tray is misalignment Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. -10 to 10 mm/s 0 10



1276



8. Service Mode SORTER (Service mode for delivery options) > ADJUST (Adjustment mode) SFT-SPD



1 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method Caution



Display/Adj/Set Range Unit Default Value Related Service Mode Amount of Change per Unit STP-SPD



1 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method Caution



Display/Adj/Set Range Unit Default Value Related Service Mode Amount of Change per Unit RBLT-PS2



1



Adj dvry speed at collate mode: Fin-V To adjust the delivery speed to the stack tray at collate mode. As the value is changed by 1, the delivery speed changes by 10 mm/sec. When the paper stacking of stack tray at collate mode is misalignment Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. - When the value is decreased, the productivity is decreased. - When the buffer operation is performed, delivery speed does not change. (The buffer operation is the operation to deliver the stacking paper on the processing tray.) The ON/OFF of buffer operation is set by BUFF-SW. -5 to 5 mm/s 0 SORTER> OPTION> BUFF-SW 10 Adj dvry speed at staple mode: Fin-V To adjust the delivery speed to the stack tray at staple mode or staple-free binding mode. As the value is changed by 1, the delivery speed changes by 10 mm/sec. When the paper stacking at staple mode or staple-free binding mode is misalignment Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. - When the value is decreased, the productivity is decreased. - When the buffer operation is performed, delivery speed does not change. (The buffer operation is the operation to deliver the stacking paper on the processing tray.) The ON/OFF of buffer operation is set by BUFF-SW. -5 to 5 mm/s 0 SORTER> OPTION> BUFF-SW 10 Adj of Return Belt height 2:Fin-V



Detail



To adjust the height of the Return Belt when aligning the paper on the processing tray. As the value is changed by 1, the height of the return belt changes by angle of 0.1 degree. +: Downward -: Upward When replacing the Finisher Controller PCB/clearing the RAM data of the Finisher Controller PCB, enter the value of service label.



Use Case



When the misalignment of paper stack occurs during alignment operation on the processing tray. When replacing the Finisher Controller PCB/clearing the RAM data of the Finisher Controller PCB.



Adj/Set/Operate Method Caution



Display/Adj/Set Range



Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. The height of Return Belt during the paper alignment on the processing tray is the total of setting values of RBLT-PRS2 and PBLT-PS3, so adjust again the setting value of RBLT-PS2 if necessary when changing the setting value of RBLT-PRS3. After the setting value is changed, write the changed value in the service label. -30 to 30



Unit



°



Default Value



0



Related Service Mode Supplement/Memo Amount of Change per Unit



SORTER> ADJUST> RBLT-PRS,RBLT-PS3 Perform this adjustment after executing adjustment of RBLT-PRS. 0.1



1277



8. Service Mode SORTER (Service mode for delivery options) > ADJUST (Adjustment mode) RBLT-PS3



1



Adj of Return Belt height 3:Fin-V



Detail



To adjust the height of the Return Belt when stacking the 1 sheet on the processing tray. As the value is changed by 1, the height of the return belt changes by angle of 0.1 degree. +: Downward -: Upward When replacing the Finisher Controller PCB/clearing the RAM data of the Finisher Controller PCB, enter the value of service label.



Use Case



When the paper alignment position is displaced. When replacing the Finisher Controller PCB/clearing the RAM data of the Finisher Controller PCB.



Adj/Set/Operate Method Caution



Display/Adj/Set Range



Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key. The height of Return Belt of the stacking 65 sheets adjust in the RBLT-PRS. The height of Return Belt at the stacking 2 to 64 sheets alignment on the processing tray is the total of setting values of RBLT-PRS and RBLT-PS3. So adjust again the setting value of RBLT-PS2 if necessary when changing the setting value of RBLT-PS3. After the setting value is changed, write the changed value in the service label. -50 to 100



Unit



°



Default Value



0



Related Service Mode Amount of Change per Unit



SORTER> ADJUST> RBLT-PRS,RBLT-PS2 0.1



FUNCTION (Operation / inspection mode) SORTER (Service mode for delivery options) > FUNCTION (Operation / inspection mode) FN-SENS1



1 Detail



Use Case Adj/Set/Operate Method Caution Display/Adj/Set Range FN-SENS2



1 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method Caution Display/Adj/Set Range FIN-BK-R



1 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method



Adj Punch Horz Rgst Sensor: Fin-V To automatically adjust the output of the Horizontal Registration Sensor 1 to 5 of the Puncher Unit in sequence. Horizontal Registration Sensor 1: A3/A4, 2: LDR/LTR, 3: B4/B5, 4: A4R/LTRR/LGL, 5: B5R - When installing/replacing the Puncher Unit - When replacing the Horizontal Registration Sensor of the Puncher Unit Select the item, and then press OK key. If paper blocks light to the sensor, the adjustment result ends in NG. During operation: ACTIVE, At normal termination: OK, At abnormal termination: NG Adj Punch Waste Full Sensor: Fin-V To automatically adjust the output of Punch Waste Full Sensor (Punch Waste Full Detection PCB) of the Puncher Unit. - When installing/replacing the Puncher Unit - When replacing the Punch Waste Full Sensor Select the item, and then press OK key. If paper blocks light to the sensor, the adjustment result ends in NG. During operation: ACTIVE, At normal termination: OK, At abnormal termination: NG Finisher backup data saving: Fin-V To read the backup data from Finisher Controller PCB and save in HDD. When replacing the Finisher Controller PCB 1) Select the item, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.



Display/Adj/Set Range



During operation: ACTIVE, At normal termination: OK, At abnormal termination: NG



Related Service Mode



SORTER> FUNCTION> FIN-BK-W



1278



8. Service Mode SORTER (Service mode for delivery options) > FUNCTION (Operation / inspection mode) FIN-BK-W



1 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method



Finisher backup data writing: Fin-V To write the backup data saved in HDD to the Finisher Controller PCB. When replacing the Finisher Controller PCB 1) Select the item, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.



Display/Adj/Set Range



During operation: ACTIVE, At normal termination: OK, At abnormal termination: NG



Related Service Mode



SORTER> FUNCTION> FIN-BK-R



FIN-CON



1 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method Caution



Controller PCB RAM clear: Fin-V To execute the RAM clear of the Finisher Controller PCB to delete all the adjustment contents (excluding counter information). When clearing RAM data of the Finisher Controller PCB 1) Select the item, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. - Output the service mode setting values by P-PRINT before execution. After execution, enter necessary setting value. - RAM data is cleared after the main power switch is turned OFF/ON.



Display/Adj/Set Range



During operation: ACTIVE, At normal termination: OK, At abnormal termination: NG



Related Service Mode



COPIER> FUNCTION> MISC-P> P-PRINT



Supplement/Memo



The adjustment values stored to the puncher controller PCB does not cleared.



1279



8. Service Mode SORTER (Service mode for delivery options) > FUNCTION (Operation / inspection mode) MTR-CHK



1 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method Caution Display/Adj/Set Range



Default Value Related Service Mode MTR-ON



1 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method Caution



Specification of oprtn Motor: Fin-V To specify the Motor to operate. When replacing the Motor/checking the operation Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. When setting the staple motor or the saddle stitcher motor, remove each staple cartridge. When the staple cartridge is installed, the motor is not driven. 1 to 30 1: Inlet Feed Motor (M101) 2: Pre-processing/Buffer Motor (M102) 3: Stack Delivery/Paddle Motor (M103) 4: Escape Feed Motor (M117) 5: Paper End Pushing Guide Motor (M112) 6: Stapler Shift Motor (M114) 7: Stack Tray Shift Motor (M105) 8: Swing Guide Motor (M110) 9: Front Alignment Motor (M107) 10: Rear Alignment Motor (M108) 11: Return Roller Lift Motor (M111) 12: Flapper Motor (M104) 13: Upper Escape Delivery Shift Motor (M119) 14: Paper End Assist Motor (M113) 15: Escape Flapper Motor (M118) 16: Lower Escape Delivery Shift Motor (M106) 17: Tray Auxiliary Guide Motor (M109) 18: Cooling Fan (FM101) 19: Staple Motor (M115) 20: Staple-free Binding Motor (M116) 21: Saddle Feed/Paddle Motor (M201) 22: Saddle Delivery Motor (M207) 23: Saddle Switching Lever Motor (M202) 24: Saddle Stitcher Motor (M208) 25: Saddle Paper End Stopper Motor (M206) 26: Saddle Gripper Motor (M205) 27: Saddle Alignment Motor (M203) 28: Saddle Paper Pushing Plate/ Folding Motor (M204) 29: Punch Motor (M301) 30: Punch Shift Motor (M302) 1 SORTER> FUNCTION> MTR-ON Operation check of motor: Fin-V To start operation check of the motor specified by MTR-CHK. It is driven for 10 seconds and is automatically stopped. When replacing the Motor/checking the operation Select the item, and then press OK key. - When the job starts during the operation of the motor, the finisher sequence error jam occurs. - When the error avoidance jam occurs during the operation of the motor, the jam becomes the error immediately.



Display/Adj/Set Range



During operation: ACTIVE, At normal termination: OK, At abnormal termination: NG



Related Service Mode



SORTER> FUNCTION> MTR-CHK



CNT-FCON



1 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range



Finisher parts counter clear: Fin-V To clear the parts counter counted by the Finisher Controller PCB. When clearing the parts counter of the Finisher 1) Select the item, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. During operation: ACTIVE, At normal termination: OK, At abnormal termination: NG



1280



8. Service Mode SORTER (Service mode for delivery options) > FUNCTION (Operation / inspection mode) FR-ST-RP



1 Detail



Use Case Adj/Set/Operate Method Caution



Display/Adj/Set Range Supplement/Memo CL-CHK



1 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range



Default Value Related Service Mode CL-ON



1 Detail



Use Case Adj/Set/Operate Method Caution



Display/Adj/Set Range Required Time Related Service Mode PUN-BK-R



1 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method Caution



Ppr dust remov at stpl-free bind: Fin-V To remove the paper dust from the staple-free binding unit, the staple-free binding operation repeatedly is executed 30 times without paper. When this mode is executed, the performance of the staple-free binding unit recovers. When the performance of the staple-free binding unit deteriorates Select the item, and then press OK key. - The part counter value of the staple-free binding operation increases. - When the job starts during the operation of this mode, the finisher sequence error jam occurs. - When the error avoidance jam occurs during the operation of this mode, the jam becomes the error immediately. During operation: ACTIVE, At normal termination: OK, At abnormal termination: NG The removed paper dust accumulates on the lower frame under the paper path, so it does not influence to the performance of the machine. Specify of operation Clutch: Fin-V To specify the Clutch to operate. When replacing the Clutch/checking the operation Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 1 to 3 1: Lower Stack Delivery Roller Clutch (CL102) 2: Escape Feed Clutch (CL101) 3: Paddle Clutch (CL103) 1 SORTER> FUNCTION> CL-ON Operation check of Clutch: Fin-V To start operation check of the clutch specified by CL-CHK. ON/OFF of the clutch is repeated at intervals of 500 msec for 10 seconds, and then the operation stops automatically. When replacing the Clutch/checking the operation Select the item, and then press OK key. - When the job starts during the operation of the clutch, the finisher sequence error jam occurs. - When the error avoidance jam occurs during the operation of the clutch, the jam becomes the error immediately. During operation: ACTIVE, At normal termination: OK, At abnormal termination: NG 10 sec SORTER> FUNCTION> CL-CHK Puncher backup data saving: Fin-V To read the backup data from Puncher Controller PCB and save in HDD. When replacing the Puncher Controller PCB 1) Select the item, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Be sure to read the data before writing.



Display/Adj/Set Range



During operation: ACTIVE, At normal termination: OK, At abnormal termination: NG



Related Service Mode



SORTER> FUNCTION> PUN-BK-W



1281



8. Service Mode SORTER (Service mode for delivery options) > FUNCTION (Operation / inspection mode) PUN-BK-W



1 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method Caution



Puncher backup data writing: Fin-V To write the backup data saved in HDD to Puncher Controller PCB. When replacing the Puncher Controller PCB 1) Select the item, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Be sure to read the data before writing.



Display/Adj/Set Range



During operation: ACTIVE, At normal termination: OK, At abnormal termination: NG



Related Service Mode



SORTER> FUNCTION> PUN-BK-R



EMSG-CLR



1 Detail



Use Case Adj/Set/Operate Method Caution Display/Adj/Set Range



Fin limited function mssg clear: Fin-V To clear the message that displayed on the control panel when the function of the staple-free binding is limited. The staple-free binding alarm is cleared. When clearing the message related to limited functions mode that is displayed after troubleshooting of finisher is performed Select the item, and then press OK key. Only the messages related to staple free stapling can be cleared. At normal termination: OK!, At abnormal termination: NG!



OPTION (Specification setting mode) SORTER (Service mode for delivery options) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) MD-SPRTN



1 Detail



Use Case Adj/Set/Operate Method Caution Display/Adj/Set Range



Default Value Additional Functions Mode BUFF-SW



1 Detail



Use Case Adj/Set/Operate Method Caution Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value



Restricted operation at Finisher error To set whether to stop the machine when an error occurs at Finisher. The result set in [Limited Functions Mode] in [Settings/Registration] is displayed. Set 0 when canceling restriction on operations. When switching whether to restrict operations for each function, make the setting in [Limited Functions Mode]. When canceling restriction on operations of the finisher 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Do not set any value other than 0. 0 to 255 0: Normal 1: Function restriction 2 to 255: Not use 0 Management Settings> Device Management> Limited Functions Mode Set of fin buffer opertn: Fin-V To set ON/OFF of buffer operation in the Finisher. When 1 is set, the buffer operation is not performed for all modes. The alignment performance is improved, but the productivity decreases. When 2 is set, the buffer operation is performed only for collated mode. When the misalignment of the buffered paper stack occurs on the processing tray Enter the setting value and press OK. When the buffer operation is set to OFF, productivity is decreased. 0 to 2 0: ON, 1: OFF, 2: ON for collated mode only 0



1282



8. Service Mode SORTER (Service mode for delivery options) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) PUCH-SW



1 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value Additional Functions Mode Supplement/Memo 1SHT-SRT



1 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method Caution



Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value Additional Functions Mode Supplement/Memo



FIN-SP1



2 Detail



Adj/Set/Operate Method Caution Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value FIN-SP2



2 Detail



Adj/Set/Operate Method Caution Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value



Hi-prdctvty/accurcy punch mod: Fin-V To switch the high-productivity punch mode or high-accuracy punch mode of Finisher. When switching the high-productivity punch mode or high-accuracy punch mode Select the item, and then press OK key. 0 to 1 0: high-accuracy, 1: high-productivity 0 Adjustment/Maintenance> Adjust Action> Switch Finisher Puncher Mode The settings of this service mode and the "Switch Finisher Puncher Mode" of the "Settings/ Registration" change at the same time. Set collate dvry of 1-sheet: Fin-V To set ON/OFF of collated delivery operation for a sheet of paper. When 1 is set, the collated delivery operation for a sheet of paper is not performed. Upon user's request Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. The stacking condition decreases when the collated delivery operation for a sheet of paper enables. A sheet of paper is delivered by non-sort decreases when the collated delivery operation for a sheet of paper disables. 0 to 1 0: ON, 1: OFF 0 Setting/Registration> Function Settings> Common> Paper Output Settings> Offset Jobs The collated delivery operation for a sheet of paper works in the following condition. The setting of a sheet of paper and a copy This service mode is ON. The job from a printer driver Oddset jobs is ON. Finisher special settings 1: Fin-V To execute the Finisher special settings 1. 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Take necessary action in accordance with the instructions from the Quality Support Division. 00000000 to 11111111 00000000 Finisher special settings 2: Fin-V To execute the Finisher special settings 2. 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Take necessary action in accordance with the instructions from the Quality Support Division. 00000000 to 11111111 00000000



1283



8. Service Mode SORTER (Service mode for delivery options) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) NSRT-STC



1 Detail



Use Case Adj/Set/Operate Method Caution



Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value MSTP-TMG



1 Detail



Use Case Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range Unit Default Value Additional Functions Mode Supplement/Memo Amount of Change per Unit PUN-Y-SW



1 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method Caution Display/Adj/Set Range



Default Value Related Service Mode



Set stack improve mode: non-sort, Fin-V To set stack improvement mode when non-collate is set to the Stack Tray (Tray C). When 1 is set, paper stack is delivered at the center reference via the Process Tray even if it is non-collate mode so the stacking condition can be improved. When the stacking condition is low while non-collate is set to the Stack Tray (Tray C) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. When 1 is set: - Productivity is decreased. - In the case of the paper type or the paper size that cannot feed via a processing tray , paper is delivered by non-sort. 0 to 1 0: OFF, 1: ON 0 Setting of manual staple timing: Fin-V To set the interval time between from the paper setting to the automatic stapling at manual staple mode. As the value is changed by 1, the time is changed by 1 second. +: Interval time is delayed -: Interval time becomes earlier Upon user's request Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 1 to 5 sec 3 Adjustment/Maintenance> Adjust Action> Time Until Stapling Starts in Stapler Mode The settings of this service mode and the "Time Until Stapling Starts in Stapler Mode" of the "Settings/Registration" change at the same time. 1 Setting of punch horz reg oprtn: Fin-V To set whether or not to perform the horizontal registration operation of puncher unit for matching with the center of the paper. When the adjustable range of the punch hole horizontal registration adjustment (PNCH-Y) is enlarged. Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. When a punch hole position precision improvement mode was set, this mode is given priority to. 0 to 1 0: The horizontal registration operation is performed. 1: The horizontal registration operation is not performed. (fixed in the center position) 0 SORTER> ADJUST> PNCH-Y SORTER> OPTION> PNCH-SW3



1284



8. Service Mode SORTER (Service mode for delivery options) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) PNCH-SW2



1 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range



Default Value PNCH-SW3



1 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method Caution Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value Related Service Mode Additional Functions Mode SFT-CHNG



1



To set the punch hole specification of puncher unit. When replacing the Puncher Unit 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 0: 2/4 holes puncher unit 1: 2/3 holes puncher unit 2: SWE 4 holes puncher unit 0 Set punch hole hi precision mode: Fin-V To set ON/OFF of the mode to improve the precision of the punch hole position. When 1 is set, the punch hole position is decided by the paper trailing edge standard. When the position of the punch hole is misaligned Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. - When setting to ON, the productivity is decreased. - When setting the punch mode to the precision priority, this mode enables. 0 to 1 0: OFF, 1: ON 0 SORTER> OPTION> PUCH-SW, PUN-Y-SW Adjustment/Maintenance> Adjust Action> Switch Finisher Puncher Mode Set dvry number of stck ppr: Fin-V



Detail



To change the number of small size papers to be delivered as a stack in offset and collate mode. When 1 is set, the number of sheets to be delivered as a stack in offset and collate mode is changed from 5 sheets to 2 sheets.(However, it is not changed when delivering paper with a weight of 91 g/m2 or more or tab paper.)



Use Case



When improving stacking performance at the time of offsetting and collating paper other than paper with a weight of 91 g/m2 or more and tab paper



Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value STP-ALG



Setting of punch hole spec: Fin-V



1 Detail



Use Case Adj/Set/Operate Method Caution Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value



Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 0 to 1 0: OFF, 1: ON 1 Set align plate oprtn at stpl mod:Fin-V To set the operation of alignment plates at staple mode and staple-free binding mode. Set to 1 when the alignment operation by the alignment plates is changed from one time to two times at the staple mode and staple-free binding mode. When improving the alignment (front/rear) of the paper at staple mode Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. When setting to ON, productivity is decreased. 0 to 1 0: OFF, 1: ON 0



1285



8. Service Mode SORTER (Service mode for delivery options) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) SDL-ALG



1 Detail



Use Case Adj/Set/Operate Method Caution Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value TRY-STP



1 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method Caution Display/Adj/Set Range



Default Value TRY-LMT



1 Detail



Use Case Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value



Set paddle oprtn in sddl unit: Fin-V To set the paddle operation when stacking the paper in the saddle stitcher unit. Set to 1 when the paddle operation of the last stack paper in the saddle stitcher unit is changed from one rotation to two rotations. When improving the paper alignment of the feed direction at stacking the paper in the saddle stitcher unit Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. When setting to ON, productivity is decreased. 0 to 1 0: OFF, 1: ON 0 Stpl/fold stck limit clear: Fin-V To set whether to limit the stack capacity of the stapled copies/folded sheets. When clearing the limit, the tray height limit is applied instead. When stacking papers beyond the maximum number of stapled copies/folded sheets Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. When the stacking limit is cleared, stacking capacity increases, but stacking performance decreases. 0 to 3 0: Normal specification 1: Clear the limit of stack capacity of the stapled copies, and apply the tray height limit 2: Clear the limit of stack capacity of the folded sheets, and apply the tray height limit 3: Clear the limit of stack capacity of both the stapled copies and folded sheets, and apply the tray height limit 0 Set stack limit of stack tray: Fin-V To set whether to limit the stack capacity of the stack tray. Set to 1 when the stack capacity of the stack tray for the small size paper except the thin paper and coated paper is changed from about 3,000 sheets to about 2,000 sheets. When the stacking performance decreases by the curled paper during stacking a large amount of the small size paper except the thin paper and coated paper Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 0 to 1 0: OFF, 1: ON 0



1286



8. Service Mode



BOARD (Option board setting mode) OPTION (Specification setting mode) BOARD (Option board setting mode) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) MENU-1



2 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value MENU-2



2 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value MENU-3



2 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value MENU-4



2 Detail Use Case



Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value FONTDL



1 Detail



Adj/Set/Operate Method Display/Adj/Set Range Default Value



Hide/dspl of printer set menu level 1 To set whether to display or hide the level 1 of printer setting menu. Upon user's request 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 0 to 1 0: Hide, 1: Display 0 Hide/dspl of printer set menu level 2 To set whether to display or hide the level 2 of printer setting menu. Upon user's request 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 0 to 1 0: Hide, 1: Display 0 Hide/dspl of printer set menu level 3 To set whether to display or hide the level 3 of printer setting menu. Upon user's request 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 0 to 1 0: Hide, 1: Display 0 Hide/dspl of printer set menu level 4 To set whether to display or hide the level 4 of printer setting menu. Upon user's request 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 0 to 1 0: Hide, 1: Display 0 ON/OFF of font setting screen display To set whether to display the service-purposed setting screen of fonts which are listed using PS Kanji Font Downloader. 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 0 to 1 0: Hide, 1: Display 0



1287



8. Service Mode



FAX (Serivce Mode for FAX) Overview ■ Configuration of the Service Mode Service mode is divided into the following 10 items (#1 to #10). Item



Name



Description



#1 SSSW



Service software switch



This can be used to conduct the registration/settings relating to basic functions of the fax, such as error management, echo prevention and prevention of communication problems.



#2 MENU



Menu switch setting



This can be used to conduct the registration/settings relating to the required functions at installation, such as NL equalizer, transmission level.



#3 NUMERIC Par- Setting of numeric pa- This can be used to enter numeric parameters. am. rameters #4 NCU



(Adjustment by a service technician is not possible.)



The values of this item are collectively set based on the setting of #5 TYPE.



#5 TYPE



Country/region setting



If the item "STANDARD" displayed on the display is set, #4 NCU data is collectively set to comply with the communication standards in Japan.



#6 IPFAX



Communication settings of IPFAX



If the license option for IPFAX has been enabled, IPFAX is displayed.



#7 PRINT



Printer function setting



This can be used to conduct the registration/settings relating to the printer basic service functions, such as size reduction conditions for received images.



#8 CLEAR



Data initialization mode setting



This item is to initialize each data.



#9 TEST



Test Mode



To execute various tests.



#10 REPORT



Service Report



To execute report print.



CAUTION: If a 2nd line fax option is installed, IPFAX cannot be used.



■ Operation method 1. Enter service mode.



1288



8. Service Mode 2. When the connected options (FEEDER, SORTER, FAX, BOARD) are displayed, select FAX and enter service mode of this board. SERVICE MODE



LEVEL 1



COPIER FEEDER



SORTER



FAX



COPIER: Service mode of the connected equipment FEEDER: Service mode of the ADF (*) SORTER: Service mode of the Finisher (*) FAX: Service mode of the fax (*) The following explains the operation method using the #1 SSSW screen as an example. The meaning of the keys and operations are common for all screens. Sssw Menu Num Ncu Type



IP FAX



Print Clear Test Report



SW01



00000000



SW02



10000000



SW03



00000000



SW04



10000000



SW05



00000000



SW06



10000000



SW07



00000000



SW08



10000000



OK



Press to accept the current input.



Previous Page/Next Page key



Press to stop the TEST.



• • • •



When changing the setting of the bit switch, directly press the bit (numeric value) you want to change. To enter a numeric value, use the numeric keypad. When confirming a change in a numeric value or when executing an item, press the [OK] key. To return to the previous layer, use the [Reset] key.



CAUTION: When changing the service mode settings, turn OFF and then ON the power. The details of settings in service mode are stored in the storage of the host machine. The settings for this board are enabled by loading the settings stored in the storage of the host machine to the G3 Fax Control PCB when the main power is turned ON. Therefore, be sure to turn OFF and then ON the power when the settings have been changed.



1289



8. Service Mode



■ Menu List #1 SSSW



#2 MENU



#3 NUM



001 002 003 004 005 006 007 008 009 010 011 012 013 014 015 016 017 018 019 020 021 022 023 024 025 026 027 028 029-80



SW01 SW02 SW03 SW04 SW05 SW06 to SW08 SW09 SW10 to SW11 SW12 SW13 SW14 SW15 SW17 SW18 SW19 to SW21 SW22 SW23 to SW24 SW25 SW26 SW27 SW28 SW29 SW30 SW31 to SW50



001 to 004 005 006 007 008 009 010 to 020



error management Not used set remedy against echo set remedy against communication error set standard function Not used set communication result display Not used set page timer Display of the screen Settings Inch/mm resolution settings Not used Transmission level setting of modem The control of IP supported communication setting Not used Settings of archive send function Not used set report display function set transmission function Not used set V. 8/V. 34 Not used Dial tone detection method switching Not used



Not used NL equalizer line monitor transmission level (ATT) V.34 modulation speed upper limit V.34 data speed upper limit Not used



not used RTN transmission condition (1) RTN transmission condition (2) RTN transmission condition (3) NCC pause time (before ID code) NCC pause time (after ID code) pre-pulse time at time of call not used number of characters in telephone numbers between transmitting and receiving parties. line connection identification time T.30 T1 timer (for reception) not used T.30 E0L timer not used hooking detection time Time until a temporary response is obtained when switching FAX/TEL Pseudo RBT signal pattern ON time Pseudo RBT signal pattern ON time (short) Pseudo RBT signal pattern OFF time (long) Pseudo CI signal pattern ON time Pseudo CI signal pattern OFF time (short) Pseudo CI signal pattern OFF (long) CNG detection level when switching FAX/TEL Pseudo RBT transmission level when switching FAX/TEL CNG monitoring time when the answering phone connection function is set Silent detection level when the answering phone connection function is set preamble detection time for V.21 low-speed flag Off-hook PCB duty settings not used



1290



8. Service Mode #7 PRINT



#8 CLEAR



BIT SW



SW01 SW04 SW05 SW06 SW07 to SW20



hold the line/DUMP report output setting not used reduction/cassette selection reduction setting not used



NUM



001 002 003 004 005 006 to 030



maximum non-image range not used not used leading edge margin trailing edge margin not used



TEL USSW SW SRV SW NCU SRV DATA REPORT ALL COUNTER IP FAX



#10 REPORT



DATA DUMP



Setting of Bit Switch (SSSW) ■ Bit Switch Composition The registration/setup items of the switch are set according to the positions of its 8 bits; the bit switch shown on the display is as follows, each bit being either 0 or 1: Bit 0



Bit 7 SW01



0



0



0



0



0



0



0



0



CAUTION: Do not change service data identified as "not used"; they are set as initial settings.



Sssw Menu Num Ncu Type IP FAX



Print Clear Test Report



SW01



0



0



0



0



0



0



0



0



SW02



1



0



0



0



0



0



0



0



SW03



0



0



0



0



0



0



0



0



SW04



1



0



0



0



0



0



0



0



SW05



0



0



0



0



0



0



0



0



SW06



1



0



0



0



0



0



0



0



SW07



0



0



0



0



0



0



0



0



SW08



1



0



0



0



0



0



0



0



OK



1291



8. Service Mode



● SSSW-SW01 Functional Construction Bit



Function



1



0



0



Error codes for service technician



Output



Do not output



1



Error dump list



Output



Do not output



2



Not used



-



-



3



Not used



-



-



4



Display service error codes in the ##300 series



Display



Do not display



5



Increase the capacity of SUBLOG for USBFAX2



Increase



Do not increase



6



Not used



-



-



7



Cancel prohibition of user setting collectively



Cancel



Do not cancel



Details of Bit 0 Select whether to output service error codes. When "Output" is selected, service error codes will be on the display and on the report. Detailed Discussions of Bit 1 Select whether to output error dump list. When "Output" is selected, the error transmission report and the reception result report at the time of occurrence of an error are output with the error dump list attached. Detailed Discussions of Bit 4 Select whether to display service error codes in the ##300 series. Detailed Discussions of Bit 5 Select whether to increase the log storage area when firmware automatic update function of USBFAX2 (a modem with Silicone Labs modem mounted version) is used. Detailed Discussions of Bit 7 Select whether to collectively cancel the prohibition of user settings.



● SSSW-SW02 Functional Construction Bit



Function



1



0



0



Not used



-



-



1



Not used



-



-



2



Not used



-



-



3



Not used



4



To prohibit control channel retrain during V.34



5



Not used



6



Not used



7



F-NET service without ring tone



-



-



Prohibit



Do not prohibit



-



-



-



-



Supported



Not supported



Detailed Discussions of Bit 4 Select whether to prohibit the control channel retrain during V.34. Detailed Discussions of Bit 7 Select whether to support F-NET (fax communication network) service without a ring tone. If "Supported" is selected, fax document will be automatically received without a ring tone when FC signal (1300 Hz tonal signal) from F-NET is detected.



● SSSW-SW03 Functional Construction Bit



Function



0



Not used



1



Echo protect tone at high speed transmission



1292



1



0



-



-



Send



Do not send



8. Service Mode Bit



Function



1



0



2



Not used



-



-



3



Not used



-



-



4



Transmission mode: International transmission (1)



Yes



No



5



Transmission mode: International transmission (3)



Yes



No



6



Send mode



7



Tonal signal before sending CED signal



International transmis- International transmission (3) sion (2) Send



Do not send



Detailed Discussions of Bit 1 Use it to enable/disable sending an echo protect tone for a high-speed transmission V.29 modem signal (transmission speed at 9600 or 7200 bps). If errors occur frequently at time of sending fax because of the condition of the line, select "Send". Selecting "send" sends non-modulated carrier for about 200 ms as the synchronous signal before sending images. NOTE: Error codes caused by line condition when sending fax ##100, ##104, ##281, ##282, ##283, ##750, ##755, ##760, ##765



Detailed Discussions of Bits 4, 5 and 6 Transmission mode: Selected to use whether international transmission (1), international transmission (2) or international transmission (3). Use these switches or the dial registration to select a transmission mode if errors occur frequently at time when sending fax overseas. NOTE: Error codes caused by echoes at time of sending fax #005, ##100, ##101, ##102, ##104, ##201, ##280, ##281, ##283, ##284, ##750, ##760, ##765, ##774, ##779, ##784, ##794



Settings using the Dial Registration (user level): Select "international transmission (1)" when making an entry in the address book. If errors persist, select "international transmission (2)" and then "international transmission (3)". Transmission mode selected using One-Touch Dial function or the Speed Dial function will be given priority over the setting made by the service soft switch. An international transmission mode may be selected using the keypad if a mode has been selected using this switch; for settings, see the following table: Transmission mode



Bit7



Bit6



Bit5



Bit4



Bit3



Bit2



Bit1



Bit0



International transmission (1)



*



0



0



1



-



-



*



-



International transmission (2)



*



0



1



0



-



-



*



-



International transmission (3)



*



1



1



0



-



-



*



-



International transmission (1): Selected to ignore the first DIS signal from the other party. International transmission (2): Selected to transmit a 1850-Hz total signal when transmitting the DIS signal. International transmission (3): Selected to transmit a 1650-Hz total signal when transmitting the DIS signal. Detailed Discussions of Bit 7 Select whether to enable/disable sending of a 1080-Hz tonal signal before sending CED signal. Select "Send" if errors occur frequently because of an echo when reception is from overseas. NOTE: Error codes caused by echoes at the time of reception #005, ##101, ##106, ##107, ##114, ##200, ##201, ##790



1293



8. Service Mode



● SSSW-SW04 Functional Construction Bit



Function



1



0



0



LC monitoring



Monitor



Do not monitor



1



Check the CI signal frequency



Check



Do not checked



2



Final flag sequences of the procedure signal



2 pcs



1 piece



3



Reception mode after sending CFR signal



High speed



High speed/low speed



4



Time to ignore low-speed signals after sending CFR signal



1500 msec



700 msec



5



Check the CS signal frequency (when PBX is set)



Check



Do not check



6



CNG signal at the time of manual sending



Send



Do not send



7



CED signal at the time of manual reception



Send



Do not send



Detailed Discussions of Bit 1 Select whether to check the CI signal frequency. Detailed Discussions of Bit 2 Select the number of the final flag sequences with the procedure signal (300 bps transmission speed). Select "2" when the other party's machine does not properly receive the procedure signal sent by this machine. NOTE: Error codes occurring at the time of sending fax ##100, ##280, ##281, ##750, ##753, ##754, ##755, ##758, ##759, ##760, ##763, ##764, ##765, ##768, ##769, ##770, ##773, ##775, ##778, ##780, ##783, ##785, ##788



Detailed Discussions of Bit 3 Select a reception mode after sending CFR signal. Select "High speed" in the case of frequent errors caused by line condition at the time of reception. Simultaneously, turn "OFF" the "ECM reception" of the user data. NOTE: Error codes caused by line condition at the time of reception ##107, ##114, ##201 Be sure to change bit 4 before changing this bit; if errors still occur, change this bit. When 'high speed' is selected, only high-speed signals (images) will be received after sending the CFR signal.



Detailed Discussions of Bit 4 Select the time length during which low-speed signals are ignored after sending the CFR signal. Select "1500 msec" when reception of image signal is difficult because the line condition is not good. Detailed Discussions of Bit 5 Select whether to check the CI signal frequency when PBX is set. Detailed Discussions of Bit 6 Select whether to send CNG signal at the time of manual sending. If error occurs frequently at manual sending when the destination device that has FAX/TEL switch mode does not change to the fax mode, select "Send". Detailed Discussions of Bit 7 Select whether to send CED signal at the time of manual reception. Select "Send" when the other party's machine does not start sending although manual reception is executed.



● SSSW-SW05 Functional Construction Bit



Function



0



Not used



1



To execute mm/inch conversion (text mode).



2



Not used



1



1294



0



-



-



Yes



No



-



-



8. Service Mode Bit



Function



3



To send bit 33 or later of DIS signal.



4



Record paper length to be declared by DIS signal



5 6 7



1



0



Prohibit



Do not prohibit



A4/B4 size



Any size



Not used



-



-



Not used



-



-



Not used



-



-



Detailed Discussions of Bit 1 Execute mm/inch conversion for the image scanned in text mode. Detailed Discussions of Bit 3 Select whether to send bit 33 or later of DIS signal. CAUTION: If "Prohibit" is selected, the super-fine reception from other brand printers or memory box function will be disabled. Detailed Discussions of Bit 4 Select whether the paper to be declared by DIS signal is a cut paper. Select "A4/B4 size" if dividing the original at the sending machine side at the time of receiving a long original. NOTE: Depending on the model of sending machine, long originals may not be divided.



● SSSW-SW09 Functional Construction Bit



1



0



0



Communication result at normal completion



Function



Display



Do not display



1



Communication result at completion with an error



Display



Do not display



2



Not used



-



-



3



Not used



-



-



4



Not used



-



-



5



Not used



-



-



6



Not used



-



-



7



Not used



-



-



Detailed Discussions of Bit 0 and 1 Select whether to continue displaying the communication result on the Control Panel at normal completion and/or at completion with an error.



● SSSW-SW12 Functional Construction Bit



Function



1



0



0



Timeout period for sending 1 page (sending)



1



0



1



Timeout period for sending 1 page (sending)



1



0



2



Timeout period for sending 1 page (HT sending)



1



0



3



Timeout period for sending 1 page (HT sending)



1



0



4



Timeout period for sending 1 page (reception)



1



0



5



Timeout period for sending 1 page (reception)



1



0



6



Not used



-



-



7



Page timer settings for sending/receiving



Set



Do not set



This machine stops communication when sending/receiving per original page takes 32 minutes or longer. When setting the timer different from the above, see the following to set the most appropriate time length.



1295



8. Service Mode When 'Do not set' is selected using bit 7, the timeout length per page for all modes will depend on the setting of bit 0 and bit 1.



Timeout period at the time of sending/receiving Timeout period



Bit7



Bit6



Bit5



Bit4



Bit3



Bit2



Bit1



Bit0



8 min.



0



*



*



*



*



*



0



0



16 min.



0



*



*



*



*



*



0



1



32 min.



0



*



*



*



*



*



1



0



64 min.



0



*



*



*



*



*



1



1



Timeout period at the time of sending (in text mode) Timeout period



Bit7



Bit6



Bit5



Bit4



Bit3



Bit2



Bit1



Bit0



8 min.



1



*



*



*



*



*



0



0



16 min.



1



*



*



*



*



*



0



1



32 min.



1



*



*



*



*



*



1



0



64 min.



1



*



*



*



*



*



1



1



Timeout period at the time of sending (in text mode) Timeout period



Bit7



Bit6



Bit5



Bit4



Bit3



Bit2



Bit1



Bit0



8 min.



1



*



*



*



0



0



*



*



16 min.



1



*



*



*



0



1



*



*



32 min.



1



*



*



*



1



0



*



*



64 min.



1



*



*



*



1



1



*



*



Timeout period at the time of reception Timeout Period



Bit7



Bit6



Bit5



Bit4



Bit3



Bit2



Bit1



Bit0



8 min.



1



*



0



0



*



*



*



*



16 min.



1



*



0



1



*



*



*



*



32 min.



1



*



1



0



*



*



*



*



64 min.



1



*



1



1



*



*



*



*



● SSSW-SW13 Functional Construction Bit



1



0



0



Not used



Function



-



-



1



Not used



-



-



2



Not used



-



-



3



Display Modem Dial-in/My Number Setting screen



Yes



No



4



Display Number Display Setting screen



Yes



No



5



Not used



-



-



6



Not used



-



-



7



Not used



-



-



Detailed Discussions of Bit 3 To set whether to display Modem Dial-in Setting screen and My Number Setting screen. NOTE: Turn OFF and then ON the power of the host machine after the setting.



Detailed Discussions of Bit 4 To set whether to enable the display of Number Display Setting screen.



1296



8. Service Mode NOTE: Turn OFF and then ON the power of the host machine after the setting.



● SSSW-SW14 Functional Construction Bit



1



0



0



Not used



Function



-



-



1



Not used



-



-



2



Not used



-



-



3



Not used



-



-



4



inch-configuration resolution declaration



Yes



No



5



Not used



-



-



6



Not used



-



-



7



Not used



-



-



Detailed Discussions of Bit 4 At the time of G3 communication, select whether to declare inch-configuration resolution to the other party's machine. if 'declare' is selected, the machine will indicate that it reads and records at an inch-configuration resolution using the DIS, DCS, or DTC signal.



● SSSW-SW17 Functional Construction Bit



Function



0



Not used



1



To select the transmission level of the modem



2 3



1



0



-



-



0 to 15



8 to 15



Not used



-



-



Not used



-



-



4



Not used



-



-



5



Not used



-



-



6



Not used



-



-



7



Not used



-



-



1



0 -



Detailed Discussions of Bit 1 Select the transmission level of the modem.



● SSSW-SW18 Functional Construction Bit



Function



0



Not used



-



1



Not used



-



-



2



Prohibition of the control of IP supported communication



Yes



No



3



Number of command retransmission (V1.7 or earlier)



6 times



3 times



4



Request retransmission of all frames after frame loss at JBIG reception



Yes



No



5



Not used



-



-



6



Not used



-



-



7



Not used



-



-



Detailed Discussions of Bit 2 Set whether to prohibit the control of IP supported communication 1: Yes 0: No



1297



8. Service Mode Detailed Discussions of Bit 3 Number of command retransmission 1: 6 times 0: 3 times Detailed Discussions of Bit 4 Set whether to request retransmission of all frames after frame loss at JBIG reception 1: Yes 0: No



● SSSW-SW22 Functional Construction Bit



Function



1



0



0



Backup when an archive transmission error occurs



Use



Do not use



1



Not used



-



-



2



Not used



-



-



3



Prohibit manual polling operation



-



-



4



Not used



-



-



5



Not used



-



-



6



Archive transmission function



Enabled



Disabled



7



Not used



-



-



Detailed Discussions of Bit0 Select whether to back up data when a communication error occurs during archive transmission. This function is available on the Platform Version 3.6 or later. Detailed Discussions of Bit3 Set whether to prohibit of manual polling operation Detailed Discussions of Bit 6 Set whether to send the sent images to the destination specified by the forwarding function.



● SSSW-SW23 Functional Construction Bit



1



0



0



Not used



Function



-



-



1



Not used



-



-



2



Prohibit to rotate A4 or larger paper in portrait position by 180 degrees



-



-



3



Not used



-



-



4



Not used



-



-



5



Not used



-



-



6



Not used



-



-



7



Not used



-



-



Detailed Discussion of Bit 2 Set whether to add header with or without rotating the image by 180 degrees when A4 or larger paper is placed in the feeder in portrait position (R position). 1: Yes 0: No



● SSSW-SW25 Functional Construction Bit



Function



0



Sender's phone number indicated in the report



1



Not used



1298



1



0



Receiver's number



Caller's number



-



-



8. Service Mode Bit



Function



1



0



2



Not used



-



-



3



Not used



-



-



4



Not used



5



Firmware automatic update (USB Fax)



6 7



-



-



Prohibit



Do not prohibited



Not used



-



-



Not used



-



-



Detailed Discussions of Bit 0 Select a phone number to be indicated on the report after transmission is completed. Caller's number: To display the caller's phone number on the report Receiver's number: To indicate the phone number (CSI signal data) sent from the other party's machine on the report Detailed Discussions of Bit 5 Select whether to prohibit the firmware automatic update for USB Fax.



● SSSW-SW26 Functional Construction Bit



Function



1



0 -



0



Not used



-



1



Not used



-



-



2



Check the sequential broadcast.



Check



Do not check



3



Not used



-



-



4



Not used



-



-



5



Redial function when transmission error occurs



Use



Do not use



6



Not used



7



Error report when sending process is canceled



-



-



Do not output



Output



Detailed Discussions of Bit 2 Select whether to display a confirmation message when entering destination for the sequential broadcast in order to prevent the user from broadcasting by mistake. Detailed Discussions of Bit 5 Select whether to use the redial function when outgoing transmission error occurs. Detailed Discussions of Bit 7 Select whether to output an error report when the [Stop] key is pressed to cancel sending.



● SSSW-SW28 Functional Configuration Bit



1



0



0



V.8 procedure at the caller side



Function



No



Yes



1



V.8 procedure at the receiver side



No



Yes



2



V.8 late start at the caller side



No



Yes



3



V.8 late start at the receiver side



No



Yes



4



Fallback from the V.34 receiver side



Prohibit



Do not prohibit



5



Not used



-



-



6



Not used



-



-



7



Not used



-



-



Detailed Discussions of Bit 0 Select whether to execute V.8 procedure when making a call. "No": V.8 procedure is not executed even if V.8 procedure is received from the receiver side, and the procedure starts from V.21.



1299



8. Service Mode Detailed Discussions of Bit 1 Select whether to execute V.8 procedure when receiving a call. "No": V.8 procedure is not executed, and the procedure starts from V.21. Detailed Discussions of Bit 2 Select whether to execute V.8 procedure when ANSam signal from the receiver side cannot be recognized at the time of making a call and V.8 procedure is declared by DIS signal from the receiver side. "Yes": CI signal is sent in response to the DIS signal of the receiver side to execute the V.8 procedure. "No": CI signal is not sent in response to the DIS signal of the receiver side, and the V.21 procedure is executed. In the case of manual transmission, there will be no V.8 late start regardless of this setting. Detailed Discussions of Bit 3 Select whether to declare the existence of the V.8 procedure with the DIS signal that is transmitted after the ANSam signal in case that the ANSam signal at the reception is not recognized at the caller side. "Yes": V.8 procedure is declared by DIS signal and V.8 procedure is executed after CI signal is sent from the caller side. "No": V.8 procedure is not declared by DIS signal, and V.21 procedure is executed. In the case of manual transmission, there will be no V.8 late start regardless of this setting. Detailed Discussions of Bit 4 Select whether to prohibit fallback from the V.34 receiver side. "Prohibit": There will be no fallback from the receiver side.



● SSSW-SW30 Functional Construction Bit



Function



1



0



0



Not used



-



-



1



Not used



-



-



2



Not used



-



-



3



Not used



-



-



4



Not used



-



-



5



Switching the dial tone detection method



-



New detection method



6



Flow control between pages



Control



Do not control



7



Not used



-



-



Detailed Discussions of Bit 5 Switch the detection method when executing the dial tone detection at the time of calling. 0: New detection method (default) 1: Not used Detailed Discussions of Bit 6 Select whether to execute flow control between pages.



● SSSW-SW50 Functional Construction Bit



Function



1



0



0



Transmission number restriction: Function to prevent no external access code *2



ON: Enable



OFF: Disable



1



Transmission number restriction: Extension allowance, prohibition *2



Prohibited



Allow



2



Transmission number restriction: Add "0" to the first digit of external access code *2



Yes



No



3



Operate as the client of a fax server *1 *a



Yes



No



4



Display the send job stop confirmation screen when pressing Stop key *2



No



Yes



5



Send jobs that are targeted to stop when pressing Stop key *2



Ongoing send job



Incomplete send job



6



not used



-



-



7



not used



-



-



*1: Supported by the platform version 306 or later *2: Supported by the platform version 307 or later



1300



8. Service Mode *a: Enabled only for USA Details of Bit 0 To prevent incorrectly sending fax due to forgetting to use the external access number, "0", this function displays a pop-up warning window and prevents sending and returns to the status before pressing Start button by pressing [OK] after setting the fax number in [Fax] or [Scan and Send] and pressing Start button if the set telephone number does not start with "00". This function is supported even if the machine is operating in the fax server mode. 0: ON: Disable 1: OFF: Enable CAUTION: • If using this function, enter the telephone number from the area code. • This function applies to the fax destination telephone number of "Address List", "One-touch" and "Numeric Keypad input". However, the warning is not displayed with "sending from Mail Box" and "manual sending". • A warning is displayed when sending IP fax but it is not displayed when sending PC fax. • A warning is not displayed when forwarding transmission. • If any registered number matches to the condition for displaying a warning, the warning is displayed with "sequential broadcast" and "group sending". • "*" and "#" are also processed as a number.



NOTE: Example of sending fax to 03-1234-5678 • The machine accepts sending fax with "0 (external access code) + 03 1234 5678 (telephone number)". • The machine displays a warning and stops sending with "(no external access code) + 03 1234 5678 (telephone number)". • If the external access code is other than "0", it can be changed from the following service mode. Service Mode > FAX > NUM > 080 Change the default setting of 080 from "0" to the external access code used in the installation environment.



Details of Bit 1 This is set to allow or prohibit transmission to the extension line. This is enabled only if Bit 0 (function to prevent no external access code) is "1" (ON: Enable). If transmission to the extension line is allowed, all telephone numbers not starting with the external access code are allowed. For example, if the external access code is "0", any number starting with "00" as starting 2 digits and number of the extension line are allowed. This means numbers starting with "01" to "09" are prohibited and other numbers are allowed. If transmission to the extension line is prohibited, only allow the telephone number starting with the external access code + area code "0". For example, if the external access code is "0", allow only numbers starting with "00" as starting 2 digits. Prohibit all extension numbers. This means only numbers starting with "00" are allowed and other numbers are prohibited. 0: Allow 1: Prohibit Details of Bit 2 This is the switch to add "0" to the beginning of external access code (default "0") set by the NUM switch 080. The NUM switch can be used to set "0" and "1" but not "00" and "01" as the external access code. This switch is used to solve this issue. In the above example, set this setting to "add" and then set the NUM switch 080 to "0" and "1" to set the external access code of "00" and "01". 0: No 1: Yes CAUTION: • This automatically adds the external access number to the destination telephone number for sending fax registered by Address List, One-touch and entering by the Numeric Keypad excluding Direct Send and Send from Mail Box. • This should be set only in the network environment that sends fax by adding the external access code. • Do not add the external access code to the telephone number for fax send destination as the external access code is automatically added. Details of Bit 3 This switch operates the machine as the client of fax server. 0: No 1: Yes



1301



8. Service Mode CAUTION: When changing this switch, make sure to turn OFF and then ON then ON the power supply twice. This is the specification for changing the fax configuration and is the same specification as adding the Fax Board to the existing machine. Details of Bit 4 This is the switch to set to display the send job stop confirmation screen if the Stop key is pressed during sending fax. 0: No 1: Yes Details of Bit 5 This is the switch to set to stop the ongoing send job or incomplete send job if the Stop key is pressed during sending fax. 0: Incomplete send job 1: Ongoing send job



Setting of Menu Switch (MENU) ■ Configuration of Menu Switches Sssw Menu Num Ncu Type IPFAX Print Clear Test Report







001



xxxxx



←㸦yyyyy㸧{aaaaa㹼bbbbb}



002



xxxxx



←㸦yyyyy㸧{aaaaa㹼bbbbb}



003



xxxxx



←㸦yyyyy㸧{aaaaa㹼bbbbb}



004



xxxxx



←㸦yyyyy㸧{aaaaa㹼bbbbb}



005



xxxxx



←㸦yyyyy㸧{aaaaa㹼bbbbb}



006



xxxxx



←㸦yyyyy㸧{aaaaa㹼bbbbb}



007



xxxxx



←㸦yyyyy㸧{aaaaa㹼bbbbb}



008



xxxxx



←㸦yyyyy㸧{aaaaa㹼bbbbb} OK



No.



Function



Scope of selection



005



NL equalizer



1: ON, 0: OFF



006



Phone line monitoring



0 to 3



007



Transmission level (ATT)



8 to 15 (ex: 15 = -15 dBm)



008



Upper limit for V.34 modulation speed



0: 3429, 1: 3200, 2: 3000, 3: 2800, 4: 2743, 5: 2400



009



Upper limit for V.34 data speed



0 to 13



010



Frequency of pseudo CI signal



0: 50 Hz, 1: 25 Hz, 2: 17 Hz



005: NL equalizer Select ON/OFF of NL equalizer. Select "1: ON" in the case of frequent errors caused by line status at the time of communication. NOTE: Error codes caused by line status at the time of transmission ##100, ##101, ##102, ##104, ##201, ##281, ##282, ##283, ##750, ##755, ##765, ##774, ##779, ##784, ##789 Error codes caused by line status at the time of reception ##103, ##107, ##114, ##201, ##790, ##793



006: Phone line monitoring Set whether to make monitoring tone of the phone line from the speaker. • 0 (DIAL): To make monitoring tone of the phone line from the speaker from the start of line connection until the DIS.



1302



8. Service Mode • 1: To make monitoring tone of the phone line from the speaker from the start of communication until the completion. • 2: Not used • 3 (OFF): There will be no monitoring tone of the phone line from the speaker.



007: ATT transmission level Set the transmission level (ATT). Increase the transmission level (make it closer to 8) in the case of frequent errors caused by line status at the time of communication. NOTE: Error codes caused by line status at the time of transmission ##100, ##101, ##102, ##104, ##201, ##280, ##281, ##282, ##283, ##284, ##750, ##752, ##754, ##755, ##757, ##759, ##760, ##762, ##764, ##765, ##767, ##769, ##770, ##772, ##774, ##775, ##777, ##779, ##780, ##782, ##784, ##785, ##787, ##789 Error codes caused by line status at the time of reception ##103, ##106, ##107, ##201, ##793



008: Upper limit for V.34 modulation speed Select the upper limit of the modulation speed (baud rate) in the V.34 primary channel. When 4 (2743 baud) is selected, the communication is actually performed at 2400 baud.



009: Upper limit of V.34 data speed Select an upper limit of data transmission speed in the V.34 primary channel in the range between 2.4k and 33.6kbps at 2400bps intervals (0: 2.4 kbps to 13: 33.6 kbps).



010: Pseudo CI signal frequency Set pseudo CI signal frequency. Depending on the type of external phones, there is no ring tone when the FAX/TEL switching function is working. Change the pseudo CI signal frequency when there is no ring tone.



Setting of Numeric Parameter (NUMERIC Param.) ■ Configuration of Numeric Parameters Sssw Menu Num Ncu Type IPFAX Print Clear Test Report







001



xxxxx



←㸦yyyyy㸧{aaaaa㹼bbbbb}



002



xxxxx



←㸦yyyyy㸧{aaaaa㹼bbbbb}



003



xxxxx



←㸦yyyyy㸧{aaaaa㹼bbbbb}



004



xxxxx



←㸦yyyyy㸧{aaaaa㹼bbbbb}



005



xxxxx



←㸦yyyyy㸧{aaaaa㹼bbbbb}



006



xxxxx



←㸦yyyyy㸧{aaaaa㹼bbbbb}



007



xxxxx



←㸦yyyyy㸧{aaaaa㹼bbbbb}



008



xxxxx



←㸦yyyyy㸧{aaaaa㹼bbbbb} OK



No.



Function



Setting range



Default value



002



RTN transmission condition (1)



1 to 99%



10



003



RTN transmission condition (2)



2 to 99 times



15



004



RTN transmission condition (3)



1 to 99 lines



12



005



NCC pause time (before ID code)



1 to 60 sec



4



006



NCC pause time (after ID code)



1 to 60 sec



4



007



Prepose time at the time of making a call



0 to 9999 (x 10 ms)



0



1303



8. Service Mode No.



Function



Setting range



Default value



009



Comparing the number of digits between the sender's telephone number 0 to 20 digits and the receiver's telephone number



0



010



Line connection identification time



0 to 9999 (x 10 ms)



5500



011



T.30 T1 timer (for reception)



0 to 9999 (x 10 ms)



3500



013



T.30 EOL timer



500 to 3000 (x 10 ms)



1300



015



Hooking detection time



0 to 999



120



016



Time until a temporary response is obtained when switching FAX/TEL



0 to 9



017



Pseudo RBT signal pattern ON time



0 to 999



100



018



Pseudo RBT signal pattern OFF time (short)



0 to 999



0



019



Pseudo RBT signal pattern OFF time (long)



0 to 999



200



020



Pseudo CI signal pattern ON time



0 to 999



100



021



Pseudo CI signal pattern OFF time (short)



0 to 999



0



022



Pseudo CI signal pattern OFF time (long)



0 to 999



200



023



CNG detection level when switching FAX/TEL



0 to 7



4



024



Pseudo RBT transmission level when switching FAX/TEL



10 to 20 (TYPE = STANDARD)



20



025



CNG monitoring time when the answering phone connection function is set



026



Silent detection level when the answering phone connection function is set



027



V.21 low-speed flag preamble detection time



20 (-10 ms)



028



Off-hook PCB duty settings



1 to 99%



0 (50%)



080



Transmission number restriction: Outside line transmission number *1



0 to 9999



0



4



0



*1 : Supported on the platform version 307 or later



002: RTN transmission condition (1)/003: RTN transmission condition (2)/004: RTN transmission condition (3) Set the RTN signal transmission condition. In the case of frequent errors caused by RTN signal transmission at the time of reception, increase the parameters to loosen the RTN signal transmission condition. NOTE: Error codes caused by RTN signal transmission at the time of reception ##104, ##107, ##114, ##201 RTN signal transmission condition (1) is the ratio of error lines for the total number of lines per page of the received image. RTN signal transmission condition (2) is the reference value (*2) of burst error (*1). RTN signal transmission condition (3) is the number of errors that fail to meet the reference value of burst error. *1: Burst error (transmission errors with several continued lines) *2: Reference value (When "15" is set, transmission error with 15 consecutive lines is recognized as a burst error.) When any of the above conditions is detected during reception of image signals, RTN signal is sent after reception of the procedure signal from the sending machine. Increasing such parameter sends less RTN signal.



005: NCC pause time (before ID code) Set the pause time to be automatically entered between the access code and ID code when dialing on NCC (New Common Carrier) line.



006: NCC pause time (after ID code) Set the pause time to be automatically entered between the ID code and the other party's telephone number when dialing on NCC (New Common Carrier) line.



007: Prepose time at the time of making a call When automatically making a call, set the time from closing a line to making a call.



009: Comparing the number of digits between the sender's telephone number and the receiver's telephone number Set the TSI comparing the number of digits (last XX digits) when matching telephone numbers.



1304



8. Service Mode



010: Line connection identification time Set the line connection identification time. Increase this parameter in the case of frequent errors caused by line connection status at the time of communication. NOTE: Error codes caused by line connection status ##005, ##018 The line connection identification time is the duration from when the dial signal is transmitted until the line is disconnected at the sending side, or from when DIS signal is transmitted until the line is disconnected at the reception side.



011: T.30 T1 timer (for reception) Set T1 timer at the time of reception (wait time until receiving the meaningful signal after DIS transmission).



013: T.30 EOL timer Set the receivable 1 line transmission time. In the case of a long line data length (e.g.: computer FAX), extend the transmission time to prevent reception errors.



015: Hooking detection time Set the hooking detection time.



016: Time until the primary response is obtained when switching FAX/TEL Set the time from when capturing the line until transmission of pseudo RBT at FAX/TEL switching function operation.



017: Pseudo RBT signal pattern ON time/ 018: Pseudo RBT signal pattern OFF time (short)/ 019: Pseudo RBT signal pattern OFF time (long) Set the pattern of pseudo RBT signal to be sent at Fax/Tel switching function operation.



020: Pseudo CI signal pattern ON time/ 021: Pseudo CI signal pattern OFF time (short)/ 022: Pseudo CI signal pattern OFF time (long) Set the pattern of pseudo CI signal to be sent at Fax/Tel switching function operation.



023: CNG detection level when switching FAX/TEL Set the CNG detection level at Fax/Tel switching function operation.



024: Pseudo RBT transmission level when switching FAX/TEL Set the transmission level of pseudo RBT at Fax/Tel switching function operation.



025: CNG monitoring time when the answering phone connection function is set 027: V21 low-speed flag preamble detection time Set the period of time for judge detection of V.21 low-speed command preamble. Continuous detection for the fixed period of time leads to command analysis.



028: Off-hook PCB duty settings Set the Off-hook PCB duty setting. When 0 or a value that is 100 or more is entered, the duty becomes 50%.



080: Transmission number restriction: Outside line transmission number This sets the number permitted to dial to the outside line. Only the outside line transmission by the set number is permitted and other numbers are prohibited from transmission.



Setting of Destination (TYPE) ■ Overview When the type shown on the display is set, all the service data is set to match each country/region domestic telecommunication standards.



1305



8. Service Mode



Setting of Printer Functions (PRINTER) ■ Setting of Bit Switch (SSSW) ● SSSW-SW01 Functional Construction Bit



1



0



0



Not used



Function



-



-



1



Not used



-



-



2



Not used



-



-



3



Not used



-



-



4



Not used



-



-



5



Not used



-



-



6



Hold the line (when error code occurs)



7



Output a print log when DUMP report is output



Hold



Do not hold



Output



Do not output



Detailed Discussions of Bit 6 Select whether to hold the line when an error code occurs. However, in the case of vertical scanning prioritized recording, even when 0 is set for Bit 1 and Bit 0, the priority order will be Letter -> A4 -> Legal.



Detailed Discussions of Bit 7 Select whether to output a print log at the time of the DUMP report output.



● SSSW-SW05 Functional Construction Bit



1



0



0



Letter priority



Function



Set



Do not set



1



Legal priority



Set



Do not set



2



Not used



-



-



3



Not used



-



-



4



Not used



-



-



5



To prohibit reduced size printing (A4)



Prohibited



Not prohibited



6



To prohibit reduced size printing (A4)



Prohibited



Not prohibited



7



Vertical scanning prioritized recording



Set



Do not set



Detailed Discussions of Bit 0 and 1 When an image which can be printed in 100% magnification and with the same number of divided pages on any of A4, letter and legal is received, set which paper is prioritized for printing. With the settings of Bit 0 and Bit 1, the priority order of the recording paper is shown in the following table. Bit 1



Bit 0



Priority order of the recording paper



0



0



A4 -> Letter -> Legal



0



1



Letter -> A4 -> Legal



1



0



Legal -> Letter -> A4



1



1



Letter -> Legal -> A4



However, in the case of vertical scanning prioritized recording, the priority order will be Letter -> A4 -> Legal even when 0 is set for Bit 1 and Bit 0.



Detailed Discussions of Bit 5 and 6 Select whether to enable reduced size printing for A4 or LTR.



1306



8. Service Mode



Detailed Discussions of Bit 7 Set whether to set vertical scanning prioritized recording. Set: If B4 recording paper and A4 recording paper are set and an A4 extra-long image (*) is received, printing will be on the B4 recording paper. Do not set: If B5 horizontal recording paper and A4 recording paper are set and a B4 image is received, printing will be by division and on B5 horizontal recording paper. *: Image B4 or shorter and that cannot be printed on A4 recording paper.



● SSSW-SW06 Functional Construction Bit



1



0



0



Not used



Function



-



-



1



Not used



-



-



2



Not used



-



-



3



Not used



-



-



4



Not used



-



-



5



Reduced printing from A4 to B5



Enable



Disable



6



Not used



-



-



7



Not used



-



-



Detailed Discussions of Bit 5 Set whether to execute the reduction print that forcibly reduces the received A4 size document into the B5 size. This function is invalid when outputting the report.



■ Setting of Numeric Parameter (NUMERIC Param.) ● Numerical Parameter Composition No.



Function



Setting range



Initial setting



Unit



01



Missing areas of printing image when receiving image with longer length than standard



0 to 9999



12



1 mm



04



Leading edge blank area



0 to 9999



3



1 mm



05



Trailing edge blank area



0 to 9999



3



1 mm



Use it to set the range of the image to be removed from when printing an extra-length received image. Lower the parameter to decrease the range if the trailing edge of the received image must be retained (as when it is longer than the effective recording length).



Use it to set the leading-edge margin for the effective recording length.



Use it to set the trailing-edge margin for the effective recording length.



1307



8. Service Mode



IPFAX Setting ■ IPFAX ● BASIC N Bit



Function



Setting range



2



Session control reception timeout (sec.)



0 to 9999 (0*)



20



Reception start delay time (sec.)



0 to 9999 (0*)



21



BYE sending delay time at transmission (x10 msec.)



0 to 9999 (0*)



22



BYE receiving delay time at transmission (x10 msec.)



0 to 9999 (0*)



● NETA NUM Bit 1



Function



Setting range



T0 timer(Timer C) for IPFAX(sec.)



0 to 9999 (55*)



● NETC NUM Bit



Function



Setting range



1



SW for adjusting the speed at VoIPGW transmission [%]



0 to 9999* However, the value is fixed in the case of ECM, and is corrected by adding 5 %.



2



VoIPGW buffer size [byte]



0 to 9999* However, when the value is 0, it is internally interpreted as 200.



3



Packet division size [byte]



0 to 9999* However, when the value is 0, it is internally interpreted as 66.



4



Number of VoIPGW buffer reset frames at ECM 0 to 9999* * At ECM transmission, when frames of the number of this NUM value have However, when the value is 0, it is internally been transmitted, the next frames will be transmitted after the VoIPGW buffer interpreted as 16. becomes empty.



● T.38 Bit Setting SW01 Bit



Function



Setting range 1 Effective



0



1



German mode is effective during T.38 communication.



Invalid *



2



T.38 significant bit of DIS (bit123) is ignored. Ignore (When this SW is effective, the other party's machine is regarded as IPFAX even if DIS bit123 is 0.)



Not ignore



3



Transmission ECM = OFF setting



Effective



Invalid *



4



Reception ECM = OFF setting



Effective



Invalid *



● T.38 NUM Setting Bit



Function



Setting range



1



High-speed flag sending time of ECM mode for IPFAX (x10 msec.).



2



WAIT time from the close of T.38 to the close of SIP: Unit; second 0 to 9999 (1*) (However, the setting becomes 2 seconds even if the setting is changed to 2 or more. ).



1308



0 to 9999 (0*)



8. Service Mode



Initialization of Set Value (CLEAR) ■ Overview Selecting the following items enables the applicable data to be initialized. When clear is executed, the setting items and numeric values for various parameters are set back to the factory setting values. Item



Data to be initialized



TEL



Registered telephone number data (*1)



USSW SW



Contents registered in the user data and service mode #1 to #3 Memory management contents of the user data are not cleared. Image data stored in the memory is not cleared.



SRV SW



Contents of the user data and service mode #1 to #3, and #7



NCU



Contents of service mode #4



SRV DATA



Contents of the system dump list



REPORT



Contents of the communication management report



ALL



All Settings/Registration data (*1) except service mode #5 TYPE (*2)



COUNTER



The number of printed sheets, the number of read sheets



IPFAX



Contents of service mode IPFAX



*1: With models that can register information other than fax in destination, the telephone number data is not cleared even when TEL (service mode > FAX > Clear > TEL) or ALL (service mode > FAX > Clear > ALL) is executed. To clear the data, execute the following service mode on the host machine. COPIER > Function > CLEAR > ADRS-BK *2: When service mode > FAX > Clear > ALL is executed, a value is registered in service mode > FAX > TYPE according to the location of the host machine (in the case of Japanese model, "STANDARD" is registered). CAUTION: If service mode > FAX > Clear > ALL is executed with a fax job waiting to be processed and the fax job is cancelled before the power is turned OFF and then ON, E674-0100 may occur when the power is turned OFF and then ON. If E674-0100 occurs, the machine can be recovered by executing service mode > FAX > Clear > ALL again and then turning OFF and then ON the power. In order to prevent the foregoing error, be sure to check for any remaining fax jobs before executing service mode > FAX > Clear > ALL. If there is a remaining job, cancel the job and then execute service mode > FAX > Clear > ALL.



Test Mode (TEST) ■ Overview ● Test Mode Construction Sssw Menu Num Ncu Type



IP FAX



ISDNMOD2 MODEM MODEM2 FACULTY FACULTY2



DATA SET ISDNMOD



1309



Print



Clear Test Report



8. Service Mode Using Test Mode 1. Press the desired item to highlight; then, press the OK key to bring up its screen. The following table shows text mode items that are valid and invalid when a fax board is installed: Yes: may be used -: not used Level 1



Level 2



Fax Board present



RELAY-1



Yes



RELAY-2 MODEM



FACULTY



-



FREQ



Yes



G3TX



Yes



DTMFTX



Yes



TONERX



-



V34G3TX



Yes



G3 4800TX



Yes



SPEAKER



-



DETECT1



-



DETECT2



-



DETECT3



-



VOICETX



-



DATA SET



-



ISDNMOD



-



ISDNMOD2



-



CAUTION: Do not use items in the table identified as "-."



■ MODEM Test ● Relay Test (RELAY-1) Use it to see if the individual relays on the NCU board go on and off as expected. Sssw Menu Num Ncu Type



IP FAX Print Clear Test Report



CML



OFF



P



OFF



S



OFF



H



OFF



D



OFF



R



OFF







OK



Using Text Mode 1. From the relays indicated on the screen, select the one you want to test; then, turn it off or on using the Up/Down key. (Some of the relays may not actually exist on the NCU board.)



1310



8. Service Mode



● Frequency Test (FREQ) Of the items indicated below, press one; in response, the DC circuit will be closed and the selected frequency will be transmitted using the tone transmission function of the modem. You can also monitor the transmission signal by listening to the sound key. generated by the speaker. To stop the operation and end test mode, press the Sssw Menu Num Ncu Type



IP FAX



Print Clear Test Report







RBT 462Hz 1100Hz 1300Hz 1500Hz 1650Hz 1850Hz 2100Hz



OK



CAUTION: 'RBT' is not currently supported.



● G3 Signal Transmission Test (G3 Tx) Of the items indicated below, press one. In response, the DC circuit will be closed and the selected frequency will be transmitted using the G3 signal transmission function of the modem. You can also monitor the transmission signal by listening to the sound generated by the speaker. To stop the operation and end test mode, press the key. Sssw Menu Num Ncu Type IP FAX Print Clear Test Report











300bps 2400bps 4800bps 7200bps 9600bps TC7200 TC9600 12000bps



OK



1311



8. Service Mode Sssw Menu Num Ncu Type IP FAX Print Clear Test Report











14400bps 300-ALL0 300-ALL1 300-1:1 300-1:4 300-4:1



OK



CAUTION: '300-ALL0' through '300-4:1' are not currently supported.



● DTMF Transmission Test Of the items indicated below, press one; in response, the DC circuit will be closed and the selected DTMF signal will be transmitted using the DTMF transmission function of the modem. You can also monitor the transmission signal by listening to the speaker. To stop the operation and to end test mode, press the key. Sssw Menu Num Ncu Type IP FAX



LONG



Print Clear Test Report







0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 * #



OK



Using Text Mode 1. From the items indicated on the screen, select the item you want to test; then, press the key on keypad that corresponds to the DTMF signal to test. CAUTION: 'SHORT' is not currently supported.



● V.34 G3 Signal Transmission Test (V34G3Tx) Select the transmission speed you want to test, and then select a modulation speed (baud rate); in response, the V.34 G3 transmission signal will be transmitted to the telephone line terminal and the speaker. To stop the operation and to end test mode, key. press the



1312



8. Service Mode



Sssw Menu Num Ncu Type







SPEED



33600bps



IP FAX



Print Clear Test Report







3429baud 3200baud 3000baud 2800baud 2743baud 2400baud



OK



Using Text Mode 1. Select 'SPEED', and then select the speed you want to test using the Up/Down key. 2. Select the baud rate you want to test.



■ Function Test ● 4800-bps Signal Transmission Test The DC circuit will be closed, and a 4800-bps signal will be transmitted using the 4800-bps signal transmission function of the modem. You can also monitor the transmission signal by listening to the speaker. To stop the operation and end test mode, press key. the Sssw Menu Num Ncu Type



IP FAX



Print Clear Test Report



G34800TX



OK



Service Report (REPORT) ■ System Data List Use it to check the settings associated with the service soft switch and service parameters.



1313



8. Service Mode 2003 09/02 TUE 12:00



001



FAX



****************************** *** SYSTEM DATA LIST *** ****************************** SERIAL NO



XXXXXXXX #1 SSSW SW01 SW02 SW03 SW04 SW05 SW06 SW07 SW08 SW09 SW10 SW11 SW12 SW13 SW14 SW15 SW16 SW17 SW18 SW19 SW20 SW21 SW22 SW23 SW24 SW25 SW26 SW27 SW28 SW29 SW30 SW31 SW32 SW33 SW34 SW35 SW36 SW37 SW38 SW39 SW40 SW41 SW42 SW43 SW44 SW45 SW46 SW47 SW48 SW49 SW50



#2 MENU 01: 02: 03: 04: 05: 06: 07: 08: 09: 10:



---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------



00000000 10000000 00000000 10000000 00000000 10000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000011 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00011000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00100000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000



-----------------------------------------



0 0 0 0 0 0 10 0 0 2



■ System Dump List NOTE: A system dump list is generated when you execute the following in service mode: FAX > Report > DUMP.



Use it to check the history of communications, both successful and error. 2013 04/05 FRI 12:00



001



FAX



******************************* *** SYSTEM DUMP LIST *** *******************************



*1 *2 *1 *2 *3 *3



*4 *5 *6 *7



SERIAL NO



XXXXXXXX



CLEAR DATE



2013 02/03 FRI 13:37



TX = A4 = RX = A4 = NWSPD = 33600 = 21600 = 9600 = 14400 = 14400 = 9600 = STD = MH = G3 =



1298 1302 1572 1581 0 1 0 0 83 0 2 60 7 37



#000



0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0



0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0



0 0 2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0



0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 22 0



0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0



0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0



0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0



0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0



#100



0



0



0



0



0



0



18



0



B4



=



49



A3



=



27



LTR



=



0



LGL



=



0



B4



=



59



A3



=



59



LTR



=



0



LGL



=



0



31200 19200 7200 12000 14400 7200 FINE MR ECM



= = = = = = = = =



0 0 0 1 0 0 2839 32 3040



28800 = 16800 = 4800 = TC9600 =



2986 0 0 0



26400 14400 2400 TC7200



= = = =



0 0 0 0



24000 12000



= =



0 0



4 107 9 0



2400 ULTRA JBIG IPECM



= = = =



0 71 3029 0



JPEG IPG3



= =



0 0



4800 SUPER MMR G4



= = = =



1314



8. Service Mode *1: RX, total reception number of times; TX, total transmission number of times. *2: number of pages sent/received according to original size. *3: number of pages sent/received in connection with different modem speeds (NWSPD : For IPFAX communication count). *4: number of communication pages by resolution(Standard, Fine, Super Fine, Ultra Fine). *5: number of pages sent/received in connection with different coding methods. *6: number of transmissions/receptions according to mode. *7: number of occurrences according to error code. Indication sample #280



1 ↑ number of errors ##280



7 ↑ number of errors ##281



3 0 ↑ number of errors ##282



0



It provides error information on the 3 most recent communications. 2003 09/02 TUE 12:00



*1 *2 *3 *4 *5



001



FAX



#1 LATEST



#000 START TIME OTHER PARTY MAKER CODE MACHINE CODE RCV V.8 FRAME SYMBOL RATE DATA RATE TX LVL REDUCTION ERR ABCODE ERR SECTXB ERR SECRXB



*6 *7



Rx : ( bit 1 ) ( bit 65 ) Tx : ( bit 1 ) ( bit 65 )



*8 *8



Rx : NSF CSI DIS Tx :



09/02 10:00 12345678 10001000 0100001 00000000 E0 81 85 D4 90 7E 00 00 3429 baud 28800 bps [V. 34] 0 00 00 00



00000100 00000001 00000000 00000001



01110111 01011111 00000001 00000100 01000010 00011111 00000001 00000100



00100011 00000001 00000000 00000000 00100001 00000001 00000000 00000000



CFR NSS TSI DCS



#2



MISC-R > RD-SHPOS



Release lever



15. Remove the tapes.



1325



9. Installation



21. Lift the Original Pickup Tray and remove the tape securing the tag and the Roller Pressure Release Member.



16. Holding the tab, open the Inner Cover. Remove the Protector Paper and the Protection Sheet.



17. Close the Inner Cover, and Cover of the ADF document reading area. CAUTION: Be sure that the covers are closed properly. 22. Open the Right Rear Cover 1, and Open the HDD Lid. • 1 Screw 18. Remove the paper on the Copyboard Glass.



1x 19. Close the DADF.



20. Remove the packaging materials from the Document Supply Tray.



23. Remove the tape securing the tag and remove the package material.



1326



9. Installation



Checking the Contents



24. Close the HDD Lid. • 1 Screw



[1] Developing Assembly X 1



[2] Exhaust Filter X 1



[3] Left Upper Cover X 1



[4] Right Upper Cover X 1



[5] Upper Rear Cover X 1



[6] Service Book Holder X 1



[7] Finisher Connector Cover X 2



[8] Cleaning Tool X 1



[9] Paper Size Label (Cassette)



[10] Paper Size Label (Deck) X 1



1x



25. Close the Right Rear Cover 1.



for USA X 1 for Asia X 2 for EUR X 1



[11] JAM Label X1



[12] Power Code X 1 230V region and China only The connector has a different shape depending on locations.



1327



9. Installation [13] Rubber Cap X 4



[24] Cleaning Position Label



[14] Screw (Binding; M4x6) X 1



for USA X 1 for EUR X 1 for Asia X 4



[25] Cleaning Procedure Label



for USA X 1 for EUR X 1 for Asia X 1 for Asia X 3



[15] Screw (RS Tightening ; M4x10) X 6



[16] Power Code X 1



[26] Printer Cover X 1



[27] Right Cover Support Plate X 3



230V region and China only The connector has a different shape depending on locations.



[17] Connection Seal (Middle) X 1



[18] Connection Seal (Front) X 1



[28] Reader Fixation Plate L X1



[29] Reader Fixation Plate R X1



[19] Left Upper Small Cover X 1



[20] Cleaning Cloth Storage Box X 1



[30] Screw (Binding; M4x6) X 5



[31] Screw (P Tightening; M4x10) X 4



[21] Cleaning Cloth X 1



[22] Double-sided Tape X1



[32] Screw (TP; M4x8) X 1



[33] Cushion X 2



[34] Device Port Sheet X1



[35] Wire Saddle X 1



[23] Copy Prohibition Label



for USA X 3 for EUR X 4 for Asia X 5



1328



9. Installation NOTE: • [9], [24], [25]: Number of labels attached to the sheet varies according to location/area. • [19] to [25]: Only for machines equipped with the Image Reader Unit • [26] to [32]: Only for machines equipped with the Printer Cover • [33] to 35]: Only for machines equipped with the IC Card Reader Box



2. Install the Reader Fixation Plate L. • 2 Bosses • 1 Screw (Binding: M4x6)



Binding; M4x6



• Including guides



1x



Installation Procedure ■ Installation of the Printer Cover (Only for Machines Equipped with the Printer Cover)



1. Remove the Reader Positioning Shaft, and secure it in the hole as shown in the figure. • 1 Screw



1x



1x



1329



Boss



9. Installation



3. Open the Multi-purpose Pickup Tray, and install the Reader Fixation Plate R.



4. Install the 3 Right Cover Support Plates. • 2 Hooks each • 1 Screw each (Binding; M4x6)



• 2 Bosses • 1 Screw (Binding: M4x6)



Binding; M4x6



Binding; M4x6



3x



1x Boss



1330



9. Installation



2. Install the Left Upper Small Cover.



5. Install the Printer Cover.



• 1 Protrusion • 1 Claw



• 4 Screws (P Tightening; M4x10) • 1 Screw (TP: M4x8)



NOTE: Be sure to push it in until it clicks. P Tightening; M4x10



TP㸹M4x8 TP



P Tightening



5x Protrusion



3. Close the DADF.



6. Close the Multi-purpose Pickup Tray.



■ Installation of the Covers NOTE: • The procedure for installing the cover is the same between the printer model and the model equipped with the Image Reader. • Steps 1 to 3 are works performed in the case of the Image Reader Unit model.



1. Open the DADF.



1331



Claw



9. Installation



4. Install the Upper Rear Cover.



5. Open the covers.



• 3 Protrusions • 2 Claws



• Toner Replacement Cover • Right Cover • Right Rear Cover 1



CAUTION: Points to Note when Installing the Image Reader Unit: This may cause the Rear Upper Cover to be not securely installed so avoid catching the Reader Communication Cable with the rib inside the Rear Upper Cover.



Right Cover



Toner Replacement Cover



Right Rear Cover 1



Claw



6. Install the 4 Rubber Caps to the Right Upper Cover.



Protrusion



Rib



1332



9. Installation



10. Install the Left Upper Cover in the direction of the arrow.



7. Install the Right Upper Cover by fitting its hole onto the boss of the Upper Rear Cover.



• 3 Protrusions • 3 Hooks • 3 Screws (RS Tightening; M4x10)



• 3 Protrusions • 2 Screws (RS Tightening; M4x10)



CAUTION: When installing the Left Upper Cover, be careful not to secure it while it is being slided fully toward the front. Otherwise, the Left Upper Cover may interfere with the Toner Replacement Cover and the magnet cannot work.



RS Tightening; M4x10



RS Tightening; M4x10



࣎ࢫ Boss Protrusion



3x Protrusion



2x



Hook



Hook



11. Install the Left Rear Cover. • 1 Hook • 1 Claw 8. Close the Right Cover and Right Rear Cover 1.



9. Remove the Left Rear Cover. • 1 Claw • 1 Hook Claw



Claw



Hook



12. Close the Toner Replacement Cover. Hook



1333



9. Installation



■ Installation of the Developing Assembly



2. Check if there are any scratches on the cylinder while rotating the gear manually in the direction of the arrow.



CAUTION: How to Hold the Developing Assembly • When holding the Developing Assembly, be sure to hold the handle of the Developing Assembly as shown in the figure. • Do not touch the shutter area of the Developing Assembly. The shutter area is slippery, so it may cause a fall of the assembly.



CAUTION: • Do not damage and touch the cylinder. • Do not turn the gear inversely.



3. Open the Right Cover.



4. Turn the Lock Lever, and open the Developing Assembly Pressure Cover.



1. Unpack the Developing Assembly.



1334



9. Installation CAUTION: • Before installing the Developing Assembly, be sure to check that the Buffer Shutter is not opened. • If forcedly inserting the Developing Assembly while the Buffer Shutter is open, the Buffer Shutter may get damage. When the Buffer Shutter is open, be sure to close it by pulling it toward the front.



5. Hold the Developing Assembly as shown in the figure, and align the protrusions at both sides of the assembly with the rails on the host machine. • 2 Protrusions each



Protrusion



Rail



Protrusion



• Whether the Developing Assembly is installed properly can be checked with the Shutter Arm.



Rail



Shutter Arm



Protrusion



Shutter Arm



1335



9. Installation



■ Installation of the Pickup Assembly 6. Along the rails, insert the Developing Assembly horizontally. • 1 Connector



1. Remove tapes securing tags from the Vertical Path Cover.



1x



2. Open the Vertical Path Cover and remove 2 Pressure Release Spacers at pickup slot for each cassette.



7. Close the Developing Assembly Pressure Cover and return the Lock Lever to the original position. Secure with the Screw (Binding; M4x6).



3. Close the Vertical Path Cover. Binding; M4x6



4. Open the Front Cover.



1x



5. Open the Left and Right Decks, and remove the tape.



6. Loosen the screw and slide the Deck Pressure Plate in the direction of the arrow. Check that the screw



8. Close the Right Cover.



1336



9. Installation position is at the engraved mark '1', and then tighten the screw.



1x



2. Turn the Fixing Feed Unit Release Lever in the direction of the arrow and pull the Fixing Feed Unit all the way out.



Engraved Mark Deck Pressure Plate



1x Screw



NOTE: In the case that the Fixing Nip Pressure Release Screw is hard to be removed, release the lock by pressing the Lock Springs at both rails, and pull out the Fixing Feed Unit further until it stops.



Lock Spring



7. Close the Left and Right Decks.



■ Installing the Fixing Assembly Lock Spring



1. Remove the tapes.



3. Remove the tape securing a tag on the Fixing Upper Cover.



1337



9. Installation



7. Return the Fixing Feed Unit and lock the Fixing Feed Unit Release Lever.



4. Open the Inner Delivery Unit, and remove the 2 Fixing Nip Pressure Release Screws.



1x



Fixing Nip Pressure Release Screw



NOTE: In the case of pulling out the Fixing Feed Unit further, be sure to return the Fixing Feed Unit while releasing the Lock Spring.



1x



Fixing Nip Pressure Release Screw



Inner Delivery Unit



5. Close the Inner Delivery Unit.



6. Remove the ETB Spacer.



1338



9. Installation NOTE: How to push the Fixing Feed Unit in 1. Release the Release Springs [A] on the side of either rail. Slowly push the Fixing Feed Unit in by approximately 5 mm while keeping it level.



CAUTION: Points to Note when Inserting the Fixing Feed Unit While pressing the Release Springs, slowly push the Fixing Feed Unit in so that the fingers do not get caught.



[A]



approx. 5 mm



2. Take the fingers off the Release Springs and slowly push the Fixing Feed Unit in to the end.



1339



9. Installation



2. Unpack the Toner Container and shake it approx. 10 times horizontally.



8. Affix the Jam Label of the appropriate language over the existing label on the Fixing Front Cover.



3. Remove the cap of the Toner Container.



4. Set the Toner Container to the Main Body, and turn the Lock Lever in the direction of the arrow to secure the Toner Container in place. 9. Close the Front Cover.



■ Installation of Toner Container 2



1. Open the Toner Replacement Cover, and turn the Lock Lever in the direction of the arrow to release.



1



5. Close the Toner Replacement Cover.



1340



9. Installation



■ Installing the Exhaust Filter 2. Hold the Exhaust Filter as shown in the figure, and install it to the Main Body. 1. Remove the tape, and remove the Filter Cover.



CAUTION: When installing the Exhaust Filter, be sure to install it straight. If it is installed askew, the Filter Cover does not fit properly.



1341



9. Installation



2. Remove the screw. (Lower the Control Panel Hold Plate as shown in the figure.)



3. Install the Filter Cover. • Screw (RS Tightening; M4x10)



• 1 Boss



1x RS Tightening; M4x10



Boss



1x



Control Panel Hold Plate



NOTE: When opening the Front Cover, be sure to do so while holding the Control Panel Hold Plate.



■ Installing the Card Reader (Only for Machines Equipped with the IC Card Reader Box) 1. Open the Toner Replacement Cover, and remove the Bottle Guide Rail. • 1 Screw • 1 Hook



Hook



1x



1342



9. Installation



3. Remove the Control Panel Left Upper Cover.



4. Place the Cushions.



• 2 Claws • 1 Boss • 2 Hooks



Boss



Hook



5. Install the Wire Saddle. 6. Connect the Card Reader to the connection port on the lower side. CAUTION: Do not insert it in the connection port on the upper side.



Claw



1343



9. Installation 7. Route the cable as shown in the figure, and store the extra slack in the position as shown in the figure.



9. Remove the sheet of the Control Panel Left Cover. (The removed sheet will no longer be used.)



• 1 Wire Saddle



Wire Saddle



1x



10. Affix the Device Port Sheet to the Control Panel Left Cover. NOTE: Be sure to affix it inside the frame.



1x



8. Place the Card Reader on the cushions. NOTE: Be sure to change the number of cushions according to the thickness of the Card Reader.



1344



9. Installation



13. Install the Bottle Guide Rail, and close the Toner Replacement Cover.



11. Install the Control Panel Left Upper Cover. • 2 Hooks • 1 Boss • 2 Claws



• 1 Hook • 1 Screw



Boss



Hook



Hook



1x



■ Setting the Environment Heater Switch



Claw



1. Check that the Leakage Breaker is ON.



12. Secure the Control Panel Hold Plate and the Control Panel Left Upper Cover. • 1 Boss • 1 Screw



1x



Boss



Control Panel Hold Plate



1345



9. Installation 2. Turn ON the Environment Heater Switch and the Cassette Heater Switch in accordance with the installation environment.



CAUTION: • Some of the settings can be skipped without entering the command. To configure skipped settings, configure the settings one by one after exiting Setup Guide. • Setup Guide can be started again from [Settings/ Registration]. ([Settings/Registration] > [Management Settings] > [License/Other] > [Start Setup Guide]) • If the host machine is turned OFF during the registration using the Setup Guide, the Setup Guide is automatically started by turning ON the host machine. • Once registration using the Setup Guide is completed, the Setup Guide is not automatically started by turning ON the host machine.



NOTE: In the case of high humidity environment, turn ON the Environment Heater Switch.



Environment Switch



CAUTION: Register the information of paper loaded during installation of the host machine. Be sure to register the correct paper type. Especially in the case of special paper types such as heavy paper, registering a wrong paper type may result in image failure, and when the Fixing Assembly becomes soiled or paper wraparound occurs, repair by a service technician becomes necessary.



Cassette Heater Switch



NOTE: While mixing toner, “Securing the Host Machine” on page 1347, “Other Installation Work” on page 1347, , “Affixing the Labels on the Reader Assembly” on page 1348, “Installing the Cleaning Tool” on page 1348, “Setting the Deck” on page 1350, “Setting the Paper Cassette ” on page 1351can be executed.



Leakage Breaker



■ Turning ON the Main Power 1. Remove the protection sheet on the control panel.



● Informing the System Administrator Completion of the Installation



2. Connect the power plug of the host machine to the power outlet.



When installation is completed, ask the system administrator to change the password and keep the changed password to prevent information leakage.



3. Turn ON the main power switch.



■ Registration of Installation Date Information



4. A message is displayed prompting to check that the Reader Unit Cable is connected properly. 5. Select the following service mode and enter "0" to the setting value.



CAUTION: Be sure that [Date/Time Settings] is completed. (There are items in Setup Guide.)



COPIER > OPTION > FNC-SW > W/SCNR 6. Exit the Service Mode.



■ Host Machine Settings (Start Setup Guide) The Setup Guide starts when the host machine is turned ON for the first startup. Follow the instructions displayed on the Touch Panel Display to configure the settings of the host machine.



1346



9. Installation



1. Enter the following service mode, and execute "Batch Set Installation Date Info".



2. Use a screwdriver to turn the adjusters in the direction of the arrow to make them secured.



COPIER > FUNCTION > INSTALL > INSTDTST NOTE: Securing of the adjuster is not earthquake resistant.



NOTE: • Year, month, day, hour, and minute can be edited individually in the following service modes. COPIER > OPTION > USER > INSTDT-Y COPIER > OPTION > USER > INSTDT-M COPIER > OPTION > USER > INSTDT-D COPIER > OPTION > USER > INSTDT-H COPIER > OPTION > USER > INSTDT-N • The default value of each service mode is "0". • When "0" is set for each service mode, "Device Installation Date" on the counter report will be blank.



2. Exit service mode. 3. Output the counter report, and check that the installation date information is registered. • [Counter/Device Information] key > [Print List] > [Yes]



■ Other Installation Work



■ Securing the Host Machine



● Service Book Holder 1. Confirm the position to install the Host Machine and turn the 2 adjusters with your hand until they closely contact the floor.



1. Remove the double-sided tape on back side of the Service Book Holder, and affix the holder on the Base Plate of the host machine.



NOTE: If you failed to turn the adjusters with your hand, use a screwdriver so that they can be turned by your hand.



1347



9. Installation



● Finisher Connector Cover



■ Affixing the Labels on the Reader Assembly



1. Install the 2 Finisher Connector Covers to the left side of the host machine.



1. Affix the label for the appropriate language over the positions shown in the figure below.



• 1 Protrusion each • 1 Claw each



• Copy Prohibition Label • Cleaning Position Label • Cleaning Procedure Label



Claw



Cleaning Procedure Label Protrusion



Cleaning Position Label



● Cleaning Tool



1. Store the cleaning tool on the inside of the Right Deck to use for maintenance. (Hook it on the back side of the Deck Cover.)



Copy Prohibition Label



■ Installing the Cleaning Tool NOTE: Be sure to install the Cleaning Cloth Storage Box to a position after checking with the user on where to install it.



1348



9. Installation in the figure, and remove the release paper of the double-sided tape.



1. Clean the position where the Cleaning Cloth Storage Box is to be installed with lint-free paper moistened with alcohol.







3. Install the Cleaning Cloth Storage Box.



2. Remove one side of the release paper of the doublesided tape. Affix the double-sided tape to the Cleaning Cloth Storage Box at a position as shown



1349



9. Installation Side End Plate in place, and fix each of the Guide Plates at user's desired size.



4. Place the Cleaning Cloth in the Cleaning Cloth Storage Box.



NOTE: Setting the Paper Side End Plate • Be sure to align the Paper Side End Plate with the position according to the size requested by the user, and secure the screw. • When B5 size is set, the Paper Size End Plate cannot be fixed to the deck with the screw. In order to prevent the screw from being lost, be sure to secure the screw to the deck as shown below.



■ Checking the K paper settings (Only for CHINA)



Check the following service mode, and change the setting value if different. 1. Enter service mode. 2. Check that the setting value of COPIER > OPTION > FNC-SW > MODEL-SZ is "0". 3. Enter service mode (Lv.2). 4. Check that the setting value of COPIER > OPTION > FNC-SW > SENS-CNF is "0". 5. Check that the setting value of COPIER > OPTION > FNC-SW > MODELSZ2 is "0".



4x



6. Check that the setting value of COPIER > OPTION > FNC-SW > KSIZE-SW is "1".



Trail Edge Guide Plate



7. When having changed the setting, turn OFF and then ON the main power to enable the setting value.



Left Guide Plate



Screw



Right Guide Plate



■ Setting the Deck



Paper Side End Plate



1. Pull out the Left and the Right Decks to the front.



2. Remove the 4 screws fixing the Trailing Edge Guide Plate, Left Guide Plate, Right Guide Plate, and Paper



3. Put the specified size of papers in the Left/Right Deck, and push the Left/Right Deck in.



4. Affix Paper Size Labels (for Deck) according to the paper size, with the edge of each label aligned with



1350



9. Installation



■ Setting the Paper Cassette



the edge of the cassette number label. Approx. 5 mm away from the number label.



1. Pull out the Cassette to the front.



2. Hold the lever of the Side Guide Plate, and adjust the plate to the specified size. Adjust the Trailing Edge Guide Plate in the same way. Side Guide Plate



5 mm



Trail Edge Guide Plate Lever Trail Edge Guide Plate



NOTE: If Setup Guide is running, skip this procedure.



Side Guide Plate Lever Side Guide Plate



3. Set paper, and push the Cassette.



5. Register the type of paper loaded in the paper source.



4. Set another cassette as well.



1. Select the [Settings/Registration] > [Preferences] > [Paper Settings] > [Paper Settings]. 2. Select the paper source where paper is loaded, and press [Set]. 3. Select the paper type same as that of the loaded paper, and press [OK] > [OK].



NOTE: Paper size is set to be automatically recognized.



5. Affix Paper Size Labels (for Cassette) according to the paper size, with the right edge aligned with the



NOTE: If the corresponding paper type is not displayed on the simple settings screen, press [Detailed Settings] and make a selection on the detailed settings screen. If the type of loaded paper is not displayed on the detailed settings screen, you can register it.



NOTE: If Setup Guide is running, perform the following works after Setup Guide ends.



6. When the size has been changed, register the paper size for the Left and Right Deck in the service mode. Right Deck : COPIER > OPTION > CST > P-SZ-C1 Left Deck : COPIER > OPTION > CST > P-SZ-C2



7. Exit from the service mode.



1351



9. Installation



■ Image Position Adjustment



right edge of the number label, approx. 5 mm away from the number label.



● Left Edge Margin Adjustment (1st side) NOTE: • Be sure to check with the user whether or not to affix the Paper Size Label, and then affix it at the recommended position. • Keep the Paper Size Labels as they will be used when changing the paper size.



1. After setting the service mode as follow, press the Start key and output a test print from each cassette and Deck. COPIER > TEST > PG > TYPE = 5 COPIER > TEST > PG > PG-PICK = 1/2/3/4



2. Check that the left edge margin of the image (L1) is within 2.5 +/- 1.5mm. When the result is out of the specified range, perform adjustment by following the following procedure. Feeding direction of paper



L1



image



5 mm



3. Adjust the image position in service mode. NOTE: If Setup Guide is running, skip this procedure.



NOTE:



-20 to 20 (0.1 mm per unit) As the value is incremented by 1, the left edge margin is increased by 0.1mm.



6. Register the type of paper loaded in the paper source. 1. Select the [Settings/Registration] > [Preferences] > [Paper Settings] > [Paper Settings]. 2. Select the paper source where paper is loaded, and press [Set]. 3. Select the paper type same as that of the loaded paper, and press [OK] > [OK].



Right Deck: COPIER > ADJUST > FEED-ADJ > ADJ-C1 Left Deck: COPIER > ADJUST > FEED-ADJ > ADJ-C2 Cassette3: COPIER > ADJUST > FEED-ADJ > ADJ-C3 Cassette4: COPIER > ADJUST > FEED-ADJ > ADJ-C4



NOTE: If the corresponding paper type is not displayed on the simple settings screen, press [Detailed Settings] and make a selection on the detailed settings screen. If the type of loaded paper is not displayed on the detailed settings screen, you can register it.



4. When the setting value was changed in step 3, write down the new numerical value in the service label.



5. Exit from the service mode.



1352



9. Installation



10. According to the scale in which the position was checked in step 8, adjust the position of the Cassette Button Link Button.



6. Perform printing again from the cassette/deck, and check that the left edge margin (L1) of the image is within 2.5 +/- 1.5 mm.



NOTE: • In the case of larger margin at the rear side, move the Cassette Button Link Unit to the rear side. • In the case of larger margin at the front side, move the Cassette Button Link Unit to the front side.



NOTE: If the adjustment cannot be made with the setting value of -20 to 20 (adjustment amount: -2.0 to 2.0mm), execute step 7 and later steps.



7. Pull out the Cassette. Cassette Button Link Unit



8. Check the Cassette position by the scale of the Cassette Button Link Unit.



Scale



Cassette Button Link Unit



Scale



11. Tighten the 4 screws (which have been loosened in step 9. NOTE: If you are concerned with alignment of the Cassette Front Cover, perform steps 12 to 14 to make an adjustment as necessary.



12. Loosen the 4 screws and adjust the position of the Cassette Front Cover by referring to the scale. 9. Loosen the 4 screws of the Cassette Button Link Unit.



3x



Cassette Button Link Unit



1x



1353



9. Installation 13. When moving the Cassette Button Link Unit, adjust the left side of the Cassette Front Cover by shifting it with the same shifting amount of the unit.



2x



1. After setting the service mode as follow, press the Start key and output a test print from Cassette 3. COPIER > TEST > PG > TYPE = 5 COPIER > TEST > PG > PG-PICK = 3



Scale



2. Check that the leading edge margin of the image (L2) is within 2.5 +1.5/-0.5 mm. When the result is out of the specified range, perform adjustment by following the following procedure. L2



Feeding direction of paper image



Cassette Front Cover



3. Adjust the image position in service mode.



2x



NOTE:



-50 to 50 (0.1 mm per unit) As the value is incremented by 1, the leading edge margin is decreased by 0.1mm.



Scale



COPIER > ADJUST > FEED-ADJ > REGIST



4. Perform printing again from the cassette 3, and check that the leading edge margin (L2) of the image is within 2.5 +1.5/-0.5 mm.



14. Once the position of the Cassette Front Cover is confirmed, tighten the 4 screws (which have been loosened in step 12).



5. When the setting value was changed in step 3, write down the new numerical value in the service label. 15. Perform printing again from the cassette/deck, and check that the left edge margin (L1) of the image is within 2.5 +/- 1.5mm.



6. Exit from the service mode.



● Left Edge/Leading Edge Margin Adjustment (2nd side)



NOTE: When a mechanical adjustment was made, be sure to execute the service mode again.



NOTE: By executing the margin adjustment for the Cassette 3, the adjustment is applied to all source of paper.



● Leading Edge Margin Adjustment (1st side) NOTE: By executing the margin adjustment for the Cassette 3, the adjustment is applied to all source of paper.



1354



9. Installation



5. When the setting value was changed in step 3, write down the new numerical value in the service label.



1. After setting the service mode as follow, press the Start key and output a test print from Cassette 3. COPIER > TEST > PG > TYPE = 5 COPIER > TEST > PG > 2-SIDE = 1 COPIER > TEST > PG > PG-PICK = 3



6. Exit from the service mode.



● Left Edge/Leading Edge Margin Adjustment of Multi-purpose Pickup Tray



2. Check that the left edge margin (L1) and leading edge margin (L2) are within the range indicated below. When the result is out of the specified range, perform adjustment by following the following procedure.



1. After setting the service mode as follow, press the Start key and output a test print from Multi-purpose Pickup Tray.



• left edge margin L1: 2.5 +/-1.5 mm • leading edge margin L2 : 2.5 +1.5/-0.5 mm



COPIER > TEST > PG > TYPE = 5 COPIER > TEST > PG > PG-PICK = 5



L2



2. Check that the left edge margin (L1) and leading edge margin (L2) are within the range indicated below. When the result is out of the specified range, perform adjustment by following the following procedure.



Feeding direction of paper



L1



image



• left edge margin L1: 2.5 +/-1.5 mm • leading edge margin L2: 2.5 +1.5/-0.5 mm L2



Feeding direction of paper



3. Adjust the image position in service mode.



image



L1



NOTE:



-50 to 50 (0.1 mm per unit) As the value is incremented by 1, the left edge margin is increased by 0.1mm.



COPIER > ADJUST > FEED-ADJ > ADJ-REFE



3. Adjust the image position in service mode.



NOTE:



-50 to 50 (0.1 mm per unit) As the value is incremented by 1, the leading edge margin is decreased by 0.1mm.



NOTE:



-20 to 20 (0.1 mm per unit) As the value is incremented by 1, the left edge margin is increased by 0.1mm.



COPIER > ADJUST > FEED-ADJ > REG-DUP1 COPIER > ADJUST > FEED-ADJ > ADJ-MF 4. Perform printing again from the cassette 3, and check that the left edge margin (L1) and leading edge margin (L2) of the image are within the range indicated below. • left edge margin L1: 2.5 +/-1.5 mm • leading edge margin L2 : 2.5 +1.5/-0.5 mm



1355



9. Installation



8. Loosen the screw and adjust the position of the Slide Guide by referring to the scale.



NOTE:



-50 to 50 (0.1 mm per unit) As the value is incremented by 1, the leading edge margin is decreased by 0.1mm.



• In the case of larger margin at the rear side, move the Slide Guide to the front side. • In the case of larger margin at the front side, move the Slide Guide to the rear side.



COPIER > ADJUST > FEED-ADJ > RG-MF



Scale



1x 4. When the setting value was changed in step 3, write down the new numerical value in the service label.



5. Exit from the service mode.



6. Perform printing again from the Multi-purpose Pickup Tray, and check that the left edge margin (L1) and leading edge margin (L2) of the image are within the range indicated below. • left edge margin L1: 2.5 +/-1.5 mm • leading edge margin L2: 2.5 +1.5/-0.5 mm NOTE: In the case of left edge margin: If the adjustment cannot be made with the setting value of -20 to 20 (adjustment amount: -2.0 to 2.0mm), execute step 7 and later steps.



7. Open the Multi-purpose Pickup Tray.



9. Tighten the screw loosened in step 8.



10. Perform printing again from the Multi-purpose Pickup Tray, and check that the left edge margin (L1) and leading edge margin (L2) of the image are within the range indicated below. • left edge margin L1: 2.5 +/-1.5 mm • leading edge margin L2: 2.5 +1.5/-0.5 mm NOTE: When a mechanical adjustment was made, be sure to execute the service mode again.



■ Checking the Network Connection ● Overview If the user's network environment is TCP/IP, use the Ping function to check that the network setting is properly performed.



1356



9. Installation



● Checking the Network Connection



6. Inform the system administrator at the installation site that installation of the Host Machine is complete, and then, ask for the network setting.



CAUTION: Be sure to use the network cable with Category 5e or higher. In addition, a sealed type (STP cable) is recommended. Using the non-shield type can affect the peripheral electrical equipment through the network cable.



NOTE: Network setting cannot be executed unless logging in as an administrator. Factory default password is as follows. • System administration division ID: 7654321 • System administration password: 7654321



1. Turn OFF the main power switch. 2. Connect the network cable to the Host Machine and turn ON the main power switch.



CAUTION: To perform the network setting, the following Additional Functions items must be set "ON". • [Settings/Registration] > [Preferences] > [Network] > [Confirm Network Connection Setting Changes] • [Settings/Registration] > [Preferences] > [Network] > [TCP/IP Settings] > [IPv4 settings] > [Use IPv4]



3. Remove the cover of the Cord Guide. 4. Remove the release paper, and affix the Cord Guide to the area indicated in the figure.



7. Turn OFF and then ON the main power.



● Operation Procedure Using Ping 1. Select the following: [Settings/Registration] > [Preferences] > [Network] > [TCP/IP Settings] > [IPv4 settings] > [PING command] 2. Enter the IP address with the numeric keypad on the Control Panel and press "Execute" key. "Response from the host" is displayed if Ping command is succeeded while "no response from the host" is displayed if failed.



● Checking by the Remote Host Address



5. Put the network cable through the Cord Guide, and install the cover of the Cord Guide.



Using the remote host address to execute Ping can check whether connection to the network is enabled or not. Remote host address: IP address of PC terminal connected/running on TCP/IP network environment that connects to this equipment.



1x



1. Inform the system administrator about checking of the network connection using Ping. 2. Confirm the remote host address with the system administrator. 3. Enter the remote host address to Ping. • The network is properly connected if the message say "Response from the host". • The network is not properly connected if the message say "No response from the host", therefore, execute the following troubleshooting.



1357



9. Installation



● Checking Network Function on the Main Controller



■ Network Troubleshooting ● Checking Connection of the Network Cable



Perform checking by the loopback address. 1. Select the following: [Settings/Registration] > [Preferences] > [Network] > [TCP/IP Settings] > [IPv4 settings] > [Ping Command]; and enter the IP address, "127.0.0.1" with the numeric keypad and enter Execute key.



To check whether the network cable is properly connected to the LAN Port.



● Operation Procedure Using Ping 1. Ask the network administrator at the user’s site to write down the IP address of the PC that is connected to the network.



• The network function of the Main Controller is working properly if the message say "Response from the host". • If the message say "No response from the host", the network function of the Main Controller is faulty.



2. [Settings/Registration] > [Preferences] > [Network] > [TCP/IP Settings] > [IPv4 settings] > [Ping Command]; and enter the IP address of the PC with the numeric keypad and press Execute key.



2. Replace with a Main Controller that works properly, and then check connection.



• The network is properly connected if the message say "Response from the host". • If the message say "No response from the host", check the following.



Operation when using uniFLOW Online



● Checking the Network Setting of the Host Machine



When using uniFLOW Online*, follow the setup procedures on the uniFLOW* Online First Steps Guide (http://www.ntware.com/uFO_FS). * China version of "uniFLOW" is called "mdsFLOW".



Check if the IP address specified in the Host Machine is correct. 1. Select the following: [Settings/Registration] > [Preferences] > [Network] > [TCP/IP Settings] > [IPv4 settings] > [IP address setting]; and write down the address in the IP address field. 2. Select the following: [Settings/Registration] > [Preferences] > [Network] > [TCP/IP Settings] > [IPv4 settings] > [Ping Command]; and enter the IP address. • The IP address specified in the Host Machine is correct if the message say "Response from the host". • If "No response from the host." is displayed, check if the IP address information set for the system administrator is correct. NOTE: When setting the address by manually input, set the Subnet Mask by following the instruction of the administrator.



1358



9. Installation



When Relocating the Machine



2. From the following service mode (Lv.2), move the Scanner Unit to the position to secure. COPIER > FUNCTION > MISC-R > RD-SHPOS



Points to Note When Relocating the Host Machine



CAUTION: If the Reader is moved after installation, the Scanner Unit of Reader may move and become damaged. Damage can be prevented by moving the Scanner Unit to the specified location and securing it before moving. If the machine is moved with the ADF Reading Glass stopped at a position other than the specified position, the Glass Holder of the ADF may be scraped and the Reading Glass may be soiled, resulting in lined images. In order to prevent it, execute the foregoing service mode to move the ADF Reading Glass to the specified position. If the Reader Scanner Unit is manually moved back to the fixation position, the ADF Reading Glass does not move along with the Reader Scanner Unit. Be sure to use service mode to move it.



It is basically based on delivery of pre-installed host machines to shops. In the case of relocation from a low humidity environment (an air-conditioned room) to a high humidity environment (high-temperature high-humidity open air), be careful of condensation.



Overview ■ Works before Relocation • • • • • • • • • •



Image check Move the Scanner Unit (service mode). Detach the options. Works inside the Decks Fix the Scanner Unit. Fix the covers of the DADF. Clean the area around the hopper. Clean the area around the Registration Assembly. Clean the Pre-transfer Charging Assembly. Clean the Developing Assembly.



3. Turn OFF the main power switch.



4. Check that the display in the Control Panel and the lamp of the main power are turned off, then disconnect the power plug. Disconnect the Grounding Wire if it is connected.



■ Works after Relocation • Check for any toner scattering. • Image check



Works during Relocation



5. Detach the options.



■ Works inside the Decks



When relocating an installed host machine to another location, the following works need to be performed.



Lower lifters inside the Pickup Decks and cassettes. 1. From the following service mode, print 2 sheets each of TYPE 4, TYPE 6, and TYPE 7 in a large size, and check that there is nothing wrong with the image. COPIER > TEST > PG > TYPE



1. Pull out all Pickup Decks and cassettes.



2. Confirm that lifters are lowered and close all Pickup Decks and cassettes. CAUTION: • Make sure to turn the Main Power OFF and then perform these procedures. If the Main Power is ON, lifters may rise again after closing Pickup Decks and cassettes. • If the machine is moved with lifters raised, the Lifter Drive Gear may be damaged due to the shaking.



1359



9. Installation



■ Cleaning of the Area around the Hoppre



■ Fixing the Reader Unit 1. Open the DADF, and remove the Left Upper Small Cover.



1. Open the Toner Exchange Cover and remove toner from the area around the hopper.



• 1 Claw • 1 Protrusion



Protrusion



Claw



2. Close the Toner Exchange Cover.



2. Secure the Scanner Unit with the Scanner Fixation Tool that have been kept in a safe place since image Reader Unit installation.



■ Registration Assembly Cleaning Procedure 1. Open the Front Cover.



2. Turn the Fixing Feed Unit Pressure Release Lever in the direction of the arrow to pull out the Fixing Feed Unit.



3. Put cushioning material (plastic packing material with air bubbles, etc.) between the DADF and the reader.



4. Close the DADF.



5. Secure the followings with tape to prevent them from opening during delivery. • DADF • Feeder Cover • Document Pickup Tray



1360



9. Installation



■ Pre-transfer Charging Assembly Cleaning Procedure



3. Clean the top surface of the Registration Assembly with lint-free paper moistened with alcohol.



1. Open the Inner Cover. • 1 Screw (to loosen)



1x Loosen



4. Return the Fixing Feed Unit to its original position.



CAUTION: When removing the Primary Charging Assembly and the Pre-transfer Charging Assembly, go through the following procedure while the Charging Shutter is open. • At sleep mode, press the Power Switch on the Control Panel, check that the machine is in standby condition, turn OFF the Main Power, and then perform removing. • In the case that the condition of the Charging Shutter (open/close) is unknown while the power of the host machine is OFF, turn ON the power, check that the machine is in standby condition, turn OFF the Main Power, and then perform removing. If the above operations are not performed, it may be possible to remove the assembly while the Charging Shutter is closed, which may damage the drum or the shutter.



2. Turn the Lock Lever in the direction of the arrow to pull out the Pre-transfer Charging Assembly.



1361



9. Installation



3. Turn the Lock Lever, and open the Developing Assembly Pressure Cover.



3. Clean the top surface of the Pre-transfer Charging Assembly and the Transfer Inlet Guide with lint-free paper moistened with alcohol.



• 1 Screw



1x



4. Return the Pre-transfer Charging Assembly to its original position. CAUTION: Points to Caution at Installation Be sure to fit the Transfer Charging Assembly to the groove on the host machine and install it horizontally.



5. Close the Inner Cover. (1 Screw)



6. Close the Front Cover.



■ Developing Assembly Cleaning Procedure 1. Place paper underneath the Developing Assembly.



2. Open the Right Cover.



1362



9. Installation CAUTION: How to Hold the Developing Assembly • When holding the Developing Assembly, be sure to hold the handle of the Developing Assembly as shown in the figure. • Do not touch the shutter area of the Developing Assembly. The shutter area is slippery, so it may cause a fall of the assembly.



5. Clean the top surface of the Developer Container and the lower side of the Developing Assembly with lint-free paper moistened with alcohol.



6. Clean the location where the Developing Assembly is going to be installed inside the host machine if necessary.



4. Remove the Developing Assembly by following the Rail. • 1 Connector



1x



1363



9. Installation CAUTION: Points to Caution when Installing the Developing Assembly Before installing the Developing Assembly, check that the Buffer Shutter is not open. If the Developing Assembly is forcibly installed while the Buffer Shutter is open, the shutter may get damage. When the Buffer Shutter is open, pull out the shutter to the front and then close it.



7. Return the Developing Assembly to its original position. 1. As shown in the figure, hold the Developing Assembly and fit the protrusions at right and left sides of the Developing Assembly to the rail of the host machine.



Protrusion



Rail



Protrusion



Whether the shutter is open or not can be checked with the Shutter Arm.



Rail



Shutter Arm



Protrusion



Shutter Arm



1364



9. Installation 2. Install the Developing Assembly horizontally by following the rail. (1 Connector)



4. After turning ON the power, print 2 sheets each of TYPE 4, TYPE 6, and TYPE 7 in a large size, and check that there is nothing wrong with the image.



1x



8. Close the Developing Assembly Pressure Cover. (1 Screw)



9. Close the Right Cover.



10. Lift the 2 adjusters of the host machine off the floor by turning the adjusters with a screwdriver.



Works after Relocation 1. Check that there is no toner scattering in the area where you cleaned before relocation. If there is any toner scattering, wipe off the toner. The procedure is the same with "Works before Relocation". • • • •



Hopper Registration Assembly Pre-transfer Charging Assembly Developing Assembly



2. Remove the packing materials you put before relocation.



3. Remove the Scanner Fixation Tool, and install the Left Upper Small Cover.



1365



9. Installation



Printer Cover-H1/H2



Checking the Contents



Points to Note before Installation In the case of installing the Printer Cover by removing the Color Image Reader Unit • When installing this equipment, be sure to remove the Image Reader Unit. (Refer to the Service Manual.) • After installation of the Printer Cover, be sure to change the setting of the following service mode to "0" before turning OFF the power of the host machine. Otherwise, an error may occur when turning ON the power. COPIER > OPTION > FNC-SW > W/SCNR • The parts and screws removed when removing the Image Reader Unit will be used when installing this equipment.



[1] Printer Cover X 1



[2] Screw (TP; M4x8) X 1



[3] Screw (P Tightening; M4x10) X 8



[4] Reader Mount X 1



Use 4 for them



[5] Reader Fixing Plate L H1: 1 pc. included H2: 2 pc. included



[6] Reader Fixing Plate R H1: 1 pc. included H2: 2 pc. included



[7] Screw (RS Tightening; M4x8) X2



[8] Reader Fixing Plate L X 1



[9] Reader Fixing Plate R X 1



Only for H2



1366



Only for H2



9. Installation



Essential Items to Be Performed Before Installation



1. Remove the Reader Positioning Shaft, and secure it in the hole as shown in the figure. • 1 Screw



• Turn OFF the main power of the host machine, and disconnect the power plug from the outlet.



1x



1x



WARNING: • If performing work without disconnecting the power plug of the host machine, it may cause electrical shock. • If disconnecting the power plug without turning OFF the main power, it may cause damage of the machine. • When turning OFF the main power, follow the below procedure. 1. Turn OFF the main power switch of the host machine. 2. The display in the Control Panel and the lamp of the main power are turned off.



Installation Outline Drawing



2. Install the Reader Fixation Plate R. (Use the removed Reader Fixation Plate R) • 1 Screw (Use the removed screw)



Installation Procedure



1x Boss



NOTE: The installation procedure is the same between the Flat Control Panel model and the Upright Control Panel model. Subsequent illustrations and pictures are the case of Flat Control Panel model.



1367



9. Installation



3. Install the Reader Fixation Plate L. (Use the removed Reader Fixation Plate L)



4. Install the Printer Cover. • 4 Screws (P Tightening; M4x10) • 1 Screw (TP; M4x8)



• 1 Screw (Use the removed screw)



1x



Boss



P Tightening; M4x10



TP㸹M4x8 TP



P Tightening



5x



5. Open the Covers. • Toner Replacement Cover • Right Cover • Right Rear Cover 1



Right Cover



Toner Replacement Cover Right Rear Cover 1



1368



9. Installation



6. Install the Upper Rear Cover.



8. Install the Left Upper Cover in the direction of the arrow.



• 3 Protrusions • 2 Claws



CAUTION: When installing the Left Upper Cover, be careful not to secure it while it is being slided fully toward the front. Otherwise, the Left Upper Cover may interfere with the Toner Replacement Cover and the magnet cannot work.



Claw



• 3 Protrusions • 3 Hooks • 3 Screws (Use the removed screws) Protrusion



Protrusion



Protrusion



3x



7. Install the Right Upper Cover by fitting its hole onto the boss of the Upper Rear Cover. • 3 Protrusions • 2 Screws (Use the removed screws)



Hook



Hook



Hook



9. Close the Toner Replacement Cover, Right Cover and Right Rear Cover 1. Boss



10. Install the Left Rear Inner Cover. • 2 Screws (Use the removed screws) Protrusion



2x



2x



1369



9. Installation



11. Install the Left Rear Cover. • 1 Hook • 1 Claw



Claw



Hook



Operation Check 1. Connect the power plug of the host machine to the outlet. 2. Turn ON the main power switch. CAUTION: If "E732-0023" is displayed after turning ON the main power switch, turn OFF and then ON the main power switch, and then perform the following steps.



3. A message is displayed prompting to check that the Reader Unit Cable is connected properly. 4. Set "0" for the following service mode. COPIER > OPTION > FNC-SW > W/SCNR 5. Exit service mode. 6. Turn OFF and then ON the main power switch.



1370



9. Installation



NFC Kit-A1 (for Upright Control Panel)



Essential Items to Be Performed Before Installation • Turn OFF the main power of the host machine, and disconnect the power plug from the outlet.



Points to Note before Installation



WARNING: • If performing work without disconnecting the power plug of the host machine, it may cause electrical shock. • If disconnecting the power plug without turning OFF the main power, it may cause damage of the machine.



Do not touch the sensor and PCB components of the Control Panel.



Checking the Contents [1] Front Tray Upper Unit X1



[2] NFC PCB X 1



[3] NFC Cable X 1



[4] Screw (TP; M3x6) X 1



• When turning OFF the main power, follow the below procedure. 1. Turn OFF the main power switch of the host machine. 2. The display in the Control Panel and the lamp of the main power are turned off.



Installation Outline Drawing



[5] Protection Sheet X 1



• Including guides



1371



9. Installation



Installation Procedure



2. Remove the screw. (Lower the Control Panel Hold Plate as shown in the figure.) • 1 Boss



1. Open the Toner Replacement Cover, and remove the Bottle Regulation Rail. • 1 Screw • 1 Hook



1x



Boss



Control Panel Hold Plate



NOTE: When opening the Front Cover, be sure to do so while holding the Control Panel Hold Plate.



Hook



1x



1372



9. Installation



3. Remove the Control Panel Left Upper Cover.



4. Remove the Front Tray. (The removed Front Tray will not be used.)



• 2 Claws • 1 Boss • 2 Hooks



• 1 Screw • 2 Claws • 2 Hooks Hook



1x



Boss Hook



Claw



5. Connect the NFC Cable to the NFC PCB. • 1 Connector



1x



1373



9. Installation



7. Remove the release paper on the Protection Sheet and affix the sheet to the area indicated in the figure.



6. Install the NFC PCB assembled in the previous step. • • • •



1 Protrusion 1 Screw (TP; M3x6) 2 Cable Guides 1 Connector



CAUTION: Pay attention to the direction in which the NFC PCB is installed.



8. Install the Front Tray Upper Unit. • 2 Hooks • 2 Claws • 1 Screw



1x Hook



1x



2x



1x Protrusion



1374



9. Installation



11. Install the Bottle Guide Rail, and close the Toner Replacement Cover.



9. Install the Control Panel Left Upper Cover. • 2 Hooks • 1 Boss • 2 Claws



• 1 Hook • 1 Screw



Boss Hook



Hook



1x



Setting after Installation Craw



1. Connect the power plug of the host machine to the outlet. 2. Turn ON the main power switch. 3. Eenter service mode and set the value to "1". COPIER > FUNCTION > INSTALL > NFC-USE 10. Secure the Control Panel Hold Plate and the Control Panel Left Upper Cover.



NOTE: When [System Manager Information Settings] is set, it is required to log in as a system manager in accordance with instructions of the user administrator.



• 1 Boss • 1 Screw



1x



4. Select [Settings/Registration] > [Management Settings] > [Device Management] > [Use NFC Card Emulation], and set the item to "ON". Boss



5. Turn OFF and then ON the main power switch.



Control Panel Hold Plate



1375



9. Installation 6. When a message prompting the version update is displayed, press [Update] and automatically update the version of this equipment. CAUTION: It may take time to display the update screen. (Approx. 1 to 2 min.) During this time, do not operate the screen.



7. Check the end of the following service mode. COPIER > DISPLAY > VERSION > PANEL If the end is an even number (e.g. 01.26): NFC is not installed. If the end is an odd number (e.g. 01.27): NFC is installed.



1376



9. Installation



NFC Kit-C1



Essential Items to Be Performed Before Installation



Points to Note before Installation



• Turn OFF the main power of the host machine, and disconnect the power plug from the outlet.



Do not touch the sensor and PCB components of the Control Panel.



WARNING: • If performing work without disconnecting the power plug of the host machine, it may cause electrical shock. • If disconnecting the power plug without turning OFF the main power, it may cause damage of the machine.



Checking the Contents [1] NFC PDB X 1



[2] NFC CableX 1



• When turning OFF the main power, follow the below procedure. 1. Turn OFF the main power switch of the host machine. 2. The display in the Control Panel and the lamp of the main power are turned off. [3] Guide Sheet X 1



[4] NFC Target X 1



[5] Wire Saddle X 1



[6] Screw(TP; M3x4) X 1



Installation Outline Drawing



< Others > • Including guides



1377



9. Installation



Installation Procedure



NOTE: When opening the Front Cover, be sure to do so while holding the Control Panel Hold Plate.



■ Remove the Control Panel 1. Open the Toner Replacement Cover, and remove the Bottle Regulation Rail. • 1 Screw • 1 Hook



3. Remove the Control Panel Left Upper Cover. • 2 Claws • 1 Boss • 2 Hooks



Hook



1x



Boss



Hook



2. Remove the screw. (Lower the Control Panel Hold Plate as shown in the figure.) • 1 Boss



1x



Boss



Control Panel Hold Plate



Claw



1378



9. Installation



4. Remove the Control Panel Right Cover.



5. Remove the 4 screws and raise the Flat Control Panel. (The removed screw will be used at installation.)



• 2 Claws • 2 Hooks



• 2 Boss Hook



4x



Boss



Boss



Craw



6. Remove the Cable Retaining Member. • 1 Reuse Band • 1 Boss • 3 Hooks



1x



1379



9. Installation



■ Install the NFC Kit 7. Disconnect the 3 cables, and remove the Flat Control Panel. 1. Pass the NFC Cable under the plate.



3x



8. Remove the 2 Control Panel Bases. (The removed parts will be used at installation.) • 2 Screws for each • 2 Bosses for each



2. Connect the NFC Cable to the PCB of the Control Panel and the NFC PCB.



4x Boss



• 2 Connectors



Boss



2x



9. Remove the Control Panel Lower Cover. (The removed parts will be used at installation.) • 1 Wire Saddle • 5 Screws • 3 Bosses



5x



Boss



1x



Wire Saddle



Boss



1380



9. Installation



■ Install the Control Panel 3. Install the NFC PCB. • 1 Protrusion • 1 Screw (TP; M3x4)



1. Install the removed Control Panel Lower Cover to the Flat Control Panel. • 3 Bosses • 5 Screws (Use the removed screws) • 1 Wire Saddle (2 Cables)



TP; M3x4



5x



1x Boss



1x



Wire Saddle



Boss



2. Install the 2 removed Control Panel Bases to the Flat Control Panel. 4. Install the Wire Saddle, and secure the NFC Cable in place.



• 2 Bosses for each • 2 Screws for each (Use the removed screws)



4x Boss



Boss



3. Connect the removed cables to the Flat Control Panel. • 2 Cables



1x



2x



1381



9. Installation



4. Install the Cable Retaining Member. • • • •



5. Install the Flat Control Panel.



3 Hooks 1 Boss 1 Cable 1 Reuse Band



• 2 Bosses • 4 Screws (Use the removed screws)



4x



1x



1x Boss



Boss



6. Install the Control Panel Right Cover. • 2 Hooks • 2 Claws Hook



Craw



1382



9. Installation



9. Install the Bottle Guide Rail, and close the Toner Replacement Cover.



7. Install the Control Panel Left Upper Cover. • 2 Claws • 1 Boss • 2 Hooks



• 1 Hook • 1 Screw



Boss



Hook



Hook



1x



Claw



8. Secure the Control Panel Hold Plate and the Control Panel Left Upper Cover. • 1 Boss • 1 Screw (Use the removed screw)



1x



Boss



Control Panel Hold Plate



1383



9. Installation



■ Affixing the NFC Target



Setting after Installation



1. Align the guide sheet with the edges of the Control Panel.



1. Connect the power plug of the host machine to the outlet.



2. Remove the release paper on the NFC Target, and affix it by aligning it with the corner of the guide sheet. (The guide sheet will not be used.)



2. Turn ON the main power switch. 3. Eenter service mode and set the value to "1". COPIER > FUNCTION > INSTALL > NFC-USE NOTE: When [System Manager Information Settings] is set, it is required to log in as a system manager in accordance with instructions of the user administrator.



4. Select [Settings/Registration] > [Management Settings] > [Device Management] > [Use NFC Card Emulation], and set the item to "ON". 5. Turn OFF and then ON the main power switch. 6. When a message prompting the version update is displayed, press [Update] and automatically update the version of this equipment. CAUTION: It may take time to display the update screen. (Approx. 1 to 2 min.) During this time, do not operate the screen.



7. Check the end of the following service mode. COPIER > DISPLAY > VERSION > PANEL If the end is an even number (e.g. 01.26): NFC is not installed. If the end is an odd number (e.g. 01.27): NFC is installed.



1384



9. Installation



Reader Heater Unit



Essential Items to Be Performed Before Installation



Checking the Contents [1] Reader Heater X 1



• Turn OFF the main power of the host machine, and disconnect the power plug from the outlet.



[2] Flat Screw (M4x4) X 4



WARNING: • If performing work without disconnecting the power plug of the host machine, it may cause electrical shock. • If disconnecting the power plug without turning OFF the main power, it may cause damage of the machine.



 Binding screw can also be used. [3] Heater Sheet X 1sheet



• When turning OFF the main power, follow the below procedure. 1. Turn OFF the main power switch of the host machine. 2. The display in the Control Panel and the lamp of the main power are turned off.



Use 3 of them



Installation Outline Drawing Checking the Parts to be Installed (Europe only)



Prepare the following parts because each part of the Cassette Heater Unit is assigned as service part. NO.



Parts name



Parts Number.



Q'ty



[1]



Reader Heater (200V)



FM1C270-000



1 pc



[2]



Flat Screw (M4 x4)



XA9-1956-000



4 pc



[3]



Heater Sheet



FC8-6060-000



1 sheet



Installation Procedure 1. Open the DADF.



1385



9. Installation



2. Remove the Right Retainer Cover.



4. Remove the Copyboard Glass.



• 2 Screws



2x



5. Align the 3 Heater Sheets in the marking line and put them on.



3. Remove the DF Cable Cover. • 2 Screws



2x



Marking Line



CAUTION: • Soiling on the glass surface and the White Plate affects reading. When removing or installing the Copyboard Glass, be sure not to touch the glass surface and the White Plate. • If soiling is attached, clean it with lint-free paper.



Marking Line



White Plate



1386



9. Installation



6. Install the Reader Heater.



7. Pass the connecter under the wire and the Scanner Rail.



• 2 Bosses • 4 Screws (flat-head ;M4x4) (Binding screw can also be used.)



CAUTION: Do not scratch surface of the wire and the Scanner Rail.



CAUTION: Do not scratch the surface of the Guide Shaft.



Wire



4x



Scanner Rail



Boss



Guide Shaft



8. Remove the screw and shift the harness guide in the direction of the arrow to make a space [A] to pass



1387



9. Installation the harness. (The removed screw will be used in step 12.)



10. Release the Wire Saddle and connect the Connector. Wire Saddle



[A]



1x



1x 1x



11. Fix the harness. • 2 Edge Saddles • 1 Wire Saddle



9. Put the harness along the claws of FFC Guide in the 4 places. NOTE: Make sure to keep the harness tightly put.



Craw



3x



Craw



4x



1388



9. Installation NOTE: Be sure to check that the sheet is on the plate.



14. Install the DF Cable Cover. • 2 Screws



2x



Sheet



15. Install the Right Retainer Cover. • 2 Screws Sheet



2x



12. Install the shifted Harness Guide by aligning it with the boss. • 1 Screw (the screw removed in step 8)



1x



16. Close the DADF.



17. Turn ON the Environment Heater Switch. 18. Connect the power plug to the outlet.



Boss



19. Turn ON the main power switch. 13. Install the Copyboard Glass.



1389



9. Installation



Shift Tray-F1



Essential Items to Be Performed Before Installation



Checking the Contents [1] Shift Tray X 1



• Turn OFF the main power of the host machine, and disconnect the power plug from the outlet.



[2] Shift Drive Unit X 1



WARNING: • If performing work without disconnecting the power plug of the host machine, it may cause electrical shock. • If disconnecting the power plug without turning OFF the main power, it may cause damage of the machine. [3] Shift Tray Cover X 1



[4] Shift Tray Support Base X 1



[5] Reinforcing Plate X 1



[6] Shift Delivery Support Base (1) X 1



[7] Shift Delivery Support Base (2) X 1



[8] Face Cover X 1



[9] Rubber Cap X 3



[10]Shift Tray Shaft X 1



[11] Screw (RS Tightening; M4x20) X 2



[12] Screw (RS Tightening; M4x8) X 4



• When turning OFF the main power, follow the below procedure. 1. Turn OFF the main power switch of the host machine. 2. The display in the Control Panel and the lamp of the main power are turned off.



Installation Outline Drawing



[13] Screw (Binding; M4x6) X 2



1390



9. Installation



Installation Procedure



4. Remove the Left Upper Cover. • 3 Screws • 3 Hooks • 3 Protrusions



1. Remove the Left Rear Cover. • 1 Claw • 1 Hook



3x



Protrusion



Claw



Hook Hook Hook



5. Remove the Delivery Cover.



2. Open the Toner Replacement Cover.



• 5 Stepped Screws (The 3 removed Stepped Screws will be used in step 9.) • 2 Hooks



3. Remove the 2 Finisher Connection Covers. (The removed Finisher Connection Cover will not be used.)



5x



• 1 Claw for each • 1 Protrusion for each



Claw



Protrusion



1391



9. Installation



6. Remove the 2 screws, and install the Shift Delivery Support Base (1) using the removed screws.



7. Remove the screw, and install the Shift Delivery Support Base (2) using the removed screw and the screw included in the package. • 1 Screw (RS Tightening; M4x8)



2x CAUTION: The 2 screws used are different in length. Be sure to install them to the correct positions.



1x



2x



2x



RS Tightening; M4x8



Removed Screw M4x10



Screw Included in The Package M4x8



8. Install the Shift Tray Support Base. • 2 Bosses • 2 Screws (RS Tightening; M4x8)



2x



Boss RS Tightening; M4x8



1392



Boss



9. Installation



9. Install the Shift Tray Cover.Install the Shift Tray Cover.



12. Install the Reinforcing Plate. • 2 Screws (RS Tightening; M4x20)



• 2 Hooks • 3 Stepped Screws (Use the screws removed in step 5.)



2x



3x



RS Tightening; M4x20



13. Install the Harness Fixing Plate attached to the end of the Shift Tray Cable. • • • •



10. Remove the tapes, and install the Shift Tray Shaft.



2



1



1 Hook 1 Boss 1 Screw (RS Tightening; M4x8) 2 Connectors



RS Tightening M4x8



1x Boss



2x



11. Install the Shift Tray. • 2 Hooks Hook



Hook



1393



9. Installation



14. Remove the tapes, and install the Shift Drive Unit.



16. Using a flat-blade screwdriver, remove the Face Cover from the Delivery Cover removed in step 5 (the Delivery Cover will not be used).



• 2 Screws (Binding; M4x6) • 3 Rubber Caps CAUTION: Be sure to put the harness for connecting to the host machine into the groove when installing the unit.



Binding; M4x6



17. Install the Face Cover removed in the previous step and the Face Cover included in the package.



2x



• 1 Protrusion for each • 1 Claw for each Claw



Rubber Cap



Protrusion



18. Close the Toner Replacement Cover.



19. Return the Left Rear Cover to their original position. 15. Install the Left Upper Cover.



Checking after Installation



• 3 Protrusions • 3 Hooks • 3 Screws



1. Connect the power plug of the host machine to the power outlet.



Protrusion



3x



2. Turn ON the main power switch. 3. Press the counter check key on the control panel. 4. Press [Check Device Configuration].



Hook



5. Check that "Shift Tray-F1" is displayed in option field. Hook



1394



9. Installation



IC Card Reader Box-B1



Essential Items to Be Performed Before Installation



Point to Note About Installation



• Turn OFF the main power of the host machine, and disconnect the power plug from the outlet.



• When installing this equipment, the Card Reader (sales company's option) is required. • When installing the Card Reader from NT-Ware, an extension cable is required. • Refer to“ Installing the Card Reader ” on page 1398for the process of models with the IC Card Reader Box. • The pictures and illustrations used may be different from the product in front of you, but the procedure is the same.



WARNING: • If performing work without disconnecting the power plug of the host machine, it may cause electrical shock. • If disconnecting the power plug without turning OFF the main power, it may cause damage of the machine. • When turning OFF the main power, follow the below procedure. 1. Turn OFF the main power switch of the host machine. 2. The display in the Control Panel and the lamp of the main power are turned off.



Checking the Contents NOTE: If the parts with " [2] x 1 " and " [4] " are included, they will not be used.



[1] LED PDB X 1



Installation Outline Drawing



[2] Cushion X 3



Use 2 of them



[3] Device Port Sheet X 1



[4] Device Port Sheet X 1



with LED indication



with LED indication



[5] Device Port Sheet X 1



[6] Reuse Band X 4



without LED indication



[7] Double-sided Tape X 2



1395



9. Installation



Installation Procedure



2. Remove the screw. (Lower the Control Panel Hold Plate as shown in the figure.)



■ Installing the LED PCB



1x 1. Open the Toner Replacement Cover, and remove the Bottle Guide Rail. • 1 Screw • 1 Hook



Boss



Control Panel Hold Plate



NOTE: When opening the Front Cover, be sure to do so while holding the Control Panel Hold Plate.



Hook



1x



1396



9. Installation



3. Remove the Control Panel Left Upper Cover.



4. Free the cable from the Wire Saddle, and connect it to the LED PCB (and close the Wire Saddle).



• 2 Claws • 1 Boss • 2 Hooks



1x



Boss



Hook



1x



Claw



5. Install the LED PCB. • 1 Hook • 1 Claw



Hook



Claw



1397



9. Installation



2. Remove the Left Rear Inner Cover.



6. Place the Cushions.



• 2 Screws



2x



3. Using a tool such as a flat-blade screwdriver, remove the 2 Finisher Connection Covers. • 1 Claw for each • 1 Protrusion for each



■ Installing the Card Reader



Claw



1. Remove the Left Rear Cover. • 1 Claw • 1 Hook



Claw Protrusion



4. Remove the Left Upper Cover. • 3 Screws • 3 Hooks • 3 Protrusions



Hook



Protrusion



3x



Hook Hook



1398



9. Installation



7. Remove the ECBOX Harness Guide (Upper).



5. Remove the Reader Fixing Plate.



• 1 Screw • 2 Bosses



• 2 Bosses • 1 Screw



1x



1x



Boss



Boss



Boss



8. Disconnect the Wi-Fi cable.



1x



6. Remove the ECBOX Harness Guide (Lower). • 1 Screw • 1 Boss



Boss



1x



1399



9. Installation



11. Loosely loop the 4 Reuse Bands around the cable of the Card Reader in the direction as shown in the figure.



9. Pass the cable of the Card Reader under the Wi-Fi cable and then through the rear side of the plate [A].



CAUTION: • Do not tighten them in this step. • When installing the Reuse Bands, be sure to pay attention to the direction.



[A]



4x



10. Connect the cable of the Card Reader to the Main Controller. • 2 Edge Saddles CAUTION: Adjust the length of the [A] part of the cable to be approx. 140 mm. If the extra length of the cable is not sufficient, stress may be applied on the cable.



Edge Saddle



1x



2x



[A]



1400



9. Installation



13. Store the excess length of the cable of the Card Reader in the position as shown in the figure, and return the Wi-Fi cable to its original position.



12. Tighten the Reuse Bands at the positions of the holes, cut off the excess length, and insert them into the holes. CAUTION: Be sure to align the Reuse Bands with the holes to prevent slack in the cable.



14. Place the Card Reader on the cushions. CAUTION: Be sure to change the number of cushions according to the thickness of the Card Reader.



4x



1401



9. Installation



15. Remove the sheet of the Control Panel Left Cover. (The removed sheet will no longer be used.)



17. Install the Control Panel Left Upper Cover. • 2 Hooks • 1 Boss • 2 Claws



NOTE: If any paste is remaining on the removed surface, clean with alcohol (to prevent the non-level surface from forming when affixing the Device Port Sheet).



Boss



Hook



16. Affix the Device Port Sheet to the Control Panel Left Cover. NOTE: Be sure to affix it inside the frame.



Claw



without LED indication



1402



9. Installation



■ Installing the Covers 2. Install the ECBOX Harness Guide (Upper). • 2 Bosses • 1 Screw



1. Check the shape of the ECBOX Harness Guide (Upper).



1x



CAUTION: Points to note when installing the ECBOX Harness Guide (Upper) The ECBOX Harness Guide (Upper) comes in two configurations, so follow the instruction shown below. In the case of Type-A : Skip steps 1 to 3 (do not install the ECBOX Harness Guide). Proceed to step 4. In the case of Type-B : Cut off the [1] part with nippers, and then proceed to step 2.



Boss



3. Install the ECBOX Harness Guide (Lower). • 1 Boss • 1 Screw



Type-A



Boss



1x Type-B



[1]



1403



9. Installation



6. Install the 2 Finisher Connector Cover.



4. Install the Reader Fixing Plate.



• 1 Protrusion for each • 1 Claw for each



• 2 Bosses • 1 Screw



Claw



1x



Boss



Boss



Protrusion



7. Install the Left Rear Inner Cover. • 2 Screws



2x



5. Install the Left Upper Cover. • 3 Protrusions • 3 Hooks • 3 Screws CAUTION: When installing the Left Upper Cover, be careful not to secure it while it is being slided fully toward the front. Otherwise, the Left Upper Cover may interfere with the Toner Replacement Cover and the magnet cannot work.



8. Install the Left Rear Cover. • 1 Hook • 1 Claw



Protrusion



3x



Claw



Hook Hook



Hook



1404



9. Installation



9. Secure the Control Panel Hold Plate and the Control Panel Left Upper Cover. • 1 Screw



1x



Boss



Control Panel Hold Plate



10. Install the Bottle Guide Rail, and close the Toner Replacement Cover. • 1 Hook • 1 Screw



Hook



1x



11. Insert the power plug into the outlet. 12. Turn ON the main power switch.



1405



9. Installation Including guides



Paper Deck Heater Unit-A1



Essential Items to Be Performed Before Installation



Checking the Supplied Parts



• Turn OFF the main power of the host machine, and disconnect the power plug from the outlet.



NOTE: Each part of the Paper Deck Heater Unit-A1 for the Paper Deck is supplied as a service part according to the location, so prepare the following parts. Also, use the appropriate Paper Deck Heater Unit for each country.



[3]



[6] [5] [1]



[9]



[12]



• When turning OFF the main power, follow the below procedure. 1. Turn OFF the main power switch of the host machine. 2. The display in the Control Panel and the lamp of the main power are turned off.



[2]



[4] [5]



[7]



[8]



[10]



Item



Installation Procedure [5]



■ Preparation of the Paper Deck



[11]



Parts Name



WARNING: • If performing work without disconnecting the power plug of the host machine, it may cause electrical shock. • If disconnecting the power plug without turning OFF the main power, it may cause damage of the machine.



Parts Number



Q'ty



[1]



Heater unit



FG6-9650 (100V) FG6-9651 (230V)



1pc.



[2]



AC input connector



FG6-1117



1pc.



[3]



Relay harness unit



FG6-2957



1pc.



[4]



AC cable



FK3-0630 (100V) FK3-0631 (230V)



1pc.



[5]



Screw (Toothed washer; M4x6)



XB2-7400-607



3pcs.



*[6]



Cable protection bushing



WT2-5098



1pc.



[7]



Power supply label



FS6-8478 (100V) FS6-8725 (230V)



1pc.



[8]



Screw (Binding; M4x4)



XB1-2400-409



2pcs.



[9]



Screw (RS Tightening; M4x8)



XA9-0732-010



2pcs.



[10]



Wire saddle



WT2-5730



3pcs.



[11]



Cord mount



FC7-5473



1pc.



[12]



Screw with flat spring XB2-8401-007 (M4x10)



1. Remove the latice connector from the host machine. • 1 Wire saddle • 1 Connector



1x



1x



1pc.



*As for the change of the part number, please refer to the latest parts catalog. *[6] Cable protection bushing is not used for the installation.



1406



9. Installation



4. Remove the rear cover.



2. Insert screwdrivers into the hole at rear left side of the compartment and then release the lever to open it.



• 6 Screws



6x



5. Remove the left upper cover.



2x



3. Remove the right cover. • 5 Screws



Loosen



5x



1407



9. Installation



8. Insert the connector of the heater to the panel mount part.



6. Remove the upper cover. • 3 Screws



3x



9. Insert the supplied AC input connector and then fix the ground cable. • 1 Screw (Toothed washer; M4x6)



7. Put the connector through the hole in the top plate and then fix the heater unit in the Paper Deck Unit.



Screw with toothed washer; M4x6



• 2 Hooks • 1 Screw (Toothed washer; M4x6)



Screw with toothed washer; M4x6



1x



1x



1408



9. Installation



2. Removet the rear upper cover.



10. Install the relay hareness unit on the rear side panel of the Paper Deck Unit.



• 4 Screws



• 2 Screws (RS Tightening; M4x8) • 2 Connectors • 2 Snap bands



4x



RS Tightening; M4x8



2x



2x 3. Remove the rear lower cover. • 6 Screws



2x 6x



11. Re-attach the external covers.



■ Preparation of the Host Machine 1. Remove the left rear cover.



1409



9. Installation



6. Fix the ground cable to the cord mount.



4. Remove the blindfold plate (the removed cover and screws are not used).



• 1 Screw (Toothed washer; M4x6)



• 2 Screws Screw with toothed washer; M4x6



1x



2x 7. Connect the AC cable to the host machine and then fix it. • 2 Screws (Binding; M4x4)



Binding; M4x4



1x



2x Binding; M4x10



5. Insert the AC cord into the hole of the cord mount and fix it. • 1 Screw (Flat spring; M4x10)



Screw with flat spring; M4x10



1x



1410



9. Installation



2. Paste the power supply label.



8. Attach the rear lower cover. • 3 Screws (RS Tightening; M4x10) • 3 Screws (P Tightening; M4x10)



6x



■ Connection with the Host Machine 1. Cut the blindfold cover of the AC input from rear side of the Paper Deck Unit.



3. Connect the Paper Deck Unit with the host machine.



1411



9. Installation



4. Connect the latice connector of the Paper Deck Unit to the host machine and the fix it with the wire saddle.



6. Attach the wire saddles. • 3 WIre saddles



• 1 Wire saddle



1x



1x



7. Connect the AC cable to the Paper Deck Unit and then fix it as shown in the figure. 5. Remove the blindfold seals (the removed seals are not used).



• 1 Snap band • 3 Wire saddles



1x



1412



1x



9. Installation



Utility Tray-B1



Installation Outline Drawing



Points to Note at Installation • The pictures and illustrations used may be different from the product in front of you, but the procedure is the same. • Refer to "Table of Options Combination" when installing this equipment before operation.



Table of Options Combination Voice Opera- Voice Guidtion ance Kit Utility Tray



No



Copy Card Reader



No



Yes



Yes: Available, No: Unavailable



Installation Procedure



Checking the Contents [1] Utility Tray Unit X 1



1. Remove packing tapes.



[2] Wire Saddle X 5



Use when installing the USB Keyboard



[3] Screw (TP ; M4x14) X 4



2. Loosen the 2 screws, and move the Utility Tray Mounting Plate in the direction of the arrow until it stops.



[4] Screw (TP ; M4x10) X 2



Use 3 of them



2x



[5] Keyboard Table Plate X1



[6] Screw (TP; M4x8 Black) X 10



Utility Tray Mounting Plate



1413



9. Installation



3. While pulling the [A] part of the Utility Tray, remove the Utility Tray Mounting Plate.



5. Install the Utility Tray Mounting Plate.



CAUTION: To avoid damage, do not pull the [A] part of the Utility Tray too much.



CAUTION: Points to Note at Installation If the holes are marked as shown below, align the holes marked with B, G and P with the holes in the host machine



• 3 Screws (TP; M4x14)



[A]



A B Q R



C D



E



F G



H



I J



S



TP ; M4x14



4. Remove the 3 Rubber Caps from the Right Upper Cover. (The removed Rubber Caps will not be used.)



3x



1414



K



L M



N



O P



9. Installation



■ When Installing the USB Keyboard 6. Install the Utility Tray. • 2 Screws (TP; M4x10) • 2 Screws (TP; The screws loosened in step 2.)



1. Remove the 2 Cap Covers, and install the 5 Wire Saddles. (The removed Cap Covers will not be used.)



TP ; M4x10



Cap Covers



Wire Saddles



2x



2x



1415



9. Installation



Copy Card Reader-F1



Essential Items to Be Performed Before Installation



Points to Note at Installation



• Turn OFF the main power of the host machine, and disconnect the power plug from the outlet.



• To install this equipment, the Copy Card Reader Attachment is required. • After installing the Copy Card Reader, input the card number to be used in service mode. Otherwise the card cannot be recognized even though it is inserted. COPIER > FUNCTION > INSTALL > CARD • When installing this equipment, be sure to install it by referring to "Table of Options Combination". • The pictures and illustrations used may be different from the product in front of you, but the procedure is the same.



WARNING: • If performing work without disconnecting the power plug of the host machine, it may cause electrical shock. • If disconnecting the power plug without turning OFF the main power, it may cause damage of the machine. • When turning OFF the main power, follow the below procedure. 1. Turn OFF the main power switch of the host machine. 2. The display in the Control Panel and the lamp of the main power are turned off.



Table of Options Combination



Copy Card Reader



Utility Tray



Voice Operation



Yes



Yes



Voice Serial In- Copy Guidterface Control ance Kit Kit Interface Kit Yes



No



■ Installation Outline Drawing



No



Yes: Available, No: Unavailable



1416



9. Installation



Checking the Contents



[1] Card Reader Unit X 1



[2] Toothed washer X 1



[1] Card Reader Mounting Plate X 1



[2] Card Reader Mounting Plate X 1



Used only for the Upright Control Panel



Used only for the Flat Control Panel



[3] Card Reader Relay Unit X 1



[4] Card Reader External Relay Harness X 1



[5] Connector Cover1 X 1



[6] Connector Cover2 X 1



[7] Connector Case X 2



[8] Cord Guide X 1



[9] Connector Cover X 1



[10] PCB Spacer X 1



[3] Screw (RS tight; M4x10) X 1



1417



9. Installation [11] Screw (Binding; M3x6) X 1



Installation Procedure



[12] Screw (TP; M4x12) X 1



■ Installing the Card Reader Mounting Plate



Used only for the Upright Control Panel



[13] Screw (RS tight; M4x8) X 1



Used only for the Upright Control Panel



[15] Screw (Binding; M4x6) X 1



1. Open the Toner Replacement Cover, Right Cover, and Right Rear Cover 1.



[14] Screw (Binding; M4x20) X 1



Used only for the Flat Control Panel



Right Rear Cover 1



[16] Relay Harness X 1



Used only for the Flat Control Panel



Right Cover



[17] Screw(TP; M3x6) X 1



Toner Replacement Cover



1418



9. Installation



5. Install the Card Reader Mounting Plate.



2. Remove the Right Upper Cover.



• 1 Screw (Binding; M4x6)



• 2 Screws • 3Protrusions • 1Boss



Binding; M4x6



1x



Boss



Protrusion



2x



6. Install the Right Rear Cover 2 (1 Screw). 7. Open the Right Cover, and then install the Right Upper Cover (2 Screws). 8. Close the Right Cover and Toner Replacement Cover.



■ Installing the Card Reader 3. Close the Right Cover. 1. Remove the Side Cover. • 2 Screws • 1 Hook



4. Remove the Right Rear Cover 2. • 1 Screw • 1 Protrusion



2x



1x



Hook



Protrusion



1419



9. Installation CAUTION: Be careful not to let the 2 bosses of the Side Cover come off from the 2 mounting holes of the Right Rear Cover 1.



3. Remove the Face Cover. (The removed Face Cover will not be used.) • 2 Screws(The removed screws will be used in step 5)



2x



2. Hold the handle to remove the Main Controller PCB 1. • 1 Connector



1x



4. Remove the screw, and install the PCB Spacer. (The removed screws will not be used.)



1x



Connector Handle



CAUTION: Be sure to place the removed Main Controller PCB 1 flatly. Reason: Due to the protruded plate, the PCB may be deformed if work is performed while it is placed at an angle.



1x



Plate



1420



9. Installation



5. Install the Card Reader Reply Unit.



6. Insert the Main Controller PCB 1 until it stops.



• 1 Connector • 2 Screws (Use the screws removed in step 3.) • 1 Screw (Binding; M3x6)



• 1 Connector



1x



Binding; M3x6



Connector



1x



Handle



CAUTION: Be sure to push [A] part hard to install it, otherwise the connector may not be connected properly.



3x



[A]



1421



9. Installation



9. Install the Connector Cover to the Card Reader External Relay Harness.



7. Connect the Card Reader External Relay Harness.



• 1 Screw ( Use the screw removed at previous step.) CAUTION: • Install the screw to the [A] part. • When installing the Connector Cover, be sure to place the tie-wrap on the Card Reader External Relay Harness on the inside of the Connector Cover.



1x



1x [A]



8. Remove the Screw ( The removed screws will be used at next step.)



1x



1422



9. Installation



10. Install the Side Cover by putting the Card Reader External Relay Harness through a hole of the cover.



12. Remove the Lower Cover of the Card Reader Unit, and change the position of the cable.



• 1 Hook • 2 Screws



• 1 Claw • 1 Screw



CAUTION: Be careful not to let the 2 bosses of the Side Cover come off from the 2 mounting holes of the Right Rear Cover 1



Lower Cover



1x



Claw



Groove



1x 2x



Hole



Claw



13. Disconnect the Short Connector on the Card Reader. (The removed Short Connector will not be used.)



Hook



1x 11. Close the Right Rear Cover 1.



1423



9. Installation



14. Install the Card Reader.



Binding ; M4x20



14-1. Install the Card Reader to the Card Reader Mounting Plate. • 2 Bosses • 1 Toothed Washer • 1 Screw (RS Tightening; M4x8)



1x



Boss



RS tight; M4x8



1x 15. If the Upright Control Panel is installed, put the connector of the Card Reader Unit through the hole on the Card Reader Mounting Plate.



Boss



NOTE: While pictures of the Upright Control Panel model are used for explaining the steps 16 and 17, the procedure is the same for the Flat Control Panel model.



14-2. Install the Card Reader Unit assembled in step 14-1. • 1 Boss • 1 Screw (TP; M4x12)



16. Connect the connectors of the Card Reader Unit and the Card Reader External Relay Harness.



1x



TP㸹M4x12



1x



17. Install the Connector Case.



Boss



CAUTION: When installing the Connector Cases, be sure to place the tie-wrap on the Card Reader External Relay Harness on the inside of the Connector Cases.



14-1. Install the Card Reader. • 2 Bosses • 1 Toothed Washer • 1 Screw (Binding; M4x20)



1424



9. Installation 19. Put the Card Reader External Relay Harness through the Cord Guide, and install the cover of the Cord Guide.



tie-wrap 5 mm



tie-wrap



20. Push the Card Reader External Relay Harness in the Right Rear Cover 1.



NOTE: While pictures of the Flat Control Panel model are used for explaining the following steps, the procedure is the same for the Upright Control Panel model.



18. Remove the cover of Cord Guide, and affix it to the area indicated in the figure.



Checking after Installation 1. Connect the power plug of the host machine to the power outlet. 2. Turn the main power switch ON. 3. Check the model of the Card Reader in service mode. (Default: 0 "Card Reader-F1") COPIER > OPTION > ACC > CR-TYPE



4. Set the number of card (number of department ID) that can be used with the Card Reader in service mode.(Lv.2). COPIER > OPTION > FNC-SW > CARD-RNG



1425



9. Installation



5. Use Service Mode to enter the minimum card number to be used by a user (1 to 2001). COPIER > FUNCTION > INSTALL > CARD Starting from the entered card number, the number of cards set in step 4 can be used.



6. Turn OFF and then ON the main power switch to enable the setting values. 7. Insert a card with a card number that has been registered, and check that the machine operates normally. NOTE: Perform the following operations to change the number of cards (departments) after it has been set. In such a case, counter information for each department is reset. COPIER > FUNCTION > CLEAR > CARD • Turn OFF and then ON the main power switch to enable the settings. • After that, perform from step 3.



1426



9. Installation



Voice Guidance Kit-G1



Checking the Contents



Points to Note at Installation



[1] Speaker Unit (Upper) X1



[2] Speaker Unit (Lower) X1



[3] Voice Guidance Board Unit X 1



[4] Speaker Cable X 1



[5] Cord Guide X 7



[6] Ring Core X 2



• The pictures and illustrations used may be different from the product in front of you, but the procedure is the same. • When installing this equipment, be sure to install it by referring to "Table of Options Combination"



Table of Options Combination Copy Serial Copy Card InterControl Reader face Kit Interface Kit Voice Guidance Kit



Yes



Yes



Yes



Voice Operation Kit



Utility Tray



No



No



Yes: Available, No: Unavailable



Use 4 of them



[7] Screw (Binding ; M4x6) X 1



1427



[8] Screw (Binding ; M4x20) X 2



9. Installation [9] Screw (TP ; M3x6) X 4



Installation Outline Drawing



[10] Screw (Binding ; M4x16) X 2



Use 3 of them



[11] Screw (Binding ; M3x16) X 1



[12] Voice Guidance Board Support Plate X 1



[13] Cable Face Seal X 1



[14] Card Spacer X 1



Installation Procedure 1. Open the Right Rear Cover 1, and remove the Side Cover. • 2 Screws • 1 Hook



Including guides



2x



Essential Items to Be Performed Before Installation



Hook



• Turn OFF the main power of the host machine, and disconnect the power plug from the outlet. WARNING: • If performing work without disconnecting the power plug of the host machine, it may cause electrical shock. • If disconnecting the power plug without turning OFF the main power, it may cause damage of the machine.



CAUTION: Be careful not to let the 2 bosses of the Side Cover come off from the 2 mounting holes of the Right Rear Cover 1.



• When turning OFF the main power, follow the below procedure. 1. Turn OFF the main power switch of the host machine. 2. The display in the Control Panel and the lamp of the main power are turned off.



1428



9. Installation



2. Hold the handle to remove the Main Controller.



4. Install the Voice Guidance Board Unit to the Main Controller PCB 1.



• 1 Connector



• 1 Connector • 3 Screws (TP; M3x6)



1x NOTE: Check that the connector is connected properly.



TP㸹M3x6 Connector Handle



3x



1x Connector



CAUTION: Be sure to place the removed Main Controller PCB 1 flatly. Reason: Due to the protruded plate, the PCB may be deformed if work is performed while it is placed at an angle.



Plate



3. Remove the Face Plate (The removed Face Plate and screws will not be used.) • 2 screws



2x



1429



9. Installation



7. Install the Side Cover.



5. Insert the Main Controller PCB 1 until it stops.



• 1 Hook • 2 Screws



• 1 Connector



1x



CAUTION: Be careful not to let the 2 bosses of the Side Cover come off from the 2 mounting holes of the Right Rear Cover 1.



Connector Handle



CAUTION: Be sure to push [A] part hard to install it, otherwise the connector may not be connected.



[A]



2x



Hook



6. Cut off [A] part of the Side Cover with nippers. NOTE: When cutting off the part, be sure not to make burrs.



[A]



1430



9. Installation



9. Connect the Speaker Cable to the Voice Guidance Board Unit.



8. Attach the 2 Ring Cores to both ends of the Speaker Cable. NOTE: < In the Case of Upright Control Panel> When installing the Card Reader at the same time, be sure to install a Ring Core only to one end of the Speaker Cable.



1x



10. Retrieve the Speaker Cable from the position shown in the figure, and close the Right Rear Cover 1.



CAUTION: Be sure to attach the Ring Cores within 50mm from the end of the Speaker Cable.



11. Remove the 2 Rubber Caps from the Right Upper Cover. (The removed Rubber Caps will not be used.)



50mm



1431



9. Installation 16. Pass the Speaker Cable through the Cord Guides, and fit the 4 covers on the Cord Guides.



12. Install the Speaker Unit (Lower). • 2 Screws (Binding; M4x20)



Screw



Binding㸹M4x20



2x



150 mm



1x



NOTE: When using together with the Copy Card Reader



< In the Case of Upright Control Panel> 1. Pass the Speaker Cable through the [A] part, install the Ring Core to the cable, and then connect the cable to the Speaker Unit.



13. Install the Speaker Unit (Upper). • 1 Screw (Binding; M4x6)



CAUTION: Be sure to attach the Ring Cores within 50mm from the end of the Speaker Cable. Binding㸹M4x6



1x



50mm



2. Remove the 4 covers from the Cord Guides, and affix them as shown in the figure. 3. Pass the Speaker Cable through the Cord Guides, and fit the 4 covers on the Cord Guides. 14. Connect the Speaker Cable to the Speaker Unit. 15. Remove the 4 covers from the Cord Guides, and affix them as shown in the figure.



1432



9. Installation 3. Select [Settings/Registration] > [Preferences] > [Accessibility] > [Voice Navigation Settings] > [Use Voice Navigation], and check that the setting is [ON]. 4. Select [Settings/Registration] > [Preferences] > [Accessibility] > [Voice Navigation Settings] > [Voice Guide from Speakers], and check that the setting is ON.



[A] Screw



Operation Check 150 mm



■ When Starting to Use



1x



1. Press reset key 3secs or more. 2. If the display in panel screen is boxed with red frame, “Voice Guidance Kit” is available.



■ When Stopping to Use



< In the Case of Flat Control Panel> 1. Connect the Speaker Cable to the Speaker Unit. 2. Remove the 4 covers from the Cord Guides, and affix them as shown in the figure. 3. Pass the Speaker Cable through the Cord Guides, and fit the 4 covers on the Cord Guides.



1. Press "Reset" key or the Voice Recognition button for more than 3 seconds.



Screw



150 mm



1x



Checking after Installation NOTE: When changing the settings upon user's request, it is required to log in as a system manager in accordance with instructions from the user administrator.



1. Connect the power plug of the host machine to the power outlet. 2. Turn the main power switch ON.



1433



9. Installation



Document Scan Lock Kit-B2



Essential Items to Be Performed Before Installation



Points to Note Before Installation



• Turn OFF the main power of the host machine, and disconnect the power plug from the outlet.



• To enable the function of "Image Data Analyzer Board", it is necessary to install the license which comes with the product. • Be sure to ask users to install the license after the installation.



WARNING: • If performing work without disconnecting the power plug of the host machine, it may cause electrical shock. • If disconnecting the power plug without turning OFF the main power, it may cause damage of the machine.



CAUTION: An error occurs when the license is installed before installing the Image Analysis Board, so make sure to install the license after installing the Image Analysis Board.



• When turning OFF the main power, follow the below procedure. 1. Turn OFF the main power switch of the host machine. 2. The display in the Control Panel and the lamp of the main power are turned off.



Checking the Contents [1] Image Data Analyzer Board x 1



Installation Outline Drawing



[2] PCB Spacer x 4



Use 3 of them



[3] Screw (TP; M3x6) x 4



[4] Image Data Analyzer Board Support Plate x 1



Use 2 of them



[5] Screw (Binding; M3x4) x1



[6] Support Platex 1



[7] Protection Sheet x 1



[8] Wire Saddle x 2



1434



9. Installation



Installation Procedure



2. Hold the handle to remove the Main Controller PCB1. • 1 Connector



1. Open the Right Rear Cover 1, and then remove the Side Cover.



1x



• 2 Screws • 1 Hook



2x



Connector



Hook Handle



CAUTION: Be sure to place the removed Main Controller PCB 1 flatly. Reason: Due to the protruded plate, the PCB may be deformed if work is performed while it is placed at an angle.



CAUTION: Be careful not to let the 2 bosses of the Side Cover come off from the 2 mounting holes of the Right Rear Cover 1.



Plate



3. Remove the screw (The removed screws will be used in step 5.)



1x



1435



9. Installation



6. Insert the Main Controller PCB 1 until it stops.



4. Install the 3 PCB Spacers.



• 1 Connector



1x



3x



Connector Handle



CAUTION: Be sure to push [A] part hard to install it, otherwise the connector may not be connected properly. 5. Install the Image Data Analyzer Board. [A]



• 1 Connector • 1 Screw (Use the screws removed in step 3) • 2 Screws (TP; M3x6)



TP ; M3x6



1x



3x



1436



9. Installation 4. Ask users to install license. 5. Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.



7. Install the Side Cover, and then Close the Right Rear Cover 1.



6. Press [Counter/Device Information] > [Device Info./ Other] > [Check Device Configuration] key on the control panel.



• 1Hook • 2 Screws



7. Check that "Image Data Analyzer Board" is displayed in option field.



CAUTION: Be careful not to let the 2 bosses of the Side Cover come off from the 2 mounting holes of the Right Rear Cover 1.



2x



Hook



Checking after Installation 1. Connect the power plug of the host machine to the power outlet. 2. Turn ON the main power switch. 3. If a message prompting the user to update the version appears, press [Update] to automatically update the version of the host machine. NOTE: If [Skip] is selected, a message prompting the user to update the version will appear every time the host machine is started. In the service mode (Lv.2) shown below, it is possible to set not to display the message prompting the user to update the version. COPIER > OPTION > FNC-SW > VER-CHNG



1437



9. Installation



Serial Interface Kit-K3 / Copy Control Interface Kit-A1



Checking the Contents



Points to Note at Installation



[1] Serial RS Conversion Board X 1



[2] IA Harness Protection Sheet X 1



[3] RS Conversion Cable (Short) X 1



[4] Hexagonal Screw X 2



[5] Washer X 2



[6] PCB Spacer X 1



[7] Screw (TP; M3x6) X 3



[8] Support Plate X 1



[9] RS Conversion Cable (Long) X 1



[10] RS Conversion Cable X 1



When installing this equipment, be sure to install it by referring to "Table of Options Combination".



Table of Options Combination Voice Copy ConSerial InOperatrol Interterface Kit tion face Kit Kit



Voice Guidance Kit



Copy Card Reader



Serial Interface Kit



-



No



Yes



Yes



No



Copy Control Interface Kit



No



-



Yes



Yes



No



Yes: Available, No: Unavailable



1438



9. Installation



Installation Outline Drawing



[1] CC-VI Cable X 1



[2] D-SUB Support Plate X1



[3] Washer (large) X 2



[4] IA Harness Protection Sheet X 1



Installation Procedure



[5] Hexagonal Screw (Spring Washer (Small) ,Nut) X 2



Do not use a Nut



■ Removing the Main Controller PCB 1 1. Open the Right Rear Cover 1, and remove the Side Cover. • 2 Scews • 1 Hook



Essential Items to Be Performed Before Installation



2x



• Turn OFF the main power of the host machine, and disconnect the power plug from the outlet. Hook



WARNING: • If performing work without disconnecting the power plug of the host machine, it may cause electrical shock. • If disconnecting the power plug without turning OFF the main power, it may cause damage of the machine. • When turning OFF the main power, follow the below procedure. 1. Turn OFF the main power switch of the host machine. 2. The display in the Control Panel and the lamp of the main power are turned off.



1439



9. Installation CAUTION: Be careful not to let the 2 bosses of the Side Cover come off from the 2 mounting holes of the Right Rear Cover 1.



3. Remove the face cover (The removed Face Cover will not be used). • 2 Screws



2x



2. Hold the handle to remove the Main Controller PCB 1.



■ Installing the Serial Interface Kit



• 1 Connector



1. Remove the screw, and install the PCB Spacer (The removed screw will be used in step 3).



1x



1x



Connector Handle



CAUTION: Be sure to place the removed Main Controller PCB 1 flatly. Reason: Due to the protruded plate, the PCB may be deformed if work is performed while it is placed at an angle.



1x



Plate



1440



9. Installation



■ Installing the Copy Control interface Kit



2. Connect the RS Conversion Cable (short) to the Serial RS Conversion Board.



1. Put the CC-VI Cable through the D-SUB Support Plate. CAUTION: Install the extruded side of the D-SUB Support Plate as shown in the figure.



1x



Inside



3. Install the Serial RS Conversion Board. • • • •



1 Screw (Use the screw removed in step1) 2 Washers 2 Hexagon Screws 1 Connector



D-SUB Support Plate CC-VI Cable



2. Connect the CC-VI Cable to the Main Controller PCB 1. • • • •



2 Hexagon Screws 2 Spring Washers (small) 2 Washers (Large) 1 Connector



3x



1x CC-VI Cable



2x



1x



Washer (Large) Spring Washer (Small) Hexagon Screw



1441



9. Installation



■ Installing the Main Controller PCB 1 2. Install the Side Cover, and then Close the Right Rear Cover 1. • 1Hook • 2 Screws



1. Insert the Main Controller PCB 1 until it stops. • 1 Connector



CAUTION: Be careful not to let the 2 bosses of the Side Cover come off from the 2 mounting holes of the Right Rear Cover 1.



1x



Connector Handle



CAUTION: Be sure to push [A] part hard to install it, otherwise the connector may not be connected properly.



2x



[A]



Hook



3. Connect the power plug of the host machine to the power outlet. 4. Turn the main power switch ON.



1442



9. Installation



Voice Operation Kit-D1



Checking the Contents



Points to Note Before Installation



[1] Speaker Unit X 1



[2] Voice Operation Board Unit X 1



[3] Support Plate X 1



[4] DVI Cable X 1



[5] Ring Core X 2



[6] Cable Face Seal X 1



[7] Cord Guide X 7



[8] Card Spacer X 1



• The pictures and illustrations used may be different from the product in front of you, but the procedure is the same. • Refer to "Combination of options" when installing this equipment before operation.



Table of Options Combination Copy Serial Copy Voice Card InterControl GuidReader face Kit Interface ance Kit Kit Voice Operation Kit



Yes



Yes



Yes



No



Utility Tray



No



Yes: Available, No: Unavailable



1443



9. Installation [9] Screw (Bind; M4x14) X 2



Installation Outline Drawing



[10] Screw (TP; M3x6) X 2



Use only 1 of them



[11] Ring Core X 1



[12] Wire Saddle X 3



[13] Screw (Bind; M4x20) X 2



[14] Screw (Bind; M3x14) X 1



Installation Procedure 1. Open the Right Rear Cover 1, and then remove the Side Cover. • 2 Screws • 1 Hook



[7]: Use 6 of them for the Flat Control Panel model. [11]: This is used for the user installed option and should be handed over to the user.



Including guides



2x



Hook



Essential Items to Be Performed Before Installation • Turn OFF the main power of the host machine, and disconnect the power plug from the outlet. WARNING: • If performing work without disconnecting the power plug of the host machine, it may cause electrical shock. • If disconnecting the power plug without turning OFF the main power, it may cause damage of the machine.



CAUTION: Be careful not to let the 2 bosses of the Side Cover come off from the 2 mounting holes of the Right Rear Cover 1.



• When turning OFF the main power, follow the below procedure. 1. Turn OFF the main power switch of the host machine. 2. The display in the Control Panel and the lamp of the main power are turned off.



1444



9. Installation



2. Hold the handle to remove the Main Controller PCB 1.



3. Remove the Face Plate. (The removed Face Plate will not be used.)



• 1 Connector



• 2 Screws (The removed screws will be used at next step . )



1x



2x



Connector Handle



CAUTION: Be sure to place the removed Main Controller PCB 1 flatly. Reason: Due to the protruded plate, the PCB may be deformed if work is performed while it is placed at an angle. 4. Install the Voice Operation Board Unit to the Main Controller PCB 1. • 1 Connector • 2 Screws (Use the screw removed at previous step) • 1 Screw (TP; M3x6) NOTE: Check that the connector is connected properly.



Plate



TP㸹M3x6



3x



1x



1445



Connector



9. Installation



7. Install the Side Cover.



5. Insert the Main Controller PCB 1 until it stops.



• 1 Hook • 2 Screws



• 1 Connector



1x



CAUTION: Be careful not to let the 2 bosses of the Side Cover come off from the 2 mounting holes of the Right Rear Cover 1.



Connector Handle



CAUTION: Be sure to push [A] part hard to install it, otherwise the connector may not be connected properly.



[A]



2x



Hook



6. Be sure to push [A] part hard to install it, otherwise the connector may not be connected properly. NOTE: When cutting off the part, be sure not to make burrs .



[A]



1446



9. Installation



10. Close the Right Rear Cover 1.



8. Attach the 2 Ring Cores to both ends of the DVI Cable and then remove caps from both ends.



11. Remove the 2 Rubber Caps from the Right Upper Cover. (The removed Rubber Caps will not be used.)



9. Pass the DVI Cable through the hole of the Side Cover, and connect the DVI Cable to the Voice Operation Board Unit.



1x



1447



9. Installation



14. Install the Speaker Unit (Upper).



12. Remove the Speaker Unit (Lower) from the Speaker Unit.



• 2 Screws (Use the screw removed in step 12.)



• 2 Screws (The removed screw will be used in step 14)



2x



2x Speaker Unit (Lower)



15. Remove the cover of Cord Guide, and affix it to the area indicated in the figure. < In the Case of Flat Control Panel> NOTE: Even when this kit is used in combination with a Copy Card Reader, the positions to install the Cord Guides are the same.



13. Install the Speaker Unit (Lower). • 2 Screws (Binding; M4x20)



• Use 6 Code Guides < Right side>



Binding㸹M4x20



2x



Screw holes



1448



9. Installation



NOTE: Be sure to affix them on the extension lines of [A] and [B].



Screw



Rear Cover 2



[A]



[B]



< In the Case of Upright Control Panel> NOTE: Even when this kit is used in combination with a Copy Card Reader, the positions to install the Cord Guides are the same.



Screw holes



• Use 7 Cord Guides.



NOTE: [Be sure to affix them on the extension lines of [A] and [B].



Screw



Rear Cover 2



[A]



[B]



16. Connect the DVI Cable to the Speaker Unit.



1449



9. Installation 17. Put the Speaker Cable through the Cord Guide, and install the cover of the cord guide.



CAUTION: When using together with the Copy Card Reader



CAUTION: Be sure to slack off [A] par for not interfering to open/ close the Right Rear Cover1.



< In the Case of Upright Control Panel > Be sure to pass the DVI cable between the Upright Arm and Card Reader Mounting Plate.



< In the Case of Flat Control Panel > • Use 6 Cord Guides



[A]



7x [A]



1x [A]



6x



Checking after Installation



[A]



< In the Case of Upright Control Panel > • Use 7 Cord Guides



NOTE: When changing the settings upon user’s request, it is required to log in as a system manager in accordance with instructions from the user administrator. [A]



1. Connect the power plug of the host machine to the outlet.



1x



2. Turn ON the main power switch.



7x



3. Select Settings/Registration > Preferences > Accessibility > Voice Navigation Settings > Use Voice Navigation, and check that the setting is ON.



[A]



4. Select Settings/Registration > Preferences > Accessibility > Voice Navigation Settings > Voice Navigation at Startup, and check that "Select Mode at Startup" is set. 5. Select Settings/Registration > Preferences > Accessibility > Voice Navigation Settings, and check that "Tune Microphone" is displayed.



Operation Check ■ When Starting to Use 1. Press "Reset" key or the Voice Recognition button for more than 3 seconds.



1450



9. Installation 2. In "Select the Voice Navigation type." on the Control Panel screen, select "Manual + Vocal Mode", "Vocal Mode" or "Manual Mode", and press OK. 3. Once the indication on the screen is framed in red, the "Voice Operation Kit" becomes enabled. NOTE: When "Manual Mode" is selected in "Select the Voice Navigation type.", nothing happens by pressing the Voice Recognition button.



■ When Stopping to Use 1. Press "Reset" key or the Voice Recognition button for more than 3 seconds.



1451



9. Installation



Connection Kit-A1/A2 for Bluetooth LE Checking the Contents



1x



for CN,KR 1x



1x



for US 1x



for TW 1x



A



D TP; M3x6 1x 1x



W Sems; M3x6 1x



P Tightening; M3x8 2x



E



B



for CN, KR 1x



for TW 1x



1x



1x



F



for US 1x



1x



H



1x



1x



C



1x



1x



1x



G



1x



1452



1x



1x



9. Installation



Essential Items to Be Performed Before Installation • Turn OFF the main power of the host machine, and disconnect the power plug from the outlet. WARNING: • If performing work without disconnecting the power plug of the host machine, it may cause electrical shock. • If disconnecting the power plug without turning OFF the main power, it may cause damage of the machine. • When turning OFF the main power, follow the below procedure. 1. Turn OFF the main power switch of the host machine. 2. The display in the Control Panel and the lamp of the main power are turned off.



Installation Outline Drawing



Installation Procedure NOTE: Although model with the Upright Control Panel is used for illustration in this procedure, the same procedure is applied to model with the Flat Control Panel.



1



1453



9. Installation



2



1x



1454



9. Installation



3 1x



1x



NOTE: The removed screw will be used in a later step.



4 NOTE: Use the screw removed in the previous step.



1x



1x



1455



9. Installation



5



1x



6



1456



9. Installation



7 NOTE: Align it with the bottom edge of the recessed face for USB and affix it between the recessed face and the Device Port Sheet.



A



B A=B



1457



9. Installation



8 NOTE: In countries other than the following countries, it is not necessary to affix the Approval Label.



< For US > Affix it over the number on the Wireless LAN Approval Label.



US



< For CN, KR, and TW > Affix it over the Wireless LAN Approval Label.



CN,KR



Setting after Installation 1. Connect the power plug of the host machine to the outlet.



1458



TW



9. Installation 2. Turn ON the main power switch. 3. In the following Service Mode, set the value to "1." COPIER > FUNCTION > INSTALL > BLE-USE NOTE: When [System Manager Information Settings] is set, it is required to log in as a system manager in accordance with instructions of the user administrator.



4. Select [Settings/Registration] > [Preferences] > [Network] > [Confirm Network Connection Setting Changes], and set the item [ON]. 5. Select [Settings/Registration] > [Preferences] > [Network] > [Bluetooth Settings] > [Use Bluetooth] > [ON]. 6. The message "Perform Apply Setting Changes from Settings/Registration" appears in the Touch Panel Display. 7. Perform "Apply Setting Changes." Press [Settings/Registration] > [Yes].



1459



9. Installation



Stamp Unit-B1



Essential Items to Be Performed Before Installation



Checking the Contents



• Turn OFF the main power of the host machine, and disconnect the power plug from the outlet. WARNING: • If performing work without disconnecting the power plug of the host machine, it may cause electrical shock. • If disconnecting the power plug without turning OFF the main power, it may cause damage of the machine.



1x Binding M3x6 1x



1x



• When turning OFF the main power, follow the below procedure. 1. Turn OFF the main power switch of the host machine. 2. The display in the Control Panel and the lamp of the main power are turned off.



P Tightening M3x12 1x



1x



• Including guides



Installation Procedure



Installation Outline Drawing



1. CAUTION: Be sure to place paper in order to prevent the Copy Board Glass from being damaged when the cover of the document reading area is opened.



1460



9. Installation



2.



4. 1x



3.



5. CAUTION: Check that the [A] part of the harness is not placed on the guide. If it is placed on the guide, the cable may be caught when installing the cover.



Binding M3x6



1x



1x



1461



[A]



9. Installation



8.



6. 1x



7.



9.



1462



9. Installation



10.



11.



Connect the power plug to the outlet.



12.



Turn ON the main power switch.



Operation Check 1. Press [Scan and Send] on the Touch Panel Display. 2. Specify the destination and press [Other Functions] > [Finished Stamp]. 3. Press [Close]. 4. Check that a stamp is printed on the original scanned by the Feeder.



1463



9. Installation



■ Installation Outline Drawing



HDD-related Option Pre-checks ■ Points to Note at Installation CAUTION: • For TYPE2 to TYPE7, be sure to perform the procedure of each TYPE after performing“Removing the HDD Box Unit” on page 1464 • When using the mirroring function, be sure to install 2 HDDs of the same capacity. • The HDD needs to be initialized after replacing the large capacity HDD. • When replacing a HDD that contains user information with a high-capacity HDD (which is not an initial installation), backup and export of HDD data are necessary. For details, refer to "Backup Data" in the Service Manual.



■ Essential Items to Be Performed Before Installation • Turn OFF the main power of the host machine, and disconnect the power plug from the outlet.



When installing the HDD-related options (the following 4 products), refer to pages described below. • 2.5inch/250GB HDD-N1 • 2.5inch/1TB HDD-P1 • Removable HDD Kit-AL1 • HDD Mirroring Kit-J1 Title



WARNING: • If performing work without disconnecting the power plug of the host machine, it may cause electrical shock. • If disconnecting the power plug without turning OFF the main power, it may cause damage of the machine.



Combination of Product



TYPE- “[TYPE-1] Option HDD (1TB)” on page 1467 1



• When turning OFF the main power, follow the below procedure. 1. Turn OFF the main power switch of the host machine. 2. The display in the Control Panel and the lamp of the main power are turned off.



TYPE- “Removing the HDD Box Unit” on page 1464 + 2 “ [TYPE-2] Removable HDD Kit” on page 1470 TYPE- “Removing the HDD Box Unit” on page 1464 + 3 “[TYPE-3] Option HDD (1TB) + Removable HDD Kit” on page 1475 TYPE- “Removing the HDD Box Unit” on page 1464 + 4 “[TYPE-4] Standard HDD + Option HDD (250GB) + HDD Mirroring Kit” on page 1482



Removing the HDD Box Unit



TYPE- “Removing the HDD Box Unit” on page 1464 + 5 “[TYPE-5] Standard HDD + Option HDD (250GB) + Removable HDD Kit + HDD Mirroring Kit” on page 1488



CAUTION: • For [TYPE-1 Option HDD (1TB)], this procedure is not necessary. For other TYPEs, be sure to proceed to each installation procedure after performing this procedure. • The removed screws will be used again in the installation procedure of each TYPE.



TYPE- “Removing the HDD Box Unit” on page 1464 + 6 “ [TYPE-6] 2 Option HDDs (1TB) + HDD Mirroring Kit” on page 1496 TYPE- “Removing the HDD Box Unit” on page 1464 + 7 “ [TYPE-7] 2 Option HDDs (1TB) + Removable HDD Kit + HDD Mirroring Kit” on page 1503



1464



9. Installation



3. Remove the HDD.



1. Open the Right Rear Cover 1.



NOTE: When replacing with the Option HDD (1TB), the removed HDD will not be used.



2. Open the HDD Lid. • 1 Screw NOTE: The removed screw will not be used when installing the Removal HDD Kit.



4. Close the HDD Lid. NOTE: Do not tighten the screw here.



1x



1465



9. Installation



7. Remove the HDD Box Unit.



5. Remove the Side Cover.



• 2 Connectors • 2 Screws • 2 Hooks



• 2 Screws • 1 Hook



2x 2x



2x Hook



Hook



CAUTION: Be careful not to let the 2 bosses of the Side Cover come off from the 2 mounting holes of the Right Rear Cover 1. 8. Open the HDD Lid, and remove the HDD Outside Cover. • 4 Screws • 1 Protrusion



4x



Protrusion



6. Hold the handle, and remove the Main Controller 1. • 1 Connector



1x 9. Remove the HDD Unit. • 4 Screws



4x



Connector Handle



1466



9. Installation



■ Essential Items to Be Performed Before Installation



10. Remove the HDD Side Cover. • 4 Screws • 4 Bosses



• Turn OFF the main power of the host machine, and disconnect the power plug from the outlet. WARNING: • If performing work without disconnecting the power plug of the host machine, it may cause electrical shock. • If disconnecting the power plug without turning OFF the main power, it may cause damage of the machine.



4x Boss



• When turning OFF the main power, follow the below procedure. 1. Turn OFF the main power switch of the host machine. 2. The display in the Control Panel and the lamp of the main power are turned off.



Boss



[TYPE-1] Option HDD (1TB)



■ Installation Procedure



■ Checking the Contents [1] HDD X 1



[2] HDD Case X 1



1. Open the Right Rear Cover 1.



[3] HDD Holder Hinge X 1



[4] HDD Case Hinge Base X 1



[5] Screw (Sems ; M3x4) X 4



[6] Screw (P Tightening ; M3x8) X 2



2. Open the HDD Lid. • 1 Screw (will be used in step 7)



1x



1467



9. Installation



5. Install the assembled HDD Case to the HDD.



3. Remove the HDD. (The removed HDD will not be used.)



• 4 Screws (Sems; M3x4)



Sems; M3x4



4x



4. Fit the Hinge Pin of the HDD Holder Hinge with the groove of the HDD Case Hinge Base to install it to the HDD Case.



6. Install the Option HDD to the host machine.



• 2 Bosses • 2 Screws (P Tightening; M3x8)



Boss



2x



7. Close the HDD Lid. • 1 Screw (screws removed in step 2)



1x P Tightening ; M3x8



1468



9. Installation



1. Connect the USB flash drive to the PC. 2. Start up SST, and click the USB icon displayed in the target selection screen. 3. Select the drive, the model series, and the version to be written to the USB flash drive, and click [Confirm]. 4. Click [Start], and after the version has been written to the USB flash drive, click [OK] and then remove the USB flash drive. 5. Terminate the SST. 6. Connect the USB flash drive to the host machine, and start the host machine with download mode in safe mode. 7. When the USB menu is displayed, press keys on the Control Panel in the order shown below. • [4]: Clear/Format • [1]: Disk Format • [0]: OK • Press any keys. • [C]: Return to menu • [Reset] : Start shutdown sequence • [0]: OK (The power of the host machine is turned OFF automatically.) 8. Remove the USB flash drive. 9. Turn ON the main power switch.



8. Close the Right Rear Cover 1.



■ HDD Initialization Procedure 1. Requirements 1. PC Service Support Tool in the version that supports this host machine must be installed. 2. Cross Ethernet Cable (when SST is used) 2. Preparing for the Installation of the System Software of Host machine



■ Executing Auto Gradation Adjustment



1. If both PC and the machine are on, turn them off. 2. Connect the PC and the host machine using an Cross Ethernet cable. (when SST is used) 3. Turn on the PC.



When the high-capacity HDD is installed, the machine initializes its HDD, resetting the data used for auto gradation correction. Therefore, execute full adjustment of auto gradation adjustment after installing the high-capacity HDD to enable proper images to be output.



3. Registering the system software 1. Insert the latest System Software into the PC using the SST. 2. Start the SST. 3. Click 'Register Firmware'. 4. Select the drive where the system software has been inserted, and click the [SEARCH] button. 5. Click the [REGISTER] button. 6. Click [OK].



■ Execution of the Minimum Installation Work Be sure to execute the minimum installation work in accordance with the Setup Guide because HDD is initialized when the high-capacity HDD is installed.



4. Initializing HDD



1. Start the host machine with download mode in safe mode. 2. Start the SST. 3. Select the model. Then, select [Single] and click [Start]. 4. Click [Format HDD]. 5. Select [All], and click [Start]. 6. Click [Execute Format]. 7. The Format is executed. 8. Select [Shutdown/Restart], and click [Shutdown]. 9. Click [OK] 10. The power of the host machine is turned OFF. 11. Terminate the SST. 12. Disconnect the Cross Ethernet Cable from the machine, and connect the user's network cable to the machine.



1469



9. Installation



■ Essential Items to Be Performed Before Installation



[TYPE-2] Removable HDD Kit ■ Checking the Contents [1] iVDR Cable 1 (Red) (A: HDD-Sig1/Pow1) X1



[2] iVDR Cable 2 (Blue) (A: HDD-Sig2/Pow2) X1



[3] Conversion Connector X2



[4] Connector Fixation Block X 2



Use 1 of them



• Turn OFF the main power of the host machine, and disconnect the power plug from the outlet. WARNING: • If performing work without disconnecting the power plug of the host machine, it may cause electrical shock. • If disconnecting the power plug without turning OFF the main power, it may cause damage of the machine. • When turning OFF the main power, follow the below procedure. 1. Turn OFF the main power switch of the host machine. 2. The display in the Control Panel and the lamp of the main power are turned off.



Use 1 of them



■ Installation Procedure [5] R-HDD Label X 1



[6] HDD Caution Label X 1



CAUTION: Be sure to perform“Removing the HDD Box Unit” on page 1464 before performing the following work.



● Installing the Removable HDD Kit [7] Screw (P Tightening; M3x8) X 4



1. Remove the HDD Cable Unit. • 2 Screws (will be used in step 3) • 2 Bosses



Use 2 of them



2x Boss



Boss



1470



9. Installation



2. Remove the HDD Cable 1 from the HDD Connector Support Plate, and replace it with the iVDR Cable 1 (Red) (A: HDD-Sig1/Pow1).



4. Install the HDD Side Cover. • 4 Bosses • 4 Screws (Use the removed screws)



• 2 Bosses • 2 Screws



4x 2x



Boss



Boss



5. Put the 2 cables through the hole, and install the HDD Unit according to the marking lines.



2x



• 4 Screws (Use the removed screws)



4x



Boss



3. Install the assembled iVDR Cable 1 (Red) (A: HDDSig1/Pow1). • 2 Bosses • 2 Screws (screws removed in step 1)



2x



Marking Line



Boss



6. Open the HDD Lid, and affix the HDD Caution Label in the appropriate language according to the marking lines on the HDD Cap.



Boss



Marking Line



1471



9. Installation



9. Connect the iVDR Cable 1 (Red) (A: HDD-Sig1/Pow1) to [A] on the Controller PCB.



7. Install the HDD Outside Cover, and close the HDD Lid. • 1 Protrusion • 4 Screws (Use the removed screws)



CAUTION: If the Communication Cable (red) is connected to [B], the HDD error occurs.



4x • 2 Connectors [A] [B]



Protrusion



[B]



8. Put the 2 cables through the hole, and install the HDD Box Unit



2x



• 2 Hooks • 2 Screws (Use the removed screws)



Hook



2x



1472



9. Installation



● Assembling and Installing the HDD



10. Insert the Main Controller PCB 1 until it stops. • 1 Connector



1. Install the Conversion Connector to the HDD removed from the host machine.



1x



CAUTION: Be sure that there is no gap between the HDD Connector and the Conversion Connector.



Connector Handle



CAUTION: Be sure to push [A] part hard to install it, otherwise the connector may not be connected properly.



1x [A]



2. Install the Connector Fixation Block. • 2 Bosses • 2 Screws (P Tightening; M3x8) Boss



11. Install the Side Cover. Do not close the Right Rear Cover 1 yet here.



P Tightening; M3x8



• 1 Hook • 2 Screws



2x



2x



Hook



1473



9. Installation CAUTION: • Be sure to firmly hold the Connector Fixation Block when tightening the screws. • Be sure to follow the correct order to tighten the screws, otherwise the Conversion Connector may not be connected properly, resulting in poor contact.



4. Open the HDD Lid.



5. Install the HDD to the host machine.



3. Affix the label "HDD No.1" to the HDD Holder Hinge. Write down the serial number of the host machine to the label for recording the number, and affix it to the area indicated in the figure.



HDD No.



Serial No.



6. Close the HDD Lid.



XXXXXXXX



7. Be sure to request the user to padlock the removable HDD to discourage theft.



1474



9. Installation



8. Close the Right Rear Cover 1.



[1] iVDR Cable 1 (Red) (A: HDD-Sig1/Pow1) X1



[2] iVDR Cable 2 (Blue) (A: HDD-Sig2/Pow2) X1



[3] Conversion Connector X2



[4] Connector Fixation Block X 2



Use 1 of them



[TYPE-3] Option HDD (1TB) + Removable HDD Kit



[5] R-HDD Label X 1



Use 1 of them



[6] HDD Caution Label X 1



■ Checking the Contents



[1] HDD X 1



[2] HDD Case X 1



[7] Screw (P Tightening; M3x8) X 4



Use 2 of them



[3] HDD Holder Hinge X 1



[4] HDD Case Hinge Base X 1



■ Essential Items to Be Performed Before Installation [5] Screw (Sems ; M3x4) X 4



• Turn OFF the main power of the host machine, and disconnect the power plug from the outlet.



[6] Screw (P Tightening ; M3x8) X 2



WARNING: • If performing work without disconnecting the power plug of the host machine, it may cause electrical shock. • If disconnecting the power plug without turning OFF the main power, it may cause damage of the machine. • When turning OFF the main power, follow the below procedure. 1. Turn OFF the main power switch of the host machine. 2. The display in the Control Panel and the lamp of the main power are turned off.



1475



9. Installation



■ Installation Procedure 3. Install the assembled iVDR Cable 1 (Red) (A: HDDSig1/Pow1).



CAUTION: Be sure to perform“Removing the HDD Box Unit” on page 1464 before performing the following work.



• 2 Bosses • 2 Screws (screws removed in step 1)



● Installing the Removable HDD Kit



2x Boss



1. Remove the HDD Cable Unit. • 2 Screws (will be used in step 3) • 2 Bosses



Boss



2x Boss



Boss



4. Install the HDD Side Cover. • 4 Bosses • 4 Screws (Use the removed screws)



4x Boss



2. Remove the HDD Cable 1 from the HDD Connector Support Plate, and replace it with the iVDR Cable 1 (Red) (A: HDD-Sig1/Pow1). • 2 Bosses • 2 Screws Boss



2x



2x



Boss



1476



9. Installation



7. Install the HDD Outside Cover, and close the HDD Lid.



5. Put the 2 cables through the hole, and install the HDD Unit according to the marking lines.



• 1 Protrusion • 4 Screws (Use the removed screws)



• 4 Screws (Use the removed screws)



4x 4x



Protrusion



Marking Line



8. Put the 2 cables through the hole, and install the HDD Box Unit • 2 Hooks • 2 Screws (Use the removed screws)



6. Open the HDD Lid, and affix the HDD Caution Label in the appropriate language according to the marking lines on the HDD Cap.



Hook



2x



Marking Line



1477



9. Installation 10. Insert the Main Controller PCB 1 until it stops. • 1 Connector



9. Connect the iVDR Cable 1 (Red) (A: HDD-Sig1/Pow1) to [A] on the Controller PCB.



1x CAUTION: If the Communication Cable (red) is connected to [B], the HDD error occurs. • 2 Connectors [A] [B]



Connector Handle



CAUTION: Be sure to push [A] part hard to install it, otherwise the connector may not be connected properly.



[B]



2x [A]



11. Install the Side Cover. Do not close the Right Rear Cover 1 yet here. • 1 Hook • 2 Screws



2x



Hook



1478



9. Installation



● Assembling and Installing the Option HDD



3. Install the Conversion Connector. CAUTION: Be sure that there is no gap between the HDD Connector and the Conversion Connector.



1. Fit the Hinge Pin of the HDD Holder Hinge with the groove of the HDD Case Hinge Base to install it to the HDD Case. • 2 Bosses • 2 Screws (P Tightening; M3x8) (included with Option HDD)



Boss



1x



2x



4. Install the Connector Fixation Block. • 2 Bosses • 2 Screws (P Tightening; M3x8) (included with Removable HDD Kit) Boss



P Tightening ; M3x8



2. Install the assembled HDD Case to the HDD. • 4 Screws (W Sems; M3x4)



P Tightening; M3x8



2x



Sems; M3x4



4x



1479



9. Installation CAUTION: • Be sure to firmly hold the Connector Fixation Block when tightening the screws. • Be sure to follow the correct order to tighten the screws, otherwise the Conversion Connector may not be connected properly, resulting in poor contact.



6. Open the HDD Lid.



7. Install the Option HDD to the host machine.



5. Affix the label "HDD No.1" to the HDD Holder Hinge. Write down the serial number of the host machine to the label for recording the number, and affix it to the area indicated in the figure.



HDD No.



Serial No.



8. Close the HDD Lid.



XXXXXXXX



9. Be sure to request the user to padlock the removable HDD to discourage theft.



1480



9. Installation



1. Connect the USB flash drive to the PC. 2. Start up SST, and click the USB icon displayed in the target selection screen. 3. Select the drive, the model series, and the version to be written to the USB flash drive, and click [Confirm]. 4. Click [Start], and after the version has been written to the USB flash drive, click [OK] and then remove the USB flash drive. 5. Terminate the SST. 6. Connect the USB flash drive to the host machine, and start the host machine with download mode in safe mode. 7. When the USB menu is displayed, press keys on the Control Panel in the order shown below. • [4]: Clear/Format • [1]: Disk Format • [0]: OK • Press any keys. • [C]: Return to menu • [Reset] : Start shutdown sequence • [0]: OK (The power of the host machine is turned OFF automatically.) 8. Remove the USB flash drive. 9. Turn ON the main power switch.



10. Close the Right Rear Cover 1.



■ HDD Initialization Procedure 1. Requirements 1. PC Service Support Tool in the version that supports this host machine must be installed. 2. Cross Ethernet Cable (when SST is used) 2. Preparing for the Installation of the System Software of Host machine



■ Executing Auto Gradation Adjustment



1. If both PC and the machine are on, turn them off. 2. Connect the PC and the host machine using an Cross Ethernet cable. (when SST is used) 3. Turn on the PC.



When the high-capacity HDD is installed, the machine initializes its HDD, resetting the data used for auto gradation correction. Therefore, execute full adjustment of auto gradation adjustment after installing the high-capacity HDD to enable proper images to be output.



3. Registering the system software 1. Insert the latest System Software into the PC using the SST. 2. Start the SST. 3. Click 'Register Firmware'. 4. Select the drive where the system software has been inserted, and click the [SEARCH] button. 5. Click the [REGISTER] button. 6. Click [OK].



■ Execution of the Minimum Installation Work Be sure to execute the minimum installation work in accordance with the Setup Guide because HDD is initialized when the high-capacity HDD is installed.



4. Initializing HDD



1. Start the host machine with download mode in safe mode. 2. Start the SST. 3. Select the model. Then, select [Single] and click [Start]. 4. Click [Format HDD]. 5. Select [All], and click [Start]. 6. Click [Execute Format]. 7. The Format is executed. 8. Select [Shutdown/Restart], and click [Shutdown]. 9. Click [OK] 10. The power of the host machine is turned OFF. 11. Terminate the SST. 12. Disconnect the Cross Ethernet Cable from the machine, and connect the user's network cable to the machine.



1481



9. Installation



[TYPE-4] Standard HDD + Option HDD (250GB) + HDD Mirroring Kit



CAUTION: Although the red cable shown below may sometimes be supplied in lieu of the HDD Cable 2 (Blue), the procedure for connecting the red cable is the same as that for the blue cable. When connecting the cable to the Controller PCB, make sure to first confirm that the sticker [B] is attached to the cable and then connect the cable to the Controller PCB.



■ Checking the Contents



[1] HDD X 1



[2] HDD Case X 1



[3] HDD Holder Hinge X 1



[4] HDD Case Hinge Base X 1 HDD Cable 2 (Red)



[5] Screw (Sems ; M3x4) X 4



[1] HDD Cable 2 (Blue) X1



[2] HDD Connector Support Plate X 1



[3] Screw (TP; M3x6) X 2



[4] Screw (TP; M3x8 Black) X 2



[6] Screw (P Tightening ; M3x8) X 2



• Guides are included



1482



9. Installation



■ Essential Items to Be Performed Before Installation



2. Assemble the HDD Cable 2 (Blue or Red) and the HDD Connector Support Plate.



• Turn OFF the main power of the host machine, and disconnect the power plug from the outlet.



• 2 Bosses • 2 Screws (TP; M3x8 Black)



WARNING: • If performing work without disconnecting the power plug of the host machine, it may cause electrical shock. • If disconnecting the power plug without turning OFF the main power, it may cause damage of the machine.



2x



• When turning OFF the main power, follow the below procedure. 1. Turn OFF the main power switch of the host machine. 2. The display in the Control Panel and the lamp of the main power are turned off.



Boss



TP; M3x8 Black



■ Installation Procedure



3. Install the assembled HDD Cable 2 Unit to the HDD Unit.



CAUTION: Be sure to perform“Removing the HDD Box Unit” on page 1464 before performing the following work.



• 2 Bosses • 2 Screws (TP; M3x6)



● Installing the HDD Mirroring Kit TP; M3x6



1. Remove the HDD Wrong Insertion Prevention Plate. (The removed parts will not be used.)



2x



Boss



• 1 Screw • 1 Protrusion



1x Protrusion



Boss



1483



9. Installation



4. Installing the HDD Side Cover.



6. Install the HDD Outside Cover, and close the HDD Lid.



• 4 Bosses • 4 Screws (Use the removed screws)



• 1 Protrusion • 4 Screws (Use the removed screws)



4x 4x Boss Protrusion



Boss



7. Put the 4 cables through the hole, and install the HDD Box Unit.



5. Put the 4 cables through the hole, and install the HDD Unit according to the marking lines.



• 2 Hooks • 2 Screws (Use the removed screws)



• 4 Screws (Use the removed screws)



4x



Hook



2x



Marking Line



CAUTION: Be sure to connect the communication cable to the correct port. The HDD error occurs.



8. Connect the HDD Cable 1 (Red) to [A] on the Controller PCB. • 2 Connectors



1484



9. Installation 9. Connect the HDD Cable 2 (Blue) or the HDD Cable 2 (Red) with a sticker labeled [B] to [B] on the Controller PCB.



10. Insert the Main Controller PCB 1 until it stops. • 1 Connector



• 2 Connectors < When using the HDD Cable 2 (Blue) >



1x [A]



[B]



Connector Handle



4x CAUTION: Be sure to push [A] part hard to install it, otherwise the connector may not be connected properly.



[A]



< When using the HDD Cable 2 (Red) > [A]



11. Install the Side Cover. Do not close the Right Rear Cover 1 yet here.



[B]



• 1 Hook • 2 Screws



4x



2x



Hook



1485



9. Installation



● Assembling and Installing the Option 12. Open the HDD Lid. 1. Fit the Hinge Pin of the HDD Holder Hinge with the groove of the HDD Case Hinge Base to install it to the HDD Case. • 2 Bosses • 2 Screws (P Tightening; M3x8)



Boss



2x 13. Return the HDD removed from the host machine to the Slot 1 (Left).



P Tightening ; M3x8



2. Install the assembled HDD Case to the HDD. • 4 Screws (Sems; M3x4)



Sems; M3x4



4x



1486



9. Installation 2. Turn OFF/ON the main power of the host machine to enable the setting value.



3. Install the Option HDD to the Slot 2 (Right).



3. Make sure that the UI screen is activated correctly. 4. Open the Cover, and make sure that the LED blinks. NOTE: Rebuilding starts approximately after 3 minutes after turning OFF and then ON the power. • HDD 1 (Slot 1): The green LED blinks. • HDD 2 (Slot 2): The green and red LEDs blink.



CAUTION: Rebuild process starts after setting "1" for W/RAID. If an error occurs during the rebuild process at the initial installation the hard disk needs to be replaced. (Call service rep.), reexecute the process with the following procedure. 1. Check that the lighting red LED is HDD2. 2. Select "0" for the following service mode. COPIER > OPTION > FNC-SW > W/RAID 3. To enable the setting value, turn OFF/ON the Main Power Supply Switch of the host machine. 4. Select "1" for the following service mode. COPIER > OPTION > FNC-SW > W/RAID 5. To enable the setting value, turn OFF/ON the Main Power Supply Switch of the host machine. The foregoing procedure is limited to the rebuild process at the initial installation. An error during the rebuild process that is executed during operation is not included in the consideration.



4. Close the HDD Lid. • 1 Screw (Use the removed screws)



1x



5. Close the Right Rear Cover 1.



■ Setting the Mirroring 1. Set the setting value for the mirroring to "1" in the following service mode. COPIER > OPTION > FNC-SW > W/RAID



1487



9. Installation



[TYPE-5] Standard HDD + Option HDD (250GB) + Removable HDD Kit + HDD Mirroring Kit



[1] iVDR Cable 1 (Red) (A: HDD-Sig1/Pow1) X1



[2] iVDR Cable 2 (Blue) (A: HDD-Sig2/Pow2) X1



[3] Conversion Connector X2



[4] Connector Fixation Block X 2



[5] R-HDD Label X 1



[6] HDD Caution Label X 1



■ Checking the Contents



[1] HDD X 1



[3] HDD Holder Hinge X 1



[5] Screw (Sems ; M3x4) X 4



[2] HDD Case X 1



[4] HDD Case Hinge Base X 1



[6] Screw (P Tightening ; M3x8) X 2 [7] Screw (P Tightening; M3x8) X 4



1488



9. Installation



■ Installation Procedure



NOTE: The red cable shown below may sometimes be supplied in lieu of the HDD Cable 2 (Blue).



CAUTION: Be sure to perform“Removing the HDD Box Unit” on page 1464 before performing the following work.



● Installing the Removable HDD Kit



1. Remove the HDD Wrong Insertion Prevention Plate. (The removed parts will not be used.) • 1 Screw • 1 Protrusion



HDD Cable 2 (Red)



[1] HDD Cable 2 (Blue) X1



[2] HDD Connector Support Plate X 1



[3] Screw (TP; M3x6) X 2



[4] Screw (TP; M3x8 Black) X 2



1x Protrusion



2. Remove the HDD Cable Unit.



• Guides are included



• 2 Screws (will be used in step 4) • 2 Bosses



■ Essential Items to Be Performed Before Installation



2x Boss



• Turn OFF the main power of the host machine, and disconnect the power plug from the outlet. Boss



WARNING: • If performing work without disconnecting the power plug of the host machine, it may cause electrical shock. • If disconnecting the power plug without turning OFF the main power, it may cause damage of the machine. • When turning OFF the main power, follow the below procedure. 1. Turn OFF the main power switch of the host machine. 2. The display in the Control Panel and the lamp of the main power are turned off.



3. Remove the HDD Cable 1 from the HDD Connector Support Plate, and replace it with the iVDR Cable 1



1489



9. Installation (Red) (A: HDD-Sig1/Pow1). (The removed cable will not be used.)



5. Assemble the iVDR Cable 2 (Blue) (A: HDD-Sig2/ Pow2) and the HDD Connector Support Plate.



• 2 Bosses • 2 Screws



• 2 Bosses • 2 Screws (TP; M3x8 Black)



2x 2x



2x



TP; M3x8 Black



Boss



6. Install the assembled iVDR Cable 2 (Blue) (A: HDDSig2/Pow2). • 2 Bosses • 2 Screws (TP; M3x6) Boss



4. Install the assembled iVDR Cable 1 (Red) (A: HDDSig1/Pow1).



TP; M3x6



• 2 Bosses • 2 Screws (screws removed in step 2)



2x



2x Boss



Boss Boss



1490



9. Installation



10. Install the HDD Outside Cover, and close the HDD Lid.



7. Install the HDD Side Cover. • 4 Bosses • 4 Screws (Use the removed screws)



• 1 Protrusion • 4 Screws (Use the removed screws)



4x 4x Boss



Protrusion Boss



8. Put the 4 cables through the hole, and install the HDD Unit according to the marking lines.



11. Put the 4 cables through the hole, and install the HDD Box Unit.



• 4 Screws (Use the removed screws)



• 2 Hooks • 2 Screws (Use the removed screws)



4x Hook



2x



Marking Line



9. Open the HDD Lid, and affix the HDD Caution Label in the appropriate language according to the marking lines on the HDD Cap.



CAUTION: • Be sure to connect the communication cable to the correct port. The HDD error occurs.



12. Connect the iVDR Cable 1 (Red) (A: HDD-Sig1/Pow1) to [A] on the Controller PCB. • 2 Connectors



Marking Line



1491



9. Installation CAUTION: Be sure to push [A] part hard to install it, otherwise the connector may not be connected properly.



13. Connect the iVDR Cable 2 (Blue) (A: HDD-Sig2/ Pow2) to [B] on the Controller PCB. • 2 Connectors [A]



[A]



[B]



4x



15. Install the Side Cover. Do not close the Right Rear Cover 1 yet here. • 1 Hook • 2 Screws



2x



14. Insert the Main Controller PCB 1 until it stops. • 1 Connector Hook



1x



Connector Handle



1492



9. Installation



● Assembling and Installing the HDD Removed from the Host machine (First HDD)



CAUTION: • Be sure to firmly hold the Connector Fixation Block when tightening the screws. • Be sure to follow the correct order to tighten the screws, otherwise the Conversion Connector may not be connected properly, resulting in poor contact.



1. Install the Conversion Connector to the HDD removed from the host machine. CAUTION: Be sure that there is no gap between the HDD Connector and the Conversion Connector.



3. Affix the label "HDD No.1" to the HDD Holder Hinge. Write down the serial number of the host machine to the label for recording the number, and affix it to the area indicated in the figure.



1x



2. Install the Connector Fixation Block. • 2 Bosses • 2 Screws (P Tightening; M3x8) (included with Removable HDD Kit) Boss



HDD No.



Serial No. P Tightening; M3x8



2x



1493



XXXXXXXX



9. Installation



● Assembling and Installing the Option HDD (Second HDD)



4. Open the HDD Lid.



1. Fit the Hinge Pin of the HDD Holder Hinge with the groove of the HDD Case Hinge Base to install it to the HDD Case. • 2 Bosses • 2 Screws (P Tightening; M3x8) (included with Option HDD)



Boss



5. Install the HDD removed from the host machine to the Slot 1 (Left).



2x



P Tightening ; M3x8



2. Install the assembled HDD Case to the HDD. • 4 Screws (Sems; M3x4)



Sems; M3x4



4x



1494



9. Installation CAUTION: • Be sure to firmly hold the Connector Fixation Block when tightening the screws. • Be sure to follow the correct order to tighten the screws, otherwise the Conversion Connector may not be connected properly, resulting in poor contact.



3. Install the Conversion Connector. CAUTION: Be sure that there is no gap between the HDD Connector and the Conversion Connector.



1x



5. Affix the label "HDD No.2" to the HDD Holder Hinge. Write down the serial number of the host machine to the label for recording the number, and affix it to the area indicated in the figure.



4. Install the Connector Fixation Block. • 2 Bosses • 2 Screws (P Tightening; M3x8) (included with Removable HDD Kit) Boss



HDD No. P Tightening; M3x8



2x SerialNo.



XXXXXXXX



6. Install the Option HDD to the Slot 2 (Right).



1495



9. Installation CAUTION: Rebuild process starts after setting "1" for W/RAID. If an error occurs during the rebuild process at the initial installation the hard disk needs to be replaced. (Call service rep.), reexecute the process with the following procedure. 1. Check that the lighting red LED is HDD2. 2. Select "0" for the following service mode. COPIER > OPTION > FNC-SW > W/RAID 3. To enable the setting value, turn OFF/ON the Main Power Supply Switch of the host machine. 4. Select "1" for the following service mode. COPIER > OPTION > FNC-SW > W/RAID 5. To enable the setting value, turn OFF/ON the Main Power Supply Switch of the host machine. The foregoing procedure is limited to the rebuild process at the initial installation. An error during the rebuild process that is executed during operation is not included in the consideration.



7. Close the HDD Lid.



8. Be sure to request the user to padlock the removable HDD to discourage theft.



[TYPE-6] 2 Option HDDs (1TB) + HDD Mirroring Kit



9. Close the Right Rear Cover 1.



■ Checking the Contents



■ Setting the Mirroring



[1] HDD X 1



[2] HDD Case X 1



[3] HDD Holder Hinge X 1



[4] HDD Case Hinge Base X 1



[5] Screw (Sems ; M3x4) X 4



[6] Screw (P Tightening ; M3x8) X 2



1. Set the setting value for the mirroring to "1" in the following service mode. COPIER > OPTION > FNC-SW > W/RAID 2. Turn OFF/ON the main power of the host machine to enable the setting value. 3. Make sure that the UI screen is activated correctly. 4. Open the Cover, and make sure that the LED blinks. NOTE: Rebuilding starts approximately after 3 minutes after turning OFF and then ON the power. • HDD 1 (Slot 1): The green LED blinks. • HDD 2 (Slot 2): The green and red LEDs blink.



1496



9. Installation



■ Essential Items to Be Performed Before Installation



CAUTION: Although the red cable shown below may sometimes be supplied in lieu of the HDD Cable 2 (Blue), the procedure for connecting the red cable is the same as that for the blue cable. When connecting the cable to the Controller PCB, make sure to first confirm that the sticker [B] is attached to the cable and then connect the cable to the Controller PCB.



• Turn OFF the main power of the host machine, and disconnect the power plug from the outlet. WARNING: • If performing work without disconnecting the power plug of the host machine, it may cause electrical shock. • If disconnecting the power plug without turning OFF the main power, it may cause damage of the machine. • When turning OFF the main power, follow the below procedure. 1. Turn OFF the main power switch of the host machine. 2. The display in the Control Panel and the lamp of the main power are turned off.



HDD Cable 2 (Red)



■ Installation Procedure [1] HDD Cable 2 (Blue) X1



[2] HDD Connector Support Plate X 1



CAUTION: Be sure to perform“Removing the HDD Box Unit” on page 1464 before performing the following work.



● Installing the HDD Mirroring Kit [3] Screw (TP; M3x6) X 2



[4] Screw (TP; M3x8 Black) X 2



1. Remove the HDD Wrong Insertion Prevention Plate. (The removed parts will not be used.) • 1 Screw • 1 Protrusion



1x Protrusion



• Guides are included



1497



9. Installation



2. Assemble the HDD Cable 2 (Blue or Red) and the HDD Connector Support Plate.



4. Install the HDD Side Cover. • 4 Bosses • 4 Screws (Use the removed screws)



• 2 Bosses • 2 Screws (TP; M3x8 Black)



4x



2x Boss Boss



Boss



TP; M3x8 Black



5. Put the 4 cables through the hole, and install the HDD Unit according to the marking lines.



3. Install the assembled HDD Cable 2 Unit to the HDD Unit.



• 4 Screws (Use the removed screws)



• 2 Bosses • 2 Screws (TP; M3x6)



4x



TP; M3x6



2x



Boss



Boss



Marking Line



1498



9. Installation 9. Connect the HDD Cable 2 (Blue) or the HDD Cable 2 (Red) with a sticker labeled [B] to [B] on the Controller PCB.



6. Install the HDD Outside Cover, and close the HDD Lid.



• 2 Connectors



• 1 Protrusion • 4 Screws (Use the removed screws)



< When using the HDD Cable 2 (Blue) > [A]



4x



Protrusion



[B]



4x



7. Put the 4 cables through the hole, and install the HDD Box Unit. • 2 Hooks • 2 Screws (Use the removed screws)



Hook



< When using the HDD Cable 2 (Red) > [A]



2x



[B]



4x



CAUTION: Be sure to connect the communication cable to the correct port. The HDD error occurs.



8. Connect the HDD Cable 1 (Red) to [A] on the Controller PCB. • 2 Connectors



1499



9. Installation



10. Insert the Main Controller PCB 1 until it stops.



12. Open the HDD Lid.



• 1 Connector



1x



Connector Handle



● Assembling and Installing the Option HDD



CAUTION: Be sure to push [A] part hard to install it, otherwise the connector may not be connected properly.



1. Fit the Hinge Pin of the HDD Holder Hinge with the groove of the HDD Case Hinge Base to install it to the HDD Case. • 2 Bosses • 2 Screws (P Tightening; M3x8)



[A]



Boss



2x



11. Install the Side Cover. Do not close the Right Rear Cover 1 yet here. • 1 Hook • 2 Screws



P Tightening ; M3x8



2x



Hook



1500



9. Installation



5. Install the Option HDD to the Slot 2 (Left).



2. Install the assembled HDD Case to the HDD. • 4 Screws (Sems; M3x4)



Sems; M3x4



6. Close the HDD Lid. • 1 Screw (Use the removed screws)



4x



1x 3. Install the First Option HDD to the Slot 1 (Left).



7. Close the Right Rear Cover 1.



4. Assemble the Second Option HDD with same steps of Step 1 to Step 2.



■ HDD Initialization Procedure 1. Requirements 1. PC Service Support Tool in the version that supports this host machine must be installed. 2. Cross Ethernet Cable (when SST is used)



1501



9. Installation



■ Setting the Mirroring



2. Preparing for the Installation of the System Software of Host machine 1. If both PC and the machine are on, turn them off. 2. Connect the PC and the host machine using an Cross Ethernet cable. (when SST is used) 3. Turn on the PC.



1. Set the setting value for the mirroring to "1" in the following service mode. COPIER > OPTION > FNC-SW > W/RAID



3. Registering the system software



2. Turn OFF/ON the main power of the host machine to enable the setting value.



1. Insert the latest System Software into the PC using the SST. 2. Start the SST. 3. Click 'Register Firmware'. 4. Select the drive where the system software has been inserted, and click the [SEARCH] button. 5. Click the [REGISTER] button. 6. Click [OK].



3. Make sure that the UI screen is activated correctly. 4. Open the Cover, and make sure that the LED blinks. NOTE: Rebuilding starts approximately after 3 minutes after turning OFF and then ON the power. • HDD 1 (Slot 1): The green LED blinks. • HDD 2 (Slot 2): The green and red LEDs blink.



4. Initializing HDD



1. Start the host machine with download mode in safe mode. 2. Start the SST. 3. Select the model. Then, select [Single] and click [Start]. 4. Click [Format HDD]. 5. Select [All], and click [Start]. 6. Click [Execute Format]. 7. The Format is executed. 8. Select [Shutdown/Restart], and click [Shutdown]. 9. Click [OK] 10. The power of the host machine is turned OFF. 11. Terminate the SST. 12. Disconnect the Cross Ethernet Cable from the machine, and connect the user's network cable to the machine.



CAUTION: Rebuild process starts after setting "1" for W/RAID. If an error occurs during the rebuild process at the initial installation the hard disk needs to be replaced. (Call service rep.), reexecute the process with the following procedure. 1. Check that the lighting red LED is HDD2. 2. Select "0" for the following service mode. COPIER > OPTION > FNC-SW > W/RAID 3. To enable the setting value, turn OFF/ON the Main Power Supply Switch of the host machine. 4. Select "1" for the following service mode. COPIER > OPTION > FNC-SW > W/RAID 5. To enable the setting value, turn OFF/ON the Main Power Supply Switch of the host machine. The foregoing procedure is limited to the rebuild process at the initial installation. An error during the rebuild process that is executed during operation is not included in the consideration.



1. Connect the USB flash drive to the PC. 2. Start up SST, and click the USB icon displayed in the target selection screen. 3. Select the drive, the model series, and the version to be written to the USB flash drive, and click [Confirm]. 4. Click [Start], and after the version has been written to the USB flash drive, click [OK] and then remove the USB flash drive. 5. Terminate the SST. 6. Connect the USB flash drive to the host machine, and start the host machine with download mode in safe mode. 7. When the USB menu is displayed, press keys on the Control Panel in the order shown below. • [4]: Clear/Format • [1]: Disk Format • [0]: OK • Press any keys. • [C]: Return to menu • [Reset] : Start shutdown sequence • [0]: OK (The power of the host machine is turned OFF automatically.) 8. Remove the USB flash drive. 9. Turn ON the main power switch.



■ Executing Auto Gradation Adjustment When the high-capacity HDD is installed, the machine initializes its HDD, resetting the data used for auto gradation correction. Therefore, execute full adjustment of auto gradation adjustment after installing the high-capacity HDD to enable proper images to be output.



■ Execution of the Minimum Installation Work Be sure to execute the minimum installation work in accordance with the Setup Guide because HDD is initialized when the high-capacity HDD is installed.



1502



9. Installation



[TYPE-7] 2 Option HDDs (1TB) + Removable HDD Kit + HDD Mirroring Kit



[1] iVDR Cable 1 (Red) (A: HDD-Sig1/Pow1) X1



[2] iVDR Cable 2 (Blue) (A: HDD-Sig2/Pow2) X1



[3] Conversion Connector X2



[4] Connector Fixation Block X 2



[5] R-HDD Label X 1



[6] HDD Caution Label X 1



■ Checking the Contents



[1] HDD X 1



[3] HDD Holder Hinge X 1



[5] Screw (Sems ; M3x4) X 4



[2] HDD Case X 1



[4] HDD Case Hinge Base X 1



[6] Screw (P Tightening ; M3x8) X 2 [7] Screw (P Tightening; M3x8) X 4



1503



9. Installation



■ Installation Procedure



NOTE: The red cable shown below may sometimes be supplied in lieu of the HDD Cable 2 (Blue).



CAUTION: Be sure to perform“Removing the HDD Box Unit” on page 1464 before performing the following work.



● Installing the Removable HDD Kit



1. Remove the HDD Wrong Insertion Prevention Plate. (The removed parts will not be used.) • 1 Screw • 1 Protrusion



HDD Cable 2 (Red)



[1] HDD Cable 2 (Blue) X1



[2] HDD Connector Support Plate X 1



[3] Screw (TP; M3x6) X 2



[4] Screw (TP; M3x8 Black) X 2



1x Protrusion



2. Remove the HDD Cable Unit.



• Guides are included



• 2 Screws (will be used in step 4) • 2 Bosses



■ Essential Items to Be Performed Before Installation



2x Boss



• Turn OFF the main power of the host machine, and disconnect the power plug from the outlet. Boss



WARNING: • If performing work without disconnecting the power plug of the host machine, it may cause electrical shock. • If disconnecting the power plug without turning OFF the main power, it may cause damage of the machine. • When turning OFF the main power, follow the below procedure. 1. Turn OFF the main power switch of the host machine. 2. The display in the Control Panel and the lamp of the main power are turned off.



3. Remove the HDD Cable 1 from the HDD Connector Support Plate, and replace it with the iVDR Cable 1



1504



9. Installation (Red) (A: HDD-Sig1/Pow1). (The removed cable will not be used.)



5. Assemble the iVDR Cable 2 (Blue) (A: HDD-Sig2/ Pow2) and the HDD Connector Support Plate.



• 2 Bosses • 2 Screws



• 2 Bosses • 2 Screws (TP; M3x8 Black)



2x 2x



2x



TP; M3x8 Black



Boss



6. Install the assembled iVDR Cable 2 (Blue) (A: HDDSig2/Pow2). • 2 Bosses • 2 Screws (TP; M3x6) Boss



4. Install the assembled iVDR Cable 1 (Red) (A: HDDSig1/Pow1).



TP; M3x6



• 2 Bosses • 2 Screws (screws removed in step 2)



2x



2x Boss



Boss Boss



1505



9. Installation



10. Install the HDD Outside Cover, and close the HDD Lid.



7. Install the HDD Side Cover. • 4 Bosses • 4 Screws (Use the removed screws)



• 1 Protrusion • 4 Screws (Use the removed screws)



4x 4x Boss



Protrusion Boss



8. Put the 4 cables through the hole, and install the HDD Unit according to the marking lines.



11. Put the 4 cables through the hole, and install the HDD Box Unit.



• 4 Screws (Use the removed screws)



• 2 Hooks • 2 Screws (Use the removed screws)



4x Hook



2x



Marking Line



9. Open the HDD Lid, and affix the HDD Caution Label in the appropriate language according to the marking lines on the HDD Cap.



CAUTION: • Be sure to connect the communication cable to the correct port. The HDD error occurs.



12. Connect the iVDR Cable 1 (Red) (A: HDD-Sig1/Pow1) to [A] on the Controller PCB. • 2 Connectors



Marking Line



1506



9. Installation CAUTION: Be sure to push [A] part hard to install it, otherwise the connector may not be connected properly.



13. Connect the iVDR Cable 2 (Blue) (A: HDD-Sig2/ Pow2) to [B] on the Controller PCB. • 2 Connectors [A]



[A]



[B]



4x



15. Install the Side Cover. Do not close the Right Rear Cover 1 yet here. • 1 Hook • 2 Screws



2x



14. Insert the Main Controller PCB 1 until it stops. • 1 Connector Hook



1x



Connector Handle



1507



9. Installation



● Assembling and Installing the Option HDD (First HDD)



3. Install the Conversion Connector. CAUTION: Be sure that there is no gap between the HDD Connector and the Conversion Connector.



1. Fit the Hinge Pin of the HDD Holder Hinge with the groove of the HDD Case Hinge Base to install it to the HDD Case. • 2 Bosses • 2 Screws (P Tightening; M3x8) (included with Option HDD)



Boss



1x



2x



4. Install the Connector Fixation Block. • 2 Bosses • 2 Screws (P Tightening; M3x8) (included with Removable HDD Kit) Boss



P Tightening ; M3x8



2. Install the assembled HDD Case to the HDD. • 4 Screws (Sems; M3x4)



P Tightening; M3x8



2x



Sems; M3x4



4x



1508



9. Installation CAUTION: • Be sure to firmly hold the Connector Fixation Block when tightening the screws. • Be sure to follow the correct order to tighten the screws, otherwise the Conversion Connector may not be connected properly, resulting in poor contact.



6. Open the HDD Lid.



7. Install the First Option HDD to the Slot 1 (Left).



5. Affix the label "HDD No.1" to the HDD Holder Hinge. Write down the serial number of the host machine to the label for recording the number, and affix it to the area indicated in the figure.



HDD No.



Serial No.



XXXXXXXX



1509



9. Installation



● Assembling and Installing the Option HDD (Second HDD)



3. Install the Conversion Connector. CAUTION: Be sure that there is no gap between the HDD Connector and the Conversion Connector.



1. Fit the Hinge Pin of the HDD Holder Hinge with the groove of the HDD Case Hinge Base to install it to the HDD Case. • 2 Bosses • 2 Screws (P Tightening; M3x8) (included with Option HDD)



Boss



1x



2x



4. Install the Connector Fixation Block. • 2 Bosses • 2 Screws (P Tightening; M3x8) (included with Removable HDD Kit) Boss



P Tightening ; M3x8



2. Install the assembled HDD Case to the HDD. • 4 Screws (Sems; M3x4)



P Tightening; M3x8



2x



Sems; M3x4



4x



1510



9. Installation CAUTION: • Be sure to firmly hold the Connector Fixation Block when tightening the screws. • Be sure to follow the correct order to tighten the screws, otherwise the Conversion Connector may not be connected properly, resulting in poor contact.



7. Close the HDD Lid.



8. Be sure to request the user to padlock the removable HDD to discourage theft. 5. Affix the label "HDD No.2" to the HDD Holder Hinge. Write down the serial number of the host machine to the label for recording the number, and affix it to the area indicated in the figure.



9. Close the Right Rear Cover 1.



HDD No.



■ HDD Initialization Procedure SerialNo.



1. Requirements XXXXXXXX



1. PC Service Support Tool in the version that supports this host machine must be installed. 2. Cross Ethernet Cable (when SST is used)



6. Install the Option HDD to the Slot 2 (Right).



2. Preparing for the Installation of the System Software of Host machine 1. If both PC and the machine are on, turn them off. 2. Connect the PC and the host machine using an Cross Ethernet cable. (when SST is used) 3. Turn on the PC.



1511



9. Installation



■ Setting the Mirroring



3. Registering the system software 1. Insert the latest System Software into the PC using the SST. 2. Start the SST. 3. Click 'Register Firmware'. 4. Select the drive where the system software has been inserted, and click the [SEARCH] button. 5. Click the [REGISTER] button. 6. Click [OK].



1. Set the setting value for the mirroring to "1" in the following service mode. COPIER > OPTION > FNC-SW > W/RAID 2. Turn OFF/ON the main power of the host machine to enable the setting value.



4. Initializing HDD



3. Make sure that the UI screen is activated correctly.



1. Start the host machine with download mode in safe mode. 2. Start the SST. 3. Select the model. Then, select [Single] and click [Start]. 4. Click [Format HDD]. 5. Select [All], and click [Start]. 6. Click [Execute Format]. 7. The Format is executed. 8. Select [Shutdown/Restart], and click [Shutdown]. 9. Click [OK] 10. The power of the host machine is turned OFF. 11. Terminate the SST. 12. Disconnect the Cross Ethernet Cable from the machine, and connect the user's network cable to the machine.



4. Open the Cover, and make sure that the LED blinks. NOTE: Rebuilding starts approximately after 3 minutes after turning OFF and then ON the power. • HDD 1 (Slot 1): The green LED blinks. • HDD 2 (Slot 2): The green and red LEDs blink.



CAUTION: Rebuild process starts after setting "1" for W/RAID. If an error occurs during the rebuild process at the initial installation the hard disk needs to be replaced. (Call service rep.), reexecute the process with the following procedure. 1. Check that the lighting red LED is HDD2. 2. Select "0" for the following service mode. COPIER > OPTION > FNC-SW > W/RAID 3. To enable the setting value, turn OFF/ON the Main Power Supply Switch of the host machine. 4. Select "1" for the following service mode. COPIER > OPTION > FNC-SW > W/RAID 5. To enable the setting value, turn OFF/ON the Main Power Supply Switch of the host machine. The foregoing procedure is limited to the rebuild process at the initial installation. An error during the rebuild process that is executed during operation is not included in the consideration.



1. Connect the USB flash drive to the PC. 2. Start up SST, and click the USB icon displayed in the target selection screen. 3. Select the drive, the model series, and the version to be written to the USB flash drive, and click [Confirm]. 4. Click [Start], and after the version has been written to the USB flash drive, click [OK] and then remove the USB flash drive. 5. Terminate the SST. 6. Connect the USB flash drive to the host machine, and start the host machine with download mode in safe mode. 7. When the USB menu is displayed, press keys on the Control Panel in the order shown below. • [4]: Clear/Format • [1]: Disk Format • [0]: OK • Press any keys. • [C]: Return to menu • [Reset] : Start shutdown sequence • [0]: OK (The power of the host machine is turned OFF automatically.) 8. Remove the USB flash drive. 9. Turn ON the main power switch.



■ Executing Auto Gradation Adjustment When the high-capacity HDD is installed, the machine initializes its HDD, resetting the data used for auto gradation correction. Therefore, execute full adjustment of auto gradation adjustment after installing the high-capacity HDD to enable proper images to be output.



■ Execution of the Minimum Installation Work Be sure to execute the minimum installation work in accordance with the Setup Guide because HDD is initialized when the high-capacity HDD is installed.



1512



9. Installation



Super G3 FAX Board-AS1



Checking the Contents



Product Name



[1] FAX Unit X 1



[2] Screw (TP; M3x4 Black) X 1



[3] Modular Label X 1



[4] Fax Approval Labele X1



Safety regulations require the product's name to be registered. In some regions where this product is sold, the following name may be registered instead. • F632501



Points to Note at Installation • When installing the Super G3 2nd Line Fax Board and this equipment at the same time, after checking "Checking the Contents", and install them following the Installation Procedure for Super G3 2nd Line Fax Board. • For "Checking the Operation", refer to this document.



Included for USA and Taiwan



Essential Items to Be Performed Before Installation



[5] Telephone Cord (2 Contact type) X 1



[6] Telephone Cord (6 Contact type) (only for Europe) X 1



[7] PTT Cable (only for Asia) X 1



[8] PTT Plug (Only for France) X 1



[9] PTT Plug (Only for Germany) X 1



[10] PTT Plug (Only for U.K.) X 1



• Turn OFF the main power of the host machine, and disconnect the power plug from the outlet. WARNING: • If performing work without disconnecting the power plug of the host machine, it may cause electrical shock. • If disconnecting the power plug without turning OFF the main power, it may cause damage of the machine. • When turning OFF the main power, follow the below procedure. 1. Turn OFF the main power switch of the host machine. 2. The display in the Control Panel and the lamp of the main power are turned off.



Installation Outline Drawing



[11] Modular Cover (only for Europe) X 1



* These are not used with this machine.



1513



9. Installation < Others > • Including guides



3. Remove the Face Cover. (The removed parts will not be used.)



Installation Procedure



• 1 Screw (used in the next step only in EUR) • 1 Protrusion



1. Remove the Left Rear Cover.



1x



• 1 Claw • 1 Hook



Claw



Hook



2. Remove the Rear Cover 2. • 3 Screws • 2 Protrusions



NOTE: This step is only for Europe.



4. Install the Modular Cover.



3x



• 1 Protrusion • 1 Screw (use the screw removed in the previous step)



1x



Protrusion



1514



9. Installation



7. Affix the following FAX Approval Label.



5. Remove the tape and, install the Fax Unit.



• [A] For USA • [B] For Taiwan



• 2 Protrusions • 1 Screw (TP; M3x4: Black) CAUTION: • Be careful not to damage the [A] part of the speaker as the wiring may be broken. • Be sure to tighten the screw while holding the FAX Unit. • After tightening the screw of the FAX Unit, check for any backlash. If there is backlash, tighten the screw again with the protrusion precisely fitted. [A]



[A] [B]



Protrusion



TP; M3x4 (Black)



8. Affix the appropriate Modular Label to the place shown in the figure.



Protrusion



1x



6. Connect the 2 cables of the FAX Unit. • 2 Connectors



2x



1515



9. Installation



11. Install the Rear Cover 2. • 2 Protrusions • 3 Screws



NOTE: This step is only for Europe. Do not connect the Telephone Cord (2 contact type) with the PTT Plug.



3x 9. Connect the PTT Plug matched the field or area to the PTT Cable (6 contact type).



Protrusion



1x 12. Install the Left Rear Cover. • 1 Hook • 1 Claw



Claw



10. Connect the end of the PTT Cable or Telephone Cord to the modular jack on the Host machine, and connect the other end to the modular jack on the wall. Hook



1x 13. Connect the Power Plug to the outlet. 14. Turn ON the main power switch. CAUTION: If the machine does not recognize this equipment, unplug and then plug the power plug after turning OFF the main power switch, or turn OFF the main power switch and then turn it ON within 20 seconds. To avoid this symptom, unplug the power plug or turn the breaker OFF when installing.



Checking the Operation ■ Type Setting Select the country/region of the FAX Board in Service Mode: FAX > Type > TYPE



1516



9. Installation This setting performs the parameter settings to match the communication specification of the country/region.



2. Send the test document from this machine to another machine that can handle the communication test to check that this machine can send the data correctly.



1. From the following service mode, set the TYPE of country/region to install this machine, and then press OK.



3. Send the test document from the target to this machine to check if the machine can receive the document properly.



FAX > TYPE > TYPE 2. Confirm that service mode parameter below is "0". In the case, parameter is "1", change to "0". COPIER > OPTION > DSPLY-SW > SDTM-DSP NOTE: To change parameter to "0" makes no show below [Settings/Registration > Preferences > Time/Energy Settings > Auto Shutdown Time] and auto shut down is not available.



3. Turn OFF/ON the main power switch to enable this setting.



■ Basic Setting NOTE: • When "System Manager Information Settings" is set, be sure to follow the direction of user administrator in order to log in as an administrator. • This setting can also be set from the Setup Guide ([Settings/Registration] > [Management Settings] > [License/Other] > [Start Setup Guide]).



In this section, make only minimum settings required for FAX communication.



1. Set the user telephone number. [Settings/Registration] > [Function Settings] > [Send] > [Fax Settings] > [Set Line] > [Line 1] > [Register Unit Telephone Number] > Enter the fax number > [OK] 2. Set Type of telephone line. [Settings/Registration] > [Function Settings] > [Send] > [Fax Settings] > [Set Line] > [Line 1] > [Select Line Type] > Select the line type to connect > [OK] 3. Turn OFF/ON the main power switch after setting the user telephone numbers and the type of telephone line.



■ FAX Communication Test Perform communication test to check if FAX function works correctly.



1. Switch the control panel display to Send/Fax display.



1517



9. Installation



Super G3 FAX Board-AS2



Checking the Contents



Product Name



[1] FAX Unit X 1



[2] Screw (TP; M3x4 Black) X 1



[3] Modular Label X 1



[4] Fax Approval Labele X1



Safety regulations require the product's name to be registered. In some regions where this product is sold, the following name may be registered instead. • F632501



Points to Note at Installation • When installing the Super G3 2nd Line Fax Board and this equipment at the same time, after checking "Checking the Contents", and install them following the Installation Procedure for Super G3 2nd Line Fax Board. • For "Checking the Operation", refer to this document.



Essential Items to Be Performed Before Installation



[5] Telephone Cord (2 Contact type) X 1



• Turn OFF the main power of the host machine, and disconnect the power plug from the outlet. WARNING: • If performing work without disconnecting the power plug of the host machine, it may cause electrical shock. • If disconnecting the power plug without turning OFF the main power, it may cause damage of the machine.



< Others > • Including guides



Installation Procedure • When turning OFF the main power, follow the below procedure. 1. Turn OFF the main power switch of the host machine. 2. The display in the Control Panel and the lamp of the main power are turned off.



1. Remove the Left Rear Cover. • 1 Claw • 1 Hook



Installation Outline Drawing



Claw



Hook



1518



9. Installation



2. Remove the Rear Cover 2.



4. Remove the tape and, install the Fax Unit.



• 3 Screws • 2 Protrusions



• 2 Protrusions • 1 Screw (TP; M3x4: Black) CAUTION: • Be careful not to damage the [A] part of the speaker as the wiring may be broken. • Be sure to tighten the screw while holding the FAX Unit. • After tightening the screw of the FAX Unit, check for any backlash. If there is backlash, tighten the screw again with the protrusion precisely fitted.



3x



Protrusion [A]



3. Remove the Face Cover. (The removed parts will not be used.) • 1 Screw • 1 Protrusion Protrusion



TP; M3x4 (Black) Protrusion



1x



1x



5. Connect the 2 cables of the FAX Unit. • 2 Connectors



2x



1519



9. Installation 9. Install the Rear Cover 2. • 2 Protrusions • 3 Screws



6. Affix the following FAX Approval Label.



3x



Protrusion



10. Install the Left Rear Cover. • 1 Hook • 1 Claw



7. Affix the appropriate Modular Label to the place shown in the figure.



Claw



Hook



11. Connect the Power Plug to the outlet. 12. Turn ON the main power switch. CAUTION: If the machine does not recognize this equipment, unplug and then plug the power plug after turning OFF the main power switch, or turn OFF the main power switch and then turn it ON within 20 seconds. To avoid this symptom, unplug the power plug or turn the breaker OFF when installing.



8. Connect the end of the Telephone Cord to the modular jack on the Host machine, and connect the other end to the modular jack on the wall.



1x



Checking the Operation ■ Type Setting Select the country/region of the FAX Board in Service Mode: FAX > Type > TYPE This setting performs the parameter settings to match the communication specification of the country/region.



1520



9. Installation communication test to check that this machine can send the data correctly.



1. From the following service mode, set the TYPE of country/region to install this machine, and then press OK.



3. Send the test document from the target to this machine to check if the machine can receive the document properly.



FAX > TYPE > TYPE 2. Confirm that service mode parameter below is "0". In the case, parameter is "1", change to "0". COPIER > OPTION > DSPLY-SW > SDTM-DSP NOTE: To change parameter to "0" makes no show below [Settings/Registration > Preferences > Time/Energy Settings > Auto Shutdown Time] and auto shut down is not available.



3. Turn OFF/ON the main power switch to enable this setting.



■ Basic Setting NOTE: • When "System Manager Information Settings" is set, be sure to follow the direction of user administrator in order to log in as an administrator. • This setting can also be set from the Setup Guide ([Settings/Registration] > [Management Settings] > [License/Other] > [Start Setup Guide]).



In this section, make only minimum settings required for FAX communication.



1. Set the user telephone number. [Settings/Registration] > [Function Settings] > [Send] > [Fax Settings] > [Set Line] > [Line 1] > [Register Unit Telephone Number] > Enter the fax number > [OK] 2. Set Type of telephone line. [Settings/Registration] > [Function Settings] > [Send] > [Fax Settings] > [Set Line] > [Line 1] > [Select Line Type] > Select the line type to connect > [OK] 3. Turn OFF/ON the main power switch after setting the user telephone numbers and the type of telephone line.



■ FAX Communication Test Perform communication test to check if FAX function works correctly.



1. Switch the control panel display to Send/Fax display. 2. Send the test document from this machine to another machine that can handle the



1521



9. Installation



Super G3 2nd Line Fax BoardAS1



Checking the Contents [1] G3FAX Expansion PCB X 1



[2] Modular PCB X 1



[3] USB Cable X 1



[4] Modular Cable X 1



[5] Signal Cable X 1



[6] FAX Shield Plate X 1



[7] FAX Board Fixed Plate X1



[8] PCB Spacer (Long) X3



[9] PCB Spacer (Short) X1



[10] Modular Label X 1



Product Name Safety regulations require the product's name to be registered. In some regions where this product is sold, the following name may be registered instead. • F632502



Points to Note at Installation When installing the Super G3 FAX Board and this equipment at the same time, be sure to install them by referring to this document after checking "Checking the Contents" of Super G3 FAX Board.



Essential Items to Be Performed Before Installation • Turn OFF the main power of the host machine, and disconnect the power plug from the outlet. WARNING: • If performing work without disconnecting the power plug of the host machine, it may cause electrical shock. • If disconnecting the power plug without turning OFF the main power, it may cause damage of the machine. • When turning OFF the main power, follow the below procedure. 1. Turn OFF the main power switch of the host machine. 2. The display in the Control Panel and the lamp of the main power are turned off.



Installation Outline Drawing



1522



9. Installation [11] Dust Cover X 2



Installation Procedure



[12] Screw (TP; M3x4) X8



■ Preparation 1. Remove the Left Rear Cover. • 1 Claw • 1 Hook [13] Screw (Binding; M4x4) X 1



[14] Fax Approval Labele (only for Taiwan) X 1



Claw



[15] Telephone Cord (2 Contact type) X 1



[16] Telephone Cord (6 Contact type) (only for Europe) X 1 Hook



2. Remove the Rear Cover 2. [17] PTT Cable (only for Asia) X 1



• 3 Screws • 2 Protrusions



[18] PTT Plug (Only for France) X 1



3x



[19] PTT Plug (Only for Germany) X 1



[20] PTT Plug (Only for U.K.) X 1



Protrusion



NOTE: • When the Super G3 FAX Board is installed: Perform steps 3 and 4, and proceed to step 7. • When installing the Super G3 FAX Board at the same time: Proceed to step 5.



1523



9. Installation



3. Disconnect the Telephone Cord of the FAX (1-Line).



5. Remove the Face Cover of the FAX (1-Line). (The removed parts will not be used.) • 1 Screw (used in the next step only in EUR) • 1 Protrusion



1x



1x



4. Remove the FAX Unit. • 2 Connectors • 1 Screw • 2 Protrusions CAUTION: Be careful not to damage the [A] part of the speaker as the wiring may be open circuit. NOTE: This step is only for Europe.



2x 6. Install the Modular Cover. • 1 Protrusion • 1 Screw (use the screw removed in the previous step)



1x [A]



1x Protrusion



1524



9. Installation



2. Install the Signal Cable to the FAX Unit.



7. Remove the Face Cover of the FAX (2-Line). (The removed parts will not be used.)



• 3 Cable Guides



• 1 Screw • 1 Protrusion



1x



1x



3x



■ Installing the Equipment



3. Install the Modular Cable to the Modular PCB.



1. Free the Cable from the Wire Saddle.



1x 1x



1525



9. Installation



4. Install the Modular PCB to the FAX Unit.



5. Install the FAX Unit to the Host Machine.



• 2 Screws (TP; M3x4)



• 2 Protrusions • 1 Screw (TP; M3x4 Black) (Use the removed screw or those included with the Super G3 FAX Board) CAUTION: • Be careful not to damage the [A] part of the speaker as the wiring may be broken. • Be sure to tighten the screw while holding the FAX Unit. • After tightening the screw of the FAX Unit, check for any backlash. If there is backlash, tighten the screw again with the protrusion precisely fitted.



TP; M3x4



2x



[A]



Protrusion Protrusion



1x



1526



9. Installation



9. Install the FAX Board Fixed Plate.



6. Install the 2 Cable of the FAX Unit.



• 2 Bosses • 1 Screw (Binding; M4x4)



• 2 Connectors



2x Binding; M4x4



1x



Boss



7. Remove the 2 Screws. (will be used in next step)



2x



8. Install the FAX Shield Plate. • 2 Screws (screws removed in the previous step)



2x



1527



9. Installation



10. Remove the Screw and install the PCB Spacer (Short). (The removed screw will not be used.)



11. Install the 3 PCB Spacers (Long).



1x PCB Spacer (Long)



3x



12. Install the G3FAX Expansion PCB. • 6 Screws (TP; M3x4) PCB Spacer (Short)



NOTE: Because the 4 screws [A] need to be removed when installing the Super G3 3rd/4th Line Fax Board at the same time, it is efficient not to tighten them here.



1x



TP; M3x4



6x [A]



[A]



[A] [A]



1528



9. Installation



13. Install the Signal Cable, Power Supply Cable and USB Cable to the G3FAX Expansion PCB.



NOTE: When installing the Super G3 3rd/4th Line Fax Board at the same time, the following step is not necessary.



• 1 Wire Saddle NOTE: Because [A] of the USB Cable needs to be disconnected when installing the Super G3 3rd/4th Line Fax Board at the same time, it is efficient not to connect it here.



15. Secure the cable with the Wire Saddle.



1x



4x



[A]



1x



■ Subsequent Work



NOTE: The following work is required only when installing the Super G3 FAX Board at the same time.



Wire Saddle



1. Affix the following FAX Approval Label.



14. Pass the Modular Cable inside the Speaker Holder, and install the G3 FAX Control PCB.



• [A] For USA • [B] For Taiwan



• 1 Edge Saddle



1x Edge Saddle



1x



[A]



[B]



1529



9. Installation same time, connect the other end to the modular jack on the wall. NOTE: This step is only for Taiwan.



1x



2. Affix the following FAX Approval Label.



5. Connect the end of the PTT Cable or Telephone Cord to the modular jack on the Host machine, and connect the other end to the modular jack on the wall.



1x



NOTE: When installing the Super G3 3rd/4th Line Fax Board at the same time, the following step is not necessary.



3. Affix the appropriate Modular Label. If a label is already affixed, remove it and then affix the appropriate label.



NOTE: When installing the Super G3 3rd/4th Line Fax Board at the same time, the following step is not necessary.



6. Install the Dust Cover.



4. Connect the PTT Cable or Telephone Cord of the FAX (1-Line). When installing this equipment at the



1530



9. Installation 11. If a message prompting the user to update the version appears, press [Update] to automatically update the version of this equipment.



NOTE: When performing the following steps, it is efficient to install the cover after installing the Super G3 3rd/4th Line Fax Board in case of installing the fax board at the same time.



NOTE: If [Skip] is selected, a message prompting the user to update the version will appear every time the host machine is started. In the service mode (Lev. 2) shown below, it is possible to set not to display the message. COPIER > OPTION > FNC-SW > VER-CHNG



7. Install the Rear Cover 2. • 2 Protrusions • 3 Screws



Checking the Operation



3x



■ Type Settings Select the country/region of the FAX Board in Service Mode: FAX > Type > TYPE This setting performs the parameter settings to match the communication specification of the country/region.



1. From the following service mode, set the TYPE of country/region to install this machine, and then press OK.



Protrusion



FAX > TYPE > TYPE 8. Install the Left Rear Cover.



2. Confirm that service mode parameter below is "0". In the case, parameter is "1", change to "0".



• 1 Hook • 1 Claw



COPIER > OPTION > DSPLY-SW > SDTM-DSP NOTE: To change parameter to "0" makes no show below [Settings/Registration > Preferences > Time/Energy Settings > Auto Shutdown Time] and auto shut down is not available. Claw



3. Turn OFF/ON the main power switch to enable this setting.



■ Basic Settings Hook



NOTE: When "System Manager Information Settings" is set, be sure to follow the direction of user administrator in order to log in as an administrator.



9. Connect the power plug to the outlet. 10. Turn ON the main power switch.



In this section, make only minimum settings required for FAX communication.



CAUTION: If the machine does not recognize this equipment, unplug and then plug the power plug after turning OFF the main power switch, or turn OFF the main power switch and then turn it ON within 20 seconds. To avoid this symptom, unplug the power plug or turn the breaker OFF when installing.



1. Set the user telephone number. [Settings/Registration] > [Function Settings] > [Send] > [Fax Settings] > [Set Line] > [Line 2] > [Register Unit Telephone Number] > Enter FAX number > [OK]



1531



9. Installation 2. Set the type of telephone line. [Settings/Registration] > [Function Settings] > [Send] > [Fax Settings] > [Set Line] > [Line 2] > [Select Line Type] > Select the line type to connect > [OK] 3. Turn OFF/ON the main power switch after setting the user telephone numbers and the type of telephone line.



■ FAX Communication Test Perform communication test to check if FAX function works correctly.



1. Switch the control panel display to Fax display. 2. Select the sending line. Press [Fax] > [Options] > [Select Line], select the added line, then press [OK] button. 3. Send and receive a test original between the equipment and a remote unit with which a communication test can be performed and check if it can be sent and receive correctly. 1. Press [Status Monitor/Cancel] > [Send] > [Job Log] and select [Fax] from pull down menu. 2. Press [Fax Activity Report] > [OutPut Normally] > [Start Printing]. 3. The number printed following colon (:) in "COMM.MODE" field on FAX ACTIVITY REPORT TX/RX shows line type used for sending/receiving. E.g. "ECM:2" => Line 2 NOTE: If E744-5000 error code (Fax software version mismatch error) occurred while sending or receiving fax, upgrade the firmware of 2-line Fax to the latest version.



1532



9. Installation



Super G3 2nd Line Fax BoardAS2



Checking the Contents [1] G3FAX Expansion PCB X 1



[2] Modular PCB X 1



[3] USB Cable X 1



[4] Modular Cable X 1



[5] Signal Cable X 1



[6] FAX Shield Plate X 1



[7] FAX Board Fixed Plate X1



[8] PCB Spacer (Long) X3



[9] PCB Spacer (Short) X1



[10] Modular Label X 1



Product Name Safety regulations require the product's name to be registered. In some regions where this product is sold, the following name may be registered instead. • F632502



Points to Note at Installation When installing the Super G3 FAX Board and this equipment at the same time, be sure to install them by referring to this document after checking "Checking the Contents" of Super G3 FAX Board.



Essential Items to Be Performed Before Installation • Turn OFF the main power of the host machine, and disconnect the power plug from the outlet. WARNING: • If performing work without disconnecting the power plug of the host machine, it may cause electrical shock. • If disconnecting the power plug without turning OFF the main power, it may cause damage of the machine. • When turning OFF the main power, follow the below procedure. 1. Turn OFF the main power switch of the host machine. 2. The display in the Control Panel and the lamp of the main power are turned off.



Installation Outline Drawing



1533



9. Installation [11] Dust Cover X 2



[12] Screw (TP; M3x4) X8



2. Remove the Rear Cover 2. • 3 Screws • 2 Protrusions



3x



[13] Screw (Binding; M4x4) X 1



[14] Telephone Cord (2 Contact type) X 1



Protrusion



NOTE: • When the Super G3 FAX Board is installed: Perform steps 3 and 4, and proceed to step 6. • When installing the Super G3 FAX Board at the same time: Proceed to step 5.



Installation Procedure ■ Preparation 1. Remove the Left Rear Cover. • 1 Claw • 1 Hook



3. Disconnect the Telephone Cord of the FAX (1-Line).



1x



Claw



Hook



1534



9. Installation



4. Remove the FAX Unit.



6. Remove the Face Cover of the FAX (2-Line). (The removed parts will not be used.)



• 2 Connectors • 1 Screw • 2 Protrusions



• 1 Screw • 1 Protrusion



CAUTION: Be careful not to damage the [A] part of the speaker as the wiring may be open circuit.



1x



2x



1x [A]



Protrusion



■ Installing the Equipment 5. Remove the Face Cover of the FAX (1-Line). (The removed parts will not be used.)



1. Free the Cable from the Wire Saddle.



• 1 Screw • 1 Protrusion



1x 1x



1535



9. Installation



4. Install the Modular PCB to the FAX Unit.



2. Install the Signal Cable to the FAX Unit.



• 2 Screws (TP; M3x4)



• 3 Cable Guides



TP; M3x4



2x



1x



3x



3. Install the Modular Cable to the Modular PCB.



1x



1536



9. Installation



5. Install the FAX Unit to the Host Machine.



6. Install the 2 Cable of the FAX Unit.



• 2 Protrusions • 1 Screw (TP; M3x4 Black) (Use the removed screw or those included with the Super G3 FAX Board)



• 2 Connectors



2x CAUTION: • Be careful not to damage the [A] part of the speaker as the wiring may be broken. • Be sure to tighten the screw while holding the FAX Unit. • After tightening the screw of the FAX Unit, check for any backlash. If there is backlash, tighten the screw again with the protrusion precisely fitted.



[A]



7. Remove the 2 Screws. (will be used in next step)



2x



Protrusion Protrusion



1x



8. Install the FAX Shield Plate. • 2 Screws (screws removed in the previous step)



2x



1537



9. Installation



9. Install the FAX Board Fixed Plate.



10. Remove the Screw and install the PCB Spacer (Short). (The removed screw will not be used.)



• 2 Bosses • 1 Screw (Binding; M4x4)



1x



Binding; M4x4



1x



Boss



PCB Spacer (Short)



1x



1538



9. Installation



13. Install the Signal Cable, Power Supply Cable and USB Cable to the G3FAX Expansion PCB.



11. Install the 3 PCB Spacers (Long).



• 1 Wire Saddle NOTE: Because [A] of the USB Cable needs to be disconnected when installing the Super G3 3rd/4th Line Fax Board at the same time, it is efficient not to connect it here.



PCB Spacer (Long)



3x



4x



[A]



1x



12. Install the G3FAX Expansion PCB. • 6 Screws (TP; M3x4) NOTE: Because the 4 screws [A] need to be removed when installing the Super G3 3rd/4th Line Fax Board at the same time, it is efficient not to tighten them here.



Wire Saddle



14. Pass the Modular Cable inside the Speaker Holder, and install the G3 FAX Control PCB. • 1 Edge Saddle TP; M3x4



1x Edge Saddle



6x 1x



[A]



[A]



[A] [A]



1539



9. Installation



NOTE: When installing the Super G3 3rd/4th Line Fax Board at the same time, the following step is not necessary.



NOTE: When installing the Super G3 3rd/4th Line Fax Board at the same time, the following step is not necessary.



2. Affix the appropriate Modular Label to the place shown in the figure.



15. Secure the cable with the Wire Saddle.



1x



■ Subsequent Work 3. Connect the Telephone Cord of the FAX (1Line).When installing this equipment at the same time,connect the other end to the modular jack on the wall.



NOTE: The following work is required only when installing the Super G3 FAX Board at the same time.



1x 1. Affix the following FAX Approval Label.



1540



9. Installation



4. Connect the end of the Telephone Cord to the modular jack on the Host machine, and connect the other end to the modular jack on the wall.



6. Install the Rear Cover 2. • 2 Protrusions • 3 Screws



1x



3x



Protrusion



7. Install the Left Rear Cover.



NOTE: When installing the Super G3 3rd/4th Line Fax Board at the same time, the following step is not necessary.



• 1 Hook • 1 Claw



5. Install the Dust Cover.



Claw



Hook



8. Connect the Power Plug to the outlet. 9. Turn ON the main power switch. NOTE: When performing the following steps, it is efficient to install the cover after installing the Super G3 3rd/4th Line Fax Board in case of installing the fax board at the same time.



CAUTION: If the machine does not recognize this equipment, unplug and then plug the power plug after turning OFF the main power switch, or turn OFF the main power switch and then turn it ON within 20 seconds. To avoid this symptom, unplug the power plug or turn the breaker OFF when installing.



1541



9. Installation 2. Set the type of telephone line.



10. If a message prompting the user to update the version appears, press [Update] to automatically update the version of this equipment.



[Settings/Registration] > [Function Settings] > [Send] > [Fax Settings] > [Set Line] > [Line 2] > [Select Line Type] > Select the line type to connect > [OK]



NOTE: If [Skip] is selected, a message prompting the user to update the version will appear every time the host machine is started. In the service mode (Lv.2) shown below, it is possible to set not to display the message. COPIER > OPTION > FNC-SW > VER-CHNG



3. Turn OFF/ON the main power switch after setting the user telephone numbers and the type of telephone line.



■ FAX Communication Test Perform communication test to check if FAX function works correctly.



Checking the Operation 1. Switch the control panel display to Fax display.



■ Type Settings



2. Select the sending line.



Select the country/region of the FAX Board in Service Mode: FAX > Type > TYPE This setting performs the parameter settings to match the communication specification of the country/region.



Press [Fax] > [Options] > [Select Line], select the added line, then press [OK] button. 3. Send and receive a test original between the equipment and a remote unit with which a communication test can be performed and check if it can be sent and receive correctly.



1. From the following service mode, set the TYPE of country/region to install this machine, and then press OK.



1. Press [Status Monitor/Cancel] > [Send] > [Job Log] and select [Fax] from pull down menu. 2. Press [Fax Activity Report] > [OutPut Normally] > [Start Printing]. 3. The number printed following colon (:) in "COMM.MODE" field on FAX ACTIVITY REPORT TX/RX shows line type used for sending/receiving. E.g. "ECM:2" => Line 2



FAX > TYPE > TYPE 2. Confirm that service mode parameter below is "0". In the case, parameter is "1", change to "0". COPIER > OPTION > DSPLY-SW > SDTM-DSP NOTE: To change parameter to "0" makes no show below [Settings/Registration > Preferences > Time/Energy Settings > Auto Shutdown Time] and auto shut down is not available.



NOTE: If E744-5000 error code (Fax software version mismatch error) occurred while sending or receiving fax, upgrade the firmware of 2-line Fax to the latest version.



3. Turn OFF/ON the main power switch to enable this setting.



■ Basic Settings NOTE: When "System Manager Information Settings" is set, be sure to follow the direction of user administrator in order to log in as an administrator.



In this section, make only minimum settings required for FAX communication.



1. Set the user telephone number. [Settings/Registration] > [Function Settings] > [Send] > [Fax Settings] > [Set Line] > [Line 2] > [Register Unit Telephone Number] > Enter FAX number > [OK]



1542



9. Installation



Super G3 3rd/4th Line Fax Board-AS1



Installation Outline Drawing



Product Name Safety regulations require the product's name to be registered. In some regions where this product is sold, the following name may be registered instead. • F632503



Points to Note at Installation • Install this equipment after installing the Super G3 FAX Board and Super G3 2nd Line Fax Board. • When installing Super G3 2nd Line Fax Board at the same time, start from "Installing the Equipment". • When installing this equipment later, start from "Preparation".



Essential Items to Be Performed Before Installation • Turn OFF the main power of the host machine, and disconnect the power plug from the outlet. WARNING: • If performing work without disconnecting the power plug of the host machine, it may cause electrical shock. • If disconnecting the power plug without turning OFF the main power, it may cause damage of the machine. • When turning OFF the main power, follow the below procedure. 1. Turn OFF the main power switch of the host machine. 2. The display in the Control Panel and the lamp of the main power are turned off.



1543



9. Installation



Installation Procedure



Checking the Contents [1] G3FAX Expansion PCB X 1



■ Preparation



[2] FAX Shield Plate X 1



1. Remove the Left Rear Cover. • 1 Claw • 1 Hook



[3] FAX Board Fixed Plate X 1



[4] PCB Spacer X 2



Claw



[5] Resin Spacer X 1



[6] Modular Label X 1 Hook



2. Remove the Rear Cover 2. • 3 Screws • 2 Protrusions [7] Modular Label X 1



[8] Telephone Cord X 2



[9] PTT Cable X 2 (only for Asia)



[10] Screw (TP; M3x4) X 2



3x



Protrusion



3. Disconnect the USB Cable of the G3FAX Expansion PCB side. [11] FAX Approval Label (only for Taiwan) X 1



1x



1544



9. Installation



■ Installing the Equipment 4. Free the Modular Cable from the Wire Saddle. (Close the Wire Saddle.) 1. Install the FAX Shield Plate. • 2 Screws (Use the removed screws or TP; M3x4 included with the FAX (2-Line))



1x



2x



5. Remove the 4 Screws. (will be used in Installing the Equipment)



4x



2. Install the FAX Board Fixed Plate. • 1 Boss • 1 Screw (TP; M3x4)



TP; M3x4



1x



Boss



1545



9. Installation



5. Connect the USB Cable.



3. Install the 2 PCB Spacers and Resin Spacer.



1x



2x



■ Subsequent Work 1. Install the Rear Cover 2. • 2 Protrusions • 3 Screws



3x 4. Install the G3FAX Expansion PCB. • Upper Side: 2 Screws (Use the removed screws or TP; M3x4 included with the FAX (2-Line)) • Lower Side: 1 Screw (TP; M3x4) • 1 Resin Spacer • 2 Connectors



Protrusion TP; M3x4



3x



2x



Resin Spacer



1546



9. Installation



4. Remove the 2 Dust Covers if installed. NOTE: This step is only for Taiwan.



CAUTION: Do not insert a screwdriver, etc. into the modular terminal.



2. Affix the following FAX Approval Label.



NOTE: Keep the removed Dust Cover.



5. Connect one of the 2 Telephone Cords or the 2 PTT Cables to the modular jack on the host machine and the other cord to the modular jack on the wall.



3. Affix the appropriate Modular Label. If a label is already affixed, remove it and then affix the appropriate label.



2x



1547



9. Installation 2. Confirm that service mode parameter below is "0". In the case, parameter is "1", change to "0".



6. Install the Left Rear Cover.



• COPIER > OPTION > DSPLY-SW > SDTM-DSP



• 1 Hook • 1 Claw



NOTE: To change parameter to "0" makes no show below [Settings/Registration > Preferences > Time/Energy Settings > Auto Shutdown Time] and auto shut down is not available. Claw



3. Turn OFF/ON the main power switch to enable this setting.



■ Basic Settings Hook



NOTE: When "System Manager Information Settings" is set, be sure to follow the direction of user administrator in order to log in as an administrator.



7. Connect the power plug to the outlet. In this section, make only minimum settings required for FAX communication.



8. Turn ON the main power switch. CAUTION: If the machine does not recognize this equipment, unplug and then plug the power plug after turning OFF the main power switch, or turn OFF the main power switch and then turn it ON within 20 seconds. To avoid this symptom, unplug the power plug or turn the breaker OFF when installing. If the host machine still does not recognize this equipment after performing the foregoing remedy: In the case of installing the Super G3 Fax Board (1-Line) and the Super G3 2nd Line Fax Board at the same time, it is necessary to turn OFF and then ON the power three times in some cases (no message is displayed on the Control Panel).



1. Set the user telephone number. [Settings/Registration] > [Function Settings] > [Send] > [Fax Settings] > [Set Line] > [Line 3]/[Line 4] > [Register Unit Telephone Number] > Enter FAX number > [OK] 2. Set the type of telephone line. [Settings/Registration] > [Function Settings] > [Send] > [Fax Settings] > [Set Line] > [Line 3]/[Line 4] > [Select Line Type] > Select the line type to connect > [OK] 3. Turn OFF/ON the main power switch after setting the user telephone numbers and the type of telephone line.



■ FAX Communication Test



Checking the Operation



Perform communication test to check if FAX function works correctly.



■ Type Settings Select the country/region of the FAX Board in Service Mode: FAX > Type > TYPE This setting performs the parameter settings to match the communication specification of the country/region.



1. Switch the control panel display to Fax display. 2. Select the sending line. Press [Fax] > [Options] > [Select Line], select the added line, then press [OK] button. 3. Send and receive a test original between the equipment and a remote unit with which a communication test can be performed and check if it can be sent and receive correctly.



1. From the following service mode, set the TYPE of country/region to install this machine, and then press OK. • Service Mode > FAX > Type > TYPE



1. Press [Status Monitor/Cancel] > [Send] > [Job Log] and select [Fax] from pull down menu. 2. Press [Fax Activity Report] > [OutPut Normally] > [Start Printing].



1548



9. Installation 3. The number printed following colon (:) in "COMM.MODE" field on FAX ACTIVITY REPORT TX/RX shows line type used for sending/receiving. E.g. "ECM:3" => Line 3



1549



9. Installation



Super G3 3rd4th Line Fax Board-AS2



Installation Outline Drawing



Product Name Safety regulations require the product's name to be registered. In some regions where this product is sold, the following name may be registered instead. • F632503



Points to Note at Installation • Install this equipment after installing the Super G3 FAX Board and Super G3 2nd Line Fax Board. • When installing Super G3 2nd Line Fax Board at the same time, start from "Installing the Equipment". • When installing this equipment later, start from "Preparation".



Essential Items to Be Performed Before Installation • Turn OFF the main power of the host machine, and disconnect the power plug from the outlet. WARNING: • If performing work without disconnecting the power plug of the host machine, it may cause electrical shock. • If disconnecting the power plug without turning OFF the main power, it may cause damage of the machine. • When turning OFF the main power, follow the below procedure. 1. Turn OFF the main power switch of the host machine. 2. The display in the Control Panel and the lamp of the main power are turned off.



1550



9. Installation



Checking the Contents [1] G3FAX Expansion PCB X 1



Installation Procedure ■ Preparation



[2] FAX Shield Plate X 1



1. Remove the Left Rear Cover. • 1 Claw • 1 Hook



[3] FAX Board Fixed Plate X 1



[4] PCB Spacer X 2



Claw



[5] Resin Spacer X 1



[6] Modular Label X 1 Hook



2. Remove the Rear Cover 2. • 3 Screws • 2 Protrusions [7] Modular Label X 1



[8] Telephone Cord X 2



[9] PTT Cable X 2 (only for Asia)



[10] Screw (TP; M3x4) X 2



3x



Protrusion



3. Disconnect the USB Cable of the G3FAX Expansion PCB side.



1x



1551



9. Installation



■ Installing the Equipment 4. Free the Modular Cable from the Wire Saddle. (Close the Wire Saddle.) 1. Install the FAX Shield Plate. • 2 Screws (Use the removed screws or TP; M3x4 included with the FAX (2-Line))



1x



2x



5. Remove the 4 Screws. (will be used in Installing the Equipment)



4x



2. Install the FAX Board Fixed Plate. • 1 Boss • 1 Screw (TP; M3x4)



TP; M3x4



1x



Boss



1552



9. Installation



5. Connect the USB Cable.



3. Install the 2 PCB Spacers and Resin Spacer.



1x



2x



■ Subsequent Work 1. Install the Rear Cover 2. • 2 Protrusions • 3 Screws



3x 4. Install the G3FAX Expansion PCB. • Upper Side: 2 Screws (Use the removed screws or TP; M3x4 included with the FAX (2-Line)) • Lower Side: 1 Screw (TP; M3x4) • 1 Resin Spacer • 2 Connectors



Protrusion TP; M3x4



2. Affix the appropriate Modular Label. If a label is already affixed, remove it and then affix the appropriate label.



3x



2x



Resin Spacer



1553



9. Installation



3. Remove the 2 Dust Covers if installed.



5. Install the Left Rear Cover. • 1 Hook • 1 Claw



CAUTION: Do not insert a screwdriver, etc. into the modular terminal.



NOTE: Keep the removed Dust Cover.



Claw



Hook



6. Connect the power plug to the outlet. 7. Turn ON the main power switch. CAUTION: If the machine does not recognize this equipment, unplug and then plug the power plug after turning OFF the main power switch, or turn OFF the main power switch and then turn it ON within 20 seconds. To avoid this symptom, unplug the power plug or turn the breaker OFF when installing. If the host machine still does not recognize this equipment after performing the foregoing remedy: In the case of installing the Super G3 Fax Board (1-Line) and the Super G3 2nd Line Fax Board at the same time, it is necessary to turn OFF and then ON the power three times in some cases (no message is displayed on the Control Panel).



4. Connect one of the 2 Telephone Cords or the 2 PTT Cables to the modular jack on the host machine and the other cord to the modular jack on the wall.



2x



Checking the Operation ■ Type Settings Select the country/region of the FAX Board in Service Mode: FAX > Type > TYPE This setting performs the parameter settings to match the communication specification of the country/region.



1. From the following service mode, set the TYPE of country/region to install this machine, and then press OK. • Service Mode > FAX > Type > TYPE



1554



9. Installation 3. The number printed following colon (:) in "COMM.MODE" field on FAX ACTIVITY REPORT TX/RX shows line type used for sending/receiving. E.g. "ECM:3" => Line 3



2. Confirm that service mode parameter below is "0". In the case, parameter is "1", change to "0". • COPIER > OPTION > DSPLY-SW > SDTM-DSP NOTE: To change parameter to "0" makes no show below [Settings/Registration > Preferences > Time/Energy Settings > Auto Shutdown Time] and auto shut down is not available.



3. Turn OFF/ON the main power switch to enable this setting.



■ Basic Settings NOTE: When "System Manager Information Settings" is set, be sure to follow the direction of user administrator in order to log in as an administrator.



In this section, make only minimum settings required for FAX communication.



1. Set the user telephone number. [Settings/Registration] > [Function Settings] > [Send] > [Fax Settings] > [Set Line] > [Line 3]/[Line 4] > [Register Unit Telephone Number] > Enter FAX number > [OK] 2. Set the type of telephone line. [Settings/Registration] > [Function Settings] > [Send] > [Fax Settings] > [Set Line] > [Line 3]/[Line 4] > [Select Line Type] > Select the line type to connect > [OK] 3. Turn OFF/ON the main power switch after setting the user telephone numbers and the type of telephone line.



■ FAX Communication Test Perform communication test to check if FAX function works correctly.



1. Switch the control panel display to Fax display. 2. Select the sending line. Press [Fax] > [Options] > [Select Line], select the added line, then press [OK] button. 3. Send and receive a test original between the equipment and a remote unit with which a communication test can be performed and check if it can be sent and receive correctly. 1. Press [Status Monitor/Cancel] > [Send] > [Job Log] and select [Fax] from pull down menu. 2. Press [Fax Activity Report] > [OutPut Normally] > [Start Printing].



1555



APPENDICES Service Tools.................................. 1557 General Timing Chart......................1559 General Circuit Diagram..................1562 Soft counter specifications ............. 1576 Removal.......................................... 1580 List of Service Modes That Can Be Restored...................................... 1583



Service Tools



Service Tools Special Tools In addition to the standard tools set, the following special tools are required when servicing the machine. Tool name



Tool No



Category



Appearance



Remarks



Digital multimeter



FY9-2002



A



Cover switch



TKN-0093



A



Tester extension pin



FY9-3038



A



Used as a probe ex-tension when makingelectrical checks.



Tester extension pin(Lshaped)



FY9-3039



A



Used as a probe ex-tension when makingelectrical checks.



Mirror positioning tool(front, rear)



FY9-3046-00 0



B



Used for positioning the mirror mount 1 and the mirror mount 2.



NA-3 Test Sheet



FY9-9196



A



Use for image adjustment / check



Used for electrical checks; for adjustment of laser power in com-bination with the laser power checker.



1557



Service Tools Tool name Electrode for checking potential sensor



Tool No



Category



FY9-3059-00 0



B



Appearance



Remarks Surface potential sensor for zero-level check



Reference: Category A: Must be kept by each service engineer. B: Must be kept by each group of about five engineers. C: Must be kept by each warkshop



Solvent/Oil List Solvent name



Location of use



Service parts number



Alcohol



External Covers, Control Panel, None (to be prepared by sales etc. company)



Super Lube Grease



Gears of the Fixing Assembly



FY9-6005



Tospearl 240



Drum Cleaner Blade



FY9-6007



MOLYKOTE EM-50L



Gears



HY9-0007



Conductive grease



Drum Sliding Assembly



FY9-6008



Drum cleaning powder



Cleaning of the Photosensitive Drum



FY9-6024



Oil Glass Cleaner



Cleaning of the surface of the Stream Reading Glass



FY9-6035



Cleaning cloth



Cleaning of the surface of the Stream Reading Glass



FC5-4430



1558



Caution Never put it close to fire



General Timing Chart



General Timing Chart Basic sequence at power ON Main power ON Print Unit



INITIAL



INITIAL ROTATION



STBY



Laser Scanner Motor(M44) ETB Motor(M43) Developing Motor(M02) Drum Motor(M01) Developing Clutch(CL01) Developing AC bias Developing DC bias Potential Sensor(EPC01) Developing DC bias Pre-transfer charging bias Pre-exposure LED Primary charging bias Transfer bias Fixing Motor(M03) Standby Temperature Control



Fixing Heater(H03) Duplex Feed Merging Motor(M32) Duplex Feed Left Motor(M19) Duplex Feed Right Motor(M18)



ETB Engagement CCW



Detachment



CCW



Delivery Motor(M13) Multi-purpose Tray Registration Front Motor(M33) Right Deck Pickup Solenoid(SL06) Registration Motor(M34) Reverse Motor(M14) Vertical Path Upper Motor(M26) * CW=Positive Rotation,CCW=Negative Rotation



1559



CW



General Timing Chart



Basic sequence at printing Start key ON Print Unit



STBY



INTR



PRINT



LSTR



STBY



Print Status PTOP Video Signal Laser Scanner Motor(M44) ETB Motor(M43) Developing Motor(M02) Drum Motor(M01) Developing Clutch(CL01) Developing AC bias Developing DC bias Potential Sensor(EPC01) Developing DC bias Pre-transfer charging bias Pre-exposure LED Primary charging bias Transfer bias Fixing Motor(M03) Standby Temperature Control



Fixing Heater(H03) Duplex Feed Left Motor(M19)



ETB Engagement



CCW



CCW



Reverse Upper Flapper Solenoid(SL05) Delivery Motor(M13) Multi-purpose Tray Registration Front Motor(M33) Right Deck Pickup Motor(M11) Right Deck Pickup Solenoid(SL06) Registration Motor(M34) Reverse Motor(M14) Vertical Path Upper Motor(M26)



CCW



CCW CW



* CW=Positive Rotation,CCW=Negative Rotation



1560



CCW CW



Detachment



General Timing Chart



Basic sequence at printing Start key ON Print Unit



STBY



INTR



PRINT



LSTR



STBY



Print Status PTOP Video Signal Laser Scanner Motor(M44) ETB Motor(M43) Developing Motor(M02) Drum Motor(M01) Developing Clutch(CL01) Developing AC bias Developing DC bias Potential Sensor(EPC01) Developing DC bias Pre-transfer charging bias Pre-exposure LED Primary charging bias Transfer bias Fixing Motor(M03) Standby Temperature Control



Fixing Heater(H03) Duplex Feed Merging Motor(M32) Duplex Feed Left Motor(M19) Duplex Feed Right Motor(M18)



CCW



CW



CW CW



CW CW



CCW



ETB Engagement



Reverse Upper Flapper Solenoid(SL05) Delivery Motor(M13) Multi-purpose Tray Registration Front Motor(M33) Right Deck Pickup Motor(M11) Right Deck Pickup Solenoid(SL06) Registration Motor(M34) Reverse Motor(M14) Vertical Path Upper Motor(M26)



CCW



CCW CW



CCW CW



* CW=Positive Rotation,CCW=Negative Rotation



1561



General Circuit Diagram



General Circuit Diagram 7



120V



F



6



100V(HIGH)



5



3 2 1



L



E



3



4



5



6



7



8



SOLD7



SOLD5



2



H(B)



1



FT46



FT47



MT7



SOLD6



2



J500



AC_H(B)



W



1 U



E



J3639F



T



R



2



CB1004



3 W T



4



Leakage Breaker



FT44



N(W)



H(B)



N(W) FT43 1 U R



2



CB1003



W T



4



Leakage Breaker



3



FT42



H(B)



N(W) FT41 1 U R



2



CB1002



Leakage Breaker



FT04 3 W T



4



J507F



1



FT15



2 2



SEESAW_OUT



1



2



J2



3



RMT_SYS_HT



1



2



3



GND



FT11 1



5VA



FT09



J801



FT13



GND



SW04 Cassette Heater Switch



GND



SW03 Environment Switch



5VB



1



12VSEESAW



J3639M



2 1



UN26



J803



D



2



J802 3



4



1



2



1



2



3



4



5



4



5



3



AC_N(W)



1



AC_N(W)



J810



4



1



AC_N(W)



3



2



AC_H(B)



J1



AC_H(B)



2



UN25 Choke Coil PCB



Noise Filter



J3012M 1



FT12



FT10



AC_H(B)



2



J3012F



2



1



J804M



1



2



3 1



F-6



2



To P.2



D



F



UN3



1



2



2



100V



2



1



Fixing Power Supply PCB



1



H(B)



3



100V



1



N



3 2 1



H(B)



N(W) FT29 1 U R



2



N(W)



FT14



CB1001



Leakage Breaker



E



UN86 1



GND



2



Relay PCB



P03



P02



3



200V



100V(LOW)



P04



P01



MT01



4



AC_N(W)



8



3



9



4



10



3



1



AC_H(B)



3



AC_H(B)



2



AC_H(B)



1



J602



200V



AC_N(W)



AC_H(B)



3



AC_N(W)



2



J602X



AC_N(W)



1



100V



AC_N(W)



AC_H(B)



200V



J810X



2



3



4



5



1



J607



J620



2



3



4



5



6



7



8



1



2



J601



J611



UN20



C



C



AC Driver PCB J604



J608 3



4



J610



1



2



3



4



5



6



7



1



2



3



4



5



6



7



1



2



3



4



5



6



7



1



2



J615 3



4



3



4



4



A



10



1



2



3



4



1



J102A



2



3



4



J102B



1



2



3



J681



UN4



UN5



UN6



UN7



DC Power Supply PCB



DC Power Supply PCB



DC Power Supply PCB



All-night Power Supply PCB



9



8



7



1



2



J613 3



4



5



6



7



8



9



1



13 12 11 10



9



8



7



6



5



5



6



7



8



9 10 11 12 13



2



3



J614 4



5



1



2



3



(V) 3



100V



3



2



4



J9020 1



2



3



POD Deck Lite-C1



J3119M



Paper Deck Unit-E1



To P.13



2



3



4



5



6



1



2



3



4



5



6



1



E-7



6



2



3



4



5



J3051L J3051LH



2



3



4



9



8



7



6



5



4



CRNT_SNS_REF_ANALOG



1



1



CST_H_SERIAL_DTC



3



2



1



TEST+12V



TEST+5V



4



3



2



1



4



3



2



1



2



3



J3174L



1



2



3



1



2



3



1



J3176M J3176F



J3638D 4



B



J127



F-3



6



C-8 2



3



J3174D J3174DH



B-1



To P.4



J220F 1



TEST +12V



TEST_GND



FIN_GND



6



CRNT_SNS_SERIAL_DTC



5



GND



2



CRNT_SNS_DTC_ANALOG



1



GND



J9019F



200V



2



1



AC_H(B)



N.C.



AC_H(B)



J9019M



J220M 1



6



AC_N(W)



AC_N(W)



AC_N(W)



AC_H(B)



200V AC_N(W)



J3173F



AC_H(B)



100V AC_H(B)



AC_N(W)



AC_H(B)



AC_N(W)



AC_H(B)



AC_N(W)



AC_H(B)



AC_H(B)



AC_N(W)



B



AC_N(W)



J3173M



J101A



5



(V)



2



N.C.



1



GND



3



DRUM_H_RESET



2



CST_H_ON



1



DRUM_H_SET



5



N.C.



4



N.C.



J603 3



AC_N(W)



2



AC_N(W)



1



N.C.



4



N.C.



3



N.C.



J606



2



N.C.



1



N.C.



J605



To P.6



To P.6



J3115F



H02



C-4



Multi Cassette Heater



A



To P.5



5



4



3



2



1



P.1



1562



General Circuit Diagram 10



9



8



7



6



5



4



3



2



1



To P.1 D-9



F



3



1



F



J804F



UN10



BL



BL



UN12



2



Modular PCB (1 line) N.C



2



J2



1



Modular PCB (2 to 4 lines)



J4



J1 2



3



4



5



6



1



2



3



4



5



6



7



8



SP_OUT



2 2



1



1



1



J751



N.C



4



T2



3



N.C



2



T1



L1



CT1



1



5



6



7



8



E



N.C.



E



CT2



SP1 L2



3_LINE_L1



2_LINE_L1



2_LINE_L2



4_LINE_L2



4_LINE_L1



3_LINE_L2



GND



1 1



Super G3 3rd/4th Line Fax Board-AF1



J3



#FC_USB_IN



J6 J4



UN11



1



GND



2



1



J8



UN12



2



J7



MONI_USB 3



2



J2



2



1



1



2



2



3



3



4



J2



UN9



Super G3 2nd Line Fax Board-AF1



Super G3 FAX Board-AF1



D



4



D J5 1



N.C. 2



J2



3



#RESET_FAX



#FCID



+3.3R



4



3



2



1



GND



5



#FCID_USB



6



#MODEM_SNS



7



#INT_FAX



8



#FOFFHK



#EXB_WE



#EXB_OE



EXB_ADDR8



EXB_DT7



EXB_DT6



EXB_ADDR7



GND



EXB_ADDR6



EXB_DT5



8



GND



7



EXB_DT3



6



EXB_ADDR5



5



EXB_DT4



EXB_ADDR3



EXB_DT2



4



EXB_ADDR4



EXB_DT0



3



EXB_DT1



EXB_ADDR1



2



9



9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31



C



J701 (J4011)



J780



UN8 Main Controller PCB 2



J4031



J4023



J4201



J781



8



7



6



5



4



3



2



1



1



2



3



4



5



19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10



9



8



7



6



5



4



3



2



SEESAW_OUT



GND



SHUTOFF_SW



J782



5VA



GND



DFRX-



DXRX+



SCTS



N.C.



9



SCMD-



+3.3R_RDINT_SNS



SPOWER



SPRDY-S



4



CPRDY-S



3



RCON_SNS_INT_N



2



SDOWNLD



1



DFRX_FRQCHG



4



4



SLIVEWAKE



GND



3



3



GND



USB_USER_DP



2



2



GND



+5S_USB2 1



1



USB_CARD_DP



4



GND



3



+5S_USB1



2



USB_CARD_DN



1



USB_USER_DN



19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10



SSTS-



J4023



B



1



1



EXB_ADDR2



+5C_FAX



+12S_UI_FAX



GND 2



SSTS+



+5A_WIFI or +5S



3



SCMD+



CN_USBWIFI_DP



4



SRTS



GND CN_USBWIFI_DN



USB



GND



1 2 3 4 5



WLAN PCB



J784



USB 1 2 3 4 5



UN45



5



GND



6



J704 (J4012)



J4013



GND



MINI_USB



GND



+12S_UI_FAX



1 2 3 4 5



C



N.C.



GND



USBFAX_DP



SET_RST_FAX_N



USBFAX_DN



+3.3R_FAX



31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10



#EXB_CS1



J1



1



N.C.



2



MINI_USB 1 2 3 4 5



3



J403



4



3



2



1



1



2



3



4



B



J3637D J3637LH J3637L



1



N.C.



E-4



To P.13 3



2



3



J3801



A



4



1



2



5 1



6



1



J3800



A



2



SW01 Power ON Switch



10



9



8



7



6



5



4



3



2



1



P.2



1563



General Circuit Diagram 10



9



8



7



6



5



4



3



2



1



FM14 Power Supply Cooling Fan 1



F



UN7



UN4



UN6



All-night Power Supply PCB



DC Power Supply PCB



DC Power Supply PCB



J692



J691 1



2



3



4



5



6



1



2



J693 3



1



2



J201X 3



4



1



2



3



UN5 DC Power Supply PCB



J202A 4



5



6



7



8



9



1



2



3



Power Supply Cooling Fan 2



J202B 4



5



6



7



8



9



10



1



2



3



4



5



6



7



8



9



J2134DH



10



3



2



1



J2134D J3224L J3224LH



1



3



2



2



J2154DH



3



J2154D



1 3



2



1



PS FAN2 ERR



N.C



10



GND



9



PS FAN2 ON



8



PS FAN1 ERR



7



GND



6



J513



PS FAN1 ON



GND



5



GND



4



GND



3



GND



2



24VB



1



24VB



10



1 2 3



E



24VB



9



GND



8



RMT_24VBP



7



J512



24VB



6



GND



5



GND



4



GND



3



24VA



2



GND



1



24VA



9



24VA



8



24VA



7



RMT_24VAP



6



J511



GND



5



GND



4



12V



3



GND



2



GND



1



12V



6



12V



5



12V



4



RMT_12VP



GND



3



GND



5VA



2



GND



5VA



5VA



1



J510



GND



J3224D



E



F



FM15



1 2 3



1



2



3



4



5



6



7



J509



UN86



D



D



Relay PCB



2



4



5



2



1



1



2



3



4



5



6



1



J101



2



3



4



5



7



1



2



3



4



5



6



7



UN79 Feed Driver PCB



1



10 11



2



3



4



5



6



7



8



7



6



5



4



3



2



1



8



9



C



GND



9



24VA IL



11 10



GND



7



24VB IL



6



GND



5



RMT_DCON



GND



4



SEESAW_OUT



PS_FAN_FULL_ON_CONT



3



1



2



3



4



5



1



2



3



4



5



J3102F J3102M



J5



UN8



6



UN78



9



RMT_SYS



NO SIGNAL



2



J201



Main Driver PCB



8



N.C.



3



J108



6



1



J9901 (J9001)



B



J520



J501 3



N.C



1



N.C



J508



2



N.C



1



PS_FAN_ERR_CONT



GND



24VA IL



8



GND



24VB



GND



12V



GND



24VA



GND



12V



GND



24VB



12VLOOPBACK



12V



NO SIGNAL



C



7



GND



6



RMT_RCON



5



R_PW_MONI



4



24VA IL



J519 3



GND



2



12V



1



GND



7



GND



6



5VA



5



5VA



4



GND



J516 3



5VA



2



GND



1



24VA IL



J515 3



N.C.



2



N.C.



1



N.C.



J522



Main Controller PCB 2



1



2



B



J3099F



J3218F



D-6



1



2



B-8



To P.5



To P.5



J2152



1



J2151



2



1



2



D-5



D-4



To P.6



To P.6



A



A



10



9



8



7



6



5



4



3



2



1



P.3



1564



10



J2160



BD PCB



UN33 4 3 2 1



J2159 M44 Laser Scanner Motor J9912



9 4 3 2 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8



8 9 10 11 13



12 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30



7 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 8 7 6 5 4 3 2



6



1565



Feed Driver PCB



5 J5005D A19 B17 1 2 3 4 5



1



UN79



J2169



UN31



Laser Driver PCB



A



4



1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9



9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1



24VB



GND



GND



24VB IL



GND



39 40



A9 B5



3



5



1



J461 1 1



J5004D J5004LH J5004L



To P.8



E-4



J3237F J3237M



2 3



1 2



9



J451 4 5



3



6



15 14 13 12 11 10



1 2 3 4



1 2 3 4



7



9



8



8



9



7



10 11 12 13 14 15



6 5 4 3



1 2



2



3 4



4



J514



1



J502 4 1



5 6



J9200



Deck Lattice



2



2 3 4 5 6



6 5



7 8



E-8



J3118M



To P.13



9



3



4 3



2



2



1 2 3 4



1 2 3 4



8



J401 1



MT26



5



7 6



1 N.C.



2



J518



1 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1



1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9



1



5R



3 5



J462 2



J9043P_BUS



A9



3



4 3



3



4



DOWNROAD_PC



2



GND



1



+3.3



PC_TXD



PC_RXD



GND



DCON_FUNC0



DCON_FUNC1



DDIP_LOCK



4



3



DCON_FUNC2



GND DDIP_SERDES_PDN



DDI_PRTS DDI_PPRTST



PCMD(DDI_RXD) DDI_PPOWER



DDI_PCTS



PSTS(DDI_TXD)



DDI_PSCNST



DDI_PPRDY



DDI_DCON_LINE



DDI_PPO1



DDI_INT_DCON



DDI_PCPRDY



DDIP_RESET(DDI_PPI2)



DDI_PLIVEWAKE



DDI_DOWNLD



GND



PBD



5



2



J442



4



2



6



J492DH J492D



5



3



7



4



6



4



8



3



FIN_DL_EN FIN_RESET FIN_DTC FtoP_RXD PtoF_TXD GND FIN_RMT



5



9



2



7



6



GND



PVREQ



GND



SMART_PW_ON



SMART_SNS_1



SMART_SNS_2



DDIP_SABU_RX



DDIP_SABU_TX



CN_USBDDIP_DN GND



DFTX_K_P



CN_USBDDIP_DP



GND



GND



DFTX_K_N



29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10



1



9



7



9



8



N.C.



8



8



GND 24VB GND 12V



9



7



CONNECT_LOOPBACK GND 24VB RMT_TEIHAN RMT_ENG24V GND 24VA_IL_DTC 24VB_IL_DTC 12LZ_DTC GND GND PS_FAN_FULL_ON_DCON PS_FAN_ERR_DCON GND CONNECT_DTC



10 11



6



GND



9



5



N.C



8



7



4



N.C



7 6



3



4



6 5



2



J517



5 4



1



9



4



3



7



8



3



2



6



6



2



1



5



5



J443



4



7



1



3



4



J432 2



3



DRV1_ANALOG_IF_CNCT_DTC



SMART_SNS2



SMART_SNS1



SMART_PW_ON



GND



3RD



3RD



3RD



2ND



1



DECK_RX GND DECK_D_MNT DECK_FEED_SNS DECK_PULL_SNS GND DECK_D_RESET GND DECK_TX



GND IH_ON_ENB



TO_DCON_IH_LIMIT



GND



GND



M2S-



FROM_DCON_IH_PWM0



M2S+



FROM_DCON_IH_PWM1



GND



FROM_DCON_IH_PWM2



CLK+



PACTH_VOP_ANALOG



CLK-



EPC_DTC_ANALOG



GND



DRV1_ANALOG_IF_CNCT



S2M+



GND



S2M-



1ST



2ND



N.C.



(J5201) J711



2



1



3



8TH



39



GND DUP_DRAWER_CNCT_DTC



GND S2M+



S2M-



10 11 12 13 14 15



17



GND S2M+



1ST



1ST



CAN_TXD2



CAN_RXD2



GND



PARA_IN2



PARA_OUT2



CONNECT_DTC1



CONNECT_ACC



GND



3.3V



5V



GND



CAN_TXD1



CAN_RXD1



GND



PARA_OUT1



PARA_IN1



GND



CONNECT_DTC2



GND



GND



RMT_EXIT2



RMT_EXIT1



GND



1



16



2



15



1



7TH



J413



14



J8



13



10 11 12



11



9



10



8



12



M2S+



9



9



M2S-



8



CLKCLK+ GND M2S+ M2SGND M2SM2S+ GND



7



7TH



6 7



8



5 6



6



4



5



2



7



3



4



3



5



2



3



4



4



1



US_PLS 24VB GND



J431 2



5



3



N.C. N.C. N.C.



5 1



6



2



4 7



1



3



19



J3017D J3017DH J3017L



2



18



1



17



DC Controller PCB J9 S2MS2M+ GND S2M+ S2MGND PIO_DRV_IN2 PIO_DRV_IN3 PIO_DRV_OUT2 PIO_DRV_OUT3 GND DUP_DRAWER_CNCT



GND



S2M-



M2S+



GND M2S-



CLK-



GND



9



16



1



8



15



2



7



14



3



6



13



4



5



11



5



4



8TH



J412



12



6



3



10



7



7TH



10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17



2



9



9



1



8



8



10 11 12 13 14 15



8



4 5



2



5



MT23



6 7



B5



8



TEST_GND FIN_GND TEST+12V TEST+5V



Finisher Lattice



1



J204



9



9



1



9



7



8



15 14 13 12 11 10



2



17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10



6



7



J124



3



10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17



5



7



6



1



2



12V



8



9



4



6



5



2



3



J5005DA_BUS



9



3



5



4



3



4



17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 8



2



4



3



4



5



1



3



2



5



7



J421 2



1



6



6



J411



7



5



1



CLK+



+5v GND +3_3V



GND



N.C.



N.C.



N.C.



6



8



N.C



J3011D J3011LH J3011L 5



9



6



J3018D J3018DH J3018L 4



1



4



40 3



2



3



38 2



Main Driver PCB J125



2



37 1



3



N.C. N.C.



J414



3.3V GND JUSO_SCL JUSO_SDA US_PLS



36 +5R



1



CLKCLK+ GND M2S+ 5TH M2SGND 6TH M2SM2S+ GND 5TH S2MS2M+ GND 6TH S2M+ S2MGND RESERVE GND



5TH



35



K_LDB_N



34



K_LDB_P



33



K_LDA_P



32



K_LDC_N



31



K_LDA_N



30



K_LDC_P



29



K_LDD_P



28



K_WENN



27



K_LDD_N



26



K_5V_MON



25



K_WCLK



24



K_SDCLK



23



K_SD_DATA_C



22



K_SD_DATA_A



21



K_SD_DATA_B



20



K_SD_DATA_D



19



K_AKM_SCLK



18



K_DIO



17



K_AKM1_IC_SELN



16



K_INT_APC



2



K_APC_SEL



15



K_CTL1



14



3



K_CTL0



4



K_CTL2



13



K_GAIN_PIX



12



5



K_CTL3



11



6



K_AKM2_IC_SELN



10



7



K_SD_DATA_G



9



K_SD_DATA_F



8



K_SD_DATA_H



8



K_SD_DATA_E



7



N.C



6



K_LDE_N



5



K_LDE_P



4



K_LDF_N



N.C



3



K_LDF_P



K_LDH_N



K_LDH_P



K_LDG_N



K_LDG_P



GND



GND



K E2PROM CS



2



9



4



2



5



GND



5V



GND



J5021



5



1



6



21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10



6



3



7



J471



8 7



2



4



8



K AKM 2 CSN



1



7



5



9



K AKM 1 CSN



9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19



6



8



J9043B_BUS



5



GND



J472 5



9



J9043A_BUS



6



1



4



15 14 13 12 11 10



2



9



2



3



J126



1



8



GND



J7



2



6



3



1 7



3



1



5



4



6 1 8



4



5 4



12V GND 24V GND



5 2 7



DEC 5



4 3



3



5



B 3 9 6



ACC



UN78



12V GND 24VB GND 24VB GND 24VA GND 12V GND



4 4 8 5



3 2



12V GND 24VA GND UL1007#22



5 7 1 4



24V



1



J128



4



5



6 6 2 3



FG



UN37



5



4



2 3 5 3 2



S/S



D 2



6



3



1



C BD



5V 1



GND



J4



7



12V GND 24VA GND



7 4



GND



1



8



2



3 2 4



FG



8 5



DEC



1 3



S/S



9 6



ACC



2



GND



1 7



9



J9200P_BUS 1



4 8



24V



9



BD



5V



10



J9200A_BUS



N.C.



General Circuit Diagram



1



F UN8



F



(J5202)Main Controller PCB 2 J712



CAN Transeiver PCB 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29



J3 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19



E E



J2087DH J2087D



J491



1



UN1



D



9 10 11



J3241D J3241LH J3241L



C



J5005DB_BUS



Relay PCB



UN86



6



J505 10



B



J3238F J3238M To P.1 A-2



J3638L J3638LH



J9043



A



1



P.4



General Circuit Diagram



J118



J119 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19



J3513



PIN1



1



2



3



2



1



1



2



1



2



3



4



24V



4



4



GND



3



5



24V



2



6



GND



1



7



5



9



8



7



6



5



4



3



2



9



GND



1



2



1



2



3



1



2



10 11 12 13



3



2



1



J3111D J3111LH J3111L



13 12 11 10



1



2



3



9



4



8



5



7



6



7



6



5



8



9



12V_TH



4



12V_TH



5



12V



6



10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19



4



3



2



1



10 11 12 13



1



1



E



2



16 15 14 13 12 11 10



9



8



7



6



5



4



3



2



1



8



7



6



5



4



3



2



1



J314 UN3 Fixing Power Supply PCB J9004 1



MT8 MT6



J3222M J3222F



1



2



1



3



2



3



J3005M J3005F



J3217M J3217F



4 4



1



2



1



2



3



4



5



1



2



1



2



3



4



5



J3004M J3004F 1



J3099M J3003M J3003F



2



A-6



1



2



1



2



3



1



2



1



2



3



J3214M J3214F



N (W)



J3221M J3221F



3



9



F



2



2



8



J3501 UN15 Primary Charging High Voltage FT18 PCB MT03 PIN3 J3502 J312



MT5



1



7



GND



7



6



IH_LIMIT



IH_CURRENT_ANALOG_TO_AD



8



5



GND



IH_VOLTAGE_ANALOG_TO_AD



9



4



12V



8



3



12V



7



GND



GND



GND



FROM_DCON_IH_PWM0



6



ZC_IN



5



GND



FROM_DCON_IH_PWM2



GND



IH_VIN_CMP



FROM_DCON_IH_PWM1



4



2



J2130D J2130DH



H (B)



3



8



3



PWM0_OUT



2



PWM1_OUT



1



J101



2



GND



1



J3510



J3512



9



J3544 UN16 Pre-transfer Charging PCB PIN2 J3548 J3547



J3500



13 12 11 10



4



1



3



2



2



3



1



4



J3545



5



24V



6



4



7



3



8



2



9



1



13 12 11 10



J3511 UN17 Develop High Voltage PCB



E



IH_12V_MONI



IH_RELAY1_ON



19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10



PWM2_OUT



J3172D J3172LH J3172L



END18



GND



GND



+5V



GND



GND



GRID_HV_CNT_DA



J3097D J3097LH J3097L



GND



9



IH_RELAY2_ON



1



8



VIN_CMP



2



7



V_MONITOR



3



6



+5V



4



PRIM_HV_24V_RDY



PRIM_HV_PCB_RMT_ONX



5 5



PRIM_HV_CNT_DA 6 4



7



PRIM_HV_CNCTX



PRIM/GRID_HV_ONX



POST_HV_PCB_RMT_ONX



GND



+5V



POST_HV_DC_CNT_DA



POST_HV_24V_RDY



7 3



POST_HV_AC_CLK_A



8



DEV_HV_24V_RDY



DEV_HV_AC_ONX 7



POST_HV_AC_ONX



8 2



POST_HV_PCB_CNCTX



9



POST_HV_AC_CLK_B



6



DEV_HV_DC_ONX



GND



DEV_HV_AC_CLK_A 5



POST_HV_DC_ONX



DEV_HV_PCB_RMT_ONX



DEV_HV_DC_CNT_DA



DEV_HV_AC_CNT_DA



DEV_HV_PCB_CNCTX



DEV_HV_SERIAL_DTC 4



3



1



POST_HV_CLK_25K



3



4



1



8



2



5



2



9



1



6



9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25



25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10



POLLER_BIAS_OFFX



J3098D J3098LH J3098L



1



GND



9



5V



8



GND



7



I_LIM



6



IH_FAN_ERR



5



N.C.



4



GND



3



GND



2



5V



1



IH_FAN_PWM



9



GND



8



24VB



7



IH_FAN_ERR



6



N.C.



5



1



N.C.



4



GND



3



24V



2



IH_FAN_PWM



1



IH_HIGH_UNIT_DTCX



9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25



GND



8



GND



7



IH_PID1_LOW_SPEED



6



F



IH_ON



5



2



INV_ON



4



UN78 Main Driver PCB J111



3



IH_PID0_LOW_SPEED



3



4



PID0



2



5



GND



1



6



PID1



J112



7



GND



8



IH_CRNT_DTC



9



V_MONI_AC



10



MT02 2



1



2



1



To P.3



4



J9005D



3



2



1



1 2 3



FT1 MT10 1



2



3



4



5



1



2



3



4



5



1



2



3



4



5



J3129M J3129F



J9005L FM07 Fixing Power Supply Cooling Fan



FT23



FT34



FT22



FT21



J9001 FT2 UN75 Post Charging Trance



High Voltage



D



END51



END50



END60



D



CB1005



High Voltage 2



Connector



Connector



1



H03 Fixing Heater



7



8



9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21



1



2



3



4



5



6



7



8



9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23



1



2



3



4



5



1



2



3



4



5



6



7



STRAY_PAPER_FULL



6



STRAY_PAPER_SNS



5



STRAY_CCWX



4



STRAY_HP_L_SNS



3



STRAY_HP_R_SNS



2



J122



GND



1



J102



STRAY_CNCT



3



J105



8



9 10 11



UN78 Main Driver PCB J123 1



2



3



J107



4



1



2



3



4



5



6



7



8



9 10 11 12 13 14 15



J3001DA_BUS



5



J3218M



MTR_B*



MTR_B 2



3



8



9



3



1



1



2



3



4



J9059M



5



2



1



J9058L



J3177D J3177LH J3177L



9 10 11 12



1



2



3



4



5



6



7



8



11 10



9



8



7



6



5



4



9 10



1



2



3



4



1



2



3



4



J9059F



20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10



9



8



7



6



5



4



3



2



1



20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10



9



8



7



6



5



4



3



2



1



J3060D J4060L



B



M13



DKIT_CNCT



N.C



N.C



N.C



N.C



N.C



N.C



N.C



N.C



N.C



N.C



OP



N.C



C-3



N.C



1



M



5V



3



DRM_HP_SNS



4



8



GND



PRE_EXP_LED_ON



5



7



DKIT_CNST_DTCX



PATCH_LED_ON



6



6



PRIM_WIRE_CLN_M_OUT-



24VA



4



PATCH_SHUT_SL_ON



GND



7



3



PRIM_WIRE_CLN_M_OUT+



PATCH_LED_ASW_IN



8



2



24VA



PATCH_VOP_ANALOG



9



1



Shift Tray



10 11



12 11 10



5V(DKIT_CNCT_DTC)



GND



24VB



GND



5V



N.C



STRAY_FULL_ON 2



GND



STRAY_ON



4



J3116F J3116M



4



2



To P.4



7



5



3



J3001DB_BUS 1



B



6



6



3



2



N.C



4



7



2



1



N.C



3



8



1



J3115M



N.C



2



9



3



N.C



1



10



2



N.C



J2009



J9058D J9058DH



C



A-5 1



N.C



1



2



3



5



4



6



7



8



9



10



11



12



13



14



15



16



17



18



19



20



1



2



3



5



4



6



7



8



9



10



12



11



13



14



15



16



17



18



19



20



MTR_A



END19



END20



FIX_CNCT2



+5S



FIX_CLAW_JAM_SNS



GND



+5S



FIX_EXT_SNS



GND



GND



+5V



FIX_M_ON



FIX_M_ERR



FIX_M_CCW



FIX_M_GAIN



FIX_M_CLK



WEB_SL_ON



+5S



24VA



FIX_ENT_SNS



GND



+5V



MTR_B*_OUT_B1*



MTR_B_OUT_B1



MTR_A*_OUT_A2*



MTR_A_OUT_A1



+5S



FIX_SHUT_HP_SNS



GND



+5S



WEB_LESS_SNS



GND



GND



THM_CNCT_DTCX



3



GND



3



2



SHUT_THM_ANALOG_TO_OVER



2



1



SUB_R_THM_ANALOG_TO_OVER



1



To P.1



MTR_A*



J3231M



GND



J3231F



SUB_L_THM_ANALOG_TO_OVER



12V IH LATCH



12V_IH_POWER



C



GND



(V)



(OR)



N.C.



2



MAIN_THM_ANALOG_TO_OVER



1



J104



+5V



J129



Delivery Motor



1



MT06



FT25 4



3



2



1



A20



B20



2



3



3



2



1



UN23 FAN_DRV 4



5



6



8



9



1



2



J651 J653 3



END1 END2



J3001DWH J3001DB J3001DA J3001D



7



4



5



6



7



END3 END4 END5



J650 J652



2



1 1



2 2



F-5



To P.21



J2200D J2200DH J2200L



A



3



2



1



1



2



3



1 2 3



FM10



3



1



2



2



1



3



1 2 3



FM11



J2201D J2201DH J2201L



3



2



1



1



2



3



J2202D J2202DH J2202L



J4120M J3120F



3



1



2



J4141D J4141DH J2141L



1



3



1



J4107D



UN65 Contact A PCB 3 3



FT16



Contact B PCB 2



1



LE01 Pre-exposure LED



FM12



2 2



1



J2137



1



UN66



FT17



H01 Drum Heater



1 2 3



2



2



A



PS61 Drum Home Position Sensor



1



1



2



M



M06 Primary Charging Wire Cleaning Motor



10



9



8



7



6



5



4



3



2



1



P.5



1566



General Circuit Diagram 10



9



8



7



6



5



4



3



2



1



UN78 Main Driver PCB J117



F



2



3



4



5



J115



6



1



2



3



4



5



6



7



8



9



J130 1



10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21



2



3



4



J151 5



6



7



8



1



9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17



2



3



4



5



6



J127



J109



7



1



2



3



4



5



6



7



8



9



F



10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27



5



6



7



8



9



4



5



6



7



8



N.C. 1



2



3



4



5



6



7



8



6



5



4



3



2



J3067D J3067DH J3067L J3215D J3215DH J3215L



1



9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17



2



3



3



2



4



1



5



3



2



1



1



2



3



J3106D J3106LH J3106L



6



17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 1



2



3



4



5



6



7



9



8



8



7



6



5



4



3



2



J3124D J3124LH J3124L



1



9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17



1



2



3



4



5



6



7



2



1



8



8



7



6



5



4



3



2



1



9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17



1



2



3



4



5



6



2



3



1



2



J2034



2



1



1



2



1



M



D



J2039D J2039DH



J2036D J2036DH J2036L



6 1



5



4



3



2



1



2



3



4



5



6



J2038D J2038DH



J2035D J2035DH 3



2



1



2



1



6



3



J2039L



5



1



M10 Toner Exchange Cover Toner Supply Sensor



1



Buffer Toner



CL



2



3



4



1



J2170D J2170H



3



J2171D J2171H 3



2



5



3



2



3 3 1 2 3



1 2 3



4



3



2



1



1



2



3



4



1



1 2 3



1 2 3



FM31



FM32



Developer Upper



Pre-transfer



Cooling Fan



Charging Assembly



2 2



1



POST_OUT_FAN_ERR



GND



POST_OUT_FAN_POWER



GND



PRIM_OZON_FAN_PWM



REAR_COOL_FAN_ERR



PRIM_OZON_FAN_ERR



GND



24VB



24VB



DEV_SLV_CL_ON



REAR_COOL_FAN_PWM



5V



GND



DEV_M_ON



DEV_M_ERR



24VB



DEV_M_CCW



DEV_M_CLK



DEV_M_GAIN



GND



5V



DRUM_M_ERR



DRUM_M_ON



DRUM_M_CCW



J5001D J5001DH J5001L



J5026D J5026LH J5026L



1



2



J2006D J2006DH J2006L



J2114



J2038L FM02



FM30



Primary Charging Developer Lower Cooling Fan Air Supply Fan



4



Pre-transfer Charging



3



2



J5003 3 3



2 2



J2139



J2138



1



8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1



8 8



1



7 7



6 6



M



Waste Toner



PS100



Full Sensor



5 5



4 4



3 3



2 2



4



M02



1



1



Developing



Drum Motor



Sensor



Motor



J2151



2



1



J2152 CL01



2



A-2



6



7



8



9



10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17



1



2



3



4



5



6



7



8



9



10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19



1



2



3



4



1



2



3



4



5



6



GND



GND



5V



12V_TO_DR



2



5



4



3



2



1



1



2



3



4



5



To P.1



J3088D J3088LH J3088L



J3272D J3272LH J3272L



J3055D J3055DH J3055L



7



6



1



5



4



3



2



3



4



5



6



J2008D J2008LH



3



2



J2004D J2004DH



1



D



1 2 3



FM17



FM33



Primary Charging



Pre-transfer Charging



Cooling Fan



Exhaust Fan



Exhaust Fan



7



8



9



10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31



3



4



5



6



7



6



5



4



3



2



1



EPC_RMT_ON



24VB



3.3V_ANA



GND



EPC_RMT_ON



31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10



1



2



3



4



5



1



2



+3.3V



GND



EROM_DM



EROM_CLK



EROM_DOUT



EROM_DIN



FRONT_DOOR_OPEN_DTC



RETURN_FROM_SE



END13 1



WST_TNR_SCREW_LOCK_DTCX



2



5V



3



5V



4



FIX_LEVER_ON_MAIN_DRV_SNS



5



A-3



GND



3



6



5V



2



7



EX_DELI_SNS



1



8



1



6



7



8



9



2



3



8



7



6



5



4



3



2



1



10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31



25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10



1



9



C



4



5



6



7



8



9



9



8



7



6



5



4



3



2



J3089D J3089DH J3089L



1



10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25



N.C.



1



9



DRUM_H_SET



10 11 12 13 14 15



J3051D J5010D J5010LH J5010L



GND



1



CRNT_SNS_DTC_ANALOG



2



DRUM_H_RESET



9



3



CRNT_SNS_REF_ANALOG



8



1



CST_H_ON



7



2



CRNT_SNS_SERIAL_DTC



3



15 14 13 12 11 10



GND



GND



4



N.C.



J3235D J3235LH J3235L



CST_H_SERIAL_DTC



5V



5



5V



MLT_PAPER_LENGTH



6



VPATH_UPPER_SNS



GND



7



GND



MLT_PAPER_WIDTH



8



5V



GND



9



LS_WRITE_SNS



3.3V



5U



MLT_PAPER_SNS



GND



GND



MLT_RELEASE_SL_VCC



C MT04



2



J114



5



PRIM_SHUT_HP_SNS



5



GND



4



3



1 2 3



FM16



GND



3



EPC_DTC_ANALOG



2



UN78 Main Driver PCB



N.C.



1



4



Laser Scanner



Developing Clutch



To P.3



J110



J2007D J2007LH



1



1 2 3



2



To P.3



J103



2



CL



A-2



J106



3



1 1



M



M01



Waste Toner Container



Air Supply Fan



M28



J5002



1



TS04



Shutter Sensor



Toner Feed Motor



Magnet Roller Clutch



2



1



1



PS95



6



Sensor 1



CL05



J2177D J2177H



1



1



7



1



Buffer Toner



M



Sensor 2



Motor



3



2



TS02 1



2



2



3



J2035L



TS03



PS54



4



2



N.C.



3



3



2



6



N.C.



J2131D J2131DH 4



3



5



E



N.C.



1



4



4



4



5V



5



5



3



GND



6



9



6



2



ENV_HUM_ANALOG



E



17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10



7



1



GND



9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21



7



ENV_THM_ANALOG



8



8



5V



7



9



MLT_DOOR_OPEN_SNS



6



17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10



POST_BM_OUT-



5



J3090D J3090DH J3090L



1



POST_BM_OUT+



4



2



24VB



3



3



DEV_TNR_CNCT



2



4



GND



1



6



5



DEV_TNR_DTC



5



6



N.C.



4



7



24VB



3



8



5V



2



9



N.C.



1



21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10



N.C



J3080D J3080DH J3080L



J2037D J2037LH J2037L



DRUM_M_GAIN



DRUM_M_CLK



5V



J3066D J3066LH J3066L



GND



1



W_TONER_BOX_DETECT



2



24VB



3



W_TONER_FULL_SNS_ANALOG



4



9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17



GND



N.C



5



GND



6



POST_HP_SNS



7



+5V



POST_IN_FAN_POW



POST_IN_FAN_ERR



DEV_FAN2_POW



3



GND



8



2



DEV_FAN1_ERR



DEV_FAN2_ERR



9



1



DEV_FAN1_POW



17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10



PRIM_FAN_ERR



GND



J3091D J3091LH J3091L



PRIM_FAN_PWM



1



GND



2



24VB



3



10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21



GND



SUB_HOP_UNDER_TNR_CNCT



4



N.C



N.C.



5



24VB



24VB



6



A-1



To P.1



N.C



4



GND



7



3



SUB_HOP_UNDER_TNR_DTC



24VB



1



DEV_BUF_M_CNCTX(YOBI)



2



GND



3



DEV_BUF_M_ON(24V)



4



8



2



GND



5



9



1



24VB



6



21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10



DEV_BUF_TNR_CNCT



6



DEV_BUF_CL_ON



1



5



DEV_BUF_TNR_DTC



2



4



N.C.



3



3



BOTTLE_COVER_OPEN_SNS



4



2



+5U



GND



GND



5



1



24VB



BOTTLE_M_FG



BOTTLE_M_PWM



6



GND



BOTTLE_M_ON



J3063D J3063LH J3063L



GND



N.C.



1



MT05



J3251D



MT14



5



4



3



2



1



1



2



3



4



5



J2005



1



Paper Sensor



UN13 Multi-purpose



PS28



PS24



Multi-purpose Writing Judging Vertical Path Sensor1 Tray Paper Sensor



2



1



1



2



3



4



5



6



7



3



2



1



3



2



1



3



2



1



3



2



1



PS36 MT13



Length Sensor



PS96



Outer Delivery Fixed Feed Lever Sensor Sensor



2



1



SW05 Waste Toner Lock Detection Switch



2



SW06 Multi Door Switch



Potential



4



FT02



J2133D J2133DH J2133 2



3



6



5



4



4



5



6



3



2



1



J3108D UN63 2



1



4



3



2



1



1



2



3



4



3



2



1



3



2



1



Contact A PCB



J3252D J3252LH J3252L



Sensor



6



5



4



3



2



UN64



1



J5014 SNS-SIG



R



SNS-VCC



BK



FLG1A FLG1B DRV-SIG RTN-SIG



Contact B PCB



4



3



2



1



1



2



3



4



J3047D J3047DH J3047L



FT31 1



J3170D



J3172



2



FT30



4



J427



UN18



1



2



Voltage Control PCB



J3108L



SW02



MT21



2



Open/Close Sensor



M



M07



Front Door Open Detection Switch



3



2



1



J3048



PS03 Multi-purpose Cover



1



J3169L



J2132



6



1



OR



3



FT01



R BK



7



W



5



1



P



UN19



J3169DH J3169D W



4



2



S



3



Sensor



3



2



3



J2140D 1



P



3



J3170LH J3170L



2



J2053



4



Developing Toner



2



1



2



1



1



2



J2136D



2



1



7



2



3



5



TS01 1



6



3



J3050LH J3050L J3253F J3253M



3



J5011



6



2



OR



1



J3251LH J3251L



5



1



7



3



4



1



2



PS101



Pickup Solenoid PS23 Multi-purpose Tray MT1



2



3



2



J3101L



S



Multi-purpose



A



3



1



4



J2003



3



5



1



1



2



3



2



2



6



3



3 1



2



J2002



J3122D J3122DH J3122L



J5015D J5015LH J5015L



7



1



6



B



PS94 Shutter Sensor



1



1



2



1



5



J2029



Primary Charging



6



2



3



2



4



UN21 Drum ROM



5



3



3



3



J3167D J3167DH J3167L



4



SL



SL02



4



2



1



3



2



5



1



1



2



1



SOLD4



1



6



2



3



1



SOLD3



MT2



J2001D J2001DH J2001L



J2025



J3050D 2



1



SOLD2



1 2



2



SOLD1



2 1



J3101D J3101DH



3



3



MT3



3 1



2



2



1



3



1



4



2



5



3



6



4



7



5



8



10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17



6



9



9



6



8



5



7



4



6



3



5



2



4



1



3



BR



2



BR



1



OR



B



17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10



OR



J3121D J3121DH J3121L



MT4



THU01



A



Environment Sensor



Pre-transfer Charging Wire



MT20



Cleaning Motor



Tray Paper Width Sensor



10



9



8



7



6



5



4



3



2



1



P.6



1567



General Circuit Diagram 9



8



7



6



5



F



PS72



PS73



SW08



PS69



PS70



Cassette 4



Cassette 4



Cassette 3



Cassette 3



Paper Level



Paper Level



Paper Width



Paper Level



Paper Level



Sensor 1



Sensor 2



Detection Switch



Sensor 1



Sensor 2



2



1



3



2



3



J2093



PS19



PS08



PS07



Right Deck



Right Deck



Right Deck



Pickup Solenoid



Pickup Sensor Upper Limit Sensor Paper Sensor S



SL 1



3



2



PS47



PS32



Right Deck



Paper Height Right Deck Sensor Pull Out Sensor



Left Deck Pickup Solenoid



Sensor 1



Sensor 2



P 2



SL



1



3



2



1



3



2



1



3



2



1



3



2



1



1



3



2



2



1



1



3



2



1



3



2



1



3



2



1



J2062



J2061



J2060



J2070L J2070DH J2070D



2



3



2



2



1



3



2



Left Deck Paper Height



Pickup Sensor



Sensor



2



S



1



3



2



1



3



2



Left Deck Left Deck Paper Height Pull Out Paper Sensor Sensor Sensor Left Deck



PS49



PS50



2



3



J2149



2



1



2



2



1



1



2



3



J2094



1



2



3



4



5



1



2



3



1



2



3



1



2



3



1



2



3



J2082



J2095



SW09 Cassette 3



FM03



Paper Width



Paper Length



Paper Length



Making Image Exhaust



Detection Switch



Detection Switch



Detection Switch



Fan



1



J2083



2



3



4



1



5



J2084



2



3



4



1



3 3



2 2



1



3



1



J2042



2



3



1



2



3



1



3



2 2



1



3



1



J2044



J2043



3



2 2



1



3



1



3



2 2



J2045 J2046



3



4



5



6



7



8



17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10



D



9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17



9



8



7



6



5



4



3



2



1



2



3



4



5



6



7



7



6



5



4



3



2



1



3



4



1



3



1



2



3



M04



Cassette4



Cassette3



Right Deck



Lifter



Lifter



Lifter



Motor



Motor



5



M



M



Making Image Exhaust Fan



M



3 2 1



J2085



J2088DH J2088D



1



3 21



2



3



1



2



1



2



1



2



1



2



1



2



1



2



J2074



J2072



1



2



J2099DH J2099D



4



3



J2069



E



Lifter Motor



J3033L J3033LH J3033D



1



2



1



J2048



M20



Motor



F



FM01



M21



J2049



2



1



2



1



11 10



J2051



1



9



2



8



3



7



4



6



5



5



6



4



7



3



8



2



J3273L J3273LH J3273D



1



9 10 11



11 10



1



9



2



8



3



7



4



6



5



5



6



4



7



3



8



2



13 12 11 10



1



1



9 10 11



3



4



9



8



7



6



5



5



6



7



8



9 10 11 12 13



4



3



2



1



J3031L J3031LH J3031D



3



2



1



1



2



3



J3008D J3008H J3008L



5



1



4



3



2



2



3



J3013L J3013LH J3013D



1



4



5



END25 END24



2



N.C.



MT36



J3028L J3028LH J3028D



2



100V_60/65/75ppm and 200V_55/65/75ppm (for CN, EU model)



1



2



3



4



5



6



7



8



J3634L J3634DH J3634D



9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17



17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10



9



8



7



6



5



4



3



2



1



1



2



3



4



5



6



7



7



6



5



4



3



2



1



J3132L J3132LH J3132D



N.C.



N.C.



2



1



N.C.



1



J3633L J3633H J3633D



1



J2096



J2052DH J2052D MT35



5



M



1



J2052L



3



SW10 Cassette 4



Left Deck



1



J2148



2



1



except 100V_60/65/75ppm and 200V_55/65/75ppm (for CN, EU model)



SW07



M05



Left Deck Left Deck Paper Level Paper Level Sensor 1 Sensor 2



P



3



J2064



PS33



PS11



PS20 Left Deck



1



J2063



PS10



PS12



Right Deck Paper Level



3



1



SL07



PS48



Right Deck Paper Level



1



2



Cassette 3



END29



E



PS06



SL06



3



Cassette 4



1



Right Deck



4



END27



10



D



FM40



3



9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31



J221



R_DECK_LIFT_M_VCC



GND GND



LOW_EXHAUST_FAN_ERR



C4_LIFT_M_VCC GND C3_LIFT_M_VCC



GND LOW_EXHAUST_FAN_VCC



C3_LENGTH_BIT1



C3_LENGTH_BIT2 C3_LENGTH_BIT3



GND



C3_LENGTH_BIT0



C4_LENGTH_BIT0



C4_LENGTH_BIT2 C4_LENGTH_BIT3



C4_LENGTH_BIT1 GND



C3_WIDTH_BIT3



C3_WIDTH_BIT2



C3_WIDTH_BIT0



GND



C3_PAPER_LEVEL_LOW



C3_WIDTH_BIT1



5V



GND



GND



GND



C3_PAPER_LEVEL_UP



C4_WIDTH_BIT3 5V



C4_WIDTH_BIT0



C4_WIDTH_BIT2



C4_PAPER_LEVEL_LOW



5V



C4_WIDTH_BIT1



GND



C4_PAPER_LEVEL_UP



5V N.C.



5V



321



GND



L_DECK_LIFT_M_VCC



5V



L_DECK_PAPER_LEVEL_UP



L_DECK_PAPER_LEVEL_LOW



5V



GND



L_DECK_PULL



GND



5V



GND



L_DECK_LIFT_SNS



L_DECK_PAPER



5V



GND



L_DECK_PAPER_LIMIT



5V



8



GND



7



5V



6



L_DECK_RETRY



5



GND



L_DECK_SL_VCC



GND



4



GND



3



GND



2



R_DECK_PAPER_LEVEL_LOW



5V



1



10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17



J222



5V



GND



R_DECK_PAPER_LEVEL_UP



5V



R_DECK_PULL



9



GND



8



5V



7



R_DECK_LIFT_SNS



6



GND



GND



5



5V



5V



4



R_DECK_PAPER



R_DECK_PAPER_LIMIT



3



GND



GND



2



R_DECK_RETRY



GND



1



5V



R_DECK_SL_VCC



Cooling Fan



GND



Feed Driver



2



1



23 22 21 20



19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12



11 10 9



8



7



6



5



4



3



2



19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12



1



11 10 9



8



7



6



5



4



3



2



1



5



J225



J226



J227



UN79



4



3



1



2



J2250



J215



4



J218



5



1



2



3



4



J223



5



1



2



2



3



4



5



6



7



8



9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17



5



4



5V



6



GND



5V



7



VPATH_LOW_PAPER_SNS



5V



C4_PAPER_SNS



C4_LIFT_SNS



GND



GND



5V



C4_PAPER_LIMIT_SNS



GND



8



5V



9



C4_RETRY_SNS



17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10



GND



1



GND



2



END22



3



5V



4



R_LOW_DOOR_OPEN_SNS



5



5V



6



GND



7



MID_UP



8



GND



9



5V



C3_PAPER_LIMIT_SNS



17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10



3



2



1



5



1



2



3



4



5



6



7



8



9



10 11



1



2



3



4



5



6



7



8



9



10 11



J2076 1



2



3



4



5



6



7



8



9



10 11



J2097 1



2



3



4



5



6



7



8



9



10 11



J2077 1



2



3



4



5



4



1



M



3



4



M



M33



1



2



3



4



1



2



3



4



M



M



1



2



3



2



7



3



8



9



10 11



4



4



M



M



M26



M31



M12



M27



Multi-purpose Tray



Vertical Path



Vertical Path



Cassette3.4



Vertical Path



Registration Front Motor



Upper Motor



Middle Motor



Pickup Motor



Lower Motor



M24 Left Deck Pickup Motor



2



6



1



2



3



4



5



6



7



8



N.C.



6



J2147



J3635D J3635H J3635L



9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17



7



6



1



5



2



4



3



3



4



2



5



J3128D J3128LH J3128L



1



6



7



1



2



3



4



5



6



7



8



9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17



J3636D J3636H



B



J3636L



N.C.



M11 Right Deck Pickup Motor



1



DC-DC Converter PCB



J2146



1



B



VPATH_LOW_PAPER_SNS



5



3



GND



4



2



C3_LIFT_SNS



3



1



4



5V



2



3



C3_PAPER_SNS



1



10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25



5V



6



9



GND



5



4



8



GND



4



3



M



7



5V



3



2



6



GND



2



5V



1



C3_PICKUP_SL_VCC 2



1



J224 5



C



MTR_B*



MTR_B



MTR_A*



MTR_A



MTR_A*



MTR_B*



MTR_B



MTR_A



1



4



J9033 UN24 J2050



J2071



3



C4_PICKUP_SL_VCC



3



C3_RETRY_SNS



2



GND



1



GND



4



5V 3_3V



3



GND



2



12V



1



GND



J214



5



MTR_B*



4



MTR_B



3



MTR_A*



2



MTR_A



1



MTR_B



J213



MTR_A



8



MTR_B*



7



MTR_A*



6



MTR_B*



5



MTR_A*



4



MTR_A



3



MTR_B



MTR_A*



2



MTR_B*



MTR_A



1



MTR_B



MTR_B*



J212



9



MTR_A*



MTR_B



8



MTR_A



MTR_A*



7



MTR_B*



6



MTR_A*



5



MTR_B



4



MTR_A



3



MTR_B



2



MTR_A



C



1



MTR_B*



Feed Driver PCB J211



2



1



1



2



J2073D J2073DH J2073L 3



2



1



J2078



3



2



1



J2055



3



2



1



J2079D



3



2



J2080D



1



3



2



1



J2081D



3



2



1



J2054



3



2



1



2



1



1



2



J2075D J2075DH J2075L



J2066



3 3



3



2



1



3



2



1



3



2



1



3



2



1



3



2



1



3



2



1



3



2



1



PS68



1



PS13



PS17



PS26



PS25



PS02



Cassette 3



Cassette 3



Vertical Path



Vertical Path



Vertical Path



2



SL



SL03



2



1



J2089



1



3



2 3



J2056



1 2



1



3 3



2



1



2



J2090



1



3 3



2 2



1



J2091



1



3 3



2 2



1



J2092



1



P



P



PS21



A



2



1 S



S



Cassette 3 Cassette 3 Upper Pickup Sensor Limit Sensor



Paper Sensor



Paper Height Sensor



Sensor3



Sensor2



SL



Cover Open/Close Sensor



Cassette 3



2



SL04



PS22



PS71



PS14



PS18



PS27



Cassette 4



Cassette 4 Upper



Cassette 4



Cassette 4



Vertical Path



Pickup Sensor



Limit Sensor



Paper Sensor



Paper Height Sensor



Sensor4



A



Cassette 4



Pickup Solenoid



Pickup Solenoid



10



9



8



7



6



5



4



3



2



1



P.7



1568



General Circuit Diagram 6



5



4



5



4



GND



GND



3_3V



24V



2



2



1



5



4



3



2



To P.4



1



J9034 UN28



A-6



J5005LA J5005LB J5005L



DC-DC Converter PCB 6



5



4



3



2



A19



1



B17



N.C



J332



4



5



6



7



8



1



2



3



J342



4



5



6



7



1



8



2



3



4



5



6



7



8



9



1



12 11 10



9



7



6



5



4



3



2



1



J340 1



10 11



2



3



4



5



6



7



8



9



2



1



1



2



3



7



6



2



5



3



4



4



3



5



2



6



1



7



B



4



1



4



2



3



4



5



6



7



8



9



10 11



J2107



1



2



3



4



5



6



7



8



9



10 11



J2167



1



2



3



4



5



6



1



2



3



4



5



6



1



2



3



4



5



6



J2109



1



2



3



4



5



6



J2098 3



1



2



3



4



1



2



3



4



1



2



3



4



1



2



3



4



1



2



3



4



1



2



3



2



M



M



M



M



M



2



1



J2144D J2144LH



2



3



2



1



2



2



3



1



4



3



2



1



1



2



3



5



4



3



2



1



2



3



4



5



6



ETB Motor



10



Reverse Motor



Duplex Feed Left Motor



9



M32 Duplex Feed Merging Motor



8



M18 Duplex Feed Right Motor



M34



1 2 3



1 1



P



Registration Motor



7



PS29 Registration Sensor



REV SEP SL ON



REV SEP SL DTC



REV UPFLAP SL DTC



J3236D J3236L J3236LH



J3243D J3243DH J3243L



2



3



4



3



2



1



3



2



1



J2125



3



2 3



J2113



1



1 2 3 4



17



13



16



15



12



11



10



9



14 4



7 8



DUP_DRAWER_CNCT_DTC



GND



M2S-



GND 3



2



1



3



2



1



1



2



J2121D J3020LH J3020L



3



B



2



1



1



2



J2115D J2115DH J2115L



2



1



J2176D J2176DH



2



J3021D J2121DH



1



3



2



1



J2118D J2118DH 3



2



2



1



3 3 3 S



M19



5



3



M



M14



REV UPFLAP SL ON1



5V



GND



REV VPATH PAP DTC



INDELI PAP DTC



GND



J2124D J2124DH J2124L



6



1



J2145D J2145LH



A M43



6



J2120



1



1 2 3 1 2 3



S



7



1 2 3



J2116



1



4 3



M



3



3



J3242D J3242LH J3242L



5V



5V



DUP_SIDEREGI_DTC



GND



J3263L



4



1



J2108



8



N.C.



J3263D J3263DH



MTR_B*



3



3



MTR_B



2



9



10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27



4



MTR_A*



3



MTR_A



1



2



GND 1



+5V



J3042M J3042F



1



6



11 10



J301



C



REGI PAP DTC



MTR_B*



MTR_B



MTR_B*



MTR_B



MTR_A*



MTR_A



MTR_A



MTR_A*



MTR_B*



MTR_B



MTR_A*



MTR_A



MTR_B*



MTR_B



MTR_A



MTR_A*



MTR_B*



MTR_B



MTR_A*



MTR_A



MTR_A*



MTR_A



MTR_B



MTR_B*



C



J2111



5



N.C. 19



18



17



16



15



7TH 8



J300



GND



3



2



+5V



2



3



DUP L PAP DTC



1



4



D



GND



J331



4



5



J310



UN80 Duplex Driver PCB



GND



J3233F J3233M



M2S+



1



M2S-



2



M2S+



3



DECURL_FAN_ON



3



3.3V



DECURL_FAN_ERR_DTC



2



GND



8TH



4



7TH



5



GND



6



MT12



Duplex Merging Sensor



CLK+



1



CLK-



2



DUP_FEED_FAN_ERR_DTC



1



8



1 3



GND



4



DUP_DRAWER_CNCT



5



RESERVE_OUT_4



PS67



6



DUP_FEED_FAN_ON



J330



4



14



9



SCL(I2C)



GND



3



13



8



SDA(I2C)



7TH 2



US_PLS



N.C.



1



24V US_PLS



RESERVE_OUT_3



P



6



J333



12



7



6



5



4



2



3



1 N.C.



24V



GND



12V



GND



J3306F



24V



PIN4



J5009D J5009DH GND



N.C.



FT20



11



J5005LA_BUS



Transfer High Voltage PCB



7



J5005LB_BUS



6



1



5



2



4



3



3



4



2



5



N.C.



6



N.C.



7



1



S



Left Deck Duplex Outlet Sensor Merging Solenoid



E



J2105



1



2



8



RESERVE_IN_4



3



P



PS64



SL11



MT9 J3306M



UN67



9



RESERVE_IN_3



1



2



15 14 13 12 11 10



J3062 UN76



GND



3



1



S2M-



2



J2104



1



2



GND



S



2



3



10



4



J3061



S2M+



PS55 ETB Engage Sensor



J3269D J3269DH J3269L



8TH



PS56 ETB Disengage Sensor



3



Transfer High Voltage Resistance PCB



3



2



SL



D



1



2



S2M+



1



2



1



MT11



3



1



3



S2M-



2



J3265D J3265DH J3265L



J2106D J2106DH J2106L



J2100



1



3



GND



3



2



2



1



2



12V



1



3



1



1



2



1



GND



J2101



2



3



GND



8



24V



J3270D J3270DH J3270L



1



7



1



2



1



6



2



3



5



24V



2



1



4



4



24V



3



2



5



3



GND



3



6



2



2



7



1



GND



E



8



1



+5V



GND



TR_24V_RDY



TR_HV_RMT_ONX



TR_P_CV_ONX



TR_RV_CC_ONX



TR_P_CC_ONX



TRN_P_CV_CNT



TR_P_CC_CNT



TRN_RV_CC_CNT



TR_I_SNS_AD



TR_V_SNS_AD



GND



TRN_HV_PCB_CNCTX



3



5V



6



N.C.



7



3



F



J311



10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29



+5V



9



DUP_MERGE_PAP_DTC



8



GND



7



+5V



6



DUP_EXT_PAP_DTC



5



GND



4



LDECK_MERGE_SL_ON1



3



GND



TRBELT_PLESS_HP_DTC



2



+5V



GND



1



LDECK_MERGE_SL_DTC



J343



+5V



F



7



GND



8



12V



9



TRBELT_PLESS_DTC



10



FM41 Duplex Driver Cooling Fan



FM42



M16



PS31



Registration Motor/Duplex Motor Cooling Fan



Side Registration Motor



Side Registration Sensor



6



5



PS35 Inner Delivery Sensor



4



2 2



1



J2117



1 P



S 1



2



2



1 P



A



PS66



SL



PS65



SL05



FM08



FM05



Reverse Vertical Path Sensor



Reverse Upper Flapper Solenoid



Transfer Cleaner Cooling Fan



Paper Cooling Fan



3



2



Duplex Left Sensor



1



P.8



1569



General Circuit Diagram 10



9



8



7



6



5



4



3



2



1



To P.8 A-5



F



MT07



F



FT26 4



J3001LWH



B20



20



17



19



18



14



16



15



11



13



12



8



10



7



9



5



4



6



3



2



1



20



19



18



17



16



13



15



14



12



9



10



J3001LB_BUS



11



7



6



4



3



2



8



J3001LA_BUS



J3095F 1



J3095M



5



1



J3096M



A20



1



1



2 1



A-4



2



2



12V IH LATCH 12V IH LATCH



2



(V) (OR)



3



E



E



J2158D



J2157D



J2156D



D



J2156DH



1



2



3



J2156L



3



2



1



J2157DH J2157L



6



5



4



3



2



1



J2158DH



1



2



3



4



5



6



J2158L



2



1



1



2



J3006D J3006DH



7



6



1



J3006L



2



5



3



4



3



4



2



5



1



6



7



J3094D



J3007D J3007DH



4



3



2



1



J3007L



1



2



3



4



3



2



1



J3009D



1



2



3



J3009LH J3009L



9



8



7



6



5



4



3



2



1



1



2



3



4



5



6



7



8



9



J3092D



6



J3092LH J3092L



1



5



2



4



3



3



4



2



5



1



6



D



J3094DH J3094L



J3093D 9



8



7



6



5



4



3



2



1



J3093DH



1



2



3



4



5



6



7



8



9



J3093L



C



C



J2011 2



TP



1



TP010



1



2



THM010



Thermal Switch1 Fixing Main Thermistor



B



1



2



THM030 Fixing Sub Thermistor 2



1



3 3



2



2 2



1



3



1



3



2 2



1



J2014D J2014DH



J2012



1



3



4



3



4



2



3



1



2



3 3



1



2 2



1



J2017



1



2



1



1



2



J2015D J2015DH J2015L



3 8 8



7



6



7



5



6



PS53



Fixing Sub Thermistor 1



PS45



PS51



Fixing Shutter Home Position Sensor



3



2 2



M03



Fixing Inlet Sensor



1



2



1



J2018



1



3



2



1



3



2



1



J2019



J2016



1



PS52



PS04



Fixing Outlet Sensor



Fixing Toenail Jam Sensor



Fixing Motor



M15



Fixing Cleaning Web Level Sensor



3



4



M



M



THM020



4



5



2



1



Fixing Shutter Motor 1



B



2



J2016P



2



SL



SL09 Fixing Cleaning Web Drive Solenoid



J3096F



A



1



A



2



E-8



10



9



8



7



6



5



4



3



2



1



P.9



1570



General Circuit Diagram 10



9



8



7



6



5



4



3



2



1



F



J13



J1



3



GND



2



SNS_FAN_COM



3



4



5



6



7



8



9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40



1



2



3



4



1



Main Controller Cooling Fan



J7000 2



3 2 1



FM04



5



6



7



8



9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60



E



B15



GND



GND



N.C.



EXB_CS1



AD0



EXB_DT0



GND



EXB_OE



EXB_DT9



EXB_DT8



EXB_DT1



EXB_DT3



EXB_DT2



EXB_DT10



EXB_DT11



+3.3V



EXB_DT4



EXB_DT12



EXB_DT5



EXB_DT13



EXB_DT6



EXB_DT14



EXB_DT7



GND



EXB_DT15



EXB_DT23



N.C.



EXB_DT16



HBE



GND



GND



GND



EXB_AD1



EXB_AD2



GND



EXB_AD4



EXB_AD5



EXB_AD3



EXB_AD7



EXB_AD17



EXB_AD6



EXB_AD24



EXB_AD25



EXB_AD18



RST_M_SYS



EXB_WE



EXB_AD21



EXB_AD19



8



EXB_AD8



7



EXB_AD20



EXB_AD11



6



EXB_AD9



5



EXB_AD10



4



EXB_AD14



3



EXB_AD12



2



EXB_AD13



GND



EXB_AD15



1



EXB_AD22



A15 B14



J1



N.C. +3.3C



+3.3C



LPC_AD0



GND



INT_SERIRQ



LPC_FRAME_N



GND



LPC_AD1



GND



LPC_AD2



LPC_CLK1



LPC_AD3



PLT_RST_TPM_N



GND



N.C.



N.C.



SPI_CS0_ZIG_N



GND



GND



N.C.



GND



PM_SUS_STAT_N



SPI_MISO



GND



SMB_DATA



SPI_MOSI



SMB_ALERT_N



8



GND



7



SPI_CLK



6



SMB_CLK



5



GND



4



GND



3



SPD_SA2/DET_LPC_IF



2



TD0



1



TMS



AUDIO_VOLM



AUDIO_VOLP



A14 B13



1



B15



VCC_FAN



A15



AUDIO_PHNDET



A14



A13 B12



B14



GND



N.C.



B11



GND



AUDIO_TYPE



A12



A11 B10



A13



AUDIO_MICDET



N.C.



N.C.



N.C.



GND



GND



A12



B13



TCK



B9



B12



B11 A11



A10



A9 B8



B10 A10



AUDIO_SW



ACS_BITCLK_1P5



A8 B7



B9 A9



+1.5C



GND



A8



A7 B6



B8



GND



A6 B5



GND



N.C.



ACS_SYNC_1P5



A5 B4



A7



ACS_RST_N_1P5



A6



B7



+3.3A



A4 B3



B6



TDI



A3 B2



B5 A5



ACZ_SDATAOUT_1P5



A4



+3.3C



GND



+3.3A



A2 B1



B4



+3.3A



A1



A3



ACZ_SDATAIN0_1P5



A2



SET_ROM_LED_N



+12S



A1



+12S



E



B3



+3.3C



B2



B1



1



J15



2



UN34 Main Controller PCB 1



3



F



9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60



9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40



J1



D



UN42



UN41



Voice Guidance PCB



TPM PCB



UN39 D



Debug-SRAM



C



C



GND



5.0C_HDD



1 2 3 4 5 6



GND



5.0C_HDD



UN34



4



HDD1



1 2



GND GND



3



GND



N.C.



5.0C_HDD



4



1 3



2



GND



2



J6004



1



N.C.



5.0C_HDD



4



3



GND



1 2



TXPLUSB_H



3



TXMINUSB_H



4



GND



5



RXMINUSB_H



6



RXPLUSB_H



7



GND



HDD2



1



N.C.



2



GND



3



GND



5.0C_HDD



4



7



2



GND



3



1



N.C.



HDD2



1



7



GND



2



6



RXPLUSB_H



6



5



RXMINUSB_H



5



4



GND



1 3



3



TXMINUSB_H



4



2



TXPLUSB_H



2



J8000



1



GND



B GND



4



1 3 4 5 6 7 1 4



2



GND



2



J8000 1 2 3 4



HDD1



1



N.C.



2



GND



RXPLUSA_H



Main Controller PCB 1



3



RXPLUSA_H



J8001



RXMINUSA_H



5



GND



6



TXMINUSA_H



7



TXPLUSA_H



RXMINUSA_H



7



GND



7



HDD1



7



6



RXPLUSA_H



6



5



RXMINUSA_H



TXPLUSA_H



GND



3



6 7 1 2 4



3



J6004



Main Controller Walkure-Omega 1/5 PCB 1



5



4



UN34



GND



1 3 4 5



4



GND



GND



TXMINUSA_H



4



3



2



1



REMOVABLE-HDD (STD)



J6003



■



2



J6003



1 2 3



TXMINUSA_H



Main Controller PCB 1



B



REMOVABLE-HDD MIRRORING



J8001



UN34



4



5.0C_HDD



3



3



GND



TXPLUSA_H



3



2



GND



GND



4



6 7



J6004



1



N.C.



1 3 5



5



HDD1



7



GND



1



RXPLUSA_H



6



RXMINUSA_H



4



4



GND



2



TXMINUSA_H



2



1



J6003



HDD MIRRORING



3



TXPLUSA_H



4



1 2 3



J6003



4 7 1 2 4



J6004



6



5



UN34 Walkure-Omega



Main Controller 1/5 PCB 1



GND



2



■



HDD STANDARD (STD) (X1)



3



■



■



A



A



10



9



8



7



6



5



4



3



2



1



P.10



1571



General Circuit Diagram 10



9



8



7



6



5



4



3



2



1



■Flat Control Panel F



F



UN48 NFC PCB



LED_NFC_G



LED_NFC_R



NFC_INT



GND



6



7



8



9 10



J8



1



2



3



J1022



J5 1 2 3 4 5 6 7



SKEY6



8



SKEY7 GND



UN49



J2



POWER_LED



2



3



LED_TA_R GND



1



J13



9 10 11 12



LED_ST_G



8



LED_TA_G



7



7



POWER_ES_LED



6



6



SOFT_SW_N



5



5



DKEY7



4



1 2 3 4



DKEY5



12 11 10



DKEY2



8



J1002



DKEY1



9



8 7 6 5 4 3



J1006



+5A



Key Top PCB



J6 DKEY0



E



J1



D



2



J1



SKEY5



1



LED PCB



SKEY4



3



D



SKEY3



J7



1



GND



2



+3.3JIN SENSE_DET



GND



UN51



SKEY2



J29



J14 J14H J3 5



1 2



4 3



3



2 1



5



SDA1



4



1 2 3



J1



4



UN50 Motion Sensor PCB



GND SCL1



5



J20



J1001



SKEY1



9



E



J11 SKEY0



9



GND



5



8



SPI_PCS



4



J1005



7



SPI_SCK



3



6



SPI_MOSI



2



5



SPI_MISO



1



J1009



J9



4



1



3



2



2



3



1



4



2



5



1



6



SPM



7



N.C.



8



SPP



9



+3.3NFC



J1 10



1



GND



2



LED_DP_G



3



4



GND



J1



2



UN51 LED PCB



3



C



1



J6



J1008



J1020



+3.3LCD +3.3LCD +3.3LCD N.C. GND GND *LVDSA_N LVDSA_P GND *LVDSB_N LVDSB_P GND *LVDSC_N LVDSC_P GND *LVDSCLK_N LVDSCLK_P GND +3.3LCD or GND GND GND GND GND PWMO BKLTEN_BLON_MASK +12S +12S +12S +12S



UN53



C



LCD PCB



J1007



J1021



1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19



+3.3LCD



302928272625242322212019181716151413121110 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1



6



7



SENSE_DET



5



GND



302928272625242322212019181716151413121110 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1



10 9



ONPA_MASK



8



ONPA_CLK



J1024



6 5



2 3



4



+3.3JIN



4



3



12C_DISABLE_N



5



2



1



11



Control Panel CPU PCB



6



6



5



Motion Sensor PCB



1



1 2 3



J1



4



UN61



J5L J5LH J5D



J57



UN47



1 2 3 4 5



1



2



3



4



5



6 7



8



9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80



J4021



2



5



9



GND



N.C.



N.C.



GND



XY01



XY02



XY03



XY00



XY04



XY05



XY06



XY07



XY08



XY11



XY09



XY13



XY10



XY14



XY12



XY15



XY16



XY17



XY18



XY19



XY20



XY24



XY21



XY22



XY23



GND



XY25



GND



XY27



XY28



XY26



XY29



XY30



XY31



XY32



XY33



XY34



XY35



XY36



XY37



XY39



UN52



Main Controller PCB 2



10



XY40



9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80



J4022



UN8



A



XY38



XY42



XY43



XY41



XY44



XY45



XY46



XY47



XY48



XY49



XY50



XY53



XY51



XY52



XY55



XY56



XY54



XY57



XY58



XY59



XY60



XY61



XY62



XY63



8



XY64



6 7



GND



PANEL_ID1



GND 4



PANEL_ID2



N.C. 3



PANEL_ID0



1



GND



GND



1 2 3 4 5



GND



1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19



+12S GND FCT_MOD +5A GND



B



GND *DDI1_TXNO DDI1_TXPO GND LCD_ON NFC_TXD_N NFC_RXD_N SET_ROM_LED CPU_RDY GND DDI1_AUXP_S *DDI1_AUXN_S INTOUT_NFC INTOUT_HMD UI_TXD_N UI_RXD_N HPDR_LCD_ON GND SOFTSW_N



B



A



Touch Pannel PCB



8



7



6



5



4



3



2



1



P.11



1572



General Circuit Diagram 9



8



7



6



5



4



1 2 3 4



B3 GND B2 B1 B0 GND G5 G4 G3 GND G2 G1 G0 GND R5 R4 R3 GND R2 R1 R0 +3.3LCD or GND +3.3LCD or GND GND CLK GND



+12S



7



1



J28



8



2



LED PCB



10



J27 7 6 5 4 3 2



1 2 3 4 5 6 9



4 3



+3.3JIN SDA1 SCL1 GND



9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 8 7 6 5 4



GND



3



GND



UN59 J1 Key Top PCB (Right)



2



1 2 3 4 5 6 7



LED_DP_G



J1001



9



8



GND



J1005



18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10



20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10



NFC_INT



C



J1



1



1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9



1 2 3 4 5 6 7 9



LED_NFC_G GND



ES_LED SOFTSW_N SKEY5 SKEY7 DKEY1 SKEY2 SKEY4 SKEY6 SKEY0 SKEY1 DKEY2 LED_ST_G DKEY0 GND DKEY7 SKEY3 SET_ROM_LED N.C.



1



B



GND



GND



GND



3



LED_DP_G



SENSE_DET



4



GND LED_NFC_R



UN56



XN YN XP YP



J1007



6



7



8



*DDI1_TXNO



DDI1_TXPO



GND



LCD_ON



NFC_TXD_N



NFC_RXD_N



SET_ROM_LED



1



2



3



4



5



6



7



8



J5



9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19



1



2



3



4



5



GND



5



+5A



4



FCT_MOD



3



GND



2



GND



J3 1



+12S



GND



UI_RXD_N



UI_TXD_N



SOFTSW_N



HPDR_LCD_ON



DDI1_AUXP_S



INTOUT_HMD



INTOUT_NFC



*DDI1_AUXN_S



CPU_RDY



1



GND



5 6



9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19



2



3



4



5



J4022



A



1



J4021



J1



UN8



2



UN51



2



SPM



1



6



SPI_PCS



3



A



1



N.C.



2



5



SPI_SCK



3



4



5



GND



J10



4



2 1



3



6



SPI_MOSI



Touch Pannel PCB



J5L1 J5LH1 J5D1



+3.3JIN



ONPA_CLK



7



ONPA_MASK



8



SPI_MISO



8



1



12C_DISABLE_N



1



J92 1 2



9



GND



J65



5



4



Motion Sensor PCB



3



J1



6



UN61



11 10



2



J1



Sensor Relay J1001 PCB J1003



J1004



3



UN51 LED PCB



SPP



1



J13



GND



+3.3NFC



20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10



8 7 6 4



GND



UN55



2



GND



3



+3.3JIN



5



J29



J14 J14H J3 5



1



4



2



3



3



2



12C_SDA



4



1



12C_SCL



5



J20 1 2 3 4 5



GND



LED_DP_G



B



J2



9 10



2



8



3



7



4



6



1



5



2



4



3



3



4



2



J1002



Motion Sensor PCB



(Left)



J2 1



J1



J1



1



J4



C



UN50



10



Volume PCB



+3.3NFC



UN58 Key Top PCB



2



UN62



8



5



7



SPI_MISO



J1002



+12S LED_TA_G LED_TA_R SPP SPM K-RTN5 GND K-SCN2 K-SCN3 K-SCN4



1



9 8



SPI_MOSI



9



13 12 11 10



7



SPI_SCK



D



J1003



K-SCN4



6



SPI_PCS



K-RTNO



5



GND



GND



4



LED_NFC_G



VBR



3



LED_NFC_R



+3.3A



1 2



NFC_INT



10



GND



UN57 Tarry PCB



1



+12S



J1



2



3



GND



3



4



GND



UN54 Control Panel CPU PCB



2



5



+5V



3



6



BL_ON



E



4



8 7



PWMO



2



LED Driver PCB



GND



1



2



1



J501



UN61



3



GND



4



LED1



5



GND



J502



6



1 2



+3.3LCD or GND



J1008



J26



B4



4



B5



LED2



F



3



GND



GND



5 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10



+3.3LCD or GND



LED3



6



9



GND



7



8



+3.3LCD or GND



3



D



J1



1



8



7



+3.3LCD or GND



4



LCD PCB



NFC PCB



2



9



6



DE



1



5



+3.3LCD or GND



2



4



+3.3LCD



5



3



+3.3LCD



6



1 2



N.C.



5



UN60



E



+3.3LCD



40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10



F



UN48



3



J1004



■Upright Control Panel



6



10



Main Controller PCB 2



9



8



7



6



5



4



3



2



1



P.12



1573



I_OUT_L4



40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50



I_OUT_L3



5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39



I_OUT_L2



1 2 3 4



7



6 8 9 10



40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3 4



50 13



1 3



2 2



1 3



2



1 3 5



4



GND SIZE2



J5203



+5V



GND SIZE1 +5V



3



SIZE2



GND +5V GND SIZE1 +5V



DOWNLOAD_PC +5V PC_TxD PC_RxD



3



GND



+24V 8



8



9



9



DF_OPEN1



7



7 4



4



5 3



1 3



5 2 2 2



2



2



3 1



1



J5202



3



J102M 6



6 1



J5301L J5301DH3 J5301D 1



J102



FAN_LOCK2



GND



2



ACOM A BCOM



1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22



23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45



46 47 48 49 50



B



GND



Sensor 1



LOOP-BACK-IN GND +12V +12V +12V +12V GND GND GND +6V +6V +6V GND GND GND GND GND BC_RX_00 GND BC_RX_10 GND AP_LOAD_00 AP_LOAD_10 GND BC_TX_0 GND BC_SCLK_0 GND GND RA_R_N RA_R_P GND RB_R_N RB_R_P GND RC_R_N RC_R_P GND RCLK_R_N RCLK_R_P GND RD_R_N RD_R_P GND RE_R_N RE_R_P GND GND GND LOOP-BACK-OUT



Sensor 2



1 1



2



3



19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22



J5201



DFRXGND DFRX+ SSTS+ SCTS SSTSSCMD+ SRTS SCMDSBTMODE SPRDY* IMGGET-S SPOWER CPRDY-S SLIVEWAKE* SDOWNLD* FRQCHG GND GND



GND



+5V +24V



I_OUT_R4



J2074



DADF Open/Closed Sensor 2



19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 3



2



1



I_OUT_L4



C-9



PS1



I_OUT_L3



M



DADF Open/Closed Sensor 1



8



9



10 7 6 1



2



3



50 49 48 47 46 45 44 43 42 41 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1



50 13 3



2



1



5 4 3 2 1



I_OUT_R4



I_OUT_L2



PS2



I_OUT_R3



I_OUT_L1



GND



Scanner Unit Home Position Sensor



I_OUT_R2



LOOP_BACK GND DF_FEED_MTR_CLK GND DF_REST_MTR_CLK GND DF_EJCT_MTR_CLK GND DF_SEP_MTR_CLK GND DF_READ_MTR_CLK GND ADF_RESET GND D/A_CLK GND D/A_DIN GND D/A_LOAD GND SDA_ADF GND SCL_ADF GND EXCL_0 GND M2S_0 GND S2M_0 GND AD4 AD3 GND AD2 AD1 AD-0 GND GLASS_HP [SENS8] FEED_S [SENS7] SEPA3_S [SENS6] GND SKEW_S [SENS5] SEPA2_S [SENS4] EJCT_S [SENS3] GND 2READ_S [SENS2] READ_S [SENS1] RESI_S [SENS0] GND LOOP_BACK



I_OUT_R1



DC_OUT_L



I_OUT_R3 I_OUT_R2 I_OUT_R1



I_OUT_L1



1574



6 6



1 2 3 4 5 6



5 5



B DC_OUT_R



DC_OUT_L



UN4



Reader LED Lamp PCB (Left)



To P.14 LOOP-BACK-IN GND +12V +12V +12V +12V GND GND GND +6V +6V +6V GND GND GND GND GND BC_RX_00 GND BC_RX_10 GND AP_LOAD_00 AP_LOAD_10 GND BC_TX_0 GND BC_SCLK_0 GND GND RA_R_N RA_R_P GND RB_R_N RB_R_P GND RC_R_N RC_R_P GND RCLK_R_N RCLK_R_P GND RD_R_N RD_R_P GND RE_R_N RE_R_P GND GND GND LOOP-BACK-OUT



GND



GND



GND



+12V



+24V +24V



1



DC_OUT_R



+12V GND GND



+24V



2



A 3



J2402 4 3



J101_BUS



FM1



Scanner Unit Cooling Fan



CF2



Original Size



J2401



5 2 3



2 1



1



J125DH J125D J125L



A



CF1



Original Size



J1101



UN2 UN2 Reader Scanner Unit PCB 1 2 3



4 4



J2072D J2072DH J2072L 1 2 3



3 2 1



J2073 3 2 1



1



3



J2401_BUS



1 2



2



J124D J124DH J124L 3 2



1 2 3 4 5



J2403 1 2



2 3



1



J107M J110M



2 1 3 2 1



1 2 3 1 2 3 4 5



J2080 J201_BUS



3 4



J103 1



UN3



4 5 5



J110



5 4



1



2



Reader LED Lamp PCB (Right)



5 6



4 3



2



3



J108M J111M



6 3 2



J107 2 1



J2071D J2071DH J2071L 3



6



1 3



50



J103M



4 5



7 8 9 10



+3.3V



4 3 4



C UN1 HP



3 2 3



J109M DF_OPEN2



2 1 4 2



3 3



D 2 2



J601 1 1



J108 19



J202_BUS



Scanner Motor J1101_BUS



1 4 3 1



To P.14 Reader Controller PCB



+5V



C



GND



UN4



J109 3 2



6



J418 4 3 2 1



M1 Reader LED Lamp PCB (Left)



J104 50 J101M GND



J123D J123LH J123L



B



C-10 GND



+24V



H2 Reader heater



J111 2 1



5



1



1 4



J105 50 3



+3.3V



2



J101 1



2



19 3



J206_BUS



D



J2 4



J2412



5



MT2



J5103 1 2



J104_BUS Reader Scanner Unit PCB J5100F



50 49 48 47 46 45 44 43 42 41 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1



J401 50



UN3



E E



MT1



B-6 NEUTRAL(WHITE)



100V HEATER



NEUTRAL(WHITE)



To P.2 HOT(BLACK)



J1102 3 2 1 1 2



UN2 H1 Reader heater



B-2



J5101M



3 4 5



1



J2411 1 2



6



2



A-6



3



200V HEATER



J5105F J5001F



4



J2413



5



To P.1 To P.4



F Reader LED Lamp PCB (Right)



F



1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10



1



PS3



General Circuit Diagram



To P.14 E-5



3 2 1



P.13



General Circuit Diagram 10



9



8



7



6



5



4



3



2



1



SR18



SR19



SL1



Glass Home Position



Lead Sensor 2



Stamp Solenoid



Sensor



3



2



1



I_OUT_R3



I_OUT_R2



I_OUT_R1



DC_OUT_R



4



5



UN6



10



J623 3



2



1



3



2



1



3



2



1



3



2



1



SR13



SR12



Original Size Original Size Sensor 4 Sensor 2



MOVE_HP_S



GND



GND



MOVE_HP_S



GND



+5R



2READ_S



+5R



GND



+5R



MOVE_HP_S



GND



+5R



STMP1_SOL



GND



EJECT_TRY_S



+24V



+24V



STMP1_SOL



+5R



MOVE_HP_S



GND



2



8



7



6



5



4



3



2



1



J1019L J1019LH J1019D



1



D



6 4



5 5



4 6



3 7



2



1



8



9



J1027D J1027LH J1027L



5 2



4 3



3



2



J1013D J1013DH J1013L



4



5



3



2



1



3



2



1



3



2



1



3



2



1



2



J627



6 3



2



3



5



4



3



2



1



SR14



2



1



SR17



MOVE MOT B2



1



1



2



3



4



5



6



7



8



9



MOVE MOT B-



MOVE MOT B+



7



MOVE MOT B+



GND



7



MOVE MOT A+



READ_AD



8



MOVE MOT A+



READ_S_LED



6



MOVE MOT A-



+5R



RESI_AD



GND



RESI_S_LED



EJCT_S_LED



9



GND 4



4



3 6



2 7



1 8



6



5



4



3



J1025D J1025LH J1025L



J1016D J1016LH J1016L



4



3



2



1



4



3



2



1



1



2



3



4



5



1



2



3



4



4



3



2



1



4



3



2



1



J628



1



5



J629



B J1118D J1118DH J1118L



J638



4



3



2



1



1



2



3



4



1



2



3



4



J1225D J1225DH J1225L



M



M8



1



SR15



Original Size Original Size Sensor 1 Sensor 3



5



5



SR21



J626



+5R



+5R



J1117D J1117DH J1017L Delivery Sensor



J625



1



5



MOVE MOT B-



7 3



4



MOVE MOT B+



8 2



3



MOVE MOT A+



9 1



2



MOVE MOT A-



1



10 11



1



MOVE MOT A-



1



3



GND



2



6



2



GND



3



7



1



RESI_AD



4



8



GND



5



9 10 11 12 13 14



J1029D J1029LH J1029L



READ_AD



4



READ_S_LED



1



3



J1014D J1014LH J1014L



9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13



RESI_S_LED



1



6



8



10 11 12 13



+5R



2



7



7



9



GND



3



8



6



8



+5R



EMP_LED



4



9



7



RESI_AD



5



EMP_LED



4



6



EJCT_AD



EMP_LED



+5R



+5R



COVER_S



GND



+5R



GND



SIZE3_S 3



5



RESI_AD



2



2



4



Glass Movement Moter



UN2 Original Display



SR22



SR23



LED PCB



Lead Sensor 1



Registration Sensor



Cover



A



MT2 Open/Closed



MT6 3



2



Sensor



1



J634



J635



SR25



SR24



J2413 MT5



UN5 DADF LED Lamp PCB (Left)



9



9



RESI_S_LED



3 9



US_PLS



4



I_OUT_R4



3



3



9 10 11



RESI_S_LED



4 8



SCL_ADF



5



DC_OUT_L



2



4 8



+5R



5 7



SDA_ADF



6



I_OUT_L1



1



5 7



+5R



6 6



GND



7



I_OUT_L2



5



6 6



GND



7 5



J1012D J1012DH J1012L



+3.3V



9



8



I_OUT_L3



4



7 5



GND



8 4



13



10



I_OUT_L4



3



8 4



READ_AD



GND



9 3



1



DADF LED Lamp PCB (Right)



2



2



MT1



2



9



READ_AD



2



1



3



J637



6



1



1 6



3



READ_S_LED



1



J2411_BUS



J2412



2 5



2



READ_S_LED



11 10



J622



A



GND



14 13 12 11 10



+5R



1



+5R



2



9 10 11



COVER_S



3



8



+5R



4



7



+5R



5



6



COVER_S



6



5



GND



7



4



GND



8



3



2



+5R



9



1



+5R



11 10



Registration Motor



1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 50



DADF Scanner Unit PCB



3



1



J1113D J1113DH J1113L



+5R



J1009D J1009LH J1009L



M



GND



M7 Tray Lifter Motor



+5R



FM2 J619 DADF Cooling Fan 2



SIZE1_S



6



6



SIZE3_S



5



5



GND



4



4



+5R



3



3



SIZE3_S



2



2



J2411 UN4



4



4



SIZE1_S



1



1



2



+5R



3



M



J105_BUS J1102



3 4



1



+5R



2



M6



1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50



+5R



SIZE1_S



GND



+24V



US_PLS



US_PLS



SDA_ADF



SCL_ADF



SIZE4_S



GND



GND



+5R +3.3V



GND



ALARM1



SIZE2_S



GND



+5R



+24V



LIET MOT B-



1



LOOP-BACK-IN GND +12V +12V +12V +12V GND GND GND +6V +6V +6V GND GND GND GND GND BC_RX_00 GND BC_RX_10 GND AP_LOAD_00 AP_LOAD_10 GND BC_TX_0 GND BC_SCLK_0 GND GND RA_R_N RA_R_P GND RB_R_N RB_R_P GND RC_R_N RC_R_P GND RCLK_R_N RCLK_R_P GND RD_R_N RD_R_P GND RE_R_N RE_R_P GND GND GND LOOP-BACK-OUT



B



4 3



E J1020L J1020LH J1020D



J415



1



13 12 11 10 1 2 3 4



GND



1 2 3



SIZE3_S



Pickup Motor



J401_BUS



J1022L J1022DH J1022D



C



J1008D J1008LH J1008L



1



EJCT_AD



1



2



EJCT_S_LED



2



3



GND



3



4



+5R



4



SIZE1_S



Read Motor



6



+5R



Feed Motor



5



GND



M4



4



M



M5



M



M3



3



GND



Pickup Roller Unit Lifter Motor



2



GND



M



Delivery Motor



M1



J617



5



9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27



GND



6



6



GND



6



5



8



GND



5



4



7



GND



4



3



6



+24V



3



2



5



7



+24V



2



1



4



+24V



1



6



3



US_PLS



6



5



2



US_PLS



5



4



1



8



EJCT_AD



1 3



9



EJCT_S_LED



2 2



US_PLS



4



3



5 2



11 10



J412



10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25



US_PLS



3



2



1



SDA_ADF



M2



M



2



1



J1007D J1007DH J1007L



SCL_ADF



To P.13



1



4



GND



J616



9



US_PLS



1



6



3



SDA_ADF



5



2



SCL_ADF



4



8



+5R



6



GND



3



4



7



27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10



+5R +3.3V



2



M 3



6



DADF Cooling Fan 1



J620D J620DH J620L



+5R +3.3V



1



2



5



FM1



1



1



4



US_PLS



5



3



SDA_ADF



4



1 2 3



2



SCL_ADF



3



J411 1



GND



2



3



GND



1



2



+5R +3.3V



J618



1



SIZE2_S



J615



J407



SIZE4_S



6



4



SIZE4_S



5



3



SIZE4_S



4



2



GND



3



J406 1



LIET MOT B+



3



LIET MOT A+



2



LIET MOT A-



RESI MOTOR B-



1



9



ALARM2



8



GND



7



+24V



6



RESI MOTOR B+



SEPA MOT B+



5



+5R



2



F



J413



GND



1



+5R



J1005L J1005DH J1005D



STMP1_SOL



7 1



+5R



1 4



6 1



GND



6 2



SIZE2_S



2 3



1 5



+24V



5 3



GND



3 2



2 4



2READ_S



4 4



GND



D-4



4 1



3 3



11 10



4



J612D J612DH J612L



4 2



GND



3 5



+5R



3



1 6



+5R



2 6



SIZE2_S



2



5 1



J630



J1023L J1023DH J1023D



50



3 1



J639



J1021L J1021LH J1021D



2 5



STMP1_SOL



1 7



J408



4



SEPA MOT B-



3



RESI MOTOR A-



2



RESI MOTOR A+



1



SEPA MOT A-



READ MOT +24V



READ MOT B-



READ MOT B+



9 10 11 12



READ MOT A-



FEED MOTOR A-



8



READ MOT +24V



5



J1006D J1006DH J1006L



7



READ MOT A+



4



1



FEED MOTOR 24V



3



2



6



FEED MOTOR A+



2



3



5



FEED MOTOR B+



EJCT MOT B-



EJCT MOT B+



EJCT MOT A-



EJCT MOT A+



PICKUP MOTOR B-



GND



PICKUP MOTOR B+



+5V



1



4



4



FEED MOTOR B-



50



5



J105



3



FEED MOTOR 24V



C



PICKUP MOTOR A-



GND



C-5



2



1 2



9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23



DADF Driver PCB J405



J404 1



2 1



3



J401



SEPA MOT A+



J403 PICKUP MOTOR A+



4



+24V



To P.13



3



1 3



3 4



2READ_S



50 49 48 47 46 45 44 43 42 41 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33 32 31 30 29



J1004L J1004LH J1004D



1



J409



1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8



2



2 2



4 3



+5R



GND



J614



UN3 J402



3 1



EJECT_TRY_S



2



J1124L J1124DH J1124D



J104_BUS



5 2



+24V



8



1



6 1



GND



7



3



PAPER_FACE_S



6



4



GND



5



5



+5V



SEPA3_S_LED



4



6



TRAY_OPEN_S



+5V_FU_OUT



3



7



GND



+5V



2



8



+5V



SEPA2_S



1



2



3 2



1



9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 9



FEED_S



7



GND



6



GND



5



3



2 1



3



EJECT_TRY_S



8



4



J632L J632LH J632D



+5R



2



3



1 2



2



1



+5R



3



2



1



J613



GND 4



1



2 1



+5V



5



GND



6



+5V



7



+5V



8



J410



1



J104



GND



50



1



9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 9



+5V



8



GND



7



+5V



6



TRAY_OPEN_S



5



FEED_S



4



GND



3



GND



2



2



2



28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1



3



3



50 49 48 47 46 45 44 43 42 41 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1



1



1



PICKUP_HP_S



2



2



+5V



GND



GND



+5V



FEED_S



J611



GND



SEPA3_AD



+5V_FU_OUT SEPA3_S_LED



3



3



EJECT_TRY_S



Home Position Sensor



+5R



Sensor



1



PAPER_FACE_S



1



2



+5V



2



3



TRAY_OPEN_S



3



SEPA3_S_LED



1



17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10



10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21



1



17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10



+5V_FU_OUT



J1002L J1002DH J1002D



2 1



1



2



SEPA3_AD



1 2



2



SEPA3_AD



J1001L J1001DH J1001D



3



3



J610



SEPA2_S



3 1



J1003L J1003LH J1003D



Pickup Roller Unit Lifter



+5V



4



+5V



1



1



GND



LGL_S2



2



LED-



LED+



9



+5V



8



TRAY_HP_S



7



3



J1000L J1000DH J1000D



1



GND



6



2



+5V



+5V



5



3



LGL_S2



LGL_S



4



4



EMP_S1



GND



3



+5V



2



5



GND



6



2 2



+5V



10 11 12 13 14 15



7



GND



9



8



A4LT_S



VR



1



EMP_S1



8



9



GND



GND



+3.3V



D



SLEEP-POWER



7



GND



6



GND



5



SLEEP-POWER



+5V



4



1 1



2



J606



1



GND



A4LT_S



3



2 2



J605



3



LGL_S



GND



2



+5V



VR



+3.3V



GND 1



15 14 13 12 11 10



J608



J607 3 3



3



J609



1



GND



1



1



GND



J1603L J1603LH J1603D



2



Sensor



F-4



Paper Surface



P 2



+5V



2



3



3



SEPA1_S



3



1



S



1



+5V



4



2



P 2



SEPA1_S



5



6



Sensor



GND



6



5



4



3



GND



3



S



LED_PCB



SEPA2_S



SR5



Open/Closed



Delay Sensor



SR11



SR10



Tray



SR8



SR7



Post-separation Post-separation Delivery Display LED PCB Sensor 1 Sensor 2



+5V



2



UN1



Tray Home Position GND



1



J604



GND



1



1



EMP_S1



1



2



GND



2



+5V



3



A4LT_S



3



GND



2



2



J603 SLEEP-POWER



VR



1



3



J601



+3.3V



GND



J600L J600DH J600D



1



3 1



3



LOOP_BACK GND RESI_S READ_S 2READ_S GND EJCT_S SEP2_S GND GND SEP3_S FEED_S MOVE_HP_S GND READ_AD SEPA3_AD EJCT_AD GND RESI_AD VR GND S2M_0 GND M2S_0 GND EXCK_0 GND SCL_ADF SDA_ADF GND SLEEP-OUT SLEEP-POWER GND DA_LOAD DA_DATA DA_CLK GND ADF_RST* GND READ_MTR_CLK GND SEP_MTR_CLK GND EJCT_MTR_CLK GND RESI_MTR_CLK GND FEED_MTR_CLK GND LOOP_BACK



E



2



2



SEPA1_S



3



3



GND



1



1



3 2



To P.13 SR9



Sensor 3



SR6



LED-



2



J602



2



1



MT3



3



3



2



LED+



1



3



MT4



2



P



LGL_S2



2



3 3



SR20 Post-separation



S



+5V



Sensor



Z-Folding Sensor



Original Sensor



TRAY_HP_S



Sensor 1



SR4



SR3



AB/ Inch Identification



PICKUP_HP_S



SR1



SR2 LTR-R/ LGL Idenfication



+5V



VR1 Original Width Volume



2 1



1



3



+5R



1



J633



J631



2



GND



SR16 Delivery Tray Sensor



1



2READ_S



STMP1_SOL



F



1



+24V



SL 2



8



7



6



5



Double Feed Double Feed Detection Sensor Detection Sensor (Reception) (Transmission)



4



3



2



1



P.14



1575



Soft counter specifications



Soft counter specifications The numbers entered for software counters are classified as follows: No.



Counter Details



000 to 099



Remote copy



100 to 199



Total



200 to 299



Copy



300 to 399



Print



400 to 499



Copy and print



500 to 599



Scan



600 to 699



Box print



700 to 799



Reception print



800 to 899



Report print



900 to 999



Transmission



Meanings of symbols in tables • 4C: Full Color • Mono: Mono Color (Y,M,C / R,G,B / retro monochrome) • Bk: Single black color • L: Large size (larger than B4 size) • S: Small size (smaller than B4 size) • Numbers 1, 2 indicated under "Counter Details": Number of counts for large size paper It can be changed by the service mode (COPIER > OPTION > USER > B4-L-CNT) so that the paper larger than B4 size can be counted as large size paper. • Copy: Local copy + Remote Copy • Copy A: Local copy + Remote Copy + Box Print • Print: PDL print + report print + Box Print • Print A: PDL print + report print • Scan: Black and white scan + color scan 000 to 099 No.



Counter Details



No.



Counter Details



006



Remote Copy (mono color 1)



022



Remote Copy (mono color / Large / double sided)



007



Remote Copy (mono color 2)



023



Remote Copy (mono color / Small / double sided)



012



Remote Copy (mono color / Large)



071



Toner bottle counter black



013



Remote Copy (mono color / Small)



100 to 199 No.



Counter Details



No.



Counter Details



101



Total 1



136



Total A (mono color / Large)



102



Total 2



137



Total A (mono color / Small)



103



Total (Large)



138



Total A1 (double sided)



104



Total (Small)



139



Total A2 (double sided)



108



Total (mono color 1)



140



Large A (double sided)



109



Total (mono color 2)



141



Small A (double sided)



112



Total (mono color / Large)



150



Total B1



113



Total (mono color / Small)



151



Total B2



114



Total 1 (double sided)



152



Total B (Large)



115



Total 2 (double sided)



153



Total B (Small)



116



Large (double sided)



156



Total B (mono color 1)



117



Small (double sided)



157



Total B (mono color 2)



126



Total A1



160



Total B (mono color / Large)



127



Total A2



161



Total B (mono color / Small)



128



Total A (Large)



162



Total B1 (double sided)



129



Total A (Small)



163



Total B2 (double sided)



1576



Soft counter specifications No.



Counter Details



No.



Counter Details



132



Total A (mono color 1)



164



Large B (double sided)



133



Total A (mono color 2)



165



Small B (double sided)



200 to 299 No.



Counter Details



No.



Counter Details



201



Copy (Total 1)



222



Copy (mono color 2)



202



Copy (Total 2)



227



Copy (mono color / Large)



203



Copy (Large)



228



Copy (mono color / Small)



204



Copy (Small)



237



Copy (mono color / Large / double sided)



205



Copy A (Total 1)



238



Copy (mono color / Small / double sided)



206



Copy A (Total 2)



249



Copy A (mono color 1)



207



Copy A (Large)



250



Copy A (mono color 2)



208



Copy A (Small)



255



Copy A (mono color / Large)



209



Local copy(Total 1)



256



Copy A (mono color / Small)



210



Local copy(Total 2)



265



Copy A (mono color / Large / double sided)



211



Local copy(Large)



266



Copy A (mono color / Small / double sided)



212



Local copy(Small)



277



Local copy (mono color 1)



213



Remote Copy (Total 1)



278



Local copy (mono color 2)



214



Remote Copy (Total 2)



283



Local copy (mono color / Large)



215



Remote Copy (Large)



284



Local copy (mono color / Small)



216



Remote Copy (Small)



293



Local copy (mono color / Large / double sided)



221



Copy (mono color 1)



294



Local copy (mono color / Small / double sided)



300 to 399 No.



Counter Details



No.



Counter Details



301



Print (Total 1)



329



Print (mono color / Large / double sided)



302



Print (Total 2)



330



Print (mono color / Small / double sided)



303



Print (Large)



331



PDL Print (Total 1)



304



Print (Small)



332



PDL Print (Total 2)



305



Print A (Total 1)



333



PDL Print (Large)



306



Print A (Total 2)



334



PDL Print (Small)



307



Print A (Large)



339



PDL Print (mono color 1)



308



Print A (Small)



340



PDL Print (mono color 2)



313



Print (mono color 1)



345



PDL Print (mono color / Large)



314



Print (mono color 2)



346



PDL Print (mono color / Small)



319



Print (mono color / Large)



355



PDL Print (mono color / Large / double sided)



320



Print (mono color / Small)



356



PDL Print (mono color / Small / double sided)



400 to 499 No.



Counter Details



No.



403



Copy + Print (mono color / Large)



413



Copy + Print (2)



Counter Details



404



Copy + Print (mono color / Small)



414



Copy + Print (1)



405



Copy + Print (mono color 2)



421



Copy + Print (mono color / Large / double sided)



406



Copy + Print (mono color 1)



422



Copy + Print (mono color / Small / double sided)



411



Copy + Print (Large)



471



Long length Counter (Total)



412



Copy + Print (Small)



473



Long length Counter (Black and whiter)



500 to 599 No.



Counter Details



No.



Counter Details



501



Scan (Total 1)



507



Black and white Scan (Large)



502



Scan (Total 2)



508



Black and white Scan (Small)



503



Scan (Large)



509



Color Scan (Total 1)



1577



Soft counter specifications No.



Counter Details



No.



Counter Details



504



Scan (Small)



510



Color Scan (Total 2)



505



Black and white Scan (Total 1)



511



Color Scan (Large)



506



Black and white Scan (Total 2)



512



Color Scan (Small)



600 to 699 No.



Counter Details



No.



Counter Details



601



Box Print (Total 1)



631



Memory media Print (Total 1)



602



Box Print (Total 2)



632



Memory media Print (Total 2)



603



Box Print (Large)



633



Memory media Print (Large)



604



Box Print (Small)



634



Memory media Print (Small)



609



Box Print (mono color 1)



639



Memory media Print (mono color 1)



610



Box Print (mono color 2)



640



Memory media Print (mono color 2)



615



Box Print (mono color / Large)



645



Memory media Print (mono color / Large)



616



Box Print (mono color / Small)



646



Memory media Print (mono color / Small)



625



Box Print (mono color / Large / double sided)



655



Memory media Print (mono color / Large / double sided)



626



Box Print (mono color / Small / double sided)



656



Memory media Print (mono color / Small / double sided)



No.



Counter Details



700 to 799 No.



Counter Details



701



Reception Print (Total 1)



743



Network Print (Total 1)



702



Reception Print (Total 2)



744



Network Print (Total 2)



703



Reception Print (Large)



745



Network Print (Large)



704



Reception Print (Small)



746



Network Print (Small)



709



Reception Print (mono color 1)



749



Network Print (mono color 1)



710



Reception Print (mono color 2)



750



Network Print (mono color 2)



715



Reception Print (mono color / Large)



753



Network Print (mono color / Large)



716



Reception Print (mono color / Small)



754



Network Print (mono color / Small)



725



Reception Print (mono color / Large / double sided)



757



Network Print (mono color / Large / double sided)



726



Reception Print (mono color / Small / double sided)



758



Network Print (mono color / Small / double sided)



727



Advanced Box Print (Total 1)



759



Mobile Print (Total 1)



728



Advanced Box Print (Total 2)



760



Mobile Print (Total 2)



729



Advanced Box Print (Large)



761



Mobile Print (Large)



730



Advanced Box Print (Small)



762



Mobile Print (Small)



733



Advanced Box Print (mono color 1)



765



Mobile Print (mono color 1)



734



Advanced Box Print (mono color 2)



766



Mobile Print (mono color 2)



737



Advanced Box Print (mono color / Large)



769



Mobile Print (mono color / Large)



738



Advanced Box Print (mono color / Small)



770



Mobile Print (mono color / Small)



741



Advanced Box Print (mono color / Large / double sided)



773



Mobile Print (mono color / Large / double sided)



742



Advanced Box Print (mono color / Small / double sided)



774



Mobile Print (mono color / Small / double sided)



800 to 899 No.



Counter Details



No.



Counter Details



801



Report Print (Total 1)



810



Report Print (mono color 2)



802



Report Print (Total 2)



815



Report Print (mono color / Large)



803



Report Print (Large)



816



Report Print (mono color / Small)



804



Report Print (Small)



825



Report Print (mono color / Large / double sided)



809



Report Print (mono color 1)



826



Report Print (mono color / Small / double sided)



1578



Soft counter specifications 900 to 999 No.



Counter Details



No.



915



Transmission scan total 2 (Color)



940



Remote Scan (Black and whiter)



916



Transmission scan total 2 (Black and whiter)



945



Transmission Scan / E-mail (Color)



917



Transmission scan total 3 (Color)



946



Transmission Scan / E-mail (Black and whiter)



918



Transmission scan total 3 (Black and whiter)



959



Media Scan (Color)



921



Transmission scan total 5 (Color)



960



Media Scan (Black and whiter)



922



Transmission scan total 5 (Black and whiter)



961



Application Scan (Total 1)



929



Transmission scan total 6 (Color)



962



Application Black and white Scan (Total 1)



930



Transmission scan total 6 (Black and whiter)



963



Application Color Scan (Total 1)



937



Box Scan (Color)



964



Super Box LocalScan (Color)



938



Box Scan (Black and whiter)



965



Super Box LocalScan (Black and whiter)



939



Remote Scan (Color)



1579



Counter Details



Removal



Removal Overview • User data kept by the machine contains address books and inbox documents that users can recognize. • For security, the Settings/Registration menu for user is provided to delete data on FLASH PCB and perform overwrite deletion to render user data on Storage unrecoverable. • Before the removal of machine, be sure to explain to the user that the above mode must be used to completely delete data. When performing the user operation as the substitute, make sure that the service staff executes this to prevent the information leak of user data.



■ Cancelling the Device Registration If Data Backup Service is used, it is required to perform the following steps in the order. 1. Stop using the Data Backup Service. (Operation on CBIO side) 2. Delete all the backup data. (Operation on CBIO side) 3. Cancel the device registration. (Operation on the device side) NOTE: For the above-mentioned procedure, see the User's Guide for Data Backup Service or the Service Manual for the imageRUNNER ADVANCE system. If the User's Guide is not available, see the technical documents published by each sales company.



CAUTION: Be sure to cancel the device registration before deleting the user, because the device registration cannot be cancelled after deleting the user data.



■ User data deletion • To delete user data, execute Settings/Registration > Management Settings > System Management > Initialize All Data/ Settings. Performing Initialize All Data/Settings returns setting values of Settings/Registration menu to their factory defaults. • Deletion Mode can be changed. Normally, "Once with 0 (Null) Data" can sufficiently delete data. Note that increasing the number of overwrite increases the time required for the deletion operation. NOTE: • When you perform Initialize All Data/Settings, license and data of MEAP application are initialized to the state same as when the HDD is replaced. If any MEAP application may be used by other users after the machine is removed, disable the MEAP application and uninstall it in advance. • Performing Initialize All Data/Settings does not delete the license of the system option.



■ Deletion of Service Mode Settings The user mode setting values may have been changed at the user's request. In that case, the service mode setting values should be changed back to the default values before removing the machine.



Work Procedure If the user uses MEAP applications, ask the user to uninstall the MEAP applications if necessary.



■ User data delete procedure 1. Settings/Registration > Management Settings > Data Management > Initialize All Data/Settings 2. Select a deletion mode.



1580



Removal 3. Press [Start]. If the user has not given any instruction on which item in the deletion mode should be used, select the default "Once with 0 (Null) Data".



NOTE: • When all the data are initialized, the user data on the HDD and the user data on the Flash PCB are deleted. For the items to be deleted, refer to the backup list. • Performing "Initialize All Data" turns auto gradation adjustment values and TPM settings to OFF. Therefore, to enable normal operation the next time, the operation performed at installation is necessary. • Performing Initialize All Data/Settings does not delete the license of the system option.



Report output upon completion of Initialize All Data/Settings A report is output after "Initialize All Data/Settings" is completed. Consider using this report to provide to user as a material to inform of work details when executing Initialize All Data/Settings upon user's request.



Operation after Initialize All Data/Settings The machine is started normally at restart after Initialize All Data/Settings without displaying the message (Turn OFF the main power supply on the right side of the machine) on the screen to prompt shutdown. The report is output after startup.



****************************** *** System Information *** ******************************



> Serial Number Device Name



ZZZ99999 iR-ADV XXXX (iAXXXX)



Overwrite Method for Deletion Mode



Once with Random Data (*1)



The following data stored in the device has been completely erased. - Data stored in the temporary data area - User generated data - Settings under Settings/Registration (restored to factory defaults)



1581



Removal *1 display following one. "Once with 0 (Null) Data" "Once with Random Data" "3 Times with Random Data" "9 Times with Random Data" "DoD Standard"



Limitations • • • •



The language of the report is only English, and cannot be changed. The report is output without fail (a function to select ON/OFF of report output is not provided). There is no second output of report when the machine is turned ON without paper. Only the output of this report remains in the job log.



■ Deletion of Service Mode Setting Values Service Mode Lev1 > Function> CLEAR > MN-CONT



NOTE: • When MN-CON clear is executed, the address book on the HDD is not deleted. As for the user data, initialize all the data. • When MN-CON clear is executed, the password for the security policies will be deleted.



1582



List of Service Modes That Can Be Restored



List of Service Modes That Can Be Restored The following items are restored when a DCM file obtained by using [Settings/Registration] > [Back Up/Restore] or [Backup/ Restoration Using Service Mode] is exported.



Purpose for Using the Function Case



Export/ Import



Use Case



A



Export from and import to the same device



• Used as backup in preparation for a device failure • Used as backup before changing settings



B



Export from and import to a different device of the same model



• Collectively migrate data when replacing the host machine • Copy the settings to multiple devices (during kitting)



C



Export from and import to a different model



• Migrate the settings from the old model to the new model when replacing the host machine • Migrate the settings of the base machine to a different model for a largescale user



NOTE: For the details of the function, refer to "Backup/Restoration" of the System Service Manual.



List of Service Modes That Can Be Restored Initial screen



Main item



Intermediate item



Sub item



Case A



Case B



Case C



BOARD



OPTION



-



MENU-1



Restored



Restored



Restored



BOARD



OPTION



-



MENU-2



Restored



Restored



Restored



BOARD



OPTION



-



MENU-3



Restored



Restored



Restored



BOARD



OPTION



-



MENU-4



Restored



Restored



Restored



BOARD



OPTION



-



FONTDL



Restored



Restored



Restored



COPIER



ADJUST



ADJ-XY



ADJ-X



Restored



-



-



COPIER



ADJUST



ADJ-XY



ADJ-Y



Restored



-



-



COPIER



ADJUST



ADJ-XY



ADJ-Y-DF



Restored



-



-



COPIER



ADJUST



ADJ-XY



STRD-POS



Restored



-



-



COPIER



ADJUST



ADJ-XY



ADJ-X-MG



Restored



-



-



COPIER



ADJUST



ADJ-XY



ADJY-DF2



Restored



-



-



COPIER



ADJUST



AE



AE-TBL



Restored



Restored



-



COPIER



ADJUST



BLANK



BLANK-T



Restored



-



-



COPIER



ADJUST



BLANK



BLANK-L



Restored



-



-



COPIER



ADJUST



BLANK



BLANK-R



Restored



-



-



COPIER



ADJUST



BLANK



BLANK-B



Restored



-



-



COPIER



ADJUST



CCD



W-PLT-X



Restored



-



-



COPIER



ADJUST



CCD



W-PLT-Y



Restored



-



-



COPIER



ADJUST



CCD



W-PLT-Z



Restored



-



-



COPIER



ADJUST



CCD



SH-TRGT



Restored



-



-



COPIER



ADJUST



CCD



100-RG



Restored



-



-



COPIER



ADJUST



CCD



100-GB



Restored



-



-



COPIER



ADJUST



CCD



DFTAR-R



Restored



-



-



COPIER



ADJUST



CCD



DFTAR-G



Restored



-



-



COPIER



ADJUST



CCD



DFTAR-B



Restored



-



-



COPIER



ADJUST



CCD



MTF2-M1



Restored



-



-



COPIER



ADJUST



CCD



MTF2-M2



Restored



-



-



COPIER



ADJUST



CCD



MTF2-M3



Restored



-



-



COPIER



ADJUST



CCD



MTF2-M4



Restored



-



-



COPIER



ADJUST



CCD



MTF2-M5



Restored



-



-



COPIER



ADJUST



CCD



MTF2-M6



Restored



-



-



COPIER



ADJUST



CCD



MTF2-M7



Restored



-



-



1583



List of Service Modes That Can Be Restored Initial screen



Main item



Intermediate item



Sub item



Case A



Case B



Case C



COPIER



ADJUST



CCD



MTF2-M8



Restored



-



-



COPIER



ADJUST



CCD



MTF2-M9



Restored



-



-



COPIER



ADJUST



CCD



MTF2-S1



Restored



-



-



COPIER



ADJUST



CCD



MTF2-S2



Restored



-



-



COPIER



ADJUST



CCD



MTF2-S3



Restored



-



-



COPIER



ADJUST



CCD



MTF2-S4



Restored



-



-



COPIER



ADJUST



CCD



MTF2-S5



Restored



-



-



COPIER



ADJUST



CCD



MTF2-S6



Restored



-



-



COPIER



ADJUST



CCD



MTF2-S7



Restored



-



-



COPIER



ADJUST



CCD



MTF2-S8



Restored



-



-



COPIER



ADJUST



CCD



MTF2-S9



Restored



-



-



COPIER



ADJUST



CCD



100DF2GB



Restored



-



-



COPIER



ADJUST



CCD



100DF2RG



Restored



-



-



COPIER



ADJUST



CCD



DFCH2R2



Restored



-



-



COPIER



ADJUST



CCD



DFCH2R10



Restored



-



-



COPIER



ADJUST



CCD



DFCH2B2



Restored



-



-



COPIER



ADJUST



CCD



DFCH2B10



Restored



-



-



COPIER



ADJUST



CCD



DFCH2G2



Restored



-



-



COPIER



ADJUST



CCD



DFCH2G10



Restored



-



-



COPIER



ADJUST



CCD



MTF-M1



Restored



-



-



COPIER



ADJUST



CCD



MTF-M2



Restored



-



-



COPIER



ADJUST



CCD



MTF-M3



Restored



-



-



COPIER



ADJUST



CCD



MTF-M4



Restored



-



-



COPIER



ADJUST



CCD



MTF-M5



Restored



-



-



COPIER



ADJUST



CCD



MTF-M6



Restored



-



-



COPIER



ADJUST



CCD



MTF-M7



Restored



-



-



COPIER



ADJUST



CCD



MTF-M8



Restored



-



-



COPIER



ADJUST



CCD



MTF-M9



Restored



-



-



COPIER



ADJUST



CCD



MTF-S1



Restored



-



-



COPIER



ADJUST



CCD



MTF-S2



Restored



-



-



COPIER



ADJUST



CCD



MTF-S3



Restored



-



-



COPIER



ADJUST



CCD



MTF-S4



Restored



-



-



COPIER



ADJUST



CCD



MTF-S5



Restored



-



-



COPIER



ADJUST



CCD



MTF-S6



Restored



-



-



COPIER



ADJUST



CCD



MTF-S7



Restored



-



-



COPIER



ADJUST



CCD



MTF-S8



Restored



-



-



COPIER



ADJUST



CCD



MTF-S9



Restored



-



-



COPIER



ADJUST



CCD



DFCH-R2



Restored



-



-



COPIER



ADJUST



CCD



DFCH-R10



Restored



-



-



COPIER



ADJUST



CCD



DFCH-B2



Restored



-



-



COPIER



ADJUST



CCD



DFCH-B10



Restored



-



-



COPIER



ADJUST



CCD



DFCH-G2



Restored



-



-



COPIER



ADJUST



CCD



DFCH-G10



Restored



-



-



COPIER



ADJUST



CCD



MTF2-M10



Restored



-



-



COPIER



ADJUST



CCD



MTF2-M11



Restored



-



-



COPIER



ADJUST



CCD



MTF2-M12



Restored



-



-



COPIER



ADJUST



CCD



MTF2-S10



Restored



-



-



COPIER



ADJUST



CCD



MTF2-S11



Restored



-



-



COPIER



ADJUST



CCD



MTF2-S12



Restored



-



-



COPIER



ADJUST



CCD



MTF-M10



Restored



-



-



COPIER



ADJUST



CCD



MTF-M11



Restored



-



-



COPIER



ADJUST



CCD



MTF-M12



Restored



-



-



COPIER



ADJUST



CCD



MTF-S10



Restored



-



-



1584



List of Service Modes That Can Be Restored Initial screen



Main item



Intermediate item



Sub item



Case A



Case B



Case C



COPIER



ADJUST



CCD



MTF-S11



Restored



-



-



COPIER



ADJUST



CCD



MTF-S12



Restored



-



-



COPIER



ADJUST



CCD



DFCH2K2



Restored



-



-



COPIER



ADJUST



CCD



DFCH2K10



Restored



-



-



COPIER



ADJUST



CCD



DFCH-K2



Restored



-



-



COPIER



ADJUST



CCD



DFCH-K10



Restored



-



-



COPIER



ADJUST



CCD



DFTAR-BW



Restored



-



-



COPIER



ADJUST



CCD



DFTBK-G



Restored



-



-



COPIER



ADJUST



CCD



DFTBK-B



Restored



-



-



COPIER



ADJUST



CCD



DFTBK-R



Restored



-



-



COPIER



ADJUST



CCD



DFTBK-BW



Restored



-



-



COPIER



ADJUST



CST-ADJ



MF-A4R



Restored



-



-



COPIER



ADJUST



CST-ADJ



MF-A6R



Restored



-



-



COPIER



ADJUST



CST-ADJ



MF-A4



Restored



-



-



COPIER



ADJUST



CST-ADJ



PDK-A4



Restored



-



-



COPIER



ADJUST



CST-ADJ



PDK-A5R



Restored



-



-



COPIER



ADJUST



DENS



DENS-ADJ



Restored



-



-



COPIER



ADJUST



DEVELOP



BIAS



Restored



-



-



COPIER



ADJUST



DEVELOP



FRQ-DEV



Restored



-



-



COPIER



ADJUST



EXP-LED



PR-EXP



Restored



-



-



COPIER



ADJUST



FEED-ADJ



REGIST



Restored



-



-



COPIER



ADJUST



FEED-ADJ



ADJ-C1



Restored



-



-



COPIER



ADJUST



FEED-ADJ



ADJ-C2



Restored



-



-



COPIER



ADJUST



FEED-ADJ



ADJ-C3



Restored



-



-



COPIER



ADJUST



FEED-ADJ



ADJ-C4



Restored



-



-



COPIER



ADJUST



FEED-ADJ



ADJ-MF



Restored



-



-



COPIER



ADJUST



FEED-ADJ



ADJ-DK



Restored



-



-



COPIER



ADJUST



FEED-ADJ



ADJ-REFE



Restored



-



-



COPIER



ADJUST



FEED-ADJ



RG-MF



Restored



-



-



COPIER



ADJUST



FEED-ADJ



REG-THCK



Restored



-



-



COPIER



ADJUST



FEED-ADJ



REG-OHT



Restored



-



-



COPIER



ADJUST



FEED-ADJ



REG-DUP1



Restored



-



-



COPIER



ADJUST



FEED-ADJ



REG-DUP2



Restored



-



-



COPIER



ADJUST



FEED-ADJ



LP-FEED1



Restored



-



-



COPIER



ADJUST



FEED-ADJ



LP-MULT1



Restored



-



-



COPIER



ADJUST



FEED-ADJ



LP-DUP1



Restored



-



-



COPIER



ADJUST



FEED-ADJ



REG-SPD



Restored



-



-



COPIER



ADJUST



FEED-ADJ



LP-DK



Restored



-



-



COPIER



ADJUST



FEED-ADJ



DK1-PKLV



Restored



-



-



COPIER



ADJUST



HV-PRI



PRI-GRID



Restored



-



-



COPIER



ADJUST



HV-TR



TR-OFS1



Restored



-



-



COPIER



ADJUST



HV-TR



TR-OFS2



Restored



-



-



COPIER



ADJUST



HV-TR



TR-OFS3



Restored



-



-



COPIER



ADJUST



HV-TR



TR-OFS4



Restored



-



-



COPIER



ADJUST



HV-TR



TR-OFS5



Restored



-



-



COPIER



ADJUST



HV-TR



TR-OFS6



Restored



-



-



COPIER



ADJUST



HV-TR



TR-L-OF1



Restored



-



-



COPIER



ADJUST



HV-TR



TR-L-OF2



Restored



-



-



COPIER



ADJUST



HV-TR



TR-L-OF3



Restored



-



-



COPIER



ADJUST



HV-TR



TR-L-OF4



Restored



-



-



COPIER



ADJUST



HV-TR



TR-L-OF5



Restored



-



-



COPIER



ADJUST



HV-TR



TR-L-OF6



Restored



-



-



COPIER



ADJUST



HV-TR



P-TR-OF1



Restored



-



-



1585



List of Service Modes That Can Be Restored Initial screen



Main item



Intermediate item



Sub item



Case A



Case B



Case C



COPIER



ADJUST



HV-TR



P-TR-OF2



Restored



-



-



COPIER



ADJUST



HV-TR



P-TR-OF3



Restored



-



-



COPIER



ADJUST



HV-TR



P-TR-OF4



Restored



-



-



COPIER



ADJUST



HV-TR



P-TR-OF5



Restored



-



-



COPIER



ADJUST



HV-TR



P-TR-OF6



Restored



-



-



COPIER



ADJUST



HV-TR



TR-SP1



Restored



-



-



COPIER



ADJUST



HV-TR



TR-SP2



Restored



-



-



COPIER



ADJUST



HV-TR



TR-L-SP1



Restored



-



-



COPIER



ADJUST



HV-TR



TR-L-SP2



Restored



-



-



COPIER



ADJUST



HV-TR



P-TR-SP1



Restored



-



-



COPIER



ADJUST



HV-TR



P-TR-SP2



Restored



-



-



COPIER



ADJUST



IMG-REG



MAG-V



Restored



-



-



COPIER



ADJUST



LASER



PVE-OFST



Restored



-



-



COPIER



ADJUST



LASER



POWER



Restored



-



-



COPIER



ADJUST



MISC



SEG-ADJ



Restored



-



-



COPIER



ADJUST



MISC



K-ADJ



Restored



-



-



COPIER



ADJUST



MISC



ACS-ADJ



Restored



-



-



COPIER



ADJUST



MISC



ACS-EN



Restored



-



-



COPIER



ADJUST



MISC



ACS-CNT



Restored



-



-



COPIER



ADJUST



MISC



ACS-EN2



Restored



-



-



COPIER



ADJUST



MISC



ACS-CNT2



Restored



-



-



COPIER



ADJUST



MISC



SEG-ADJ3



Restored



-



-



COPIER



ADJUST



MISC



K-ADJ3



Restored



-



-



COPIER



ADJUST



MISC



ACS-ADJ3



Restored



-



-



COPIER



ADJUST



MISC



ACS-EN3



Restored



-



-



COPIER



ADJUST



MISC



ACS-CNT3



Restored



-



-



COPIER



ADJUST



MISC



TBSIS-WB



Restored



-



-



COPIER



ADJUST



MISC



HP-OFST



Restored



-



-



COPIER



ADJUST



PASCAL



OFST-P-Y



Restored



-



-



COPIER



ADJUST



PASCAL



OFST-P-M



Restored



-



-



COPIER



ADJUST



PASCAL



OFST-P-C



Restored



-



-



COPIER



ADJUST



PASCAL



OFST-P-K



Restored



-



-



COPIER



ADJUST



V-CONT



VL-OFST



Restored



-



-



COPIER



ADJUST



V-CONT



VD-OFST



Restored



-



-



COPIER



ADJUST



V-CONT



DE-OFST



Restored



-



-



COPIER



ADJUST



V-CONT



VCONT-1



Restored



-



-



COPIER



ADJUST



V-CONT



VL-OF-L



Restored



-



-



COPIER



FUNCTION



2D-SHADE



M-LINE1



Restored



-



-



COPIER



FUNCTION



2D-SHADE



M-LINE2



Restored



-



-



COPIER



FUNCTION



2D-SHADE



S-LINE1



Restored



-



-



COPIER



FUNCTION



2D-SHADE



S-LINE2



Restored



-



-



COPIER



FUNCTION



2D-SHADE



S-LINE3



Restored



-



-



COPIER



FUNCTION



2D-SHADE



S-LINE4



Restored



-



-



COPIER



FUNCTION



2D-SHADE



2D-SET



Restored



-



-



COPIER



FUNCTION



INSTALL



E-RDS



Restored



Restored



Restored



COPIER



FUNCTION



INSTALL



RGW-PORT



Restored



Restored



Restored



COPIER



FUNCTION



INSTALL



RGW-ADR



Restored



Restored



Restored



COPIER



FUNCTION



INSTALL



CDS-CTL



Restored



Restored



Restored



COPIER



FUNCTION



INSTALL



BIT-SVC



Restored



Restored



Restored



COPIER



FUNCTION



INSTALL



NFC-USE



Restored



-



-



COPIER



FUNCTION



INSTALL



BLE-USE



Restored



-



-



COPIER



FUNCTION



INSTALL



FAX-USE



Restored



Restored



Restored



COPIER



OPTION



ACC



COIN



Restored



-



-



1586



List of Service Modes That Can Be Restored Initial screen



Main item



Intermediate item



Sub item



Case A



Case B



Case C



COPIER



OPTION



ACC



DK-P



Restored



-



-



COPIER



OPTION



ACC



CARD-SW



Restored



-



-



COPIER



OPTION



ACC



CC-SPSW



Restored



-



-



COPIER



OPTION



ACC



UNIT-PRC



Restored



-



-



COPIER



OPTION



ACC



MIN-PRC



Restored



-



-



COPIER



OPTION



ACC



MAX-PRC



Restored



-



-



COPIER



OPTION



ACC



MIC-TUN



Restored



-



-



COPIER



OPTION



ACC



SRL-SPSW



Restored



-



-



COPIER



OPTION



ACC



PDL-THR



Restored



-



-



COPIER



OPTION



ACC



CR-TYPE



Restored



Restored



-



COPIER



OPTION



ACC



MEAP-SRL



Restored



Restored



-



COPIER



OPTION



ACC



CV-CSZ



Restored



Restored



Restored



COPIER



OPTION



ACC



COIN-AUT



Restored



-



-



COPIER



OPTION



FNC-SW



PO-CNTMD



Restored



Restored



-



COPIER



OPTION



FNC-SW



MODEL-SZ



Restored



-



-



COPIER



OPTION



IMG-FIX



FIX-CLN



Restored



-



-



COPIER



OPTION



IMG-FIX



FIX-TEMP



Restored



-



-



COPIER



OPTION



IMG-FIX



FSPD-S1



Restored



Restored



-



COPIER



OPTION



FNC-SW



SCANSLCT



Restored



-



-



COPIER



OPTION



IMG-MCON



PASCAL



Restored



-



-



COPIER



OPTION



IMG-DEV



DRM-IDL



Restored



Restored



Restored



COPIER



OPTION



FNC-SW



SENS-CNF



Restored



-



-



COPIER



OPTION



FNC-SW



CONFIG



Restored



-



-



COPIER



OPTION



IMG-MCON



SHARP



Restored



Restored



-



COPIER



OPTION



IMG-LSR



LAPC-SW



Restored



Restored



-



COPIER



OPTION



NETWORK



IFAX-LIM



Restored



Restored



Restored



COPIER



OPTION



IMG-RDR



DF-BLINE



Restored



-



-



COPIER



OPTION



CUSTOM



TEMP-TBL



Restored



-



-



COPIER



OPTION



FNC-SW



W/SCNR



Restored



-



-



COPIER



OPTION



IMG-MCON



DRM-H-SW



Restored



Restored



-



COPIER



OPTION



NETWORK



SMTPTXPN



Restored



Restored



Restored



COPIER



OPTION



NETWORK



SMTPRXPN



Restored



Restored



Restored



COPIER



OPTION



NETWORK



POP3PN



Restored



Restored



Restored



COPIER



OPTION



FNC-SW



ORG-LGL



Restored



Restored



-



COPIER



OPTION



FNC-SW



ORG-LTR



Restored



Restored



-



COPIER



OPTION



FNC-SW



ORG-B5



Restored



Restored



-



COPIER



OPTION



DSPLY-SW



UI-COPY



Restored



Restored



Restored



COPIER



OPTION



DSPLY-SW



UI-BOX



Restored



Restored



Restored



COPIER



OPTION



DSPLY-SW



UI-SEND



Restored



Restored



Restored



COPIER



OPTION



DSPLY-SW



UI-FAX



Restored



Restored



Restored



COPIER



OPTION



IMG-MCON



SCR-SLCT



Restored



Restored



-



COPIER



OPTION



IMG-MCON



TMC-SLCT



Restored



-



-



COPIER



OPTION



NETWORK



FTPTXPN



Restored



Restored



Restored



COPIER



OPTION



NETWORK



NW-SPEED



Restored



-



-



COPIER



OPTION



FEED-SW



TRY-CHG



Restored



Restored



Restored



COPIER



OPTION



DSPLY-SW



NWERR-SW



Restored



Restored



Restored



COPIER



OPTION



NETWORK



STS-PORT



Restored



Restored



Restored



COPIER



OPTION



NETWORK



CMD-PORT



Restored



Restored



Restored



COPIER



OPTION



FNC-SW



MODELSZ2



Restored



-



-



COPIER



OPTION



IMG-RDR



DFDST-L1



Restored



-



-



COPIER



OPTION



IMG-RDR



DFDST-L2



Restored



-



-



COPIER



OPTION



NETWORK



NS-CMD5



Restored



Restored



Restored



COPIER



OPTION



NETWORK



NS-GSAPI



Restored



Restored



Restored



1587



List of Service Modes That Can Be Restored Initial screen



Main item



Intermediate item



Sub item



Case A



Case B



Case C



COPIER



OPTION



NETWORK



NS-NTLM



Restored



Restored



Restored



COPIER



OPTION



NETWORK



NS-PLNWS



Restored



Restored



Restored



COPIER



OPTION



NETWORK



NS-PLN



Restored



Restored



Restored



COPIER



OPTION



NETWORK



NS-LGN



Restored



Restored



Restored



COPIER



OPTION



NETWORK



MEAP-PN



Restored



Restored



Restored



COPIER



OPTION



FNC-SW



SVMD-ENT



Restored



Restored



Restored



COPIER



OPTION



ENV-SET



ENVP-INT



Restored



Restored



Restored



COPIER



OPTION



NETWORK



CHNG-STS



Restored



Restored



Restored



COPIER



OPTION



NETWORK



CHNG-CMD



Restored



Restored



Restored



COPIER



OPTION



DSPLY-SW



ANIM-SW



Restored



Restored



Restored



COPIER



OPTION



FNC-SW



BASE-SW



Restored



Restored



-



COPIER



OPTION



IMG-DEV



DV-RT-LG



Restored



-



-



COPIER



OPTION



NETWORK



MEAP-SSL



Restored



Restored



Restored



COPIER



OPTION



CUSTOM



SC-L-CNT



Restored



Restored



-



COPIER



OPTION



IMG-FIX



CBLTINVL



Restored



-



-



COPIER



OPTION



FNC-SW



KSIZE-SW



Restored



Restored



-



COPIER



OPTION



NETWORK



LPD-PORT



Restored



Restored



Restored



COPIER



OPTION



FNC-SW



PDF-RDCT



Restored



Restored



Restored



COPIER



OPTION



IMG-RDR



ABC-MODE



Restored



-



-



COPIER



OPTION



IMG-MCON



VP-ART



Restored



-



-



COPIER



OPTION



IMG-MCON



VP-TXT



Restored



-



-



COPIER



OPTION



DSPLY-SW



UI-PRINT



Restored



Restored



Restored



COPIER



OPTION



FNC-SW



SJB-UNW



Restored



Restored



Restored



COPIER



OPTION



DSPLY-SW



IMGC-ADJ



Restored



Restored



Restored



COPIER



OPTION



DSPLY-SW



UI-RSCAN



Restored



Restored



Restored



COPIER



OPTION



DSPLY-SW



UI-EPRNT



Restored



Restored



Restored



COPIER



OPTION



DSPLY-SW



UI-WEB



Restored



Restored



Restored



COPIER



OPTION



DSPLY-SW



UI-HOLD



Restored



Restored



Restored



COPIER



OPTION



FNC-SW



CARD-RNG



Restored



Restored



-



COPIER



OPTION



NETWORK



WUEN-LIV



Restored



Restored



Restored



COPIER



OPTION



CUSTOM



MAILYEAR



Restored



Restored



Restored



COPIER



OPTION



IMG-FIX



TMP-TBL2



Restored



-



-



COPIER



OPTION



IMG-FIX



TMP-TBL3



Restored



-



-



COPIER



OPTION



IMG-FIX



TMP-TBL4



Restored



-



-



COPIER



OPTION



FNC-SW



SJOB-CL



Restored



Restored



Restored



COPIER



OPTION



NETWORK



IFX-CHIG



Restored



Restored



Restored



COPIER



OPTION



IMG-FIX



RAG-CONT



Restored



-



-



COPIER



OPTION



NETWORK



DNSTRANS



Restored



Restored



Restored



COPIER



OPTION



IMG-RDR



ABC-MD2



Restored



-



-



COPIER



OPTION



FNC-SW



MIBCOUNT



Restored



Restored



Restored



COPIER



OPTION



ENV-SET



DRY-CISU



Restored



-



-



COPIER



OPTION



DSPLY-SW



RMT-CNSL



Restored



Restored



Restored



COPIER



OPTION



CUSTOM



PDLEVCT1



Restored



Restored



Restored



COPIER



OPTION



NETWORK



PROXYRES



Restored



Restored



Restored



COPIER



OPTION



NETWORK



WOLTRANS



Restored



Restored



Restored



COPIER



OPTION



IMG-RDR



DF2DSTL1



Restored



-



-



COPIER



OPTION



IMG-RDR



DF2DSTL2



Restored



-



-



COPIER



OPTION



NETWORK



802XTOUT



Restored



Restored



Restored



COPIER



OPTION



NETWORK



NCONF-SW



Restored



Restored



Restored



COPIER



OPTION



CUSTOM



ABK-TOOL



Restored



Restored



Restored



COPIER



OPTION



FNC-SW



W/RAID



Restored



Restored



-



COPIER



OPTION



FNC-SW



PSWD-SW



Restored



Restored



Restored



COPIER



OPTION



FNC-SW



SM-PSWD



Restored



Restored



Restored



1588



List of Service Modes That Can Be Restored Initial screen



Main item



Intermediate item



Sub item



Case A



Case B



Case C



COPIER



OPTION



IMG-MCON



C-PDL-T



Restored



Restored



-



COPIER



OPTION



IMG-MCON



C-S-P-D



Restored



Restored



-



COPIER



OPTION



IMG-MCON



C-S-C-D



Restored



Restored



-



COPIER



OPTION



IMG-DEV



ADJ-VPPN



Restored



-



-



COPIER



OPTION



IMG-FIX



RAG-SW



Restored



-



-



COPIER



OPTION



CUSTOM



DEV-SP1



Restored



-



-



COPIER



OPTION



CUSTOM



DEV-SP2



Restored



-



-



COPIER



OPTION



FNC-SW



RPT2SIDE



Restored



Restored



Restored



COPIER



OPTION



NETWORK



AFS-JOB



Restored



Restored



Restored



COPIER



OPTION



NETWORK



AFC-EVNT



Restored



Restored



Restored



COPIER



OPTION



DSPLY-SW



UI-SBOX



Restored



Restored



Restored



COPIER



OPTION



DSPLY-SW



UI-MEM



Restored



Restored



Restored



COPIER



OPTION



NETWORK



ILOGMODE



Restored



Restored



Restored



COPIER



OPTION



NETWORK



ILOGKEEP



Restored



Restored



Restored



COPIER



OPTION



DSPLY-SW



UI-NAVI



Restored



Restored



Restored



COPIER



OPTION



FNC-SW



STND-PNL



Restored



Restored



-



COPIER



OPTION



FNC-SW



INVALPDL



Restored



Restored



-



COPIER



OPTION



FNC-SW



CDS-FIRM



Restored



Restored



Restored



COPIER



OPTION



FNC-SW



CDS-MEAP



Restored



Restored



Restored



COPIER



OPTION



FNC-SW



CDS-UGW



Restored



Restored



Restored



COPIER



OPTION



FNC-SW



LOCLFIRM



Restored



Restored



Restored



COPIER



OPTION



CUSTOM



DEV-SP3



Restored



-



-



COPIER



OPTION



CUSTOM



DEV-SP4



Restored



-



-



COPIER



OPTION



CUSTOM



DEV-SP5



Restored



-



-



COPIER



OPTION



CUSTOM



DEV-SP6



Restored



-



-



COPIER



OPTION



CUSTOM



DEV-SP7



Restored



-



-



COPIER



OPTION



CUSTOM



DEV-SP8



Restored



-



-



COPIER



OPTION



NETWORK



IPTBROAD



Restored



Restored



Restored



COPIER



OPTION



FEED-SW



DK2-TURN



Restored



-



-



COPIER



OPTION



FEED-SW



DK3-TURN



Restored



-



-



COPIER



OPTION



FEED-SW



DK4-TURN



Restored



-



-



COPIER



OPTION



FEED-SW



DK1-TURN



Restored



-



-



COPIER



OPTION



FEED-SW



DK5-TURN



Restored



-



-



COPIER



OPTION



NETWORK



PFWFTPRT



Restored



Restored



Restored



COPIER



OPTION



CLEANING



CLN-SW



Restored



-



-



COPIER



OPTION



CLEANING



CLN-ADJ



Restored



-



-



COPIER



OPTION



IMG-FIX



FIX-DWN



Restored



-



-



COPIER



OPTION



IMG-FIX



FIX-RT



Restored



-



-



COPIER



OPTION



IMG-DEV



DRM-IDL2



Restored



-



-



COPIER



OPTION



CUSTOM



AC-FREQ



Restored



Restored



Restored



COPIER



OPTION



IMG-LSR



2D-SHADE



Restored



-



-



COPIER



OPTION



FNC-SW



T-RUN-LV



Restored



Restored



-



COPIER



OPTION



IMG-MCON



WDREDUCT



Restored



-



-



COPIER



OPTION



IMG-MCON



VDADDCNT



Restored



-



-



COPIER



OPTION



IMG-MCON



HDADDCNT



Restored



-



-



COPIER



OPTION



FEED-SW



DK1-AIR



Restored



-



-



COPIER



OPTION



FNC-SW



BXNUPLOG



Restored



Restored



Restored



COPIER



OPTION



IMG-MCON



LIN-OFST



Restored



Restored



-



COPIER



OPTION



FEED-SW



TFL-RTC



Restored



Restored



-



COPIER



OPTION



DSPLY-SW



UI-CUSTM



Restored



Restored



Restored



COPIER



OPTION



IMG-FIX



P-BETWN



Restored



-



-



COPIER



OPTION



FNC-SW



SDLMTWRN



Restored



Restored



Restored



COPIER



OPTION



FNC-SW



JLK-PWSC



Restored



Restored



Restored



1589



List of Service Modes That Can Be Restored Initial screen



Main item



Intermediate item



Sub item



Case A



Case B



Case C



COPIER



OPTION



NETWORK



DDNSINTV



Restored



Restored



Restored



COPIER



OPTION



IMG-FIX



FX-IMGLV



Restored



Restored



-



COPIER



OPTION



IMG-FIX



FX-WNKL



Restored



Restored



-



COPIER



OPTION



FNC-SW



FAX-INT



Restored



Restored



Restored



COPIER



OPTION



IMG-DEV



ATM



Restored



Restored



-



COPIER



OPTION



FNC-SW



CDS-LVUP



Restored



Restored



Restored



COPIER



OPTION



IMG-DEV



LWDTY-SW



Restored



Restored



-



COPIER



OPTION



IMG-DEV



LWDTYADJ



Restored



-



-



COPIER



OPTION



IMG-DEV



BB-CNT



Restored



-



-



COPIER



OPTION



IMG-DEV



PRI-SHUT



Restored



-



-



COPIER



OPTION



IMG-DEV



TBLTCLSW



Restored



-



-



COPIER



OPTION



IMG-DEV



TBLTBIS+



Restored



-



-



COPIER



OPTION



IMG-DEV



TBLTBIS-



Restored



-



-



COPIER



OPTION



IMG-DEV



TBLTTMS



Restored



-



-



COPIER



OPTION



IMG-FIX



FIX-TMP4



Restored



Restored



-



COPIER



OPTION



IMG-DEV



DRM-IDL3



Restored



-



-



COPIER



OPTION



FNC-SW



AMSOFFSW



Restored



Restored



Restored



COPIER



OPTION



FNC-SW



UA-OFFSW



Restored



Restored



Restored



COPIER



OPTION



FNC-SW



MIB-NVTA



Restored



Restored



-



COPIER



OPTION



FNC-SW



MIB-EXT



Restored



Restored



-



COPIER



OPTION



DSPLY-SW



SCT-BTN



Restored



Restored



Restored



COPIER



OPTION



CUSTOM



DFEJCLED



Restored



-



-



COPIER



OPTION



FNC-SW



SVC-RUI



Restored



Restored



-



COPIER



OPTION



FNC-SW



LCDSFLG



Restored



Restored



Restored



COPIER



OPTION



DSPLY-SW



SDTM-DSP



Restored



Restored



Restored



COPIER



OPTION



FNC-SW



BXSHIFT



Restored



Restored



Restored



COPIER



OPTION



FNC-SW



HOME-SW



Restored



Restored



Restored



COPIER



OPTION



FNC-SW



NO-LGOUT



Restored



Restored



Restored



COPIER



OPTION



FNC-SW



JM-ERR-D



Restored



-



-



COPIER



OPTION



FNC-SW



JM-ERR-R



Restored



-



-



COPIER



OPTION



NETWORK



SIPAUDIO



Restored



Restored



Restored



COPIER



OPTION



NETWORK



SIPINOUT



Restored



Restored



Restored



COPIER



OPTION



IMG-FIX



WEB-LIFE



Restored



Restored



-



COPIER



OPTION



NETWORK



SIPREGPR



Restored



Restored



Restored



COPIER



OPTION



FNC-SW



ASLPMAX



Restored



Restored



Restored



COPIER



OPTION



NETWORK



VLAN-SW



Restored



Restored



Restored



COPIER



OPTION



FNC-SW



SEND-SPD



Restored



Restored



Restored



COPIER



OPTION



FNC-SW



VER-CHNG



Restored



Restored



Restored



COPIER



OPTION



NETWORK



FTPMODE



Restored



Restored



Restored



COPIER



OPTION



NETWORK



SSLMODE



Restored



Restored



Restored



COPIER



OPTION



NETWORK



SSLSTRNG



Restored



Restored



Restored



COPIER



OPTION



FEED-SW



DK1-ALVD



Restored



-



-



COPIER



OPTION



FEED-SW



DK1-ALVU



Restored



-



-



COPIER



OPTION



FEED-SW



DK1-LDWN



Restored



-



-



COPIER



OPTION



FEED-SW



DK1-PSP



Restored



-



-



COPIER



OPTION



FEED-SW



PDK-REST



Restored



-



-



COPIER



OPTION



DSPLY-SW



UI-PPA



Restored



Restored



Restored



COPIER



OPTION



NETWORK



NW-WAIT



Restored



Restored



Restored



COPIER



OPTION



NETWORK



WLAN-USE



Restored



Restored



Restored



COPIER



OPTION



DSPLY-SW



CE-DSP



Restored



-



-



COPIER



OPTION



IMG-MCON



DOTSCT



Restored



-



-



COPIER



OPTION



IMG-MCON



SP-GRAD



Restored



-



-



COPIER



OPTION



NETWORK



WLANPORT



Restored



Restored



Restored



1590



List of Service Modes That Can Be Restored Initial screen



Main item



Intermediate item



Sub item



Case A



Case B



Case C



COPIER



OPTION



DSPLY-SW



LOCAL-SZ



Restored



Restored



-



COPIER



OPTION



CUSTOM



PAP-TYPE



Restored



Restored



Restored



COPIER



OPTION



NETWORK



RAW-PORT



Restored



Restored



Restored



COPIER



OPTION



NETWORK



LINKWAKE



Restored



-



-



COPIER



OPTION



FNC-SW



PICLOGIN



Restored



Restored



-



COPIER



OPTION



CUSTOM



DCM-EXCL



Restored



Restored



Restored



COPIER



OPTION



DSPLY-SW



SND-NAME



Restored



Restored



Restored



COPIER



OPTION



DSPLY-SW



PCMP-DSP



Restored



Restored



Restored



COPIER



OPTION



FNC-SW



FL-START



Restored



Restored



Restored



COPIER



OPTION



CUSTOM



FPOT-MD



Restored



Restored



Restored



COPIER



OPTION



NETWORK



BLEPOWER



Restored



-



-



COPIER



OPTION



NETWORK



WSMC-USE



Restored



Restored



Restored



COPIER



OPTION



FNC-SW



3RDP-MSG



Restored



-



-



COPIER



OPTION



DSPLY-SW



ERR-DISP



Restored



Restored



Restored



COPIER



OPTION



DSPLY-SW



SVC-ACA



Restored



Restored



Restored



COPIER



OPTION



NETWORK



INTENT



Restored



-



-



COPIER



OPTION



IMG-MCON



BIN-SEL



Restored



-



-



COPIER



OPTION



DSPLY-SW



SVC-SRA



Restored



Restored



Restored



COPIER



OPTION



DSPLY-SW



LF-DSP-S



Restored



Restored



Restored



COPIER



OPTION



DSPLY-SW



LF-DSP-U



Restored



Restored



Restored



COPIER



OPTION



DSPLY-SW



ERRL-DSP



Restored



Restored



Restored



COPIER



OPTION



DSPLY-SW



JLG-UD-D



Restored



Restored



Restored



COPIER



OPTION



DSPLY-SW



UFOS-DSP



Restored



Restored



Restored



COPIER



OPTION



DSPLY-SW



SVC-DAT



Restored



Restored



Restored



COPIER



OPTION



CST



P-SZ-C1



Restored



Restored



Restored



COPIER



OPTION



CST



P-SZ-C2



Restored



Restored



Restored



COPIER



OPTION



CUSTOM2



SP-B01



Restored



Restored



Restored



COPIER



OPTION



CUSTOM2



SP-B02



Restored



Restored



Restored



COPIER



OPTION



CUSTOM2



SP-B03



Restored



Restored



Restored



COPIER



OPTION



CUSTOM2



SP-B04



Restored



Restored



Restored



COPIER



OPTION



CUSTOM2



SP-B05



Restored



Restored



Restored



COPIER



OPTION



CUSTOM2



SP-B06



Restored



Restored



Restored



COPIER



OPTION



CUSTOM2



SP-B07



Restored



Restored



Restored



COPIER



OPTION



CUSTOM2



SP-B08



Restored



Restored



Restored



COPIER



OPTION



CUSTOM2



SP-B09



Restored



Restored



Restored



COPIER



OPTION



CUSTOM2



SP-B10



Restored



Restored



Restored



COPIER



OPTION



CUSTOM2



SP-B11



Restored



Restored



Restored



COPIER



OPTION



CUSTOM2



SP-B12



Restored



Restored



Restored



COPIER



OPTION



CUSTOM2



SP-B13



Restored



Restored



Restored



COPIER



OPTION



CUSTOM2



SP-B14



Restored



Restored



Restored



COPIER



OPTION



CUSTOM2



SP-B15



Restored



Restored



Restored



COPIER



OPTION



CUSTOM2



SP-B16



Restored



Restored



Restored



COPIER



OPTION



CUSTOM2



SP-B17



Restored



Restored



Restored



COPIER



OPTION



CUSTOM2



SP-B18



Restored



Restored



Restored



COPIER



OPTION



CUSTOM2



SP-B19



Restored



Restored



Restored



COPIER



OPTION



CUSTOM2



SP-B20



Restored



Restored



Restored



COPIER



OPTION



CUSTOM2



SP-B21



Restored



Restored



Restored



COPIER



OPTION



CUSTOM2



SP-B22



Restored



Restored



Restored



COPIER



OPTION



CUSTOM2



SP-B23



Restored



Restored



Restored



COPIER



OPTION



CUSTOM2



SP-B24



Restored



Restored



Restored



COPIER



OPTION



CUSTOM2



SP-B25



Restored



Restored



Restored



COPIER



OPTION



CUSTOM2



SP-B26



Restored



Restored



Restored



COPIER



OPTION



CUSTOM2



SP-B27



Restored



Restored



Restored



1591



List of Service Modes That Can Be Restored Initial screen



Main item



Intermediate item



Sub item



Case A



Case B



Case C



COPIER



OPTION



CUSTOM2



SP-B28



Restored



Restored



Restored



COPIER



OPTION



CUSTOM2



SP-B29



Restored



Restored



Restored



COPIER



OPTION



CUSTOM2



SP-B30



Restored



Restored



Restored



COPIER



OPTION



CUSTOM2



SP-B31



Restored



Restored



Restored



COPIER



OPTION



CUSTOM2



SP-B32



Restored



Restored



Restored



COPIER



OPTION



CUSTOM2



SP-B33



Restored



Restored



Restored



COPIER



OPTION



CUSTOM2



SP-B34



Restored



Restored



Restored



COPIER



OPTION



CUSTOM2



SP-B35



Restored



Restored



Restored



COPIER



OPTION



CUSTOM2



SP-B36



Restored



Restored



Restored



COPIER



OPTION



CUSTOM2



SP-B37



Restored



Restored



Restored



COPIER



OPTION



CUSTOM2



SP-B38



Restored



Restored



Restored



COPIER



OPTION



CUSTOM2



SP-B39



Restored



Restored



Restored



COPIER



OPTION



CUSTOM2



SP-B40



Restored



Restored



Restored



COPIER



OPTION



CUSTOM2



SP-B41



Restored



Restored



Restored



COPIER



OPTION



CUSTOM2



SP-B42



Restored



Restored



Restored



COPIER



OPTION



CUSTOM2



SP-B43



Restored



Restored



Restored



COPIER



OPTION



CUSTOM2



SP-B44



Restored



Restored



Restored



COPIER



OPTION



CUSTOM2



SP-B45



Restored



Restored



Restored



COPIER



OPTION



CUSTOM2



SP-B46



Restored



Restored



Restored



COPIER



OPTION



CUSTOM2



SP-B47



Restored



Restored



Restored



COPIER



OPTION



CUSTOM2



SP-B48



Restored



Restored



Restored



COPIER



OPTION



CUSTOM2



SP-B49



Restored



Restored



Restored



COPIER



OPTION



CUSTOM2



SP-B50



Restored



Restored



Restored



COPIER



OPTION



CUSTOM2



SP-B51



Restored



Restored



Restored



COPIER



OPTION



CUSTOM2



SP-B52



Restored



Restored



Restored



COPIER



OPTION



CUSTOM2



SP-B53



Restored



Restored



Restored



COPIER



OPTION



CUSTOM2



SP-B54



Restored



Restored



Restored



COPIER



OPTION



CUSTOM2



SP-B55



Restored



Restored



Restored



COPIER



OPTION



CUSTOM2



SP-B56



Restored



Restored



Restored



COPIER



OPTION



CUSTOM2



SP-B57



Restored



Restored



Restored



COPIER



OPTION



CUSTOM2



SP-B58



Restored



Restored



Restored



COPIER



OPTION



CUSTOM2



SP-B59



Restored



Restored



Restored



COPIER



OPTION



CUSTOM2



SP-B60



Restored



Restored



Restored



COPIER



OPTION



CUSTOM2



SP-B61



Restored



Restored



Restored



COPIER



OPTION



CUSTOM2



SP-B62



Restored



Restored



Restored



COPIER



OPTION



CUSTOM2



SP-B63



Restored



Restored



Restored



COPIER



OPTION



CUSTOM2



SP-B64



Restored



Restored



Restored



COPIER



OPTION



CUSTOM2



SP-B65



Restored



Restored



Restored



COPIER



OPTION



CUSTOM2



SP-B66



Restored



Restored



Restored



COPIER



OPTION



CUSTOM2



SP-B67



Restored



Restored



Restored



COPIER



OPTION



CUSTOM2



SP-B68



Restored



Restored



Restored



COPIER



OPTION



CUSTOM2



SP-B69



Restored



Restored



Restored



COPIER



OPTION



CUSTOM2



SP-B70



Restored



Restored



Restored



COPIER



OPTION



CUSTOM2



SP-B71



Restored



Restored



Restored



COPIER



OPTION



CUSTOM2



SP-B72



Restored



Restored



Restored



COPIER



OPTION



CUSTOM2



SP-B73



Restored



Restored



Restored



COPIER



OPTION



CUSTOM2



SP-B74



Restored



Restored



Restored



COPIER



OPTION



CUSTOM2



SP-B75



Restored



Restored



Restored



COPIER



OPTION



CUSTOM2



SP-B76



Restored



Restored



Restored



COPIER



OPTION



CUSTOM2



SP-B77



Restored



Restored



Restored



COPIER



OPTION



CUSTOM2



SP-B78



Restored



Restored



Restored



COPIER



OPTION



CUSTOM2



SP-B79



Restored



Restored



Restored



COPIER



OPTION



CUSTOM2



SP-B80



Restored



Restored



Restored



1592



List of Service Modes That Can Be Restored Initial screen



Main item



Intermediate item



Sub item



Case A



Case B



Case C



COPIER



OPTION



CUSTOM2



SP-V01



Restored



Restored



Restored



COPIER



OPTION



CUSTOM2



SP-V02



Restored



Restored



Restored



COPIER



OPTION



CUSTOM2



SP-V03



Restored



Restored



Restored



COPIER



OPTION



CUSTOM2



SP-V04



Restored



Restored



Restored



COPIER



OPTION



CUSTOM2



SP-V05



Restored



Restored



Restored



COPIER



OPTION



CUSTOM2



SP-V06



Restored



Restored



Restored



COPIER



OPTION



CUSTOM2



SP-V07



Restored



Restored



Restored



COPIER



OPTION



CUSTOM2



SP-V08



Restored



Restored



Restored



COPIER



OPTION



CUSTOM2



SP-V09



Restored



Restored



Restored



COPIER



OPTION



CUSTOM2



SP-V10



Restored



Restored



Restored



COPIER



OPTION



CUSTOM2



SP-V11



Restored



Restored



Restored



COPIER



OPTION



CUSTOM2



SP-V12



Restored



Restored



Restored



COPIER



OPTION



CUSTOM2



SP-V13



Restored



Restored



Restored



COPIER



OPTION



CUSTOM2



SP-V14



Restored



Restored



Restored



COPIER



OPTION



CUSTOM2



SP-V15



Restored



Restored



Restored



COPIER



OPTION



CUSTOM2



SP-V16



Restored



Restored



Restored



COPIER



OPTION



CUSTOM2



SP-V17



Restored



Restored



Restored



COPIER



OPTION



CUSTOM2



SP-V18



Restored



Restored



Restored



COPIER



OPTION



CUSTOM2



SP-V19



Restored



Restored



Restored



COPIER



OPTION



CUSTOM2



SP-V20



Restored



Restored



Restored



COPIER



OPTION



CUSTOM2



SP-V21



Restored



Restored



Restored



COPIER



OPTION



CUSTOM2



SP-V22



Restored



Restored



Restored



COPIER



OPTION



CUSTOM2



SP-V23



Restored



Restored



Restored



COPIER



OPTION



CUSTOM2



SP-V24



Restored



Restored



Restored



COPIER



OPTION



CUSTOM2



SP-V25



Restored



Restored



Restored



COPIER



OPTION



CUSTOM2



SP-V26



Restored



Restored



Restored



COPIER



OPTION



CUSTOM2



SP-V27



Restored



Restored



Restored



COPIER



OPTION



CUSTOM2



SP-V28



Restored



Restored



Restored



COPIER



OPTION



CUSTOM2



SP-V29



Restored



Restored



Restored



COPIER



OPTION



CUSTOM2



SP-V30



Restored



Restored



Restored



COPIER



OPTION



CUSTOM2



SP-V31



Restored



Restored



Restored



COPIER



OPTION



CUSTOM2



SP-V32



Restored



Restored



Restored



COPIER



OPTION



CUSTOM2



SP-V33



Restored



Restored



Restored



COPIER



OPTION



CUSTOM2



SP-V34



Restored



Restored



Restored



COPIER



OPTION



CUSTOM2



SP-V35



Restored



Restored



Restored



COPIER



OPTION



CUSTOM2



SP-V36



Restored



Restored



Restored



COPIER



OPTION



CUSTOM2



SP-V37



Restored



Restored



Restored



COPIER



OPTION



CUSTOM2



SP-V38



Restored



Restored



Restored



COPIER



OPTION



CUSTOM2



SP-V39



Restored



Restored



Restored



COPIER



OPTION



CUSTOM2



SP-V40



Restored



Restored



Restored



COPIER



OPTION



CUSTOM2



SP-V41



Restored



Restored



Restored



COPIER



OPTION



CUSTOM2



SP-V42



Restored



Restored



Restored



COPIER



OPTION



CUSTOM2



SP-V43



Restored



Restored



Restored



COPIER



OPTION



CUSTOM2



SP-V44



Restored



Restored



Restored



COPIER



OPTION



CUSTOM2



SP-V45



Restored



Restored



Restored



COPIER



OPTION



CUSTOM2



SP-V46



Restored



Restored



Restored



COPIER



OPTION



CUSTOM2



SP-V47



Restored



Restored



Restored



COPIER



OPTION



CUSTOM2



SP-V48



Restored



Restored



Restored



COPIER



OPTION



CUSTOM2



SP-V49



Restored



Restored



Restored



COPIER



OPTION



CUSTOM2



SP-V50



Restored



Restored



Restored



COPIER



OPTION



CUSTOM2



SP-V51



Restored



Restored



Restored



COPIER



OPTION



CUSTOM2



SP-V52



Restored



Restored



Restored



COPIER



OPTION



CUSTOM2



SP-V53



Restored



Restored



Restored



1593



List of Service Modes That Can Be Restored Initial screen



Main item



Intermediate item



Sub item



Case A



Case B



Case C



COPIER



OPTION



CUSTOM2



SP-V54



Restored



Restored



Restored



COPIER



OPTION



CUSTOM2



SP-V55



Restored



Restored



Restored



COPIER



OPTION



CUSTOM2



SP-V56



Restored



Restored



Restored



COPIER



OPTION



CUSTOM2



SP-V57



Restored



Restored



Restored



COPIER



OPTION



CUSTOM2



SP-V58



Restored



Restored



Restored



COPIER



OPTION



CUSTOM2



SP-V59



Restored



Restored



Restored



COPIER



OPTION



CUSTOM2



SP-V60



Restored



Restored



Restored



COPIER



OPTION



CUSTOM2



SP-V61



Restored



Restored



Restored



COPIER



OPTION



CUSTOM2



SP-V62



Restored



Restored



Restored



COPIER



OPTION



CUSTOM2



SP-V63



Restored



Restored



Restored



COPIER



OPTION



CUSTOM2



SP-V64



Restored



Restored



Restored



COPIER



OPTION



CUSTOM2



SP-V65



Restored



Restored



Restored



COPIER



OPTION



CUSTOM2



SP-V66



Restored



Restored



Restored



COPIER



OPTION



CUSTOM2



SP-V67



Restored



Restored



Restored



COPIER



OPTION



CUSTOM2



SP-V68



Restored



Restored



Restored



COPIER



OPTION



CUSTOM2



SP-V69



Restored



Restored



Restored



COPIER



OPTION



CUSTOM2



SP-V70



Restored



Restored



Restored



COPIER



OPTION



CUSTOM2



SP-V71



Restored



Restored



Restored



COPIER



OPTION



CUSTOM2



SP-V72



Restored



Restored



Restored



COPIER



OPTION



CUSTOM2



SP-V73



Restored



Restored



Restored



COPIER



OPTION



CUSTOM2



SP-V74



Restored



Restored



Restored



COPIER



OPTION



CUSTOM2



SP-V75



Restored



Restored



Restored



COPIER



OPTION



CUSTOM2



SP-V76



Restored



Restored



Restored



COPIER



OPTION



CUSTOM2



SP-V77



Restored



Restored



Restored



COPIER



OPTION



CUSTOM2



SP-V78



Restored



Restored



Restored



COPIER



OPTION



CUSTOM2



SP-V79



Restored



Restored



Restored



COPIER



OPTION



CUSTOM2



SP-V80



Restored



Restored



Restored



COPIER



OPTION



INT-FACE



IMG-CONT



Restored



-



-



COPIER



OPTION



INT-FACE



AP-OPT



Restored



-



-



COPIER



OPTION



INT-FACE



AP-ACCNT



Restored



-



-



COPIER



OPTION



INT-FACE



AP-CODE



Restored



-



-



COPIER



OPTION



INT-FACE



NWCT-TM



Restored



-



-



COPIER



OPTION



INT-FACE



VTRNS-TO



Restored



-



-



COPIER



OPTION



INT-FACE



ERRHNDL



Restored



Restored



-



COPIER



OPTION



PM-DLV-D



TONER-K



Restored



Restored



Restored



COPIER



OPTION



PM-DLV-D



WST-TNR



Restored



Restored



Restored



COPIER



OPTION



PM-DLV-D



PT-DRM



Restored



Restored



Restored



COPIER



OPTION



PM-DLV-D



PRM-WIRE



Restored



Restored



Restored



COPIER



OPTION



PM-DLV-D



PRM-CLN



Restored



Restored



Restored



COPIER



OPTION



PM-DLV-D



PRM-UNIT



Restored



Restored



Restored



COPIER



OPTION



PM-DLV-D



CLN-BLD



Restored



Restored



Restored



COPIER



OPTION



PM-DLV-D



BS-SL-F



Restored



Restored



Restored



COPIER



OPTION



PM-DLV-D



BS-SL-R



Restored



Restored



Restored



COPIER



OPTION



PM-DLV-D



SP-CLAW



Restored



Restored



Restored



COPIER



OPTION



PM-DLV-D



EXP-SCRP



Restored



Restored



Restored



COPIER



OPTION



PM-DLV-D



DV-UNT-K



Restored



Restored



Restored



COPIER



OPTION



PM-DLV-D



TR-BLT



Restored



Restored



Restored



COPIER



OPTION



PM-DLV-D



TR-ROLL



Restored



Restored



Restored



COPIER



OPTION



PM-DLV-D



T-CLN-BD



Restored



Restored



Restored



COPIER



OPTION



PM-DLV-D



T-CN-BRU



Restored



Restored



Restored



COPIER



OPTION



PM-DLV-D



PO-WIRE



Restored



Restored



Restored



COPIER



OPTION



PM-DLV-D



PO-CLN



Restored



Restored



Restored



COPIER



OPTION



PM-DLV-D



PO-UNIT



Restored



Restored



Restored



1594



List of Service Modes That Can Be Restored Initial screen



Main item



Intermediate item



Sub item



Case A



Case B



Case C



COPIER



OPTION



PM-DLV-D



FX-UP-RL



Restored



Restored



Restored



COPIER



OPTION



PM-DLV-D



FIX-TH1



Restored



Restored



Restored



COPIER



OPTION



PM-DLV-D



FIX-TH2



Restored



Restored



Restored



COPIER



OPTION



PM-DLV-D



FX-RTNR



Restored



Restored



Restored



COPIER



OPTION



PM-DLV-D



FX-LW-RL



Restored



Restored



Restored



COPIER



OPTION



PM-DLV-D



FX-L-STC



Restored



Restored



Restored



COPIER



OPTION



PM-DLV-D



FX-WEB1



Restored



Restored



Restored



COPIER



OPTION



PM-DLV-D



C1-PU-RL



Restored



Restored



Restored



COPIER



OPTION



PM-DLV-D



C1-FD-RL



Restored



Restored



Restored



COPIER



OPTION



PM-DLV-D



C1-SP-RL



Restored



Restored



Restored



COPIER



OPTION



PM-DLV-D



C2-PU-RL



Restored



Restored



Restored



COPIER



OPTION



PM-DLV-D



C2-FD-RL



Restored



Restored



Restored



COPIER



OPTION



PM-DLV-D



C2-SP-RL



Restored



Restored



Restored



COPIER



OPTION



PM-DLV-D



C3-PU-RL



Restored



Restored



Restored



COPIER



OPTION



PM-DLV-D



C3-SP-RL



Restored



Restored



Restored



COPIER



OPTION



PM-DLV-D



C3-FD-RL



Restored



Restored



Restored



COPIER



OPTION



PM-DLV-D



C4-PU-RL



Restored



Restored



Restored



COPIER



OPTION



PM-DLV-D



C4-FD-RL



Restored



Restored



Restored



COPIER



OPTION



PM-DLV-D



C4-SP-RL



Restored



Restored



Restored



COPIER



OPTION



PM-DLV-D



M-FD-RL



Restored



Restored



Restored



COPIER



OPTION



PM-DLV-D



M-SP-RL



Restored



Restored



Restored



COPIER



OPTION



PM-DLV-D



DLV-UCLW



Restored



Restored



Restored



COPIER



OPTION



PM-DLV-D



OZ-FIL1



Restored



Restored



Restored



COPIER



OPTION



PM-DLV-D



AR-FIL1



Restored



Restored



Restored



COPIER



OPTION



PM-DLV-D



DF-PU-RL



Restored



Restored



Restored



COPIER



OPTION



PM-DLV-D



DF-FD-RL



Restored



Restored



Restored



COPIER



OPTION



PM-DLV-D



DF-SP-RL



Restored



Restored



Restored



COPIER



OPTION



PM-DLV-D



LNT-TAP1



Restored



Restored



Restored



COPIER



OPTION



PM-DLV-D



LNT-TAP2



Restored



Restored



Restored



COPIER



OPTION



PM-DLV-D



PD-PU-RL



Restored



Restored



Restored



COPIER



OPTION



PM-DLV-D



PD-SP-RL



Restored



Restored



Restored



COPIER



OPTION



PM-DLV-D



PD-FD-RL



Restored



Restored



Restored



COPIER



OPTION



PM-MSG-D



TONER-K



Restored



Restored



Restored



COPIER



OPTION



PM-MSG-D



WST-TNR



Restored



Restored



Restored



COPIER



OPTION



PM-PRE-M



TONER-K



Restored



Restored



Restored



COPIER



OPTION



PM-PRE-M



WST-TNR



Restored



Restored



Restored



COPIER



OPTION



PM-U-DSP



PT-DRM



Restored



Restored



Restored



COPIER



OPTION



PM-U-DSP



FX-REP



Restored



Restored



Restored



COPIER



OPTION



USER



COPY-LIM



Restored



Restored



-



COPIER



OPTION



USER



SLEEP



Restored



Restored



Restored



COPIER



OPTION



USER



SIZE-DET



Restored



-



-



COPIER



OPTION



USER



COUNTER2



Restored



Restored



Restored



COPIER



OPTION



USER



COUNTER3



Restored



Restored



Restored



COPIER



OPTION



USER



COUNTER4



Restored



Restored



Restored



COPIER



OPTION



USER



COUNTER5



Restored



Restored



Restored



COPIER



OPTION



USER



COUNTER6



Restored



Restored



Restored



COPIER



OPTION



USER



DATE-DSP



Restored



Restored



Restored



COPIER



OPTION



USER



MB-CCV



Restored



-



-



COPIER



OPTION



USER



CONTROL



Restored



-



-



COPIER



OPTION



USER



B4-L-CNT



Restored



Restored



-



COPIER



OPTION



USER



MF-LG-ST



Restored



Restored



Restored



COPIER



OPTION



USER



CNT-DISP



Restored



Restored



Restored



COPIER



OPTION



USER



PH-D-SEL



Restored



-



-



1595



List of Service Modes That Can Be Restored Initial screen



Main item



Intermediate item



Sub item



Case A



Case B



Case C



COPIER



OPTION



USER



COPY-JOB



Restored



Restored



-



COPIER



OPTION



USER



OP-SZ-DT



Restored



Restored



-



COPIER



OPTION



USER



NW-SCAN



Restored



Restored



Restored



COPIER



OPTION



USER



JOB-INVL



Restored



Restored



Restored



COPIER



OPTION



USER



TAB-ROT



Restored



Restored



-



COPIER



OPTION



USER



PR-PSESW



Restored



Restored



Restored



COPIER



OPTION



USER



IDPRN-SW



Restored



Restored



-



COPIER



OPTION



USER



PCL-COPY



Restored



Restored



Restored



COPIER



OPTION



USER



CNT-SW



Restored



Restored



Restored



COPIER



OPTION



USER



TAB-ACC



Restored



Restored



Restored



COPIER



OPTION



USER



BCNT-AST



Restored



Restored



Restored



COPIER



OPTION



USER



PRJOB-CP



Restored



Restored



Restored



COPIER



OPTION



USER



DOC-REM



Restored



Restored



Restored



COPIER



OPTION



USER



DPT-ID-7



Restored



Restored



Restored



COPIER



OPTION



USER



RUI-RJT



Restored



Restored



Restored



COPIER



OPTION



USER



FREG-SW



Restored



Restored



Restored



COPIER



OPTION



USER



IFAX-SZL



Restored



Restored



Restored



COPIER



OPTION



USER



IFAX-PGD



Restored



Restored



Restored



COPIER



OPTION



USER



MEAPSAFE



Restored



Restored



-



COPIER



OPTION



USER



AFN-PSWD



Restored



Restored



Restored



COPIER



OPTION



USER



PTJAM-RC



Restored



Restored



Restored



COPIER



OPTION



USER



PDL-NCSW



Restored



Restored



-



COPIER



OPTION



USER



PS-MODE



Restored



Restored



Restored



COPIER



OPTION



USER



CNCT-RLZ



Restored



Restored



Restored



COPIER



OPTION



USER



LDAP-SW



Restored



Restored



Restored



COPIER



OPTION



USER



FROM-OF



Restored



Restored



Restored



COPIER



OPTION



USER



FILE-OF



Restored



Restored



Restored



COPIER



OPTION



USER



MAIL-OF



Restored



Restored



Restored



COPIER



OPTION



USER



IFAX-OF



Restored



Restored



Restored



COPIER



OPTION



USER



LDAP-DEF



Restored



Restored



Restored



COPIER



OPTION



USER



FREE-DSP



Restored



-



-



COPIER



OPTION



USER



TNRB-SW



Restored



Restored



Restored



COPIER



OPTION



USER



DK1-ASST



Restored



-



-



COPIER



OPTION



USER



USBH-DSP



Restored



Restored



Restored



COPIER



OPTION



USER



USBM-DSP



Restored



Restored



Restored



COPIER



OPTION



USER



USBI-DSP



Restored



Restored



Restored



COPIER



OPTION



USER



CTCHKDSP



Restored



Restored



Restored



COPIER



OPTION



USER



DFLT-ADJ



Restored



Restored



Restored



COPIER



OPTION



USER



USBR-DSP



Restored



Restored



Restored



COPIER



OPTION



USER



POL-SCAN



Restored



Restored



Restored



COPIER



OPTION



USER



PH-D-SL2



Restored



Restored



-



COPIER



OPTION



USER



W-TN-DSP



Restored



Restored



Restored



COPIER



OPTION



USER



SCAN-RSL



Restored



Restored



-



COPIER



OPTION



USER



JA-SBOX



Restored



Restored



Restored



COPIER



OPTION



USER



JA-DFAX



Restored



Restored



Restored



COPIER



OPTION



USER



JA-REP



Restored



Restored



Restored



COPIER



OPTION



USER



JA-FREP



Restored



Restored



Restored



COPIER



OPTION



USER



JA-BOX



Restored



Restored



Restored



COPIER



OPTION



USER



JA-FORM



Restored



Restored



Restored



COPIER



OPTION



USER



JA-PREV



Restored



Restored



Restored



COPIER



OPTION



USER



JA-PULL



Restored



Restored



Restored



COPIER



OPTION



USER



JA-PDLB



Restored



Restored



Restored



COPIER



OPTION



USER



JA-JOBK



Restored



Restored



Restored



1596



List of Service Modes That Can Be Restored Initial screen



Main item



Intermediate item



Sub item



Case A



Case B



Case C



COPIER



OPTION



USER



JA-JDF



Restored



Restored



Restored



COPIER



OPTION



USER



JA-RUI



Restored



Restored



Restored



COPIER



OPTION



USER



JA-WEB



Restored



Restored



Restored



COPIER



OPTION



USER



EXP-CRYP



Restored



Restored



Restored



COPIER



OPTION



USER



SNDSTREN



Restored



Restored



Restored



COPIER



OPTION



USER



FAXSTREN



Restored



Restored



Restored



COPIER



OPTION



USER



SJ-UNMSK



Restored



Restored



Restored



COPIER



OPTION



USER



SJ-CLMSK



Restored



Restored



Restored



COPIER



OPTION



USER



PRTDP-SW



Restored



Restored



Restored



COPIER



OPTION



USER



PDFD-MSW



Restored



Restored



Restored



COPIER



OPTION



USER



SFT-OUT



Restored



Restored



Restored



COPIER



OPTION



USER



LGCY-SCP



Restored



Restored



Restored



COPIER



OPTION



USER



FLM-DSPL



Restored



Restored



-



COPIER



OPTION



USER



CNT-PRT



Restored



Restored



Restored



COPIER



OPTION



USER



C-P-SIZE



Restored



Restored



Restored



COPIER



OPTION



USER



MF-FEED



Restored



Restored



Restored



COPIER



OPTION



USER



INSTDT-Y



Restored



-



-



COPIER



OPTION



USER



INSTDT-M



Restored



-



-



COPIER



OPTION



USER



INSTDT-D



Restored



-



-



COPIER



OPTION



USER



INSTDT-H



Restored



-



-



COPIER



OPTION



USER



INSTDT-N



Restored



-



-



COPIER



OPTION



USER



STOP-USE



Restored



Restored



Restored



COPIER



OPTION



USER



LASTREST



Restored



Restored



Restored



COPIER



OPTION



USER



SZCHKSW



Restored



Restored



Restored



COPIER



TEST



NET-CAP



CAPIF



Restored



-



-



FEEDER



ADJUST



-



DOCST



Restored



-



-



FEEDER



ADJUST



-



LA-SPEED



Restored



-



-



FEEDER



ADJUST



-



DOCST2



Restored



-



-



FEEDER



ADJUST



-



LA-SPD2



Restored



-



-



FEEDER



ADJUST



-



ADJMSCN1



Restored



-



-



FEEDER



ADJUST



-



ADJMSCN2



Restored



-



-



FEEDER



OPTION



-



SIZE-SW



Restored



Restored



Restored



FEEDER



OPTION



-



R-ATM



Restored



Restored



-



FEEDER



OPTION



-



R-OVLPLV



Restored



Restored



-



SORTER



ADJUST



-



PNCH-Y



Restored



-



-



SORTER



ADJUST



-



STP-F1



Restored



-



-



SORTER



ADJUST



-



STP-R1



Restored



-



-



SORTER



ADJUST



-



STP-2P



Restored



-



-



SORTER



ADJUST



-



BFF-SFT



Restored



-



-



SORTER



ADJUST



-



PNCH-X



Restored



-



-



SORTER



ADJUST



-



BFF-SFT2



Restored



-



-



SORTER



ADJUST



-



SDL-STP



Restored



-



-



SORTER



ADJUST



-



SDL-FLD



Restored



-



-



SORTER



ADJUST



-



SDL-ALG



Restored



-



-



SORTER



ADJUST



-



ST-ALG1



Restored



-



-



SORTER



ADJUST



-



ST-ALG2



Restored



-



-



SORTER



ADJUST



-



SW-UP-RL



Restored



-



-



SORTER



ADJUST



-



NST-SPD



Restored



-



-



SORTER



ADJUST



-



FR-ST-PS



Restored



Restored



-



SORTER



ADJUST



-



FR-STP-Y



Restored



-



-



SORTER



ADJUST



-



RBLT-PRS



Restored



-



-



SORTER



ADJUST



-



MSTP-2P



Restored



-



-



SORTER



ADJUST



-



CENT-ALG



Restored



-



-



1597



List of Service Modes That Can Be Restored Initial screen



Main item



Intermediate item



Sub item



Case A



Case B



Case C



SORTER



ADJUST



-



SDL-STP2



Restored



-



-



SORTER



ADJUST



-



SDL-FLD2



Restored



-



-



SORTER



ADJUST



-



ESC1-SPD



Restored



-



-



SORTER



ADJUST



-



ESC2-SPD



Restored



-



-



SORTER



ADJUST



-



SFT-SPD



Restored



-



-



SORTER



ADJUST



-



STP-SPD



Restored



-



-



SORTER



ADJUST



-



RBLT-PS2



Restored



-



-



SORTER



ADJUST



-



RBLT-PS3



Restored



-



-



SORTER



OPTION



-



MD-SPRTN



Restored



-



-



SORTER



OPTION



-



BUFF-SW



Restored



-



-



SORTER



OPTION



-



PUCH-SW



Restored



Restored



-



SORTER



OPTION



-



1SHT-SRT



Restored



Restored



-



SORTER



OPTION



-



NSRT-STC



Restored



Restored



-



SORTER



OPTION



-



MSTP-TMG



Restored



Restored



Restored



SORTER



OPTION



-



PUN-Y-SW



Restored



Restored



-



SORTER



OPTION



-



PNCH-SW2



Restored



Restored



-



SORTER



OPTION



-



PNCH-SW3



Restored



Restored



-



SORTER



OPTION



-



SFT-CHNG



Restored



Restored



-



SORTER



OPTION



-



STP-ALG



Restored



Restored



-



SORTER



OPTION



-



SDL-ALG



Restored



Restored



-



SORTER



OPTION



-



TRY-STP



Restored



Restored



-



SORTER



OPTION



-



TRY-LMT



Restored



Restored



-



1598